NSCP 2010 6th Edition

SIXTH EDITION
NSCP C10110
nNATIONA
j
I
I,
!
I
TRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE
PHILIPPINES
VOLUME I
BUILDINGS, TOWERS AND
OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES
SIXTH EDITION
Association of Stmctural Engineers of thc Philippincs

Suite 7 I3, Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
112 I'anay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No ; (+632) 410-0483
F"x No.: (+632 ) 411-S606
Enlail: i~~l!."!.!ili!.l...I.;Yf.gJ]]illL~~Jl!.!
Webs ite: http: //www.aseponline.org
Nat!Oni'll Structural Code of U'le Philippines 6!il Edition Volume 1
NSCP C101-10
NATIONAL
S~rRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE
PHILIPPINES
2010
II
t
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION
Association of Structural Engineers of th e Philippines
NATIONAL STR UcrURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES (NSCP)

CIOI-IO
Volume I
Buildings, Towers and Other Vert ica l Structures
Sixth Edition, 2010, First Plinting
Copyright @ 20 I0, The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
All rights reserved. Thi s publicat ion or any part thereof must no! be reproduced in any fom1 wilhoullhe written pcmlission
of Ihe Associat ion Slructu ral Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP).
ISSN No.: 2094-5477

PUBLISHER
Association of Structural Engi neers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)
Suite 713 Future POilU Plaza Condominium
112 Panay A venu e, Quezon City,
1100 Philippines
Telephone Nos.
(+632) 410-0483
(+632) 411-8606
Facsimile No.
E-mail address
aseponline@gmaii.com
\Vebsite
hltp:llwww.asepo nIine.org
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Phili ppines, Inc . (ASEP) is a professiona l Association found ed in August
1961 to represent the structural engineering communi ty nationwide. This document is published in keeping wilh the
association's objectives;
Maintenance of high ethi cal and profess ional standards in the practice of structuraJ engineering;
Advancement of structural engineering knowledge;
Promot ion of good public and private clientele relationship; and
Fellowship among structural engineers, and professional relations wit h other allied technical and scienlific
organi zat ions.
Print His tory

First Edition, 1972
Second Edition, 1981
Third Edit ion, 1987
Fourth Edi tio n, 1992
Fifth Edition, 2001
Sixth Edition. 20 J 0
National Structural Code of the Philipp ines 6" Edit ion Votume 1
FOREWORD
For the protection of public life and propeny, the design of structures and the preparation of
structural plans for their construction have to be controlled and regulated. For almos t four decades now,
this control has been exercised in this countly by the National Structural Code of the Philippines with the
initial publication by the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) of the National
Structural Code for Buildings. The c urrent publication of the 6'" Edition of NSCP CIOI - 10 for buildings,
towers and other vertical structures is the affinnation of the mandate of the ASEP to continuously update
the National Structural Code of the Philippines with the latest technological developments. While
attaining a legal status in its use as a referral code of the National Building Code, NSCP CIOI-1O is a
publication of high technical value in matters of structural concerns.
The NSCP CIOI-IO is not only complete ly new in its technical substance but also in its format. It
has been a product of a sustained effon of ASEP spanning nine years and the fruition of this endeavor has
finally come to reality during my incumbency. It is therefore with a deep feeling of gratitude and pride
that I commend the members of the ASEP Board, the Codes and Standards Committee and the Publicity
and Publications Committee for their accomplishments.
May 2010.
AD~S'F.ASEP
Presiderll
Association of Structural Engineers of the
Philippines. 2009-2010
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
PREFACE TO THE NSCP SIXTH EDITION

1.
Introduction
ASEP recognizes the need for an up-to-date structural code addressing the design and instalbtion of building
stmclUral systems through requirements emphasizing performance. The new National Stl1Jctural Code of the
Philippines (NSCP) is designed 10 meet these needs through various model codes/regulations, generally from the
United S((I(CS, to safeguard the public health and safety nationwide.
This updated StI1lc(ural Code establishes minimum requirements for building structural systems using prescriptive
and pcrforrnance-bascd provisiolls. It is founded 011 broad-based principles [hat make possible the usc of new
materials (ind new building designs. Also, this code rencets the latest seismic design practice ror ea rthq uake rcsis!allt
structures.
2.
Changes and Developments

In ilS drive 10 upgrade and updale Ihe NSCP, Ihe ASEP Codes and Siandards Commillee inilially wanled 10 adopi
the larest editions of American code counterparts. However, for cases where available local data is limited to
suppon the upgrade, then some provisions and procedures of the NSCP 5 th edition were retained.
This NSCP 6th edi tion is based on the follow ing international codes and references:
a.
Uniform Building Code UBC1997 (adopled for Earlhquake Loads)
u.
Imernational Building Code IBC2009 (referenced)
c.
American SocielY of Civil Engineers ASCE70S (adopted for Wind Loads)
d.
American Concrete Institute ACI31808M
c.
American Institute for Steel Construction AISC05 with Supplementary Seismic Provisions
f.
American Iron and Sleelinslitute AISI S 100-2007
g.
Reinforced Masonry Engineering Handbook America
h.
Concrete Masonry H andbook, 6th Edition
Signifi cant rev is io ns are summari z.ed as follows:

a.
Chap ter I - Genera l Requirement s. The rollowing changes arc madc in this code:
a. J
Section 103 - Classification of Buildings

School buildings of more than one storey, hospitals and designated evacuation ce nters are
added under the essential facilities category.
a.2
Section 104 - Design Requirements

Deflection of any structural member under the serviceabili ty requ iremen t is deleted. For
concrete and Sir:l,'.1 materials see Chapter 4 and 5 respecti vely; new requiremenls are
added 10 the design review section.
a.3
Section 105 - Post ing and InslrUme nlati on

The provision of installed recording accelerograph is adjusted.
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
b.
Chapter 2 - Minimum Design Loads. The changes made in this code are as follows:
b.i
Section 203 - Combination of Loads
The load factor val ues on wind 100lds (Ire

loads.
b.2
adjll~ted
together with the inclusion of rOlin
Section 205 - Live Loads

Additional loads arc in corporated in the table for minimulll uniform and concentrated
loads.
b.3
Sec ti on 207 - Wind Load s

Wind load provisio ns, which were previously based on ASCE7-9S, are updated by lhe
introduct ion of the 'Wind Directionality Facto r, KJ , based on ASCE7-0S. The ANSI
ErAITIA-222G is also referenced for wind loads on antennas.
Equations [or the gust effect facLOrs for both rigid and flexible structures are introduced.
These include the gust effect factor for antennas, tran smission and latticed towers,
poles/posts, masts and transmission Jines based on ASCE Manual of Practice NO.74
(Guide lines for Electrical Transmission Line Stru ctural Loading).
New rormu las are also introd uced for the natural freq uency and damping rat io.
h.4
Sec ti on 208 - Earthquake Loads

Basi ca lly. Lhere are no major changes on the earthquake provisions due 10 the 110navailabiJi'lY of Phivolcs-issued spectral acceleration maps for all areas in the Philippines.
However, ASCE/SEI7-05 is recognized as an alternativ e procedure in the determination
of the earthquake loads.
b.S
Section 210 and Section 2i 1- Environmemal Loads

New sections on rai n loads and nood loads are added.
c.
Chapter 3: Specifications ror Excavations and Geomatcrials. The revisions made in this updated
code arc ,IS rollows:
c.1
Provisions ptrtaining to the conduct and interpretation of found<Hion invcstigmions for

cases invol ving liquefillblc, expa nsive or questionable soils are adopted ;
c.2
The secti on on root ings is amended to in corporate provisions for differcntial selli c meni ,
design loads and vibratory loads;
c.3
The section on pile foundations is amendcd to incorporate new provisions on splicing of
concrete piles; and
cA
d.
Th e section on special foundations, slope stabilization and matcrials of constructio n are

added.
Chapte r 4: Structural Concretc. The revi sions made in th is upda ted code arc as follows:
d. 1
Sectioll 40 I . Genera l Requirements: Design requ iremcnts for carthquakc-rcsistam

x!ructurcs arc updated based on ACI 3IS-0SM which mentions the "Seism;c Design
Cillcgorks (SDCs)" or ASCEISEI 7-0's. However, ill the absence of Phi voles-issued
spectral acceleration maps for <til <lreas in the Philippines , the seismic 10ilding procedu res
hased Oil "SCE/SEI 7-05 is adopted ilS an alternative procedure (sec Section 208-11) .
Tilcre.forc . based 011 the Commentary of AC I 318-08, Seismic Zone 2 (UBC (7) was
adopted ill lieu of SDC C (ASCE/SE I 7-05). S iJllil ~II l y. Seismic Zone 4 is adopted in
liell o r SDC, D. E and F;
Association of Structural Engincms of the Philippines
d.2
Section 403 - Materials: New requirements for headed shear stud reinforcement, headed
deformed bars, and stainless steel bars are given wi~h appropriate references to ASTM
standards;
d.3
Section 404 - Durability Requirement: Exposure categories and classes, requirements or

concrete by exposure class are adopted to replace the many tables of durability
requirements in Section 404, making it easief to clearly specify the intended application;
<1.4
Section 405 - Concrete Quality, Mixing, and Placing: The use of three JOO 111m x 200
cylinders is adopted as equivalent to the use of two 150 I11Ill x 300 mm cylinders for
determining concrete cornpressive strength. Due to concern that material properties may
change with time, a 12-month limit is set on historical data used (0 qualify mixture
proportions and flexural test performance criteria arc added to qualify the use of steel
fiber - reinforced concrete as a replacement for minimum shear reinforcement;
111m
d.5
Section 407 - Details of Reinforcement: To avoid the misconception that there is no

minus tolerance on cover values given in the code, "minimum cover" is replaced with
"specified cover" throughout Section 407; Class B lap splices are now required for
structural integrity reinforcement; continuous top and bottom structural integrity
reinforcement are required to pass through the column core; and requirements for
transverse reinforcement confining structural integrity reinforcement in perimeter beams
are clarified;
d.6
Section 408 - Analysis and Design - General Considerations: Provisions are modified \0
allow redistribution of positive moments; and a simple modeling procedure for
evaluation of lateral displacements is added;
d.7
Section 409 ~ Strength and Serviceability Requirements: Strength reduction factors for
compression-controlled sections (other structural members) is reduced from 0.70 to 0.65,
and shear and torsion for shear walls and frames in Seismic Zone 4 is reduced from 0.85
to 0.75, bearing on concrete (except for post-tensioning anchorage zones) is reduced
from 0.70 to 0.65. Strength reduction factors for strut-and-tie models, Ilexural sections in
prctensioncd members, afC also added;
d.8
Section 4JO - Flexure and Axial Loads: The section on slenderness effects is reorganized
to recognize computer analysis techniques as the primary method of evaluating secondorder effects;
d.9
Section 411 - Shear and Torsion: Code requirements are added to permit the lise of
headed stud assemblies as shear reinforcement for slabs and footings. The nominal shear
strength is permitted to be larger for headed stud assemblies than for other forms of slab
and footing shear reinforcement; more stringent limits arc placed on the depths of
beams that are exempted from the requiremellt for minimulll shear reinforcement; a new
limit 011 the depth of ho!low core units for which minimum shear reinforcement could be
waived is established; steel fiber-reinforced concrete is added as an alternative to
minimulll shear reinforcement; and the upper limit on shear friction strength is
significantly increased for monolithically placed concrete and COllcrete placed against
intentionally roughened concrete;
th
Nation8i Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1
cl.lO
Section 412 - Development and Splices of Reinforcement: Provisions are added for the
development length of headed deformed bars; splice length when splicing bars with
different sizes is addressed; and a coating factor of 1.0 for galvanized reinforcement is
added;
d.II
d.12
Section 4 J 3 - Two-Way Slab Systems: Dimension limits are added for the use of shear
caps; and alternative corner reinforcement arrangement is added for two-way slabs
supPol1ed [).Y edge beams or walls;
Section 414 ..- Walls: Design provisions for slender wall panels are modified to be more
consistent with the methods used in design practice;
d.13
Section 418 - Prestressed Concrete:
The allowable concrete compression stress
immediately after prestress transfer is increased; and requirements for structural integrity
steel in two-way unbonded post-tensioned slab systems are modified;
d.14
Section 4.20 - Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures: Load factors for determining
the required test load are modified to reflect typical modern load combinations;
d.IS
Section 421 - Earthquake-Resistant Structures: This section prescnts thc requiremcnts for
Seismic Resistant Design from ASCEISEI 7-05, but instead of using the Scismic Design
Categories of ASCEfSEI 7-05, the equivalent Seismic Zones as per UBC 1997 are
specified. Also, new design requirements are added for slIch seismic zones; ncw
detailing option is added for diagonally reinforced coupling beams; design yield strength
for confincment reinforcement is raised to 690 MPa to help reduce congestion; and
boundary clement confinement requirements is relaxed;
d.16
Section 423 - Anchoring to Concrete: Use of reinforcement In the vicinity of anchors and
ductility requirements for anchors in seismic zones are clarified.
d.17
Section 425 - Altcrnative Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Flexural
and Compression Mcmbcrs: Revisions in Appendix B of ACI 3J8-08M is adopted;
e.
d.18
Section 426 - Alternative Load and Strength Reduction Factors: Revisions in Appendix
C of ACI 318-08M is adopted, and
d.19
Section 427 - Strut-and-tie Modcls:

entirety.
Appendix A of ACI 3 I 8-08M is adopted in ils
Chapter 5: Structural Steel. The revisions made in this updated code arc as follows:
c. J
Adopted is an integrated treatment of the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) and the Load
and Rcsistance Factor Design (L,RFD) such that the earlier Specification that treated only
the ASD method is retained;
c.2
In lieu of the previolls mcthod of analysis, a new method (Direct Analysis Method) is
adoptcd; and
eJ
The cold formed steel design for building systems and structural members are included.
Thc chapler on slcel design from NSCP 200 I which covered Allowable Working Stress Design (ASD) is
fully updated to address usage, advances in the statc of knowledge, and changes in design practice.
f.
Chapter 6: Wood
1"1
The provisions in this chapter arc refined to iocorporate local practices and corrections in
[he previous vcrsion of lhe code (NSCP 2(01). Referrals arc made to the NSCP 2010
J\ssocialion of Structural Engineers of t!~e Philippines
Vol. III on Housing for relevant provisions concerning single-family dwellings / low-cost
housing;
f.2
Tables from the previous version of NSCP 2001 includiog the Table containing specie
design information are amended to incorporate the latest updated information/ list of
wood species as provided by the Forest Products Research and Development Institute
(FPRDI);
g.
1'.3
A provision that limit the use of wood shear walls and diaphragms is added; and
fA
A section for Machine Graded Lumber (MGL) is included.
Chapter 7: Masonry
g.1
The provisions in this chapter are refined to include local practices and corrections from
the previous versioo of the code (NSCP 2001); referrals are made to the NSCP 2010 Vol.
III on Housing for relevant provisions concerning single-family dwellings / low-cost
housing;
g.2
Recycled aggregates are defined and provided;
g.3
A section for Seismic Design is added; and
g.4
Additional sections each for Masonry Fireplaces and Masonry Chimneys arc included.
This publication of the 6th Edition is a collective effort of the ASEP Board of Directors from 2007 to 2010, from
ASEP's past presideots Christopher P. T. Tamayo (2007-2008) and Wilfreda S. Lopez (2008-2009) and the ASEP
Codes and Standards Committee whose cooperation made this publication.
In addition, the ASEP Codes and Standards Committee is indebted to Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (Phivolcs) and to DiL Renato V. Solidum, Ph. D. for his unselfish contribution especially on Chapters I
and 2 of this codc.
Likewise, our thanks to all ASEP mcmbers and other users of the NSCP who have suggested improvements,
identified errors and recommended items for inclusion and omissions. Their suggestions have been carefully
considered.
ASr.~P also acknowledges the contribution of the industry partners, companies and individuals, who continue
suppon ASEP's numerous undertakings.
3.
to
Disclaimer
The reader is cautioned that professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations afe applied.
The information presented has been prepared in accordance with recognized engineering principles anel is for
genera! information only. This information should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without
competent profcssioll,li examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability and applicability by a registered
engineer. Anyone .making usc of this information assumes all liabilities arising from sllch usc.
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
ADAM C ABINALES,
m:"';:~ '.ASf.I'
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ,
MCM . .. .AS.:I'
AS!' Presidenl, 2009-20/0
ASEt' Presidl!llf, 2008-2009
ANTHONY VLADIMIJ{ C. PIMENTEL, "",,"'
CHRISTOPHER 1'. T. TAMA YO, ,. "."
ASEP lIice-Presidenl, 2009-2010 (/Ild
ASr:;P Pr('sit/{!III, 20072008
M(I"ogill[: Director, Cod(!.\" (111(/ Standard.l Commillcc
EM ILO M. MORALES, ~lsn: .ASI:.'

Ch(lirman. Codes (IIu/ SUlllti(/rdJ COII/lllitlt'e
ROMEO A. ESTANEnO, 'b.n .. ...... St:l

At/viser, Codes (llld SI<IIu/cm/s Committee
CODES AND STANDARDS COMMITTEE

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
LOADS AND ACTIONS
CARLOS M, VILLAHAZA , ,'..'.""

CltaimuJII
VIRGILIO C. COLUMNA, ~!I:"~~ t....:m
CARLOS M. VILLAHAZA, ' '''''

Chaimum
VIRGILIO C. COJ..UMNA, .' ,..:......AM:'
Co-CJwimwl/
Co-Clwimwil
RONALDO S. ISON, I".\ s .:r

RON\VALDO EMMANUEL R AQUINO,
Work Grollp M embl'rs
~I SC:L~L\ SEr
BENITO M. PA CHECO, ''''-I' I.AS'':I'

CESAR I', PAllA LAN, ,. <'"
RONALDO S.ISON, F.ASEl'
HONWALDO EMMANUEL R. AQUlNO, """"""
nUTn n. MAUILANGAN, M sn:'~I""SH
Work Group M embers
EXCAVATIONS AND
GEOMA TERIALS
MARK ZAH C O,
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
JORGE P. GENOTA,
I'I.R
!"-\SH
Choir/llO/l
Chairl/l(/ll
ROY ANTHONY LUNA,
~IS( I .
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ,
Co- Clwirll1l11l
Lm:1'
Co-Chair'lIIall
JONATHAN R. DUN GCA ,,,.,,.

MARK K. MORALES, ".".
DANIEL C. PECKLEV JR, . ~ ...
BUlAN B. TAN, ~I.~t"l:
Work Group M"",b('l's
ANDHES WINSTON C. ORETA, rh. II.

RAMIL H. CRISOLO, .,,~""
JUANITO C. CUNANAN,
Mc\SEI"
".,u'
Ill-AS N. ESPINOSA, "."""

BERNA RI)O A. LEJANO, !hJI. M.ASI'.'
Work Gmllp Members
AHNEL R. AGUEL,
~I."'SH
ResO/lrce Perso/l
ROMEO A. ESTANERO,
Acll';.\'(!r
Association o f Structural EnDinfl8fS of ltle Philippine:;
n.. IL ....ASt:'
;'"
\'
,\ NTI/ONY VLADIMIR C. PIMENTEL,
..
'A'"
CHRISTOPHER P.T. TAMAYO, w ..~

CJw irman
CilllimllUl
GILBERT n. MACBUTAY, ".,,,,,

F R EDERICK FRA NC IS M. SISON, ","".
ALAN C. AllAN,
F.ASf.P
CoChainnan
RICO J. CADANGON, r~J) . ! fltrHl

ACHILLES L. LUARDO, ""'''
ROY T. ROQUE, ~u s~')'
C,,Chairmen
ALLAN DERDY A. ALFILER, )u s.:r

ALLAN n. BENOCSUDAN, MA''''
EDGA RDO S. CRUZ~ M.AStl'
JONATHA N C. SEVILLA, .","'"
Work Group Members
Work Group Members
MAsONRY
ASEP SECRETARIAT
C HRISTO PHER P.T. TAMAYO, ,."".

Chairman
ALAN C. AllAN ,
AlLYN C. ANONICAL
Administrative Officer
r","SEI'
'CoClwim/(U/
MA Y A. JA C INTO
LEOPOLDO R. BUENA VENTURA, JR., M

A.""
JAY EMERSON V. LIM, MA.m'
Account Officer
CERELINE C. LUCASIA
JUNE B. CATS
Work Group Members
Administrative Staff
1h
National Structural Code of th e PhilipPines 6 Edition Volum e 1
ASSOCIA TION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE

PHILIPPINES
COMMITTEE ON CODES AND STANDARDS (2007-2010)
Letter of' Acknowledgemen t and Appreciation

' 1 wish to convey my deepest appreciation and Ihanks for Ihe invaluable service rendered by the
various volunteer chairpersons and members of Ihe commiltees in making Ihis major NSCP 2010 6'"
Edilion a reality.
The time, money and personal sacrifices rendered by the various Commillee Chairpersons are
sincerely and deeply appreciated. Withou t these unselfish contributi ons, this monumental task would not
have been at all possible.
My sincerest thanks are also offered to our sponsors and benefaclors who have responded 10 our
call by supporting the NSCP Ihrough their advertise ments which are very valuable in reducing the cost of
prinling 10 make the NSCP more afford able and mOre widespread in di stribution .
As we launch the NSCP 20 10 6'" Edition, we stay committed towards disseminating the
important fealures and new revisions to the Code by conducting regional and city seminars as a service to
Ihe civil engineering profession and also to help Ihe slructural engineering profession keep abreasl with
the state of praclice and state of Ihe art in slrucluml engineering.
As we have gone to this initial launch, we encourage the end-users 10 give us their inva luable
comments towards making the NSCP a living code and more receptive 10 Ihe needs of Filipino engineers.
Special thanks also go to the ASEP Presidenl and Ihe Board of Directors and the ASEP
Secretariat for the valuable support and assistance given in the preparation o f the revised NSCP 2010 6'h
Edilion.
. MORALES MSCE. F.i\SEP. F..PICE. F.ASCE

Chairm 11
Commillee 011 Codes and Standardsjor
NSCP 2010 6,10 Edition
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of tile Philippines
ASSOCIATION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS OF THE

PHILIPPINES
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS (2009-2010)
OFFICERS:
ADAM C. ABINALES, MEng., F.ASEl'
Presidelll
ANTHONY VLADIMIR C. PIMENTEL, F.ASEI'
Vice Presidellt
MIRIAM LUSICATAMA YO, MSCF" F.ASEl'
Secretary
VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA, MEng.,F.ASEl'
Treasurer
DIRECTORS:
ANTONIO A. AVILA, M.ASEP
DANILO A. DOMINGO, M.ASEl'
RONAL DO S. ISON, F.ASEl'
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON, M.ASEI'
PEDRO M. TOLENTINO, JR., M.ASEl'
VINCI NICHOLAS R. VILLASENOR, F.ASEI'
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ, MeM, F.ASEl'
Im mediate Past President
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
ROMEO A. ESTANERO, I'h .D., FASE!'
Challcel/or
JORGE 1'. GENOTA, F.ASEI'
Scribe
CARLOS M. VILLARAZA, F.ASEl'
Burse,.
111
National Structural Code of the Pt1i1ippines 6 Edition Vall!me 1

PHILIPPINES
OFFICERS:
WILFREDO S. LOPEZ,
MeM, F.ASEI'
President
ADAM C. ABINALES,
MEng., F.ASEP
Vice President
VIRGILIO C. COLUMNA,
MEng.,F.ASEP
Secretary
VINCI NICOLAS R. VILLASENOR,
F.ASEP
Treasurer
DIRECTORS:
DANILO A. DOMINGO, M.ASEP
RONALDO S. ISON, F.ASEP
JORGE P. GENOTA, LASEP
FREDERICK FRANCIS M. SISON, M.ASEI'
ANTHONY VLADIMIR C. PIMENTEL, F.ASEP
PEDRO M. TOLENTINO, JR., M.ASEI'
CHRISTOPHERI'. T. TAMAYO,
F.ASEP
Immediate Past President
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
ROMEO A. ESTANERO,
Ph.D., F.ASEP
Chancelior
JORGE P. GENOTA,
F.ASEP
Scribe

PHILIPPINES
O!FFICERS:
CHRlSTOPHER 1'. T. TAMA YO,
F.ASEl'
President
WlLFREDO S. LOPEZ, MCM,F.ASEP

Vice President
VIRGlLIO C. COLUMNA,
MEng.,F.ASEP
Secretary
ELMER P. FRANCISCO, M.ASEP

Treasurer
DIRECTORS:
ADAM C. AlBIN ALES, MEng., F.ASEP
FERDINANJ[) A. BRIONES, M.ASEP
DANILO A.. DOMINGO, ~I.ASEP
RONALIDO S. ISON, F.ASEP
BERNARDO A. LEJANO, !'h.D., M.ASEP
PEDRO M. TOLENTINO, JR., M.ASEI'
JORGE P. GENOTA,
F. ASEP
Imm ediate Pas{ Presidelll
COLLEGE OF FELLOWS:
ROMEO A. ESTANERO,
Ph . D. , F.ASE!'
Chancellor
JORGE P. GENOTA,
F.ASE!'
Scribe
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
Department of Public Works and Highways
Association of Structural Engilwers of ttle Philif}plnes
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines II 00
Tel. No: (+632) 410-0483
Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: asepon JincCmgll1<lil.colll
Website: http://www.aseponline.orll
National Struclura l Code of the Philippines 6'" Edillon Volume 1
CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements
1-1
Table of Contents
CHAPTER I GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 3
SECTION 101 . TITLE, PURPOSE AND SCOPE ................................................... ............................................................. 3
101.1 Title ...... .... .
101.2 Purpose ...... .... .... ..... ........ ... ....
........ ... ..... .. .
10 J.3 Scope .... .... ...
.... . '" ....... ........ ........... ..... .. .
101.4 Ahemative Systems._ .. ... ............. .. .. _...................................... ..... .
....... 3
...... ... 3
........ . 3 .
..... .. 3
SECTION 102 . DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................... 3

SECTION 103 . CLASSIFICA T10N OF STRUCTURES .................................................................................................... 5
103.1 Nature of Occupancy ................... ..................... ... ................. ........ ..... ............. ....... ........................... .. ........... .... ........... 5
SECTION 104 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 6

104.1 Strength Requirement ..... ........ ... ...................... ..... ...... .................. ..... ...... ....... .. ..........
..... .... ... ..... . .. . 6
104.2 Serviceability Requirelncnt. ............................................................................ ....................... .....
................. .. 6
104.3 Analysis ......... ....... ........ ...... .. .... ...... .. ............... ........................................................ ................. ...... ........... .................. 6
104.4 Foundario n In vestigation .... ....... ..... .. ...... ,... ,.......... .. .. ...... ............ .. .............. ... .. ....... ..... ....... ... ... ...... .... .... ........ ,.... ,.. 7
104.5 Design Review ........ ..... .. .......... ............. ....... ...... ..... ...... ........... ................. ............. ...... .................... .. ..................... .... 7
SECTION 105 POSTING AND INSTRUMENTATION ..................................................................................................... 7

105.1 Posting of Live Loads ......................... ........ ............ ........... .... ........ ........... .... ..
105.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumen tation .. ... ... ........... ........... ....... .... ..
............ .. .. ............. ...... 8

.. ........ ............ .... 8
SECTION 106 . SPECIFICA TJONS, DRA WINGS AND CALCULA TlONS ....................... ............................................. 8
106. I General... .............. ........... ................... ............ .. ............ .......... ................ ... .... ........
.. ............. 9
106.2 Specifications........ ........ .. .... ........ ...... .............................
..................
................
.. ........ ........... 9
106.3 Design Drawings ............ ................. ............... ....................... .................
.. .... 9
106.4 Calculalions ..
.......... ................ .... ..
................
.. ...... ........... .. 10
106.5 As-built Drawings....
....... ... ......... ............ .......
........... ... .......... ..... .... .......... .....
. .. 10
SECTION 107 STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND STRUCTURAL OlISERVATIONS ......... .................. II
.. ...... .. ....... 11
107. 1 General............................................ ............................................................. ........... ........... .......... .
107.2 Definitions .. ............... ................. .......... .. .. .. .......... ...... .. ...... .. ................................. .. ............................ .. .................. II
107.3 l nspcction Program ...... .. ..
.............................................................. .......................
.. ............... 12
107.4 Structural lnspcctor ..... ................................................................................................................................................ 12
.................... .. ..............
.. ....... 12
107. 5 Types of Work for Inspectio n .. ... ........................ ............ .. .
107.6 Approved Fabricators ........ ......... .. ...............
........ .. .. .. ..................... ........ ......
14
107.7 Prefabricated Construction
............. .....
.......... ....
........ ....... .. ........... .... ...
.. .... .............. .. 14
107.8 Non -Destructive Testing.... .................... ........ ......
. .. .. ......
.. ............ ... 15
107.9 Structural Observatio n ................ .................... .. ......
.. .. ...... ............................................................................. 16
SECTION 108 . EXISTING STRUCTURES ........................................................................................................................ 16

...........................
108. I General... .... ..................................................................................................... .
.. .. .............
108.2 Mainle nancc ............... ............ ........... .
.. ....... .... ........... .. .... .... .... .. .. ..... .. .... .. .....
108.3 Additions, Alterati ons or Repairs ............ .. ...... ........ .
....
108.4 Chan ge ill Use.. ..
.. .... ...... . .............. ...... ............. ..... .............. .... .
16
16
16
17
SECTION 109 GRADING AND EARTHWORK .............................................................................................................. 17

................................ 18
.. ...... 18
.. ........................ 19
109. 1 General. .................................. ..
109.2 Definitions ...... .

109.3 Permits Required ........ .......... .
lh
National Stru ctural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
12
CHAPTER 1 - General Requiremenls
. 19
109.4 Hazards.
109.5 Grading Permit Requi rements ........... ........ .. .... ............................................................................ ............. ...... ............. 19
109.6 Grading I nspection ................................................................................... ................. ... .............. .......... .. .... ............. . . 20
109.7 Complelion of Work ...... ........ ........................................................................................................................ .... ........ 2 1
CHAPTER 1 - General ReqUIrements
10J.1 Tille
These regul ations shall be kn own as the National
Structural Code of the Philippines, Vol. I, 6111 Edition
20]0, and may be ciled 3S such and will be re ferred to
herei n as "this code."
Sponsors of an y system of design or construction not

within the sco pe of this code, the adequ acy of which had
been shown by successful use and by analysis and test,
shall have the ri ght to prescnt the data on whi ch their
design is based to the bui ldi ng official or to a board of
examiners appointed by the buildi ng official or the project
owner/developer. Thi s board shall be composed of
competent stru ctural engineers anc! shaH have auth ori ty 10
investigate the data so submitted, to require tests, and to
formul ate rules go verning design and construction of such
systems to meet the intent 0f this code. These rul es, when
approved and promulga ted by the building offi cial, shall
be of the same force and effect as thc provisions of th is
code.
101.2 Purpose
The purpose of this code is to provide minimum load
requirements for the design of buildings, towers and other
vertical st ru ctures, and
minimum standard s and
guidelines to safeguard life or limb, propert y and public
welfa re by regul at ing and con tro lling the des ign.
construction. quality of materi als pe rt ain ing to the
stntctural aspec ts of all bui ldings and stm clures withi n
this j urisdicti on.
101.3 Scope
T he provisions of this code shall appl y (() the
construc tion, <l ll crati on. movi ng~ demoli tion. repa ir,
main tenance and use of bui ldi ngs. towers and other
vertical structures within this jurisdiction.

Special structures such as but n Ot limited to si ngle fa mil y
dwelli ngs. storage s il o.';, liquid prod uct tanks a nd
hydraulic nood control structures, sh ould be rc ferred to
special slat e of practi ce literatu re but shall refer to
provisions o f' th is code as a mini mulll whe rever
appl icable.
for additions, altcrations, main tenance. ,md change in w;c
of buildi ngs and structures. see Sect ion 108.
Where, in an y specific case, different sec tions of thi s code

specify different materi als, methods of construction or
oth er requiremen ts. the mos t res tri cti ve prov isions shall
govern exce pt in the case of single fam il y dwcll ings.
Where there is a conflict between a gcneral require ment
ilnd a specillc rC(luircmcnt. the specific rC{luirement shall
he ap plicable ..
101.4 Alternative Syslems
Th e provi sions or this code <I re not intended to prevc llt th e
w,c of any materia l, alte rnate design or method of
co nstructioll
nOI
1-3
spccilically prescribed by Ih is code.
provided ,Ill Y allcrnatc has been permilled and its li se

authorized by th~ building official (sec Section 1(2).
National Structural Code of th e Philippines
Gi ll
Edition Volume 1
14
CHAPTEH 1 - General Requiremen ts
art ificially built up or composed of pans joined together

in some defi nite manner.
For the purpose of this code. certain terms. phrases. words

and their deriv:ui\'es shall be confirmed as specified ill this
chapter and else where in this code where specific
definiti ons arc provided. Terms. phrases and words lIsed
in th e. singu lnr include the plural and vice versa. Term s,
phrases and words IIsed in the IllClscu 1i :;p. gender include
the feminine and vice versa.
STRUCTURAL ENG IN EER is a registered Civi l

Engjneer wit h special qualificati on in the practice of
Structura l Engineering as recognized by the Board of
Civil Engi neerin g of the Professional Regu lat ion
Commission as endorsed by th e Philippine Institule of
Civil Engineers (PICE) through the Association of
Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) or
special ist members of the Structural Enginccring
Specialty Division of PICE.
The follo wing terms arc defined for usc in this chapter:
ADDITION is an extension or increase in fl oor area or
height of a bu ilding or SlrUClUre.
ALTE R or ALTERATION is any change. addition or
Illodific<uion in const ruction or occupancy.
APPROVED as to IllHlcrinls and types of COllslJuct ion,

refers to approval by the building official as the result of
invcstig.uioll and tests conducted by the building officii!),
or by reason of nccc ptcd principles or tests by recogn ized
auth oriti es, tedillical or 5c icnt iric organiz.ations.
AUTHORITY HA VING JURISDI CTION is the
organi zat ion, political subdivision , omce or ind ividual
chHrged with the responsibilit y of ildminislering and

enforcing the provisions of this code .
BUILDING is <lily structure usually enclosed by \\'alls
and it roof, constructed to provide support or sheller for an
intended usc or occupancy_
BU ILDI NG, EXISTI NG. is a building erec ted pri or to
the adoption of th is code , or olle for which a legal
building permit has been issued.
BUILDING OFFIC IAL is the offlccr or other
designated nUlhority charged with the admi ni :-; trati on and
e nforcemen t of thi s code, or th e bu ilding omcial 's du l y
authorized represen tat ive.
C IVIL ENG INEER is a professional engineer licensed
LO practise in the field of civil engineering.
ENG INEER-OF-RECOI(I)
IS
a
responsible for Ihe slrucwfill design.
civil
cnginee r
OCCUPANCY is Ihe pUlpOSC for which a bui lding or

othe r structures or part thereof. is lIsed or intended to be
used .
STn UCTURE is thil l which is buill or constmctcd, an

edifice or bu ilding o f any kind. or any piece of work
Assor.i<1tion of Siructura l Engineers of the PhilippInes
CHAPTEFl. 1 -- General fiequirements
1-5
Table 103-1 - Occupancy Category

OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTION OF
STRUCTURE
OCCUPANCY
CATEGORY
Occupancies having surgery and emergency

treatment areas,
Fire and police stations,
103.1 Nature of Occupancy

Buildings and other structures shall be classified, based
on the nature of occupancy, according to Table
I03~1
Garages and shelters for emergency vehicles

and emergency aircraft,
for
purposes of applying wind and earthquake in Chapter 2.

Each building or other structures shall be assigned to the
I"
Stnlctures and shelters in emergency

preparedness centers,
A viation control towers,
highest applicable occupancy category or categories.
Structures and equipment in communication

centers and other facilities required for
emergency response,
Assignment of the same structure to multiple occupancy

categories based 011 usc and the lype of loading condition
being evaluated (e.g. wind or seismic) shall be
pennissiblc.
Essential
Facilities
Facilities for standby power-generating

equipment for Category I structures,
Tanks or other structures containing housing
or supporting water or other firesuppression material or equipment
required for the-protection of Category I,
II or III structures,
When buildings or other structures have multiple uses

(occupancies), the relationship between the uses of
various parts of the building or other structure and the

independence of the structural system for those various
parts shall be examined. The classification for cach
indcpendent structural system of a multiple-use building
or other structure shall be that of the highest usage group
in any part of the building or other structure that is
dependent on that basic stJ1lctura! system.
Public school buildings,

Hospitals and
Designated evacuation centers.
II Hazardous
Facilities
Occupancies and structures housing or

supporting toxic or explosive chemicals
or substances,
Non-building structures storing, supporting
or containing quantities of toxic or
explosive substances.
-,Single-story school buildings
Buildings with an assembly room with an
occupant capacity of 1,000 or more,
Educational buildings such as museums
libraries, auditorium with a capacity of
300 or more students,
III Special
Occupancy
Structures
Buildings llsed for college or adult

education with a capacity of 500 or more
students,
Institutional buildings with 50 or more
incapacitated patients, but not included in
Category I,
Mental hospitals, sanitariums, jails, prison
and other buildings where personal
liberties of inmates arc similarly
restrained,
All structures with an OCCllp~I11Cy of 5,000 or
more persons,
..
Structures and equipment in powergenerating stations, and other public

utility facilities not included in Category
lor Category 11, and required for
continued operation,
'''----~-~.~--
National Structural CodE) of the PllilipPlnes
Gill
- - -..
- .-.-------- - ~.---
Edilion Volume 1
..
----~--.-.-
..
--~-.-.
' 6
CHAP TER 1 ... General ncquirements
Table 103-1 (con tinued ) - Occupancy Category

OCCUI' AN CY
OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTION OF
CA TEGOR Y _.
STRUCTURE
IV Stlil1 dard
AI! structu res housing occupanc ies or
Occupa ncy
h,lving runctioll s not listed in Category l,
Structures
II or III and Category V.
I' Misccll aneo us
Struct ures
Private garages, c:lrports, sheds and feLlces

over 1.5 III high.
104.1 Strength Requirement

Buildings. LOwers and oth er ven ical structures and all
portions thereof shall be des igned and constmcted to
sustain , within lhe limitations specified in (his code, all
load s set forth i ;l Chapter 2 and eJsewhen~ ;n tli! .'; code,
combined in acco rdance with Section 203.
Des ign shall be in accordance with Strcngth rk:-.tg;;, L..()ad
a nd Resistance Facto r Design and An ~,\'.' ;it'd~ S tress
Design methods , as pennittcd by the appl i":J.b lc material
chapters.
Ex:ception:
Unless otherwise required by the building official,
buildings or portions thereof thai llre cOllstructed in
accordaJlce willi
fh e cOllvemionai
Iiglltframill8
requirements sp ecified in Chapter 5 and the NSCP
Volume III 011 Housing sholl be deemed (0 meet rhe
requiremelllS of this section.
104.2 Se r viceability Requi rement
J 04.2. 1 Gene r a l
Stru ctural systems and me mbe rs thereof shall bc designed
to have adequ a tc stiffness to limit deflect ions, lateral
dri ft s, vibrati on, or any other deformations (bm adversely
affect the inte nded usc and performa nce of' buildin gs
lowers and ot her vert ical struct ures . The design shall a lso
cons ider durahil ity, resistance to exposure to weather or
aggressive env ironment . crac k contro l, and other
cond i tions Ih<.11 affect the int ended usc and perform ance of
buildings, towers il nd other vertical struct ures.
104.3 Analysis
Any sys tem or me thod of construction to be used ..shall be
based o n a rational analysis in accordance with well
established principles o f mechanics that take into account
equilibrium, general stability, geometric comp<Hib il ilY alld
both short-tenn and long-term matcria l properties.
Me mbe rs that te nd to accumul ate resi dua! deformati ons
under repeated se rvice loads shall have includetl in their
ana lys is the added ecce ntri ci ties expecte d lO occu r du ring
their service lire.. Such analysis shall result in a system
Ih.1t prov ides it co mple le load path capable of Iran sferrin g
;111 loads and forces from their point of origin to the loadresisti ng clements. The an alysis sh all incl ude., bLlI not be
l imi te d to, the provis io ns of Sections 104 .:'1. 1 through
104.3.3.
Association of Siructuwl Engineers of U)e PhilI ppines
C HAPTEfl 1 - General riequiremenls
104.3.1 S tabilit y Aga ins t O ve rturnin g

Every Slniclurc shall be designed (0 resist the ovcI1urning
effects caused by Ihe latera l forces specified wi th
adequa le Faclor of Safely (FOS). See Secli o n 206.6 for
n::(a ining wil lis, Section 207 fo r wind loading and Section
208 for earthquake loadi ng.
104.3.2 Self-S trai ning Fo r ces
provisions shall be made for anticipated self-straining

forces ilrising frolll diffcrcmial St!\lh:;llcnl of foundntions
and from restrained dimensional changes due 10
Icmpcnlturc, moi sture. shrink.lgc. heave, creep and simi lar
effects.
104 .3.3 Anchora ge
Anchorage of Ihe roof to walls and columns. and of walls
and columns to foundations shall be provided and

adequately de tailed to resist the uplift and sliding forces
that result from Ihe applicatioll of the presc ribed fo rces.
Conc rete and masonry wa lls shall he anc hored to all
floors. roofs and m her struclU ral cleme nts Ihat prov ide
latera l su ppon for the wa ll. Such anchorage shall provide
a pos iti ve d irect con nec ti on capab le of resis ting the
hori zo ntal forces speci fied in Chapter 2 but not less th~n
the minimum fOfces in Section 206.4. in add iti o n, in
Seismic Zone 4. diap hragm to wall ancho rage lIs ing
embedded straps shall have Ihe straps illlached to or
hooked arou nd the reinforcing steel or otherwise
term inatcd so as to effec ti vel y trn nsfe r forces to the
rein forc ing steel. W<llIs shall be designed to res ist bend in g
be tween anchors where the anchor spacing exceeds 1.2
meters. Required tlllcilors jll masonry walls of hollow
units or cavity walls shall be embedded in a reinforced
grouted st l1!ctural elcmelll orthe wall. See Sections 208.7.
208.8.2.7 and 208.8.2.8 for earthq uake design
requirements. Stiffener bea ms and columns adequalely
anchored to the main frames slwlJ be considered as
necessary to ensure proper basket effect on the masonry
blocks to prevent coll"pse provided its co ntribution to the
overall stiffness of the structure is recognized.
104.4 F ounda ti on In vesti gati on
Soi l eXplOrillions sh:11I be required for buildings. tOwers
ilnd other venical structures falling under Cllcgories I. II
and III in accordant'c with Table 1031 ur ,IS required by
the bu il ding official or if the s ile sp~ci fic cond itions make
(he fou nda ti on in vestigation necessary.
17
104.5 Design Review

The design calculations, drawi ngs, specificatio ns and
other design rel ated documents for buildings, lowers and
other vert ical structures with irregu lar configuration in
Occupancy Categories J. II or III wi thin Seismic Zone 4.
struclu res under Altemalive Systems in hem lO l A, and
Undefined SllUclural Systems nOI lisled in Table 208-11,
shall be subject to a review by an independent recognized
structural engineer or engineers to be employed by the
owner in accordance with the ASEP Design Pee r Review
GuideHni:S.
The stroclural engineer or structural
engineers performing the review shall have comparable
qualifications and experience as the structural engineer
responsible for Ihe design. The reviewer or reviewers
shall obtain a profess iolHll waiver fro l11 the engi nee rofrecord who shall be ex pected to grant suc h waiver in
keeping with et hical standa rds of the profession as
"dopted in ASEP guidelines for peer review,
The des ign review shall , as a mini mum , veri fy the general
compli ance with thi s code which shall illcJ ud e, but not be
lim ited to, the review of the des ign load cri teri a, the
des ign concept . mat hemat ica l mode l and tech niques.
The followin g may also be verified, thal th ere are no
maj or errors in pe rtinent ca lculali ons, drawings and
specificati ons and may also ensure th at the struClUre as
rev iewed, meet mi nimu m standards for safcty, adeq uacy
nnd acceptable standard des ig n practi ce.
The engincer-o f reco rd shall submil the p lans and
specificat ions, a signed and scaled sta tement by the
structural engineer doing [he review thal the above review
has been performed and that minimum standards have
been mel.
See Section 208.6.6.3.2 for design rev iew requirements
when nonlinear timchislory ana lysis is used for
earthquake design .
In kccping wilh Ih e elhical slandards of Ihe profe.~sio n , Ihe
reviewer or reviewers shall not supplant the engineeron
record as cngineer-on rccord for the project. The design
review shall not in any way transfer or diminish the
responsibility of the engineerof-record .
.; .~;\~;~~:~~;~< .:.Jl~:}; ~;: ~,;~ ~~~;~..:!::~;:.~-;~~~i rtisYf.~~~~~-~~: ~ '~~:~+~~;.~1~
Detililcd requirements for foundation investigations sha ll
be in acc.:ordance with Chapter 3 of this code.
Natlollfll Str uc tural Code of U'le Plli1ipplnes 6
tll
Edition Volume 1
18
CHAPTEIi 1 -- General Requirements
105.1 Posting of Live Loads

The live loads for which each floor or pOliion thereof of a
commercial or industrial building has been designed shall
have such design live loads conspicuously posted by the
Phivolcs or the authorities having jurisdiction shall make

arrangements to provide, maintain and service. the
instruments. Data shall be the propcl1y of the authorities
having jurisdiction. but copies of individual records shall
be made available to the owner of the building and to the
public on request and after the payment or an appropriate
fcc.
owner in that pari of each story in which they apply, using

durable metal signs. It shall not be allowed to remove or
deface such notices. The occupant of the building shall be
responsible for keeping the actual load below the
allowable limits.
105.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumentation

105.2.1 General
Unless waived by the building official, every building in
Seismic Zone 4 over 50 m in height shall be provided
with
not
less than
three approved
recording
accelcrographs.
The
acceJerographs
shall
be
interconnected for common start and common timing.
105.2.2 Location
The instruments shall be located in the basement,
midpOliion, and near the top of the building. Each
instrument shall be located so that access is maintained at
all times and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign
stating "MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS
INSTRUMENT' shall be posted in a conspicuous
location.
105.2.3 Maintenance
Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be
provided by the owner of the building, subject to thc
monitoring of the building official. Data produced by the
instrumcnts shaH be made availablc to the building
official or the Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (Phi voles) on request.
105.2.4 Instrumentation of Selected Buildings

All owners of existing structures selected by the
authorities having jurisdiction shall provide accessible
space for the installation of appropriate earthquakcrecording instruments. Location of said.instnlments shall
be determined by Phivo!cs or the authorities having
j lJ ri sci i ct ion.
Association of Structural Engineers of tile PlliliPPlfws
CHAPTER 1 - General Requiremen
1-9
106.3.2.1 General Inrormation
106.1 General
Copies of tlcsign c'1Jculations, repon s. plans.
specifications and inspection program for all
conSllllctions sh;'11i bear the signtllurc and seal of the
engi neer-of-record.
106.2 Specifications
The specifications shall contain infonnatiol1 cavcling the
I.
Name and date of issue of buildi ng c .' ; and

supplements. if an y, to which the des:gn conI ' i ,1$.
2.
Strcngths or designations of material s
3.
Design strengths of underlying sailor f"ck.

or rock profile. when ava ilable, shall be !TOV'
I .. ..; li. ( ...: ,
:lC
des il~ll aJ :
Live loads ,lHd other loads lIsed in

indicated in the Ooor plans,
5.
Seismic design basis induding the tow! b;, ',,: shear

coeffi cicnt ; a description of the laterH! ~ ;Id -r i:! :ng
sys tem ; and the fundamenta l natur<:;i " '1<" .; . he
design in each direction under considc!... ,.. 11
6.
Provisions for dimensio nal changes ,,('<;;' 11; f !'rom

creep, shrinkage. hea ve and tem perature.
106.3 Design Drawings
l:"'!J" ly
7.
Camber of t!usses, beams and girders , ,1' "gll" : .
106.3.1 General
The design drawings shall be drawn to scale on durable
8.
Explanation or definition of
abbreviations lIscd in the drawings.
paper or cloth lIsing permanent ink and shall be of

su ffi cient clarity 10 ind icate the location, n<uurc and exte nt
9.
of the work proposed.

TIle drawings shall show a
co mpl ete design with sizes, secti ons, rel at ive locatio ns
and connecti on detaits of the various members. Floor
levels, column cenlers and offsets shall be dimens ioned.
Where avai lable and feasible, nfchive copie.~ shall be
maintained in durable mediu lll such as compact disc (CD)
Engineer's professional license

mn ,ll.;,
expi ration date of the cu rrell! Profession:d Rc' -I'
Co mmission reg istration,
106.3.2.2 Stru ctural Concrete

I.
and digilal versalile disc (DV D).
;--;Yl !m -
Specified compressive st rength if'c) o [

statcd ages or stages of construction 'n;part of st ructure is designed, The 28 ,;
strength (J'..) shall be the basi s of desir"
106.3.2 Required Ini~r;~~tio n .

The design drawings s hall cont ain, but shall nOl be limited
to the general information listcd in SCClion 106.3.2_1 and
material specific infonnatiol) lis ted in Sections 106.3.2.2
and 1063.2.3. as applicab le.
soil
d.
4.
material and constructi on requirements. The material s and
cons truction requirements shall confonn to the

specifications referred to in Chapters 3 to 7 of thi s code.
lu
' . H;
-,
,': 1 SC/" . (
2.
Anchorage embedme nt lengt hs or CI ' . l r pC' I

steel reinforcement and locati on and L.nglh
splices_
1.
Type and location of welded splices i!n'!

cOllncctions of reinforce ment.
4.
Magnitude and location of prcstrcs!-ol iig

includi ng prestressed cable layout.
5.
Minimum concre te compressive st reng: > if'.- )

of posHension ing,
6.
Strcssing seque nce for post -tensioned I(!: ,' . . ii .' ,
7.
Dctails lind location of all cOFll racli { ,

joints specifi rc! for plain concrete in ::;(:;. <
8.
.(s
,.:
Statemcnt if conc rcte slab is designi.d , .: .n.

<IS specified in Sccrioll ;2 1.9
diapllragm.
421.9.4.
~-------
.J
_ __h
_ _ __ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _
__ _
__
lh
........ ~ .."
NC1tlonnl Stru ctuwl Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1
1 10
CHAP TE Ii 1 -GeneralliequiremenlS
106.4.3 Compuler Programs

Calculations Illay include the results from an electronic
106.3.2.3 Structural Steel
digital computer analysis.
I.
apply
2.
T ype or types of construction as defined in Sec ti on

501.3.
3.
Th e type o f con nection for joints using
A dra wing of the complete mathematical model used

to represent the struc ture in the computer-ge nerated
ana lys is shall be provided. Design assump tions shall
be clearly desc ribed .
2.
A program description giving the program name, the
ve rsion number, and the company whi ch developed
high~ strcngth
lhe program and its address shall be provided as part

of the computation docum entati on. A program User's
Guide shall also be made avai lable, upon request, and
shall contain the information to determine the nature
and ex lent of the analysis. verify the input data,
interpret the result , <Iud determine whether the
boils.
4.
For welded joints, Type I connections shaU not be

allowed.
5.
Stiffener and bracing requirements.
6.
Description or explanation of welding and inspec ti on
computations comply wi th the requirements of this

code.
sy mbols used in the design and shop drawing s.

7.
Notes for joints in which welding sequen ce and
3.
Data provided. as co mput er input shall be clearly

distinguished from th ose computed in tile program.
The information required in the output shall include
date of processing. program identification, and
identification of structures being analyzed, all input
data, units and final results . An archived copy of all
computer runS shall be stored in CD or DVD.
4.
The firs! sheet of each co mput er run shall be signed
technique of welding arc required to be carefully

controlled to minimize distoI1ion.
106.4 Calculations
106.4.1 General
Calculations pertinent to the Slnlctu ral design of
structures and its component members shall be filed with
the des ign drawings.
106.4.2 Basis of Design Summary

The calc ulation s s h~1l include a summary o f the. crilCria
a nd methodologies Il sed in the design. Th is summ ary
shall include, but need not be li mited lO, tile folJo\, . . ing:
J.
Name ,llld date of issue of building code and

supp lc melH s, if any, to which the design conforms.
2.
Strengths or designations of materials to be used for

each co mponent of the structure.
3.
Design stre ngt hs and other design parameters of the

underlying soi l or rock.
4.
Li ve loads and other loads lIsed in design.
5.
Th e b'1Sis of the seismic an d wind design forces.
6.
A ucscriptioll of the stl1lclUre's grav it y and lateral

Jmld resistin g sys tems. A. description of Ihe roof.
Il oor. foundation and olher com pollc nt !iystel11s sllilll
also he pro vi ded .
7.
A descri pt io n procedures ust!d ill tile struclUral

il!lal ysis. Thi s slwH incl ude the section and Jlwtcrial
proP{~Jlic s used, loading co mbinati olls co nsidt! rcd,
scc() l1d ~ ordcr
ellerts considerati ons, lIlId any
sill1pl ifying as~umplions made.
The following requirements
calculations which include such computer output:
1.
Loads and design requireme nt s necessary for

preparation of shop drawings including shears,
moment s a nd ax ial forces to be resisted by all
members and their connections.
to
and sealed by the engineer-of-rccord.
106.4.4 Model Analysis

Rcsuhs from modcl antl lysis <Iud experimcntal swdics
shall be permitted 10 su ppleme nt calculations. The results
shall be accompanied by a de sc ripti on of the rationa l
hasis. SCI-UP, methodology and other informa tion requi red
for Ihe evaluation of the results.
106.5 Asbuilt Drawings

As-built drawings shall be prepared by the constl1lctor or
a perso n rettlillcd to provide such services to docllment
the wo rk as actually constru cted . The as-buil t drawi ngs
shall be drawn lO scale upon durable pilpcr or cloth llsing
pe rm anent ink and shall illdicnte Ihe sizes, sectio ns,

relative locati ons. ~lI\ d cOll llecl ion deta ils of the vari ous
st ructu ral members as acltl;tlly co nstructed . Strengths of
materials, based on required tesls. sha ll <lISt} he ind icated.
\Vork i lt! l1l ~ whidl requi re lI1odifications of or arc
otherwise different fro m those shown in Ihe design
drawi ngs fil ed wilh Ihe build ing officii'll shall he

accordingly mark ed in the a s~b llilt drawings and pro v!dt!d
with noll'S indicating the ha sis of such modifications or
changes. The bas is of modifi ca tion ' or ch'lIlc shall
include reference to sllppk1llcntal design draWings,
conslruction bulletins, or instru ctio!ls from the owner,
Association of StfUc!ural En})li"lcers of the
Ptlllipplne~ ;
1-11
owner's representative or structural engineer authorizing

such modifications or changes.
The signature, seal, name and professional license number
of the civil engineer in charge of construction shall be
included in the as~built drawings.
Copies of the as-built drawings shall be provided to the
owner, constructor, engineer~of~record and the building
107.1 General
All construction or work for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection throughout the various work
stages.
One or more structural inspectors who are
registered civil engineers with experience in structural
construction, who shall undertake competent inspection
during construction on the types of work listed under
Section 107.5, shall be employed by the owner or the
engineer~of~ record acting as the owner's agent.
Exception:
The building official may waive the requirement for the
employment of a structural inspector if the construction is
of a minor nature.
In addition to structural inspections, structural

observations shall be performed when required by Section
107.9.
107.2 Definitions
The follo'wing tenns are defined for use in this section:
CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
structural inspection where the structural inspector is on
the site at all times observing the work requiring
structural inspection.
PERIODIC STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a

structural inspection where the inspections arc made on a
periodic basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous
inspection, provided this periodic scheduled inspection is
performed as outlined in the inspection program prepared
by the structural engineer.
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is the visual observation
by a structural inspector of a particular type of
construction work or operation for the purpose of
ensuring its general compliance to the approved plans and
specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions
of this code as well as overall construction safety at
various stages of construction.
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION
is the visual
observation of the structural system by the stI11ctural
observer as provided for in Section 107.9.2, for its general
conformance to the approved plans and specifications, at
significant construction stages and at completion of the
structural system. Structural observation docs not include
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
112
CHAPTER 1 -General Requiremenls
or waive the responsibilily for the structural inspections

required by Section 107. I or other sections of this code.
107.3 Structural Inspector
I. 'Concrete jor,foundations of resillelllial !JUi/dings

accommodating 10 or ~fewer persons, or - b!li1d~ngs
fal1i~i l""'er Category V of Table 10}1, provided
the buitding officwl finds tllat a ' structural IIaZ{lrd
does not exist.

107.3.1 Qualifications
The sU'uctural inspector shall be a registered civil

engineer who shall demonstrate competence for
inspection of the particular type of construction or
operation requiring structural inspection.
107.3.2 Duties and Responsibilities

The structural inspector shall observe the work assigned
for conformance (0 the approved design drawings and
specifications. Any discrepancy observed shall be brought
to the immediate attention of the constructor for
correction, then, if uncorrected, to the owner andlor to the
building official.
The structural inspector shall verify th at the asbuilt
drawings (see Section 106.5) pertaining to the work
assigned reflect (he condition as constructed,
The structural inspector shall also submit a final report
duly signed and sealed stating whether the work requiring
stru ctu ral inspection was, to the best of the inspector's
knowledge, in confonllance to the approved plans and
specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions
of thi s code.
2.
For foundation concrete, otlier than cast-ill-place

drilled piles or caissons. where the structural desigll
is based on alit, 1Iot greater tha1l 17 MPa.
3.
Non-structural slabs on grade, lnclllding prestressed

slabs on grade when effective prestress in concrete is
less rhan 10 MPa.
4.
Site work concrele fully supported on earth and

concrete where no special hazard exists.
107.5.2 Bolts Installed in Concrete

Prior (0 and during the placement of concrete around bolts
when stress increases permitted by Section 423 are
utilized.
107.5.3 Special Moment-Resisting Co ncrete Frame
For special moment-resisting concrete frame design
seismic load in structures withill Seismic Zone 4, the.
slructurru inspector shall provide reports to the engineerof-record and shall provide continuous inspection of th e.
placement of the reinforcement and concrete.

107.5.4 Reinforcing Steel and Prestressing Steel
Tendons
107.4 Inspection Program
The structuraJ inspector shall prepare an appropriate
testi ng and inspection program that shall be submitted to
the building official. He shall designate lhe ponions of
the work that req uires structural inspections.
When structural observation is required by Section 107 .9.
the inspection program shan describe the stages of
construction at which structural observatio n is to occur,
The inspection program shan include samples of
inspection reports and provide time limits for submi ssio n
of reports.
107.5.4.1 During a ll stresSing and gro uting of tendons
in prestressed concrete.
107.5.4.2 During )llacing of I'einfol'ci ng steel and
prestressing tendons for all concrete required to have

structural inspection by Section 107.5.1.
Exception:
The st11lctural inspector need not be presel!! continuously

during placing of reillforcing steel and prestressing
tendons, provided the structural inspector has inspecfed
for confonnance to the approved plalls prior to flu:
closing offonns or the delivery of concrete 10 the jobsit l'.
107.5 Types of Work for Inspection

Except as provided in Section !o7.1. the types of work
listed below shall be inspected by a structural inspeclor.
107.5.1 COllcrcte
During the laking of test specimens and placing of
concrete. See Section 107.5.12 for shoterete.
:.ccepliol.'s:
.. '.
107.5.5 Structural Welding
1-13
107.5.5.1 General
of bolts to determine that all layers of connected materials

have been drawn together and that the selected procedure
is properly used to tighten all bolts.
During the we lding of any member or connecti on th at is

designed to resist loads an<\forces required by this code.
107.5.7 Structural Masonry
Exceptions:
1.
Welding dOlle in on approved fabricator's shop in

accordance witli Sec/ion 107,6.
2.
TI,e _~tmctural inspector need not be cOllfinuously

presem dwine welding of the following ilems,
provided the materials, qualifications oj welding
procedures and welders are verified prior 10 the start
of work; periodic inspections are made of work in
progress; and a visual inspection of all welds is made
prior 10 completion or prior fa shipment of shop
welding:
oj Sing/ewpass fillet welds no/ exceeding 8 mm
in sileo
b) Floor and roof deck welding.
107.5.7.1 For masonry, other than fully grouted openend hollow-unit masonry, during preparation and
taking of any required prisms or test specimens,
placing of all masonry units, placement of
reinforcement, inspection of grout space, immedhHely'
prior to closing of cleanouts, and dUl'ing all grouting
operations.
Exceptioll:
For hollow-unit masonry where the fm is no more than 10
MPa for concrete Ilnits or 18 MPa for clay ullits.
structural inspectioll may be peifonned as required for
fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry specified ill
Section 107.5.7.2.
c)
Welded studs when used for structural

diaphragm or composite systems.
d)
Welded sheet steel for cold-fanned steel

framing members such as studs alld joists.
107.5.7.2 For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit

masonry during preparation and taking of any
required prisms or test specimens, at the start of
laying units, after the placement of reinforcing steel,
grout space prior to each grouting operation, and
during all grouting operations.
e)
Welding of stairs and railing systems.
Exceplion:
107.5.5.2 Special Moment-Resisting Steel Frames

During the non ~destru clive testing (NDT) of welds
specified in Section 107 .8 of this code, the use of certi fied
welders shall be required for welding structural sleel
connections for this type of frame. Crirical joint
connections shall be subjected to non-destructive testing
usi ng certified NDT technicians.
S,ructural inspection as required ill Sec/iolls 107.5.7. J

and 107.5.7.2 need not be provided when design stresses
have been adjusted as specified in Chapter 7 to permit
noncontinUous inspection.
107.5.8 Reinforced GYPsulIl Concrete
When cast-in-place Class B gypsu m concrete is being
mixed and placed.

107.5.5.3 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
During the non -destruct ive testing of welds.
107.5.6 High-Strength Bolts

The inspection of hi gh-strength A325 and A490 bolts
shall be in accordance with approved internationally
recognized stanqards and the requirements of this section.
While the work is in progress, the stnJclUral inspector
shall determine that the requiremenls for bolts. nuts,
washers and paint: bo iled parts; and in:,t allali on and
lightening in such standards arc mel. Suc h inspections
may be perfonncd on a periodic basis as defined in
Section 107.2.
J07.5.9Insulating Concrete Fill

During the application of insulaling concrete fill when
used as part of a structural system.
Exception:
]fIe slmctural inspections may be limited. to an illitja~
inspection to check the deck sUrface and placement of
reinforcing Sleet. 11le slructural inspector shall monitor
rhe preparation of compression test specimens during this
initial inspection.
The st ructural inspector shall observe the calibration

procedu res when such procedures are requi red by lhe
plans or specifications. He shall monitor lhe installation
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
1 14
107.5.10 Spray Applied Fire-Resisti ve M a terials
2.
Verification of the fab ri cator's qUal it/ ~ontrol

capabi lities, plant and person nel as outl illed !Jl the
fab rication procedura l manual ~ lla ll b ~ ; ~)' an
approved inspection or quali ty control dgcllt.y .
3.
Peri odic plant inspections shall be conducled by an

approved inspection or quality con trol agency [0
monitor the effectiveness of the quality co ntrol
program.
Du ring the application of spray-applied fire-resistive

materials ..
107.5. 11 Piling, Drilled Piers and Caissons

During driving and load testing of piles and construction
of cast-inplace dri lled piles or caissons. See Sections
107.5. 1 and 107.5.4 for concrete and rei nforcing steel
inspection.
107.7 Prefabrica ted Cons tructi on

107.5.12 Shotcrete
During the (aJdng of lest specimens and placing of all
107.7.1 General
sholcrelc.
107.7.1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this section is to regulate materials and
Exception:
Shotcrete work f ully supponed all earth, millor repairs

and when, in the opinion of the building official, 110
special hazard exists.
establish meth ods of safe construction where any

struc ture or portion the reof is wholl y or panial ly
107.5.13 Special Grading, Excavation and Filling
107.7.1.2 Scope
During earthwork excavations, grad ing and fi lling

operatio ns ins pection to satisfy req uireme nt s o f Cha pter 3
Unl ess otherwise specifically stated in thj s scct ion , all

prefabricated co nstructi on and all materials used therein
and Section 109.5.
shall conform to all the req uirements of Secti on 101.4.
107.5.14 Special Cases

Wo rk that, in the opinion of the stn lclural engineer,
107.7.1.3 Definition
prefabricated.
involves unusual hazards or condi tions.
PREFABRICATED ASS EMBLY is a stru ctural uni t.
107.5.15 Non-Dest ru ctive Testing
the integral parts of w hi ch have been built up or

assembled prior to incorporation in the buHding.
In-situ non-destructive testing program, in addition to the

requirements of Section 107.8 that in the opinion of the
structural engineer may supplement or replace
conventional lC!HS 011 concrele or olher materials and
assemblies.
107.6 Approved Fa br ica tors
Structural inspections required by this section and
elsewhere in this code are not required where the work is
done on the premises of a fab ricator approved by the
structural engineer to perform such work without
structural inspection. The approved fabrica tor shall
submit a certi (icate of compliance Lhat the work was
performed in accordance with the approved plans and

specifications to the building official and to lhe engineer
or architect of record. The approved fabricator's

qualifications shal! be contingent on compliance with the
following :
I.
The fabricator has developed and submiltcd (l

detai led fabrication procedur:ll manual rcnect ing key
q uality cont rol procedures Iha t wi ll provi de a basis
fo r inspect io n con tro l of work mansh ip and the
rabricator plan t.
107.7.2 Tests of Materials

Every approval of a material n01 specifically mentioned in
this code shall incorporate as a proviso the kind and
number of tests to be made during prefabrication.
107.7.3 Tes ts of Assembl ies

The building official may require special tests to be made
011 assemblies to dctermine thei r structural adequacy,
durabili ty and weather resis tance.
107.7.4 Connec ti ons

Every device used to connect prefabricated as!\(,-II'b! i('~~
sllall be designed as required by this code and : j , _; : j>c
capable of developing the strength of the largest ,;" ;l1ber

connected, except in the case of members fenning part of
a sll1.lcwral frame designed as specified in ampler 2.
Connections shall be capable of withstanding uplifl forces
as specified in Chapter 2.
107.7.5 Pipes a nd Co nduits
In structural design. due allowance shall be mack fo r any
mate rial to be re moved or d isplaced for tile inxla lia lion of
pi pes, co nduits or ot her equipment.
Association of Structural Engineers of th e Philippines
CHAPTEfi 1 - General Hequirements
107.7.6 Certificate and Inspection

107.7.6.1 Materials
Materials and the assembly thereof shall be inspected to

determine compliance with this code. Every material shall
be graded, marked
this code.
Of
labeled where required elsewhere in
107.8.2.1 General
All complete penetration groove welds contained in joints
and splices shall be tested 100 percent either by ultrasonic
testing or by radiography.
l!.,xceptions:
1.
When approved, the non-destructive testing rate for

an individual welder or welding operator may be
re.duced to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is
demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds
tested for the welder or welding operator. A sampling
of at least 40 completed welds for a job shall be made
for such reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined
as the number of welds containing rejectable defecls
divided by the number of welds completed. For
evaluating the reject rate of continuous welds over
900 mm in length where the effective throat thickness
is 25 mm or less, each 300 mm increment or fraction
thereof shall be considered as one weld. For
evaluating the reject rate on continuous welds over
900 mm inlenglh where the effective throat thickness
is greater than 25 mm, each 150 mm of length or
fraction thereof shall be considered one weld.
2.
For complete penetration groove welds on materials

less than 8 mm thick., non-destructive testing is not
required; for this welding, continuous inspection is
required.
3.
When approved by the building official alld owlilled

in the project plans and specifications, this nondestructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in
the shop oj an approved fabricator utilizing qualified
le.st techniques in the employment of the fabricator.
107.7.6.2 Certificate
A cCI1ificate of acceptance shall be furnished with every
prefabricated assembly, except where the assembly is
readily accessible to inspection at the site. The certificate
of acceptance shall certify that the assembly in question
has been inspected and meets all the requirements of this
code.
107.7.6.3 Certifying Agency

To be acceptable under this code, every certificate of
approval shall be made by a nationally or internationally
recognized cCltifying body or agency.
107.7.6.4 Field Erection
Placement of prefabricated assemblies at the building site
shall be inspected to detennine compliance with this code.

107.7.6.5 Continuous Inspection
If continuous inspection is required for certain materials

where construction takes place on the site, it shall also be
required where the same materials are used in
prefabricated construction.
txceplioJ1:
Continuous inspection )'1 ill not be required during
prefabricariol1 If the approved agency cerlz(ies to the
consfruction andfumishes evidence (~f compliance.
115
107.8 NonDestructive Testing

107.8.1 General
In Seismic Zone 4, welded, fully-restrained connections

between the primary members of special momentresisting frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods
perfonned by certified NDT technicians for compliance
with approved standards and job specifications. This
testing shat! be a pan of the structural inspection
requirements of Section 107.5. A program for this testing
shall be established by the person responsible for
stI1lctural design and as shown 011 plans and
specifications.
107.8.2 Testing Program
As a minimum, the testing program shall include the

following:
107.8.2.2 Partial penetration groove welds when used in

column splices shall be tested either by ultrasonic testing
or radiography when rcquired by the plans and
specifications. For partial penetration groove welds when
used in column splices, with an effective throat less than
20 mm thick, nondestl1lctive testing is not required; for
this welding, continuous structural inspection is required.
107.8.2.3 Base metal thicker than 40 mm, when subjected
to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shalt be
ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind
such welds after joint completion.
Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected
on the basis of the defect rating jn accordance with the
(larger reflector) criteria of approved national standards.
107.8.3 Others
The structural engineer may accept or require in place
non-destructive testing of concrete or other materials and
assemblies to supplement or replace conventional tests.
1h
National Structural Code of the Pllilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
1-16
CHAPTER 1 _.. General Requirements
107.9 Structural Observation

107.9.1 General
Stmctural observation shall be provided in Seismic Zone

4 when one of the foll owing conditions exists:
I.
The struct ure is defi ned in Table 103- 1 as Occupancy

Category I. II or Ill;
2.
The structure is in Seis mic Zone 4, No as sel forth in

Table 208A is greater th an 1.0, and a lateral design is
10S.1 General
Buildings in existence at the time of the adoption of this

Illay have their existing usc or occupancy continued ,
if such use or occupancy was legal at the time of the
adoption of this code, provide(1 such cOlllin ued use is not
dangerous to life.
co~e
required for the entire structure;

3.
4.
When so designated by the stru ctural engineer. Of
When such observation is specifically required by the
Any change in the use or occupancy of any ex isting

building or structure shall comply with lpC provisions of
Seclions 108.4 of this code.
bu ilding official.
I
I.
107.9.2 Structural Observer

The owner shall empl oy the engincer~of-record or another
civ il engi neer to perform structural observation as defined
in Section 107.2.
Observed deficiencies shall be reponed in writing (0 the
owner's represcntati vet structural inspector, constructor
and the building official. If not resolved, the stnlctural

observer shall submit to the bu ilding offi cial a written
statement duly signed and sealed, idemifying any
deficiency.
107.9.3 Cons truction Stages for Observations
The structural observations shall be performed at the

construction stages prescribed by the inspection program
IOS.2 Maintenance
AI! buildings and structures, both existing and new, and
all parts thereof, shall be maintained in a safe condition.
The owner or the owner's designated agent shall be
responsible for th e maintenance of buildings and
structures. To determine compliance with this.subsection,
the bui lding official may cause a structure 10 be
reinspected.
108.3 Additions, Alterations or Repairs
10S.3.1 General
Buildings and structures to which additions, alterations or

repairs are made shall comply with all the requirements of
this code for new facilit ies except as specifically provided
in thi s section .
prepared as requ ired by Secti on 107.3.
It shall be the dUly of the engineer+in-charge of

construction, as authorized in the Building Permit, 10
notify the stmclUral observer that the described
constniction stages have been reached, and to provide
access to and means for observing the co mponents of the
strucrural system.
~~W~~~j!'f~
~~--gp;~~~~~.$~
IOS.3.2 When Allow ed by the Building Official

Additions, alterations or repairs may be made to any
building or structure without requ iri ng the existing
building or st nlcturc 10 co mply wi th ,\11 the requirements
of this code, provided the addition, alteration OJ' repair
co nforms to that required for a new building or structure
and provided further that such appro val by the building
official is in writi ng.
Additions or alterations shall not be made to an ex isting
building or structure that will calise the existing bui lding
or Slructure to become unsafe. An unsafe condition shall
be deemed to ha ve been created if an addit io n or
alteratioll wi ll ca use .IIlY st ructu ra l element of the existing
building or SlmClUrc to resist loads in excess of their
capacity or cause .1 red ucti on of {heir load cnrrying
capaci ty.
Ad di tions or alterations shall nOI be made 10 an ex isting
buildi ng or structure when suc h existing building or
structure is not in full compliance with the provisions of
this code except when such addi ti on or alteration will
resu lt in {he ex isting building or st ructure bei ng no more
Association of Struclural Engineers of the Philippines
hazardous based on structural safety, than before such

additions or alterations arc undertaken, unless adequate
retrofitting or remediation is introduced.
Exceptions:
Alterations to exl'sting structural elements or additions of
flew structllral elements, wh!'ch are initiated for the
plllpose oj increasing the strength or stiffness oj (he
lateral-jorce-resisting system of an existing struc/~lre.
Ileed not be designed for. forces confonning to these
regulations provided that an engineering analysis is
submitted 10 show that:
1.
The capacity of existing structural elements required

to resist/orces is not reduced;
2.
The lateral force co required errstmg structural

elements is not increased beyond their design
strength;.
3.
New slnlclural elements are detailed and connected

to Ihe existing structural elements as required by
these regulations; and
4.
New or relocated nOfl~strnctural elements are

detailed alld connected to existing or fl ew structural
elements as required by these regulations.
A change in use or occupancy of any building shall be

allo wed only when the change in use or occupancy will
not cause any structural elemen t of the existing building
to resist loads, determined on Ihe basis on this code and
on the proposed use or occupancy. in excess of their
capacity. Alterations to Ihe ex isting bui lding shall be
pemliued to satisfy this requirement.
No change in the character of occupancy of a building
shaJl be made without a new cenificate of occ upancy
regardless of whether any alterations to the building arc
108.3.3 Non-structural
Non-s truclural alterations or repairs to an existing
bui lding or struclure are rennitted 10 be made of Ihe sam e
materi als of whi ch the building or structure is constructed,
provided that they do not adversely affect any structural
member or lhe fire~resistance rating of any part of the
bu ilding or structure.
108.3.4 Historic Buildings

Repairs, alterati ons and additions necessary for the
preservation, rcstoration, rehabilitation or cominued use
of a building or structure may be made without
confonnance 'to all the requ irements of this code when
authorized by the building official. provided :
I.
The build ing Or structure has been designated Iby

official action o f the legally constituted authori ty of
thi s jurisdict ion as having spec ial historical or
architectural signi fi cance.
2.
Any structurally unsafe conditions are corrected.
3.
The reslc!'cd buildin g or structure will be no more
1 17
hazardous based on life safet y than the existing

building.
108.4 C hange in Use

No Change shall be made in the charactcr o f occupancies
or use of i\ny building unless the new o r proposed lise is
less ha7.ardous, hased on life safety than the existin g usc.
th
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
118
CHAPTER 1 '" General Requirements
Geotechnica l Engineeri ng of the Ph ilippi ne In stitute o f

Civil En gineers (PI CE).
109.1 General
109. 1.1 Scope
GEOTECHNI C AL ENGINEERING is the "ppli cation

of thc princi pl es o f soil and rock mechan ics in the
in vestigatio n, eva luati on and dcsign of ci vil works
involvin g the use o f ea rth materi als and fo und ations and
the inspec tion or testi ng of the construction the reof.
The provis ions of this section apply 10 gradi ng.

excavation and can hwork cOll stm . :tio n, includ in g fi lls and
c nbankmc rHs.
GRADE is Ihe vel1icill locJli on of the ground su rfacc.
109.2 DefillitiolLs
EXISTING GRADE is the grad e pri or to gradin g.
The fo ll owing terms are defi ned for lise in this sect ion:
APPROV AL s hall mean Iha t the proposed work or
completed work con forms 10 th is secti on in the opin ion o f
th c building offi cial.
FINISH GRAD E is the final grade of the si te that

confonns to the approvcd pl an.
ROUGH GRADE is the stage at which the grade
approximately co nforms to the approved pl an.
AS GRADED is the ex te nt o f surface con dirions o n

comple ti on of grading.
G RADING is an excavator or fill or com bination thereo f.
BEDROCK is in placc solid or altered rock .
K E Y is a designed compacted fi ll placed in a tre nc h

excav ated in earth malerial beneat h the toe of a slope.
BENCH is a rel atively level step ex cavated into earth

mat eri al on whic h fill is to be pl aced .
nORRO\V is earth m3lerial acquired from an offsite
loca tion fo r use in grading on a site.
CIVIL ENGINEERING is the applicat ion of the
kn owl edge of the fo rces of nature, principl es o f
mec hanic s a nd the properties of mate ri als to the
evaluat ion, design an d constllJc ti o n of civi l works.
COMPA C TION is the dcnsir<cation
mechanical or chemical mea ns.
of a
fill
If)'
EARTH MATERIAL is a ny roc k, natural soi l o r r< 1I or
PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION is the inspection

required by thifi code to be performed by th e civ il
engineer o r geotechnical e ngi neer. S uc h inspecti ons
incl ude tha I perfomled by persons supervised by such
engi neers or geologists a nd shall be suffic ient to fonn a n
opinio n relating to the conduct of the work.
SITE is any lot or parce l of land or cont iguous
com binmioll the reof. unde r the same owncrs hi p. where
grading is performed or permitted.
SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of

whic h is ex prcssed as a rat io o f vel1ica l distance to
horizo ntal di stance.
an y combin ati o n thereof.
SOIL is naturall y occu rring supe rficia l deposi ts overlying

EROSION is the wearing away of the grou nd surface as a
bedroc k.
res ult of the movemen t of wi nd, wate r or ice.

SOILS ENGIN EER. See Geotechni cal Engineer.
EXCAVATION is the mec ha ni cal re moval of earth
mate ri al.
SOILS ENGINEEIUNG . See Geotecilili ca l Engineering.
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial

me'I IlS.
TERRACE is a relatively level step co ns tructed in the

face of a graded s lope surface for drai nage and
mai IIt ena nce purposes.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER is II registered Civ il

En gin ee r with spec ial qualifi ca ti on in the prac tice of
Geo tec hn ical Engineering as recognized by the Bo.ard of
Civi l Engincering of thc Professiona l Regulation
Commission as endorsed by the Specially Division of
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Philippines
CHAPTER 1 .- General HequlremenlS
109.3 r)ennits Required

109.3.1 Gencral
Exce pt as specified in Section 109.3.2 of this section, no
person shall do any gmd ing without first having obtained
.1 gra ding pCnllit from the building official.
109.3.2 Exempted Work
A grading permit shall not be required for the following:
I.
Grading in an isolated.
sc lf~co lllaiJ)cd
area if [here is
1- 19
Sl<lbility of a public w:ly or drainage channel, the owner of

the property upon whi ch the excavation or fill is located,
or other person or agent in control of said property, upon
receipt of notice in writing from the building official,
sha ll within the period specified therein repair or
eliminate such excavat ion or embankment (O eliminate the
hazan.l and 10 be in confonnance with the requirements of
this code. Requirements for excavations shall he referred
to Chapter 3 of thi. code.
109.5 Grading Permit Requirements
no dnngcr to priv'lIc Or public properly.
2.
An excavation below finished grade for basements

and footings of a building, retnining wall or other
stnlcture authorized by a valid building permit. Thi s
shall nol exempt any fill made with the material from
such excavation or cxempt any excavation ha ving an
. unsupported hcight greater than 1.5 m after the
completion of such Slmcture;
3.
Cemetery graves;
4.
Refuse di sposal sites cont rolled by other regulmions;
5.
Exc:lvations for wells, or trenches for utilities;
6.
Mining, quan'ying, excavating, processing or

stock piling of rock , sa nd, gravel, aggregate or clay
controlled by other regulations. provided slich
operations do flot affect the ItHera l suppon of, or
increase stresses in, soil on adjoining propeflies;
7.
Exploratory excavat ions performcd under

direction of a registcred geotechnical engineer;
8.
An excava ti on that ( I) is less than 600 mm in depth

Of (2) docs not create <l cut slope grea ter [han 1,5 m in
height and steeper th an ! unit venical in I Y2 units
horizo ntal (66.7 % slope); and
9.
A fill less than JOO mill in depth and placed on

natttrni terrain wi th a slope flatter th<l ll 1 unit vertical
the
in 5 units hori zo ntal (20% slope). Or less than 900

in depth, not imcndcd 10 suppor( structurcs, that
docs not exceed 40 Ill) on anyone lot and docs not
obSlmct a drainage course.
109.5.1 General
Except as exempted in Section 109.3.2 of this code, no
person shall do any grading without first obtaining a
grading permit from the building official. A separate
pem)it sha ll be obtained for each si te, and may cover both
excavations and fill s.
109.5.2 Grading DeSignation
Grading in excess of 4.000 m) shall be perfonned ill
accordance with the approved grading plan prepared by a
civil engineer, and shall be designated as "engineered
grading." Grading involving less Ihan 4,000 1111 shall be
designated "regular grading" unless the permittee chooses
to have the grading performed as engineered grading, or
the building official determines Ih31 special conditions or
unusual hazards exist, in which case grading shall
conform to the requirements for engineered grading.
109.5.3 Engineered Grading Requirements
Application for a gradi ng pennil shnll be accompanied by
two sets of plans and specifications, and supporting data
co nsisting of a geotechnicill engineering repofl.
Additionally. the application shall state lhe estimated
quantities of work involved. The plans and specifi cations
shall be prepared and sig ned by the civi l engineer licensed
to prepare such plans or spec ifi cations when required by
{he build ing official.
111m
Exemption from the pennil requirements of thi s sec ti on

shall flot be deemed 10 grant authorization for any work to
be done in any manlier in violation of the provisions or
this code or any oth er laws or ordinances or this
jurisdiction.
Specifications
shall
contain
information covering
Plans shall be
drawn to scale upon subs tantial paper or cloth and shall be
of sufficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent of (he
work proposed and show in detail thilt th ey will conform
to th e provisions of this code and all rc!e val1l laws.
ordinances, rules and regulations . The first sheet of eac h
set of plans shall give location of the work, the nam e and
,lddrcss of {he oWlH.~1'. and the perso n hy whom th ey were
constmcl ion and malerial requirements.
prcp'l l'cd .
109.4 Hazards
Wh enever the huilding offi cial determines lhilt any
exLo;;ting excavation or embankment Of filt on private
property Il(I~ become a hazard to life and limb, or
endangers properly. or Oldvcrscly affects the s"f'ct y. usc or
National Struc tural COCIG of thE: Pllilippll1 es
()Iil
Edition Votume 1
120
CHI\P TEIi 1 ... General f1equirerncnls
The plans shall include lhe following information:

I.
General vi cinity map of lhe proposed s ite;
2.
Property limits and accurate contours of eX isti ng
3.
4.
of the person who prepared the plan . The pl:m shall

include the followin g information :
I.
General vicinity map of the proposed site;
ground and details of terrain and area drainage;
2.
Limiting dimensions a nd depth of cut and fill;
Limiting dimensions elevati ons or f'inhih co ntours to

be achieved by the grading, and proposed dmin agc
channels and rel ated COnSII1J ction;
J.
Provisions for lateral earth SUPPOI' or shori ng; l.\Ild
Detailed plans of all surface and subsurface drainage
4.
Loca tion of an)' bu ild ings or structures where work is
w be pcr:onned , and the location of any buildings

stnJcture ~ \~' ithin
4 .5
III
Or
of the proposed grading.
devices, w;.!Ils, cribbing, dams <lnd other protective

devices to be constructed with, or as a part of. the
109.6 Grading Inspeclion
proposed work, IOgether with a map showi ng the
5.
6.
drainage arc.\ and the estimated runoff of the arc,l
109.6.1 General
serveO by an y drains;
Location of a ny buildings or struc tures on the
property where the work is to be pcrfonncd and the
locatioll of any buildings or s(ruClUres on l:lllu of
adjacen t owners that arc within 4.5 m of the property
or that may be affected by the proposed grading
Grading operariolls for which a permit is required shall be

subject 10 inspection by the building official. Inspection
of grading opera tions shall be provided by the
geolechnical engineer reHlined 10 provide such services in
accordance with Section 109.5.5 for engineered grading
<lnd as required by the building official for regular
opermiolls;
grading.
Recommendations
included
in
the
geotechnical
enginccling reron and the engincering geology

report shall be incorporated in,. the grading plans or
speci fi cations. When approved by the building
official, specific recommendations contained in the
geotechnical engineering report and the engineering
geology report, which arc applicable to grading, may
be included by reference; and
7.
The dates of the geotechnical engineering :lnd

engineering geology repon s toge ther with the names,
addresses and phone numbers of the firms or
indi vidu als who prepared the reports.
109.5.4 Geotech nical Engineering Report

The geo technical engineering re port required by Section
109.53 shall include data regarding the nmure,
distributi on and strength of ex.ist in g soi l, conclusions and
recomlllendations for grading procedures and design
criteria for corrective mcasures, including buttres,-; fill s,
when necessary, and opinion on adequacy for the
intended usc of sitcs to be devel o ped by the proposed
grading ilS affected by gcotechn ica l engineering f.lcwrs.
including Ih l~ stabili ty of slopes.
Refer to -C hapter :-\ on Excavtltiolls imd Fou ndations for
delililed requ ireme nt s :md gu idel ines.

J 09 .5.5 H('g uJ :Il- GnHiing Requirements
applicat ion for .1 grading perini I shall l)l~
(I<..:<.:otllpanicd by <I plan in su fficient clarity 10 indicate the
nature ilnd cxlcll! or !Ilc work. and slate tllc estimat ed
qllilillili e-s of' work involved. The plans shall give th e
loc, llinn oj' th e work, 1he Ilame of thc ow nc r alld thc Il i lllle
Each
109.6.2 Civil Engineer

The civil engineer shall provide professional inspection
within such engineer's area of tcchnicnl spec ialty, which
shall consist of observation and review as to the
establishment of line, grade and surface drainage of the
development area. If revised plulls arc required during the
course of the work, th ey shal! be prepared by the civi l
engineer.
109.6.3 Geotechnical Engineer

The geotech nical enginee r shall provide obscrvation
duri ng gradi ng a nd tc~tin g for requ ired compaction . The
geotcc hn ical engineer shall provide s ufficiclll observation
during the prep<lration o f the natural ground and
placemelll and comp<lclioll of (he rill to verify lh<lt sll ch
work is being performed in accord ance with the
condit ions of the approved p lun and th e ,Ippropriate
requirements of this chapter.
Revised recolllmendations relating to conditions differing
from the approved geotechnical engi ncering ttl1d
eng inecling geology report s shall be submitted to the
permi ttee, the buildi ng officia l a nd Ih e civil engi neer.
109.6.4 I>enllittre
The pcrmilLcc s hall he res po nsi hle for the work to he
performed in accordancc wi th th e approved pla ns and
spcc ifie;:ltin ns and in conformil llce with th e provisions or
Ihis code. and the pcrmillce shall e ngage cons ultants, as
may be ncce ssary. 10 provide professional in spec ti on un iI
limely basis. The permittee shall ac t ;IS a coorclin:lt or
between lh c COllsuIWIHS. lhc co ntrac tor <Ind the building
Associallon of Slnu:1 111',)1 Enq: n(~nrs of tile: Pillilpplll e~,
CHAPTER 1 - General 11equiremenls
official. In the event of changed conditions, the permittee

shall be respo nsible for infonning the bui lding oflici nl of
such change and shall provide revi sed plans for approval.
109.6.5 BUilding Official
The building orfi cial shall inspect Ihe projeci at the
vario us stilges of work requiri ng approviJl to detc rmine

ndequate cOl1 lrol is being exercised by Ihe
professional co nsultants.
{h<l{
109.6 .6 NOlilicalion of No ncompliance
If, in the course of fuHilJing their respcctive duties under

thi s chapter, the civil engineer or the geotech ni cal
engineer rind s that the work is not being done in
confo nnance with thi s chapter or the appro ved,., gradin g
plans, the disc repanc ies shall be reported immediately in
writ ing to the permittee and to the building offi cial.
109.6.7 T r ansfer of Rcsponsibilily
If the civil engineer or the geotechnical engineer-ofrecord is changed during grading, {he work shall be
stopped ulllil the replace me nl has i.lgreed in writing to
accept their responsi bility within (he area of techni cal
co mpetellce for approval upo n completi on of the work. It
shall be the duly of th e pennittee to notify the building
official in wl;ting of such Change prio r \0 the.
recolnmeJ)cement of such grading.
tests, other substamiatin g data, and com ments all any

changes made during grading and thei r effect on the
recomrncndmions made in th e approved geotechni cal
engineering investigati on report. GeotcdUl ical
engincers shall submit a statement that, to the besl of
their knowledge. the work wi thin their aren of
responsibilities is in accord ance wit h (he approved
geotechni cal engineering repon and applicable
provisions of thi s sec tion.
3. The gradi ng conl ractor shall submit in a fNIll
prescribed by the building official a slmemCI, i of
co nfonnance to said as-buill plan and .he
speci ficati ons.
109.7.2 Nolification of Complel ioll

The permi ttee shall notify the building official when the
grading operati on is ready fo r final inspec tion. '; n:-li
permission by the bui lding official shall not be giver .!" '
all work, including installation of all drainage f ? !
.md their protecti ve devices. and all erosion ~'
measu res have been com pleted in accordance W I': 1;:'_
final approved gnlding plan , and the requi red fep(l: !
been submitted by the engi neer-or-record.
109.7 Compleli on of Work

109.7.1 Final Reporls
Upon completion or the rough grading work and 31 the
final completion of the work , the following reports and
dnlwings and sup ple ments thereto <Ire requ ired for
engineered grading or when profess iona l inspec ti on is
perform ed for regular grading. as applicable:
I.
An ns-built gradin g plan prepared by the civi l

e ng inee r retained to provide slich services in
accordance with Section J09.6.5 showing original
ground surfac e elevati ons, as-graded ground su rface
elevations, lot drai nage patterns, and the loca tions
and elevati ons of surface dmin age faci lities and of
the ou tlets of subsu rface drains. As-constnlcted
locations, elevations and details of subsu rface drains
shall be shown as repo rted by th e geo tedlllical
e ngineer. Civil engineers shall stale Ihal 10 Ihe bes t
of their knowledge th e wo rk within the ir area of
res ponsi bili ty was done in acco rd ance wit h the finil l
approved grading plan .
2.
1\ repol1 prepared hy the geotec hnical engineer

retained 10 provide such services ill accordance wi th
1-2 1
Sec tion 109.6.3 , including locations and elevations of

fie ld density tests, summaries of field .Ind I;.lboratory
Nationa( Stru ctural Co(Je of t!1P. r.l11i1ippines (,111 Edition Volume 1
Association or Struc tural E 119inecrs of the Philippinp.s
NSCP C101 10
Chapter 2
MINIMUM DE5.IGN LOADS
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL. CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION
Association of Structu ra l Engi neers of the Philippines

Suite 7 13, Fut ure Point Plaza Co ndo minium I
I I2 Pan ay Avenu e, Q uezo n City, Phili ppines 11 00
Tel. No : (+632) 4 10-0483
Fax No .: (+632) 4 11 -8606
Email: !'!~10 ll l illc~com
Wehsil e: htt p://www.asc ponlin e.org
Nalloll<l l S tI"LJ ctlJr,~ 1 Code of 11'10 F>hilipPlnes 6 ' Edition Volume 1

i1
CHA PT ER 2 - Minimum Design loads
2 1
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 2 MINIM UM DESIGN LOADS ................ .. .................................... ........ ............................................................ 3
SECTION 201 GENERAL. ............................................................................................................. ................................... ...... 3
20 1. 1 Scope ... .....
....... .... ...
......... .....
. .......... .... ..
.. ........ ......... 3
SECTION 202 DEFINITIONS ........... ............... ..... ................ ...................................... ........................................................... 3

202. 1 Walls ...................... ..
...... 4
SECTION 203 COMBINATIONS OF LOADS ..................................................................................................................... 5

203. 1 General ............ ...... ..... .....
.............. ................ ....... ........... .. ................ ....... ..........
. .................................................. 5
203.2 SYlllbols and Notations. .........

................. ................................ .......... ............................................. 5
203.3 Load Combinations llsing Strength Design or Load and Resistan ce Factor Design .
.. ........ .......... ....... .. ..... ".5
203 .4 Load Co mbinati ons Using Allowable Stress Design ......... .. ........ ........ .......... ........
.. ......... ........................... 5
203.5 Specia l Seis mi c Load Combinations
.... ............ .....
........ ...........
. .... 6
SECTION 204 DEAD LOADS ........ .............................................. ........................ .................................................................. 9

. 204. 1 General .... .... .............. ................... .. .... ..........
204.2 Weigh ts of Materi,ds and Conslnlclions.. ........
.. .............. ..
204.3 Parlitio n Loads.. ........ .....................
. ................ .
..................... .. .... ............ ............. .... ..... ............ 9

.......... ....... ..... ................ .................................... 9
.. ............. 9
SECTION 205 LIVE LOADS ........................... ................. ......................................... ................ ............................................. 9

205. 1 Gen eral...... . .. ........... ..... ..... .. .. ... .... ...... .... .... ..
.......... .... .. ............ ...... 9
205.2 Critica l DistributiOJl o f Live Loads.. ..
.......................
.. .................. 9
205.3 Floor Li ve Lo ads ............. .
.................
.. ................................. 9
205 .4 Roof Live Loads .......... ...... ............... ..... ........... ..... ............. .................................. .................................................. 13
205.5 Redl!ction of Li ve Loads .................................... ................... .
...... ........................ 14
205.6 A ItCrlHl tc Floor Live Load Reduc lion ..
.. .... 14
SECTION 206 OTHER MINIMUM LOADS ............... ..................... ........................... ........... ............................................ 15
206. I Gelle ra l .... .......... .... .
206.2
2063
206.4
206.5
Olher Load s.
I mpaci Loads
................. .
Anchorage of Conc rete iln d Masonry Wall s .......
Interi o r Walt Lo ads.....
.. ............. .. ..
206.6 Retaining Vo.' alJs ................. ........................... " ................... .

206.7 Waler Accumul at ion .. .
206.8 Up lift on Floors and Foundations . .......... ........ ..
206.9 Crane Loads ...... .. ....... .
. ..... ... ...... .. ... .
206. 10 Heliport '!!lei Hel isto p Landin g Areas .
............ ..
. 15
.. .... 15
15
15
15
. 15
.. ...... .. 15
.. .. 15
. ......... .. ........ ......... ....... ........ ....... .. ...... ... .... ....... ... .... ..... .... 16
... 16
SECTION 207 WIN]) LOADS ........ ....................... ................... ............. ............................................................................... 17

207. 1 Gene ral .................... ..
207.2 Definitions
2073 Symbol s and NOI.uiolls ..
207.4 Method I - Simpl i fi ed Pmct~d1ll'c .. .
207.5 Method 2 -- Analyti ca l Procedure ..
207.0 Method 3 ... Wind Tunnel Proced ure ..
207.7 GUSI Effect Fac tor for Other Struclures .. .
207.X ES lim'ilcs of D yn'lInil' PropcI1ics .............. ...... ..
207.9 Con sc nslis Sta nd 'Ir<.Is il nd Olher RcfcrclH.:cd i)(lClIIllCIH.'i .....
..................... ... 17
.. .... . 17
.. 19
.. .... 20
.. .... 2 1
... 01
.. ............................... :l2
.. .. 32
.. ...... .. ................ .................... 34
SECTION 208 ICAHTHQUAKE LOAI)S .............................. ....... .. ........................ ...... ... ...... .... .. ..... ......... .... .................. ... .. 72
22
C HAPTt:f~
2 -. Minimum Design Loads
208. 1 Geneml. ........... .............. .. .................................................. ..................................... .................................................. 72

208.2 Dcllnitions . ...... .... .....
....... ...... .
.... 72
208.3 Symbol s and Notation ......
.. ....... .........
.... ..... .. 74
208.4 Criteria Selecti on ........ ..................
.. ................
............................ ............................. 75
208.5 Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Rcl3lcd Effects ........ ................................. ....................................................... 81
208.6 Dynal1\ ic Analysis Procedu res ...................... .... ........ ... .............. .......... ..................... ..... ...... ..................
.. ...... 90
208.7 Lateral Force 011 Elemen ts of Stnlctures, NonslJ1lctur.1I Componcllt,<; and Eq uipmcn t Suppol1cd by St ructures ... 92
208.8 Detailed Systems Design Requirements..
....... ....... ...... . .. ..... ........
.. ... ..... 96
20R.9 NO ll-Bu ilding Stru ctures ........................... .. .. , ..... ... ......
..... ". ,." .. ,.. ,.... '..
,........ ,... .." ......... " ... 99
208.10 Si te Cntcgorization Procedure.,.,............
........... ,., ,......... ,..........
..................... ,............. , 101
208.1 t Alternativc Earthquake Load Procedure
"" .. "." ................ ..... ,." ....... ,.102
SECTION 209 SOIL LATERAL LOADS ................................................ ...................... ................................................. ... 103
209.1 Ge nera!... ..
....... 103
SECTIO N 210 RAI N LOADS .......................................................................... ... ..... ................. .......................................... 111
I
!
210.1 Roof Drainage ..... ..... ...

2 10,2 Design Rain Loads ..... ,
2 ] 0.3 Ponding Instabili ty
210.4 Controlled Drailwgc
........... .......... ................. III

.....................
........ 111
...... .. 111
......... 111
SECTION 211 FLOOD LOADS ............. ....................................... ...................................................................................... 111

211. 1 Ge neral.. .
2 J 1.2 Definitions,
21 1.3 Establishme nt of Flood Hazard Areas, . ,
2 11.4 DeSign and Constructioll ........
2 1 1.5 Flood Hazard Documentation
Association of Structu ral
...... .......... ........... 111

......... .... 111
.. ..... ..... ..
....... 11 2
.............. ... .
....... . 11 2
............................. ........................... ...... 113
En~inep.rs
of tile PhilippInes
CHAPTEli 2 - Minimum DeSign Loads
2-3
The following terms are defined for use in this chapter:
ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting

of panels mounted on pedestals to pr9vide an under-floor
201.1 Scope
This chapter provides minimum design load requirements
for the design of buildings, towers and other vertical
structures. Loads and appropriate load combinations,
which have been developed to be used together, for
strength design and al!owa~le stress design are set forth.
space for the installations of mechanical, electrical,

communications or similar systems or to serve as an
air-supply or return-air plenum.
AGRICULTURAL BUILDING is a stmeture designed

and constructed to house farm implements, hay, grain,
poultry, Ii vestock or other horticultural products. The
stmcture shall not be a place of human habitation or a
place of employment where agricultural products are
processed, treated, or packaged, nor shall it be a place
used by the public_
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN is a method of

proportioning and designing structural members such that
elastically computed stresses produced in the members by
nominal loads do not exceed specified allowable stresses
(also called working stress design).
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a

building
for such
worship,
awaiting
for the gathering together of 50 or more persons

pUfl)oses as deliberation, education, instruction,
entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining, or
transportation.
AWNING is an architectural projection that provides

weather protection, identity or decoration and is wholly
supported by the building to which it is attached.
BALCONY, EXTERIOR, is an exterior floor system

projecting from and supported by a structure without
additional independent supports.
DEAD LOADS consist of the weight of all materials ancl

fixed equipment incorporated into the building or other
structure.
DECK is an exterior floor system supported on at least
two opposing sides by an adjacent structure anci/or posts,
piers, or other independent supports.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES arc buildings. towers and

other vertical structures that arc intended to remain
operational in the event of extreme environmental loading
from wind or earthquakes.
FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load specified in

Sections 204 through 208 and a load factoL See Section
203.3 for combinations of factored loads.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volurne 1
24
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
GA RAG E is a building or portion thereof in which motor

vehicle containing flammable or combusHble liquids or
gas in its tank is stored, repai red or kept.
2.
Any masonry or concrete walt that supports m ore

than 2.90 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its Own
weigh!.
GARA GE, PRIVATE, is a bu ilding or a portio n of a

building, not more than 90 111 2 in area, in which only
motor vehicles used by the tenants of the building or
buil din gs on lhe premises are kepi or stored.
EXTERIOR WALL is any wa ll or elemen t of a wall, Or

any membcr or group of members , that defines th e
exterior bound aries or courts of a build in g an d that has a
slope of 60 degrees or greutcr with th e horizontul plane.
LIMIT STATE is a condit ion beyond whicJ; i\ structure

or member becomes unfi t for service and is judged to be
NONBEARIN G WALL is any wall thaI is not a bearin g

wall.
no longer useful for its intended func tion (serviceability

limit state) or
(0
be unsafe (strength limit state).
LI VE L O ADS are those loads produced by the use and

occupancy of the building or Olher structure and do nOl
include dead load, construction load. or environmental
loads suc h as wind load, earthquake load and nuid load.
PARAPET W AL L is Ihat part of any wall entirely above

Ihe roof linc.
RETA INING WALL is a wall designed to resist the
lateral displacement of soil or other materials.
LOADS are forces or other actions that result from the

weight of all bu ilding materials. occupants and their
possess ions.
environmental
effects.
differential
movements, and restrained dimensional changes.
Penn ancnt loads are those load s in which variations over
lime are rare or o f small magnitud e. All other loads are
vari able load,.
LOAD A ND RES ISTAN CE F ACTOR DES IGN
(LRF D) M ETHOD is a me thod of proportioning and
designing structural elements using load and resistance
factors such that no applicable limit state is reached when
the struc ture is subjected 10 all a ppropriate load
combinations. The term "LRFO" is used in the design of
sleel stru ctures.
MA RQ UEE is a permanent roofed stru cture attac hed to
and supported by Ihe buildi ng and projecting over public
right-of-way.
O CC UPANCY is the purpose for th at a bu ilding, or part
the reof, is used or intended to be used .
STR E NG TH DESIGN is a method of proportioning and
designing stnlctural members such that the computed
forces produced in the members by the factored load do
not exceed the member design strength . The term strength
design is used in the design of co nc rete stnlclllres.
202. 1 Wa lls
B EA RI NG WALL is any wall meeting either of the
following class i fications:
I.
Any metal or wood stud wall that slipports more thall

1.45 kN/1ll of ven ical load in addition to its own
weigh!.
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of the Philippine s
CHAPTE R 2 - Minimum Design Loads
2-5
0.9 D+ 1.6 IV + J.6H
(203-6)
O.9D+1.0E+1.6H
(203-7)
whe re:
203.1 General
Buildings. towers and other vertical SUl lctu rcs and <'\11
portions thereo f shall be designed to resisl the load
co mbinations speci fi ed in Section 203.3 O[ 203.4 and,
where required by Section 208, or Chapter 4 and the
special seismic load combinations of Secti on 203.5.
T he most critica l effec l ca n occ ur whe n o ll e or more o f
lhe contribut ing loads 3rc not ac ting . All appli cab le loads
sha ll be considered. includin g both eanhquake and wind,
in accord ance with the spec ified load co mbin ations.
f,
= 1.0 ror fl oors in pl aces of publi c assembl y. ror li ve

load s in excess,of 4 .8 kPa, and for garage live load
= 0.5 ror olher live loads
203.3.2 Other Loads

Where P is to be consi dered in des ign, {he applica ble load
shall be added lo Seclio n 203.3. 1 ractored as 1.21'.
203.2 Symbols and Notations

D = dead load
= eart hqu ake load sel rorth in Section 208.5. 1
Em = estimated maximum earthquake force that ca n be
de veloped in the structure as sel fort h in Sec ti o n
208.5. 1.1
F
= load du e lO Oui ds wil h well-d e r,ned press ures and
II
= load
maximum heights
due lO lat eral pressure of so il and water in

soil
L = live load , except roof live load , incl udin g any
permitted li ve load reducti on
Lr = roof live lond , including a ny permitted li ve load
reducti on
I' = pondi ng load
R
rain load on thc undef1ec(cd roo f
r = selr-straining fo rce and e rrects arising rrom
cont raction
or
ex pansion
resulting
from
tcmpcrarurc cha nge. shrinkage. llloislU rc cha nge.
c reep in componelll materials, movement due 10
di ffe re nt ial scttl ement . o r comb inations thcreof .
IV = load due (Q wi nd pressure
203.4 Load Combinations Using Allowable Stress

Design
203.4.1 Basic Load Combinations

W here all owable stress design (working stress des ign) is
used. structures and all portio ns thereof shall resist the
rnos t critical effects res ulting from th e foll owing
co mbinations of loads: .
V+F
(203-8)
D+H+F+L +T
(203-9)
D + Ii + F + (L,o,. 1/)
D+ N + F +0.75[L+ T
(2OJ-2)
1.2D + 1.6(L, 0 '- R) ... ([, Lo,- O.8W)
(203 -3)
1.2 V + 1.6IV + J,L+O.5( L, 0,-11)
(203-4 )
1.2D+ I. OE+/i L
(203 -5 )
(203-1 1)
(203- 12)
No increase in a llowab le stresses shall be used wi lh these

load co mbinati ons except as specifica ll y permitlcd by
Secli on 203.4.2.
Where load and rcsi.'itancc fac tor des ig n is ll sed, stru c tures
:md a ll portions thereof sha ll resist the most c riti ca l
erfects rrom the fo ll uw ing co mbinati o ns of factored loads:
1.2(V + F + r)+ 1.6(L + H)+ O.S(L,o,-ll)
(L,or R)]
1.4
203.3.1 Basic Load Combinations
(203 -1 )
D + N+ F+ (II' o r E)
203.3 Load Combinations using Strength Design or

Load and Resistance Factor Design
IA(V+ F)
(203- 10)
N"_1IiOrlcJI Structural Code of tile Philippine s 6
th
Edition Volume 1
26
CHAPTER 2 .- Minimum Design Loads
203.4.2 AHernate "asic Loa d Combinations
In lieu of (he basic load combinations specifi ed in Section

203.4. I , stJ1J ctllrcs and portions thereof shall be permitted
to be designed for the most critical effects resulting from
the following load combinations. When using these
all emalc basic load combinations, a onethird increase
shall be permitted in all owable stresses ror all
combinations, including W or E.
f)
<-II
+F +075[ L+ L, +(W or I/~: J]
O.60D+W+H
O.60 D + -
(203- 13)
(203- 14)
+H
. (203 -1 5)
1.4
D + L + L,(or R)
(203- 16)
D+ L+W
(203 -1 7)
D + L+
(20318)
1.4
203.4.3 Ot her Loads

Where r is to be considered ill design, eac h app li cable
lo ad shall be added to th e co mbin ati ons s pec ifi ed in
See, io ns 203.4.1 and 203.4 .2.
203.5 Special Seismic Load Combinations
For both allowable stress design and strength des ign, the
following spec ial load combinations for seismic desi gn
s hall be used as speci fi call y required by Secti on 208, or
by Chap,ets 3 ,hro ugh 7.
1.2D+/,L+ I .OE",
(203- 19)
0.9D I.OE",
(20320)
wh ere:
I,
:::
1.0 for noors iii placcs of pu blic assembl y. for live

loads in excess of 4.8 kP<I. and for glJnlge liv.:.lo<ld.
::; 0.5 for olher live loads
Em := th e Il1tlXilll ll J1l effect or horizontal tllld verti cal
forces as scl fon h in Section 208.5. 1.1
Association of Structurfl ! Engineers of the Philippines
2-7
Table 204- 1 Mi nimum Densities for Design Loads fro m Materials (kN/m3)
Ma terial
Density
Alumi num
DilUllunous Products
Asphaltum
Graphite "
Paraffin ........ ,........... .
26.7
Material
Densit y
Lead .................................. .
IIL5
Lime
PelroJeum, crude
Petroleum. refined.
Petroleum. benzine ...... .

Petroleum, gasoline
Pitch
................. .
Tar
Brass
Bronze .....
Cas(~slone masonry (cement. slone, sand)
Cement, port land, loose .......................................................... .
Ceramic tile .
........................................... .
Charcoal
...................... .
Cinder fin .................................
Cinders, dry, in bulk .................................................... .
8.8
8.6
7.9
7.2
6.6
10.8
11 .8
82.6
86.7
22.6
14.1
23.6
1.9
9.0
7.1
Coal
Anthracite, piled
Bituminous, piled
Ligni te. piled
PCilt, dry. piled ...
8.2
7.4
7.4
3.6
Concrete. Plain
Cinder ........ .... ... ...
17.0
15.7
Haydi te (bumed-clay aggregate) ......... ....... ................. ..... \4 .1
Slag
................. .
20.7
SlOne
22.6
Vermiculi te and perlite Ilggrcgalc. nonload- bcaring ... 3.9-7.9
Other lighl aggregate. load bearing
.11.0- 16.5
Expanded-s lag aggregate
Concrctc. Reinforced
21.2
27.2
22.6
Masonry. Brick
Hard (low absorption)
Medium (medium absorption)
Soft (high absorption) ......... ...
20.4
18.1
I S.7
MASONRY. Conc rete (solid ponion)

Lightweight un its
Med ium weight units
Normal weight uni ts ................... ...
21.2
Masonry grout
22.0
16.5
19.6
Masonry. Rubble Slone

Granite
Limestone. crysta lline
Limestone. oolitic
Marble ....... ........ ... ........ ... ............ .. ................... .
Sandstone
Mortar, cement or lime
24.0
23. 1
21.7
24 .5
21.5
20.4
7.1
Particle board
Plywood
5.7
Riprap (nol nubmerged )

Li mesto ne
13.0
14.1
Sandstone
17.4
...................... _............................................... . 2 1.7

Slone. (including gra\lel) ............................. .
23.6
. ................................. ..... ....... . 87.3
2.2
Earth (nol subme rged)

Clay. dry
Clay. damp ..... .
Clay and gravel. dry ........................ .
Silt. moist. loose ...
Silt. moist, packed
Silt, flowing ....
Sand and gra\le!. dry. loose _
Sand and gra\lel. dry. packed ........... _.... _.............................
Sand and gravel. wet..
9.9
17.3
15.7
12.3
15. 1
17.0
15.7
17.3
18.9
Earth (sublncrgcd)
Clay
12.6
Soi l ................. ..
River mud
S:lnd or ;,,1 "vel ......................... ................ .
Sand o r gra\lel <lOti clay .............. ..... .
11.0
14. 1
. ................................ .
I)A
10.2
25. 1
1603
11.0
7.9
9.0
14. 1
C lean and df)'

River. dry ....................................... .
16.7
Slag
Bank
11 .0
Bank scrccnings
Machine
Sand ..
17.0
15.1
8.2
27.0
77.3
Slate
S teel. cold-drawn .
Slone. Quarried. Piled
Basalt. grani1e. gneiss ........... _................ .
Limestone, marble. quartz
Sandstone ... .......... ..................... ....... ...... .
Shale
Greenstone. hornblende
TeCT3. COlla, Archi tectural
Voids filled
Voids unfilled
Tin
\5.1
14 .9
12.9
14.S
16.8
18.9
.... 11.3
72. 1
Water
Fresh
Sea
9.8
10. 1
Wood (see Table 6.2 for relative de nsities for Philippine wood )
Zinc, rolled !'iheel
Iron
Cast
Wrought
25.9
25.9
Sand
Cinder .................................. .
Glass ...
Gra\lel. dry ..
Gypsum. loose
GYPSUlll. w:ltlbu;Ird
kc
7.1
Masonry. Ashlar Stone

Granite
Limestone. crystalline:
Limestone. oolitic ........ _.. ....... ..
Marble ...
Sandstone .....
Slag
Copper .
Cork. compresseiJ .......
5.0
Hydrated. k>ose ...............

.................. ..
Hydrated. compac1ed .................. ..
12.7
21.2
70.7
7.SA
tli
National Structural Code o f the PI1i lippines 6 Edition Volume 1
70.5
2-8
CHAPTER 2 - Minimurn Design Loads
Table 204-2 Minimum Design Dead Loads (kPa) (Use actual loads when available)
Component
CEILINGS
Acoustical Fiber Board
Load
FLOOR FILL
0.05
Gypsum Board (per mill
thickness)
0.008
Mechanical duct allowance ....... 0.20
Plaster on tile or concrete

Plaster on wood lath
0.24
0.38
Suspended steel channel

system
0.10
Suspended meta! lath and cement
plaster
0.72
Suspended metal lath and
gypsum plaster
Wood fUITing suspension
system
0,48
0.t2
COVERINGS, Roof and Wall

Asphalt shingles ......................... 0.10
Cement tile .................................. 0.77
Clay tile (for mortar add 0,48 kPa)
Book (ile, 50 mill ................... 0.57
Book tile, 75 flun .................. 0.96
Ludowici .. ................................ 0.48
Roolan...
. .......................... 0.57
Spanish.
.. ........................ 0.91
Composition:
Three-ply ready roofing .......... 0.05
Four-ply fclt and gravel ........... O.26
Five-ply felt and gravel ........... 0.29
Copper or tin ............................ 0.05
Comlgated asbestos-cement
roofing .................................... 0.19
Deck, metal 20 gage.
. ............ 0.12
Deck, metal, 18 gage ................... 0.14
Fiberboard, 13 1llJ11 .
. .......... 0.04
Gypsum sheathing, 13 mIll ......... 0.10
Insulation, roof boards (per mm
thickness)
Cellular glass
0.0013
0.0021
Fibrous glass
0.0028
Fiberboard
Perlite
0.0015
0.0004
polystyrcne foam
Urethane foam with skin
0.0009
Plywood (per mm thickness) 0.0060
Rigid Insulation, 13 mrn .
0.04
Skylight, metal frame,
J 0 nun wirc glass
0.38
Slate,S
Illlll
Load
Component
0.34
0.48
Slate, 6 mm
Waterproofing membranes:
Bituminous, gravel-covered. 0.26
Bituminous, smooth surface .0.07
Liquid, applied ..................... 0.05
Single-ply, sheet ................... 0.03
Wood Sheathing (per mOl
thickness) ............................ 0.0057
Wood Shingles ........................... 0.14
FRAME WALLS
Cinder concrete, per mill .......... 0.017

Lightweight concrete, pcr mm .0.015
Sand, per mm ........................ 0.015
Stone concrete, per mm ............ 0.023
FLOOR AND FLOOR FINISHES

Asphalt block (50 rnm), 13 mill
mortar ...
.. .......... 1.44
Cement finish (25 mm) on stoneconcrete fil!..
.. ................ 1.53
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm)
on 13 mill mortar bed ............. 0.77
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm)
on 25 mm 111011ar bed ............. 1.1 0
Concrete fill finish (per mm
thickncss) .............................. 0.023
Hardwood flooring, 22 rnrn ........ 0.19
Linoleum or aspbalt tiie, 6mm ... 0.05
Marble and mOJ1ar on stoneconcrete fill ............................. 1.58
Slate (per mm thickness) .......... 0.028
Solid Oat tile on 25 mm mortar
base..
. .......................... 1.10
Subflooring, 19 mill ................... 0.14
Terrazzo (38 mm) directly on
slab..
.. ................................ 0.91
Terrazzos (25 mm) on stoneconcrete fill ............................ !.53
TClTilzZO (25 mm), 50 Illm stone
concrete..
...1.53
Wood block (76 mm) on mastic,
no fill..
.................. 0.48
Wood block (76 mm) 011 J3 rnm
mortar base ........ ............. ...... 0.77
FLOORS, WOOD-JOIST (no

plaster)
- - - - _ .......
~gist SpacinE
300 .
' 4(JtJ"-' . 6tJtJ"
(mm)
mm
;
.:
mm
0.25
- -.----.~~-.-,
.. ---
0.30 i
0.30
1.50x200
50x250 i IUS .r:o..3i>~-l
.1..
50x300
0.40
0.35
Exterior stud walls:
SOx I (X)
mm
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.30
FRAME PARTITIONS
Movable steel partitions ...
0.19
Wood or steel studs, ! 3 mill
gypsum board each side.. .
0.38
Wood studs, 50 x 100,
unplastcred
0.19
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
one side..
.. .......................... 0.57
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
two side ...
.. ...................... 0.96
mill @
400 mm, IS-1l11ll
gypsum, insulated, 10-mm

siding ................................. 0.53
SOx 150 mOl @ 400 mm, I5mlll
gypsum, insulated, 10-mm
siding
....................... 0.57
Exterior ~tlld wall with brick
veneer
2.30
Windows, glass, frame and
sash
0.38
Clay brick wythes:
IOOmm
1.87
3.80
5.50
7.42
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
200mm
300 mill
400mm
Hollow Concrete Masonry units

(Unplastered, add 0.24 kPa for
each face plastered)
Grout
: Wythe thickness (mm)
Spacing : 100 ; 150
200
1_6.5 kN/m, Density o( Un!t
-,
Nog'ou;
CijJj'I.15 ,
800
1.40 . 1.53
1.63
6oii ' .. "--'i:so"
148
. 2:6 i
22rj'
400 .......... !~J2rJ 192-1254 "

Full
'2.50 ,2.63 '359'
!Y..~~~/~11.l.}2~.r"\_~.i~X.?r Un it
!'J.O.g~(?l~1
1.24
1.59
1.69
1.98
2.69
800
600 .
400
Full
Joist
Sizes
50xl50 .1..i 0.30
Load
Component
r.---"'~'
Full
. 2:44 .
. 282
. 3:88
r '1;8~ : :
L. 2.39
1.83 .. L 1.96
2.13
2.2
. r 2.84
" 2.97!
600!
, ..
172 .
2.25
1.87
2.11
2.82
21.2 .k.r~.r~ny. _p~,~~,i.tX(}r~J[.lJt

!'l_ogr."Ol!t '1 .J.}? __ . 1.44
?99.
I. _
}}1_..! 1.82
400
.....
1.34
I. 72
259
292 .
3:97 .
CHAPTER 2 -. Minimum Design Loads
29
204.1 General
205.1 General
Dead loads consist of the weight of all materials of

construction incorporated into the building or olher
struclUrc. including bUI not limited to walls, floors, roofs.
ceilings. stairways, buill-in partiti ons. finishes, cladding
and other similarly incorporated architectural and
stmcLUrill items, and fixed se rvice equipm ent, including
the weight of cmlles.
Live loads shall be the maximum loads expected by the

intended use or occupancy but in no case shall be less
than the loads required by thi s section.
204.2 Weights of Materials and Constructions
The actual weights of materials and constructions shall be:

used in determining dead loads for purposes of design. In
the absence of definite illfonnation, it shall be permitted
to use the minimum values in Tables 204-1 and 204-2 .
204.3 Partition Loads
Floors in office buildings and other buildings where

partition locations arc subject to change shall be designed
10 suppon, in add ition to all otiter loads, a uniform ly
distributed dead load equal to 1.0 kPa of floor area.
205.2 Critical Distribution of Live Loads

Where structural members are arranged
continuity, members shall be designed using
conditi ons, which would cause maximum
bending moments. Tbis requirement may tic
accordance with the provisions of Section
205.4.2, where applicable.
to create
the loading
shear and
satisfied in
205.3.2 or
205.3 rloor Live Loads

205.3.1 General
floors shall be designed for Ihe unit live loads as set forth
in Table 2051. These loads shall be taken as the
minimum live loads of horizontal prOjection to be used in
the design of buildings for the occupancies listed, and
loads <ltleast equal shall be assumed for uses not listed in
this sec tion but that creates or accommodates similar
loadings.
Where it can be determined in designing fl oors that the

actu al li ve load wi ll be grea ter (han {he value shown ill
Table 205-1, the actual live load shall be used in the
design of such buildings or ponions th ereof. Special
provisions shaH be made for machine and apparatus loads.
205.3.2 Distribution of Uniform Floor Loads
Where unifonn fl oor loads are i nvo l ved, consideration
may be limited to fu ll dead load on all spans ill
co mbination with full live load on adjHccllt spans and
alternate spans.
205.3.3 Concentrated Loads
Floors shall be designed to SU ppOrl safely the un iformly
distributed li ve loads prescribed in this section or the
co ncentrated load given in Table 205 ~ 1 whichever
produces the greatest load effects. Unless otherwise
specified the indica ted concentration slwll be assumed to
be uniformly di stributed over an area 750 mill square and
shall be located so as to produce the lIlOlximum load
effects in the slruclUral mcmber.
ProviSion shall be made ill areas where vehicles are used
or stored for concentrated loads, L, co nsi sting or tw o or
more loads spaced 1.5 III nomi na ll y on ce ntcr without
uniform live loads. Each IO(ld shall be 40 percen t of the
National Structural CoeJe of the Pl1ilippine s 6\11 Edition Volum e 1
2-10
CHAloTER 2-- Minimum Desi(Jn Loads
accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4 as appropriate,

producing the greatest stresses shall govern.
gross weight of the maximum size vehicle to be

accommodated. Parking garages for the storage of private
or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no repair or
refueling shall have a floor system designed for a
205.3.4 Special Loads

Provision shall be made for the special vertical and lateral
concentrated load of not less than 9 kN acting on an area

of 0.015 rn 2 without uniform live loads. The condition of
concentrated or uniform live load, combined in
loads as set forth in Table 205-2.
Table 205-1 - Minimum Uniform and Concentrated Live Loads
Use
01'
Occupancy
Category
Description
Office use
2.4
9.0'
. 4.8
9.0'
------------+------!--------I
1. Access floor systems
Computer use
0
7.2
2. Armories
I--------------+----------i----------------------2.9
0
Fixed seats
3. Theaters, assembly areas J and
auditoriums.
3.6
o
o
o
o
1.9
1.3
Movable seats
4.8
Lobbies and platforms
4.8
Stages areas
7.2
4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms and similar

recreational areas
5. Catwalk for maintenance access
- - - - 1 - - - - .---.--4
6. Cornices and marquees
3.6
7. Dining roOnls and restaurants
4.8
- - - - - - - - - - -..- .--.-.-----..- --.----.--.-----... --- _ . _--_._-----1---
o
o
8. Exit facilities 5
4.8
---------. - . - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .--..----.----11----.- .--..-----..---.General storage and/or repair
4.8
- . - -..---------.--.-- --.-.-.-...---------- '- - - - - - - - 1
9. Garages
Private or pleasure-type 1110tor
1.9
-'-vc"I"'1i"'c.::lc'--,,5("'0o.ra'"g"'>c'-_ _
_____._._____________.____+___
+ __._________+____._._. ___. _.__

1.9
Wards and rooms
I--;-;----:--,---;;--~-+------------
I O. Hospitals
Laboratories & operating
f-____~r..::o~o_"Ill.::S'- _______ . __.____
2.9
0 _.0 . _ _
."
__
4.5 '
---------
Corridors above ground floor

3.8
- - - - - - -_._- --- -- - - - - - + - _ . _ - - - _ ._ _._--_.__._-_. _. _------_._._------ Reading rooms
2.9
1------_--------__---- - - - - I I. Libraries
7.2
Stack roOIllS
Corridors above ground floor
4.5 2
o~"'o_._~_~._. _. _______ _
4.5
_... _..._- - - -4.5
4.5 '
3.8
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----__------------1--- - - - - - .__._---------_._--9.0 2
Light
60
______--_-1----12. Manufacturing
----------_... _. ._ . _------- _.. _ - - - ' - - -
Heavy
Association of Structural Engineers of the Ptlilippines
12.0
13.4 2
CHAPTER 2 . Minimum Design Loads
..,......... ,. ......
_. -.....
Usc 01' Occupancy

.._-- ..._'....... . _.... .. _- --- ._.,. ....... ......
Description ..,
...... ... . ... .. .. ... . .,_ .. "-,, .......

'
Category
'
- .. _--
Uniform Load 1
.. .. -..,.---..-.... . .. ... -.
kPa
~- - ,
Ca ll Ce llters & B PO
4.8
9.0
Orrices
2.4
9.0'
Building corridors above

Brou nd floor
3.8
9.0
Press rooms
7.2
11.0 '
Composing and linotype

rooms
4.8
Basic floor area
1.9
0'
Ex tcrior balcon ies
2.9'
Decks
1.9'
Storage
1.9
conidors
16. Rcs lroo ms
--
17. Reviewing
sl<Incls, grands tands,
Bleachers, and folding and telescoping
seatin g
....
..
4.8
Same as area served or

Occupancy
--
--
Cla ssrooms
1.9
45 '
Corridors above ground Ooor
3.8
45
Ground Ooor corridors
4.8
4.5
Public access
12.0
--
---_ _-_
20. Sidewalks a nd drive ways
Lig ht
---------.---_
Heavy
21. Storage
_---_._---- _..---------- --_.-
_-_
A'{:rt' lIIbly ar('os inc/llt/l' .mel! OCCllf)(III(it',~

ar(' W"lI'mlly aC("/',\'.\ihle to til{! flublie.
Il,t
,-,
..------
--
Retail
4.8
4.5 2
Wholesale
6.0
13.4 1
--
4.8
--
Nores fOR TMnE 205/

See Scctioll 205.5 j(Jr live food reciuctiollJ.
S('c S/'uil}ll 205.J.3.jint paragmph./or Ol"/'lIlI/ loud
12.0
..
..
22. Stores
21 Pedcstrian bridges and walkways
--
0.0
..
._---
--
--
18. Roof decks
19. Schools
--
.. _.....
9.0 '
--
kN
9 .0
13. Office
15. Rcsidelllial 8
Concentrated
-_ ........ _..Load
_-- _... - .....
2 .9
------Lobbies & ground floor
14. Print ing plants
"
211
--
IIIJp/i(/lti,lll.
dlllln' I/(//ls, Ilrill room.". Rymllfl.filllll.f. pla.l"~I"OIIIIl!.r. I'!(/Ul.~. /rrr(lc('s (Illd .I'ill/ifa l" occllpmlC'i('s that
F Ol" Jpe C"i{/('fmrf!(ls{~ rollfl'. sa Sectioll 205.-1.4,

I:.:,ril/Clcilitie.l' .I-/W/l ill l"llldl' .\"I(ch 11X(',t
(/lui .Iimilt,, lur .(.
(I,t /'rIITidol".\' .I'en'ill}; lII/I/I '("/ I{lfll1I
load 0/ I() o/" morc " cr.tll lI s. c.l'IcriOI' exit baIroil ii'S, ,I/(/irll'(IJ'J, fin'
('$((1/)(',1'
Im/il idllal sll/il" tr('ml.l sh/lll hi' des;gll(,(/ to .III/'/Io,--t a 1.3 /.;N ('oll('('l lll'(I(('d !lIad plw,(,(f in a posit;ulI thaI would rall.fl' /111J.rilllllll! .~/r('ss. Swir
slri"I-It'r.f ilia)' hI' de.\"I);IU:,tl fin the ul/ijt".m IO(ld ofC'1/orJlI ill tilt' Ie/hit'.
Stl~ 051'( '(;011 205 ..1.3.f('coll(/,mmgraph, /tJf (,(lIIcctl/ml('d lom/.f. Srr
1'0"'1' 2052 fi"'I'('hk/~ Im'-rier~.
RI'.\irh!l/tin( o('n lp(ll/tir.f iI/dud., I'riwlIl! dwl'ifillg.f. (111(11"11111'111$ lilli' hOld guest 1"/10111.1'.
Rrs/rllfJl/I
/(lOc/.f sllall 1101 Ill:
/f'.1.{
IlIml Ihe' load for 111(' ocne{l(lIIcy wil h whl<__"
National S truc tural CorJe or
(I'le
U1
flu.'.\' (In' tI.lsm ;a(('(I. but /l~('d 1/tIi c.n,:(,l'l/ 2.4 kP(I .
Philippinos G Edition Volume 1
2-12
CHAPTEli 2. ... Minimum Design Loads
NOlexfor Table 205-2
Table 205-2 Special Loads'
Vertical
Latera!
_+_--"L",o:"""d__-i-._}__o_"_d__
Usc or Occupancy
___C_
-a_tc-,g,-o_r'-Y___ j ___ ~~~criJ!_I._i(_"_'_I___k_P_"_-----j __.-.:k.-.:-P-,-a'---j
I.
Construction,
Walkway
public access al
site (live load)
~----.-
---------_._-
Docs flOlllPI)!.\' 10 cl'ilings thm hlll'{' ,wjfid('1JI tlJlIll (len'.I's ji'OIII

be/ow. ,I'l/ch llial o('n'ss is 1101 rt'qllircd lI'ililin Ihe sllIln' a/Jo\'!!
(he cciling. 00('.\' no( IIpply II! Ct'iliIJg.l if (he IIl1ic areos ohm'!' fhe
cd/ing {Ire 1101 pr(Jllidei/ with access. This hl'e loud IIt'NjIlO( IN'
considered (/.1' w:lillg simu/wl/collsly lI'ilh other lil'(, /(JUd.I'
imposed UpOIl (Iu' ailillg framing or ils supporting s(rw'IJ/J'{'.
7.2
I-~------------~~I-----I~---+----j
2.
(3randstan(:s,
reviewing,
stands bleachers,
and folding and
telescoping
Seals and
footboards
1.75
Catwalks
1.9
Sa
Note 3
,j
seating (live
load)
3.
Stage
accessories (live
Follow~p;t:--
load)
---.--..
---.-.~
._----.-
projection and
Over stages
Ceiling framing
(live load)
1.0
All uses
supporting the.~e rails.

7 A load per lincal ml'ter (kNIIII) /() be applicd horizontally at right
0.5 <1
except over
. stages ._"_ ... _____ ..,_.
5.
(lllgk~ 10
Partitions and
0.25
interior walls,
1~6-.~E-'-~'l-'-c-'-va-'-t-'-o-rs-'-'-'-In-'-d:""'-+~~------ ~---------I-~~--i
dumbwaiters
(dead and live
~____~I(~"~II~ls~)____~
2 x total
loads
----ro-t;-I-Io-ad--~"~~~~~j-~~~
7.
Cranes (dead
including
impact
and live loads)
1,25 x IOlal
load'\
increase
----------':xit fac;ii!T~s
serving an
greater than
Balcony railings
and guardrails
(1.I 0
total
loado
0.75
kN/m
occupant load
B.
The impact jacfOrs included arl' Jor cram's with .,'ted lI'ilee/.I'
riding Oil ,wed rails, TIJ<'y ilia), be modified if SlIbsf(lntilllillg
{ecllnical data accepwble 10 fhe bllildillg official ix SlIlimilled.
Live loads Oil crt/ne support Rirders omi Iheir COlll1ectiollS shall
he taken as the lIJaximllll! ('/'{IIIC wheel loads, For IH'IU/OIII operated traw'fing crane support girders olld their cOllnectiollS,
rhe imp(/ctJactors shall be I. JO.
nJis applies in the ilifl'Clioll parallel to (hl' rullway mils
{longitudinal}. The jaclor Jor Jorces p<'Ipelldiclilaf 10 Ihe mil is
0.20 x Ihe 11'(II/SI'('I'se Iml'eling IO(lds (trolley, cab, /looks olld
IIIfI'd loads). Forccs shall be appfi{'d (If lOp oj rail (llld lIIay be
disturbed omong rails of mllllip/1' rail C/,{lIIe,~ and shall he
dislrilmted with duc regard for latNal s(if/tI('SS of (hc Sll'IIctllres
2.4
i___________ I-'c~~.~<?,!~~oo~~._ ._~ __.. ____ .______ ~
4.
(Jnils is kNlm.
/..tl/{'rol .\'\\'0)' I){(/I'illg loads of 350 Nlm {Jarallel (Ill/I 145 Nlm
perpendiclIl(lr.I' 10 sl'a( (lnd jO{)(/)ow<i.l'.
7.2
Canopy
nJe tabulated loods orl' minimlllll /i)(Jds. Where olher ver/iml by

Ihis code or reqllired hy thl' design would ((JUSI' gn'(l/er Slre.I'.\'<'S,
Ihey slwll be used. Loads are ill kPo linkss ()/h('l'll'isl' illdiclIl{'d
in Ihe rab/I'.
righl (lllglcs 01'1'/' Iht' entire triblltal), area. ille/llding openings

alld spaces helween rails. Reaclioll.\' du' 10 Ihis loading /lccd nol
be combined with those oj Footnotc 7.
v A horizontal load in kN applied (If right (lngh's /(J Ihl' I'I'hic1t~
barrier (If a heifilll of 450 1/1/11 (I/;m'e rhe parking surfllC!'. The
jorce may be di.Hriiulfed (11'1'1' a 300-111I1I',Wf/lare orca,
In
kN/m
Components
!.28
0.30
7
The 111OllIJtillg : oj handrails .1'1/(/11 be such that the complcted

handrail (lnd slIpportillg strU('llIn' art' cupabh' (~( \\'i(hs/(Iliding a
load oj (J[ least 890 N applied ill alii' directioll 1It aNI' {loill( 0/1
Ihl' fail, Tln's(' loads s/Jal! nol /)(' (/.~'.\'lmJ('d to (lC( ('lIlIlI/lmiH'I\'
with Itcm 9.
\/(~l'Iiclll membas oj stora[ie /'(Icks ,I'hal! hc prol('c/ed from
impact Jorces (!( opef(llill[i equip/llelil. or rocks shal! 1)(' designed
so that fiji/un' (!( 0111' l'erticalll!(,lIIber \l'il/llot CO lise cof/opse oj
1/101'1' 1/)0/1 tile bny or !J(/ys dircctly supported hy Iha/lIJember.
50
1-=----1----1--__--
Other than
exit facilities
fhl' fOp rail.
Intermediate rails, panel fillers (lnd thl'ir CO/lnectiolls shall be

capable OJWifhstaliding (j load oj 1.2 kP(I applied horizonta!!., al
il
Thl' 1.1 kN load is to be applied to (111.1' single fire sprillkler

support poillt hilt flOl simult(llu'OI(.\'/Y to 01/ ,\'II/>porl joillts.
f-------.------- 9.
Vehicle barriers
10.
J-landrails
! J. Storage racks
27 kN'
S('l'
Noll' I()
Over 2.4
high
III
Total
loads"
12. Fire sprinkler
1.1 kN plus
stnJctural
support
water-filled
----- -- - -
weight of
See
Note 10
See
Table
208-/2
See
Tahfe
Ii
208-/2
_. _______i.~~~c____"_______ _
Association of Structural Engineers of Ole Philippines
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design loads
Table 205-3 Minimum Roof Live Loads
213
,.---- -- _ . _ - - - METHOD I
ROOF SLOPE
Tributary Area (m')

to 20
20 to 60 lOver 60
Uniform Load (kPa)
I. Flat J or rise less than 4 units vcnidb.l in

12 ullit s horizontal (33.3% slope). Arch
and dome with rise less than one-eighth
of span.
10 less than 12 units
vertical in 12 unit s horizontal (33.3% to
less than 100% slope). Arch and dome
wi th rise one-cig})!h of span 10 less than
METHOD 2
Uniform
Load 2
(k Pa)
Rate of
Reduction ,
r
Maximum
Reduction
R
(percen tage)
1.00
0.75
0_60
1.00
0 .08
40
0.75
0.70
0.60
0.75
0,06
25
0.60
0,60
0 .60
0 .60
0,25
0,25
0,25
025
2. Rise 4 units verti cal
three-eighths of span.
3. Ri se 12 units vertical in 12 units
horizolllal (100% slope) and greater.
Arch or dome with risc three-eig hths o f
span or greater.
No reduction permifted
4. Awnings except cloth covered . "
----- ------- - ------ ------ ------,.,... ".
5, Greenhouses,
,
J
lath
agri cu ltural buildings . 5
houses
and
0,50
0.50
-- ---,
0.50
0,50
For sJ1ectnl'l'urpos~ mnf.f. -W't: Sl'ct/OII 205.4.4.

5u Sections 205,5 (1//(/ 205.6 for /itf!/ond reductions, Th(' rare (If "'dllC/ioll r ill EqullIi(lll 205/ ,fh(1I1I)~ (IS ;lIdicatf'd ill Ih~ lobiC'. '/1". max;1I/lfm
redllnion. R, s/ItIIIIl()Il'xcecd Ih ~ l'{l/lfC' illfJiI:nI('d ill the /OhI~.
A fI(1I roof is (III)" mnj wil/) a slope le.n tlul/J 1/4 wlil I'erti, (I/ i ll 12 lill i/of Ir nrhmllll/ (2% slo!,e). The 1;1'(' /11(1(/ fllr filii raoff is ill (ldtiilinll /(J lilt
J'rmdiIrg hKul required h.I' Sf'nim/ 206.7.
SI'(' dl'jilll/imf it! S,,tioll 202.
Sl'e SC'c/ifm 205.4.4.fllr , 'WII 'c'lllm/i'd load "('(Illiremenu .for lU'(>I,"hOlHC rool flU'wbers,
2()5.4 Roof Live Load s

205.4, I General
Roofs shall be designed for the un;( live loads. L" set
fonh in Table 205-3, The li ve loads shall be assumed to
act vertically lipoll the area projected 011 a horizontal
plane.
205.4.2 Distribution of Luads
Where uiliform roof loads arc involved in the design of

$tructural Illcmbcr$ arranged to create continu ity,
consideration may be limited to full dc,ld load$ 011 all
spans in co mbination with full roof live loads on adjacent
spans and on al ternate spans.
For th ose conditi ons where light ~g agc metal preformed

structural .sheets serve as the SUpp0l1 and finish of roofs ,
roof slructum l members <lITangcd to create continuity
shall be considered adequate if designed for full dead
loads on all spans in combination wi th the most cri tical
one of the following superimposed loads:
I. The uniform roof live load. Ln set forth in Table 205) on all s pilns.
2.
A conccnlr<ued gravity load, Ln of 9 kN plnced on

any span supporting a tributary ,uea greater than 18
111 2 to creat e maximum st resses in the member,
whenever this loadi ng creales greater stresses than
those caused by the uniform live load . The
concenl rated load shall bc placed on the member over
a length of 750 mill along the span. The concentrated
load need 110t be applied to more than one span
sillHl!tanc()usl y,
J,
Water <'lCculllulmioll as prescrihed in Section 206.7.
Exceptio'l:
Altenzate spa~1 loading need flot be considered where the
uniform roof live load is 1.0 kPa 'or more.
111
National Structural CO(j G of U18 PhiliPPUHJS 6 Edition VOIUI11e 1
214
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design l.oads
205.4.3 Unbalanced Loading

Unbalanced loads shall be used where such loading will
result in larger members or connections. Trusses and
arches shall be designed to resist the stresses caused by
unit live loads on one half of the span jf such loading
results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater in any

portion than the stresses produced by the required unit
live load on the entire span. For roofs whose structures
arc composed of a stressed shell. framed or solid. wherein
s tresses caused by any poim loading arc distributed
throughou t the area of the shell, the requirements for
unbalanced unit live load design l11<1y be reduced 50
The live load reduction shall not exceed m i' Ci,-'~: l4 t ;n

garages for the storage of pri vate pleasure cars havius. a
capaci ty of not more than nine passengers per veh icle.
205.6 Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction
As an alternate to Equ,Hion (205~ I ), the unil live loads set

forth in Table 205~1 Illay be reduced in accordance wilh
Equation 2053 o~ any member, including Oat slabs,
having an inOuence area of 40 m 1 or morc.
(205-3)
percen!.
where:
205.4.4 Special Roof Loads

Roofs 10 be used for special purposes shall be designed
for appropriale loads as approved by Ihe building official.
Greenhouse roof bars, purlins and rafters shall be
designed to carry a 0.45 kN concentrated load. LT. in
addition to the uniform live load
205.5 Reduction of Live Loads
The design live load determined using the IInit live loads
as sel fMh in Table 205-1 for floors and Table 20S-}.
Method 2, for roofs may be reduced 011 any member
supporting more than 15 m2, including Oat slabs, except
for floors in places of public assembly and for live loads
greater than 4.8 kPa. in accordance wit h the following
cqUl.ttion:
R = r(A -15)
(205-1 )
= influence area, 1112

= reduced design live load per square meler of area
supponed by the member
L" = unreduced design live load per square meter of area
supponed by the member (Table 205-\)
AI
L
The influ ence area AI is four times the tributary area for a
co lumn , two times the tributary area for a beam, equal to
the panel area for a lW() ~ way slab, and equ al to the
product of the span and th e full flange width for a precast
T-beam
The reduced live load s hall nOI be less Ihall 50 percell I of
the unit live load La for members receiving load frolll one
level only, nor less than 40 percent of the unit live load La
for other members.
The reduction sha ll not exceed 40 percent for members

re<.:eiving load from one level only, 60 percent for other
mcmbers or R. as detemlined by (he following equation:
R=23. IO+DIL)
(205-2)
where:
A
D
L
R
r
= area
of floor or roof supported by the member,

square meter, m 2
= dead load per squ are meIer of area suppo rted by
th e member. kPa
= uni t live load per square meIer of area supported by
the member. kPa
= reduction in percentage, %.
= rate of reduction equal to 0.08 for nOOni. Sec Table
205-3 for roofs
ror storage loads cx<.:eeding 4.8 kPa, 110 reduction shall bc

Innde. except that design live loads on co lumns may he
reduced 20 perce nt.
Associa tion of S tru cturFlI Engineers of the Pllilippinf)S
CHAPTER 2 .. Minimum DeSIgn Loads
206.1 General
JII addition to the olher design loads specified in this
chapter. struC[UrC5 shall be designed to resist Ihe loads
specified in thi s section and the special loads scI forth in
Table 205 2. Sec Section 207 for design wind loads, and
Section 208 for design earthquake loads.
M
206.2 Other Loads

Buildings and ot her slnlClures and pOri ions thereof shall
be designed to resist ali loads d ue to app licable fluid
press ures. F, lateral so il pressures, If. p ~ nding loads. P,
and self-straining forces, T. Sec Seclion 206.7 fo r po nding
loads for roofs .
2-15
206.5 Interior Wall Loads

Interior walls, pcnnancn! partitions and temporary
partitions that exceed I.S 111 in height shall be designed to
resist all loads to which they are subjected but not less
than a lo.ad, L , of 0.25 kPil applied perpendi cul ar to the
wa ll s. The 0.25 kPa load need 1I0t be applied
simultaneously with \vind or seismic loads. The defl ec tion
of such walls under it load of 0.25 kPa shall not exceed
1/240 of the span fm walls with brittle finishes and IIl20
of the span for wall s with flexible finishes. SC,e Table
208-12 for earthquake design requirements where such
requirements are more restricti ve.
Excepti(J1J: ..,,'
Ffexible,' jdiding orpor1dki~par(iiioJ):;-,~re. n~l. req~jred 10

",!f.el ." Ih!! .::{iJaft.aiiii defl.i!h!iM"((jd.@jfl <:b~( ;'(1I!i~1 be
a~fhori4.7 j(r: ":t~ ~~~~Rp'qf#~g- ~U:fi~i.~ te~~)o' ;fn"et , the
p'rov;siorjs ojtbis,co'i;J[' . . .
...~.:
-.
206.3 Impact Loads

The live loads specified in Secti ons 205.3 shall be
assumed to include il llow3ncc for ordinary impacl
conditions. Provisions shall be made in the structu ral
design for use s nJld loads thaI in volve unu sual vibration
and impact forces. Sec Section 206.9. 3 for impact loads
for cranes, and Section 206.10 for heliport an d helistop
landing areas.
206.3.1 Elevators
All elevator loads shall be increased by 100% for impacl.
206.3.2 Machinery
Fo r the purpose of design, the weight of machinery and
movi ng loads shal! be inc rea~cd as follows to allow for
impact:
I.
Eleva tor Illachincry
2.
Light mac hinery, shaft - or motor-dri ven
3.
Reciprocatin g machinery or power-driven units 50%
4.
Hangers for floors and balconies
100%
20 %
33%
All percentages shall be increased where specified by the

manufacturer.
206.4 Anchorag e of Concrt!tc and Ma so nry \Valls
Concrete <l nd m;lsonry wa lls shall he ,lIlchorcd as required
by Secti on
J 04 .3.3. Such anchorage shall he c:lpablc o f

resisting the load co mbinations of Section 203.1 or 203.4
using the greater of th e win d or c<lrthquake loads requi red
by this chapter or il minimullI horizontal force of 4 kN/rn
of ",;]11. substituted for E,
206.6 Retaining Walls

Rerain ing walls shall be designed to resist loads due to the
lateral pressu re of retained material in accordance with
accepted engi neering pract ice. Walls retainin g draincd
so il, where the surface of the retained soi l is level, shall
be designed for a load, tI, equivalent to that exerted by a
nuid weighing not less than 4.7 kPa per meter of depth
and having a depth equal to that of the retained soil. Any
surcharge shall be in addition to the equivalent nuid
pressure.
Retaining wal ls shall be designed (0 res ist sliding by at
leas t 1.5 limes the latera l fo rce and overturning by at least
J.S limes the overturning lIloment, using allowable stress
design load s.
206.7 Water AccullJulation

All roofs shall he designed with suffi cie nt slope or
Climber to cnsure adequate dra inage after the long- term
dcOec ti on from dC'ld load or shall be designcd to rcsisl
ponding load, P, combined in accordance with Section
203 .3 or 203.4 . Ponding load shall include water
accu mulation from any source due to deflection .
206.8 Uplift on Floors and Foundations

In the des ign of baseme nl floo rs and similar
approximately horizontal c1emellls below grade, the
upward pressure V.I water, where appl ic nb le. shall be
take n <IS the full hyd rostatic pressure applied over {he
entire area. The hydrostatic load shall be mcnsured from
the underside of the co nstrllction. Any other upward
loads shall be included in the design.
Where expansive soils are presenl under fOtl ndalions or
s l abs-() n ~g round .
the founda ti ons, slabs, and other

co mponents s h,dl be designed to tolerate the mo ve ment or
th
National Structural Code of the Plli!ippines 6 Edition VoIU01 0 1
2- 16
CHAP TEI1 2 - Minimum Design Loads
resist the upward loads caused by the expansive so il s, or

the expansive soil shall be removed or stabili zed around
206.10 Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas
206.9 Crane Loads
In addition 10 other design requireme nts of this chapte r,

hcliport and helistop la nding or touchdown <ueas shall be
designed for the [allowing loads, combincd in accordance
wi lh Scc lion 203.3 or 203.4:
206.9. 1 Gellera l
I.
Dead luad plus <IctuaJ weight of th e helicopter.
The crane load simi I be the ra led cHpacity of lhe erllnc.

Design .Ioads for the runway be.lllls, including
conn ections .1I1e1 SUppOIl bracke ts , of moving bridge
cr,lI1cs and monorail cranes shall include the max imum
wheel loa ds of Ihe crane and the vertical impact. lateral.
nnd longi tudinal forces induced by the moving cra ne.
2.
Dead load plus a si nglc CO llcc lllrHted impact load, L ,

covering 0.1 m2 of 0.75 li mes the fuily loaded weight
of the heli copter if it is equipped wit h hydrau lictype
shock absorbers. or 1.5 times lhe fully loaded we ight
of the helicopter if il is cq uipped wi th a ligid or s kidtype landing gear.
206.9.2 Maximum Wheel Load
The dead load plus a uniformlivc load. L, of 4.8 kPa. The

rcq uircd liye load may be reduced in ac.cordance with
Seclion 205.5 o r 205.6.
<md beneath the structure.
The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads

produced by Ihe weighl of Ihe bridge. as appl icable, plus
Ihe sum of the rated capacity and (he weight of (he trolley
with the trolley posi tioned all its ru nway whe re Ihe
resulting load effect is ma ximum .
206.9.3 Vertical Impact Force

The maxi mum wheel loads of the crane shall be increa~ed
by th e pe rcentages shown below to determine th e induced
vertica l impact or vib ration force:
I.
Monorai l c ran es (powered)
25 %
2.
Caboper:lIcd or remotely operated bridge

c ra nes (powered)
25%
3.
Pcnd antoper:lled bridge cra nes (powered )
10%
4.
Bridge cranc,"i or monorail cranes with

hand gcHrcd ridge. trolley and hoist
0%
206 .9.4 L'lIeral Fo rce

The latera l force on crane runway bcams wi th electrica lly
powered trolleys sha ll be calculated as 20% of the sum of
the rated capaci ty of the crane and the weight of the hoist
[lnd trolley. The lateral force sha ll be assu med to act
horizontally at the tracti on surface of a runw ay beam, in
ei ther direction perpendicular to the beam, and shall be
distributed with due regard {Q the latera l stiffness of the
runw,IY bea m ill1d support ing struct ure.
206.9.5 Longiludinal Forces

The longilUdinal force on cra ne runw,lY bcallls, e.xcept for
bridge crancs with hand-geared bridges, Sllllll be
calculated iI.... 10% of the lll<lxillluln wheel loads of th e
cra ne.. The longitu dinal forc e sha ll he assumcd to act
horii'.o lllall y tlI the trilct ion surfacc o f II r u n WilY hea m, in
eithcr (i irct:li(lIl parall el to the bea m.
As socia tion of Structural [:n9ineers of the PhilipPil1 cs
CHAPTER 2 ~" Minimum Design Loads
APPROVED.
jurisdiction.
207.1 General
207.1.1 Scope
Buildings, towers and other vertical structures, including
the Main Wind-Force Resisting System (MWFRS) and all
components and cladding thereof, shall be designed and
const!1lc!cd to resist wind loads as specified herein.
207.1.2 Allowed Procedures
The design wind loads for buildings, towers and other
vertical stl1lcturcs , including the MWFRS and component
and cladding elements thereof, sha!! be determined using
one of the following procedures: (I) Method I
Simplified Procedure as specified in Section 207.4 for
building meeting the requirements specified therein; (2)
Method 2 - Analytical Procedure as specified in Section
207.5 for buildings meeting the requirements specified
therein; (3) Method 3 - Wind Tunnel Procedure as
specified in Section 207.6.
207.1.3 Wind Pressures Acting on Opposite Faces of

Each Building Surface
In the calculation of design wind loads for the MWFRS
and for components and cladding for buildings, the
algebraic sum of the pressures acting on opposite faces of
each building surface shall be taken into account.
207.1.4 Minimum Design Wind Loading
The design wind load, determined by anyone of the
procedures specified in Section 207 . 1.2, shall be not less
than specified in (his section.
to
the
authority
having
BASIC WIND SPEED. V Three-second gust speed at

JO rn above the ground in Exposure C (see Section
207.5.6.3) as determined in accordance with Section
207.5.4 and associated with an annLlal probability for 0.02
of being equaled or exceeded. (50-years mean reCllrrence
interval).
BUILDING, ENCLOSED is a building that does not
comply with the requirements for open or partially
enclosed buildings.
BUILDING ENVELOPE. Cladding, roofing, exterior
wall, glazing, door assemblies, window assemblies,
skylight assemblies, and other components enclosing the
building.
BUILDINGS, FLEXIBLE. Sleoder buildings that have
a fundamental natural frequency less than I Hz.
BUILDING, LOW-RISE. Enclosed or partially enclosed
building that comply with the following conditions:
I.
Mean roof height h less than or equal to 18
2.
Mean roof height II does not exceed least horizontal

dimension.
Jll.
BUILDING, OPEN. A building having each wall at least

80 percent open. This condition is expressed for each
wal! by the equation Ao c 0.8 Ag where
BUILDING, PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building
that complies with both of the following conditions:
1.
the total area of openings in a wall that receives

positive external pressure exceeds the slim of the
areas of openings in the balance of the building
envelope (walls and roof) by more than 10%; and
2.
the total area of openings in a wall that receives

positive external pressure exceeds 0.5 m2 or I
percent of the area of that wall, whichever is smaller,
and the percentage of openings in the balance of the
building envelope does not exceed 20 percent.
207.1.4.1 Main WindRFol'ce Resisting System
The wind load to be llsed in the design of the MWFRS for

an enclosed or partially enclosed building or other
structure shall not be Jess than 0.5 kPa multiplied by the
area of the building or structure projected onto a vertical
plane norillal to the assllmed wind direction. The design
wind force for open buildings and other structures shall be
not less than 0.5 kPa multiplied by the area AI as defined
in Section 207.3.
Acceptable
217
207.1.4.2 Components and Cladding

The design wind pressure for components and cladding of
buildings shall not be less than a net pressure of 0 ..5 kPa
acting in either direction normal to Ihe surface .
207.2 Definitions
The following definitions apply to the provisions of
Section 207 .
th
2-18
CHAPTER 2 --- Minimum Design Loads
These conditions
equations:
I.
2_
A ..
are expressed
by
the
following
> 1.10 A",
Ao > smaller of (0.5m 2 or 0.01 Ax) and

A",IAs; S 0.20
nUILDlNG OR OTIIER STRUCTU RE, REGULA RSHAPED. A building or other structure having no
unusual geometrical irrcguhuity in spatial forlll.
nUII-DING RIGID. A building or other st ru cture whose
fundamental frequency is greater than or equal to I H z.
n UILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM. A building in
which both wi ndward and leeward wind loads arc
transmiHcd through Door and roof diaphragms to the: same
verri cnl MWFRS (c.g . no stnlctural separations).
COM PONENTS AND CLADDING. Elements or the
building envelope that do not qualify as part of the
MWFRS .
DESIGN FOnCE, F, is the equivalent stati c rorce to be
llsed in the determination of wind loads for ope n
buildings and other structures.
OgSIGN PRESSURE,p, is the equivalent stati c pressure
to be used in the determination of wind loads for
buildings.
EA VE HEIGHT, h . The di stance from Ihe grou nd

surfacc adjacent to the building to Ihe roof cave line at a
particular wall . If fh e height of the eave v<lries along the
\v;111. the average height shall be used .
EFFECTIVE WIND AREA is the area used to
determine Gel'" For componclH and cladding elements,
the effective wind area in Figures 207-1 f through 207- 17
and Figure 207-19 is the spa n length multiplied by an
effective width thaI need not be less than one-third the
span length. For cladd ing fasteners , the effective wind
are:'l ~ha ll not be greater !lum the area thai is tributary to
an individual rastener.
ESCA RPM ENT. Also known as scarp. wi th resp!xt to
tOlhJgraphic cffc(;t i ll Section 207.5.7. a cliff or steep
slope generally separ;Hing two levels or gc nlly sloping
a reas (sec Figure 207 -4).
FJH~ E HOO F.
Roof with a conrigllr<l tioll genc:nllly
conforming 10 those shown in Figures 207 18/\ through
207 1t{J) (l1)oJlosiope. pitched. or (roughed) in an opel!
building with no enclosing walls lJlldCrll ca lh th e roof
GLAZING. Glass or transparent or translucent plastic

sheet used in windows, doors, skyl ights, or cu rtain wal ls.
GLAZING, IMPACT n ES ISTANT. Glazing that has
been shown by testi ng in accordance with ASTM EI886
and ASTM 1 996 or other approved test methods 10
withstand the impact of wind -borne missiles likely to be
generated in wind-borne debris regions during design
winds.
HILL. With respect 10 topogr;'lphic effects in Section
207.5_7 , a land su rface charac terized by strong relief in
any horizontal di rection (Figure 207~4)
IMPACT RESISTANT COV EnING. A covering
designed to protect glazi ng, which has been shown by
testing in accord ance with ASTM EI 886 and ASTM
E 1996 or other approved test methods to withstand the
impact or wind-bOl:ne debris missiles likely to begenerated in wind~b(}rnc debris reg ions during design
winds.
IMI'OnTANCE FACTOR, I ... A ractor that accounts
for the degree of hazard to huma n life and damage to
property.
WIND -FORCE
RESISTING
SYSTEM
MAIN
(MWFRS). An asse mblage of souctural elements
assigned to provide support and stabil ity for the overall
st ructure. The system generally receives wind load ing
from more than one surface.
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT, h . The average of the roof
eave height and the heigh t to the hi ghest point on the roof
surface. except that. for roof angles of less than or equal
to 10, the mean roof height sh<lll he (he roar heave
hei ght.
OPENINGS. Apertures or holes in the building cIwciope
that allow air to now lhrough the building envelope and
that arc designed as "open" during design winds as
defi ned by these provisions.
OTHEn STRUCUTU n ES are nonbuilding stru ctures

including poles, masts. trussed towers. and bill boards {hilt
are not Iypically occupied by persons but arc also covered
by this Code.
RECOGNIZED LITEHATURE. Pub lished research
findings and tcc hnicnl papers Ihm arc approved.
IUDGE. With respecl to topographic crfects in Sc(;t ioll

207.5.7 an elongated crest of a hill ch;\f<\ctcril.cd by
stro ng relief in two directions (sce Figure 207-4).
sII r fa ('(~.
Associ ,ltlon of Stru ctu ra l Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEf1 2 - Minimum Design Loads
WIND-DORNE DEBRIS REGIONS.

typhoon prone regions located:
Area, wi thin
Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water Iinc
I.
where the basic wind speed is equal

180 kph.
2.
(Q
or greater tlwn
In areas where the basic wind speed is equal to or

greater than 190 kph.
207.3 Symbols and Notalions

The following symbols and notation apply only to the
provisions of Section 207:
A = effective wind area, 1112

Aa ::: ampJilUde factor for estimation of
III
[or other
structures.
AI ::: area of opcn buildings and other struclUres cit h l~r
norillal to lhe wind direction or projected on a
plane normal to the wind direction , m 2
Ac ::: the gross area of that wall in which A(I is identified,
m'
Agi
:::
the sum of the gross surface areas of the buildi ng

envelope (wall s and roof) not including A $' rn 2
All
A"i
A"S'
As
a
B
lJo
ill!
BOI
:;: : total area of openings in a wall that receives

positive ex ternal pressure, m 2
:;;: [he sum of the areas of openings in th e bui ldin g
enve lope (walls and roof) not including A", 1112
== total area of ope nings in the building envelope. m2
;:: gross area of the solid freestandin g wall or solid
sign, 111 2
= width of preS$ure coefficient zone, 111
== horizontal dimens ion of a bu ilding, lower or other
s tnlcture measured normal to wind di rection, III
== horizon tal dimensio n at the base of a structu re, III
= horizontal dimension <u the top of a structure, In
== average horizontal dime nsion of a structure, or
taken as average of Bo aJld Ih. III
b :;: : mean hourly wind speed factor in
Eq. 207- I 4 frolll
Table 207-5
b ;
3-second gust speed factor from Table 207-5

;: force coefficient to be used in the dClcnnination o f
wind loads for olher structures
eN == net pre..'isure coefficient to be used in determination
of wind loads for ope n buildings
;; external pressure coefficient to be used ill the
l
detennination of wi nd loads for buildings
C
:; lUrbulcil cc in tensity faclor in Eq. 207-5 from T'lbl e:
207-5
f)
:; diametcr of a circula r s lmcturc or member, III
D' ; depth of protmding elements such as ribs and
spoilers, III
Do = su rfacc drag coefficient
P ; design wind force for other st ructures, kN
G :; gust effcct factor for rigid buildings; al!lo coli lcd
"simplified dynamic response factor" and is
C/
2-19
eq ui va len t to Gf with R (resonan t response factor)

assumed as zero
Gf ; gust effect factor for MWFRS of flexible buildings
and othcr structures, including poles, masts,
billboards, and trussed lowers; also called
"dynamic response faclor"
G(.~m ;;combined net pressure coefficient for a parapet
GCp = product of external pressure coefficient and gust
effect factor to be used in the dcterillinatio n of
wind loads for buildings
GCp/ ;; product, of equivalent extemal
pressure
coefficient and gust effect factor to be used in the
dctenninalion of wind loads for MWFRS of low
rise bu ildings
GC~,; = product of imernal pressure coefficient and gus t
effect factor fa be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings
gQ ;; peak factor for backgrou nd response in Eqs. 2074
and 207-8
CN ;; peak factor for resonant response in Eq. 2078
g, ;; peak factor for wind response in Eqs. 207.4 and
207-8
N ;; height ofhilJ or cscarpment in Figure 207A, III
II
= mean roof height of a building or height of other
structure, except that cave height sha ll be used for
roof angle Oof les s than or equa l to 10", III
fir
= roof eave height at a part icular wall , or the average
height if the eave varies along the wall
'\1" = impo rtance factor
I; ;; intensity of turbulen ce from Eq , 207-5
kill ::: we ight distribution factor for est im ati on of tl\ for
other structures
K f ' Kz. KJ ;; multipliers in Figure 207-4 to obtain K :f
K,f = wind directionali ty faClaf in Table 2072
K" ::: veloc it y pressure exposure coefficient eva lu ated at
heigh t z;; II
K= ;; veloci ty prcssure exposure coelTicient evaluated at
height z
K., :; : topographic factor as defined in Section 207.5.7
L :; horizontal dimension of a building measured
parallel to the wind direction. m
,.-" ::: distance upwind of crest of hill or escarpment in
rig 207A to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment, III
L: = integral length scale of turbulence, 111 .
L,
;; horizontal dimension of return corner for a sol id

frees tandin g wa ll or solid s ign from Figure 20720.
III
t
f1I,
illlegra l length scale factor from Table 2075, III

ratio. o r the rati o of att ached masses (c.g.
<lnteIHl<!S, cables, lighting, ,1Ild othe r appu rt enances)
at the top 5% of the tower or other vert ica l
structure to the 10lal mass of the (owe r or other
structure alone; for attached masses Ht lower levels
= mass
111
Edition Volu me 1
220
CH AP TER 2 .. Minimum Design Loads
of the tower. an equivalent mass ratio shall be

taken
Mn :::; mass factor for esti mation of III for other stru ctures
N, = reduced frequency from Eq . 20712
11/
::;: building natural frequency, Hz
"
= design pressure to be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings. kPa
PI- ::: wind pressure acting on leeward [ace in Figure
207-9, kP"
flllt!
ne t des ign wind pressure from Eq. 207-2, kPa
P'~f')= ncl design wi nd pressure for Exposu re B at II::: 9 III
and I .. = 1.0 f,om Figure 2073 , kPa
PI' ::: co mbined net pressure On a parapet from
Eq. 207 -20, kPa
/JJ :::; si mplifIed design wind pressure from Eq . 207- 1,
kPa
PJ I)
;;: si mplifi ed design wi nd pressure for E xposure B a.1
II = 9 m and I .. = 1.0 from Figure 207-3, kPa
PII' :::; wind press ure acting on windward face in Figure
2079, kPa
Ph = plan-shape factor for cS lil11al iOIl of "I for other
st ructu res
Q = background response factor from Eq. 2076
lJ
::: velocity press ure, kPa
q" ::: velocity pressure evaluated at height z ::: ii, kPa
qi ::: velocity
pressure
for
internal
pressure
determinatio n, kPa
qp ::: ve loci ty press ure at lOp of parapet, kPa
q~
::: velocity pressure evaluated at height z above
ground , kPa
R ::: resonant re spo nse fa cto r from Eq. 207-10
Rna::: aspect rati o factor for cstimalion of
for other
strucLUres, eva luated at the base widlh , Bo
RII , R,.. II,. values from Eq . 207 - 13
Ri ::: reduction faclOr from Eq . 207- 16
Nil :: va lue from Eq. 207- 11
s ::: vertical dim ension of th e solid freestanding wall or
. solid sign from Figure 207 -20, m.
r
::: rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs.
V = basic wind speed obtained from Table 207-1, kph.
The basic wind speed corresponds to a 3-second
gust speed al 10 rn above ground in exposu re
category C
Vi := ullpartitioned in le rnal vo lu me, m 3
\I: :::: mean hourl y wind speed al heightz, kph
W ::: width ofa building in Figures 207- 12 and 207-14 A
and B and width of span in rig urcs 207 ~ 13 and
207 -15 , III
X := distance to center of pressure from winciwHfd edge
in Figure 207-18 .111
x ::: tli stancc upwind or down w ind of crest ill Figure
207 4, III
1.
:::: heig ht above ground level. In
Z :::: cquiva lclll height of ~tnJc turc, III
"It
Zg
:;:; nominal height of the atmospheric boundary layer
used in thi s standard Values appear in Tab le 207-5
Zmitl :::: exposure constant from Table 207~5

3second gust~speed power Jaw exponent from
Table 2075
= reciprocal of a from Table 207 5
Ii
::: mean ho url y wind-speed power law exponent III
Eq . 2071 4 from Table 207-5
fJ ::: damping ratio, perce nt critical for buildings o r
othe r structures
PI := slructural damping ralio, percent critical for other
structures
Ba := aerodyn amic dampin g rat io, percent crit ical for
other structu res
e
rati o of solid area to gross area for open sign, fa ce
or a tru ssed tower, or lattice structure
A. ;:;: adjustme nt fac tor for building height and exposure
from Figures 207-2A and 207-3
E = integral length scale power law exponent in Eq.
207.7 from Table 2075
,/ = value used in Eq. 207. 13 (see Section 207.5.8.2)
p :;:; roughness factor
B :;:; angle of plane of roof from horizontal, degrees
v :;:; heighHo -widtb ratio for so lid sign
(J.
:::
207.4 Method I - Simplified Proeedure

207.4.1 Scope
A building whose design wind loads arc determined in
accordance with this section shall meet all the cond ition s
of Sections 207.4.1.1 or 207.4. 1.2. If a building qualifies
on ly under Secli on 207.4. 1.2 for design of its components
and cladding, then its MWFRS s hall be designed by
Method 2 or Method 3.
207.4.1.1 Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems
For the design of MWFRSs the bui lding must meet all of
the following condi tions:
The bu il ding is a simple diaphragm building as

defined in Section 207.2 .
2.
The building is a low-rise building as defined in

Secti o n 207.2.
3.
The bu ilding is enclosed as defi ned in Section 207.2

and conforms to the wind -borne debri s provisions of
Section 207.5 .9. 3.
4.
The building is a regular-shaped buildin g or SlruclUre
as defined in Section 207 .2.

5.
The building is not classified as a flexible building as

defined in Sec tion 207.2
6,
The building docs not have response charac terist ics

ma king il subject to across wind load ing , vortex
Association of Structural En9in eers o f the Philippines
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Desig n Loads
22 1
shedding, instabi lit y due to ga lloping or nutter; and

does not have a site location for which channeling
effects Or buffeting in the wake of upwind
obstructions warran t special consideratio n.
windward and leewa rd net pressures, fJJ shall be

determined by the following equation:
7.
The buildi ng has and approximately symmetri cal

cross-sec tion ill each direction with either a flat roof
or a gable or hip roof wit h 0::: 45.
8.
The building is exe mpted from torsional load cases as

indicated in Note 5 of Figure 207-10, or the torsional
load cases defined in Note 5 do not con trol the design
of any of the MWFRSs of the building.
207.4.2.1 .1 Minimum Pressures

The load effects of the design wind pressures from
Section 207.4.2. 1 shall not be less th an the minimum load
case from Section 207. 1.4 .J assllming the pressures, PSI
for zones A, B, C, and D all equal to +0.50 kPa, while
assumin g zones E, F, 0, and H all equal 100 kPa.
(207-1 )

For the design of co mponcms and cladding the bui ldi ng
must meet all [he conditions:
1.
The mea n roof height h must be less

to 18 m.
than or equal
2.
The building is enclosed as defined in Secti on 207 .2

and conforms to the wind-borne debris provisions of
Section 2075.9.3.
3.
The building is a regular-shaped building or structure

as defined in Section 207.2.
4.
The building docs /l ot have response charac teristics

making it subject to across wind loadin g, vortex
shedd ing, ins ta bility due to galloping or flutter; and
does nol have a sile location for which channeling
effects or buffeting in the wake or upwind
obstructions warra nt special co nsideration .
5.
The bu ilding has either a nat roof, a gable roof with 0

< 45, or a hip roof wI O:s 27.
Net design wind pressures, Pnc" for the components and

cladding of buildings designed using Method I represent
the net pressures (sum of internal and external) to be
applied nonnal to each building surface as shown in Fig.
207-3. Pntl shall be detennined by the following equation:
(207-2)
207.4.2.2.1 Minimum Pressures
The posi tive design wind pressures, PfIt"/, from Section
207.4 .2.2 shall not be less th an +0.50 kPa, and the

negative design wind pressures . PnCfl from Section
207 .4.2.2 shall not be less th an -0.50 kPa.
207.4.3 Air Penneable Cladding
Design wind loads de termined from Figure 207 .3 shall be
used for all air permeable claddin g unless approved les t
data or the recognized literature demonstrate lower loads
for the type of air permeable cladding being considered .
207.5 Method 2 - Analytical Procedure
207.4.2
I.
D(~sign
Procedure
The basic wind speed V shall be determined in

accordance wilh Section 207.5.4. The wind sha ll be
assumed to come fro m any horizont al directi on.

2.
An importance factor I". shall be det ermined ill

accordance with Section 207.5.5.
3.
An ex posure category shall be determined in

acc ordancc wi th Secti on 207.5 .6.
4.
A heighl and exposure adjustll1cnt coeffi cient ,A, shall

be determined from ri gu res 207~2 and 207~3.
207.4.2.I I\:Jain Wind-F'orcc Resisting System

SimpliJicd de sign wind pressures, p... for the MWFRSs of
low -rise simple diaphragm buildings represellt the net
pressures (sum of internal and ex ternal) to be applied 10
the Ilorizoillal and ve rti cal projectio ns of btli lding surfaces
as sho wn in Fi gures 207- r an d 207-2. For the horizontal
pressures (;I.o nes A, B, C. D), PJ is the combinat ion of the
207.5.1 Scope
A building or other struct ure whose design wind loads are
de termined in accordance with th is section shall meet all
of the following conditions:
J.
The building or other structure is a regularshaped

bu ilding or slmcture as defined in Secti on 207.2.
2.
The building or other st rll cture does not have

respo nse win d loading, vortex shedding, instability
due to g~l lI opin g or flutler; or does nol have a site
locmioJl for which chanlle ling effect or buffeting in
the wake of upwind obstruc tions warrant special
consideration.
207.5.2 Limitations
The pro vis ion of Sect ion 207 .5 take i nlo consideration the
load ma gnifi cation effecl caused by gusts in resonance
with al ong-wind vibrat io ns of llexib le building or other
structures. Buildings or other st ructures not mee ting the
1h
National Structural Code of U"l e Phi lippine s 6 Edition Volume 1
222
CHAPTER 2 - Minimu m Design Loads
requirements of Section 207.5.1. or having unl/suaJ shapes

or response characteristi cs shall be designed usi ng
recogni zed literature documenting such wind load effects
or shall usc the wi nd tUHnel procedure speci fied in
Section 207.6.
207.5.2.1 Shielding
There s hall be no reductions in velocity pressure du e to
apparent shieldin g aflord cd by buildin gs and other
structures o r terrai n features.
207.5.2.2 Air Permeable Cladding

Design wind loads delcmlincd from Section 207.5 shall
be used for air permeable cladding unless approved lest
data or recogni zed literature demonstrate lower loads for
207.5 .4.1 an d 207.5.4 .2. The wind sh,,;\ D;:

come from any horizon tal direction.
:::'l ~ : \1! p i'd ;\\
207.5.4.1 Special Wind Regions

The basic wind speed shall be increased whcu.:: rc.:;ords O f
experience indicate that Ihe wi nd speeds arc higher th an
those refl ected in T able 207-1. Mountainous lCITa in,
gorges, and special regi ons sh~ill be examined for unusual
wind conditions. The authority havin g jurisoicl ion shall ,
if necessary, adjust the values given in Table :W: i to
. account for higher local wind speeds. Such ndj u'c\ il)C iJ!
shall be based on meteorological infonnation and an
estimate of the basic wind speed obtained in accordance
with the provisions of Secti on 207.5.4 .2.
I.
The basic wind speed V and wind directionality

factor Kd shall be detennined in accordance with
Secti on 207.5.4 and Table 2072 respecti vely.
2.
An importance factor I,v shall be determined in

207.5.4.2 Estimation of Basic Wind Speeds from

Regional Climatic Data
Regional climatic data shall only be used in lieu of the
basic wind speeds given in T able 207 1 when: ( I )
approved extreme-value statis tic al -analysis procedures
have been employed in reducing the data; and (2) the
length of record, sa mpling error, averaging time,
anemometer height, data quality. and terrain exposure
have been taken into account.
3.
A n exposure category or exposure ca tegories and

ve locity pressure ex posure coefficient Kt or Kit , as
applicable, shall be dctennined for each wind
direction in accordance with Section 207 .5.6.
207.5.4.3 Limitation
Extreme typhoons have not been considered
developing the basic windspeed distributions.
the lype of air perm eable cladding being considered.
207.5.3 Design Procedure
4.
A topographic faclOr K!,t shall be determi ned in

accordance wit h Secti on 207.5.7.
5.
A gus t effect Factor G or GI , as applicable, shall be

determined in accordance with Section 207.5.8.
6.
An enclosure classification' shall be determi ned in

accordance with Section 207 .5.9.
7.
Ime rn al pressure coe ffi ciclH GC,li shall be determined

in accordan ce with Section 207.5. J I. J
8.
External pressure coeffi cients Cp or GC.~'I' or force

coefficients CI' as applicable, shall be determined in
accordance with Secti on 207.5.11.2 or 207.5.1 U.
respec t ively.
9.
Velocity pressure q, or q", as applicable, shall be

determined in acco rd ance with Section 207.5 . 10.
207.5.4.4 Wind Directionality Faclor

The wind direc ti onality factor, Kill shall be determined
frol11 Table 207 2. This fac tor shall on ly be applied when
used in conjunc tion wit h load combinations speci fied in
Sections 203.3 and 20104 .
I O. Des ign wind load p or F sljaiJ he detc rm ined ill

accordance with Section, 207.5.12.
207.5. 14, and 207.5 .15. as appl icable.
in
207.5.13.
207.5.4 Basic Wind Speed

Thc bas ic wind speed, V, used in the delenninmion of
des ign wind loads on buildings and other structures shall
be as given in Tab le 207-1 except as provided in Sections
Table 207 -I Wind Zone for the Different Provinces of the

Philippines
Zone Classification
Wind S ced)
Table 207-2 Wind Directionality Factor, Kd
Provinces
~asic
Albay, Aurora, Batanes,

Cagayan, Camarines Norte,
Camarines Sur, Catanduanes,
Eastern Samar, Isabela,
Northern Samar, Quezon,
QUlIlllO, Samar, Sorsogon
Abra, Agusan uel NOlte,
Zone I
(V= 250 kph)
2-23
Structural Type
Directionality
Factor Kd*
Buildings
Main Wind Force Resisting System
Components and Cladding
0.85
0.85
-
Arched Roofs
0.85
Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar StlUcturcS

Square
Hexagonal
Round
0.90
0.95
0.95
Agusan de! SU[, Aklan,
Antique, Apayao, Balaan,

Batangas, Benguct, Biliran,
Bohol, Buiaean, Camiguin,
Cariz, Cavitc , Cebu ,
Compostcla Valley, Davao
Oriental, Guimaras, Ifugaa,
Ilocos Norte, lIocos Sur, Iloilo,
Zone 2
(V = 200 kph)
Zone 3
150 kph)
(V=
_..___ ._~ ___ ~__
Kalinga, La Union, Laguna,

Leytc, Marinduquc, Masbatc ,
Misamis Oriental, Mountain
Province, National Capital
Region, :"Iegros Occidental,
Ncgros Oriental, Nueva Ecija,
Nueva Vizcaya, Occidental
Mindoro, Oriental Mindoro,
Pampanga. Pangasinan, Rizal,
Romblon, Siquijor, Southern
Leyte, Surigao del NOiiC,
Surigao del Sur, Tarlac,
Zambalcs
BasiJan, Bukidnon, Davao del
Norte, Davao del Sur, Lanao
del Norte, Lanao del SUf,
Maguindanl1o, Misamis
Occidental, North Cotabato ,
Palawan , Sarangani, South
C. otabato ,Sl.dtan Kudarat,
Sulu, Tawi~tawi, Zamboanga
del NOlie, Zamboanga de! Sur,
_.-
Solid Signs
0.85
"---
Open Signs and Lattice Framework
0.85
Trussed Towers
Triangular, square, rectangular
All other cross sections
0.85
0.95
Dir('Cfionalif}, Factor Kd has been calibrated with combinations of

loads speciji~d ill Seclioll 203. This fin'lOr shall only he applied when
IIsed in C()lIjuIIClioll wilh load combillatiol/S specified in Section 203.3
alld 203.4.
Z'lll1~""ll~_~_b-"ga y_ _ __
th
Edition Volume 1
2-24
CHAPTEH 2 Minimum Design Loads
207.5.5 Importance Factor

An imp0l1ance factor, 1\\., for the building or other
structure shall be determined from Table 20 7~3 based on
building <lI1d structure calegories listed in Table I03 ~ I.
For each wind direction considered, the upwind exposure

category shaH be based on ground surface roughness that
is determined from natural topography, vegetation. and
cons tru cted facilities.
Table 207-3 Importance Factor, IIV (Wind Loads)
~,.----:-~----'--r-" ""-"
Occupancy
Description
I.
Categ0.'2'
II
III
IV
1.15
Esscil ti al
-.- -~
-_._._- ._-
1.15
Ilazardous
Spccial
q~c~e.~~~r
Standard
.9(;1?~p~I~C.)'.
1. 15
---. _.. __ ... _1.00
V_- ' -_
Miscellaneotls
'--_
_ _ _ _..1...-_ _0.87
_ ___ _
I
207.5.6.3 Exposure Categories

Exposure B. Exposure 13 shall apply w here the grou nd
207.5.6 Exposure
- .. - ...- ........ - -_..
Surface Roughness D, Flat, unobstructed areas and water

su rfaces. This category includes smooth mud flats and
salt flats.
see Tah!!! !03 } /0/' t)'{)(!S (If (lCCII/ffl/tCY
IIl/der
('(Ich
c{ltegory.
207.5.6.1 Wind Directions and Sectors

For each selected wind direction i.H which the win<1 loads
are to be evaJualed, the exposure of the building or
Sll11cture shall be determined for the two upwind sectors
ex tend ing 45 either side of the selected wind directi on.
The exposures in these two sectors shall h~ de termined in
accordance with Sections 207.5.6.2 tlnd 207.5.6.3 and the
exposure resulting in the highest wind loads shal! be used
to represent the winds from thaI direction.
207.5.6.2 Surface Roughncss Categories
A ground surface roughness within CilCh 4Y' sector shall
be detennined for a distance upwind of the si te as defined
in Seclion 207.5.6.3 from the categories defined in the
fo llowing text . for the purpose o r assigning an exposure
cClIcgory as defined in Section 207.5.6.3.
surf.'lCc roughness condi tion, as defined by Surface

Roughness D. prevails in the upwind directi on fo r a
dist:mce of at least 800 III or 20 times the height of th e
building, whichever is gremer.
Exception :
For buildings whose mean roof height is less than or
equal to 1Q m, the upwind distance may be reduced to
450"..
Exposu rc C. Exposure C shall apply for all cases whe re
Exposure B or D does not apply.
Exposure D. Exposure D shall apply where lhe ground
surface roughness , as defined by Surface Roughness D,
prevails in lhe upwind direction fo r a distancc greater than
1.5 km or 20 times the building height, which is greater.
Exposure D shaH extend into downwind are,IS of Surface
Roughness B or C for a distance of 180 m or 20 times the
height of the building. whichever is greater.
For a site loca ted in the transition zone between exposure
categories. the category resulting in the largest wind
forces shall be used.
Exception:
All imermediate exposure be/ween the precedi"g
categqries is permilled in a transition zone provided that
it is determined by a rational analysis method defined in
rlie recognized literature.
207.5.6.4 Exposure Category for Main Wind-Force

Resisting System
207.5.6.4.1 Buildings and Other Struc!ures
For each wind direction considered wind loads ror the
design o f the MWfRS determined from f-igUfc 7.07 '()
:-; hall be based o n the exposure categories defined in
Section 207.5.().] .
Su rf:)cc Roughness B. Urban and suburban areas,
wooded areas, or other tcrrain " .witl1 numerou s close!y
spaced obstnlctions having the size of sing J(> family
dwell ings or larger.
Surface noughn css C. Open tcrrain wit h SCilHerc.d
obstructi ons havin g heights generally le:.;s than 9111. This
category includes nat open coullIry. grasslands. :'lIld all
watcr surfaces in regions with records of ex treme
207.5.6.4.2 Low-Rise Buildings .

Wind loads for the design of the MWFRSs for low-risc
huildings shall he dcterm ineD using a velocity press ure qh
hased ;;) the exposure resulti ng in the highest wind loads
for any wind directioll at the sile where. extemal pressu re
coc fficieJlts GCp'( given in Fig. 207-10 arc used.
typhoo ns.
201.5.6.5 Exposure Ca tegor y for Components a nd

Cladding
Components and cladding design pressures for all
buildings and other structures shall be based on the
exposure rcsuhing in the highest wind loads for any
direction at the site.
225
Notes:
J. Case I: a. All compotlttllS and cladding.
b. Main wind force ruisring s)'stem in Jowrise buildings
desig,,~d using FiGure 207/0.
Cast 2: a. All 1II0i" wind forct rrsislillg ;rySfCmS in bllildines
e:ccepl ,hCJSt in low rise buildings dtsig,,~d ftling
Figure 207 10.

h. Ail main wind force resislillg s),SI'IIIS ill olirer
201.5.6.6 Velocit y Pressure Exposure C oefficient
2.
nI t!
sfrucrurtS.
vl'locifY pressllre (!XPOl'II/'(1 wc/fi(:ie lll K, moy be ilefC mrilled
Based on the exposure category determin ed in Sec tion
f rom Ihefollowin c!orlllufa:
207.5.6.3, a ve loci ty press ure ex posu re coefficie nt K( 01'

K h , as applicab le, shall be determined from Table 2074.
For
For a site locCHed in a transition zone between exposure

categories, thai is, ncar to a change in ground surface
roughness, intermediate values of K: Or K", between (hose
shown in Table 2074, are pennitted, provided that they
are determined by a ralional analysis method defined in
the recogni zed literature.
Table 207-4 Velocity Pressure Exposure Cocrticienls',
Kh and Kz
Hcigh l
Exposure (Note I)
above
Ground
leYel "
C"." I
..
asc
OUt'S
1& 2
Cases
1& 2
0.90
1.08
0.94
I. I 2
I--='
O("-':~"-')-:C5'- "--C
-l. 7-0- - -C-)~i7- -0.8S-----j:()-3--
......_... ... - ....

'
0.70
7.5
- ".... _
....... ,.
0.70
0.62
0.66
.. ...._-...
0.70
0.70
12
0.76
0.76
15
0.81
....
0.81
1.09
18
0.85
0.85
1.1.1
1.27
1.)1
21
0.89
0.89
I 17
1.)4
.--_ .." .
...0.98
..... ... .. ... 1.16
. . - ....
1.04
1.22
24
0.93
0.93
1.21
1.38
U.96
0.96
1.24
110
30
0 .1)1)
0.99
.....
1.26
1.43
36
1.04
1.31
1.48
42
1.09
1.04
1.(19
1.36
1.52
48
1.13
...1. 13
'.
1.39
. .....
1.5.\
54
1. 17
1.17
1.43
I .S8
60
1.20
1.20
[ .46
I ,(J !
75
1.28
1.2R
1..\3
1.68
90
1.3.\
U.\
1.59
1.73
1.6:1
1.69
I.n
.. ..... ... -
. .
105
1.4 I
1.41
120
1.47
1.47
135
ISO
'~
1.56
1.52
1.56
----
For 4.5 III S as al
1.82
1.73
1.86
1.17
1.89
)".
{7--1
K:",2.0
'<I
NOIe: l. shal/iwi be mlcl'n less ,han 9.0 "'lor Cou / in eJ.posure B.
J. a nnd II ar~ I(lblllo,~d in Table 2075.
4, Lil/ear illlt!fpolofion for ;1Ifennedialt values of heiglll l is
(lCCeIJfable.
5. Exposllre cmegoriu ore dejilled ;tt Section 207.5.6.
201.5.7 T opog raphi c E ffects

207.5.7.1 Wind Speed-Up Over Hills, Ridges, and
Escarpmen ts
Wind speedup effec ts at isolated hi lls, ri dges , an d
escarpments constitutin g ab ru pt cha nges ill th e genenJ
lOpography, located in any ex pos ure category, shall be

incl uded in the design when buildi ngs and oth er site
conditi ons and locations of structures mee t all of the
follow ing conditions:
I.
The hill. ridgc , or escm'pment is i sol~Hed and

ullobstructed upwind by other similar topographic
features of compar;'lblc height for 100 limes the
height of thc topographic fCaiure (1001-1) or 3.2 kill
whichever is less. TIlis d istance shall be measured
horizontally from the point at which the height H of
lhe hill . ridge. or escarpmcm is determined.
2.
The hill, ridge. or escarpment protl1ldes above the

height of upwind len'ain featu res within a 3.2 kill
rad ius in any quadran l by a faclOJ' of two or more .
J.
The structure is localed as shown in Figure 2074 in

thc upper one- hall' of rt hill or ri dge or nca r th e crest
or an esc arpmcnt.
.-
27
z < 4.5 III
llmll l)f' eq u:d 10 4.5m for Exposur~s C

:lIld D and 18m (or Exposure B.
5. II is greater
N,JIlonal Structura l Code of U1H PI1ilipPIncs Gill Edition Vo lum0 1
226
CHArJTER 2 - Minimul1l Design Loads
207.5.8.2 Flexible or Dynamically Sensitive Structures

207.5.7.2 Topographic Factor
The wind speedup effect shall be included in the
calculation of design wind loads by using (he faclOr Kl , :
For flexible or dynamically sensi ti ve suuctures as defined

in Section 207 .2 the gusteffect factor shall be caiculated
by
(2073)
where K I , K1 and KJ are given in Figure
(207 8)
207~4.
If site condi ti ons and locations of structures do not meet

all the conditions specified in Seclion 207.5.7.1 the KlI :::
1.0.
gQ and g" shall be taken as 3.4 and 8R is given by
8R =J2 In(3,600Il J )+
207.5.8 Gust Effect Factor
The gUSl effect facto r shall be calculated as penniUed in
Sections 207.5.8. 1 to 207.5.8.5, using appropriate values
for natura] frequency and damping ra lio as permitted in
Section 207.5.8.6.
0.577
~21n(3.6001l J )
(2079)
R:;::;: the resonant response factor is given by
R~
pRn Rh R IJ (0.53+0.47R{.l
(207-10)
207.5.8.1 Rigid Buildings
R -(
For rigid buildings as defined in Section 207.2, the gust

effect factor shall be taken as 0.85 or calculated by th e
fonnu la:
n -
N, =
7.47N,
(I
(207 11 )
"0"'-
(207-12)
Vi
(2074)
R,
where
=:' __I_( I _,,-2")for l/>0

'/
R,
(2075)
(20713a)
27/'
=1 f Off) =0
(207 l3b)
where lhe subscript t in Eq. 207 ~ 13 shall be taken as h, B,

and L. respective ly, where ii, 13.) artd L are defined in
Section 207.3.
..
,
where
Iz
+ IO.3N,)"'/l
::: the intensity of turbul ence at he ight Z where

Z ::; the equivalent height of the SlrUl:lUrc.
defined as 0.6h, but not less tlmn lmi" for all
building heights. Zmin and c are listed for each
exposure in Table 2075; gQand g,. shall be taken
as 3.4. The background response Q is given by:
Q=
1+0.6
i B~" )0.63
(2076)
Il,
::: building natu rHI frequency -
III
:;: ;: Rh selling '/ = 4.611 Ih/V;,
RI
:;: ;: Rn sellin g
1J ::;
RI
= RL setting 'I = 1 5.4I1IL/~
fI
~
= damping ralio, percent of critical

~
mean hourly wind speed (m/s)
at
height
determined from Eq . 20714
( )"
- z_
V- =b ,
10
where B. h '-Ire defined in Section 207.3: and Li :::: the

intcgml length sC;:lle or turbulence at the eq ui valent height
given by
4.611 I En /V:
where band !i arc constant s listed ill Table

is the basic wind speed in kph.
(207.7)
In which f aile! E are consta nts lis ted in T;lble 207~5 .
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippin es
(20714)
207~5
and V
Tablc 207-5 Terrain Exposurc Constants
a
z, (m)
Ii
.--.
207.5.9.3 Wind-Borne Debris
-B
C
D ---7.0
9.5
11.5
365
275
215
117
119.5
----- 1111.5
0.84
1.00
1.07
--_.._.
... _.1/4
1/6.5
1/9
.... 0.45
0.65
0.80
--_._...
0.30 _._._0.20
0.15
..
0.010
0.005
0.003
..---150--100
200
1/3
1/5
118
9
4.5
2.10
I~xposurc
~~---.-
;;
a
---=---
-.~---.--
c _.
----~-
Do --_._._.. . f (m)
--
If
~~---
2-27
Glazing in buildings located in wind-borne debris regions

shall be protected with an impact-resistant covering or be
impact-resistant glazing according to the requirements
specified in ASTM EI886 and ASTM EI996 or other
approved test methods and performance criteria. The
levels of impact resistance shall be a function of Missile
Levels and Wind Zones specified in ASTM EI886 and
ASTM E1996.
---~~
~--~-.~.
*Zrnin
Z",",
(m)
:::
minimum height used to ensure that {he equiv3knt height
greater or
l",,,,
or
Xh
Zis
for tmssed lowers, the height of (he
trnnsmission cable above ground, or 0.611 ror buildings and other

structures. For 11:5 z. . ,". i shall be taken as z,o,o'
207.5.9.4 Multiple Classifications

207.5.8.3 Rational Analysis
In lieu of the procedure defined in Sections 207.5.8.1 and
207.5.8.2. detcrmination of the gust~effcct factor by any
rational analysis defined in the recognized literature is
pennittcd.
If a building by definition complies with both the "open"

and "partially enclosed" definitions, it shall be classified
as an "open" building. A building that docs not comply
with either the "open" or "partially enclosed" definitions
shall be classified as an "enclosed" building.
207.5.8.4 Limillitions
207 .5.10 Velocity Pressure
Where combined gust-effect factors and pressure

coefficients (GCp ' GCp ;' and GC"f) are given in figures
and tables, the gust-effect factor shall not be determined
separately.
Velocity pressure, CJl> evaluated at height z shall be

calculated by the following equation:
(207 -15)
207.5.8.6 Dynamic Properties
where K" is the wind directionality factor defined in

Section 207.5.4.4, K~ is the velocity pressure exposure
coefficient defined in Section 207.5.6.6, KZI is the
topographic factor defined in Section 207.5.7.2. and q" is
Ihe velocity pressure calculated using f:q. 20715 at mean
roof height h.
Values of natural frequency and damping ratio when lIsed

as input parameters in calculations of the gust effect
factor shall be obtained from full-scale measurements of
the actual structure, from computer simulation. or from
the estimation formulas given in Section 207.8.
The numerical coefficient 47.3 x 10-6 shall be used except

where sufficient climatic data arc available to justify the
selection of a different value of this factor for a design
application.
207.5.9 Enclosure Classifications
207.5.1 I Pressure and Force Coefficients
207.5.8.5 Other Structures

Procedures for calculation of the gust effect factor for
other structures sha!l be taken from Section 207.7.
207.~.9.1
207.5.11.1 Intel-nal Pressure Coefficient
General
For the purpose of determining internal pressure

coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as enclosed,
partially enclosed, or open as defined in Section 207 .2.
Internal pressure coefficients, Gc.~)l' shall be determined

from Fig. 207~5 based on building enclosure
classifications detennined from Section 207.5.9.
207.5.9.2 Openings
207.5.11.1.1 Reduction FHclor for Large Volume

Buildings, Ri
A determination shall be made of the amount of openings

in the building envelope to determine the enclosure
classification as defined in Section 207.5.9. I.
For a partially enclosed building containing a single,

unpartitioned large volume, the internal pressure
N;;ltiotlal Structural Code of the Philippines
Gill
Edition Volullw 1
228
CHAPTEr:l 2 Minimum Design l.oads
coefficient, GC~II> shall be multiplied by the following

reduction factor, Ri :
207.5.11.5 Parapets
207.5.11.5.1 Main WindForce Resisting System
The pressure coefficicnts for the effect of parapets on the
MWFRS loads arc given in Section 207.5.12.2.4.
(207-16)
where
Aog
Vi
= total
area of openings in the building envelope

walls and roof, in m2
= unpal1itioned internal volume, m3
207.5.11.2 External Pressure Coefficients

207.5.11.2.1 Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems
External pressure coefficients for MWFRSs e,l arc given
in Figures 207-6, 207-7, and 207-8. Combined gust effect
factor and external pressure coefficients, GCl'f' are given
in Figure 207-10 for low-rise buildings. The pressure
coefficient values and gust effect factor in Figure 207 10
shall not be separated.
207.5.11.5.2 Components and Cladding

The pressure coefficients for the design of parapet
component and cladding clements arc taken from the wall
and roof pressure coefficients as spccified in Scction
207.5.12.4.4.
207.5.12 Design Wind Loads on Enclosed and
Partially Enclosed Buildings
207.5.12.1 General
207.5.12.1.1 Sign Convention
Positive pressure acts toward the surface ilnd negative
pressure acts away from the surface.
207.5.12.1.2 Critical Load Condition
Values of extemal and interna! pressures shall he
combined algebraically to determine the most criticill
load.

Combined gust-effect factor and external pressure
coefficients for components and cladding GCI ) arc given
in Figures 207- I I through 207-17. The pressure
coefficient values and gust-effect factor shall not be
separated.
207.5.12.1.3 Tributary Areas Greater than 65 m'

Component and cladding clements with tributary areas
greater than 65 1112 shal! be permitted to be designed using
the provisions for MWFRS.
207.5.12.2 Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems

207.5.1 1.3 Force Coefficients
Force coefficients Cj arc given in Figures 207-20 through
207-23.
207.S.12.2.1 Rigid Buildiugs of All Heights

Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of buildings of all
heights shall be determined by the following equation:
207.5.11.4 Roof Overhangs
(207-17)
207.5.11.4.1 Main Wind-Force Resisting System

Roof overhangs shall be designed for a po~itive pre~sure
on the bottom surface of windward roof overhangs
corresponding to C~, :::: 0.8 in combination with thc
pressures dctcrmined from Llsing Figures 207-6 and 207I ().
where
q
'I
'I,

For all buildings, roof overhangs shall be designed for
pressures determineo from pressure coefficients given in
Figures 207-1 Ill. C. D.
'I,
::::; q; for windward walls evaluated ilt height !

above the ground
= q" for leeward 1\I(I/lS, side walls. and ron\<
evaluated at height II
= (fir for l\Iilldw(/rd walls, sid~ wails, leeward \\':111.and roofs of enclosed huildings ;lnd fOl" neg :il l\"\:
internal prcssure evaluation in p,lrtially encloscd
buildings
::;: q; for positive intcrnal pressure CVallJ;ili("~l
partially enclosed buildings \vherc hei):I,
defined as the level of the highest opening Ii; ~:L,"'
building that could affect the positive
For buildings sited in wilj.: i Ill'
pressurc.
I\ssoCi,ltICHl of Str"UCllJ('ll E:nqinnus of the PhilipPines
CHAPTER 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
c"
(G(~lI)
debris regions. glazing that is nOt impact

resistant or protected with till impac t resislanl
cove ring, shall be treated "s an opening in
accordance wi th Secti on 207.5.9.3. ror positi ve
int ernal
pressure
evalUilli on.
qi
may
conserv<lli ve ly be e valuated at height" ('Ii = ql.)
= g US! effect factor from Sec ti o n 207.5.8.
= external press ure coefficient from Figure 207-6
or 2078.
= internal pressure coefficient from Figure 207-5
q and <Ii shall be evalutlieq llsin g exposure
defined ill Secti on 207.5 .6.3. Prcss ure shall be
applied si muil nncousl y on wi ndward and
leewa rd walls a nd on roof s urface as defi ned in
Figures 2076 and 2078.
207.5.12.2.2 LowRise Building
,
!
j,
Altern atively, design wind press ures for the MWFRS of

Jow -rise bu ildings shall be dete rm ined by Ihe fo ll owing
equat io n:
(20718)
229
away from) the fro nl (exterior) side of th e

parapet
lJlI
= ve loci ty press ure eval uated at the top of the
parapet
Gel''' = combincd net press ure cocfficient
= + 1.5 for wind ward parapet
= - I .0 for leeward pa rapet
207.5.12.3 Design Wind Load Cases
Th e. MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind

londs have be-cn dctcrmin ed under the provisions of
Seclions 207.5. 12.2. I and 207.5.1 2.2.3, shall be des igned
for the wind load cl-l ses as defined ill Fig. 207-9. The
eccentri cit y e for rigid structu res shall be meas ured frolll
the geometric cent er of the building face and shall be
considered for eac h principal axis (ex. ey).
The
eccentri city e for nexible structures shall be determi ned
from the fol lowing equation and shall be considered for
each principal ax i s (ex. e ,.):
e Q + 1.7/ , J(g"Qe Q )' + (CN Re R ) '
e= -
---
(2072 1)
1+ 1.71, J(g"Q)' +(gR R)'
where
=- velocity pressu re evalu ated at mean roof
q"
(GCIJj )
(GCI ,,)
height 11 using exposure defined in

Secli on 207 .5 .6.3
:::: external press ure coeffi cient frol1l Fi gure 207 10
= intemal pressure coeffi cient froll1 Figure 207-5
wh ere
=- eccentricity e as determined for rigid structures

in Figure 2079
= distan ce be tw een til e clastic shear cent er and
centcr of Ill:lSS of each fl oor
/ " g Q.Q. gR. Ii shall be as defined in Secli on 207.5.8
207.5.12.2.3 fl exible Buildiugs
Des ign wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible

bu ildi ngs shall be delc nnined !'mlll the following
cqu<ltion:
The sign of the eccen tricity e shall be plus or minus.

whichever causes the morc severe load effect.
Exeeplion:
whe re q. qi. Cpo and (CGpi ) arc as defi ned ill Secti on
207.5. 12.2.1 and (Ij = gust effect facto r is defined as ill
Scclion 207.5.8.2.
Olle-sto"ry buildings with h less lhan or equa} .to 10 IrIJ

bujldj!,g~ tWO ~'or!~~ 9' less framed . 1V;,h Iight'{rame
co~'si . !:ti~n..- j:m'q QlIt(4l"ngs. /)Vo sto.r!es or I~s~ 4.es~g~ed
wit~'!/. '. . . p'lr.}JgM.f~lfeta"~nifF!trdesignet:tli>'-load
c(kt!'i"
ba:siMtlff~Fjkur~;'2b7S9: ,c'" " " ,:' , " '.
207.5.12.2.4 Parapets
207.5.12.4 Compollents and Cladding
The dcsign wind press ure for the e ffect of parapets on

MWFRSs of ri gid, lo w-rise. or Oexibl e buildings with
nat , gable, Or hip roofs shal! be uctel'lllined by the
following cq u<lIion:
207.5.1 2.4.1 Low-Hisc Bui1dings and Buildings with h

S 18 III
P,. =qpGC,.
(20720)
Design wind press ures on com po nent II lld cladd ing

c le ments of lo w-risc bui ldin gs wit h h ~ 18 In s.lall be
detcnn ined from (hc fo ll owing eq uation :
where
1'='1'[ (GC,.l -(GC,,,) 1

= combined net pressu re 011 the p<lfapcl due 10 the
the
combina tion of tile Ilet press ures fro m
fron t and bac k pa rapet surfaces. Plus (a nd minus)
signs sign ify net prc!';s lI rc ;Klin g toward (and
(20722)
where
C/J.
= velocily pressure cvaluated at mean roa r heigh t h
using exposure defined in Section 2075 :6.3
111
National Structura l CoeJe of tile PJ'IilipPlnes 6 Edition Vot ume '1
230
C HAPTER 2 _. Minimum Design loads
(Gep ) = external pressure coefficients given in Figure

207- 11 through 207- 16
(CCIl ;)=. internal pressure coeffi cient given in Figure
207-5
207.5. 12.4.2 Buildings with" > 18 111
Des ign w ind press ures on components and claddin g fo r
where
Ge"
all buildings with h > 18m shall be determined from th e

followin g equation :
(20 7-23)
where
q
q
l!;
for wi ndward walls caicuialcd <II height l

above the ground
:::. qh for leeward wall s, side wall s, and roo fs.
e valuated at height if
=. {h
;;:: q" for windward walls, side walls, leeward walls,
:::: veloc ity pressure evaluatcd at ill;.,' k',' . r the

parapet
:::: eX lern al press urc coeffi cients fro m
Figu res
207 1 1 throu gh 207 -1 7
~ int ernal pressure coeffici ent rrom Figu res 2()7~5,
based on the poros ity of the parapet C!l\,(ljupc.
Two load cases shall be co nsidered. Load ~ ',,' /'.: ~ ~a ll

consisl o f applying the app licable posit ive w;,11 prc:-.:-. u rc
from Figure 207-I IA or Figure 207- 17 !t o illI: !-;"(lIl(
surface o f the parapet while appl yi ng I!:-.: ;ll'i;il'I!, le
negati ve ed ge o r corner zone roof pressure flt .1l1 I-igu res
207- 11 throu gh 207-1 7 to the back surface. Load Case B
$hall consist of applying the applicable posil ive wall
press ure from Figure 207-IIA or Fi gure 2.(J' ) I'J 10 th e
back o f the parapet surface, and appl yi ng Ihe :Ipplicab le
negat ive wall pressure fro m Fi gure 207- i I A or Figure
207- 17 to the front surface. Edge and corner Wiles. sha ll
be arranged as shown in Figu res 207- 11 thronl~h 207 -1 7 .
GCp shall be detcnn ined for appropriate i''iO{ Ing le and
effec tive win d arca from Fi gures 20 7~ 11 Ih)'();II',h 207 ~ J 7.
If intcrnal press ure is present, both load t.:::::;;.', ,' .hnuld bc.
evaluated un der positive and negati ve internal press ure.
and roo fs o f enclosed buildings and for negati ve

inte rnal pressure e va lua tion in partia ll y e nclosed
buildings
qi
:::. q: for posi ti ve internal press ure eva luation ill
part iall y cilcloscd bu ildi ngs where heig ht z is
defined as the level o f the highes t opcning in the
building thaI could affect the positive internal
pressure. For buildings sited in wind-born e
debri s regions, glazing th at is not impact
res is(ant or protec(cd wit h an impact-resislant
coveri ng , ~h all be treated as an opening in
accordance with Section 207.5.9.3. For pos itive
inte rn al
pressure
eval uati on,
qi
may
conserva tive ly be evaluated at height " (q ; = q,,)
( Gel') :::: ex ternal press ure coefficient from Fi gure 207 I 7
(GC,,;) = internal press ure coeffi ci.ent given in
Fi gure
207-5
Pl us and min us sign s sig nify press ure ac tin g towa rd and
away from the lOp s urface of the roof, fcspeCl ivtdy.
q and qi shall be eva lu ated using exposure derined in

Sec ti on 207.5.6.3.
207.5.13.1.2 C ritical Lo ad Condition
<"
207.5.12.4.3 Alternalive Design Wind Press ures for

Components and Cladding in Buildings with 18m
< 27m
Alternati ve to th e req uirements o f Sectio n 207. S.12.4 .2,
the design o f compo nent s and cladding fo r build ings wit h
a mean roo f height greater tha n 18m and less tha n 27 m
values from Figures 207-11 through 207- 17 sha ll be used
on ly if the heighl to wid th ratio is o ne or less (except iI:\
pe rm itt ed hy Note (, of Figure 207-17) an d 10'1. 207-22 is
used .
207.5.13 Des ign Wind Loads on Open Bui ld ings

with Monos lo pe, Pitch ed , or Troughed Il oo fs
207.5.13.1 General
207.13. J.1 Sign Convention
Net pressure coeffi cien ts eN incl ude contrib utions from

top and boltom surf5ccs. All load cases shown for cnch
roo f angle shall be illv C'stiga led.
207.5.13.2 Molin Wind-Force Resisting Systems

Th e net design pressure fo r the MWFRSs of l1)olloslopc,
pi tched, or troughed roo fs shall be dCh.nllillt ~ d I,'! t!i~~
following equat ion:
(207-251
where
207.5.12.4.4 Parapets
ve-lod lY press ure cvalu,l1 cd at mean roo f height II

lIsi ng lh e ex pos ure as defi netl in Section
207 .5.0.3 tlm t results in the. high~s! Wii ld l\lads
ror any wi nd direction at the site
= gust crfect factor from Seclion 207.5. X
=:
The dc:\ ign wind pressure o n (hc compollc nts and

c huJdin g clc lllellls of parapel:-; shall be designed by the
rol lowing equation:

G
Associ;llion of Stru ctura l Engin o(HS of the P illiippines
CHAPTEH? . Minimum Design I.oads
= net pressure coc nicicnt determined
= projected area
from Figures
207- 18A through 207-1 8D
normal
to
the wind
CX.CCpl
2-3 1
where
Cf is specified for the actual su rface area, mZ
For frcc roofs with an angle of phme of roof from

horizontal 8 less than or equal to Y' and containing fascia
panels. Ihe fascia panel shall be considered an inverted
parapet. The contribution of loads on the fasc ia to Ihe
MWFRS loads shall be determined lIsing Section
207.5.12.2.4 with If,. equal to q".
207.5.15.1 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for

Buildings with II :S 18((/
The force 011 rooftop structures and equipment wi th Af

less than 0.1 O/3h locat ed on buildings with Ii $ 18 III shall
be determined from Eq. 207-28, increased by a factor of
1.9. The factor shall be permitted to be reduced linearly
from J.9 to J.O as th e value of Aj is increased from 0.101317
207.5.13.3 Component and Cladding Elements
to Bh.
The net design wind pressure for component and ctadding

elcments of lllonosJope. pitched, and troughcd roofs shall
be dClcnnincd by the following equation :
207.5.15.2 Structures Supporting Antennas, C'lblcs,

and Other Attachments and Appurtenances
(207 -26)
where
q,
= velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof hcight Ii

using Ihe exposure as defined in Section
207.5.6.3 that resu hs in Ihe highest wind loads
for any wind direction at the site
= gust-cffect faclOr from Section 207.5.8
= net pressure coefficient detcI1l1ined from Figures
207-19A through 207-19C
207.5.14 Design Wind Loads on Solid Freestanding

Walls and Solid Signs
The design wind force for sol id freestanding walls and

solid signs shall be determined by the followi ng formula :
(207 -27)
where
The wi nd loads on all stl1lclures supponing attachments

and appu11cnances including antenna and cablcsuppol1ing structures shall take into account the wind
loads on all supported antennas, cables, 3l1achmcllls, and
appul1enances.
Guidance on wind loads on su pported antcllntlS shall be
obtained from the TfA- 222-G (2005) sta ndard unless
sufficient suppolling evidence can be obtained from
recognized literature or frolll wind tunnel tests.
Guidance on wind IOilds on supported cables shall be
obtained from the ASCE Manual of Practice #74
(G uidelines on Electrical Trclnsmission Line Structural
Loading) except that the gust effect factor for cables as
give n in Section 207.7.3. or unless sufficient su pporting
evidence can be obtai ned from recogn ized litermure or
from wind tunnel tests.
wind loads on suppo rt ed antennas, cables.
illlachments, ilnd appuncll,mccs shall be applied at the
lo(.:ali on of support 0 11 the support i ng structure.
Thc
qh
Gf
Cf
A.I
= th e
velocity pressure evaluated at height II

(defined in Figure 207-20) using exposure III
Section 207.5.6.4.1
= gus t-effect factor from Section 207.5.8
= nel force coefficient from f-igure 207-20
::: the gross area of the solid frees tandin g wall or
solid sign , rn z
207.5.15 Design Wind Loads on Other Structures

The design wind force for other strlJclllres shall be
dctcnnined hy the following equation:
(207-28)
whcre
G
C,
velocity prcssure CVillU <lt cd al hcight l of the.

centroid of <lfC<1 It, u sing C}lpOSUfe defined in
Section 207.5.6.3
= gust -effect factor from Section 207.5.K
= force (:oclTicicnls from Figures 207-2 1 through
207-n
207.6 Method 3 - ""ind Tunnel Procedurc

207.6.1 Scope
Wind tunnel tests sh<1 11 be used where required by Section

207.5.2. Wind tunnel testing shall be permitted in lieu of
Methods I and 2 for any building or structure.
207.6.2 Test Conditions
Wind tUllnel les ts, or s im ilar em ploying fluid s olhcr than

air. lIsed for the determinat ion of design w ind loads for
any building or ot he r stnlcl urc. sl1<l1l hc conduc ted in
accordance with thi s secti on. Tests for the determination
of mean and nuclllfliing forces ,mel press ures shall meet
.!l1 of lhe following conditions:
J.
Thc nalunll atmos pheric bmllld<lfY la ye r has been

modeled III account fo r thc variati o n of wind speed
wit h height.
N;ltlonal ~.;trllctu{t!1 Co(Je of !lIe Plli1ipPl1l8S
()!L
Edition VoIUlIlc! 1
2<32
2.
3.
4.
CHAF)TE:li 2 ._. Minimum Design Loads
The relevant macro-integral length and micro-length

scales of the longitudinal component of atmospheric
turbulence are modeled to approximately the same
scale as that L1scd to model the building or structurc.
The modeled building or other struClure and
arc
surrounding
structures
and
topography
geometrically similar to their full-scale counterparts,
except that, for low-rise buildings meeting the
requirements of Section 2.07.5.1, tests shall be
permitted for the modeled building in a single
exposure site as defined in Section 207.5.6.3.
The projected area of the modeled building or other
Slructure and sUlToundings is less than 8 percent of
the test section cross-sectional area unless correction
is made for blockage.
5.
The longitudinal pressure gradient in the wind tunnel

test section is accounted for.
6.
Reynolds number effects on pressures and forces arc

minimized.
7.
Response characteristics of the wind tunnel

instrumentation arc consistent with the required
measurements.
207.6.3 Dynamic Response

Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic
response of a building or other structure shall be in
accordance with Section 207.6.2. The structural model
and associated analysis shall account for mass
distribution, stiffness, and damping.
207.6.4 Limitations
"
Gf
1+ O.85gep!Q' + /I'
. ...... .. _ - - - - _ .. ........
where
P~ 4.9J75;: (10/ z)""
(207-30)
Q~
(207 -31)
......-....
II~ 0.017 (,".z)
J fJ V.
-.'""C~
and
...
III
207.6.5 Wind-Borne Debris
Glazing in buildings in wind-borne debris regions shall be

protected in accordance with Section 207.5.9.3.
207.7 Gust Effect Factor for Other Structures
207.7.1 Poles, Masts, and Trussed Towers

For other structures such as poles, masts, trussed towers,
and the like, that function as communication towers or
antenna-supporting structures, electrical transmission
towers and poles, structures supporting lighting
equipment, and the like, the gust effect factor shall he
calculated by
(207-32)
The peak factor g shall be taken as 4.0. The value of e

shall be 0.75 for electrical transmission towers and poles
other cases. The parameters that
with cables, or 1.0 for
define the wind field characteristics, specifically Do, a:, I,
i', b, and i'i, shall be obtained from Table 207-1 I. The
effective height "2 shall be taken as two-thirds the height
of the tower eI3h), but not less than 2m;" as listed in Table
207-11. V; is calculated using Eqn. 207-J4.
an
207.7.2 Billboard Structures, Free-Standing Walls,

and Solid Signs
For billboard structures, free-standing wai!s, and solid
signs with height-to-least-horizontal dimension greater
than 4, the procedures in Section 207.7.1 shall be used.
Otherwise, the procedures in Section 207.5.8.2 shall be
used.
207.7.3 Cables
Por cables, Equations 207-29, 207-30, and 207-32 shall be
used together with:
(207-33)
207.6.4.1 Limitations on Wind Speeds
Variation of basic wind speeds with direction shall not be

perrnitted unless the analysis for wind speeds conforms to
the requirements of Section 207.5.4.2.
(207 -29)
1+ 0.85gp
where B is the total length of the cable.
207.8 Estimates of Dynamic Properties

When values for nalUral frequency and damping ratio as
required input parameters in the calculation of the gust
effect factor for buildings and other structures arc [1'lt
available from full-scale measurements of (he ::"1(1:1
structure or from computer simulation, the cst::, . ' .J
formulas given in Sections 207.8.1 and 207.8.2 sh,dl uc
used.
207.8.1 Approximate Fundamental Frequency
207.8.1.1 Buildings
For buildings, the natura! fre.qucncy III may be
llsing the following general formulas:
eSlilll ':l ; :!
CHAFfEH ? - Minimum Design I. cads
Type
Service-level
Strength level
6711z
50llz
56/Jz
4211z
Concrete
Sleel
233
207.8.2 Approximate Damping Ratio

207.8.2.1 General
207.8.1.2 Free-Standing Trussed Towers and Billboard

Structures
For free-slanding (russed towers. nnd billboard siructurcs,
For wind loading purposes, the total damping ml io Illay be

taken as 0.015 for co ncretc slruclures, and 0.010 for slcel
and oiller Siruciures.
(he natural frequency "1 may be es timated using Ihe
207.8.2.2 Poles, Mast" Trussed Towers, Bi ll boards,
following formula:
and Simila r S tru ctu r es

Allcrmtl iveiy for poles, masts. trussed towers, billboards,
<lnd simi lar Slfll ctures, the SIJ1lclllntl damping ralio fJs at
service- leve l condi ti on may be taken .IS
where
and
,,=107/M
,
/ h " II ,, 1,1 fA
"
..
(20734)
R"u
= 1.25(ItIBor0 2
(20735)
c=c
(207-36)
=-,--_.::,3,--_
(20737)
V~
~ 0.003
/J, = 0.16
II
where
(0",/ )' +0. 15

/ IJ,
I'll = 0.9 for Iri;'lngu!nr (3-legged) towers, and 1.0 for other
conditions. A~I = 1.0 for service-level condition, and 0.R3
for strength-level co ndit ion. Bulo is the average tower
width, or average of the base and top widths, or no and nil
respective ly, fo r tapered to wers. km shall be (aken as 2.6
III
(20738)
is the serv ice le ve l natural frequency.
The structu ral dampi ng mlio fl, m stre ngt hlevel co ndition
for poles, masts, trussed towers, billboards. Hnd the like,
may be taken as
~ 0.004
/J , = 0.23
Iz
(20739)
whe re III is the st rc ngth lcvc l natura l frequ e ncy.
for billboards, poles, masts, an d non-tapering lowers and

ol her stru ctures.
Alternmi ve ly. for frcc- slanding lowers or billboard

Sl ruCltirc.s ill the Philippines withoul <luached antennas or
cab les.
Plan-shape
Triangular
Others
Service-level
Strength-level
81/11
91/11
68111
75/11
For antellna towers or electrica l tra nsmissioll lowers in the

Philippincs wilh I1mss ratio IIIr a'i 5% (or approximalcl y 3
ilII3Chcd alltennas):
Plan.shape
SgUiJrC
Triallgul:lr
Service- level
8111z
7]111
The aerodynamic damping ratio fJ" at se rvice-l ev:'!

condition for lrussed lOwers, billboard s, and the like. In:.
be taken ,1S
/J"
\vherc
For poles. mas Is. sol id signs, guyed stnJclurcs. cables. and
other structures. thc naturill rrc(luellcy mily be estimated
from rull -sc ale IllC<lsurcrncnts or compuler sim ulation
taking inlo 'h;<.:(JU IlI the clTect of tension -o nly clement
propc l1ies and olher 'Iltachlllc nts.
0.007
",
~ 0 .007
120740)
is the service level natural frequen cy.
'nlC <lcrodynamic damping nllio fl.. at :';(reng{h~k"';::1

condi tion for trussed lOwers. bi ll boards. :JIld the like. m;,y
he laken as
~ 0.007
for Wind Zone i or 2.
or for V> 162 kph,
(207" I)
fl" = 0 .0 11
",
Strength -level
68111
6111z
207.8. 1.3 Pol es, M '1StS, SuJid Signs, Guyed Structures,

Cahles, .1IId O ther Structur'cs
/1 1
fl. = O.lK~) ~ 0 .007
ror
Wind
",
or for V :S 162 kph
w here
Zone
3,
(207. ;.<)
"l is the strength-Icvel na::lr,,1 frcquency.
The acrodYllamic damping ratio /1" Illily be ohtilincd fmm

a more detailed analysis with the ilpproprialc hasic wind
speed Vas parallle(er. the hourly mean wind speed from
E<j. 207-14. a Illode shape exponcilt of ].0. unit mass at
the base, a nd so lid il y ra ti o I:: a nd drag force cncfTicicllt Ci
evaluated at the cffc(:l ivc heigh t.
Nill ional Stru clul',tl Code of lhe Phil i pplrH:!~ (-) :! , Edition Volul'll n 1
2 -3~
CHI\PTE'~
2 Minimum Design l.oeds
The 100ili damping ratio ,Bshall be taken as
fl =fl, + fl. ,,; 0.06
(207-43)
American Society of Testing and Materials (AS'j'M)

ASTM Inlemalional
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
207.9 Consensus Sland:t ..ds a nd O lher Referenced

J)(IClIlll c n(s
This section lisls the consensus slandards and other

documents which .Ire
section :
adOp(l~d
by reference within thi s
Assor..iiltion of Stru ctural Enginer:m.; of the Philippines
-....
Transverse
-....
Longitudinal
WALLS AND ROOFS

Note.s:
2.
3.
,I.
5.
6,
7,
R
Pn_~SItH.f ,\'/10""1 (11'(, applied (0 I/:e /101';:011101 fllld n~rlical proiectlO/l.s. for ('xpo.ntl"(' n. ell Ii =- 9 m. I .. = I ,f), om! K" ~ J.0. t ft/iust /()
mile!" t'omlilious usmg Equalioll 207-1 ,
111l! (oad pa[Wr'II.f ,tltOlt'1I slwll he applied 10 ca(," ("orner of/he building ill lui'll n.t the reference c<mler. (S<'!: Figure 20710;.
For III(' c/".tigll o/1I1t' fungi/lIllil/ol M WFRS use
0, alit/locale the wile ElF. Gill bOlluc/ory a llhc' mid-/(,l/gIII of lite buildillg.
Load cases I (l1/(1 ]lII l/sl he checked Inr 25 < 8 ;S 45, Load case 2 of 2Y' is provided OIl (V fo r i llll'f 1W/(1tioll betll'l.'efl 25 0 /0 30,
PIllS alld mimls signs sigllify pressures acting IQ II'f) I't/ and away /ro m the p roje<.'{ed sur/aces. n!,I"pecl i l'<'Iy.
For ro(~{s lopC',~ o lllerihal! those shown, lineCJr illtl!l]m!(1lioll i,~ p ermifled ,
The IOta! horizoll/a//oad shall 1101 be less IIl(ln (hat determined by assllming /1s c () ill zones B & D,
nil! zrme pr('ss lJl'es I'cpresen / the/allowing:
1/0rizOIllai pn).~,wrl' ;on's ,- Sum o/Ihe windward atul /eewllrd f/(~t {.W/Il q{ illferna/ (1l1d external) pressures 011 \Jer/ h:al
proje-clioll 0/'
e'"
oj 1\'0/1
C - In ferior 1011(' O/ lI'CJII
IJ ., 1;'1/{1 :one (~rrooJ
D - I nferior W il l! of roof
A - t.:' ld w ne
y,
/0,
V('rl h'o//m'sslII'c Z(JII("f - N e! (.~lIm O./ill /I 'nIa} lind eXl er/lfIl) pres,wrl's 01/ horizonlo! projali(U/ (~f'
E - /;'m/ :!OII(' of lI'i"dl\'(lr(/ roo/
G - 11I1('rior 10m' 0/ wjllt/ward rmif
r -, /;'1/(1 ZO/l(' o./il'cward roof
I I- Inferior zOlle o/It'cword 1'00./
11'11,'1'<' =01/1' I~" rlr (J /il/I,\' /Ifl (/ nJ()/ overhang on the windward ,tid,' of thl' /milding, U,H' Emt (111(/ G OII for the prt~,nllrt!
/lOri:OIl(lIl jlJ'(Jjl" IUJl/I!f lire (wC'r /tmrg, OverJumg,{ (III ,he I('cwftnl (IIUI,fitle edgt',f shl/II hal'(' ill(' luuir :Of/(' prl'~.flln> (fJlJ'Ii~'d,
NmfllioJl:
II +,
II/{
If) IIl' I'('l'lrl II} le/ul horizontal di"'(~J/sioll or f) 411, whic/rel'f!r i,f slII/IIft,,-. hrt! /lilt I('.{,r ,11m/ ('il/lrr 4% HI it'U,I" /lIJri:mll(l1
or 0 , 9111 ,
ML'(II/ rmd'/lI'iglil, m, ,'X('('pi ,hal em'e I!n);"/.fhalllw !ls('dln/' mq((lIIgitx < In,
AlIl::le (?(,,//IIi(' (?(r()t~{Jhll" '10";;11111(/1. degrc('5,
tlilJJ('II,1'flnI
011
Figure 207 J Design Wino PrcsslllcS on

Wall s and Roo fs of Enclosed Buildings w ith h"; 18m,
Main Wind - Force Resisting System -- Method J
1h
National Stru ctural Code of the PI1ilippin es 6 Edition Volum e 1
2-35
2-36
CHAPTEF< 2 .-. Minimum Design Loads
Adjustment Factor
for Building Height and Exposure A
..__.
Mean roof
height (Ill)
4.5
6.0 ..
7.5
9.0
11.0
12.0
13.7
15.2
16.8
18.0
--~
..-.---,.
-~-.-.-
-~~-.---.~-
-.~-
1. 00
1.00
1. 00
1.00
1.05
1.09
1.12
1.16
--_._._--1.19
1.22
Exposure
C
D
1.21 --.. .
1.47
1.29
1.55
1.35
1.61
1.40
1.66
1.45
1.70
1.74
1.49
1.53
1.78
1.56
- -1.81
--1.84
1.59
1.62
-~~
~
-~~--
WALLS AND ROOFS
Basic
Wind
Roof
Speed
Overhangs
Vcrtical Pressures, kPa

...
-~
_..._ - -
---
(kril)
Eoil
G Oh
ISO
-0.79
-0.79
-0.45
-0.48
-0.55
-0.55
-0.35
-1.1 I
-1.1 I
-~
-0.37
-0.79
-0.52
-0.55
-0.40
-1.11
-0.87
25
-~-------
250
..-
30 to 45
-.----.----~~-
o to 5
-.----~--
10
._.._._---_15
.. _-_.
20
Figure 207-2 Design Wind Pressures on

Walls and Roofs of Enclosed Buildings with h $; ! 8m,
Main Wind-Force Resisting System _. Method I
Association of StrlJcturai Engineers of the Philippines
-0.87
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum De sign Load s
Flat Roof
Hip Roof (r<O :5 27")
Gable Roof (0::;7")

[
-]
2-37
Interior Zones
Rook :zoo. 1 I w.... . z.on. "
Gable Roof (7< 045)

. . . Corner Zones
End Zones
I!!III
RcloOf . Zone 21 Waite Ion. 15
~ . z.oo. 8
WALLS AND ROOFS

NOles:
,_
Pn's."ul'I' sholl''' art! applh'ti llorll/(//Iu ,11(' .\'/Irftu:e. for ('XI'(/,\ /I/"(: /J.
Eqllllfirlll 207 1.
flf
h "" 9111,
I~. <.~
1.0. and K:. = 1,0, A ((jll.tf 10 of/WI" cclIJdiljolls IIsing
l'llis (lm/lllinlls siN,II'v .I'igllf/j' pressu re.l" (/eli,,}.! 10 1l"(/ l'd (l ml (tIl'IIY from {he .vllif aces. I'f!spec lil/' /y.
3.
4.
FOI" hip roo/i' wilh
e::; 25. lone 3 shall he 11'l'11I(~d as lOll e 2.
For 1'{li'l'I i" I' I"ind {/I'f'(I.I' h<.'/ \\ '(,(,II (hose ~ i \'(m . \'o /lle may he "lItl'l]l o/a(('d, o{/!('rwiSI' IIS(, fhe 1'' ','lI(: a,\'socia/ed will, (he lower e!ll'cli\lc wind
(/r('C/.
5_
Nllffllhm :
1/ ' "
II} pern" 11 oj lellsi horizol/tlll

n.9111.
dim"/Is ;oll 01"
()Ab. 1\"/tidw l'('r is xfI/(/lIer,
bill 11111 I(':ro,f
dum (, j/her 4 % o/ll'dS! horiZ(}lIIul dimel/sio/l m '
11ll{1t6glt!. III m. I'XC'('/l1 thllt C'dVi' h (I.~hf shalf ht' lI.w dIiw rO<~(lI /1glf!'" < /0,
All}.!'!' n/p/ml(' u(l'(wffrl)/11 Iwn:rJ/lIUI. rlt'W'j'I '.r,
"
., M('(II1
=-
Figu re 207~3 Design Wi nd Pressures on Wa lls & Roof of Enclosed

Bll ildings with II S I R Ill , Componen ts and Cladd ing - Meth od I
th
National Struc tural Coda o f th e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
,.
2-38
CH A PTEF~
2 ._. Minim ul11 Design Load s
Adjustment Factor fo r
B tilIdlO gs II. eIgHt

I an dE:. xposure, Ie
Mean roof
Exposure
heigh! (m)
B
.. C
4.5 ."_M.
1.00
1.2 1
6.0
1.00 .1.29
1.00
7.5
1.35
1.00
9.0
l AO
11 .0
1.05
IA5
1.49
12.0
1.09
13.7
1.12
1. 53
15.2
1. 16
1.56
16.8
1.1 9
1.59
1. 22
1.62
18.0
D
I A7
1.5 5
1.6 1
1.66
1.70
1.74
1.78
1. 8 1
1.84
1.87
WALLS AND ROOFS

Ne! Desig n Wind Pressure, /J'Kh kP" (Exp osu re 13 at " =I0 111 with 1= 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effective
Roof
Basic Wind Speed V (kph )
wind
Ang le
Zone
area
(0)
150
200
250
(m' )
I
I
I
I
0<0
<7
--
1.0
2.0
4.5
9.5
2
2
2
... - -- 1.0
9.5
3
3
3
1.0
2.0
4 .5
.l
9.5
- 2.0
4.5
0.3 0
0.29
0.26
0.24
0.30
0.29
0.26
0.2 4
0 .30
0.29
0.26
-"._"_._
0.24
-075
-0.73
0.71
-0.69
0.55
0.51
0.47
0044
0.55
0.51
OA7
OA4
-.......:L~ ___..0 55 - - ._- -0.55
0.67
-2 .09
-2.03
-1.96
- 1.91
.. -3.50
-3.1 3
-2.64
-2.26
0. 85
0.79
0.73
-0. 8 1
0:44
OA4
0.85
079
.. 0.73
0.67
-1.90
-1 .57
1.1 4
0.55
0.51
0.4 7
0.44
0.55
0.5 1
0.47
0.4 4
0.85
0.79
0. 73
---0 .67
-I. I 2
-0.95
.---- ----0.81
0 .5 1
0047
0.5 1
0.4 7
-5.27
-4.37
----3.1_..7,--
Figure 20 7 3;). (co l1t 'd) - Design Wind Pressu res on Walls & Roo f ofE tlc loscd :
l3 uildings with It 5" 18 Ill , Components and Cladding ... Me thod I
Associa tion or S(ruClllfaJEngineers of the Phllippill!'!S
-2 .26
Net Des ign Wind Pressure, POOh kPa (Exposure B at II =10 In with J = 1.0 and KJ = 1.0)
Effective
Roof
Basic Wind Speed V (kph)
wind
Angle
Zone
area
(deg)
250
150
200
(m')
I
I
I
1.0
2.0
4.5
O.4J
0.40
0.34
-0.69
-0.67
-0.64
0.78
0.71
0.62
0.78
0.71
0.62
1.20
1.10
0.95
-1.9 1
- 1.86
-1.78
9.5
0.30
-0.62
0.55
0.55
0:85
-1.73
2
2
2
1.0
2.0
4.5
0.43
0.40
0.34
-1. 20
- 1.10
-0.97
0.78
0.71
0.62
0.7 8
0.71
0.62
1.20
1.10
0.95
-3.33
-3.06
-2.71
9.5
0.30
-0.88
0.55
0.55
0.85
-2.44
3
3
3
1.0
2.0
4.5
0.43
0.40
0.34
-1.77
-1.65
-1.50
0.78
0.71
0.62
0.78
0.71
0.62
1.20
1.10
0.95
-4.92
-4.60
-4. 18
9.5
0.30
-1.39
0.55
0.55
0.85
-3.86
1
I
1
1.0
0.69
2.0
4.5
0.67
0.64
-0.75
-0.7 1
-0.66
1.23
1.20
1.1 5
1.23
1.20
1.15
1.91
1.86
1.78
-1.98
-1.84
9.5
0.62
-0.62
1.12
1. 12
1.73
-1.73
2
2
2
1.0
2.0
4.5
0.69
0.67
0.64
-0.88
-0.84
-0.79
1.23
1.20
1.1 5
1.23
1.20
1.15
1.91
1.86
1.78
-2.44
-2.33
-2. 19
9.5
0.62
-0.75
1.11
1.11
1.73
-2.09
3
- -_
.
3
3
3
1.0
2.0
4.5
0.69
0.67
0.64
-0.88
-0.84
-0.79
--- 1.23
1.20
1.1 5
1.23
1.20
1. 15
1.9 1
1.86
1.78
-2.44
-2.33
-2.19
9.5
0.62
-0.75
1.1 2
1.12
1.73
-2.09
1.0
0.75
0.72
1.35
1.28
1.2 1
1.14
2.09
1.99
1.87
1.77
-2 .26
-2 .17
-2.05
-1.95
e > 7 to
27
0 > 27
1o 45
Wall
-2.09
4
4
4
4
4.5
9.5
0.67
-0.78
-0.74
0.64
-0.70
1.35
1.28
1.21
1.14
46.5
0.56
-0.62
1.01
1.01
1.56
-1.73
1.35
1.28
1.2 I
1.14
1.35
1.28
1.2 I
1. 14
2.09
1.99
1.87
1. 77
-2.79
-2.60
-2.36
-2.17
1.0 I
1.0 I
1.56
5
..-.--_.-
". -
2.0
1.0..
-_.... _--_
..
5
2.0_-_._.--_.
- -5
4.5
-.
5
9.5
--_.
5
46.5
-0.8 1
_-_
-0.26
.
0.72
~_ .024.. __
"- - 0.67
-0.22
0.64
-0.20
."-",
..0.75 .
0.56
-0.62
Figurc 207-3h (conl'd) - Design Wind Pressures on Walls & Roof of Enc losed
Buildings wi!h " .:S I R 111, Components <lIld Cladding - Method I
Nation;;)1Stru ctural Code of the Ph ilippines 6 Edition Vo lume 1

th
-1.73
2-39
2-40
CHAPTE:!, 2 - Minimum Design l.oads
V(Z)
vrZ)
Speed-up
V{Z)
X(Upwind)
X (Downwind)
-Spe
X (Do
~~-
Hil
ESCARPMENT
2-D RIDGE OR 3-D AXISYMMETRICAL H
..-
._--- K, Multiplier
HlL"
0.2
0.25
0.30
ro:-:lS
OAO
OA5
.0.50
3-0
Axisym.
2-0
2-0
Ridge
Escarp
0.29
0.36
0.43
0.51
0.58
0.65
0.72
0.17
0.21
0.26
0.30
0.34
--0.38
OA7
OA3
0.53
._---_.
K3 Multiplier
K, Multiplier
xlI~h
Hill
0.21
0.26
0.32
0.37
0.42
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
All
Other
Cases
2-0
Escarp
1.00
0.88
0.75
0.63
0.50
0.38
0.25
0.13
0.00
..
1.00
0.67
0.33
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
_-_.
-~
0.00
---_._-
2-0
zlLh
Ridge
2-0
Escarp
-.~----
__
I.
For m!l/('.\' HIL,. and :JL,. other {liall (ho.H' shoWI/, lineal' il1lerpolalioll is perm/lied.
2.
IfIL;, > 0.5, (lSSIIIII(, /-1Il.;, ,":0 O.5jbr ('valuating K,l1lJd slIh.I'(i!lIfe 211/or ,.,Jor {'will/Olillg K., alld K.lMliltipli('rs al"e based 011 rhe (lSSl/lI1ptiOIl rllal approoches 1111' hill OJ" escarplII(,lI( a/ollg fhe dircctioll oj"maXi/llllfl1 stope.
4,
{:O/"
Nolafion"
!l '" lIeighl o!"hifl or escalpmellt re/(I{il'(' 10 Ihe IIpwind /erroill, III,

/,1, c, /Ji.v/ollce IIfI\\'illli o(eres/ (0 where (he d((rerence ill g/'Olind del'atioll is hal(thc heighl o(lli/! or
K I ~~ "-oclor 10 (U'COIIIl(./(){" shape <?({opographic/(!(I(/I/"e alld maximum .Ipeed-lip e(T('cl,
K: ,.~ Fac(or (I) IICCOIlllt/Of' reduclion ill .Ipeed-lip with dislance up1l'illd or dOll'lIl1'illd (!(c/"esl.
K, '" Factor /0 ac('olilltf()/" reductioll ill ,Ipeed,up wilh hdghl ah()\'(' /oud terraill.
X
/)islilllce (1I/)lI'll1<1 01' dOll'l1l1'illd) /i'Olll Ihe ("J'esl to fhe hili/ding site, III.
Z " /feight olio\'(' /01'0/ ground Icl'('3. III
I'
:~
Axisym.
Hill _._
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
0.67
0.10
0.74
0.78
0.61
0.45
0.20
0.55
OA7 -- .. 030
030
0.41
0.37
0.20 .0.40
0.30
0.22
0.29 ._-- - -0.14
0.50 ----_
.. . -----0.09
0.17
0.22 ..- --_.0.60
0.17
0.06
0.70
0.12
0.14
0.09
0.80
- ,0.04
,--0.11
0.03
0.90
0.07
1.00
0.08 _._ .._0.02
.. _---~ ---_.
0.02
0.00
0.01
1.50
(1.00
0.00
0.00
2.00
NOlt'S:
J.
3-0 -.-
('.ICU/"PIIH'II/, II!
j{orizon/ol aflcl/I{(IfiOIl flu'for.
/" ., lIeighl alll'/!II(1lionfllC/ol".
Figurc 207-4: Topographic Factor, K/I _. Mcthod 2
Equations:
K, determined from table below
II
,f
Parameters for Speed-Up over Hills and Escarpments

K,I(HlL,,)
Hill Shape
Exposure
Upwind
)'
of Crest
D
B
C
2-dimensional ridges (or valleys
1.30 1.45 1.55
1.5
3
with negative H in K,I(HlL,)
2-dimensional escarpments
0.75 0.85 0.95 2.5
1.5
3-dimensional axisym. hill
0.95 1.05 1.15
4
1.5
I'
Downwind
Figure 207-4 (cont'd): Topographic Factor, K" - Method 2
NJlionn! Structural Coele:: of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1

111
of Crest
1.5
4 ,
1.5
2-4 1
2-42
Enclosure Classification
Open Buildings
Partially Enclosed Buildings
..
Enclosed Buildings
Ge,
0.00
+0.55
-0.55
+0.18
-0.1 8
WALLS AND ROOFS
NOles:
I.
Plus and minus signs s ign ify pressures acting toward and away from the internal sUI/aas.
respectively.
2.
3.
Values of GCp' shall be used with q, or q" as specified in Section 207.5.12.

Two cases shall be considered to determine 'he critical load requirements for the appropriate
condition:
(i) a positive value ojGCpi applied to all ifltemal sw/aces
(ii) a Ilegative value o/GCpi applied to all internal sUl/aces
Figure 207-5 Internal Pressure Coefficients, GCpi on

Walls and Roofs of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed and Open Buildings for all Heights
Main Wind-Force Resisling System/Components & Cladding - Method 2
As sociA ti on of StruCILJfal Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTE R 2 - M inlll1l1lll Design
PlAN
Loads
2-43
ELEVATION
GABLE, HIP ROOF
-_ q,r;Cp
1-
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
MONOSLOPE ROOF (NOTE 4)
q"Gc"
L----
PLAN
----J
ELEVATION
MANSARD ROOF (NOTE 8)

WALLS AND ROOFS
figure 207-6 External Pressure Coefficients, C" on
Wal ls and Roofs of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings for all Heights
Main Wind-Force Resisting System - Method 2
Nation,)1 Structural Code of the Pililippines 6'" Edition Volum e 1
2,44
CHAPTEH 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
~---
Wall Pressure Coefficients, C

LIB
Co
All values
0.8
0-1
-0.5
Leeward Wall
-0.3
2
>4
-0.2
Side Wall - - - Ali values
-0.7
Surface
Windward Wall
Usc With
Ci,
q"
Oil
---------------,-_.
RoofPrcSSUfe Coefficients, C" fOf use with
Wind
Direction
----_.
-~-~--
Normal to
ridge for ()
< 10 and
Parallel to
ridge for
all 0
_..._------
----IT<-~)
hlL
_ _ "m
Leeward
Windward
Angle, () de )rces Angle, IJ Idegrees)

> 60 10
10 15
>2 a
45
IS
20
10
25
30
35
--_.
-0.7
-0.5
-OJ
-0.5
-0.3
-0.2
-0.2
-0.6
0.0
::: 0.25_.. -0.18
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.010
--05 -0.5
0.0
-0.9
-0.7
-0.4
-0.3
-0.2
-0.2
-0.6
0.5
-0.18 ._-.:2.lL _ 0.0'
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.010
--1.0
-0.7
-0.7
-0.6
-OJ
-0.2
0.0'
-0.5
-0.6
-1.3 **
0.0
-0.18
:: I.Q_ -0.18
-0.18
0.2 __ ~ 02. __ 00111
...
Horizontal distance from
*
Value is provided for interpolation purposes,
Cp
- windward edge
o to hl2
-0.9, -0.18
::: 0.5
hl2
to
II
_
-0.9,-QJL
1-------..
II to 211
-0.5, -0.18
** Value can be reduced linearly with arca over
> 211
which it is applicable as follows: ---_.-0.3, -0.18
Reduction Factor
Area 1m')
.
.
.1.3 , -0.18
to h12
< 9
1.0 .. _-._1.0
23
0.9
---------,-_._---> h/2
-0.7, 0.18
>
93
0.8 ---,-..- ----- -----." .... ,.,--------------..-----.
~.--.-,----
Normal to
ridge for ()
:: 10
Cfll
0"'0*
~---
-----~
__
'"
------.-----~.,---.-
"
-.---.-~
WALLS AND ROOFS

1.
2,
3,
4.
5,
rI.
7,
FIllS alld lIIillllS sigl1.\' sigll({I' pre,I'slIn's (lcling IOw(/rd (llId (1\\'oyJi'ollllhe .I'll/fixes, respeclively,
Linear interpolalion is permil(edJiJr value.t (~f LIB: hlL (llId () othel' Ihall shown. Interpolation shall only he ('wTied out b('tween )lo/ues o(the salll('.I'i
Where no valu(' o(lhe same sigll is given, assume O,OIbr illl<'I]JOlalio/l purposes.
Where 111'0 values ()I(~, are fisled, {hi.\' illdic(lies Ihal the windw(lrd roofslope is subjecled 10 eilher posilive or lIegalille pressures (lnd Ihe r()(!(SlnlCI,
shall he desigllcd/i:n- bOlh conditiOlls. II/IC'/potalioll for inlermcdiale ratios olhlL ill Ihis case shall ollly he carried oul belweel/ (~, l'allle,l' (~f like ,I'(f!,11
For mOllos/ope roo/i', {,lIlire rQ(~(,wljiJce i,l' eilher a windward OJ' leeward sill/ace.
Forjlexihfe huildingl' 115e appropriale G, a.l delermilled by Section 207,5,8.
Reier 10 Figure ]07- 7(i)r dOilies (llld Figure 207-8(i)/' arched /'oof~
NOlalion:
fJ ~ I IOl'i20nla/ dimension o(/Jlli/dillg, ill m, IIlNI,wred normal 10 willd direclioll
L Iloriwlllal dimC'nsion of buildillg, ill m, measured paJ'alfd 10 wind direclioll.
1/ M('(l1I r()(?( heighl in III, ex('c/ilihol ('()I'(' heighl ,dl(dl hI' us(,d/or 0 :S /() degn't's,
I- ,-- lIeighl (lho\!(' grollnd. m.
(!
,\'
III
GII.I'I
{:IT('CfJiICIOI'
({:, ,qlo
VelocilY pn'x,I'lII'(', Nlml. ('wlll/llled (II /'("I,/)('Clilll' height.
f)
Angle ofll{(lJI{' o(roor(rolll horizonlal, degrees.
For IIWll.Hlnl roo/i'. the lop horiuJ!/1a1 sl/rfrU'(' (llId feew(Jrd il1cfil1('(/ Sll/jiU'1' ,I'half 17(' Irealed as lecw(lrd sllIjiwes/i'olll Ihe lah/(',
Fxn'jlls/ilr MWFR,<,,' ',I' ollhe l'oo(co/lsiSlillf: (~/mo/JIelll /'c,I'islingfmlllcs, IiiI' 10101 horizonlo! shear shalf 1/01 h(' 1("I's Ihll/l Iha! d('/erlllilled hi' Ii,', '('('{il
willd(hrc('s Oil l'oo(,wr(ace,I'.
For mo/slopes gn'lIll'1' Ihal! 80", II.1'C (~, 0.8
Figure 207-6(cont'd) - External Pressure Coeflicicnts, e p on

Walls and Roofs of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings [c)r all Heighls
Main Wind Force Resisting System -- Method 2
CHAPTEF~
1
A (h 0 10 =025)
'\
A (hoID=O) \
+0. 8
1\
+0.4
;;;-
~
7~
7
/
"
----- ____ ""
,-- ----::::.
-/-,
>!
1/
/
\
~1,6
,,
"
A (holD 2: 1.0)
C (h"ID=O)
----
/ V
1/
,,
2~45
:?J'l --0
+0.'
2 -- Minimum Design Loads
/
"I,
- -j-/
C (holD 2:0.5)
"~ V
--- -
B (h"ID=O)
B (hoID2:0.5)
--~
~1.8
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.'
0.'
Ratlo of Rise to Diameter, flO

Noles:
1.
2.
1.
5.
{i
7.
8
Two load cases shafl be considered'

Case A. C,. l'{Ilucs between A and Band belween IJ arid C shaff be dl~/erll/il/ed by linear interpolalion along arcs 011 (he dome parallel 10 rhe lI'illd
directioll;
Case B. C" shall be Ihe cons(anl value of A/or ():5 25 degrees, and shall be determined by linear intelpolalion/i"Ol11 25 degrees 10 Band from B 10 ,.
Values del1o(e C~, to /;I~ used wilh q(ho ~-/) where hI) +fis the height al the top 1~{tlW dOllJl'.
PIlls and millllS signs signijj' pressures acting toward alld away/rom the sw:{acl's. respectively
(~, is COllstall1 0/1 the dome slIrfilCefor orcs o(cirdes perpendicular to fhe wind direction; /or ('.wmp/c, lhe (lrC" jills.I"ing Ihrough IJ-/J,/J and a/I II!',
p(lmlld 10 B-I1-/1,
"
For wI/lies o/Ir,lD IW(I\eell{flro.I'1' hl"led on Ihe graph ('UI"I'('.I', 1i1l('(J1" illierpo/a(ioll sha/l be j1amil(l'd.
(I = 0 degrees on dOllie spring line, () ~, 90 degrees af dl)lIIl' cellter fOp point, lis measured{rom spring lilli' {o fop
The 100al horizol1(a/ shear shall !lot be less (hall that delermined hy netlecting wind(r)/"(YI' all ro(lsJII/ocl's
For/1D value'S /I'SS (hall 0.0.5. lise Figure 207-6.
'Figure 207-7 External Pressure Coefficients, C~) for loads 011 Domed Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures for all Heights
Main Wind- Force Resisting System - Method 2
th
246
CHIIPTE H 2- Minimum Design Loads
ARCHED ROOFS
Conditjons
Roof on elevated structure
Roof springing from grou nd

level
Rise- ta-span
ratio, ,.
C,
Center half
0 < ,.< 0.2

0.2 < r < 0.3
0.3 < r< 0.6
Windward
quarter
-0.9
1.5,. - 0.3
2.75/'-0.7
-0.7 -,.
-0.7 - r
0.7 - r
Leeward
quarter
-0.5
-0.5
-0.5
0<,.~0.6
1.4,.
-0.7 - ,.
-0.5
Wlrell tlse rise-Io-spar! ratio is 0.2.$r:S 0.3. alternate coefficients given by 6r-2.1 .thoU also be used/or ,he
windward Quarter.
Notes:
I.
2.
J.
4.
Values listed are/or Ihe '/cferminOliOIl oj average loads all main wincl force resisting systems.
Plus mId mimi.! signs Signify pressures actillg IOlVord and alVoy from the sill/aces. respectively.
For wind directed pamllcllo the (lxis oJlhe are/J. use pressure cocjficiellfsfrom Figllre 107-6 with wind dil'e('(ed parallel 10
ridge.
For components and cladding: ( I) AI roo/perimeter, use Ihe exlemal pressure coelJiciellls ill Figure 207/ ,lI'ilh 0 h(Jscd
on spring line slope and (2)/or remail/ing roof areas. lise exlernal pressure coefflcielJ(J' of this table mrdtll)/ictl hy 0.87.
Figure 207 -8 External Pressure Coeffic ients, Cp for loads on Arched Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures for all He ig ht s
Main Wind- Force Resisting System/Compo nents and Cladding - Method 2
Association of Structura l Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTER 2 - Minimulll Design Loads
247
O. 75P >'Y
0. 75Pwx
CASE 1
CASE 3
'I
0.563P"",
0. 75P"",
MT ~ 0. 75 (p"" + Pu ) Bx ' x
"" = O. I5B x
MT = 0.75 (P",,+ P.r) B T. ,
e, -
,1
,,---r-r-r-,-,
I'-1- r- -r- -1~rT- r- r-t-'
0. 75P"
0. 75Pwx
Br
I'
0.563 P,.J(
0.563 Pwx L-L -.L...l-...L.....L...JO563 Rr-r
MT = 0.563 (Pwx + PIX) Bxex+ 0.563 (Pwr + PH) Brer
O.15B,
CASE 2
CASE 4
Case 1. Full design wind pressure acting 011 the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the structure,
considered separa tely along each principal axis.
Case 2. Th ree quaners of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each princi pal axis of
the structure in conjunct ion with a torsional moment as shown, co nside red separately for each principal axis.
Case 3. Wincl loading as defi ned in Case 1, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of lhe specified value.
Case 4. Willd loadi ng as defined in Case 2, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
NOll's '
1.
/){'.~igll wind pre.Hures/n/' windward and Ic('word fa ce.( slta" be d('lcrmilJcd in a/'{'on/ rlllct! wilh IIII' provi.riolls o(Sec/s. 10 7.5. 11.2. 1 {1m/
l fil. 5.ll.l . .l (IS (lflplirah/e l or buildings 01 (Ill hcighlJ.
/Ji(lj.!I'(/I".~ .f/lOlI' plan vi{' w'f olh/.i/dins:.
Nolo/iflll :
I.
dc.rigll fln's.W/l'e (JCfi11f; ill Ihe x. y prillC/lm/ (lxi.f. nspl'(f/\'('~)'.

/. ('('lIardlucl' d(,\' i~1I pre.uw'(' fiNing in tlu~ x. y prine/jNII (lx i..-. rt!.ljJt'ctively.
(' ((' 1', ('1) -- /;'c'('('II{ricity/iw liJe x, y prillcil)(l{ (lxis oJtl1t! structure. f'(!.\pt:cliw ()'.
A"I ,- TO/ :~il/lJiI! /IIOIII/'Itt pel' IIl/il heiglrt (lClilll,: abolll a \'l'rl/ca! axi.~ Il/lhe blli/ding.
Por I'
I'll)
PI r P I1
~. Willi/ward/aCt!
' ;'
Figure 2079 Design Wind Load Cases for All H eights

Main Wind-Force Resis ting System - Method 2
Natlonat Structural Code of lI,e Philippines 6 ' Edition Volu me 1
248
CHAPTEH 2 ... Minimum Design Loads
......
(~ ./
.....
...
... ,-....
...
~ .. 0
-- ,
"
/ ..
/ ~~
~.~
.~
Transverse Direction
(j)
....
Longitudinal Dlrectlon
BASIC LOAD CASES
Figure 20710 External Pressure Coefficients. Ge,.on Low Rise Walls & Roo[,
of Enclosed. Partially Enclosed Buildings with" ,; I R m.
Main Wind Force Resistin g System Method 2
I\ssoci8\ion of Stru ctural Engineers of 1118 Pililippines
Roof
Angle 0
(degrees)
0-5
20
30-45
'----90
...
2-49
Buildin Surface
I
IE
2E
3E
4E
0.40
0.53
0.56
0.56
-0.69
-0.69
0.2 1
0.56
-0.37
-0.48
-0.43
-0.37
-0.29
-0.43
-0.37
-0.37
-0.45
-0.45
-0.45
-0.4 5
-0.45
-0.45
-0.45
-0.45
0.6 1
0.80
0.69
0.69
-1.07
- 1.07
0.27
0.69
-0.53
-0.69
-0.53
-0.48
-0.43
-0.64
-0.4 8
-0.48
No!l'.\" :
I.
1.
PIII.~ om' //lilli/X signs signiJjl pr(!.\'slIrc:.' (K/illg (oward and (Ill'oy/rom Ihe slIrjiu.y!.f, re.rpeOillcly.
3.
711(' bllildillg must be designed for all wind directions rising Ih(, R loading patterns .f/IOWI/.
For l'(lIU1~:"
ImiMi/1; {:orlll'r
other thl/1/
ill turllS
11m.\'(:
show". iiI/cor illfl'lpolofiolJ ;.1' pCl'lllif((!(J,
nil! load pllltems
are applht! 10 l'lll:h
as tile Reforellce Corner.
Comhil/o/iOlls o.f eXlema/ IIml illlcmal pre.ts/m!s (see Figure 1075) shall be evalllnted a.f reqllired 10 obtain lite mOM .revere
londings.
For 111(' torsional/Dad cases showlI below. the pres.tures ii, lOlles desiglltl/ed wilh a "'" (1 T. 2T, IT. 4T) shaff be 25% of Ihe full
desigll willd prC.fsures (zolle J. 2. 3. 4).
6.
xce}Jlioll : Qlle -"ton'), buildings with len Ilion or equal 10 10 III buildillgs fWO slories or less framed wilh light !rollle CO lls/mel ion.
lIIul huildillgs fwo swries or Jess dcsignated willi fll'xible diaphragms lIeed not be designed for Ille larsiOllof lond cases.
7.
TOl'siall(lllomlillg sha/J apply fa of( eight basic load palle,."s 1I.<:illg Ih e figllres below applied at cflch referellce comer.
8.
Excepi for momt!lII.resistillg frames. tile total horizonlal sllMr shaJl IIot be less Ihon Ihat determilled by lIeglecting willd farces 011
raul sllI/ace.f.
9.
For the (/t'.<:ign of tfte MWr"RS providing laleml rt'Sislanc(! i" a dil'eCli(J1I parallel f() a rit/ge. lille' orlor flat roO/f. lise 0 =- 0 0 atld
loca/e flte la/IC 213 boundfll)' (// rhe midlcl/glll olthe Imildillg.
10. The /'oolpr(!ssure coefficicfJ! GC~f. II'hell neg(llil'e ill zolle 2 or 2E. shall be applied ill zOlle 212 E. for a dis/(UJce [ram the edge 0/1'00/
equal 10 0.5 limes (he horizontal dimension 0/ rhe building paml"" 10 Ihe directioll ollhe MWFRS being design ed or 2.5 lim('s Ihe
efll'e heigill. hr. at Ihe windward 11'(1/1. whichever is less: lite remainder of zone 212 E. extending 10 {he ridge line .l'lwll usc rhe
preSS/Ire coe.Oicienl GC"lfiJl' zone 3/3 e.
j 1.
No/(uiOIl.'
II ~ 10 pl~I,(,(!1/1 (~f Icasl horiZO/lwl dillle'lI.n'OIl or O,4h, which ever is ,fIIf{//"~r. hut 110/ It!!>.\, IIwll eit/wl' 4% (llc(Jsl horiZOIl/(J1 dimem';rm
5.
01'0.9111
Ii
MlUJII rno/height. m, except thm eIJl'(~ heighl slllJlI be uset/forO :; I(YO

= Angle alp/one ofroo[from horizontal. degrees
<:
Transvel se Direction
On!Ilt'LJdlnal Direction
Torsional Load Cases

LOW-RISE WALLS AND ROOFS
Figure 207- 10 (conI 'd) EXlernal Pressure Coemcien'" GC"ro ll Low-Rise Willis & Roof.,
of Enclosed, Partia ll y Enclosed 8uildings \~ilh II :5' 18 m,
Main Wind-Force Resistin g System-Method 2
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volul11 e 1
).SO
CHAPTEF{ 2 Minimum Design Loads
c.
-1.8
..-"
c:
-1.4
o(!)
.-o
Q)
-1.6
-1.2
~Q)
.0.2
-0
--
f--
---- ----: ~
o
+0.2
C/)
C/)
+0.4
a.
+0.6
c:
L.
+1.0
2X
+1.2
-ro
""-- i'--..
.0.4
:J
(5)
-1.0
.0.6
J.-- c--
+0.8
L----- I----"
0&(5)
0.9
0.1
1.9
4.6
k- -
9.3 18.6
..-
46.5
Effective Wind Area, m
WALLS
NOles:
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
()
Vertical scale denotes G(~ 10 be used lI'illl q;,.

Horizontal scale denotes effective lI'illd area, II!"
PIlls and lIli/IUS signs sign!()' pres.l"Ures acting toward alld away/rom the swflees, respectively.
Each compOllell! shall be designed/or /l/aximulII pO.l'ilil'(, and !legalil'!' pressures.
Jia/!I('s oJG(~Jor wol/s shall be reduced by 10% when 0::; If)"
NO((J(ioll:
,~ 10 percellt of !(,II,V! horizontal dimellsioll or (JAil, \Ihic/)el'('r is sma/la. hut 110t less lholl either 4~-{' {~/ least horizontal
(I
II
dimensio/1 or (), 9 III

Meall J'()(!/heigiJf. III, except {hal {'(lve height shall he IIsed/llrO ::; 10"
C~ Angle (!fplonC? o/n)(!f/rom hori;:oll/(//. degrees.
C"'
Figure 207-! I A External Pressure Coefficients, Gel' for Loads on Walls

of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with h ~ 18 In
Components and Cladding ~ Method 2
-14-
l~l
.-- <V,
- - - 1- - ---,,
-r--------l-- --,,,<v
---" ----1-
,
,
I
I
0:
,0
;1=-L<V""-.1.:-_-""':Oc:..-_-_---'--_-...:"'-_
_
-_-:,-,0~3
..
-3.0
C-
...c-
La
C>
"(5
-2.0
o
f!
:J
''"~"
a.
tv
....c
oQ.
-1.8
f----.-
u
_1.2
-1.0
< .
< .
-:--
..
--
f------.
0
S~&@-
,\
1.1
-1.0
"-
<.,
tv
S .,..... f-0{i)
Q)
.,---'
0.1
)(
:2:1
0.9 1 .9
?'
I~ ~.-
f--
+aJ~
u' ar an g
-2.0
1--'
.,."
5.
C> 3 .0
Q)
!i:Q)
2.S
Rc bf
....
< .
0.1
0 .9
1 .9
1"-
..-
.,.,
...
4.6 9 .3 16.6 46 .5 92.9
Effective Wind Area, m 2
4 .6 9 .3 18.6 46.5 92 .9
EffacUve Wind Area, m 2
GABLE ROOFS 0 :s t
No/e,\".'
Vertical ""ale denotes G (~, to be used lI'ilh q~ .

lIuriU)lff(l1 scali' denote.\" "jlee/iI'c! 1I'illd (Ire(} A, m:,
J.
4.
1'111.,' III/(/ mill1/5 sign.~ signify preS.fUI'('S (I eliflg toward lind tlw(ly Ji'om the .wl'f ilces. rt'.,.,u!c'lil'l!ly.
hoc" COlllpUIII!1If .f/wl/ be d esiglled for IIl(JximUTII pO.filil'C (l11(/III!J;alil'c pre.HUH'.f.
J.
6.
Ftw bllildings SifC't/ within .tf}()SIIr(,
7.
Nolcll;,m:
For 0 S 70 ,
II '"
11(1/11(':.
o/GCI'/rom Figure 20758 .f/mll be used.

co/culaled preSSIIt'{'S sh(lll be nllllfil'li::d l~r 0.85
n.
J(}'l~ O//ClI.d IwriU)IIW/ dilll{'II.~iul/ 0/11 .{llIgle ,sf/lm module or I)
It'O,l'f lU}r;u11ltal dilfl(!lIsimr (~rll.fill~/c+.tp(JIr matlll/f! 0"/

II ,., HI"t' hl' I/:1I1 .t/wll b(' /Ised j i/I' () $ 10"
W <"' IJIII/dillS !lidlh, /1/
4". wlJiclu'ver is .wwller. hilt lIolless thcm dlher" perct'''! of
/It
(}:" Allgll' ~rp/ml(' c~rroojfrmn Jwn;ontlli. dl'grt>es
Fig ure 207-1 113 External Pressure Coem c ient', Ge" on Gable Roofs
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with" " 18 III
Co mponents and Cladding - Method 2
National Stru ctural Code of th~) Philippines 6 'h Edition VOl lHl'l8 1
2-51
252
CHAP TEr< '2 .- Minimum Design l.oads
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CD
(3)1
r
I
1(3){3)1
CD
1:-1-._.-._ ._....J]
I@
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t= i-(J)-::--:
,..
.
C-
(!)
..J
.,
c
'0
..
z
z .4
z .2
"
., .
.8
,
.,
. . -Q}
it3o ., .4
.,e
:J
'"
E
0..
iii
...c
"" "
-2
"-
... ..
-+ .....
-(f
,.
z.O
.,
.7
1.'
........
-
0
'0.
I-
: -(j)-@&(F'
0.'
0.9 1 .9
4.8
.,
C
...
...
z
S ...
...
...e
C-
(!)
..J -4 .
""
.2
1 .0
' r-
-_.
9 .3 18.6
= .." ..3
'::-::
92.9
41~ . 5
-'-r-'-- ~'
-3. 81-@-.----..
'0
3 .8
if
Ql
3. 4r..-..
-3.
_.
to
...C
_.
'\.
.__..
Z. 4
__
.2.
-2.0 .,-.
0 .1
2.'
-+ _. -
.....-;:
0.9 1 .9
-3.7
-- I'\
:J
0..
-+--
-\
-3 .0
e .,.8
.,.
''""
e z
......
4 .6
9.318.6
Z.,
46.592.9
EffectJve Wind Area, m'
EffectJve Wind Area, m'
GABLE/HIP ROOFS
<
e s 27
Noles:
I.
2.
J.
4.
5.
(j
7.
Vertical senft! dC/JOit's Gel' to be Il,H:d II'llh q~ . lIori:mulIl salle del/ofes eIfective wind area, ill !illll(Jl'~' 1JI('lt" :", III I,
sigl/s signify p""ssw 'cs (Iclillg IOlI'ord (lml (lway/rom III(' .wlI/nC('.f. r('.o:pf'("(jW/),.
E(u:h component .{Iwl( be dl'SIgllcd fnr fllllximlim pn.nfil'(.' (lnd " ego/ille I'res,u/I"(s.
Vallles t!fGCpfor roof OI'trh(lIlg.f il/ell/rle pl'C",r.urre c(1rltributiolufl'om bOlh IIppt'r /lilli/ower slIr{f/(;(....
edge / r idge sirips and pressllf"(' c()l:fl/cit'llIS {"r ridJ.:.{.r l!fguh/('d midi- shal/lIppi!' 011 I'uell hip.
For hip roo!'; willi 7 < () ~ 1
PillS (llId 1i ! :II11S
r,
/,'or '"i' w l?fr wilh 0:::: 25. Wile' 3 ,r/mll h<'/rcu/ct! II.r ZOI/C' 2
No/a fioll.\:
Il '" If) jlern'lI f ~rf('(lsl hOri201l(liI {1i1ll ('n<:i(lII.~ or (J.t/II , II'hkh{>I'(!" is .H1l11l1er. hilI Iwl !t'ss thall ('illl('l" 1%
'!{ it'rUI
orfJ.9 m
h ,~ Mean 1'(J(!f Jwight. m. ext'ept thtlt ('IH '(! /r etg"l .Ihall be fl.snl jiJI' (}:5
{} ~~ Angle (~f plane f!f 1'01!lfmlll horizonw/. IJ('gl'('{!'\'
f()Q
Figure 207- 1 IC External Pressure Coefficients, Ge" Oil Gable/II ip Root:,

of Enclosed, Part ially Enclosed Buildings with II ~ 18 III
Components and Cladding ._. Method 2
AssOcitHion of S trlJ cturf:ll Engineers of the: Phil ippine s
"/lri~(mllll dillll'l!..iu;;
CHAr'TER 2 . Minimum Design Loads
2.. 53
ftft/ft
-j- _l L ~ JQ2
:.r&321__
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G) r@1
@I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G)
{)
h
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.....
_---_ .._.....
__. _ - - - - '
+- r -1 @: -@- -:
.:'.j___
1'.'~------'-"---~-r-~-~~
a.
._-
(!)
..r
I:
0.6 -
...-.-..--..---
1_
... 4~----- ' - - -
"
"o
'0 .,.4 e----- .-..J---I--I----I--I---.-
---+-~---I...--- --_
---+-+--1---1--1
if
..., - - - - -..-- --- -_....)---1-10-..----- .. --..
-.-1---- 1.- -.-..._-.
~
en
en
~
:J
....
.0 .
--------_.._..- - -
..... _....
- - ..
..
[...(1)-(2)'&@-- -.:--: == -.,~ ..--.. -..--- -.-.....
+1.0
-____ _____
0.1
0.9
1.9
4.6
___ L _____ _
9,3 18.6
....
46.5 92.9
0..
(ij
I:
'-
:;: _(2) &~_+=+-_. ___
.._____.. ___ ._ .'0
, . I-----+----+---=~"'+-I_-I- 1.'
-1.6
.....__..__._-1--- - - --- -- - - -
1.4 - - ' ' ' - ' - - - - . - - _ . -
...-
.--.
---I---
1.' . - - - - - .....- ...- ......--. --..- ..- - .---.- . - .
1.0
0.1
0.9
1.9
4.6
9.3 18.6
46.5 92.9
Effective Wind Area, m'
GABLE ROOFS 27 0 < 0 :s 45

No/es.
I.
Vertical w:a/c dClJotes (j(~, to he IIsed 1I'111t qh
2.
ilorizontal scale dello!es
(~O;:!Cfin)
wil/d area,
III~
Plus and millll.l" ,~igl/s sigf1[{j' pressllres acting {Oln/rd and (1woyji'olll Ihe siujiu:es. respectively.
1
5.
I:'(/cll cOIIII'0I1(,1I1 shatl he desigllcd/o}" maxinll/III positil'(' olld /lcgalivc pressures

Value.l" o( C;C;.jin' mO/OI'er/ulIIgs illclurie pressure cOlllrihulioll.ljiom holh IIpper and lower .l"1II.f(lces.
No(aliOIlS
(J
10 percellt O(/CO.It /iori::OIua/ dimcllsioll.l or OAiI. whichl'v('!" is S/II(lI/t'!". hut !lot less thall eithC'r
4% (?f lells! hOl"ium/ol dimellsioll
orO.9111.
II '" Meall }"oo(hr'(l;/II. III
AI/gIl' ofplul/(, o(mo//i"Ol1l hOI"/;:(}ntlil. d('gr('{'.1
() '0
Figurc 207-11 D Extcrnal Pressure Coefficients, G(~) on Gable Roo(\

of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with h $ ! 8 m
Components and Cladding - Method 2
Nc)(ional Structwal Code of
lilt)
th
Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
2-54
CHAPTER 2 -- Minimum Design Loacls
.'!.i
.-c
II
0.3 to 0_7
w, = 0.25 to 0.7.1
W
STEPPED ROOFS
Note,I':
011 Ihe
101l'('r/cl'('/
o/jla(, stepped 1"IJ()f.i ,\"11011'11 ill Figure 2()7 /2, the
::011('
d("I'igllolioll.\' olld prI'SJIII"(' coefficiellts
."/;ml/i "!
1/ /J shalf appzv, except lliar at the 1"()(!/~lIp"er 11'(11/ inICl".I'CClioll(s). ::0111' 3 .\'ha// he {reared (IS zone 2 (lnd ZOIW ) shu!! h, 1,'01('(/ t:x
ZOIl(, 1. Posifin' wlll/('.\" of GC:~. (,(/110/ to tho.\'{' /hl" walls ill Figur(' ]{)7j fA sl1r11/ apply (III (he crosshatched (/n'O.l' sholl'/! in Figure
207-12.
2.
N%/ivlls :
h .~ 1.5111 ill Figure 20l f 2. hllll/Of greater fhall 30 m
h '" Meall J'()(!f height. //I

hi ,- hi or II! ill Figure 207-12: II'~ h/ -j 11 :: h, :0: 3 III, h/h ,~ (U /0 0.7
W c", /Juilding width ill Figure }07-/2
W,'''' If / o/" W!or WI ill Figu/"e207/2. If ~' IVI + W., or WI -I We -1- WI W/Il' '" n.25 {0 0.75
o ""' Angle o(plane (!{/"()(?flio/11 horizollfal. d('grees
Figure 207-12 External Pressure Coefficients, Gel' on Stepped RnolS

of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with Ii ,; 18 III
Components and Cladding -- Method 2
Association of Structural Engineers of the PhilipPines
2-55
,,
:
,
,
1 -_._.!!W
---_ __
ELEVATION OF BUILDING
(2 OR MOR E SPANS)
PLAN AND ELEVATION Of

A SINGLE SPAN MODULE
3.0
2 .6
3 .0
0.
()
C,!)
,
f
I
\
....c
2 .4
2 .2
.~
2 .0
()
1 .6
ifQl
1 .6
()
:l
Vl
Vl
!l.
(ij
C
L.
....x
Ql
2 .6
2 6f--
"
'\..
.........
() 2 .2
C,!). .2.0
....C
2.2
"
Ql
------
-- -----
1 .4
1 .2
1.7
1.6
o
()
1.1
.{). 6
1 .7
..-
1 .1
.{). 4
- - -- - -
0-'-<{). 2
..-
_. .: -- f---
--- _
-
<{) . 8
2.6
. 2.5
2.0
'-
-'"
1 . 0 ..
'\..
1. B
.1.6
1 . 0
<{). B
.{). 2
-- --
(j)
30'< 0 S 45'
--
() . 1. 4------ _.-- ..
ifQl 1. 2 -,
L'\..
C!l
-_..
0-
0. 2 4i-<?>
2.7
10'<0 <30"
+0. 6
(j)@&@
+0.8
0.1
.... - --
_ -- _.- f--..
I=-
----
0.91 .9
0
.
roc
.-~-
- - _ _--
+0.4
-- I - -
..
_.
--- 1-
L.
....x
Q)
+0.4
-_. - - +0 .
+0. 2
+0 .4 -
---
6--+0 .8
----
0 .1
.- -
.- -
Q)@&@
4 .69.318.646.592 .9
I-.- _.
0 .91 .9
- - I-
+ 0.8
1.0
4 .69.318.646.592.9
Effective Wind Area , m 2
Effective Wind Area, m 2
MULTI-SPAN GABLE HOOFS

,vOI,'S:
J.
.;,
V('/'fical.u'ai, d('lIf1il'.f Ge" to /1(' /If('t/II";lh 1/.

lfor;::OI/W/ sc:a/( (kllolt'... t1fi.'clil't! wind Ort'll. 11/
PIli!/: 1111(1 mfllllS Jil:tls signify p n 'ssld'C'S (WI llig IOU"m "I' IMd lIu-ay/rom Ihc' .nfljil( es. r,,~p(cllI't~, r
1;(1('11 compl}//('III,\'/udl 111' t!('.\igl1('(! fill' 1/I11.limulllluHifll'l' (lm/III'C(llin' W'('.f,tllrc:S.
/0 0, I'all/t's ofG<'~.lio lll Figwv l1J7-11 shall hi'
For (J
6.
Now/iolls:
(I ~, If) 1){'n'('II' fllt'asl llOl'i.7(II1I(11 dim(' /lS;OII,\' uta ,~jl/.~:/( '-"'I'(111 IIIod"/( III' (JAil. It'hidll'l'('1' is SII/(/II.-I', hl/IIIOf h's,\' ,h(/I/ ('iI/wI' 4
"I"'(I,fl/lOl'I:ml/a/ dillll'lI,f/rJ/l of fI ,flll~/I! 'V){}1I /1111(1"1,, Ill' 0. 9 11/
It '" ,\Iewl I'r",/I/('I;/II. m . {'X(,I!I" 11/(/1 "c/I' I' h(j)!hl ,\'!Jall hi' " .H'd/orl}::: IfJ"
It' ." IJuiidillg modllll! widrh, 11/
tJ
00
If.{j'd
AI/gil' of"It/l/(, ofronf(rom hori:onltll. t/(',I!.r('l',{
figure 20713 EXlemal Pressure Coe m cicnls, Ge" on Mullisl'an Gable Roofs
of Enclosed. Parlially Enclosed l3uildings wilh " ,; I Rill
Componen ts and Cladding - Method 2

National Structural Code
or the Philippines 6U1 Edition Volume
/w/,( '/'Ilf
256
CHAPTE:H 2 -.. Minimum Design l.oads
l-:r
i-----~-----L~ ~L
,
-3.0
'
,'
,,
,,
____
1M '
0:
,
,:
-.,--f----:,
,,
,
<:t
'
CD1
2.6
C-
,I,
-2.8
,
;~
;(2
2.4
-2.2
-2.0
,:,
!4-,,
,
. J.i_- _-_- __;_- _-_- _-!. .r_~. . .J- - ~
""-->__ L__'
-1.8
1.6
-1.4
,,
1.2
-1.0
'" '"
"'---
f---W
-2.6
-1.B
-1.6
-1.5
-1.3
-1.2
-1.1
1-0
-0.8
-;
...c:
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
+0.2
o+---=::,.,
,--------,1
+0.4
+0.6
All ZONES
<
+0.:
0.1
0.9
1.9
4.6
9.3 18.6
46.5 92.9
Effective Wind Area,m 2
~w --~
1--1.
MONOS LOPE ROOFS 3" :::: 0 :::: 10"

Noles :
I.
Verli(."(I/.\"(xJfe denores (;C:~ (() be used with qh
2.
/ /ol"i:olllill sca/I' denoles {!Ueclive willd al"ea A. m.
3.
5.
PIlls (Il1d minus signs sign(fjl pressures acting IOll'(JI'd 0111/ (j\\'(J.l'/i"Oln the ,I"wfnces. I"especril'e/y.
Each compollent shall be designed/c)/" maxilllum posilil'(, (lnd ncgatil'e pressurc.\".
For () ~ 3". wl/ues (~rG(~,f/"()1II Figure 207/ III shoff he u.\"ed
6.
Nolaliolls:
4.
(/ ,- /0 perCClI1 (~lI('asl horizollial dimellsions or O.4h, \l'lIichell('r is .wwf/e/". bur nor le.u dUIII ('ir!!('/" 4 p('I"n'lIl O(l{'(/S! hon21111fo!
dilll('II.1"IOII or O. 9 111
II co 1,,'alJe height sholl he uscd/i."ll" ():S /OG
W'" /Juilding width, 11/
(J ", Angle ojp/ww o/roo/from horizontat, degrees
Figure 207-14A External Pressure Cocfticients, Gel' on Monoslope Roofs 3 < e ~ 10

of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with h ~ 18 III
Components and Cladding -- Method 2
CHAvn::F 2 _.- Minimum Design Loads
'--.
I~
(-------------1
I
II
""
IdJ
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---~
~ I:
I
I
I
.---I----~
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
II
I
L _ __ ______ _ __ J
CL
C)
l
~
(2J
-2.9
-2~ 1-----1--+":---1-+--1---
:~
CD
I
I
""
IdJ
.J'0'ii~~~~=l=+=~
-2.8 i="
~e
::l
::l
C-
as
E
-2.4 f------I-i-"--',,,I--I--+--l--I
-221----+-+-+-+-r---j-1
-2.01------11--1--+-+-1--- .. .0
I! 1-=:----- ---1--+--+-1---1---1.8 r@~----k::,,-+-i. --. - 1 - 1.6
IA
-~I- ----1--+--j
"
I---r.;--------I~
r------
.1.3
.~1.~ I--{B_l-_--_-~_-_--+,~-~--~--:O--t~=t'---=::t=t=!~:H
-Ur-------I---j).8 - - - - - -- - - - ---I--- - - - - - j ) A -
. C 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -.-
1---
0---------- -- . _- --- -
~2t~~~~t=j:~~j==t=~~
--- m
+0.4 ALLZON"RS
9+--""1
h
MONOS LOPE ROOFS 10" :S 0 :S 30

NOles '
I.
IINliealscll/('
2.
f {orizol/lill
I>IIIS lil/d
to hI' IIsed \\-illl q"

e{fective I\"illlf al"('(1 A.
dCI/o[('.\" G(~,
.1'('(1/('
del/ole,l"
lIli/IIIS .\igll.~
11(.
sigllil.i- pres,l"IIl"e.\' (lclillg toward and (/\\oy./iolll fire .I'III/OC(,S. res/wclil'ely
4.
each COIII/HIII('111 sh(lll he d(,s(i~lIed/()r mi/ximllll! po.vil/\'e (lild I/egalil'{' prex.I"II/'e.\'.
5.
NO{(J/joll.\'.
If) /)('l"n'lIl o(l('os( /wri::()Iliu/ diml'lIsionl' OJ" O.4h, w/iic/iCI'cr

dimcnl'i()11 or O. 9 111
II Mel/II roof'/I('(I!,lir,1II
Jj'
Iluitdill,!!. lI'ill/h , III
o ": Ang/e o(p{(J/1(' 1!/mo(ji'Olll hori::oll/ol, dc,!!.n'I's
/I
i ,l' .1'11)(///('1',
hilt 1I01/('.\'.\' thall ('ililc/' 4 pcrcCllt o({ensl horizontol
Figure 207-1413 External Pressure Coefficients, GC~J 011 Monoslopc Roofs 10 <
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings with II :s; J 8 III
C()Jl1pol1cnts and Cladding .- Method 2
111
eS; 30
2-57
258
CHAPTEH 2 - Minimum Design Loads
...
... 4 ~(SPANAI
,
1,
,
:
1,
,
'
r--
3.
C-
()
:,
Cl
'
:
c:
QI
'0
..;
;,;i
j
~i - ------ --Kr 3:::
IEQI
'"
-1.2
III
III
-1.0
0-
-<l
"
-1.4
"'.2
~ -~
"-
.-
-<l,2
+0.2
o
+0,'
+0 .
+0 .
--
+1.0
[--
+1 .2
+1.4
0.1
Elevation of Building
(2 or More Spans)
0.9
1.9
-- -
+0.4
+0 .7
+0.6
.-
4.6
+1 .1
9.3
18.6
46.5 92.9
SA WTOOTH ROOFS
No r!'!.;
2.
V"/"I;('(t/ scah' dlII(J(I!.~ eel' to II(' USN} wilh q"

Ilm'hul/wl scale clt'1I0Il'S l'ffi:ctil'e wind ort'a A,
Plus ali(I millllX ... i~II'<: slf,lI iji' PI'/,.\'SIW<'S I1Clillg f()\~ 'fI,.d (lilt! (111'(1)' /rom Iht.! .l'Ifrf(IC<',f, rl!sp{'Clil'l'(I"
4,
Had, ('0111(10111.:111 shafll)(' 1/(.\"igIJl'dji,,. /IIt/rimll'" ;10.\";I;l'(.' (1/11/

Fo r" ~ tfJD, I'(tfl/{'S I~r (j(.~,jh )ll' Fi};ur(' 107 // shall hi! IIsed.
II ....
Now/ioll.\':
- /0 1U'l'c('tI/ or/('(/.~I Iwri::collia/ dlll/I'IISiml.\ O/'
(I
r/iI1U'II.\'iml or
n 9111
nAIz.
-1.1
-<l.'
c:
....
~
x
fl.
-1.6
-<l .
til
5.
-2 .6
_.
'
"
,
"" '"
'" "-~
1,
--
I,
0)
.~
@(SPANB.C & DJ
2.
1.
::>
. . ! . . .w- - - I
."
."
.,.,
r--
-2. 0
()
I--
'-
3.0
0 ) ,i'6
ii"'2
------..
3 .
,:
,,
,
,
a.
a.
!;
-4 .1
-4 .0
~.--. @i.-----~m--mf 3:::

__ :
..
/wgllfil'c: PH!SSllres .
wll/ ch e l'I'r
is smalh>r. hili 110'
"',u (/1111/ (,i,//('r .f /)('/H'1If o.//('OSI /wri=mllo/
h MC'a1/ nxifhl'l,l4hl, m. 1',I t'C'Pl lh{lf ('1II.,. Ilt'ix1ilsltllll hI' 1I,\'(r/ (or 0 S. /00
II' ... IJllilrlmg 11I0r/llit' wit/lh, 11/
() ~ "'''1:1('0./plm/(: fll rao((nml Jwri=Ollwl, t/t'grC'l!s
f'igurc 207-15 EXlcrtl.1 Pressure Cocmeienls,
GC~
on Sawloolh Roofs
or Enclosed, Partial ly Enclosed Buildings with II S 18

Componen ts and Cladding -.- Method 2
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippine s
In
CHAr'TER 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
Wind
ho
Wind
1
DOMED ROOFS
External Pressure Coefficients for Domes with a Circular Base

Negative
Positive
Positive
0, degrees
Pressures
Pressures
Pressures
61 - 90
0-90
0-60
------+0.5
+0.9
GC, ._.- - -- -0.9
- - - - _..
Notes:
I.
Verlical gale denotes
2
3
4
5.
PlU,I" and
(J(~,
to be used I\'ilh (j(h{) + J) where (fit)
+ f) is [he heigh! althe
lOp of lire dome.
in us signs signify pr(,ssures aClil1g /oll'ard and awayjmln IIie SUI/aces, respec/il'ely.
Each componeili shall be designed for moximulIl posilive and negative pressures.
Values app~l' (o 0::: h,ID:5 0.5. 0.2 'S.jlD:-:: 0.5.
() '" () degrces 011 dome spring lillc. () ." 9() degree.\" (II dome celller top pOinf.I is 1I/('(JsuI"cdji'om spring tim'
III
Figure 207-16 External Pressure Coefficients, GC;, on Domed Roois
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures with all Heights

Components and Cladding - Method 2
fo
lOp.
259
2-60
CHAP1H, 2 -- Mlnimurn Design Loads
3. 4
'--.....
2 .8
2. 6
2 .4
(!)
-2.0
1 .6
1.4
1 .2
-1.0
ROOF PLAN
-<>.8
-<>.6
--fl--
,,,
i'-.
- -'-- . 2 .3
~--
1. 8
.3 .2
-- -
"
2. 2
'- fl'
--
'--.....
3.0
a.
---
3 . 2
500
100
10
-3.6
r--------..
'--
"'----
ill
--- ---
hv
'"
1 .8
1 .6
----
'--.....
I----
-1 .4
"'---
1.0
-o.g
-0.7
.0.4
-<>.2
--
o f---.+1l .2
+1l.4
,i
,,,
,,
,
..,
,--
f-@&
+1 .0
0.9 1.9
0.1
@)
J-- j-----'
_________ ____ _ "--' _ _ _ _-L-l
WALL ELEVATION
WALLS AND ROO FS

Noll'S:
V('rfir/II scale dellOle,,' (;C,./o he IIsed wirh q, or q..
J
3,
4.
5
(,
7,
S.
I/on :(/l/w/ snli(' del/Ole:; effeclil'c will/I ar('(1 A. 11/

PIII.~ /lmlmil/l/.f signs ,t igl/W' preHUI'('S ae/illg 10 l1l/lrd fllld (lII'(I),/rom lhl! .nu/rICe-.f . re.~/)(!(, I ;vdy.
u'w II: willi JJOJilil'l' v(lf/u's (?fGCr (//1(/ q" wilh /1l.'f,;(llil'C' "lIfm:,,' (~rGCI'
hlW/l {'OI/lPOIU'III.f/wll hf' d" .fil:l1I'ti/"rllJ(HinwIII (JO,fllh 'e tlIuJ nC'}:(llil'l? pn'!i.WrI'I',
('v l'Okirillf drt' {or rtk>/r lI'ilh allg/(- 0 :5 10. For ut/wr roo/III/Kles (lIId J:cmmt'/I)'. u.\"(~ G(~ " III,,('.f/I"OIll Ffl:!ln' l illil (II,d l llf,'lId,m l
q. lwst'd 01/ ('XI>OSlII'(: ae./im:d;" St'CI;OI/ 107_5 6.
, .'
1/(1 jlal"f1(Wf {'I/Imllf} O/" highl'r (i1(11/ {J,Y //I i.r prm'idl'd aroumllhl' p('rim("j'r I~rlh(' 1'(,1II/ lI';{}' f) "5 1(''', :LOlli'} .~/IIIIII)(' /1'('ul('d 1I.\' I.IIm'l,
No /(/(;olls :
10/11'1"/'('11/ (!{ft'fI ,\'{ hori: Olllu/ dill/l' ILI-jOU,I', IUll lJOt l('s,I' rhull 0. 9 !II
" ;.' Alel/II rOlf/wigh" m, ('x('('pl ,IU/ll'II\'I' IId}.!1I1 simI! III' /1,1'/'11 (or(} ::; IO il
~
""/g"IIII)(",,(, ground, III
(j ,.
r; - AI/}.:/" "(plum' o(mof(Him hO!'l:mtllll t/r};r cc.r
Figure 20717 External Pressure Coefficients
GC~,
on Walls and Roof.'\
of Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Bui ldings wilh" > 18111

CO lnponcnts and Cladding - Method 2
+0.6
+0.9
4.6 9 .318.8 46.592.9
Effective Wind Area, m2
,,
...
+1l.6
+1l.8
0.5L
Wind
Direction
=>
y= 0
Roof
Ang le, 0
7.5
13
15
13
22.5
B
A
30
B
A
B
37.5
45"
0.5L
13
C NW
1.2
-1.1
-0.6
-1.4
-0.9
- 1.9
-1.5
-2.4
-1.8
-2.5
- 1.8
-2.4
-1.6
-203
0.5L
Wind
Direction
<==
Clear
A
B
A
0.5L
Wind Direction y ~ 0
Obstructed
Willd Flow
Flow
C NW
CNt.
OJ
-0.5
-1.1
-0. 1
-I
-I
0
-1.3
-1.1
- 1.3
-2.1
0
-1.6
-1.5
-0.3
-2.3
-1.8
-1.5
-0.5
-2.3
- 1.8
-1.5
-0.6
-2. 2
-1 .8
-1.3
-0.7
-1.9
y = 180
~/777//77/,///7
A
rLoad
Case
2-61
/.T,//// ///77/,////
Wind
CNt.
-1.2
-0.6
- 1.5
-0.8
- 1.5
-0.6
-1.7
-0.9
-1.3
- 1.1
-1.8
- 1.1
- 1. 8
- 1.2
Wind Direction y ~ 180

Obstructed
Clear Wind Flow
Flow
C NW
C NW
C N1
0.2
-0 .5
1.2
-1.1
-0. 1
-1.1
-0.2
0.9
1. 5
0 .3
0.8
1.6
0.4
1.3
1.6
1.2
0.6
1.8
1.7
1.8
0.5
0.7
1.3
2.2
0.6
2.1
2. 1
2.6
1.6
I
2.1
2.2
1.7
2.7
1.9
1.1
2.2
2 .5
0.8
1.4
2.1
2.0
Wind
-CN~_
-1.2
-0.6
- 1.2
-0.3
- 1.1
-OJ
-I
0
-I
0.1
-0.9
0.3
-0.9
0.4
Notes:'
I.
].
.i.
Cm- allti (~L dl'/I/wt III~I JlY('S.rIII"('.~ (C<JI1lribulioll!;ji-om lOp (wd haltom !iW!W."(I.I) jar windward ami leelVal'd halfo! roo/sill/ace.... re.fjll!t'fiwfy.
Clt'flr wind flow dCfl/OI('s rdolil'e1y /IIW/Jsfrucln/ldnd fiow with hlockng(~ It!SS rhall 01" equal (0 50%. Obsfructed willdflow denoles objects ludow
roof illhihilillg lI'iml/low (::> 500/0 blockage).
For I'll /lies off) bmw('{'11 7.5 0 alld 45, linear illtC!'1'oiflliol/ is permiued. For WIllies v/O le.fs l/tall 7. :; .... lI.ft: ''',lIlos/ope roof /0(1(/ cm:Oicit'III ....
<I
PIlls a1l(/ mitlllS sf}.:lI.\' .flgnj[v Im',H"lwe:; acting lUII'llI'd:; iJlld aWlly/rom the top rQ(ifsUliace. I"c.tp('clil'cly.
5.
I'i.
All /aod ClI:;t'-$ sholl'lIfiw (>lIdl roof{1/1J:le sholl /It' I//\'(':;{igatl'd

Notatiolls:
I.
II
"CO=
-"'0
IIwizoll(al (iimt'llsiOIl.r ofrm!{,

Meml rim! heighl. m
1Itl'(lSfIlWI
ill lire
a/I)II!!
WII/d direclio/l, m
)' '"" /JJr('cfioll flwilltl. drf,I'I!I'.t
n '" Augle t?{phllll' o/moffi{)IIIIl()ri;::tmla/. dI'W'('('s

Figure 207-18A Net, Pressure Coefficicnts, eN on Monos lope fre e
Roofs 8,; 45,)' ~ 0".180" of Open Buildings
Main Wind- Force Resisting
S~stem
Nationa! Stru ctu ra l Code of the Philippines 6 h Editio n Vo!urnG 1
2-62
Wind
Direction
=>
1=0
0
Roof
Angle, 0
Wind Direction y _ 0, 180

Obstmcted Wind
Load Case
Clea r Wind Flow
Flow
---_._.
__._..
7.5 0
13
15
22.5
A
B
A
B
f------.o013
30
A
B
37.5
45
13
CNII'
1.1
0.2
1.1
0.1
1.1
-0. 1
1.3
-0.1
1.3
-0.2
1. 1
-0.3
CNL
eNW
-0.3
-1.2
-0.4
-1.6
-0.9
-1.2
-0.6
-1.2
-0.8
-0.7
-0.2
-0.6
-0.3
-0.5
-0.3
-1.1
0.1
-0.8
0.3
-0.9
0.6
-0.6
0.9
-0.5
eN/.
-I
-1.7
-I
-1.6
-1.2
-1.7
-0.7
-1.1
-0.6
-0.9
-0.5
-0.7
PITCHED FREE ROOFS 8!5 45, Y = 0, 180

No/c'.f:
1.
C'H fllld C"'"L t/('IJ()/C' I/e'l {JH!UIIH'!, (cIJII(ril"'fioll.f from /(If! (lild Imllam sfll/acC'.f) /rw willdw(/rd alld h'(!ward 1111 If of mq{ sUlfaces.
r(".~fI(~( ri ' -1'~1'
Clenr II-jllllj/o\\' (Ii.'l1o/c's rl:'faln'('~)' flIl()h.W1ICfc'(/ ."iml jlOII' willi "hkkagl' it'....f dum or equ(ll 10 50% Oh.f/I'U('/l't/ wind JIm" ,',
For I'all/('.\" 11/0 bdll'('I'1f 7.Jt> IIml 45 , fill/~tlr ;1//1''1)o/l1liol/ ;.f pcrmiffld. For ndues of 0 les.f ,hUll 7,.s", lise mmmslfJpl' r,;.,.
I.
o"jet'ls heloll' roo/inhlbifing wi"d flow (;, 51Y',1, blockage).

l"OC'{liC;f'IILf.
4.
5,
(j,
PIf;s (llId JII i/llls sigllx !.igll!ly pr(',~,ql1"l'~ tlc ling IQII'(ll'ds nllcl (lway/rollllhe fOp ru0.f.mr!il('(',
AII/llod I '(m'.~ s/'m..,1 for cal'll m~fllng/(' ,~/UlII hI' illllf.'slignlcd,
/'(,,\'Pl!('fil'(!~I"
N"fllfioll.c
I . ." l/orj:;()I/fa{ dill/I'IIS;OIH o{l'tllIl 1I/('f1.mrnl i ll III(' a/olll! wil/d din'clio l/,
II "" Me(ln nm{ heigili. III
'
.
III
;' :'0 /)in'{'/ioll o{llil/(l. de}!I'('(',\'
(} "
AII,~/I' ofpiml(' lI{n)t!(/i 'om
1101'1::0111(11, t!cgl'l'I'.\
Figure 207-1813 Net Pressure Coc f'ficicllts. C,., on Pitched force
Roofs e:5 45, )' = 0, 180 of Open Buildings wi th

J lei ght h to Length L ratio , 0.25 :5 hlL:5 1.0
Main Wind-Force Resisting System

Association 01 Stru ctLlral Engineers of the Pllilippines
.".
Wind
Direction
=>
1=0'
"
Roo r
Angle, 0
Load Case
A
7.5 0
--_.._.
B
A
15
13
A
22.5
13
A
30
B
A
37.5
B
A
45
..
-.---..-.
_____
.~
Wind Directi on y - 0, 180

Obstructed Wind
Clear Wind Flow
Flow
C NII'
CNI
CNIf'
eN/.
-0.5
- 1.1
0.3
-1.6
-0. 2
-0.9
-0. 8
1.2
-0. 5
- 1.1
- 1.2
OA
-0.8
0. 1
1.1
-0.6
-0.6
-1.2
- 1.1
-0. 1
-0.1
-0.8
-0.8
0.8
-1 .3
-I A
-0.4
-0.3
-0.5
-0. 1
-0.2
0.9
-0.3
-1.3
-0.6
- IA
-OA
-0.3
0.2
0.6
-1.2
-0. 3
- 1. 1
-0. 9
-OJ
-0.4
.. 0.3
.. _.0.5
_ ~ ~L_
TRO UGHED FREE HOOFS 6:S 45, Y = 0, 180
I.
C"fr (ll/d
CA1.
dCllofC' lief pr('SJIII'("S (colllriblllioll.{ from lOp tlIUI IJO/(om .nll!u('e.f)Ior wil/dward all d leell'tJnl halfof rc1()f.5/lrfilCC.~.
re.fJ)(!C:lil'(!~;"
!.
).
"
5.
fi.
C/(>nr wmff flow d ellOU',l' relo(/I'('(v 1fl1O/J.<;iI1lC/ed ",indflow wilh blockage less thatl or eql/a/lo 50% ObslIll(:lc:d 1I'illd/lo11' dC1ltJ/t's
obJect.r be/ow roof ;uhibitillg w /1Id flow (> 50% blockage).
For \'(I/II("J l~rO belln'c'/I 7.5 0 (111(/ 45, linea/' jl/((,I'flo(ution is ,wrmiued. For I'(lhu'.t 010 less th(lll 7.5, N.H! mOllosfop<, r()(~rlotld
(oefJichmu.
I'{ux ll lld lIIillll.\ .1'iW IS siJ: I1 (l.i' p n!.\'.mr('s (le/ illg lowards mId away/ro ll1 l he lOp m o.r.~ 1IJf(j(;l', re.ljJ('clil,eI)'.
All food (' (I.''' '.\' show/1 fhr ('(I e), /'01?f angle .\'II(lfI he if/I'C',\ligal('d.
NOla/jOlIS:
I, ~: 110l'i1.IIIIIIII dill"'llsiolls I!f I m~t: fI1 ('(I.I'II/'et/ ill ,hl' a/o il!!, wind din'('(ioll. //I
11'-- M('wl /'(I(~r"dgh f. m
;' ". /)iq 'ClffllI (~rll'illd. (/t'gr(,l'I;
fJ Alm~It'llfJlI(JII(, ofmo/fi'of1l Iwrizol/(rll, df'grC'C'.\
<C
Figure 207 - 18C Ne t Pressure Coefficien ts , C.. 0 11 Troughcd f ree

Roofs 8 $: 45, Y= 0, 180 of Open Bui ldings wit h
Height h to Length L rati o, 0.25 S hll. " 1.0
Main Wind Force Resisting System

01
National Stru clural Code of the Pllilippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
263
2-64
CHAPTEF< 2 ... Minimurn Design Loads
Monoslope
l}
Distance
Distance
Distance
from
Windward
Edge
from
Windward
Edge
from
Windward
Edga
l}
Wind Direction
y=90
.-..
Roof Angle
Clear Wind Flow

-------_._-_._-
Load Case
()
l}
Wind Direction
y=90
Horizontal
D istance [rOll1
Windward
Edge
Wind Direction
y=90
Obstructed
Wind Flow
eN
eN
-0.8
-1.2
.-
- ~ .- - -
All Shapes
:;'11
Os; 45 0
B
0.8
. _ - - - -------_.- -------_. - - - - - - - - - All Shapes
> IT,::; 211
A
---.-----
-0.6
0.5
0::; 45
._---_.-
-.-------.-~
..
.~.-
All Shapes
-0.9
---
..- ....
0.5
----
. .... ...-..
~
-0.3
-0.6
0.3
0.3
._.....-
f--
> 2h
OS; 45
~---.-
0.5
..--
TROUGHED FREE ROOFS a s 45, y = 0,180

No(es:
I.
2.
3.
5
(,
C\'(/(,110((,.\' /Jd pressures (coli/rih/{{ioll.~.(iom (OP (lild ho/lolII sill/aces)

Clear wil1d .flow denotes 1'('/llIil't:/y IIl1ohslruc/ed wind .flOIl' with h/ockage h'.I".\ Ihml or equal 10 50% ()hS/l"llc/ed wind .I/O1\"
d('noles ol~i('Cf.r he/ow /"()(?j"inhihi{illg lI'indflol!' (> 50% l>/or/.:age)
1'1/(.1' and minlls .\"igll.\ sigIJ!/)' pre.Hl/reS (lClillg IOlVords alld aW(Jy(i"o/IJ Ihe fOp roOj"SWjllt:" /"e.I"/lCClil'e/y
All load C(JS(!.I' S!to\\'II'/()/' ('ach l'Oo((lngl(' sh(lll be inFestig(l/ed
For mOllos/ope mol;" wilh (hela less l!tall 5 degn'('s. ex l'olIiCS shown applr 01.1'0 for C(1ses lI'iJ('I"(' gOl/Jmo
() degr(,es (/I/d O,tJ5
1r'.1"S liJ(l1l or <'<{UII! fo hll,less Ihan or ('qllal 0.25. ,)'('(' Figure 207IRA/or olher hlL values.
Nola/iolls:
I.
It
HoriZOI1{ol dimellsioll.\" a/roof," lI1easl(lwl ill fhl' a/ollg \\"il1d direclioll.

Mean I"()(?//wiglil. 11/
)' ~, Direcfioll of wind. dcgrccs
() ' '" Angle a.lplo!l(, ofro(dfrom horizon/al. degree,r
III
eN
Figure 207-18D Net Pressure Coefficients,

on Troughed Free
Roofs 8:5 45', )' ~ 0, 180 0 of Open Buildings wilh
Height h to Length L ratio, 0.25 :5 hlL:5 1.0
Main Wind-Force Resisting System
Associat"ion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTER 2 _. Minimum Des ign Loads
2-65
3
2
1
2
3
'-_._ - - - - -
-jalal--
-.----~--.-.---I-.
Roof
Angle
eN
Effcctivc
Wind
Clear Wind flow

Area
0
Zone 2
Zone I
Zone
_
.2.""C
3
< a'
2.4
3.3
1.8
1.7
- 1.1
1.2
I
0'
>0\ < 40 2
1.8
-1.7
-1.7
1.2 - -1.1
0.8
1.8
> 4a"2
1.2
-1.1
1.2
- 1.1
1.2
- 1.1
0.5
< {[2
3.2
-4 .2
2.4
-2.1
1.6
- 1.4
1.6
>n2, < 4a 2
7.5"
2.4
-2.1
2.4
-2.1
-1.4
1.2
1.6
> 4a 2
1.6
-1.4
1.6
- 1.4
-1.4
0.8
1.6
< a'
: 1.9
3.6
-3 .8
2.7
-2 .9
1.8
2.4
15 . >a~ . .~~_cC._ 2.7
-2.9 _..._--2.7
1. 8
- 1.9
1. 8
> 4a'.. .. - iT ~ 1.8
1.8 .. -1.9._1.2
-_._- ----_
-------< oJ
5.2
-5
3.9
-3. 8
2.6
3.2
2 .5
30
> 0 2, < 4a 2
3.9
3.8
3.9
-3.8
2.6
-2.5
2.4
> 4a 1
2.6
-2.5
2.5
2.6
2.6
-2.5
1.6
< (J l
5.2
-4 .6
3.9
-3.5
2.6
-2 .3
4.2
>a~, < 4(1'
45
3.9
-3.5
3.9
-3.5
2.6
-2.3
3.2
> 4(12
2.6
-2.3
2.6
-2.3
2.6
-2.3
2.1
-..2'L.
__
-:..l4-
Obstructed Wind Flow

Zone 1
Zone 2
- 1.8
0.5
- 1.2
0.8
-3.6
- 1.2
0.8
-1.8
0.5
- 1.8
-1.2
- 1.2
0.5
-1.2
0.5
1.2
0.8
-1.7
-5.1
-2.6
-1.7
1.2
-2.6
0.8
-2.6
-I. 7
- 1.7
0.8
0.8
-1.7
-2. 1
1.8
-3 .2
1.2
-4.2
-3.2
1.2
-2 .1
1.8
-3.2
----2.1
1.2
-2.1
1.2
-2.1
-2.3
-3.5
1.6
2.4
-4.6
-2. 3
-3.5
2.4
-3 .5
1.6
-2.3
-2.3
1.6
-2.3
1.6
- 1.9
2 .1
3.2
-2.9
-3.8
-1.9
2.1
-2.9
3.2
-2.9
2.1
-1.9
-1.9
-1.9
2. 1
N o les:
C~.:d(,,/OW lief pn'.uUn!.f (("(}II/l"iblltioIlJlrolll top amI )w/lom slUfi" :(~~)

rdllliwly wlOh\,tnw(,d willd IIt)w with h/oe/mgt' le.u l/'lI II (II' equlIl to 50%. Oll'\"{n/( t{~d
I.
1.
('({'lIr wind fllll\' d('lIo/ex
J.
roof il/hihitill~ willtll/nw (> 50% hlockfIMe).

Fl)r I'(dllC!.~ ,?fO 111111.'1" Ih(ln tho.'w.\"hoWII, lill('ar jllff!'1wfaliOlI
1.
.~ .
fI,
!Vimll'o1\' dl.!t",IC'.'i objet:ls
IS pf'rmiltc'd
-'''if,lIi(y pn...... IlI"('.~ tlClillf, low(ll"(lt (lml away from till' fop nmf'~ '''..'(I(."('. r('.'\II(("(iI'(~I.
CompO/WI/IS /11/(/ daddiltJ! c'/ellle-1I1s shnlJ he ,Ic~\i.f!,md/m positive' nlld lIeRlIlil't' ""f!,~SI'rt' ("oe.Uici('lll.\" showl/,
PIlL.. flml
lIIillll." ...iKIlS
Nora/il)/l,I':
(/ '"" jO ';-'r; (!( I"{/'\'I hOl'i:nlllfil rlill /Clfs irllls
"
Ill'
0..111, whid,,w1' i.l smaller hill
/lO( (e,I',I'
Ihrlll 4% (l(er/sf hm'/zoll/al diIlH'"Siofls or
,\fe{/II I'of!(h cighf, III
'11111';;;1111/(/1 dimell ,l'jOiI O{hllildillg IIIctl,wreri ill '/llolI).! wind din ' nioll.
f) ,~ AII}!./l' (lli i/mll' flf /'Imf limll horiUIllff/I. (h'.~nl"~
III
r igurc 207 - 19A Net Pressure Coefficients.
Rools
eN 011 Monoslopc Free
e" 45 ofOpcn i3uildings wi th Height" to Length L ratio, 0.25 "hlL:5 1.0

Components an d Cladding
111
Nationa l Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume
,1
n,9 ",
hdl.1w
2-66
CHAPTER 2 Minimum Design Loads
, ......... L
L
" .. ......
1
3
2
2
1
--1
1
2
3
0<10'
Roof
An g le
eN
Effective
Wind
Area
< a'
>a 2 , < 4a 2
> 4a 2
< a'
, < 4a
> 40 2
7.5
>a
15
>0 2,
30
>a 2 , <
< a'
< 4a 2
> 4a2
< a'
4(12
> 4a 1
< a'
>a 2 , < 4a 2
> 4a 2
45
Zone 3
2.4
-3.3
-1.7
1.8
- 1.1
1.2
2.2
-4 .2
-2. 1
1.7
-1.4
l.l
2.2
-3. 8
J.7
2.9
- 1.9
1. 1
2.6
-5
2.0
-3.8
1.3
-2.5
2.2
-4.6
1.7
-3.5
1.1
-2.3
C lear Wind Flow

Zo ne 2
- 1.7
1. 8
1.8
-1.7
1.2
1. 1
2.4
-2. 1
2.4
-2. 1
1.6
- I. .4
2.7
2 .9
-2 .7
2.9
-1.9
1.8
3.9
-3.8
3.9
3.8
2.6
-2.5
3.9
3.5
3.9
-3.5
2.6
-2.3
Obstnlcted Wind Flow

Zone 2
Zone I
Zon e 3
-1.2
I
0.8
- 1.8
0.5
-3. 6
0.5
0.8
0.8
- 1.8
- 1.2
1.8
0.5
-1.2
0.5
- 1.2
0.5
-2. 6
0.8
-1.7
1.6
5 .1
1.2
-1.7
0.8
1.2
-2.6
1.2
-2.6
.1.7
0.8
-1.7
0 .8
0.8
- 1. 7
-3 .2
1.2
-2. 1
2.4
-4 .2
1.8
-3.2
1.2
-2. 1
1. 8
-3.2
1. 8
-2. 1
1.2
-2 .1
1.2
-2.1
1.2
-2.3
3.2
2.4
-3 .5
1.6
4.6
1.6
2.4
3 .5
2.4
-3 .5
1.6
-2.3
1.6
-2.3
1.6
-2.3
- 1.9
-2.9
2.1
4 .2
-3.8
3.2
- 1.9
-2.9
2.1
3.2
-2.9
3.2
2.1
1.9
2. 1
-1.9
2.1
1.9
Zone I
. I. I
1.2
--1. 1
1.2
- 1.1
1.2
1.6
-1.4
- 1.4
1.6
- 1.4
1.6
- 1.9
1.8
1.8
1.9
' 1.8
1. 9
-2.5
2.6
-2.5
2.6
2.6
-2.5
2.6
-2.3
2.6
-2.3
2.6
-2.3
--
.:-#-
..:g..
Nul!',\':
I.
2.
J
"
5.
fi
C" d{'I/OtI! 11('1 /J /"('s.fllres (colllnblttioJlsjrom I(}P mId h()tt.:lIIr .wrfilce.\)

Ch'a,. wilUljloh' di'1I0(e.f /'ela tj\'f!~V lI/wiJSirllCl('d windj1t1 w lI'illl blockage /c,ts thall or c'l/flul to 51Y'/", Oh.I'I/1/Cttd
mol inhibiting 11-;l/d flow (> 50% h!ocllllgf.')
For w,fuf!$ % otlier thall rhose shown, Ii/wlll' iIlWrpo/a/ioll is flmm ilted.
PillS a lld millu.{ .figlls s;gll~{j' pre fsllr(!S n c(mg towards alltl nll'(J.I'/rom tlu' top rooJslltfa ce. nslu.Cl il'(,~I"
\I
;11(1 Jlo", (/('110 1<'.$ obj(!(:ts
Compollellts (/1/(1 daddillg C'/('lIl{'lIts shall be' desigl l('d/uI' pO,fitll'l.' lIlItl /Ij'gcllll'(! pre.'i.mre COt~tJidt!IIlJ ,f/wl1'fI .
Notaliml,( '
f/ a
II
If)'):' oj It'ItSlllI1ri1 Imla/ riiIJ/f'II,fjrms 01' 0 .411. h'IIkht"C'I' is
17 M "IIII
I'f1Q/hcigl:r.
/, ~ 110";:011/01 dillJel/siull (~rlmitdi"g m('II.'iI/I'(,t!

(I '"
.Hrwl/(,I'
bltl I/(JIIts.'i 111(111 J ~"'; oflC(UI liol'j:'olllrll ,/iml'fu jll/lf 01' n.9 til
III
IIII};II' of/Jlml(' o/ruofli'ml/
!/fJ/,;;;:rJIIlfl/,
1/1
a loll,!!. wi/ld (Jill,{t;OIl . III
deg/'('c.\
Figure 207-1 9 B Ne t Pressure Coe ni cients,
Roofs
eNon Tro ilghed Free
e,; 45 (l fOr cn Bu ildin gs with I'lei ght" to Length L rati o, 0.25 S hi!.'; 1.0
Component s nnd C ladding
Association of Structu ral Engineers of the Philippin es
hdo\\'
CHAf' TER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
2-67
DF
l_--_--_---_ L_--:-~-=---0<10'
O;e: 10'
!\
Roof
Angle
- ---0
7.5 0
15
30
45
eN
Effccl ive
W ind
Area
- ---,.-< a'
> (1 2, < 4(/2
> 40 2
< a1
2
>a , < 4a 1
Zone 3
2.4 - -3 .3
1.8
- 1.7
L2
- I. I
2.4
-3.3
1.8
-1.7
> 40 2
1.2
-1. 1
< a'
2.2
-2.2
2 < 4(1 2
1. 7 .... - 1.7
.--- >a>, 4(12
...l:.L - I . 1
-2.6
--~>1I J., < 4a?
1.4
-2
> 40 2
- 1.3
0.9
< (11
-2 .2
1.6
2
> 0 , < 4a 2
1.2
- 1.7
> 4a 2
0.8
-1.1
--'-4-
Clea r Wind Flow

Zo ne 2
1.8
- 1.7
---_.
- 1.7
1.8
1. 2
- 1.1
1.8
-1.7
1. 8
-1.7
1.2
-1.1
1.7
- 1.7
l~ -I 7
I I
-I I
1.4
-2
1.4
-2
1.9
-1.3
1.2
- 1.7
1.2
-1.7
1.8
-1. 1
Zone
1. 2
J.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1. 1
1. 1
--',,:l0.9
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.8
Obstru cted Wind Flow

Zone!
Zone 2
Zone 3
- 1.2
-1.8
0.5
-3.6
0.8
I
- 1.2
-1.8
0.5
- 1.8
0.8
.0.8
-1. 2
0.5
- 1.2
0.5
- 1.2
0.5
-1.6
-4.8
-2.4
0.5
I
0.8
-2.4
0.5
-1.6
0.8
-2.4
0.8
0_5
O.S
-1.6
- 1.6
-1.6
0.5
- 1.2
0.5
- 1.8
I
-2.4
0.8
-1.2
0.8
-1.8
0.5
0.8
- 1.8
---_.
0.5
-1 .2
0.5
- 1.2
-1.2
0.5
1
0.5
-2.
I
-2.8
0.8
- I.~-1-~1- .
- 1.4
0.5
-2.1
-1.3
0.8
-2. 1
0.8
0.5
- I .4
- 1.4
-1.3
0.5
-1.4
0.5
-1.2
-1.8
0. 5
- 1.1
I
-2.4
0.8
- 1.2
- 1.8
0.5
- 1.1
0.8
-1 .8
0.8
- 1.2
0.5
- 1.2
- 1.1
0.5
- 1.2
0.5
I
- I. I
- 1.1
-1.1
-1.1
-1.1
- 1.1
- I. I
-1.1
- 1.1
NOles :
I.
eN tinfOIl' 111'1 pn's.wrl'S ("ollfri /)/ffilUl .,-/nll1/ lOp (111(/ iWl/om ,n uf(u:('.'i)
Clem' lI'imlJlm,' t/l' IW(t'S n'llIfil 'l'~)' /limbs/melt'" willi/ jim ." with h/tlci;ag(> k~.\ I"f1Il ,II' ,'q ual II} 50%. Ob.~fnl( 1I!11 lI"illd lloll"d('l/ ofes objt'cls
mof il/!tihi/Jlll: \I'illdjl()\\' ( > 5fJ% hfo('/'(IJ:('j.
For l'<IIIIe'.I' a/II ath ..,. thflll Ihoxe .,-llt/WI!. /il/('/Ir ill/("1;o/fllioll ix p"nllilleel
1':1i. 011(/ m im(.\" .figtls .vigll/ji' pH's.wn's /tefmg /o 1l'IInls (11111 aWflyji'()/11 the tol' nu!/slIIj(/Cl'. r,-~~p( '(fi ndy.
COl~I"(}I/(IIf., ({lid claddi ng ( 'hfI/('''/.~ .I}/(/II II(' dl'.{iglwd./i}l posilil 'e (/mlll('gl1fil'I' preS."ll'(' " oeOiCI{'II/,f slm,.'I/.
J.
'1
5.
fi .
Na/afiolls :
(}
10% 1!(lnl.l'1 /tor iWIII,,1 "illll'll sioll.\' or (J Ail, u,h icht'\'('r ix SlI1ol/(,1' hut 1/01 /t'.I',\' I/'all 4'!'~ o(ll!(/ ,I'I horizonfa l dimemiol1.\' or
/'.1('(1/1 m{}rtll' lj~h l , //I
"
I.
eo'
(J '"""~
/(Ol'/zoll /al dillH'II.I' itl l/ ofhlliltiillJ:,
lII('tl.~IfIl'(/ 11/ (/I()II.~
\\'im/ dir('('litm.
11/
AI/KI t' ,!fplwl(' t!frm!l.Ii'lltll !wl'i::oll lai. d(Xrccx
Ro{) f:~
Figu re 207- 19C NC I Pressure Coefficients, e,v 0 11 Troughed Free

8:5 45 o f Open Buildi ngs with Il e igh! " to Length L rati o, 0,25 S hlL S 1.0
Compon ent s and Cladding
Nat io nal Stru ctural Code of 1110 Philippin es 6
111
Editi on Vo lume 1
n.9 m
hdoll'
7.68
CHM') TEH 2 - Minimum Design Loads
,
I
--p-j-'"
~ ..."" .!:'.... _--- -j
<~~~~~~~~~~~=~~]_;:1
CASE A
I
,
WIND
./ i F\--II.. _ ...
GROUND SURFAce
ELEVATION
;j J~H~'
view
WIND
RA,NGE
;;:'-"'1]-"'.1"'"
,....'j ":lJ
r
r_ -:::.:_=======--==.:::::=:.:.:=-....::_ __
tU N
CASEB
'---1
GROUND SURFACE
.-..\ -
(UN --.
._-_......_-----_.-
...-..!ti.CASE A &
CASE B
Aspect Ratio, Bls
1
2
4
1.45
lAO
1.35
1.4 5
l.S5
1.50
1. 65
1.60
1.60
1.75
1. 70
1.70
1.80
1. 80
1.80
1. 80
1.80
1.80
1. 80
1.80
1.8 5
C r, CASE
Clearance
< 0.05
1.80
1.85
1.90
1.95
1.95
1.95
1.95
WIND
RANGE
.
Ratio, "II!
1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
< 0. 16
; "-
CROSS-SECTION VIEW
0. 1
1.70
1.75
1. 85
1.85
1.90
1.90
1.90
0.2
1.65
1.70
175
1.80
1.85
1.85
1.85
0.5
1. 55
1.60
1.70
1.75
1.80
1.80
1.85
5
1.35
<:
.Regi on
-----10
1.30
lA S
lAO
1. 55
1.70
1.80
1.80
1. 85
.._._
1. 55
1.70
1.80
1. 85
1.85
- --_.__..
Re gion
Aspect Ratio, /31"

2
2.25
1. 50
o tos
s to 2s
2s to 3s
3s to lOs
4
2.90
1.90
1.30
1.1 0
3
2.60
1. 70
1. 15
5
3. 10'
2.00
7
3.40'
2.25
1. 65
1.05
330
2. 15
1.55
I .Q5
1A5
1.05
8
3.55 '
2.30
1.70
1.05
9
3.65'
2.3 5
1.75
1.00
10
3.75*
2.4 5
1.85
0.95
r2~.2="lJr .:~~;~~~- "~T l:;c~~;~~;'~~

I ~ ~I- ..
-I
oom I,,.....,.,
- .-- -
"I
----
....- -
>~ --
. _--
..-
. ~ ~...:-=--=.
20
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.70
1.85
1.90
1.90
"'8 -...
'
-~- -
-- - - _ . --- - -
o tos
s to 2s
2s to 3"
3s to 4.>
4s to 5s
40
1.30
30
1.30
1.40
1.55
1.70
1.85
1.90
1.90
l AO
1.55
1.75
1.85
1.95
1.95
.."_._-_._-"-_...-."Aspect Ratio.
Bls
13
4.00'
2.60
2.00
1.50
1.35
> 45
4.30'
2.55
1.95
1. 85
1.85
1.10
0.90
5.1' to
l Os ._. _._
-_.. .. . ..........0.55
> lOs
- -- -- .Yc.5L
__
------
Nll/e.~ :
I.
!.
The ferm "signs" ill "Olt'.<; hi'/OW (lIsa 0l1lllie.f tn ':rreeSfatuJilig wall.f ",
Sigll.t I>'if" opef/ing.t comprising I('ss ,hem 30% of 'he gross arM Or"(' da.'f.~ifit'J (IS .{(,Iitl .~i1!'u. f~,.cc ("(WOh."'lIt.( (nl" .foNd ,fi/!lu' "'itll
.l.
/n hr! IIIt,lHfJlied IIJ' {II!' redllctinn /actnr ( 1_ (I_c) 1') .

Tn all",1' holh 1I01"IImi uml ohli'l"(' willd dirj'f'limlS. t/Jrlllllnwillg CI'l'.t('f :'ilia/( be nlll.mit'Ir>tI
Opt'lIjllg.t .~hall
he' IJ"!"II/ it/t'd
For slil .:: I:

CASE A: }"nu/ll'lII lj,,"':!' ucts Iwrll/lIl /(I flu.'jil(."t, a/IIU' sigll fhrough III(' g c'ofl!f'/ric n'II/I'r.
CASE
r!'sufl(IIII .fill"(C' (/(I.t Iwrmol to fil!' flu'r> q(f/W .fi}!11 (I I U (/i.fWIICC'/I"O/ll rI,(, ,f.:1'Imll'tric <'ell/t'r IIIWI/I"d IIIl' 11"111(/"'((1'/1 ".!Kf <'f/lml to n.] (imc'.f Ilu'
m'('I"u8c' width 0/ tlu' sigll.
1'-,,,. /J/J? 2, CASE C 11111.1' ( rll.f(J /)f' ("I) /I,1";(/"I"('d:
(""ISI;'
n'.I'It!III/lI .ri)l"n'.~ a('ll1ol"lI/(// 1/) {/II'/U ("l' of file si),!11 Ih ro ug h Ihl' gCOIII <' f";(" ('('Ilfers IIleach I"t'gi(ll/,
Fo/" sl/J <. I :
.
n:
c:
TIl(' ,WIII(' ("IISI'S
(/.I'
I/hOl'(' ("XCI'li/lha//11('
l'w(i("(l I/o("(lIioll.l'
I?/".Ih (' I 'C.W IWIl/ fO/"( 'f' S IIC'I,"III" 11111 dis tall C(' 0/111\'(' I ii, ' g ('/llIwlri, ' ( '1' /1 1, '1"
heil:'" U/f!'" .~il: '!.

FOl" CAS/;' C ",he/"(' .tn, > nJ" {tltn' cfJt:lfirit!lIf.f "';',,11 h(' 1III1IIiplh(III.I' Ih(' I"1'11t'cliflll /(Ir 'lm (I .S
(l1"('/"(/ge
5.
Um'ur illlcq)()/ntioll ;,~ IX'r",iff('I/ filr ,'ulllC'.' or,rllt, /ll.f (IIu/I.,A of ill'./" 'htlll .f/lOlI'lI.
711(' "R'~ I(}II" ill III" luhh' IIhm't' j.f tllr' /WI"i:" , .lIal tll.'llIIu','/rm' , wwdwurr! rdgc
6_
Not(l/i,III '
/I ""' Illwi:'fllllal ditll('/I.~irlll 1I(.,;gll,
Ii = 1f1'i~/1I
.1' "
fir fir" .~iKII.
.,Ib).
1/1
1/1
I'f'I"th'ol {liml'll.nOlI or lilt: ";j!II . 11/

,;, J!/"o,f.\:a/"('tI
I: r.:. /(alillll(.lollIl an'a
L, :-. I IIIr"i:milu/ dil/ll'II,fillll {!{ /"('1111'1/ cm"cr,
11/
Figllre 20720 Force Coefficients, Cion Solid Freestanding Walls & Solid Signs
of all Height s Other Strllctures ... Method 2
Association of
S~ructurClI
Engineers of the Ptlilippu)cs
"'11111/ /1) (J.f}.i
l illl (,,\' IIi ('
CHAI:>TEf~
,.--
Cross-Section
. ___.____...___LYp.<'.gf Surface _. _____ -...
--~
- --
.jguarc (wind norma! to
(1)>25)
(1)~ >5.3, D in
Ill,
..-.-------
._._----.__ ..!.1...~
._----- All
All
1.0
- .1.0
All
Moderatelt Smooth
0.5
Rough (D'ID = 0.02)
0.7
Vert rough (D'lf) -: 0.08L _ _ -_. 0.8
f~lCC)
Square (wind along di~gonal)

Hexagonal or Octagonal
Round
2 -. Minimum Design Loads
hID
269
._----2 . 0~
1.4
1.1
J.2
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.4
0.7
0.9
0.2
0.8
J.2
q, in kPa
All
__. __
0.7
._- - - - - -
NOles:
I.
2.
3.
711(' d!'sign wind force shall he ("alculated based on the area of/luI structure projected 0/1 a plane I/omw{ /0 Ihe wind directioll. The force slwll be
assumed to act parallel 10 fhe wind directioll.
Unear illte/po/alion is permilled for hiD values OIher [hall sholl'lI.
Nowlion:
/lnder
f) '" Diameler of circu/or cross-section ond Icast horizolllal dimen~iolls (~rsqu(lre. hexagonal or octagollal cross-sectiolls al elevolion
consideration, m;
D' '" Depth (~(prol,./(dillg elements sllch (IS ribs alld spoilen'< 111:
II '" Heigh( (?is(rucrure. 111: and
q; '" Velocity pressure ('valuated at heighr z above ground. kP(I .
Figure
207~2!
Force Coefficients, (; on Chimneys, Tanks,
Rooftop Equipment and Similar Structures of AI! Heights

Other Structures Method 2
th
2l0
CHAr-'TE!, 2 .. Minimum Design l.oads
~.
Rounded Members
D,Jq; " 2.5

D,Jq; ,; 5.3
Dfq, >2.5
Dfi >5.3
2.0
1.2
0.8
0.1 to 0.29
1.8
1.3
0.9
0.3 to 0.7
1.6
1.5
1.1
{;
flat Sided
Members
<0.1
.-
..
Noles:
/.
2.
3.
4.
Signs lI'ilh openings comprising 30% or //lore a/the gross area are ch1.l'sijied {J.\' OpCII signs
The calculalion oj the desigll wind forces shafl he based an the area 0/ 0/1 e:tposed members and eiemcl1H projected
(0 (he wind directioll. Forces shall be assumed (0 (lct paral/ello the wind direcfioll.
71lc area A/collsisten! with Iheseji.Jrce coe/ficiclI/s is Ihe solid area projected norma! 10 the willd riil"/!Clioll.
Notation:
c "0 Ralio o/.wlid area 10 gross area
1J "" Diameter 0/ a typical round member. m
(j: '" Velocity pressure evaluated af heighl z aiJol'{! ground. kPa
Figure 207-22 Force Coefficients, Clan Open Signs and

Lattice Frameworks of All Heights
Other Structures - Method 2
011
(I
plant' lion:
CHAI"TEP 2 .. M'nil1llll1ll)""'[J1l Loads
211
Tower Cross Section
4.Oc 2 -5.98+4.0
Square
---1-----
Triangle
' - - - - - - - _. ... -
3.42
--4.7c+ 3.4
_ __._......_...
.. .....
Notes:
I.
3.
For all lI'il1d directions considered. Ihe IIrea A, ("ollsi.I'fell/ wilh {he ,I'!'ec!liedj()/"("(' ('ot{{1icicl!l.\' shall be rhe solid area (?(a IOll'er/lxl'
projected 011 rhe plane o/r/Jmf{lce/of {he lower segment under cOllsideration
The specijied;;,,.ce cm/jieien!,\' are/ill' {OIl'as will! structural allg!e,I' or .I'imilllljll1l-sided members.
For lOwers cOlllaining rOllnded mem/)el".\', il is (/('ceptable to mulliply lhe .I'pec(jil'd .FJrei' ('o{~((icicllix h.l' the /iJ/IO\\'illg faclOr when
d('fcrmilling wind/orees 011 .mel! 1II('lIIben '
fUll:! + f).57, /)liI I/O!;:' 1.0
4.
IVilld threes shalf be applied in the direcliOlls re:m/tillg in m(/XilllUIII membel" ji)N'('S and reactiolls. For t{)l\'NS with square erO.IS.I'r!(tion.I. wind (orc!!s shall be fIIUlliplied by Ihe j()ffowillg/aclOl" when the wind is direcled along a IOIVC'r di(lgonal
5.
Wind /orce.l Oil lower appllrtenallces slich (l.\' ladders. conduil.\". lights. ('{('\'IIlO!".\". ('1(" sha/l he
coe/ficir!ntsjor Ihe.I'e elements.
Nolatioll:
""' Ratio {?j'solid area to gross area O/OIlC lower/ace for (hc segmel1lllndel" comic/emfioll.
(;
-I-
0.751:.1)//11101 > 1.2

calclllilled lI.I'illg
Figure 207-23 Force Coefficients, Croll Trussed Towers orAl1 Heights

Other Structures .~. Method 2
111
appropriate force
2'1/.
CHM'lEP 2 .. Mirllfllurn Design l. oa(15
111'J"
120 "
122 "
.~----~-- .--- ." -
124"
126"E
..- -..--~-----~.
......1
N
20"
,;
HI"
HI"
i
ZONE II
ZONE I
V (200kph)
V (250kph)
14"
12"
10"
v "'
(150kph)
I'J"
.'
I
.1
. ...
Figure 207-24 Referenced Wind Zone Map oflhe Philippines

. . . . - ....... . _ j
I
I
CHAPTloH 2 - Minimum Design Loads
'
..
208.1 General
2-73
COMPONENT is a part or clement of an architectural,

electrical, mechanical Or structural system.
COMPONENT, EQ UIPMENT, is a mechanical or
electrical componclll or elemenl that is part of a
mechanical and/or electrical system .
208.1.1 Pnrpose
The purpose of the earthquake provisions herein is
primarily to safeguard against major stmctural f.1ilurcs
and loss of life. nol to limil damage or maintain fun ction.
COMPONENT, FLEXIBLE, is a compa nen., including

ils attachments. having a fundamental period greater than
0.06 second.
208.1.2 Minimum Seismic Design
Structures and portions thereof shall, as a minimum, be

designed an d constructed to resist th e effects of seismic
gro und motions as provided in this section.

208.1.3 Seismic and Wind Design
When the code-prescribed wind design produces greate r
effects, the wind design shall govcm, but detailing
requirements and limi tations prescribed in thi s sect ion and
referenced sections shall be followed .

208.2 Definitions
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motion s are
considered 10 be imparted to the structure or the level at

which the structure as a dynam ic vibrator is su pported.
BASE SHEAR, V, is the total design lateral force or
shear at the base of a structure.
COMPONENT, RIGID, is a compo nent, in cludin g its

attachments, having a fundamental period lcss than or
eq ual to 0.06 seco nd .
CONCENTRICALLY BRACE D FRAME is a braced
frame in which the members are subjected primarily to
axial forces.
DES IGN BASIS GROllND MOTION is that ground
motion that has a 10 percent cha nce of being exceeded in
50 years as determined by a si te-specific hazard analysis
or may be detemlin cd from a hazard map. A suite of
ground motion time hi 5toric5 with dynamic propcr1ies
representative of the si te chara cteristics shall be used to
represent thi s ground mo ti on. The dynamic effects of the
Design Basis Ground Motion ma y be represented by the
Design Response Spectrum. See Sec. ion 208.6.2.
BRACE D FRAME is an essentially ve rtical truss sys.em

of the concentric or eccentric type that is provided to
resist la tera l forces.
DES IGN RESPO NSE SPECTRUM is an elastic

response spectnllll for 5 perce nt equ ivalclH viscous
damping used to represent the dynamic effects of the
Design Basis Ground Motion for th e des ign of structures
in acco rdance with Sections 208.5 and 208.6. This
response spectrum may be either a site-specifi c spectru m
based 0 11 geologic, tectonic, seis mological and soi l
charac teristics assoc iated wi th a spccific site or may be a
spectrum conslmcted in accordance with the spect ral
shape in Figure 208-3 using the si te-specific va lues of Co
and C,. and multiplied by the accele ration of gravity,
9.815 m/sec'. See Section 208.6.2.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is an essentially complete space fmme that provides support for gravity loads.
Sec Secti o n 208 .4.6.2.
DESIGN SEISMI C FORCE is .he minimum .ota!

strength design base shea r, fa ctored and distributed in
accordn nce with Section 208.5 .
BEARING WALL SYSTEM is a stmc.u ral sys.em wi thout a comp lete vertical load-carrying :; pacc frame. Sec
Section 208.4.6 .1.
BOUNDARY ELEM E NT is an elemen t at edges
openings or at perimerers of shear wa lls or diaphragms.
or
CANTILEVERED COLlIMN ELEMENT is a column

clement in a la te ral-Iorce-res isting system thaI ca nti levers
from a fixed base and has minimal moment capacity at the
top. with l'lIcral forces applied essent iall y at the tall.

COLLECTOR is a me mber or clement provided to
tra nsfer latera l forces from a portion of a stmcllIre 10
vertica l c lements o r lhe latcnll-forcc-rcsisting system.
111
National Structural Code of the Pililippines 6 Edition Volume 1
?. 74
CHI\PTEH :2 .. MlflirnUIl1 De sign l.oads
DIAPI-IIlAGM is a horizon wl or ncarly horizontal

system acting to Irnnsmil lateral forces to the verticalresisting clements. The tern) "diaphragm" includes
hOI'izont<l1 br[lcing syste ms.
MOMENT-RESISTING WALL FRAME (Mlt\\T) IS

masonry wall frame especially detai led to provide
ductile behavior and designed in conformance with
Section 708.2.6.
DIAPHRAGM or SHEAR WALL CHORD is the

boundary clement of' a diaphragm or shear w<1 11 that is
assumed to takc axial stresses analogous to the nanges or
a beam.
ORDINARY BRACE D FRAME (O BF) is " steel

bnlccd fralllc designcd in accordance wit h {he provisions
of Section 527 or 528 or concrete-braced frame designcd
in accordance with Section 421.
DIAPllnAGM STRUT (drag stru t, tic, coliector) is the

element of a diaphragm parallel to the applied load that
collects and transrers dia phragm shcfIr to the verticalresisting clcments or distributcs loads within the
diaphragm. Such members may take axial tension or
compression.
FRAME
MOMENT-RESISTING
ORDINARY
(OIHRF) is a momcnt- resisting fi'ame nol meeting special
detai ling requi rements fo r ductile behavior.
II
ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the earthquake load

effects on structural eleme nts common ( 0 the lateralforce~resisting systems along two orthogonal axes.
DRIFT. See "story drift."

DUAL SYSTEM is a combinatio n of momcnt-resisting
frames and shear walls or braced frames designed in
accordance wi th Ihe criteria of Section 208.4.6.4 .
ECCENTRI C ALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a

steel-braced frame designed in conformance with Sect ion
528.
ELASTIC RESPONSE PARAMETERS arc forces and
defonnatiolls determ ined from an clastic dynamic analysis
lIsing an unreduced ground motion representation, in
accorda nce with Sect ion 208.6 .
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES arc those st nlctures that arc
necessary for emergency operations subsequent to <I
natural disas ter.
FLEXIBLE ELEMENT or SYSTEM is one whose
deformation undcr la teral load is significantly largcr than
adjoining parts of the system. Limiting ratios for dclini ng
specific ncxibl e elemcnts are sct fOrlh in Section 208.5.6.
HOIlIZONTAL BRA C ING SYSTEM is a horizonta l
truss system that serves thc samc fun ction as a di<1phragm.
OVERSTRENGTH is a characteristic of stl1lctures

where the actual strength is larger than the design
strength. The degree of ove rstrength is materia l-and
systc m~d cpen dcllt .
Pil EFFECT is the secondary effec t on shears, axial

forces and moments of frame mem bers due to the action
of the vertical loads ind uced by hori zontal displacemen t
of the stnlCture resulting from various loading.
SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist latern l forces
parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to as
vertical diaphragm or stlllctural wa!!).
SHEAR WALL-FRAME INTERA CTIV E SYSTEM
lIses combinations of shear walls and fmmcs designed to
resist latera) forces in propol1ion (0 the ir relative
rigidi ties, cons idering interaction between shear wa lls and
frames on alI levels.
SOFT STORY is olle ill which th e lateral stiffness is less
than 70 percent of the stiffness of the story above. Sec
Tobie 208-9.
Scction 412 .
SPACE FRAME is a three-dim ensional struct\ !ral

system, wi th out bearing walls ) composed of mCIri!)(".iS
inte rconnected so as to function :'IS a complete sclfcontained unit with or \vithollt the <lid of horizontal
diaphragms or noor~bracjllg systems.
LATICRALFORCE- RESISTING SYSTEM is that part

of th e structural system desi gned to res ist th e Design
Se ismic Fon.;cs.
SPECIAL C ONClcNTHICALLY BRACED FRAME

(SeBF) is a .s lccl~braccd frame desi gned in conformance.:
with the provisions of Section 526.
MOMENT- IU:S ISTI , G F I(AMI-: is " [',\l11C in which

members and joints Me cap.lblc or resis ting forccs
prinwri ly by Oexure.
S PECIAL MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (SMRF)

is a morncnl-resisting frame speciall y detailed 10 provide
INTERMEOIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME

(Ii\1RF) is a concrete rrame designed in accordance wilh
I\ssOClatlOI) of Structural En91tlCerS
or th.n Phl liPPUW5
CHAPTEF :2 .," Ivlinirnum Desi9n LOCld~;
ductile behavior and comply with the requirements given

Chapter 4 or 5,
jn
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAME (STMF) is a

moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behavior and comply with the provisions of
Section 525 .
STORY is the space between levels, Story x is the story
below icvel x.
STORY DRIFT is the lateral displacement of one level
relative to the level above or below.
STORY DRIFT RATIO is the story drift divided by the
story height.
STORY SHEAR, V" is the summation of design lateral
forces above the story under consideration.
STRENGTH is the capacity of an clement or a mcmber
to rcsist factored load as specified in Chapters 2, 3,4, 5
and 7.
STRUCTURE is an asscmblagc of framing members
designed to support gravity loads and resist lateral forces.
Structures may be categorized as building structurcs or
nonbuilding structures.
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a diaphragm used to
transfer wall anchorage forces to diaphragm cross tics.
C
C[
)l~)
seismic coef'flciellt, as set forth in Table 208-7

numerical coemclent given in Section 208.5.2.2
C,. ~ seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208-8
D
dead load on a structural element
De = the length of a shear wall in the first stOI), in the
direction parallel to the applied forces, m
E, E", Em' E,. = earthquake loads set forth in Section
208.5.1, N
F I , FII.I;~"" design seismic force applied to Level i, 17
or ,r, respectively, N
f'~) "" design seismic force all a part of the structure, N
Fpx =-:-: design seismic force on a diaphragm, N
F[ = that portion of the base shear, V. considered
concentrated at the top of the structure in addition
toF,ION
f = lateral force at Level i for use in Equation 208- I 0,
N
g
;;:: acceleration due to gravity;;:: 9.815 m/sec 2
h" h",hl ,
~"" height above the base to Level i, 11 or \
respectively, III
= importance factor given in Table 208-\
I" = importance factor for llonstructura1 component
as given in Table 208-1
L = live load on a structural clement
=: level of the structure referred to by the
Level i
subscript i
"i = 111 designates the first level above the base
= that level that is uppermost in the main
Level n
portion of the structure
that level that is under design
Level x
consideration
"x I" designates the first level above the base
IH
maximum momellt magnitude
.N"
near~SOllrec factor uscd in the determination of' C
in SeismiC Zone 4 related to both thc proximity of'
the building or structure to known faults with
magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-4 and 20S -()
N,. C~ Ilear-sourcc factor Ilsed in the determination of C, .
in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the proximity of
the building or structure to known faults with
magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-5 and 208-6
PI ;;:: plasticity index of soil determined in accordance
with approved national standards
R '''' llulllerical coefficient representative or the inherent
overstrength and global ductility capacity or
lateral-foree-resisting systems, as set {()I'th in Table
208-11 or 208-13
,. ;-,. a ratio used in determining p. Sec Section 208.5 . 1
S,,,, Sf), Sc, Su, Sb SF soil proflle types as set f()rth in
Table 208-2
)' ... clastic fundamental perind of' vibration of' the
structure in thc directioll under consideration, sec
II
the total design lateral force or shear at the base
given by Equalions 208-4, 208-.\, 2086. 208-7 or
208-11, N
V,_ '-'" the design story shear in Story x, N
=
li
:=:
::'0
000
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME is a spacc

fl'amc designed to carry vertical gravity loads.
WALL ANCHORAGE SYSTEM is the system of
clements anchoring the wa!! to the diaphragm and those
clements within the diaphragm required to develop the
anchorage forces,
including subdiaphragms and
continuous tics, as specified in Sections 208.8.2.7 alld
208.8.2.8.
\VEAK STORY IS one in which the story strength is less
than 80 percent orthe story above, Sec Table 208~9,
208.3 Symhols and Notation
At;
A,.
A"
A\
(II'
',"C
ground floor area of structure to include area

covered by all overhangs and projections, 1112
the combincd effective arca of the shear walls in
the Ill'st story of the structure, 111 2
the minimum cross-sectional area in any horizontal
planc in thc first story ora shcar wall, m 2
the torsional amplification f~lctor at Level x
numerical coefficient specificd in Section 20g.7
and set fc)rth in Table 208-12
":0
II
c.c
;'CO
National Structural Code of the:: Philippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
2-lG
CHAPTEH 2 .. Minimum DesI9fl l.oads
in Sections
208.5.1.1 and 208.5.2.1, N
Wi. IV,\'
that portion of W located at or assigned to Level i
or x, respectively, N
FVp ::~ the weight of an element Of component, N
W,n ;.=; the weight of the diaphragm and the clement
tributary thereto at Level x, including applicable
loads defined 111 Section
portions of other
208.5.1.1, N
Z seismic zone factor as given in Table 2083
b. M ,-.c: Maximum Inelastic Response Displacemcnt, which
is the total drift or total story drift that occurs
when the structure is subjected to the Design
Basis Ground Motion, inclueling estimated elastic
and inelastic contributions to the total deformation
defincd in Section 208.5.9.2, 111m
As = Design Lcvel Rcsponse Displacement, which is the
total drift or tOlal story drift that occurs when the
structure is subjected to thc design seismic forccs,
"0 the total seismic dead load dcfined
the design approach used in the design of the structure,

provided load combinations of Section 203.4 are utilized.
:0:
D"
:.~
208.4.2 Occupancy Categories
For puqJOSCS of earthquake-resistant design, each

structure shall be placed in one of the occupancy
categories listed in Table 1031. Table 2081 assigns
importance factors, I and 1/1' and strLlctural observation
requircrocnts for each category.
Table
---
I.
II.
208~!
Occupancy
Category'
Seismic
Importance
Factor, J
Seismic
Importance 2
Essential
Facilities
1.50
1.50
1.25
1.50
Hazardous
Facilities
Factor, I"
Occupancy
horizontal displacement at Level i relative to the

base due to applied lateral forces, f,' for use in
Equation 208-10, mm
Redundancy/Reliability Factor given by Equation
2083
Seismic Force Amplification Factor, which is
required to account for structural overstrength and
set forth in Table 20811
Structures 4
IV.
V.
1.00
1.00
._- .
Standard
Occupancy
Structures 4
Miscellaneous
structures
J .00
1.00
1.00
1.00
, See Table 103-1/0/' occlipanL)' categol)' listing.

TlU' limitatioll of 1,,/or pond COllllectiollS in Sectioll 208.8.2.3 shalf
be 1.0 for the entire connector.
208.4 Criteria Selection
208.4.1 Basis for Design
Structural Ob.H!IWllion reqllireme!1ls are given in Secrioll /()7.9.

For anchorage a/machinery and (~qUlj)/ll('nl reqlliredfor I!fe-s(ljery
sy.\lellls. Ih(' willie (~f I" shall be taken 0.1" 1.5.
208.4.3 Site Geology and Soil Characteristics
Each site shall be assigned a soil profile type based on

properly substantiated geotechnical data using the site
categorization procedure set forth in Section 208.10 and
Table 2082.
The minillluill design strength shall be based 011 the

Design Seismic Forces determined ill accordance with the
static lateral force procedure or Section 20B.S, except as
modified by Section 20R.6.5.4
208.4.3.1 Soil Profile Type
Where strcngth design is uscd, the load combinations of

Section 20.1.:1 shall apply. Where Allowable Stress
Design is llsed, the load combinations of' Section 203.4
shall apply.
Allowable Stress Design may be uscd to evaluate sliding
or overturning at the soil-structure interrace regardless of
III. Special
1llJl1
The procedures and the limitations for tile design of

structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning,
site characteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural
system and height in accordance with this section.
Structures shall be designed with adequate strength to
withstand the latera! ciisplacements induced by the Design
Basis Ground Motion, considering the inelastic response
of the structurc and the inherent redundancy, overstrength
and ductility of the lateral force-resisting system.
- Seismic Importance Factors
Soil Profile Types SA, Su. Sc. So and S/;, are defined in
Table 2082 and Soil Profile Type SF is defined as ", .,
requiring site-specific evaluation as follows:
I.
Soils vulnerable to potentia! failure O!: collapse lil"

seismic loading, such as liquefiable soils, quick iind
CHAP1TR 2 - Minimum Design Loads
hi g hly
2.
senSlllve
clays, and
collapsible
weakly
cemented soils.
208.4.4,1 Seismic Zo ne
Peals and/or highly organic clays , where th e

Ihickness o f peal o r highly organic clay exceeds 3.0
The Philippine archipelago is divided in lo lwo seismic

zones o nly. Zone 2 covers the provinces of Palawan, Sulu
and Tawi-Tawi while the res t of the country is under Zone
4 as shown in Figure 2081 . Each slnrcture shall be
assigned a seismic zone factor Z. in accordance with
Table 208 3.
Ill .
3.
Very high plasticil y cla ys wi th a plasticity inde x, PI

> 75, where Ihe depth of clay exceeds 7.5 m.
4.
Very thick soft/medium stiff clays, where the depth

o f c lay exceeds 35 m .
.
The cril e ria sci fo rlh in Ihe definition fo r So il Profile Ty pe

SF requiring site-specific evaluation shall be considered.
If th e s ite corresponds to these criteria. the si te shall be
classified as Soil Profile Type SF and a sile-specifi c
evaluati on shall be conducted.

Table 208 -2 . Soil Profile Types
Soi l
Prol1lc
Nam e I
Soil
Profile
Generic
Desc riplion
Type
A verage Soil Properties for Top

30 m of Soil Profile
Shea r
Undrained
SPT, N
Wave
VCI~ci,~' V,
mls
---.- - .--Hard
SA
1-.._ .. Rock
> 1500
Rock
760 10
1500
S,]
Sll ca r
St r'cngth ,
(blowsl
300 nlln)
SI! (kPII)
. _- -' -
Very
Table 208-3 Seismi c Zone Factor Z
~~Z~O~N~E=-__+-__~2~__-+_____4~___ J
Z
SII
S,..:I
S,..
Suit Pmfile 7)'/X' Sf: alw iJld/i(/e.{ (lilY .w il profile
.I
f} III
\1 '__
,h e'
lI'i,"
more 'hall
of soft cia)' (leJim'd as a .w i/wilh plas /icily index, PI :- 10,
<10 p er('('11I (/lId ,f. < 24 kPa . The Pla.~/ic:i~~' 'lldex, PI, arrd
I/W i.f/lIIl! 1'0111<" 1/,
\hall b e
11' - . .
d ('l <'r mill('d i ll occOI dfll/ C'1!
with
(lf IPI"lH'l'ti IUI/iwwl ,t l om/nrd.\.
0.40]
In Seismic Zone 4, each Site shall be assigned nearsource

factors in accordance wilh Tables 2084 and 208-5 based
on the Seism ic Source Type as set forth in Sectio n
208.4.4.4.
The va lue of Nfl used to detcnnine Co need not exceed 1.1
for structures complying wit h all the following
condition s:
I.
The soil profile Iype is SA . So, Sc or S'l'
2.
P ~ 1.0.
3,
Except in single-story stnlclures, residential building

accom modatin g 10 or fewe r perso ns, private ga rages,
carports, sheds and agri cu ltural buildings, momclH
frame syste ms designa ted as part of the lateral forceresi sting sys tem shall be special moment-resisting
frames ,
4.
The exceptions to Section 5 15.6.5 shall not appl y,

except for co lulllns in oncstory build ings o r columns
at the lOp story of mullistory bu ildings.
5.
None of the following stru ctural irregula rit ies is

presem : Type 1,4 or 5 a fTable 2089, and Type I or
4 of Table 208 10.
360 to
Soi l ad
> 50
> 100
760
so n
Roc k
Sliff Soil
180 10
1.1 III
50 10
Pro Ii iI!
360
50
100
Sofl Soi l
< 180
< 15
< 50
Pro fil e
Soil Requi ring Site-spec ific Evaluatioll .
See Section 208.4 .3. 1
S"
0.20
208.4.4.2 Seismic Zone 4 Near-Source Faclor
Dense
277
208.4.4.3 Seismic R esponse Coefficients

Each structure shall be assigned a seismic coefficienl. en.
in accordance with Tab le 208-7 and i1 se ismic coefficient.
C,~ in accordance w ith T<lb le 20XS.
208.4.4 Si t e Se ismi c Hazard C hara c t<.'r is lics
Se ismi c ha zard duracteristics for Ihe site shall be

eSlahlished based Oil the seismic zOll e lind proximit y of
th e S lt ~ to ;u.: tive seismic sources, site soi l pro fil e
c haracteristics ilnd the st ructure's importance f' IC{Or.
208.4.4.4 Seismi c SOllrce T ypes

Table 2086 defines the Iypes o r seismic SOllrces. The
location and type o f seismi c so urces to be used for design
shall be established based 0 11 approved geological data;
sec Figure 208-2A. T ypc A sources shall he dete rmined
('rolll Figures 208-2B. C. D. E or the most recent mapp ing
of ac ti v~ 1:1UIIS by th e Philippine Inslilu te of Volcano logy
and Seismology (PHIVOLCS).
National S tru ctLJ n~ 1 Code of til e Philippines 6
111
Edition Volum e 1
2-78
CHAPTEFo( 2 Muul1lum
Dc:!~ lun
I.o'.lcl!-,
ear-Source Factor N"
Table 208-4
Seismic
Source
Table 208-6 - Seismic SOllrce Types'
TlP!
S5k lll
2 10k 'll
A
B
C
12
1.0
1.0
1.0
_I L
- - - - -- ........._ _L<2.. _ ....... __._

'fab le 208-5
-~
Closest Oi stance To
Known Seismic Soul"ce l
$ 5 km
10km
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.2
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
..
.\,Itull
1>1'
tllh'lI
as
that
that
are
of
large
M ,? 7.0
events
have a
...
__._--
6.5 ~ M < 7.0
C.
TIl(' Nl'aT-Sauro.! Foctor m;l)' hI' based 011 tilt' IiI/ifill' illlel]1OluluJII
of 1'1IJII('.~ jiJr distal/CeS 0Ii11'1' Iilol/ lhos(- shou'l/ i" til(' lahle .
SO/iTCf!
D\ ti lt ;~~t.'ll
1\'1ax i~;;;-~-\1;nl-e;~
hi gh rate of seismic
ac ti vity.
All faults other
(han Types A and
15 km
- . --~
;",'r:
.. M. ~ll.~!! "d.!2...11L.
Faults
ma gnitude
Paults that are not

capable
of
producing
Jarge
magnitude
earthquakes
and
have
that
a
relatively low rate
of seis mic activity.
Notes/or Tahle's ]08.4 and 108.j :
The closes! di.HIUIC(' to .'u'ismic
Description
and
Typo
Seismic Sour'cc
producing
A
"._-
~ ;:i \~,':c ~;:'"
ca pable
--_.
..........
Source
Seismic
Source
Type
----
.... _ ..
Ncar-Source FlI<: tor, N,,)
Sr.ismic
..
Closest Dista nce To

Known Seism ic So ut'ee 2
til('
mil/imuflt diJt(lIl(,(' betwe"" til(' sifl~ (llid thl' urca i!l'Jcribl'd lIy tIl('
verticaf projer'lion of {he ,WI/rei! Oil llie ,1'llijiICI' (i.e .. slIIfaC('
projection (~/jillllt p lul/e) . 77w XIII/aCe projectiol/ lI('ed IWt il/{'/lId('
porrioll.~ of ,II, .I'Olln 'l! al dt'pfhs olIO kill or gn'tlla. TIlt' largest
value 0/ 'he Nt'(lI'Sourct' Factor cOJ!sid~'ring I//! source.I' shall IJ('
IIsed/or ",'sigll.
L...,--
SuhduClio/! S()lIr(,(',\' shall be I!m/ll(lled on
M<6.5
f1
site-specijlc basis.
Table 208-7 - Seismic CoefGcient,
Seismic Zone Z
So il Profil e
Type
SA
Z ~ O.4
0.2
0. 32Na
OAONa
OAON,
OA4N.
OA4N.
See Footllote I a/Table 2088
0 . 16
0.20
0.24
0.28
0.34
SI!
So
S"
S,
S,.-
Tab le 208-8 .. Seismic Coefficie nt, Cv

Seismic Zone Z
Soil I'rofile
Type
..
S"
SB
Sc
..
51)
S,
SF.
L._ _
Z" O.2
Z.. O.4
0.16
OJ2N"
0.20
0.32
OAON"
0.56N,,__ _
0.64N,. - - 0.9611'" - - - -
OAO
0.64
St'C' FOrlilJole I a/ Table 108-8
Sitt"-V)('dlic ~I'(}{('dmin" illl'l':>liglllic)f/ lIlId dYlI(lmic JI/(' j CSlJOII.f C'

sh(l/J lu" ' <'lji}l m('d to dC/I'I'mill(, .teiJIII;( C()('j]ir:il'lll.f
IIIUlZI'S/\
Association of Structural
EI19J1H~nrS
of tliB PhilipPlnmj
CHAPTER 2 .. Minimum Design Loads
2-79
208.4.6.3 Moment Resisting Frallle System

208.4.5 Configuration nequirelllents
alln 208.4.5.2.
A structural sysfem with an essenti ally complete space

frame providing support for gravity loads. Momentresisting frames provide resistance to lateral load
primarily by flexural action of members.
208.4.5.1 Regular Structures
208.4.6.4 Dual Syslem
Regular stnlctufcS have no significant physica l

discontinuities ill plan or ve rtical configuration or in their
A structural system with the following features:
Each structure shall be designated as being structurally

regular or irregular in accordance with Sections 208 .4.5. 1
lateral- lo ree-resisting systems such as

features described in Section 208.4.5.2.
the
irregular
An essentially complete space frame that provides

supp0l1 for gravity loads.
2.
Resistance to latera l load is provided by shear walls

or braced frames and momentwresisting frames
208.4.5.2 Irregular Structures
J.
(SMRF, IMltF, MMRWF Or steel OMRF). The

moment-resisting frames sha ll be designed to
independenlly resist al leasl 25 percenl of Ihe design
ilTcgular structures have significant physical

discontinuities in configuration or in their lateral force-resisting systems. Irregular features include, but
base shear.
are Ilot limited 10. those described in Tables 208-9
alld 208 10. All slruclu res iu occupancy Calegories 4

and 5 in Seismic Zone 2 Ileed 10 be evaluated only for
verlical irregularili of Type 5 (Table 2089) and
horizonlal irregularilies of Type I (Table 208-10).
2.
Sll1Jcturcs having any of the features listed in Table

208 9 shall be designated as if having a vertical
irregularity.
v
Exception:
Where I/O stmy drift ratio under design lateral forces is

greater thal/ 1.3 times rhe story drift ratio of rhe stDlY
above, the SfnJcture may be deemed 10 not have the
stroctural irregularities of Type J or 2 in Table 208-9.
The story drift ratio for the top two slories need not be
considered. The stDlY drifts for this de/ermina/ion may be
I.
3.
The Iwo syslems shall be designed 10 resisl Ihe lola l
design base shear in proportion to their relative

rigidities considering the interaction of the dual
system a l all levels.
208.4.6.5 Cantilevered Column Syslem
A structural system relying on cantilevered column
elements for lateral resistance.
208.4.6.6 Undefined Structural System
A sl ruclural syslem no l lisled in Table 208 11 .
208.4.6.7 NonbuiJding Structural System
A struc tural system conforming to Section 208.9.
calcuiated negiecliflg torsional effects.

J.
Structures havin g allY of the features listed in Table

208-10 shall be designated as having a plan
irregularity.
208.4.7 Height Limits
Height limits Cor the variolls structural systems in Seismic

Zone 4 arc given in Table 20811.
Structural systems shall be classified as one of the types

lisled in Table 208-11 and defined in Ihis seclion.
ExcepJion: .
Regu!ar slruCllJres may exc.~ed /III~se limits by not more
than
percent for unoccupied st'1lctures, which we not.
.. .
accessible to tHe general public.
208.4.6.1 fleadng Wall Sys tem
208.4.8 Selection of Lateral Force Procedure
A structu ra l sys tem without a complete vertica l Joadcarrying space frame. nCilring wall s or bracing systems
provide su pport for all or most gr;wily loads. Resistance
10 latera l load is provided by slH!Hr Willis or braced
Ally structure may bel and certain structures defined

below shall be, designed usin g th e dynamic lateral -force
procedurcs ofScclion 20R.6.
208.4.6 Slnlclu,.J Systems
so
frames .
208.4.6.2 Bllilding Framo Syst em
A slructural system with (ill cssc!llially complete srmce

fnllnc providing SliPPOrl for gravity IOiH.is. ResistClllce to
late ral load is provided by shear walls or braced fr:lJnes,
NatiofliJl Struc tural Code of It'll.'! Pililippin es 6
th
Edition Volume 1
?-80
CHAPTEH 2 -- Minimum Design loads
Tablc 208- 10 Horizon[al Structural Irregularities

Tab le 208-9 Vertical Stmcturallrregularities
Irregularity Ty pe and Definition
J.
2.
Stiffness Irregularity - Soft

Story
A soft story is one 111 which the
Int eral stiffness is less than 70 pcrccnt
of th at in thc story above or Icss th an
80 perccn t of the average st iffn ess of
the three stories above.
Weight (Mass) Irregularit y
Mass ilTegularity shall be considered
to exist where the effective mass of

any story is more than 150 percent of
the effective mass of an adjacen t
story. A roof that is lighter than Ih e
ncar below need not be considered.
3.
Reference
Section
Irregularity T ype and Definition

I.
208.4.8.3
Itc1l1 2
208.4 .8.3
item 2
2.
Rc-Entran[ Cor ner Irreg ularity
3.
Plan config urat ions of a stmcture and

its
latera l-foree-resisting
system
contain re-C nLT"dnt co rn ers. where both
projections o r the stru cture beyond a
re-entrant corner arc greater thHn 15
percent of th c pl nn dimensi on of the
stmclure in the givcn directi on.
Diaphragm Discontinuity
Vertical Geometric Irregularity
4.
horizontal dimension of the latera!-
208 .4 .8.3
Ite lll 2
morc than 130 percent of that in an
Irregulari[y
adj acent story. One-slory penthouses

need not be co nsidered.
In-Plane Discontinuily III Vertical
disDiaphragms
with
abrupt
continuities or variati ons in stiffness,
Lateral-Force-Resisting ElclHCllt
Irregularity
areas greater than 50 percent o f the

gross enclosed area of the di aphragm,
or changes in effect ive diaphragm
stiffness of more than 50 percent from
one story 10 the next.
An in-plane offset of the lateral-I oadresisting clements greater th an Ihe
5.
including those having ClI to ut o r open

208.5.8 . 1
length of those clements.

Discontinuity In Capacity - \V rak
4.
Sto ry Irreg ularit y

A weak story is one in which the
stO ry strcngth is less than 80 perccnt

of that in the story above. Thc story
strength is the to[al strength of all
seismic-resisting clements sharing

the story for the direction under
consideration.
208.4 .9. 1
Section
208.8 .2.8
Item 6
including accidenta l tors ioll. at one

end of the st ructure transverse to an
axis is more than 1.2 Limes the
average of the story drifts of the two
ends of the stnJcture.
Vel1i cal geome tric irregularity shall

be co nsidered to exist where thc
force-resisting system in any stolY is
Torsional Irregu larit y - To Be

Considered \ Vhell Diaphragms Are
Not Flexible
be
Torsional
irregularity shall
co nsidered to exist when the
maximull1 story drift. computed
Rer"'cn cc
5.
208.8.2.8
items G
and 7
208.8.2_8
ItemG
Out-Or-Plan e Ofrsets Irreg ularity

Discontinuities ill a Illtera l force path,
such as out-of-planc of(,cts of Ihe
208.5 .8.1
208.8.2.8
vertica l elements
Nonparallcl Systcms Irregu lari ty
Thc vertical
latcral-Ioau-resisting
elcments ,Irc not parallcl to or
symmetric about th e major orth ogo nal
axes of Ih e lateral force-resisting
systems.
515 .7
Association of Stru ctura l :n9incefs of tile Phllipplll n~,
Item 6;
208.8. 1
---
CHArYlH, 2 ." Minimuill Design Loads
208.4.8.1 Simplified Static
soils at the site and shail conform to Section 208.6.2,

Item 4.
The simplified static lateral-force procedure sct forth in

Section 208.5.2.3 may be used for the following
stnlcllHCS of Occupancy Category IV or V:
208.4.9 System Limitations
1.
208.4.9.1 Discontinuity
Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family

dwellings) not more than three stories in height
excluding
basements
that
usc
light-frame
construction.
2.
Other buildings not more than two stories in height
excluding basements.
208.4.8.2 Static
The static lateral force procedure of Section 208.5 may be
used for the foHowing structures:

1.
2.
3.
Strucfures with a discontinuity in capacity, vertical

irregularity Type 5 as defined in Table 208-9, shall not be
over two stories or 9 111 in height where the weak story ha;;
a calculated strength of less than 65 percent of the story
above.
Exception: .
Where the weak story is capable of!i~sisting a total
lal(rqi. . seismic' force of n" times.. jlii design fore.
.',,<..
, ..
prescribed in Section 208.5.
All stmcl1Jres, regular or irregular in Occupancy

Categories IV and V in Seismic Zone 2.
208.4.9.2 Undefined Structural Systems
Regular stilletures under 75 III in height with latera!

force resistance provided by systems listed in Table
208-11, except where Section 208.4.8.3, Item 4,
applies.
For undefined structural systems not listed in Table 208

II, the coefficient R shail be substantiated by approve'
cyclic test data and analyses. The following items shail be
addressed when establishing R:
Irregular stnlctures not morc than five stories or 20
I.
Dynamic response characteristics,
2.
Lateral force resistance,
3.
Overstrength and strain hardening or softening,
4.
Strength and stiffness degradation,
S.
Energy dissipation characteristics,
6.
System ductility, and
7.
Redundancy.
III
in height.
4.
2-81
Stmctures having a flexible upper portion supported

on a rigid lower portion where both portions of the
stnlcture considered separately can be classified as
being regular, the average story stiffness of the lower
portion is at least 10 times the average story stiffness
of the upper portion and the period of the entire
structure is not greater than 1.1 times the period of
the upper portion considered as a separate structure
fixed at the base.
208.4.8.3 Dyn,"nic
The dynamic lateral-force procedure of Section 208.6
shall be used for all other structures, inclu.ding the
following:
I.
Structures 7S m or more in height, except as

permitted by Section 208.4.8.2, Item I.
2.
Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric

vertical irregularity of Type I, 2 or 3, as defined in
Table 208-9, or structures having irregular features
not described in Table 208-9 or 208-10, except as
permitted by Section 208.5.4.1.
3.
Structures ovcr five stories or 20 111 ill height in

Seismic Zone 4 not having the same structural system
throughout their height except as permitted by
Section 208.6.2.
4.
St!1lctures, regular or irregular, located on Soil

Profile Type SF, that have a period greater than 0.7
second. The analysis shall include the effects of the
208.4.9.3 Irregular Features

All structures having irregular features described in Table
208-9 or 208-10 shall be designed to meet the additional
requirements of those sections referenced in the tables.
208.4.10 Alternative Procedures

Alternative lateral.,force procedures using rational
analyses based on well-established principles of
mechanics may be used in lieu of those prescribed in
these provisions.
208.4.10.1 Seismic Isolation

Seismic isolation, energy dissipation and damping
systems may be used in the design of structures when
approved by the building official- and when special
detailing is used to provide results equivalent to those
obtained by the use of cOllventional structural systems.
th
Edition Volume 1
CHAPTE:f~
282
2 ... Minil'fH.Hll Design l.oads
208.5 Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related

Effects
208.5.1 Earthquake
Requirements
Loads
and
Modeling
208.s.l.l Earthquake Loads

StJ1lctures shall be designed for ground motion producing
structural response and seismic forces in any horizontal
direction. The following earthquake loads shal! be used in
the load combinations set forth in Section 203:
E",
E, .
(2082)
the product of the wall shear multiplied by 31 'wand

divided by the total story shear, where I,.. is the length of
the wall in meter.
resulting from the combination of the horizontal

component, Ell> and the vertical component, E, ..
the earthquake load due to the base shear, V, as set
forth in Section 208.5.2 or the design lateral force,
Fp, as set forth in Section 208.7.
the estimated maximum earthquake force that can
be developed in the stlUcture as set forth in Section
208.5.1.1, and used in the design of specific
elements of the structure, as specifically identilled
in this code.
the load effect resulting from the vertical
component of the earthquake ground motion and is
equal to an addition of o.~/Dto the dead load

effect, f), for Strength Design, and may be taken as
zero for Allowable Stress Design.
.0" = the seismic force amplification factor that is
required to account for structural overstrength, as
set forth in Section 208.5.3.1.
p
= Reliability/Redundancy Factor as given by the
following equation:
(20R3)
where:
("""
.~~
shall be taken as the maximum value or
For shear walls,
= the earthquake load on an element of the structure
E"
For moment frames, ri shall be taken as the maximum of

the sLIm of the shears in any two adjacent columns in a
moment frame bay divided by the story shear. For
columns common to two bays with moment-resisting
connections on opposite sides at LeVCI i in the direction
under consideration, 70 percent of . the shear in th,1t
column may be used in the column shear summation.
(2081 )
where:
For braced frames, the value of ri is equal to the

maximum horizontal force component in a single brace
element divided by the total story shear.
the maximum clement-story shear ratio . For "

given direction of loading, the element-story shear
ratio is the ratio of the design story shear in the
most heavily loaded singlc clement divided by the
total design story shear.
For fIny given Story Level i, the elcl1lent-stolY shear ratio

is denoted as r,. The maximulll elemcnt-story shear ratio
1'''''1\ is defined as the largest of the clement story shear
ratios, r" which occurs in any of the story levels at or
below the two-thirds height level oCthe building.
I"i
For dual systems, ri shall be taken as the maximum valur:

of ri as defined above considering a!llateral~load-resisting
elements. The lateral loads shal! be distributed to
clements based on relative rigidities considering the
interaction of the dual system. For dual systems, the value
of p need not exceed 80 percent of the value calculated
abovc.
p shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater
than 1.5. For special moment-resisting frames, except

when used in dual systems, p shaH not exceed 1.25. The
Ilumber of bays of special momcnt-resisting frames shall
be increased to reducc r, such that p is less than or equal
to 1.25.
/!.,xception:
All may be taken as the average floor area in the upper
setback portion 0/ the building where a larger base area
exists at the ground floor.
When calculating drift, or when the structure is located in
SeismiC Zone 2, p shall be taken equal to ! .0.
The ground motion producing lateral responsc and design

seismic forces Illay be assumed to act nOll-concurrently in
the direction or each principal axis or the structure, except
as required by Section 20X.8.1.
Seismic de'l(.1 load. /-V, !s the total dead load :lnd
applicable portions or other loads listed below.
I.
In storage and w,lrehousc occupancies, a minimulll or

25 percent orlhe floor liv(, lo,HI shall be applicable.
2.
Where a partition load is used in (he floor design,

load of !lot kss (hall (l.S kNhn~ shall be included.
1.
Total \'.'eight
included.
Association of Structural Enqirwers of tile Phi!IPPIrl(?5
or
permancnt equipment shall be
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design
20B.5.1.2 Modelling Re(IUircmcnts

The mathemat ical model of the ph ysica l slructure shall
include all elements of the lateral-force-resisting system.
Thc 1110del shall also include Ihe sliffness and slrenglh of
elemen ts, whi ch arc gignificanl 10 the distri bution of
forces, and shall represent Ihe spatial distrib ution of the
mass and stiffness of the structure. In add ition, th e model
shall comply wilh the fOllowing:
1.
2.
2-63
The total design bilse shear shall not be less than the
followiug:
V=O.l
r:~JW
(208-6)
In addition, fo r Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall

also not be less than the following:
v = O.BZN,. 1 W
Stiffness propcl1ics of reinforced concrete an d

masonry eleme nts shall cons ider the ciTcels o f
cracked sec tions.
For steel moment frame systems, the contr ibution of

panel zone deformatio ns to overall story driti sha ll be
included.
Loads
(20B-7)
II
20B.5.2.2 Structure Period
The va lue of T shall be determined from one of Ihe
following melhods:
Method A:
20B.S.1.3 Ph Effects
I.
The resulting member forces and moment s and the story
cor all buildings, Ihe value T may be approximaled from

the following equalion:
drifts induced by Ph effects shall be considered in the

evaluation of overall Slnlctural frame stability and shall be
evaluated using the forces produci ng the disp lacements of
tJ-s. P6 need not be considered when the ratio of
secondaJY moment to primary moment does not exceed
0.10; the ratio may be evaluated for any stOty as the
produci of the tolal dead and Ooor live loads, as required
in Section 203, above the stOty times the se ismic drift in
that story divided by the product of the seismic shear in
that story times th e height o f lhat story. In Seismic Zone
4, P6. need'"not be considered whcn the story drift rati o
docs not exceed 0.02 , R.
20B.S.2 Static Force Procedure
(208 -4)
The total design base shcar need not exceed the

following:
V = - - - '- W
II
31 4
(208-B)
where:
C : : : 0.0853 for steel momen t-resis ting frames.

for
reinforced
concrete
momentresisting frames and eccentrically braced frames.
C, = 0.0488 fo r all other bu ildings.
C,
== 0.0731
Allernativcly, the value of Cr

or mClSOt1r)'
rat
structures with concrcte

shear walls may be taken as 0.0743 1.fA: .
The val ue of A, shall be determined from Ihe followi ng
208.S.2.1 Dcsignllase Shear

The total des ign base shear in a given direction sha ll be
determined from the following equati on:
2.5C, 1
T = C/"II)
(20H-S)
N8tioJ'lai Structural Code of the
equa ti on:
(208- 9)
The value of
exceed 0.9.
2.
Del hl1used in Equation
(20B-9) shall not
Method Il :
The fundamental period T' may be calculatcd lIsi ng the

structu ral properties and deforma tional characteristics of
th e res isti ng elemcnts ill a properly su bstantiHted analysis.
The <Hwlysis shall be in accordance with the requi rements
Ill' Seelion 208 .5. 1.2. The value of T from Melhod 13 shall
!lot exceed a vallie 30 percent greater than the value of T
ob tained from Method A ill Seism ic Zone 4, and 40
percell1 in Seismic Zone 2.
Philj ppl!'l~~S Gi ll Editi on Vo lum e '1
2-84
CHAPTEH 2 - Minimum Oesign Loads
Table 208- 11 A Ear1hquake-Force-Resisting Stmctural Systems of Concrete

-~ - -
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting Syst m
no
4.5
4.5
2. 8
2.8
NL
NL
5.5
2.8
NL
75
5.6
2.2
NL
NP
5.5
2.8
8.5
2.8
NL
NL
5.5
2.8
NL
NP
3.5
2.8
NL
NP
8. 5
6.5
2.8
2.8
NL
NP
NL
NP
6.5
4.2
2.8
2.8
NL
NL
50
50
4.2
2.8
NP
NP
2.0
NL
NL
10
50
-4
I',
!
A. Bearill/i Wall Systems

Special rein forced concrete shear walls
OrdilHuy reinforced conCrete Shf:I ' walls
B. Buildill!: Frame Systems

Special reinforced concrete shear walls or
braced frames
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls or

braced frames
Intcnncdiatc precast shear walls or braced
Special reinforced concrete moment frames

InlCnllCdiate reinforced concrete moment
frames
Ordinary reinforced concrete moment fra mes
frames
C. Aloment-Resistill/( Frame Systems
D. Dual Systems
Special reinforced concrete shear wall s
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
E. Dual System with Intermediate Momellt Frames
SjJCcial reinforced concrete shear walls
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
Shear wall frame interactive system with
ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames
and ordinat.I reinforced concrete shear walls
F. Cantilevered Column BuildillJ! Systems
Cantilevered column elements
G. Shear Il'all- Fram e imeractioll Systems
System Limitation and

Building Height Limitation by
Seismic Zone, m
Zone 4
Zone 2
..
2.2
5.5
2.8
Association of Structural Engineers of the PI)ilippin8s
--
50
NP
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Load s
2-85
Table 208-11B EarthquakeForce Resisting Structural Systems of Steel

System Limitation nd
Building Height Li mi' ion by
Seismic Zon e
04
Zone 2
no
2.8
2.2
NL
4.4
2.2
NL
4.5
2.8
NL
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System
A. Bearill!! Wall Systems
..
Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension only bracing

Braced frames where bracing carries gravity
load
Light framed walls sheathed with wood
stntctural panels rated for shear resistance or
steel sheets
Light-framed wa lls with shear panels of a ll
ot her light materia ls
Light-framed wall systems using flat strap
bracing
._.
' J
4.5
2.8
NL
2.8
2.2
NL
8.5
2.8
NL
6.0
2.2
NL
6.0
3.2
2.2
2.2
6.5
2.8
NL
2.5
2.8
NL
2.8
NL
2.8
NL
2.8
NL
8.0
4.5
3.5
6.5
3
3
3
3
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
5
6
NL
48
NP
..' 0
'"
...
B. Buildill!! Frame Systems
Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF),

momen t-resis ting connections at co lumns
away from links
Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), non
moment-resisting connections at columns
away from links
Special concentrically braced frames (SCBf')
Ordinary concentri cally braced frames (OCSF)
Light-framed walls sheathed with wood
structuralpanels I sheet steel panels
Light fmme wa lls with shear panels of all other
materials
Buck lin g-restrained braced frames (BRBF),
110 n l1lolnc llt-resisting beam-colu mn
connection
Buckling-restrai ned braced frames, mOlllcnl resistin.e beam-colunm connections
Specia l steel plate shear walls (S PSW)
C. MomentResisting Frame Systems
Special moment- resisting frame (S MRF)

Intermediate steel moment frames (1M!')
Ordinary moment frames (OMF)
Speciallruss moment framcs (STMF)
Special com posi te steel and concrete momenl
frames
In lermediate co mp<?s itc moment frames
Composi te pa rtiall y restra ined moment frames
Ord inary co mposite moment fra mcs
D, Dual S,'slems wilh Special t.lomelJl Fram es
..-
.-
3
3
Steel eccent rically braced frames

__
S
Spcci,lI stcel concent rica lly braced framcs___
---- - 7-.Co mposite steel and concrete eccentri ca ll y
8
braced frame
- - - -_._.
Nt
NL
..
2.8
2.8
NL
_.
2.8
... - - - - - - - 111
National Structuml Code of !he Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
_.. _.
-,
..- .. -
., o
. ..
I,
---
..
.
t"
.-.
N
.
.. .._-_..N
h.:
!, ..
:. '
"
NL= i
NL
_._-----
"
.__ ." ..
i'<
._ .
-_.
2-86
CHAPTEH '2 .- MlIlllllum DesIgn Loads
Table 208-1 1B(eonl'd) Ealihquakc-Force-Resisling Sll1Ielural Syslems of Sleel
Basic Seismic-Force Res ist in g System
Composite steel and concrete concelltric ally

braced fiam e
Composite steel plate shear wa ll s
Buck ling-restrained braced fmllle
Special Slee l plate shear wa lls
Masonry shea r wa ll wit h slee l OMRF
Sleel EBF with sleel SMRF
Stecl EBF wi lh slee l OMRF
Special concentrically braced frames wi th steel
Special concentrically braced frames with steel
SM RF
OMRF
E. Du al SJ'stem witlt Intermediate IWomelll Frames
Special slccl co ncen lrically braced frame
Composite steel and concrete concentrically
braced frame
Ordinary co mposite braced frame
Ordinary composite reinforced co ncrete shear
walls with stee l elements
I"~ Calltilel'ered Columll Buildill!! Systems
Specia l steel moment frallies
fnterl11cdiatc steel moment frames
Ordinary sleell110ment frames
Cantilevered colu mn elements
G. Steel Systems lI ot Specifically Detailed fo r
Seism ic R esistance, Excluding Cantilever S},stel1ls
_-
... ..
- -.-_
System Li mii i'. ; !: lIi ;1 1l <i
Building Height Limitation hy
Seismic Zone, 111
Zone 4
Zone 2 .." .
..
n.
2.H
7.5
8
8
4.2
8.5
4.2
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
7.5
2.8
NL
NL
4.2
2.8
NL
50
NL
.-
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
. -- ......
--
~-
NL
-NL
_ _-_
NL
_h ...
...
- - ------.NL -- .
.-----.
50
-_. _-----.
--
NL
50
-.
-
2.8
NL
NP
5.5
2.8
NL
NP
3.5
2.8
NL
NP
2.8
NL
NP
2.2
1.2
1.0
2.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
10
10
10
NP
NP
NL
10
NL
NP
10
Table 208- 11C Earthquake-Foree-Resi$till g Structura l Systems or Masonry
A. Bearing IVal/ S~lste ms

Masonry shear wa lls
11. Buildi,,!: Frame Sl,.w ems
Mason~ shear walls
C l'1oment-R esi.*ifiIlK Fram e SJ'stemJ
Masol1JY moment-resist ing w<l1I frames
JMMRWF)
D. Dllal Sy .<lem.l'
Masollry s hear walls w ith SMRF
Masonry s hear wa lls with steel OMRF
- Maso lllY shear wa lls wilh concrete IMRF
---_.. Masonry shear wa!ls with Illa ~~~nry MMRWF
no
System Limitation and

Seismic Zone 1 m
ZOlle 4 ...Zone 2
4.5
2.8
NL
50
5.5
2.8
NL
50
6.5
2.8
NL
50
5.5
4.2
4.2
(,.0
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
NL
Nt.
NL
Nt.
50
50
As socia tion of Structural Engineers of the Phil ippines
--.
-
...
_.
_.
NP
50
.-
2-81
Table 208- 11 D Earthquake-Farce-Resisting Structura l Systems of Wood
no
System Limitalion and

Seismic Zone (meters)

Zo ne 2
Zone 4
2.8
NL
20
2.8
2.2
NL
20
NA
NA
NA
NA
2.8
2.2
NL
20
6.5
2.8
NL
20
A. Bearing Wall Systems
Li ght- framed wa lls wi th shear panels: wood

s tructural panel wa lls fo r s tructures three
sto ries or less
H eavy limbt!r braced frames where bracing
carries Rravi ty load
Light-framed wa lls with wood shear panels
walls for structures three stories or less
All other li gh t framed walls
Heavy timber-braced frames where bracing
carries gravity load
5.5
..
B. Building Frame Systems
Light-framed walls w ith shear panels: wood

structura l panel walls for structures three
sto ries or less
Ordinary heavv timber-braced frames
The fundamental period T may be computed by using the

following equation:
T =21[
(208 -10)
I,
1
I
I
The values of jl: represent any latera l force distributed

approximatel y in accordance with the principles of
Equations (208-13), (208-14) and (208-15) or any other
ralional distributi oll. The c lastic de Oect ions. 0;, shall be
calculated using th e applied lateral forces,r,.
I.
Type 1, 4 or 5 of Table 208-9, or
2.
Type I or 4 ofTable 208-1 0.
208.5.2.3.2 Vert ical Distribution

The rorces at each level shall be calcu lated usi ng the
following equation :
(208-1 2)
where the value of C(l shall be dctermined as ill Section

208.5.2.3. I.
208.5.2.3 .1 Ilase Shear
208.5.2.3 .3 Applicability
The total design base shear in a given direc tion shall be

dctennincd rrom the ro llow ing equa ti on :
Section s 208.5.1.2, 208.5.1. 3, 20 8.5.2. 1, 208.5.2.2,

208.5.5, 208.5 .9, 208.5.10 'lJ1d 208.6 shall not apply when
lIsing the simp lified procedure.
11
SE shall be used in Seismic Zo ne 2. III Seis mic Zonc 4,

the Nea r- Source Factor, Na. need not be greater than 1.2 if
no ne of the following structural irregu lariti es are present :
3C0 w.
F .::: __
x
11
'
Structures conforming to the req uirements of Section

208.4.8. 1 may be des igned us ing this procedure.
3e
20
2.2
NL
where the value of C. shall be based on Tab le 208-7 for
the soil profile type. When the , oil properties are not
know n in sufficient detai l to determine the soil profile
type, Type SD shall be used in Seismic Zone 4, and Type
208.5.2.3 Simplified Desig n Base Shear
ll
V ~--- W
II
5.6
(208-1 I)
th
N(llional Stru ctural Cod e of the PhilipPines 6 Edition Vo turn e 1
2-88
CHAPTEI< 2 -_. Minim urn Design l.oads
1.1 The flexible upper portion shall be designed as a

separate structure, supported latera ll y by the
rig id lower portion, using the appropri ate values
of Rand p.
1.2 The rigid lower portion shall be designed as a
separate structure using the appropriate value s of

Ra nd p . The reactions from the upper pOl1ion
shall be those detennined from the analysis of
the upper portion amplified by the rat io o f the
(Rip) of the upper portion over (RIp) of the lower
Where used , !:lid shall be taken equal to 0 .0 l limes the
SIOIY height of all Slories. In Seclion 208.8.2 .8, Equalion

(208-20)
shal1 read
and
ex ceed Ca ~11pX' but shall no t be less than
need
O.Sea wpx .
and llo shall be laken from Table 208-1 L

208.5.3 Dctcrm.ination of Seismic Factors
208.5.3,1 Determination of llo
Fo r spec ific e le ments of the structure, as s pec ifically
identified in this code, the minimum design strength shall

be the product of the seismic force overstrength factor
pOl1ion.
not
nn
and the design seismic forces set f0l1h in Section 208.5.

For both Allowab le SUess Design and Strength Design,
the Seismic Force Overslrength Factor, flo. shall be taken
from Table 208- I I .
208.5.3.2 Determination of R
The value for II shal1 be taken from Table 2081 I.
208.5.4 Combinations of Structural Systems
Where com binations of structura l syste ms arc
incorpo rated inl o th e same stru cture, the requirements of
this sec tion shall be satisfied.
208.5.4.1 Vertica l Combinations
The value of R used in the design of any story shall be

less than or equJI to the value of R llsed in the give n
direction for the story above.
208.5.4.2 Combinations along Different Axes

In Seismic Zone 4 where a structure has a bearing wall
system in only one direction, the value of R used for
design in the orthogonal direction shall not be greater lhan
thaI used for the bearing wall system.
Any com bination of bearing wall systems, building frame

systems, dual systems or moment-resisting frame systems
may be used to resist seismic forces in struCtures less than
50 m in height. On ly combinati ons of dual systems and
special moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist
seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 m in height in
Seismic Zone 4.
208.5.4.3 Combinations along the Same Axis
Where a combination of different structural systems is
utilized to resist latera! forces in the same direction, the
value of R used for design in Ihat direction shall not be
greater than the least value for any of the systems utilized
in that same directi on.
208.5.5 Vertical Distribution of Force
The lotal force shall be distribu ted over the hei ght of the
stru clure in confom1ance with Equations (2 08-1 3), (208 14) and (208- I 5) in the absence of a more rigorous
procedure.
"
v =r~ + IF;
Exception:
This requirement Ileed not be applied 10 a slory where the
dead weight above that stolY is less than 10 percellt of Ihe
fatal dead weight a/the Slruc[we.
Structures may be designed using th e procedures of Ihis

section unde r the following condit ions:
The cnli!"!.: stru cture is des ig!1ed using the lowest R or thc
tilleral force-res is ting systems used, or
I.
(208-1 3)
(= 1
The following Iwo-stagc slatic anal ys is procedures

Illa y be used fo r struc tures con forming
20X.4 .R.2 _Itelll 4.
10
Sectio n
Thc con ccntrated force F, at the top, wh ic h is ill additi on

10
r:
I,
shall be dc::rmined fro m th e equation:
F, =o.07TV
(208-14 )
The value of T used fo r the purpose of calculati ng J-~ shall

be Ihe pcriod thaI corres ponds with the desig n base shear
<IS computed usin g Equation (208 -4). PI need 110t ex cced
O.2:V a nd may be cons ide red as zcro where '" i': 0 .7
second or less. The rcma in ing porti on of th e b;n. :.1. r
shall be distributed over the height of the SIlth: llil"C,
includ ing Level II. according to the foHow ing equation :
A!:'sociatlon of Structural EIl91ne ers or the Philippines
CHAPTEH 2 - Minimum Design Loads
F
x
= (V - F,)w,."-,.
(20S-ls )
"
2-89
208.5,7 Horizo nta l To rsio n al Mo m ent s
L Wihi
Provisions shall be made fo r th e increased shears resuit ing
;=1
from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not

flex ible. The most severe load combination for each
At each level designated as x, the force F, shall be applied

over the area of the bu ilding in ac cordance wi th the mass
clemen! sha ll be considered for design.
distribut ion at that leve l. Struc tural di splacements and

design seismic forces shall be calculated as the e rfect of
forces F, and F, applied at the appropriate levels above
the base.
moment resulting from eccentricities between applied
The torsional design moment at a given story shall be the

desi gn lateral forces at levels above that story and the
vertica l-resisting elements in that story plus an accidental
torsion.
208,5.6 Ho r izo ntal Dist ri b nti on of Shea r
The design story shear. V.n in any story is the sum of the
forces F, and F, above th at story. V, shall be distri buted to
the various elements of the vertical lateral fo rce~resi s ti ng
system in proportion to their rigidities. considering the
rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 208.8.2.3 for rigid
e lemen ts that are not intended to be part. of the lateral
fo rc e~
resisting systems.
The acciden tal torsiona l moment shall be determi ned by
assuming the mass is displaced as required by Section

208 .5 .6.
Where torsi onal irregularity exists, as defined in Table
20S- 10, the effects shall be accounted for by increasing
the accidenta l torsion at each level by an amplification
rae tor, A n determined from the following equation:
Where diaphragms are not fl exible, the mass at each level

shall be assumed to be disp laced from the calculated
center of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5
percent of the building dimension al that level
perpendicular to the direc tion of the fo rce under
considerati on. The effec t of thi s displ acement on the
story shear distri bu tion shall be considered.
Om,/! =
Diaphrag ms shall be considered flexi ble fo r the purposes
O (tIUX
of distribution of story shear and torsional moment when

the max imum lateral defo rmation of the diaphragm is
more th an two limes lhe average story dri ft of the
associated story. This may be determined by comparing
the compu ted midpoint in ~pl ane deflection of the
diaphragm itself und er lateral load with the story drift of
adjoining vertical-resisting elements under equi va lent
tribu tary l.te ra l load.
(208 -1 6)
where:
the average of the displacements at the extreme

points of th e structure at Level x, mOl
the maximum displacement at Level x, mm
The val ue of Ax need no t exceed 3.0

208.5.8 Overturn ing
Every structure shall be designed to resist lhe overtull1ing

effects caused by earthquake forces speci fied in Section
208.5.5. At any level, the overturn ing moments to be
resisted shall be determ ined using those seismic forces (F/
and F,) th at act on levels above the level under
consideration. At any level, the incrementa l changes of
the design overturnin g moment shall be di stributed to the

various resi sting elements in the manner prescribed in
Section 20S.S.6. Overturning effects on every element
shall be carried down to the fou ndation. See Sect ions
207. 1 and 208. 8 for combining gra vi ty and seismic fo rces.
,j
!
i
I
,~
National Stru ctural Code of the Phil ippi nes 6'" Editio n Volume 1
I,
1
._n, o o!- ( .' .' . ..
.;itf'
2-90
CHAP1TF< 2 ... Minimum Design Loa ds
20B.5.8.1 Elements
Systems
Supporting
6.
Steel clements designed primarily as flexu ral

members or trusses shall have bracing for bo th top
and bottom beam fl anges or chords at the locut ion of
the support of the discontinuous system and sha ll
comply with the requirements of Section 515.6. 1.3.
7.
Wood elements des igned primarily as flexural

members shall be provided with lateral bracing o r
solid blocking at each end of the clement and at the
ro" nection location(s) of the di scontinuous system.
Discontinuous
20B.5.B.l.l General
Where allY portion of the lateral load-resisting system is
discontinuous, such as fo r vertical irregularity Type 4 in
Ta ble 208-9 or plan irregularity Type 4 in Table 208 10,
concre te, masolllY, stee l and wood e lements supporting
s uch discontinuous systems s hall have the design strength
to resist the combination loads resulting from the special

seismic load co mbinations of Sect ion 203.5.
~c.epti.oTi$"
.t. :., ' ., .' '.' :: '.. .
th~ qbi1nfithjfj;ljJ.'iech'oif:~03.5 need nbt exce~ the

m{lilmum fo.rceiliat caJlbetransferred 10 Ihe element
. !>y Ihe-:1ciletai-fQti:~'resijrin$ System.
,.
! : ~;'\" .~ . ' ,~1;
,;.: . .: : .
20 B. 5.B.2 At Foundation
Sec Sections 208.4.1 and 308.4 for overturning moments
to be resi sted at the foundation so il interface.
2. Qq~.crflf~lqos;:~1fpl!.qrlil!g IigJ:lI-/rame wood ,shear

>V(JJ):sxstems or ilghJ.;ji-qme sleel and wood structural
pa~elshe~r wall sYSiemi:
fo r A ll owable Stress Design, the design strcngth may be

detennined usin g an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
resistance factor, , of 1.0. This increase shall not be
combincd with the oncthird stress in crease perm itted by
Section 203.4, but may be combi ncd with the duration of
load increase pennitted in Section 615.3.4.
20B.5.8.1,2 Detailing requirem ents in Seismic Zonc 4
In Seis mic Zone 4, e lcmcnls support ing discontinllous
systems shall meet tbe following detailing or mem be r
limitfltions:
I.
Reinforced co ncretc or rcinforced masonry clcmcnts

designed primarily as axja l~lo ad members shal!
compl y wit h Section 42 1.4.4.5.
2.
Reinforced conc rete elements designed primarily as

flex ura l members and supporting other than ligh tfram e wood shear wa ll system or light-fra me stee l
and wood structural panel shear wall systems shall
comply with Sections 421.3.2 and 421.3 .3. Streng th
compu tations for portions of slabs dcsigned as
support ing elcment s shall include only those portions
of th e slab tlw.! comply with th e requirements of thesc
20B.5.9 Drift
Drift o r horizontal displacements of the structure shall be
com puted where requi red by this code. For both
Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design, the
Maximum In elastic Response Displacement, 6.,.,. of the
structure caused by the Design Basis Ground Motion shall
be determined in accordance with this section. The drifts
corresponding to the design seismic forces of Section
208.5.2.1 or Section 208.6.5, /), S, shall be detennined in
accordance w ith Section 208.5.9.1. To determine /),U,
these drifts shall be amp lified in accordance with Section
208.5.9.2.
208.5.9.1 Determination of L1s
A static, elastic analysis of the lateral rorce~res i s ting
system shall be prepared using the design seism ic forces
from Section 208 .5.2. 1. Alternatively, dynamic ana lysis
may be performed in accordance with Secti on 208 .6.
Where All owa ble Stress Design is llsed and where drift is
being computed, the load combinations of Scction 203.3
shall be used. The mathematical model shall comply with
Section 208.5.1.2. The resuiting defomlati ons, denoted as
11.<;. sha ll be determined at all critical loca tion s in the
structure. Calcu lated drift shall inc lude translational and
torsional deflections.
20B.5,9.2 Dct enllinatio n of /)'",

Th e Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, tJ.,\{.
shall be comruted as follow s:
sections.
J.
Masolll)' clemcnts des igned primari ly as

carrying mcmbers shall co mp ly with
706. 1. 12.4. Item I. and 70g .2.6.2.6.
Sec tions
4.
Masonry cl ements des ign ed primaril y as ncxural

members shall compl y with Sect ion 70X.2 .6.2.5.
5.
Steel clemc nts designed prill1;lrily as :lxi'II-load

membe rs sha ll compl y wilh Sec ti ons 5 15.4.2 il nd
515.4 .3.
Associatloll
(208- 17)
' L~ial - I o ad
() f
.xception:
~.:.
Alternatively, 6. M may be :computed by Ilonlinear time

his/DI)' analysis in accordance with Sec/ion 208.6. 6.
The analysis lIsed to determi nc the Ma ximu m In clastic
Response Displacement AM shall considcr P6 effecls.
Stfllclu(tll EngIneers of thA
Phiti pprn e ~
CHAryrEF, 2- Minimum D"sign Loads
208.5.10 Story Drift Limitation

Story drifts shall be computed using the Maximum
Inelastic Response Displacement, 11 M .
principles of dynamics.
208.5.10.1 Calculated
section
Calculated story drift llsing !!.'d shall not exceed 0.025

times the story height for structures having a fundamental
period of less than 0.7 sec. For structures having a
fundamental period of 0.7 sec or greater, the calculated

,tDlY drill shall not exceed 0.020 times the stOIY height.
2-91
representation and shall be performed using accepted
Structures that arc designed in accordance with this
shall
comply
with
all
other
applicable
requirements of these provisions.
208.6.2 Ground Motion

The ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be
one having a I O-percent probability of being exceeded in
Exceptions:
50 years, shall not be reduced by the quantity R and may

be one of the following:
1.
1.
l'lzese drift limits may be exceeded when it is

demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by
both stmctural elements and nonstructural elements
that could affect life safety. The drift used in this
assessment shall be based upon the Maximum
Inelastic Response Displacement, LlM .
2.
There shall be no drift limit in single-story steelframed structures whose primaty use is limited to
storage, jactories or workshops. Minor accessOlY
uses shall be allowed. Structures on which this
exception is used shall !lot have equipment attached
to the structural Fame or shall have such equipment
detailed to accommodate the additional drift. Walls
that are laterally supported by the steel frame shall
be designed to accommodate the drift in accordance
with Section 208.8.2.3.
en
acceleration ordinates shall be multiplied by the

acceleration of gravity, 9.815 mfsec 2
2.
A sitewspecific elastic design response spectrum

based on the geologic, tectonic, seismologic and soil
characteristics associated with the specific site. The
spectrum shall be developed for a damping ratio of
0.05, unless a different value is shown to be
consistent with the anticipated structural behavior at
the intensity of shaking established for the site.

3.
208.5.10.2 Limitations
The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated
drift may disregard the limitations of Equation (208-6)
and (208-7) alld may be based 011 the period determined
from Equation (208-10) neglecting the 30 or 40 percent
limitations of Section 208.S.2.2, Item 2.
An elastic design response spectlllm constructed in

accordance with Figure 208-3, using the values of
and C. consistent with the specific site. The design
Ground motion time histories developed for the

specific site shall be representative of actual
earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
histories, either individually or in combination, shall
approximate the site design spectrum conforming to
Section 208.6.2, Item 2.

4.
For stJ1lctures on Soil Profile Type Sr, the following

requirements shall apply when required by Section
208.4.8.3. Item 4:
4.1 The ground motion representation shall be

developed in accordance with Items 2 and 3.
208.5.11 Vertical Component

4.2 Possible amplification of building response due
to the effects of soil-stl1lcture interaction and
The following requirements apply in Seismic Zone 4

only. Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed
lengthening of building
for a net upward force of O.7Ca/~r

In addition to all other applicable load combinations,
horizontal prestressed cOlllponents shall be designed using
not 1110re ill;!n SO percent of' the dead load for the gravity
load, alone or in combination with the lateral force
efJCds.
208.6 Dynamic Analysis Procedures
period
caused
by
inelastic behavior shall be considered.
s.
The vertical component of' ground motion may be

defined
by scaling corresponding horizontal
accelerations by a factor of (wo- thirds. Alterna;ivc
factors may be used \vhen substantiated by ~itew
specific data. Where the Near Source Factor, Nil' is
greater than 1.0, site-specific vertical response
spectra shall be used in lieu of the factor of twothirds.
208.6.1 General
208.6.3 Mathematical Model
Dynamic analyses procedures, when used, shall conform

to the criteria established in this sectiol1. The analysis
shall be b;lscd 011 an appropriate ground Illotion
A mathematical model of the physical structure shall

represent the spatial distribution of the mass and stiffness
of the structure to an extent that is adequate for the
lh
Nation;:]1 Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1
2-92
CHAPTEIi: '2 ..
Miflllllllnl Oesl~Jil
l.oacis
calculation or the significant rcntures of its dynamic

response. A three-dimensiona l model shall be used for
the dYlllllllic analys is of sll1lc(ures wit h highl y irregular
plan config urat ions such as those havi ng a pla n
ilTegularity detl ncd in Tab le 208- J 0 and hav ing a ri gid or
semi- rig id diap hmg m. The stiffn ess properti es used in th e
analysis and ge neral mathematica l modeling shall be in
accordance \-vith Section 208.5.1.2 .
208.6.4 Description of Analysis Procedures
208.6.4.1 Hes!,ollse SpectrullI Allalysis
An elasti c dyn.lI mic ana lys is of a st ru cture uti lizing the
peak dynamic response of all modes hav ing a signifi cant
contri bution to total stmclura l response. Peak moda l
responses arc calcu lated usi ng the ordinates of the
appro priate response spectrum curve which correspond to
th e modal periods. Maximum mod<1 1 contribut ions arc
combined in a stat istical manner to oblHin <til approximate
[olal slmc(ura l response.
combined by recognized methods. When lhr eedimcnsiona l modcls arc used fo r analysis, mo dal
interactio n efleClS shall be considered when co mbining
modal IlH1X im<1.
208.6.5.4 Rl'dutlion of Elastic Response Parameters
for Design
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced for purposes
of design ill acco rda nce with the foll owing itcms, \\. itll th e
limitation th at in no case shall th e Elas ti c Response
I)aramciers b ~ reduced sllch thaI the co rresrond ing des ign
base shear is less th an th e Elasti c Response Base Shear
divided by Ihe va lue o f R.
I.
2.
208.6.4.2 Time History Analysis
An analysis of th e dynamic response of a structure at each

increment of time when the base is subj ected to a specific
ground Illotion time history.
For all regular structures where the ground motion

representalion comp lies wilh Seclion 208.6.2, Item I,
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
that the correspond ing design base shear is not less
than 90 percent o f the base shear detenn ined in
acco rdance wilh Section 208.5.2.
For all regul ar strucrures where the ground motio n
reprcscntati on compli es with Sect ion 208.6.2 , hem 2,
Elastic Res ponse Parameters mny be reduced such
that the co n esponding design base shear is not less
than 80 percent of the base shear detelmined ill
accordance with Section 208 .5.2 .
208.6.5 Re sponse Speclrll III Analysis
3.
208.6.5. 1 Res ponse Spectrum Represe ntation and

Interpretation or Results
The ground motion represl'll!<ltion shall be in accordance
\v ith Section 208.0.2. The corresponding response
parnmclcrs, including fo rces. momen ts and displacC'lllcnts,
shall be denoted <is Elasti c Res ponse Parametcrs. Elas tic
Response Para mc{C rs Illay be rrduccd in acco rdance with
Sec lio n 208.6.5 .4.
The corresponding reduced design seismic fo rces sha ll be

used for design in ~ccordance wilh Section 203.
The base shCHr for a given direct iol1 . de term ined usin g
dynamic analysis must not be less thall th e value obtained
by the equivalent lateral force meth od of" Section 208.5 .2.
In this case, alt co rresponding rC!-ipo nse P,lr(l1l1ctcrs arc
adjusted pro portiona tely.
f<or all irregula r stru ctures, regardless of th e ground

Illotion re presentation, Elastic Response Parameters
may be reduced sllch that the cOITespondi ng design
basc shear is not less {han 100 percenl or the base
shear determined in accordance wit h Section 208.5.2.
208.6.5.5 Direclion a l Errecls
Directiona l effec ts fo r horizontal groun d Illotion shall

con form 10 the req uirements of Sectio n 208.5. 1. The
effects of vert ica l ground moti ol1s on horizontal
cantilevers and pres tressed elements shall be qmsiciered
in accordance with Section 208.5.1 t . Altcrnately. vertical
seismic re s p o ll s ~ Illay be determined by dynamic response
me thods ; in no case shall the response uscd for design b(.:
Jess than that obtllinc<1 by the slatic mc th od.
208.6.5.2 Number or Modes
TilL' requ irc mcnt of Section 20K.6.4. 1 II1<1t all signifi cant
modes be inc ludcd may he sCltisfied hy demonstrating lhat
for the modes cOJlsidered. <II least 90 percent or thl.!
participating mass of the strurlure is im:ludcd in th\.'
calcu lation of response I(w each principal hori7.ontal
direct ion.
208 .6.5,] COlllhini llg Modes
208. 6.5.6 TO"sion

The analysis sllflll HCCO Ulll ror to rsionall'flcc{s. including
;Jct:jdcn t ~1 torsional efrects as presc ribed in Sect ion
20X.5.7. Where thl'ccdimcn:.;ional mode-Is :lrc uscd for
ana lysis, erfects of accidcnwl torsion shall be accou nted
fiJI" by appro priate adjust ments in the model slich il f;
adjust men t of" mass loca lions. or by equ ivale nt statio:
procedures such as pro vided in Sect ion 208.5.0.
The pcn k member j()]"ces. di sp lacements. slory f()fI:cs,

story shears ;llld base reactions I()r" l~ ach mode shall be
Assod:ltlon of Structural
Eil~J l ntw r s
of the PhlilPPll leS
CHAVITf, 2 - Minimum Design Loads
208.6.5.7 Dual Systems
2,93
208.6.6.3 Nonlinear Time History Analysis
Where the latera! forces arc resisted by a dual system as

defined in Section 208.4.6.4, the combined system shall
208.6.6.3.1 Nonlinear Time History
be capable of resisting the base shear determined in
Nonlinear time history analysis shall meet ;bc

requirements of Section 208.4.10, and time histories sblll
be developed and results detennined in accordance with
the requirements of Section 208.6.6.1. Capacities,eI
characteristics of nonlinear elements shall be modci<:d
consistent with test data or substantiated analy<s,
considering the Importance Factor. .The maxirm::n
inelastic response displacement shall no(be reduced ,:lid
shall comply with Section 208.5.10.
accordance with this section. The moment-resisting frame
shall conform to Section 208.4.6.4, Item 2, and may be

analyzed using either the procedures of Section 208.5.5 or
those or Section 208.6.5.
208.6.6 Time History Analysis

208.6.6.1 Time History
Time-history analysis shall be performed with pairs of
appropriate
horizontal
ground-motion
time-
history
components that shall be selected and scaled from not less

than three recorded events. Appropriate time histories
shall have magnitudes, fault distances and source
mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the
design-basis
earthquake
(or
maximum capable
earthquake). Where three appropriate recorded groundmotion time-history pairs are not available, appropriate
simulated ground-motion time-history pairs may be used
to make up the total number required. For each pair of
horizontal ground- motion components, the square root of
the sum of the squares (SRSS) of the 5 percent-damped
site-specific spectrum
of the scaled horizontal
components shall be constructed. The motions shall be
scaled such that the average value of the SRSS spectra
does not fall below 1.4 times the S percent-damped
spectrum of the design-basis earthquake for periods from
O.2T second to I.ST seconds. Each pair of time histories
shall be applied simultaneously to the model considering
torsional effects.
The parameter of interest shall be calculated for each
timc.- history analysis. If three time-history analyses are
performed, then the maximum response of the parameter
of interest shall be used for design. If seven or more timehistory analyses are performed, then the average value of
the response parameter of interest may be used for design.
208.6.6.2 Elastic Time History Analysis

Elastic time history shall conform to Sections 208.6.!,
208.6.2, 208.63, 208.6.5.2, 20S.6.5.4, 20S.6.5.5,
208.6.5.6,208.6.5.7 and 208.6.6.1. Response parameters
from clastic time-history analysis shall be denoted as
Elastic Response Paramcters. All clemcnts shall be
designed llsing Strength Design. Elastic Response
Parameters may be scaled in accordance with Section
208.6.5.4.
208.6.6.3.2 Design Review

When nonlinear time-history analysis is used to justify,. .
structural design, a design review of the lateral- force
resisting system shall be performed by an independcd
engineering team, including persons licensed in ihc
appropriate disciplines and experienced in seisrnic
analysis methods. The lateral-foree-resisting system
design review shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
I. Reviewing the development of sitespecific spectra
and ground-motion time histories.
2.
Reviewing the preliminary design of the lateralforce-resisting system.
3.
Reviewing the final design of the lateral-forceresisting system and all supporting analyses.
The engineer~of~record shall submit with the plans and

calculations a statement by all members of the
engineering tcam doing the review stating that the above
review has been performed.
208.7 Lateral Force on Elements of Structures,

Nonstructur.1 Components and Equipment Supported
by Structures
208.7.1 Gener.1
Elements of structures and their attachments, permanent
nonstructural components and their attachments, and the
attachments for permanent equipment supported by a
structure shall be designed to resist the total design
seismic forces prescribed in Section 208.7.2.
Attachments for noor- or roof-mounted equipment
weighing less than 1.8 kN, and furniture need not be
designed.
A ttachments shall include anchorages and required
bracing. Friction resulting from gravity loads shall not be
considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
111
Edition Volume 1
2-94
CHAPTEF~
2 -' MlOimwn Design l.oads
When the stmctural fa il ure of Ihe lateral-force-resist ing

systems of nonrigid equi pment would cause a life hazard,
such systems shall be designed to resist the seismic fo rces
prescribed ill Section 208.7.2.
When permissible design strengt hs and oth er accept ance
criteria arc not contained in or referenced by this code,
such criteria shall be obtained from approved national
standards subject to the approval of th e building official.
208.7.2 Desigll for Total La tHai Force

The total design lateral seismic fo rce, FI"
delenn incd from the fol lowing equation:
Forces dctcnnillcd lIsing Equation (20 r.:-:,j \..>:. t: .-, .(;;

shall be lIsed to design members and cO IH;\'c! j ;".~') (:;;11
tra nsfer these fo rces to Ihe scismicn""' '1;;' ...: .... ~i....:l -".
M embers and connection design Shidi l.i 'tC 11,.:. ;' f'IJ
co mbi nati ons (11)(1 rac tors speci fi ed in S~ C!ii.)n . ~0 3.3 ll l"
203 .4 . The Reliabi lity/Redundancy Factor, !), may be
taken eqLlal to 1.0.
For appli cabl e (orees and Component p,.' : ' O Jl ': (
Modification Facto rs in connectors for c;\"l<..~ r i )l p. ;:
;.j
diaphrag ms, refe r to Sections 208.8.2. 3, 2tnU\./ . .. Hi
shall be
208.8.2.8.
(208 - 18)
result in [he 1110st crilicalload ings for design .
f-orces shall be appl ied in the horizontal di rc<.:I!OH::, \'.Ih il:!:
Altern atively, Fp may be calculated using the fo llowing

equ ation:
aCI(
II)WP
P 1
R
+
F = P
P
1I
I'
) ---L
(208-1 9)
"I"
Except that I'~' shall 1I0t be less than O.7C,/pWp and
need not be more than 4C~JpJ1~) .

where :
h.f
the clement or componcn! atta chme nt elevation

wiLh respect LO grade. fi x shall n01 be taken less tha n
0.0 .
h,. = the stnlClure roof elevation wit h respect 10 grade.
n,l = the inslruc ture Componelll Amplification Factor
that varies from 1.0 to 2.5.
=
A va lue for "" shall be selecled from Table 208-12.

Altemalively, this factor may be detenn ined based on the
dynam ic properti es or e mp irical da ta of the co mponen t
and the structure thai supports il. The va lue shall not be
taken less th an 1.0.
Rp is the Componenl Response Modification Factor that
shall be taken from Table 208-1 2, except that Rp for
anch orages shall eq ual !.5 for shall ow ex pansion anch or
bo ilS, shallow chem ical anchors or shallow castinp lace
anchors. Sha llow anchors are th ose wit h ti n embedme nt
IcngtlHodiamcter ratio of less tha n 8. When anchorage is
co nstructcd ofnonducti lc mate rials, or by lise of adhesive,
Rp shall equal 1.0.
208.7 .3 Specifying Lateral Forces

Design speci fi ca tions for equi pment sha ll either spcci r/
Ihe design lateral fo rces prescri bed he rein or reference
these pro visions.
208.7.4 Relative Motion of Equipment AII. chment,

For equipment in Categories I and II bui ldin gs as dcfincti
in Table 103 1, th e lateral-force design ~; h a l! considc) (l,c
effec ts of rela tive motion of th e poin ts of attachmen l to
the structure, usi ng the drift based upon AM.
208.7.5 Alternative Designs
Where an approved national stand ard or approved
physical tes t dala provide a basis ror the earthquake
resis tant design of a particular type of equipment or other
nonstructural component, sllch a standard or data may be
.lcccplea as a basis for design of the items wit h thc
fo llowing limita ti ons:
J.
These provisions sha ll prov ide minim um va lues for

th e design of the anchorage and th e mem bers an d
connections th at transfer the forces to th e seismicresisting system.
2.
The force, I;~h and the overturning mo ment used in

the design of th e nonstl1lctural component sh;\!1 ,i' .
be less than 80 percent of the vn lucs that WO\i ~.:
obtained lIsing these provisions.
The design latcnd forces determined using Equat ion (208

I R) or (208- 19) sha ll be distributed in proport ion I() the
mass dis Lri bulioll of fhe element or component.
Associat ion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
2-95
Table 208-12 Horizontal Force Factors, ap and Rp for

Elements of Structures and Nonstructural Components and Equipment
- - - - - -- _._- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ --- -- - - - - - , - - , - - - - - - - , - - - - - ,
Category
Element or Component
ap
Rp
Footnote
~----.---
--------------------'-----'-------'---!-----I
I. Walls including the following:
................... __ ..
a. Un braced (cantilevered) parapets
2.5
3.0
._-_ . .._-- -
.....
b. Exterior walls at or above the ground floor and

p_~r:.~p~~~ br~~e~_ a~.oy~th_~ir__~~~1t~I:~~_f_ g~~.~jty
1, Elements or
Structures
1.0
._
. ..
--
c. All interi6r~bcaring and non-bearing walls
2. Penthouse (except when framed by an extension of the

stmcturai frame)
3
3.0
. CO ,l;1cci;O-[~;-'f~~-p-~~'f;~b;:i~-~tcd-st;;;-~iu~a"j -ci ~~~;e~-t~-~ti~c~--walls. See also Section 208.7.2
I. Exterior and interior oll1amentations and appendages.
-- -------~ ---
1.0
3.0
2.5
4.0
1.0
3.0
2.5
3.0
--------
... _.....-
2. Chimneys, stacks and trussed towers supported on or
- -- --
p~oj.~~!.ing_.~_~2.'::'~!l!.~~_2r
_.~ __ ......_".___._
. _. . ~ .. __ ..._ ...... __._ __ ~_._.~~ __.__ .. _
a. Laterally braced or anchored to the structural frame at
2.5
3.0
.~. P5?it_)t_~~l~~ _t!1~i~ __
c_~.!.~~~r~ __()f ~!:l~.~.~" _......_..... _ ..____ " .......__ .. ___ .~_. _.~ .. _....___ ._____ _
b. Laterally braced or anchored to tbe structural frame at
1.0
3.0
O!' ,~bov.c .theil: centers o.f m~ss
_. .." ._...~ .. __ ~ .. __._,_. __._____________ ~. __.__ _
3. Signs and billboards

2.
NOllstructural
Components
2.5
3.0
4. Storage racks (include contents) over 1.8 m tall.

2.5
. .. --------.-----5. Permanent floor-supported cabinets and book stacks more
1.0
4.0
- -----t----~
3.0
5
tl.la_t~JJ.m_ in ..l!~.jg!.l~. __ (i!lclud~_c:()n!e~~s).
__ .
______;____.. _._.. _. _.... __._ .__._______ _ _1
6. 0nchorage and lateral bracing for suspended ceilings and
1.0
3.0
3, 6, 7, 8
hght fi.~~_u~es
........__ .._____ .. _. __ ... _______--1
7. Access floor systems
4,5,9
3.0
1.0
---- - -
- ~ ~- . ~--
8. Masonry or concrete fences over 1.8 m high
3.0
1.0
..
9, Partitions,
.~___;_~-_:_;c___;- -- .- - . -
1.0
-- . --~- - -.- - .----.-- -
---_._-
I . Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support
systems.
1.0
2. Electrical, mechanical and plumbing equipment and

associated conduit and ductwork and piping.
-- ---- -_ ..
f---3.0
1.0
I
3. Any flexible equipment iaterally bt~aced or anchored to the
2.5
3.0
stnlctural ft~atl.lC at a point_ ~e!.ow tl~~_t~_~~.~!t.~r ofmas~
3. Equipment
4. Anchorage of emergency power supply systems and
essential communications equipment. Anchorage and
support systems for battery racks and fuel tanks necessary
1.0
3.0
for operation of emergency equipment. See also Section
208.7.2
5. Tcmporary containers with flammable or hazardous
3.0
1.0
_ _ __.___ ._~ _ _.~ ___._____.._.!.1.1,ltcriaJs._____ _ _ _ ~ ___..~~ ___,___._ _._______+_----1---
CompOnCll\S
I. Rigid comroncnts with ductile material and attachments.
1.0
3.0
2. Rigid components with nonductile material or attachments
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
1.5
J. Flexible components with ductile material and
altacllmcllts.
4. Flexible components with nonductile materi,!! or
attachments.
1h
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
------~
5, 10, ll,
12,13,14,
15, 16
3.0
..... 5-:io,T4:-
_ .. -
4., Other
_-
3.0
.. 11,1.2 _
17, 18
- --
19
CHAPTEI~
2-96
2 ,-. Minimum Design Loads
Notes/or Table 208, J2

I
See Section 208.2 Jor definitions ojj7exible componellls and rigid component,I'.
I See Sectioll 208.8.2.3 and 208.8.2. 7./ar COIlCl'ele (Jnd ma.wllIy 11'(/1/.\' and Sectioll 20S. 7.2 for cOllnccfio/lsjiu" pond wl/nee/orsji),. jWllc{s.
J Applil'S to Sci,l'mic ZOIl(,S 2 and 4 only.
Ground supported steel storage racks lIIay he designed IIsing Ihe prol'i.\"jo/l,I' (~f'S(,Cfi(Jl/s 208.1), Lood and /"esi.\'{III1C1'jilC/o/" design /lilly be
".\wl JiJr the design oj cold.jonned sfeel 1111'111/;<'1;\', pl"(JI'ided sei,\"lIIi(' dO'ign /hrce.\" are i'ill/o/ to or grea/e!" 11/(111 {hose ,Ipeei/ied ill Sec/ioll
208.7.2 or 208.9.2 as appropriate.
OI1/Y anchorage or resfrail1l.I' /leed be designed
Ceilillg weight shall include all Iig"fJixfures and olher equII)lIIl!n! or parliliollS Ihal are lalemlly xupporled II.!' Ihe ceiling For purposes
of determilling fhe .Ie/slllicjoree, (l ceiling weight o/nolless (han 0.2 kPa shall he used.
1 Ceilings eonslrucled of lath and plaster or gypsum board screw or lIail (Jtlached to slI.Ipellded memher.l fh(lt supp()rt 0 c('iling {It 0111'
level extelldiJlgfrom wall to wall need not be ana~!'zed, provided (he walf,l' (lre I/of over 15 lIIelers oparl.
Light jixrures and /l/eclwllical services illstalled ill metal slI.Ipellsioll sy.l'lel/ls for aco/lstical IiII' (llId lay-in panel cei(ings shilll he
independently supporledJrolll Ihe SIn/crure abol'l! as specified in VBe Standard 25-2, Parr II/,
W,Ior accessjloor systems shall be the dead /otl(1 of the (lCCessjloor system pIllS 25 percenf'q(lhe/loor livc load pIllS a 0.5 kPo parlilioll
load allowal/ee.
Eqllipment includes, but I:V /lot limited to, boilers, chillers, heal exchallgers, pumps, tlirjwlldling IIl1its, cooling tOl\'ers, control pal/e/s,
motors, switchgear, trallsformers and life-safety equipment. II shall indude major cO/lduit, dUelillg and piping, which serl'ices such
machill(")' and equipmenl and/ire sprinkl'r systems. See Sec/ioll 208. 7.2I()r addilioll(ll rcquireml'III.I'jor t/e/{'/'minillg ar/i)}' nonrigid or
flexibly mO/lnted eq!(lj)ment.
III
II
Seismic res(raints may he omilledFom pipiflg and duct supports ((all fhe/rAlowing condiliOlls are sa{i.~lied:
/II
Latera! molioll (?((he 1)lI)illg or duel lI'il! not calise damaging impacl lI'i[h Olher systems
IUThe piping or due[ l:~ made of ducri!e materia/willi ductile connections.

II J Latera!
motiOIl of rhe piping or duct does not cause impact I?fFogife appurlentlnces (e.g. , sprinkler hem/s) with
pll)ing or structllral member.
(11/.1'
olher eqllipmenl.
'14 Lateral mOliOIl o/lhe PII)illg or duct does 1I0t cause loss q( system vertical support.
11.1 Rod-III/lip,
116 Support
Seismic res/milliS may be omilledji'Olll electrical raceways, meh as cable trays, con(hlil and Ims ducts, i/allthej(}/fllwing ('Oll(/iliol/.\ (Ire
saliVied:
11
I.' 1
I.' "
Lateral 1II0lioll of [he Nl('C'II'ay wi/lllol calise damagillg impact lI'ilh olher syslems
L(l/eral moliOIl o/the raceway does /lot cause loss (?fsy.~tem vertica! SlippOr/.
I.' J Rod-hllng
1.'.<Support
J.I
I.
supports oIless than 300 mm in length halle top cOl/nections Ihm callnOI del'elop mOlllenfs.
membcn cantile\'ered lip Fall! IhC'/loor are checkedj(!r slability.
SlIpporls o(less than 300
IIIIIJ
in lenglh hOI'<' rop cOlllleuiolls Ilwl callnot del'<,loll //lOll/ellis
members ct/I/tilel'ercd upFoIII fhejloor are checked/or siahilil)'
Piping ducls (lnd electrical race\I'ays, which IIIIIS[ he /III/Cliol/o! Iollo\\'ing all e(luhquoke. spllnlling /J('/lI'l'ell di[li>rell/ hllildillgs or
slructural ,1),.1'/('111.1' .1'//111/ be sI41iciellilyflexible 10 withstand Idatil'" lI1olio/! oj.I'I{/lporl POilllS assllming out-or/lhIlS" /IIOliU!l.I
Vibration isolalors supporting equipment sil(1/1 he designcd j()r hl/eml l!lads or reslmined /iml/ displacing laterll/~1' hy oilier 111('(111.1'
Reslrai!1l shall also be pnll'ided. \I'lliell limits valiea! displacelllcnt. .weh that hI/era I reslraillt.l do nOI hecome diwngoged. (1/, (111(/ R,,/iJ/'
eqllll)ll1el1l supporlcd (In I'ihration I:wiators shall be lakell as 2.5 and 1,5, reSpeClil'e!y, except Ihal [( Ihe isolalioll mounling Fame is
supported by shalfow or e:q)(ll/sioll allchor,~, Ihe design forces .f<)r fhe (/lIcllor,\' calculaled hy Equalion (20!) . 18).or (208 - /9) (incl/lding
limits), shalf be additionally II1Uflll)/ied by/actor (42.0.
15 Equipmellt anchorage sha/lIlO{ be designed such tllatloads are re.~isfed by g/'Q\Jityjikliol! (e.g., /ricriol/ dips).
16 Expansion (I/lcllor,\', which are required to r('siSI seismic loads in lellsioll ..\'hal/ 1101 be
present.
J1
II,H'd
where operational \'ihNlling loads are
/.lo\'('lIIen[ (?( compon('nts wilhill dectrical cllbillet.I, rack,ol/d skid-mounter! equipll/{'II! (ll/d portiOIl,I' (:/skid-lIIl11l11led e/ectrOIlWc/llll1iclIl
equipmenl (hat ilia.\' calise damage 10 other compollents /).1' di.lpillcing, shl/If he reslrirled lIy IIl1llchlll('l/t 10 a!lchored ('(/'IIIIIII{'III or
support/rallies.
I."
/Jatteries
IV
5;eismic reSlrllillls lIIoy incll/dc .I'/raps, chaillS. holls, harner.l or olher lII('chollislIIS fhat pn'I'(,I/{ sliding. /ol/ing alld IIr('(lch ojrllJ/lllilllllcll1
I!I/lollllllab/e and toxic materials. Friction/illn's IIf(lY I/of he IIsed 10 r('.I'i.l'1 lotl'rof III(/(lI' ill III(' l'e.I'lroilils IIntes.\' flosilil'{' II/,lil; restrailll i.1
provided which {'IISIII'('S [hal fhc/i'ictioll/or('es act c()/llil!l/O/ls~l'.
Oil
racks .1'110/1 h(' restrail/cd agaill.H
IIIOVellll'l1!..i1l
aI/ direcliOIl dll(' 10 ('orlhqurlke(o/,c('.\'
Association of Slructuml EIl~Jille8rs of the Philippines
CHAF'TEf~
; 208.8.1 General
;' All s(nlctural framing SYSICIllS sha ll comply Wilh the
i requirements of Section 208.4. Only the elements of the
':" designated scismic-force-resisting system shall be lIsed to
resist design forces. Thc individual components shall be
designed to resist th e prescribed design seismic forces
acting on th em. The components shall also comply wit h
the specific requirements for the material contained in
~ Chaplers 4 through 7. In addition, slich framing systems
and components shall comply with the detailed system
design requiremcnts contained in Section 208.8.
!(
All building components in Seismic Zones 2 and 4 shall

be designed to resist the effe cts of Ihe seismic forces
prescribed herein and the effects of gra vity loadings from
208.8.2.1 Detailing for C ombinations of Systems
For componcnts common 10 different structural systClns,

the more resl rictive dctaillng requircmen(s shall be used.
208.8.2.2 Connections
Con nections that resist design seismic forces shall be

designed and deta iled on the drawings.
208.8.2.3 Deformation Compatibility
All stnl ctural framing elements and their connections, not
required by design to be part of the lateralMforee-resisting
Consideration shall be given to design for uplin effects

caused by seismic loads.
system, s hall be designed andlor detailed to be adequate

to mainlain suppor! of design dead plus live loads whell
subjected to lhe ex pecled deformations caused by seismic
forces . P6 effects on such clements shall be considered.
Ex pected deformations shall be detcnnill ed as the grea ter
of the Maximum inelastic Response Displacement, 11 M
cons idering PI1 effecls determined in accordance wit h
Section 208.5.9.2 or the defollnation induced by a story
drin of 0.0025 limes the story height. W hen computing
fn Seismic Zones 2 and 4, provision shall be made for th e

effects of earthquake forces actin g in a direction other
than the principal ax es in each of the following
circumstances:
I.
Ir
shown in Table 208-1 1. Each type is subdi vided by the

types of vCl1icaJ c lemen Is used to resist lateral seismic
forces. Special frBming requirements arc given in Ihis
section and in Chapters 4 through 7.
dead and flo or live loads.
The structure has plan irregularity Type 5 as given in

Table 208-1 0.
2.
i
3.
The stnlcture IlHs pJan irregularity Type I as given in
expecfed deformations, the stiffening effect of those

clemen ts not part of the laleral-fo rce-res isting system
Table 208-10 for both maj or axes.
sha ll be neg lected.
A column of a structure forms pat1 of two or

intersecling lateral-forcc~rcs i sling systems.
1110rc
~ception:
~ the
axial load ill the column due to seismic forces

~f'ting in either direction is less than 20 percent of the
~olunlll axial load capacity.
The requirement that orth ogona l effects be considered
may be sat is fied by designing slich elements for 100
perccnt of thc prescribed design seismic forces in one
direction plus 30 perce nt of th e prescribed design seism ic
forces in the pi! rpcndicular direction. The combination
requiring th e greater com ponent strength shall be used for
design . AIIl'rnat ively, the erfects of the t\I./O ortho!.!o nal
directions may be combincd 011 a square rOOI of thc~ SUIll
or
of the sqllorcs (SRSS) basis. When the SRSS mcthou

combining directional c ffecl s is used, eilch Icrm compulcd
shall be assi gned th e sign Ihat will result ill (he 1110st
conservative result.
For clements not 1'<111 or lhe lateral-force-resisting system,

the forces inducted by the expected delonnation may be
co nsid ered as ultimate or factored forces. When
co mputing Ihe forces induced by expected deformations,
Ihe restraining effect of adjoining rigid structures and
nonslructural elCIl.1enlS shall be cons idered and a rational
va lu e of member and restraint stiffness shall be used.
Inelasti c dcfonnations of members and connections may
be considered in the evaluation. provided the assumed
ca lculn tcd capacities <Ire consistent wilh member and
connection design and detailing.
For concrete and masonry clements that are pan of the
Ia(c ral - fOfce-resi sting system, the assumed fl exural and
shear stiffness pro pcl'lies sha ll not exceed one half of th e
g ross section pmpcrlics unless fl rational crackcd ~ scction
ilna lysis is performed. Additional deformations Ihat Illay
result from foundcHinn ncx ibilily and diaphragm
deflections shall be considered. For concrete clements not
part or the hllera l- forcc~rcs i st iJl g sys tem, see Section
421 .9.
National Struc tural C()(~c: of ll'l~: PhiliPPines
29i'
208 .8.2 Str uctural Framing Systems

pour typcs of general building framing systems defi ned in
Section 208 .4.6 are recognized in th ese pro visio ns and
; 208.8 Detailed Systems Design Requirements
;> - Minimum DElsiqn I.oads
(J lh
Edi ti on Volul'llo 1
2-9B
CHAf'TEH 2 .. MirlHmml Design Loads
208.8.2.3.1 Adjoining Rigid Elements
Moment-resisting frames
and shear walls may be
enc losed by or adjoined by more rigid clements. provided

it can be shown that the participation or failure of the
A positive connection for resist ing horizontal forl,.:c aCling

parallel to th e member shall be provided for each h( am ,
gi rder or truss. This force shal l not bc less thall (L ). ..../
times the dead plus live load.
more rigid elements wi ll not impa.ir the vertical and

lateml- load-resisting abi lity of the gravity load and '
lateral-fo rce-resisting sys tems. The eflccts of adjoining
rigid clements shall be considered w'l':en assessing
whe ther a structure shall be des ignated rcguial or ilTcgular
in Section 208.4.5.
208.8.2.3.2 Exterior Elements
Exterior non-bearing, non-shear wall panels or elements

tiltH are attached to or enclose the exterior shall be
designed to resi st the forces per Equation (208-1 8) or
(208-19) and shall accommodate movemen ts of the
struct ure based on 6 M and temperalure changes. Such
clements shall be suppo rted by means .of cast-in-place
concrete or by mechanical connections and fasteners in
accordance wi th (he following provisions:
I.
Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative

movement between stories of not less than two times
:-I tOly drift caused by wind, the ca lculated story drift
based on 11M or 12.7 mm, whichever is greater.
2.
Connections to permit movement in the plane of the

panel for story drift shall be sliding connections using
slotted or oversize holes, connections that penni!
movement by bending of steel, or other connections
providing equiva len t sliding and ductility capacity.
J.
Oodies of connections shall have sufficient duct ility

and rotation capacity to preclude fnlcturc or the
conc rete or brittle failures at or ncar welds.
4.
The body of the connection sha ll be designed for the

force determined by Equation (208-19), where lip ~
3.0 and "" ~ 1.0.
S.
All fasteners in the connecting syste m, such as bolts,

inserts, welds and dowels, shall be designed for the
forces determined by Equation (20819). where R, ~
1.0 and a, ~ 1.0.
6.
Fnstcncrs embedded in concrete sh,1I1 be attached 10,

or hooked around, reinforcing steel or otherwise
termi nated to cfTcctivcly 'transfer forces to the
rcinfo rcing stcel.
208.8.2.4 Collector Elements

Collector e!ements shall be provided that are capable of
transferring the seismic forces originating ill o!hn
portions of the struc tu rc to the clcment providing : he
resistance to those forces.
Collector clements, splices and their connc<.:lio1":<: 10

resisting clements shall re sist the forces d elen ni~lcd ;11
accordance with Equation (208-20). In addition. co llector
clements, splices, and the ir connections 10 resisting
elements shall have the design strength to resist the
combined loads resulling from Ihe special seismic load of
Sect io n 203.5.
Exception:
/11 st/velures, or portions thereof, braced entirely by lightframe wood shear walls or light-frame steel and wood
stmctllral pallel shear wall systems, col/ectol" elen;(,l1ts,
splices and connections to resisting elements /l eed olil)' he
designed to resist forces in accordance with Equutioli
(208-20).
The quantity .\1 need not exceed the maximum force that
can be transferred to th e collector by the diaphragm Hnd
other clements of the lateral-force-resisting system. For
Allowable Stress Design. the design strength may be
determined using an allowable stress increase or 1.7 and iJ
resistance factor, $. of 1.0. This increase shall !lot be
combined with the one-third stress increase permitted by
Section 203.4, but may be combi ned with the dura tion of'
load increase permined in Seclion 615.3.4.
208.8.2.5 Concrete Frames
Concrete frames required by design to be part of the

lateral-force-resisting system shall conform 10 the
following:
I.
In Seismic Zone 4 they shall be specinl 1ll0llwnt

resisting frames.
2.
In Seism ic Zo ne 2 th ey sha ll, as a minimum, be

inlcrmediatc moment-resisting framcs.
208.8.2.3 Tics a nd Continuity
208.8.2.6 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry W:tIlS
All parts of a stntclurc shall be intercollnectcd and the

conncctions shall be c<lpable or transmitting th e seismic
fort:c induced by the pans being connected. As a
minim ulll, any smaller portion orthc bui lding shall be tied
to the rcm.tinder of the building with c1elllcnts having at
lea st" strength to resist 0.5 CJ limes the weight or the
smaller portion .
Concrete or masonry wa lls sha ll be anchored 10 ;1/ 1 noo l

and roofs that provide QUI-or-plane lateral support of" the
wa ll. The anchorage shall provide a positive direct
cnn neclion hetwcen the wall and fl oor or roof
COII!'ltruc{ioll c"pab le of resisti ng the largcr or the
horizontal forces spec ified in this section <Il1d Sections
20().4 and 20~.7. In addition. ill Seism ic Zone 4.
Assol.iatJon of Structural EngIneers o f IIH~ PtlilipPJf10S
CHAPTEf, 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
diaphragm to wall anchorage using embedded straps shall

have the straps attached to or hooked around the
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated to effectively
transfer forces to the reinforcing steel. Requirements for
developing anchorage forces in diaphragms arc given in
Section 208.8.2.8. Diaphragm deformation shall be
considered in the design of the supported walls.
208.8.2.6.1 Olll-of-Plane Wall Anchorage to Flexible
Diaphragms
This section shall apply in SeISmic Zone 4 where flexible
diaphragms, as defined in Section 208.5.6, provide lateral
support for walls.
I.
Elements of the wall anchorage system shall be

designed for the forces specified in Section 208.7
where Rp ~ 3.0 and Q p ~ 1.5.
2.
In Seismic Zone 4, the value of Fp used for the design

of the elements of the wall anchorage system shall
not be less than 6.1 kN per lineal meter of wall
substituted for E.
3.
See Section 206.4 for minimum design forces in

other seismic zones.
4.
When clements of thc wall anchorage system are not

loaded concentrically or are not perpendicular to the
wall, the system shall be designed to resist all
components of the forces induced by the eccentricity.
5.
"
F+"F.
,
L., ,
---,'' ' --'' -'- w,,,,

2:" w;
i",x
F"., determined from Equation (208-20) need

not exceed! .OCr/wp.\"> but shall not be less than O.5CJwpJ:'
\Vhcn the diaphragm is required to transfer design seismic

forces from the yertical~resisting clements above the
diaphragm to olher vertical-resisting elements below the
diaphragm due to offset in the placement of the elements
or to changes in stiffness in the veliical elements, these
forces shaH be added to those detennined from Equation
(208-20).
3.
Design seismic forces for flexible diaphragms

providing lateral supports for walls or frames of
masonry or concrete shall be determined using
Equation (208-20) based all the load determined in
accordance with Section 208.5.2 using a R not
exceeding 4.
4.
Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls

shaH have continuous ties or struts between
diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces
specified in Section 20S.8.2.7. Added chords of
subdiaphragms may be used to form subdiapluagms
to transmit the anchorage forces to the main
continuous crossties. The maximum length-to-width
ratio of the wood structural sub-diaphragm shall be
2Y,: I.
5.
Where wood diaphragms are lIsed to latera!ly support

concrete or masonry walls, the anchorage shall
Zone 2
conform to Section 208.8.2.7. In Seismic
and 4, anchorage shall not be accomplished by lise of
toenails or nails subject to withdrawal, wood ledgers
or framing sha!lnot be used in cross-grain bending or
cross-grain tension, and the continuous ties required
by item 4 shall be in addition to the diaphragm
sheathing.
6.
Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elcments in

structures in Seismic Zonc 4, having a plan
irregularity of Type I, 2, 3 or 4 in Table 208- I0, shall
be designed without considering either the one-third
increase or the dun:tion of load illcrease considered
in allowable stresses for elements resisting
earthquake forces.
7.
In structures in Seismic Zone 4 having a plan

irregularity or Typc 2 ill Table 20g~IO, diaphraglli
chords and drat! Illcmbers shall be designed
considering illdcp~'lldcnt movement or the projecting
wings or tile structure. Each of these diaphragm
When pilasters are present in the waH, the anchorage
6.
The strength design forces for steel clements of the

wall anchorage system shall be 1.4 times the forces
otherwise required by this section.
7.
The strength design forces for wood elements of the

wall anchorage system shall be 0.S5 times the force
otherwise required by this section and these wood
clements shall have a minimur" actual net thickness
of63.5 mm.
208.8.2.7 Diaphragms
!.
2.
The dcOcction in the plane of the diaphragm shall not

exceed the permissible deflection of the attached
clements. Permissible deflection shall be that
deflection that wil! permit the attached clement to
maintain its structural integrity uncleI' the individual
loading and continue to support the prescribed loads.
Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist
the forces determined

following equation:
in
accordance
with
the
(208-20)
The force
force at the pilasters shall be calculated considering

the additional load transferred from the wall panels to
the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage force
at a floor or roof shall be that specified in Section
208.8.2.7. I, Item I.
2-99
National Structural Code of the PhilipPines bill Eclition Volume 1
~.100
CHAPTER 2 -. Minimum Design Loads
c lements shall be des ign ed for the mo re severe of the
following two assumptions:

a.
Motion of the projec ting wings in the same

direction.
b.
Motion of the projecting wi ngs
provisio ns contained in Section 208.9.

208.9.1.2 C riteria
The minimu m design seismic forces prescribed in th is
Exception:
This reQl'irell!e!1! (TIllY. be deemed.. satiifl.ed if. .-.the
procedllr!2S of;ec(ion 20R,'6 in cOlljullctio~ with a Ih reedimellsiQllpl . m.odel haye ..been IIsed to. de(ermine the
lalera/ seismic forces for design.
208.8.2.8 F raming Below the Base
The strength and stiffness of the framing between the base
and Ihe foundation shall not be less than that o f the
supers tructure. The special detailing requirements of
Chapte r.; 4, 5 and 7, as appropriate, shall apply to
columns supporting discont inu ous lateral-force-resisting
clements and 10 SM RF, IMR F, EBF, STMF and
MMR WF system elements below the basel which are

requ ired to transmit the forces resulting from lateral loads
to the foundation.
specified in this section. Design shall conform to the

applicable prov isions of other sections as modified by the
jn opposi ng
directions.
sha ll be designed to provide the s trength required [ 0 res ist

[he displacements induced by the minimum lateral forces
208 .8.2.9 Building Sepa rations

All structures shall be se parated from adjoining structures.
Separations shall allow for the displacement t!",. Adjacent
buildings on the same property sha ll be separated by at
least 6 ,tfT where
(20821)
section a re a( a le"c1 that produces displacements in a

fi xed base, clastic model of the s tructure, comparable to
th ose expected of th e real stnl ctllre when responding to
the Design Basis Ground Motion. Reductions in these
forces using th e coefficient R is permitted where the
design of nonbu ilding st ructures provides sufficient
strength and ductility, consis tent with the provisions
specified herein for buildings, [0 resi st the effec ts of
seismic ground mo tions as rep resented by these design
forces.
When applicable, design strengths and other detailed
design criteria shall be obtai ned from o ther sec tions or
their referenced s tandards. The des ign of nonbuilding
s tJUctures sha ll use the load combi nat ions or factor~
specified in Secti on 203.3 or 203.4. For nonbuildin g
st ructures designed usi ng Secti on 20B.9.3 , 208.9.4 or
208.9. 5, the Re li ability/Red undancy Fac[or, p, ma y be
taken as 1.0.
When applicable design strengths and other design
criteria are not con tained in o r referenced by this code,
such criteria shall be obtained from approved national
standards.
208.9.1.3 Weight W
and 6,1(1 and 6.m, arc the displ acemen ts of the adjacent
buildings.
When a structure adjo ins a property lin e nOI commo n to a
public way, that structure shall a lso be set back from the
property line by at least th e displacement tl" of that
The weight, W, for nonbuilding struct ures shall include all

dead loads as defined for bui ld ings in Section 20B. S. I.1.
For purposes of calcu lating design seismic rorces in
nonbuilding struc tures, W shall also inc lude all nonnal
operating contents for items such as tank s, vesse ls, bins
and pipi ng.
structure.
208.9.1.4 Period
Exception:
"
".
Smaller separations or property line seiback.i.::/~ay b.e

permitted '.vlten justifieq .by ralia/ial 'i.ifci1ysej.bi#ed Oil
maxinllJnI
eXpected ground motions. :- .:~!.~-'
208.9. 1.5 Drift
208.9 Nonhuildi ng S tru ctu res

208.9.IGcncra l
208.9.1'. 1 Sco pe
NOllbuilding st ru Ctu res include
s truc tUl' c~
period or the structure shal l be

determined by rational methods slIch as by using Method
fl in Section 208.5.2.2.
The fundamental
al l
sclf-
supportin g
other than buildings that ca rry gravity loads and

res ist th e effects or earthq uakes. NOllb uildin g stru ctures
The drift limitations of Sec lion 208.5.10 need not appl y to

nonbuilding struc tures. Drift limitations sh,!!1 lIe
established for stnl ctural or no nstructural elenH~Il! '; ':h.sc
railure would cause life hazards. PA effects ;-.j;.,j! be
co nsidered for s tructures whose calcula ted drills c:\cccd
the values in Secti on 208 .5. 1.3.
Association of Struc tural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAP TEli 2 Minimum
208.9.5 Other Nonbuilding Struclures

Nonbuildi ng structures that are not covered by Secti ons
208.9.3 and 208.9.4 shall be designed to resist design
seismic forces not less th an those determined in
accordance with the provisions in Section 208. 5 with the
foll owing additi ons and exceptions:
o 208.9.2
I.
Laleral Fo rce
!{ateraJ-force procedures for Ilonbuilding stmctu fcs w ith

'structural syslems similar to buildings (those with
~;tructural syslems which arc listed ill Table 208- 11) shall
},e selecled in accordance with Ihe provisions of Section
".208.4.
:jjlllemJediote momeJJl-resisling frames (IMRF) may he

(; ,used ill Seismic Zone 4 for non-building structures in
". Occupall( V Calegories III alld IV if (1) Ihe slrllctllre is
~' less than J5 m in height and (2) rhe value R used ill
.; reducing ca/clliated member forces and moments does 110/
; exceed 2.8.
;: 208.9.3 Rigid Siructures
! :Rigid
structures (those with period T less than 0 .06

. 'second) and their anchorages shall be designed for the
laleral force obtained from Eq uati on (208-22).
(208-22)
V ~ 1.6ZN .J W
R
,
2.
(2 08-24)
The venical distribution of the design seismic forces

in structures covered by this section may be
dc(cml ined by us ing the provis ions of Section
208.5.5 or by usin g the procedures of Secti on 208.6.
Exception:
For irfelW.lar s~ciures assigned ' to Occupancy
Categories r anq.fI that plinnPt b~ modeled as a. Single
mass, the proceduresoIS.dion 208.6shall be used.
3.
The force V shal l be di stributed according to th e

distributi on of mass and shall be assu med to ac t in any
horizontal direc tion.
(208-23 )
Additionally, ror Seismic Zone 4, the lotal base shea r

shall a lso no l be less than the following:
The factors Rand D. shall be as set fo rth in Table

208-13. The tolal design base shear determined in
accordance with Seclion 208.5.2 shall not be less
than the following:
V=O.5~/W
-f.
~.'Exceptiofl:
if
2:101
: In Seismic Zone 4, Slruclures thai support flex ible

; Jlonstnlctural clements whose comb ined we ight exceeds
.25 percell I of the weight of the stnlct ure shall be designed
i:considering interaction effects between the structure and
Lor.ads
'. 08.9.1.6 InteracCion Effecls
: lhe supported elements .
O(~!->ign
Where an approved nationa l standard provides a basis

for lhe c8I1hquakeresistant des ign of a particular
ty pe of non bui lding st ructure covered by this section,
such a standard Illay be used, su bject to the
limi tati ons in this section:
208.9.4 Tanks wilh S upport ed Bottoms
t
F
Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with supponcd bOtlOIllS,

founded at or be low grade, shall be designed to resist th e
i'
seismic forces calculated using the procedures in Section
208.7 for rigid st11JClUreS considerin g the en tire we igh l of
the tank and its contents. Altemative ly. sHch tanks may be
designed using one of the two procedures described
belo,w:
I.
2.
A res ponse spectrum ana lysis that includes

con sideration of the acllla l ground Illotion anticipat ed
at th e sile and th e inert ial cffects of the co nla incd
nuid.
A design b<lsis prescribed fo r th e particu lar type of
lan k by an approved natio nal sl,lJldard, provided that
the se ismic zones and occu pancy categor ies shall be
in confo rman ce with the provisions 01 Sections
208.4.4 and 20R .4.2, respec ti vely.
The seismic zones and OCCUpl1llcy categories shall be in

co nformance with the provisions of Sections 208.4.4 nnd
208.4.2,respecli ve ly.
The va lues for total latera l . force and tOlal base
overturn ing moment used in design shall not be less than
80 percent of {he values that wou ld be obta ined lIsing
these provisions.
208.10 S ite Catego rization Procedure
208.10 . 1 Scope
This sect ion desc ribes the procedure fo r dClcn nin ing Soil
Profile Types S. , th rough S,.. as defi ned in Tab le 208-2.
th
Natiorli:1 1Structural Code of the Philipp ine s G Ecliti on Vo lurn(; 1
2- 1U2
CHAP TEr~
Table 208-13
2 _. Minimum Design Loads
3.
(H > 3 m of peat and/or higL:/

where H = thickness of so il ).
4.
Very high plasti city clays
R and flo Factors for Nonbuilding

Stmctures
STRUCTURE TYPE
5. (11 > 7.5
I. Vesse ls, including tanks and
pressurized spheres, on braced or

unbmccd legs.
2. Casl- i;l-pl acc cOllcrclc-silos ';;1(1
chimneys having walls con tinuo us
to Ihe foundations
3. Dfsl~ibu lcd- ~11~ss ~~llIikv~;
2,2
2 .0
3.6
2.0
-- ----.
such as sl acks,
chimneys, silos and skirtsupJ)ortcd vertical vessels.
SllUctUfCS
2.0
Very thick sofVmedilllll stiff cI ,y.;
7.
(H > 36 '~l).
~ep!id~i; ,\, - .,; ..".'!i\:.

la '
S
Jh.'!/f~t
~'J'1'~
'
.;/Ji rno.wni"'~ _., ,e ,>,,:~';

~'fee, TfPe SD slu.!! l i;;;~-~
Tjlle ..~i
d nol be' 'OSS""'2;!
"t4eJer:inill~s .(hQI S.il P!" jii,'
be pr.eSe'1ftii. the #fe or .i~ . Ihe evenl Ihat
b!iil<!in
guyed), guyed stacks and
2.9
2.0
2.2
2.0
5. Caruilcvcrcd column -Iype
slnrClures.
6. Coo ling towers.
3.6
.- ':i.- Bi~-s ';'~~j h~ppcrs 0;; b ~~~~~i ~;..
with PI > 75).
6.
irii,Qll iM's,q(('Pi:i!kt
2.9
4. Trussed to~~~ rs '(f~ccs-[a~ding or

clljlll':t~Ys:
III
,''C:' "..
2.0
-. -
2.0
2.9
.. ,~!.~:~:.~c.~~_ I.cS_s ..
8. Stomgc rack s.
... .. .....
3.6
-."
estabJishi!4 bjigeoJiCim;c'qj.!/Ibi4.
The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil PfO filc Type
SF requiring site-specific evaluatio n s ha H be .... 01i:.. idered. If

the si te corresponds to these cr iteria, Ihe s ite shall be
classificd as Soil Profile Type S,' and " si te-specific
evaluation shall be conducted.
2.0
208.10.2.1 v" Average Shear Wave Vol "cit)'

9. Signs and billboards.
3.6
2.0
10. Amu sement stru ctures and
Vs shall be detennined in accordance wit h the following

equation:
(208-25)
208.10.2 Definitions
Soil profile types are defined as follows:
s..
SR
Sc
'Iard rock with Illcasmcd shear wave veloc ity,

I ' . > 1500 IIl/s .
Rock wi th 760 IIlls < I'. 5: 1500 IIl/s.
Very den se soil and soft rock with
360 rnls < v.! :::; 760 ll1/s or with

ei ther N > 50 o r s,, ;'
Ion kP a.
S"
S tiff soi l with 180 IIl/s'; v.,,; 360 IIlls o r

wi th IS'; N,; 50 or 50 kPa ,; s,,'; 100 kPa .
St"
1\ so il profile wi th l's < J 80 Ill/S or

any profile wit h more than 3 III o f soft c la y defined
as soi l wi th PI > 20, W IIIo " ~ 40 perce nt an d
x" < 25 kPa .
S,.
~o il s
where:
thi ckness of Layer i in m
til
V,n
= shear wave velocity in La yer i in
ntis
208.10.2.2 N, Average Field Standard Penetration

Resistance and N tl" Average Standard Penefration
Resistance for Co hesion less Soil Layer'
N and Nell shall be determined in accord ance wi th tbe
following eq uati on:
(208 -26)
requiring .:) it c~s pcc i(j c evaluation :
I.
Soi ls vulnerable to poten ti a l ra ilurc or co llapse

under se is mic loading s lich as liqucliab lc so ils,
quid nnd highly sensitive clays, co llaps ible
wcnkly cClllcrHcd soils.
2.
Peals andlor highly organic clays
(2082'.')
where:
d,
=0
thickness of L.ayer i in mill
Ass ociation of Structural Engineers of tile Philippin es
CH;\PTE:H:? ~
ds = thc total thickllc!is ofcohesiolllcss soillaycrs ill thc

top 30 In
N, :~ the standard pcnctralion resistance of soi l layer in
accordance with approved nationally recognized.

standards
208.10 .2.3 s,,, Avera ge Undrained Shea r Strength
SII
(208-28)
where:
Sus
Des~gn
Loads
2 ~103
and fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known 10

be continuous to a depth of 30 m, surficial shear wave
velocity measUJ emcnls may be extrapolated 10 assess V.I"
The rock catego ries. Soi l Profile Types 5',{ Hnd Sfl. shall
not be used if th<.re is Illo rc than 3 meters of soil between
the rock surface (did the bottom of' the sprcttd footi ng or
mat rou ndat io n.
shall be determined in accordance wil h 1he fo llowing
equation:
de
MH1imulll
the total thickness (I OO-d,) of cohesive soil layers

in the top 30 m
the undrained shear strength in accordance with
approved nationa ll y recognized standards, 110t to
exceed 250 kPa
208.10.2.4 Soft Clay Profile , SE
The ex istcn ce ora lOla I thic kn css of sa lt clay greater than

3 III shall be in ves ti ga ted where a soft clay layer is
defi ned by Sli < 24 kPa, 11'' ' ' '::: 40 percell ! and PI > 20. If
these criteri a are met, the site shall be class ified as Soil
The definitions prese nted herein shall npply to the upper

30 meters orthe site profi le. Profiles co nt aini ng d isti nc tly
differen t so il layers sllall be su bdivided into those la:if:rs
designated by a number from I 10 11 at the bottom, whe re
there are a tota l of 11 dist inct laye rs inl hc upper 30 meters.
The symbol i the n refer to cillY one or the hlyers between I
and 11.
208. 1 I Alt ern a ti ve E arthqu a ke Loa d P.-ocedur c
The earthquake load proeedur" of ASCE/SE I 7-05 may be
used in determin ing the carthquake loads as an alternative
procedure subject to re liable res(~a rch wo rk commissioned

by the owner or the e n gi neer~oll ~ record to provide for all
data req uired due to the non~avai l a b i l ity or Phi\'olcs~
iss ued spec tra l accelerati on maps for all areas in the
Philip pines.
208.10.2 .5 So il Profil es So SD a nd S f
T he e ng ineer-on ~ reco rd shall be respo nsib le fo r the

spect ral acce leration and oth er rcla! i.:d data not issued by
Phivolcs used in the delerminatioJ: of the earthquake
loads. This altemative earthquake 103.1 procedure shall be
subject 10 Peer Review and approv~d of the Bu ild ing
Sites wi th Soil Profile T ypes Sc. So and Sf sha ll be
Orncial.
Profi le Type Sf.
classi fied by using one of the following three methods

with l-:<; . Nand Sj' computed ill all cases a5 speci fied ill
Section 20X.1 0.2.
1.
I'~
2.
N Ii,,' the top 30 meters (N me thod).
3.
for the lOp 30 meters
(I'~
method).
Nm lor cohesionle," soil laye rs (PI < 20) in Ihe top

III and average Sj/ for cohesi ve soi l layers ( .nl .> 20)
ill the top 30 ill (.I'" meth od).
30
208.10.2.6 Roc k "rolil es, S ., and S/I
The shear W;lVC velocity for rock, Soil Profile Type 5fl ,
shull be eithcr Illc,lsurcd Oil site or estima ted by a
gcotec hllical
eng inee r,
cnginee ring
gco logisl
or
scislllologist for cOlllpelellt rock wi th 11l0dCf<11c fracturi ng

and wC~j(hcrjng . So fieI' and Illore high ly rractured and
weathcred rock sha ll either he Illc;lsured on site for !-ihcar
Wavc velocity or classilicd as Soil Profile Type Sc.
The ha rd rock. Soil Profi le Type
S.,. category ,hail be
Supported by :>.hear wave ve locity measurcmen t cither 011

site o r ' on profiles or the S~lIllC rock typc in the salllc
forma tion wit h tin equal or grea ter degree or weathcring
N;il innal Slruc!ural Code of Ole Pllil:ppines (jli' Edilion Volurnn 1
2-104
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loatls
Distribution
Active Faults and Trenches

the/Phi ppines
/
{J
~
~()Ij<l ine- trace certain
apptolOmate offshOre projedlon
- - - - da$he:d ~t'\e- trace approWnat~
- - - Acttve Faull:
" 00'
Trench
Transform FalA
COlislon lOOO
TrendHelat&d faUls
Roadshlighw;J ys
e CitylTown
16'"
""
,, '"
1200'
' .00'
.'"
600'
127 00'
Figure 20S-2A. Seismic SO llrces: Active Faults and Trenches in the Philippines
Associati on of SlruCluHl l Enginecl"s of tile Pllilippin es
200
ilO 00'
11100'
121 00'
122 00'
Active Faults in N<frtheri?Philippines
'"''
"""
1600'
Logend
_ _ _ Active Fault: solid line- onland :
dashed line- offshore
$ capital CltyfTown
I)
00'
140W
Figure 208-2B. Seismic Sources: Active Faults in Northern Philippines
~,
National Structural Cod e of the Philippines
6(h
Edition Volume 1
2-105
?~ 1 06
CHAPTEH 2 ~ lViin illlwll Design toad~
.,
j
OG cl"
us 00'
I N 00'
l1HIO'
.,
Q.~
116 00'
East Central Philip p~n~ s

Legend
_
Active Faul!: solid hn:: ,-,[".i_.
I:
. dashed line- otfshol c

C<l pital CltyfTown
".,
-~
...
...
, - -- - --
II
. )
'~
,I
L _
-."
_ __
_ __
11 to:!'
111')
Fi g ure 20X- 2C Scis mic Sources: /\(;Ii vc Fau lts in Ef1 s! Central Ph ilippi nes
CHAP TER 2 - Minimum Design Load s
"",
~.
, ,'
"
"I:,;
j
\~~~
1,",
,
:',
- /l0lY
i{
:v
<1
~~~
S." .leu
;:~,
..
,:'
't,
'
"
. ,"7'
.'
.~.
.-P
.:\>
1100'
10 00'
\!O 00'
Figure 208-2D. Seismic Sources: Aclive F<lu lts in Wesl CcnlraJ Ph ilippines
N8tionHI Structural CocJe of the Philippine s 6
111
Editi on Vo lume 1
2,107
2- 108
Cf~Af>TER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
''''
Legend
- - _ Acttve Fault: solid lin e- onland ,
... ... dashed line- offshore

@
Capital cltyrrown
&00"
IlJ 00'
Figure 208-2E. Seismic Sources: Active Faults in Southern Philippin es

Association of Siructurul En9incers of the PhilipPin es
-------------------------------_._._-- -- -- -- - - Co nt ro l Periods
1~ =
CJ 2.SCa
= n?T
.1
c.
f
f
f
--J......------'-_ __ J _ _ _
~ ""O""""'_ _ _ .L_____'__ I _. _ _
_
o 0.2
I
I
.L-._.L._ _ - ' - - - : ___ - ' _ _
.J..- .
Period (TITs )
TolTs
Figure 208-3 - Design Response Spectra

Table 209- 1 - Soi l Lateral Load
Description Of Backfill Material '

Well-graded, clean gravels; grave l-sa nd mixes
Poorl y graded clean gravels; gravel-sa nd mixes
Si lly gravels, poorly graded gravel-sand mixes
Clayey gravels, poorly graded grave l-and-clay mixes
Well -graded , clea n sand s; gravelly sand mixes
Poorl y graded clea n sa nds; sa nd-gravel mi xes
Si lly sands, p oo rly graded sand-s ilt mixes
Sand-si lt clay mix wi lh plastic fines
--- Clayey sa nds, poor/ w aded sand-clay mixes
Inorga nic sills and clayey sil ts
Mixtu re of inorganic silt and cla y
Inorgan ic clays of low to mediu m plasti city
Organ ic silts and silt clays, low plasti ci ty
Inorganic clayey sills, elaslic silts
Inorga ni c clays of high plast icity
Orga ni c clays and si lty clays
Unified Soil
Classification
GW
GP
GM
GC
SW
SP
SM
SM- SC
SC
ML
ML-CL
CL
OL
MH
CH
Design Lateral Soil Load'

kPa per m width
Acti ve pressure
At-rest pressure
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
16
16
Nole b
NOle b
Nole b
NOleb
--
7
5
5
7
7
10
7
10
10
Note
No te
Note
Note
0 1-1
b
b
b
b
D esig ll Infernl .fOlI IOllds fin! .~i1'(11 lfJr moi.rl COlldiliollS for lite spec!/ied sail.f til Ih eir opfimldl1 d elisi/it's. AOftnJ jh/d ('(mr/lllolls shall
gflll(!ln. Suhmcrgcd or .W llrmf('d .\"oil IH t'.I'.flll ".\" .Ifroff inc/udt' Iht' wcighl of Ifl(' huoyllill Joil ,,11I.~ Ih" hydro.Hafie lo(/ds.
I,
U I/.I'lIiloMe (I.I ha("~fi /lm a(eri{//
'! he dc/illifioN (mri dO,l".\i(ic(l l io ll oj".wi f moll'I'iuls shofl hI' ill (In'o rr/ollce lI"illl ASTM f) 2487
Nallon (-l l Stru c tural CO(j(~ of 11'18 PhlliPPI f"H:)S
r/' Edition Vo lun1e
2-109
2-110
1 tilr
1tfJ-'
....
...
ZONE 4
ZONE 2
...
Figure 20RA Referenced Seismic Map of the Philippines
Association of Structural Engineers of the PhilipPines
2-111
209.1 General
210.1 RoofL1r;>inage
Basemenl , foundalion and re.aining walb' shall be

designed to resist lateral soil loads. Soil loads speci fi ed in
Tab le 209-1 shall be used as the minimum design lateral
soil loads unless specified otherwise in a soil invest.igation
report approved by .he building official. Basemenl ,valls
Roof dra inage -::ystclIls s hall be designed in accordance

wi th th e provisio ns o f the code havi ng jurisdiction in the
area. The flow C,1 j>:1 Clty of secondary (overflow) drains or
scuppers shall no t be less than that of the primary drains
or scuppers.
and other walls in which hori zon tal movement
is
restricted at Ihe top s hall be designed fo r at- reSI pressUi ,' .

Retaining walls free to move and ro e a. the lOp ar,;
permitted to be design ed for active pressure. Design
lateral pressure from surcharge loads shall be added to Ihe
laleral earth pressure load. Design lateral pressure shall be
increased if soils with expansion potential are present at
the site.
210.2 Design Rain L, ads

Each portion of a rot f shall be designed to sustain the
load of rainwater that \,\/i ll accumulate on it if the primary

drainage syslem for t hat portion is blocked plus the
unifonn load caused by water that ri ses above the inl et of
Ihe secondary drainage " ystem at its design flow .
(210-1)
\\ ' ICre;
addiLional depth of water on the undeflcctcd
roof
(h,
:::
above the inlet of s(-condary drainage system at

its design flow (i.e .. the hydraulic head), in mm
= , t,'plh of water on the undefl ected roof up to the
in let of secondary drainage system when the

prinary drainage sy,;rcm is blocked (Le., the stati c
heac), in mm
rain I"c.ad all the untie "lected roof, in kN/m2
When the phrcY) c "undeflcc: ~d roor' is used. deflections

from loads (inclding dead I, ad s) shali not be co ns idered
when dClcrmininh.' I.he amount ')( ra in on the roof.
210.3 Ponding lnst :l bility
For roo fs wilh a slop, less tiu n 6 nlln per 300 mm (I 19
degrees or 0.0208 rnd 'a n), the desig n calculati ons sha ll
illclude verification 01" adcq ;late s tiffness to preclude
progressive deflec tion in accc- rdance wilh Section 8.4 of
ASCE-7-0S.
210.4 Co ntroll ed Drainage
Roofs equ ipped with hard , a..e to control the rate of
drainage shall be equi pped .y :th a secondary drainage
system at a higher clevation \:!l~\t limits accumulation of

water 0 11 the roof above that c ',: .Iil li o n . Such roofs shall be
designed to susta in the 10[;\ )[ rainwater that will
HCCtllmlialc on them to the c ~V. Ilion of th e secondary
dra in age system plus the uuife tll load ca used by W(lter
thaI rises above th e in let or the sc:. ~(ndary drainage system
at its design flow determined fre ',1' Section 210 .2. Such
roofs shall al so bc checked for !.o nd in g instability in
accordance with Section 2 10.3.
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volun1e 1
?'-112
first fl ood plain management code, ordi nance or standard,
"Existing construction" is also referred to as "ex isting

structures. "
211.1 Ge neral
EXIST IN G
W ithin flood hazard areas as established ill Section 211 ,),

all new construction of buildings, structures and port ions
construction."
of buildi ngs and structures, including su.bstantia l

improvement and restoration of S4bl;(antial damage to
buildings and structures, shall ' he designed and
cons tructed to resist the efTects of flood hazards and flood
loads. Fo r buildings that are locall' J in mOre than one
flood hazard area, the provisions assvci ated with the most
restrictive flood hazard area shall apply,
211.2 Definiti ons
The fo llowing words and term's SI13II, fo r the purposes of

this section. have the mean ings show n herein.
BA SE F L OOD , The fl ood having a I -pc rcent chance of
be ing equaled or exceeded in any given year.
STR ucr UR E.
See
"Existing
FLOOD or FLOODl G , A general and temporary

Or complete inundation of no rmally
condition of partial
d,y land from :
I.
The overflow of inland or tidal waters.
2.
The unusual and rapid accumulation or runoff of

surface wa ters from any source.
FLOOD DAMAG E-RESISTA NT MATERIALS. Any

construct ion material capab le of withstanding direct and
prolonged COrHacl with floodwaters without sustai ning

any damage that requircs more th an cos metic repair.
FLOOD HAZARD ARE A, T he greater of the fo ll o w ing
two areas:
BASE FLOOR ELEVATION. The e levati on o f th e base
fl ood, incl uding wave height, rel ati ve to th e datum to be
set by the speci fi c national or loc al govern me nt agr.:ncy.

BAS E M E NT, The porti on o f " bu ildi ng havin.g its floor
subgradc (below grou nd level) nn all sides,
D ES IG N FLOO D. The flood associated w',th the greater
of the following two areas:
I.
2.
Area with a flood plain subject tn a lpercent or

greater c hance of flooding in any year; or
Area designated as a nood haZc1.rd arca on a
community 'S Oood hazud ma'i), or olhelwisc legally
designated.
1.
The area within a fl ood plain subject to a I-percent or

greater chance of fl oodin g ill any year.
2.
The area designa ted as a fl ood hazard area on a

co mmu nity's flood haznrd map, or olhen-vise legally
des ignated,
FLOOD HAZARD AR E A SU BJ ECT TO HIGH

VELOCITYWAV E ACTION, Area within the flood
hazard area that is subject to high velocity wave action.
FLO ODWA y, The channel of the river, creek o r Olher
watercourse and the adjaccnt Itllld arcas that must be
reserved in order (0 discharge the base flood without
cumulatively increasing the water surface elevation more

than a designated height.
D ES IGN FLOOD E LEVAT) ' J
. The e levation of the
"oesign Oood," includi ng W 3 ve heigh t, relative: to the

datum specified on the co n ' nu ni ty's legally designated
LOWEST FLOOR. The fl oor of the lowest enclosed
area, including basement, but excluding any unfinished or
flood hazard map, The desif".1 fl ood elevation shall be the

elevation of the highes t ex sting grade of the building's
flood -resistant
perimeter plus the depth J11 1,mber (in meters) speci ried on
parking, building access or limited storage provided that
the flood hazard map,
enclosure. lIsable solely
for vehicle
such enclosure is not built so as to render the structure in

violation of this section.
DRY FLOO DP R O O F r\'G, A combinatioll of design
modifications that resll ;!s in a building or structure,

including the attelldant u :,I ity and sanitary faci lities, being
water tight with walls ' mbstantially impermeable to the
passage of water and v lith stru ctural components havi ng
the capacity to resist h) ads .1S identified illlhc code.
ST A RT OF CONSTIWCfl ON , The diltc of permit

issuance for new cOllslruclioll and substantial
improvemcnts to existing structures, provided the actual

star! of construction, repair, rccC)nstlllction, rehab ilitatio n,
addit ion, plilcement or ot her improvemen t is within 180
days afte r thc date of issuancc. The actual slllrt of
EXI STI NG C ONS" ,. RUCTlON ,

Any buildings and
st ru ctures flH" \\"1 !ich the "s tart o f co nstructio n"
co nstru ction means the fi rst placement of perman ent

co nstruction of a bui ldi ng (inc lud ing n manufactured
co mmcnced be fo rc the effective dat c of th e co mmunit y 'S
home) on a site, such as th e pou rin g of II slab or footings,
Association of Structura l Engineers of Ule Ph!lippines
CHAP TEH 2 ... Minimum Design l.oads .
installati on of pilings or construction of colurnmi.

,:" Pcrnnncnt construction docs not include land preparation
;. (slid, as clearing, excavation, grading or filling) , the
It instaJlarion of streets or walkways, excavation for a
f basement, footings. piers or foundations, the erection of
:. temporary fonns or the installation of accessory buildings
K such as garages or sheds not occupied as dwelling units or
~ not parl of the main building. For a substantial
n improvement, the actual "start of construction" means the
r. first alteration of any wa ll, ceiling, floor or other
t structura l parl of a building, whether or not that alteration
, affects the externa l dimensions of the building.
, SUBSTANTIAL DAMAGE. Damage of any origin

t sustained by a structure whereby the cost of restoring the
i structure to its before-damaged condition wou ld equal or
exceed 50 percent of the market value of the structure
before the damage occurred.
SUBSTANTIAL IMPROVEMENT. Any repair,
reconstruction, rehabilitation, addition or improvement of
a building or stru cturc, the cost of which equals or
exceeds 50 percent of the market value of the structure
before the improvement or repair is started. If th~:
structure has sustained substantial damage, any repairs arc
considered substantial improvement regardless of the
actual repair wo rk performed. The term does not,
however, include either:
1.
Any project for improvement of a building required

to correct existing health, san ita ry or safety code
viol ations identified by the bui ld ing official and th at.
are the min imum necessary 10 assure safe liv ing
condi ti ons,
2. Any alteration of a historic sll11cture provided thai the

alteration wi ll nOt preclude the structure's contin ued
designation as a historic stru cture.
2-113
211.5 Flood Hazard Documentation

The following documentation shall be prepared and
sealed by an engi neer-of-record and submitted to the
bui lding official :
I.
For construction in flood hazard areas not subject to

shigh~velocjty
wave action:
1.1. The elevation of the lowest floor, inc luding the

basement, as required by the lowest floor elevatio n.
1.2. for fully enclosed areas below the design flood
elevation where provisions to allow for the automatic
entry and exit of floodwaters do not meet the
minimuTJ) requi rements) construction documen ts shall
include a statement that the design will provide for
eq ualization of hydrostatic flood forces.
1.3. For dry flood-proofed nonresidential bui ldings,
construction docu ments shaH include a statement that
the dry flood -proofing is designed .
2.
For construction in flood hazard areas subject to

high-velocity wave action:
2. I. The elevation of the bottom of th e lowest horizontal

stmctural member as required by th e lowest floor
elevation.
2.2 Constmction documen ts shall include a statement

that the building is designed, including that the pile
or column foundation and building or structure to be
attached thereto is designed to be anchored to resist
flotati on, collapse and latera l movement due to th e
effccts of wind and Oood loads ac ti ng si mul tan eously
on all building components, and other load
requirements of Chapter 2.
2.3 For breakaway wa lls designed 10 resist a nominal load
of less than 0.48 kN /m 2. or more th an 0.96 kN /ml,
construction documents shall include i;l statement Ihm
the breakaway wall is designed .
211.3 Establishment of F lood Hazard Areas

To establish flood hazard areas, the governing body shall
adopt a flood hazard map and supporting data. The flood
hazard map shall include, at a minimum, areas of special
flood hazard where records are available.
211.4 Design and Construction

The des ign and construction of bui ld ings and structures
located in flood hazard areas, inc luding flood hazard a rCHS
Subject 10 high ve locity wave actioll.
th
National Structural Corle of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volurnc 1
Associat ion of StrlJcluml EngIneers of the Philippines
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 3
EXCAVATIONS AND
GEOMATERIALS
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION
Association ()f Structural Enginccrs of thc

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483
Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: i\;-i~P9}}EJ1~{~~gmniLQL1~.
\V chsi tt': ht f p:iIww\'~' .ascponlinc.org
Philippincs
CHAPTER 3 - Gen eral & Excavalion and Fills
3 1
Table of Contents
!f
tt
I
SECTION 3()1 GENERAL ...................................... ............................................................................................................... 3

301. I Scope ......... ..... ................................................................................. ......... .......................... ..................... ...................... 3
301.2 Qualily and Design ....... ......... ..................... .. .................................... ...... ................. ..... .. ... ....... ........ .... ..... .................... 3
30 1.3 All owable Bearing Pressures ..... ..................................... ... .... .. .. ........ ........ .... ................... ................ .. ....... ... ... ............. . 3
SECTION 302 - EXCAVATION AND FILLS ........................................................................................................................ 3
302. I General ........................................ .... ... ......................... ....... .. ................................ ............................. ... ...... ..... ... ... ........ 3
302.2 Cuts .. .......................................... ......... ..... .......... ..... ..... ........... .... ................................. ...... ......... ......... ........................ 3
302.3 Excava ti ons .. .......... .. ... ..................................... .. .... .......... .. ....... .... ............................. .... .. ... ..... ............. ...................... .. 3
302.4 Fills ......................... .......................... .... ................. ......... ...... ............... .. ....... .. ..... ... ............ ...... ... .... ........................ .. .... 4
302.5 Selbacks ........................................ .................... ..... .............. .............. ... ... ....... ..... ................ .......................................... 5
302.5 Drainage and Terraci ng ... ..................................................................... ...... .. ................................................................. 6
302.6 Erosion Contro!. ...... ................. ............... ..................................... ... ....... .......................................................... .............. 6
SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................ 7
303. I General .......................... ...... ........................................ .... .............................................................................................. 7
303.2 Soil Classification .......................................................................... ..................................................................... ............ 7
303.3 Questionable Soil .................... .. ................ ............ ...... ................................. .. ....................... ........................ ........ ......... 7
303.4 Liquefaclion Sludy ...... ................................... .......................... .. .. .............. ............. .. ....................... ............ ....... ......... 7
303.5 Expansive Soil .. ............ ...... ...... .................... .. ........................... ................ ... ........................................ ... .................. 7
303.6 Compressible Soils ............................................................................ ........................................................................ 8
303.7 RepOrts.... .......................
............................. ... .. .. ..... ................................... .. ....................................... ........ 8
303.8 Soil Tesls .................. ........ . ...... ....................... .......... .......................
. ................................. .. ...... ....................... ... 9
303.9 Liquefaction Potenlial and Soil Sirength Loss....................
................................. .............................
.. .. 9
303 .10 Adjacenl Loads.................. .......................................... ................
.. ......................... .. ............ ........................ 10
303 .11 Drain.ge........................................... ....... .. .... ...... ....... ........................................ ........ .... ... ........... ....... ...............
10
303. 12 Plate Load Test ................................... .. ............ .. ........ .................................................... ................ .... .. ....... .... ....... 10
SECTION 304 - ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LA TERAL PRESSURES ......................................................... 10
304. 1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and As sl~ss m e n( ...... ,...........
....... ............. ............... .. ................. ... .. .......... 10
304.2 Pres umplive LoadBearing and Lateral Resisting Values ........ ..
......................... ....... ....... .......... ...... ........... JO
304.3 Mininlunl Allowable Pressures... .............. .... ..................
. .. ....... .. _........ ...... . ,....... .. ........... ... .... .... ....... I J
304.4 Fou ndmi ons Adjace nt to Exisl ing Retainin g/Basement Walls..
,...... ,............ ... .................. ......... J 1
SECTION 305 FOOTINGS .......................................... ........................................... .................................... ......................... 12

305. 1 General ................................................................................................... ................................................................... 12
305.2 FOOling Design .... .... ....................................................... ............... ................. .... ........... ....... .................................... 12
305.3 Bearin g Walls ................. .......................................................................... .................................................... .............. 12
305.4 S lepped Foundalions .. .............................................. ............................................................. .......... ............... .............. 12
305.5 Footi ngs on or Adjacenllo Slopes............................................................... .. .......................................................... J3
305.6 Foundalion PI ales Or Sills ........... ....... ....................................... .......... ...................... ....... ......... .. ................ ................ 13
305.7 Designs Emp loyi ng Lateral Bearin g .................................. .. .............. ..... .... ........... ....... ................ ... .... .............. ..... ..... 14
305. 8 Grillage Footi ngs .................. ......... .. .................................................... ...... ......................... .. ............................ ......... 14
305.9 Bleac her Fooli ngs .. .... .. .... .. ............. .. ..... ... ... .................. .............................................. ... ... .......... ... ...... .. ... ..... .............. 14
SECTION 306 PILES - GENERAL REQUIREM E NTS ................................................................................................... IS
306. I General .......... ............................. ......... ................... ...... ................ ...... .. ....... .................................... ......................... .. .. 15
306.2 Interco nnection ............................................. "... .... ........................ .................... .......... ,... ., ........ .. ........... ...... .. ......... 15
306.3 DClernlinalion o f Allo\vablc Loads ............... .......................................... ................................ ....... ................ ...... ....... 15
306.4 Stalic Load Test......
.. ........................ ... ............................................................................................................ 15
306.5 Dynamic Load Tes l...................................................................... ...............
.. ..................................................... 15
306.6 COhl1111l Act ion .................. ................ ...........................
................... ...............................
.. ... 15
306.7 Group ACl io n ....................
............................. ................ ........... ............... ....... .......................
15
306.8 Pi les In S ubs id ing Areas....
................
.... ..........
.. ............................... 16
306.9 Jellin g
....................................
...................
....................
.. .. 16
306. 10 Pro lc<.:lion Of Pile Materials

........................ ..... ...
.. 16
306. 1 I Allowable Loads.......... .......... ................. ..................
. ................ ....................... ..... 16
306. I 2 Usc of Hi gber Allowable Pile Stresses
............ ....
.. .. ........ . ...............
.. .. 16
SECTION 307 . PILES - SPECIFIC REQUiREMENTS ....................................... ............................................................. 17
National Structural COdE: of the Philippines 6
lh
Edition Volum e 1
307.1 Round Wood Piles.

307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles ..
307.3 Metal-Cased Concrete Piles ..
307.4 Precast C:oncretc Piles .............................................................................................. ...... . ..
307.) Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioncd) ..
10
, ')
307.6 Structural Steel Piles ..
307.7 CoocreteFilied Steel Pipe P i l e s . . )
SECTION 308 . FOUNDATION CONSTl!UCTlONSEISMIC ZONE 4 ........................................................ " . ........... 19

308.1 General..
~08.2 Foundation and ()eotcchnicallnvestigations .
3tnLl Footings and Foundations ..
308.4 Pier and Pile Foundations.
30X.) Driven Pile Foundations..
306.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations..
()
/0
;i
. ..................... .
SECTION 309 - SPECIAL FOUNDATION, SLOPE STABlLIZA TION AND MATERIALS OF

CO NSTl! UCTI 0 N .................................... .............................................................................................................................. 22
CHAPTER 3 - Gelleral & Excavation and Fills
3-3
I
30J.! Scope
This chapter sels forth requircmems for exclwarions, fill s,
footings and foundations for any building Or structure.
302.1 General
Excavation or fills for buildings o r structures shall be
constructed or protected such that they do not endanger life
or property. Reference is made to Section 109 of this code
301.2 Quality and Design
for requiremenls governi ng cxcavalion. grading and

earthwork construc tio n. including fills and e mban kments.
The quali ty and desig n of materi als used strucltlfally :ii

excavalions, fills. footings and foundations sh all conform to
the requirements specified in Chapters 4, 5, 6 and 7.
302.2 Cuts
301.3 Allowable Bearing Pressures
302.2.1 General
AJlowable stresses and design formul as provided in this

chaplcr sha ll be lIsed with the allowable stress design load
Unless otherwise reco mmended in the approved

geotechnical e ngineering. c uts shall confonn (0 the
provisions of this section . In the absence of an approved
geotechnical engineering report . these provisions may be
waived fo r minor cuts not intended to support structures.
combimuions specified in Section 203.4 .
302.2.2Slol'e
The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for
the intended use and shall be no steeper than 1 unit vertical
in 2 unit s horizont al (50% slope) unless a geotechni cal

engineeri ng, or both, staling that the site has been
investigated, and giving an opinion that a cut at a steeper
slope will be stable and not create a hazard to pub lic or
private property, is submitted and approved. Such cuts shall
be protected against erosion or degradation by sufficient
cover, drain age, engineering andlor bi otechnical means.
302.3 Excava tions

302.3.3 Existi ng footin gs or foundations which may be
affected by any exc ava ti on shall be underpinned adequately
or otherwise protected agai nst se ttl ement and shall be
protected against lateral movemen t.
302.3.4 Protection of Adjoining Property

The requirement for protection of adjacent property and the
depth 10 which protection is required shall be defined by
preva iling law. Where not defined by law. the foHo wing
shall apply;
th
National Structural Cod e of tlie Philippines 6 Edition Vo lume 1
3 -4
CHAP TER 3 - General & Excavation and Fills
Top of
Slope
PA*
: 1-115 but
~ ~ 0.60 m3
: min. an
.r
. -, I
3 In max .. 7'
Toe of
PA*
Sl~pe
~ < HI2 bJ!! 0.6 m,> :

: mi n. and 6 m
C ut or Fill
Slope
, I
-I
~ IIII S I
Natura\ 1or FGrade
max.
1
* Permit Area Boundary
Figure 3021
1.
Natural or Finish
Grade
Setback Dimensions for Cut and Fill Slopes
Before commencing the excavation, the p e~on making
or causing Ihe excavation to be made shall nOlify in

writing the owners of adjoining building not less than
10 d ays before such excavation is to be made and Ihal
302.4. 1 General
the adjoining building will be protected. The condition

of the adjoining building will be documented to include
geotec hnical engi neering report, fills shall confonn to th e
photographs prior to excavation. Technical docume nts

pe nallllng to the proposed underpinnin g and
excavation plan shall be provided the owner of the
adjacent property.
2.
302.4 Fills
Unless it can shown th rough a det ai led geotechnical
in vestigation that underpinning is unnecessary. any

person making or causing an exca.vation shal l protect
the excavati on so that the soil of adj oining property
will not cave in or settle,
In cases where the existing adjacellt building will have

morc bascmcllls tha n the proposed bui ld ing. Ihe foundati on
of lhe proposed building should be designed so ;IS not 10
impart add itional lateral eanh pressures on the existing

build ing (sec scc ti on 304.4).
Unless
mherwise
recommended
in
the
approved
provisions o f th is sectio n. In the absence o f an approved

geotechn ical e ngineering report, these provis io ns may be
waived for minor fills not intended 10 support st ruc tures.
Fills to be used to suppon the foundalions of any building
or struClUre shall be placed in accordance with accepted
engineering prac rice. A geotcchnical invcstigation ' report
and a report o f satisfactory placement of fill. both
acce ptable to the building offi cial. shall be submitted when
required by the building official.
No (ill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to

any bu ilding or slmClUrc unl ess such building or stru ctu re is
capable of wi thstanding the additional vertic<ll and
horizontal loads c allsed by Ih e fill or surcharge ,
Fill slopes shall not be constlllcted 0 11 natural slo pes Slccpe r
th an I unil vcrt ica l in 2 un its horizonta l (50% slope),
provided fUfiher th aI benc hes shall be made 'to kcy in the
subsequent fill materia l.
As sociation of Structura l Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTER 3 - General & Excavation and FillS
Preparation of Ground
ground surface shall be prepared to received fill by
vegetation, non-complying fill, top soil and other
nSl,iW:ble materials by scarifying and benc hing in the case
,__ " "inO
sloping ground The existing ground surface shall be

prepared (0 receive fill by rem oving vegetation
~d,:qu"e,y
materials, non-complying fill , lopso il and other

Im:,uiltable materials. a nd by scarifying LO provide a bond
Ihe new fill.
3-5
be used based on ASTM D5030 -04. A minimum o[ three

tests for every 500 m2 area should be performed for every
lift [Q ve rify compliance with compac tion requirements.
302.4.5 Slope
The slope of fill surfaces shall be no Sleeper 'han is safe [or
the inlended usc. Fi II slopes shall be no stceper than I unit
vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope) unless
subs tantiat ing slope stabili ty analyses justifying steeper
slopes arc submiucd and approved.
the natura! slopes arc steeper than I unit venienl in 5
' units horizontal (20% slope) and lhe height is greater than
1.5 m, the ground surfucc shall be prepared by betlch ing
into sound bedrock or other co mpeten t . mated al as
determined by the geotechnical engineer. TIle bench under
the loe of a filion a slope sleeper than I unit venical in 5
unils horizon,.,1 (20% s lope) shall be OlleaSI 3 m wide.
I
i
The area beyond the loe of fill shall be sloped to drain or a

paved drain shall be provided_ When fill is to be placed
over a cut, the bench under the toe of fill shall be at least 3
III wide but the cut shall be made before placing the fill and
onJy after acccpt.mce by the geotechnical engi neer as a
suitable found ation for fill .
302.4.3 Fill Material
Any organic or deleterious ma terial shall be removed and
Ii
will not be permitted in fills_ Except as pennined by the

geoteChnical engineer, no rock or similar irreduc ible
material with a maximum dimension greater than 200 mill
shall be buried or placed in [ills.
ftxception:
I
I
~~e placemem of larger rock may be permitted when
Ihe
geotechnical engineer properly devises a method of
placement. alld contitlf(ollsly inspects its placemellf alld
approves lire fill stability_ The following conditions shall
also apply:
1_
Prior to issuance of the gradinB permit, pOlential rock

disposal areas shall be delineated on the grading plan.
2.
Rock sizes greater Ihon 300 111m in maximwn

dimension shall be 3 m or more below grade, measured
vC!'(ically_
3.
Rocks shall be placed so w 10 assure filling of all voids

wilh well-grotled soil.
302.4.4 Co mpa ction
All rill s shall bc co mpac ted in lifts Ilot exceedi ng 200 Illlll
ill th ickncss 10 II min imuill of" CJ5 percent of maximum
density as determined by ASTM Standard D- I 557. Inplace dcns it y shall be determincd in .\ccordancc with
ASTM D-1556. D-2Ifl? 1)2922. D-lO I? or eq ui va len t.
302.5 Setbacks
302.5.1 GClIcral
Cut and fiJI slopes shall be set back from si te boundaries in
accordance with this sect ion subjec t to verification with
delailed slope stability study. Selback dimensions shall be
horizontal distances measured perpendicular to the site
boundary. Setback dimensions shall be as shown in Figure
302-1.
302.5.2 Top of C UI Slope
The top of cut s lopes shall not be made nearer [0 a s ile
boundary line than one fifth of thc vertical height of cut
with a minimum of 0.6 III and a maximum of 3 m . Th(
sctback may need to be increased for any required
interceptor drains.
302.5.3 Toe of Fill Slope
The toe of fi 11 slope shall be made not nearer to tbe site
boundary line than one half the height of the slope with ~,
minimu11l of 0.6 In and a maximum of 6 m. Where a ft::
slope is to be located near the s ite boundary and Ih,
adjacent off-site propcl1y is developed , special precaution:
shall be incorporated in the work as the building offici:.:.!
deems necessary to protect the adjoining propel1y fro !:
damage as a re su lt of" such grading. These precautions m <! ~;
include but are not limited to:
I.
Additional setbacks.
2_ Provisio n for retaining or slough walls.

3.
Mechanical s tabilizati o n or chemical lreulmen( of I~ ;:

fill slope surface to minimize eros ion.
4.
Rockfall protection
5_
Provis ions Cor the contro l of surface wate rs.
302.5.4 Modification of Slope Location

The hui lding offici'll may approve allc lllatc sctback s. Ti
buildin g offici al l1lay requ ire an investigation ' ~! ' .
rccollllllcn<i<l!ion by a qualified geotec hn ical engincC';'
demonstrate thill th e inten t of thi s section has been sat is; .. -
For clean granular mah.:/"ials. thc lise of the foreg oing

procedures is i n;'l pproprialc. Rcl,Hi vc dcnsi lY critc ri a shall
111
N;l!IOIl~li Slnl c tlHcll Code of !he Phi lippine s 6 Editi on Volume 1
3-6
CHAPTER 3 -- General & Excavalion and Fills
Exception:
302.5 Drainage and Terracing
The gradient from Ihe bllildillg pad may be I perccm fr all

of the following conditions exisl Ihroughout fli .' per;;:;1
302.5.1 General
Unless o therwise indicated
011
the approved grading plan,
area:
drainage facilities and terracing shall conform to the

provisions of this section for cut Or fill slopes Sleeper than I
unit vertical ill 3 units horizontal (33.3% slope).
1.
No proposedji fls ore greater thall 3 m maximum depth.
2.
No proposed finish cut or fill slope f(lces have a

vertical height in excess of 3 m.
302.5.2 Terrace
3.
No existing slope faces steeper than 1 IInit verlh.",,: in

10 units horizontal (10% slope) hGlle a vertical hc,iglll
ill excess of 3 m.
Terraces ill !CHst 2 III in width sha ll be estti bl ished at nOI

more than 10 III ve nical intervals o n all ellt o r fill slopes to
contro l sUlface drainage and debris except Lhal where on ly
o ne lerracc is required, it s hall be al mid-height. For cuI or
fill slopes greater than 20 III and up to 40 111 in vertical
height, one terrace at approximately mid-height shall be 4
m in width . Ten'ace widths an d spacing for cut and fill
s lopes greater than 40 m in height shall be designed by the
civil engineer and approved by the buildi ng official.
Suitable access shall be provided to permit proper cleaning
and maintcnance.
Swales Qr ditches on terraces shall bc designed 10
effectively co ll ect surface water and di sc harge to an outfall.
It shall have a minimum gradient of 0.5 percent and must be
paved with reinforced concrete not less than 75 mm in
thickness or an approved equal paving material.
A si ngle ru n of swale or ditch s hall not coll ect runoff from a

tri but<JIY area exceedi ng 1,000 m2 (projected area) without
discharging into a down drain .
302.5.3 Subsurface Drainage

Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with surface drainage
as necessary for stability.
302.5.4 Disposal
All drainage facilities shall be designed to ca rry waters to
the nearest prac ti cable drainage way approved by the
building official or ollIer appropriate jurisdiction as a safe
place to deposit such waters. Eros ion of gro und in the area
of discharge shall be prevented by installation of n on ~
erosive down drains or other devices or splash blocks ,mei
sed iment ation bas in s.
302.5.5 Interceptor Drains

Paved or Lined interceptor drains shall be in stalled alo ng
the top of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area
above slopes toward the cut has a drainage path greater than
12 m measured horizontally. Interceptor drains shall be
paved with a minimum of 75 mm of concrete or gu nile and
re info rced. They sh:lIl have a m in imum depth of 300 mOl
ilnd a minimum paved width of 750 mm measured
horizontally across the drain. The slope o f drain shall be
approved by the building offic ial.
302.6 Erosion Conlrol

302.6.1 Slopes
The faces of c ul and fill s lopes shall be prepared and
maintained to con trol ngainst erosio n. Thi s conLrol m3Y
consist of effecti ve planting adapted to or indigenous (Q the
loca lity. The protection for the slopes shall be installed as
soo n as practicable and prior to calling for final approval.
Where cut slopes arc not subjec t to erosion due to the
erosion-resistant character of the material s, sllch protection
may be omillcd .
302.6.2 Othel- Devices

Where necessary, check dams, cribbing, Iiprnp or other
devices or method s shall be employed to control erosion
and provide safety.
Building pads s hall have a drtlinage gradien t of 2 percent

toward approved dminage facilities, uoles!'; waived by the
huilding official .
/\ssociation of Structural Engu'le(;I'S of the PllilipPIl'18S
CHAPT ER 3 - General & Excavalion and FillS
3-7
Addit ional studies may be necessary to evaluate soil

strength, the effect of moisture variation on soil-bearing
capacity, compressibilit y, liquefaction and expansiveness.
303.1 General
303.3 Questionable Soil
Foundation in vest igation shall he conducted and a

professiollal Repor! by a Regis(ered Civi l Engineer
experienced or knowledgeable in Soil Mechanics and
Foundations shall be submitted at each building site.
Where the classification, strength or compressibility of the

soil are ill doubt, or where a load bearing va lue superior to
that specified in thi s code is claimed, the building official
shall require that the necessary soil investigation be made.
For structures to two stories or hi gher" it is recommended

th at an exhaus ti ve geotech ni cal study be pcrfonncd 10
evaluate in-situ soi l parameters for foundation design and
analys is. II is recolllmended that a minimum of one
303.4 Liquefaclion Study

The bu ilding official may requi re a Liquefaction evaluation
stud y in accorda nce with Secti on 303.6 when. during the
cou rse of the roundati on investigation, all of the following
conditions are discovered:
borehole per two hundred, 200 11\2 of the slruclUrc's
footprint be drilled to a depth of at least 5 III into hard strata

or until a suitable bearing layer is reached unless otherwise
specified by th e consu lting geotechnic al e ngi nee r. The total
number of boreholes per structure shou ld be no less than 2
for stJUcturcs whose footprints arc less than 300 m2 and no
less (h an 3 for those sl mcturcs wi th larger footprints.
For buildings with basements, it is recommend ed that the
depth of boring should ex tend to twice the least plan
dimension of th e structure ' s footpri nt plus the depth of the
I.
Shallow ground waler. 2 m or less.
2.
Unconsolidated saturated sa ndy alluvium (N < 15)
3.
Se ismic Zone 4.
1:.,~\:cep t ioll:
The building offiCial may waive this evaluation upon receipt

afwritten opinion of a qualified geotechnical engineer that
liquefaction is not probable.
basement.
303.5 Expansive Soil
An exhaustive geotech nical invcstig.ltion should also be
conducted in Ci.lSCS of questionable soils, expilnsive so ils,
unknown groundwater table to determi ne whether the
exist ing ground wale!" table is above Of" within 1.5 m be lo w
the elevation of the lowest 0001' level or whe re such floor is
located below the finished ground level adjacent to th e
foundation, pil e foundations, or in rock stra ta where the
roc k is sllspected to be of doubtful characteristics or
indicmc variati ons in the structure of" th e rock or wlwrc
solution cavities or vo ids are expected to be prcse nt in the
rock.
The building official lIlay req uire that the interpretation and
eval uation of the resu lts of the foundation invcstigation be
made by a regis tcred civil engineer experienced and
knowledgeable in th e field of geotechn ica l cnginccring.
Soils meeting all four of the following provisions shall be

considered expansive. except that tests to show com pl iance
with Items I, 2 a nd 3 shall not be required if the test
presc ribed in hem 4 is conducted:
!.
Plasticity index (PI) of 15 or greater, determined in

acco rdance with ASTM D 4318.and Liquid Limi t > 50.
2.
More than 10 percent of the soil particles pass a No.

200 sieve (75 111), determined in accordance with
ASTM D 422.
3.
Marc than 10 percent of the soil parti cles arc less than
5 micrometers in sile, determined in accordan ce with
ASTM [) 422.
4.
Ex pansion index grea ter than 20, determined in

accordance with ASTM D 4829.
303.2 Soil Classific:t lion
303_5.1 Design fol' Expansive Soils
For Ihe pu rposes of this cha pte r) the defin iti oll ;1I1d
class iri c:lli on of soi l materia ls for use in Table 304-1 sha ll
Foo tin gs or foundati ons fo r buildings and strucLUres

fo unded 0 11 expansi ve soils shall 1:- designed in accordance
wi th Section 1805.8.1 or 1805.8.2.
be accord ing to I\STM D-2487.

Soi l classifi cat ion shall. be based on observat ion <l nd any
necessary field or l<lbora tory tests of tin:: materials disclosed
by borings or excavations made in appropriate locations .
Foo tin g or foundati on desig n nced not compl y wit h Section
303.5.3 or 303.5.4 where the so il is rcmoved in accordance

with Sect ion 303.5.4, nor where the building offi cial
approves stabilization of the soil ill accordance with Section
301.5.5.
NotlOll al S ll"l!(:tural Code) of tile
Pl1ilippll"les G" Edition Volume 1
3-8
CHAPTER 3 - General & Excavalion and Fills
303.5.2 Foundations
Footings or foundatio ns placed o n or wit hin the active zone
of expansive soils shall be designed to res ist differenti al
vo lume chnnges and to prevent st l1Jctural damage to the
suppoJ1cd structure.
Defl ec ti on and rac king of the
supported shall be limited to that which will not interfere
wi th the usabil ity and serviceability of the structure.
Found ati ons placed below where vo lume change occurs or
below expansive soil shall com ply with the following
provisions:
I.
2.
Fou ndat ions ex tending into or pe netrating expa nsive

soils shall be designed to prevent uplift of the
supported structure.
Foundations penetrating expansive soils shall be
designed (Q res ist forces exerted on the fou ndation due
to soi l volume changes or shall be isolated from Ihe
expansive soil.
303.5.3 Slab on G round Foundations

Momen ts, shears and deflections for use in designing slab
onground mat or raft foundations on expa nsive soils shall
be determin ed in accordance with WRIICRSI Design of
S!abon-Ground
Found~ti on s
or
PTJ
Standard
Requ irements fo r Analys is of Shallow Concre te
Foundations on Ex pansive Soils.
Using the moments,
shea rs and deflecti ons detemu ned above, prestressed slabs
ongroun d, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils sha ll
be designed in accordance wi th PTJ Standard Requ irements
fo r Design of Shalfow PostTensioned Concrete
Foundat ions on Expansive Soils. It shall be permitted to
analyze and des ign such slabs by other methods tilat
account for soils truclu re interaction, the defo rmed shape of
th e soil support, the place or s tiffened plme action of the
slab as well as both cemer lift and edge lift conditions.
Such alt ernative methods sha ll be ra tional and the basis fo r
all aspects and param ete rs of the method shall be ava ilab le
for peer rev iew.
303.5.4 Removal of Expa nsive Soil

Where expansive soil is removed in lieu of designing
footings or foundations in accordance wilh Secti on 302.3.2,
the soil shall be removed 10 a de pth sufficient to ensure a
constant moist ure contenL in Ihe rema;ning soil. FiJI
material shall not cont ain ex pansive soils <1 11<1 shall comply
with Section 302.3.3.
303.5.5 Stabiliza ti on
Where the active zone of expansive soi l ~ is stabi li zed in lieu
of designing footi ngs or fou ndations in accord<H1ce Wi lh
Section 306.2, the soi l shall be stabili zed hy chemi cal
. lreat ment, dewntering, pre-satu rati on or equ iva lent
teC hni ques.
303.6 Compressible Soils
If th e boreholes show tlHl t the propo!'ed slruc tul'cs arc to be
buill abo ve co mpressible ti negrain ed soi ls (wi th N< 6), it
is recomme nded th at conw li darion tests be perform ed ill
accordance with ASTM D 2435 to determine the settl emelll
parameters for the si te.
If wide, massive loads within the slmctures to be built on
compressible fine -grained soils are to be expec ted for
prolonged periods of time built, the settlement effects on
adjacent SlruClu rc.1) shou ld be evaluated as we ll.
303.7 Reports
The soi l classification and design bearing capacity shall be
shown 0 11 the plans, unless the fou ndation co nforms to
Tab le 305-1. The build ing official ma y require submission
of a written repon of th e investigation , whi ch shall include,
but need not be limited to, the followin g informati on:
I.
A plOl showing the locat ion of all test borings and/or

excava ti ons.
2.
Desc riptions and classifi cati ons of the materia ls

encountered.
3.
Elevation of the waler table, if encountered.
4.
Recommendations for foundation Iype and design

criteria, including bcuri ng capacity, provisions to
mitigate the effects of diffcrential scttlements and
ex pansive soils, provisions to mitigate the effects of
liquefaction and soi l strc ngth , provisions for spec ial
fo undation solutio ns and ground improvement, and the
effec ts of adjaccnt loads.
5.
Expected total and differentia! settlement.
6.
Laboratory test resu lt s or soil sam ples.
7.
Field borehole
informat ion
a)
b)
c)
d)
c)
Exception:
Expansive soil need not be removed 10 the depth of constant
moisture, provided the confining pressure in the expallsive
soil created by the fill and supported s/ruClllre exceeds the
swell pressure.
lug
co nta ining
the
following
Project locmioll
Deplh of borehole
Ground elevation
Grollnd water t;tblc c!cv.atio!1
Date !'tarled and finished
T he soil ciassific.ltion and dcs ignbeari ng capacity shall bc

shown on the pla ns, un lc:-s the foundat ion con forms to
Tab le 305- 1.
Associatio n of Structural Engineers of tile
Pt1i li ppine~~
CHAPTr: R 3 - General & Excavation and Fills
When expansi ve soils are present, the bui lding official may
Table 3033 Geophysical Tests
require thai speci,ll provisions be made in Ihe roundati on
design and constmction to safeguard against damage due to

this expansiveness. The building official may require a
special in vestigati on and report to provide these design and
construction criteria.
Table 303-2 Laboratory and Field Tests
Laboratory I
Field Test
Output OatH I
I ASTMJ Test I Parameter
Obtained
nCS i 1!Il ~lfioJ1
Field Test
ASTM
Designation
D2216-05
Grain size
analysis
Atterberg Li mits
D422-63
D4318-05
uses
D2487-00
Specific Gravity
Shrinkage Limit
Organic Matter
D854-05
D427-04
D2974-00
Swedis h Weight
Sounding Test
115
A 1221:2002
Moisturel Waler
con lent
Soil grad ation
Liq uid limit, plasti c
Ii mi t
Classificati on of
soils
Specific gravity
Shri nka~e limit
Moisture content, ash
conteiH and percent
orl!a nic mutter in soi l
N~w-value indicating,
undrain ed so il shear
strength
UCT Test (Soi ls)

Tri-ax ial
(UU
Test)
Tri-axial
(CU
Test)
Oedollleter ( I -D
Consolidation)
Laboratory Va ne
Shear
Direct Shear
Test
UCT for Intact
Rock
Standard
Penetration Tes t
Modified Proctor
Test
Standard Proc'{or
D2166-00
D2850-03a
Strength parameters
Strength parameters
D4767-04
Strength parameters
D2435-04
D4648-05
Consoli dation
parameters
Strengt ll parameters
1)3080-04
Strength pa ram cters
D2938-95
Strength parameters
Geophysical Tests
Seismic
reflection
D5777-00
Ground
Penetrating
Radar
D7128
Cross hol e
seismic survey
D6432-99
Geo-resisti vity
Survey
D4428
Maps su bsurface
geologic conditions,
lithologic unit s and
fractures.
Maps lateral
continuity of
lithologic units and
detects changes in
the acoustic
properties of
subsurface
geomatcrials.
p-wave and !i-Wave
velocity
determination.
elastic modul i
. detcllllination
CO!Tosion Potential
or so ils, Electrical
grounding,
slratigraEhic stlldie~ _
303.8 Soil Tes ts

Tables 301-2 and 103 -3 summarize the commonly used
fi eld and labora to ry tests needed in determining the in-situ
so il parameters for use in foundati on design and analysis.
303.9 Liquefaction Poten tial and Soil Strength Loss
When required by Section 3(H.3. the poten ti al for soil
liqucfaction and soi l strength loss during eal1hquakes shall

be cvaluated during the geotechnical investigation. The
D1586-99
N- va lue
D IS57-02
Max imum dry

densit l'
tvlaximulll dry
D698-00"
Test
Field Density
Test
Cil R t,,1> Test
Cone Penclnltion
Output Data I
Parameter Obtained
Seismic refract ion
Classification oj .soils
Moisture content
:;-9
de nsi ty
I)
IS5600
D ISH3-05
1)3441-05
Maximull1 dry
density
CIl R
Soil strength
~~~ ___,________,_._..._. ______J.~~~~~.!::.~ _.. _._. ____ ._
geotech nical evalua ti on shall assess potenti,11 liqueractio n

susceptib ility potentia! t:onsequc nccs of any liquefaction
;l!ld soil stre ngth loss, including estimation of differential
se ttl ement. lat cr;i1 movement or reduction in fo undation
='t1i l-hcill'i ng cap;lcit y. <llld di scu ss mitigating Illea!; ures.
Sud ! me:lsurcs sha ll he given consideralion in lh e design of
the bui ld ing and may include. but are not limi led to, ground
slabil izatio n. selet:!ion or appropr i,lt c foundati on type and
depths. =,ckc tio n of <Ippropri alc structural S)'slemS to
'I(.Tollllllodat l! anli cipalcd displacements. or :lIly
t:olllhin'lli o" of these measures.
The potential I'llI' liqu(:rat:tioll :llld soil stre ngth loss shall \J; '
ev,lIu;IIt.',d for a sile peak ground ac:ccler,llioll that .IS
mini mum. confo rms to the proba hi lity o f cxccct!;lIl,
s pceilicd in SCd ioll 20K.fl.1. Peak grollnd Cleeclerillion m:":

hJ;lllond i S !!Ucl lJ !,ll COd (; 0 1 Ii 1(-: PI1I IIPi J1 :k:'; ((
hl:\IO!l \J()llllill'~ 1
3-10
CHAPTEri 3 --. General & Excavation and Fills
be determined based on a site-specific study taking into

account soil amplifkation effects.
In the absence of such a study, peak ground acceleration
may be assumed equal to the seismic zone factor in Table
208-3.
303.10 Adjacent Loads

Where footings are placed at varying elevations, the effect
of adjacent loads shall be included in tile foundation design.
303.11 Drainage
Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of
surface water around buildings and ensure that scour will
not threaten sllch structures through adequate embedment.
(Sec also Section 305.5.5).
303.12 Plate Load Test
The plate load test is generally used for determination of
soil subgrade properties for rigid foundations. If used for
building foundations, it mllst be emphasized that the Depth
of fnlluence is only up to twice the width of the test plate.
Care must be used when extending the results to deeper
depths.
304.1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and

Assessment
The recolllmended allowable foundation ;in,! 1;,1' '.,;
pressures slwtl be estimated from a rcasonahi y (" .
geotechnical site investigation and assessment, which shall
include at least the (o!lowing:
a)
Description or regional geologic
b)
Characterization of in-situ geotechnical conditions;
c)
Factual report on the insitu and lahora!or), :c ~;i::

performed to characterize the site rSc'.,' .\,'clinn
303.7 for a list of ill-situ and lal.1;;i<::\):Y IC:;I~
commonly carried out for geotechnical site
characterization) ;
d)
Disclosure of the assumptions and tllc :,-ppliclbk.

analytical or empirical models used in
the allowable foundation and lateral pre:," ii \:'.;
e)
Calculations carried out and Factor til'

;!
assumed in arriving at the recommended :.llluw,il.:J('
foundation and lateral pressures; and
f)
Evaluation of existing potential ge(.llogic haZ;\Fds

and those that may be induced or triggered by the
construction/installation of the structure.
eh;!r;l,;[~' i'isiic:;;
The geotechnical site investigation and assessment shall be

performed by a registered civil engineer experienced and
knowledgeable in the field of geotechnical engincering.
A geotechnical investigation and assessment shall !)c
presented in a repoli. The repoli, together with a brief
resume and a sworn statement of accountability or ' I Je
geotechnical engineering consultant who prepilred :i,
11
be included in the submittals to be reviewed ,-Ull! C'\dl i '. :d
by the building official or government authority in ch:\r,:,~,e
of issuing the relevant permits stich as ellvirol1:n( ':al
compliance cel1ificatc and/or building permit.
304.2 Presumptive LoacrBearing and Lateral Hesisting
Values
When no exhaustive geotechnical site assessment and

investigation is perrormed, especially when no in-silu or
very limited tests arc carried out, the preSUJ11pl;\",~ k.;:dbearing and lateral resisting values provided in 'j',lbk ~W I
shall be uscd. Usc of these v;lIues requires Ihal Ihe.
foundation design engineer has, at the least, clnicd oul iii]
inspection of the site and has hecollle familiar with tile
predominant soiJ or rock characteristics or the site.
Association of Structul"al Lnqincc:rs of the
Philipplne~;
C HAPT E ~~
.,,
.,
Presumptive JO:l<J-bcaring values shall apply to lll<Ilcrials

with similar ph ysical characteristics and dispositions. Mud,
prganic silt, orga nic clays, peat or unprepared fi ll shall not
be assumed 10 have a presum ptive load-bearing capacity
unless data from a geotech ni cal site assessmcllI and
jnvcst igalion to substantiate the use of such a value arc
submjued.
For clay, sandy day, si lty clay and cla yey silt, in no case
shaJllhc latera l slid ing resistance eKceed one-half the dead
load.
3 -- Gene ral & Excav ation and F:llls
3- 11
304.3 Minimum Allowable Press ures.

The recommended all owable foundali on and lateral values
shall be with the allow ab le stress design load co mbin ations
specifi ed in Secti on 203.4.
,
304.4 Fo undations Adjacenf to Exis ting
Relainin g/Basemcnt "" all.1i
In cases where the adjacent building will have more

basemcnls th an (he prob'oscd bu ilding, lhe foundation of the
proposed build ing shqukl be designed so as not to impal1
addi ti ollallatcrnl earth pressu res on th e existing building.
It is (he responsibililY of lhe engineer-DC-record 10

determine the applicability of these presLi mptive values for
Lhe Project.
Table 304-1 Allowable Foundation lind Lmcrai Pressure
Class of Materials l
Latera l
Gearing
Allowable
Foundation
Pressure!
I1 clow Nftl ura l
( kJ'a )
(kPaJm of
Lateral Sliding'
-----
Grade
Coeffici cntS
deplh)
Rcsistance6
(kPa)
L Mass.i ve Crystalline Bedrock
200
200
0.70
2. Sedimentary and Foli ated Rock
100
60
0.35
3. Sand y Grave l and /or Grave l(GW & GP)
100
30
0.35
4. Well -graded Sand. Poorly-graded Sa nd. Silty Sand.

Clayey Sand. Silty Gravel and Clayey Gra ve l (SW.
SP, SM. SC, GM and GC)
75
25
0.25
5. el.y, Sandy Clay. S ilt y Clay and Clayey Silt (CL. ML.
MI-I, and CH)
50'1
15
II
A geotechnical sire' illl'c.Higmiol! i.~ /'{' c(IIwneIJdl'dfor .wil r/os.\'ifi('(/li(1/I (Rljl'!' /0 S('rlioll JO.l).
Afll/a/IlCS of alloll'able /oU/u/(lIirm p res.que (lI~' [ul'j()(n ill.t:..f hm'illl; fllllillillll/l11 wit/ill (If .loa //I1I/1I11t! (} millimum d<'I)(11 (~r JOO mill info I/lI' .wfllml gl'(ldc.
Except as li med in I-nomOft! '(I ' , all iI/crease 0120% i.f o/foll'ed for I'm'" lIa(liliOlWI 300m", of \I'lfllil (1I/(lItlt'til'I'th III t/ II/t/xill/mll l 'O/lIt' ojthrei' lilli,'.,' Iilr
desigl1l1/C'(/ \'(Ilile. All inr:rCII,ft! oj f1/1t!-,hird i.f {wl'lIIil/('(/ ....h('11 IIsin.': III!' (llt('n/tlft' lam/ nllllbhrll/iol/:r ill S.'rliOIf 103,4 111m illf/m/t 1";/1/1 o r earthquake
loads.
The resi.'iflltl('e 1'(I l l1eS deril'cd from 'he labie {1m IU!111Ii(l('tl /(J br il/t'I'c'f1Sl't/ by rhe /II /JII lnr I'n/lle for /'uch mlt/irilllw l .100 111m oj (/t'll/ll IrJ (I 111/1.1'/1111111/ of 15
limes th e lahular !lallle. I .w/med po/e.( fo /' u.w:s .fllch asj/ag{lIIll's fir .fig ll .\ (//1(/ {Ioks 1I.I'('d 10 supJlo rt IlIIiJdill}i .~ Ihlll (11'(' no{ ad" f'l'wty (((fi'I 'ln! hy (/ 12 111111
lliOlio!! af 11/(' groul1d .mrfacl' rill{' /I! .~/1fIrtf('rlll t(l tem! Irwds 111'1' p(, l'miw'd III IU' dt'.\igl/t't! II sing Itll cro/ /ic((rillg ('(IIIICS equal 10 111'0 1;II!('s Ifll' I(Ilm /1ll
l'<l/lIe.f.
/.alent! hctll'lIIR (1 11(/ f/idil/.~ ,,(.~i.H(lIIn' "'11\ 1)(> Iolllhitud.
C(Jeg;/'iI'1JI {() hI' lilli/lip/iN/ hy
/11('
ch'l1(J ',,~/(t.
I.ul/~I'(" didillg rC.f if{m/{'I' " (IIUt' to I,C' lIIulti/,lil'rl Ily 111(' OJ/llm'l orl'(/ . III
III)
nul' .(Iml/ IIII' /(111'1'(1/ .I/hlmg
1'f'i.#{/1WI'
No iIlI'rC'fI.W' .fllalf /1(' a llowed/or OIl i llr /'('a.w' (~r wid fh .
N;)llollal S lrllcl llr~:ll Code of lilt;; PhlllPPill OS (,'
:.dltlon \lOlll l: 1f~
/'l'/ '/'('(I (J//(" ./m{f IIii' (ka t! Ir~/fl.
3"12
305.2.1 Design Loads

Footings shall be designeofor the most unfavo rable load
effec'ts duc' to combi nations of loads_ T he dead load i s
pennitted to include the weight of foundations, (ooti ngfi
and overlying fill. Reduced live loads as penni tlcd in the
Chapter o n Loadings are perm itt ed to be used in th e
design of foot in gs.
305. 1 General
Foo lings and foundations shall be constructed of ma so nry,
concrete or treated wood in conforman ce with Chap ters 4,
6 and 7. roolings of concrete and masonry shall be of

:wli d materiaL Foundations supporti ng wood sha ll extend
at least 150 mill above the adjacent finish grade. Footin gs
s hall have a minimum depth as indicated in Table 305 ~ I,
unless another depth is warranted, as eSUIblished by a
305.2.2 Vibratory Loads

Where machinery operations or other vibratory loads or
vib rati ons
are
transmitted
to
the
foundations,
co nsiderat ion shall be g iven in the repon to address the
founda tion design to prevent detrimental disturbances to
the soil due to vibratory loadings .
foundation investigation.
The provisions of Ih is section do not apply to bui ld ing and
foundation systems in those areas subject to scou r and
water pressure by w ind and wave acti on. Buildings and
found<Hions subject
Dynamic Soil Properties shall be inc luded where requi red .
such loads shall be designed in
to
305.3 Bearing Walls
accordance with approved nati ona l standards.

Table 3051 Minimum Requi rements fo r Foundations
T hick ness of
NlI llIhcr of
Floors
Foundation Wall
S upported
(0101)
..
by the
-~;ii-Foundations CtHlcretc
Masonrv
--_ _-150
of
of
Undis tu rbed
Fooling
FOOlin g
Gro und
150
.... ....
2
200
.. _.
200
250
250
, Wlt",-(, 1111I1 ~jW{
(111m)
(mm )
300
150
.. _. '
"" -
flIIlth'fllll.{ IUC
foulld_
Surface
(111111 ) 4
300
375
175
450
450
200
600
fimllll.t:J:
1"I'{1II;"1'11 11/ SI', 'li(1/I 305. 1,

Tilt' ~rrm/l(!IfIll!l' r ,hi' fllNlr flllly IN' I'.IH/wtln!
{II'
Depth
Belo w
Width ~'hickncss
--
1.2.J
.-
Bearing walls shall be SUppo!1cd on masonry or

rc info rced concrcte fou ndat io ns o r pil es or other
permitted foundati on system Ihal shall be of suffic ient
size to suppOt1 all loads.
Where a design is not pro vided, the min im um foundation
requirements for stud be arin g walls shaH be as set forth in
Table 305~1, unless expansive soils of a seve rity to calise
differential move ment are known to ex ist.
i:.xcepl ions:
I.
A o ne~story \Vood or metal{rame building 1101 used

2
for human occupancy alld 1I()l over 40 m if! floo r
a rea may be cOllstructed witll walls supported all a
wood foundarion plale permallelllly Illlder lile waler
wble when permitled by the buildillg official.
2,
nit! support of buildings by /lOsts embedded ill eartli

shall be designed as specified ill Section 305.7. Wood
posts or poles embedded ill earth shall be pressure
treated with an approved preservative, Steel posts or
poles shall be protected as specified ill Seclioll
mlll/rmmltllmi/J J'hnlf
fl .\
/(I
Ihl' cll' l'(l/jml
0ll{lf'
If/I' IIJI'I~frHlIIlIg.
I FIH/I/Ilmillll
111((,\-
.\up/Hn'l
(I
TtIO[ ill mldi/;o/I UI 1111' 51i,1ll1r1l1'11 !"IIlmlll'"

rfHifl' only .f/wlllJl" (1.1 rl'i/llir(!11 jf/r
"f jloorJ. . FllwU/fII;mlS _1//PfHlrlin.s:

IIIPI'"nillg tJII(' jloor_
Till' (ir/JlII "11',,,/)(,,/111('/1/
IIIIIM (l1\\,(lr.1
111' bl'l,,1I' flO/l'll/iul 11.('/""
11/
.ff 11/11-
305.2 Fnoling Design
306.10.
Except for special provisions of Section 307 coveri ng the

dc .. igl1 uf' piles. all p0l1io!ls of footing s .. hall he designed
in m:cord;lllcc with the :-tl11clUml provisions of thi s ernie
and :-hall he designed to.:illinimi7_c diffcrellli ;'ll ... cttlcmcnt
whcn nc('cssary ;Intl thl" effects of expansive soils whl"1l
prc.<:;cnt .
305 .4 Slepped !'oundalions

Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
ground slope.... morc than I lInil VCl1ica l in I (J units
horizolllal ( 10% .'dope) shall hc level or shall he s(eppcd
so (hal both top and bouom of such foundation arc level.
Siah-on-gradc and mat type f( XHings I'll!' huildings Ilx-med

cxransivc soils may he dcsigncd in act.:orclilllCC with
1he gl"tHcch nil'ltl reco llllllcndation as pCl'Illitled hy tile
"wildin g official.
011
/\SSOCi;ltl(lll c)f S tnI C!U( "1 1 Enqu1f:c: rs of (h(~ Pililippilw:;
CHAPTER 3 -- General & Excavation and Fills
Top of Slope
Face O(SII1lClurC
Hn but
need not
exceed
,7'
4.5m m..'tx.
3-1 3
~:
Of.5,'_IO_.P"
/I
H/3 but neoo nOi

cxccC!d 12 III malt.
,r'
- - - --"---
Figure 305-1 Setback Dim('llsions for Ouilding Clearance from Slopes
305.5 Foolings on or Adjacent 10 Slopes

305.5.1 Scope
The place ment of buildings and strucltJres on or adjacent
to slopes steeper than I unit vertical in 3 units horizontal
(33.3% slope) shall be ill accordance with this section.
305.5.4 Pools
The set back between pools regul ated by thi s code and
slopes shall be equal <0 one half ,he building footing
setback di stance required by this section. Thm portion o f
the pool wall within a horizontal di stan ce of 2 III from the
top of (he slope shall bc c,lpablc of snpportin g the waler
in the pool without soil SUppOI1.
305.5.2 Building Clearance from Ascending Slopes
In general, buildings below slopes shall be set a suffi cient

distance from the slope to provide protection f~om slope
drainage . Scour erosion and shallow failures . Except as
provided for in Seclian 305 .5.6 and Figure 305-1. 'he
following crit eria will be assumed to provide thi s
protection. Where the ex isting slope is steeper than I uni t
venical in I unit horizont al (100% slope), the loe of the
slope shall be assumed 10 be at the intersection of a
JlOrizontal plane drawn from the top of the fou ndmion and
a plane drawn {angen! to the slope at an angle of 45
degrees (0 the horizontal. Whe~e n retainin g wall is
constructed at the toe of [he slope, the height of the slope
shaH be measured from the top of the wall to thc top of
'he slope.
305.5.3 Fooling Selback from Descendi ng Slol)e
Surface
Footings on or adjacen t to slope su rfaces shall be founded

in finn m<ltcrial with an embed men t and setback from the
slope wrface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral
SUppOf1 for ll.~ footin g without delrimental scHJc mcllt.
Except as provided for in Section 305.5.6 and f:'igure 305I, the following se tback is deemed adequate to meet the
criteria. Where. th e slope is SICCP(~1' than I unit vertical in
I unit horizolltal (100% slope). the required setback shOl l!
be mc'ls urcd from illl imaginary plnnc 45 degrees to the
horizontal, projected upward from the toe of the slope.
305.5.5 Fou ndation Elevation

On graded sites, the top of any exterior foundation stwll
extend above the elevation of the street guuer at point of
discharge or the inlet of an approved drainage de vice a
mininlUlli of 300 mill plus 2 percent . The bui lding official
may permit alternate elevati ons. provided it ca n be
demonstrated that requ ired drainitge Itl the point of
discharge and away from th e ~ tm c tllrc is provided at all
loc:uions on the site.
305 .5_6 Alternate Setback and Clearance
The building o ffici al Ilwy approve uhcrlliHe selbacks ilnd

clearances. The building offici al lllay require an
in ves tigation and reco mlllendmiol1 of a qualified engineer
to demonslrate that the intent of this section has been
inves tigati on shall
incl ud e
satisfied. Such an
con1;ideralion of material , heigh! of slope, slope grildicnl,
load intensi ty and erosion chafllc lerislics of slope
material .
305.6 Foundation Plates or Sills
Wood plates or sills shall be boIled 10 the foundation or
foundation wall. Sleel bolls with a minim ulll lI ominal
diameter of 12 I11Ill shall be lI sed in Scismic Zonc 2. Steel
ho lts with a minimum nomina l diameter of 16 mill shall
be lIscd in Seismi c Zone 4. Bolts shall he cmbeddcd at
least 180 mm in to the COllcr C(L' or lllilSOIlrY ilnd sh.JlI Ill'
spaced not morc than 2 III apart. There. shall be a
minimum of two bolls per piece wi th (inc bolt inc<uccl nol
N,ll tOn<;lJ ~;!ruclu r<-Ij Code of the Pllil ippHw s G ' Edilioll Volume 1
ti
314
CHAPTEli3 -- General & Excavation cllld Fills
more than :WO mm or Jess than seven bolt diameters from

of the piece. A properl y sized nut :111(\ washer
shall be liglll cncd 0 11 each boIL to Ihe plate_ Foundati on
"hlles an d sills shall be the kind or wood specified in
Chapter 6.
c~c h e nd
305.7 Designs Employing LatcraJ Hearing

305.7.1 General
Constructio n employing posts or poles as columlls
eillbedded ill e:lrth or embedded in concrete fOOlings in
the earth m;IY be used and designed (() res ist both axia l
and 1~ll c ntl loads. Th e depth to resis t latera l loads shall be
determined by means of the design edteri,l eswb lished
he rein or other IllclllOds ;lpp roved by the build ing official .
305.7.2 DeSign C"il eria
305.7.2.1 NOll-cons train ed

The follo wi ng formula ma y be u !'l~ d in delermi ning the
depth or embedment required 10 resist latc ral loads where
no constrailll is provided at Ihe gro und surface, sllch as
rigid floor or ri gid grouJld surface pn\ l' m Cnl.
d= 2II
( f ----)
1+
4.3/i
1+ - - 11
(3051 )
d
II
P
S,
.,'1
The resistance to vertical loads is dCl crmi ",cil I,.:

allowable soiJbcaring pressure sct forth ill T:!! : _. ," :
~: i C
305.7.3 Backfill
The backfill in the annular space around column not
em bedded in poured footings shall be by one of the
following methods:
1.
Backfill shall be of concrete with an UJtiIlHi l.;. s! !"r nglh

of ! 5 MPa at 28 days. The hole shall not lw ks': IiLH l
100 mill large r (h an the diameter of the Cf\ IUlIln :~ t ils
bottom
or
100 mm
larger
than
dimensi on of a Squ fU"C or rectan gu lar
2.
~h t:
,: .. .. O Ili:!
coi u !lII'.
Backfill shall be of clean sand . The sand shall be

thoroughly co mpac ted by tampin g in la yers not morc
than 200 I11I1l in thickness.
305.7.4 Limitations
The design procedure OlH li llCd in thi s section shall be
subject to the fo ll owing limitations:
305.7.4.1 The fri ctional resistance for retaining w(\;L'; and
slabs Oil silts lind clays shall be limited to one half ur {he
normal force impo~ed on the soil by the weight of the
footing or slab.
'0
305.7.4.1 Posts embedded in eanh shall no. be used

provide latera l suppOrt for siructural or nOllslruclural
maleri als such as pl aster, masonry or concrete un less
bracing is provided.
where:
A
305.7.2.3 Vertical load
2.3 P
S,"
= uia me ter of rollnd post or foo ting or diilgonill

d i lll~n sio n nf squa re post or foo tin g. III
= depth of emhedment in (~art h in 111 btl l 1101 ove r 3.5
III for p"q')ose of com pIlling lateral pressure. III
= d ist:1I1CC from ground surface 10 poilU of
applic;ltion of P, m
= applied lateral force. kN
= allow:!blc late ral soil-bearing pressure as set forth
in T,lblc 304- 1 based on a depth of one third the
depth of embedment, kPa
= allowabl e latc ral soil-bcclring press ure as set forth
ill Tahle ~04- 1 hased O il it depth equal to the depth
o r cmhedmCIll. kPa
305.8 Gril lage Footings

When grillage footings of Sll1lclura l steel shapes <I re used
o n soi ls. they sha ll be co mpletel y e mbedded in concrete.
Concrele covel' shall be m least 150 mOl all the bOIl O Ill
and al least 100 mill at all olher points,
305.9 Bleacher Footings

Footings for open -air seating facilities sh;l!1 comply with
Chap.er 3.
ExceptiOlIS:
Temporary open -t,;r porlllble bleacher.'i may be JUPI)(l! : :d
IIpon wood ,'iil/s or .\'I(~el plates placed directly UpOIi the
.r: mull ...J surface. prm-idetf soil pl"l'.\sure doC's /l of ('x: I'(~d
J05.7.2.2 COllsll'a in cd
50kPa.
The following fnrllwlil llIi1y hI..' u:ie(1 [0 del cnninc the

depth of emhedment requ ired to rc."is l 1;l1(,l'ill loads where
constrain t i ~ provi ded :tI Ihe ground surface, such as iI
rigid floor or pave mcnt.
0052)
CHAPTEFi 3 - General & Excavation and Fills
31 b
306.4 Static Load Test

Static axial compressive pile load tcst shan be in
accordance with ASTM Standard 0-1143. Performance of
the load test require that lhe test be conducted under the
supervision of a registered civil ellgineer experienced and
knowledgeable in the practice of static pile !oad testing.
be designed and installed on the

of a foundation investigation as defined in Section
where required by the building official.
The investigation and rCpO!1 provisions of Section 303
shall be expanded to include, but not be limited to, the
. following:
Recommended pile types and installed capacities.
When the a!lowable axial compressive load of a single

pile is determined by a static load test, one of the
following methods shall be used:
Method 1. It shaH not exceed 50 percent of the yield
point under test load. The yield point shall be defined as
that point at which an increase in load produces a
disproportionate increase in settlement.
Driving criteria.
Installation procedures.
Field inspection and reponing procedures (to include
procedures for verification of the installed bearing
capacity where required).
Pile load test requirements.
The use of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter
shall be permitted, subject to the approval of the building
official upon submission of acceptable test data,
calculations or other information relating to the proper1ies
and load-carrying capacities of such piles.
306.2 Interconnection
Individual pile caps and caissons of every structure
subjected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by tic
Beams. Such tic beams shall be capable of resisting, in
tension or compression, a minimum horizontal force equal
to 10 percent of the largest column vertical load.
Exception:
Other approved methods mav be used 'where it can be
demonstrated that equivalent ~es(raint can be provided.
306.3 Determination of Allowable Loads
The allowable axial and lateral loads on piles shall be

determined by an approved formula, by a foundation
investigation or by load tests. Static axial compressive
pile load test shall be in accordance with ASTM Standard
D-1143, and lateral load testing or piles shall conform to
ASTM Standard D-3966. Dynamic pile tcsls shall be in
accordance with ASTM Standard D-4945. Static axial
tensile load testing to determine [he uplift capacity of
pile-soil systems shall be in accordance with ASTM
Standard 1)36X9.
Method 2. It shall not exceed one half of the load, which

causes a net settlement, after deducting rebound, of
0.03mm/kN of test load, which has been applied for a
period of at least 24 hours.
Method 3. It shall not exceed one half of that load under
which, during a 40-hour period of continuous load
application, no additional settlement takes place.
306.5 Dynamic Load Test
High-strain dynamic load test may be used to determine

the bearing capacity of piles, in accordance with ASTM
Standard 1)-4945. It is required that the test be conducted
by a registered civil engineer experienced and
knowledgeable in the practice of pile dynamic load
testing.
306.6 Column Action
All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capable of lateral support shall conform to the applicable
column formula as specified in this code. Such piles
driven into finn ground Illay be considered fixed and
laterally supported at 1.5 III b,elow the ground surface and
in son material at 3 III from the ground surface unless
otherwise prescribed by the building official after a
foundation investigation by an approved agency.
306.7 Group Action
Consideration shaH be given to the reduction of allowable

pile load when piles are placed in groups.
Where soil conditions make such load reductions
advisable or necessary, the a!lowable axial and lateral
loads determined for a single pile shall bc reduced by any
rational method or formula submitted to the building
official.
hlalloll,'li Structure.'!i Codo of the PhiiippinE)s 6: Edition Volunl(~ 1

1
',
3 -16
CHAJ'TF.:f1
~~
,.. Genera! & Excavation and Pills
306.8 Piles in Subsiding Areas

Where piles are dri ve n through subs iding fill s or other
i
;
306.12 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses

Allowable compressive stresses greater than those
wh" '-' ~
s ubsiding Siratil .1Ild dClive suppon from underlying
specified in Section 307 s hall
firmer materials, consideralion shall be given (0 the

downward frictional forces, which may be imposed on Ihe
piles by Ihe subsiding upper st raw which :-;Ilall be
deductive fromlhc nel pile 10<ld c.lpacily,
substantiating data justifying such higher stresses are

submitted to and approved by the building official. Such
substant iating data shall be included in the foundation
in vcslig;:nion repon in accordance wilh Section 306, 1.
Where (he influence of su bsiding fill s is conside red as

imposing loads on the pilc, Ihe allowable si resses
specified in this chapter may be increased if sati sfactory
substantiating data arc su bmiucd ,
306.9 Jelling
In stallmion of pilcs hy wal eI' jelling shall nol be uscd
excepl wherc .lI1d as spccifically permi{lcd by {he building
official. When uscd, jetting shall be carried oul in slich a
manner Ihm tile carrying capacity of existing piles and
sl l1icturcs shall not be impaired, After withdrawal of the
jet , piles shall be dri ve n down untillhc required res istance
is obtained ,
306.10 Protection of rile Mntcriais

Where th e boring records of sile conditions indicate
possible delet eriolls action on pilc Ilullerials becau se of
soil cOllstilllc nls. changing wCllcr lc\fC ls or olher fact ors,
such materi als shall be i.ulequatel y protected by methods
or processes approved by Ihe gcotech nical engincer.
The effectivcness or sllch methods or proccsses for Ihe
particular purpose shall have been thoroughly established
by sm i,SfaclOry service reco rds or other evide nce, which

dClllonst r;lh;-s the effectiveness of sud I protective
measures,
In su lfate hearing soi ls. the stee l piles shall be prolectcd

agains! corrosioll or reinforced <..'O l1c['Clc piles shall usc
Typc rr ccment.
306.11 Allowable Loads
The allowable loads based on soil conditions shall be
establ ished in accordance wilh Sect ion 306.
Exception:
Ally ulIca,\'ed casl- iJ/ ~place pile may be assIlIIu1d 10
d l!\'C'ilJ!' a Fiefiollol l'C'sisf(/l1 ce i'qual 10 (Jill! ,n"xlh (?{ Ihe
bea r;IIK I'(t/II(' of tile' :wif maferial (11111;11 111111111 de/JIb nf ,\'('1
forth in Table' 305 -1 l)fa lIot to exceed 25 kPa III rlt'.I",\" a
~U '('(I/('r I'a/ue i ,\' allowed by till' Imildill/o: official (!{ter (I
foundation illl'esliga lio/i as sp ecm ed ill .,'eclioll 303 is
slIhlllilled" Frictional r('siS(W1C e (/1/(/ hearillg rcsi,l'lal/ce
shall lIot he a,\'slIlIwd (0 tlct sil1lulllllU'OIiX/Y {(I/{('ss
rl!('ol1lllu'lI(/ed (iffer a jrmlldatirm illVl'sliMaliOI1 as
s{J('{4ied ill
S('c'liOIl
3fJ3,
be pelmilted
3- 17
307.3 Me(al-Cased Concrete Piles

307.3.1 Ma(erial
Concrete used in metal-cased concrete piles shall have a
specified compressive st rength
of nOI less than l7
MP.
i'e
307.1 Round Wood Piles

307.1.1 Ma(erial
'>'.
Except where ulltre:ncd piles arc permitted, wood piles

shall be pressure treated. Untreated piles may be used
only when it has been establ ished that the cutoff will be
below lowes t groundwater level assumed to exist during
307.3.2 Installation
Every metal casing for a concrete pile shall have a scaled
tip with a diameter of not less than 200 mm .
[he life ortlle sll1lc lurc.
Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have

shells driven for their full length in contact with the
surrounding soil and left permanenlly in place. The shells
shaH be sufficiently strong to resis t collapse and
sufficiently watertight to exclude waler and foreign
material during the placing of concrete.
307.1.2 Allowable Stresses

The allowable unit stresses for round woodpiles shall nOt
exceed those set forth in Chapter 6 .
The allowable va lues listed in. for compression parallel 10

the grain III extreme fiber in bending are based on load
sharing as OCClII'S in a pile cluster. for piles which
support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25

shall be applied to compression pluallel to the grain
values (md 1.30 to extreme fiber in bending values.
307.2 UncHsed
Cast~In~Place
Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing

as to ensure against distortion of or injury to piles already
in place. No pile shall be driven within four and one~haJf
average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete k:-;s
than 24 hours old unless approved by the geotechnic;,~J
engineer.
Concrete Piles
307.2.1 Ma(erial
Concrete piles cast in place against earth in drilled or

bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to ensure
the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a
sized shafi .
rull~
The drilled or cxcav<ltco hole sha ll be prevented from

collapse or cOlllaminatioll by colhtpsing soils. Thorough
c1eani ng of the hole shall be asslIreo <'I nd displHccmenl of
the soil cuuings by nOlation shall be ass ured. The le ngth
of such pile shall be limited 10 not more than 30 times the
average diameter.
Concrete shall have a specified
compressive strenglhj'(' of 1l00Iess than 17 MPa.

Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified :i;
Section 307.2.2, except that the allowable concrek s[r ( ~
may be increased to a maximum value of 0.401'" fo r that
portion of the pile meeting the following co nditions :
I.
The thickness of the meta! casing is not less thall 1.7

mill (No. 14 carbon sheet steel gage);
2.
The casing is seamless or is provided with seams c

eq ual strenglh and is of a confi gurati on lh ,H \\!~ ::
provide confinementlo the cast M
in-place concre : ~ ;
3.
Tile specified co mpressive strength f' .. sha:i r:~'

exceed 35 MPa and the ratio of steel mi l .J;'
specified yield strength F,. to concrete spt.-..:ifii,
comp ressive strength!'" shall not be less than 6 ; ;Ul .
4.
The pile diameter is not greater than 400 mm .
Exception:
The length of pile may exceed 30 rim es the diameter

provided th e design and installation of the pile foundation
is III accordance with all approved foundation
307.4 Precast Concrete Piles
iflvestigatioll report.
307.2.2 Allow,,!)le Stresses

The all owable compressive stress in the concrete shn ll not
exceed 0.3V,.. The allowable compressive st ress or
reinrorcement shall not exceed 34 percent or the yie ld
Mrenglh or the steel or 175 MPa.
307.4.1 Ma(erials
Precast concrete piles shall have a specific i comprc<;si
~a reJlglhf'. of not less than 20 MPa. and sh,JI! dey .. ,."
compress ive strength of not less than 20 MPa I.. ere
dri ving.
307.4.2 Reinforcement Tics
The !ongitudimd reinforccmcnt in driven precast (' fl JlO
pil es shall be laterally tied with steel lies or wire .
Tics and spirals shaI! nOt be spaced morc than
National Structu ral Code of IIle P!1ilippin8s Gill Edition Volume 1
3-18
CHAPTER 3 -- General & Excava/ion _and Fills
ap,lrt, centcr to cellter, for a di stance of 600 mill frol11 the

ends and not more Ihan 200 mm elsewhere. The gage o f
lics and spiraJs shall be as follows:

I.
For piles ha ving a diameter of 400 mill or less, wire

shall nol be smaller than 5 min ;
2.
For piles, having a diameter of morc: than 400 mil1
loads. The effective prestress in the pile sh;i;l ;;',l( h' ; ("'~::;
than 2.5 MPa for pi les up (0 10 III in !enrol:
:/!\~ L,;
piles up to 15 m in length , and 5 MPa Iv: I ) ' ' ' : ' t~ ..: . . ~~ r
than 15m in length.
T he compressive stress in the concrete du e !o c".!'::-na ll y
app lied load shall not exceed:
and Jess than 500 mm, wire shall /l ot be smaller than
. -,!'.' .)
f) mm; a.nd
3.
For pi les having a diameter of 500

wire shall not be smaller than 7 mm.
mll1
and larger.
If'<'
307.4.3 Allo wa ble Stresses

Precast concrete piling shall be designed 10 res ist stresses
induced by handling and dri ving ns well as by loads. The
allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified in
Section 307.2.2.
307.5
Precast
(Prctensioncd)
Prestressed
Co ncrete
wherc:
Piles
307.5.1 Malerials
Precast pres tressed concrete piles shaH have a specified

co mpressive strength[.. of not less than 35 MPa and shall
develop a com pressive stren gth of not less than 27 MPa
before driving.
307.5.2 Rei nfo rce ment
307.5.2. 1 Longitudinal Rei nforce ment

The longitudinal reinforcem ent shall be high-tensil e
se ven -wire strand conform ing to ASTM Stand ards.
Longitudinal reinforcement Sh311 be I,Herally lied w ith
sleel ties or wi re spirals.
307.5.2.2 Tra nsverse Reinfo rce ment
~ effective
prestress stress on the gros!':.
:,t'{'!; '! :i.
Effective prestress s hall be based on an :i :-':": iir: , ~- ,: i:.,;:: J:

200 MPa in the prestressing steel. The allow i1l, k~ .', irt:... ~ ii ,
the prestressi ng stee! shall not exceed the v<ll u~':. :q' ( -. . , j
in Sec ti on 418 .5.
307.S.4 S plici ng
Where required , splicing for concrete piles sh:JI! hr i,v use
of embedded and properly anchored thick :'h't:1 I);,I'CS at
the ends being joined which shall then be rll lii- ". ::i/;. j , (';'
by use of adequate sized dowe l rods and .'it! l.i :( " .' it .
sleeves. The dowels and the faces shall then b (~ J ();, )". ; .'
StJ'ucturil! epoxy. Metal splice cans are not :d; ~!\ ..,( :.
307.6 Str uctura l Steel)'iles
307.6.1 Material
Structura l steel piles. steel pi pe piles and full y W(' !dt i;
steel piles f:.lbrica ted from platcs shall co nforlll to olle vi"
the rnflteri al spec ifications listed in Sectio n 50 1J.
307 .6.2 Allowable Str esses
The nllowable m:.i.!I stresses sha ll not exceed 0 t 'i or Ih,
. minimum speci fied yield strength F.,. or KCj \ 11':.
whichever is less.
Tics or spiral reillforcemclll shall nol bc sp:lccd more th an
75 111m apart, ccnter to center, ror II distance o r 600 mm
Exception:
from the ends and nol more than 200 I11Ill elsewhere. A(
each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be
When justified in accordance with Sectioll .{f).Ii. J? 'ii

allowable axial stress may be increased aboV(! rl5 iliii'"
alld 0.35F}~ hut Jhall llot exceed O.5Fr
spaced 25 mOl center to center.
For piles having a diameter of 600 mill or less, wire shall

not be smaller than 5 111111 .
For piles having a diameter greater than 600 I11Ill bu t less
tha n 9(X) mill, wire shall not be smaller (lw l1 6 mrn.
For piles having a dinrllelcr grcfltcr (han gOO mill, wire
shall not be smaller Ihan 7 mill.
307.6.3 Minimulll Dimensions

Ii -piles shall co mply with lhr
Seclions of dri ven

rollowing:
1. The flan ge projection shall not exceed 14 li~l W" :lle

minim um thickness of meta! ill either tl w n""
the web, and the flnnge widths shall not :J~' k " .'
1')0 percenl of the dcplh or the secti on.
2.
307.5.J All owa ble St resses
The nominal dcp(h ill the direction of the '. \( L ... .. ;""
not he less than 200 mill.
Precast prestressed piling shall he designed 10 resist

stresses induced by handling nnd driving as \vc ll as by
Assoclo tiotl of Slrllclural
'
En9Ine('~r s
of the Philippines
Flanges anti webs shall have

thickness of 10 mm ,
il
3 19
minimum nominal
: ~ecljonS of dri ven pipe piles sha ll have nn outside
:: diam eter of not less than 250 mill and a minim um

. thickness of not less than 6 mm.
, 307.7 ConcreteI"illed Steel!'ipe Piles
307.7.1 Material
The sleel pipe of concrele- filled stee l pipe pi les shall
conform
(0
onc of the material speci ficati ons listed in
Section 50 1.3. The con crete in concrete-fill e d steel pipe

piles shall have a spec ified co mpressive strcnglh [,c of not
less than J7 MPa.
!I
i-
I
!
308.1 Gelleral
In Seismic Zones 4, the further requirements of thi s
sec tion shall apply to the des ign and cons truction of
foundati ons, foundation compone nts 'and Ihe connecti on
of superst(1Jcture elements thereto. See Sec ti on 421.10
for additional requirements for S(l1lctural concrete
foundati ons resisting seismic forc es.
308.2 Foundation and Geotechnical Investigations

307.7.2Allowable Stresses
The all owable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength F.,' of the steel plus 0.33
of the specified compress ive slrcllglh /'(' o f concrete,
provided J'~' shall lIo t be assumed greater than 250 MPa
for computational purposes.
Where a structure is de termined to be in Seismic Zone 4

in accordance with Section 208.4, an investigation shall
be conducted and shall include an evaluation of the
following potential hazard s resu ltin g from eart hqu ake
motio ns: slope in stabilit y. liquefac lion and surface rupture
due to faul!ing or la te ral spreading.
~CepliOIl:
In addition , the foll owi ng in vestigations sha ll a lso be met:
When justified ill accordance with Section 306.12, /he

pllowable stresses may be in creased to 0.50 F)"
I.
307.7.3 Minimum Dimensions
2.
Driven piles of uil iform scction shall have a nomina l

outside diamete r of not less than 200 Illlll .
117~!}\:t;
. ,.
A dctcnnination of lateral pressures on basement and

re taining walls due to earthquake motions.
An assessment of potenti al consequences of any
ligueracrion
and
soil
srrengrh
loss,
including
estimati on
of diffe ren ti al
seule mcm,
lateral
move ment or reduction in foundation soil~be aring
capac ity, and shall address mitigation meas ures. Suc h
meas ures shall be give n consideration in the design
of the s truc ture and can include but are not limitcd to
ground stabili zation. selec (i on of appropriate
foundation type and depths, selection of appropriate
structural systems 10 accomm odate antic ipated
displacements Or any combination of these measures.
The potential for liqu efaction and soil strength loss
shall be evaluated for site peak ground accelerati on
magnitudes and source characteristics consistent with
the design earthquake ground motions. Peak ground
acceleration s hall be determined from a si l e~ s pecifjc
stud y takin g into account soil amplifi cation effects,
as speci fi ed in Section 208.4.
308,3 Footings and Foundations

Where il struclUrc is assigned (0 Se ismic Zone 4 in
accordance with Section 208.4 , individual sprcad footings
fo unded on soil de fined ill Sec ti o n 208.4 .3 as Soil profile
Type SE or SF shall be interconn ected by ti c beams . Tic
beams shall be capabl e of carr yi ng, in tension or
co mpress ion, unless it is demon strated th at equival ent
restraint is provided by re inforced conc ret e beams within
s labs 011 gmde or reinforced concrete slabs 011 grade.
Ncll iOl'w l Struc tural Cod e of the Philippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
3-20
CHAI'TEI1 3 _. General & Excavation and Fills
308.4 Pier and Pile Found.tio

Where a stmclUre is assigned to Seismic Zo ne 4 in
accordan ce Wi lh Seclion 208.4 he following sha ll appl y.
Individual pilc caps, piers or piles shall be interconnected
by ties. Tics shall be capable of carrying, in tension and
com pression . 10 % of Ihe maximum axial load unless it
can be demonstrated Ihal cquiv;'l lcnt restraim is pro vided
by reinforced concrete beams within slabs on grade,
reinforced concrete slabs on grade, confinemen! by
competent rock, hard cohesive soi ls or very dense
granular soi ls. Conc rete shall have a specified
compressive strength of not less than 21 MPa at 28 days.
Exception:
Pie rs supporting foundation walls, isolated interior posts

detailed so the pier is not subject 10 lateral loads. lightly
loaded exterior decks and palios alld occupancy category
IV and V specified in Section 103 not exceeding two
stories of light-frame construction, are flot subject to
interconnection if it call be shown the soils are of
adequate stiffness, subject to the approval of the building
official.
308.4.1 Connection to Pile Cap
For piles required to resist up lift forces or Lo pro vide

rotati onal res traint, design of anchorage of piles into {he
pile cap shall be provided considering {hc combined effect
'0
of axial forces due '0 uplift and bending momen .. due

fixity (0 the pile cap. Anchorage shall deve lop a min imu m
or
25 perccnt of the strength of th e pile in (e nsio n.

An chorage into the pile ca p shall be capable of
developing the following:
I.
In the case of uplift , lhe lesser of lhc nominal le nsile

strcngth of the longi llldi nal reinforcemcnt ill a
conc ret e pile, or the nominal te nsile strength of a
s[eeJ pile. or (he pile uplift soil nomina l st rength
factored by 1.3 or the axi al tensi on rorce res ulting
from the load combinations of Secti on 203.
2.
1n the case of rotational restrai nt, the lesser of the

ax ial and shear forces and moments resulti ng from
the load combina tions of Section 203 or development
of the full axia l, bendin g and shear nominal stren gth
of .he pile.
wi thin seven pile dia mclers of the pile cap and lhe
interfaces of soft (0 mediu m stiff clay or liquefiable strata.
Grade bea ms shall be des igned as beams in accord ance
Secti on 4. When grade beams have Ihe capacity to rcsis t
the forces from the load combinations in Section 203.
308.4.3 FlexII,.al Slrength
Where the vcrtical la t c ral ~ro rce ~re s i s tin g elements are
(';ol umns, the grade bea m or pile eel p nex ural strengths
shall exceed the column flexural strength. The connection
between batter piles and grade beams or pile caps shall be
designed to resi st the nominal st rength of lhe pile actin g
(IS a short column. Bauer piles and the ir connection shall
be capable of resisting forces and moments frol11thc load
co mbinat ions of Sectio n 203 .
308.5 Driven Pile Foundations
308.5.1 Precast Connete Piles
Where a struclllre is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 the
iongilUdinal reinforce ment wi th a min imum steel ratio o f
0.0 1 shall be provided throughout the Icngt h of precast
concrete piles, Within three pil e diarnct ers of the bottom
of the pile cap, th e longitudiJl<l1 reinforcement shall be
confined with closed lies or spirals of a miniinum 10 mm
diame ter. Ties or spirals shall be provided at a mn ximulH
spacing
eight times (he diameter of the smalles t
longitudinal bar, not to exceed 150 111111 throughout the
re mainde r of the pi le. the closed ti es or spirals shall ha ve
a maximum spacing of J 6 limes the smalles t longitudinal
bar diamc ter not 10 exceed 200 min.
or
308.S.2 Precast Prestressed Piles

Where a stl1Jclurc is assigned \0 Seismic Zone 4, the
following shall "ppl)'. The mi nimu m vo lulIletric ratio of
spira! reinforcement shall not be less than O.()()7 or the
amount required by the follow ing formul a for th e upper 6
11') of the pi Ie.
p.=OI2J,.jJ
where :
I.
I,,"
308.4.2 Desigll I)ct;:lils for Pie rs, I)ilcs and Gracie
Beams
Pie rs or piles shall he designed and constructed 10

withsta nd Ill <lX imUIll imposed cu r v<l t ure.~ from eel l1hquake
ground moti ons and structure respoJlse. Curvatures sha ll
include free-field soil strains modified for soi l-pile
structure inlcrnction couplcd wil h pier or pi le
deformati ons induced oy l<llenll pier or pile res istance to
st ru cture seismic forces. Concrcte piers or piles Oil soil
type Sf: or S" sites, <IS determ ined in Secti on 20RA.l. shall
he des igned and delailed ill ~Icco rdance with Sections 410
(308.5.1 )
p,
Spccilied compressive strl~ nglh of ro ncrcte, MPa

= Yi eld stren gth of spiral rc inforc ell1 ~~n t. 586 MPa
;:: Spiral
reinforce ment
index
(vol ume
of
spiral/v()lu me of core)
At least o n c~h a lr the vo lullletri c ratio requ ired hy Eq. 4~1

sh;lI ! he provided below t!w upper 6 III or the pi le. The
pile cap co nnection hy mea ns of dowels. Pile cap
connect ion by meall.'i or developi ng pile. reinforcin g strand
is pe rmilled provided lhat th e pik reinforcing strand
rC"wlts in a duclile conllcclioll.
Association of Structural Enqlneers of the PhilipPInes
CHAPTER 3 - General & Excavalioll and Fills
Ihe total pile length in Ihe soil is 10.5 III or less, the
transverse rei nfo rcement in the ductile region shaH

Ouough tile length of the pile. Where the pile length
10.5 m. rhe ductile pile region shall be taken as
greater of 10.5 In or the distance from th e underside of
pile cap to the point of zero cu rvature plus three
:' times the least pile dimension.
; In the ductile region, the center- io-ccillcr spacing of th e
spirals or hoop reinforcement shall not exceed olle-fifth

. of tJle least pile dimcllsiOIl, six times the diallleter of the
longitudinal strand, or 2(Xl mill, whichever is smaller.
but nOl less than:

A"
Where lhe transverse reinforcement consists of circular

spirals, the volumetl;c ratio of spiral transverse
reinforcemel1l in the ductile region shall comply willl the
following:
p,
=O. 1 2.L.(~ - I )[~ - 1.41']

f'h
A,, ,
(308.5.2)
f..A~
but not less than :
and need nO[ exceed:

(308.5 .4)
p, = 0.021
where:
2
A" "" Pile crosssct"tional area, mm

Ad = Core area defined by spiral outside diameter, m lll ~
f c = Specifi ed compressive stre ngt h of concrelc, MPa
hh = Yield strength of spira! rc.inforce ment :s; 586 MP.I

I' = Axial load on pile, kN
=:
(308.5.6)
I,."
= S 483 MPa
he
:= Cross~seclional
dimension of pile core measured

center LO ce nter of hoop reinforcement, mm
'= Spacing of transverse reinforcement measu red
. along length of pile. mm
= Axial load, N
:: Cross~sec tional area of tran sverse reinforcement,
mm
A,
f.
:: Gross area of pi le. 111m2

Specifi ed compressive strength of concrete, MPa
:=
The hoops and cross ties shaH be equi valent to defonned

bars not less than IOmm ill size. Rectangular hoop ends
shall terminate at a comer with seismic hooks. Outside of
the length of the pile requiring transverse confinement
reinforcing, th c spiral or hoop reinforcing with a
volumctric rati o not less than one half of that required for
transversc confinement reinforcing shall be provided .
306.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations
(}08.5.3)
Ps
=O. 1 2Sh,(.L)[~+
lAP]
f,. 2 f,A,
where:
A.th
" Circular spiral rcinforcClllcnl shall be spliced by lapping

one full tum and bending the end of the spiral to a 90degree hook or by usc of a mechanical or welded splice.
3 21
Volumetric ratio (volumc of spiral! volume of core)
This required amou nt of spiral reinforcemellt is pcrmitled

to be obtained by pro viding an inner and outer spi ral.
When transverse reinforce melll consists of recta ngular
hoops and cross tics, th e total c['()ss ~ sccti ()Jlal are a of
lateral transverse rcinforccmcill in the ducti le region with
spacings, Jnd perpcndicular 10 dimension, he. shill!
confonn 10:
Where a stJUcture is assigned to Scismic Zone 4, a

minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio of 0.005 shall
be provided for uncased cast~ in~place drilled or augered
concrete piles, piers or caissons in the top o ne~half of the
pile lengt h a minimum length of 3 In below ground or
lhroughout the flexural length of the pile, whichever
length is greatest. The Oexurallength shall be taken as the
length of the pile to a point where the concrete section
cracking moment strength multiplied by 0.4 exceeds the
requ ired mo me nt strcngth at lhal po int. There shall be a
minimulll of four longitudinal bars with transverse
confinement reinforcem ent provided in the pile within
three tillles th e least pile dimension of the bottom of the
pile cap. A transverse spi ral reinforcement rat.io of not
less than onehalf of that required in Section 410 for ot her
than Soi l Profi le Type S" SF or as determined in Section
208.4.3 or liquefiable sites is permitted. Tie spaci ng
throu ghou t Ihe remainder of the concrete section shall
neither exceed 1 2~ longiludinal~bar diameters, o ne~half the
least dimension of the sec ti on, nor 300 mm. Ties shall be
a min imum of 10 fIllll bars for piles with it least
dimcnsion lip to 500 n1m , and! 2 111m bars for larger piles.
N;:llional Structural CorJe of tile Philippines
(, !II
Edition Vol ume 1
3-22
CHA PTE li 3 - General & Excaval ion and Fills
309.1 Special Foundation Systems

Special foundation sys tems or materials other than
specified in (he fore goi ng Sections may be introduced
provided thai such syslems can be supported by
caic ul:ltions and theory to be providi ng safe foundati on
sohtlions and when approved by the engineer-o f-reco rd.
The special foundati ons solutions for incorporati on into
the foundation should have proven track record of
successful usage in similar applications.
309.2 Acceptance and Approval

Structure support on improved ground using such spec ial
systems or proprietary system s may be approved s ubject
to su bmittal of calculations and other proof of acceptance
and usage.
309.3 Specific Applications

Specialty foundation systems may be applied or used
specifically to address any or combinations of the
improveme nt,
soil
following:
beari ng
ca paci ty
liquefact ion mitigati on, slope stabilit y enhancement.
control and/or acceleration of consolidation settlements or
immediate settlements, increa<;c in soi l shear strength and
capacity. sliding resistance. increased pull o ut or
overt urning capacity. special anchors in soil and rock and
other beneficial effects. COnlrolled low strength materi als
(CLSM) 10 reduce fill loads may be allowed for use where
ap plicable_
Associ8tion of Structura l Engineers of tile Philippines
NSCP C10110
Chapter 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
VOLUME I
BUILDINGS, TOWERS AN[)
, SIXTH EDITION
Associa ti on of Structural E nginee r s of th e Philippines

Suite 7 13, F uture Poin t Plaza Co nd omiuiulll I
11 2 Pana), Ave nu e, Q uezo n C ity, Phil ipp ines 11 00
Tel. No : (+632) 4 10-04H.I
Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
ElIl a il: ;tscponlinc(ci,lglllilil .com
Weusitc : ht tp ://www.asCI}Onli nc.org
Nationa l S tructur;:i! Code of the Philippines
6! h
Edition Volume 1
CHAPTI'J14 . Concrete
4 '
Table of Contents
401 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 7
....... ..... ..... ........ ............................................................................................................................ 7
.2 Scope .... ....................... ................. .. ...............

............. ..............
.. ........................................... .. ................... 7
402 DEFINITIONS ...................................................... ..... ................................................. ................................ 8
:.- .... -.~" 403 ~ SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIAI.S ................. ,............... ..................... ............... 13
.. ................... . .. 13
.... .............
Tests of Ma terials ........ .... .. ...
......... .. ...........
.. ........................ ........ 13
Ccnlcnt...
.. .. ...... ... .......
.... .. ..... ..
. 13
Aggregates .. .. .......................
........................ ......
...............
.. .. 13
........ ...... .. ...
13
Water .. ....... .......... .... ....
S teel Reinforcement.. .....
. .... .... ....
. ... ..... ... .. .. ............... 14
Admixtures ", ... ,"
..... ..... .... ... ..
... 15
Storage of Materials.. ............ ......... ......... ..............
...............
.. ....... ....... 16
S tandards Cited in this Chapter ........................... ... ...... .. .......... ... ... ....
. .... ........ ..... .. .......... ........... 16
SECTION 404 . DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS ...... .......................................................... ....................................... 18
...............
. ......... . ... .... ..................... 18
404.2 Definitions ... .. ...
................. .. ............ ..
.... .. ... .. ....... ... 18
... 19
404.3 Genera l .
......................
.........................
........................... ........
404.4 Exposu re Categories and Classes.
.. ...... .... .. ..
.. 19
404 .5 Special Exposure Co ndi tions. .......
.............. ........ ........ ..............
. .. .. .................... 19
404.6 RcquiremcllI s for Concrete Mixtures .. :. ............................ ..... ...
. .... ............. .. 19
. ... 19
404.7 Alternati ve CemelHitious Materials for Sulphate Exposure. ..
404.8 Water-Cem en titi ous Materials Ratio ....
..... .. ...... ".
. . ..... 19
404.9 Corrosion Protection o f Re inforce ment .. ................ ...........
. ............................... 19
SECTION 405 ~ CONCRETE QUALITY, MIXING AND PLA CIN G ....................................................................... 21
405.1 Notations.. ....
.... ... .... .. .. .... .. ... ...... .
. .... .. ... ...
.... 2 1
405.2 Geo eral ........ .. ..
.. ....... 21
405.3 Selection of Concrete Proportions .. ... .. ............
..... ...............
... 21
405.4 Propollio ning on the Basis of Field Experience and Tri .d Mixtures. or Both.
.. ..... ... ....
. ...... 22
405.5 Proportioning without Field Experience or Tri al Mixtures
.. .... 23
405.6 Average Strength Reducti on ..
.......... ....
.. ..............
.... .... ..... 23
405.7 Evaluat ion and Acceptance of Concrete ...
. ......... 23
405.8 Prepa ration of Equipmcill and Place of Deposit
.................
. .. 25
405.9 Mixin g. .. ...... .... ...
. .... .... ....
.. .... 25
........................
.. ...... 25
405. 10 Conveying
...................
................
...26
405. 11 Deposi ting
...............
............ .. ..... .... ........ ....
.. ... 26
405.12 Curing..
4.05.13 Hot Weather Requirements.
............ .. .... ................ ...
.... .... ....... . .
.. .. 26
SECTION 406 . FORMWORK, EMBEDDED PIPES AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ..................................... 26
.... .......... .. ..
.. ..... 27
406. 1 Design of Forrmvo rk .... ............................
406.2 Removal of Forms, Shores and Re sllOring
.... .. 27
406.3 Conduils and Pi pes E.mbcddcd in Concrete.
................
......... .. 27
...... .. ...... .............. ...
..... ......... .. ..... .
... 28
406.4 Construction Joi nts ...... ... ... .........
SECTION 407 . DETAILS Oil REINFOR CEMENT .................. ... ........... ......... .................... ............................... .... .... 28
407.1 Notations..
. ...... 29
407.2 Stil ildard 'Iooks..
.. .............. ..... . .. . ......
.. 29
407.3 Minimum Bend Di,llllctcrs.....
................
. .... 29
407.4 Bendin g of Reinforcement. .
. .. 29
407.5 Su rfa ce Conditio ns of Reinforcement. .
. ... ... . 29
407.6 Placing Rcinfo rcemcnt.. ...... ..
.... .... ......
.................... . 29
407.7 S pacing Limils for Re inforcc mcIlL..
. .... 30
407.8 Co ncrete Protection for Reinforce mellt
.. 3 1
407.9 Special H. cinforccment Details for Col um ns
...... ... 32
407. 10 Connections ....
... ...... .. ....
. .. J:\
42
CHAI'lTI14 . Concrete
407.11 Lateral Reinforcement for Compression Members ...... .

407.12 Lateral Reinforcement for Flexural Members .. .
407.1 J Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement ..................... .
407.14 Requirements for Structural Integrity ......................................... ..
SECTION 408 - ANALYSIS AND DESIGN-GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ....................................... ,
......... j8
408, I Notations ..
408.2 Design Methods"
38
408.3 Loading..
.................................. .
3R
408.4 Methods of Analysis. ....................................................................
............. .
408.5 Redistribution of Negative Moments in Continuous Nonprcstressed Flexural ivicmbers
408.6 Modulus of Elasticity"
" .. ,... ,.. ,... "."." .. ,."
()
,.. "", .... "".",, .. ,. "" .. ,.. "."",.,,. ,." .. "., .. "
408,7 Lightweight Concrete
408.8 Stiffness .
408.9 Effective Stiffness [0 Determine Lateral Deflections ....
408.10 Span Length ...
,.,." .. ,.. ".
408, II Columns ,. ,."" ... " ......... " .. ,.,. ,.,., .. ,.".,." .. , ."" .. ,.. " .. ,."."" ..... .
408.12 AITangement of Live Load
408.13 T-beam Construction ................................................. .
408.14 Joist Constl1lction ..
408.15 Separate Floor Finish..
......................................... .
.., .. ".11
..,,42
SECTION 409 - STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS ................................... ,.,
-12
409.1 Notations ..
/. .
409.2 General..
409.3 Required Strength. ,
409.4 Design Strength"
409.5 Design Strength for Reinforcement ................................ .
409.6 Control of Deflections ..
SECTION 410 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS ............................................................................... .
................ . .. 10
410.! Notations ....................................................................... .
410.2 Scope ..
. ............. ..Ii <)
410.3 Design Assumptions.
. . .'.1 (i
410.4 General Principles and Requircmcnts ..
. ,... 49
410.5 Distance between Lateral Suppons of Flexural Members.
............ ... ,50
410.6 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members.
........ ,........... 50
410.7 Distrihution of Flexural Reinforcement in Beams and One-way Slabs.
.. ............ so
41 O.S Deep Beams,
. . S)
410.9 Design Dimensions for Compression Members ..
410.10 Limits for Reinforcement of Compression Members ..
. ............ . .............. :)i
410.11 Slenderness Effects in Compression Members..
....................... .. .
,.. , .. " " .. , ." .. ,.. " .. ""." .. ,., .... " .. ,"
410.12 Magnified Moments .. " .. " .. " ... "
410. I 3 Moment Magnification Procedure - Nonsway .............................. .
4 J 0.14 Moment Magnification Procedure - Sway .......................................... ..
410.! 5 Axially Loaded Members Suppo[1ing Slab System.
. ................ .
410.16 Transmission of Column Loads through Floor System ................................. .. ..
4! O. J 7 Composite Compression Members..
. ............ .
4 It}. ! 8 Beari ng Strength ..................... .
SECTION 411 - SHEAR AND TORSION ................................................................................................. .
41 1.1 Notations ..
SI
41 1.2 Shear Strength.,
41 J.3 Lightweight Concrete ..
41 1.4 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Nonprestressed Members
4! 1.5 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete for Prestressed Members .....
411.6 Shear Strength Provided by Shear Reinforcement ..
4 J 1.7 Design for Torsion.
..\,
41 !.8 Shear ~ Friction.
4! !.9 Deep Beams.
..................... 65
"
CHAPT ER 4 . Concrete
II
i
!
13
41 LID Pro visions for Brac kelS and Corbels... ........

............................................ ....... ......... ..................
........ 65
41 Lll Provisions for Walls ............................................... ........... ........ .............. .......................... .
.. ......................... 66
41 Ll2 Transfer of Moments to Columns.. ......... .... .. .. .......
..... .. ....... .. ... ...... ..................... .. .........
........................... 67
41 Ll3 Provisions for Slabs and Footings ........ ................ .................................................................................................. 67
SECTION 412 - DEVELOPMENT AND SPLlCES OF REINFORCEMENT ........................................................ 70
412.1 Notations.............................. .. ............................ .... .....
........ ... .... ............ .. .. . ... ...... ...
70
412.2 Development of Reinforcemcl1l - General.........
... 71
412.3 DevelopmclII of Defonned Bars and Deformed Wi. ~~ in Tension................
. ............. ,... ...
....... ......... ........ 7 1
41 2.4 Development of Defonned Bars in Compression.
............................... "............. .... ...
... ..... ,... 72
412.5 Development of Bundled Bars.:.......................... ..
......... ........................... .................. ........................... ............ 72
........................................................
.72
412.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension ........
412.7 Development of Headed and Mechanically Anc ho red [ 'cfofmcd Bars in Tension
..... ....... 73
412.8 Development of 'Welded Deformed Wire Reinforcer. l ~nt in Tension .... .... .. ... ..... "....
... ........ ....... ....
. .. .. 73
412.9 Development of Welded Plain Wire Reinforcemenl il Tension..... ...... ... ....... ..
............ ...... ............ ......... .... 73
412.10 Development of PreSlressi ng Strand ................. ............. ...................................................... .............................. .......... 74
412.1 I Development of flexu ral Reinforcement - GeneraL.... .. ..... ,.................... ........... ...... " .. ....... ............. .............. ....... ...... 74
.......................................... ......... ....................... ........ ............ 74
412.1 2 De velopment of Positi ve Moment Reinforcemenl... ..
412.13 Development of Negative Moment Rei nforcement .....
..................
..... .. .. ................ .
... ...... 75
412.14 Development of Web Rein force ment ........... .......
... ...... ............ ...... .... ........ ................... .. 75
4 12. 15 Splices of Reinforcement - General...................... .....
................ ....
.. ..... ...... ........... ... 76
...... .. 76
412.16 Spl ices of Deformed Bars and Defomled Wire in Tensi \11...... ........... .......... ......................
412.17 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression .... .... ................ ................. . ........................................................................ 77
412.1 8 Special Spli ces Requirements fo r Columns .... ..... ............................................. ... ........................................ .. ......... .... 77
412.19 Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Reinforcement in Tens '0"-. ........... .. ............ .. ................................................ ........ 77
412.20 Splices of Welded Plain Wire Reinforcement in Tension ....
....... ........ .........
...............
..................... 78
SECTION 413 - TWO-WAY SLAB SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 78
......... .............. .. .. ...............
..... ... .......
.......... .... .. 78
413.1 Notat ions ....... .............
..... .......................................................... 79
413.2 Scope .......................................... ............................. .......... .... .
413.3 Definitions ... ........... .... ........ ............................. ................... ..
.. .................
.... ........................ 79
413.4 Slab Reinforcement .... ... .. ...................... ......................... ... ...
............ .............. ....... ........ .
.............. . ........ 79
.............. ....... ....... ..
.. .............................................................................. 8 1
413 .5 Openings in Slab Systems ........
.............. .................... .....
...................
.. ..... ....... 82
413.6 Design Proced ures .....
413.7 Direcl Design Method....
....................
........ ..... ..
.. .. ........ 82
413.8 Equivalcl1I Frame Method .
....................
............................ ......
. .... 85
SECTION 414 - WALLS ............. .................. .......................................... ........................... .................................................... 86
414.1 Notations
........... ....
.... .............................. ...
........... ....
.... ........... 87
414.2 Scope ....... .............. ....... .... ................................
..... .............
.......................... .... 87
414.3 General ....
.. ... ........ .
............. ...... . ...... ........ ......
............... ....... ..............
........ 87
. 414.4 Minimum Rcinforcemcnt...... ..
...... ....... ....
.................. .. ....
....... .. . 87
414.5 Walls Design as Compression Members. .. .. .... .... ...
................
.. ... 88
.................... ........ .............................. 88
414.6 Empirical Design Method ............. ... ......................................... ...
414.7 Non-Bearing Walls. ............. .. ........ ..............................
... ................. ............. ........................... ... ......... 88
414.8 Walls as Grade Beams ........... ....... .............. ........ ........ ........ ..... .. .......... ... .. ........ ............ .... ... .......... ...... .. .................... 89
414.9 Altemale Design of Slender Walls .......................... ... ............................ ... ................... ....................................... ........ 89
SECTION 415 - FOOTINGS .......................................................................... .. . .................................................................... 89
415.1 Notalions. .... .......... ...... ...
...... ........... .... ..... ..... ..... .... .............. . .. .................. ..
...90
415.2 Scope ... ....... .. ... ................
.......... .... ......
..... ........... ................ ...
.... ...........
.. ........... 90
4 t5.3l/},;<is and Reactions....... .. .......
.......... ....................................... ......... ........................ ....
()O
4l5.4 Footings Su pporting Circu lar o r Regular Polygon-S haped Columns or PCl.k.. als ..... . ..............
.. ............. -:"0
415 .5 MOJllent in Footi ngs ................................ ,.......................... ..... ............. .......
........................... ..........
....... ,.. 90
..................
.......... ....
....................... 90
415.6 Shear in Footings......................... ...............
415.7 Development of Reinforcement in Footings ...... ...
............. ..
.. .. .... ,,' 9 1
415.8 Minimum Footi ng Depth ...... .....
...... ......... .
.. ....... 91
415.9 Transfer of Force al Base of Column, Wall or Reinforcement Pedestal .. ............ .
.......... ..... ................
......... 91
415. 10 Sloped or Stepped Footings .....
......................
...........................
....... 92
................................. ...
....................
.... ....... 92
415 . 11 Combi ned Footi ngs and Mats
Nationa! Structural Code of the Philippi ne s 6 Edition Vo lu; !" ~ 1

1h
4-4
CHAPTEH 4 - Concrete
................... _.................... _............ ...

.. .... 92
415.12 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings ...................... .
SECTION 416 -PRECAST CONCRETE .................................... _ .. .................................................................................... 92
416. i Notal ioTls ........ .
.. _..... _.... __ ............. .. ....................................... -- .... -.......... 92
.. .. _.......... _..............
...92
416.2 Scope_ .... _............................ _........................................... _..
.. ........ _.............. 92
416.3 General .................... .
4 ) 6.4 Distribution of Forces among Members ........................... .
.. ...... ..... ....... _.. _...... 92
............
.. ... 93
.. ......... ........... 93
_.. _93
...... _................ . ............. 94
416.8 Items Embcdue '[ \ncr Concrete Placement ............... .
416.9 Ma rking aud Ide ntification................ ...............
...................................................................... ....... ... ........ 94
4 16.10 I-Iandling ... __ ... _.. _... _......... ...... _.. _.. ___ ......... _.......... .... ........ .....
_.. __ ...... .... _.. _._ ... _......................... .... _.... _...... _.... _..... 94
416.1 J Strength Evaluation of Precast Construction ..... _................ ..... ,............. ................. .......... ................ ... ........................ 94
SECTION 41 7 - COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL Mi;, ..\!8ERS ........................ ................................................... 95
417_1 Nota tions.
.. .... _.... .. .
.. ........... _ ........................................................................ _................ 95
417.2 Scope..
..... ........ ..........
.. ... ........... _.................................... _........... _
.............. 95
4 17. 3 General
.... _.. _.... ......
............ ...... .......... ..
.. _.......... ..
.. ...... 95
...................
.. ........ _..... _
.......... __ ...... _....... _............ _............... _........ _.. _........... 95
417.4 Shoring.. ..............
417_5 Yenieal Shear Strength ...................
...................... .. ... _.. _...... _........ .................... _......... _.................................... 95
4 ) 7_6 Hori zontal Shear Strength ..... ................
........... ....... .. ......... .. ............................................................. ................... 95
417_7 Ties for Horizontal Shear .......... .. _.................. _.. _........... _
.. _.. ___ ............ _........................ _................. _
.. _96
SECTION 418 - PR ESTRESSED CON C RETE .................. .......... ........................................................................................ 97
418_1 Notations
............................ _....... . .......................................................
.. ................ _............ 97
4 18_2 Scope
...... .. _.... _.. _..................... _..
.... ...... .......
.. .... _.... .....
.. ....... 97
418 .3 Gene ral
............ _...........
.. .. ........ ... _.......... ........ .... .... ...........
.. .. .......... .. .. .... .... 97
..................... _.... 98
418.4 Design Assumpti ons
.. ................... .
_...................... 98
418.5 Permissible Stresses ill COllcrc lc - Flexural Members
418.6 Permissible Stress in Prestressi ng Tendons ............... . _............ _.. _..... __ ._ .. _..... ____ .. ___ .. _.......... .. __ ............ __ ...... ___ .... _.. _ .. ___ 99
.. ...... .. .. .. __ .................... 99
418_7 Loss of Prestress ......
_...... _........ _................. ..
.. ......................... ............ 99
4 18 .7.2 friction Loss in Post-Tensioning Tendons
... 100
418.8 Flexural Strength ...... _
.................. _
...... 100
418.9 Limits for Reinforcc mcnt of Flex ural Members ....
.100
4 18.1 0 Minim um Bonded Reinforcemcnt
4 I 8. II Stat ically Jnc.kl cl"minatc S tructures .....
.... ..............
.... ....... ..... ........ ............. 101
418.12 Compression Members - Com bined Fl ex ural iH' .. i Axial Loads .
.... 101
4 18_13 Slab Systems: ...... .. _..................... _
...... ............ ____ ................. _.... _
.............................. 102
4 18. 14 Post -Tensioned Tendon An chorage Zones.
...................
.. .................. 103
4 I 8.15 Design of Anchorngc Zones for Monoslra nd ( Jr Single 16 I11Ill Diamcter Bar Tendons ........... ...... ........... .......... ........ 104
4 18.16 Design of Anchorage Zones for Mullislr:HH!,' J T L' ndons
................................................................................ 104
418.1 7 Corrosion Protection for Unboudcd Prc ~ll ~' .sing Tendons. .
. .......................................... .. ............. ......... . 105
4 18.18 Post-Tensio ning Ducts..
.. .. _.. __ .....
.. .. __ .. __ ........
. 105
418.! 9 Grou t for Bonded Prcstressing Tendon .......... ....
.............. .. ... .......... ...
105
4 18.20 Protcction for Prestrcssing Steel
..... ... .........
.. ......................
105
4 18.21 Applicat ion and Measurement of Prc" t .:ssing Forec........
. ............................................................................. 105
4 18.22 Post-Tensioning Anchorages ,mel COl!. tiers ......... .................
. ......... .......... .................... .... .............. ................ 106
4 ! 8.23 External Pust Tensioning ..
..............
............................. ...
. .............. ...... .......... 109
SECTION 419 - SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATE MEMHERS .......... .............. .. ...... __ .............. " .. __ .... .. .......................... 109
419. 1 Notatio ns
.... ......... ...
.................... 109
4 19.2 Scope And Definit ions
..................
. ................... 109
419.1 Analysis and Design.
......... ....... .
... J 10
4 19.4 Design strength ()f Materials..
.110
419.5 Shell Rci nforcemcIlL .... .
.... ....... ....
..............
.... ..........
......................
......... 110
4 19.6 Construction ...... .
..... .........
...................
.................................... 11 1
SECTIO N 420 - STI!ENGTH EY ..II .UATION OF EX ISTING STlWCTURES .............. ........................................ __ ..... 112
420_1 Notations....
__ .. _........ ___
__ __ .. ___ .. __ _
__ ____ ......... __ .. __ .. __ ....
_.... ___ ..... 112
420.2 Strength Ev,liulitiollGencral
........... __ ........ ... ..... .....
................. .....
................. 11 2
416_5 Member Design ..................... ..
416.6 Structural Int egrit y ..

4 J 6.7 Con llection and Bearing Design
CHAPTEli 4" Concreto
4":i
420.3 Determination of Required Dimensions and Material PropcI1ics ...... ..................

..............
.. .... 112
420A Load Test Procedure.
..............
......................... ...................
.112
420.5 Loading Criteria ....................
........................
... 113
420.6 Acceptance Criteria ............ .......... ............... ...... . ..........
...............
...................... 113
420.7 Provisions for Lower Load Rating..
....... . ..............
. ...... 113
420.8 Safety
............................
.............. ................. ....... ..... .
......................... 113
SECTION 421 - EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT STRUCTURES .................................................................................... II3

421.1 Notations.. ...... ...... .............. ........ . . ............
.............. .....
.. ... 114
421.2 Definitions.
...................................... ......... .....
.....................
.. ... 115
421.3 Genera! Requirements.
. .... 116
421.3.0 Mechanical Splices in Special Moment Frames and Special Structural Walls ...................
.. ............... ".. II?
42 J.4 Intermediate Precast StI1lc(ural WaJls
.....................................
. ............ .. ..................... I J 8
421.5 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames..
...... J J 8
421.6 Special Moment Frame Subjected to Bending and Axial Load ...............
. ..................... .
. I !9
421.7 Joints of Special Moment Frames .....................
..121
... .............................
.. .. 122
421.8 Special Reinforced Concrete Structural Walts and Coupling Beams
421.9 Stmcturai Diaphragms and Trusses ................. .....
.......... ......
. 125
421.10 Foundations
................. .......................
.. ......... 127
421.11 Members not Designated as P;:U1 of the Seismic~Force~Resisting System..
. ...............
.. ........... 128
421.12 Requirements for Intermediate Moment Frames, Seismic Zone 2. ..................... ........
129
421.13 Special Moment Frames Using Precast Concrete..
. 130
421.14 Ordinary Momcll! Frames.. .............................
................................ ......................
.. ... J 31
421.15 Special Structural Walls Constlllcted Using Precast Concrete. ...........................
.. .... 131
SECTION 422 - STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE ..................................................................................................... 132
422.1 Notations..
.......................
.. .... 132
422.2 Scope..
................ .............................. ... .............. ...................
.. ...... 132
422.3 Limitations ........................................................ .. .
............... 132
422.4 Joints..
.. . 132
422.5 Design Method.
.......................................................
.. ........... 133
422.6 Strength Design
.... ........ . .................... .
.. .......... .. .
.. ... 133
422.7 Walls .......................................
.. ....... 134
.... 134
422.8 Footing ........................................ .
422.9 Pedestals ..................................................................................... .. .
. ........... 135
422. JO Precast Members ...................................................................... .
. ............ 135
422.1 J Plain Concrete in Earthquake-Resisting Structures.
................. 135
SECTION 423 - ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE .......................................................................................................... 136
423. J Definitions..
.....................
.. ......... J 36
423.2 Scope.
.. ............. 137
423.3 General Requirements.
.. .. ....... .
........... .....
.. ........ ! 37
423.4 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors..
. ... 138
423.5 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading..
. ........ 139
426.6 Desing Requirements for Shear Loading..
.......... 141
423.7 Interaction ofTensiie and Shear Forces....
.............. 143
423.8 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thickness to Preclude Splitting Failure..
.143
423.9 Installation of Anchors .................
.. ... ............... ..
.. .......... 144
SECTION 424 - ALTERNATE DESIGN [I.1ETIIOI) ....................................................................................... .................. 144
424.1 Notalions..
.... 144
424.2 Scope.
.. .. ......... 145
424.3 General.
............. ........................................... . ............ ....
................. .. ...
........... .. .. 145
. ... 145
424.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses ..
424.5 Development and Spliccs of Reinforcc1llcrll...
... 145
424.7 Compression Members With or Without Flexure..
..146
424.R Shear and Torsion..
.. 146
SECTION 425 - ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS FOR REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSEI) CONCRETE
FLEXlJ RA LAND COM PRESSION [\oj EM BEllS .............................................................................................................. 148
425. I Scope.
. .. 149
N;l!IOmll ~;!rllctlJr,cl) Code of the P!11lipPlnes
G!it
Edition Volume 1
46
CHAI'TEfi 4 Concrete
425.2 Redistribution of Negative Moments in Continuous Non-Prestressed Flexural Members ................... ". .. ............. , 1,'19
SECTION 426 - ALTERNATIVE LOAD AND STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS .............................................. 150
SECTION 427 STRUT AND TIE MODELS ....................................................................................................................... 152
427.1 Definitions ..............
. .................
................ 152
427.2 Strut-andTie Model Design Procedure.. ........................ ...................................... ...............................
.. ....... 157
427.3 Strength of Struts..
. . ... ..... .............
. ............................ 157
427.4 Strength of Tie$..
......... 158
............. ........
...............................
.. ....... 159
427.5 Strength of Nodal Zones..
CHAPT ER 4 . Concrete
47
401.2.7 Concrete on Sleel form Deck

401.2.7.1 Design and constructi on of structural concrete
slabs cast on stay-in-place. noncomposi te steel foml deck

are governed by this chapter.
401.1 Nolalion
fe
:;:: speci fled co rnprcssi ve strength of co ncrete, M Pa
40).2 Scope
401.2.1 Thi s dwptcr prov ides minimum req uirement s for
the design Clnd cons truc tion of structural concrete clements
of any building .or othe r structure under requirements of the
Na.ional Building Code of .he Philippines of which .his

Secti on of the National Structural Code of the Philippines,
Volume I. forms a part of. This section also covers the
strength eva lu ati on o f existing concrete stru ctures.
For structural concrete,
r. shall not be less than 17 MPa.
401.2.7.2 This chapter docs not govern th e co mposite

design of structural concrete slabs cast on stay-ill-place,
composite steel form dec k.
Co ncre te used in the
co nstruc tion of such slabs shall be governed by Sec tions
40 I
406 of .his chap'cr, where appli ca ble. Porti ons of
'0
suc h slabs designed as re inforced co ncrete are govern ed by
.his Chapter.
401.2.8 Special Provisions for Earthquake Resistance

401.2.8.) In regions of modera.e (seismic Zone 2) o r high
seismic risk (seismi c Zone 4). provisions of Section 421
shall be s isfied . Sec Sec.ion 421.3.1.
No maxi mum value of Ie shall apply unl ess restricted by a
speci fi c code pro vision.
401.2.9 This chaptcr does not

constructi on of tank s and reservo irs.
401.2.2 Thi s chapt er shall govern in all matters pertaining to

the design, co nst ru cti on, and materi al properties of
slmclUm] conc rete clements wherever this chapter is in
con m e t with req uirements contained in oth er stnndard s
referen ced in this chapter.

401.2.3 Design and construction of one- and two-family
dwellings
a nd
multi ple
s ingle-family
dwellings
cle sign
and
Guidance on design and construction of concrete tanks and

reservoir shall be obtained frolll the American Concrete
IIlS!i.u.e ACI 3500 I or ACI 35006 "Code Requirements
fo r Ell virollmenw{ Engin eering Concre te Slru cru res" unless
suffi cient supponin g ev id ence can be obta ined from
recogni zed literat ure.
(townhouses) and the ir accessory struclU res will be cove red

by provisions of the National StruclUral Code of the
Philippines, Volume III . Housing.
401.2.4 For unu sua l structu res, sllch as arches. tanks ,

reservoirs, bills and silos, blast-resistan t st ructures . and
chimneys,
govern
provisio ns of thi s chapter sh~1I govern where
applicable. See also 422.2 .3.

401.2.5 Thi s chapter does not govern design alld installat ion
of portions of COncrete piles and drilled pi e rs embedded in
ground except for stm cllJrcs in regions of hi gh seismic risk
OJ' assigned to hi gh seismic performance or design
ca tego rie s.
Sec Sec ti on 421.10.4 fo r require me nts for
co ncrete piles, drill ed piers. and caissons in stru ctures in
regions o f hi g h scismic ri sk or ~Issig nc d to high sc is'mic
performan cc or des ign Gl tcgorics ..
401.2.6 Thi s ch apt e r docs not govern design and

construction o f soi l slIpPor1cd slabs ,
unless lhe slab
transm it!>. vcnical l o~ds from other portions of the structllre
to thl! soil.
4
Nation ;:ll Slruc.:tlJl"li Code o f th e Pt1itippines GIl> Edition Votunw 1
4,8
CHAPTU14 ' Concrete
wires, or single bars larger than 16 mil) diameter, that

satisfies Section 418.22.1 and the bearing stress and
minimum plate stiffness requirements of AASHTO Standard
Spec(fic(lfiof!s Jor Highway Bridges, 17'" l:-eJitioJl, 2002,
Division I, Seclions 9.21.7.2.1 through 9.21.7.2,4,
~Jj:QWJQN,,4QZ
DEFINITIONS
The foHowing terms are defined for general usc in this
chapter.
sections.
Specialized definitions appear in individual
ADMIXTURE is material other than water, aggregate, or

hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and
added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify its

propcl1ics.
AGGREGATE is granular material, slIch as snnd, gravel,

crushed stone and iron blast-furnace slag, and when used
with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic cement
concrete or mortar.
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT is aggregate with a dry,
loose weight of ! 120 kg/nY' or less.
AIR-DRY WEIGHT is the unit weight of a lightweight

concrete specimen cured for seven days with neither loss
nor gain of moisture at 15 C to 2r C and dried for 2 I days
in 50 7 percent relative humidity at 23<1 C 1.1 () C.
ANCHORAGE DEVICE IN POSTTENSIONING is a
device used to anchor tendons to concrete member; in
prctensioning, a device used to anchor tendons during
hardening of concrete.
ANCHORAGE
ZONE
IN POSTTENSIONED
MEMBERS is the portion of the member through which
the concentratcd prestressing force is transferred to the
concrete and distributed more uniformly across the section.
Its extent is equal to the largest dimcnsion of the cross
section. For intcrmediate anchorage devices, the anchorage
zone includes the disturbed regions ahead of and behind the
anchorage devices.
BASE OF STRUCTURE is Ihal Icvel at which Ihe
horizontal earthquake ground motions arc .assurlled to be
imparted to a building. This Jevel docs not necessarily
coincide with the ground level. Sec Section 421.
BASIC MONOSTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE is
an anchorage device used \vith ;lIlY single strand or a sin,glC'
16 I11Ill or smaller diameter bar that satisfies Scction
41 B.22.1 and the anchorage device requirements of the PostTensioning Institu(e's "Speciflcatio/l fo/' UlI/)OIl(/e(/ Single
.)', /'(111(/ Tel/(/olls ".
BASIC MULTlSTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE IS

an anchorage device used with multiple strands. hal'S or
!\ssocinIIOI\ of
BONDED TENDON is a prestressing tendon that is bonded

concrete either directly or through grouting.
to
BOUNDARY ELEMENT is that portion along stltldural

wall and structural diaphragm edge strengthened by
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. Boundary
clements do not necessarily require increase in the thickness
of wall or diaphragm. Edges of opening within walls and
diaphragms shall be provided with boundary elements as
required by Section 421,8.6.2 or 421.9.7,5, Sec Section 421.
CEMENTlTlOUS MATERIALS arc materials as
specified in Scction 403 which have cemcnting value when
used in concrete either by themselves, such as pOitland
celllent, blended hydraulic cements and expansive cemem,
or such materials in combination with fly ash, raw or other
calcined natural pozzolans, silica fume, or ground
granulated blast-furnacc slag.
COLLECTOR ELEMENT is an elemenl that acts in axial
tension or compression to transmit earthquake-induced
forces between a structural diaphragm and a vertical
clement of the seismic-force-resisting system. See Section
421.
COLUMN is a mcmber with a ratio of height-to-Ieastlateral dimcnsion of 3 or greatcr used primarily to support
axial compressive load. For a tapered mcmber, the least
lateral dimension is thc average
the top and bottom
dimensions of the smaller side.
or
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS

arc concrete flexural members of precast and cast-in-place
concrete clements, or both, constructed in separate placements but so interconnected that all clements respond to
loads as a unit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLED SECTION is a cross
section in which the net tensile strain in the cxtreme tcnsiOll
steel at nominal strength is less than or equal to the
c()lllprcssion"colltrollcd strain limit.
COMPRESSIONCONTROLLED STRAIN LIMIT is
the net tensile strain at balanced strain conditions. Sec
Section 4 J 0.4.3.
CONCHETE is a ll1ixture of portland cement or any other

hydraulic CClllellt, line aggregate, coarse aggregate (tIle!
watcr, with or without admixtures.
:~)tnlClllI ' ;ll r:nCJllw~r;Is
of
th('~ Philippin(?~,
CHAPTER 4 . Concrele
. CONCRETE, NOIlMALWEIGHT is concrete containing

only nggregate Ihat co nforms to ASTM C33.
. CONCRETE, SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT is lightweiglll
concrclc cOiliaining only norm al weight aggregate IhaL
confonns to ASTM C33 and only lighlweighl aggregate that
confonns to ASTM C330.
SPECII'IED
COM PRESS IV E
CONCRETE,
STRENGTH OF (j',) is the compressive strength of
concrete used in design and evaluated in accordance with
provisions of Section 405 in MPa. Whenever the quantity
f, is under a radica l sign, square root of numerical val ue
only is intended, and resuh has units of MPa.
CONCIlETE, STRUCTURAL LIGHTWEIGHT is
concrete containing lightweight aggregate that conforms to
" Section 403.4 and has an air-dry unit weight as determined
by "Test Method for Ullit Weight of Smlclurai Lightweight
COllcrete" (ASTM C 567) not exceeding 1840 kg/nI'. In
this code, a li ghtwe ight concrete containi ng on ly li ght we ight
coarse and fine aggregates that co nform to ASTM C330 is
termed "concrete, all-lightweight ", and lightweight co ncrete
containin g li ghtweight aggregate and an equilibrium
density, as determined by ASTM C567, betwee n 1440
kg/m) and 1840 kg/m3, is termed "concrete, Ji gh twcight."
4-9
hooks with at least six-diameter extension at the other end .

The hooks shall engage peripheral longiludinal bars. TI,e
90-degrce hooks of two successi ve crosslies engaging the
same longitudinal bars shall be alternated end for end. See
Sections 407,421.
CU Il V ATURE FRICTION is friction resulting from bends
or curves in the spccifi ed prestrcssing tendon profile.
DEFORlVlED REIN FO R CEMENTS are deformed
reinforcing bars, bar and rod mats, de(c'nned wire. welded
smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric
conforming 10 Section 403.6.3.
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is the total lateral
displacement expected for the design-basis earthquake, as
required by the governing code for earthq uake-resistant
des ign. See Section 42 1.
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS are the combinati on
of factored loads and forces in Secti on 409.3.
DESIGN STORY DRIFT RATIO is the relative
difference of design displacement in between the top and
bottom of a Slory, divided by the Slory height. See Section
421 .
CONNECTION is a region that joins two o r more

Secti on 421, a con nection also refers to a
regio n that joins members of which one or more is precast,
for whi ch the following more specific defini ti ons apply:
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is th e lenglh of embedded

rei nforcement required to develop the design strengl h of
reinforcemem at a criti caJ sectio n. See Secti on 409.4.3.
DUCTILE CONNECTION
is a connection Ihal
experie nces yielding as a result of the. earthq uake design
displacements.
reduce the amount of negative reinforcement over a column
members. In
DIlOP PANEL is a projection below the slab used to
STIlONG CONNECTION a connection Ihat remains

elas ti c while adjoining members experience yielding as a
res ult of the cal1hquake design displacements.
CONT RA CT DOCUMENTS arc documents, including
the project drawings and project specifications. covering the
requ ired Work .
CONT RA CTION JOINT is a formed, sawed, or tooled
groove in a concrete structure to create a weakened plane
and regulate Ihe location of cracking resu lting frol1l the
dimcnsionnl chnngc of different parts mlhe slnlClU rc .
COVE ll, SPECIFIED
CONCRETE is Ihe diSl.nce
between the outermost surface of embedded reinforcement

and thc closes t (lu ter surrace of the concrete indica ted o n
design drawings o r in project specificat ions.
c nOSSTIE is a (';OlllinliO liS reinforci ng bar ha vi ng a

seismic hook a\ one end and a hook not less than IJO-degrcc
or the minimum required slab thickness. and to increase the

slnb shear strength. Sec Seclions 413.3.5 and 413.4. 7.
DUCT is a conduit (plain or corrugated) to accommodate
prestressing
steel
for
post-tensioned
install ation.
Requirements for post-tensioning ducts are given in Section
418.18.
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION (d) is the di slance
measu red from ex.treme compression fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement.
EFFECTIVE PIlESTRESS is Ihe Slress remai ning in
prestressing tendons after all losses have occu rred.
excluding effects of dead load ilnd superimposed load.
EMBEDM ENT LENGTH is Ihe lengl h of embedded
reinforcement provided beyond a critical section.
EQUILlUIlIUM DENSITY is th e density of li ghtweiglH
concrete after exposure 10 a relmi ve humidit y of 50 5
percent and a tempera ture of 2].00 2.(X)O C for a period of
lime sufficient to reac h cons tant de nsity (see ASTM C567).
11
National Structural Codo of ti le Philippines 6 \ Edition Volum e 1
4-10
CHAPTER 4 - Concrete
EXTREME TENSION STEEL is the reinforcement

(prestressed or nonpre.'itrcssed) that is the fm1hesl from the
extreme compression fiber.
MODULUS 01' ELASTICITY is Ihe ratio of normal .<Iress

10 correspondi ng strain for tensile or compressi ve ~; !;c :-,!-,.'.S
below proporlional limit of tnillClial. See Section ~1 'Y-i.i_..
I1lcl11ber~
HEADEJ) DEFORMED BARS are deformed reinforcing
MOMENT FRAME is a fr.amc in which
bars with heads att,lehed at one or both ends. I-leads arc

attached to fhe bar end by means such as welding or forging
joints res ist forces through Jlcxure, shear, and axial force.
Moment framcs designated as pan of the scismicfor cc~
resis ting system sha ll be categorized as follows:
onto the bar, int ernal threads on the hend mating
[0
threads
on the bar end, or a separate threaded nut to secure the head

of the bar. The Ilet bealing area of headed dcfonnt'd bar
equals the gross area of the head minus th e larger of Iht, arC:l
of the bar and the area of any obstructioll.
HEADED SHEAR STUD REINPORCEMENT is a
reinforcement consisting of individual headed studs. or
groups of studs. wi th anchorage provided by a head at each
end or a common base rail consisting of a stee l plate. or
shape_
HOOP is a closed ti e or cOOli nuously wou nd tie . A closed

tie can be made up o f severa l reinforcement clements each
having hooks at both ends. A continuous ly wound tic shall
have a seismic hook at bolll ends. See Sectio n 42 1.
and
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME is a c'lSl-in -pl,,; ... "

precast concrete frame complying with Ihe requirCl1l1..'.ilt:: i iI'
Sections 401 to 418, and, ill the case of ordinary mOI!:" : ~ l
rrames assigned 10 areas with low seis mi c ri sk. :d:-"'_.I
c:o mplying with Section 421 . 14.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT PRAME is a cast- in-place
frame complying with the requi remeIHs of Section 421.12 II!
addilion to the requirements for ordinary moment frrlmes.
ISOLATION JOINT is a separati on bel ween adjoining
SPECIAL MOM ENT PRAME a cast- ill-plaee fra me

complying wit h the requi rements of Seclian 42 1.3 .4 thrOllp i:
42 1.3.7, 42 !.5 through 421. 7, or a precast fraille complyi lfg
with the requirements of Sectio n 421.5 through 421. ;; .
42 J J 3.1 through 421 . 13.4. Jn addition, the requireme nts L
ordinary momen! frames shall be satisfied.
parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane. at a

designed location such as to interfere least with performance
of the structure, yet such as to all ow relative movement in
three directions and avoid fonnation of cracks elsewhere in
NET TENSILE STRAIN is the lensile sirain at Ilomin;':

strength exclusive of st rains due to effective prestres :~>
creep. shrinkage and Icmperilwfc.
the concrete and through which all or pan of the bonded

reinforcement is intenupted .
JACKING FORCE is Ihe lemporary force exerted by

device that introduces tension into prestressing tendons in
prestressed concrete.
JOINT is tI pan ion of struct ure common to intersec ting
members. The effect ive cross-seclionnl area of a joint of a
special momcnt frame, AI. for shear strength comp utalions is
defined in Seclion 421_7.4.1.
LOAD, DEAD is the dead weight sllpponed by a member.
as defined by Section 204 (without load factors).
LOAD, FACTOn g J) i:-) the load, multiplied by ilppropr i<l1c

load factors, u:-)cd to proportion memhers hy the strength
de:-iign method of thi s chClptcr. Sec Sections 408.2.1 and
409_3_
LOAD, LIVE is the live load specilicd by Section 205
(without load factors).
LOAJ), SEIlVICE is the load specified by Sections 204 10
207 (wit houl load lilclolS).
PEDESTAL is an Upri glH co mpression member with a rmin

of unsupponed heigh! to average least lateral dimcnsion nol
cxceeding 3. For a tapered member, the lensl lateral
dimension is Ihe average of the top und ho ttom dimensions
of the smalier side.
PLAIN CONCRETE is !-;trllctura l concrete with Ih"1
reinforcement or with less reinforcement {han Ihe minimlHil
amouill specilied for reinforccd concrctc.
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT is reinforceme lll Lhal doc;
not co nform to definition of deformed reinforceme n!. Sec
Section 401.6.4.
PLASTIC HING E REGION is Ihe Iellgl h of fra ll;;dement over whi ch Il cx ural yielding is intended to OCCli l
d u t.~ to canh quakc design displac.:mcnts, cxte nding not less
than a distance. II from the c:rilic:al !-;cclioll where ncxlInll
yiel ding i nitiatc!-;. Sec Section 421 .
POST-TENS IONING is il method of prestressing ill which
Icndolls <Ire te nsioned nfter conc retc hilS harde ned.
pnECAST CONCRETE is a strucltlral COIKl"el C elemelll

<.:;Isl in othe r than ils final position in Ihe slruclurc.
CHAPTER 4 . Concrete
pRJECmilPIU;SS;ED TENSILE ZONE is that pOI1ion of
member where flexural tension, calculated

section properties, would occur under
dC<ld and l ive loads if the prestress force was not
concrete, to provide corrosion protection, and

corrosion inhibiting coating.
to
4 11
contain the
grosS
SHORES arc vertical or incli ned suppon members

des igned to ca rry the weight of the forrnwork, concrete and
constl1lclion loads above.
CONCRETE is stl1JclUral concrete ill

: which internal stresses have bee n int roduced to redu ce
SPAN LENGTH . See Secti on 408. 10.
' po!entli'''! tensil e stresses ill concrete res ulting from loads.
J'RESTRESSING STEgr, is
l\
hi gh-strength Sh::cJ cl em e nt
stich as wire. bar, or :-trand, Of a hundlc o f such cle men ts,
used to impart prcstrc,,, forces to t:oncrclc.

PRETENSIONJNG
IS
SPECIAL' ANCHOHAGE DEVICE is an anchorage

device thai satisfi es Section 4 18. 16. 1 and the standardi zed
acceptance tests of AAS HTO "Standa rd Specifications for
Highway Bridg{!s ", 17" Editioll, 2002, Division II, Section
10.3.2.3.
a method of prestressin g in wh ich
tendons arc tensioned be fore co ncrete is pl a(;ed.
REINFORCED CONCRETE is st rllctural concrete

reinforced with 110 less tlum the mini mum amounts of
prestressin g tendons or non prcslrcsscd rein force men t
specified ill this chap ter.
SPECIAL BOUNDARY ELEMENT is a boundary

clement required by Sec tions 421 ,8,6.2 or 42 1.8.6.3.
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is contin uously wound
reinforcement in Ihe foml of a cylindri cal heli x.
SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH
REINFORCEMENT is mate ri al th"lt conform s to Section

403,6, exclud ing prestressin g ten dons unl ess specificall y
included.
(f;,) is the tensi le
slrength of concrete delerm ined in accordance with ASTM

C496M as described ill "Specificatiolls for Ught weight
Aggregar{! for Structural Con crete " (ASTM C330). See
Section 405.2.4.
RESHORES arc sho res pl aced sllu g l y under a CO IKTC iC slab

or othe r stfuclUfal member after the original fo rms and
STEEL FIBERREINFORCED CONCRETE. Conc rete
shores have been re moved rrom a large r area, thus req u iring
containing dispersed rando ml y oriented steel fi bers .
the new slab or s[nIctural mcmber to deflect and support its

own weight and existing construction loads applied pri or to
fh e installat ion of the res hores.
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGOHY
is a cl ass ification
assigned to a stru cture based on it s occ upancy t:tl lcgo ry and
the severit y or the design earthquake ground motion at th e
site. as defin ed hy the lega ll y adoptcd ge ncral building code.
STIRUUP is reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion

stresses in a Slillctural me mber; typicall y bars, wires, or
welded wire fabri c (plain or defonned) bent into L, U or
rectan gular shapes and located perpendi cul ar
10
or at an
<Ingle to lo ngitudi na l re inforceme nt. The term "stirrups" is

usually (Ipplied to lateral reinforceme nt in llex ural me mbers
and the term "ties" to (hose in compression membe rs. Sce
also "Tie."
SEISMICFORCERESISTING SYSTEM is a portion of

the struclUrc designed to res ist earthq uake design forces
required by th e legall y adopted general buildin g code using

the applicable provisions and load combinations.
SEISMIC HOOK is a hoo k on a stirrup. or crosstie ha ving

a bend not less th an 135 degrees, exce pt thaI circula r hoops
Shall have a bend nor less than 90 degrees. I-Itx)ks shall have
a 6dv, but not less than 75 mm extellsion tha t engages the
longitUd inal reinforceme nt and pruje<.:ts into the interior of
the stirru p or hoop. Sec Section 407.2.4 and Section 42 1.2.
SHEAR CAP is a projec t below the slab used In increase
the sl:! h she;lr strength . See Secti on 4 1J.3.6.

SHEATHING is a malcri:!1 cncas ing a prestressing tl~!l(l on
to prevent bonding the tendon with the surroullding
STRENGTH, DESIGN is the no minal strength multiplied

by a st rength -reducti on factor, . See Secti on 409.4 .
STnENGTH, NOMINAL is the stren gth o f a memb er o r
cross secti on calcula ted in accordance with provisions and
assumptions of thc strc ngth design mcthod of thi s chaptcr
before appl ication
or
any strengl h~reduct ion factors . See
Section 409.4. 1.
STRENGTH, REQUIRED is the strength of " member or
cross secti on required to resi st factored loads or reltltcd

internal moments and forces ill stich combinations :IS arc
stipul <lled in Ihis chapter. Scc Sectio n 409.2. 1.
STRESS is the intensi ty of force per unit arCl!.
1h
Nationa l Structural Coclo of the Plli!ippirw s 6 Edition Volume 1
4 -12
CHAPTE11 4 - Concrete
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE is all concrete used for

s tructural purposes , including plain and reinforced conc rete.
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGM is a structural member,
such as a fl oor or roof slab, th at transmits forces acting ill
the plane of the member to Ihe vertica l elements of the
seismic-force-resis ti ng syste m. See Secti oll 42J for
requirements in the earthquake-resisting structures.
STRUCTURAL TRUSS is an assemb lage of reinforced
concrete members subjected primarily to ax ial forces.
STRUCTURAL WALL is a wa ll propoJ1ioned to resi st
combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces. A shear
wall is a structural wall. A structural wall designated as part
of Ihe seismic-force-resisting system shall be categorized as
fo ll ows:
II
ORDINARY STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE

WALL is a wall complying with the requirements of
Section 422.
ORDINARY
REINFORCED
CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL WALL is a wall co mplying with the
req uirement s of Secti ons 401 through 4 J 8.
INTERMEDIATE PRECAST STRUCTURAL WALL is
a waJl complying with all app licable requirements of
Sections 40 1 through 41 8 in addition to 42 1.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALL is a cast-in-place or
precast wa ll shall comply with the requirements of Sections
421.3.3 through 421.3.7, 421.8 and 421.15 as app licable, in
addition to the requirements ror ordinary reinforced concrete
stnlclUral w'llls.
TRANSFER LENGTH is [he length of embedded pretensionedstrand rcquired to transfer the effective prestress to
(he concrete.
UN BONDED
TENDON
is tendon in whi ch the
prestressing steel is prevented from bonding to (he l:oiic retc
and is free 10 move relative to the concrete. The prestressing
force is pcnnanently transferred to the concrete al the
tendon ends by anc horage only.
WALL is a member, usually vertical, IIsed to enclose or

separate spaces.
WELDED WIRE REINFOR CEMENTS are rei nf(.rcing
elements consisting of ca rbon-steel plain or defo rmed Wires,
confo rming to ASTM A82 or A496, respectively, fabrica ted
int o sheets 0 1' rolls in accordance with ASTM A 185 or
A497M, respectively; or reinforci ng elements consisti ng of
stainless-steel plain or deformed wires fab ricated into
sheets or roll s conformi ng to ASTM A I 022.
'W OBBLE FRICTION in prestressed co ncrete is I'!iction
caused by unintended deviation of prestressi ng sheath or
duct from its specified profile.
\\fORK is the entire co nstlllclion or separately identifiable

pans Ihereof that are requi red to be fUl1lished under the
contract documents.
YIELD STRENGTH is the specified minimum yie ld
strength or yield point of reinforcemenl in MP a. Yield
strength or yield point shall be determ ined ill tension
accord ing to appli cable ASTM standards as modified by
Section 403.6 of this code.
:,,: .
TENDON. In pretcllsioned app lications. the tendon is the

pres tressin g steel. In pos t-tensi oned appli cations, the tendon
is a complete assembly consisti ng of. anc horages,
prestressi ng steel. and shea ting with coating ror unbounded
applications or duc ts with grout fo r bonded applications.
TENSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross section
in which th e Ilet tensile strain ill the extreme tension steel at
nom inal strengt h is greate r than or equal [ 0 O.(XJ5.
TIE is
<I loop of reinfori.:i'ng btlr or wire enclosing

IOllgiwdin;tl reinforcement. A co ntinuously wound bar or
wire in the for m of a circle. rectangle or other polygoll
shape without re-entra lll corners is acceptable. 'Sec
"Stirrup."
T1lANSFEIt is the ac t of transferri ng stress in prestressing

tcndons from jads or prctcnsioning bed to (;Oilcrett!
me mber.
Association of Structural Enqineeni of tlln
Ph l hrpUlf:~
~.
4-13
403.4 Aggregates
403.4.1 Concrete aggregates shall conform to one of the

rollowing specifications:
"SpecijicmiollsJor Concrete Aggregares" (ASTM C 33):
= specified
yield
""ength
of
non prestressed
reinforcement, MPa
::: nomin al diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand,
"SpecijicariollS Jar Lighrweighr Aggregates for Srl"Ucrurai

COllcme" (ASTM C 330).
Aggregates failing (0 ' meel the above specifications but

which have been shown by special tcsL or aC{lJal service (0
produce concrete of adequate s trength and durability ma y be
used where authoriz.ed by the engineer-of-rccord.
mill
Tests of Materials
TIle engineer may require the testing of any
'materialS used in concrete constnJctioll to determine if
malerla" are of quality speci fied.
Tests of materials and of concrete s hall be made in
' ac,cordal1ce with the standards listed in Section 403 .9.
403.2.3 Complete record of tests of Illmclials and of

; concrete shall be available for inspect iOIl durin g prog ress of
, work and for two (2) years after COJllph~ lion of [he project,
br as required by the implementing agency and shall be
preserved by the engineer for that purpose.
403.4.2 The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate

shall not be larger than:
I.
One fifth (1/5) the narrowest dimension between sides

of rOfln s; or
2.
One third (113) the depth of slabs: or
3.
Three fourth s (3/4) Ihe minimum clear spaci ng between

. individual reinforci ng bars or wires, bundl es of bars, or
prestressing tendons or dUClS.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgmcm of the

engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are sllch
thal concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
403.3 Cement
; 403.3.1 Cement shall con form
10
one of the following
"Specifications/or Pon/wu/ Cement" (ASTM CI50).

"Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Celllellls" (ASTM C
595M), excluding Types S and SA which arc not intended
as principal ceme nting constituents of structural conc rete.
"Specifications for Expollsil'e Hydraulic Cel11e"," (ASTM
C 845).
Fly ash and natural pozzolan: ASTM C618.
Groulld-granulmed blast-I"uflwcc s lag: ASTM C989.
403.5 Wat er
403.5.1 Wilter used in mixing conc rete shall be clean and
free from injuriolls amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, sa lts,
organic materials or other substances deleteri ous to concrete
or reinforcement.
403.5.2 Mixing water fo r prestresscd concrete or for

concrete that will corllain aluminum embedments, including
that portion of mi xing water contributed in the form of free
moisture 011 aggregates, shall not con tain deleterious
amounts of ch loride ions. See Section 404.6. I .
403.5.3 NOIl-p0lable waler shall not be lIsed in concrete
unless the rollowing :lfe satisfied :
403.5.3.1 Seleclion of concrele prnp0l1 ioils shall be
Silica fume: ASTM C!.'40.
ba~ed
on co ncrete mixes using w<ucr from the same source.
403.3.2 Cement used in th e work shall correspond to (hat on

which selection of COllnc (c proporti ons was based . See
Section 405.3 .
403.5.3.2 Mortar tc st cubes made with nonpowblc mi xing

water shall have 7-day and 28-day strengths equal to a( k:ast
90 percent of strcngths of similar specimens made with
pmablc water. Strength test co mparison shall be Il1tlde on
11l0l1ars, identical except for lhe mixing waler, prepared il nd
Nationa l Structural Code of th e Pll i1ippines G(I\ Edition Volume 1
."
414
CHAPTER 4 Concrete
tested in accordance with "Tesl Method for Compressive

Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 50-nun Cube
Specimens)" (ASTM C 109).
Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 496M). exccpt that

wire shall not be smaller than size MD25 or larg'' ii i i \i .' i ~
MD200 unless as permitted in Section 403.6 ..
h " '"
with a specified yield streilgth /y exceeding . ,'~ i:j lvi r'a, /;.
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0 ..,) ptrC(llt.
403.6 Steel Reinforcement

403.6.1 Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement,
except that plain reinforcement sh:lll be permitted for spirals
or prestressing steels; and reil;iorcement consisting of
headed shear studs, structural steel, steel pipe or steel tubing
shall be permitted only for resisting shear under conditions
specified in Section 411.6.6.1(6).
403.6.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform to
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel", ANSIIAWS
DIA of the American Welding Society. Type and location
of welded splices and other required welding of reinforcing
bars shall be indicated on the design drawings or in the
project specifications. ASTM reinforcing bar specifications,
except for ASTM A 706M, shall be supplemented to require
a report of material properties necessary to conform to
requirements in ANSI! AWS D1.4.
403.6.3 Deformed Reinforcements
403.6.3.1 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to one of
the following specifications, except as pennitted by Section

403.6.3.3:
1.
"Specifications for Deformed and Pia ill Billet-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 615M)
for seismic resisting members.

2.
"Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement"
(ASTM A 706M) for
members resisting earthquake induced forces .

403.6.3.2 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to one
of the ASTM specifications listed in Section 403.6.3.1 ,
except that for bars with/y exceeding 415 MPa,/y shall be
taken as the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent.
See Section 409.5.
403.6.3.3 Deformed reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM
AI035 shaH be permitted to be used as transverse
reinforcement in Section 421.6.4 or spiral reinforcement ill

Section 410.10.3.
403.6.3.4 Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall conform
to "5jJecijicatiollS for Fabricated D(formed Steel Bar Mats
for COllcrete Reillforcemellt"
(ASTM A 184M).
Reinforcing bars used in bar mats shall conform to one of
the specifications listed in Section 403.6.3.1.

403.6.3.5 Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement shall
conform to "Specificatiolls for Steel Wire , Dtjomzed, for
403.6.3.6 Welded
plain wire fabric for concrete

reinforcement shall conform to "Specijicalio!/.I /H )'teel
Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinfo/"u , iOll"

(ASTM A 185M), except that for wire with a
' Id
strength fy exceeding 415 MPa, 1,. shall be taken :i\ iIC
stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percen!. \Vc-J.:1ed

intersections shall not be spaced farther apart j i'; ':1 ~(jn ' . :'1 )
in direction of calculated stress, except for ",ii;
'K
,i
as stirrups in accordance with Section 412.14.2.
deformed wire fabric I'OJ COllecte
reinforcement shall confonn to "Specifications for .; ('({
403.6.3.7 Welded
Welded
Wire
Fabric,
Deformed,
fo ,("on , .rf'-{(~
Reinforcement" (ASTM A 497M), except lhal for wire
with a specified yield strength fy exceeding i~)5 MPa, .r;.
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of" (LIS pt.TccnL
Welded intersections shall not be spaced faIlli, ' ~q!, ! n ; ,an
400 mm in direction of calculated stress, eX I ' T (01

e
fabric used as stirrups in accordance with SeCl I');) " .".
"
Deformed wire larger than MD200 is 'penllitt';';j w li::;]
in welded wire reinforcement conforming :0 /\,' .
A497M, but shall be treated as plain wire for de vtlnplJlC lJ1.
and splice design.
403.6.3.8 Galvanized reinforcing bars shaU comply wi(\t
"Specifications for Zinc"Coated (Galvanized) Steel!Jol.\.{ il
Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 767M) . Epoxycoal ed
reinforcing bars shall comply with "Specification ior
Epoxy~Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars" (ASTfd A 77.'>1/:' () J
with "Specifications for Epoxy-Coated Prefabli(,j!i'o'
ci
Reinforcing Bars" (ASTM A 934M). Galvanii:ed (II c,
coated reinforcement shall conform to

specifications listed in Section 403.6.3. I .
01;('
403.6.3.9 Epoxy-coated wires and welded wire fal ;)

Ii
comply with "Srandard Specification for LI)()xy ("//i : C( "
Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Rei'!f(!/"{"( .'!;
(ASTM A 884M). Epoxy-coated wires shall ",,, I,'
Section 403.6.3.5 and epoxy-coated welded wile i (illl;
conform to Section 403.6.3.5 or 403.6.3.6.
II<
403.6.3.10 Deformed stainless-steel wire. and deformed ;;:id

plain stainless-steel welded wire for concrete I"cinf01n l: lit
shall conform to ASTM l022M, except deformed wire .',i; 'll!
not be smaller than size MD25 or larger t1'

. .. ~
and the yield strength for wire with Iv eXC l"\'; ill'
shall be taken as the stress correspond(ng to a s{rall! 01 U .j)
percent. Deformed wire larger than MD200 is PCI i' :: : (d
where used in welded wire reinforcement confo!"lllilig to
ASTM AI022M. but sha ll be o'eated as plain wire for

' development and splice design. Spacing of welded
: inte.",;.;ctions shall not exceed 300 mm for plain welded wire

:: and 400 mm for deformed welded wire in direction of
~ caJculntcd stress, except for welded wire reinforcement used
'; as stirrups in accQrdance with Section 412.14.2.
Section 410./7.7 or 410.17.8. shall confolln to one of the

following specifications:
I.
"Specifications for Carbon Sree/" (ASTM A 36M).
2.
"Specifications for Hi gh-Strenglh Low-All oy Stilletural

Steel" (ASTM A 242M).
3.
"Specificafiolls
Jor
High -Strength
Low-Alloy
Columbium- Vanadium Sleds of Structural Quality"
(ASTM A 512M) .
4.
"Specificatiolls for ihiJ,-Slrength Low-Allo), Slruclural

Sleel " with 345 MPa (ASTM A 588M).
5.
"Specifications
A992M).
403.6.4 Plain Reinforcement

. . 403.6.4.1 Plain bars for s piral reinforcement shall conform
to one of the following specification: ASTM A615M or
A706M .
403.6.4.2 Plain wire for spi ral reinforcement shall confonn
to "Specifications f or Steel Wire. Plain, for Concrete
Reinjorcemem" (ASTM A 82M), except Ihal for wire wilh
a specified yield strength!, exceeding 415 MPa./, shall be
the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent.
403.6.5 Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement

403.6.5.1 Headed studs and headed stud assembl ies shall
confonn to ASTM AI044M .
shall
l.
Wire conforming to "Specifications for Uncomed

Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Con crete "
(ASTM A 42 1M).
2.
Low-re la xati on wire cOllformin g 10 "SjJecijicoliolls for

Uncoated Stress- Relieved SU'e/ Wire for Prestressed
Concr ete " including Su pplemcill "Lt) w-Reiaxarioll
Wire " (ASTM A 421 M)
3.
Strand conforming (0 "SpecificmiollS for Steel Stn/fld,

Un COaTed Seven- Wire for Prestressed COl/ crete "
(ASTM A416M).
4.
Bar conforming to "Specijicllliolls fo r Uncoated HighStrength Steel Bar Jor Prestressing Conc rete " (ASTM
A 122M)
403.6.6.2 Wire, strands , and bars not specifically listed in

ASTM A 4 16M . A 421M alld A 122M arc allowed.
provided they con form to minimum requirements or Ihesc
spccifications and do not have prOI)Cl1ics that make thcm
less satisractory (han those listed in these s pecificati ons.
403.6.7 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing
403.6.7.J Stmctur<ll steel used with reinforci ng bars in
co mpositc co mpress io n mcmbers meeting req uirements of
for
SIrucfIlral
,~hllpeJ"
(ASTM
403.6.7.2 Steel pi pe or tubin g fo r composite compress ion

members composed of a steel -encased concrete core
meeting requirements of Section 410.17.6 shall conform to
one of the following specifications:
J.
Grade B of "Specifications for Pipe, Steel. Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coaled Welded alld Seamless"
(ASTM A 53M).
2.
"Specifica tions for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tllbing ill Rounds and Shapes"
(ASTM A SOOM) .
3.
"Specijications Jo r flor-Formed Welded alld Seamless

Carboll Sleel Tllbillg" (ASTM A 50 1M).
403.6.6 Prestressing Tendons

403.6.6.1Tendons for prestressed reinforcement
confoml to one of the foll ow in g speci fi cati ons :
4-15
403.6.8 Steei discon tinuou s fiber reinforcement fo r concrete

shall be deformed alld conform to ASTM A820M. Steel
fibers have a lell gl lHo~diameter ratio not smaller than 50
and not grealcr than 100.
403.6.9 Headed defo rmed bars shall co nform to ASTM
A970M and obsll1lclions or interruption s o f th e bar
defonnati ons. if any. shall not extend Illorc lhan 2th rrom
the bearing face or the head.
403.7 Admixtures
403.7.1 Admixtures fo r water reduction and setting time
modification shall co nform ASTM C494M . Admixtures for
usc in producing nowing concrete shall conform ASTM
C IOI7M.
403.1.2 Air-entrain ing admixlUrcs shall conform to
"Specificmio flslor Air-EllIrai"inlj Admixtures fur CO/l crete"
(ASTM C 260).
403.7.3 Admixtures to be used in conc rete lhat do 110t
conforl1l lO Sections 403.7.I .ilnd 403.7.2 s ha ll be subject to
prior approval by the engineer.
Nationa l Structural Code of the Pl1ilippine s Sill Edition Volume 1
416
403.7.4 Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride

from other than impurities from admixture ingredients shall
not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete containing
embedded aluminum, or in concrete cast against stay-inplace galvanized steel forms. See Sections 404.6.1 and
406.3.2.
403.7.5 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall
conform to "Specificalions/or Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzo/an for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
POri/and Cement Concrete" (ASTM C 618),
403.7.6 Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an

admixture shall conform to "Specifications for Ground
Granufoted Blast-fumace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Mortars" (ASTM C 989).
403.7.7 Admixtures used in concrete containing ASTM

C845 expimsive cements shall be compatible with the
cement and produce no deleterious effects.
403.7.8 Silica fume used as an admixture shall conform to
A185/A18507
Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
A242/A242M04a Standard Specifications
Strength Low~Alloy StructuraL Steel
for
A307/A307~07a Standard
Specijication
for
Steel Bolts and Studs, 415 MPa Tensile Strength.
High.
Carbon
A416/A416M()(; Standard Specificatiolls for SIal Slrand,

Uncoated Seven~Wirefor Prestressed Concrete
A42J/A421~05
Stress~Relieved
Standard Specifications for Uncoated

Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete
A496/A49607
Srandard Specificatians for Steel Wire,
Deformed, jar Concrete Reinforcement
A497/A49707
Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
"Specificatioll for Silica Fume for Use in Hydraulic-Cement

Concrete and Mortar" (ASTM C 1240).
ASOO/ASOO07
Standard Specifications for ColdFormed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes
403.8 Storage of Materials
A50 II A50 1-07

Standard Specifications jor fiat-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carboll Steel Structural Tubing
403.8.1 Ccmentitious materials and aggregate shall be

stored in such manner as to prevent deterioration or
intrusion of foreign Imitter.
403.8.2 Any material that has deteriorated or has been

contaminated shal! not be used for concrete.
A5721 AS7207
Standard Specifications
Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium
Steels
StT'(~Jlgth
for
High
Structural
AS88/A588M~OS Standard
Specifications for
High.s'trength Low-ALloy Structural .)'teel up to 345 MPa
minimum
yield point with Atmospheric Corrosion
403.9 Standards Cited in this Chapter
Resis{(~llce
403.9.1 In the absence of the Philippine National Standard

(PNS), Standards of the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) referred to in this chapter listed below
with their serial designations, including year of adoption or
revision, arc declared (0 be part of this code as if fully set
forth herein:
A61SIA615M-07 SWlldard Specijications for Deformed

and Plain Billet-Steel Bars jor Concrete Reinforcement
A361 A36M05
,)'tJ'Uct/lral Steel
Standard
SpecUlcatiol1S
for
Carboll
A . 531 A53 .. 07
Standard SpeClficatiolls for Pipe, Sted,

Black and lim-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded (Ind Seamkss
A 706/A 706M-06a Standard Specifications for Low-Alloy

Steel Deformed Barsfor Concrete Reinforcemelll
A 7221 A 722-07
Standa,.d Sp(~cifica(ions for UnCOOfu/
High-Strength Steel Bar/or P}'(~stressillg Concrete
A 76 7I A 767M ~OS Statu/ard S/J'cificatiolls for Zi,u -Coaled
(Galvanized) Steel Barsfor COil crete Reinjoram('J/t
A775/A77SM-07 Standard
A821 AB2-07
Standard Spec!fications for Steel Wire,
Plain, for Concrcte Reit(forcemelll
A 1841 AI 84-06
Standard 5'pec(ficatiolls for Fabricated

Dljonlled S'rcel Bar Mats/or COJJcrete ReiJ!forcement
Coat(~d
SpecificatioJls
for
Ejwxy-
Reilljorcint: Slee/ Bars
A8201 A820M06 Swndard SpecificalioJ1s for ,S'teei Fiber'

for Fiber Reinforced CO!lcrde
ASSOCIation of Structural Engineers of tile Philippines
CHAPTER 4 . Concroie
Specifications for EpoxyWelded Wire Fabric for
A884/A884M-06 Standard
. Coated Steel Wire and
S'pecifications for
417
Port/and
CISO-OS
Cement
Standard
CI72-04
Mixed Concrete
Standard Method of Sampling Freshly
Reinforcement
A934/A934M-07 Standard Specifications
Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
for
Epoxy-
. A955/A9SSM-07a Standard Specifications for Deformed
and
Plain
and
Stainless
Steel
Bars for
CI92/CI92M-06 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly

Mixed Concrete
Concrete
C231-04
Standard Method for Air COfltenl of
Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Me/hod
Reinjorcemellf
A970/A970M-06 Stondard Specifications for Headed Steel
Bars/or Concrete Reinforcement
C260-06
Standard
SpeCificaTions
Entraining Admixtures for Concrere
"
A9921A992M-06a Standard Specifications for Structural

Steel Shapes
A996/A996M-06a Standard Specifications for
and Axle
Sleel
Reinforcement
Deformed
Bars
for
for
Air-
C330-0S
Stondard Specifications for Lightweight
Aggregatesfor Structural Concrete
Rail-Steel
Concrete
A!0221AI022M-07 Standard Specification for Deformed

and Plain Stainless Sleel Wire and Welded Wire for
C494/C494M-OSa Standard Specifications for

Admixtures for Concrete
Cltemical
C496/C496M-04 Standard Test Metltod for Splitting

Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concn:te SpeCimens
Concrete Reinforcement
AI03SIAI03SM-07 Standard Specification for
Deformed
C567-05a
Standard Test Method for UniT Weight of
Structural LighTweight Concrete
and Plain, Low-Carbon, Chromium, Sleel Ban'for Concrete

Reinforcement
Standard
CS9SM-07
Hydraulic Cements
Specifications
for
Blended
AI044/AI044M-OS Standard Specification for Steel Stud
Assemblies/or Shear Reinforcement of ConerNe

C291C29M-03
Stondard Method for Bulk Demity (Unit
Weigh!) and Voids in Aggregare
C618-05
Standard Specifications for Fly Ash and
Raw or Calcined Natura! Pozzohm for Use as a Mineral
Admixture on Portland Cemenf Concrete
and
C685/C685M-O I Sralldard Spccificaliolls for ConcrelC

Made by VO!llIllNric Barching and Confinuous Mixing
Concrete
Standard Spec((ications for expansive

C84S-04
Hydraulic Cement
C39/C39M-05
Standard Test Method for Compressive
Strength of L)lilldrical Concrete Specimens
C989~06
Standard Specifications for Ground
Granulated BIaSI-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Morlars
C42/C42M-04
Standard M(~lhod of Obtaining
Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
C!OI2-04
Tes! Method for Length Chang(~
l1)Ylraulic-Cement Mortars Exposf.>d {() a Su~(a!e ,)'olurioll
C31/C31 M-06
S'randard Practice f6r Making
Curing COl/crete Test Specimens in the Field
C33-03
Aggregate
Standard
SpeCifications
for
and
(4
S'tal1(/ard ,S'pec({icarions for Ready-Mixed
C lO I7/C J 0 J 7M-OJ Slandard Specifications for t:hemica!

Admixluresfor Use in Producing F/owinx Concrele
Cl 09/C! 09M-05 Standard Tcst Merhod for Compressive

Strength (~( Hydraulic Cemenr Mortars (Using 50-mill Cub(~
Specimens)
C I J J 6-06/C 1116M~06 Standard SpeCifications for Fiher-
C'J.1IC94M-06
Concrete
C144-04
,\'wlldard ";pecUicatiol1s for Ar:grer:of(' for
Masonry Morrar
Reinforced Concrete
Slwu/ard
C1157-03
(or lIwlrall./ic Cemenr
th
National Structural Code of the Philippllws 6 Edition Volume "\
Pel/tmJl(/!/c('
Seec({tc(lrions
418
CHAP TEI14 Concrete
C 12 18/CI2 18M -99 Srandard Test Method for

Soluble Chloride if! Mortar (1m/ Concrete
Warer
C 124005
Standard Specifications for Silicll f ume
for Use in l1ydmulic:Cemel1l Concrete alld Mortar
C 1602/C 1602M-()6 Srandard Spcdjications fo r Mixing

War er used ill th e Production oj Hydraulic C!lnent
404.1 Notat ion
r.
= specifi ed compressive strength o f co ncrete, MPa.

w/e m = maximum watcr-ee mel11iti ous materi al ratio ,
ConcreTe
CIr,09lC I609M-06 SUmdard Test Method fo r Flexural
Performallce of Fiber- Reinforced Concrete (Using Beom
With Third-Poilll Loading)
403.9.2. "STructural Welding Code - Reillforcing Steel"

(ANS I/A W S DI.4/D I.4M :2oo5) of Ihe American Welding
Society is declared part of this code as if fully scI fo rth
here in.
403:9.3 Sec ti on 203.3 Comb inin g Loads Us in g Strength

DeSIgn. or Load and ResisTance Fac lor Design of thi s code
as if fully sc I forth herein, for the purposes cited in Sectio ns
409.3.3 a nd 426.
403.9.4 "Spec ification Jor Unhol/ded S ingle Strand 1'e fldoll
Marer;,,/'- (AC I 423.707)" is decl ared to be pan of this
Code as if fully se t fo nh herein.
403.9.5 Seclions 9.21.7. 2 and 9.2 1.7.3 of Divisio n I a nd

Secli on 10.0. 2.3 of Di vis io n II of AA SHTO "SllIlIdard
Specification for Highway Bridges" (AASHTO I t" Ed iti on,
2002) arc declared to be pan of Ih is code as if fully SCI fonh
herein for the purpose ci ted in Section 418.16. 1.
403.9.6 "Qualfficatiol/ of Post-h'.wafh!(1 M edulll ical

IlI/ cllOrs in CO/lcrete ( Ael 355.2-(7) " is decl ared to be pa rt
of Ih is Code as if full y sel fort h herein . fo r the purpose c ited
in Sec tion 423, A nc horing (Q Concre te .
403.9.7 S,r/l clllral
Welding
Code
Steel
(A WS
D 1.1/0 1.1 M:2006)" of the Ameri can Welding Soc ielY "
decl ared ta be P;1I1 o f I h i ~ Code <IS if full y se l forth he rein .
404.2 Definitions
Th e Secti on ad dresses th ree ex posure categories that affect
th e req uirements far co nc rete to ensure adeq uate durabi lit y :
Exposure Category S applies to concrete in contac t wi th
so il or water contai ning deleterious amounts of wate rsolub le
sulfate ions as defined in Section 404.4. J.
Exposure Category P appli es to conc rete ill contact wilh
water requiri ng low permeabilit y.
Exposure Category C applies to reinfo rced and prestressed
conc rete ex posed to conditi o ns that require addition :!!
protection against corros ion of reinforcement. Severity \ ,~.
exposure within each category is defined by classes W l rl i
increasing nume ri cal values representin g increasingly se w n '
ex posure conditi ons. A classific ation of "0" is assign'l
when the exposu re severity has negligib le effect or docs Il {;~
apply 10 (he s t ~c tura l membe r.
Exposure Category F is subd ivided into four e xposure
classes. However only Exposu re Class FO appl ies II :
Phili ppine condition; Exposu re C lass F J. Exposure Clas!.
F2. Exposure Class F3 do no t apply as it involve concrete
exposed 10 cycles of freez ing and thaw in g, in conti nuous
comaC I with lllo islU re, and whe re e xpos ure 10 deic illt.
c he micals is <l nli cipatcd:
Exposure Class FO is assigned to co ncrete that wi ll not b~

exposed to cycles o f freeli ng a nd th a win g.
Exposure Category S is subdivided into four
classes:
CXPOS l!I"(.:
403.9.8 "Acceptance Criteria Jor MOIII!'II' Fmmc.\ B(I.\"('(/ Oil

Srruc:lurof TexrillK (Ael 374. 1-05)" is declared to be p iHl of
this Code as if fu ll y set forth he rei n.
Exposure Class SO is assigned for condi ti ons where n,

water-so lu ble sul fate concen tration in CO il tact wi th COllen.:lt:
is low and injuri ous sulfate attack is not a conce rn .
403 .9.9 "Accrl'wl1cr Criferia Jor Spel."ia/ UlliJOIu/ed

Pn.fr- Tt'usinl1rd Precast Strllclllr(J/ Wafl.\ Bused 011
Valida/iot! Fe.flif/g (AC T ITG-5 . 1-07) ,. is dCcJiln:d to be part
of th is Code as if fu ll y SC I fo rth herei n.
EXJlosure C lasses Si t S2, and 53 arc assigned for

structural concrelc members ill direct contact with solub le
su lfales in soil or W.1IC r. The severity o f exposure increases
frolll Expos ure Cl ass S I to S3 based on th e marc crili ciil
val ue of Illc<ls urcd water-sol uhle sul fate COllcclltral ion ill
soi l or Ihe concentra tion of dissolved su lfate in Willer. Sea
\v:llcr expos ure is clClss i(jed CIS Ex pos ure Class S I.
ASSOCI(l\ IOII
of Slfl Jr:luraj Er)g inecr$ of tile Phil ippines
CHAPTER 4 . Concre le
Exposure Category P is subdivided into two expos ure

classes:
Exposure C lass PO SlIllcturaJ members should be assigned
when there nre no speci fic penncnbility requirements.
to
Exposure Class PI is assigned all the bas is of the need for

co ncrete 10 ha ve a low permeability to water when the
permeation of water into concrete might reduce durability or
affect the inten ded functio n of the stru ctural member.
Exposure Class P I should typically be ass igned when other
exposure classes do not app ly. An example is an interior
wa ter tank.
Exposure Category C is subdivided into three ex posure

classes:
~ - 19
404.5 Special Exposure C onditions
Concrete that will be subject to the exposure given in Table

404-2 shall confonn to the corresponding maximum watercementiti ous materi als ratios and minimum specified
concrete compressive strenglh requirements o f that t:lblc.
404.6 Uequirements for Concrete Mixtures
404.6.1 Based on th e expos ure classes assigned from Table
404- 1, concrete mixtures shall comply with ti~e JIlost
res trictive requirements accord ing to Table 404 2. '.
404.6.2 Calcium chl oride as an admi xture shall not be used
in concrete to be exposed to severe or very seve re su lfate
co ntaini ng solutions, as defin ed in T able 3.1 of AC I 222R.
Exposure Class CO is assigned when exposure conditions

do not require addi tional protection against the initiation of
corros ion of reinforcement
404.7 Alternative Cemenlitio us Materials for Sulphate

Exposure
Exposure Classes C l and C2 are assigned
404.7.1 Alternati ve combinat ions of cementitious materials

to those listed in Table 404-2 shall be permitted when tested
for sulfate resistance and meeting the criteri a in Table 404-
reinforced
and prest ressed concrete members depend ing on the degree
of exposure 10 ex ternal so urces of moisture and chlorides in
se rvice.
10
Exa mples of external so urces of chlorides include concrete

in direct contact with deicing chemicals, saIl, salt water,
brackish water, seawater, or spra y from these sou rces.
404.3 Ge nera l
404.3 .1 The v.lue of /",. sh.1I be the greatest of the values
required by Section 404.3. 1, for du rabi lit y in Section 404,
and for structural strength requirement s and shall apply for
mi xt ure proponioni ng in Section 405.4 and for evaluation

and (lCceplance of concrete in Secti on 405.7. Concrete
mixtllres shall be proportioned 10 comply with the
maxi mum watcr-ccrnen ti tious material rat io ( w/em) and
other requirem ents based on the exposure class ass igned to
tile concrete structural member. All cememili ous matelials
fi pecified ill Secti on 403.3. 1 and the combina ti ons of these
materials shall be included in calculating the w/cm of the
co ncrete mixture.
404.3.2 The maximulll wlew limi{,s in Section 404 do not
appl y to light weigh t concrete.
404.4 Ex pos ure C ate go ries and Classes

404.4.1 ' nlC engineerof-record :->h<111 assig.n exposure
clas:->cs based on th e scverit y of the anti cipated ex posu re of
structural concrete. members for each ex posure category
acco rdin g to Table 4()4- I.
3.
404.8 Water-Cemcntitious Materials Ualio
The
waler~cementiti o u s
materi als ratios specified in Tables
404- 1 and 404-2 shall be ca lcul ated using the weight of

cement meeting ASTM C 150. C 59SM. C 845 or C 11 57
plus the weight of ny as h and other pozzolans meeting
ASTM C 6 18, slag meeting ASTM C 989, and s ilica fu me
meeti ng ASTM C 1240, if any.
404.9 Co rrosion Protection of Reinforceme nt

404.9.1 For corrosion
concrete,
maximum
of rc inforce ment in
watc r soluble chl oride ion
concentrations in hard ened co ncrete at ages from 28 to 42
days contributed from the ingredients, including water,
aggregates, cementitious materi als and admixtures fihall not
exceed the limits of Table 404-2. When testin g is performcd
to determine water soluble chloride ion co ntent, test
proced ures shall conform to AS TM C 121 8.
protecti on
404.9.2 If concrete with reinforce ment will be ex posed
to
chlorides from sal\. salt water, hrackish \...lter. se<l Will er Of

spray fro m Ihese sources, requirements of Table 404 -2 for
water water-cementitious materials ratio and concrete
stren gt h and the minim um co ncrete covcr requiremen ts of
Secliol1 407.8 shall be sil ti sfied . In addition, sec Section
418. 15 for unhondcd pres tressed tendons.
111
Natlollal Structura l Code of the Pililippin es 6 Eclition Volum e 1
CHAPTEH 4 " Concrele
Table 404" I Exposure Calegories And Classes
c0
c'
c
>
B
U
"
V>
--------_.
..
~.,.
_[i_
Condition
---------- -- -- -- ---- -
--w~-i~-~~-~ojui;!e'--
.~------
N/A
'"
"'
Moderate
.q
-
.;:
.;
...
_-
"
--
(SO~) in
Titious
t--~at:?!~
N/A
SO
50'1 <0.10
50.1 < 150
PI
OA5
3t
N/A
N/A
SI
0.10 ::;50.1 < 0.20
150:;;50.<1500
P2
OA5
31
N/A
N/A
F3
0.45
31
N/A
0.20::; 504
SO~
:;;
2.00
Seawater
1500:5 SO. S
10,000
504 > 10,000
> 2.00
--~--
[n contact with water where
~-~--~.-.-. "
..
Calcium
Chloride
ASTM
CI157
ASTM
Ct50
ASTM
C595
No Type
No Type:
No
rnHiclion
n:wiClion
Re,tric~ion
N/A
17
NoT)"p
rewiClion
0.50
28
JJ ,
Admixture
W(MS) .
In contnc\ with wtller where

permeability is not required.
.
N/A
Ccmentitiou$ Materials + Types
permeability is not required .
PI
~
Ccmcn-
N/A
PO
Required
Limits on
Air Content
SI
---"
.....,-,,-,--Dissolved
-- 1 - - '
N/A
Additional Mil,limum Requirements
17
~:.o
"
MPa
N/A
3' .3 rl
'"n.
w/cm*
F0
S3
Severe
._ CiUIS.
water, ppm
S2
Very
Min.
f..,
sulfate
V>
Severe
Max.
~ht
V> 0.
;:0
SUft
"-"
sulfate (SO.) in
soil. percent by
f-
TabJc 404-2 Requirements for Concrete by Exposure Class
No
MS
IS (<70)
Restriction
(MS)
"'---
IP (11$)
S2
V,
31
0.45
No'
HS
IS 70)
I'cnnit!ed
(l1S)
~------------.---~
NtA
CO
II' (IlS) +
Concrete dry or protected

from rnoistme
S3
o~
'g
0
0
"E
u
u
"
". e.S:
0
"o
/"vfooerate
CI
U ~,
Severe
__
C2
3I
pouolan or
slag! or IS
Poaolan
or Slag II
70)
(I1S) +
Concrete exposed to moisture and

an cxtemal source of chloride from
salt, brackish water, seawater, 0'
spray from these sources.
HI
..
[>07.lolan or
.\I~g
.-- " .~-
url..2
Concrele exposed to moisture

but not to external sources of
chloride.
0.45
V+
NIA
17
0.50
28
HS+
Pozz.o!an
or Slag
Not
I'cnnillcd
II
None
--PI
None
WJter",lublc
jon (0-) wntem;n
Ma~;mum
<"bloride
concrele. [>Crcelll by weight
. __ ._~~_m."nl /I
............".-
CO
.. __.
NIA
C!
N/A
1 - ----C2
OAO
--
Related Provisions
Reinforced
Concrele
I're,lre,,:.cd
17
I.{X)
0.06
17
0.30
0.06
None
0.06
Section 407.8.5,
Section 418.17"
--
35
0.15
etHlCR'le
..-..
Fnr /ighnw:ig/rl CQIl(rClc. sa .<:;telion 404.1.2.

tA/ICI7I(lliI'( (Olllbifl(lliOIiS of (t'IIlC/l{illnIlS lIlaleria/.r of IhoJc Ii.llcd ill Table 4042
.t/wll hc fiulllilled II"hcli Inled for .HI/fall": resislalla and 1Il(.'('Iing Ihe cdlui(l ill
Sr("lioli 404.7.1.
I For .{C(/\WU('t" t.I"POS"I"c. 0111<'1" IY{lI'J of porl/muf (("IIICI1/.1 willi Iric(lleium (I/ulllim/{c
(C3A) (OIllI'IIH /(I! 10 10/1(,(((111 Ol"C p<,t"IIli(tcd i.llllI' II"/cm dol'S 1101 c.\"("ad 0.40.
f OlliN 1II'(li/ab/e IY{JtS of (('m,'/II .\11(11 0.1 "r:l'lIe III or 1".1'IIC / arc I!rmill<'lf In DI{losurc
Cia.l.lcs S I or S2 if Illc eM ("(ml('llis ar(' less IIIan <'I or .5 /It'f("C(II. rCS{J{'clil'l:ly.
II nl(' Onlmllil (If Ih,' spccific .lOI"("C of 111<, P(!UO/(lil or s/ag /() /", uud shall Iwl be: I{'ss
I/rOIi Ih" III/ifIll/II rlilli has h"fli (/('/{'Imill('d by .\eni(c r<'(ord 10 illlflW\'(' Jill/au
U'SiJIWlI."e "hell lI.t,.d ill (1lllOde (1IIlraillillg 7)p<' V all/<'liI. A/Icrn(llild)". Ill<' OlnoulII
of 1/1<' spccific ./IllI/"(C of Ih" po::zoiall or .>Iog 10 b(' USN! .Iha/lllOl hI' Ic$.\ Ihwi 111('
(1!1!,,11111 1".II"d ill (1("("01"<10/1("(' willi ASTM CI012 alld //l('('lillg Ihe criluia ill ,'),'(Iion
104.7./.
K WOIN.w/ulll,' chloridc illli (OIlI(,lIllhal iJ nmll"ilml('dfrom Ill(' illf.:r('diclli.t illcluding
WOIN. agKI"('j:a/is. ("('III('IlIIliIJIlS IIIllIFfia/x. Wid ailmi.tiur('J J/w/l bc dcl('(millcd 011 Ihl'
(IIII(/"('IC mixllirc by ASTM el218M (J( (/~(' "('I"'fCIl 28 (Jnd 42 d(ly.f .
Rr</lIil"(lIII'IIIJ (:fS('({ioll 407.R.5 .,Iwl! he .wlisfir(/. Sr(' S('clillil 41R.17 for lIlI/lIIlIded
1<'11"011.1
/\SSOci8tion of Structur<1i El1qincefs of t!~e Philippinos
CHAPTER 4 -Concrete
4-21
Table 404-3 Req ui rcments fo r Estobl ishi ng Suitabilit y of
Ccrncntitious Materials Combinations Exposed to Water

Soluble Su lfate
EXpOsure
Class
AI6 months
51
0.10 percent
S2
0.05 percenl
A I 18 monlhs
405.1 Notations
fr = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
Irr ; ;: required average compressive strength of concrete

used as Ihe basis
proportions, MPa
for
se lecti o n
of
conc rete
f.., = average splitting tensile strength of lightweight

aggregate concrele, MPa
s
Ss
;;;: standard deviation, MPa
= sample standard dev iat ion, MPa
405.2 General
405.2.1 Concrete shall be propol1io ned to provide an
average compressive strength , fe r as prescribed in Section
405.4.2, as well as sat isfy the durability criteria of Section
404. Concrete s hall be produced to minimize frequency of
strengths below Fe as prescribed in Seclion' 405.7.3.3. r:()r
concrete deSigned and constru cted in accord ance with the Cod(;,
J,' shall not be less than 17 MPa.

405.2.2 Requirement s for fl' shall be based on tests o!'
cyl inders made and tested as prescribed in Section 405.7.3.
405.2.3 Unless otherw ise specified,f, sha ll be based on 28day tests. If oth er than 28 days , test agc for
shall be ,,'
indicated in design drawings or specifications.
r,.
405.2.4 Where design criteria in Sections 408.7 .1.

412.3.4(4) . and 422.6.6. provide for use of a splilli l"
tensile strength val lie of concrete. laborato ry leS IS shall h:

made in accordance with Specification for Lig/Jtweig.'
Aggregates for Structural Concrete (ASTM C 330)
establi sh val ue offe, correspondin g to speci fied values ofI. .
405.2.5 Splitting tensile strength tests shall not be used . ,
basis for field acceptance of concre tc.
405.2.6 Steel
fib c r ~ reinfoJ'ced
conc re te shall conform
ASTM C1 116. The minimu mfc' for steel fib e r-reinfo!'l

concrete shall conform to 405.2.1.
405.3 Sel ection of Concrete Proportions
405.3.1 Proportions of mate rials
establi shed to provide:
I,
for concrete shall
be
WorkiJb ility and consistency to pe rmit co ncrete to L

worked readil y into (orms and around reinforcel),:
N<1tional Stru clur,l l Cod(-! of thf~ PI1ilippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
4-22
CHAlyrEFI
- Concrete
under conditions of placement to be employed without

segregation or excessive bleeding.
Table 405-1 Modification Factor for Standard Lk'\"i;J.;ioll

When Less Than 30 Tests arc Available
----------- - -.-.~---.-.----,~---~
2.
Resistance to special exposures as required by Section

404.
3.
Conformance with strength tcst requirements of Section

40S.7.
Number of Tests I
Modification
Fac[(j,:
Less than 15
Usc Table 405-2
I_~~~~~~~~~~_I Standard Dcviatio..~~_]_
...... 1
~-------------------------I---~----
1.16
15
--~------~ - --
405.3.2 Where different materials arc to be used for

different portions of proposed work, each combination shall
be evaluated.
20
----~---.---
30 or more
405.3.3 Concrete proportions, including w<\tcr-cementitious
1.08
- - - -- 103
1.00
materials ratio, shall be established on the basis of field

experience and/or trial mixtures with materials to be
/ IllIerpo/all! Jor IIIlermedwle /lumber of lesl:..

1 Modified slandard devialioll {() be IIsed to determine rNjllired
.\/reIJgth f" ji"O/lI Section 405.4.2.1
employed (see Section 405.4), except as permitted in

Section 405.5 or required by Section 404.
405.4.2 Required Average Strength
405.4 Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience

and Trial Mixtures, or Both
-I
Ii),/ .."
405.4.2.1 Required average compressive strengthfcr used
H::;
the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the

larger of Equation (405-1) or (405-2) using the sample
standard deviation, S.I' calculated in accordance with Section
405.4.1 Sample Standard Deviation
405.4.1.1 or 40S.4.1.2.
405.4.1.1 Where a concrete production facility has test

records not morc than 12 months old, a sample standard
deviation, SJ> shall be established. Test records from which a
F,
standard deviation
Usc the larger value computed from Eq. 405-\ and 405 :'>,
or:
I.
2.
3.
.'1.11
is calculated:
Must represent materials, quality control procedures

and conditions similar to those expected, and changes
in materials and proportions within the test records shall
not have been morc restricted than those for proposed
work.
Must represent concrete produced to meet a specified
strength or strengths i'c within 7 MPa of that specified
for proposed work.
Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two
groups of consecutive tests totaling at least 30 tests as

defined in Section 405.7.2.4, except as provided in
Section 405.4.1.2.
405.4.1.2 Where a concrete production facility docs not
have test records meeting requirements of Section
405.4.1.1(3), but docs have test records [Jot more than 12
months old based on 15 to 29 consccutive tests. a standard
sample deviation S" shall be established as -[Ile product of
the calculatcd sample standard deviation and the
modification factor of Tahle 405-1. To be acceptable, test

records shall Illeet the requircments or Section 40S.4.I.I,
Items I and 2, and represent only a single record of
consecutive tests that span a period of not less than 4S
calendar days.
3SMPa:
F"
F,
-I-
(405 !)
1.34 s,
./", + 2.33 s, - 3.S
/",.>3SMPa:
t" = t, +
t"
(405-1)
1.34.1,
= 0.90 F, + 2.33
(40S-3)
.I.,
Use the larger value computed from Eq. 405-1 and 405-3.
405.4.2.2 When a concrete production facility docs not have.
ficld strength test records for calculation of standard
deviation meeting requirements of Section 405.4.1.1 ()'"
405.4.1.2, required average strength fu shall be dctermined
from Table 405-2 and documentation of average strength
shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 405.4.3.
Table 405-2 Required Average Compressive Strength

When Data are not Available to Establish a Standard
Deviation
Less than 21 M Pa
I,
21 '5,[, ::; 15
./', "'" g.J
/\SSOCl,:ltlon of Stn!ctuf(ll Enqll"lcers of
-I-
7.0
I. Jill', .,. S.II
tI)(~
Philippine;
CHAPTER 4 . Co ncrele
405.4.3 Documentation of A vCl'age Strength.
6.
DocumelHalion that proposed concrete proportions will

produce an average compressive strength equal (0 or greater
than required average comprcssive strength (see Section
405.4.2) SIHtJl consist of a lield strength test record , several
strength test records, or trial mixllIrcs.
405.4.3.1 When test records in accordance with Sections
405.4.1.1 and 405.4.1.2, arc used to demonSlratc Ihat
proposed co ncrete propo/lions wi ll produce the required
average slrcngthf'l"l'" (see Section 405.4.2), such records shall
represclllmutcrinls and conditions similar to those expected.
Changes in materials, conditions and proportions within the
tes t records shall not have been more restricted than th ose
for proposed work. For the purpose of documenting average
strength potenti<lI. test records consisting of less than 30 but
Tlolless than J 0 consecutive tests may be used, provided test
records encompass a period of time not less than 45 days.
Required concrete propol1ions may be established by
interpolation between the stren gths nnd proponions of two
or more test records each of which meets other rcquiremeOis
of this section.
405.4.3.2 When ;.Hl acceptable record of field test results is

not available, concrete proportions estab!ished from trial
mixtures meeting the following restrictions shall be
pcnniltcd:
I.
Combination of materials shall be those for proposed

work.
2.
Tria! mixtures hav ing proportions and consistencies

required for proposed work shall be made using at IC<lsl
three different wa ter,ceJ11entiti ous materials ratios or
ccmelltitious materials cOlllel1ls that will produce <l
range or s trengths cllcomp'lssing the req uired averOlgc
st ren gt h .I'm and meet the dllra bilit y requirements of
Sectiol1 404.
3. Trial mixtures shall be designed to produce a slump

withi n 20 mill of maximum permitted. and ror airentrained concrete, within O.5 percent of maximum
allowable air content , or within the toleranc e !ipecified
for the proposed Work .
4.
For each walcr-ccmemit iOlls mmcrials ratio or

cememitiolls malcri.ds content. at Icast three tcst
cylinders for each lest age shall be made a nd clIreli in
accordance wilh "Method (~r Making alld Cllrilll{
COl1crele [e.I{
SPl'Cillll'IIS ill
dw Labo/'{llory" (A STM C
192). Cylinders shall he tested at 2& d:1YS or at test age

designntcd for determination ()f.r,~
5.
From results of cyl inder tcsl.~. :l curve sl1<l1l he plotted

show ing relationship betw ee n wHler-cC111cnlitiollS
materials ralin or c{~mc!l[itious materials content and
com pressive strength OIt desi gnillcd tesl age.
423
Maximum water-ccmentitious materials ratio or

minimum cementitious matcrials conlent for concrete 10
be used in proposed work shall be that shown by the
curve to produce the average strength required by
Section 405.4.2, unless a lower water-ccmenlitious
matcrials ratio or higher strength is required by.Section
404.
405.5 Proportion.ing without Field Experience or Trial

Mixtures
405.5,1 If data required by Section 405.4 are not available,
concrete proportions shall be based upon olher ex.periencc
or information, if approved by the engineer. The required
average compressive strength fer of concrete produced with
materials similar to those proposed for use shall be at least
8.5 MPa greate r than the specified compressive strength,fl"'
This alternative shall not be used for specified compressive
strength greater than 35 MPa.
405.5.2 Concrete proponioned by Sect ion 405.5 shall
confonn to the durability requirements of Section 404 and to
com pressive st rength lest criteria of Seclion 405 .7.
405.6 Average Strength Reduction
As data become available during construction, it shall be
pcmliltcd to reduce the amOUrH by whi ch f l"l must exceed
the specified value off ... provided:
I.
Thirty or more lest results are available and average of

test results exceeds th at required by Section 405.4.2 . 1.
using a sa mple standard deviation calculated in

accordance with Section 405.4. 1. 1, or
2.
Fiftee n 10 29 test results arc .wailable and average of

test results exceeds that required by Section 405.4.2 .1.
using n sample standard deviation calculated in
accordance with Seclion 405 .4. 1.2, and
3.
Spcci<ll exposure requirements of Section 404 are met.
405.7 Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete

405.7.1 Concrete shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of Scction 405.7.2 through 405.7.5. Qualined
field testing tech ni cians shall perform tests on fresh concrelc
at the job si te, prepare specimens requircd for curi ng under
fi eld conditions. prepare specimens required for testing in
the laboratory. and reco rd the tempcrnturc of the fresh
concrete when preparing specimens ror st rength tests.
Qualified laboratory technicians shall pcrform all requircd
laboratory lest') .
N('llional Structural Code o! the Pllilippin(!S GIll Edition Votl.Jlne 1
4-24
CHAPTEli 4 .- Concrete
405.7.2 Frequency of Testing
405.7.4 Field-Cured Specimens
405.7.2.1 Samples for strength tests of each class of

concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a
day ,or not less than once for each 120 m3 of concrete, or
not less than once for each 500 m2 of surface area for slabs
405.7.4.1 If required by the engjneer~of~record, rcsults of

strength tests of cylinders cured under field conditions shall
be provided.
or walls.
405.7.4.2 Ficld .. curcd cylinders shall be cured under field

conditions, in accordance with "Practice for Making and
Curing Concrete Test ,)"'pecimens ill Ih(~ Fidd" (ASTM C
31M).
405.7.2.2 On a given project, if the total volume of concrete

is such that the frequency of testing requireo. by Section
405.7.2.1 would provide less than five strength tests for a
given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least nvc
randomly selected batches or from each batch if 'fewer than
five batches are used.
405.7.2.3 When total quantity of a given class of concrete is
less than 40 m3, strength tests arc not required when
evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and
approved by the engineer.
405.7.2.4 A strength test shall be the average of the
strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of
concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for
determination offe.
405.7.3 Laboratory-Cured Specimens
405.7.3.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in
accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete" (ASTM C 172).
405.7.3.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and
laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM
C 3 J M) and tested in accordance with "Test Method for
Compressil'e Strength (~r Cylindrico! Concrete 5jJecimefls"
(ASTM C 39M).
405.7.3.3 Strength level of an individual class of concrete

shall be considered satisfactory if both the following
requirements are met:
I.
Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive

strength tests (see Section 405.7.2.4) equals or exceeds
I, .
2.
No individual strength test (average of two cylinders)
falls below.r by more than 3.S MPa, when f'r is 35

MPa or less; or by Illore than 0.1 Of'e when Fe is more
than 35 MPa.
405.7.3.4 If either or the requirements of Section 405.7.303
arc not mel, steps shall be taken to increase the average or
subsequent strength test results. Requirements of Section
405 .7.5 shall be observed if the requirement of' Item 2 of
Section 405.7.3.3 is nol mel.
405.7.4_3 Field-cured test cylinders shall be molded at the

same timc and from the same samples as laboratory-cured
test cylinders.
405.7.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete

shall be improved when strength of field-cured cylinders at
test age designated for determination of fe is less than 85
percent of that of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
The 85 percent limitation shall not apply if field-cured
strength exceedsf,. by more than 3.5 MPa.
405.7.5 Investigation of
Low~Strength
Test Results
405.7.5.1 If any strength test (see Section 405.7-2.4) of

laboratory-cured cylinders falls below specified values of Ie
by more than 3_5 MPa (see Section 405.733. Item 2) or if
tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
protection and curing (see Section 405.7.4.4), steps shall be
taken to ensure that !oad-carrying capacity of the structure is
not jeopardized.
405.7.5.2 If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is

confirmed and calculations indicate that load-carrying
capacity is significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from
the area in question in accordance with "M(!(hod of
Obtaining alld Testing Drilied Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete" (ASTM C 42M) shall be permitled. In such cases,
three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than
3.S MPa below specified value off,.
405.7.5.3 If concrete in the structure will be dry under
service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperatures
ISoC to 25C, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for
seven days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in
the structure will be Illore than superficially wet under
service conditions, cores sh;dl be immersed in water for al
least 40 hours and be tested wet.
405.7.5.4 Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall
be considered structurally adequate if the avcnlge of three.
cores is equal to at !east 85 percent 01'/,. and if no single
corc is Jess than 75 percent ofF.. Additional testing of coreS
extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength
results shall be permitted .
Association of Structural Enqll inors of tile PhdlPPIIWS
405.7.5.5 If criteria of Section 405 .7.5 .4 arc not met, and if

suuctural adequacy remains in doubt, the engineer of record
shall be permilled to order a strength evaluation in
accordance with Section 420 for the Cjllestionable portion of
the structu re, or lake other app ropriate action.
405.7.6 Sleel Fiber-Reinforced Concrele
405.7.6.1 Acceptance of !'acei libcr-rcinforccd concrete used

in beallls in accordance with 41l.6.6.1(6) shall be
determined by testing in accordttnce with ASTM C J609. In
addition, strength tes tin g shall be ill accordance wi th
405.7.1.
405.7.6.2 Steel tiber-reinforced concrete shall be co nsidered

acceptable for shear resistance if co nditions ( I), (2), and (3)
are satisfied:
1.
2.
3.
!i
The weight of deformed sleel fibers per cubic rneter of

concrete is greater (han or equal to 60 kg.
The residual strength obtained from Ocxural testing
in accord;lI1ce with ASTM CI609 al <I mid-span
deflection of 1/300 of the span length is greater ilwn or
equ al [090 percent of the measured first-peak stre ngth
obtained from a Ocxural tcs t or 90 percent of the
slrenglh corresponding to J, [rom Eq . (409 10).
whichever is larger; and
The residual strength obtained from fl exural tcs tin g in
accorda nce with ASTM C 1609 at .1 mid-span deflecti on
of 1/ 150 of the span length is greater than or eq ual to 75
percc m of the measured fi rst- peak stre ngth obtained
from a flexufnl test or 75 perce nt of the stren gth
corresponding to f, frolll Eq . (409- 10). whi t hcvc r is
large r.
405.8 Preparation of Equipment and Place of J)eposit

405.8.1 Preparation before concrete pl<lcement shall include
the following:
1.
All equipment for mi xing and transponing co ncrete

shall be clea n;
2.
All debris shall bc rcmoved rro m Sp<ICCS to be occ up ied

by concret e;
3.
Forms shall be properl y coa ted;
4.
Masonry filler II nits th ill will be in cont3C1 wil h

co ncrete shall be weI! drench ed;
5.
Reinforcement sha ll he thoroug hl y dean of dc le(Criotls

coatings :
6.
Water shall be removed from place of deposit before

co ncret e. is placed unless a trernie is (0 he used or unl ess
ot herwise permitted by lhe engi neer:
7.
4-25
All iait<lIlce an d other unsound materia! shall be

removed before additi onal concrete is placed agains t
hardened concrete.
405.9 Mixing
405.9.1 All concrete shall be mi xed unt il there is a uniform

distributi on of materials and shall be discharged completely
before mi xer is recharged.
405.9.2 Read y-mi xed concrete shall be mixed and delivered
in accordance with requirements of "Specifications for
Ready Mixed COllerete" (ASTM C 94M) or "Specifica tiolls
Jor COII Cf'ere Made by Volumerric Batching and COlllinllolls
Mixillg " (ASTM C 685M).
405.9.3 Job-mixed concre te shall be mixed in accordance
wi th th e following:
I.
Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of an appro ved

Iype;
2.
Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the

lllanuf,lcturcr;
3.
Mixing sh all be continued for at least
4.
After all malerials are in lhe dru m, unless a shorter lime

is shown to be satisfactory by the mi xing un iformit y
tests of "Specifications for Ready-Mixed COflcre{(:"
1 ~ l/2
minutes
(ASTM C 94M) ;
5.
Materials handling, batching and mixing shall conform

to applicable provisions of "Specifications f or ReadyMixed COllcrete" (ASTM C 94 M) ;
6.
A de wilcd record shall be kept to identi fy:
a.
Number of batr hes produced;
b.
Proporti ons of materials used;
c.
d.
Approximatc
structure;
location of final
deposi t in
Time and date of mixing and placing.
405.10 Conveying
405.10.1 Concrete shall be co nveyed from mix er to place of

fi nal depo!\it by me thods th ilt wi ll preven t separation or loss
of materi al",.
405.10.2 Conveyin g equipmen t shall be capable of
provid ing a su ppl y of concrete at si te of place ment wi thout
.separati on of ingredients and without interrupti ons sufficicnt
to permit Joss or plas ti ci ty b ~lwcen successive increments.
111
N3 honl.~! S tructural Code or the Philippines 6 Edillon Volume 1
4-26
405.11 Depositing
405. 11.1 Concrete shall be deposi ted as nearly .s
practicable in its final position to avoid segregati o n due to
fe-hand li ng or Oowing.
405.11.2 Concreti ng shall be ea rned on at such a rat e th at
405.12.3.2 Accelerated curing s hal l provide a compressive

s trength of concreLe at the load stage considered at least
equal to required design strength at th ai load stage.
405.12.3.3 Curing process sholl he such as 10 produce
concrete with a durabil ity at least eq~li va lent to the curing
method of Sccti on 405 .12. 1 Or 405.12.2.
concrete is at all times plastic and fl ows readil y in to spaces

between rcinforccnwn!.
405.11 .3 Concrele th.t has partially hardened or been

con taminated by foreign materials shall not be deposi ted in
the structul"C;.
405.12.4 When required by the engineer, suppl ementary

strength tests in accordance with Secti on 405 .7.4 sh all be
perfomled to assure Lhat curing is satisfactory.
405. 13 Hot Weather Requirem ents
405.11.4 Re-tcmpcred concrete or concrete that has been remixed after initial set shall.nol be used unless approved by
the engi neer:-of-record.

405.11.5 AfLer conc~eting is started. it shall be carded on as
a continu ous operati on until pl.a cing of a panel or secti on, as
defined by ils boundaries or prcdcrcnnjncd joints, is
co mplet ed, except as permitted ' or prohi bi ted by Secti on
406.4.
During hot weather, proper attent ion sha ll be given to

ingredients, production methods, handl in g, placi ng.
protection and cu rin g [Q prevent excessive concrete
temperamres or water evaporat ion th at may im pair required
s tren,gllt or ser:'ic~abilit y of the member or s (ruclUrc.
. ,,"t; ~)i: '/
405.11.6 Top surfaces of veI1icall y fo rmed lifts shall be

generall y leve l.
405.11.7 When const rucl ion joints are required. joints shall
be made in accordance wit h Seclion 406.4,
405.11.8 All conCrele shall be thoroughly consolid.ted by
su itable means during placement and shall be thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtu res and
into corne rs of forms .
405. 12 C u ring
405.12. 1 COllcre le (other tha n high -ea rlystren gth) shall be
mai ntained a'bove wOe and in a moi st condition for at Icast
lhe fi rst sev~n days after placement, except when cu red in
acco rd ance with Seclion 405.12,3.
405. 12.2 High-cnrly-s lrength concrele shall be ma intained
above lOoe and in a moist condi ti o n for at least (he first
three days, cxcc~t w hen cu red in accordance wilh Section
405. 12.3 .
405.12.3 Accelera ted C uring
405. 12.3.1 C uring by hig h-press ure stenll1, steam at
atmospheri c pressure, heat and mo isture o r other accepted
processes, Ill Hy be employed to accelerate strength g nin and
redu ce time of cu ring,
Association of Stru ctu ra l Engineers of the Philippines
.. '
'\:~il~~f;.":' .:,
,':
,: ,~:l}.,~.<~ ~~
I.
2.
427
The Slructural analysis and concrete strength data used

in planning and implementing form removal and
shoring shall be furnished by the co ntractor to tbe
building official when so requested .
No co nstru ction loads shall be supp0l1ed on, or any
shoring removed from, any part of {he slmcturc under
constructioll exce pt when that pan ion of the structure in

com bination wi th remaining forming and shoring
sys tem has sufficient stre ngt h to ~ upport safely its
weight and IOilds placed thereon.
406.1 Design of Formwork
406.1.1 Forms shall result in a final structure thaI conforms

to shapes, lines and dimensions of the members as required
by the design drawings and spccificmions.
406.1.2 Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to

prevent leakage of mortar.
I
I
406.1.3 Fonns shall be properly braced or tied together to

maintain posi lion and shape.
406.1.4 Forms and their supports shall be designed so as
not 10 damage previously placed structure.
406.1.5 Design of fo nnwork shall include co nsideration o r
the following factors:
1.
Rate and method of placing concrete;
2.
Construction loads, including verti cal, horizon tal and

impact loads;
3.
Special form requi rements for constluction of shells.

folded plates , do mes, architect ural concrete or similar
types of elemen ts.
3.
Sufficient slIenglh shall be demonstrated by structura l

anal ysis considering proposed loads, strength of
forming and shoring system and concrete strength data.
Concrete streng th data may be based on tests of fi eld
cured cylinde rs or, when approved by the en g ineer~o f
record, on ot her procedures to evaluate concrete
slrength.
406.2.2.2 No construction loads exceeding the combination

of superimposed dead load plus specified live load shall be
supported on any unshorcd pOr1i on of the stmctu rc under
constnlction, unless anal YS is indicates adequate strength to
support such additional loads.
406.2.2.3 Form suppo rts for prestressed concrete members
shall not be removed uillil suffi cient prestressing has been
app lied 10 enable pre.o:;tresscd members to carry their dead
load and an ticipated construction loads.
406.3 Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete
406.1.6 Forms for prestressed conc rete members shall be

designed alld constnlctcd to permi t 1ll0VC IllCIlI of Ihe
member wi lhollt damage duri ng application of prestressin g
force.
406.3.1 Conduits. pipes an d sleeves of any material not

h,mnful 10 concrele and within limi tations of Ihis subsection
Illay be embedded in eOllcretc with approval of the engineer.
provided they arc /lot considered 10 rcpl ace struclUratty the
disp laced concrete.
406.2 R emoval of Forms, Shores a nd Reshorin g
406.3.2 Conduits and pipes of alumin um shall not be

embedded in siructura l co ncrete unless effectively coared or
covered to prevent alu min uffificoncrete reaction or
electrol yt ic action bet ween aluminum and steel.
406.2.1 Removal of Forms
Forms shall be rem oved in such a manner as nol to impair

safety and servicc(lbility of the stm cture. Concrete to be
exposed by form re mova l shalt ha ve suffi cient st rength not
to be damaged by removal opcnl tioll.
406.2.2 Rcmov:;1 of Shores and n cshol'ing
The pro visio ns of Secti on 406.2.2.1 through 406. 2.2.1 shall
apply to slabs and heams except whe re cast Oil the grou nd.
406.2.2.1 I3efore starting cons tru clioll , th e co ntra<.:tor shal]

develop a proced ure and schedu le for removal of shores and
imaallatioll of reshorcs nnd for calculating Ihe IOilds
trans ferred to the sll1lcturc during the process.
4Q6.3.3 Conduits, pipcs and sleeves passing through a slab.

wall or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of
the cons tnJ crioll .
406.3.4 Co nduit s
within a co lumn
th e area of <.:fOSS
whi ch is required
and pipes, with their fittings, embedded

sha ll not displace more than 4 pcrcclH of
sectio n on wh ich stren gth is calcu lated or
fo r lire protection.
406.3.5 Except when plans for conduits and pipes arc

approved by th e structural enginee r, co ndu its nnd pipes
embedded within a slab. wall or beam (ot her than those
merely pass ing through) shall satisfy the following:
111
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Vo lume 1
4-28
406.3.5.1 TI,ey shall not be larger ill outside dimension than

one third the overall thickness of slab, wall or beam in
which they are embedded.
406.3.5.2 They shall be spaced not closer than t hrcc

diameters or widths 011 cenler.
406.3.5.3 They shall not imp<lir significantly the strength of
the construction.
406.3.6 Conduits. pipes and sleeves may be considered as
replaci ng slfllclumlly in compression tile di splaced concrete.
406.4.2 fmmediately before new concrete is placed, all

construction joints shall be wetted and standing water
removed.
406.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located so
as not to impair thc strength of the. structurc. Provision shall
be made for transfer
shear and oth er forces through
cOJlstruction joints. Sec Sect ioJl 411.8.9.
or
406.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located within

the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and girders.
406.4.5 Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance
of two times the width of intersecting beams.
provided:
406.3.6.1 They arc not exposed to IlJst ing or other

deterioration.
406.3.6.2 They <Ire of uncoated or galv<lnizcd iron or stcel
406.4.6 Bcams, girders or slabs supported by columns Or

wHlls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in lhe
vert ical SUppOl1 mcmbers is no longer plastiC.
not thinner than standard Schedule 40 sleel pipe.

406.3.6.3 They hnve a nominal inside diameter nO{ over 50
mm and arc spaced
nol
less than three diameters 011 centers.
406.4.7 Bcams, girders, haunches, drop panels and capitals

shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab systcm ,
unless otherwise shown in design draw ings or
specifications.
406.3.7 Pipes and fi ttings shall be designed !O resist effects

of the material, press ure and temperature to which they will
be subjected .
406.3.8 No liquid, gas or vapor. except water not exceeding
30:C or 0.35 MPa pressure, shall be placed in (he pipes
umillhe concre te has mlained its design strength .
406.3.9 In solid slabs. piping. unless it is used for radiant
healing or snow melting. shall be placed between lOp and
bOltom reinforCCIllI!I)( .
406.3.10 Conc rete cove r for pipes. condu it and linings shall
not be less than 40 mill for concrete exposed to earlh Of
wc,lthc r, or less Ihan 20 mm for concrete not exposed 10
weather or in con tact with ground.
406.3.11 Reinforcement wilh an arca not less [han 0.002
times the area of co ncrcte section shall be provided normal
to the piping.
406.3.12 Piping and mouit slwW be so fabricated and

insta lled thai cutt ing. bendin g or displacement of
rei nforccment from its proper lociHion willnOl he requiretl .
406.4 Construction Joints
406.4.1 Surface of concrele constructiun joints shall be
cleaned and laitancc rcmoved.
4-29
Table 407-1 - Minimum Diamelers or Bend

Bar Size
~IO mm Ihrough <1>25 mOl
q,28 mm , ~32 mm and
407.1 Notalions
db
::::: distance from extreme compression fiber to cen troid

of tension reinforcement, mm
;: nominaJ diameter of bar. wire or prestrcs~ing s lrand,
mm
~36 nun
q,42 mm and
~58
mm
Minimulll Diameter
6d,
3d,
10d,
407.4 Bending of Reinforcement
lei = comprcssve
strength of concrete at li me of initia l

preSlress. MP.
= specified yield strenglh or non prestressed
407.4.1 All reinrorcemenl shall be ben I co ld, unless

otherwi se pemlillcd by the engineer-oF-record.
rej nforcemen t, MPa
Ld :; developmeru length,
mOl. See Section 4 12.
407.2 Standard Hooks
"Standard hook " as used in this code is one of the

following:
407.2.1 180-degree bend plus 4d" eXlension, bUI nOI less
than 60 111m at free end of bar.
407.2.2 90-degree bend plus 12d" extension al rree end or
bar.
407.2.3 For stirrup and tie hooks:
I.
q,16 mm bar and smaller, 90-degree bend plus 6(1"

extension at free end of bHr; or
2.
q,20 mm and q,25 mm bar. 90-degree bend , plus 12(/"

extension al frec end of bar; or
3.
$25
nUll
bar and smaller, 135-degrce bend plus 6(h
extension at free end of bar.
407.4.2 Reinforcement panially embedded in concrete

shaH not be field bent , except as shown on the design
drawings or permitted by the engineer-or-record.
407.5 Surface Conditions of Reinfol'eement
407.5.1 At the time concrete is placed, reinforccment shall
be free from mud, oil or other nonmctallic coatings that
decrease bond. Epoxy coatings of steel reinforcement in
accordance with Sections 403.6.3.8 and 403.6.3.9 shall be
pennitted.
407.5.2 Reinforcement, except prestressing tendons. with
ru st, mill scale or a combination of both, shall be considered
satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions (including
height of defonnations) and weight of a hand -wire-brushed
tcst specimen comply with applicable ASTM specifications
re ferenced in Section 403.6.
407.5.3 Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of oi!,
dirt. scale, pitting and excessivc lU St. A light coating of rust
shall be permiltcd.
407.2.4 Seismic hooks as defined in Section 402.

407.6 Placing Reinforcement
407.3 Minimum Bend Diameters
407.3.1 Diameter of bend measured on the inside or the bar.
other Ihan ror stirrups and lies in sizes q,1 0 mm Ihro ugh ~ 16
mm, shallnol be less Ihan Ihe values in Table 407- \.
407.3.2 Inside diameter of bends for sti rrups and tics .shall
not be less than 4db for ~16 mm bar and smaller. For bars
larger (han 4>16 mm, diameter of bend shall be in accordance
wilh Table 407-1.
407.6.1 Reinforcement. prestressing tend ons and ducts

shall be accurately placed and adequately slipponcd before
concrete is placed. and shall be secured against
displacement wilhin to lerances of lhis section.
407.6.2 Un less OIherwise specified hy the engineer-of\!cord , reinrorcemenL , prestressing lendons and preslressing
ducts shall be placed wilhin Ihe followin g tolerances:
407.3.3 Inside diameter of bends in welded wire fabric
(plain or deformed) for stirrups and lies shall not be less

than 4(h for deformed wire larger thall MD40 and 2lh for all
oth er wires. Bends with inside diameter of less than '8d"
shall not be less than 4(", from nearest welded intersection.
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
~30
CHAI'TER 4 . Concrete
407.6.2.1 Tolerance for depth d, and Ilummum concrete

cover in flexural members, walls and compression members
s hall be as follows:
r-
Tolerance on
Effective Dcplh.
Tolerance on d
Minimum Concrete
d ,; 200
_.
Co'vcr
I11Ill
<I> 2UO /TIm
lOmm
10
12mm
- 12 ,nUll
mOl
except that to lerance for the clear distance (0 fonned soffi ts

s hall be minus 6 mill and lOlerance for cover shall not
exceed minus one-third the minimum concrete cover
required by the approved plans or specifications.
407.6.2.2 Tolerance for longitudinal localion of bends and
ends of reinforcement shall be 50 mm except at

discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be
407.7.3 In spirally reinforced or lied reinforced compression

members, clear distance between longitudin al bars shall not
be less than LSd. or less than 40 mm. See also Section
403.4.2.
407.7.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply
also to the clear distance between a contact lap sp lice and
adjacent splices or bars ..
407.7.5 In walls and slabs olher than concrete jOiSl
construction, primary Oexural reinforcement shall not be
spaced farther apan than three times the wall or slab
thickness, nor farther than 450 111m .
407.7.6 Dundled Dars
407.7.6.1 Groups of parallel rein forcing bars bundled in
contact to ac~ as a unit shall be limited to four bars in One
bundle.
12 mill at the discontinuous ends of brackets and corbe ls.
and 25 mm at the discontinuous ends of other members.

The tolerance for concrete cover of Section 407.6 . 2. 1 shall
also app ly at the discontinuous ends of members.
407.6.3 Welded wire fabric (with wire size not greater than
MW30 or M030) used in slabs not exceeding 3 III in span
shall be permitted to be curved from a point near th e top of
s lab over the support to a point near the bottom of slab at
midspan, provided such reinforcement is either continuous
ove r, or securely anchored al, support.
407.6.4 Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for
asse mbly of reinforcement.
Exceptions:
1.
Rein/arcing steel bars are not required by design.
2.
When specifically approved by the engineer4o,f.record,

welding of crossing bars for assembly purposes ill
Seismic Zone 2 may be permit/ed, provided that data
are submitted to the engineer to show that rht?Te is 110
detrimental effect on the actioTl of the structural
member as a result afwelding of the crossing b.ars.
407.7 Spacing Limits for Reinforcement

407.7.1 The mini mulll clear spacing between parallc:J bars in
a layer sha ll he (It. but not less than 25 1l1111 . See also Section
40lA.2.
407.7.2 Where paralic! reinforcement is placed in two or
morc layers, bars in thc upper layers Sh'lll be placed directly
ahove bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between
la yers not less than 25 mm.
407.7.6.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within stilTUPS or

ties.
407.7.6.3 Bars larger Ihan ~36 mm shall not be bundled in
beams.
407.7.6.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated within
the span of flexural members shall term inale at different
points with at least 40db stagger.
407.7.6.5 Where spac ing limitations and minimum concrete
cover are based on bar diameter (//>, a unit of bundled bars
shall be trealed as a single bar of a diameter del;ved from
the equivalent total area.
407.7.7 Prestressing Te ndons and Ducts
407.7.7. 1 Center !0-center spacing
of pre-tensioning
tendons at each end of a member shall not be less than 5db
for wire. nor 4db for strands. except that if concrete strength
at transfer of prestress. c; is 28 MPa or more, min imum
center to center spacing of strands shall be 45 mm for
strands of 12 mm norrtinal diameter or smaller and 50 mm
for strnnds of 16 mm nominal diameter. See also Section
403.4.2. Closer vertical spacing .tnd bundling of tendon s
sha ll be permiHcd in the middle portion of a span.
4
407.7.7 .2 Bundling of post-lensioning duels shall be

permitted if it is shown that concrete can be sati sfactorily
placed and if provision is made to prevent the tendons , wlF ~!!
tensioned, from breaking through (he duct.
Association of Structuf(ll Engineers of the Philippine s
4-31
407.8 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement

407.8.1 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Nonprestressed)
Unl ess a greater cover is required by Section 407.8.6 or
407.8.8, speci fied cover for reinforcement shaJ] nOlless than
Ihe following:
,.
407.8.2 Precast Concrete (Manufactured Under Plant

Control Conditions)
Unless a greater cover is required by Section 407.8.6 or
407.8.8, specifi ed cover for prestressed and nonpres lrcssed
reinforcement , dUCIS. and end fittings shall

following:
CQllcrelc cast against and pcnnancnli y
I.
exposed to earth ........................ ................. 75 mm

2.
mm bar through ~36 nun bar .... .

~I 6 mm bar, MW200 or MD200 wire,
and sJllaller ....................................... .
3.
Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

a. Wall panels:
Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

~20
40mm
~42 mm and ~58 mm bars
4>36 bar and smaller, prestressing
tendons larger than 40 mm and smaller,
MW200 or MD200 wire and smaller. __ ... 20 mm
SO mm
40ml11
b. Olher members:
Concrete not exposed to weather or in
contact with ground:

a.
b.
c.
~42 and .p58 bars, prestressing lendons

larger than 40 mm ................. ,.".. .. .... ......
<1>20 through <1>36 bars, prestressing
Slabs, walls, joists:
.p42 mm and .p58 nUll bars
40mm
~36
20 nun
mm b,lfS and smaller
less than the
Minimum Cover
Minimum Cover
I.
110t
tendons larger than 16 mill through

40mm ...... ......... ........
..............
Beams, columlls:
<P 16 bar and smaller, prestressing
PrimalY reinforcement, tics,

stirrups, spirals .............................. _.... 40 mm
tendons 16 mm diameter and smaller,

MW200 or MD200 wire, and smaller.....
Shells, folded plale members:

.p20 mm bar and larger
20 mm
q,16 mm bar, MW200 or MD200
wire, and smaller ._...................... ......... 12 mill
2.
50 111m
40 mill
30
nll11

contact with ground :
a. Slabs, walls, joists:
<1>42 mm and 4>58 mm bars, prestressing

tendons larger than 40 mm ................
30 mm
Prestressing tendons 40 fnm

.... 20 111m
and smaller ...
4>36 mrn bar and smaller, MW200 or
15 mm
MD200 wire and smaller.
b. Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement db but flol less
than 4J 15 mm and need not exceed ........ 40 mm
Ties, slirrups, spirals ........... ............... 10 mill
c.
Shells, folded plate members:

Prestressing tendons.
mm bur and larger
</>16nll11 bar, MW2000r MD200
wire, and smaller .... ..... .
~20
Nationa l Structural Code of the Pllllippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
20 nun
J5mlll
IOmm
4-32
CHAPTER 4 - Concre le
407.8.6 Corrosive Environmcnts
407.8.3 Cas tln Place Concrete (Prestressed)

407.8.3.1 Un less a greater cover is required by Sections
407 _8_6 and 407.8_8, specified cover for prestressed and
nOllprcstrcssed reinforcement, duc ls and end filtings, shall

not less Ih(lll the following:
Minimum Cover
1.
2.
3.
Concrete cast against and permanently

exposed 10 earth
Concrete exposed
LO Cll11h
.. .
75
lii;ll
or weather:
Wall panels. slabs, joislS
2S mm
Other members ........... .... .
40mm
co ntact with ground:

a.
Slabs, walls, joists
b.
Bc:uns. columns:
c.
In corrosive envi ronments or other severe ex pOsure

conditi ons, amount of concrete protection shall be. s:!iWhly
increased, and the pel1inent requirements for concrete bas.cd
o n applicable exposure categories in Section 40't shall be
met, denseness and nonporosity of protecting concrcle shall
'be considered, or other protection shall be provided.
407.8.6.1 For prestressed concrete members exposed to
corrosive environments or other severe exposure rilleg!"'
such as Ihose defined in Section 404, and whid; .lfC
classi fied as Class T or C in Section 418.4.3. spc:cdl e rl
concrete cover shall not be less (han 1.5 limes tlH: !.', . C tor
prestressed reinforcement required by Sections filJi X.i. <. Iid
407.8.3. This requirement shall be permitted to be \Vaiv~d if
the precompressed tensile zone is not in tensi on under
sus tained loads.
20 mm
Plimary reinforcement
40111111
Tics, stirrups. spirals
25 mm
407.8.7 Future Extensions

Exposed reinforcement, insens and plates inlcndcd for
bonding with future extcnsions shall be prot<~ {;l(;d from
corTOsioll.
Shell s, folded plate members:

<j>16mm bars, MW200 or MD200 wire,
and smaller
......... ". ... ... .. ........ ...... 10 nun
Olher reinforcement
............ lit. > 20 ml11
407.8.3.2 For pres tressed concrete members exposed to
earth , weather o r corrosive environmcnl s. and in which
permissible ten sile s tress of Sec ti on 41 8.5. 1. Item 3. is
exceeded. minimum cove r shall be increased 50 percent.
407.8.3,3 For pres tressed concrcte members manufacturcd
under plant comrol con ditions, min imum concrete cover for
nonpreslressed reinforcement shall be as required in Section
407.8_2.
407.8.8 Fire Proteclion
If the National Building Code, of which the N;Jli () nal

Structural Code of the Philippines (onns a p:lri, jl:qi1frt :: a
thickness of cover for fire protection greater than (he
minimum concrete cover specified in Seciion:. tl( ri .,; . 1
through 407.8.7, such greater thickness shall he ~ p(;(; iI H .. j ,
407.9 Special Reinforcement Details for Columns
407.9.1 Offset B:trs
Offset bent longitudinal bars shall confoml to (he followir'f::
407.9.1.1 Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with (lxis
of co lumn shall not exceed I in 6.
407,8.4 Bundled Bars
For bundled bars, minimum concrete cover shall not be less

than the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but need not be
greater than 50 mill; except for concrete cast against and
permanently exposed to earth, minimum cover shall not be
less than 75 mill.
407.8.5 HC:ld ed Shear Stud J{cinfor(.'clI1cnt
For headed shear stud reinforcement, speci fied co ncrete

cover for the heads or base raits shall not be Ic..o;s than thill
requi red for the re inforcement in the type of member in
which th e headed shear stud reinforcement is pl'lced.
407.9.1.2 Portions of bar above and below all
off~;c(
shall be
parallel to axis of column.

407.9.1.3 Horizontal support at offset bl'n ds ~ ! d1 ; ll~
prov ided by lateral li es, spirals or purts of {Ii;: fL,,!
constru ctio n. Hori zontal suppo rt pro vided shaH lie t1. ;.i;, -J
to res ist o lle and onehalf limes the horizontal ,~}jllp: l(le I H .;f
th e computed force in the inclined portion or :w urr,:'1 11. '.
Late ral lies or spirals. if used, shall be placed /lO! m Oil: rb,q)
150 mOl from po ints o f bend.
407.9.1.4 Offset bars shall be belli before ,,1,''C'nc'" i"
forms. See Section 407.4.
d."
I
i
4-33
407.9.1.5 Where a column face is offset 75 mm or greater.

longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent. Separate dowels,
lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to the offset
column faces, shall be provided. Lap splices shall conform
to Section 412.18.
407.11.3 It shall be permitted to waive the lateral

reinforcement requirements of Sections 407.11, 410.17 and
418.12 where tests and structural analyses show adequate
strength and feasibility of construction.
407.9.2 Steel Cores
Spiral reinforcement for compression members

conform to Section 410.10.3 and to the following:
407.11.4 Spirals
Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite
compression members shall be provided by the following:
407.9.2.1 Ends of structural steel cores shall be accurately
finished to bear at end-bearing splices, with positive
provision for alignment of one core above the other in
concentric contact.
407.9.2.2 At end-bearing splices, bearing shall be
considered effective to transfer not more than 50 percent of
the total compressi ve stress in the steel core.
407.9.2.3 Transfer of stress between column base and
footing shall be designed in accordance with Section 415.9.
407.9.2.4 Base of structural steel section shall be designed
to transfer the total load from the entire composite member
to the footing; or, the base may be designed to transfer the
load from the steel core only, provided ample concrete
section is available for transfer of the portion of the total
load carried by the reinforced concrete section to the footing
by compression in the concrete and by reinforcement.
407.11.4.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continuous

bar or wire of such size and so assembled as to permit
handling and placing without distortion from designed
dimensions.
407.11.4.2 For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals
shall not be less 10 mm diameter.
407.11.4.3 Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed
75 mOl or be less than 25 mm. See also Section 403.4.2.
407.11.4.4 Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be
provided by one and one-half extra turns of spiral bar or
wire at each end of a spiral unit.
407.11.4.5 Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced. if needed.
by anyone of the following methods:
I.
407.10 Connections
407.10.1 At connections of principal framing elements (such
as beams and columns), enclosure shall be provided for
splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage of
reinforcement terminating in such connections.
Lap splices not less than the larger of 300 mm and the
length indicated in one of (a) through (e) below:
a.
deformed uncoated bar or wire
48 db
b.
plain uncoated bar or wire
72 db
c.
epoxy-coated deformed bar or wire.
72 db
d.
plain uncoated bar or wire with a

standard stirrup or tic hook in
accordance with Section 407.2.3 at
ends of lapped spiral reinforcement.
The hooks shall be embedded within
the core confined by the spiral
reinforcement .................................... ........ 48
407.10.2 Enclosure at connections may consist of external

concrete or internal closed ties, spirals or stirrups.
e.
407.11 Lateral Reinforcement for Compression
Members
407.11.1 Lateral reinforcement for compression members
shall conform to the provisions of Sections 407.11.4 and
407.11.5 and, where shear or torsion reinforcement IS
required, shall also conform to provisions of Section 411.
407.11.2 Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite
compression members shall conform (0 Section 410.17.
Lateral reinforcement requirements for prestressing tendons
shall conform to Section 418.12.
shall
2.
(h
epoxy-coated defonned bar or wire

with a standard stirmp or tie hook in
accordance with Section 407.2.3 at
ends of lapped spiral reinforcement.
The hooks shall be embedded within
the core confined by the spiral
..... 48 db
reinforcement
Full mechanical or welded splices in accordance with

Section 412.15.3.
407.11.4.6 Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab in

any story to level of lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
National Structural Code of the Philippines
ell Edition Volume 1
434
CHAPTEH 4 Concrete
407.11.4.7 Where beams or brackets do not frame into all

sides of a column, lics shall extend above tcnninmion of
s piral to uonom of slab, drop panel, or shea r cap.
407. 11.4.8 III columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to

level fit which the diameter or width of capital is twO times
il
Ihm of th e co lumn .
407.11.4.9 Spirals shall be held firmly in place and tru c to

line.
407. 11 .5 Tic reinforcement for compression member!) shall
conform to the following:
407.11.5.1 All non prestressed bars shall be enclosed by

latcral (ies. a( least mID mOl in size for longitudinal bars U!32
111m or smalier. and at least rnl2 mm in ~ize for liI36 mm, rn42
mm. 1.!J58 111m bars. and bundled longitudinal bars.
Deformed wire or we lded wire fabric of equivalent area
s hall be permilled.
407.11.5.2 Vel1ical spac in g of lies shall not exceed 16
longitudinal bar tlinmetcrs , 48 ti e bar or wire diarneters, or
leas t dimensioJl of the compression mem ber.
407.11.5.3 Ti cs sha ll be arranged slich tl1m every corner and
alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral SUppOI1 provided
by the corne r of 11 tic with an included angie of not more
than 135 degrees and a bar shall be nOt fanher than 150 mill
clea r all each side along the lic from such a laterally
supported bar. Where longi tudinal bars arc IOC.HCd around
the perimcte r of a c ircle, a complete circuhu lie shall be
pcnnincd.
4 07. 11.5.4 Tics shill! be locateo vertically not more than on e
half a tic spncing above the lOp of footing or s lab in an y
slOry and shall be spaced as provided herein to nol more
than o ne half a tic spacing below the lowest horizontal
reinforcemellt in slab, drop panel, or shear CHP above.
407.11.5.5 Whe re beams or brackets frallle from fOll r
d irec ti ons into <I co lumn, terminati on of li es not more than
75 mill below reinforcement in sha ll owes t of slI ch beams or
brackcts shall be pennittcd.
407.12 La teral Reinforcement for Flexural Members

407.12.1 Compress io n reinforcemen t in beams shall be
enclosed by lies or stirrups satisfying the size ami spacing
limitations in Section 407 .11.5 or by weld ed wire fabric of
cq uiva icill area. Suc h tics or stirrups shall be provided
throughout the di stan ce where compression re inforcement is
req uired.
407.12.2 Lateral rei nfo rcemcnt fG! nexural framing
members subject to stress reversal s or to to rsion at slIppons
shall consist of closed tics, closed stirrups, or spirals
ex tending around Ihe flexural reinforcement.
407.12.3 Cl osed lies or Slil11Jps may be formed in one picce
by overlapping standard stil11Jp or tie end hooks around a
longi tudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap spliced
with a Class B splice (lap of 1.3Id ), or anchored ill
accordance wi lh Section 4 12. 14 .
407. 13 Shrinkage a nd Te mpera ture Reinforcement
407.13.1 Reinforcement for sh rinka ge and tc mperalllre
st resses normal to fl ex tlrnJ re inforccl'l1ent shal l be provided
in structural slabs whe re the flexural rei nforceme nt extends
in one direction o nl y.
407. 13.1.1 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall
be provided in accordance with ei the r Section 407.J3.2 or
407.13.3.
407.13.1.2 Where shrinkage and tempcrature movements
arc significamiy restrained. the requirement s of Sections
408.3 .4 and 4093.3 sha ll be considered .
407.13.2 Deformed reinforcemcnt co nformin g 10 Sect ion
403 .6 .3 lIsed for shrinkage and temperature reinforcemcnt
shall be provided in accordance with the following:
407.13.2.1 Area of shrinkage and te mp erature reinforcement
shall provide at leflst the fo ll ow ing ra tios of re inforcement

area to gross con crete area, but not less than 0.00 14:
I.
Slabs where Grode 280 and Grade 530

deformed bars arc used ....... ... .. ......... .......... 0 .0020
2.
Slabs where Grade 4 15 deformed bars

or welded wi re fabric (smooth or
deformed) "re used .............................. ...... 0.0018
3.
Slabs where rei nforcement with yield .

stress exceeding 415 MPa measured at
0.00 18 x415
a yield strain of 0 .35 percent is used
or
407.11.5.6 Where ,Hlehor bolls are pklccd in (he top

columns or pe destal s , the bolls shall be enclosed by lateral
reinforcement 111<It al so surrounds at Icit st fOllr vcnkal bars
of the colu mn or pedeslal. The laleral reinrorcement shall be
distributcd within 125 nllll of thc lOp or column or pedcstal.
and shall consist of at least [wo ml2 ml11 or three rnlo nun
bars.
J,
Association of StrtJ clural Englllcers of tile Phil ippines
CHAPTER 4 . COllcrele
435
407.13.2.2 Shri l1kage and tClllpcralu r~ rein forccmcllI shall

be spaced nol f.wher ap,IJ1 than ri vc timcs the sla b lhickness
or 450 mm.
2.
407.13.2.3 AI <t il secti ons whcre requi red. rei nforcc men t for
shrinkage and tcmpe.rillure ~(rcsscs shall develo p the
specified yicld strcngth J~ in (elision in .kccord;lncc wit h
Scclion 41 2.
A l non-con tin uous suppOl1S, the reinforce ment shall be

anc hored to develop 1,. at the face of the support lIs in g II
standard hook satisfying Sec ti on 41 2.6 or headed defonncd
bar sa ti sfying Section 412 .7.
407.13.3 Prestressin g Icndons conforming to Scct ion

403.6.6 used for shrinkage ,lIld temperature reinforcement
shall be provided ill accorda nce wilh the followi ng:
407.14.2.3 The co ntinuous moment reinforcement required

ill Section 407. 14.2.2 shall bc enclosed by transverxe
reinforcement or the Lype specified in Section 4 11.7.4.1.
The transve rse rcinforcemenl Shilll be an chored as specified
ill Section 4 11.7.4.2. The transverse rein forcement need not
be extended thro ugh the coluilln .
407.13.3.1 Tendons shall be proportioned to provide a

mini mu lll average co mpressive Sl rC!\s of 0.70 MPa on gross
COll cretc area using effecti ve prestress, after losses, in
accordance wi th Sccti on 418.7.
407.13.3,2 Spacing of prl.!s lrcssed te ndons shall not exceed
i .8 meter.....
407.13.3.3 WIlen the spacing of pres tressed tcndOlls exceeds

1.4 Ill, <Iddi lional bonded shrinkage and temperature
reinfo rceme nt conforming with Secti on 407 .13.2 xlmll be
pro vided between (he (c!l tk>ns at slab ed ges extending from
the Slil b edge for a distance equal 10 the tendon spacing,
407.14 UCCJuircmcnts fo r Stru ctll ra lln tcgrity

407.14,1 III the dc/ailing of re info rce ment and connec ti ons.
members of' . 1 structure shall be effectivel y tied toge ther (0
impro ve illlcgri ty of the ove ral l struc ture.
407.J4.2 For cast-I n-plan.' olllslnl<.'tion.
llIinilllUlll r e quil'l~ lIlcnls :
I h~'
following sh;1I 1
c() ll s tillftl~
407,14.2. 1 In joist conslnll' ti oll. its delincd in Sections

408.14.1 through 01 08. 14.3. at lea~1 nile hO(t Olll har shall he
continuous or shal l he spliced over the support wi th a Class
B tens ion spl icc 0 ]' a Illct' h;m ic al ~)I' welded s plice satisfy ing
Section 412. 1S .] <lod at nOIl-cont inllolls support s sh all be
'1IH.:hored 10 develop f, a! the face of the slJppon lI sin g a
sta ncbnl honk satisfying Sect ion ~ 11.6 or hcmicd (kfo rmcd
bar SiU i~ryi llg Set'! inn 412.7.
407.J4,2.2
al tl w pcrilllt'!l:r of Ih e St I1l C!\lI\' sh,dl

I'ci nrmccillcill O\:l! Ihe :-.pan kll gth p assin g
region bounded hy l ile longitudilla l
I k:1Il1S
11 ;1\\ , ~: ()llt i l1\1\1\1s
throu gh tht:
rcinfnrcl'Illl'1lI o r I Ill! L"lliu llIl1 l'oll si:-tlllg
I.
til'
( I ) and (2):
It'a.\( (llll' -s ixth nf the tens ion rc ill i'orn'm t'1I1

I'l'q uil'l'd for ll ~ga ti\'l: 11101111..'1\1 al the :-. uppOl'1. hU I no t
k::-.s 111:111 t\V() 1);lrs:
1\1
At Icast onc-qual1cr
reinforccment requi red
two bars.
of thc posit ivc

momcnt
midspa n, bUI not less Ih'lll
aI
407.14.2.4 Where splices are required to salisfy Section

407, 14.2.2, (he lOp reinforcement shall be spliccd at or near
midspan and boltom reinforcement shall be spliced near the
support . Splices shall be Class B tension splices, or
mechanical or welded splices satisfyi ng Section 4 12. i 5.3 .
407.14,2.5 In other than perimeter beams . where transverse
reinforce ment as dcfined in Secti on 407 .14.2.3 is provided,
there arc 110 addi tion al requirements for longitudinal
reinforcement .
Wh ere
such
transverse
integrity
reinforcc melll is nOt provided, nt least one-qual1cr of the
positive 1l10lnCllI rein forcement at midspan, but not less than
I WO ba rs, shall pnss through the regi on bounded by the
longiludinal reinforccll1clHof thc COI Ulllll :lIld shall be
co ntinuou s or shall be spliced over OJ' ncar the support wilh
a Class B tens ion spli ce, or mec hanical or weld ed split:cs
sa ti sf yi ng Section 412. 15.3. A I 11011 co ntinuous suppOI1S, the
reinforccment sl1:111 he 'lIlchored 10 (ievel opJ~ at the face ()f
Ihe SUPP()f1 using a standard hook sali s fying Section 4 12.6
or headed de forilled bar sa tisfying Sct: ti o ll 4! 1 .7.
407 ,14.2,(' For IlOll presLresscd two-way sl" b COllst rllCli ()]).
set: Sel' tion 41 J .4.R.5.
407. 14.2.7 For prt:stressed two-way slab cOllslnlcli on. see
Secti on 4 18. 13 .6 and 41 8 13.7
407. 14 ,) For precast concrc te
CO]l Slrut'l io n .
tcnsio]) lies
shall be provided in the transverse. longitudinal. and vcrtit'al

dircction s and arou nd t h ~' perimcter o f the slrllc tll rc In
~rrl~\,:tivdy til' ek lll c lJt s toget her. The provisions of Sec ti on
4 I (,.!, shall "ppl)' .
.:107. 14.4 For lif, "I,,11

and ..t 18 . 1:IX
l'oll~trlll'tioll, St'C. St:t't ioIlS .~
1l.tX 6
436
CHAPTEI, 4 . Concrete
Table 407-2 Steel Reinforcement Information

Information on Sizes, Areas and Weights of Various Steel Reinforcements
. . ..... .. _ . _ - - - - - _..
- - - - - - . - _.
ASTM STANDARD
PHILIPPINE STANDARD (SI)

..
Nominal
Diameter, mm
9.5
..
12.7
Nominal
Area, mm 2
71
_- _._-_
Nominal
mass, kg/m
-----
'"
199
0.560
-------.- .--..
0.994
_._..
10
-- ~-
. - 1-.
0.618
--~---
...
-,.-~---
12
113
0.890
16
201
1.580
20
314
2.465
n.a
n.a
19.1
284
2.235
22.2
387
3.042
n.a
3.973
25
510
79
--_..
1.552
..
25.4
Nominal mass,
kg/m
....
129
15.9
Nominal
Area, mm 2
Bar Size
Designation
. ..._._- - - _.
491
..
3.851
..
28.7
645
32.3
35.8
5.060
28
616
4.831
819
6.404
32
804
6.310
1006
7.907
36
1019
7.986
43.0
1452
11.380
42
1385
10.870
57.3
2581
20.240
58
2642
20.729
._... _...... _.
. .
.
--~
.."" ... _ . _ - - - - ' - . _ - - -
/\SSOC i8t ioil of Siructur81 Enqineers of tile Pll i lipPllll~' ;
CHAPTER 4 . Concrole
Table 407 -3 WRI Standard Wire Rein force men t

AREA, mm' I m OF WIDTH FOR
VARIOUS SPACINGS
CENTER-TO-CENTER SPAC ING,nun
MW and MD
SIZE
-
PLAIN
DEFORMED
- - --_..
Nominal
Nominal
Diameter,
mass,
mm
kg/Ill
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
MW 290
MD290
1922
2.270
5800
3900
2900
1900
1450
1160
970
MW200
MD200 '.
15.95
1.570
4000
2700
2000
1300
1000
800
670
MW130
MD130
12.90
1.020
2600
1700
1300
870
650
520
430
MWI 20
MD I20
12.40
'0.942
2400
1600
1200
800
600
480
400
MWI OO
MDI OO
11 .30
0.785
2000
1300
1000
670
500
400
330
MW90
MD90
10.70
0.706
1800
1200
900
600
450
360
300
MW80
MD80
10. 10
0.628
1600
1100
800
530
400
320
270
MW70
MD70
9.40
0.549
1400
930
700
470
350
280
230
MW65
MD65
9. 10
0.510
1300
870
650
430
325
260
220
MW60
MD60
8.70
0.471
1200
800
600
400
300
240
200
MW55
MD55
0.432
1100
730
550
370
275
220
180
MW50
MD50
8.44
8.00
0.393
1000
670
500
330
250
200
170
MW45
MD45
7.60
0.353
900
600
450
300
225
180
150
MW40
MD40
7.10
0.314
800
530
400
270
200
160
130
MW35
MD35
6.70
0.275
700
470
350
230
175
140
120
MD 30
6.20
0.236
600
400
300
200
150
120
100
MD 25
5.60
0.196
500
330
250
170
125
100
83
5.00
0.157
400
270
200
130
100
80
67
MWIS
4.40
0.118
300
200
150
100
75
60
50
MWIO
3.60
0.079
200
130
100
70
50
40
33
2.50
0.039
100
67
50
33
25
20
17
MW30
1----MW 25
MW20
MW5
--- - ----
--
..
_-_.
~ -37
4-38
CHAPTEfl4 - Concrete
408.3 Loading
SECTJQN 408 ANALYSIS AND

DESIGN
:'
408.3. 1 Des ign prov isions of thi s code nrc based on the
ass umption that 51 ructurcs sha ll be designcd to resist all
applicable loads.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
408.1 Notations
A. ;;: area o fnonprcstrc.o;:scd tension rci n(ol'CCI1lCnL I11m ~

A '. ;;: area of compression rei nforce ment, 1111112
b ;;: width of compression face of member, mm
d
::: di stance from extreme compressi oll fiher 10 ce nt roi d
of (ension rcinforccmcllI. 111m
E,
E,
:;: modulus of elas ti cit y o f concrete . MP,1. Sec SC'lion

208.6. 1
:;: modulus of elasticity of rcin f'o rcc m clH. MPa. Sec
Sections 408 .6.2 and 408 .6.3
speci fied compressive strengt h of cOllc re te. Mila
;; speci fied
yie ld
strength
of
Ilo nprestn::ssed
re inforce ment. MPa
:;;: length of clear Sp:lH measured facc~ l o- fC!(:c
of
r, :;:
~
I"
V,
Iii,
IV"
fJ,
Slipp0 11 S. mill
;;: no m inal shear stre ngth provided by concrete
:;: ullit weight of concrete, kghn ,l
;;: facLOrccl load per unit len gth of beam Or' per Llnit area
o f slab
= raCIOr defined in Seclion 410,3 ,7.]
in ex treme tens io n steel at nom inal

strcng th
;:: w ti o or no nprcstressed ICllsion rcinrorcclllcnl
p'
= liJbd
;:: rati o or lIonprcsl rcssc cJ compression l'l.!inforL'cmclH
408.3.3 In ~csig n for wind :111<1 c4l11hquakc loads, intcgraL

structural pans shall be dcsigilCd to resist th e (otal lateral
loads,
408.3.4 Considerat ion sha ll be given to e ffcc ts or rorces due
to prcstrcssing. crane loads , vihratio n, impac l, shrinkage ,
temperature changes. creep. expansion of shrinkageco mpcnsating C{) llcrC le tul d uneqllal settl cmcllt of supports.
408.4 Methods of Analysis

408.4.1 All members or ffum es or <.:o minll ous construction
shall be designed (or tile ma ximulll effects or fa c tored loads
as determined by th e th eory o f clastic 'IIln lysis, exc ept as
modified by Section 408.5 , It sha l l be permincd to si mplify
the design by usin g tilt:: nss ll ll1p ti olls spccilkd in Scction s
408 .8 th rough 408 .12.
;:: net tens ile stra in
= II ',1M
Ph :::: rcinrorccmcnt
ratio
produci ng
condi li ol1s, Sec Sccl io ll..j
408.3 ,2 Servi ce load s shall he in iH:corda nce with C hapter 2

or this code Wilh appropriatl.!. live IO<ld reduct ions as
pe l'ln iHcd therein.
.:::: streng th -red uct ion rac tor.
halanced
~ tn li !l
IO .,~ .2
St' C
SCCl io1l409.4
408.4.2 Except fo r prest resse d concrct!.! , approximate

me thod s or frallle anal ysis ma y bc lI sed for buildings of
usual Iypes of construct ion , ~p a!ls .1Ilt! story he ig ht s.
408.4.3 As all a ltenlm!.! In fraillc illHlIY'iis, till' rollowi ng

approxim.llc mOlllclltS and 'ihcar~ ~ h ;tll I ~ l>cnn ittcd (0 he
used in t.Ic sign o r l' ()JlI i lltl(H1~ heam:.. and OIl!.! ""';I)' '\1<1hs
(~ I ahs reinforced to rc ~ is t Ikxllral :.. trcs,cs ill on ly olle
directit)ll). provided:
I.
408.2 Design Methods
T here are two I)r mo rc
SPilIlS ;
lar~cr of two
adj'll"l'nl SpilllS tl OI grcater than the shoneI' by more than
:W pcn.:clll:
2. Spans 'arc :l)proxilll:ltcly equal. wil h lhe
408.2. 1 In dc~ign or stnH.:tural t'tHH:n.'te. mcmhe rs ~hall he

proportioncd fo r <\(lcqlla!c ~Ircllg th in ;!(conl'lIll'e wi th
pro visioll~ o f this C h a pl~f. using load f;K h )r~ and "tn'llgt hn.'(iLU,'li on r;lcl o r~ ~~srccificd ill Scn io ll -Hl9 ,
40X.2.2 f)c~ign of reinrorced ClHllTl'!t'
of Set'lillll 425 ~hall he pcnnillcd,
U'IIl)!
Ihe
I .();!d ~
-I .
U nfaclOrcd li ve IO<ld, I .. dck,':-' 1101 e\lcl,.'d IllIce timcs

unfa('(ored (ka(~ j1.1I 1. /) : ;lII d
),
Melllhcr~
pm\'i,itl ll ~
40 H.2.J An<.: h llr~ wit hin the St'Olk ' II!' Set'ltlln ,n.\ 111'.. 1:111('(1
in (o nne h.' 10 I r: lII ~ kr l" ;,,ds !~I\vl'l'n rnll n l'~ t l' d Llt' l lIl'n "
s ha ll he Ik:-. ig ned US III~ Sect ion 123 .
.1 ,
arc Uillftll'lll i y d i ~ lril)llt ed :
arc prismalic
CHAPTI: R 4 . Concrete
For caJculming negative 1ll0IllCIHS,

orthc <ldjaccnt clca r span lengths.
/"
is IiIkcn as the avcrage
POSITIVE MOMENT:
439
Stati c equi librium shall be maintained after redi stributi on of

moments for each loadi ng arrangement
408.6 Modulus of Elasticity
End spans
408.6.1 Modulus of elasticit y E,. for concrete shall be

permitt ed to be take n as w/sO.043
(in MPa) for
Discontinuous end unrestrained

Disco ntinu ous end integral with
F,
.... wlIl,i'~1J4
SUppOI1
w J}1l6
Intelior spans
For
values of Wr between 1.500 and 2,500 kg/ml.
normal. weight co ncrete, Ec shall be permitlcd to be taken
1I
as 4700
.J"/':
NEGATIV E MOMENT:
al
Two spans ................. .
\t
"I./19
w,.J,,'~/ IO
More than two spans ..

at other faces of interior support s
1V.,/,/!11 1
at face of all su pports for: slabs with

sp:lnS not cxceeding 3 meters; and
beams where ratio of su m of column
sl iffnesses (0 beam stiffness exceeds
cigh l at each end of lhe span
408.7.1 To account for the usc of liglHweight concrete,

unless !:>pccifically noted otherwise, a modification factor ),
w)}'124
w)}1!6
SHEAR :
at face of first interi or suppon .. .. . ... .....

face of all ot her slIppOJ1S . ...... ............
408.6.3 Modulus of elasticity Es for prest ressing tendons

shall be dClcnnined by lc:-itS or supplied by the
manufacturer.
408.7 Lightweight Concrete
al interior face of exterior support for

members built integrally with suppons:
where support is a spandrel beam
where su pport is a column
a\
of elasticit y Es for nonprestressed

reinforcement shall be permitted (0 be taken as 200,000
MPa.
408.6.2 Modulus
ex tcrior face of first intcrio r sllppon
1. 15 11',,1,/2
11',,/,,/2
408.4.4 Stru HlIld -tie models shall be penn illcd to be used

in the design of slruclunll concrele. Sec Section 427.
408.5 Redi stribution of Negative l\1omcnts in
Continuous Nonprestressed Flexural Members
408.5.1 Excep t where approximate va lue.. .c; for moments arc
used. il is pe rm itted to decrease factored momcnts
calculated by clas ti c thcory at sections of max.i mu m
nega tive or positi ve momcnt in any span of contin uous
fl exu ral mcmbers ror any ass umed loading arrangement by
nOI morc than IOODE, percen t, wi th II maxim um of 20
percen!.
408.5.2 Hcdi stribu ti oll of negat ive moments shill I he madc
only wh c n t.j is equal to or greater than 0.0075 H( the sec ti on
at whi ch mome nt is reduced.
appears as a multiplier of
F,
in all applicable equations
and sections of this code, where }, = 0.85 for sandlightweight COllcrete and 0.75 for all-li ghtweight concrete.
Linear interpolation between 0.75 and 0.85 shall be
permitted, on the basis of volume tri c fracti ons, when a
pOl1ion of the ligili weight fine agg regate is replaced with
normal-weight fine aggregate. Linear interpolatio n between
0.85 and 1.0 shall be permitted, on the basis of volu mclric
frac ti ons. for concrele con taini ng normal-weight fine
aggregate and a blend of li giliweigh t and normal -weight
coarse aggregates. For normal weigh t conc rete, }. = 1.0. If
average splitting tensile strength of li ght we ight concrete,Fe/>
is specified, A ~ t" 1(0.56
F, .) $
1.0.
408.8 Stiffness
408.8. 1 Use of any set of reasonable assumptions shall be
pCl'mitlcd fo r co mputing relati ve ncxu ral and torsional
sliffnc!;scs of colu mns. walls. Ooors and roof sys tems. The
<lsslIlllptions adopted shall be consistcnt throughout
<lIlal ys is.
408.8.2 Effect of haunches shall be considered both in

determining moments and in design of members.
408.5.3 The reduced IllOJllent shall be used for calcula ting

redistribut ed moments at all other sections within the spans.
National Structural Corle of tl'l('; Pililippines 6
111
Edition Volumr? 1
440
CHAPTEI, 4 . Concrete
408.11 Columns
408.9 Effective Stiffness to Determine Lateral
Deflections
408.9.1 Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete building

systems resulting from service lateral loads shall be
computed by either a linear analysis with member stiffness
determined using 1.4 times the flexural stiffness defined in
408.9.2 and 408.9.3 <>1' by a more detailed analysis. Member
properties shall not be taken greater than the gross section
properties.
408.9.2 Lateral deflections of reinforced concrete building
systems resulting from factored lateral loads shall be
computed either by linear analysis with member stiffness
defined by (I) or (2), or by a more detailed analysis
considering the reduced stiffness of all members under the
loading conditions:
I.
By section properties defined in 410.12.3 (I) through

(3); or
2.
50 percent of stiffness values based on gross section

properties.
408.9.3 Where two-way slabs without beams are designated

as part of the seismic-foree-resisting system, lateral
deflections resulting from factored lateral loads shall be
permitted to be computed by using linear analysis. The
stiffness of slab members shall be defined by a model that is
in substantial agreement with results of comprehensi ve tests
and analysis and the stiffness of other frame members shall
be as defined in Section 408.9.2.
408.11.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces

from factored loads on all floors or roof and the maximum
moment from factored loads on a single adjacent span of the
floor or roof under cOllsideration. Loading condition giving
the maximum ratio of moment to axial load shall also be
considered.
408.11.2
In
frames
or continuous
constl1lction,
consideration shall be given to the effect of unbalanced floor
or roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of
eccentric loading due to other causes.
408.11.3 In computing gravily load moments in columns, it
shall be permitted to assume far ends of columns built
integrally with the stl1lcture to be fixed.
408.11.4 Resistance to moments at any floor or roof level
shall be provided by distributing the moment between
columns immediately above and below the given floor in
proportion to the relati ve column stiffnesses and conditions
of restraint.
408.12 Arrangement of Live Load

408.12.1 It is permissible to assume that:
l.
The live load is applied only to the floor or roof under

consideration; and
2.
The far ends of columns built integrally with the

structure are considered to be fixed.
408.10 Span Length
408.12.2 It is permitted to assume that the arrangement of

live load is limited to combinations of:
408.10.1 Span length of members not built integrally with

supports shall be considered the clear span plus depth of
member, but need not exceed distance between centers of
supports.
I.
Factored dead load on all spans with futl-factored live.

load on two adjacent spans, and
2.
Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored live

load on altemate spans.
408.10.2 In analysis of frames or continuous construction

for determination of moments, span length shall be taken as
the distance center to center of supports.
408.10.3 For beams built integrally with supports, design
on the basis of m'()ments at faces of support shall be
permitted.
408.10.4 It shall be permitted to analyze solid or ribbed

slabs built integrally with supports, with clear spans not
more than 3 111, as continuous slabs on knife edge supports
with spans equal to the clear spans of the slab and width of
beams otherwise neglected.
408.13 Tbeam Construction

408.13.1 In T-beam construction, the flange and web shall
be built int.egrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
408.13.2 Width of slab effective as a T-beam flange shall
not exceed olle-fourth the span length of the beam, and the
effective overhanging slab width on each side of the web
shall not exceed:
J.
Eight times the slab thickness; or
2.
One-half the clear distance to the next web.
Association of Structural Enginems of the Philippines
,f
4-41
408.13.3 for beams with a slab on one side on ly. the

effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed:
1,
Onctwclfth the !span"length of the beam;
2.
Six limes the slab thickness; or
3.
Onchalflhc clear di stance to the next web.
408.13.4 Isolated beams. in which Ihe Tshape is used 10

provide a flange for additional compression area, shall have
a flan ge thickness not less than one half the width of web
and an effective fl ange width not more th an four limes the
width of web.
"
408.13.5 Where primary ' flexural reinforce ment in a slab

that is considered as a Tbeam flange (excluding joist
cons tru ction) is paraliel to Ihe beam, reinforcement
perpendicular 10 the beam shall be provided in tl,e lOP of tl,e
slab in accordance with the following:
408.13.5.1 Transverse reinforcement sha ll be designed to

carry the factored load on lhe overhang ing s lab widl.h
assumed 10 act as a cantilever. For iso latcd beams. the full
width of overhanging flange shall be considered. For other
T-beams, only the effective overhanging slab width need be
considered.
408.13.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced not

farther apart than five times the slab Ihickncss or 450 mill.
408.14.5.2 Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall nol be

less than one twelfth the clear distance between ribs nor less
than 40 mm.
408.14.5.3 In one-way joisls, rei nforcement normal to Ihe
ribs shall be provided in the Slil b as required by Secti on
407.13.
408.14.6 When removable forms or fil lers not complying
with Seclion408. 14.5 are used:
408.14.6.1 Slab thickness shali not be less than one twelfth
the clear distance between ribs, or less than 50 mm .
408.14.6.2 Reinforcement normal to the ribs shali be
provided in the slab as required for flexure. considering load
concentrations, if any, but not less than req uired by Section
407.13.
408.14.7 Where conduits or pipes as pcrmjlled by Section
406.3 are embedded within the slab. slab Ihickness s hall be
al least 25 mm greater th an the total overall depth of the
conduits or pipes at any poin!.. Conduits or pipes shall not
impair sig nificantly the stre ngth of the cons truction.
408.14.8 For joist cons truction, contri bution of concrete to
shear strengt h Vc- is permitted lO bc 10 percent morc than
that specified in Section 411. It shall be peml ilted lO
increase shear strength using s hear reinforcement or by
widening Ihe ends of the ribs.
408.14 J oist Construction

408.14.1 Joist constmction consists of a mOllolilh ic
combination of regularly spaced ribs and a top sJab arranged
to span in one direction 01" two oI1hogonal directions.
408.14.2 Ribs shall not be less than 100 Jllln in width and
shall have a depth of not more than three and one-half times
the minimum width of rib.
408.14.3 Clear spacing between ribs shali nOl exceed 750
mm.
408.1 5 Separate Floor Finish

408.15.1 A floor finish shall not be included as pan of a
strucwral member unless placed monolithically with the
floor slab or designed in accordan ce with requiremen ts of
Section 4 J 7.
408.15.2 It shall be permitted to consider all concrete floor
finishes as part of required cover or tOlal thickness for
nonslructural considerations.
408.14.4 Joi sl. constmclion not meeting the Iimitalions of

Seclions 408.14. 1 Ihrough 408.14.3 shali be designed as
slabs and bea ms.
408.14.5 When permanent burned c11l)' or conc rcte tilc
fillers of J1lillcrial having a unit comp ressive slrenglh at least
equal to that of the speci fied strength of co ncrete in the
joists are used:
408.14.5.1 For shear and nega(ivc~momem strength
computati ons. it shall be penniued to include the vertical
shells of fillers in cont act with ribs. Other pOI1ions of ml eTs
shall not be included in strength compu tations.
Nationa l Structural Code of tl1e Philippines
6\11
Edition Volume 1
4-42
nominal axial load strength at balanced ~>train

co nditions. See SCClion 410.4.2
:: nominal ax ial load strength at given eccentricity
=-rai n load, or related internal moments a!ld fo rces.
Sec tion 409.3.1
:: cumulative
effects of temperature,
creep,
shrinkage. d iffe renti al settlement and sh rinkage
compensatin g concrete
= requ ired strength to resist fa clOfcd loads or relate d
internal moments and forces
= w ind load, or re lated internal moments and forces
3
= weight of concrete. kg/m
= distance from centroidal axis of gross section ,
neglecting rei nforcemelH, to ex.treme fiber in
tension
= ratio of flexural sti ffness of beam section to
flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterall y by center line of adjacent panel , if any. on
each side o f beam . Sec Secti on 4 J 3
:: average value of Of for all beams on edges of a
panel
:: ratio of clear spans in 10ng~lo-sh ol1 direction of
two-way s labs
= time-dependent factor for sustained load. Sec
Section 409.6. 2.5
= net tensile strain in ext reme tcnsion ste d at
nominal strength
modification
factor rellec ling the rednccd
mechani ca l properties of lightweight concrete. See
Section 408.7. 1
= multipli er for additional l ong~t ime dei1cction as
defined in Section 409.6.2.5
= ratio of nonp restressed tcns ion reinforcement,
p'
= rei nforcement rati o for no nprestressed compressio n
Ph
:: re inforcement ratio producing balanced strain
= st rength -reducti on fa cto r. See Section 409.4
409.2 General
Pb
p.
Ii
409.1 Notations
At
A's
b
:;:: gross area of secti on. mm

:;:: area of compression reinforcement, mm 2
:;:: width of compression face of me mber, mOl
= distan ce from extreme compression fiber to neutral
axis. mm
D
cI
tI'
;::;: dead loads, or related internal moments and forces

:;:: distance from ext reme compression fiber to
centroid of tension rei nforcement, mrn
:;:: distan ce from extreme compression fiber to
ds
:;::
tI,
:;::
Er
:;::
;::;:
fl.
u
w
y,
centroid of compression reinforcement, mm

distance from extreme te ns ion fib er to centroid of
tension reinforcement, mm
distance from ex tre me compress ion tiber to
extreme tension steel, mm
load effeclS of earthquake, o r related internal
moments and forces
modulus of elasticity of concrete. MPa. See Section
408.6.1
loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with
well defined densities and controllable maximum
heights. or related internal moments and forces
specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
ff == square rom of specified

f,
J;
I-I
II
I,
I,
L
I
I"
1yI"
M"
compressive strength of
co ncrete. MPa
splitting tensile stre ngth of lightweight
aggregate concrete, MPa
= modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa
:: specified
yield strength
of nonprestressed
reinforcement , MPa
:: loads due to weight and pressure of soi l, water in
soi l, or ot her materials, or related in tern al mome nts
and forces
= overall thickness of membe r, mm
moment of inerti a of cracked section trans formed
to concrete. mrn~
effective mOlllent of inertia for co mputati on of
delleclion, 1l11ll4
= moment of inertia of gross concrete seclion about
4
cClHroidal ax is. neglecting rein forcement, mm
== Jive loads. or re lated in ternal moments and forces
== span length o f beam o r one ~w a y s lab, as defined in
Section 408 . 10; dear proj ec tion of cantilcver, mrn
= length of clear span in long uirection of two-way
construc tion, measured face to face of supports in
slabs without beams and face to face of beams or
o ther SUpp0l1S in olher cases
=- maxim um moment in membe r at stage d eflection is
comput ed
= crack ing mOlllcnt. Sec Equation 409-9
= average
fJ
::
Ad
A/bd
reinforcement, A 'jbd
conditions. See Section 410.4 .2
409.2.1 Structures and structural members shall Iw (k~iJ ';! cd

(0 have design strength s at all secti ons at !cil :-.i n;i:, '
required st rengths calculated for the faclOr.:,! hi:
forces in such combinations as arc sti pulated in l his <.'< l(lc.
."
409.2.2 Members also sha ll meet all other requi remc nts of
thi s code to e nsure adequate perfo rm ance al :lcrvi{ ( to ad
levels.
409.2.3 Des ign of Slructures and stru c tural mClllbc'I",'\ Will i'.
the load faclor combinali ons and st renglh r(' (b ':i '.~' ";! (.;., .
o f Section 426 shall be permiued . Usc ( l l" ;,;.,,,j ilt.:h.
CHAPTER 4 . Co ncrete
443
combinations [ rom this chapter in conjunction with st rengt h

reduction factors of Section 426 shall not be permitted.
the appropriatc load combinations of ASCE I SEI 7 shall be

used.
409.3 Required Strength
409.3.5 For post-tensioned anChorage zone des ign, a load

factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the ma ximum tendon
jackj ng force.
409.3.1 Rcquired SlrclIgth U shall be at least equal to the

effects of factored load s ill Eq. 409- 1 through Eq . 409-7 .
The effect of one or more loads not acting simultaneously
shall be investigated.
1.4(D + F)
(409- 1)
U = L2 (D+ F + T) + 1.6 (L+H) + O.5(L. or R)
(409-2)
U = 1.2 D + 1.6 (L, or R) + (1.0L or 0.80 W)
(409 -3)
U = 1.2 D + 1.6 W + 1.0 L +O.S (L, or R)
(409-4)
U = 1.2 D + 1.0 E+ 1.0 L
(409-S )
409.4 Design Strength

409.4.1 Design strengtll prov ided by a member, its
con necti o ns to other members and its cross sections, in
terms of fl ex ure, a xial load, shear and torsio n, shall be take n
as the nomi nal strengt h ca lcul ated in accorda nce with
requiremen ts and assumptio ns of this Section, mult iplied by
a s trength- reduction factor in Sections 409.4.2, 409.4.4
and 409.4.5.
409.4.2 Strength-Reduction Factor
Strength-reduction factor shall be g iven in Sections
409.4.2. 1 through 409.4 .2.7 :
U = 0.9 D + 1.6 W + 1.6 Ii

(409-7 )
409.4.2.1 Tension contro lled sections as defin ed in Secti on

410.4 .4 (scc also Scction 409.4.2.7) ............ .... .. .. . 0.90
I . The load factor on tile livc load L in Eq . 409-3 to 409-S
409.4.2.2 Compres sion co ntroll ed sections, as defi ned in

Section 410.4.3:
U = 0.90 [) + 1.0 E + 1.6 Ii
except as follows:
shall bc permitted to be reduced to 0.5 except for
garages, areas occupied as places of public assembl y,
2
and all areas where L is greater th an 4.8 kN /m
2.
\Vhere wind load W has not been reduced by a

directionality factor. it shaH be permitted to use I.3 W in
place of 1.6W in Eq. 409-4 and 409-6.
3.
W here E, the lo ad effects of earthquake. is bascd 011

ser vice-level seismic fo rces, 1.4 shall be used in place
of 1.0 E in Eq. 409-S and 409-7.
4.
The lo ad factor on H, loads due to weigh t and press ure

of soil, wa ter in soil, or other materi al s, shall be set
cqual to zero in Eq . 409-6 and 409-7 if the stmctural
action due to H co unteracts that due to W or E. Where
lateral earth press ure provides resi stan ce to structural
ac tions from o ther forces, it shall not be included in Ii
but sh all be includ ed in the design res istance.
409.3.2 If resistance to impact e ffects is laken into accouni

in des ign, stich effects shall be included with live load L. .
409.3.3 Estimat io ns o f different ial settlement, creep.
shrinkage , expansio n o f shrinkage-co mpe nsatin g conc rete or
temperature change shall be based o n a reali stic assess ment
of suc h effects occ urring in service.
409.3.4 If a structu re is in <I n ood zone. or is subjected 10
forces from at mos phe ric preci pitatio ns, the Oood loads and
1.
2.
Members with spiral reinfo rcement

conforming to Secti on 4 10. 10.3 .. .... ..........
0.7S
Other reinforced 1l1cmbers
0.65
foo r sections in whi ch th e net tensile strength, Cr. is between

th e limi ts for co mpressio n-controlled im d ten sio n-colHroll ed
sectio ns, shall be pc nniucd 10 be linearl y increased from
th at fo r co mpressio n-con tro ll ed sectiolls to 0 .90 as c,
inc reases fro m the compression-cont ro ll ed strai n limit to
0.005 .
Altern at ively, when Sec ti o n 425 is used, for mem bers in
whi ch h' does not exceed 415 MPa, with s ymmetric
reinforcement, and with (II . d')/h not less than 0.70, shall
be permitt ed to be in creased linearly 10 0 .90 as P(l
decreases from 0.10 fr A,( to zero. For other reinforced
mem bers, shall he permi tt ed to be increased linearly to
0.90 as P., dec reases from 0. 10 AK or Ph, whic hever is
smaller, 10 7.ero.
tc
409.4.2 .3 Shea r and torsio n (Sec also Section 409.4.4 for

shear wn lls <lnd rram cs in Seismic Zo ne 4)
0.75
409.4.2.4 Bearin g on concrete (excepl for posttensio ning anchomge zones) ................ ...................... 0.65
409.4.2.5 Post-ten sioned ancho rage
th
National Structu ra l Code of th e P!)il ippines 6 Edition Volume 1
Wiles
085
~-4~
CHA I' TEI1 4 . Concrele
409.4.2.6 Slmland-lie models (Secli on 427).
and struts, lics, llodaJ zones, and bearing areas in

such models
0.75
409.4.2.7 Flexural sections in pre-tensioned members where
strand embedmen t is less than the development length as
409.5 Design Strength for Reinforcement

The values of hand 11' used in design calculations shall not
exceed 550 MPa, except for prestressing tendons and for
transverse reinforcement in Section 410. 10.3 and 421 .3.5 .4.
provided in Seclion 412.10.1.1:
I,
Prom the end of the member to the end of the transfer

.0.75
409.6 Control of Deflections
longlh ...
2.
From the end of the transfer length to the end of

the devclopmcm length shall be permitted to be
409.6.1 Reinforced concrete members subject to lkxur('.

shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to lim it
deflections or any deformatio ns that adversely affect
strength or serviceability of a st ructure.
linearly increased from .......................... 0.75 100.9

Where bonding of a strand docs not extend (0 the le:nd of the
member, strand embedment shall be assumed (0 begin at the

end of Ihe debonded leng.h. Sec also Seclion 412.10.3.
409.4.3 Developmenl lenglhs specified in Sec. ion 4 12 do
no! require a factor.
409.4.4 For structures that rely on intermediate precast

structural walls in Seismic Zone 4, special moment frames,
or special structural walls to resist earthquake e.ffccls. E,
shall be modified as given in Seclion 409.4.4.1 Ihrough
409.4.4.3:
409.4.4.1 For any structural member that is designed to
resist E, for shear shall be 0.60 if the nominal shear
strength of the member is less than the shear corresponding
to Ihe deve lop ment of the nominal Ocxural st rength of the
member. The nominal flexural strength shall be determined '
considering the most critical factored axial loads and
including E;
409.6.2 One-Way Construction (Nonprestressed)

409.6.2. 1 Minimum thickness stipu laled in Table 409 :
shall apply for one-way construction not supporting or
attached to partitions or other construction likely to be.
damaged by large deflections, unless computation of
deflection indicates a lesser thickness Illay be used without
adverse effects.
409.6.2.2 Where deflections are to be computed, deflections:
that occur immediately on application of load sId! lv'
computed by usual methods or formulas for e1as: ic
deflections,
considering effects of cracking i~nd
reinforcement on member s tiffness.
409.6.2.3 Unless stiffness values arc obt:lined by a more
co mprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall :lC
computed wilh the modulus of elasticity c- fo r conc rete as
specified in Section 108.6. 1 (normnl wcight or ligh tweight
concrete) and with the effective moment of incnia as
follows , but not grefttcr than It:.
409.4.4.2 For diaphragms. for shear shall no. exceed the

minimum for shear used for the vertical componen ts of the
primary seismic-foree-resisting system;
409.4.4.3 For joints and diagonally reinforced coupling
beams. forshear s hall be 0.85.
where:
M
409.4.5 Strength reduction
factor for
nexure,
co mpression. shear find bearing of structural plain co ncrete
in 'Secli o n 422 shall be 0.60.
.
J, I ,
- - -)"
and for lIonn al-wcighl concrete
J, = 062}. ff,
Association of Structura l Eng ineers of the Philippin es
I
I
Table 409 1 . Minimum Thickness of Nonprestrcssed

Beams or One Way Slabs Unless Deflections are
Computed
Minimum Thi ckness. It
Simply
Supponcd
Member
One end
continuous
Both ends
conrinuous
Can tilever
Members not supporting or auachcd to partitions or other

construction likely to be damaged by large deneclion!i
Solid o"e
way slabs
Beams or
_l
_e
24
_ t
28
_C
20
_ t
18.5
_ t
21
-1_
_ t
16
ri bbed one
way slabs
10
8
Voluu gi1't~n shalJ 1M used directly for numbers wilh 11001101 weight
COl/erne (w..
2,400 I:glm 1 ) and Grade 415 reinforcement. Fo r other
condirimlS, the mhus sholl be modified as/ollows:
0)
For structural Ughnveighl concrete having !mit wtight ir! the rangt
1.5002.000 kg.m ' , tilt values slutlf be multiplied by (1.65 .
O.OOOJwrJ b/lf 110 1 Ius Ihan 1'(J9. whut! wf is the unit weight iI'
kg/mI.
/J)
For h olher Ilion 4/5 MPa. Ihe ~'{Jlues shall be mulJipJied by (0.4 +
409.6.3 Two-Way Construction (Nonprestrcssed )

409.6.3.1 1ltis sectio n shall govern the minimum thickness
of slabs or other two-way constru ction designed in
accordance with the provisions of Seclion 413 and
confanning with the requirements of Section 4 13.7. 1.2. The
thickness of slabs without interior bcall'lS spanning betwecn
the suppon s on all sides shall satisfy the requirements of
Section 409.6.3.2 or 409.6.3.4. Thickness of slabs WiU,
bea ms spannin g between the suppo rts on all sides _shall
sa tisfy the requirement s of Section 409.6.3 .3 or 409.6.3.4.
409.6.3.2 For slabs without interior beams spanni ng
between the supports and having a ratio of long (0 short
span not greater than 2, the minimum thickness shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Table 4093 and shall not
be less than the following value.o;:
I . Slabs without drop panels as defi ned in

Sections413.3.5 .............. ....... ..................
2.
//1001
409.6.2.4 For co ntinuous members, effective moment of
inertia shall be pcnnitted to be taken as the average of
values obtained from Eq. 409-8 for the critical positive and
negative moment sec tions. For prismatic members, effective
moment of inertia shall be permitted to be taken as the value
obtained from Eq. 409-8 at midspan for si mple and
continuous s pans, and at support for cantilevers.
For ll/rn equal to or less than 0.2, the provisions of

Section 409.6.3 .2 shall apply.
2.
For /lfm greater than 0.2 but )10t greater th an 2.0.

the thickness shall not be less Ih an:
h=
12 months
................. 2.0
................................. 1.4
6 months
............... ............ 1.2
J mon,hs
............... .......... .. . I .0
(409 12)
For llfrn greater Ihan 2.0, the thickness shall not be Jess
than :
+..i.L)
I (0.8
1400
" = -'--:-3-:-6-+-':9-':p;-:-L
where p' shall be the value at midspan for simple and

continuous spans, and at su pport for cantil evers. :It is
permi ttcd to assume the time-dependent factor ~ for
sustained lands to be equal to:
5 years or Illore
I.
(OR+ "'&'-)
36+5P(a- ",, - O.2)14()()
and not Jess than 125 111m .;
(409- 11 )
- 1+50p'
Slabs with drop panels as defi ned in

Sections 413.3.5 .......... .............................. 100 mOl
1.
3.
- -q-
125 mm
409.6.3.3 For slabs wilh beams spanning between the

sllppons on all sides, the mjnimum thickness shall be as
follows:
409.6.2.5 Unless values are obtained by a more

comprehensive analysis, additional longtime denect ion
resu lting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members
(nonnal -weight or lightweight concrete) shall be determined
by multiplying the immediate denec li on caused by Ihe
sllstained load considered. by the facmr Ail
A.
4 45
(40913)
and not less than 90 mill .
4.
At discontinuous edges, ~U1 edge beam shall be provided

wi th a stiffness ratio Of", not Jess than 0 .80; or the
minimum thickness required by E. .!. 409- 12 or 409- J3
shall be in creased by at !C,lst J{) percent in the panel
wi th a discontillllow; edge.
409.6.2.6 Defl ection co mputcd in accordance with Scclions

409.6.2.2 th rough 409.6.2.5 shall not exceed Ii mits
stipulated in Table 4092.
t1l
National Structoral Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
446
CHAPTER 4 . Concre te
Table 409-2 - Maximum Pennissible Computed

Defl ections
Type of Member
Deflection 10 be
cons idered
Deflection
Limitalion
Table 409-3 - Minimum Thickness of Slabs
wit hout Tnterior Beams

Yield
stre ngll!
._--_._._------
!,
MPa
Flat roofs not

supportin g or att ached
to nOIl-stnl c[ural
elements likely to be
damaged by large
deflections
Floors not support ing
or all ached (0 nOll-
Slniclural elemen ts
likely (0 be damaged by
l afl~e
Immediate defl ection

due (0 live lomJ, L
_,_'
180
280
415
immediate deflection
due to Jive load. L
~
360
520
deflections
Roof or floor
construction supporting
or allached 10 lI on~
struclum l elcments
likel y 10 be damaged by
larJ!c dcflecl ions
Floor or fl oor
constmcti oll sll PPor1 in g
or attached to nOIl structural cl ements not
likcly 10 be damaged by
larne defle cti ons
That part of the totnl

defl ection occurring
afler aHachmcnl of
nonslfUclUral clemenIS
(sum of the long-term
defl ection du e to all
sustained loads and lhe
immediate deflecti on
duc to any additi onal

live load) }
With drop panels2
Wi thout drop panels'
Exteri or panels
Inte rior
panels
E)(tcrior panels
Interior
-~
without
edge
With
edge
beam
beam'
36
36
40
-~
33
33
33
36
36
31
31
31
34
......
28
without
with
edge
beam
edge
be:lIn
33
36
~
30
40
34
~
480
For W11ll~.s of ubJjor'amerli yield strength b~ nyt:~n the I'(llues given ill
table,
minimum tMckn ~ss .shall b, det~n"i"ed by /incar
imerpoiation.
1 Drop pOllels i.s deft/Jed ill 4 / 3.3.5.
) Slab.s with bcarlu benytcfI co/umlls along exterior edg~s. The mlue of a
fOr' Ille edge beam shaff /lOt be less 1"011 0 .8.
-240'-'
Tenn I" in (2) and (3 ) is length of cl ear span in long

direction measured face -to~face of beams . Term fJ in (2) and
(3) is ratio of clear spans in long to short direction of slab.
Limif flO / illl~ rlfl(!(1 /() sajegmm l againsl pOllding. POllding .should be
checked by sui/able C(l /c II /alioris of dC'fll'c /iotl, incllldillg addc(/
til'jleclioru due to ponded WOler, and cOllsiderillg 100lgtentl effects of
all su.staifll'd loads. camber, camtnlc{iol/ w{crar/ces. alld reliabiliry of
pTlll'i.siOI/S for dminnge.
1 Lollg temr dcj7~rtimr slrafillt' dell'nniMd irl (l (('o rdmrC(' with 409.6.2.J
or 409.6.4 3. bill 1110)' hl' reduced by (11110/1111 of defll'ction ca/culatl'd W
OCC/lr lu,/ore all(lci!mcnf 0f11OIIs/ructural c/~mC'/lIS. T1r~ omOUIII.rlwl/ b('
dete17l1illc(1 (III bilsi.f oj (lccepfC'd cII,I;il1urillg t/m(l re/millK to time
dcjkclimr dwnWlcri.\IIC.f of IIIemlu!rs xill/iltlr f() Ihast' brillK cmr.{il/erc'(i.
limit may 1)/.0 ('XC('c'cJce/ if adequ(l/C rlll.'lI.U/rcs {ITt' ,aJ:e" In P"' I'('1I1
damage ((J slippon('(1 or (lllacireel delllC'lIfs.
8 11t 1101 greate, tium tolerallce "ravil/cd Jor lIflt/sl rUClUra l cJC'IIICfIf.{.
l.imil may be cxl'('cdcd if camber i ... t'ml'/'dr~d .m 111m tolal t1('-fI/~c:fi(1n
millie; ca mhrrt/o(!S 1I 0 1 1'xcn~d limil.
Ihe
409.6.3.4 Slab thickn ess less than th e minim um thickness

requ ired by Sections 409.6.3.1 . 409.6.3.2 and 409.6.3.3
sha ll be pe rmitted LO be used if shown by computation that
the deOccf io n will fl ot exceed the limits stipu lated in Table
409 -2. De flections shall be co mputed taking into acco unt
size and shape of the panel. conditions of support. and
na ture of restraints at the panel edges. The mod ulus of
elastic it y of co ncrete E( sha ll be as specified in Section
408.6. 1. The effec ti ve moment of inertia shall be that given
by Eq. 409-8; other values s hall be permilled to be used if
they resull in computed de fl ections in reasonab le agreement
with the resu lts of compre he nsive tests. Add itional lo ng te rm defl ecti on s hall be computed in accord ance with
Section 409.6.2.5 .
409.6.4 Prestressed Concrete Construction
409.6.4.1 For fl exu ral me mbers designed in accorda nce with
provisions o f Secti on 41 8. immedi a te de fl ection shall he
co mputed by lI sual met hods or form ulas for elastic
deflecti olls, a nd the momen t o f ine rt ia of the gross co ncrete
section, I, . shall be perm itted to be used fo r C lass U flexura l
members. , as defin ed in Sections 4 18.4.3.
409.6.4.2 For C lass C and Class T flexural members, a.'

defi ned ill Section 41 8.4.3, dcflecti on calcul ations shall he
based o n .a crac ked trans fonned secti on 3lWl ysis. 1t shall he
perrniUcd to base comput ati ons on a bilinear Illomenl
dcn eclion relationshi p, or an effecti ve mo ment of inel1ia, le ,
as defined by Eq. 409 8.
Assoc iat ion of Structu ra l Enginee rs of the Pllil ippines
409.6.4.3 Addit ional long-time deflection o f prcstressed

concrete members shall be computed taking into accoun t
stresses in concrete and steel under sustained load and
includi ng effects of creep and shrin kage of concrete and
relaxation of steel.
409.6.4.4 Deflection computed in accorda nce with Secti ons

409.6.4. 1, 409.6.4.2, and 409.6.4.3 sha1l no. exceed limi ts
stipulated in Tablo 409-2.
410.1 Notations
A
Ach
409.6.5 Composite Construction

409.6.5.1 Shored Construc tion
If composite nexural members are supported during

construction so that, after removal of temporary supports,
dead load is resisted by the full composite section, it shall be
pennitted (0 consider the composite member equivalent to a
monolithically cast member for computation of deflection .
For non prestressed members, Ule portion of the member in
compression shall determine whet he r value.~ in Tab le 409-1
for normal-weight or lightweight concrete s hall apply. If
deflection is computed, account shall be taken of curvatures
resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and cas t-in place components, and of axial creep effec ts in a prestressed
co ncrete member.
4-47
Ag
As
II .J.min
AH
An
A,
AI
A2
:::: depth of equivalent rectangu lar stress block as

defined in 5oc.ioI1410.3.7.1, mm
= cross-sectional area of a slmctural member
measured to ou tside edges of transverse
reinforcement, mm2
::::= gross area of section, 111m2
::: area of non prestressed longitudinal tension
rei nforcement, mm 2
=m.nimum amount of nex ural reinforcemen t, mm 2.
See Sec.ion 410.6
:;::;area of structural steel shape, pipe, or tu bing in
composi te section, mm 2 . See Section 410.17.5
~total
area
of
nonpres tressed
longitudinal
2
reinforcement (bars or steel shapes), mm
::::= area of structural stee l shape, pipe or tubing in a
composite section, 111m2
~ loaded area, 111m 2
= the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of
a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained
wholly wi.hin .hc support and having for its uppcr
base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I
unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope),
2
409.6.5.2 Unshor ed Const ruction

If the thiclOlCSS of a nonprestresscd precast nexuraJ member
meets the requirements o f Table 409-1, de nection need not
be computed. I f (he th ickness of a no npreslressed composite
member meets the requirements of Table 409 -1, it is not
required to compute deflection occurri ng aflcr the member
beco mes co mposite, bu t the long-time dCnecliol1 of the
precast me mber simI! be investigated for magnitude and
duration of load prior 10 beginning of effecti ve composite
action.
;:;
bo..
;::
""
;::
Coo
d
409.6.5.3 Deflecli oll computed in accordance with Sections

409.6.5. 1, or 409 .6.5.2 shal l not exceed limits stipula.ed in
Table 409-2.
d,
E(
E
1:.."1
f(
h
1;.,
h
mm
w idth of compression face of member, mill
web width , mill
distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral
axis, mm
clear cover from the nearest surface in ten sion to
the surface o f the nexural ten sion reinforcement ,
mrn
::; a factor relating actual moment diagram to an
equivalent uniform momelll diagram
::; distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of tension reinforcement, mill
= thickness of concrete cover measu red frolll extreme
tension fib er to center of bar or wire located closest
thereto, mm
::; distance from extreme compression fiber to
extreme tension steel, mm
:;:: modulus of clasti city of concrete, MPa
== modulus of elasticity of reinforcemen t. MPa
::; n ex ural s ti ffncss of compression member. N_mm 2
Sce Eq. 41015 illld 410-16
= specified compressive slrenglh o f concret.e, MPa
::; ca lculated stress in reinforcement at service load s,
MPa
= spccified yield strength f,. of tran:..vcrsed
reinforcement , MPa
= overall dimcnsion o f me mber in dirccti on ac tio n
co ns idered , mm
or
11l
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
448
:: moment of inenia of gross concrete secti on about

4
I"
I"
ccntroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement, mm

::= moment
of inertia of reinforcement about
ccnlroidaJ axis of member cross section. mm 4
= moment of incI1ia of stl1Jctural sleel shape, pipe or
tubin g about ccnlroidaJ axis of composite member
cross secl.i on, mm~
;;: effective length factor for co mpression members
:: length of a compression member in a fram e,
measured from center to ccnter of the joints in th e
A1(
frame
;; unsupported length of compress ion member, mill.
;: factored mo ment to be used for design of
M,
= moment due to loads causing app reciabJe sway
M..
;; factored momenl at section
MI
= smaller factored end moment on a compression

member, positive if member is bent in single
curvature, negative if bent in double curvature
= faclOrcd end moment on a compression member at
the end at wh ich M J acts, due to loads that cause no
apprcciable sidesway. calcul atcd using a first-order
clastic frame analysis
= fn ctored end moment on co mpression members at
the end at which M/ acts, duc to loads thm cause
appreciable sides way, calculated using a first-order
elastic frame analysis
= larger factored end moment on compression
member. always positive
= minimum value of M l
= factored end mome nt on compression member at
the end at which M2 acts. due to loads that cause no
appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first -order
elastic frame analysis
= factored end moment on co mpression member ill
Ihe end at which M2 aCIS, due 10 loads thtlt cnuse
;:Ippreciable sides way, calculated usi ng a first-order
elasti c frame ana lysis
= nominal axial load strength at balanced strai n
co nditions. Sec Section 410.4 .2
= critical load. Sec Eq. 410-14
= nomina! nxialload strength at given ecccntricity
= nominal axial load strength at ze ro eccentri cit y
= factored axial load at given eccentricit y
1/1
P,
PdllJ
Lt"
compression member
M /lu
M IJ
Ml
M Vrlill
M 2/tJ
M21
PI!
P,
PI!
PrJ
PI'
.s (J P
II
,.
V"_~
= stability index for a slory. See Section 4 I O. I 2.4 .2

= radius of gyrati on of cros:-; secti on of a compression
member
= maximum ccnter-to-centcr spacing of fl cxur;t1
tensioTl reinforcement nearest to the extreme
tension face. mm (where thcre is onl y one hal' or
wire neares! 10 the extreme tension face. s i!oi the
maxi mum width of the extrcme tension face .)
= factored horizontal shear in a story. N
= quantity limiting di stribution of fl exural
re inforcement. See Section 4 10.7
p,
= factor defined in Section 410.3.7.3
= ratio used to accoun t fo r reduction of stiffness of

columns due to sustained axial loads
= ratio used to account for reducti on of stiffness of
columns due to sustained lateral loads
= relative lateral denection between the top and
bottom of a story due to V,,, computed using a firstorder clasti c frame ana lysis and stiffn ess values
satisfying Section 410. I 2.4 .2
= momcnt magnification [..1. . . 101' for frames braced
against sidesway (0 reflect effccts of member
curvature between ends of co mpression members
= moment magnification factor for frames not braced
against sidesway to reflect laternl drift resU lting
from lateral and gravity loads
= net tensile strain in extreme tension steel at
nominal strength
= ralia of nonprestressed tension reinforcemcnt
= A/bd
= reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions. Sce Secti on 410.4.2
= ratio of vo lume of spiral reinforcement to total
volume of core (out-la-out of spirals) of a spirally
reinforced co mpression member
= strength-reduction factor. Sec Section 409.4
== stiffness reducti on factor
410.2 Scope
Provisions of Section 4 10 shall appl y for design of members

subject to flexure or axial loads or to combi ned flexure and
axial loads.
410.3 Design Ass umptions
410.3.1 Strength design of members for flexure and axial
loads shall be based on assu mptions
giv~~11
;n Sections
410.3.2 through 410.3.7 and on satisfacti on of applicable
co nditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.

410.3.2 Strain in reinforcement and COl1crete shall be
assumed directly proportional to the disI;uwe from the

neutral axis, except that , for deep fl exural IJi' ;U H ,'.'; 'ok, ;-; ~~d
in Section 4 10.8. 1. an analys is th at con,,!,!
distribution of strai n shall be used. A hern :;;,' l i
.''''permitted 10 use a strut-and-t i::: model. See :)Cl.IHlIt . hU~.
4 11.9. and Section 427 .
410.3.3 Maximum usable strain at cxtJ't'!lU'
co mpression fiber shall be assumed equal "('; ~ .. :.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Pililippin es
'l h . .
rete
410.3.4 Stress in reinforcement be low speci fied yield

strength Ir for gmde of reinforcement used shall be taken as
t"s times steel strain. For strains greater than that
conesponding to h" stress ill reinforcement shall be
cons idered indcpendem of strain and equal to1;..
410.3.5 Tensile strengt h o f concrete sha ll be neglecp.ed in
axial and flexural calculation s of reinforced concre te , except
where meeting requirements of Section 418.5.
II
410.3.6 The relationship between concrete compressive

stress distribution and <.:onc rCle strain shall be assumed to be
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape that
resull s in prediction of strength jn substantial agreement
with resu lts of comprehensive lests.
449
conditions, For Grade 415 reinforce ment, and for all

prestressed reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the
compression-controlled st rain limit equal to 0.002.
410.4.4 Sections arc tension-controlled if the net tensile

strain in the extreme tension sleel, et, is equal to or greater
than 0.005 when the conc rete in compression reaches its
assumed strai n limit of 0 .003. Sections with t( between the
compression -controll ed strain limit and 0.005 constitute a
transition region between compress ion-contro lled and
tension-colltrolled secii,)ns.
4]0.4.5 For nonpreslressed flexural members and
nonprestressed members with factored axial compressive
load less Ihan 0.1 Of,' A" e, at nominal sirength shall not be
less Ihan 0.004.

410.3.7
Requirements or Seclion
410.3.6 may be
considered satisfied by an equivalent recta ngular concrete

stress distribution defined by the following:
410.4.5.1 Use or compression reinrorcemenl shaJJ be

permitted
in conjunction with additional ten sion
re inforcemenllO increase the strength of flexural members.
410.3.7.1 Concrete Slress of 0.85[, shall be ass umed

unjfofJ1l1 y distributed over an equivalent compression zone
bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight line
located parallel to the neutral axis at a dis tance a:: (3, c
from the fiber of maximum compressive strain.
410.3.7.2 Distance from fiber of maximum strain to the
neutral axis. c, shall be measured in a dire:ction
perpendicular LO the axis.
410.4 .6 Design axial load strength Pn of compression

members shall not be taken greater than the following :
410.4.6.1
For nonprestressed members with sp iral

reinforcement confonning to Section 407.11.4 or composite
members conforming to Section 410.17 :
(410- 1)
410.3.7.3 Faelor P, shall be laken as 0.85 ror eoncrele

strengths!, for 17 MPa up 10 28 MPa. For siren glhs "bove
28 MPa. P, sliall be reduced linearly al a rate of 0.05 ror
each 7 MPa of strength in excess of 28 MPa, but (31 s hall not
410.4.6.2
For
nonprestressed
members
reinforcement conformin g to Section 407. 11.5:
be takcn less than 0.65.
410.4,6.3 For prestressed members. design ax ial load

stren gth. riP" shall not be taken grea ter than 0.85 (for
members with spiral reinfo rcement) or 0.80 (for members
with lie reinforcement) of the design axial load strength at
zero eccentricity. ' Po.
410.4 General Principles and Requirements

410.4.1 Design of cross scction subjeci to flexure or axial
loads or to combined flexure and axial loads shaH be based
on stress and strain compat ibi lity using assumpt ions in
Seclion 410.3.
410.4.2 Balanced st rain conditions exi~t at a cross section
when
tension
reinforcement
reaches
the
strain
corresponding to its specified yield strengt h f. just as
con crete in compression reaches it s assumed ultinlat c strai n
of 0.003 .
/~ (mwl =
0.80[0.85[, (A,- A,,) +
with
tie
/,A"j (4 10-2)
410.4.7 Members subjecllo compressive axial load shall be

designed for the maximum moment that can accompany th e
axial load. The factored axial load PII at given eccentricity
shall not exceed that given in Section 410.4.6. The
maximum factored moment Mu shall be magnified for
slende rn ess effecls in accordance with Section 410 .11 .
410.5 Distance between Lateral Supports of Flexural

Members
410.4.3 Sect io ns IIrc compressionco lltrolietl if the ne t

tensile strai n in the extremc tensioll slee l, t:/. is equa l 10 or
les s thall the compression-controlled strain limit when th e
concrete in comprcssion re;\ches its assullled strain limit of
0.003. The co mpress io n-controlled s t r~ jn limit is the: net
tensile strain ill the reinforcement at balanced stra in
410.5.1 Spacing of laleral slIppons ror a beam shall nol

exceed 50 times b, the least width of compression fl ange or
fa ce.
111
National Str.uctural Cod e of the Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
4-50
CHAPTEI1 4 .. Concrete
410.5.2 Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken

into account in determining spacing of lateral supports.
410.6 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members

410.6.1 At every section of a flexural member where (ensile
reinforcement is required by analysis, except as provided in
Sections 410.6.2. 410.6.3 and 410.6.4. A. provided shall not
be less than that given by:
A
.,min
.J4 /"/y
b d
(410-3)
and not less than 1.4 bwdl/y

410.6.2 For a statically determinate T-section with flange
in tension, the area As,min shall be equal to or greater than the
smaller value given either by:
A.,mln
rr:
= 2/
b.d
"
(410-4)
or Eq. 410-3, except that b", is replaced by either 2 b", or the

width of the flange, whichever is smaller.
410.6.3 TIle requirements of Sections 410.6.1 and 410.6.2
need not be applied if at every section, As provided is at
least onc-third greater than that required by analysis.
410.6.4 For structural slabs and footings of uniform
thickness, the minimum area of tensile reinforcement in the
direction of span shall be the same as that required by
Section 407.13.2.1. Maximum spacing of this reinforcement
shall not exceed the lesser of three limes the thickness, nor
450 Illlll.
410.6.5 In structures located at areas of low levei seismic
risk, beams in ordinary moment frames forming part of the
seismic~force~resisting system shall have at least two main
flexural reinforcing bars continuously top and bottom
throughout the beam and continuous through or developed
within exteriur columns or boundary elements.
410.7 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in Bemus
and One-way Slabs
410.7.1
flexural
and in
stresses
This section prescribes rules for distribution of

reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams
one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural
in only one direction).
410.7.2 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way

slabs shall be as required by Section 413.4.
410.7.3 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well

distributed within maximum flexural tension zones of a
member cross section as required by Section 410.7.4.
410.7.4 The spacing s of reinforcement closest to a surface
in tcnsion, s, shall not cxceed that given by:
(410-5)
but not greater than 300(2801/.). where co is the least

distance from surface of reinforcement or prestressing
steelto the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire
nearest to the extreme tension face, s used in Eq. 410-5 is
the width of the extreme tension face.
Calculated stress in reinforcement Is in MPa closest to the
tension face shall be computed based on the unfactored
moment. It shall be pennitted to take Is 'as 2/3 of specified
yield strength J,..
410.7.5 Provisions of Section 410.7.4 are not sufficient for
structures subject to very aggressive exposure or designed to
be watertight. For such structures, special investigations and
precautions are required.
410.7.6 Where flanges of T-beam construction are in
tension, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall be
distributed over an effective flange width as defined in
Section 408.12, or a width equal to ~:)Ile-tenth the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds
Olle tenth the span, some longitudinal reinforcement shall be
provided in the outer portions of the flange.
410.7.7 Where II of a beam or joist exceeds 900 mm,
longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be unirorm~y
distributed along both side faces of the member. Skm
reinforcement shall extend for a distance hl2 from the
tension face. The spacing s shall be as provided in Section
410.7.4, where Cn is the least distance from the surface of
the skin reinforcement or prestressing tendons to tbe side
face. It shall be permitted to include such reinforcement in
strength computations if a strain compatibility analysi:: is
made to determine stresses in the individual bars or wires.
410.8 Deep Beams

410.8.1 Deep beams are members loaded on olle face and
supported on the opposite face so that compression slruls
can develop between the loads and the supports, and Ii::':{
either:
Association of Structural Engineers of tl"18 Philippines
I.
Clear spans, J", equal to or less than four times the

overall member depth; or
2.
Regions wi th concen trated loads withi n (wice the

member depth from (he face of the support.
Deep beams shall be designed either taking in to account

nonlinear dist ri buti on of strain, or by Sectio n 427. (See al so
Section 411 .9. land 4 12. 11.6). Lat eral buc klin g shall be
co nsidered.
4W.8.2 VII of deep hi.:!ams shall be in accordance with

Section 4 11.9.
410.8.3 Mi nimum nexural (ension reinforcemcnt, AI.
shall confonn to Section 410.6.
min.
410.8.4 Minimum horizontal and vert ical reinforcement in

the side faces of deep flexural members shall be the greater
of the requirements of Sections 411.9.4. 4 11.9.5 and
427.3.3.
4-5 t
area. This provision shall not apply to special moment

frames or special stlllctural walls in Seismic Zone 4 that are
designed in accordance with Section 42 1.
410.10 Limits for Reinfor cement of Compression
M emb ers
410.10.1 Area of 10ngituainaJ reinforcement, All! for noncomposit e compression members shall not be less than 0.01
or morc than 0.08 times gross area Ag of secti on.
41 0.10.2 Mini mum nu mber of longi tudinal bars in
compression members shall be 4 fo r bars wi thin rectangul ar
or ci rcu lar ties. 3 for bars witltin triangu lar ties. and 6 for
bars enclosed by spirals conforming to Section 4 10. 10.3.
410.10.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcemen t ratio,
be less than the value gi ven by:
Ps. shall not

(41 0-6)
410.9 Des ign Dimensions for Compression Mcmbers

410.9.1 Isolated Compression Member with Multiple
Spirals
Ou ter limits of the effective cross section of a compression

mem ber with Iwo or morc interlocki ng spirals shall be taken
at a distance outside (he ext reme limi ts of the spi rals equal
to the mini mum concrete cover required by Section 407.8.
410.9.2 Com p ressio n M ember Built Monoli thi cally With

W a ll
Outer limits o f the effective cross section of a spirally
rei nfo rced or tied reinforced compression member built
mo no lithicall y w ith a concrete wall or pier shall be taken
not greater than 40 nun outs ide the spiral or tie
rei nfo rcement.
where the value of /,., used in Eq. 410-6 shall not exceed
700 MPa. For /" greater th an 415 MPa, lap splices
acco rdin g to Section 407. 11.4.5 (1 ) shall not be used.
410.11 Slenderness E lTccl< in Compression M embers
410.11.1 Slenderness effeclS shal l be pemli ucd to be
ncglected in lhe following cases:
I.
For compression members not braced against sidesway

when:
k1u < 22
2.
For compression members braced agains t sides way

when:
34 - 12( ; : ) :540
410.9.3 Equivalent C ircular Compression M ember
As an alternative to usi ng the full gross area for des ign of a

com press ive member with a square. octagonal or other
shaped cross section. it sh'llI be permitted to usc a ci rcu lar
secti o n with a diameter cqual to the least latera l d imension
of the actual s h~i;C .
Gross area considered, requi red
percen tage of reinfu rcemen t, and design strength shall be
based on that circular section.
410.9.4 Limits ofSec tioll
For a compression member with <l cross section larger than
requ ired by considerations of loading, it shall be permitted
to base Ihe minirnu m reinforce ment and des ign strength on a
reduced effective area Ag not less than one ha lf the tota l
(410-7)
(410-8)
where MIIM2 is positive if the colu mn is bent in single

curvatu re. and negative if the member is bent in double .
curvature.
It shall be pcmlitled to co nsider compression members

braced against sideway when bracing elements have a total
sti ffn ess, resisting lateral movement of that story. of at least
12 times the gross stiffness resisting lateral movement of
that story. of at leas t 12 times the gross stiffness of the
colu mns wit hin (he story.
lh
Nati ona l Structura l Code of th e Pll i1 ippines G Edition Volume 1
4.52
410.11.1.1 The unsu pported length of a compression

l11~cm be r . lu. shall be taken as the cJc<lr distance between
floor slabs, beams, or other members capable of provid ing
lateral support in the direction being considere:d. Where
column capitals or hau nches are present, I., shall be
meas ured to the lower ext remit y of the capital or hau nch in
the plane cons idered.
410.11.1.2 It shall be pen niued to take the radius of
gyration, r, eq ual to 0.30 li mes the overall dimension in Ihe
d irection stability is be ing conside red for ft:!clangul ar
co mpression members and 0.25 times (he diameter for
circular compression members. For o lher shapes, it shall be
perm itted (0 compute r for the gross concrete sectio n.
410.11.2 When s lenderness effects arc not negl ec ted as

permitted by Sec tion 41 0. 11.1. the design of com pression
mem bers. restrai ning beams, and other slipPol1ing members
shall be based on the factored forces and moment s from a
second -order analysis satisfying Sections 4 10. 1 J .3,
41 0. 11.4, or 410.11.5 . These members shall also sati sfy
Sections 410.11.2.1 and 410.11.2.2. The dimensions o f each
member cross section used in the analysis shall be within 10
percent of the dimensions of the members shown on th e
design drawings or the analysis shall be repealed.
410.11.2.1 Total moment including secondord er effects in
co mpression members , restraining beams, or oth er structu ral
members shall not ex ceed 1.4 times the moment d ue to firs t ~
order effects.
410.11.2.2 Secondorder effec ts shall be conside red along
the length o f compression members. It shall be pe rmitl ed to
accouOl for th ese e ffects using the momc nt magnifica tion
procedure out li ned in Secti on 4 10.13 . .
410.12.3
It shall be permined to usc the fo ll owin g
properti es for the members in the structure:
I. Modu lus of el ast icity ................ Er from Section 408.6.1
2. Moments o f inertia, J
Compression members:
Coiulnns ........... ..... ....... .. ....... ................... .
Walls Uncracked.
.. ...... ........ .... ........... ..
Walls Cracked .
0.701,
0.701,
0.3 51,
Flexu ral members:

BeaITIs ...... .. ....... ..... .
Flat plates and fla t s labs ... ......... ..... .
3. Area ......................... ......... ...... ......... .
0.35/,
0.25 1.
LOOA,
Altem alively, the moment s of ineni:l of compression and

fl exural members. I , sha ll be permitted to be com puted as
follows:
Compress ion members:
1 = ( 0.80+ 25A,, )( 1 -
M.. . 0.501:" j
/. S 0.875 I,
(4109)
P"I!
Where Pu. and Mu. shall be det ermined from fhe pallicular
load combination under co nsiderati on, or the comhillation of
Pit and Mu. resulting in the smallest value of I. J need !lot be
taken less than 0.35/,.
Flexural members:
1 = (0.10 + 25p)( 1.2 - 0.2 b.) 1,:0 0.5/,
(~ 1 0 1O )
d
f or cont inuous flexura l members. I shall be permillcd to be
taken as the average of values obtained from Eq. I~ 10 10 for
lhe critical posi tive and nega tive moment scctions. J lIeeo
not be taken less than 0.25 /, .
410.12 Magnified Moments

410.12.1 Nonlinear Second-Order Analysis
Seco nd-o rder ana lys is shall cons id ermaterial on linearity,
member curva ture an d lateral drift, du ration of loads,
shri nkage and crecp. and interac ti on wilh Ihe sopporti ng
found ation. The analys is proccdure shall have been shown
[0 result in prediction of streng th in substant iil l a.grcemcilt
with resu lts o f co mprehe ns ive tes ts of co lu mns in sta ticall y
indelcn nin ate reillforceu concrete structures.
The cross~sect iolla l dimensions and reinforcement r~fio used

in the above form ul as shall be within 10 pr nT!:1 d :hc
d imensio ns and re inforcement ra tio shown on ! h t: de i t;l i
drawings or the stiffness evaluati on shall be rcpc'llt:<i.
410.12.3.1 When sustained lateral loads an' Pfl:\ " ;
co mpression me mbers slw ll be divided by ( I + !~:,i . ., :
term /Jd.l shi.iIJ be ta ken as the ratio of maxi lllulli factoli...o
susta ined shi::ar wilhin <I story 10 the ll1 axilll U! :, I:lI ; .: .
shear in that story associmed wi th the s;Jln~ i<mo
combinat ion, but s hall no! be taken greiltcr l h ;~ n 1.0.
410.12.2 Elastic SecondOrder Analys is

Elasti c sct:o n d ~ o rd er analysis s hall cons ider section
propert ies det ermin ed taking into account th e infl uence of
ax ial loads. the presence of cracked regi ons along th e le ngth
o f th e member, and the effects of load durati oll .
410.12.4 I\:lomcnt Magnification I'roccdu l"!'

Co lumns and stori es in structures shall be
no ns way or sway columns or stori es. The dl',,, i: I: "j
in nonsway frames or stori es s hall be based ,iIi
Association of Structural Enninecrs of the Philippin e:;
( ;,~ ;
::; .. ,1"\;0,;
410.13. The design of columns in sway frames or stories

shall be based on Section 410.14.
453
410.13.1.3 The effective length factor. k, shall be permitted

to be taken as 1.0.
410.12.4.1 It shall be permitted to assume a column in a

structure is nons way if the increase in column end moments
due to second-order effects docs not exceed 5 percent of the
first-order end moments.
410.13.1.4 For members without transverse loads between

supports, c'1I shall be taken as:
assume a story
where M,IM 2 is positive if the column is bent in single

curvature, and negative if the mem.ber is bent in double
curvature. For members with transverse loads between
supports, e", shall be taken as l.0.
410.12.4.2 It also shall be permitted

within H structure is nons way if:
to
Cm
0.6 + 0.4 (M/M,)
(41017)
(4101 I)
410.13.1.5 The factored moment M, in Equation (41012)
shall not be taken less than

is less than or equal to 0.05, where ,[P" and Vus arc the
total vertical load and the story shear, respectively, in the
story in question and Lto is the first-order relative deflection
between the top and boltom of that story due to V,,~.
410.13 Moment Magnification PnlceduJ'c - Nonsway
410.13.1 Compression members shaH be designed for the
factored axial load, Pu , and the moment amplified for the
effects of member curvature, Mn as follows:
(41012)
M 2.min = PI. (15 + O.03h)
(410-18)
about each axis separately, where 15 and h are in

millimeters. For members for which M 2.min exceeds M 2 , the
value of Cm in Equation (41017) shall either be taken equal
to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of the computed end
moments, M, 1M2.
410.141\:\0ment Magnification Procedure Sway
410.14.1 The moments MJ and M, at the ends of an
individual compression member shall be taken as:
where:
~
1.0
(41013)
where
I~.
7[2
EI
(41014)
(kl" )'
(41019)
Mz"s +
(41020)
0: MI.! and Os M zs shall be computed according to
Sections 410.14. J.3 or 410.14. 1.4.
410.14.1.1 Flexural members shall be designed for the total

magnified end moments of the compression members at the
joint.
410.13.1.1 El shall be taken as:
E I =fE:2EJ, +EJ,,)
M ln.1 +
(41015)
1+ PdllJ
410.14.1.2 The effective length factor k shall be determined
using the values of Be and I givcn in Section 410.12.2 and

shall not be less than 1.0.
or
EI
410.14.1.3 The moment magnificr (5s shall be calculated as
(O.4E,1 , )
(41016)
1+ Pdll.1
(41021)
Alternatively, EI shall be permitted to be computed using

the value of 1 from Eq. 4109 divided by (I + (I"",).
If 8.\ calculated by Eq. 410-21 exceeds 1.5, S.! shall be

calculated using second-order elastic analysis or Section
410.13.1.2 The term f!,/".< shall be taken as the ratio of

maximum factored axial sustained load to maximum
factored axial load associated with the same load
combination, but shall not be taken greater than 1.0.
410.14.1.4.
National Structural Code of the PhilipPines Gill hlition Volume 1
454
CHAPTE" 4 . Concrete
410.14.1.4 Alternatively. it shall be permitted to calculate

os as;
< ~----->I
0,
(41022)
IP"-
1--_
0.75IP,
where 'fPII is the summation for all the factored vertical
loads in a story and "LPc is the summation for all swayresisting columns in ':1 story. Pc is calculated using Eq. 41014 with k determined from Section 410.14.1.2 and EI from
Section 410.13.1.1, where lid, shall be substituted fol' lidm.
410.15 Axially Loaded Members Supporting Slab

System
Axially loadcd members supporting slab system included
within the scope of Section 413.2 shall be designed as
provided in Section 410 and in accordance with the
additional requirements of Section 413.
410.16 Transmission of Column Loads through 'Floor
System
410.17.2 Strength of a composite member shall be

computed for the same limiting conditions applicable to
ordinary reinforced concrete members.
410.17.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a
composite member shall be transferred to the concrete by
members or brackets in direct bearing on the composite
member concrete.
or
410.17.4 All axial load strength not assigned to concrete

a composite member shall be developed by direct
connection to the structural steel shape, pipe or tube.
410.17.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of

gyration, r, of a composite section shall not be greater than
the value given by:
O.2EJg +E~~
0.2E,A, + E,A"
(41023)
and, as an alternative to a more accurate calculation, EI in

Eq. 41014 shall be taken either as Eq. 41015; 01'
EI ~(~)E I EI
When the specified compressive strength of concrete in a

column is greater than 1.4 times that specified for a floor
system, transmission of load through the floor system shall
be provided by Sections 410.16.1, 410.16.2, or 410.16.3:
1+ fJdlU
~ K
(41024)
Ix
410.17.6 Structural Steel Encased Concrete Core

410.16.1 Concrete of strength specified for the column shall
be placed in the floor at the column location. Top surface of
the column concrete shall extend 600 mm into the slab from
face of column. Column concrete shall be well integrated
with floor concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with
Sections 406.4.6 and 406.4.7.
410.17.6.1 For a composite member with concrete corc

encased by stI1lctural steel, thickness of the steel encasement
shall not be less than:
410,16.2 Strength of a column through a flnor system shall

be based on the lower value of concrete strength with
vertical dowels and spirals as required.
nor
410.16.3 For columns laterally supported on foUl' sides by

beams of approximately equal depth or by slabs, it shall be
permiued to base strength of the column on an assumed
concrete strength in the column joint equal to 75 percent of
column concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor concrete
strength. In the application of this Section, the ratio of
column concrete strength to slab concrete strength shall not
be taken greater than 2.5 for design.
for each face of width b
-t;
h -8E .'
for circular sections of diameter h
410.17.6.2 Longitudinal bars located within the encased

concrete core shall be permitted to be used in computing An
and /.u"
410.17.7 Spiral Reinforcement Around Strudllrai Steel
Core
410.17 Composite Compression Members
410.17.1 Composite compression members shall include all
such members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel
shapes, pipe or tubing with or without longitudinal bars.
A composite member with spirally reinforced conereii'

around a stmctural steel core shall conform to Sections
410.17.7.1 through 410.17.7.4.
410.17.7.1 Design yield strength of structural steel corc

shall be the specified minimum yield strength for gr;Hic
structural steel used but not to exceed 350 MPa.
Association-of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
410.17.7.2 Spiral reinforcemen l shall conform to Section
410,10,3,
410.18.2 Section 4 10, 18 does not apply to post-tensioning

anchorages,
410.17,7,3 Longi tudi nal bars located within the spiral shall
f1 0 t be less than 0.01 or morc than 0.08 times net area of
concrete sectio n.
410.17.7.4 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall
be permitted to be used in computing As'\" and I,x.
410.17.8 Tie Reinforcement Around Structural Steel
Core
A composite member with laterall y lied concrete around a
slructural steel core shall conform to Secti o ns 41 0.17,S. 1
through 4 10,17,8,7:
410.17.8.1 Des ign yield strengtll of structural steel core
shall be the specified minimu m yield strength for grade of
structural steel used bu t not to exceed 350 MPa.
410.17.8.2 La teral ties shal l eX lend co mpletel y around the
stru ctural steel core.
410.17.8,3 [-'1teral ti es shall have a di ameter not less than
0.02 times the greatest side dimen sion o f composite
member, except that ti es shall not be small er than 10 mm
diameter and are not required to be larger th an 16 mill
diameter. Welded wire fabric of equi va lent area shall be
permitted.
410.17.8.4 Vert ica l spac ing of lateral lies shall not exceed
16 longitud in al bar diamcters, 48 tie bar diamcters , or one
half times the leas t side dimension of the composite
member.
410.17.8.5 Longit udi nal bars located within the tics sha ll
nOI be less than 0.0 1 or more th an 0.08 limes net area o f
concrete seclion.
410.17.8.6 A longitudinal bar shall be located at every
comer of a rectangular cross section, with other longitudinal
bars spaced not farther apart than one half the least side
dimension of the c O l11 po~ ite member.
410.17.8 .7 Longitud inal bars located with in the ties shall be
permitted to be used in compu ting A.u ,l nd 1.0 :,
410.18 B earing S trength
410.18.1 Design bearing stre ngth on concrete shall not
exceed (0,8S[, A,), except when the supporting su rrace is
wi der o n all si des th an the loaded area , the n the des ign
bearing streng th on (he loaded area shall be penn ili ed 10 be
mu ltiplied by A21 A" bu t by nOI more (h'ln 2.
National Structura l Code of the PhilippifwS 6
455
111
Edition Volum e 1
4-56
c]
411.1 Notalions
A ~.
'=
arc<t of co ncre te section resisting shear transfer,

111m2
A fP
AJ
A,t
All
AI
= area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete

cross section, mm 2. Sec Section 411.7.1
::= area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting
factored moment [Vua + Nuc(IJ d)). mm 2
= gross area of section, 111m2. For a hollow section,
A, is the urea of the concrete on ly and does not
inctude the arca of the void(s)
= area of shear reinforce ment parallel to primary
tension reinforcement in erbel or bracket, 111m2
= lotal area of longitudinal reinforce ment to resist
dl'
fr
.JT: ;: :;
let
Jd
torsion, mm 2
A ,.mill
An
An
A"h
AJ
Ale
At
A\'
A ,!
A ,.11
A". mill
minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement to

resist torsion. mm 2, Sec Section 411 .7.5.3
:::: area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel res isting
tensile force NII(, nun 2 See Section 411 .10
::: gross area enclosed by shear flow path. mm 2
:;: area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed
transverse torsional reinforcement, 111m2
;:; area of non prestressed longitudinal tension
reinforcement . mOl 2
;:; area of primary tension reinforcement in a corbel
or bracket, ffim2. Sec Section 411.10.3.5
:= area of one leg of a closed stirrup reSisting IOrsion
within a distance s. mm 2
;:; area of shear reinforcement within a distance s,
mm 2
::; area of shearfriction reinforcement, mm 2
;: ;lrea of shear reinforcement parallel to nexural
tension reinrorccmenl within a spacing Sz, mlll 2
= minimum arca of shear reinforcement within it
Spacing s, 111m 2. Sec Sections 411.6.6.3 ,md
::::
/p<
h'~
It!!
J"u
1;.
ht
411.6.6.4
a
b
b"
ht
hot"
/)1
/;2
CI
:::: shea r span, distance between concentrated load and
face of supports. mm
:;: width of compression face of member, mm
:::: perimeter of cri tical section for shear in slabs and
footings, nUll . See Section 411.13. J.2
::: width of thilt part of cross section containing the
closed stirnJps resisting torsion, mm
::: web width, or diameter of circular section, I1Ull
:;; dirnc.nsion of the critical section /)0 defined in
Section 411 ,13. 1.2 measured in the direction or the
span for which moments are determined, mill
== dimension of Ihe critical :-;ecti oll /}o defined in
Section 411 . 11.1.2 Illc<1surcd in the direction
perpendicular to b,. mOl
::: dimension of re-clangular or equivalent rectangular
column , capital or bracket measured in the
direction of the spa n for which l11omel1lS .Irc being

determin ed, mm
;:::; dimension of rectangular Of equivalent rectangular
column, capital or bracket measured tran sverse to
the direction of the span for which moments arc
being detennined. 111m
;:::; distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcemellt, mm
;:::; distan ce from ext reme co mpression fiber to
centroid of prestressing steel, mm
;:::; specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
square root of specified compressive strength of
II
h,.
h",
/"
I,.
/".
M.re'
M",
concrete. MPa
= average spli tting tensile strength of lighlweigi,t
aggregate concrete, MPa
= stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fibc!
of section where tensile st ress is caused by
externally applied loads, MP.
= compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for
all prestress losses) at cen troid of cross sectio n
resisting externally applied loads or at junction of
web and nangc when (he cel1lroid lies within the
flan ge, MPa. (In a composite member, he is
resultant compressive stress at centroid ur
composite section, or at junction of web and flang(.;.
when the cCl1Iroid lies within the flange. due ( 0
both prestress and moments resisted by prccw;{
member acting alone).
= compressive stress in concrete due to effective
prestress forces on ly (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at ex treme fiber of sec ti on where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads,
MPa
::: st ress in prestressi ng steel at nOminjll nexural
strength, MPa
::: specified (ensile strength of prestrl;.ssing steel, MPa
= speci fied yield strenglh of reinforce ment, MPa
::; specified yield st rength J... of transverse
reinforcement, MPa
= overall thickness or height of member, nUll
::: lotal depth of shearhead cross section, mm
= height of entire wall from base to top or height of
lile segment of wa ll considered, mill
= moment of inertia of seclion of heam about til e
celllroidal axis, mm 4
;:::; length of clear span measured face to face of
supports, mill
= lenglh of shearhcad ;!I'1ll from cCJlIroid of
concentrated load or reaction, m11l
:;; length of entire wall or lenglh of segment of wall
considered in direction of shear force, mill
= momenl causing flexural cracking at sectioll duc (0
externally applied loads, N-IllIl1. See Sc\tiou
4" .5.3 .1
moment modified 10 accolin{ for cI'J'v ' ot .
axial compression, Nmnl. See Section '111.4 .1..2
= factored
Association o f Structural Engineefs of tile P!ljJjppines
Mmi!x
= maximum factored moment at section due to
externally applied loads, N~mm

Mil
:::: nominal flexural strength at section, N-mm
Mp
= required plastic moment strength of shearhead
cross section, N-mm
Mu
= factored moment at section, N-mm
M\.
= moment resistance contributed by shearhead
reinforcement, N-mm
11
number of items, such as strength tests, bars, wires,
monostrand anchorage devices, anchors or
shearhead arms
Nil
= factored axial load normal to cross section
occurring simultaneously with VII or TIl; to be taken
as positive for compression, negative for tension, N
NIl('
factored horizontal tensile force applied at top of
~)racket or corbel acting simultaneously with V" to
be taken as positive for tension, N
Pcp
outside perimeter of the concrete cross section, nun
/h
perimeter of centerline of oulennost closed
transverse torsional reinforcement, nun
s
=- center-to-center spacing of items, such as
longitudinal
reinforcement,
transverse
reinforcement, prestressing tendons, wires, or
anchors, mm
S2
= center-to-center spacing of longitudinal shear or
torsion reinforcement, mm
7~
= nominal torsional moment strength, N-mm
1~
= factored torsional moment at section, N-mm
I
~ thickness of a wall of a hollow section, mm
V,
nominal shear strength provided by concrete, N
Vci
;;;: nominal shear strength provided by concrete when
diagonal cracking results from combined shear and
moment, N
V(!I' := nominal shear strength provided by concrete when
diagonal cracking results from high principal
tensile stress in web, N
Vd
= shear force at section due to unfactorcd dead load,
N
VI
=: factored shear force at section due to externally
applied loads occurring simultaneously with M"'(H.
fJ
y..
=
=
N
Vn
= nominal shear strength, N
Vp
= vertical
Vs
VI.
V'I
)'/
,
~,
component of effective prestress force at

section, N
;;;: nominal shear strength provided by shear
reinforcement, N
= factored shear force at section, N
::;:: nominal shear stress, MPa. Sec Section 411.13.6.2
::::: distance from centroida! axis of gross section,
neglecting reinforcement, to tension face, mm
=: angle defining the orientation of reinforcement
=: constant used to compute Vc in slabs and footings
= ratio of flexural stiffness of shearhead arm to
surrounding composite slab scction. Sec Section
411.13.4.5
457
::::: ratio of long to short dimension; sides of column,

concentrated load 01' reaction area, or sides of
footing, see Section 411
::::: factor used to compute Vc in prestressed slabs.
= factor used to determine the unbalanced moment
transferred by flexure at slab-column connection.
Sec Section 41 I
= factor used to determine the unbalanced moment
transferred by eccentricity of shear at slab-column
connections. See Section 411.13.7.1
= I - Yr
;: ;: number of identical arms of shearhead
= coefficient of friction. See Section 411.8.4.3
= modification factor reflecting the reduced
mechanical properties of lightweight concrete, all
relative to normal weight concrete of the same
compressive strength. See Section 411.8.4.3.
=- ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement.
= Ajbd
= ratio
p,
of area of
reinforcement to gross
to that reinforcement
= ratio of area of
reinforcement to gross
to that reinforcement
~
distributed
longitudinal
concrete area perpendicular
distributed
transverse
concrete area perpendicular
Ajb"d
PI\'
B
= angle of compression diagonals in truss analogy for
= strength reduction factor.
torsion
See Section 409.4
411,2 Shear Strength

411.2.1 Except for members designed in accordance with
Section 427, design of cross sections subject to shear shall
be based on
(41 I-I)
where VII is factored shear force at section considered and V,\
is nominal shear strength computed by
(411-2)
where Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in
accordance with Seclion 411.4 or Section 4 J 1.5, and VI is
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in
411.2.1.1 In determining shear strength V,,, the effect of any

openings in members shall be considered.
411.2.1.2 In determining shear strength V,., whenever
applicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and
shrinkage in restrained members shaH be considered and
effects of inclined flexural compression ill variable-depth
members shall be permitted to be included.
th
458
CHA PTER 4 Concrete
J. ~ f" 1(0.56
411.2.2 The values Of..Jf': used in SCClion41i1 shall not

exceed 8.0 Mra. except as allowed in Section 411.2 .2. 1.
JF:.) ,; 1.0.
N.B. Sect. 411 .3 nol in AC I. ad apted from NSCr 5~ Ed.
411.2.2. 1 Values o f ..Jf': greater th an 8.0 MP" are

411.4 Sh ea r Slrength Provided by Concre le for
all owed in compu ting Vo V ... and Vel<' fo r rcinl orced or

prestressed concrete beams and concrete joist cons tru ction
having mi ni mum web reinforce ment in acco rdance with
Sect :OIts 411.6.6.3 .411 .6.6 .4 and 411 .7.5.2.
411.4.1 S implified Calculation for Yc
411 .2.3 Co mputations of maximum [aclOrcd shea.r force Vu

al su ppons in accordance wilh Section 411 .2.3. 1 or
4 11.2.3.2 shall be permitted if all o f Ihe fo ll o wing three
condit io ns are sali s ficd :
Shear strength Vc s hall be co mputed by pro ViS. \lf.S {1[

Sections 411.4.1 . J thro ugh 411.4 . 1.3 unless a more detai I(..j
calcul ation is made in accord ance with Secti on 41J .4.2.
Throu ghout thi s Section, except in Secti on 411.8, A, shall b~
as defined in Section 408.7. 1.
J. Support reaction, in di rection of

introdu ces compress ion
member;
into
Nonp rcstressed Members
applie~d
the end
shear.
regions of '
411.4.1.1 For members subjecllO shear and nexure only:

(411 -3)
2.
Loads Urc applied at or near the top o f the membe r; and
3.
No concentrated load occurs between face of support

<l!Id location of critical section defined in Sections
411.4.1.2 For members subj ect to ax ial co mpression,
V~
411. 2. 3.1 and 4 11.2.3.2.

4J 1.2.3.1 For Ilonprestressed members, sections locawd less
th an a distance d from facc of SUPI)Qlt shall be pennilteci to
be de signed for thc same shear V" as Ihat computed at a
di stance d.
411.2,3,2 For prestressed members, secti ons locat ed less

than .1 distance hl2 from face of support shall be permitted
to be designed for Ihe same shenr V" as thaI co mputed at a
distance " 12.
411.2.4 Fo r deep bC Il IllS, brackets an d corbels. wa ll s and
slabs and foolin gs, the specia l prov isions of Secti ons 4 11 .9
Ih rough 4 11. 13 sholl opply.
411.3 Lightweight Concrete
0.17
(I'" ~')2ff
b . d (411-4)
14A
,."
Quan tity Nu/Ag shall be expressed in MPa.

411.4.1.3 For members subject (0 si gnificant axial tension,
Vc shall be taken as zero, unless a more detailed analysis is
made using Section 411.4 .2.3.
411.4.2 Delailed Ca lcu la li on for V,
Shear strength V.. shall be pcnnillcd 10 be computed by the
more dClailed calcul.at io n of Sectio ns 4 11.4 .2.1 throu gh
4 11.4 .2.3.
411.4.2.1 For members subject to shear and n cx.ure onl y,
(4 115)
v,
4J 1.3.1 Prov isio ns for shcar stre ngth Vc apply to norma lweigh t co ncretc. When lightweight aggregate conc rete is
used, one o f the fo ll ow ing modifi cat ions shall appl y:
but not great er {hall 0.29..Jf': b... d. Whe n computinr.
\~
hy Eq . 411-5. Vu d / M u shall not be taken grea tcr th;m ::.
411.3.1.1 When J,., is not spec ifi ed . all values o f ~
affecting \I, . ., ~ amI. Mn s hall be lllultiplied by a

mod ilicat io ll fac tor A. where}. is 0.75 for all -li g htweigh t
conc rete and 0.85 for sand-li ght weight concrete. Linear
illlcrpol:ltion between 0.85 and 1.0 shall be permit ted, Oil thc
basis of vo lumetric fractions, for concrete containing normal
weight fine agg regate and a blend of li ghtweight and normal
wei ght coarse aggregates. For normal wei ght co nc rete , ), =
1.0. If av erage splitting tensile strength of li ghtweight
con crete.Pn. is specified,
where Mil occurs simultaneollsly with

considered.
V.. ;\1
SCl'I :!,,;
411.4.2.2 For me mbers subj ect to axial compression, il

shall be pe rmitted to compute Vt. using Eq, 4 11-5 wilh M,.;
substituted for Mu and VI,d/MI, not then limitcd to ! .0.
where:
M", -- M "Nil
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of the Pililippines
(4" 8-11 )
---
CHAPTER 4 . COllcrete
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than:
459
411.5.3.1 Shear strength V,; shall be computed by

(411-7)
.j-j-:- b
= A. --'
V.
20'"
co
_=
V M
+ V + _,_
.
d
I'
"
(411-10)
M rn"~
where dp need not be taken less than 0.80h and

NjAg shall be expressed in MPa. When Milt as computed by
Equation (411-6) is negative, Vc shall be computed by
Equation (411-7).
411.4.2.3 For members subject to significant axial tension,
(411-8)
but not less than zero, where Nu is negative for tension.

N"IAg shall be expressed in MPa.
411.4.3 Circular Members
f)i
M cr<'-~'
_10 SA Y.lc
r;:;-(, + .(p c- . d
(411-11 )
y,
and values of M"wx and Vi shall be compmed from the load

combination causing maximum factored moment to occur at
the section. Vci need not be taken .less than 0.1 no.
411.5.3.2 Shear strength
ff bl.ji.
v..". shall be computed by

(411-12)
where dp need not be taken less than 0.80h.
For circular members, the area used to compute Vc shall be

taken as the product of the diameter and effective depth of
the concrete section. It shall be permitted to take the
effective depth as 0.8 times the diameter of the concrete
section.
Alternatively, Vc ". may be computed as the shear force

corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a
411.5 Shear Strength Provided by Concrete For
of member, or at intersection of flange and web when

centroidal axis is in the flange. In composite members,
principal tensile stress shall be computed using the cross
section that resists live load.
Prestressed Members
411.5.1 For the provisions of Section 411.5, d shall be taken
as the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of prestressed and nonprcstressed longitudinal tension
reinforcement, if any, but need not be taken less than 0.80h.
411.5.2 For members with effective prestress force not less
than 40 percent of the tensile strength of flexural
reinforcement, unless more detailed calculation is made in

v,
[A.1f:
+ 4.8
~ ~ Jb
but Vc need not be taken less than 0.17),
ff by.Li
Vc be taken greatcr than 0.42), jf~ bud
(411-9)
nor shall
nor the value
given in Sections 4 I J .5.4 or 411.5.5. VlldlM" shal! not be

takcn greater than ! .0, where M" occurs simultaneously
with V" at section considered.
411.5.3 Vc shall be pennittcd to be computed in accordance
with Sections 411.5.3.1 and 41 1.5.3.2 where Vc shall be the
lesser of Vci or V'.l>".
principal tensile stress of 0.33}
ff at the centroidai axis
411.5.4 In a pretensioned member in which the section at a

distance 1112 from face of support is closer to end of member
than the transfer length of the prestressing steel, the reduced
prestress shall be considered when computing V,." .. This
value of \~'l<" shall also be taken as the maximum limit for
Eq. 411-9. The prestress force due to tendons for which
bonding does not extend to the end of the member shall be
assumed to vary linearly frorn zero at point at which
bonding commences to a maximum at a distance from this
point equal to the transfer length, assumed to be 50
diameters for strand and 100 diameters for single wire.
In a pretensioned member where bonding of some

tendons does not extend to end of member, a reduced
prestress shall be considered when computing Vc in
accordance with Section 411.5.2 or 411.5.3. The value of
Vcwca!culated using the reduced pr{'stress shall also be taken
as thc maximum limit for Equatioi( (411-9). Prestress force
due to tendons for which bonding docs not cxtend to end of
mcmber may be assumcd to vary linearly from zero at the
point at which bonding commences to a maximum at a
distance from this point equal to the transfer length,
assumed to be 50 diamcters for strand and 100 diameters for
single wire.
411.5.5
th
National Structural Code of the Ptlilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
4 60
411.6 Shear Strength Provided b)' Shear Reinforcement
411.6.5.3
Where Vs exceeds 0.33
ff,. h ... d.
1 11. 6. ~. 2
411.6.1 Types of Shear Reinforcement
spacing given in Sections 411.6.5.1 and

reduced by one half.
411.6.1.1 Shear rcinforccn1cnI consisting of the following

shall be pCfmi(lcd:
411.6.6 Minimum Shcar Reinforccme nt
I.
Slinl1ps perpendicular to axis of member;
2.
Welded wire fabric with wires loc<tlcd pcrpcndiclJl:lr to

axis of member; and
3.
Spirals, circu lar ties, or hoops.
411.6.1.2 For lIonprcslfcssed members. shear reinforcement

shall be penrullcd to also consist 0[:
I.
2.
3.
SlinlJps making an angle of 45 degrees or morc with

iongilUdinallcnsion reinforcement;
maximum
shall b:;
411.6.6.1 A minimum area of shear fl'i nforcc ment, A".min,

shall be provided in all reinforced COw'n .":. flexural
members (prestressed and nonpres(resscJ ) Wht:T:. / // eXCe{~i~",
O.5V(". except in members satisfying one or ;..orc of (i )
through (6):
Solid slabs and footings;
1.
HoIlow~core
units with tOlal unlopped depth Ilot
greater than 300 mm and
h ollow ~c o rc
un its where
Longitudinal reinforcemclH Wil h belli porti on Jll<lkjng
2.
Vu is not greater than O.S V("".;
nn angl e of 30 degrees or more wi th the longitudi nal

tension reinforcement;
3.
Concrete joist construction defined by Section 408.14 ;
4.
Bcams with (owl depth, Ii not greate r thnn 250 mm~
5.
Beams integral with slabs with total depth, " not greater
than 600 mm, and not greater than 2 .~) limes thickness
of flange or 0.50 th e width of web;
6.
Beams constructed of steel ti bc r.. r e i nro ~ c ed, 110nn;;I

weight concrete with It' not exceedil1 g 4~J MPa, h Ho i
greater than 600 mill, and Vu not grealer (han O. J 7
Combinati on
of
stilTUPS
and
bent
longitudinal
reinforcement.
411.6.2 Tile values of 1;. and 1,./ llsed in the design of shear
rein fo rce ment shall not exceed 41 5 MPa, except the value
shall not exceed 550 MPa for a we lded defo rm ed wire
rei nforcemenl.
411.6.3 Where the provisions of Section 411.6 are applied
to prestresscd mcmbers. d shall be laken as the di stance
from extreme comp ression fiber to centroid of the
pres tressed and non prestressed longitudinni tension
rei nforcement, if an y. bUlllecd not be taken less than 0.80h.
411.6.4 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear

reinforcement shall extend to a distance d frolll extre me
compression fiber <lnd shall be anchored at both ends
according to Section 412.14 to develop the design yield
strength of reinforcement.
411.6.5 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinforcement
411.6.5.1 Spac ing of shear reinforcement placed
perpendi cular to axis of member 5h311 not exceed dl2 in
nonprcstrcsscd memhers and O.75h in prest ressed melnbcrs.
nor 600 mill.
ffb.d
411.6.6.2 Minimum shear reinforcement rcquir:mcnts of
Section 411.6.6.1 shall be waived if sh uwn by test that
required nominal nexural, Mn and shear :-.' rcngth , "" can be
developed when shear reinforcement is ( ,It(ed . .,l;h I.esl
shall simulate effects of differential '!! icm,' ,. creej:,
shri nkage and temperature change, be,!}"': 0 11 : H ;disli:
assessmelll of such effects occurring in sen ice.
411.6.6.3 Where shear reinforcemenl' is reqlli re(\ ,,)' :-'ectioJ '
4 11 .6.6. 1 or for strength and where Secril,;} 4; I.; i . ;J ow ~
torsion to be neglected, the min imulll :~ ..~:! o ~ :.he.l'
reinforcement for prestressed (except as . ) j )\lidj'~ ; !i ' " " li' J;
4 I 1.6.6.4) and nonpre5tressed member', :-.1: d ;1:. '.\ . ',11',
by:
b .f
A . = 0.062 Vrr;-j'
~
J r; j
(4 111 3)
r . 1IlI11.
y'
411.6.5.2 Inclined slim.lps and belli longitudinal

reinforcement shall be so spaced {hat every 45c!egrcc linc,
extending tow.mJ the reaction frOI11 mid ~d c pth of member
d/2 10 longilUdi nal tension reinforcement. shall be crossed
by al le.lsl one line of shear reinforcement.
but shall not be less than (0.35b ...'i)IJ;."

in millimeters.
Association of Stru ctura l Enginee rs of the Philip pines
WIL i~: i) .. .',,:.
411.6.6.4 For prestressed members with effective prestress

force not Jess than 40 percent of the tensile strength of
flexural reinforcement, A"min shall not be less than the
,mailer value from Equatio;\s (411-13) and (411-14).
Av, min
AI"!'" s
80! d
y
Jfl
(411-14)
461
411.6.7.6 Where shear reinforcement consists of a series of

parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up bars at
different distances from the support, shear strength Vs shall
be computed by Eq. 411-16.
411.6.7.7 Only the center Ulfee fourths of the inclined

portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered
effective for shear reinforcement
".
411.6.7 Design of Shear Reinforcement

411.6.7.1 Where factored shear force VII exceeds shear
strength Vn shear reinforcement shall be provided to
satisfy Equations (411-1) and (411-2), where shear strengU\
V~ shall be computed in accordance with Sections 411.6.7.2
through 411.6.7.9.
411.6.7.8 Where more than one type of shear reinforcement

is used to reinforce the same portion of a member, shear
strength, Vs shall be computed as the sum of the Vf values
computed for the various types of shear reinforcement.
411,6,7,9 Shear strength V, shall not be taken greater Ulan

0.66.JT: bwd.
411.6.7.2 Where shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis

of member is used,
V =
411.7 Design for Torsion
A.../Yld
(411-15)
where A" is the area of shear reinforcement within spacing s.

411.6.7.3 Where circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as
shear reinforcement, V, shall be computed using equation
(411-15) where d is defined in Section 411.4.3 for circular
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with Sections

411.7.1 through 411.7.6, or 411.7.7.
411.7,1 Threshold Torsion
It shall be pennitted to neglect torsion effects if the factored

torsional moment Tu is less than:
1.
For nonprestressed members:
members, Ay shall be taken as two times the area of the bar

(411-18)
in a circular tie, hoop, or spiral at a spacing s, s is measured

in a direction parallcl to longitudinal reinforcement, and 1)'1
is the specified yield strength of circular tie, hoop or spiral

reinforcernent.
411.6.7.4 Where inclined stirrups
are Llsed
as
2.
For prestressed members:
shear
(411-19)
reinforcement,
.
)
Vo =A.,.J"d
- - - (sma+cosa
s
(411-16)
3.
For nonpreslressed members subjected to an axial

tensile or compressi ve force:
where a is angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal

axis of the member, and s is measured in direction parallcl
to longitudinal reinforcement.
411.6.7.5 Where shear reinforcement consists of a single

bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at the same
distance from the suppOI1,
V,~A...rysil\a
(411-17)
but not greater than 0.25 J7~~- b"d, where
0:
is
angle
between bcnHlp reinforcement and longitudinal axis of the

member.
(411-20)
For members cast monolithically with a slab, the

overhanging flange width used in computing AfJl and Pcp
shall conform to Section 413.3.4. For a hollow section, Ag
shall be used in place of Acp in Section 411.7.1, and the outer
boundaries of the section shall conform to Section 413.3.4.
411.7.1.1 For isolated members with flanges and for
members cast monolithically with a slab, the overhanging
flange width used to compute Aq) and Pcp shall conform to
Section 413.3.4, except that the overhanging flanges shall be
neglected in cases where the parameter A2cp fpcp calculated
National Structural Code of t~e Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
462
CHAPTER 4 . Conerele
for a beam with flanges is less th an thal computed for the

sa me beam ignoring the flanges.
a concentrated torque OCClI rs within this di stance, the critical

section for design shall be at the face of the SUppOIl.
411.7.2 Ca lculation of Factored Torsional Moment
411.7,3 Torsional Moment Strength
411.7.2.1 Hlhe factored torsional moment,
r u , in
a member
is required to maintain equilihrium and exceeds the

minimum val ue given in Section 411.7. 1, the member shall
be designed to carry Tu in accordance wit h Sections 411.7.3
through 41 1.7.6.
411.7.2.2 In a staticall y indeterminate structure where
reductio n of the torsional moment in a member can occur
due to redi stri bution of internal forces upon cracking. the
max imum factored torsional moment, Tu shall be permilled
lO be reduced to the values given in (I). (2). or (3). as
applicable:
I.
For nonprcslrcsscd members, at the sections desc ri bed

in Secti on 41 1.7 .2 .4:
4 .fj-::
3
-~--- --- -
2,
( ._A,~ )
(4 11 2 1)
PCI'
For prestressed members, at the sections described ill

Seelion 411.7.2.5:
(411 22)
3.
411.7.3.) The cross-secti onal dimensions shall be such lhat:

I.
For sol id secti ons:
(4 11 24)
2.
For hollow sections:
+( 1.7l~p,
)<(~+ 2JT:)
(...'b .:.....)
d
A... ' b .tI
3
(41125)
For prestressed members. d shall be detcnnincd . in

accordance with Section 41 1.6.3.
411.7.3.2 If the wall thicknes s vades around the perimeter

of a hollow section. Eq. 41125 shall be evaluated al the
location where the left hand side of Eq. 41125 is a
maximum.
411.7,3.3 If the wall thi ckness is less Ihan A",/p,.. Ihe
seco nd term in Eq. 41125 shall be taken as:
For non prestressed members subjected to an ax ial

tensile or compress ive force:
ry(A':)R.
P:;
A.,lfT:
,l vi,
3
(4 11 23)
+ 0.33
In (I). (2). or (3). the correspondi ngly redislributed be nding

moments and shears in the adj oining members shaH be used
in [h e design of these members. For hollow sections. ACfl
shall not be replaced with A, in Secti on 411 .7.2.2.
where I is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at

the locat ion where tile stresses arc being chec ked.
411.7.3.4
The values of
1,.
and
1,.,
used for design of
lOrsional reinforcement shall not exceed 4 15 MPa.

411.7.3.5 Where T. exceeds Ihe Ihreshold torsion. des ign of
the cross section shall be based on:
411.7.2.3 Unless dctennincd by a more exact ana lysis, it

shall be penn iHcd 10 take the torsional loading from a s lab
as un iform ly distributed along the member.
T"
1~
(41126)
411.7.3,6 Tn shall be compu ted by:

411.7.2.4 In non prestressed members. secli o"ns located Jess
th an a d istance d from the face o f a suppo rt shall be
des igned for not less than the IOrsioll Til comptiled <:11 :l
di stance d. If a concent rated torque occ urs within this
di stan ce, tbe critical sect ion for design shall be at the face of
th e SUppOit.
411.7.2.5 In prestressed members , sections located less than

a distance hl2 from the face of a support shall be designed
for not less than the torsion 'f;, computed at a distance h12. If
T, = 2A.A,f" cotO
(41127)
where A" shaH bc determined by analysis except that it dJa!i

he permitted to take Af) equal to O.85Alllr: e shall II:':..
taken smaller than 30 degrees nor larger than 60 degrees. ii
shall be permitted to take
I.
e equal to:
45 degrees for nonprcstrcssed members or mcm/)el':';

with less prestress than in Itclll 2 below,
2.
37.5 degrees for preslre.o;;sed mcmbers wilh an effective

prestrcss force not less than 40 percent of the tensile
strength of the longitudinal reinforcement.
411. 7.3. 7
Tile additional longitudinal

r(;quired for IOrsion shall not be less than :
A, f,.,
'0
A, = P .,,_._'- cot
" s j'
re inforcement
(411-28)
4-63
2.
A closed cage of welded wire fabric with transverse

wires perpendicular to the axis of the member; or
3.
In l10 nprestressed beams, spiral reinforcement.
411.7.4.2 Transverse torsional reinfo rcement

anchored by one of the foll o wing:
shall
be
1.
A 135-degree standard hook, or seisrnjc hook as

defined in Sec lion 402, around a longilUdinal b,u';
2.
According to Sections 412.14.2.1, 412.14.2.2 Of

412. 14.2.3 in regions where the concrete SUITounding
lhe anchorage is restrained against spalling by a flange
or slab or similar me mbe r.
."
where 0 shi.lll be Ihe sa me value used in Eq. 411-27 and A,

1\' shall be Hlken as the a mount compuled from Eq. 4 f 1-27
nol m odified in accordance with Section 411 .7 .5.2 or
4 11.7.5.3 ; J,., refers to closed transve rse torsional
rei nforcemem, and J,. refers lO lo ngitudinal torsional
reinforcement.
de velo ped
411.7.3.8 Reinforccmcm required for torsion shall be added
411.7.4.4 For hollo w sections in torsio n, the di stance
to thal required for the shear, moment and axial force thaI
ac t in combinati on with the LOrsion . The most restricti ve
requircl1lcnl s fo r reinforcement spacing and placement must
measured from the centerlinc of the lransverse torsional

reinforcement to the in side face .of the wall of a hollow
seclion shall not be less th an O.SAo/,!p"
411.7.4.3 Longitudinal
01
torsion
reinforcement shall
be
bolh ends.
be met.
411 .7.3.9 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of

lo ngitudinal
torsion reinforcement in the flexural
com pression zone by Cl /l amounl equal to MlI/(O.9dh.)' where
M" occurs at the sec ti on simultaneous with 7:" except that
the reinforcement provided shaH not be less than that
req uired by See li olls 411.7.5.3 of4! 1.7.6.2.
411.7.3.10 In Pres tressed Beams:
I.
2.
lOW I
longitudinal
reinforcemen t inc luding
prestrcss ing steel iH each sectio n shall resist the factored
bendi ng 1ll0 m CIl1. M" :11 that secl io n plus iJl1 additi onal
concentric lo ngit udinal ten sile fo rce equal (0 Ad)'> based
o n the facLOred torsion , 7~ allha t secti on; and
411.7.5 Minimum Torsion Reinforcement

411.7.5.1 A minimum area of torsional reinforcement shall
be provided in all regions where the facLOred torsional
moment TIJ exceeds the values specified in Sectio n 411.7.1 .
411.7.5.2 Where tors io na l re inforcement is required by

Secli oll 411 .7.5.1, lhe minimulll area of tran sverse c losed
s tirrups shall be computed by:
The
The spaci ng of th e long iwdinal reinforcemclll including

tendons shall sat isfy the requirements in Section
411.7.6.2.
(A,. + 2A,) = 0 .062 ff, b.s

but sholl not be less than (0.35b. s)It,.,.
411.7.5.3 Where torsional reinforcement is required by

Section 411.7.5. I, the minimum total area of longitudinal
lo rsiona l reinforcement, AI.mil! shall be computed by:
411.7.3.11 In prestre ssed beams, it shall be permitted to

reduce the llrca o f longitudinal torsi o nal reinfo rcement 011
the side of th e member in compression due to nc xurc below
that re qu ired by Sec tion 4 11.7.3. 10 in accordance with
Seelioll 411.7.3.9.
(41 1-29)
I).,
A . =
I.~u!l
5ff,
A",
12/
,.
(~) b...
s
/ ,. /,
(411-30)
where AJs shill! not be taken less than 0. 175b ..../h,; /,., re fers
closed tfi1 nsvcr~e tors io nal reinforcement, and/, re fe rs 10
lo ng itudinal reinforcement.
(Q
411.7.4 I)ctnils of Torsional R einforceme nt

411. 7.4.1
Torsion
rcinforce ment
shall consist of
longitudinal hars or tendons a nd Olle o r more of the
foll ow ing:
1.
411.7.6 Spacing of Torsion Reinforcement

411.7.6.1 The spacing o f tran sverse torsi on re info rcement
:- hall no t exceed the smaller of PhiS or 300 mill .
Closed stirrups or closed tics, perpendi cular to the axis

of the member;
National S tructural Code of the Pllilippines 6
1h
Edition Volume 1
464
CHAPTEH 4 . Concrele
411.7.6.2 The longitudinal reinforcement required for

torsion s hall be di stributed around the perimeter of the
closed !itinups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm, The
411.8.4.2 Where shear-fri ction reinforcement is inclined to

shear plane, such thm the shear force produces tension in
shear-friction reinforcement. shear strength V" shall be
longitudinal bars or tendons shall be inside the stirrups.

There shall be at least one longitudinal bar or tendon in each
corner of the stin-ups. Longitudinal bill'S shall have a
diameter at least 1'124 of the stirrup spacing but not less than
computed by:
a 10 rnm .
shear planc.
4J 1.7.6.3 Torsion reinforccmclH shi.tlJ be provided for a

distance of at least (b, + d) beyond the point required by
analysis.
411 .8.4.3 The coefficient of friction JI in Eq. 411 -31 and

Eq. 41132 shall be taken as:
VII = 1I'1f,. (psin a + cosa)
where
(4 11 32)
a is angle between shear- fri cti on reinforcement and
Concrete placed monolithically ... ..... .

411.7.7 Alternative Design For Tors ion
For torsion design of solid sections within the scope of this

Chapter wit h an aspect ratio, hlb{, of 3 or greater, it shall be
pennitlcd to usc another procedure, the adequacy or whi ch
has been shown by analysis and substantial agreement with
results of comprehensive tests. Sections 4 1 1.7 .4 and 411.7.6
s hall apply.
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with

surface intentionally roughened as specified in
Sec tion 411. 8.9
411.8.1 Provisions of Section 411 .8 are to be appJied w here

it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a gi ven
plane. such as an existing or potential crack, an interface
between dissimilar materials. or an interface between two
concretes cast a{ dirferent times.
411.8.2 Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as
described in Section 411.8.1 shall be based on Eq. 411 - 1
where V" is calculated in accordance with provisions of
Sect ions 4 11.X.3 or 4 11 .8.4.
411.8.3 A crack Sh;'lll be assumed to occur along the shear
plane considered . The required arca of shear-friction
reinforcement A'l across lhe shear plane Illay be designed
usi ng cither Section 411.8.4 or any oliler shear transfer
design methods that result in prediction or strength

substantial agreement wit h results of co mprehensive lcsls.
1[1
411 .8.3.1 Provisions of Sections 41 1.8.5 throu gh 41 1.8. 10

s hall apply for all calculations of shCilr transfer strength .
411.8.4 Shea r-Fri ction Design Method
1.0,<
Concrete placed agai nst hardened

concrete not intentional! y roughened
.... O.6il.
Concrete anchored to il!i-rolled structural steel by
headed studs or by reinforci ng bars (see Section
411.8.10)
411.8 Shear Friction
1.4'<
.......... 0.7-'
where A = 1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.75 for allli gh tweight concrete. Other\vise, ,{ shall be determined
based on volumetric proportions of ligh twe ight and nonnalweight aggregates as specined in Sec ti on 408.7. 1. but sh,d l
not exceed 0.85.
411.8.5 For nonna l-weight concrete either placed

monolithically or placed against hardened co ncrele with
surface intenti onall y roughened as specified in Section
411 .8.9, V" shall not excecci the small cst o f O.2f,'A" (3. 3 +
0.08;:: ) II .. and I IA ... where Ac is area of co ncrete section
resislin g shear lransfer. For <111 other cases, V" shall not
exceed the smaller of 0.21,.'11,. Or 5.5A,,, Where concretes of
different strengths arc cast aga inst each other. the value of
J..' used (0 evaluate V" shall be that or the lowcr-strcngm
concrete.
411.8.6 The value of 1;. used ror de sign of shear-friction

reinforcement shall not exceed 415 MPa.
411.8.7 Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by
additional reinforcement. Pcnnanenl !lei cOll1pn~ssiol1 j!cross
she'lr pl,me sh.1I1 be permitted to he taken as addi tive to
A ,i... the force ill the shear friction reinforcement. when
calcu lating required A,:t
411.8.4.1
Where
shear-fri cli on
reinforce ment
IS
perpendicular 10 sheilI' plane. shl~:!r strength VII shall be
<.:o mpul cd by:
(411 -31)
where I' is cocflici cllt o r frict ion ill accordance wi th Sectio n

411.8.4.3.
411.8.8 Shc;:IIfriction reinforcement shall he appropri<lleJy

pl;lccd along the shear plane and shall be tllI(:l l(l: ,: 10
develop f . , on bOlh sides by emhcdmen!. hooks or

h ) special devices .
WC';:i illg
4 J I.H.9 For the purpmic of Secti on 41 1.8. wilen concrete is

placed agai!lst J1r~vjously hardened cOIH.:.re\C, thc interface
Association oj Structural Engineers of tile Philippines
for shear transfer shall be clean and frcc of iai tancc, If J1 is

assumed equal to J .O..?, interface sha ll be roughened to a full
.lInplitudc of approximately 6 mm.
411.8.10 Whcn shear is tr~ms ferred between as-rolled steel
and co ncrete using headed slUd s or welded rei nforci ng bars,
steel shall be clea n and free of paint.
411.10.2 Depth at ootside edge of bearing area shall not be

less than O.5d.
.
411.10.3 Secti on at face o f support shall be designed to
resist si mu/(aneous ly a shear Vi/o a factored moment [V"al' +
N,l(' (II - tf)]. and a factored horizontal tensile force Nil,.,
411.10.3.1 In all design calculations in accordance with
Section 411.10, strengthreduction factor shall be taken
equal to 0.75.
411.9 Deep Beams

411 .9.1 The provisions o f thi s sectio n shall appl y for
members with I" Ilot exceedi ng four limes the overall
member depth or regions of beams with concent rated loads
withi n (wice the member depth from Ihe support Ihal are
loaded on one face and supported on the opposi te face so
Ihal Ihe co mpression struls can develop between the loads
and the supports. Sec also Section 412.11.6.
411.9.2
Deep beams shall be designed using either
nonlinear analysis as permitted in Seclion 410.8.1, or
Secti on 427.
411.9.3 V" for deep beams shall not exceed 0.83
ff Ivl.
411.9.4 The area of shea r reinforcemeOl perpendicular to

(il e flexural tension reinforcernen[, A,. shall not be less than
0.0025 b"slt and 52 shall not exceed dl5 and 300 mm . .
411.9.5 The area of shear reinforcemen t parallel to the
nexu ral tens ion reinforcement. AI' /I shall not be less th an
0.00 15 b.. 520 and .r) shall nOI exceed dl5 and 300 mill.
411.9.6 It shall be permitted 10 provide reinforcement
satisfying Section 427 .3.3 instead of the minimum
hoJizontal and vertical reinforcement specified in Secti ons
411.9A and 411.9.5 .
411.I0 Provisions for Brackets and Corbels
411.10. 1 Brackets and corbels with a shear span -ta-depth
ratio 0,.1 d less than 2 shall be permitted to be designed
using Section 427. Design shall be permitted using Sections
411.10.3 and 411 .1OA for brackets and corbels wit h:
I.
a" /d not greater Ihan I; and
2.
Subject tv factored horizontal te ns il e force. Nut:. not

larger than V,..
411.10.3.2 Design of shear-frict ion reinforcement A"j to

resist shear V" shall be in accorda nce with Secti on 4 11 .8.
411.10.3.2.1 Fo r nOnllal -weight concrete, shear s trength Vn
shall not exceed the smallest of 0.2t,b.,d.(3.3+ 0.08!,' )b.d.
and Ilb.d411.10.3.2.2 For all lightweight or sand-lightweight
concrete. shear strengfh V" shall not be taken greater th an
the smaller of (0.2 - 0.07a/d)j ,b.d and (5.5 - 1.9a/d) b.,d.
411.10.3.3 Reinforcemen t AI to resist moment [V"a l , + N"c
(ii -d)] shall be computed in accordance with Sections 410.3
and 4 lOA.
411.10.3.4 Reinforcement All to resist factored tensile fo rce
Nllc shall be determined fr~m A,I,. ~ N u(' Fac(ored tensile
force. N".. shall not be laken less than 0.2 V" unless
provis ions arc made 10 avoid tensile forces. N"c shall be
regarded as a live load even if tension resu lts from restraint
of creep. shri nkage or temperature change.
411.10.3,5 Area of primary ten sion reinforcement Au' shall
be made less than the larger of (AI + A.) or (2A'I/3 + A.).
411.10.4 Total area, of A,,, of closed sti rrups or lies parallel
to primary tension reinforce ment shall not less than O.5(AJ'cA,,). Distribute
uniformly within (2i3)d, adjacent to
primary tension reinforccm en.
A,.
411.10.5 A"i bdshall not be less than 0.04 (j',i/,.).

411.10.6 At front face of brac ket or corbel, primary tension
reinforcement As shall be anchored by one of the following:
J.
2.
of Sections 41 1. 10.2. 411.10.3.2.1.
411.10.3.2.2. 411.10.5. 411.10.6. and 411.10.7 shall apply
to design of brackets and corbels. Erfective depth d shall be
de term ined at the f'lce of the SUppOIl .
The
465
requirements
Bya structural weld to a transverse bar of at least equa l

s ize; weld to be des igncd to deve lop specified yield
slrcnglh/y of primary tension reinforcement;
l3y bendi ng primary tension reinforcement back to fonn
a horizontal loop; or
3.
By some other means of positive anchorage.
National Struc turC:J! Code of the Philippines 6
th
Edition Volurne 1
4-66
CHAP TEll 4 - Concre te
411.10.7 Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project

beyond straight portion of primary tension reinforcement,
nor project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar (if
one is provided).
411.11 Provisions for Walls
411.11.1 Design for shear fo rces perpend icu lar to facc of
wa ll shall be in accordance wil h provisions for slabs in
Sec ti on 411 . 13. Design for hori zont al shear forces in plane
o f wall shall be in accordance wilh Secti on 411 . 11 .2 through
411 . 11.9, Alternatively, it shall be permilled to des ign walls
with a height not exceeding two rimes the length of [he wall
for horizontal shear forces in accordance with Secti ons 427
and 411.11.9,2 throu gh 411.11.9.5,
whe re I,.. is the ove rall length of the wall, and Nu is posi ti ve
for c{)mpression and negative for tensioll. If (MjVII - I", 12)
is negative, Eq. 4 J 134 shall not apply.
411.11.1 Secti ons located closer to wa ll base Ihan a di stance.
/,,/2 or one half thc wa ll hc ight, wh ichever is less, shall be
pcrmillcd to be designed for the sCllne VI" as Ih:\I computed at
a diswnce 1.. 12 or one half the height.
411.11.8 W hell (actol\;u shear force VI. is less than VJ2,
re inforcement shall be provided in accordance wi th Secti on
4 I 1. 11 .9 or in accordance with Sec ti on 41 4. When V"
exceeds V,. 12, wall reinrorcement for resisting shear shall
be provided in acco rdance with Section 411.11 .9.
411.11.9 Design of Shear Reinforcement for Walls
411.11.2 Design of hori z.ontal section for shear in plane of

wa ll shall be based o n Eqs. 411- 1 and 411 -2, where shear
st reng th Vco shall be in acco rda nce wit h Section 4 11 .11.5 or
4 11 . J J.6 and shear strength Vs shall be in accorda nce wi th
Secti on 411. 11.9,
411.1 I .9.1 Where ractored shear rorce VII exceeds shc:.il"

strength V,., hO I;zonlal shear reinforcement shall be
provided to s'lIis ry Eqs. 4 11 - 1 and 4 11-2. where shea r
strength V, shall be com puted by
V ~ A,J,d
,
s
411.11.3 Shear strength VII at an y horizollla! sectio n for

shear in plane of wall shall not be taken greater than
(5/6)
Jf'e lid, where II
i s thickn ess
or wall, and d is dcl1ned
in Section 41 J . 11 .4.
(411 -35)
where Al is area of horizontal shear reinfo rce ment withi n

spacing s. and distance d is determ ined in i:\ccordance with
Section 4 11 . 1 1.4. Vert ical she:lr re inforce ment shall be
provided in accordance wi th Section 411.11.9.4.
411 .11.4 For design ror hori zontal shear forces in pl;me of
wa ll , d shall be taken eq ual to 0,8'." A larger value of d,
equal to the distance fro m ext reme co mpression fiber 10
ce nter o f fo rce of a ll rein forcemelll in tension, shall be
permilled to be used w hen determined by a strai n
co mpatibility an alysis.
4J ] .11 .9.2 Rati o

horizom:1I shear rei nforccmcnl arca to
gro!'s co nc re te are:1 or vertical sccli on, Pr . slmll not be less
411.J1.5 Unless a mOre detailed calculation is made in

acco rdancc with Secti on 4 J J . 11 ,6, shear strcngth VI" shall
4 J 1. t 1.9.3 SP'lc.i ll g of horiwntal sllcar reinforce ment shall

]Jot exceed the small est of /".15, 311 and 450 111m, where I",
is th e overa!l length of th e waiL
not be taken greater th an ( 1/6 ) f f hd
or
Ih a" 0,0025 .
for wa lls subject
to ax ial co mpression, or V,. shall not be take n grea ter than
the va lue given in Sectio n 41 1.4 .2.3 r<'l r wa lls subject to

axia l tension.
411.11.6 She,ll st reng th VI sh:.11 1 be permillcd to be ic!'scr or
th e va lues computed rrom Eqs. 411 33 and 411 14.
(411 -33)
or
411.11.9.4 Ra tio of vertical shea r rei nrorcement area 10

gross concrete area or horizontal sccl ion, P,. shall not be Ie $:->
than the larger or:
P,
~ 0 0025 + 05( 2.5 - ~,:'
}p, -
0,0025)
(411 -36)
and O . OC~;) . The vaill (! of 1'1 calculated by Eq. 411 36 need

not be greater th an 1', required by Sec tion 411 . 11 .9. 1. In Eq.
4 11-.16. I". is Ihe overall length or the \vall. il nd II ... is the
overall height of Ihe wall.
41 J. J 1.9.5 Spadllg or vertical shear reinforccmcnt sh::l !
exceed 1.../3 . 3h or 450 111m, where I ... is the oventll I cnt;.~ . :
the wal l.
(411 -3 4 )
I\SSOclCl \lon
of S truC:llJf<l ! F.n~Jlnenr$ of tile
Phil ipp ll1es
CHAPT ER 4 . Concrele
411.12 Transrer of Moments to Colullllls

411.12.1 When gravily lo.d, wind, earlhquake, or ol her
lateral forces cause Iransfer of momenl al conncctions of
framing clcments 10 columns, the shcar res uhing from
moment transfcr shall be considered in lhe design of lateral
reinforcement in th e columns.
411.12.2 Except for con nections not part of a primary
seismic load-resistin g system that arc res trained 011 four
sides by bea ms or slabs of appro ximately equal depth,
co nnections shal! have lateral reinforcement not less than
Ihal required by Eq. 4 11 - 13 within the column for a depth
not less than that of Ihc deepest connection of frallling
elemems to the columns. See also Section 407.10.
411.12.3 For stnlctures buill in areas of low seismicity,
columns of ordinary moment framcs having a clear heightto-max imum-plal1-dimension ratio of five or less sl1<l1l be
designed for shcar in accorda ncc with Section 421 .9.3.
467
IransfCITed between a slab and a column, Section 411.13.7

shall apply.
411.13.2.1 ror nonpreSiressed sl.bs and fomings, Vc shall be
Ihe s maliesl of ( I), (2), and (3):
I.
v,
1.
6
(II 2fJ.)
~f' b
-.j}""
(41137)
where f3 is the ratio of long side 10 short side of the column,

co ncentra.tcd load Of reacti on area;
2.
V,.
~ ~
(ah,dr.
12
2)
'f'"" b
v)
C
(4 11 3&)
d
0
where v is 40 ror interior columns, 30 ror edge columns

<lnd 20 ror comer columns; and
(411-39)
411.13.2.2 At colum ns of two-way prestresscd slabs and

fOOlin gs that lllcet thc req uirements of Section 4 18. 10.3:
411.13 Provisions for Slabs and Footings

(411 40)
411.13.1 The shear strength of slabs and footings in the
vicinity of columns, conce ntrated loads or react ions IS
gove rned by the more se vere of two condit io ns:
411.13.1.1 13C;:111l aClioll where each critical sec ti on 10 be

in vcstigmed extends in a plane across lhc entire width. For
bc<tm action the sIal> or rooting shall he des igned in
accordance with Secti ons 411 .2. 411.4, 41 1.5. and 4 11 .6.
411.13.1.2 For two-way action where each or th e critical
sec ti ons to be investigated shall be located so thm its
perimeter. h". is iI minimum. but need no! approach closer
than dl2
wh ere jJ" is Ihe smaller of 3.5 or (a,d/b" + 1.5)11 2, a, is 40

for interior columns, 30 for edge columns and 20 for co rner
columns, bo is perimeter of critical scction defined in
Section 4 11. 13. 1.2. 1;". is the 'Iverage value of1;),. for the two
direct ions, and VI' is the vertical component of all effective
prcstrcss forces crossi ng the critical scction. V( shall be
permittcd (Q be com puted by Eq . 4 J 1-40 ir the foHowing arc
s.ltislied; otherwise , Section 411.13.2.1 sha ll apply:
1.
to the discontinuous edge than four timcs thc slab

thick ncss:
10:
1.
Edges or corners of col ulll lls, concent rnted loads or

reaction areas; and
2.
Changes in sinh thickness such as edges of cap itals,
drop panels, or shcar caps.
No portion of thc column cross section shall be closcr
2.
The va lue of F
in Eq. 4 11 -40 shall
nOI
be rakcn
grealcr th;:lll 5.8 MPa: and

3.
III each direction, /,'( shall not be less than 0.9 MPa, nor
be taken greatcr than 3.5 MPa.
For two-way action. the slab of rooting shal! be designed in

acco rdance with Sections 411 . 13.2 through 41 1.13 .6.
anu singlclcg or multiple-leg stilTUpS shall he permitt ed in
4J 1.13.1.3 Par square or rectangul ar colu mns, concentratcd

loads or reacti ons arcas, the critical scct ions with four
straight s ides shall bc permittcd.
sl;!hs and rootings with d greater th an or eqnal to 150 1111ll .

but not less than 16 times the shear reinforce ment bar
diametcr. Shear reinforcc mcnt shaH be in accordan ce wi th
Secliolls 4 I I. J3 .3. I Ihrongh 4 I I. 13.3.4.
411.13.2 TIle design or a slab or foot ing for twoway action

is based on Eqs. 4 I I I and 4 I 12. Vc s h. 1i be compUlcd in
.ccordance wilh Secli on 4 11.1 3.2. 1, 411 . 13.2.2 or
4 11 . 13_3.1. VJ: shall be computed in accordan ce with
Section 41 1_13 .3. For slabs with shear heads, VII shall bc in
accordance with Section 41 1.13.4. Wh cn momcnt is
411.13.3 Shear reinrorcemcnt consisling of bars or wires
411.13 .3.1 V. shall be compnled by Eq. 4112, where V,
shall nol be laken grealer Ihan ( 1/6) )..
".d, .nd V, shall
he calculatcd in accordance with Section 41 1.6 In Eq. 411 15 , A,. shall bc takcn as the cross-scctional area of all legs of
National Structurt~ l Code of the Philippilles
()!h
Edition Volum e 1
468
similar to the perimeter of the column section.
where is for tension-controlled members, 71 is the number

of spearhead arms, and II' is the minimum length of each
shearhead ann required to comply with requirements o{
411.13.3.2
Sections 41 1.13.4.7 and 41 I. 13.4.8.
reinforcement on one peripheral line that is geometrically
) F,
Vn
shall not be taken greater than 0.5
b" d.
411.13.3.3 The distance between the column face and the
first line of of stirrup legs that surround the columns shall

not exceed d/2. The sparing between adjacent stirrups legs
in the first line of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 2d
measured in a direction parallel to a1coiumn face. The
spacing between the successive lines of shear reinforcement

that surround the column shall not exceed dl2 measured in a
direction perpendicular to the column face.
411.13.3.4 Slab shear reinforcement shall satisfy the
anchorage requirements of Section 412.14 and shall engage
the longitudinal flexural reinforcement in the direction being
411.13.4.7 The critical slab section for shear shall be

perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shatl cross each
shearhead ann at three fourths the distance [I,. - (c,/2)] from
the column face to the end of the shearhead arm. The critical
section shall be located so that its perimeter i>{) is a
minimum, but need not be closer than the perimeter dellned
in Section 41 L13. 1.2(1).
411.13.4.8 VI! shall not be taken greater than (I/3)
If:
bod, on the critical section defined in Section 41 J. J 3.4.7.

When shearhead reinforcement is provided, VI! shall not be
taken greater than 0.58
ff bod
on the critical section
considered.
defined in Section 41 L13. 1.2(1).
411.13.4 Shear reinforcement consisting of steel J- or

channel- shaped sections (shearheads) shall be permitted in
slabs. The provisions of Sections 411.13.4.1 through
411.13.4.9 The moment resistance M,. contributed to each

slab column strip computed by a shearhead shal! not be
taken greater than:
41 L13A.9 shall apply where shear due to gravity load is
transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is

transferred
to
columns, Section 41 L13.7.3 shall apply.
411.13.4.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes
fabricated by welding with a full penetration weld into

identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be
interrupted within the column section.
411.13.4.2 A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 ti mes
=a"v".(l
2 1/
'
_2)
2
(41142)
where is for tension-controlled members, 1} is the Humber

of arms, and I,. is the length of each shearhead arm actually
provided. However, M,. shall not be taken larger than the
smallest of:
the web thickness of the steel shape.
1.
Thirty percent of the total factored moment required for

each slab column strip;
411.13.4.3 The ends of each shearhead arm shall be
2.
permitted to be cut at angles not less than 30 degrees with

the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the
remaining tapered section is adequate to resist the shear
force attributed to the arm of the shearhead.
The change in column strip moment over the Icnflll fl';

and
3.
The value of M" computed by Eq. 4114 '-
411.13.4.4 A!l compression flanges of'steel shapes shall be
located within O.3d of compression surface of slab.

411.13.4.5 The ratio 0;. between the stiffness of each
shearl1cad ann and that of the surrounding composite

cracked slab section of width (C2 + d) shall not be less than
0.15.
411.13.4.6 The plastic moment strength Mil required for
each arm of the shearhead shall be computed by:
M"
i;d" , (t,
t
ex,
';)1
411.13.4.10 When unbalanced moments are considcn',d, tlH"

shearhead must have adequate anchorage to transmit MI' lo
column.
4J 1.13.5 Headed shear stud reinforcement, P: ,i"i>,d

perpendicular to the plane of a slab or footing, sll;l.il ue
permitted in slabs and footings ill accordance with SC('iolls
411.13.5.1 through 411.13.5.4. The overall height 01 the
shear stud assembly shall not be less than the thicknc.c:.,; of
the member less the sum of: (I) the concrete cover Oil the
top nexural reinforcement; (2) Ihe concrete cover ('. ~: lhe
base rail; and (3) one-half the bar diameter of the ~( :ion
flexural
reinforcement.
Where
flexural
!c: ion
reinforcement is at the bottom of the section, a:-; in a [(I ,:ing,
the overall height of the shear stud assembly Shil!i il()! be
less than the thickness oCtile member less the SUII; tii: (I)
I
(411-41)
Association of Structural En9ineefs of tile PhilipPines
the co ncrete cove r all the bottom Oe:Ulral reinforcement; (2)

the concrete cove r on the head of the stud; and (3) one-half
the ba r diameter o f Ihe botlOrn flex ural rein fo rcement
411.13.5. 1 For the critical sect ion defin ed in Section
4 11.1 3.1.2. V" shall be computed using Eq. 411 2. with V,
and V" nUl exceed in g
O.25A~ b"d
and
the spac ing o f the peripheral lines of headed shear stud

rein fo rcement. III" /(b.,<) sha ll not be less than 0. 17
~.
411 .13.5.2 The spaci ng belween the column face a nd the

first pe riphera l line of shear rein fo rcement sha ll nOI e xceed
d12. The spaci ng be tween perip hera l lines of shear
reinforcement . measured in a direct io n perpend icul ar 10 any
facc o f the co lumn, sha ll be constant. For prestressed slabs
or foo tings satisfying Sec ti o n 4 11.13.2.2 . this spacing shall
not e xceed O.75d; fo r aJl ot her slabs ~lI1d footings, the
spac ing shall be based o n th e value o f Ihc shear slI'ess due to
fac tored sh eilI' forcl! and unbalanced moment at the cri tical
sec tio n defin ed in Sec tion 4 I J .13.1 .2, and shall not exceed:
0.75d whe re maxim um shear stresses du e

loads are less th an or eq ua l to O.5
2.
411.1 3.5.3
(0
factored
41 J.l3 .6.2
For slabs with shearheads. the ineffective
portio n of the perimeter sh:t ll be one half of that defined in
Seclion 4 11 . 13.6.1
10
411.13.7 T ransfer of M o m ent in Slab-ColullllI

Co nnections
4 11.1 3 .7. 1 Whe re gmv ily load, wind, earthqua ke or otht l
lateral forces cause transfer of unba lanced moment. Mil,

between 11 slab and a column, a frac tion yptu of the
unba lilnced mo men t s ha ll be transferred by flcxu re in
accordance wit h Section 4 13.6.3. T he remai nder of the
unbalanced mome nt given by 'XMw shall be considered to be
transfcrred by eccent ricity of shear about the cCIH roid of the
cri tical section defi ned in Section 4 J 1.13.1.2 where:
411. 13.7.2 The shear sU'css res ulting fro m mo me nt transfer

by eccentri c ity of shear sha ll be assu med to vary linearly
abo1l1 the centroid of th e crit ical sections defi ned in Sec tion
4 J J .13. 1.2. The ma xim ulll shear stres s due to the factored
shear force. V" and mome nt . Mil shall no t e xceed V'I:
For members wi thout shear rein forcement:
\', = (~)
f.lctored
~.
(41143)
y,. = ( I )t)
I.
ff,. ;and
0.50d where maximum shear st resses due

loads arc greater than O.5
concentrated load or rcactlOn area and tangent to the

boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffecti ve.
O.66~ b"d.
respecti vely. V.I shall be calc ulated using Eq. 41 1- 15 with AI'
equal to th e cross-sectio nal area of all the shear
reinforce ment on One periphe ral line that is approximmcl y
parall e l (0 the pc rimc te r of the co lumn section, whe re s is
I.
469
(4 1144 )
b,. d
where V" is as defi ned in Section 411. 13.2. 1 or 4 11.13.2.2.
The
spacing
betwcen
adjacent
shear
reinforcement cleme nt s . measu red on the perimeter of the
first peripheral line of s hear reinforcement , shall not exceed
2.
For members with shear rei nforcement other than

she:lrhcads:
I' +V )
Iv" ;::: - ' - - '
( b .. d
2d.
(411-45)
411.13 .5.4 She<lr stress du e to factored shear fOfce cll1d

mo ment shall not ex(,;eed
O. 1 7 A~ at
the c rit ica l
sec ti on located d/2 outside the ou termost peripheral line of

shear re inforceme nt.
where Vc and Vs arc de ti ned in Secti o n 4 11.13. 3.1. If shear

re inforce ment is prov ide d, the des ign sha ll take in to account
th e vari ati on of shear s lre~s around th e column . The shear
stress due to factored shear fo rcc and moment shall not
exceed 0. 17(12
411.1 3.6 O penin gs in Slabs

Whcn openings in slabs afe locmed at ::1 di stance less than 10
times the slab thickness from a concentrated load or reacl ion
area, or when openings in n at Slilbs are located wi thi n
co lumn strips as defined in Sec ti on 4 13, the critical slab
sec tions for shear defined in Section 41 1. 13. 1.2 and Section
4 I 1. 13.4 .7 sholl be modi fi ed as fo ll ows:
4 11.13.6.1 For slabs withou t shcarheads. that pan of the

pcrimeter of the c ritical section that is enclosed by stra ight
li ncs
projc(,;ting
fro m
the
ccntro id
of
the
til
the c ritical sectioll localed
tin
outside Ihe olltermost linc o( the st ilTIiP legs that surround

the colullIll.
411.U.7.3 Whe n shear reinforccment consisting of s teel 1nr channel-shaped sectiolls (shcarhcads) is provided. the
sum of the shc<lr stresses due to ve ni ca l 1 0~l d ac ting on thc
critic'll section defined by Secti on 4 11. 13.4 .7 <lnd the sheHf
stresses resuiting from momClll transferred by ecce ntricity
of shcaf :JbOllt the centroid o( the cri ti cal section defined in
col umn.
h
Nati on al S tru ctura l Code of thr-J P hilippines G: EcJ ilion Vo lumo 1
4 70
CHAPTEF!
. Concrete
Sections 41 Ll3.1.2 (I) and 411.13.1.3 shall not exceed
o331/1J.J/':
412.1 Notations
=- area of <In indi vidual bar or wire,
= net
head ed dcfonncd bar, mlll
A,
111m2
bearing area of the head of stud . anchor bolt, or
;::: area
of
Ilonprcstrcsscd
IO!lgitudinal
tension
reinforce ment, mm
::::; toral cross-sectional
area
of
all
transverse
reinfo rcement which is within the spacing .\' and

w hi ch c rosses the potential pJane of splilling
through the reinforcement being developed , 111m2
= web width. Or diameter of circula r section, mm
= small er of: (1) the distance from center of a bar or
wire lO the nearest concrete su rface, and (2) onchal f the cenlcr-to-ccnter sp<lcing o f bnrs or wires
being developed, mill. Sec Sec ti on 412.3.4
rI
;::: distan ce
i,
centroid of tension reinforce ment, mm

:::: nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing
strand, mm
:::: specified compressive stre ngth of concrete, MPa
ff:
/.'/
from
extreme compression fiber
to
= squa re root of specified compressive strengt h of
concrete, MPa
:::: average spliu in g ten sile strength of lightweight
<1ggreg.He conc rete, MPH
= stress in prestressed rci nforecmcllI at nominal
1;.,
flexural strength, MPa

strcss in prestrcs:;ed reinfn n:clllc lli (after
allowance for all prestress losses), 'MPa
= specifi ed yiel d strength of Ilonprcslf"cssed
reinfo rcc ment , MPa
= specified yie ld s.trc ngth [,. of transverse
II
= overa ll thickness or height o f member, 111111
K"
:::: transvcrse
f,,
= cfTcctivc
reinforcement, MPa
/(1
1(/
l rlt"
Jdh
re inforcemen t index. Sec Sectio n

412.3.3
= A,r ~" I IOSII
;::; additional cmbedment length beyond cen terline of
support or point of in nectio n, mill
;::; development length in tension of deformed bar,
deformed wire, plain and deformed welded wire
reinforcement , or prctcnsioncd strand, 111m
:::: developm ent length in compression of deformcd
bars and deformed wire, mm
:::: development length in tCli sion of dcformcd b:tr or
deformed wire with :t standard hook, measure/l
from c ritical section to outside end of h ll.
(straight e mbcdment length bc tween crilic;lI seeli -,"
and start o f hook (point of tangency) plus inside
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Idl
Mil
$...
V.,
p"
).
r:t<Jius of bend and one har diameter), 111111 . Sec

SCClioll 412.6
;; development length in tension of headed deformed
bar, measured from the critical sec tion to the
bearing face of the head, mm. See Seclion 412.7
;; nominal moment strength at secti on, N~mm
= AIr(d al2)
;; number of bars in a "lyer being spliced or
developed at a critical section
;; number of bars or wires being spli ced or developed
.along the plane of spl itting
;; cen ter-Io-center spacing of items, such as
longitudinal
reinforcement,
transverse
reinforcement , prestrc.'ising tendons, wires, or
(Illchors, min
;; spacing of wire 1O be developed or spliced, Jlllll
= factored shear force al section, N
;; ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area
of tens ion reinforcement at section.
== modification
factor reflecting the reduced
mechanical properties of lightweight COl1crel:c. all
relativc to normal-weight concrcte of the same
co mpressi ve strength. See Sections 412.3.4(4) and
4 12.6.2
= factor used to modify devclopmellt length based on
rei nforccmcnt coating, see Section 412.3.4
= factor used to modify development leilgth bas(!d Oil
reinforcement size, see Section 412.3.4
rnctor used 10 modify development length based on
reinforcement location, see Section 412.3.4
;; faclOr used to modify developme nt length for
welded deformed wi re reinforcement in tcnsio n,
sec Section 412.8
4/1
412.3 Development of Defor med Bars and Deformed

Wire in Tension
412.3.1 Developmentlcnglh, Iii. in lenns of diameter, db, for
deformed bars and deformed wire in lension shall be
dctcrmined from either Section 412 .3.2 or 412.3.3 and Ihe
app licable modification factors of Section 412.3.4 and
4 12.3.5, but I,{ shall not be less th an 300 mil).
412.3.2 For deformed bars or deformed wi rc, lei sh.al! be as
follows:
ffi20 mill bars <Ind
sma ller mid
deformed wi res
C!car spilcint of bars
beillg dcvclol>cd or
~pl i ce d 1101 less Ihan
d~. cleilr cover nOI less
Ilwn (I". ;md stirrups or
lies (hroughout 1.1 not
less lhall the code
minimum
f'V'~)d /.
2.1J.J"T:
01
Clear spacing of bars

being developed or
spliced nOI tess lhun
2dl , and clear cover
.... ~.9Llcss than (h
Olher
1 [_ I,.VI,VI, _ }
Ca~C"~
IA:t fj,
"
1i125 nun bars and

larger
( /;/f,V', }
lUff:
[ I,",",
"
}I
lI:tff "
412.3.3 For deformed bars or deformed wi re. 1,/ shal l be:

(4 12 1)
412.20cvclopmen( of Reinforccmenl- General

412.2.1 Calculatcd tension or compression in reiMorcc: lllcnt
eac h l-iccti on of structural concrete members shall be
developed on each side of that section by embedment
length, hook, headed deformed bar or mechanical device, or
a co mbination thereof. Hoo ks and heads shall not be lIsed to
develop hars in compression.
al
412.2.2 Thc val ucs of
ff lIsed in Secti on 412 shaH not
exceed 8.0 MPa.
412.2.3 In addition to th is requirements in t:.i : secti on that

affec t detail ing of reinforcements, structural integrity
rcq llircmc.: nls o r Scc tion 407.14 shell l be sa tisfied .
in which the term

2.5. and
"
(Ch
+ K,r)l<h sh(lll
= 40~
nOI
be lakc n grcater than
(4 122)
.'ill
wherc 1/ is thc number of bar: or wi res being spliced or

deve loped along the plane of spl illing. It shall be pefmi Hcd
to lI :->C KIT = 0 as a design simpli ficatio n even if tr.lIlsvcrsc
rei nforce ment is prescili.
412.3.4 The factors used in the expressions for developme nt
of dcformed l>I'us ..tnd defor med wires ill tension in Section
412.3 arc as follows:
I.
horizontal reinforcement is placed such that

more than JOO rnm of fre sh conc rete is cast below
Where
N;ltionai Structu !"(:li Co de of the PliilipPllW5
C;n Edition
Volume I
4-72
CHAI'TEI< 4 - Concrete
the development JCIlgth or splice,

situations, !f/I = 1.0;
2.
IjII :;:
1.3. For other
For epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover less than
3(h, or clear spacing less than 6db , VIe ::;: 1.5. For all
other epoxy-coated bars or wires, VIe:::: 1.2. For
uncoated
and
zinc-coated
(galvanized)
reinforcement, l.fIt ::;:: J .0. However, the product VI/Vie
need not be greater than 1.7;
3.
Fc.>! ta20 mill bars and smaller and dcfonncd wires,

;:;:; 0.80. For 25 mill diameter and larger bars;
4.
'Ils:=
5.
Where lightweight concrete is used, A shall not

exceed 0.75 unless fc, is specified (see Section 408.7).
Where normal-weight concrete i~ used, A.::;: 1.0.
VIs
l.0; and
412.3.5 Excess Reinforcement

Reduction in development length shall be permitted where
rcinforcemcIH in a flexural member is in excess of that
required by analysis except where anchorage or

development for 1;. is specifically required or the
reinforcement is designed under provisions of Section
421.3.1.5 .. ... ....
[(As.lequil"l:d}/(As.provided)]
412.4 Development of Deformed Bars in Compression

412.4.1 Development length for deformed bars and
deformed wire in compression, {dc> shall be determined from
Section 4! 2.4.2 and applicable modification factors of
Section 4 I 2.4.3, but Ide shall not be less than 200 mIn.
412.5.2 For determining the appropriate spacing and COV':'::r

values in Section 412.3.2, the confinement term in :>'~[i'.m
412.3.3, and the Vir factor in Section 412.3.'1U), a
;)f
bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar 01' a JiiliiiU ; .~J.'
derived from the equivalent total area and having a (:,:ntn ,d
that coincides with that of the bundled bars.
412.6 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension
412.6.1 Development length 1"'1 in 111m for deformed b;1!'~' . 'I
tension terminating in a standard hook (see S(;clioll -'107 .~),
shall be determined from Section 412.6.2 and the.
modification factor or factors of Section 4JX6.) ~;:!;,
: shall not be less than 8(h or less than 150 mill.
412.6.2 For deformed bars.
412.6.3 Length ldh in Section 412.6.2 shall be penniHed

be multiplied by the following applicable factors:
Reinforcement in excess of that required by analysis

...................................................... (As required)/(A provided)
j
2.
('
Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not

less than 6 mrn diameter and not more than 100 mOl
pitch or within 12 mm diameter ties in conformance
with Section 407.11.5 and spaced at not more than 100
111m on center
.
..... 0.75
412.5 Development of Bundled Bars
412.5.1 Development length of individual bars within a

bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for the
individual bar, increascd 20 percent for 3-bar bundle, and 33
percent for 4-bar bundle.
,;
t(:
1. For 36 mm bar diameter and smaller honks \'.'i(h sick.

cover normal to plane of hook) not less than h.i Inm,
and for 90~degree hook with cover 0)) . :,1' C.\\C; :;iu::
beyond
hook
not
less
than
:-)0
Ifj)i)
............ n. 'j
2.
with). as given in Section 412.3.4 (4).
1.
shall be (024\11, i.l) II:;)
with IfIr taken as 1.2 for epoxy~coated reinfo!\'cmc!!L :Ul(i

taken as 0.75 for lightweight concrete. For odlcr C:1:;'-.:5, ~o'
and) shall be taken as J .0.
412.4.2 For deformed bars and deformcd wire, I'k shall be

taken as the larger of (0.24f,/ Je.jT:) d" and (0.043/,) d"
412.4.3 Length ide in Section 412.4.2 shall be permitted to

be multiplied by the applicable factors for:
idb
For 90-degree hooks of f1l36 mm bars an,' ~:i)r ::", 111::'

are either enclosed within ties or stirrups I :'l"f)( "<lieu);',,
to the bar being developed, spaced not gr(';' i.j !iJan 3(/;.
along [dll; or enclosed within ties or stiln'p~: pa:;;1!el If
the bar being developed, spaced not gr('~lin th;m 3rJ"
along the length of the tail extension or () !lOoL plu::
bend
... .cHi
3. For ISO-degree hooks of 036 mm bars and :;malk: !h<:.
arc enclosed within ties or stirrups perpcn!l:culal io thr

bar being developed, spaced not greate)"
1r!, ; ,1(;)).:
4.
Where anchorage or development r

specifically required, reinforcement in
required by analysis ..
.... (As It":"
I,
(',
In Sections 412.6.3 (2) and 412.6.30). db is IL. ',"',ICltr c:

the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup ,shall l"-lld(!:;e til
bent portion of the hook, within 2db of the m<:,ide of III
bend.
412.6.4 For bars being developed by a stil:,,:< itO)K ;'
discontinuous ends of members with side COV('T :md lnp (r::
bottom) cover over hook less than 65 mill .
.]:(: ,;
shall be enclosed within ties or stirrups peli
bar being developed, spaced not greater th,nl :)\';, ilL ro[; i,:
The first tic or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the
hook, within 2 (h of the outside of the bend, where db is
diameter of hooked bar. For this case, the factors of
Sections 412.6.3 (2) and (3) shaU not apply.
412.6.5 I-looks shall not be considered
developing bars in compression.
effective
in
412.7 Development of Headed alld Mechanically
Anchored Deformed Bars in Tension

412.7.1 Development length for headed deformed bars in
tension, llil' shall be delermined from Section 412.7.2. Use
of heads to develop defonned bars in tension shall be
limited to conditions satisfying (I) through (6):
I.
Bar/, shall not exceed 415 MPa;
2.
Bar size shall not exceed f?J36 mm;
3.
Concrete shall be normal-weight;
4.
Net bearing area of head A brg shall not be less than 4A/!;
5.
Clear cover for bar shall not be less than lit/>; and
6.
Clear spacing between bars shall not be less than 4(h.
412.7.2 For headed deformed bars satisfying Section

{dl shall be (0.191.f/~/
)d", where the value of J/ used to calculate
shall
403.6.9, development length in tension
m:
i",
not exceed 40 MPa, and faclor !fI~ shall be taken as 1.2 for
epoxy~coated reinforcement and 1.0 for other cases. Where
reinforcemcnt providcd is in cxcess of that required by
analysis, except where development of ;;, is specifically
required, a factor of (AJ required)/(AJ" provided) may be
applied to the expression for (It. Length {"I shall not be less
than the larger of Sd/! and! 50 mm.
412.7.3 Heads shall not be considered
developing bars in compression .
effective
in
412.7.4 Any mechanical attachment or devicc capable of

developing!;. of reinforcement is allowed, provided that test
results showing the adequacy of such attachment or device
are approved by the building official. Development of
reinforcement shall bc pcrmitted to consist of a combination
of mechanical anchorage plus additional embedment length
of reinforcement between the critical section and the
mechanical attachment or device.
412.8 Development of Welded Deformed Wire
Reinforcement in Tension
412.8.1 Devc!opment length of weldcd deformed wire
reinforcement in tension, ttl, in millimeters, measured from
the point or critical section to thc end of wire shall be
computed as the product of the dcvelopmcnt length td , from
473
Section 412.3.2 or 412.3.3, times welded deformed wire

reinforcement factor, If/k" from Section 412.8.2 or 412.8.3. It
shall be permitted to reduce the development length in
accordance with Section 412.3.5 when applicable, but id
shall not be less than 200 mm except in computation of lap
splices by Section 412.19. When using the welded deformed
wire reinforcement factor, If/w, from Section 412.8.2, it shall
be permitted to use an epoxy-coating factor, If/(, of 1.0 for
epoxy-coated welded deformed wire reinforcement in
Sections 412.3.2 and 412.3.3.
412.8.2 For welded deformed wire reinforcement with at
least one cross wire within the development length, ld and
not less than 50 mm from the point of the critical section,
the welded deformed wire reinforcement factor shall be the
greater of:
but need not be taken greater than 1, where s is the spacing

between the wires to be developed.
412.8.3 For welded deformed wire reinforcement with no
cross wires within the devclopment length or with a single
cross wire less than 50 mm from the point of the critical
section, the wire fabric factor shall be taken as 1, and the
deve!opment length shall be determined as for deformed
wire.
412.8.4 When allY plain wires, or defonned wircs larger
than 16 mm diameter, are present in the weldcd deformcd
wire reinforcement in the direction of the development
length, the reinforcement shall be developed ill accordance
with Scction412.9.
412.9 Development of Welded Plain Wire
Reinforcement in Tension
412.9.1 Yield strength of welded plain wire reinforcement
shall be considered developed by embedment of two cross
wires with the closer cross wire not Icss than 50 mm from
the point of the critical section. However, the development
length fd , ill millimeters, shall not be less than:
(4123)
Where ttl is measured from thc point of the critical section to

the outermost cross wire, s is thc spacing between the wires
to be developed, and .,tas given in Section 412.3.4 (4).
Where reinforcement provided is in excess of that required,
this length may be reduced in accordance with Section
412.3.5. Length td shall not be less than 150 mm except in
computation of lap splices by Section 412.20.
National Structural Code of the Philippines
6!11
Edition Volume 1
4- 74
CHAPTEr, 4 - Concrete
412.10 Development of Prestressing Strand

412.10.1 Excep t as provided in Section 4 I 2. 10.1.1, seven
wire s trand shall be bonded beyond the critical section , a
di stance not less than:
f
"
= ( i ") d
21
+(
i p,
II
i"
)d "
(412-4)
Expressions in parentheses are used as co nslants wllhou(

units, where db is strand di ameter in millimeters. and.!;,.. and
fJr <lfC expressed in MPa.
412.10.1.1 Embedment less than Id shall be permitted at a
sectioJl of a member provided the design strand stress at Ihal
section docs not exceed values ob tained from the bi linear
relationship defined by Eq . 412-4 .
412.10.2 Limiting fh e investigation 10 cros s sections nearest
each end of {he me mber that arc required to develop full
design strength under specified factored loads shall be
permitted except where bonding of one or marc strands docs
not extcnd to the end of (he member. or whcre conce ntrated
loads arc aprlied with in the strand development length.
412.10.3 Where bonding of a strand docs not ex tend to end
of member, and design includes tension at service load in
pre-compressed [ensile zone as permined by Section
418.5.2 . development length. Id specified in Secti on
4 I 2.1 0.1 shall be do ub led .
412.11 Development of n exu ra l Reinfo rcement - General
412.1 I.J Devclopment of tension rcinforccn1cIlI by bending

across the web to be anch ored or mad e con tinuou s with
fcinrorccm~nl on the opposite fnee of me mber shall be
perlnitlcd.
412.11.2 Critical sect ions for devclopment o f reinforcement
in nexural mcmbers nfe at points of maximum stress and at
points wi th in the spa n whe re adjacent reinforcement
termina tes or is ben I. Provisions of Section 412.12.3 must
be satisfi ed .
412.11.3 Reinforce mcnt sh<lll ex tend beyond the point flt
which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a dista nce
equal to the cfTccl ivc depth of melllber or 12dl " whichever is
greater. exccpt at ~ tlppon s of si mpl e spans and at free end of
canti levers.
412.11.5 Flexural reinforccment shal l not be tennin(l.lcd in a

tension zone unless one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
412.11.5.1 V. at the eu tofT point docs not exceed (213) 9>V, .
412.11.5.2 Stirrup area in excess of that requircd for shear

and torsion is provided along each terminated bar or wire
over a di stance from the tenn ination poi nt eqllal to three
fOUl1hs the effecti ve depth of member. Excess slirrup area
A,_ shall not be less than 0.4 I b,..s i" _Spacing s shull not
exceed dl(8/3b) where Pb is the ratio of area of reinforcement
cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the sec tion.
412.11.5.3 For 1lI36 mm bar alld smaller, continuing
rei nforcement provides dou ble the area required for flexure
at the cutoff point and V. docs not exceed (3f4)9>V,.
412.11.6 Adequate anc horage shall be provided for tensiOIl
reinforcement in nex ural members where reinforce ment
stress is not directl y propo rt ional to moment. such as sloped,
stepped or tapered foo tings; brackets; deep flex ural
members; or members in which tension rei nforcemen t is not
parallel to compression facc. See Sections 412.12.4 and
41 2. 13.4 for deep fl ex ural members .
412.12 Development of Positive Moment Reinforcement
412.12.1 A t least one third the positive moment

reinforcement in simple members and one fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in con tinuous members shall
extend along the sa me face of member into the sup port. In
beams. sllch reinforce men t shall ex tend illlo the suppOrt at
least 150 mill.
412.12.2 When a flexural membe r is part of a primary
lateral-load-resisting system, positive moment rein forcement required to be extended into the support by' Section
412. 12. I shall be anchored to develop the specified yield
strength/I. in tension at the face of suppo rt.
412.12.3 At simple supports and at points of inncction.

positive moment tension reinforcement shall be limited to a
diameter such that ld computed for 1;. by Section 412.3
satisfies Eq. 4 12-5, except Eq. 41 2-5 need not be sati sfi ed
for reinforcement terminating beyond center line of simpk
SUPPOf1S by a standard hook or a mechani cal anchorage at
Icast cq ui va lent to a stand ard hook.
M
412.11.4 Conti nuing reinforcement shall have an

embedment length Il ot less than the development length //(
beyond
the point
reinforce ment is
110
where bent
or
terminated
I,,$"+f
VII
"
tension
longe r required to resist ncxure.
CHAPTER
where:
:\ M" is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the section

to be stressed to /y;
Vu is calculated
at
. Concrete
415
412.14.2.1 For III I 6 mm bar and MD 200 wire, and smaller,

and for 000 mm and 1lI25 mm bars wil h !,., of 280 MPa or
less, a standard stimlp hook around longitudinal
reinforcement.
the section;
fa
at a support shall be the embedment length beyond

center of support; or
fa
at a point of inOcction shall be limited to the effective

depth of member or l2(h. whichever is greater.
An in crease of 30 percent in the value of M,/Vu shall be

permitted when the ends of reinforccmclH are confined by a
compressive reaction.
412.12.4 AI simple suppons of deep fl exu ral members,

positive moment te nsion reinforcement shall be anchored to
develop the specified yield strength h in tension at the face
of support except that jf design is canied out using Section
427, the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be
anchored in accordance with Section 427.4.3. At interior
supports of deep beams, positive moment tension
reinforcement shall be continllous or be spliced with that of
the adjacent spans.
412.13 Developmenl of Negative Moment Reinforcement
412.13.1 Negative moment reinforcement in a cOlllinuotls,

rcs!rained or cantilever member, or in any member of a rigid
frame, shall be anchored in or throu gh the supporti ng
member by embedmcm length, hooks or mecha nj caJ
anchorage.
412.13.2 Negative moment reinforcement shall have an
embedment length into the span as required by Sect ions
4 12.2 an"412.11.3.
412.13.3 At least one third the total tension reinforcement
provided for negative moment at a suppon shall have an
embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less
than effective depth of member, 12(h, or 1116 the clear span,
whichever is greater.
412.13.4 AI interior supports of deep flexural members,
negative moment tension reinforcement shall be continuous
with that of the adjacent spans.
412.14 De\'elopmenf of 'Veb Reinforcement

412.14.1 Web reinrorcement shall be carried as close to
comprc~si{)n <l nd tension surfaces of member as cover
requirements and proximity of other reinforcement pcnllit:-;.
412.14.2.2 For !ll20 rnm and 025 mill stirrups with.!;.( greater
tiian
280 MPa, a standard stirrup hook around a
longitudinal bar plus an embedment between mid-height of
the member and the outside end of the hook equal to or
grealer.lhan 0.17dJ,.,
A.[f:
412.14.2,3 For each leg of welded smool h wire fabric
forming simple U-stirrups, either:
I.
Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm spacing

along Ihe member al Ihe lOp of Ihe U; or
2.
One longitudinal wire located not marc than d/4 from

the compression face and a second wire closer to the
compression face and spaced not less than 50 mm from
the first wire. The second wire shall be permitted to be
localed on Ihe slirrup leg beyond a bend, Or on a bend
with an inside diameter of bend not less than 8db.
412.14.2.4 For each end of a singleleg slirrup of welded

pJain or deformed wire fabric, two longitudinal wires at a
minimum spacing of 50 mm and with the inner wire at least
Ihe grealer of d/4 or 50 mm from middeplh of member dI2.
Outer longitudinal wire at tension face shall not be farther
from the face than the pOl1ion of primary flexural
reinforcement closest (0 the face.
412.14.2.5 In joist construction as defined in Section
408.12, for 12 mm diameter bar .llld MD 130 wire and
:o; mallcr, a standard hook.
412.14.3 Between anchored ends, each bend in the
continuous portion of a simple U~s tirnIp or multiple Ustirrups shall enclose a longitudinal bar.
412.14.4 Longiludinal bars ben I 10 acl as shem'
reinforcement, if extended into a region of tension, shall be
con tinuous with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended
into a region of compression, shall be anchored beyond ll1id~
depth d/2 as specified for development length in Section
412.3 for Ihal parI of!, required 10 satisfy Eq. 41117.
412.14.5 Pairs of U-stirrups or tics so placed as to for m a
closed unit shall he consi de red properly spl iced when
length s of laps arc 1.31//. In members .It Icast 450 111m deep.
such splices with AJ,./ not more than 40 kN per leg may be
co n$ide red adequate if stirnlj) legs extend the fu ll avai lable
depth of member.
412.14.2 Ends of single leg, simple U- or multiple Ustirrups :-ohall be anchored as required by the following:
National Structural Code of Ule Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
4-76
412.15 Splic", of Reinforcement - Gencral
412.15.1 Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as

required or permitted on design drawings or ill
specifications, or as authori zed by Ihe engineer-or-fecon!.
412.15.2 Lap SI)li ces
412.16 Splices of Deformed !lars and Deformed Wire in

Tension
412.]6.1 Minimum lengt h of lap for tension lap spli ces :.haIl
be flS required for Class A or B splice, but not less than 300
mill, where:
412.15.2.1 Lap splices shall nOI be used for bars larger than
36 111m diameter. except as provided in Secljolls 412.17.2
and 415.9.2.3.
412.15.2.2 Lap sp lices of bars in a bundle shall be based on
(he lap splice length required for individual bars within the
bundle, increa<;cd in accordance with Sec ti on 4 12.5.
Individual bar splices within a bundle shall nOI overlap.
Entire bundles shall not be lap spl iced.
412.15.2.3 Bars spliced by non-conlact lap spl ices in
flexural members shall not be spaced transversely farther
apart than one
the requi red lap splice lengt h. or 150
mill.
fim,
412.15.3 Mechanical and Welded Spliccs

412.15.3.1
permiued.
Mechani cal
and
we lded
splices
shall
be
412.15.3.2 A full mechanical splice shall develop in tension

or compression . as required. atlcast 1.25J;. of Ihe bilr.
412.15.3.3 Except as providcd in (his cha pler, all weldin g
!ihall confonn to "Strife/ural W{~/ding Code Reinforcing
Sleel" (ANSIJA WS D 1.4).
412.15.3.4 A full-welded sp lice shall develop al leasl 1.25
!, of the bar.
412.15.3.5 Welded splices and mechanical connections not
meering requirement s of Section 412./5.3.2 or 412.15.3.4
ru-e allowed only for rnl6 111m ba rs and smaller and in
accordance with Section 412./6.5.
412.15.3.6 Welded splices and mechanical conncctions shall

maintain the clearance and cove rage requirements of
Secti ons 407 .7 and 407.8.
Class A spl icc
I.Old
C lass IJ splice
1.31"
where Id is calculated in accordance with Section tjJ2.3 to

develop 1;. , bUl without the 300 mm minim ull1 u! .\ :ection
412.3.1 and wi thout the modi fi cation fa<.:tor of Sec tion
4 12.3.5.
412.16.2 Lap splices of deformed bars and deforn1("d wire
in tension shall be Class B splices except that Class A
splices may be used when:
I.
The area of reinforcement provided is at leasl twice that

required by ana lysis over Ihe entire length of the splice;
and
2.
One half or less of the total reinforcemcnt is spliced

within th e required lap length .
412.16.3 When bars of differen l size arc lap "pl iced in

ten sion, splice length shall be the larger of Id of larger bar
and tension Jap splice length of smaller bar.
41 2.16.4 Mechanical or welded splices used where area of
reinforcement provided is less than twice that req uired by
analysis shall meet requirements of Sections 412. 15.3.2 or
412.15.3.4.
412.16.5 Mechani cal or welded splices not meet.ing the

requiremenl" of Secli ons 412.15.3.2 or 412.15 .3 .4 shall be
permitted for 16 mm diameter bars and small er if the
requirements of Secti ons 412.1(\.5 .1 ulcough 412.16.5.3 arc
met:
412.16.5.1 Splices shall be staggered alieaSl600 mm.
412.16.5.2 In computi ng the tensile forces Ih:l{ can be

deve loped at eac h section, the spliced reinforccrnr.!li ':lfrSr.
sll<lll be taken a~ I.hc specified splice strength, hU1 1101
than [,.. The str~:,s in the unspliced reinforcement shilll be
taken as J; timcs th e ratio of the shOI1CS{ Icngth cmbcddcJ
beyond thc section to Id but nol gren ter th an!,..
412.16.5.3 The total tcnsilc force that can be devclop('.(i ;1'
each section must bc at least twice thtll required by an;ll y:
<Iud al least 140 MPa times the LOtal arca of rcinforcemCili.
provided.
412.16.6 Sp li ces in tension lie members sha ll be m ade with

a fuJI mechani cal o r full welded splice in accordance with
Secti o ns 412.15.3 .2 or 412.15.3.4 and splices in adjacent
bars shall be staggered at least 750 mill.
412.17 Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression
412. 17.1 Com prcssion lap splice length shall be 0.07 1fA . .
for 1,. of 420 MP. or less, or (0.13 I, - 24) d. for 1,. g,,;,ner
thall 4 15 MPa. but nol less than 300 mill. For fo less than
2 J M P'l, length of lap shall be increased by one third.
412.17.2 When bars of different size are lap spli ced in
compress io n, splice length shall be the larger I",., of la rger
bar Hl1d co mpression lap splice length of smaller bar. Lap

spli ces of 42 and 58 mill diamete r bars to 36 mm di ameter
;md smaller bars shall be pcr milted .
412. 17 .3 Welded sp lices or mechanical connect ions lIsetl in
compression shall meet requirements of Sections 4 12. 15.3.3
an d 4 12 . 15.3.4.
412.17.4 E nd-Bearing Splices
Tn bars requ ired fo r co mpression (Jn])'.

transmissio!l of compressive stress by bearing of square cut
ends held in concentric co ntact by a suita ble device shal! bc
pcnnittcd.
477
if one half or fewer of the bars are spl iced at an y sec tion and
alternate Jap splices are staggered by
'd'
412.18.2.3 Where the bar stress due to factored loads is

grea ter than 0.5 h in te nsio n, lap splices shall be Class B
tension lap splices.

412.18.2.4 In tied rei nfo rced com press ion members, where
lies throughou t the lap splice length have an effective area
not less than 0.0015hs, lap splice le ngt h shall be permitted
to be Illu lti plied by 0.83, but lap length shall not be less th an
300 mill. Tie legs perpend icul ar to dimension" shall be

lI sed in determining effecti ve area.
412.18.2.5 In spirally reinforced compression members, lap
splice length of bars within a spiral sha ll be permitted to be
multipl ied by 0.75, but lap le ngth shall not be less than 300
mm .
412.18.3 Welded Splices o r Mechanical Connectors in
Columns
Welded splices or mechanical connectol"!i in columns sha ll

meet the req uireme nt s of Secti on 4 12.15.3.3 o r 4 12. 15 .3 .4 .
412.17.4.1
412.1 7 .4.2 Bar cnds shall (ermin,lIc in nat surfaces wi th in

1.5 degrees of a right ang le to the u;.; is of the bars and shall
be filled within 3 degrees of fu ll bearing after assembly.
412.17.4.3 End-bearing splices shall be used only in
me m hers containing closed tics. closed sti rrups or spirals.
412.18.4 End-hearing Splices in Columns
End-beari ng spli ces complying wi th Secti on 41 2.17.4 shall

be permitted 10 be used fo r colum n bars stressed in
co mp ression provided the splices are staggered or add iti onal
bars nrc provided at splice locat ions. The conti nui ng bars in
each fa ce o f Ihe column shall have a tensile st rength, based
0 11 the specified yield strength h., not less tha n 0.25/1, limes
the area of the vert ical rein fo rce mcnt in that facc.
412.19 Splices of \-\'cldcd Dcfornwd Wire
412.18 Spedal Spikes Requiremcnts for Columns
Reinforcemcnt in Tension
412.HU Lilp s pl ices, bult we lded spi kes, mcchnni cal

co nnecti ons or end-beari ng splices shall be used wi th the
limi tations of Sect ions 4 12. J 8.2 through 412. ! 8.4. A spl ice
shnll satisfy req uiremcnts for all load cOJllb in:ltiOlls for the
column.
412.19.1 Mi nimulll lengt h o f lap fo r 1,1)) splicc..... o f wel ded

de formed wi re fabl;c measu red be tween the ends o f each
fabric sheet shall not be less th an 1.3/d or 200 mm. and the
ovcrhlp measured between ou termos t eros!'; wi res of each
fabric sheet shall not be less than 50 mill, I" shall be the
deve lop men t le ngth for Ihe .specificd yield stre ngth 1.~. in
accorda nce with Secti on 4 12 .R.
4 J 2.1 H.2 Lap Spikes ill Columns

4q.1H. 2.1 Where th e bar stress du e (l factored l()l1d ~, is
r ()!llprl~ss i ve . lap sp lices sha ll co nform 10 S~~c ti o ns 4! 2. 17. 1
and 412.17 .2. and where :lp pl it~ab!e, to Sec tio n 4 J 2.1 X.2 ,ll or
"II ~ . I K25 .
(.lctOfcd loads
41 2. 1X.2.2 Wh(:r~~ Ihe hal' Sl ress due to

is
tensi le lind dncs nol exceed () .~r.. in tension. l;l P splices sha ll
he Class B tcnsioll lap "pikes if more tha ll nne half of the
hars arc :-,plin'd <II a n)' secl ion. or Class 1\ tension lap spl ices
412.19.2
Lap spli ces of wel ded deform ed wire
rei n foru' lllcnt , with no cross wires within the lap splice
Ic.n gth . shall be determined as for (kf"onn cd wire.
412.19.3 Where any pl aul wires, or de formed wi res large r

than MD 200, arc prcsent in the welded deformed wire
reinforcemcnt in the direction or {ilc lap !\plice or where
welded ddonncd wire reinforcelllent is l"lp spliced In
we lded plain wirc reillfon:cmcnt, the rein forcement sha ll he
I.. p spliced in aCC() rdil llCc with Seclion 41 2.20.
nl
Nafiondl SIIUctt ll"i" ll Co cle of the PhilipPIi"l (-!-s G Edition Vol\l1"t1(: 1
478
CHAPTEI'4 Concrete
412.20 Splices of Welded Plain Wire Reinforcement in
Tension
Minimum length of lap for lap splices of welded plain wire
reinforcement shall be in accordance with the foHowing:
412.20.1 When area of reinforcement provided is less than
twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of
overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each
reinforcement sheet shall not be less lhan the largest of one
spacing of cross wires plus 50 mm, or less than 1.5 id , or
ISO mm, Id shall be the development length for the specified
yield strength/" in accordance with Section 412.9.
413.1 Notations
bl
b2
C
412.20.2 Where area of reinforcement provided is at least
twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of
overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each
reinforcement sheet shall not be less than 1.5 1,1, or 50 mm,
/,/ shall be the development length for the specified yield
strength/;. in accordance with Section 412.9.
::: dimension of the critical section bo measured in the
direction of the span for which moments arc

determined, mm
::: dimension of the critical section bo measured in the
direction perpendicular to /)1, mm
::: cross-sectional constant to define torsionnl
properties of slab and beam. See Section 413.7.4.)
J
I(1_O.63.::.)x
y
y 3
(.'1
("2
fie"
E("J
h
/.,
= 'dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectanguJa:'

column, capital, or bracket measured in the
direction of the span for which moments arc being
determined, mm
= dimension of rectangular or equivalent rcctangulai
column, capita! or bracket measured transverse to
the direction of the span for which moments arc
being detennined, tnm
::: modulus of elasticity of beam concrete, MPa
= modulus of elasticity of slab concrete, MPa
::: overall thickness of member, mm
= moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross
section of beam as defined in Section 413.7.1.6
= moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gro:;:)
section of slab defined for calculating fXt and /3( ,
mm
KI
1/1
::: h.1/12 times width of slab defined in notations

aand PI
::: torsional stiffness of torsional member; moment
per 'unit rotation
::: length of clear span in direction that moments arc
being determined, measured face to face (i~'
SUpp0I1S
II
12
M"
Mil
(/1<
\/,
= length of span in direction that moments are being

determined, measured center to center of support::
::: length of span transverse to I" measured center to
center of supports. Sec also Sections 413.7.2.3 ill::]
413.7.2.4
::: total factored static moment
::: factored moment at section
= factored load per unit area
::: nominal shear strength provided by concrete. See
Sectioll 411.13.2.1
::: factored shear rorce at section
~ factored dead load per unit area
::: factored live load per unit area
::: shorter overall dimension of rectangular parl
cross section, mill
AssocicltlOll of Structur("d EnDineers of the PhilipPines
CHAPTEfi 4 - Concrete
::: longer overall dimension of rectangular part of

cross section, mill
~: ratio of Ilexural stillness of beam section to
flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
lateral!y by cenler lines of adjacent panels (if any)
on each side of the beam
= E
10',.,/ ,
al
a?
~
= ain direction of I,
:::: in direction of t2
= ratio of torsional sl:ffness of edge beam section to
flexural stiffness of a width of slab equal to span
length of beam, center to center of supports
= _s"C::_
n~J,
'JJ
y"
p"
::: fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
flexure at slab-colullln connections. Sec Section

413.6.3.2
;:: fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
eccentricity of shear at slab-column connections
= I - y;
:::: ratio of nonprcstressed tension reinforcement
= reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conciitions
= strength reduction factor
413,2 Scope
413.2.1 The provisions of this Section shall apply for design
of slab systems reinforced for flexure in more than one
direction, with or without beams between supports.
413.2.2 For a slab system supp0I1ed by columns or walls,
the dimensions <.', and C2 and the clcar span til shall be based
on an effective support area defined by the intersection or
the bottom surrace or the slab, or of the drop panel if there is
one, with the largest right circular cone, right pyramid, or
tapered wedge whose surfaces are located within the column
and capital or bracket and arc oriented no greater than 45
degrees to the axis of the column.
413.2.3 Solid slabs and slabs with recesses or pockets made
by permanent or removable fillers between ribs or joists in
two directions arc included within the scope of this Section.
413.2.<-! Minimulll thickness of slabs designed in accordance
with tll;s Section shall be as required by Section 409.6.3.
4-79
413.3 Definitions
413.3.1 Column strip is a design strip with a width on each
side of a column center line equal to 0.251 2 or 0.251"
whichever is less. Column strip includes beams, if any.
413.3.2 Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two
column strips.
413.3.3 A panel is bounded by column, beam or wall center
Jines on all sides.
413.3.4 For monolithic or fully composite construction, a
beam includes that portion of slab on each side of the beam
extending a distance equal to the projection of the beam
above or below the slab, whichever is greater, but not
greater than fOLlr times the slab thickness.
413.3.5 When used to reduce the amount of negative
moment reinforcement over a column or minimum required
slab thickness, a drop panel shall:
I.
Project below the slab at least one-quarter of the

adjacent slab thickness; and
2.
Extend in each ciirection from the centerline of SUppOlt

a distance not less than one-sixth the span
length
measured from center-to-center of supports in
that direction.
413.3.6 When lIsed to increase the critical condition section

for shear at a slab-column joint, a shear cap shall project
below the slab and extend a minimum horizonlal distance
from the face of the column that is equal to the thickness of
the projection below the slab soffit.
413.4 Slab Reinforcement

413.4.] Area of reinforcement in each direction for two-way
slab systems shall be determined from moments at critical
sections, but shall not be less than required by Section
407.13.2.1.
413.4.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall
not exceed two times the slab thickness, except for portions
of slab area of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab
over cellular spaces, reinforcement shall be provitj'~d as
required by Section 407.11
1h
National StllJCturai Code of tile PhilipPines 6 Edition Volume '1
480
CHAPTEI1 4 . Concrole
Figure 413-1 Extensions for Reinforcements in Slabs without Beams (Sec Section 412.! 2. J for reinforcement extension int n
supports)
STRIP
LOCATION
MINIMUM As
AT SECTION
0
WITH DROP PANELS
WITHOUT DROP PANELS
0,331n
0,301n
50%
TOP
REMAINDER
COLUMN
STRIP
BonOM
100%
least two bars
or wires shall
1111
conform 10 13,3,6.5
Splices shall be
permitted in this region
I
TOP
MIDDLE
STRIP
0.211 .
0.22(.
0.221.
100%
50%
BOnOM
150 mm
Max. 0.151.
Max. 0.151.
REMAINDER
Clear span oln
Cl
Face of support
Cenler to center
It
Extenor support
(No slab continuity)
Center to center span
It
Intenor support
(Continuity provided)
I\ssociatlon of Structural Ellqlllccrs of 1111: PI-lilIPPIJ'lC':',
Ext 101
(No s!ab ml1lll'''lII,
CHAPTER 4 - Concrele
413.4.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to .\

discontinuous edge shall ex tend (0 the edge of slnb aud ha ve
embedment, straight or hooked, at leasl 150 !l1l11 in spandrel
beams, columns or walls.
413.4.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to
4-81
4 13.4.8 Delails of Reinforcement in Slabs without Beams

413.4.8.1 In addition to the other requirements of Section
413.4, reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have
min im um cxtensions as prescribed in Figure 41 3- 1.
II
discontinuolls edge shall be bent, hooked or otherwise

llllchored, in spandrel beams, co luillns or walls, to be
developed at f;lce of StJPPOJ1 according to provisions of
Section 412.
413.4.8.2 Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of

ncgative moment reinforcement beyond the face of support
as prescribed in Figure 4 I 3-1 shall be based on requiremcnts
of longer spa n.
413.4.5 Where a slab is nOI s li pPol1ed by a spandrel beam

or W,lJl at <1 discontinuous edge or where a slab cMti levers
beyond [he support, anchorage of reinforcement shall be
permitted within the slab.
413.4.8.3 Ilelll bars shall be pennilled only when dcplhspan ratio pennils use of bends 45 degrees or less.
413.4.6 At exte rior corners of slabs su pported by edge

walls or where onc or mOre edge beams have a value of
greater than 1.0, lOp and bottom slab reinforcement shall be
provided at exterior comers in accordance wi th Secti ons
0.,
413.4.6. llhrough 413.4 .6.4 :
413.4.6.1 Corner reinforcement in both top and bottom of

slab s hall be sufficien t to resist a moment equal 10 the
maximulTl positive moment (per meIer of width) in the slab
panel.
413.4.6.2 Tile lllomelH shall be assumed to be about an axis

perpe ndi cular to the diagonal from the corner in the lap of
the slab and about an axis parallel to the diagonal from the
corner in the bottom of the slab.
413.4 .6.3 Corner reinforce ment shall be provided for a
distance in each direction from the corner equal 10 one-fifth
th e longer span.
413.4.6.4 ConteI' r~inrorcc mcill shall be pl<1ccd parallel 10

the diagollul in the lOp of the slab and perpendicular [0 the
diagonal in the hallom of the slab. Alternatively, the special
reinforcement Sh ;'l ll be placed ill two layers pilrallcl 10 the
sides of the slab in both the top and h0l10111 of the sl ab .
413.4.7 When n drop panel is used to reduce the a!llount of
negative moment reinforcemcnt over the column of a flat
:-;Iab, the tiilllCIlSiolls of thc drop panel shall be in accordance
wilh Section 41 :t3.5. In computing required slab
rcinforcclllcllI. the thickness of the drop panel below the
shih shall not be ilSSlIlIlCtl 10 be greatcr than one-quar:er Ik
<.I ist,mcc from lhe edge or drop pa nel 10 the r<l cc 01 the
column or coillmil capital.
413.4.8.4 In framcs where two-way slabs act as primary

members reSisting lateral loads, lcngths of reinforcement
shall be delcnnined by analysis but shall not be less than
those prescribed .in Figure 413-1.
413.4.8.5 All bo([om bars or wires within the column strip.
in each direction, shall be continuous or spliced with Class
B splices or with mechanical or welded splices satisfying
Seclion 412.15.3. Splices shall be located as shown in
Figure 413-1. At least two of the column strip bOllom bars
or wires in each direction shall pass within thc regio n
bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column
and shall be anchored at ex terior SUpp0l1S .
413.4.8.6 In slabs with shearheads and in liflslab

construclion where it is not practical to pass the bottom bars
reql~red by Section 413.4.8.5 Lhrough the column, at least
(wo bonded bOllom bars or wires in each direction shall pass
through the shea rh ead or lifting collar as close to the column
as pract icable and be co ntinuous or spliced with a Class A
splice. At ex terior columns, the reinforcement shall be
.mchored at the shearhead or lifting foHnL
413.5 Openings in Slab Systems
413.5.1 Openings of any siz.e shall be permitted in slab

sys tems if shown by analysis lhal the desi gn strength is at
least equal 10 the sirength considering Sections 409.3 and
409.4, and that all serviceabil it y condi tions. including the
s pecified Iimil.'\ on deflcclions . Ire mel.
413.5 .2 As (11) altcrnate In spcciill analysis ns required by

Section 413 ..1 .1, openings shall be permitlcd ill slab syslems
wiLhout bt. . ams only in ,lccnrdancc with Ihe follow i ng:
413.5.2.1 Ope nings or <l ilY size shall be permitted in th e area
co I)) ll10nto illtl~rs('clin g mid dle strips, provided lOla! alllOunt
or reinfo rce ll'lcnt rt.'q uircd for Ihc pand withollt the opening
b ma intaincd.
4 -82
CHAPTEIi 4 - Concreto
413.5.2.2 In the area co mmo n to intersecting column stlips,
flot more than onc-eighth the width of column strip in either

span shall be interrupted by openings. An amou nl of
reinforcement equ ivalent to thaI intermptcd by an opening
sha ll be added on the sides of Ihe opening.
413.5.2.3 In the area common to one column strip and one
middle strip, not more than one-fourth the reinforcement in
eilher strip shall be inl efnlpled by openings. An nmount of
reinforcement cquivalcl; : to that interrupted by an open ing
shall be ndded 0 11 the sides of the opening.
413.5.2.4 Shear requirements of Section 411.13.6 shall be

satisfied.
413.6 Design Procedures
onc~half
slab or drop panel thickness (1.511) outside opposi te

faces of the column or c"pilal, where Mil is the moment to
be transferred and
(4 13- 1)
413.6.3.3 For unbalanced moments about an axis pa rallel to

Ihe edge at exterior Supp011S. Ihe value of Y/ by Eq. 413~ 1
sha ll be in accordance with Ihe following:
I . For edge columns with unb~llanced moments about an
an axis parallel to the edge, It = 1.0 provided that Vu at

an edge support docs not excced O.75V,. or al a comer
support does not exceed 0.5q,V,..
2. For unbalanced moments al interior SUppOI1S. and for

413.6.1 A slab system shal! be desig ned by any procedu re
snl is fyi ng conditi ons of equilibrium and geomet ric
compati bilit y, jf shown that the design strengt h at every
section is at l ea~t equal to the required strength set fo nh in
Sec ti ons 409.3 and 409.4 and that all serviceab ility
co nditi o ns. including limits on defl ec ti ons, arc mel.
413.6.1.1 Desig n of a slab system for gravity loads
in clud in g th e slab and beams. if any, between supports and
supporting co lumns or walls forming orthogo na l fr amcs. by
ei lhe r the Direct Design Method of Section 413.7 or the
Equiva le nt Frame Method of Section 413 .8, shall be
pc nn iucd .
41 3.6.1.2 For lateral loads. analysis of frames shall takc into
nccount effects of cracking and reinforcemcnt on stiffness of
frame me mbers.
4) 3.6.1.3 Combining the resuils of the gravity load unalysis

with the results of the latcral load analysis shall be
pcrmillcd.
edge co lumns with unbalanced momcnts about an axis

transverse to the edge, inc rea se '}f to as much as 1.25
ti mes the value from Eq, 413 ~ 1 , but not more than '}j=
1.0, provided that V" at the su pport docs !lot exceed
O.4<pVf . The net tensi le strain CI' ca lculated for the
effective slab width ciefined in Section 413.6.3.2, shall
not bc less than 0 .0 I O.
The value of V,. in items ( I) and (2) shall be cakul31cd in
accordance wi th Section 411. 13.2.1.
413.6.3.4 Concentration of rcinfo rceme nt over {he col um n

by closer spaci ng or additional rein forcemc lll shall be used
to rcsist moment 011 the effcclive slnb width defined in

Section 413.6.3.2.
41 3.6.4 Design for tranxfcr of IO:lci fmm sl;'!h to sllppon ing

columns or wiJlIs through shcm' ;lI1d torsion xll.1l1 he in
accordance with Section 41 I.
413.7 Di rect Design Method
413.6.2 Thc slab and beams. if any, betwccn suppmls shall

be proportioned for factored moments prevailing al evcry
section.
413.6.3 When gravity load. wind , earthquake or other latcr,,1

forces c<luse transfer of moment between slab a nd co lumn. tI
f:-<tClioll of the unbalanced moment shall hc transferred by
flexure in accordance wi th Sections 413.6,3 ,2 and 4 13 .6.1.4 .
413,6.:t l Fra ction of unbalanced moment 110t transferred

by ncx.ure shall he transfcrred hy eccentric it y of shc:lr in
accordance with Secl ion 4 11 . 13.7.
4J3.6,3 .2 A rnlctioll of thc unhahlllccd momcn l given
by Yr M" sha ll be considered to be Inlnsfcrred hy flexur e
413,7.1 Limitati on s
Design of slab xys rcms within the following limil<ltim}s hy
the direct design method sh.lI l he permitted:
413.7.1.1 There sh;:tl i he a mi nimum of Ihree c'OIui m',,"
sp.IIlS in each direction.

4[3.7. 1.2 P:lIlcis shall be rectangular. with it ratio or lungc'"
cenlcr~lo ~cc l1lcr supports within it pant:! no;
greater than 2.
10 shorter span
413.7.1.3 Successive span lengthS ccntcHoccnh-r SI! l'Y":

ill each directio n s hall not differ hy more tlt'"II1 olH>lh ild i~ .. ;
longer sp.m.
wi th in an cfl'l.!ctivc slab width between lines thaI arc one and
Associ8tlon of Structura l Engll'1ecl's of the r:)hilipPlnes
483
413.7.1.4 Offset of columns by a maximum of I() percent of

the span in direction of offset from either axis between
center lines of successive columns shall be permitted.
polygon-shaped supports shall be treated as square supports

with the same area.
413.7.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and

uniformly distributed over <1n entire panel. Live load shall
not exceed two times dead load.
413.7.3
413.7.1.6 For a panel with beams between supports on an

sides, the relative stiffness of beams in two perpendicular
dircclions.
(413-2)
Neg::ltive and Positive Factored Moments
413.7.3.1 Negative factored moments shall be located at

face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular polygonshaped supports shall be treated a,s square supports with the
same area.
413.7.3.2 In an interior span, total static moment Mo sha!l
bc distributeci'<ls follows:
Negati ve factored moment

shall not be less than 0.2 nor greater than 5.0, whereOfJ and
Qj2 are calculated in accordance with Equation (413-3).
(413-3)
Positive factored moment
................... 0.35
413.7.3.3 In an end span, total factored static moment M"

shall be distributed as foHows:
...
_---,.
(t)
(2)
Slabs
413.7.1.7 Moment redistribution as permitted by Section

408.5 shall not be applied for slab systems designed by the
Direct Design Method. See Section 413.7.7.
413.7.1.8 Variations from the limitations of Section 413.7.1
shall be permitted if demonstrated by analysis as long as
requirements of Section 413.6. J arc satisfied.
0.65
Exterior
Edge
Negfl!ive
factored
~-
-r(4)-
with
Beams between
I3c~l.It1s
Interior SllP[X)rts
between
All
--""'(5)
Slab without
Without
Edge
&lge
_ _~ar~~
Beams
----_...
0.75
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.65
0.63
0.57
0.52
0.50
0.35
0.16
0.26
0.30
0.65
..--.----
With
Exterior
Edge Fully
Supp\)n~
Unrcs(r~incd
.."._--" -..
Interior
(3)
Restrained
moment
Posi!iv~
factored
Moment
Exterior
413.7.2 Total Factored Static Moment for a Span

413.7.2.1 Total factored static moment for a span shall be
determined in a strip bounded laterally by centerline of
panel on each side of centerline or supports.
413.7.2.2 Absolute sum of positive and average negative
f~lctored moments in each direction shall not be less than
M"
I I '
.~~
(413-4)
where II! is length of clear span in direction that momcnts

arc being determined.
413.7.2.3 Where the transverse span of panels on either side
of the centerline of SllPpO!1s varies, 12 in Eq. 413-4 shall be
taken as the average of adjacent transverse spans.
negative
factored
413.7.3.4 Negative ll10ment sections shall be designed \0

resist the larger of the two interior negative factored
moments determined for spans framing into a common
suppor1 unless all analysis is made to distribute the
unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffness of
adjoining elements.
413.7.3.5 Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned
to resist in torsion their share of exterior negative factored
moments.
413.7.3.6 The gravity load Illoment to be transferred
between slab and edge coluilln in aCl:crdancc with Section
413.6.1.1 shall be (UM".
413.7.2.4 When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge is

being considered, the distance from edge 10 panel centerline
shall be substiwted for /2 in Eq. 413-4.
413.7.2.5 Clear span (II shall extend from face to face of
columns, capitals, brackets or walls. Value of II! used in Eq.
413-4 shall not be less than 0.651,. Circular or regular
N8!1onal Structural Cocl(:; of tile PlliJipplncs G!' E:dllion Voluille 1
4 84
CHAPTER -I. Concrete
413.7.4.5 For slabs wi th beams between supports. ihe slab

portion of col umn slrips shall be prop0l1ioncd to re~is ( that
portion of column st rip moments no t resi sted by beams.
413.7.4 Factored Moments in Column Strips

413.7.4.1 Column strips shall be proponioncd 10 resist the
following percentage of interior negati ve raclOred l11oments:
I, l l ,
0.5
1.0
2.0
75
75
75
(a",,'!,)1 1.0
90
75
45
(a,I,!I,)
Linear interpolations shall be made between va lues s hown.

4 13.7.4.2 Colull1n strips shall be proportioned to res ist th e
follow ing percen tage of ex.tenor negative factored moments:
I,ll,
(a,/,II,)
0.5
1.0
2.0
p,~o
lao
100
100
(f,,, 2.5
75
75
75
100
100
100
90
75
45
0
(f,
(a,/,II,)/ 1.0
/f,:> 2.5
Linear interpolations shal l be made between values shown,

where p, is calc ul ated ill Eq . 4135 and C is calc ula ted in
Eq.4136.
"C
f3'~2E.1
"
The constant C or T or L-scctions shall be pClmiltco to be

cva)u:ucd by dividing the secti on into separate recta ngu lar
;'IS
41 3.7.5. 1 Beams between SUPI}()11s shall be proportioncd to

resist 85 perccn( of column stri p momen ts if (all l lil is
equal to or ~reate r than 1.0.
413.7.5.2 For values o f (a,l ,II,) between 1.0 and zero,

proportion of column strip momellts resisted by beams sha ll
be obtained by linear interpo lation belwcen 85 and zero
percent.
4 13.7.5.3 In additi on to moments calculated for uniform
loads according to Sections 413 .7.2.2. 413.7 .1.1 and
413.7 .5.2, beams shall be proportioned 10 res ist "lI mo mellls
ca used by concentrated or linea r loads applied directly to
beams, including weight of proj ec ting beam stem above or
below the slab.
413.7.6 Factored MOlll en ts in Middl e St ri ps
4 13.7.6.1 T hat portion of nega tiv e nnd pos iti ve factored
moments not resi sted by column strips ~hall be
proponionately assigncd 10 correspo nd in g half midd le
strips.
(4135)
(4 136)
parts.
413.7.5 Facto r ed Moments ill Beams
defined in Secti on 413.3.4. and .!\umming the val ues
4 13 .7 .6.2 Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist

the sum of th e momcnts assigned to its two hal f mi ddle
strips.
4 13.7.6.3 A middle strip adjace nt lO and p_mllid \'!iIh an
edge supported by a wall shall be proportioneo ttl l (:s-is{
twicc the moment assigned to the half lllitJdk :.Irip
corresponding to the first row of intcrior supports.
of C for each part.

413.7.4.3 Where suppon s consist of column s lor walls
extending for a di stance equal to or greater th an three
fourths Ihe span lengt h I} lIsed (0 compu te M ,,, negativc
momcn ts shall be considered to be uni formly distributed
across f} .
4 13.7.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to res ist the
fo ll owing perccillage o f positive factored IllOrnCI1IS:
1,1 /,
--_._-(u,/,II, )
(0, 1,11,)1 1.0
0.5
--'-
- -
1.0
'- '---'-
60
60
90
75
2.0
_._ - --
..---------- ~----- -
(i()
45
- -- -
41 3 .7.7 Modifi ca ti on of Factored MO lll ents

Modification of negative and pos iti ve factored 1l10Jll('I! !.o,; hy
I () percent shall be permitted provided ( he I (:! :ll . ,. !il"
moment for a panel in the direc ti o n
th an that required by Eq . 4 134.
COIlS ilL:l d
;" ;:.:. ), .':.
413.7.8 Factored Shear in S lab Sys tems wi th Beams

413.7 .8. 1 Beams with a,tzlt, eq ual to or grf'.' Ir.r Ilwn J.n
shall be propo rtioned to resist s hear cau!\cd 1 , ~. r;\f'[':'- :
loads on (ributitry areits hound ed by 45-degn..c Ii!!,: ::; .!J.: from the corners of the panels and the cc nlf''' !inf's of fh:-:
Hdjaccnt panels parallcl to (he lo ng s ides.
Linear inlerpolations shall be made between values shown :

!\ssocin ti on of S tru Clu((1 1Engineers of the Ph ilippine s
CHAPTE f1 4 . Concrele
,
!
413.7.8.2 In proportioning of beams with a//]II, less th an
1.0 to resist sheaf, linear interpolation, ass uming bea ms

carry 110 load at a,::; O. shall be permitted .
413.7.8.3 111 addition to shears calculated according to
Sections 413.7.8. 1 and 41 3.7.8.2, beams shall be
propol1iol1cd to resist s hears caused by factored lo'lds
applied directly on beams.

4]3.7.8.4 Computations of slab shear slrcngih o n the
ass umption that load is distributed
(0
supportin g beams
413.7.8.5 Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of

Section 4 I I.
413.7.9 Factored MOlllents in Columns and Walls
413.7.9.1 Colum ns and wa lls built integrally with a slab

system shall resist moments caused by factored loads on the
s lab system.
413.7.9.2 At an interior support, supporting clements above

and below the s lab shall resist the ractored moment
specified by Eq. 4137 ill direct proportion to their
stiffncsscs unless a general analysis is made.
(I ',,)'J
413.8.2.2 Each frame shall consist of a row or columns or

su pports and slabbeam strips. bounded laterally by the
centerline of panel on each side of the centerline or columns
or supports.
413.8.2.3 Columns or su pports shall be assumed to be
aU<tched to slabbeam st rips by torsional members (Section
413.8.5 ) trans verse to the direction of the span for which
moments are being determined and extending to bounding
Interal panel center lines all each side of a column .
. 1\
accordance with Section 413.7 .8. 1 or 4 13.7.8.2 shall be

permitted. Resistan ce to lOtal shea r occurring on a panel
shall he provided .
M = 0 .07 [('I,,,, + 0 .5 q",) I, I,,' - q '".1',
485
(4 13 7)
413.8.2.4 Frames adjacent ano parallel 10 an edge shall be
bounded by that edge and the ce nt erline of adjaccnt panel.

413.8.2.5 Analys is or each equiv.alenl frame in its entirety
shall be pennitted. Alternatively, for gravit y loading. a
separate anal ysis of each floor or roof wit h far ends of
columns considered fixed shall be permi tted.
413.8.2.6 Where slab beams are analyzed separatel y,
determinmion of moment at a given support assuming (hat
the slabbeam is fixed at any su pport two panels distant
therefro m, shall be permilted provided the slab continues
beyond that point.
413.8.3 Slab-Belll"s
413.8.3.1 Determination of [he moment or inertia of slabbeams :11 any cross section oUlside of jOints or column
capitals using the gross Mca of conc rete shal l be pennittec1.
where q'd. /'2 and /'" refer to shorter span .

413.8 E(Juivalenl li"rame Method
413.8.1 Design of slab systems by the equi val ent frame
method shall be b,lsed on assumpti ons given ill Secti ons
4 13.8.2 through 4 I 3.8.6 and all seelions or slabs and
suppo rt ing members shall be proportioned for moments and

shears thus obtained.
413.8.3.2 Varia ti on in moment of inerti a along axis of slab

beams shall be taken into account.
413.8.3.3 Moment of inert ia of slabhcilms from cClHcr of
column to face of column, bra cket or capital shall be
assumed equal 10 the moment of inertia of the slabbea m al
face of column. bracket or capilal divided by the quantity
{I - ell ])1 where c] and I] .tre measured transve rse to the
directi on of the span for whi ch moments arc being
determined.
413.8.1.1 Where metal column capitals arc used, it shall be

permitted to take account of their contributions to stiffness
and resistance to moment and (0 shear.
413.8.4 Columns
413.8.1.2 Ncg lc(; ting Ihe change in le ngth of col umlls and
slabs uu e 10 direct stress, .1I1d derl c{, l.io ns due to she.lr, shall
be permillcd.
413.8.4.1 Determination of the 1l1 0 lllCIll 01' inerti a of

columns ,It any cross section outside of joints or colu mn
capitals using the gross area or concrete ~ha ll be perm itted.
413.8.2 E'IUiv"lcnl Frame
413.8.4.2 Variation in 1l10ment of inertia along axis of

colu mns shall be taken into account.
413.8.2. I The stl1lclUrc shall be considered 10 be made up of

equivalent frames 0 11 colullln lines taken IOll gitudin:lll y nne!
transversely through the building.
413.8.4.3 Momcnt of inert ia of columns from top to bottom

of th e slabbea m ;It a joint s hall be ass umed infinite.
Nati ona l StrucltJr(11 COd e of li te Philippines 6 1\ Edition Vo lume '1
486
CHAPTEI1" Concre\()
413.8.5 Torsional Members

413.8.5.1 Torsional members (,sec Section 413.8.2.3) shall
be assumed [0 have a constant cross section throughout their
length consisting of the larges! or:
J.
A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the

column, bracket or capital in the direction of the span
for which moments arc being determined; or
2.
F'OI" !llonolithic or fully composite constmclion, the

portion of slab specified in (J) above plus that part of
the transverse beam above and below the slab; and
3.
The transverse beam as defined in Section 4! 3.3.4.
413.8.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the direction

of the span for which moments arc being determined, the
torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by the ratio of moment
of inertia of slab with sllch beam to moment of inertia of
slab without such beam.
from face of supporting element not greater than one-half

the projection of bracket or capital beyond face of
supP0l1ing element.
413.8.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall
be treated as square supports with the same area for location
of critical section for negative design moment.
413.8.7.4 When slab systems within limitations of Secti{)11
413.7.1 are analyzed by the Equivalent Frame Method, il
shall be permitted to reduce the resulting computed
moments in such propol1ion that the absolute sum of the
positive and average negative moments used in the design
need not exceed the value obtained from Eq. 413-4.
413.8.7.5 Distribution of moments at critical sections across
the slab-beam strip of each frame to column strips, beams
and middle strips as provided in Sections 413.7.4, 413.7.5
and 413.7.6 shall be permitted if the requirement of Section
413.7.1.6 is satisfied.
413.8.6 Arrangement of Live Load

413.8.6.1 When loading pattern is known, the equivalent
frame shall be analyzed for that load.
413.8.6.2 When live load is variable but does not exceed
three~fOt1J1hs of the dead load, or the nature of live load is
such that all panels wil! be loaded simultaneously, it shall be
permitted to assume that maximum factored moments occur
at all sections with full factored live load on entire slab
systelll.
413.8.6.3 For loading conditions other than those defined
in Section 413.8.6.2, it shall be permitted to assume that
maximum positive factored moment ncar midspan of a
panel occurs with three-fourths of the full factored live load
011 the panel and on alternate panels; and it shall be
permitted to assume that maximum negative factored
moment in the slab at a support occurs with three-rOll!ills of
the full live load on adjacent panels only.
413.8.6.4 Factored moments shall not be taken less than
those occurring with full factored live load on all panels.
413.8.7 Factored Moments
413.8.7.1 At interior supports, critical section for negative
factorcd moment in both column and middle strips shal! be
takcn at face of rectilinear supports, but nol greater than
O.17.')f! from ccnter of a columll.
413.8.7.2 At exterior supports provided with brackcts or
capitals, critical section for negative factored moment in the
span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance
Association of Structural Enguieers of tile Philippines
CHAPTER
Ph
PI
= gross area of section, 111m2

:::;: area of longitudinal tension rei nforcement in wall
2
segment, Illm
= area of effective longitudinal (ension reinforcement
Au
. Concrete
487
;:::
reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain

conditions
;::: minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to
gross concrete area
414.2 Scope
414.1 Nolalions
AI-'
At
or
414.2.1 Provisions
Section 414 shall apply for design of
walls subjected to ax ial load, with or without fl exure.
414.2.2 Cantilever reta inin g walls are des~gned according to
flexural design provisions or Section 410 with minimum
horizontal reinforccmcnt accordi ng to Sect ion 414 .4 .3.
f't'
in wall segment, mm as calcul ated by Eq. 414-8

= distance from extreme compression fiber 10 ne utral
axis , mOl
:::;: distance of extreme compression fiber to centroid
of longitudinal tension reinforcement, 111m
= modulus of elasticity of co ncrete. MPa
;: ; specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
414.3.1 Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any
J;.
= specified
lateral or olher loads to which they are subjected.
c
d
Ec
yield strength
reinforcement, MPa
of
nonprestresscd
= QveraJlthickncss of member. mm
II
fa
;::: moment of inertia of cracked section transformed

10 concrete, 1111114
Ir
;:: effective moment of inenia for co mputation of
::::: effective length factor
deflecti on.
1111n4
I,.
;::: vcrtical distance betwcen supports, mm
/".
M
M"
= honzollwl length of wall , rn III

= maximum unfactored moment due to service loads,
including PA effects
;::: max imum l110 melll in member at stage deOeclion is
Mrr
;::: moment cau!> in g nexural crack in g due
compUl cd
..1"
to applied
lateral and vertical loads
= no min al moment strength ttl sec ti on
::::: ma ximulll unfactored applied momcnt d ue to
service loads, not including PA effec ts
::: factored mOIllCIlI at section including PA effects
;::: moment al the mid hcight secti on of the wall due to
factored lateral and eccentric vertical loads
::: modular ratio of elasticity, but nOl.l ess than 6
~ E/E,
;::: nominal axiiIl load strength of wall designed by
Section 414.5
= unf"aclored axia l load at (he desig n (midhcigilt)
sect ion incl ueling effccts o f sclr-wcigtll
= factored axial load
= maximum deflection at or flear Illidhc ight due to
service loads, I11Ill
= denc.ctioll at midheighl of wall due to fHclmed
loads, mill
:::. strcllgtlH'cd uctioll factor. Sec Sec ti o n 409.4
;::: mtio of te ns io n re inforcement
M"
M ",
Mu
M"fI
II
P"
P,
Pt ,
.d..
A /(I"d)
414.3 General
414.3.2 Walls subject to axia l loads shall be des igned ill

accordance with Sections 4 14.3, 414.4 and e it her Sections
414.5,414.6 or 414.9.
414.3.3 Design for shear shall be in accordan ce with Section
411.11.
414.3.4 Unless demonstrated by a de tail ed analysis,
horizontal length of wall to be considered as effective for
each concentrated load sh<l ll not exceed center-to-ce nter
distance between load s. nor width of bearing plus rOllr limes
Ihe wall thickness .
414.3.5 Compression members built integrally wilh walls
shflll conform to Section 410.9.2.
414.3.6 Walls shall be flllchored to intersect ing elements

such as 1100rs or roofs; or 10 co lumns. pilasters. buttresses,
and intersecting walls; and to footings.
414.3.7 Quantity of" reinforcement ancl limits of thickness
required by Sections 414.4 an d 414.6 shall be pe rmitted to
be waived where structural ana lysis shows adequate strength
and stabi lity.
414.3.8 Transfer of force to fOOling at base of wall shall be
in accordance wi:h Section 4 15.9 .
414.4 Minimum Reinforce ment
4J4.4.1 Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement
shall he in accordance wit h Sections 414.4 .2 ,lIld 414.4.3
unless a greater ;1I110Ullt is required for shear by Sectiolls
~11 . 11.8 <111<1411.11.9.
Nelliona! Slructur(ll Code of ti""H: PI'ilippill(~s G E:cJition VolumH 1

lh
4-88
C H APTEI~
4 . Concreto
414.4.2 Minimum ratio of ve rti cal reinforcement area
10
gross concrete area, /1" shall be:

L
0 .0012 for deformed bars 11 0 1 larger than rn l6 mill with

spcci (jed yield strength not less than 4 15 MP,l; or
:I
2.
3.
0 .00 15 for other deformed bal's; or
414.5 Walls Design as Co mpression Members

Except as provided in Secl ion 414.6, walls subject 10 nxi.aJ
load or combined flex ure and axial load shaH be designc'; as
compression members in accordance with provisions of
Seclions 410.3, 410.4 , 410. 11, 410. 15. 410. 18, 4 14 .3 nnll
414.4 .
0.0012 for welded wire reinforcement (plain or

deform ed) nOt larger than MW 200 or MD200
414.6 Empirical Design Method
414.4.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement arc.1 10

gross concrete arc, P" shall be:
I.
0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than 16 mill

d i:l mcter with a specified yield streng th 110 1 less (han
415MPa;or
2.
0.002S for oth er defo rmed bars ; o r
J.
0.0020 for welded wire reinforcement (p lai n or

deformed) not larger than MW 200 o r MD200.
414.6.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section shaH he

permitted to be designed by the empirical provisions of
Seclion 414.6 if resultant of all factored load s is localed
within the middle third o f the overall thickness o f wa ll and
. 11 limits of Sections 41 4.3, 414.4 and 4 14 .6 are salis fled.
414.6.2 Design axial strength P, of a wall satisfyi ng
limitations of Section 414.6. 1 shall be com pUled by Liq .
414-1 unless designed in i.lccordance with Section 414.5.
,P,
414.4.4 Wall s morc than 250 111m th ick, except basement
walls, shall have reinforcement for eac h di rection placed in

two layers parallel with faces of wall in accordance with the
following:
1.
2.
One la yer co nsisting of not less than one half and not
more than two-thirds of total reinforce ment required for
each direct ion shall be placed not less than 50 mm or
more than one-third the thickness of wall from exterior
= o 55f'c A,[I-(;~~JJ
(4 14-1)
where shall correspond to compression~c()ntrolled sections

ill accordance with Sect ion 409.4.2.2 and effectivc length
faclol' k shall be:
For walls braced lOp and bo ttom against lat eral translati on
surface.
and
The ol her layer. co nsisting of the balance of required
I.
reinforcemen t in that directi on. s hall be placed not less

than 20 I11Ill o r more than one-third the thickn ess o f
2.
Res trained against rotarian at one Or both ends

(top, bOllom. or bOlh) .. . .......
Un restra ined against rotation at both ends
0.8
1.0
wall from imcrior surface .

For walls not braced against lalcrallranslali on
414.4.5 Vertical and hori zontal reinforceme nt shall not be

spaced farther '.P<lll than three times the wall thickness, lIor
f .. nher apall than 450 mill.
414.4.6 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by

lateral tie~ ir vClikal reinforcement area is not greater than
0.0 I times gross conc rete area. or where veliical
reinforc eme nt is not req uired as com prcssion re inforcemcl1t.
414.3.7 In additioll 10 the mini mum rein forcement requi red
hy Sectioll 4 14.4. 1. nOI less than two 1?l 1<1 111111 bars in walls
hav ing I Wo JaYl'rs o r rein forceme nt in hOlh directi o ll s ilnd
nnc J?Jl(1 111111 har 111 wa ll s having a single la yer of
1\.'inforn.'Illl'lll ill both direction shall he provided around
window, uoor. and similar s iz.ed o penings. S tich bars shilll
be ilndlOretl 10 develo p .r;. in {e ll sio n at the cnrncrs or the
open ings.
!\%OC i,l tIClfl of Structural
2.0
414.6.3 Minimum Thickness of W"Us Des igned by

Empirical Design Method
414.6.3.1 Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less thnn
I!2S the supported heigh t or length, whi chever i~; :;1\01(
nor less than 100 mill .
or
414.6.3.2 Thi ckness

ex terior ba:-;clllcnl walls ;'.
founda ti o ll walls s hall not he less than 190 Illill .
414.7 Non-Bearing \Alalls
or
414.7.1 Thickncs!-i
lion hearing walls sha ll 1101 hI' k ~: . I l!," ~
100 mill. or lIot less tllilll II~O the IC;I~t di ~.I: III ' f .'
members thai provi de 1;ltcral support.
En9111ecns of tile
PtliliP PU10S
CHAPTEn 4 . Concrete
where:
414.8 Walls as Grade Hearns
(4144)
414.8.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and

boltom
reinforcemclll as required for moment in accordance
with provisions of Sections 410.3 through 410.8. Design for

shear shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 411 .
M"llJ is Ihe maximum factored moment at the midheight

sect ion of Ihe wall due (0 lateral and eccentric venical loads ,
not including Pd effects and L1.. is:
414.8.2 Portiol1~ o[ grade beilm walls exposed above grade

shal l also meet rcqlJircmcl1ls of Section 4 14 .4.
414.9 Alternate Design of Slend er Walls
414.9.1 When nCltural tension controls the out-or-plane

design of a wall. th e requiremenls of Section 414.9 arc
conside red (0 satisfy Seclion 4 10.1 L .
414.9.2 Walls designed by the pro visions of Section 414.9
shall satisfy Sections 4 14.9.2. I ihrough 4 14.9.2.6.
414.9.2. 1 The wa ll panel shall be designed as a simply
suppol1cd. axi;lll y loaded me mber su bjected to an out-of
planc uniform later;11 load, with maximulll moments and
deflec tions occurring at midspan.
5M 1 2
/j,
414.9.2.2
489
lie
(414-5)
(0.75)48,1"
Mil shall be ohlaincd by iteration of denections, or by direct

calculati on using Eq. 414-6.
(4146)
where:
= E, (A
I"
E.
."
+ P)l . (d -c )' + I .. c"

f,.2d
3
(4 147)
and the value of E/l:.~, shalinOl be takcn less 111M 6.
The <.: ros s section shall be constant over the
height of th e panel.
414.8.4 The maximum dcncctiOIl 4,. due to service loads.

including P6 effects. shilllnol exceed 1,.1150.
The wall shall be tension-comrollcu.
(414 -2)
If Mf ,. maximum moment al midhcight of wal l due to service

loads. includi ng PLI effects, exceeds (2J3) M ." 1 , sh.1I be
calc ulated by Ell . 414 -8
wherc "'-I.. sha ll be oblilincd using the modulus (If fupture, };"
give n by 1:(1 . 40l)-t).
LI =2136 !!1,,-2 ~~ M"){6 -21J6 ) (4 14-8)
" ( M .-2IJM ..
'
..
414.9.2.5 Concentrated gravi ty loads applied 10 Ihe wall

above the design ncxural section shall be assumed to be
distributed over a width:
If M" docs not exceed (2I3) M .... 6 , shall be calculated by

Eq.414-IO
414.9.2.4
I.
Rcinforccmcill
sh~IJI
provide a dcsign strength
Eqllallo the bearing width, pillS (1 width all each side

that increases at a slope of 2 vertical 10 I horizontal
(414-9)
where:
down to the dcsign sec tion; but

2.
Not gre.Hcr Ilwn the spacing of the concclllrmcd loads:

and
3.
Docs not extcnd beyond the edges of the wall pancl.
414.9.2.6 Venical stresses P,/A g at the midhcighl section

shall nnt exceed O.O(y...
r,l/
(41410)
'" = 5M), ~_
" 48.1..,
(414-11)
I!'J
"
= 5M
48 E , 1,
I,.r sll<l ll be c;dcu lalcd by Eq . 4 14-7 and Mil shill l be oblaincd

hy iteration of defl ecti ons.
414.9.3 The design moment strengt h (k\1" fOf ro mhincd

fl ex ure and a:dal loads at the midhcighl s hall he
(4 14-3)
Nn!IOrl r.l l StlllctlJrnl Code of ti lO P ililippinw;
(jIl l
E:dition VOllll'lle '1
490
CHAPTER
. Concre te
,"'-.; -',.:.
415.5.2 Maximum factored moment for 'an isolated footing

shall be computcd as prescribed in Sec ti on 4 15.4.1 al critical
seclions located as follows:
'"
-."/- S., ., ......
.;
. ,R, '.
"
."
I,
AI f(lce of colum n, pedestal , or wall, for footings

suppol1ing a concrete column, pedestal, or wall ;
415.1 Notations
A,t'
= gross area of section, mm
(/"
: ;.
2.
2
diameter of pile. il l footing base, mm

ralio of long side to shon side of footin g
3.
Halrway between middle ami edge of wall, for footings

suppo rting a maso nry wall;
Halfway bet wee n facc of column all(; .edge of steel base
pl'HC, for footi ngs suppo l1 ing a col ldlHl with steel base
pl:.uc.
415.2S<o1'o
415.2.1 Provisions or Section 415 shall 'Ippl y for des ign of

isolmcd fOOlings and. where applicable. to combined
415.5.3 In one-way footings and two-way squarc foolin?.:; ,

reinforcement shall be disltibu(cd unifonnly across entire
widt h of fooling.
foot ings and nwls.

415.2.2 Addit ional requirements for design of co mbined
415.5.4 In l WO-WHY rectangu lar footi ngs, reinforcement

shall be distributed as follows :
foo tings and Illats are gi veil in Section 4/5.11.

415.5.4.1 Reinforceme nt in lon g direction shall
di stributed uniforml y across cmire width of footing.
415.3 Loads and Reactions

415.3.1 Footin gs shall be proportioned to resist th e factored
loads and induced reactions, in accordan ce wit h the
appropriate design req uiremen ts of this code and as
provided in thi s section.
415.3.2 Base area of foot ing or !lumber <lllti arra ngeme nt of
piles shall be determined from unfaclOrcd forces and
moments tra nsmitted by fooling to soil or piles and
p e r[))i ~s ihl e soi l pressure or permiss ible pile. IcapClcilY
selected th rough principles of soil mechan ics.
415.3.3 foor footings on pi les. co mputatio ns for 1ll0llh!nts
and shears Ill:ty be based on the assumpt ion thai the reaction
from any pile is cOll cel1 trmcd at pile center.
be
415.5.4.2 For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of

the total reinforcement y,A, given by Eq . 415-1 shall be
distributed uniformly over a band width (centered on
centerline of column o r pedeslrI l) equal to the length of sll' dt
side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement requi red
in
short
direction , ( I - )',)A" shall be distributed
uniform ly outside center band width of foo ting.
Rcillforccmem in
" A ," __l_,a_"_d_w_id_t_h_
TOlal ReinforcemclII
in short direction
(415- 1)
(ji+ I )
where Pis ratio of long to short sides of fOOling.
415.4 Footings Su pporti ng Circul ar or Rcgulur Polygo nShap ed Colu mn s or Pedcs tal s
415.6 Shear in Foo tin gs
Fo r locati on of cri tical sections for moment, shear <lll d

developmen t or reinforcemelll in footi ngs. it shaH be
permillco to trCaI circular or regular polygon-s haped
concrete col umn s or pcdcstHb as sq uare me mbers with til\!
41 5.6.1 Shear strength in footings shall be in accn nl ance

with Section 4 11.1] .
:;amc arCi!.
415.5 Moment in Footings
415.6.2 Locali on of crilical sec tion for shear in 'Ic{:{ml :!'ce

wi th Section 41 1 sh.a ll be measured from face or (:ok!lJ lI.
pedesta l or wall, for footings support in g a co lumn , pedestal
Of wall. ro r foo lings suppon ing a colullln or pedestal wilh
steel base pl <lle:-. the criti cal secti on shall be measured fro m
loca tion de li ned in Secti on 4 15 .5.2, Itcm 3.
4]5.5.1 EX lerna l moment o n an y seclio n of a foo ting shall
be determined by passing a vertical planc through the

(oming and com puti ng the moment of the rorces acting over
the cn ti re ;lfca of fo()( ing o n olle ~ idc of tl1 ,11 vertical JlI;Jnl~.
/l..$so cintlon of Stru ctll r111
4J5.6.3 Where the disla nce hctwecll the axis of an y p;~'~ to

the axis of the column is Jllore th an t WO times the di~wl1ce
between the to p or th e pile ca p and til e top of !Il(' pi!; , {ile
pile cap shall sati sfy Sections 4 11 , 13 <Inti 415J).'~. (Jl her pile
ca ps shaH satisfy either Section 427, or both Sections
E n911"lC:CJS
of Ihn Phili ppines
CHAPTEfl 4 - Concrete
411.13 and 415.6.4. If Section 427 is used, the effective

concrete compression strength of the struts, fw shall be
determined using Section 427.3.2.2, Item 2.
4-91
bearing strength for either surface as given by Section

410.18.
415.9.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors
415.6.4 Computation of shear on any section through a

footing supported on piles shall be in accordance with
between supported and supporting members shall be

adequate (0 transfer:
Sections 415.6.4.1,415.6.4.2, and 415.6.4.3:
I.
415.6.4.1 Entire re~iction from any pile whose center is

located dl'i/J2 or' 'more' outside the section shall be
considered as producing shear on that section.
All compressive force that exceeds concrete bearing

strength of either member; and
2.
Any computed tensile force across interface.
415.6.4.2 Reaction from any pile whose center is located

dpil )2 or more inside the section shall be considered as
producing no shear in that section.

415.6.4.3 For intennediate positions of pile center, the
portion of the pi Ie reaction to be considered (IS producing
shear on the section shall be based 011 straight-line

interpolation between full value at dp ",.12 outside the section
and zero value at dpi /,J2 inside the section.
415.7 Development of Reinforcement in F()otings
415.7.1 Development of reinforcement in footings shall be
in accordance with Section 412.
In addition, reinforcement, dowels or mechanical

connectors shaH satisfy Section 415.9.2 or 415.9.3.
415.9.1.3 If calculated moments are transferred to
supporting pedestal or footing, reinforcement, dowels or
mechanical connectors shall be adequate to satisfy Section
412.18.
415.9.1.4 Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting
pedestal or footing in accordance with shear-friction

provisions of Section 411.8 or by other appropriate means.
In cast-in-place construction, reinforcement

required to satisfy Section 415.9.1 shall be provided either
by extending longitudinal bars into supporting pedestal or
footing, or by dowels.
415.9.2
415.7.2 Calculated tellsion or compre~sion in reinforcement

at each section shaH be developed on each Side of that
section by embedment length, hook tension only or
mechanical device, or combinations thereof.
415_9.2.1 For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area of

reinforcement across interface shail not be less than
O.005A g , where Ag is the gross area of SUppo!1cd member.
415.7.3 Critical sections for development of reinforcement
415.9.2.2 For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement

across interface shall not be less than minimum vertical
reinforcement given in Section 414.4.2.
shall be assullled at the sallle locations as defined III Section
415.5.2 for maximum factored moment, and at all other
vertical pJanes where changes of section or reinforcement

occur. See also Section 412.11.6.
415.8 Minimum Footing Depth
Depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be

less than 150 mill for footings on soil, or not less than 300
mm for footings on piles.
415.9 Transfer of Forc{~ at Base of Column, \Vall or
Reinforcement Pedestal
415.9.1 Forces and moments at base of column, wall, ill'
pedestal shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or

footing by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement,
dowels, and mechanical connectors.
415.9.1.1 Bearing 011 concrete at contact surface between
supported and supporting l11ember shall not exceed concrete
415.9.2.3 At footings, fM2 n1ln and [1J58 mill longitudinal
bars, in compression only, may be lap spliced with dowels

to provide reinforcement required to satisfy Section 415.9.1.
Dowels shall not be larger than [1]32 mm bar and shall
extend into supported member a distance not less than the
larger of ide> of fil42 mOl or ru58 mm bars or the splice length
of the dowels, whichever is greater, and into the footing a
distance not less than the development length, ide of the
dowels.
415.9.2.4 If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in
cas.-in-place construction, connection shall conform to
Sections 415.9.1 and 415.9.3.
415.9.3 In precast construction, anchor bolts or suitable
mechanical connectors shall be permitted for satisfying

Section 4! 5.9.1. Anchor bolts shall be designed in
accordance with Scclion 42~.
Nnlionili Structural Code of tl'1(-; Philippines Gill Edition Volume 1
4 92
415.9.3.1 Connection between precast columns Or pedestals
und supporting members shall meel Ihe rcquircmcnls of

Section 416.6.1.3 , Item I.
415;9.3.2 Connection between precast walls iJnd supporting

members shall meet the rcquircIllcllts of Scclioll 4 16.6. 1.3,
It ems 2 and 3.
416.1 Notations
415.9.3.3 Anchor bolts and mechanic<I! COllllectors sh"U be

designed lO reach their design streng!!. i Jrior to C:lIlchorugc
A,
failure or failure of surro unding concrete. Anchor bohs shall
he designed in accordance with Section 423.
415.10 Sloped or Stepped Footings
415.10.1 In sloped or stepped footings, angle of slope or
depth and location of steps shall be such Ihal design
rcquircmcnls arc satislicd al every section. (Sec also Section
412.11.6).
415.10.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed
be constructcd to ensu re action <IS a unit.
(I S
n unit
ShOll!
415.11 Combined Footings and Mats
415.11.1 Footings supponi ng Illore thall aile column.

pedestal. or wall (combincd footings or mil ts) sha ll be
propol1ioned to resist the factored loads and induced
reactions, in accordance with appropriate design
rcquirements of lIlis codc.
415.11.2 The Direct Des ign Method of Section 411 shall

1101 be used for design of cOlllbincd footings and milts.
415.11.3 Distribution of soi l pres!'>urc ti nder t:o mhilled
footings and mats shall be consistel1t with properties of the
soil and the structure <Ind with established principles of soil
Illcchani<.:s.
415.11.4 Minimum reinforcing steel illllonprcstrcsseu llIilt

foundations shall meet the requirements or Sectioll 407. 13.2
ill each principill directi oll. Mt.lximull1 sp.tdng shall 1I0t
exceed 450 mill.
415.121)lai:o Concrete Pedestals and
F ()O lill ~s
gross arC'l of column, mill

= clear span, n1l11
416.2 Sco pe
416.2. 1 All provisi ons 01" this code not speei ricall y I~ .~.l :rd,",!
and not in conniet with the pro visions of Section .11(1 . ..;k-'!
apply to structures incorporating precast concrete :-.liU..:lUHii
mel1l bers.
416.3 Gene ral
416.3. 1 Design of prectlst members and connections shall

include loading (ltld rcslraim conditio ns from initi ,,1
fabri cat ion to end use in the Slrucrure, including fo rm
rcm ovill , storage. Inlnsportatioll lind erection.
416 .3.2 When precast members are incorpol'fur.d ill!o a

struc tural sys tem. the forces and deformations {lI., ui J"i lifl i!l
;lnd adjace nt 10 cOllnections shall be included in Iht dcsign.
4 J6.3.3 Tolcr'lIlccs for both precast mcmbl'r~ and
illlcrf<lcing mcmbers shall be specified. Design of" pr(' ca~i
members ilild cnnl1~ctions :-;Imll include Ihe effecls of (hese
IOlen.lI1("cs.
416,3.4 In addition 10 the stand,lnl rcqui rclll!.: nts for
(Irawings and SPCl'ifil:!tioll!' in Section !OO.1.2. (I) <lne! (2):.
Ihe i"ollmving shall be included ill either lh~ COll1raci
documcnts or SllOP drawings:
I.
Details of reillf"orcc mcm, inserts and lifting devices

required to resist lemporary loads from handline.
stor~lge . Iransport .llion and erection;
1.
Required conc rele strc ngth at st.lle.d ages or

consl nlctiOiI.
~1;If!es
of
4 J 6.4 Dis tribllti on 01' Forces among MClllhcrs
Sec Section 422.

4 16.4. 1 Distributioll of forl:ts Ihm arc pl~ rpcndicul;\r 10 Ih e.
pi ail e or rlll'.Jl1hcrs shall he c...;tahli shcd by <llwlysi:-; Ill" hy (cst.
416.4.2 \Vhcrc the system hdliIVior requires in pl;HlI' furcC",
he lfal1SrclTcd hl' tween Ihe IHemhe rs of a prcca:.1 IiOtlf w
10
wall sys tem . the 1()llowing :-.l1all appl y:
416.4.2. 1 In-plane force paths shall be continu Dus through
2.
Precast wall panels shall have a minimum of two ties

per panel, wit h a nomi nal tensile strength not less than
44 kN per tic ;
3.
When design forces result ill no tension at th e base, the

lies requ ired by Sec tio n 416.6.1.3. Ite111 2. shall be
pcrmi ll ed 10 be anchored illlo an approp ri ate ly
rein forced concrete noor slab 011 grade.
Doth connections and members.
4J6.4.2.2 Where tension forces occur, a cont inuous paLh of

slcel or steel reinforcement shall be provided.
416.5 Member Design
416.5.1 In one-way precast /1001' an d roof' slabs and in oncway precast, prestressed wall panels, all no! wider than 3.7
Ill, and where members arc ' not mec hani cally co nnected 10
cause restraint ill the transverse di recti on, the sh rinkage and
tempcrcuure reinforce ment requirement s o f Section 407 . 13
in the direct io n normal to the flexural reinforce ll1elll shall be
pcnni ued 10 be waived. This waiver shall not apply to
members which require reinforcement to resist transverse
fle xural stresses.
416.5.2 For precast. nonpreslrcssed wall s the reinforcement
shall be designed in accorda nce wilh the provisions of
Sections 410 or414 . exce pt that the area
horizontal and
vert ical reinforcem ent 511<111 eac h be not less than O.OO IA!:,
where Ag is the gross cross-sec tional area o f the wall panel.
Spacing of reinforce men t shall not exceed 5 limes the wall
thickness nOr 750 111m for interior wall s or 450 mm for
ex terior wall s.
or
416.6 Structural 1ntegrity

416.6.1 Except where the provis ions of Sc<.:tion 416.6.2
govern, the minimum provisions of Sections 4 16.6. 1.1
through 4 16.6.1.4 for slru clUrai integrity shall app ly to al l
precast cO ll crete struc tures:
41 6.6. 1.1 Longitudinal and transverse li es required by

Seclion 407. 14 .3 shall connect members 10 a latera l load
resistin g system.
416.6.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof
493
416.6.1.4 Connection details that rely solely on friction

ca used by gravilY loads sha ll nOI be used.
416.6.2 Por precasiconcrete bearing wall structures three or
more stori es in height, the following minimum provisions
shall apply:
416.6.2.1 Longitud inal and tran sversc lies shall bc provided
in floor and roof sys tems to provide a nominal strength of
22 kN/m of widlh or lenglh. Tics shall be provided ove r
interior wall supports and between members and exterior
walls. Tics shall be positi oned in or within 600 mm of the
plane of the fl oor or roof systcm.
416.6.2.2 Longitudinal lies parallcl 10 floor or roof s lab
spans shall be spaced not more Ihan 3 m on ce nters.
Provisions shall be made to transfer forces around openings.
416.6.2.3 Transverse ti es perpendicular to floor or roof sl ab
spans shall be spaced not greater than the bealing wall
spaci ng.
416.6.2.4 Ties around the perimeter of each Ooor and roof,
wi thin 1.2 III of the edge, shall prov ide a nominal strength in
tension nOllcss Ih an 70 kN .
416.6.2.5 Vcn ical tens io n lies s hall be provided in all walls
and shall be continuous over thc height o f the bu ildin g.
They sha ll prov ide a nominal tensi le stren gth not less than
44 kN per horizontal meIer of wa ll. Not less than two lies
shall be provided fo r cilch precasl pallci.
416.7 Connection and Bearing Design
diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and those

members being laterall y suppol1ed shall have a nominal
tens ile strength capable of resisting not less than 4.4 kN/m.
416.7.1 Forces sha1l be permitted to be tran sferred between

members by grouted joints, shear keys, mechanical
COll nectors, reinforcing stee l co nnections, reinfo rced topping
or a co mbination of these means .
416.6.1.3 Ve rti c:!! tension tic req ui re ments o f Section

407. 14.3 shall appl y 10 all ve ni cal struchl r;ll mc mbcrs,
('xeepl cladding, ill UJ slwll be ac hi eved by prov id ing
co~, nccliol1 s .11 horiz.ontal joints in <lL:cordan ce with the
followi ng:
416.7.1.1 The adequacy of connectio ns to transfer forces

between members shall he detennined by analysis or by Lest.
Where shear is Ihe primary res ult of imposed loading. it
sha ll be permiHed to lise the pro vis io ns o f Sect ion 41 1.8 as
applicable.
I.
Precast
nllul1lllS
s hall have
i!
nornimd strength in
416.7.1.2 When designing;! co nnection using materials with
tension nol less than I.4Ag , in N. For columns with a

larger cross sec tion tha n required by cOlIsiiJer:llioll of
different structura l properties. their relali vc st iffnesscs,
loading.
st rength s and ductili ties s hall be co ns idered.
reduced effective area AG based on (fOSS

btll not less Ih an olle-hal f the (olal arc.l.
s hall be permitt ed:
seclioll
It
requirl~ d
N~ltiona l Slru c(ufnl Co de or th e PIli iiPPll18S b!1l Edition VOl!lnl O '1
4 94
CHAPTER 4 Concrete
416.7.2 Dearing for precast floor and roof members on

si mple support s shall satisfy the following :
416.7.2.1 The allowable bearing stress at the cont act surface
between supported and slippol1ing members and between
any intermediate bearing elements shall not exceed the
bearing strength for both su rface .mil the bearing elemen t.
Concrete bearin g strength sha ll be: as given in Section
416.9 Marking and Idenlificalion

416.9.1 Each precas t member shall be marked 10 indicate
its location tint! ori en tati on ill the sln_cture and date of
manufactu re.
410.18.
416.9.2 Ident ification marks shall cOITespond to placing

drawings.
416.7.2.2 Unless shown by test or analysis that pcrfonnance

will not be impaired, the following minimum requirements
shall be met:
416.10 Handling
I.
Each member and its supporting system shall ha ve

design dimensions selected so that, after consideration
of tolerances, the di stance from the edge of the support
to the end o f the precast member in the direction o f the
span is at least 111 80 of the clear span, I, but not less

than:
For solid or holl ow-core slabs ..
For beams or stemmed members ... .
2.
50mm
75 mm
Bearing pads at unarmored edges shall be se t back a
minimum of 13 111m from the face of the support. or at

least the chamfer dimension at chamfered edges.
416.7.2.3 The requirements of Secti on 412. 12.1 shall not
a pply to the posi tive bending moment reinforcement for
s tatically delermi nale precas t members. but at least oncthird of such reinforcemen t shall extend 10 the ccn tcr of the
bearing length.
416.8 lIems Embedded After Concr.le Placement
416.8.1 When appro ved by the engi neer, embedded items
s uch as dowels or inserts that either protrude from the
concrete or rem ai n exposed for inspecli o n shall be permitted
to be embedded while the concre te is in a plastic state
provided that:
416.10.1 Member design shall cOllsider forces an d

di stortion s during cu ring, stripping. storage, transportation
and erection so that precast members are not overstressed or
otherwise damaged .
416.10~2 Duri ng erection, precast memhcrs and st ructures
shall be adequately suppo rted and braced to ensure proper
alignment and Slmctural integrit y until pe nnanenl
connections are completed.
416.11 Strenglh Evaluation of Precast Conslruction

416.11.1 A precast elemen t to be made compositc wi th c'ls l
inplace concrete shaH be pcrmitted to be tested in fle xure a~,
a preenst element alone in accordance with the [oll owing:
416.11.1.1 Test loads shall be applied only whell
calculations indicate Ihe isolated precast element will not be
critical in compression or buckling.
416.11.1.2 The test load shall be th at load whi ch, when
applied to the precast me mber alone. induces Ihe same lol ;,!
force in the te nsion rei nforcement as would be induced hy
loading the composite mem ber with th e test load required by
Section 420.4 .2.
416,11.2 The provisions of Section 420.6 shall be th e basi;
element.
rejiwJi on of the
416.8.1.1 Embedded items are not required to be hooked or

tied to reinforcement within the concrete.
416.8.1.2 Embedded items are maintained in th e correct
position while the concrete remain s plasti c.
416.8.1.3 The concrete is properl y consolidated around the
embedded item.
Associ ation of Structura l Eng ineers of tile Pl1i!ippines
495
417.3.4 In s trength co mpu tation s or com pos ite me mbers, no

distin ction shall be Ill ude betwee n ~ h o l'cd and unshored
members.
417.3.5 All elemenl s shall be designed 10 suppon all loads

introduced prio r 10 full develo pment o f design strength of
composite me mbers.
417.1 Notations
A,
::: area of conlnel surface bei ng ili vestiglllcd for

hori zon lal shear, Illn/
::: area of tics wi thi n a d ista nce s, 111 m 2
::: width of cross section at comae ! sur face being
in vestigated for hori zolllal shear, mill

= distance from ex treme co mpress ion nbcr (0
centroid of tension rein fo rce ment for entire
composite section, mill
= overall thi ckn ess of composite members, mm
::: spacing of ties measured along the longi tudi nal
p"
ax is of Ihe member, 111111

::: nominal hOJizont a) shear strength
::: facto red shear force a l sec tion
:: correction factor re lated to uni t weight of concrete
::: ralio of tic rcinforccmc ni area (0 a rea o f co/uac!
sUlface
p,.
417.3.6 Rei nforcement shall be provided as requ ired to

contro l crack ing and to prevent separation o f indiv idua l
clements of composi te members.
417.3.7 Compos it e members shall meet requ irement s for
control of denection s in acc ordance with Section 409. 6 .5.
417.4 Shoring
Whe n used, sholing shall not be re moved until supported
cle ments have developed design properties requi red to
suppan all loads and limit defl ections and cracking at time
of shori ng remo val.
417.5 Vedical Shear Strength
=~
417.5.1 When an entire composite member is assumed to

resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with
requiremcnts of Sccti on 411 as for a monolithicall y cast
membcr o f the same cross-scctional sha pe.
b,.s
;;: strength-redu cti on factor. Sec Section 409 .4
417.2 Scope
417.2.1 Provisions of Section 4 17 shall app ly for design of
co mpos ite conaete flexura l members defined as precast or
casl-in-p lace concrete clcmelHs or both consllucted in
separate placemell ts but $0 intercon nec ted thm ,I II c leme nts
respond 10 loads as a unit.
417.2.2 All provision s of this code shall nppJy 10 compos ite
concrete fl e xural ll1 e mlH~ r s, except as specifi cally modi fied
in thi s Secti on.
417.5.2 Shear reinforcement sha ll be fully anc hored into

interconnected elements in accordance with Section 412.14.
41 7 .5.3 Ex tended and a nc hored shear reinrorce mem shall
be pCJ'ln itlcd 10 be incl udcd as lies for ho ri zon(a l shear.
417.6 Horizontal Shear Strength

417.6.1 in a compo:> ite member, full transfer of horizollwl
shear forces shall be assured at contac t surfaces of
intercon nected e lements.
417.3 General
417.3.1 The usc of an e ntire composite member or portio ns
thereo r for resistin g shciIf illld mo me nt s ha ll be permitted .
417.3.2 Individual cJerlH.:llt s shall he
critical stages or loading.
in vcs tigat(~d
for all
417.6.2 For the prov isions of 4 17.6, d shall be taken as the

distance from ext re me co mpress io n fi ber ror enure
co mpos it e sec tio n 10 cent ro id or prcslressed and
nonpresll'csscd longilll di na l tension rcinforccment, if any,
but need 110t be ta ke n less than (l .BOh for prestressed
concrete members.
417.3.3 If the s pc(.; ificd stre ngth . unit we ight or other

pro pcI1ics of lhe va ri olls dements are d ilTc rcll l, propert ies of
the individual clelllc llls or the mos t criti cal va lues sh:1I 1 he
used in dc."ign.
National Structural Code of HIe Pililippin os G!1l Edition Volllrll e 1
496
CHAPTER 4 . Conerele
417.6.3 Unless calculated in accorda nce with Seclion

417.6.4. design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear
shall be based on
(4 17- 1)
where Vol is factored shear force a[ secti on considered and

V II}, is nominal hori zontal shear strength in acco rd ance with
Ihe foll owin g:
417.6.3.1 Where C('l1~:ICt surfaces arc clear, free of lai tancc
an d intemionall y roughened, shear strength V,III shall not be
take n grea ter tha n O.55b,d, in newtons.
417.7 T ics ror Hori zont al Shea r

417.7.1 When ties arc provided to transfer horizontal she;~;-.
tie area shall not be less than that requ ired by Sec!i\!q
4 11 .6.5.3 and tic spacing shall not exceed four times th:'
Icas t dime ns ion or supportcd clement. or 600 mm.
417.7.2 Tics for hori zo lllal shea r shall consist of single bars
or wire, mUltiple leg stirrups. or vCrli callcgs of welded v,<le
fabri c (plain or de formed).
41 7.7.3 All lies shall be fu ll y anchored into interconnected
clcments in accordance with Scction 4 12. 14 ,
417.6.3.2 Where minimum ties are provided in accordan ce

wilh Section 417.7 and contact surfaces are clean and free of
laitance, but not intentionally roughened, shear strength Vnh
shall not be taken greater than O.55b,.d. in newtons.
417.6.3.3 Where min imum ties are provided in accordance
wit h Section 417.7 and contact surfaces arc clean, free of
lai l3nce. and int entionally roughened to a fu ll ampl itude of
app rox imately 5 mm, shear strength Villi shall be taken equal
10 ( 1,8 + O.6pJ,)J.b,d in newlon" but not greater th an
3.Sb,d, in newlons. Values for ..l in Seelion 411.8.4 .3 shall
apply, and P. is A.I(b,s).
417.6.3.4 Wherc facto red shear force VII at sectio n
considered exceeds 3.5I>"d, des ign for horizo ntal shear
shall be in accordance wit h Section 411 .8.4.
417.6.3.5 Where detemlining nominal horizontal shear
st rength over prestressed concrete elements. d shall be as
defined or 0.8h, whichever is greater.
41 7.6.4 A s an alternative (0 Section 417.6.3. hori1.oJlt;.tI
shear shall be permiLled (0 be detcnni ned by compu ti ng the
ac tual change in compressive or tensile fo rce in any
segment. and prov isions shall be made to tra nsfer th at fo rce
as hori zo nt al shear to the support in g elemen t. The fac tored
hori zo nt al shear force shall not exceed hori zont al shear
strength V"h as givcn in Secti ons 417.6.3. J throu gh
417 .6.3 .4 wh ere area of contact slIrfnce A(' shall be
substituted fo r b,ll.
417.6.4.1 When tics provided to resist horiwl1laJ shear are
designed 10 satisfy Section 417.6.3, the rieMarca-loMt ie M
spacing ralio along Ihe l;lCJ;lber shall approxim.ucly reflect
the distrihuli oll of s hear forces in tile member.
417.6.5 Where tension exists across any contact surface
betwecn intcrcon nected clements. shear transfer by contact
may be assulllcu only when minimum tics arc provided in

:Jccordancc with Section 417.7 .
Association of S tr uctural Englr1eers of the Phil ir>Plnes
N..
p$
1',
Pw
418.1 Notalions
:::: urea of that pm1 of cross secti on between flexural

~~~~~()Il face and center of gravity of gross section,
= larger gross cross-sec tional arCH or the slab-beam

strips of the two ol1hogo nnl equiva lent frames
intersecting al <I co lumn of a two-way slab, 1n1ll 2

::;: area of prestressed reinforcement in tell sion lone.
fJ,
Ifl
A.
111m2
A,
A;
b
D
d
::;: area of nonprcstressed tension reinforcement, 111m2

::;: area of compressio n reinforcement, mm 2
= width of compression face of member, mill
:::: dead loads or related internal moment s and forces
::::: distance from ex treme compression fiber to
ce nt roid of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,
min
:::: distance from extreme. compression fiber to
centroid of co mpression reinforcement, mm
:::: distance from extreme com pression fiber to

centroid of prestressed reinforcelnc lll, mm
;:: basc of NapicJian logarithms
;:: spccified comprcss ive strength of concre te, MPa
;:;: square root of spec ifi ed compressive strengt h of
co ncrete, MPa
F,,;
;:: compress ive strengt h of concrete ilt lime of initial
J,IU
prestress, MPa
;:: avcmge co mpress ive stress in con cretc duc (0
effective prestress force only (aner allowance for
all prestress losses). MPa
::: stress in prestressed rcinforcclIlclll at nomina l
st re ngth, MPa
;:: specified tensile strength of prestressing tc ndons ,
/py
;:;:
1,.
::: modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa

;:: effective st ress in prestressed reinforcement (after
/,,,
J,u
J.1
P
p'
497
tensile force in concrete due to unfactorc.d dead

load plus live load (D + L)
prestressing tendon force aljack ing end
= prestressing tendo n force at any point x
;:: factored
pos t-te nsioned tendon force at the
anchorage device
;:: total angular change of prestressing tCllu on profile
in rildians from te ndon jacking end 10 ,IllY poill! x
= factor defined in Sec tion 410.3.7.3
;:: factor for type o f prestressing tcndon .
= 0.55 for .!"//,,, not less than 0.80
= 0.40 for /,,,I/,," not less than 0.85
= 0.28 for /,,,11,,,, not less than 0.90
= correction faclor rclated 10 un it weight of conc rete
(See Sect ion 411 .8.4.3)
= curvature friction coefficient
= ratio of nonprcstressed tension reinforcemcnt
= A,!{bd)
=. ratio of com pression reinforcement
::0:
= A, "/(bd)
PI'
= ratio of prestressed reinforccment
= A,,/(bdp )
= s{rcngth~rcductioll factor. See Section 409.4
= pl/F,
OJ
OJ'
WI'
=
00 .... WI""
pI/F,
Pr/p/j',
(j)' ". ;:: reinforcemc nt indices for flanged sections
compu tcd as for (U, Uf.. and oJ except that b sh'lll
be the web width, and reinforcement area sha ll be
thaI req uired to develop compressive stre ngth of
web on ly
418.2 Scope
418.2.1 Provisions of this Sec lion sha ll apply 10 members
prestres sed wi th wire. strands or bars conrormi ng to
provisio ns for prestressing tcndo ns in Section 403,6.6.
MPa
specified yield strength of prestressi ng tendons,
MPa
f(~,
1,.
"
II
I,
11
allowance for a ll prestress losses), MPa

= specified
yield strength
of nonpreslrcsscd
rcinforcement, MPil
;:: ove rall dimcns ion of me m ber ill direction of action
co nsidered, 111111
= wobble fri ction coellicient per 111 III of prcs trc.~s ing
tendon
;:: length of prestressing tendon clement from jacking
end to any point x. m. See Eqs. 4 18- 1 ,lIld 4 18-2
= Ji ve IOi.1ds or rci;l1ed internal moment s and forces
= number of Illonoslrand anchorage devices in . 1
418.2.2 AI! provisions of this code not specifically

excl uded, anc! not in conflict with provisions of thi s Section,
shall apply to prestressed concrete.
418.2.3 The fo llowin g provisions or this code shal l not
it pply to prcstressed concrete, ext'cpt as specifically noted:

Secti ons 407.7.5. 408.5 . 408.11.2 through 408 . 11 .4. 408.12,
4 10 .4.2 and 410.4.0 , 410.6 . 410.7, 410. 10. 1. 410. 10 .2. 4JJ .
41 4 .4 . 414.6 and 414.7.
group
National Siruct urni Cod,,; of th e PililiPPU18S G!h Edition V()lurnC 1
4-98
CHAI'TE" 4 - Concrete
418.3 Gelleral
418.3.1
Prestressed members shall meet the strength
requirements specified in this code.
418.4.3 Prestressed flexural members shall be classified as

Class U, Class T, or Class C based on h' the computed
extreme fiber stress in tension in the pre-compressed tensile
zone calculated at service loads, as follows:
I.
Class U: J, S O.62Jl
2.
Class T: 0.62J];' <f,:o I.OJ];
3.
Class C:f, > 1.0J];
418.3.2 Design of prestressed members shall be based on

strength and on behavior at service conditions at all siages
that may be critical during the life of the structure 1'1'0111 the
time prestress is first applied.
418.3.3 Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be
Prestressed two-way slab systems shall be designed as Class
considered in design.
U with!, :0 O.SOJ];.
418.3.4 Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining
construction of elastic and plastic deformations, deflections,

changes in length and rotations due to prestressing. Effects
of temperature and shrinkage shall also be included.
418.3.5 Possibility of buckling in a member between points
where concrete and prestressing tendons are in contact and
of buckling in thin webs and flanges shall be considered.
418.3.6 In computing section properties prior to bonding of
prestressing tendons, effect of loss of area due to open ducts

shall be considered.
418.3.7 The serviceability requirements for each class are
summarized in Table 418-1. For comparison, Table 418-1
also shows corresponding requirements for nonprestressed

members.
418.4 Design Assumptions
The serviceability requirements for each class are

summarized in Table 418-2. For comparison, Table 418-2
also shows conesponding requirements for nonprestressed
members.
418.4.4 For Class U and Class T flexural members, stresses
at service loads shall be permitted to be calculated using the
uncracked section. For Class C flexural members, stresses aJ
service loads shall be calculated using the cracked
transformed section.
418.4.5 Deflections of prestressed flexural members shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 409.6.
418.5 Permissible Stresses in Concrete - Flexural
Members
418.5.1 Stresses in concrete immediately aftcr prestress
418.4.1 Strength design of prestressed members for flexure
and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in
transfer (before timc-dependent prestrcss losses):

I.
Section 410.3, except that Section 410.3.4 shall apply only
to reinforcement conforming to Section 403.6.3.

418.4.2 For investigation of stresses at transfer of prestress,
at service loads, and at cracking loads, straight-line theory
shall be lIsed with the following assumptions:
Extreme fiber slress in compression

permitted in (2) shall not exceed
except
a:;
0.60/,,,
2. Extreme fiber stress in compression at ends of simply

0.70//
supported members shall not exceed...
3.
Where computed concrete tensile strength,;;,
O.5J);'~ at ends of simply
Jl,
other
0.25
load range.
reinforcement shall be provided in the tensile 7-01':,' iii

resist the total tensile force in concrete computed \vifll
the assumption of an uncracked section.
locations,
members, c'
418.4.2.1 Strains vary linearly with depth through entire
418.4.2.2 At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
at
supported
excccd~;
additional
bop-; '"
CHAPTER 4 - Conerole
418.5.2 For Class U and Class

members, stresses in co nc rete at
uncracked sect ion properties, and
prestress losses shall not exceed the
T prestressed n ex u!"al
service loads based on
after allowance for all
foll ow ing:
I. Extreme fiber stress in compression due

plus sustained loads. . . . . . . . .
2.
prestress
. ... ... 0.45/".
10
418.6 Permissible Stress in Prestressing Tendons

418,6.1 Tensile stress in prestressing tendons shall not
exceed the following:
I.
2.
that performance will not be impaired .
Due La prestressin g tendon j acking force
.. _. O.94J;,),
but 110t greater than the lesser of 0 .80 J"u and the
maximum va lue recomme nded by manufacturer of
prestressing te ndons or anchorage dev ices.
Extre me fiber stress in compression due to prestress

plu s to tal load .. ...
. . . . . . ..
.. .. 0.60/".
418.5.3 Permissible stresses in concrete of Secti ons 418.5.1

and 418.5.2 may be exceeded if shown by lest or analysis
499
3.
. .0.82/py
Immediately afte r prestress transfer .. .

but not greate r than ........ _....... _...... .
P os t ~ tensioning
tendons.
at
... 0.74/,"
anchorage
devices
and couplers, immediately after force transfer. , ,.70J,,,,
418.5.4 For Class C prestressed fl ex ural members not
su bject
10
fatigue or
lO
aggressive exposure, the spacing of
bonde d reinforcement nearest the extreme tension fa ce shall

not exceed thal given by Section 410.7.4
f or structures subject to fatigue or exposed to corrosive

ellv ironments, invest iga ti ons an d precautio ns are required .
418.5.4.1 The spac ing requirement s shall be met by
Ilonprcstrcssed reinforcement and bonded tendons. The
spacing o f bonded tendons shall no! exceed 2/3 of t!lC
maximum
spacin g
permitted
for
Ilonprestressed
reinforcemenl.
Wh ere both reinfo rcement and bonded te nd ons are used [Q
mee t the spaci ng requirement, the spacing between a bar
and a tendon shall not exceed 5/6 o f th al permi tted by
Sec tion 41 0.7.4. See also Section 418 .5.4.3.
418.5.4.2 In applyin g Eq . lOA to prestressing tendons, A.ft,,\
shall be substituted for .f..., where ~r" ., sha ll be takcn as the
calculated stress in the prestressing stee l at servi ce loads
based on a c racked section analys is minus the
decompressio n st ress hl("' It shall be penn itled to take /d,'
equal to the effective stress in the prestressing steel [,,,. Sec
also Section 418.5.4.3 .
418.5.4.3 In applying Eq. 10-5 to prestressing tendons, the
magnitude of 6/"s shall not exceed 250 MPa . When AJ;" is
less th an or equal to 140 MPa, the spacin g requirement s of
Sections 418.5.4.1 and 418.5.4.2 shall not apply.
418.5.4.4 Where h of a bea m e xceed s 900
III III ,
the area
or
iongiludi ll:ll ski ll reinforcemen t consistin g of reinforce lne ll!
or bond ed tendo ns shall be prov id ed as required by Section
410.7.7.
418.7 Loss of Prestress

418.7. 1 To derermine effective prestress fm allowance for
the following sources of loss of prestress shaJl be
co nsidered:
I.
Te ndo n sealing at lransfe r;
2.
Elastic shorten ing o f co ncrete;
3.
Creep of concrete;
4.
Shrinkage of con crete;
5.
Relaxation of ICIl<JOIl stress;
6.
Friction loss due to int en ded or unintended curvalUre

in post-tens io ning tendons .
418.7.2 Friction Loss in Post-Tensioning Tendons

418.7.2.1 Pp, force in pos t-tensionin g tendons a di stance ',,,
from th e jacking end shall be comput ed by:
)
- ( KI
P px = I 11je
fI'
~. /f
f!
I"
When (KI11.,+J1P CI,I.t) is not greater than OJ,

permitted to be computed by:
(41 8- 1)
P 11,C
sha ll be
(4182)
418.7.2.2 Friction loss sha ll be based 0 11 experime ntally
determin ed wobble K .~uld curvature P I' frictio n coeffi cie nts
and shri ll be verified duri ng tendon stressi ng operations.
418.7.2.3 Values o f K and p J' coenicien ts used in design
shall be shown on design drawings.
418.7.3 W he re loss o f pres tress in member may occur due
to connecti on of me mber to IIdj oi ni ng cons tmc li o n, such
loss of prest ress shall be IIl10wed for ill des ig n.
N8tional Structural Cod e of Ille Philippines (/' Edition Volume 1
4 100
CHAPTE R 4 Concrele
418.9 Limits for Reinforcement of Flexural
418.8.1 Design moment st rength of fl ex ural members shall
418.9.1 Pres lressed concrete secti ons shall hr ! '.! '. ' :'>-d 's
c Hher I c n s ion ~c onlroll ed . transition, or (OlliP:""::, j <m_
CO lli rolled sec ti ons, in accordance with Secti ons 4Iu.j .3 and
410.3.4 . The appropriat e strength redu ction fac\t)J's, if , from
Seclion 409.4 shall apply.
be computed by the strength des ign methods of this chapter.
For prestressing tendons, ];,.1' shall be subst ituted for ,h. in

strength computations.
418.8.2 As an ahcrnati vc to a more accu rate determination
Oil .strain compatibility, the following
"J)[Jl'Oxirnatc va lues OfJ,~f shall be permitted to be used if IS(
is nol Jess Ihan 0.5/,,;.
(,; If'S based
I.
For members with bonded tendons:
I 1" = I ,.., (I - ~[p

~
(0 PI
1',. +..!!-.
d ,.
I'
(O 'J])
(4183)
where", is pl//e' , ",' is pJ//e', and YP is 0.55 for 1./1..

nol less Ihan 0.80; 0.40 for /,.//,.. nol Jess Ihan 0.85; and
0.28 for1.//'", nol less Ihan 0.90.
If any cOlilpression rein forcement is lakcn into account
when calcu lnling J,.s by Eq. 4 J 83. the term
P p -f,,,,,
f ~
d (
+ - --{/)-{U
'J]
2.
(/1)'
For members with unbonded

to-dcpth ratio of 35 or less:
+70+~
/ P;/
'"
100
tendons and with a span -
(4 184)
P"
but /,,, ill Eq. 418-4 shall not he I<lkcn grea ter Ihan j~ ..
nor grcmer tha ll (k. + 4 15).
mcmbers with un bonded prestressing tendons
and with a span-to-depth ratio greater than 35:
Fo r
f,,, ; / " + 70
+3~'
.
(4185 )
P"
but /,,, ill Eq . 418-5 shall not he takcn grea ter than /;')"
nor grcillcr tlw n <hI' + 2 10).
. 418.H.3
418.9,2 Total ilmounl I of prestressed and 1l01l111 :'Slrc.ssed

reinforcement in members with bonded pres;),' \SI: d
reinforcement shall be :Idequate to develop a fal;lorclj w.hl
at least 1.2 times the cracking load computed \ )1: th:' i,;:, !". '~ f
(he modulus of rupture fr specified in St'( ", . .!!!";: -~
This provision shall be permincd to bc W 1U Yc! ,(': . "",
members with shear and flexural st rength a ll ea ~;l !9!:ce \iii\!
required by Seclion 409.3.
418.9.3 Part or all of the bonded reinforcclJ !!'i,; l om;i :;li!
of bars or tendons shall be provided as clos!: :.'; !,::w! lc ab lt
to the tensi on face in prestressed nex ural lllcmlwf s. In
members prestressed with unbonded tendolls, fl:i . fl,':! I Il1Ul l'
bo nded reinforcement consisting of bars or K n<.loll:'> ~.~, ;; !I b'
as required by Sccli on 418. I O.
418.10 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement
til'
:-; hall be taken not less tha n 0.17 and d' shall be no
greater thill) 0 . 15
3.
Mt.~lllbt.!l-S
418.8 Flexural Slrenglh
NOll prcs trcsscd rei nforcc mellt con forming to

Section 403 .6.3 , if lIsed with prestressing tendons, 511<111 be
pc rmi!1cd to he considered 10 contribute 10 the tensile force
and 10 be included in moment stren gth co mputations at .1
strcss equal to the specified yield strength fro Other
nonprcslresscd reinforceme nt shall be permitted to be
included in strength computatiolls onl y if a strai n
cOlll p.Hibili ty analysis is made 10 determine stresses in such
reinfo rcc rncnt.
418.10.1 A minimum area of bonded rcinfor('cl'twJ'd . . Id l !II .

provided in all fl exural members wiill UiJtollfi(.i i
prestressing tendons as required by Sect ioJ)!: 1 :::.iiJ.1.. : 'I!:
418.10.3.
418.10.2 Except as provided in Section 41 8.IOJ. IIl:Hi mull
area of bonded reinforce ment shall be COl1l rHlkd hy:
A, = 0.004A,.,
where ACl is area of thai part of cross seelie:, i){'t".'!, n i!,
nexura l tension face and ce nt er of gravity of i:.' .,;.:.. :,' , ', .;,.
418.10.2.1 Bonded reinforcement requin~d ~.,' i . ; .
shall be uniformly distributed over prC-C\lI :li" " :""~ \l:'}
zo ne as close as practi ca ble to extreme ten siUli iii;;;.
418.10.2.2 Bonded rei nforcement sh,lIl
rega rdless of service load stress conditions .
f,'
:: ;
lei!"; ',
418.10.3 ror two-way flal slab syste ms, . mi r:: .. :":l,; ., a ili itj
d islribution o f bonded reinforcement shall he , 1 I . -: '_,;] .:d in
Secli on, 4 I 8. 10.3. 1, 4 I 8. I0 .:1.2, and 4 I 8. IOJ.I.
418.10.3.1 Bond ed rei nforcement ShilJl not i . ;;.. ; .. "
positi ve momen t ;lfCa s whc reji, Ihe cxtrcm ' '.
-.:,'
tension in the pre~ comp ressed tcnsile lone :~\ ':!': "i,'" i,~,,1
(afler ;dI OW<lllcc ror prcstress losscs) docs 1I ~, : , : ('l:': u.,,
J7.:
I\ss oCi,:l ti on of Stru ctuml E r1girwGfs of tile Philipp ines
CHAf'TEf1 6 Wood
r .
I'~
(;2l
(618-X)
lnl cnncdialc colullllls (/,.1 d greater than II but less than K):
K
(618-9)
619.1 General
(618-10)
Long column ( Ir/ d of K or grcillcr):
(618- 11)
618.5 Compression at Angle fo Grain

The allowable unit stress in compression at an ilngle of load
(0 grain between 0 find 90 shall be computed from the
Hankinson Equal iOIl as follows :
F =
II
I~. f~.J.
I;~. sill 1 0 + I~'J. cos] 0
(618- 12)
Allowable values F,: shall be adjusted for duration of load

before lise in Hankinson's Equation. Values of F" and 1~J.
are not subjected to duration of load modifications .
'. ,,:. ,:.:. .... .
,~
Timher co nnectors and fasten ers may be used to transmit

forces bet ween wood members and bet ween wood and
metal members. 111C allowable loads and installation of
timber connectors and fasteners shall be in accard:mce with
the tables as provided ill th.is Chapler. The allowable IOHds
and installation of timber connec tors shall be (\s set forth in
Tables 6.2. 6.17. 6 . 19. and 6.20.
Safe loads and design practice s for Iypes of connectors and
fasteners not mentioned or fully covered may be determined
ill a manner permiucd by the Building Official.
619.2 noll'
Safe loads in kN for bolts ill shear ill se.asoned lumber shall
not exceed the values sci forth in Table 6.17.

Allowable shear values used to co nnect a wood LO concrete
or masonry are. permitted to be determined as olle half the
tabulated double shear values for a wood member twice the
thickness of the member attached to the conCrete or
masonry.
619.3 Nails and Spikes
619.3.1 Safe Lateral Strength
A cornman wire nail driven perpendicular to grain of lhe

wood , when used to fasten wood members lOgether, shall
not be subjected LO a greater load causing shear and bending

than (he safe lateral strength of lhe wire nail or spike as SCI
forth in Table 6.21.
A wire nail dri vcn parallel to the grai n of the wood shall not
be subjected more than two thirds of the lateral load
allowed when driven perpendicul ar to the grain. Toenails
shall not be subjected more Ih an five sixths of the lateral
load allowed for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.
619_3_2 Safe Resistan ce to With,h-awal
A wire nail driven perpendi cuhlf" to grain of wood shall nol
be subj ec ted to a greater load, tend ing to cause withdrawal ,
than the safe resis(ance o f th e nail to withdraw al, as sct
forth in Tabl e 6.21.
1h
Nalionai Siruciural Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
628
CHAPTEH G . Wood
619.3.3 SI)acillg and Jlent'trtllion

Common wire mliis shall have penetration into the piece
receiving the point as SCI forth ill Table 6.21. Nails or
spikes for which the wire gauges or lengths Elrc not sct fOrlh
PO
in Table 6.2 1 shall have a required penclnttion of lIot less

than II diameters, lind allowable lond s ma y be inlcrpoliUcd.
Design values shed! be increased whell the pe netratioll of

nail s into the member holding the point is larger than the
required by Ihi s item.
'j
.<l
.J ..-. - .-
HOt Olt-.G
LU;MBt-:A
-1-- .
I,
SlOF.R
' fABlII.A1EO
l~ OSARI:
PiR
I/oCHef PENHRAPClN
For wood to-w(lod jOints, the spacing center to center of

nails in the direction of stress shall not be less than one half
of lhe required pcnctralion. r=.dgc or end di sta nces in the
direction of stress shall not be less one ha lf of ehe required
penetration. All spacing and edge and end distances shall be
suc h as to avoid splitting of the wood.
Figure 619.5.2 -A: Basic Withdrawal ConnCl'ti uH
SIDE R -"
NAIL
--_\~-
:rl -~-- H~~~~;
Hol es for nail s, where necessary to prevent spliuing, shall

be bored of a diameter smalle r than th at of the nail s.
1-
6J 9.4 Joist Hangel"s and Framing Anchors
Con nections depending upon joist ha ngers o r rraming

an chors, tics and other mechanical ra ste nings no t otherwise
covered may be used wtlcrc <lpprovcd
MEMBER
Figurc 6J9.S.2-U: Withdrawal from End-Grain
619.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners
(not allowed)
619.5.1 Drift Bolts or Drift Pins

Connections involving the li se or drirt bolts or pillS sh<.11I be
designed in accordance with the provisions set fOll h in this
Chapter.
StDE
MEMBER "
PI2
1,~~""
__ ~ WITHDRAWAL
P--
./ __
MAIN
MEMBEll
619.5.1.1 Wood Screws and Lag Screws

Wood and lag screws shall be used where there is limited
penetration, especially in a withdrawal design, as these
provide greater resistance. Design of th e sc rews shall be in
accord ance with the provjsion s set fOl1h in thi s Chapter.
619.5.1.2 Withdrawal Design Va lues

Drift boll and dlifl pin connections loaded in withdrawal
shall be designed in accordance with good engineering
pmctice. Fi gures 619.5.2A to 619.S.2-C are exa mpl es of
withd rawal connecti ons.
PI2
Figure 6J9.S.2-C: Tocnail Connecti oIl Withdrawal from
Side Gr~,in
6 19.5.1.2 Laleral Design Va lues
Allo wable lateral design values for drift bolts and drifl pins
dri ven in the side grain or wood shall nOI exceed '/5 Ji;,'r: ,'11I
of lhe all owable laleral des ign values fo r common :
:
or
th e ~ al11c diameter and Icilgth in main me mber. A{ \:i tj ~ii\a l

penetration of pin into members should he provided in lieu
o f the washer. head find nu t 011 it com m Oil boll.
619.5.2 Spike G.-ids

Wood-Io-wood connection s involving spike grit.ls for hlnal
load transfer shall be desig ned in accordance wi!:l
od
Associalion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTER 4 . Concreto
418.10.3.2 In positive moment areils where computed

lensil e stress in concrete at service load exceeds D,l71l'
418. 11 Statically Ind eterminate Stru ctures
minimum area of bonded reinforcement 5h:'11I be computed
by:
A,
=-~
05/,
where design yie ld strength
(41 8-7)
j;, used in Bq. 418 -7 shall /lot
exceed 4 J 5 MPn . Bonded reinforcement sha ll be uniformly

dist ributed over pre-comp resse d tensile zOlle as close as
practicahle to extreme tension fiber.
418.10.3.3 In nega ti ve mome nt afC(lS at column supports,
minimum area of bonded reinforcement AJ in the lOp of the
slab in each direction shall be computed by:
A,
= 0.OO075A,{
(418-8)
where A. j is the larger gross cross-sectional area of the slabbeam strips ililwo oflh ogona l equi valent frames imcrsccLing
a t a co lumn in a I wo-way slab.
Bonded reinforceme nt required by Eq. 4 1R-8 shall bc

distributed between lines that are J .511 outside opposite faces
of the column suppo rt . AI Icast four bars or wires shall be
provided in each di rection. Spacing of bonded
reinforcement shall not exceed 300 mlTI.
418.10.4 Minimulll lengt h of bonded re inforccmelll
req ui red by Sections 4 18.10.2 and 418.10.3 shall be as
required in Sections 418.I0.4. 1,4 ! 8. 10.4.2, and 418.10.4.3.
418.10.4.1 in positive moment areas. minimum Icngtl1 of

bonded reinforcement shall be one-third the clear span
length, /", and celHered in posi tive mOlllcnl area.
418.10.4.2 In
negat ive
momen t
arC;:ls.
bonded
reinforcement shall ex tend one-six th the de.l r span, I,,, on
eac h side of support.
418.10.4.3 Where bo nded reinforcem ent is provided for
design moment stre ngt h, A1., in acco rdance with Section
418.8.3, or for tens il e st ress conditions in accordance with
Secti on 4! 8. 10.3.2. minimum length also shal! conform to
provis ions of Section 412.
418.11.1 Fr~ ll1 es and COl1linllOUS co nstruction of

prcstressed concrete shall be designed 1'01' satisfactory
perfo rmance at service load condi tions an d for adequate
strgngth .
41H.l1.2 Performance at se rvice load conditions shall be
determined by clas ti c ana lysis, c~~lsidc r ing reactions,
moments. shears, and <lx ia! forces proo'u'ccd by prestressing,
creep, shrinkage, tcmpcrature cha nge, ax ia l deformation,
restraint o f altac hed structuftll clements and foundati on
settlement.
418.11.3 Moments used to compute required st rength shall
be lhe sum of the momcnts due to reacti ons induced by
prestressing (with a load factor of 1.0) and the moments due
to factored loads. Adjustment of the sum of these moments

shall be permiLted as a llowed in Section 4 18.1 1.4.
418.11.4 Redistribution of Ncgativc M011lcnl.'i in
Continuous Prestrcssed Flexural Members
418.11.4.1 Where bonded reinforcement is providcd at
SUPP011S in accord ance Wilh Section 41 8. 10, it shall be
permitted to decrease negative or
positive
moments
calculated by clastic theory for any assli med londing, in
accordance with Section 408.5.
418.11.4.2 The reduced moment shall be used for

calculating redistributed moments at all other sections
within the spans. Static equi librium shall be maintained after
rcdistJibution of moments for c,lch loading arrangement.
4J8.12 Compression Members - Co mbin ed F1exm.. 1 and
Axial Loads
418.12.1 Prestressed conc rete mcmbers subject to

flexure and axial load, with or without
nonprcslressed reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the
st rength design methods of this chapter. Effects of prest ress.
creep. shrinkage and Icmpcralllrc cha nge sha ll he included.
co mbined
i1 l
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Voltll'llr? 1
4-102
CHAPTEf14 - Concrete
418.12.2 Limits for Reinforcement of Prestressed

Compression Members
418.12.2.1 Members with average compressive stress in
concrete less than 1.6 MPa, due to effective prestress force
only, shall have minimulll reinforcement jn accordance with
Sections 407.11, 410.10.1 and 410.JO.2 for columns, or
Section 414.4 for walls.

418.12.2.2 Except for walls, members with average
prestress It),. equal to or greater than 1.6 MPa shall have all
prestressing tendons enclosed by spirals or lateral tics in
accordance with the following:
1.
2.
Spirals shall conform to Section 407.11.4;

Lateral ties shall be at least 10
n1l11
diameter in size or
welded wire fabric of equivalent area, and spaced
vertically not to exceed 48 tie bar or wire diameters or

least dimension of compression member;
3.
Tics shall be located vertically not more than half a tie

spacing above top of footing or slab in any story, and
shall be spaced as provided herein to not more than half
a tic spacing below lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above;
4.
Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a

column, it shall be permitted to terminate ties not more
than 7S mIll below lowest reinforcement in such beams
or brackets.
418.12.2.3 For wall.s with average prestress J;". equal to or

greater than 1.6 MPa, minimum reinforcement required by
Section 414.4 may be waived where structural analysis
shows adequate strength and stability.
418.13 Slab Systems
418.13.1 Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab

systems reinforced for flexure in more than olle direction
shall be determined in accordance with provisions of
Section 413.8, (excluding Sections 4 t3.8.7.4 and 413.8.7.5),
or by Illore detailed design procedures.
418.13.2 Moment strength, M" of prestressed slabs
required by Section 'f09,4 at every section shall be at least
equal to the required strength Mil, considering Sections
409.3, 418 . 11 J and 4 I 8, 11.4. Shear strength f&V", of
prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least eqllal \0 the
required strength considering Sections 409.J, 411.2,
411.13.2 and 411.13.6.2.
be met, with appropriate consideration of the factors listed

in Section 418.11.2.
418.13.4 POI' uniformly distributed live loads, ;;pacing of
tendons or groups of tendons in at least one di!l:dion shaJi
not exceed the smaller of eight times the slab thickness, and
I.S m. Spacing of tendons also shall provide a :ninimum
average prestress of 0.9 MPa on the slab section tributary to
the tendon or tendon group. For slabs with v;,; \ing cross
"ndicular
section along the slab span, either parallel or
to the tendon or tendon group, the minill1: :;" "/erage
effective prestress of 0.9 MPa is required <It ('v! I'Y (~ross
section tributary to the tendon or tendon gro'T
the
span. Concentrated loads and opening in slab:-; silall be
considered when determining tendon spacing.
418.13.5 In slabs with unbonded prestressing tendons,

bonded reinforcement shall be provided in accord :-.lIlce with
Sections 418.10.3 and 418.10.4.
418.13.6 Except as permitted in Section 418.J3.7, in slabs
with unbonded tendons, a minimum of two 12 m:n diameter
or larger, seven-wire post-tensioned strand.,; shall be
provided in each direction at columns, eithu passing
through or anchored within the region bounded by the
longitudinal reinforcement of the column. OUWdc. columJl
and shear cap faces, these two structural inlC jil'tendons
shall pass under any orthogonal tendons in adjii',:clll spans.
Where the two structural integrity tendon~:
irC!t'.lICd
within the region bounded by the longitudinill " ::!;" r CHJ(.n!
of the column, the anchorage shall be \oC<11e ::
tbe:
column centroid and away from the anchored si .:il.
418.13.7 Prestressed slabs not satisfying Se_, ::\)11 ':J~\.13.6

shall be permitted provided they C(::
\;ottOlll
reinforcement in each direction passing wilhiii
!'('ginn
bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of 1\1,
and anchored at exterior supports as required by Scc!iul1
41 J.4.8.5. The area of bottom reinforcenK!'~
c/"
direction shall be not less than 1.5 times that
!,\' I
410-3 and not less than 2.1b"LlIf"" where b" i': [1:: 1\ ,i:
the column face through which the reinfo:
Minimulll extension of these bars beyond th
cap face shall be equal to or greater
li:;
development length required by Section 412.2 L
418.13.8 'In lift slabs, bonded bottom reinforcelllcli: :,)i:,:'
be detailed in accordance with Section 4IJ.4.~U'
418.13.3 At service load conditions, all serviceability

limitations, including specified limits on dellcctions, shall
I\sSOCii1tIOIl of Structural En9ineers of the Phitippines
4103
418.14 Pos t-Tensioncd Tcndon Anchorage Zones

418.14.1 Anchorage Zone
The Hnchorage zone sha ll be considered as composed of two
zones:
I.
The 10c.1I zone is the rectangular prism (or cquiv'l lent

rectangular prism for circular or ova l anchorages) of
co ncrete immedimely su rrounding the anchorage device
and any confin ing reinforcement;
2.
The general zone is the anchorage zone as defined

Section 402 and includes the local zone.
Ifl
418.14.2 Local Zone

418.14.2.1 Design of local zones shall be based upon (he
factored tendon force. PJ u and the requirements of Sec tions
409.3.5 and 409.4.2.5
418.14.2.2 Local-zone rei nforcement shall be provided
w here req uired for proper fu ncti on ing of the anchorage
device.
418.14.2.3 Local-zon e requirements of Section 418.14.2.2
are satisfied by Sec ti on 418. I 5.1 or 418 .16. I and 418 . I 6.2.
418.14.4.2 Exce pt for conc rete confined within s pirals or

hOOp5 providing
confinement
equivalent
to that
corresponding to Eg. 410~6, nomin al compre5sive strength
of concrete in the general zone shall be lim ited 100.7 )f(,;.
418.14.4.3 Compressive strength of concrete at time o f
posHensioning shall be s pecified in the contract documents.
Unless oversize anchorage devi ces are si7..cd to co mpensate
for the lower compressive strengt h or the tendolls arc
st ressed (Q no more than .50 percell( of Ihe fin al tcndon
force, tendons shall not he stressed until co mpressive
strength of concrete, as indicated by tes ts consistent with the
curing of the member, is at leasl 28 MPa for multi strand
tendons or at least l7 MPa for single-strand or bar tendons.
418.14.5 Design Methods
418.13.5.1 Th e following methods shall be permitted for
the design of general zones provided that the specific
procedures used result in predi ction of strength in
substantial ag reement with results of comprehensive tests:
I.
Eq uilibrium
models);
2.
Linear stress analys is (inclu di ng fini te element ana lysis

or equ ivalent); or
3.
Simplilied equations where applicable.
418.14.3 General Zon e

418.14.3. 1 Design of general wnes shall be based upon the
factored tend o n force, P fU , and Ihe requirements of Sections
409.).5 a nd 409.4 .2.5
418.14.3.2 Gene ra l-zone reinforcement shall be provided
where required to resist bursting, spallin g, and longitudinal
edge. IClls io n forces induced by an chorage devices. Effects
of abrupt change in sectioll sha ll be considered.
418.14.3.3 The gClIcrHI-zone requircmelHs of Section

4 18. 143.2 are satisfied by Sections 418.14.4, 4 18.14.5,
418.14.6 and whichever one of Section 4 I 8. 15.2 o r 418. I 5.3
or 418. 16.3 is applicable.
418.14.4 Nominal Material Strengths
418.14.4.1
Nominal
te nsile
streng th
of
bonded
reinforcemcnl is limited to J,. for l1onprcstrcs$ed
reinforce ment ;md to h,,' for pres tressed rcin forceme nt
Nomina l tensi le stress of unhomJcd prestressed rein forcement for resisting tensile forces in th e anchorage zone
shall be limited to!,,)::; h .. +70,
based
plasticity
models
(stnn-nnd-tic
418.14.5.2 Simplified equations shal l nOl be lIsed where

member cross sections arc Ilonrectangular, where
di scontinu ities in or ncar the ge ne ral zone cause deviations
ill Ihe force n ow path, w here minimum edge distance is less
than 1. 5 times the anchorage device laleral dimensi on ill thai
direct ion, or where multiple anchora ge devices are used in
OIlier than one closely spaced group.
418.14.5.3 The stress ing seq uence shall be specified on the
design drawings and considered in the design.
418.14.5.4 Three-dimens ional effects shall be considered
ill design and ana lyzed using three- dime ns iona l procedures
or approximated by considering the summation of effects
for tw o ort hogonal planes.
418.14.5.5 For intermediate anc horage devices, bonded
reinforcement shall be prov ided 10 trilllsfer at least 0.35 p."
into the concrete section behind {he anchor. Such
reinforce ment shall be placed symmetrically around the
anchorage devices and shall be full y developed both behind
and aheHd o f the anchorage devices ,
Nationa l Structural Code of the Philippines GIll Edition Volume 1
4104
CHAPTER 4 Concrele
418.14.5.6 Where curved tendons arc used in the general

zo ne, except for monostrand tend ons in slabs or where
analysis shows reinforcement is not required, bo nded
rei nforcement shall be provided (0 resist mdial and splitting
forces.
418.14.5.7 Except for ll1onostrnnd tendoJl!'i ill slabs or
where analysis shows
reinforcemclH
is
not
required,
minimulll reinforcement with a nominal (ensile st rength

eq ual 10 2 perce nt of each factored lendon force shall be
provided in on hogonal directi ons paralic! [ 0 the back face of
all anchorage zones to limit spaJling.
418.14.5.8 Te nsile strength of conc rete shall be neglectod
in calculaii ollS of reinforcement rcquircmcnLs.
418.14.6 Detailing Requirem euts
Selection of reinforcemen t sizes, spacings, cover, and other
dcwils for anchorage zones shall make allowances for
tolerances on the bending, fabri cation, and placement of
rc.inforcemcnI, for th e size of aggregate, and for adequ ate
placement and consol idation of th e concrete.
418.15 Design of Anchorage Zones for Monos trand or

Single 16 nlln J)iamctcf B~lr Tendons
418.15.1 Local Z<lIle Design
MOllostrand or single 111 16 111111 or smallcr b'lf anchorage

devices and local lone reinforcc mcm shall mcel the
requiremen ts of the AC I 42.1.7 or thc special anchorage
dcvi(.:c requirem ents of Section 418. I 6.2.
4J8.15.2
Gellc r al~'l'..A)IIC
Design for Slab Telldons
418.15.2. 1 For anchorage devices ror 12 mill or smalier

diameter strands in nonnalweight concrete slabs, minimum
rcinforccmc.1l1 meeting the requirements of Section
418 .15.2.2 and 418.15.2.3 shall he provided unless a
dClniled <lllaIY!iis satisfying Section 4 18.14.5 !)hows stich
reinforcement is not required.
4J8.15.2.2 Two horizo ntal bars at least 1?J!2 111111 ill size
shal! be provided parallcl to the slab edge. Tiley shall be
pc rmilt cd 10 he ill contact with the fron t f"ac.:c of the
ancho rage device and shall he wi lh in a dis1<lncc of V1 "
Hhcad of each device. Those bars shall extend at least 150
111m eithcr side of th e outer edges of each device.
418.15.2.3 If the center-to-center spaci ng of anchorage
dev ices is 30n mill or Icss, the anchora ge devices shall be
conside red as a grollI'. For each group of six or mOre

nnc.:horagc devices, Il+J hairpin bars or closed .o;ti rrllps at
leas t 10 mill diameter in size S h ~l l\ be provi{kd . wlK'.re II is
the number of anchorage devi ces. One hairp in b~lr or stirrup
shall be placed bCIwecn eac h nnchorage lJcvicl: and one On
eac h side of Ihe group. The haiq)in bars 01" sli nnps shall be
placed with the legs cxtending into the slab perpendicular to
the edge. The ce nt er portion of [he ha ilpin bars or stirrups
shall be placed perpendicular to the ,;lane of the slab from
3"'8 10 hJ2 ahead or the anchorage deVIces.
418.15.2.4 For anchorage devi ces /lot conforming 11) Section
4 18.15.2.1, minimulll reinforce ment shall be b:.lscd upon ;\
detailed analysis satisfying Scction 418. 14 .5.
418.15.3 GencralZone Design for Groups of
Monost rand Tendons in Beams and Girders
Design of general zones for groups of m0l1o11 :l nd iendon$

in beams and girders shall meet Ihe requiremelll:-> or Sections
4 18.14.3 Ihrough 418. 14.5.
418.16 Design of Anchorage Zones for MuIri s(nm nd
Tendons
418.16. 1 Local Zone Design
l3asic mu ltist rand tlnchoragc devices and local zo ne
reinforcement shall meel the requirement ::; 'II" t\/'.S HTO
"Standard SpecificatitJl1.rfor Highway Bridgd, " Division 1,
Articles 9.21.7.2.2 Ihrough 9.21.7 .2.4.
Special anc horage devices shall siltisfy (he tests rl~qujred in

AASHTO "Standard Spec{(icariolls for fligh ll ilY /)ridge s, "
Division 1, Art icle 9.2 1.7 .3 and described , II .A.AS HTO
"Sumdard Specijlcariolls fnr Highway IJridj;es, " 17111
Edilion, 2002, Division II, Anicle 10.3.2.3.
418.16.2 Usc of Special Anchorage Devices
Where special anchorage devices arc to he 1I~I~d, supplcmental skin reinforcemcnt 5h<lll be rurn ished in the
cO ITcspo ndi ng regions or the <lIlchoragc ZOIF" . ,[I ,.;d n;on I()
the confining reinforcemcnt specified t{) :
.:",1 .a gl~
device. This supple mental rcinforcemelll sll:I !! i.: .iini'l1" in
c~H1 l ipl ralion and al leas t equivalen t in VOIU! ll1' tric 1":1'10 to
any supplementary skin reinforceme nt used t i l Ii.' (IH:difying
acce ptance teslS o f the anchorage dev ice.
418.16.3 GeneralZo ne Design
Design for general

Ihe req uiremenls
Association of Strllc{urai Fnq!neors of the
1.01les
for mullistrand tendons
~hallll1ee t
or Sl'ctions 418.14.3 Ihro !, ~~i ; .: 1~;.: 1 ..
Phi!ipplne~;
t.
418.17 Corrosion Prot(~ction for Unbondcd Prcstrcssing

Tendons
410f)
418.19.2.4 Admixtures conforming to Section 403.7 and

known to have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or
concrete shall be permitted. Calcium chloride shall not be
used.
418.17.1 Unbonded tcndons shall be encased with

sheathing. Thc tendons shall be completely coated and the
sheathing around the tendon filled with suitable material to
inhibit corrosion.
418.19.3 Selection of Grout Proportions
418.17.2 Sheathing shall be watct1ight and continuous over

entire length to be uhbonded.
418.19.3.1 Propol1ions of materials for grout shall be based

on either of the following:
418.17.3 For applications in corrosive environments, the

sheathing sl1<111 be connectcd to all stressing, intermediate
and fixcd anchorages in a watertight fashion.
418.17.4 Unbonded single strand tendons shall be protccted
against cotTosion in accordance with ACt 423.7.
418.18 Post-Tensioning Ducts
418.18.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be mortar-tight and
nonreactive with concrete, tendons, grout, and corrosion
inhibitor.
418.18.2 Ducts for grouted single wire, single strand, or
single bar tendons shall have an inside diametcr at least 6
mm larger than tendon dinmcter.
418.18.3 Ducts for grouted multiple Wire, multiple strand, or
multiple bar tendons shall have an inside cross-sectional
area at leas! two Ii IllCS the cross-sectional area of tendons.
418.18.4 Ducts shall be maintained free of ponded water if
members to be grouted arc exposed (0 tcmperatures below
freezing prior to grouting.
418.19 Grout for Bonded Prestressing Tendons
418.19.1 Grout shall consist of ponland cement and water;
or portland cemcnt, sand, and water.
418.19.2
1.
Results of tests OJl fresh and hardened grout prior to

beginning grouting operations; or
2.
Prior documented experience with similar materials and

equipment and under comparable field conditions.
418.19.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to

that on which selection of grout prop011iol1s was based.
418.19.3.3 Water content shall be minimum necessary for
proper pumping of grout; however, water-cement ratio shall
not exceed 0.45 by weight.
418.19.3.4 Water shall not be added to increase grout
nowability that has been decreased by delayed use of the
grout.
418.19.4 Mixing and Pumping Grout
418.19.4.1 Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of
continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will
produce uniform distribution of materials, passed through
screens, and pumped in a manner that will completely fil!
the ducts.
418.19.4.2 Temperature of members at time of grouting
shall be above 2e and shall be maintained above 2C until
field-cured 50 mrn cubes of grout reach a minimum
compressive strength of 5.5 MPa.
418.19.4.3 Grout temperatures shall not be above 32C
during mixing and pumping.
Materials for grout shall conform to Sections
418.19.2.1 through 418.19.2.4.
418.20 Protection for Prestressing Steel
4HU9.2.1 Portland celllcnt shall conform to Section 403 3.

418.19.2.2 W<Her shall conform to Section 403.5.
Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing

steel shall be performed so that prestressing stee! is not
subject to excessive temperatures, welding sparks, or ground
currents.
418.19.2.3 Sand, if used, shall conform to "S{(mr/ard

S{Jec!/iC(/fioll
for Ag;.:!'(?gate for Masonl), Mortar" (ASTM
C! 44) except that gradation shall be permitted to be

modified as necessary to obtain satisfactory workability.
Nallonal Siruclul-ai Code of the Philippines
Gill
Eclition Volume -I
4106
CHAPTEFl 4 Conerele
4J8.22 PostTensioning Anchorngcs and Couplers

4]8.21 Application and Measurement of Prcstl'cssing
Force
4J8.21.1 Prc~trcsslng force shaH be determined by both of
th e following methods:
I.
Measurement of' steel elongation. Required elongation

shal l be dctcnnincd /'rom average load -elonga tion
curves for the prestressing steel u';:!.!;
2.
Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gage or

load cell or by use of a calibrated dynamometer.
Cause of ;:IIlY difference in force determination between

methods J nnd 2 that exceeds .5 percent for prctcnsioncd
elements or 7 percent for posl-lcnsiollcd construction shall
be ascertained and corrected.
418.21.2 Where the transfer of force from the bulkheads of

pre-tensioning bed to the concrete is accomplished by name
cutting prestressing tendons, cutting points and cutting
sequence shall be predetermined (0 avoid undesired
tcmpomry stresses.
418.22.1 Anchorages and couplers for bonded and

un bonded tendons shall deve lop at least 95 pen:C-IH of the
specified breaking strength of the (lmdons. j;."" wilen It:stcd
in an unbondcd condition, without exceeding anti('ip~l\ed set.
POI' bonded tendons, anchorages and couplers \hall be
located so that 100 perce nt of' th e spcci ned breaking
strength of the tendons. j;.". , shall be developed :ll C) ::ical
sections after the prestressing steel are bonded ill the
member.
418.22.2 Couplers shall be placed ill areas approved by the
engineer-all-record and enclosed in hOllsing long ellough to
permit lIecessluy movements .
418.22.3 III unhanded construction subject to repet itive

loads, special attention sha ll be give n to the possibility of
fatigue in anchorages and couplers.
418.22.4 Anchorages. couplers, and end fittings shall be
permanently protected against corrosion.
418.21.3 Long lengths of exposed pre tensioned strand shall

be cut ncar the member to minimize shock to concrete.
418.21.4 Total loss of prestress due to unreplaced broken
te ndons sha!l not exceed 2 percent of IOlal prestress.
-0
.s
:;'" 0'"
~
'0
<:!
'"
I--
"
OJ
.:c
~
"" '"'"
~ .c
(/)
........._.u
. '""
'0
"0
--~---~ ---- -- - ~.- - .- -- . - --
Wire tendons
Highstrenglh bars
._ .....strand .._--_. __
- ----- . 7wire
--~.-- .
.,
'0
Table 4 ) 8-1 Friction Coefricicnts for PoslTensioncd

Tendons for Use in Equation 418-1 or 4 182
'"'"
__ _._-_._
Wobble
ClIrv'lturc
cienI , JifJ?cr rad ian
.. _---.. .____ ~y.fflci~~~~~~~cr _~_ _. __...__c()cffi
0.00330.0049
O.15-=-0.25 --' .
..- - .O. 08 ())O
OJ)0030.0020---.---.
----.-0:1"5:0.25000160.0066
._.. -.-.--.....--.-.-.--..
..---- ----- .. _-- --.
---- ~~.---
O.O033().0066
O. 050 15
7-wirc strand
O.()O33().OO66
OJ)50 15
Wire tendons
0.00 IO(). 0066
o. 05() 15
Wire tendons
0
'0
.t:> ~
;:;> I--
" '"
'0
'"
'"
'"'"
-----
'"
~
'"
7-wirc strand
----~-- ---- ----
0.00 I(J.(U)()66
L _ _ ...
Association of Structural Engineers of Ule Philippin es
..
-- --~--
OJ)50.15
CHAPTE r, 4 . Concre le
Ta ble
4 18~2
410 7
Serviceabilit y Design Requirement s
Prestressed
Nonprcstrcssed
Class T
Class U
Assullled behavior
Transition betwee n
Uncrac ked
Section properties for stress

calculation at service loads
Gross sec tion

Secti on
4 18.4.4
Allowable stress at trallsfer
Sectio n
41 8.5. 1
ABowabJc compressive stress

based 011
Section
uncracked section p,'operties

Tensile stress at service loads
Sect. 418.4.3
Cracked
Cracked
Sectio n 4 18.4 .4
Crack section
Sec li on 41 8.4.4
No requirement
Secli on 41 8.5. 1
Sec ti on 41 8.5.1
No requirement
SeclioIl41 8.5.2
No requirement
No requirement
ft <ft sft
No requirement
No requirement
Sec t. 409 .6.4.1
Sect. 409.6.4 . 1
Sect. 409.6.2,
409.6.3
Cracked section,
Cracked section,
bilinear
bilinear
uncmckcd and cr acked
Gross section
4 18.5.2
so62 ft
0.62
Sect. 409.6.4. 1
Deflection calculation basis
Class C
Gross section
.... _-_.. _."_ .. _...
--.----~ .
Side skin reinforcement
Modified by Sect.
418.5.4.1
Section 410.7.4
_..
Cracked seclion
analysis
MI(A s x lever arm).

or O.6fy
No rcquirement
Scction 410.7.7
Sec lion 4 10.7.7
No requirement
requirement
Computatioll of Alp.\' orfs for
crack control
Seclion 410.7.4
No
Crack control
Effective moment
of inertia
.._ ._.
--
No
rcq tl iremell l
or tl18 Pililippines Gill Edition Volume
4108
CHAPTER 4 ConcrelO
Table 418-3
ASTM Standard Prestressing Tendons

-.-~-~.
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Nominal
Diameter,
Area,
mass,
Diameter,
Nomiual
Arca,
mIll
mm
kg/m
mm
mlll
6A
23.2
9 Sl
54.8
I 1.10
74.2
Type
Seven-wire
Strand
(Grade 1725)
0.182
7.9
37A
0.294
9.5
51.6
OA05
---_..-
-.----.---.~
ll.l
69.7
'--.-
---.-.----~
92.9
0.730
15.2
139A
1.094
19.0
284.0
2.230
22.0
387.0
3.040
--_.
_ ..
-
12.70
--~.--.---
..
15.24
tn,l
kghn
0.4 32
98.7
10
140.0
..
12.7
250
Prestressing
Bars (Plain)
Sevell-wire
Strand
(Grade IS60)
0.548
-.--"~---~
...
Type
>{(J:l
503.0
3.970
639.0
5.030
. -------_._6.210
-_._.... ...-
4.88
... _ - -
4.98
Prestressing
Wire
IS.7
------_ .
19.5
6.35
31.7
7.01
38.6
15.0
,u
n.2
181.0
271.0
L't:
_ _ ~ _ _ u
--.-- . ---~
29.0
----32.0
794.0
35.0
955.0
----,--~-.-.--.--.--
. ........ __ ......._----
7.520
Prestressing
Bars
(Deformed)
20.0
- - - - _..._...
26.0
~--
32.0
.. _-------
36.0
Association of S!I"lIcturai Engineers
..
or the
Philippines
548.0
806.0
----~-.-
1019'1
i)
,,
..
;-'
, ,(I
CHAPTER 4 ..- Structural Concrete
4109
418.23 External {)ost- Tensioning

418.23.1 Po)-;t-tcll)-;ioning tendons shall be permitted to be
external to any concrete section of a member. The strength
and serviceability dcsign methods of this code shall be used
in evaluating the elfcCls oj" external tendon forces on the
concrete structure.
418.23.2 External tendons shal! be considered as unbonded
tcndons when computing llexural strength unless provisions
are made to effectively bond the external tendons to the
concrete section along its cntire length.
418.23.3 Extcrnal tendons shall be attached to the concrete
member in a manner that maintains the desired eccentricity
between the tendons and the concrete centroid throughout
the full range
anticipated member derJcctioJ1.
or
419.1 Notations
f~
F,
.[['
1\.
h
/"
:::: modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa, See

Section 408.6.1
= sDecified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
:::: sqt:are root of specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa
yield strength of nonprestresscd
reinforcement, MPa
:::: thickness of shell or folded plate, mm
:::: development length, mm
:::: strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4
: : specified
419.2 Scope and Del1nitions
Extema! tendons and tendon anchorage regions shall be

protected against corrosion, and the details of the protection
method shall be indicated on the drawings or in the project
sped fications.
419.2.1 Provisions of Section 419 shaH apply to thin-shell

and folded-plate concrete structures, including ribs and
edge mcmbers.
419.2.2 All provisions of this code not specifically
excluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Section
419, shall apply to thin-shell structures.
419.2.3 Thin Shells

Three-dimensional spatial structures made up of one or
more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are
small compared to their other dimensions. Thin shells are
characterized by their three-dimensional load-carrying
behavior, which is dctcrrnined by the geometry of their
forms, by the manner in which they are supported, and by
the naturc of the applied load.
419,2.4 Folded Plates

A class of shell structure formed by joining flat, thin slabs
along their edges to create a three~climensional spatial
structure.
419.2.5 Ribbed Shells

Spatial structures with materia! placed primarily along
certain preferred rib lines, with the area between thc ribs
filled with thin slabs or left open.
419.2.6 Auxiliary Members

Ribs or edge beams that serve to strengthen, stiffen, or
support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly
with the shell.
Nation,)1 Structural Code of the Philippines 6
tll
Edition Volume 1
4-110
CHAPTER 4 -- Siruciural Concrelo
419.2.7 Elastic Analysis
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on
equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic

behavior, and representing to a suitable approximation the
three-dimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliary members.
419.3.7 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall

be proportioned for the required strength and serviceability,
using either the strength design method of Section 408.2 . I
or the alternate design method of Section 408 .2.2.
419.3.8 She\! instability shall be investiWlled and shown
by
419.2.8 Inelastic Analysis

An analysis of dcfornlJ~lions and internal forces based on
equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete
and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and timedependent effects, and compatibility of strains. The analysis
shall represent to a suitable approximation thrcedimensional action of the shell together with its auxiliary
members.
419.2.9 Experimental Analysis
An analysis procedure based on the measurement of
deformations or strains, or both, of the structure or its
model; experimental analysis is based on either elastic or
inelastic behavior.
419.3 Analysis and Design
419.3.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for
determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells.
This behavior shall be permitted to be established by
computations based on an analysis of the uncracked
concrete stmcture in which the material is assumed linearly
clastic, homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of
concrete shall be permitted to be taken equal to zero .
419.3.2 Inclastic analysis shall be permitted to be used
where it can be shown that such methods provide a safe
basis for design.
design to be precluded.
419.3.9 Auxiliary members shaH be designed according to
the applicable provisions of this code. It shall be pennittcd
to assume that a portion of the shell equal to the flange
width, as specified in Section 408.13, acts with the auxiliary
member. In sLlch portions of the shell, the reinforcement
perpendicular to the auxiliary" member shall be at least
equal to that required for the flange of a T-beam by Section
408_13.5.
419.3.10 Strength design of shell slabs for membrane and
bending forces shall be based on the distribution of stresses
and strains as determined from either elastic or an inelastic
analysis .
419.3.11 In a region where membrane cracking is predicted,
the nominal compressive strength parallel to the cracks
shall be taken as 0.4(".
419.4 Design strength of Materials
419.4.1 Specified compressive strength o/" conere!etc at 2g
days shall not be less than 21 MPa .
419.4.2 Specifled yicld strength o/" nonprestressed
reinforcclllcrH./;. shall not exceed 415 MFa.
419.5 Shell Reinforcement
419.3.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and

external loads shall be made to ensure consistency of
results.
4]9.3.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures
shall be permitted where it can be shown that such
procedures provide a safe basis for design .
419.3.5 Approxi mate methods of anal ysis shall be
permitted where it can be shown that such methods provide
a safe basis for design .
419.3.6 In prestressed shells, the analysis shaH also
consider behavior under loads induced during prestressing,
at cracking load and at factored load. Where prestressing
tendons arc draped within a shell, design shall take into
account force components on the she!! resulting from the
tendon profile not lying in one plane.
419.5.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist

tensile stresses frolll internal membrane /"{)rL'c~;. to resi ~~ ~
tension from bending and twisting mOllle );: s, iu control
shrinkage and temperature cracking and as special
reinforcement as shell bOllndaries, load a!lachnll"llts ;11,;1
shell openings.
419.5.2 Tensile reinforcement s!lalJ be provided in two or
more directions and shall be proportioned Sl !("!; that it,:
resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the component
of internal forces in that dircction .
Alternatively, reinforcement for the mell1br;!i .'
i it .('
slab shall bc calculated as thc reinforcCI11C,i! )
resist axial tensile forces plus the. tensile fI~ :

friction required to transfer shear across ;.~ j<,
Association of Structural Engineers of tho r.)!iilipPllles
u ~ .'
;11 the.
til
.. . :;, ; , .:
CHAPTEH 4 .- SIrUCIUral Concrete
411t
of thc membrane. The asslimcd coefficient of friction. fl.

shall not exceed that specified in Section 411.8.4.3.
that the minimum development Icngth shalll>e 1.2/d hut not

less than 500 mm.
419.5.3 The area of shell relnforcemelll ,II <lny section as

measured in(wo onhogonal directions shall not be less than
[he slab shrinkage or temperature reinforce ment rcqllin::<1by
Seclioll 407. 13.
Splice developmenl lenglhs of shell

419.5.12
reinforcement shall be governed by the provisions of
Section 412, except thaI the minimum splice length of
tension bars shall be 1.2 limcs the value required by Sectioll
412 but nol less than 500 Illm . The !lumber of splices in
principal tensile reinforcement shi.lll be kept to a practical
minimum. Where splices arc nccessary. lhey shall be
staggered at least Id with not mord than onc-third of the
rcinforccment spliced at any section.
419.5.4 Reinforcemellt for shear and bending moments

about nxes in the plane of the shell slab shall be calculated
in accordn~l{'e with Sections 410. 41 I and 413.
419.5.5 The area of shell tension reinforce ment shillJ be
limited so tll3.1 the reinforcement will yield before either
crushing of concrete in compression or shell buckling can
lake place.
419.5.6 In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement
shall, if practical. be placed in the general directions of the
principal tcnsilc IllCll1br<Ule forces. Where this is not
practic<ll. it shall be pemlitted to place me mbran e
reinforce ment in two or more component directi ons.
419.5.7 If th e direc ti on of reinforcement varies more than
10 degrees from th e direction of principal tensile membrane
force, th e alllou rl( of reinforcement shall be reviewed in
relat ion to cracki ng at se rvice loads .
419.5.8 Where Ihe magnilude or Ihe pri ncipal lensile
membrane stress wit hi n th e shell varies great ly over Ihe
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total
tension Illay be concentrated in the regions of largest tensile
stress where it can be shown Ihal this provides ,I safe basis
for design. Howeve r, the ratio of shell reinforcement in any
portion of the tens il e zo ne shall no( be less than OJJOJ5
oased on the ovcrallthickness of the shell.
419.6 Construction
419.6. 1 \Vhc ll removHI of fonnwork is based on a specific

modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stability or
denection considermions. the value of the modulus of
elasticity E(. shall be detennined from ncxural tCSIS of fieldclired beam specimens. The Il umbe r of teSI specimens. the
dimcnsions of lest beam $pecimens .md test procedures
sha ll be specified by the engi neer-of-record.
41 9.6.2 Tile lolerances
ror
Ille shape
or ll1e
shell shall be
spl.!cificcl. If construction res ults in deviations from the
shape greater than the specified to lerances. an analys is of

the effect of the deviations shall be made and any required
remedia l aCl i ons shall be taken to ens ure safe behavior.
419.5.9 Reinforccmcllt required to resist shell bending

moment s shall be proportioned with due regard to Ihe
simultaneolls action of membrane ax ial forces al the Sil lllC

location. Where shell reinforcement is required in only one
face to resist bending moments. equal amOUJlts shall be
placed near both surfaces of Ihe shell even though a reversal
of bending moments is not indicated by thc an.tlysis.
419.5.10 Shell reinforccmelH in <tny direction shall nOI be
spaced farther <tp:1I1 than 500 mill. or fi ve limes the shell
thickness. Where the principal fllcmlmillc tensile stress 011
the gross co ncrete area due to factored loads exceeds
O.33 A.[( reinforcement shall nO! be spaced f.1rtllcr ap:lrl
(han three limes the shell Ihickn(:ss.
419.5.1 I Shell reinforcement at the jUllction oj' the shell

and slipporling members or edgc members shall be
anchored in or extended through sudl memhers in
accordancc wi th the requireme nls of Sc<.:l ioll 4 I 2, excep t
N;)\lonal Structural Code of l11H PI1ilippines
nih
[clition Volum e 1
4.112
CHAPTEr~ 4 --
SIr'UClural Concrete
420.3 Dcterminati on of Hcquircd Dimensions a nd

Material Properti es
420.3.1 Dimensions or the struc tural clcmcnts shall be
established at critical sections .
420.1 Nol ations

D
= dead loads or rcl.Hed inlemaJ moments and forces
1'.. = specified compressive strength concrete. MP"
"
= overall thickness of member in the direction of
action considered. mm
:: li ve loads or related internal moments and forces
:: span of member under load tcst, mm. (The shorter
I,
the
span for (wo-way slab systems.) Span is
smaller of (I) distance between centers of su pports
Il nd (2) clear distance between supports
plus
th ickness II of member. In Eq. 420-1. span for a
ca ntilever sha ll be taken as twice the disl.lncc from
support to canl ilcver end
6"w.~ = measured ma ximum dcOec tion. 111111 . Sec Eq . 420I
D.''''(I> = measured resid ual defl ec tion. mill. Sec Eqs. 420-2
and 420-3
6,m/l.i :: max ilJ")urn dcOection meas ured du ring th e second
tes t relative 10 the posit io n of th e strllctu re at the
beginning of the second test.
Illlll .
See Eq. 420-3
420.2 Strength Evaluatioll-Gcneral

420.2. 1 I r there is a doubt t h~ l .1 P;U1 Of all of a Slnlcture
rneets the safety requircments of this code, a strength
cv,IiUCl tioll shall he cCl ITicd out liS required hy the engineerof-record or building official.
420.2.2 If the effect or the strength deficiency is well
und erstood and if it is feasible to measure the dimcnsions
and material
properties required for analysis.
annlylical ev'llualions of strength based 011 those
mcasurelllelllS shall suffice. RC4uired data shall bc
determined in accordance with Section 420.3.
420.2.3 If the effect of the strength deficiency is not well
understood or if it is Hot feasible 10 es tablish the required
dimensions and material properties by measuremellt, a load
test shall he required if the struclUre. is lO remain in service.
420.3.2 Locations and siz.es of the rcinforcing b'lI'S. welded

wire rabric or tendons shall be determined by IllC.lsurcmcm.
It sh~ 1I be permitted to base reinforcemcnt k .::<ltiolls 011
avail:.I-:!e drawings if spot checks arc made ctll1fmni ng the
information on the drawings.
420.3.3 If required. concrete strength sl1;l1l Ii' based em
res ults of cylinder tests from the original ('on :,;li iCliulI l li
tests of corcs removed from the part of Ih;; SlI b iill e \vhere
the stre ngth is in question. For strength c.vaillillioll of :m
existi ng st ructure. cylinder or core l es t dat i: sha n be IIseti l';
es timate an equivalent 1/. The mel hod for o!,\,nning a l h~
testing cores shall be in accordance wit h AS I'M t .::! 2M.
420.3.4 If req uired . rein fo rce mcn t or tendon stre ngt h shall
be based 011 tensile tes ts of reprcscntntive sa mpl es of" the
material in th e stru ClUre ill ques ti on.
420.3.5 If the required dime nsions and material propcfli''" ':
arc determined throu gh measurements and ! (, sl il1!~. ,;)Id ;~
calculati ons ca n be made in accordallC(' wi th Seeti n:
420.2.2, it shall be permitted to incre;\sl. the stre.!lHtllreduction factor, <P. from those specified in Section 409.4 .
but the strength -reduct io n ractor, shalln ol hi.' illore !Iwo:
Tension.controlled sections. as dcfined in SCl.:l l0n
410.4.4 ....
1.0
Compression-controlled sections, as definn J in Section

410.4.3:
Mcmbers wilh spiral reinforcement ,:onl<mnill t .()
Section 410. 1OJ ..
...........
l).'iO
- 'j
Other reinforced members ........ .

Shear and/or torsion
Bearing 011 concrete ... _. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
t.
'! ~'n
420.4 Load Tcst Procedure

420.4. 1 Load Arrangement
420.2.4 If the doubt ahout safety or it pallOr :111 of a

structure involves deterioratioll il nd if the ohserved
response during (he 10;1(..1 test satisfies the :lcccpt ancc
criteria, the structure or part of the stfllcturC shal l be
permitted (0 remai n in !-icrvicc for <I specified lime pe riod . Ir
deemed nccessa ry by the engincer, peri odic reevalu ati olls
shall be conduc ted.
The number and arrangement of spans or p::nds I{)(It\1
sh<lll be selected to m'lximize the dcO ccti nn jllid ~ t r(' ~:~" ''\
th e critical regions of the struclUral d :.;.,
"
strength is in doub t. More than one te;..!! , '. i . ;H_"
shall be used if a single arnllll't'W .. ~ ! \\"~ 11
simultaneous ly res ult in ma xim uill V,ill! ( S ': ;i.:
(suc h as dcncction. rotat io n or stre ... :;) 1:,'.\ ',:;,:.,,' ."
demo nstrate the adeq uacy or the structure.
Association of Stwctural [: nglneers of t l H~ PI1ilipPIfles
II I
CHAPTER 4 - S truct ural Concrete
420.4.2 Load Inlensily

nle IOlal lesl load (incl uding dead load already in place)
shall nol be less Ihan Ihe larger of ( I), (2), and (3):
I.
1.15D + I.5L + O.4(L,or R)
2.
1.1 5D + 0.9L + I.5(L, or R)
3.
IJD
4 1 :3
420.6.2 Meas ured maximum de fl ect ions shall satisfy onc

of the following condit ions:
2
I!. <
I,
, - 20,000"
(420- 1)
(420-2)
The load faclor on Ihe Ii ve load Lin. (2) shall
b'i. p.ennilled
to be reduced to 0.45 except for garages, areas ' occupie~ :as
places of public assembly. and all Meas. where L is greater

2
than 4.8 kN/m . II shall be permitted to reduce L in
accordance with the provisions of the applicable code .
420.4.3 A load tcst shall not be made until Ihat portion of

the structure to be subject to load is at least 56 days old . If
If the measured maximum and residual denections, ~I and

I!., , do not sat isfy Eq. 420-1 or 420-2, it shall be permitted
[0 repeat the load test.
The repeal lest shall be conducted not earlier than 72 hours

afte r removal of th e first tes t load. The pOL1ion of (Ile
stnlcture tested in the repeat test shall be considered
accept able if defl ec ti o n recovery sa tisfied the conditiun:
the owner of the Slnlcture, the cont ractor, and all involved
parties agree, it sha ll be pCfll1iH Cd to make Ihe test at an
I!.
earlier age.
420.5 Loading Crileria
420.5.1 The initial value for all applicable respon se
measuremenls (such as deflecti on, rotation, strain, ~ Iip ,
crack widths) shall be obtained nOl more th an one hour
before application of the first
load increment.
Meas urements shall be made at locations where maximum
response is expected. Additional mcasurements shall be
made ifrcquircd .
, -<~
5
(420-3)
where ..1; is the maximulll deflection measured during the

second test relative 10 the posit ion of the stru cture at (he
beginning of th e seco nd tesl.
420.6.3 Stl1Jctural members tested shall not have cracks
indicating the imminence of shear failure.
420.5.2 Test load shall be applied in not less than four

approximately equal in cre ments.
420.6.4 In regions of structural members without tran sverse

reinforcement. appearance of stru ctural cracks inclined (0
the longi tud inal axis and having a hori zontal projection
longer th an the depth o f the member at mid-point of the
crack shall be cvalu<tled.
420.5.3 Un iform tcst load s hall be applied ill a ma nner to

ensure uniform distribution of (he load lransmiucd to the
Structure or portion of the stru cturc being tested. Arching of
the applied load shall be avoided.
420.6.5 In regions of anchorage and lap spli ces, the

appearance along the line of reinforcement o f II series of
short inclined cracks or horizontal cnlcks sh:ill be
evaluated.
420.5.4 A set of response measureme nts shall be made

after each load increment is appli ed and after the total load
has been app li ed all the structure for at least 24 hours.
420.7 Provisions for Lower Load Rliling
420.5.5 TOlal lest load s hall be removed immediately aner

all response measurements defined in Section 420.5.4 arc
made.
420.5.6 /\ sc t of [in al response measurements shall he
made 24 hours nfter the test load is remo ved.
If the s tructure under in vestigation does not satisfy

conditions or criteria of Sections 420.2.2, 420.6.2 or
420.6.3, the slnlcture may be permi lled for usc aI a lower
load rating based 011 the results of the load test or analysis,
if approved by the building offici'll.
420.8 Safety
420.8. 1 Lo;\d tests s hal! be cond ucted in stich a mann er as

to provide for sa fet y o f lire <l IHI stru cture dl lri ng the te:oil.
420.6 Acceptance Crit eria

420.6.1 The pOl1ion of the structure tested 5h;.111 show nc)
evidence of fai lu re. Spalling Clnd crushing of com pressed
concrete shall he considered all ind icat ion of failu re .
420.8.2 No safely IllC.ISUrC$ s hall interfere with load test

procedures or affect rcsulls.
' .
.' .,
.
.j '
" J
...
..
111
Nalional Structural Code of the Philippines 6 [(!ition Volume 1
4-114
CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
h ..,
1,/
1,111
421.1 Notations
::;
cross~sec(io n al
area
of
a st ructural
member
measured out-lo-out o f transverse rei nforcement,

mOl
::; area o f concrete section, resistin g shear. of. an

individ ual pier or horizofual wall segment , 111m2
:::; gross area of concrete section bounded by web
thickness and length of section ill the direction of
shear force considered, 111m2
A"I'
I,
I"
M,
::; gross area of section, 111m2

::;; effecti ve cross-secti onal area within a joint (see
Section 421.7.4_1) ill a pl ane parallel to plane of
2
rcinforccmcllI ge nerating shear in the joint. mm .
The joint depth shall be the overall depth of the
column . Where a beam frames into a suppOI1 of
larger width, the effective width of the joint shall
not exceed the smaller of:
II,.
A,,",
b ...
e
/"
[f.
t,
1,.
I.
Beam width pJU$ the joint depth; or
2.
Twice the smaller perpendicular di stance from

the longilUdin al axi s of the beam to the
co lu mn side. Sec Section 42 J .7.4.1.
;:: tOlal cross-sectional area of transverse rein forcement (i ncluding cross lies) withi n spacing, s.
and perpendicular ro dimension , 11(, mm 1
;:: lotal area of reinforcement in each grou p of
diago nal bars in a diagonally rein forced coupling
bea m. 111m 2
::;: effective co mpressive flan ge width o f a structu ra l
membe r, mm
= web wid th, or diameter of circular secti o n, mill
;:: di stance from the extreme compression fiber to
neutral <lxi s, sec Section 410.3.7, calculated for the
fa ctored axial force and nomi nal moment strength.
consistent with the design disp lace ment 0,,,
resulting in the largest neutral ax is d epth. mill
== effective depth of sect ion, mm
:::: bar diameter, mm
;; load effects of eanhquakc, or relat ed internal
momen ts and forces
::: specified com pressive strength of concrete. MPa
:::: sq uare root of specified compress ive strength of
concrete. MPa
specified yield strength of reinrorcement. MPa
:::spcci(icd
yield
strength
of
transverse
reinforcemen t. MPa
== cross-sec ti onal di mension of col umn core
mea sured
ccntcr-lO-center
of
con finin g
reinforce ment , rnm
M,
M,
M.
s
s,
,\'r
v,
:=
v"
v"
= height of ent ire wall or of the .segment of wall

considered, mill
= maximum ho rizontal spacing of hoop or cross tic
legs on all faces of Ihe colllmn , mm
= de velo pmcnt length fo r a straight bar
= deve lopmcnt length for a bar with a standard ho~k
as defi ned ill EG- 421 -6, mm
= c lear span measured face-to-face of Sll PPOflS , mm
= minimum length , measured fro m joinl face alon g
axi s of s tru ctuntl member. over whi ch trans It: '-Sl!reinforcement must be prov ided, mOl
== lenglh of enlire wall or of segmen t of wail
considered in direction of shear force, mm
= moment at the face of the joint, corresponding It)
the nominal flexural strength of the colum ,':
framing int o (hat joi nt , calculated for the factored
axia.l force, consistellt wit h the direction of the
lateral fo rces considered, resulting in (he lowest
nexural s trength , see Scction 421.5_2.2
== moment at the face of the joint. corresponding to
the nominal nexural st rength of the girder
including slab where in ten sion, framing inro that
joint. see Section 421 .5_2.2
= probable ncxuraJ stre ngt h of members, with or
without axial load. det ermined using th e properties
of the member at the joint faces assuming a tensile
strength in the longitudinal bars of at least 1.25.0.
and a stren gt h-reduction fac tor of 1.0
::: portion of s lab moment balanced by SUppOJ1
moment
= factored moment at secti on
== spacing of longitudinal reinforcemen t, transverse
reinforcement. prestressing tendons, wi res, or

anch ors. 111111, Sections 410 to 412. 417 to 421, and
423
::: moment , shear or axial force <H connection
corresponding (0 development of probab le strength
at intended yield loca ti ons based o n the govemiJl /'.
mechanism of inc\<tstic late ral deformation ,
considering both gravity and eanhquakc load
effects, Section 421
::: nominal nexural , shear or axial s tren gth of
co nnection, Section 42 1
== maximulll spacing o f transverse reinforcement
within 1(>1 mOl, Section 421
== longitudinal spacing of Inlllsverse reinforcement
withillthe length I... nun
:;:: nomin al sheilr strength provid ed by concrete.
Sections 408, 411. 413 and 421
= design shear force corresponding to the
development of the probable moment s trength of
(he memher, sec Sections 421.5.4 . 1 or 421.6.5.1
== nomin al shea r strengt h. Sec tions 408, 41 0, 411.
421,422 and 423
::: factored shear force .11 secti on, Secti ons 41 J h)
413,417 .42 1 alld 422
Association o f Stru ctural Engineers o f tile Ph ili ppi nes
a
a;.
: : : angle defining the orientation of rcinforcC Il1CIll,

Sections 411. 421 and 427
: : : coeffi cient defi ni ng the relative cont ribut ion of
4 -1 15
hoo ks of two successive cross ties e ngaging the same

longi tudinaJ bars shall be ahemated end for end.
concre te sirength 10 nomin:11 wall strength , Sec
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT. Total lateral displacement
Equation 42 1-7.
ex pected fo r the desig n-basis ea l1hqu ake, as required by Ihe

governin g code for earthqu ake-res istant design.
4.
::::: des ign di splaceme nt, mm , Sectio n 42 1
= rati o of nonprcstrcsscd tension reinforcement

= A/ (/>"). Secti ons 411. 41 3. 421 and 425 .
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS. Combinati ons of
:::::
fa ctored loads and forces specified in Section 409 .3.
ratio of area of distributed longitudinal

reinforce ment (0 gross concrete area
pC'1)cndicllinr
to th at reinforcement, Sectio ns 4 1 J, 414 and 42 1
PI
= r.ali o o f area of d istributed
transverse
rcinforccmCnllO gross concrete area perpcndi cuJar
(0 th aI reinfo rcement, Secti ons 4 1/. 414 and 421
p,
P.
::::: rati o of yo lume of spiral reinforceme nt to to lal

volu me of core co nfined by the spiral
rc inforccmcllI (measured oul-(Q-Qu t of spirals)
::::: ratio of area of distributed reinforcement
perpendicular lO the plane o f An to gross concrete
area A f~
= stren gt h-reduction factor
DETAILED
PLAIN
CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL
WALL. A wall co mpl yi ng with the requircn~e nts of Secti on

422 . including Section 422 .7.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A

STANDARD HOOK. The shonest distance between the
crit ical section (where the sirengt h o f the bar is to be
develo ped) and a tangent to the ou ler edge of the 90-degrce
hook.
DRY CONNECTION. A connection used between precast
me m bers whic h does not q ualify as a wet connec tio n.
FACTORED LOADS AND FORCES . Loads and fo rces

421.2 Definitions
modified by the factors in Section 409.3.
BASE OF STRUCTURE. Level at whi ch eaJ1hquake

motion s are ass umed to be- imparted to a building. Thi s
IIOOP. A closed ti c or continuously wound tic. A closed

tic can be made up of severa l reinforcin g c lem e nts, each
le ve l d oes not necessari ly coinc id e w ith th e grou nd leve l.
hav in g seismi c hooks at bot h ends. A co nt inuously wou nd

lie s ha ll have a seismi c hook a t bo th ends_
BOUNDARY ELEMENTS. Portions along " ructu ral wall

and
sl niclural d i<tphragm edges s trengthened
by
long itudina l and transverse re inforccment. Boundary
clements do not nccc....sarily requi re an increase in th e
thickness or the wall or di:lphragm. Edges of openings
wit hi n walls ilnd cli.lph ragms shall be provided wilh
bound ary e lements as requ ired by Secti o ns 421.8.6, and
42 1.9.7.5.
COLLECTOR ELEMENTS. Ele men t' thai ,erve 10

transmit the incrti a l fo rces within structural diaphragms to
members of the lateral-foree-resisting syste ms.
CONFINED CORE. The area within the co re defined by

h,..
CONNECTION . An clemenl that joins two precast

members or a precast mc mber an d a c asi -in-place me mber.
COUPLING UEAM . A horizonlal clement in plane with

and cOllllecting two she;lr walls.
C ROSSTIE. A COlll ill llOliS rein forci ng bilr havi ng a se is mi c
hook a l o ne e nd a nd H hook o( nO I less th illl 90 degrees wilh
at leas t six-d iamete r ex tens ion a t the o ther e nd . The hooks
sha ll e ngage peri pheral longitud ina l bilrs . The 90-dcg rcc
JOINT. The geometric vo lume common to illlcrsecling

membe rs.
LAT ERAL FORC E RESISTI. G SYSTEM. That ponion

of the struct ure co mposed of mem be rs propoJ1ioned to
resist forces related to cm11lqua kc e ffec ts.
LIGHTWEIGHT-AGGREGATE
CONCRETE.
AII -
li g htw eight or sand -li ght weight aggregate co nc rete made

with lightweight aggregates cO llfonning to Sec ti o n 403.4 .
MOMENT FRAME. Space frames in which mem bers and

j oi nts res ist forces th rough ncx ure, shear, a nd, axial force.
. Mo me nt fr am es shall be categorized as fo ll ows:
INTERMEDIATE MOM ENT FRAME. A cast-in-place
frame complyin g w ith the requirements of Section 42 1. 12.
ORI>INARY MOMENT "RAMK IX cast-in-place or

precnst concrete frame. complying wit h the requiremcnts of
Sections 40 1 through 418. a nd in the case of ordi nary
moment fra mcs ass ig ned to seismic zone 2, also complying
wit h 42 1.1 4 .
National S iru ctural Code of th e PI)ilippin es 6
th
Edition Volu me 1
4116
CHAPTER 4 - Struclural Concrele
SI'ECIAL MOMENT FRAME. A cast-in -place frame

complying with the require ment s of Sections 421.3.3
through 421.3 .7, 421.5 throu gh 42 1.7, or a pre"aS! frame
ORDINARY
STRUCTURAL
PLAIN
CO NOWT ;.:
WALL. A wall complying with the requiremen ts of Sec ti on
422, excluding Sec tion 422.7.
complying with the requirements of Secti ons 421.3.3

the req ui rement s for o rdinary mo me nt frames s hall be
ORDINARY
REINFORCED
CON C',m Tfi
STlWCTURAL WALLS. A wall cOll1pl yi ng w,' h the
s ati sfied .
requirements of Sections 40 1 thro ugh 418.
NONLIN EAR ACTION LOCATION . Th e ce llter o f the

region of yielding in Ilexufc, shcm o r axial action .
INTE RMEDIATE I'RECAST STRUCTURAL ' -"ALL .

A wall complying with all applicab le requil clllt" .1 s or
Sect ions 401 through 418 in additi on to 42 1.4.
through 421.3.7, 42 1.5 throu gh 421.7, 421.1 3. III addition,
NONLINEAR ACTION REGION . The member le ngth
over which nonlinear action takes place. It shall be taken as

extendi ng a distance of no less than 1112 on either s ide of the
nonlinear action locati on.
SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALL. 1\ cas t-'''-pb" ,. " ..

precast wall complying with the requi rements d .<~ 1io
421.3.3 through 421.3.7, 421. 8 and 421.15, as "pi;lie "!"., ;' .
SEISMIC 1100K. A hook on a Slirl1lp, hoop o r crosS!ie
addit ion to the requiremen ts for

concrete structural walls.
ha vin g a bend not less [han 135 deg rees . except tlh'll circular
hoops s hall have a be nd no t Jess th an 90 degree s. Hoo ks
s hall have a six-di ameter (but n OI less than 75 mill),
ex tension Ihal en gages the longi tudinal reinforcement and
projects into the interior of {he stirrup o r hoop.
SHELL CONCnETE. Concrete outside th e tra nsverse

rei nforcement confining the con crete.
SPECIAL
BOUNDARY
ELEMENTS.
1loundary
c lemctll s required by Sections 42 1.8.6 .3 or 42 1.8.6.4 .
SPECIFI ED
LATERAL
FORCES.
Lateral
forces
corres ponding to the appropriate di stributi on of lhe des ign

base shear force prescribed by the governing code for
eart hq uake-resistant design.

STRONG CONNECTION, 1\ con nection th at remains
e la stic. while the designated nonlinear acti oll regions
undergo inelasti c response under the Design I3i1si s Ground
Mot ion .
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS. Structural members,
such
Ooor and roof slabs. lhat tran s mit inertial forces

HCling in the plane of th e member to the vertical ele:ments of
the seismic-foree-resisti ng sys tem.
:'IS
STRUCTURAL TRUSS. I\ssemblage of reinforced

co ncrete members s ubjected primarily to axial forces.
STRUCTURAL WALLS. Walls proportioned to res ist
combiniltions of shears, mo men t. and axial fo rces induced
by earlhquake mo tion s. A s hear wed l is a struc tural wall.
Stru ctuftll wall s s hall be c.alegori zcd as foll o ws:
ordi nary rc in!"orced
STRUT. An clement of a structural diaphragH ' u. !

prov ide cOIH inui! y around an opening in lhe diap!iJ;lt;
Itl
TrE ELEMENTS. Elements that serve
to trm lSllIi r I :::nia

forces and prevent separation of building cornpO!:wh ;inch
as foo lings and walls.
WALL PIER. A wall segmen t with a hori w ll t3[ ;, I?n, ~

thickness ratio between 2.5 a nd 6, and whose cl t:ili l~ c j r ~ i:: ;,'
at leas t two ti mes its horizonlal length.
W ET CONNECTION. Uses an y of the "dici ng I, ,,'ti,,,,:o.

to
connect precnst members and uses ca s t-in-pl at:e
(;(l!Il'n!.h.~
or grou t to fill the s plicing closure. see Sections 4 2J .';

42 1.1 3.
Of
421.3 General Requirements

421.3.1 Scope
42 1.3.1.1 Section 4 2 1 contain s s pecial rcq uin:u){'},;': io~
design and construc ti o n of reinforced COl1 cn:h 11\ ;;1:' . :; t l:
a structure for w hich the design force:;. rda!'. ~ i 10
earthquake mOli ons. have been determined nn ill h.,,; , ~.,.
energy d issipal ion ill the nonlincar range of H.'!".PIW .
421.3.1.2 All structures shall he assigned to a :-;ch,lJ'J ic

in accordance with Section 401.1 .8. 1
.
,:OIlC
42L1.1.3 A ll members shall sati s fy n-q nirrn: n:!:. o f

Sections 401 to 419 a nd 422. S tructures :lssi !.: ::l" !' .. , L,:,'
zo nes 4. or 2 :-;hall al so sat is fy Scction s 4 2! : . . ,: iL!,.:.,t'.!;
42 1.3 .1.7 as appli cable.
Association of Structural En gineers of the Philipp ines
CHAPT ER 4 - Structural Co ncrete
421.3.1.4 Structures assigned to seism ic zone 2 shall

satisfy Sections 421.J.1 .2 and 421.3.1.7.
421.3.1.5 SlruclUrcs ass igned to seism ic zone 4 s hall
satisfy Sections 421.3. 1.2 through 421. 3. 1.7 and 421.9.
421.10. and 421. 1 I.
421.3.1.6 A reinforced concrete stru ctural system not

satisfying Il1c - reCJuirements of this Section shall be
pcnnillcd if it is demonst rated by expcrimclHal evidence
and analysis thaI the proposed sys tem w1J[ have strength
and lOughncss equal to or exceeding those provided by a
comparable monolithic reinforced co ncrete structure
satisfyin g this Secli <> l1.
4 t t 7
421.3.4.3 Speci fied compressive strength of lightweight
concrct c,!c' , shall not exceed 35 MPa unless demonstrated

by experimental evidence that structural members made
wi th that lightweight concrete provide strength and
toughness equal to or exceeding those of comparable
members made with normal weight concrete of the same
strengLh . Modificalion factor 1 for Iightwciglu concretc in
thi s Secti on shaH be in accordance with Section 408.7. (
unless specificall y noted o thclwi se.
421.3.5 Rei nforcement in Special Moment Fram es and

Special Structural Walls
421.3.5.1 Requirements of 421.3.5 apply to special' moment
frames and special structural walls and coupling beams.

421.3.2 Analysis and Proportioning of Structural
Members
421.3.2.1 The interaction of all st ru ctural and nOllsi l1lctural

members wh ich ntmcriall y affec l the linear and Ilonlincaf
I,
response of the Sll1Icturc LO earthqu ake motions shall be

co nsidered in the analysis.
421.3.2.2 Rigid mcmbers assum ed not to be a part of th e

latera1-forcc resisting system shall be permitted, provided
their effect on the response of the s.ys tem is considered and
accommooated in the stnlclural design . Consequences of
fflilure of sll1JcltJr<l1 and na nslruc tural members. whi ch arc
not a pan of thc l<Heral-fafre resi sting system, shall also be
considered.
421.3.2.3 StruclUr;'11 members. ex tending below the base o f
structure that arc required to tr<lllsmit forces rcsulling from
eanhq uakc effcct~ to the foull dill io n shall comply with the
requirements of Section 42 1 th at are consis ten t with Ihe
scismic-force-resisting system above fhe base of S\nlcturc .
421.3.3 Strength-Reduction Factors
Strength reduction faclO!'s shall be as given in Section

409.4.4.
421.3.4 Concrete in Speci ~11 '''loment Frames and

Special Structural Walls
42J .3A.l Req uiremcnts of Section 421 J.4 apply to speci al

1ll0lllCI1l fnlln cs and s pecia l struc tural walls and coupling
beams.
421.3.4.2 Compressive ~ t rcllg (h .f'.. shall be no! less (han
21 MPa.
421.3.5.2 Defomled reinforcement resisting earthquakcinduced flexu ral and axial forces in frame members.
structural walls, and co upling beams, shall comply with
ASTM A 706M. ASTM A615M Grades 280 and 420
reinforcement shtllJ be penni tied in these members if:

I.
The aClUal yield stre ngth based on mill tests does not
exceed the specified yield strength by more than 125

MPa ; and
2.
The ratio Of(l hc actual ullimatc tcnsile strength 10 the

actu al tensil e yield strength is 110t less than 1.25.
421.3.5.3 Prestressing steel resisting eart hquake-induced

flexural and axi al loads in fram e mem bers and in precast
stru ct ura l walls shall compl y with ASTM A416M or
A722M .
421.3.5.4 T he va lue of 1;., used to compu te Ihe amount of

co nfinem ent reinforccmelll shall not exceed 700 MPa.
421.3.5.5 The value of f y or h'l used in design of shea r
reinforcement sh<llJ co nform to Section 411 .6.2.
421.3.6 Mechanical Splices in Special Moment Frames
and Special Structural Walls
421.3.6.1 Mechanical splices shall be classified as either

Type 1 or Type 2 mechanical splices. as fo llows:
Type J Splice. Mechan ical splices shaH co nform to Section
4 12. 15.3 .2:
Type 2 S pli ce. Mecha nical splices shall conform to Secti on
4 I 2. 15.3.2 <lnd slw ll develop the specified (cns il e strength
of the spliced bar.
th
National Slructural Code of the Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
4-118
CHAPTEF14 -- Structural Concrete
421.3.6.2 Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be used
within a distance equal to twice the member depth from the

column or beam face for special moment frames or from
sections where yielding of the reinforcement is likely to
421.5.1.3 Width of member b". shall not be less than the

smaller of 0.311 and 250 ml11.
occur as a result of inelastic lateral displacements. Type 2
421.5.1.4 The width of member shall not exceed the \',!idth

of the supporting member, C2 plus a distance on each side of
thc supporting member equal to the smaller of (I) and (2):
mechanical splices shaH
I.
Width of supporting mcmber,
2.
0.75 times the overa!! dimension of sLJppOiting

member, CI.
be permitted to be used at any
C2,
and
location.
421.3.7 Welded Splices in Special Moment Frames and

Special Strnctural Walls
421.5.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
421.3.7.1 Welded splices in reinforcement

resisting
earthquake-induced forces shaH conform to Section
412.15.3.4 and shall not be used within a distance equal to
twice the member depth from the column or beam face for
special moment frames or from sections where yielding of

the reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of inelastic
lateral displacements.
421.3.7.2 Welding of stimJps, tics, inserts or other similar
elements to longitudinal reinforcement required by design
shall not be permitted.
421.4 Intermediate Precast Structural Walls
421.4.1 Seape
Requirements of Section 421.4 apply to intermediate

precast structural walls forming part of the seismic-forceresisting system.
421.4.2 In connections between wall panels, or between
wal! panels and the foundation, yielding shall be restricted
to steel clements or reinforcement.
421.5.2.1 At any section of a flexural member, except

provided in Section 410.6.3, for top as well as for bOllo;
reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement shall not h,
less than that given by Eg. 410-3 but not less than I Ab"ti/i
and the reinforcement ratio, p, shaH not exceed 0.025. /.'
least two bars shall be provided continuously both top aI' "
bottom.
421.5.2.2 Positive-moment strength at joint face shall nc
be less than one half of the negative-moment strengt! :
provided at that face of the joint. Neither the negative n,
the positive-moment strength at any section along men:',
length shall be less than one fourth the maximum mon!c;c(
strength provided at face of either joint
421.5.2.3 Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be
permitted only if hoop or spiral reinforcement is proVii:: (;
over thc lap length. Maximum spacing of the tranSV(', j
reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not exceL,;
d!4 or 100 mm. Lap splices shall not be used:
I.
Within the joints;
2.
Within a distance of twice the member depth from Ihe

face of the joint; and
421.4.3 Elements of the connection that are not designed to

yield shall develop at least 1.5S,.
3.
At locations where analysis indicates Ocxural yirldin;'.

caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
421.5 Flexural Members of Special Moment Frames
421.5.2.4 Mechanical splices shall conform to Secli(i),

421.3.6 and welded splices shall conform to SCClHJil
4213_7.
421.5.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.5 apply to special moment

frame members that form part of the scismic-force-rc 0 isting
system and arc proportioned primarily to resist flexure.
These frame members shall also satisfy the following
conditions;
421.5.1.1 Factored axial compressive force on the meillber,
P shall110t exceed (A,J/IO).
II ,
21.5.2.5 Prestressing, where used, shall sati ,'J,;' i I

through (4), unless used in a special moment frame ;;::;
permitted by Section 421.8.3:
I.
The average prestress, .I;"., calculated for an arca (

to the smallest cross-sectional dimension or [i l (',
member multiplied by the perpcndicular cro.\~;":: ' >: ;;,"
dimension shall not exceed the smaller or 3.5 1\-) i';i Hii\;
/' 110.
421.5.1.2 Clear span for the members, /", sha!1 not be less
than fOllr times its crfectivc depth.
Association of Stru(;tural Engineers of the Philippines
2.
Prestressing steel shall be unbonded in potential plastic

hinge regions. and the calculated strains ill prestressing
sieel under the design displacement shall be less than I
percent
3.
Prestressing steel shall 1101 contribute 10 more than oneqU<111er of (he posi (i ve or negative flexura l si rength at
the criti cal section in a plastic hin ge region and shall be
anchored at or beyond the exterior face of (he joint.
4.
Anchorages of the post-tensioning tendons resisting

cl.lrthquakc-indllced forces shall be capab lc of aJlow ing
tendons 10 wit hstand 50 cycles of loadi ng. bounded by
40 and 85 percent of the speci fied tensile' strength of
Ihe prestressing steel.
421.5.3 Transverse Reinforcement

421.5.3.1 I'loops shall be provided in the following regions
frame members:
of
I.
Over a length equal to twice the member depth

measured rrom th e race or the supporting member
toward midspan, at both ends of (he tl exural member;
2.
Over lengths equa l to twice the membe r depth on both

sides of a section where flcxural yielding is likely to
occur in connection with inelastic latcral disp lacements
of the frame.
421.5.3.2 The first hoop shall be located not more than 50

mill from the face of a supporti ng member. Maximulll
4119
shall have their 90~degree hook.1.i at opposite sides of th e

flexural member. If the longitudinal reinrorcing bars
secured by the crosslies arc confined by a slab on only one
s;ide of the flexural frame member, the 90-degree hooks of
the crossti es shaJI all be placed on that side.
421.5.4 Shear Strength Requirements
421.5.4.1 Design Forces
The design shear forces V,. shall be determ ined from
consideration of the static forces on th~ portion of the
member between faces of the joint. It shalt bc assumed that
momcnts of opposite sign corresponding to prob;'lble
flexural strength Mpr act at lhe joint faces and that the
member is loaded with the tributary gravity load along its
span .
421.5.4.2 Transverse Reinforcement

Transverse reinforcement over the lengths identified in
Secl ion 421.5.3.1 shall be propol1ioncd to resist shear
assuming V... :>:: 0 when both of the following conditions
occur:
1. The earthquake-induced shear force calculated
in accordance with Secti on 421.5.4.1 represents onchalf or more of tile max imum required shear strength
within those lengths;
2.
The
factored
axial compressive force
eart hquake effects is less than
incl udi ng
AJJ20.
spacing of thc hoops shallno{ exceed :

I.
2.
d /4 ;
Eight
limes thc di alllci er of lhe smallest longi tudina l
421.6 Special Moment Fr:une SUbjected to Bending a nd

Axia l Load
bars;
3.
4.
24 times the di.lllletcr of the hoop bars: and
300
421.6.1 Scope
The requirements of Section 42 1.6 apply to special moment
111m.
421.5.3.3 Wh ere hoops arc required, longitudinal bars on

the perimeter shall have lateral support co nfo rming to
Section 407. 11 .5.3.
frame members that rorm pan of the seismic-foree-resisting

systeJll and that resist a factored axia l compressive force PII
under any load combination exceeding AJ/ IJ O. These
rrame members shall also satisfy the conditions of Sections
421.6.1. 1 and 421.6 .1.2.
421.5.3.4 Where hoops arc not required , sti rrups wit h

seism ic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a distallce not
more than tll2 throughout Ille length or the member.
421.6.1.1 The short cst cros!Hicctional dimensi on, measured

strai ght line passing through the geometric ccnt~~i.d,
shall not be less (ban 300 mOl.
.
42],5.3.5 Stirrups or ti c.Ii required ({) fcs ist sheilI' shall bc

hoops ove r lengths of members il S specified in Sections
42 1.5.3.1.
421.6.1.2 The ratio of the shortest cross-sec tional

dimension 10 the perpendicular dimension shall not be less
011 II
Ihan 0.4.
421.5.3.6 I-loops in Oex ur:11 members shall be permitted to

be made lip or two pieces of rei nforcement: a stirrup having
seismic hooks at both ends and closed by a crosslic.
Co nsecutive crossties engaging the same longitudinal har
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum a 1
CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete
4-120
421.6.2 Minimum Flexural Strength of Columns
421.6.2.1 Flexural strength of any column shall satisfy
421.6.4.1 Transverse reinforcement as required in
Section 421.6.2.2 or 421.6.2.3.
421.6.4.2 through 421.6.4.4 shall be provided ov,,'"

10 from each joint face and on both sides of allY .'-;('.r' 'In
where flexural yielding is likely to occur as :\ i(~S!lj if
inelastic lateral displacements of the frame. Length /0 c;L:tll
not be less than the largest of (I). (2), and (3):
421.6.2.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall satisfy

Eq.421-1.
LM", " (6!5)LM"r,
(421-1)
where;
LM"c
= sum
of moments at the faces of the joint

corresponding to the nominal flexural strength of
the
columns
framing
into that joint.
Column flexural strength shall be calculated for
the factored axial force, consistent with the

direction of the lateral forces considered, resulting
in the lowest flexural strength.

.EM"" = sum of moments at the faces of the joint carfes
ponding to the nominal flexural strengths of the
girders framing into that joint. In T-bcam
construction, where the slab is in tension under

moments at the face of the joint, slab
reinforcement within an effective slab width
defined in Section 408.11 shall be assumed to
contribute to flexural strength, Mllb if the slab
reinforcement is developed at the critical section
for flexure.
Flexural
strengths shall be summed such that the
column moments oppose the beam moments. Eq. 421-1
shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both
directions in the vertical plane of the frame considered.
421.6.2.3 If SectioJl 421.6.2.2 is not satisfied at a joint, the
lateral strength and stiffness of the columns framing into
that joint shall be ignored when determining the calculated
strength and stiffness of the structure. These columns shall
conform to Section 421.13.
421.6.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
421.6.3.1 Area of longilUdinal reinforcement,

be less than 0.01 Ag or more than 0.06 Ai."
A~I>
shall not
~"'er'
) " )S
". ,,'h
I.
The depth of the member at the joint face {::;':H

section where flexural yielding is likely to ()(,.'" .
2.
One-sixth of the clear span of the member; and
3.
450 mm.
~e
421.6.4.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be provided :)y

either single or overlapping spirals satisfyi!ll' .'.;('.~ ,I,m
407.11.4, circular hoops, or rectilinear hOOf"~
:i!, Or
without crossties. Crossties of the same or smal!:" :';,. I .C
as the hoops shall be permitted. Each end of tll<' ; Tii" <e
shall engage a peripheral longitudinal reinfol' ';!~
r.
Consecutive crossties shall be alternated end for ::;j ilj, ig
the longitudinal reinforcement. Spacing of croSS!> iir
of rectilinear hoops, lin within a cross sccliu; <il :C
member shall not exceed 350 mm on center.
421.6.4.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement ;i~ Ji'I?, i ~IC
length (, of the member shall not exceed the snwllc,: l o( (i ),
(2), and (3):
I.
One-quarter of the minimum member dirncnsiuli;
2.
Six times the diameter of the smallest longiH!(Liiall, 'r;

and
3.
s", as den ned by Eq. 421-2.

s"~.IOO+
350~1r.)
( --'-3--
The value of Sf! shall not exceed 150 mill, and need not
taken less than 100 rnm.
'~e
421.6.4.4 Amount of transverse reinforcement required
ill
(I) or (2) shall be provided unless a lar!V:i'
,.,
;::;" ,I liin
required by Section 421.6.5.

421.6.3.2 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section
421.3.6. J and welded splices shall conform to Section
421.3.7.1. Lap splices shall be permitted only within the
center hall' of the member length, shall be designed as
tension lap splices, and shall be enclosed within transversc
reinforcemcnt conforming to Sections 42! .6.4.2 and
421.6.4.3.
I.
The volumetric ratio of spiral or ( i \,

I::
reinforcement, P." shaH not be less than rcqllircd by !
421-3:
P.
= O. I 2 f",. 1/;.,
and sha!ino( be less than required by

2.
{i::?l,
L~q
The total cross-sectional area of

reinforcement, A,,,, shall not be Jess tlv"
j-;,:;
!(
l['
'(Ii
Eqs. 421-4 and 421-5.
A,,,
= 03 (s/J,(",I(,,) [(AlA,,,) .-
IJ
..:\
CHAPTER 4 Slr" cl " ral COnCrel"
A,." = O.09(.rb,.!',./f,.,)
(42 1-5)
42).6.4.5 JJeyond Ihe Icngl h I" speeiJied in Seelion

421.6.4. 1, the colullln shall contain spiral or hoop
reinforcement salisfying Secti on 407. 10 wilh celller-IOccnler spacing. s, not exceedi ng the smaller of six tinllcs the
diameter of the smallest longitudinal column bars and 150
mnl, unless <I larger amou nt of transverse reinforcement is
req uired by SCClions 42 I .6.3.2 or 42 I .6.5.
the joint. In no case shall Vt' he less til'1I1 .the fac tored shear
determined by analysis of the s l!uctUrc.
421.6.5.2 Transverse reinforce ment over the length s 1//.
identified in Section 42 1.6.4.1, shHII be propol1ioned to
resist shear assuming VI" :;; 0 when both of the following
conditions occur:
I.
The earthquake-induced shear force, calculated in

accordance with Secti on 421.6.5. 1, represe nts onc- balf
or mo re of the max imum requ ired shear strength within
I,,;
2.
The factored ax ial co mpressive force, PII , including

ca nhquake effeels is less Iha n A,t,120.
421.6.4.6 Columns supporting react ions from discOlllinucd

stiff members. such as walls, shall satisfy (I) and (2):
J.
Transverse rei nfo rcement as spec ified in Sectio ns

42 1.6.4.2 lilrollgh 42 1.6.4 .4 shall be provided over
their full height beneath the le vel at whi ch the
di scontinuity occurs if the factored axia l com p r,~ssivc
force in these members, relmed to earthquake eCfect,
exceeds AJJ IO. Where design forces have been

magn ifi ed 10 aCColl nt for the over slrenglh of" the
ven ical clements of the seismic-foree-resisting system ,
Ihe limi l of AI.: /I 0 ,baJJ be illcrea,ed 10 A"f.'/4.
2.
Transverse reinforcement sha!1 ex tend illto the

di sco minllcd member at
least
Id
the l:lrgesl
longitudina l bar, where Id
is
determined ill
accordance with Section 421.7.5. Where th e lower
e nd of the colum n terminates on a wall , th e req uired
tran sverse re inforcemcnt shaH ex tend into the
wall il! . least Id of the larges t longitudinal column
bar at the pain t of terminatioll . Where the column
lerminHtcs on a footing or mat, the
required
tra nsve rse reinforcemcnt shall extend at least 300 Illm
into the footing or mal.
4121
421.7 Jointl) of Special Mom ent Frames

421.7.1 Scope
Requ irements of Section 42 1.7 npp ly to beam-column joints

of" special moment frames formin g pan of the seismicforce~resisting systelll.
421.7.2 General Requirements
421.7.2.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforce ment at the
joint face shall be determined by assu min g thaI the stress in
the flexurallcns ile reinforceme nt is 1.251;..
421.7.2.2 Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in a
column shall be ex tend ed to the far face of the confined
column co re and anchored in tension accordi ng to Seclion
42 J .7.5, and ill compression according to Section 4 J 2.
42) .6.4.7 If the concrete cover olll side the confi ning
In.lllsversc reinrorce me nt specified in Sections 42 1.6.4 . 1.
421.6.4 .), and 421.6.4.0 exceeds 100 mm, add itiona l
transvcrse reinron.:clllcnt shall be provided . Concretc ,cover
for addi tional transverse rei nforcemen t shall not exceed 100
mill and SI)ac ing of additional transverse rein forcc:mcnt
shall nOI exceed JO() 111m.
421.7.2.3 Where longi tud inal beam reinforcement ex ten ds

through a beam-colulllll joint, the column dimensioll
parallel to lhe beam reinforcement s hall not be less th an 20
ti mes [he diameter of the largest longilUd inal bar for
normal weight concrete. For lightweight conc rete, the
dimension shall not be less tha n 26 times the bar diameter.
421.6.5 Shear Strengt h Requirements
421.(,.5. I Des ign Funcs

The design shear force \I,. slwll be determilled from
cons iderat ion or [he max imulll forces thil t CtIll be gCllcr,lIed
at the faces of the joints al eac h e nd of the memher. T hese
j oint forces shall be determined using th e lllilxillltlHl
probab le moment strengths Ml'n at each end of the llle mber
associated wi th the range of facto red axial loads, PII, acti ng
on the member. The member shears need nOI exceed r. hose
det ermined from joint st rength s based on the probab le
mom e nt strength Mill of the transverse members rramil1g in
421.7.3.1 Join t (ransverse rci nfmcemen t sh~11I satisry either

Seclion 42 1.6.4.4( I) or 421.6.4.4(2), and , haJJ also sali,fy
Seclions 421.6.4 .2. 42 1.6.4 .3, and 421.6.4.7, excc pl as
permi Hed ill Secti on 42 1.7 .3.2.
421.7.3.2 Where membe rs frame into all four sitlcs of lhe

joillt ,Hld whe re e:lch mem ber width is: al lellst three-fotlllhs
the column width, the amOllrH or reinforcement specified in
Seelion 42 1.6.4.4( I) or Seclion 421.6.4.4(2) ,baJJ be
permitted to be reduced by half. and the spacing required in
Section 421.6.4.3 shall be permitted to be increased to 150
Natlollal Stru ctur,:ll Cocle of th e PllilipplfK~S G~h Edition Volume 1
4122
CHAPTE R 4 - Structural Concrete
mm within the overall depth II of the shallowest framing

member.
(42 1-6)
421.7.3.3 -Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the

column core shall be confined by transverse reinforcement
l,th for a bar with a standard 90degree hook shall not be les!-;
passing through lhe column that satisfies spacing

req uirements of Section 421.5.3.2, and requirements of
Sections 421.5.3.3 and 421.5.3 .6, jf such confin ement is not
provided by a beam framing into the joi nt.
421.7.4 Shear Strength
For lightweight aggregate concrete, the development Icngth ,

than the. largest of IDrib. 190 mm. and 1.25 times that
requ ired by Eq . 421-6.
The 90-dcgree hook shall be locatcd within the co nfincd
core of'l column or of a bound;lry member.
421.7.4.1 The nominal Sheil[ strength VII! of the joint shal!
421.7.5.2 For bar sizes 10 mill through 36 nun dimncter, lh l.!

development length II' for it straigh t har shall not be Ics~:
than the larger of ( I ) and (2):
nOt be taken greate r than the va lues specified below for

normal weight aggregate concrete.
I.
times (he leng(h required by Section 421.7.5.1 if (he

depth of the concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar
docs not exceed 300 111m: and
2.
times the length required by Section 421.7.5.1 if th e

depth of the concrete cast in one lift bencath the.
bar exceeds 300 mm.
For joints confined on all four faces . .. .. 1.7
.[1;Aj
For jOinls confi ned on three faces or on two opposite
faces
For others
J.2
.[1;A/
1.0.[1;A/
A member Ihal frames illio a face is considered to provide

con fin cment to the joint if at least threefourths of the face
of the joint is covered by the framing member. Extensions
of beams at least one overall beam depth" beyond the joint
face are permitted to be considered ali confining members.
Exteilsions of beams shall satisfy Sections 421.5. 1.3.
4 2 1.5.2.1, 42 1.5.3.2, 421.5.3.3, alld 421.5.3.6. A joint is
co nsid ered to be co nfin ed if such confining mcmbers frame
into all faces of the joint.
is the effective crosssec{jonal area within :t join!
computed from joint depth times effective joint width. JOlm
depth shall be the overall depth of the column , II . Effective
joint width shall be the overall width of the colum n. except
where a beam frames inlo a wider column, elTectivc joi nt
width , halllla< exceed the smaller of (I) alld (2):
AI
421.7.5.3 Strai ght bars terminated i.l1 a JOInt shall pa s~

through the con fined co re of a coluilln Or o f 11 boundary
mcmber. Any portion of the strai ght embedment length, 1.1
no t withi n the confined core shall be increascd by a factor
of 1.6.
421.7.5.4 If epoxy-coated reinforce ment is used, the
lengths in Sections 421.7 .5.1 through
421.7 .5.3 shall be multiplied by (he applicable factor
specificd ill Section 412 .3.4 or 412.6.2.
develo pment
421.8 Special neinforccd COllcrc(' Structllral ':Valls and

Coupling Beams
421.8.1 Scope
The requircments of Section 421.8 apply 10 special rein
forced concrete structural walls and coupling bealns serving
I.
Bea m width plus join< depth :
2.
Twice the smaller pcrpcndi culill' distan ce

longi tudinal <lxis of beam to column side.
as part of th e earthquake forcc-res isting sys tem. SpCCl;;!
from
structural walls constructed using precast conc rcte !-illa;!

'l lso comply with Section 421. 15.
421.7.4.2 For lightweight aggregate concrete, the Ilomimil

shear strcngth of the joi nt sh<lll not exceed thrccfollrths of
th e limits for l1 onn.tI wcight aggregate concret e given in
Section 421.7.4 .1.
421.8.2.1 The <'\i slributc(.\ web rcinfon.:cmcill fillios, p,. aod

P.!> 1'01' st ructural walls sha ll not be less than 0.0025, cxtl'11:
421.7.5 Developmcnt L..cngth of Bars in Tcns io n
P. 1Ild PII' shall be permitted to be reduced to that requlJ(d
421.8.2 Reinforcement
if (he design shc;u force. V" docs not exceed (1/12)A(.J.rr:..
421.7.5.1 For bur s i Zt~S 10 mill through 36 mm di . ullctcr, the

development length trll, for a bar with n st:lildard 90dcgrce
hook in normal weigh t aggregate co ncrete shall not be less
thall the largest of Rtf", 150 111m. and the length required by
Eq. 4216.
in Section 414.4. Reinforcement spacing c. lch W'L)' in

sl l1lclural walls shall not exceed 450 LlUll . Rcinfon:CJlICiil
co ntlihuting to V" shall he <.ontinuolls <l nd sh,dl be
distribulcd across the shear plane.
Associnlion o f Stnlciliral EngIneers of the Philippines
CHAPTEf~
: 421.H.2.2 A! leasl two curtain s of reinfon.: cmcm shall be
. used in a wa ll if V" cx.ncus ( 1/6)A"J.J1..

421.8.2.3
Reinforcement
jn
~Irtl (;turil l
willis
s hall
he
developed or spliced for ./;, ill tension in <It'cordance with

Section 4 12 except:
The effecti ve depth of the member rcfcrclH.:cd in
Sectioll 41 2. 11.3 shall be permitted lO be ta k(~11 as OJ~
/", for walls.
2.
The requ ire ments o f Secti o ns 412. 12. 412. 13. :lIld
412. 14nccd not bc .'iUlisficd.
. 3.
rcinforccmcill shall be 1.25 times the

for~. ill tension .
va lues caicuimcd
4.
4 123
one of the individual wall picrs, v" shall not bc takcn larger
th an 0.8311 ..... . where A, .... is the afca of t:oncrctc sectioll o f"
the indiv jdlml pic r considered .
421.8.4.5 For horil',ontal wa ll segme nts and coupli ng
beams, \/" slHl Ii not bc t;lkcn !<lrgcr than (5/6)A '1. JT,wherc
" ,.p is the area or a hori'l..olllal wall segme nt o r
cou pling bCH I11.
42) .8.5 Design for Flexural and Axia l Louds

421.8.5.1 Stru ctural walls and portions of such w<l lIs:
AI
localiolls where yield ill g of IOllgiludillal
reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of
latenll
dis placements, development
lengths of
Jongitudin<ll
-1 .. Structural Concrete
Mechanical sp lices of reinforcemellt shall conform
to
Section 421 ..1.6 and welded spli ces of re inforce me nt

sha ll co nfol1n to Section 421.3 .7 .
421.8.3 Design Force!)

The desig n s hear force lIu shall be outai ned from the liller;]]
load analYSis in accordance with the facto red load

combinat io ns.
subject 10 com bined flexural and axia l loads s hall be

designcd ill accordance with Sections -110.3 and 410.4
except thai Secti on 410.4 .7 .md the nonline'l:f strain
req uirements of Section 410.3.2 sha ll no( apply. Concrcte
<lJld developed longitudinal rei nforccmclll within effective
nangc widths, boundary clements, and th e wall web shall

considered effective. Th e effec ts of ope nin gs shalt be
considered.
b~
421.8.5.2 Unless <l morc de tai led analysi S is performcd ,

effective flan ge widths of nangcd sections shall extend
from th e face of the web a dist ance eq ual to the smaller of
one-half the di slanee to an adjacent wall web and 25
percent of the total wall height.
421.8.6 Boundary Elements of Special Ilcinfol'ccd
Concret e Structural Walls

421.8.4.1 Nomi nal shear strengt h VII of structural walls
shall not exceed:
\I" = A,,I CI,.(i112 ))',fJ; + p,f, J
(42 1-7)
where Ihe cocfficielll CI,. is 0.25 for 11.11". ~ 1.5, is 0.17 for
hJ/II" ~ 2.0, and varies linearl y between O.2~ and 0.17 for
11,11... belweell I .5 alld 2.0.
421.8.4.2 In Seelion 421.8.4. 1. Ihe val lie of ,"Iio 11,/1 .. lIsed
for dctemlining V for segments of a wall shall be the larger
of the rati os fOf th e entire wall and the segme nt of wall
co nsid ered .
421.8.6.1 The need for special boundary elcmenls at the

edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in accordance
wit h Secti on 42 1.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3. The requirements of
Seeli ons 42 1.8.6.4 and 421.8.6.5 also shall be salislied.
42J.8.6.2 This scction applies to walls or wall piers that
are effectively continuous from the base of structure to top
of wall aud designed to ha ve a single critical section for
fl ex ure and ax ial loads. Walls not satisfyi ng these
requirements shall be designcd by Section 42J .7.6.3.
Il
J.
c ~ .=--,/~._-
421.8.4.3 Walls Sh:lll have distril.nllcd shear rei nforcemcnt

providing resistan ce in \1,1,10 orthogonal directio ns ill [he
plane of th e wall. If" th e ratio h"l/". docs nOI e.xceed 2.0.
reinforccment I"il!io PI' sh;lil not be less than rcinforccmcnt
nltio p".
bounded by web th ick ness and length of section. For any
(42 1-8)
600(0.' '' .>

c in Eq. 421-8 corrcsponds 10 the largest ncu tral (IX is
depth calculated fo r the factored ax ial rorce and
nominal moment st rength consistent with the design
di splacement ()u. Ratio 6.. 111\1' in Eq. 421-8 shall not be
laken less Ih an 0.007.
421.8.4.4 Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a

Common lateral fortc, Vn shall not be assumed to exceed
(2/3)An' \~J whcre An. is the gross arca of concrete
Compression z.ones shal! be reinforced with special

bou ndary clcmenls where:
2.
Whcrc special boundary clements are required by

Seelion 421.7.6.2 (I), Ihe spec ial boundary elemenl
reinforcemen! shall extend YCl1ically fcom the crit ical
National Siruciural Code of Ihe Philippines 6"' Edition Volume 1
4-124
CHAPTEH
seclion
it
11 ~
Structural ConcretP.
dis{i\JlcC no! less than lhe larger Ilf / .._or M"
/(4 \I..}.
421.8.6.3 Structural walls nol designcd to th e provisions of
Section 421.8.6.2 shall have special boundary elcmen!s al
boundaries and edges arou nd openings of structural walls

where the Jll<lximuill extreme fiber compressive strcss,
corresponding 10 load combinations including earthquake
effect, E, exceeds 0.2/,:. The special boundary elcment shall
be permitted to be <l:<.;co ntinucd where the calculated
compressive suess is less than O.15f'~. Stresses shall be
calculated for the facLOrcd forces usi ng a linearly elastic
model and gross sect io)) properties. For wa lls wi th Oanges.
an effective nange width as defined in Section 421.8.5.2
shaH be used.
421.8.6.4 Where special boundary clements are required
by Section 421.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3, through (I) through (5)
shall be satisfied:
I.
2.
The boul1d~lry clement shall extend horizontfllly from

the extreme co mpression fibe r a dislance 110t less
than the larger of c ~ 0.11". <lnd (.'/2 . where c is th e
largest neutral axis depth calculated for the factored
axial force and nominal moment strength consistent
with "II;
In flanged sections, the boundary clement shall include

the effective flange width in compression and shall
extend at least 300 mm into (he web;
3.
Special boundary element transverse reinforcement

shal l satisfy the requirements of Se~ t ions 421.6.4.2
th rough 421.6.4.4, except Eq . 421-4 need not be
satisfied and the transverse reinforcement spacing limit
of Section 421.6.4.3(1) shall be one-third of the least
dimension of the boundary elemcl1I;

4.
Special boundary elemem transverse reinforcement at

the wall base shall extend in to the support at least the
42 J .8.6.S Where special boundary clements arc not rC'ql!in~d

hy Section 42 1.8.6.2 or 421.8.6.3, the following ~L.!l ;.;:
satisfied:
I.
If the longitudinal reinforce-ment ratio al thL'
;~',.i;
houndary is grealer than 2.8/];. boundary tran;; \'( ': .
reinforcement shall satisfy Sections 421.6.4.2, ,i;

421.8.6.4 (I). The maximum longitudinal spacing 0)'
transverse reinforc ement ill the boundary shall :, 01
exceed 200 Jlllll ;
2.
Except whell VII in the plane of the w;!l1 h; it.:,:;

{han ( 1/12)A .,.ff,.,
llorizontal
reinftl/"tt ;'i: ..;
Icrminaling 81 Ihe edges of struclUral Willi ; .'.il ! ~ I)u t
boundary elements shall have a stand mj -::L
engaging th e edge rei nforcement or the "dgc
reinforcement shall be enclosed in Ustirn1p:. ::".... ,}
the same size and spacing as. and spliced :l\ ik
horizontal reinforcement.
421.8.7 Coupling Hea llls
421.8.7.1 Coupling beams with aspect ratio 'II Id -;;' { :1):., 0

satisfy {he requirements of Section 421.5. The prm'i. ,;.'
Sections 421.5.1.3 and 421.5.1.4 shall not be rcquir",,~ Ii H
ca n be shown by analysis that the beam has adcqllal(~ )('(:1 '
"ability.
421.8.7.2 Coupling beams wi lh aspect ralio, /" II! ..-: 2, ;!Jld

with faclOrcd shear force V". exceed ing (1I3V \{ i ., A. ~
shall be reinforced with two intersecting grou /!"- 1)1 ;;i:lr:onally placed bars symmetrical about the midspan, \II ,j- ':s it
can be shown thaI loss of stiffness and strength ol Ihe
cou pling beams will not impair the vertical load c: 'I!lg
capacity of the structure, or the egrcss from the stnll:l f"',!J.
the integrity of nonstruclUral com ponents itlHi ; :t,.
connections 10 the Slnlcturc.
development length , ld' according to Section 421.8.2.3,
of the largest longitudinal reinforcement in the special

boundary element unless the special boundary element
terminates all a footing or mat, where special boundary
element transverse reinforcement sha ll extend at least
300 mill into the footing or mat ;
5.
421.8.7.3 Coupling beams nOI governed by Sr:! j"

421.8.7. 1 or 421.8.7.2 shall be permitted to he: .,' ; i' )
either with two intersecting groups of bars f-Y;: ,:!"';
about the midspan, or according to Sections ,1) 1 ~\ "through 421.5.4.
Horizon tal reinforcement in (he wall web shall be

anchored to develop the specified yie ld strenglh f".
wilhin (he confined core of (he boundary element;
.
;:f
CHAP1TH t1 ... StruC!lJr ..ll Concre le
421.8.7.4 Coupling beams rcillror<.t~d w ith (WO intcl'<;ccling

gro ups III' diagollally placed hm '~ sj'IIlIHelricid ilbout Ihe
midspan shall salisfy (I). (2). and cilher (3) nr (4).
Requirell1enls
Secti on 411.9 sh<lllnut allply:
or
1.
(42 1-9)
3.
Joint~
A ll construction joints ill structu ra l walls shall con form to

Section 406.4 and contac t su rr<lccs shall be roughened as in
Seclion 411.8.9.
The nominal shear stn..:nglh. VII' sImI! be determined
by:
2.
421.8.8 Construction
t112~
Etlch grmlp or di<lgonal hars shall consist of <I

minimum of four bars provided in two Of more layers.
The di clgonal bar.> sha ll be embedded into the wall not
less than 1.25 times (he devclopmem knglh ror /; in
te nsion.
Eile l! grou p of diagonal hars shall be enclosed

by transverse
reinforcement
having
oul-(o-out
d imensions not smaller than b,/2 in thc direction
paralicilO b w <lIld b,,!.') along the ot her si des, where b".
is the web width
the
coupling bcam . The
Iransvcrse re infon.:ement s/Jal l satisfy Sections
42 I .6.4 .2 and 42 I .6.4.4. shall have spacing meas ured
pHrailcl to Ihe diagonal bars satisfyin g Scclion
421.6.4.3 (3 ) and not exceeding six times th e diam cter
o r the diagona l bars, and shall have spacing of cJ'()~s ti es
or legs of hoops measured perpendi cu lar w tIle
diagonal bars no t excecding 350 mill . For Ihe purpose
of compu tin g AN for usc ill Eqs. 410-6 and 421 4, the
conCre te cover as required in Section 407.8 sha ll be
ass umed on ~lll rour sides of each grou p of diC!lgonal
bars. 11le transverse re info rcement , or its alterna.ti vely
conligured tr<tllsverse reinforcement satis fying the
spacing and volume rati o requirements of the
transverse reinforcement along the diagonals, shall
conti nue through the intersection of the diagonal bars.
Additional longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
shall be distributed around the bcam perimeter with
lotal area ill each direction not less than O.002blos and
spacing not exceeding 300 mm.
or
4. Transverse reinforcement shall be provided for the

entirc beam cross section satisfying Sections 421 .6,4,2.
421.6.4.4, ..md 421.5 .4.2. with long iludina l splicin g l10t
exceeding the smalle r of 150 mm and six times the
diamcter o f the diagoll<ll b<ll's, and with s paci r:lg o r
c rosslies or legs of hoops both verticall y and
horizon tall y in the plane of the bea m cross sect io n not
exceedi ng 200 mill. Each crosslie and each hoo")) leg
shall e n g~\gc a longitudinal b<lf of equal or ~a rge r
diameter. h sha ll be permined to configure hoo ps as
specifi ed in Seclion 421.5.3.6.
421.8.9 Discontinuous Walls

Co lumns supporting discontinuous structuml Willis shall be.
reinforced in accorda nce with Section 421.6.4.6.
421.9 Structural Diaphragms and Trusses
421.9.1 Scope
Floor and roof slabs acting as Sll1Jc lUral diaphragms to
Iransmit design :'lc tiollS ind uced by ea rthquake ground
motions shall be designed in accordance with this Sec ti on
42 1.9. Th!:-; Section also applies to strul S, ti l!s, c hords, and
co llector clements th at transmit forces induced by
earthquakes, as well as tru sses servi ng as parts of the
ea rthquake force-resisting sys tc ms.
421.9.2 Design Forces

The seismic design forces for stru ctural diaphragms shall be
obta ined from {he lateral load analysis in accorda nce with
the design load combinatiolls .
421.9.3 Seismic Load Path

421.9.3.1 Alr diaphragms and the ir connect ions shall be
proportioned and de(ai led iO provide for a completc lransfer
or fo rces to coll cclOr eleme nts and to the venical clements
of the seismic-foree-resisting syste m .
421.9,3.2 Elemcnts of a stnlctural diaphragm system thai
are subjected primarily to axial forces and used to transfer
diaphragm shear or flexura l forces around openings or other
discont in ui ljes, shall comply with the requirements for
colleclors in Seclions 421.9.7.5 and 421.9.7.6.
421.9.4 Cast-in-Place Composite-Topping Slab

Diaphragms
A composite-lopping slab Gast in place o n i.l precast noor or
roof s hall be pcrlllitt ccl io he used .1S a strucltlral diaphragm
provi ded the lOpping slab is rei nforced <111(1 it s connections
arc proportioned and detailed to pmv id e for a co mpl ete
transfer o f forces 10 chords, collector elements. and the
late ral-force-resisting system. The surface of the previously
hardened concrete all which the topping sial.> is placed shall
be clean, free of iaitance, and intenti onall y roughened.
tll
Edition Volum e 1
4 12()
CHAPT!: R 4 _. SlflIClliral ConOelC
421.9.5 Casl-in-Plner Topping Slab Diaphragms
res isting sys tem, thc limi! of 0.2[. ' shall he ilKTc;!scd to
A cast -in-pl;\(,.'c non-l:ompOSilc lOpping on a prccast Ooor or

roof shall be penni lied 10 serve as a struclural di'lphragm,
provided the casi-i n-place lopping acting alone is
propol1ioncd and dCI<ti led lO resisllhe design forccs.
O.v.', and the limit ofO . I S]; ' shall be increased In 0.4[,,' .
421.9.7.6 LongilUdi nal reinforceme nt

1'0.. colleclor
cleme nts iii splices alHI illlchoragc I'.ones shall have either:
I.
421.9.6 Millimum Thickness of Diaphrag ms
Co ncrete slabs and composi tc lOpping slabs servi ng as
sl ru clural dia phragms used to transmit ea nhquakc forces
shall flat be less than 50 10m th ick. Topping slabs placed
ovc r prccast Ooor or roof eleme nts, acting as structurn l
diaphragms and not relying on composite ac tion with the
precast elemclHs 10 rcsisl the design seismic forccs. sh:11I
ha ve thi ckness not less than 65 mm.
A minimum
cemer-to-ccnler spacing of three
longi tudin al bar diameters. but not less than 40 111111,
aI~d a minimum concret e clellr cover or two llnd onehail longitudinal har diameters, bUl nol less Ih'lI1 50
mill; or
2. Transverse reinforcement (is required hy Section

411.6.6.4. cxCCpl as required in Seclion 421.9.7.5.
421.9.8 Flexural Strength

421.9.7 Reinforcement
Diaphragms and port ions of d:aphragms shall be designed

for nex ure in accordance with Scctions 410.4 and 410.5
exeCI'I 111m the nonlinear di stribut ion of strain requ irements
of Section 410.4 .2 for deep bea ms need not appl y. The
efrects of openings slwll he co n s id c n~d .
421.9.7.1 The minimulll reinforcement rati o for structural

diaphragms slwll he in conformancc with Secti on 407. I 3.
Reinforccmcnt spaci ng each wa y ill non-post te nsioned
fl oor or roof sys tems shall not exceed 450 mill. Where
welded wire fabric is used as the di stributed reinforceme nt
to resist shear ill lOpping slabs placed over precast 0 001' and
roo f clemcnts. th e wires parallel to th e span of tile precas t
clcments shnl1 be spaccd nol less than 250 mill 011 ce nt er.
Reinforcemen t provided for shear strength shall be
cont inuous and shall be distributed uni fo rml y acro!>s thc
shear plane.
421.9.7.2 Bonded prest ressing tendons used as primary

reinforcement in diaphragm chords or collectors shall be
proportioned such that the stress due to dcsign seis mic
forces does not exceed 415 MPa. Pre-compress ion from
unbonded tendons shall be penniHcd to resist diaphragm
design forces jf a complete load path is provided.
For cast-in-pl ace topping slab diaphragms on precast 0001'

or roof members, An shall be computed using the thickness
of topping slab only for non-compositc lopping slab
dial-!~ragms and Ihe combined thi ck ness of cast-in-place
and precast clements for composite topping slab
diaphragms. For composi te topping Si;lb diaphragms. the
value of J/ used to determine \I" shall not exceed the
smaller ofJ/ for Ihe precnst membcrs andj;.' for the lopping
421.9.7.3 All reinforcement used to resist collector forces,

di aphragm shear. or flexural tension shall be developed or
spliced for j,. in tensioll .
421.9.7.4 Type 2 splices arc requ ired where mechanica l
splices nrc lIsed to transfer forces between the diaphragm
and the veni cal elemen ts of the seismi c-fo rcc-re:sisting
sys tem.
421.9.7.5 Collector clements with compressive stresses
exceedi ng O.2ft at any section shall have transverse
reinforcement , as in Sections 421 .8.6.4 (3) over thc Icngth
of the clemcnt. The special transverse reinforcement is
allowed to bc di sco ntinued at a section where the calcul atcd
compressive strength is less than O.15fe.
Where design forces have been amplified to accoun t for the
overstrcngth of the vertical elements of the seismicforce
Nominal shcar strcngth V" of stru ctural diaphra gms shall

not exceed:
v" = A,, 111!6)!.J/", +M,)
(421 10)
sl ab.
421.9.9.2
Nominal
shear
strength
diaphragms shall not exceed 0.66 A".
V"
.rr:.
of structural
421.9.9.3 Above joints bctwecn precast clements in

noncomposite and composite casti n.plncc lOpping :;Ial:
diaphragms, VI/: shall not exceecl :
"II = A'ff.JI
(421-1 l)
where A", is {olal area of shea r fric tion reinforcement wili,;n

topping slab, including both distributed and hOIl!H :" .~
reinforce ment, that is ori en ted perpend icular to joint s ;;. !' . '
precast system and coeffici ent or fri cti on, fl, is I.OA. wl J{;~ A
is given in Section 411.8.4 .3. At leas t onehal f of A,.' :: ,I
be uniformly distributcd along the length of lhe pOle.:
Association of Structu ral Engineers of the Philippines
.)
CHAPTER 4 " Structural Concrete
shear plane. Area of distributed reinforccment in topping

slab shall satisfy Scction 407.13.2.1 in cach direction.
421.9.9.4 Above joints betwecn precast elemerlls in
noncomposite and composite cast-in-place topping slab
diaphragms, VII shall not exceed the jimits in Section
411.8.5 where Ac is computed using the thickness of the
topping slab only.
421.9.10 Construction Joints
All construction joints in diaphragms shall conform to

Section 406.4 and contact surfaces shall be roughened as in
Section 411.8.9.
421.9.11 Structural Trusses
421.9.11.1 Structural truss clements with compressive
stresscs exceeding 0.2/,,' at any section shall have transverse
reinforcement, as givcn in Sections 421.5.4.2 through
421.6.4.4 <lnd Section 42! .6.4.6, over the length of the
clement.
421.9.11.2 All continuolls reinforcement in structuml truss
clements shall be developed or spliced for;;. in tension.
421.10.2.3 Columns or boundary clements of special

reinforced concrete structural walls that have an edge
within one-half the footing depth from an edge of the
footing shall have transverse reinforcement in accordance
with Sections 421.6.4.2 through 42 J .6.4.4 provided below
the top of the footing. This reinforcement shaH extend into
the fOOling a distance no less than the smaller of the depth
of the footing, mat, or pile cap, or the development length
in tension.
421.10.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift forces in
boundary elements of special rcinforced concrete structural
waHs or columns, flexural reinforcement shall be provided
in the top of the footing, mat or pile cap to resist the design
load combinations, and shall not be less than required by
Section 410.6.
421.10.2.5 See Section 422.11 for use of plain concrete in
footings and basement walls.
421.10.3 Grade Beams and Slabs on Grade

421.10.3.1 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal ties
between pile caps or footings shall have continuous
longitudinal reinforcement that shall be developed within or
beyond the supported column or anchored within the pile
cap or footing at all discontinuities.
42I.l0 Foundations
42I.l0.1 Scope
421.10.1.1 Foundations resisting caJ1hquake-induced forces
or transferring earthquake-induced forces between structure
and ground in structures assigned to scismic zones 4 and 2,
shall comply with Section 421.10 and other applicable code
provisions.
421.10.1.2 The provisions ill Section 421.10 for piles.
drilled piers, caissons, and slabs 011 grade shall supplement
other applicable code design and construction criteria. See
Sections 401.1.5 and 401.1.6.
421.10.2 Footings, Foundation Mats, and Pile Caps
421.10.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement of columns and

structural waHs resisting forces induced by earthquake
effects shall extend into the footing, mat, or pile cap, and
shall be fully developed for tension at the interface.
421.10.2.2 Columns
designed
assuming
fixed-end
conditions at the foundation shall comply with Section
421.10.2.1 and, if hooks are required, longitudinal
reinforcement resisting flexure shall have 90-degree hooks
Ileal' the bottom of the foundation with the free end of the
bars oriented towards the center of the column.
421.10.3.2 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal ties

between pile caps or footings shall be proportioned such
that the smallest cross-sectional dimension shall be equal to
or greater than the clear spacing between connected
columns divided by 20, but need not be greater than 450
111m. Closed ties shall be provided at a spacing not to
exceed the lesser of one-half the smallest orthogonal crosssectional dimension or 300 mm.
421.10.3.3 Grade beams and beams that are part of a mat
foundation subjected to flexure from columns that are part
of the lateral-force-resisting system shall conform to
Section 421.5.
421.10.3.4 Slabs-on-ground that resist seismic forces from
walls or colulllns that are part of the lateral-force-resisting
systcm shall be dcsigned as structural diaphragms in
accordance with Section 421.9. The design drawings sha!1
clearly state that the slab-Oil-ground is a structural
diaphragm and part of the lateral-force-resisting system.
421.10.4 Piles, Piers, and Caissons
421.10.4.1 Provisions of Section 421.10.4 shall apply to

concrete piles, piers, and caissons SUppoI1ing structures
dcsigned for earthquake resistance.
th
...
41 28
CHAPTEH:1 - Strutlural Concrele
421.10.4.2 Piles, piers, or caissons rl!~i~ ling tens iull loaus

shall ha ve continuous longitudill'll fcillforccmcill over the
length resisting design tension fon:cs. The longitud inal
reinforce ment shall bc dChlilcd to trans fer (c nsion forces
within the pile ca p 10 ~u pport cd structu ral members.
421.10.4.3 Where tension fon..: es illdu~cd by earthquake

effects <Irc transfe rred between pile cap or mal foundat io n
and precast pile by reinforcin g bars grou ted or p(l s t ~
il :wllled in the lOp of the pile, the grouting. system shall
have been Ul!lIIollstratcd by test to develop al least 125
perccnt of the speci ti.cd yield st rength of the b(tr.
421.10.4.4 Piles, piers. or caissons shall havc transverse

reinforcemellt in accordance with Secti ons 42 1.6.4 .2
through 42 1.6.4.4 at the following locati ons:
1.
AI the lap of the member fo r at teast .') limes the
member cross-sectional dime nsion, hut nol less than

1.8 Ill. below the bUllom of the pile cap:
2.
For the portion of piles in soil that is not capahJc o f

pro vidi ng lateral support, or in air and water, alon g th e
entire unsupPol1ed length plus th e length required in
Section 42 I. I O.4. 4( I).
421.10.4,5 For precast concrete driven piles, the length of

transverse reinforcemel1t provided shall be suffi cient to
account for potential varia tions in the elc.vlI tion in pile tips.
421.10.4.6 Conc rete piles, piers, or caissons in foundmions

supporting one- and two-story stud bearing wall
construction are exempt from the tr<'ll sverse re inforcement
requirements of Sections 42 1. 10.4.4 and 421.10.4.5.
421.10.4.7 Pile caps incorpora ting bauer piles shall be
designed to resi st the full compressive strength of the bauer
piles act ing as short columns. The slendemess effects of
balter piles shall be considered for the pOl1ion of ihc pi les in
soil that is not capable of providing laterClI support, or in air
or water.
421.11 Memoers not Designated a s Part of the SeismicForce-Resisting System
it shall be pcnllllll'd 10 ap ply th:.: rl lltl i rl..~lll l'l lI .... of Sect ion
421. 11.4 . For two way ~ " Ibs wi thuut bl"!.iI11S, slab.colul1l1l
cnnnccliolls slwli 1l1L'I,.' ! Ihe rl'lj ll in.: mcllIs of Secti o jj
42 1.11.6.
421.1 1.3 Wh ere !he indu ced 1ll011H!lIl s al1d shears under
design displ acement.. . of Sl"l"liOIl 421. I 1.2 combil1ed with
Ihe factored gravity mome nts and shean.; do 110 t exceed the
design moment and shear strength of tl w frame lIlelllber, thl~
conditions of Sc(.:tions 421.! 1. )', 1, 421 . 11.l .". an.; !
~2 I .1 1.33 shall he satisfied. For this purpose, the l:r:l vi h
IOCld combi nat ions ( 1.21)+ I .OL+O.2S) Or 0.9D. whicl ;t~"e r i~
critical. sh<lll bc used. The Imld fa ctor on the live b .ld !
sha ll be pcrmincd 10 he reduced 10 0.5 except for !!;!I;lt~\:::
areas occupied (I S places o r publ i<: asscmbly. ~I!ld all a r~:;i ~
where L is greater tha n 4.M kN/m:'.
421.J 1.3.1 Members with fac tored gravity a xi al forces !l O!
exceeding AJ'.I10 shill I satisfy Sections 42 1.).:?!. Stirrup'i
sha ll be spaced not more th;111 tll2 throu ghout the length of
thc mcmber.
421.11.3,2 Members with factored gra vi ty ax ial fo rces
exceeding A!lj"",/IU, shall satisfy Sections tl21.6. 3.J,
42 ! .6.4.2, and 421 .6.5. Thc rnaxilllllill longitud illr!! ~;paci : i }:
or tics shall be S,/ for Ihe full column height. The s}xlCi pg s,)
shall not exceed the smaller of six diamet ers of (ile ;\!\Wlk:,l
longillldinal bar e nc losed, and 150 111m.
421.11.3.3 Members wilh factored gra vity axiili fl)r('(~':
exceeding O.35 P" shall satisfy Secti ons 421.1 1.3.2 ;:J!d
421.6.4.7. The amount of transverse rei nforccBwHt providt,j
shall be one~ h alf of that required by Section 41.1 .(l.4.4 bUI
shall not exceed a spacing S(I for the full mem ber lenglh.
421,11.4 Ir the inuuccd moment or shell r II nd'-!" design
displacements , (5", exceeds Mn or V., (Il" t;:c; fram t
member, or
ind uced moments ;ue not cal: . l;M:d, H1C
co nditions of Sect io ns 421.11.4.1, 421 .11.:.2, au d
421.1 1.4.3 shall be sati sfied.
ir
421.11.4.1 Materia ls shaH
satisfy Sectio!1';
'12 1.~/.) ,
421.3.4.3, 421 .3.5.2. 42 1.3. 5.4, and 421.3 .5.) M"c1", ,';c;,1
spli ces shall sal isfy Section 421.3.6 <1Jld ,\ ,.Id;, j .. :"
shall smis fy Section 421.3 .7. 1.
421.11.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.11 appl y to frame members

not designated as part o f the se is mi c- force~ resis ling system
in structures assigned lO seismic zones 4 and 2.
421.11.2 Frame members assumed not to contribute to
lateral resistance, except two~way slabs without beams,
shall be detai led according to Sections 42 1.11.3 or 421.11.4
depending all the magnitude of moments induced in those
members if subjected to the desi gn di splacement, 0". If
effects of design displacements arc not explicitly checked,
421.11.4.2 Mem bers with faclored grav it y }lxi;!! fnrrl'.:-> not

exceeding AJ 'J IO shall stlli sfy Sections 'i
.!
,d
421.5.4. Stirrups shall he spaced a\ not I1lUI{~ Ihan dfl
througho ut the length of the membe r.
421.11.4.3 Members wi th factored gra vit y
exceedi ng Agref iO simll sati sfy Sections (t2 ~ .' J ~ ,
421.6.5 and 421.7.3. J.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Pllilippines
l.:J .t ,. '.
.il
CHAPTER
<'1 _.
Structural Concrete
4129
421.11.5 I)rccast C()Jlcrctc frame mcmbers assLJmcd llot to

contributc to lateral resistance, including their cOllnections,
shall satisfy (I), (2), and 0), in addition to Sections
reinforcement details in any span resisting moments caused

by lateral force /:.; shall satisfy Section 421.12.6.
421.11.2 through 421.11.4:
421.12.3 Design shear strength of beams, VII' and

columns resisting earthquake effect E shall not be less than
the smaller of (1) and (2):
J.
Tics specificd ill Section 42l.lJ.3.2 shall be provided

over the elltire colullln height, including the dl~pth of
the beams;
2.
Structural integrity rcinforcement, as specified in

Section 416.6, shall be provided; and
3.
Bearing length at support of a beam shall be at least 50

mm longer than determined frolll calculations
using bearing strength values from Section 41O.18.
For slab-column connections of two-way slabs

without beams, slab shear reinforcement satisfying the
requirements of Sections 411.13.3 and 411.13.5 and
providing V~ not less than 0.29
b;;d shall extend at least
four times the slnb thickness frolll the face of the support,
unless either (I) or (2) is satisfied:
I.
The sum of the shear associated with development of

nominal moment strengths of the member at each
retrained !!pd of the clear span and the shear calculated
for factored gravity loads;
2.
The maximum shear obtained froln design load

combinations that include earthquake effect E, with E
assumed to be twice that prescribed in Section 208.
421.11.6
JT
J.
2.
The requiremcllts of Section 411. I 3.7

using
the
design shear \lug and the induced moment transferred
between the slab and column under the design
displacement;
The design story drift ratio docs not exceed the larger
orO.D05 and [0.035 - 0.05(1I,,/II,)).
Design story dri ft rati.o shall be taken as the larger of the

design story drift ratios of the adjacent stories above and
below the slab-column connection. Ve is defined in Section
411.13.2. Vug is the factored shear force on the slab critical
section for two-way action, calculated for the load
combination 1.2D + I.OL + 0.2S.
The load factor on the live load, L, shall be permitted to be
reduced to 0.5 except for garages, areas occupied as places
of public assembly, and all areas where L is greater than 4.8
kN/m2
421.12.4 Beams
421.12.4.1 The positive moment strength at the face of the
joint shall be not less than one-third the negative moment
strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the
negative nor the positive moment strength at any section
along the length of the member shall be less than one-fifth
the maximum moment strength provided at the face of
either joint.
421.12.4.2 At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be
provided over lengths equal to twice the member depth h
measured from the face of the supporting member toward

midspan. The first stiITIlp shal! be located at not more than
50 mm from the face of the supporting member. Maximum
stirrup spacing shall not exceed the smallest of:
I.
d/4;
2.
Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal

bar enclosed;
3.
Twenty four times the diameter of the stirrup bar; and
4.
300 nun.
421.12.4.3 Stirrups shall be placed at not morc than dl2

throughout the length of the member.
421.12 Requirements for Intermediate I\1oment Frames,
Seismic Zone 2
421.12.5 Columns
421.12.1 The requirements of Section 421.12 apply to
intermediate moment frames forming part of the scismicforce-resisting system in addition to those of Sections 401
through 418.
421.12.2 Reinforcement details in a frame member shall

satisfy Section 421.12.4 if the factored compressive axial
load for the member does not exceed At/'jlO. If Pil is
larger, frame reinforcement details shall satisfy Section
421.12.5. Where a two-way slab system without beams
forms a part of the seisI1lic~force-resisting system,
421.12.5.1 Columns shall be spirally reinforced in

accordance with Sections 407.11.4 or shall conform with
Sections 421.12.5.2 through 421.12.5.4. Section 421.12.5.5
shal! apply to all colulllns, and Section 421.12.5.6 shall

apply to all columns supporting discontinuous stiff
members.
National Structural Code of 1I1e Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
4-130
CHAPTER
<1 ~.
Structural Concrete
421.12.5.2 AI both ends of the column. hoops shall be

pro vided ill sp:lci ng SOl Over "I length I" measu red from thc
j Oi lll facc. Spacing .\'/. sha ll !lot exceed the small e st oj' (I).
(2). (3). and (4);
or the
I.
Ei gh t times the diametcr

bar enclosed;
smallest longi tudinal
2.
24 times the diameter of the lic bar:
3.
OncllUlf of the smallest cross sccti oll <l l dimcn":')Jl of

thc column ; ~i,nd
4. 300 nlln
Lenglh I" shall nOI be less Ihall Ihe largesl 0 [:
I.
Onesixlh of the clear span of the membc.r;
2.
Ma xi mulll cross-sectional dimension of the column;

and
3.
450 mm.
421.12.5.3 The first lie shall be loc,ated at not more th an

s./l fro m the joint face.
421.12.5.4 Outside the length 1,,, spacing of transvcrse
reinforcem ent shall conform (() Sections 407.1! and
411.6.5. 1.
421.12.5.5 l oi nt reinforcement shal l conform to Section
411.1 2.
421.12.5.6 Columns
suppol1ing
reac ti ons
fro m
discontinuous stiff members, such as walls, shall be
provided wilh transverse reinforcement at th e spacing, s," as
defined in Seclion 42 1.12.5.2 over Ihe [ul1 heighI benealh
the le vel at whi ch the discontinuit y occurs if (he porti on of
fac tored axial co mpressive force in these mem bers related
to earthqu ake effects exceeds AJ,' flO. Where design forces
have becn magnified to aCCOUfl{ for the overstrenglh of the
vertical elements of th e seismic- fo rce~resi sting system, th e
limil o[ AI,' 110 shall be increased 10 AI,' 14. This
transverse reinforcement shall extend above and below the
columns as required in 42 1.6.4 .6 (2).
421.12.6 TWO-Way Slabs Without Beams
421.12.6.1 Factored sltlb moment at support incl udin g
earthqllake effects. E, shall be dctennined for load
combinalions defined by &15 . 409-5 and 409-7. All
reinforcement provided to re sist M,f, the pOlt ion of slab
moment balanced by sllppon mome nt shall be placed within
the column strip defined in Sectio n 4 13.3. 1.
421.12.6.2 Reinforcemcnt placed wililin the effect i Ve

widt h speci fi ed in Secti on 4 11.6.3.2 shall be propo l1 io ncd
to resis t 11A'I~loIIr Efl'cctive slab wid th for exte rior and co rnel'
l:l>nncclions shall not ex tend beyond the column face a
distance grc<I1c r than (", mcasured perpendi cular to the s lab
sp an .
421.12.6.3 Not Jess than o ne~halr of the reinforce ment in

Ihe column strip at SUppOI1 shall be placed wi thin the
effecti ve slab width specified in Secti on 4 13.6.3.2.
421.12.6.4 Nol less Ihan one-fou rt h o[ Ihe lOp
reinfo rcement at the support in the column strip sll<l ll be
cont inuous th roughout lhe span.
421.12.6.5 Continuous bottom reinforcement in the

column strip shall be not less than o ll c~third of the top
reinforcement at the support in the column slIip.
421.12.6.6 NOl less Ihan one-hair o[ all bOllom
re inforcement and all bottom column strip reinforcement at
midspan shall he cominuous and sllflll de velop its yield
strenglh, .f;., at f<lce of support as defined in Section
41 3.7.2.5.
421.12.6_7 Al di sconlinuous edges o [ Ihe slab all lOp and

bOllom reinforcement at suppon shall be and shall be
deve loped at the face of suppo n as defi ned in Section
4 13.7.2.5.
421.12.6.8 At th e critical sec tions for columns defined in
Section 4 I 1.13.1.2, lwo ~ way shear caused by factored
gra vity loads shall not exceed O.4Vr' where Vt shall be
calculmed as defined in Sectio n 411.1 3.2. 1 for
nonprestrcssed slabs and in Seelioll 411 .13.2.2 for
prestressed slabs. It shall be permitted to waive this
requi rement if the slab design satisfies requirements of
Seclion 42 1.11.6.
421.13 Special Moment Frames Using Precast Concrete
421.13.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.13 app ly to speciaJ mOlrw> t
frames conslm cteu llsin g precas t concrete fonning pari u[
the seismi c-forcc-resistin g sys tem.
421.13.2 Special moment frames with ductile COllllcctions
constru cted using precast co ncrete shall satisfy (I ) an d (2)
and all requirements for special moment frames constfllcll.(:
with cas l -i n~pl ace concrete:
I.
Vn for connecti ons computed acco rding to Sf' ''!!''''

4 11 .8.4 shall nOI be less Ihan 2V, . wh,-!e L ".
caleulaled according 10 Seclion 421.5 .4.1 or 4 ?.1.('. 5.1 ;
As sociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
r
2.
CHAPTER 4 Structural Concrete
Mechanical splices of beam reinforcement shal! be

located not closer than hl2 from the joint face and shall
meet the requirements of Sections 42! .3.6.
421.13.3
Special moment frames with strong connections
constructed using precast concrete shall satisfy all

requirements for special moment frames constructed with
cast~jn-placc
between locations where- flexural yielding is intended

to occur due to design displacements;
3.
Design strength of the strong connection, lS,!> shall be

not less than S/.;
Primary
longitudinal
reinforcement
shall be made
continuoLls across connections and shall be developed
outside both the strong connection and the plastic

hinge region; and
4.
Columns having clear height less than or equal

five times the dimension
shall be designed for shear in
(0
c,
421.15 Special Structural \Valls Constructed Using

Precast Concrete
concrete, as well as (I), (2), (3), and (4).
1. . Provisions of Section 421.5.1.2 shall apply to segments
2.
421.14.3
4131
For column-to-column connections, Sf) shall not be

less than 1.4 Sr. At column-to-column connections,
Mil shall be not less than O.4M,If for the column
within the story height, and V/I of the connection
shall be not less than Vr determined by Section
421.6.5.1.
421.15.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.15 apply to special structural
walls constructed using precast. concrete forming part of tile
seismic-foree-resisting system.
421.15.2 Special structural walls constructed using

precast concrete shaH satisfy all requirements of Section
421.8 in addition to Sections 421.4.2 and 421.4.3.
421.15.3 Special structural walls constructed using precast
concrete and un banded post-tensioning tendons and not
satisfying the requirements of Section 421.15.2 arc
permitted provided they satisfy the requirements of ACI
lTG-S.1.
421.13.4 Special moment frames constructed using precast

concrete and not satisfying the requirements of Sections
421.13.2 or 421.13.3 shall satisfy the requirements of ACI
374.1 and the requirements of (I) and (2):
1.
Details and materials used in the test specimens shall

be representati ve of those used in the structure; and
2.
The design procedure used to proportion the test

specimens shall define the mechanism by which the
frame resists gravity and earthquake effects, and shall
establish acceptance values for
sustallung
that
mechanism. Portions of the mechanism that deviate
from Code requirements shall be contained in the test
specimens and shall be tested to determine upper
bounds for acceptance values.
421.14 Ordinary Moment Frames

421.14.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.14 apply to ordinary moment
frames forming part of the seismic-foree-resisting system.
421.14.2 Bcams shall have at least two of the longitudinal

bars continuous along both the top and bottom faces. These
bars shall be developed at the face of SUppOIt.
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
4 132
CHAPTER 4 _. SUUGIUral C onCICIC
422.2.3 For unusual structures. stich as arches. underground

lItility structures. gmvity wall s. and shieldi ng wa ll ~
provisions o f (hi s section shall govern where appli cable. . ,
422.3
422.1 Nolalions
Ax
AI
A2
= gross <lrca o f sec ti on, mm:!
= loaded <lrca, 111m 2

= the .Irea of the lower base of the hugcsl frustum of
.1 pyramid,
b
b"
cone, or tapered wedge co ntai ned

wholly within the suppon and havi ng for its upper
base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I
vertical to 2 horizontal. mm?
:: widt h o f member, mm
:: perimeter of criti cal secti on for shear Ln footings.
8"
:: nominal bearing load
/" .
:: specified co mpressi ve stre ngth o f co nc rete. MPa

Sec Seci ion 405
Lim ita( i oJl~
422.3. 1 Provisions of Section 422 shall apply for design of

s tru ctural pl ai n concrete members defined as eith er
unreinforccd or cont;ti nin g less rr:;nforcement than t h;:o:
minimum alllount specified in thi s code ror rcinforl:(.,- !
concretc. See Secti on 402.
422.3.2 Use of structural plain concrete shall be limited to :
I.
Members that arc contin uously supported by soil or

supported by other structural members capablc of
provid ing conti nu ous vertical suppo rt ;
111111
ff :: square root of specified co mpressive s-t rcnglh of

con crete, MPa
average sp lilting ten si le strengt h of li gillweigh t
aggregate conc rete, MPa. See Secti ons 405.2.4 and
fr,
;;:
405.2.5
:: overa ll thickness of membe r, mil)
Ie
:: vertical distance between supports, mJl1
M"
:: l10 mi nal moment s lrc ngth at sec tion
2.
Members for whi c h arch act ion provides compress io n

under a ll condit ions of loadin g; or
3.
Wall, and pedestals. Sec Secli ons 422.7 and 422.9.
The usc of structural plain co nc rete co lumns shall not

pcnnitted.
422.3.3 Section 422 shall not gover n design and
installati on of cast -in -place co ncret e piles and pi ers
embedded in ground.
M il
:: fac tored moment
Pit
:: nominal slrength of cross sec ti on s ubj eci to
422.3.4 Minimum Specified Strength
compression
= nominal ax. ial load strength of wall designed by
Sec lion 422 .7.5
:: factored axial load at given ecce ntricity
:: c lasti c secti o n modu lus of secli on
:: nomina l shear strength at section
:: shear stress due to factored shear force al secti on.
:: fa ctored shear force at secli on
= ratio oflong side to short side of concentrated load
or reacti on area
:: strength redu c tion fact or. See Section 409.4 .5
Specified com pressive strength of plai n concrete to be used

for structural purposes shall not be less th an the larger of 17
MPa and that required fo r durability in Section 404.
p"...
P"
S
V"
Pit
VII
Pc
31
section
422.2 Scopc
422.2. t Section 422 provides minimum requirements for
design and constl11clion of s tructura l plltin co ncrCl e
members (cast-ill-place or precast).
422.2.2 Unl ess in conniel with the provisions of Sec tion
422, Ihe roll owing provi s ions o r Ihis Code sha ll app ly 10
s tructural plai n conc rete members: Sections 40 1. 1 through
407.6, 407.7. 1, 407.7.2, 407 .7.4. 407.8, 409.2.3, 409.3,

409.4.5, Secli ons 420, 421.10.2.5, 426.409.3, 426.409.3.5,
a nd Seclion 423.
422.3.5 Seismic Zones 2 and 4 . Pl a in concrete sh<lll not be

used jn Seismic Zone 2 o r 4 except where specificall y
permiHed by Seclion 422.11.1.
422.4 Joints
422.4.1 Contrac tion or isolatio n joint s shall be provided In
divide stflic lUra i plain concrete me mbers inln nr.x ur<l ;:Y
d iscontinuous elemcnt s. The size of each elcmcil l ~hall l ili ,:~
or control excessive buildup of internal strc ss(' ~ (;;; t: ~.t,) i,)
reslraint to movemelll s from c reep, shlink"gc and
temperature effecls.
422.4.2 In determining {he number ~nd loca l ion of
co ntrac tion or iso lat ion joints. co nsideration shall he given
: ,I
to; influence of climatic conditions ; ~(~k("li , ,
proponioning of mate ria ls; mix. ing, plll c i ll i~ :111\; , .
concrete; degree of restraint to movcment ; strC"'!'se': , hit. iO
loads to which an ele ment is subjeci; ;U\d tOn i." ,.
tec bniques.
Assoc iali ol1 of S tructura l Eng ineers of the Phil ipp ine s
j,
.j
CHAP rt:= n -1 . StrllcllI ra l Concrete
421-.5 Design Method

422.5.1
~
StmcIlIfil l plain
concre te
membe rs
shall
be
des igned for adcquill c sire ngth in accordallce WiLh the code,
/: using load faclOrs and design strength .

422.5.2 Factored load s and forces shall be in co mbinations
as in Section 409 .3 .
422.5.3 Where rcqtli rcd strength ex ceed s des ign slfcnglh,
rei nforceme nt shall be prov ided a nd the me m be r designed
as a reinforced cancreIC member in accord ance with

appropriate des ign require me nt s of the code.
422.5.4 Strength design of st ructural plai n conc re te
mem bers fo r fl exure and axia l loads shall be based on a
li near stress-stra in relationShip in both te nsion ~md
compress ion.
422.5.5 Ten sile strength of conc rete 5h<l ll be permitted to be
conside red in des ign o f pl ain co nc rete me mbers when
provi sions o f Sec ti on 422 .4 have bee n foll owed.
422.5.6 No strength shall be
reinforcement that may be present.
ass igned
to
subject In
p"
comrrcs~i()11
(422-4)
(JPt! ~ P"
whe re PI' is factored load Hnd
strc ngth co mputed by:
scc t ion~
422.6.2 Des ign of cross

shall he based on:
4- 133
11 is
1 (.32
-!,---)
11 ' JA
0.60} , I -
nomin al com p re~s i()11
(4 22-5)
I
where A 1 is the loaded mea.

422.6.3 Me mbers su bj ec t 10 combined nexure and axial
IOitd in compress ion sha ll be propol1i o ned such tha t On the
com press ion face:
1',,/ P" + M"/$M,
rI 1
(422-6)
and 011 the te nsio n face:
M"/S -Po/A, ,; OA2(!J.ff.
(422-7)
422.6.4 Design of recl1lll gular c ross sec ti ons subject 10

3hear shall be based on :
steel
(422-8)
whe re V" is factored shear and V'I is nominal shear stre ngth
422.5.7 Tens ion shall not be transmitted through ou tside

edges. constru cti on j oi nt s. contracti on joints. or isolati on
j oints of an indi vidua l pl a in concrete ele men!. No ne xural
contin uit y due to tc nsion shall be assumed be tween adjace nt
sU11cw ra l plain concrete e lement s.
422.5.8 When comput ing strength in flexure. combined
flex ure and axial load, and shear, the ent ire cross section of
a member shall be considered in des ign. except fo r conc rete
cast aga ins t soil where overa ll thi c kness II sha ll be take n as
50 mm less tha n act ual thi c kness .
compu ted by:
v,
= 0. 11 ).
ff. b,.h
(422-9)
for bea m acti on and by:
(422-10)
for two-way aClion but nol greater than O.22.l../T: bjl.

In Eq . 422- 10./1 correspo nd s '0 rat io of long s ide 10 short
sid e of co ncentrated load or reaclion area.
422.6 Strength Design

422.6.1 Design of cross sections subj ect to ne xure shall
be
b ased on
(422- 1)
where Mu is factored mo me nt and Mt! is nomiB<t1 moment
strength computed by
M"
= (51J2)J../T: S,"
(422-2)
if tension controls, and
422.6.5 Design of bearin g areas subject to compress ion

shall be based on:
(422-11 )
where E" is rac tored bearing load and Bn is the nomina l
bearing strength of loaded a rea A I computed by:
B,
= 0.85!"
(422- 12)
AI
except where the supporting surface is wider Oil all side.,

than the loaded area, design bea ring strenglh on the loaded
arca shall be m ultipli ed by
JA, I A,
(422-3)
if compressi on contro ls, whe re. Sill is th e correspondin g

elastic section modulu s.
National Stru ct ura l Code of the Philippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
bu. not more .han 2.
4134
CHAPTE~~
4 .- Sll"Uclural Concrete
422.6.6 Lightweight Concrete

Modification factor ), for lightweight concrete in this
Chapter shall be in accordance with Section 408.7. J unless
specifically noted otherwise.
422.7 Walls
422.7.1 Structural plain conCk .. .; walls shall be
continuously supported by soil, footings, foundation walis,
grade beams or other structural members capable of
providing continuous vertical support.
422.7.2 Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed
for vertical, lateral and other loads to which they arc
subjected.
422.7.3 Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed
for an eccentricity corresponding to the maximulll moment
that can accompany the axial load but not less than O. 1011. If
the resultant of all factored loads is located within the
middJc- third of the overall wall thickness, the design shall
be in accordance with Sections 422.6.3 or 422.7.5.
Otherwise, walls shall be designed in accordance with
Section 422.6.3.
422.7.4 Design for shear shall be in accordance with
Section 422.6.4.
422.7.6.2 [:xccpt as provided for in Section 422.7.6.3,

thickness of bearing walls shalJ [lO! be less than 1/24 the
unsupported height or length, whichever is shoneI', nor less
than 140 1111ll.
422.7.6.3 Thickness of exterior basement walls

foundation walls shall be nol less than 190 mill.
and
422.7.6.4 Walls shall be braced against lateral translation.

Sec Sections 422.4 and 422.5.7.
422.7.6.5 Not less than two lZl16 min bars shall be provided
around all window and door openings. Such bars shall
extend at least 600 Illill beyond the corners of openings.
422.8 Footing
422.8.1 Structural plain concrete footings shall be
designed for factored loads and induced reactions in
accordance with appropriate design requirements of this
Chapter and as provided ill Sections 422.8.2 through
422.8.8.
422.8.2 Base area of footing shall be determined from
un factored forces and moments transmitted by footing to
soil and permissible soil pressure selected through
principles of soil mechanics.
422.8.3
piles.
Plain concrete shall not be used for footings
OIl
422.7.5 Empirical Design Method

422.7.5.1 Stmctural plain concrete walls of solid
rectangular cross section shall be permitted to be designed
by E.q. 422-13 if the resultant of all factored loads is located
within the middle-third of the overall thickness of wall.
422.7.5.2 Design of walls subject to axial
compression shall be based on:
422.8.4 Thickness of structural plain concrete footings

shall be not less thall 200 mm. Sec Section 422.5.7.
422.8.5 Maximum factored moment shall be computed at
critical sections located as follows:
loads in
J.
At the face of the column, pedestal or wall, for footing

supporting a concrete column, pedestal or \vall;
(422-13)
2.
where Pu is the factored axial load and PII is nominal axial

load strength computed by:
Halfway between center and face of the wall, for

fOOling supporting a masonry wall;
3.
Halfway between face of column and edge of steel ba~c

plate, for footing supporting a column with SiC": ba~:c:
plate.
PfI~' = 0.45!' (~
A [1 - (-'"--)
32h
'I
(422-14)
422.8.6 Shear in Plain Concrete Footing

422.7.6 Limitations
422.7.6.1 Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis,
horizontallcngth of wall to be considered effective for each
vertical concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-center
distance between loads, nor width of bearing plus four
times the wall thickness.
422.8.6.1 Maximum factored shear shall be (:omputed in

accordance with Section 422.8.6.2, with loc;!!!"" of 'TiticnJ
r
section measured at facc of column, ped ,""
footing supporting a column, pedestal or \"' ,;
... ,)
supporting a column with steel base jlL~ '
section shall be measured at location deC! l:
422.8.5 (3).
CHAPTE R 4 - StruclUral Concrete
422.8.6.2 ShenT strength 01" structural plain conc rete

footings in the vicinity of concentnucd loads or react ions
shall be governed by the more severe of two conditions:
J.
Beflln actioll for footing. with a cr il ic~1I section

extending ill H pl<llle across the enlire fooling width and
loca ted at uistancc II from face of concentrated load
or reaction areil. For this condition, th e foolin g shall be
des igned in accordance with Eq. 4229;
,I
2.
Twoway <1ctiol1 for r~)(Jting. with 11 critical secti{J\1

perpendicular to plane of footing and l<leated so that its
perimeter bu is a minimum , but need not approach
closer Ihan "12 to perimeter of concentrated load or
reaction area. For this condition, the footing shall be
designed in accorda nce with Eq . 422-10.
422.J0.4 Prct:;:lst mcmbers sh311 he adcquiltcly bri.lced and

suppol1ed during erection to ensure proper alignment and
siructllml integrity until pcrmanent connections are
completed.
422.1) Plain C{)ncrete in EarthquukcRcsisting
Structures
422.1 1.1 Stl1lctures design ed for earthquake induced forces

in regions or high scislIlic risk or assigned to high sc i~mi c
performance or design categori es. e.g. zone 4, shall not
have foundation elements of slnicturaJ plain concrete,
except as follows:
I.
422.8.7 Circular or regular polygon shaped concrete

columns or pedestal s shall be permitlcd ( 0 be (reated as
squa re members with the same area for location of crilical
sections for moment and shear.
422.8.8 Factored bearing load, Bu, on concrete at contnct
surface between supportillg and supported member shall not
exceed design bearing stre ngth, B'I> for eilher surface as
given in Section 422.6.5.
supporting castinplace reinforced conc rete or

reinforced mas onry w(llls arc permitted provided the
foo tings are reinforced longit udina lly with not less than
two continuous reinforcing bars. Bars shall not be
small er than 12 111m diameter and shall have a 10lal
area of not less thall 0.002 times the gross crosssectional area of the footing . Continuity of
reinforcement shall be provided at comers and
intersections;
422.9.1 Plain conc rete pedestals shall be designed for

vertical, lateraJ .tod other loads 10 which they are subjected.
422.9.3 Maximum factored axial load, p., applied to plain

Concrete pedestals shall nOI exceed design bearing strengt h,
B", given in Section 422.6.5.
For detached one and Iwofamily dwellings three

stories or less in height and constructed with stud
bearing walls, plain concrete footings without
longitudinal reinforce ments supponing walls and
isolated plain concrete footings supponing columns or
pedestals arc permitted;
2: Fm all other Structures, pJain concrete footings
422.9 Pedestals
422.9.2 Ralio of unsupported height to average least

lateraldimension of plain concrete pedestals shall not
exceed 3.
4135
3.
For detached one and two-family dwellings three

stories or less in height and constructed with stud
bearing walls, plain concrete fou ndations or basement
walls arc pClluitled provided lhe wall is nOl less (han
190 nun thick and retains no more than 1.2 111 of
unbalanced fill.
422.10 Precast Members

422.10.1 Design of precast plain concrete members shall
consider all loading conditio ns from initial fabrication to
completion of th e structure, including form removal.
storage, transportati on and erection.
422.10.2 Limitatio ns of Section 422.3 apply to precast
members of plain concrete nOL only (0 the final condition
but also during fablication, transponation and erection.
422.10.3 precast members shall be connected secu rel y to
transfer all lateral forces into a structural system capable of
resisting such forces.
1h
Edition Volurne 1
4 136
CHAPTE R 4 -. Structural Concre te
DUCTILE STEEL ELEMENT. An
CkIllCIl' . ::,
" 'cnsile
lest cJongillioll of ilt least 14 percellt and 1'1'11:" 'ion '!1 area
of at least 30 perccnt. A steel CICll\t'1l1 . . \' I i;'g th e
requiremcnts or ASTM AJ07 shall he (':oll sili c.:!. ...~i: ~ ti le.
E DGE DISTANCE. The di s lHll tC from tl1(' ('che of the
conc rete surface to Ih e center of the nearest anc! ll)! :
423.1 Dcl1l1itiOIl'
ANC}fOH A stcel element either cast into co ncrete or
postinslallcd into a hardened concrcte mcmbcr und uscd to
transmit app li ed loads, including headed bolts, hooked bolts
(J- Or L-bolt) , hetl(jed studs, expansion unchors, or undercut
anchors.
ANCHOR GROUP. A
number
of
anchors
of
approximatcly equal effective e mbedment depth with each

anchor s pnced lit less than 311 tt frolll One or more adjacent
anchors when subjected to tension or 3.'0/ from one or more
adjacent anchors when subjec ted to shear. Only (ho se
anchors susceptible to the particular failure mode under
investigation shall be included in the group.
ANCHOH
PULLOUT
STRENGTH.
The
,treng.h
correspo nding 10 the anchoring device or a major

component of the device sliding o ut fro m th e concrete
withollt breaking out a
sub stant ial portion of the
surrounding conc re te.
ANCHOR RErNFOHCEMENT. Reinforcemen. used
'0
transfer the full design load from the anchors into the
structuralmcmber. Scc Section 423.5.2.9 or 423.6.2.9.
ATTACHM ENT. The SlruClUral asse mbly. eXlernal.o .he

surface of the conc reLe, that transmits loads to or receives
load s from !~Ie anchor.
BHITTLE STEEL ELEMENT. An elemen! wi.h a .ensile

{cst elongation of less than 14 percent, or reducti o n in area
orIess .han 30 percen or bo.h .

CASTIN ANCHOR. A headed bol . headed slUd. or
hooked bolt inst alled befo re plac ing concrete.
CONCHETE IlREAKOUT STRENGTH. The Slreng.h

correspondi ng to a volume o f concrete surrounding th e
anchor or grCllp of anc ll ors separating from the member.
CONCRETE PRYOUT STRE GTH. The slreng.h

con'esponding to formation of a concrete spa ll behind shon ,
stifr a nchors displ,lced in the direction opposi te 10 the
applied ~hca r force.
DISTANCE SLEEVE. A sleeve .hal encases .he ccn.er

part of an undercut anchor, a torque-conlrolled cApansioLl
anchor, or a di splacemen t-controlled expans ion anchor, but
does nOl expand.
EFFECTIV E EMIlf;DMENT DEPTH . The ("'crail <Iep,h

through which the 1I"' hor transfers force ,,', . .; !itllll the
surft)u lldi ng concrcte. The effective cmbct!ll i:',,! ,it pt h w ill
norma lly bc the depth of the conc retc fai l1lfl: su rface in
tension application s. For cast -i n headed an,l,t,; hl,li ' and
headed studs, the effective embedment dep n. ,: lW:;l,Ll red
from the bc.:1ring comac t s urface of the head .
EXPANSION ANCHOn. A post-in~la ll ed :tndHlr, inW l1ed

imo hardened co ncrete that tran sfers load s It ) :H r' lIi:, the
co ncrete by direct bearing or friction or bo;;;. ;:-::I,;:I.!;ion
anchors may be torque controlled, where tht ,- ,.j,a lisi,.Hl is
achicved by a to rqu e acting a ll the scrc\'.' 1)1' holt; or
displacemenl-comrollcd, where the expnnsil .j ,;", adlicved
by impact forces acting 011 a slee ve 01 !,jll!' and the
expansion is cOlllro ll cd by the length of trav ri Ld (1 )(: skeve
or plug.
EX I'ANSION SLEEVE. The ou 'er pOri "I' "" ""I'",,';on
anchor lhal i ~ forced outward by the cent c! p.t:!, lilli, l by
applied torque or impact, to bear against (Iii.: ~.j(h:~ oj the
predrilled hole.
FIVE PEH CENT FRACTILE. A s' a'iSlic,,!
Inill
Il 'Mlling
90 perccnt confidence that there is 95 percellt r.ll hiJ hilil y of

the actual strength exceeding the nominal strcllt:lil .
HEADED STUD. A steel anc hor confnUli ll!! to the

requirements of A WS D 1. 1 and affix.ed to it F !;;!< or si milar
stcel attachment by the stud arc welding III ,(!::S before
ca sting.
HOOKED BOLT. A casl -in ancho r ancholi't! 111::1111" by
bearing of .he 90degree bend (Lbol,) or
-Ild
(J-boIL) against the concrete, at its cmbed,k.1 (:lid. ;~ lId
I"" :. ,. "
ha ving a mi nimu m ell of 3dn .
POSTINSTALLED ANCIIOR. All alld ,.
',,, ::.:'
Ilardencd concrete . Ex pan~i on anchors ;!lld

ancllors arc ex<tmplcs o f post ~in s t ;l llcd allcJltll.,,>.
PROJECTED AREA, The area
011
ill
lIIHh,.. rcut
the fr('c ~'ud :';' I' of the

. ;(: Il
concrete member thaI is llsed to represent Ill;,

th c ass umed rectilinear failure surface.
SIDE-FACE BLOWOUT STRENGTH .. '.,

anchors with deeper cmbedmcnt but t h ij~L, :.! .. ,: ' .'. -:
corresponding to concrete spalling Oil tim side :-,1((; mOUlni
CHAPTEn 01 ..
Ihe ~mbcddcd head while no major bn:i1koul occurs al tile

lOp (;OJ)(.'fC le slIrfalc.
SPECIALTY I NSEnT. !'redesigned and prcrabricall:d
cast-in HIU.:h ol"s spccificillly designed for aUachmc.nt of

boltcd 01' sJolwd l orlllcltil)lls. Speciall y inscl1s arc oftt::n
used for handling. transportation. and erectioJl. but arc aiM)
u$cd for <lllchoring stru ctural elcments. Spcci.i1 ty inscl1s arc
11tH within the scope of this appendix .
SUPPLEMENTARY
REINFOR CEMENT.
Reinforcemcnt Ihat ac ts LO rC$train the potential con crete
breakout but is no t designed to transfer the full desi gn load
frol11 the a nchors in to the struclUral member.
UNDERCUT ANCHOR. A post -installed anchor that
develops its tensile stre ngth from {he mechani cal imerlock
prov ided by undercutting of the concrete at Ihe embedded
e nd of th e anchor. The undercutting is ac hi eved w it h a
spec ial drill before in stalling the anchor or alternatively by
th e anc hor itself durin g its installation.
StfUCtt)f(11
Concre te
4 13('
423.2.4 I_oad i.I PI>licmions that arc predominantly high l'ye le

fatigue or impact Jo'lds are nOI covcred by thi s secti oll.
423.3 General Ucquircmcnt s

423.3.1 Anchors and an c hor group s sh.1I1 be design ed for
critical dTccl:-. of f<.lc lon::d loads as de termincd by clastic
analysis. Plastic analysis ~Ipproaches are permitted where
nominal st rength is controlled by ductil e steel elcments.
prov ided th;1I dcformmional co mpiUibility is taken illlo
account.
423.3. 2 The des ign strength of anchors sl)<111 equal or
exceed Ih e largest required st re ngth colleUliltcd from the
applicable load co mbinati on s in Secti oll 402 .
423.3.3 W he n ancho r design includes earthquake forces for
structures ass igned {o seism ic zones 2 or 4, the <\dditional
requirements of Sectio ns 423.3 .3. 1 through 423.3 .3.6 shall
app ly.
423.3.3.1 The provisions of this sec ti o n do llOl apply 10 the
design of anchors in plastic hin ge zones o f concrete
structures under earthquake forc e~.
423.2 Scope
423.2.1 This secti on provides design requireme nts for
anchors ill concrete used 10 transmit structural loads by
means of tension , shea r. or a combination of tension and
shear be tween :
L
Con nected struc tu ral clcments; or
2.
Safely ~rc l a ted attachments and structural element s;.

Safety leI/cis specifi ed are intended for in -service
condi ti o ns, rathe r than for shon-lcrm handlin g and
construction conditions.
423.2.2 Thi s section applies to both cast-in ancho rs and

post -installed anchors. Specialty inserts. through bolts ,
multipl e anchors connected to a single steel plate at the.
embedded end of the anchors. adhesive or grouted anchors.
and direct anchors such as powder or pneumatic actuated
nails o r bolts, are not included. Reinforcement used a $ part
of the embedment shall be designed in accordance with
other pariS of Ihis section .
423.2.3 Headed stud s and headed bolts ha vi ng a geometry
that has been de mo nstrated to resull in a pu ll out strength ill
unc nlckcd concrete equa l or exceeding I .4NI , (w here Np is
g ive n by Eq . 423 -15) are include. Hooked bolts th "t have"
geome try {ha t has been demonstrated to res ult in a pu ll o ut
strength w ithout the bene lit of frict ion in unc racked
concrete eq ua l or exceeding 1.4NI' (where NI1 is given by
Eq. 423-16) are included. Post-installed anchors th at meet
the assessme nt requirements of ACI 355.2 arc in cluded.
The suit abili ty of the pos{~illsta!!cd anchor for use in
concrete shal l have been demonstrated by the ACI 355 .2prequ alifi cation tests.
423.3.3.2 Post~instal!cd structura l anchors shall be.

q ualified for use in cracked conc rete and shall have passed
the Simulated Seismic Test $ in accordance with ACJ 355.2.
Pullout strength N" and steel st rength of th e anchor in shear
\1$'1 shall be based on the results of the AC I 355.2 Simulated
Seismic Tests.
423.3.3.3 The a nchor design s trength assoc iated with
co ncrete railure modes shall be taken as O.7SN" <Ind
O.75VII' where f/Jis given in Section 423.4 .4 o r 423.4 .5. and
N" and Vn are determined in accordance with Sections
423.5.2, 423.5.3, 423.5 .4 , 423 _6 .2, and 423 .6 .3, assuming
the concrete is cracked unless it can be dClllonslralcd that
the co ncrete remain s uncracked .
423.3.3.4 Anchors shall be designed to be govemed by the
steel strength of a ductile steel element as determined in
<.Iccordance with Sections 423.5.1 and 423.6 . 1, un less either
Section 423.3.3.5 or 423.3 .3.6 is satisfied .
or
423.3.3.5 Instead
Section 423.3.3.4, the aHac hmcllt Ih31
the anc ho r is connecting to the struc ture sha ll be designed
$0 thal the att achment will undergo ducti le yieldin g at a
force level corresponding to lInchor rorces no greater than
the design st rength of ancho rs specified in Section
423.3.3.3.
423.3.3.6 As an alternative to Sec tions 423.3.3.4 and
423.3.3.5, it shall be permitted to take the design strength of
the anchors as 0.4 times the design st rength determined in
tll
National Structural Code: of tile Philippines G Edition Volume 1
4I:m
CHAPT H~
4 - Structural COI1(;Ielc
accordance with Secti on 423.3.3 .3. For the ,mehor.Ii of SlUt!

bearing wall s, it sh;J!I be permitted to take the design
strength of the anchors as 0.5 times (he desi gn strength
det crm ined i ll <lCCOrdallt'c wi th Secti on 421.3.J.3.
423.3.4 M~)(l il1t.: alion fa cto r ). for ligh t weight concrete ill
Ihis appendi x shall be in accordan ce with Section 408.7.1
unless specifically noted otherwi se.
423.3.5 Th e vallles ')!" ~.' used fo r cnk:u lation purposes in
this appendi x shall not exceed 70 MPn for cast-i n .:111ch9r5,
and 55 MPa for post installed anc hors. Testing is required
for posl-i nswlled anchors when used in concrete with J,.'

greater than 55 MPa.
423.4 General itequircments for Strength of Anchors
423.4. 1 Strength design of anchors shall be based either
on computation using design models that satisfy the
requirements of Secti on 423.4 .2. or 0 11 tes t eva luat ion using
the 5 percc nt rraclile of les t result s for the following:
1.
Steel strength of anchor in tension (Section 423.5.1);
2.
Steel st rength of anchor ill shear (Sec tion 423.6.1);
3.
Concre te breakout strength of anc hor
in
tension
(Sect ion 423.5.2);
4.
Concrete breakout
strength
of anchor
in
shear
(Sec li on 423.6.2);
5.
Pullout st rength of anc hor in ten sion (Sec tion 423.5.3);
6.
Concrete side face blowout strength of anchor in

tension (Section 423.5.4); and
7.
Concrete pryollt strength of anchor in shear (Section
consideration oj: (Nu,' eithe r N'h

or .pVCf'.\:
OJ'
fjJII,bx' and l'it hl'f V
cp
bm h N,,,, and
\','" (l rc prese nt
interaction crfccts shall be considcwd in accordance Witl;
423.4.1.3 Whe n
Seclioll 423.4.3 .
423.4.2 The nominal strength for any anchor or gro up of

anchors shall be based on design models that result in
predictions of strength in substanti al Clgrcelllcnl wit h reS ults
of comprehe nsive tests. The materials lIsed in the tests shall
be compati ble wit h the materials used in th e structu re. The
nominal strength shall be based 011 the 5 percen t fnlctile of
the basic individual anchor strength . For nomin.l l strengths
related to concrete strength. modifications for size effects,
the number of anchors, the effects of close spacing of
anchors, proximity to edges, dep th of the concrete member,
eccentric loadings of anchor group~. and presence or
absence of crack ing shall be taken into account. Limits 011
edge distances and anchor spacing in the design models
shall be consisten t wi th the lests [hill veri fied the model.
423.4.2.1 The effect of reinfo rcemen t provided to restrain
the conc rete breako ut sha ll be permitted 10 be included in
the design mod els used to satisfy Section 423. 4. 2. Where
anchor reinforceme nt is provided in accordance with
Secli ons 423.5.2.9 alld 423.6.2.9. o<1lclllalioll of Ihe
concrete breakout strengt h in accordance wi th Secti ons

423.5.2 alld 423.6.2 is 1101 requ ired .
423.4.2.2 For anc hors with diameters not exceedi ng 50
ITIm, and tensile embedments not exceeding 635 mm in
depth, the concrete breakout strength requirements shall be

co ns idered satisfied by [he design procedure of Sections
423.5.2 alld 423.6 .2.
423.6.3).
In additi on, anchors shall satisfy th e requi red edge

di stan ces, spaci ngs, and thi cknesses to p;ecl ude splilting
failure, as required in Section 423.8.
423.4.1.1 For th e design of anch ors, except as required in
Seclion 4 23.0.3 .
N,, ?: N u"
(423 - 1)
(423-2)
423.4.3 Resi stance to combi ned tensile and shear loads

shall be considered in design using un interaction
expression that re sults in co mput ati on of strength in
subs tantial agree men t wi th results of comprehensive tests.
This requirement shall be considered sati sfied by Section
423.7.
423.4.4 Strengt h reduc ti on factor for anchors in concrete
shall be as follows when the load co mbi nat ions Section >102.
nrc used:
I.
Anchor govcrned by strength of a ducti le steel clement
423.4.1.2 III Eq . (4231) and (4232) . N" and V" arc Ihe
lowest design strengths determined fmlll all appropriate

failure. modes. (W" is the lowest design strength in tension
of an anchor or group of anchors as determined from
considerati on of (>N.1(II fliNt"', either N.,'" or t/JNstJK' and either
Nrh or NCb&' V" is the lowest design strength in shear of
an anchor or a group of anchors as determined from
2.
a)
Tension loads ........ ..
b)
Shear loads
...... .................. .......0.75

.. ............................. .....0.65
Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel element

a) Tension loads ..
..................... ..... ....... 0.6)
b) Shear loads .....
................................. 0.60
Association of Structural Engineers of the Plli1 ippines
.~
CHAPTEH
3.
Andwr governed hy conc rete breakout, side-face

blowuul. puiloUl. or pryollt strength
Condition A
:I)
b}
Conditioll B
0.75
Shear load ...
0.70
Tension loads
Cast-in hC<lded studs,
<1 ..
St ructurell Concret e
423.5.2 Concrete llreakouf Strength of Anchor in
423.5.2.1 The nomill:.!l con cret e break o ut strength. N,-b or

N. bg , of i.l single anchor or group of anchors in te nsion shall
not exceed
I.
r or <I single anch or
(4234 )
0.75
0.70
Posi-instctlled anchors
with caiegoTY as determined
(rom ACI 355.2
2.
Category I
(Low sensi ti vi ty
to insta ll.lI ion and
high reliability)
0.75
Category 2
0.65
0.55
055
0.45
For a group of anchors

(423 5)
0.65
(Mediulll sensitivity
(0 installation and
medium reliability)
Category 3
(High se nsitivity
to j nstallation and
t 39
Tension
IWi.tdcd bolt s. or hooked
. bolts
~.
lower reliability)
Condition A appl ies where supplementary re inforcement is
present except for pullout and PTYOUI st rengt hs .
Condition B applies whe re supplememafY reinforceme nt is
nol present , and for pullout Of pryou t strenglh .
Factors IPu,N, Vlcd,N, Iflr,N, and '1'ep,N are defined in Sections

423.5.2.4.423.5.2.5,423.5.2.6. and 423 .5.2.7, respectively.
ANc is the projected concrete failure area of a single anchor
or group of anchors that shall be approximated as tile base
of the rectilinear geometri ca l figure that results from
projecting the failure surface ou tw ard 1.511,,/ from the
ce mcrlines of the anchor, or in the ClISe: of a group of
anchors, from a line through a row of adjacent anchors. AN,'
shall not exceed nANn" where n is th e number of tensioned
anchors in the group. AN,,, is the projected concrete failure
area of a single anchor with an edge distance equal to or
greater th an 1.511 rf
(423-6)
423.5.2.2 The basic concrete breakou t strength o f a single
anchor in tension in cracked conc rete , Nb , shall not exceed:
7' ilf'-'
r
Nh ~K , A,,J
423.5 Design Requiremcnts for Tensilc Loading
r;
(423-7)
where
423.5.1 Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension

423.5.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension as
governed by the steel, N~ , shall be evaluated by
calculations based on the properties of the anchor material
and the physical dimensions of the anchor.
423 .5.1.2 The no minal st re ngth of a single anchor Of group
of anc hors in tension. N 1fI shall not exceed
N'(I = nAn.N/ufI)
(4233)
where 11 is the number of anchors in the group, A st,N is the

effec ti ve cross -sectional area of a single anchor in ten sion,
mm 2, alld /Ilm shall not be taken greater than the smaller of
1.91,., and 860 MPa.
kc
kc
10 for cast-in anchors; and

== 7 for post -installed anchors.
The value of k, for post-installed anchors shall be pennilled

to be incfeased above 7 based on ACI 355 .2 pfoductspccific tests. but shall in no case exceed to.
Ahcrnativcly. for cast-in headed s tuds and headed bolts
wi lh 280 min::; hcf~ 635 mm. Nb sll3ll not e xceed
Nb ~ 16A ff: hJ '"
(423-8)
423.S.2.3Where anchors arc located less th an l .5hcf from

three or mOfe edges, the value of htj used in Eq. 423-4
through 423-11 shall be (he greater of c o.mll /l.5 and onethird of the maximum spacing between anchors within the
group.
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" ledition Volum e 1
414 0
1,.
CHAPTE H tl .. Struc lul a l COnCre !(>
423.5.2 .4 T hl.' Illodificmion fac lor fo r anc hor groups

loaded cc:r:r nlricall y in le ns ion. Iflu.N, sha ll be computed as:
(42)-9)
blll VI...Ns hall not be taken greater than 1.0.

If the 100Iding o n <til anchor group is suc h that onl y so me
ancho rs arc in lensioll, only those anchors that are in
te llsioll shall be cons idered when determi ning the
eccentricit y e 'N for usc in Eq. 423-9 and fo r the calculation
of N"" ill Eq. 423-5.
T ht cracki ng in the l'nllcrctc shull he co ntrolled by flex ural

reinfo rcement. dist ributed in accordance with Section
' 410.7.4. or eq ui valent (Tack con tro l shil ll he provided by
t"{lIlfi ning reinforceme nt.
423.5.2.7 The modificClt ion f"iICWJ" for poslins1:.ilJcd
anchors designed for uncrat' kcu concrete in accordan ce
with
Scctioll
423.5 .2 .6
wi tho ut
supplementary
reinforceme nt 10 control sp lillin g. IfI(P.N. sha ll be comp uted
as ;i~;lows usin g [h e c rit icii. dis tance Cat as lkfincd in
Section 423.8.6.
If e a,mil( ?
Car
thcn
V'",."" = 1.0
(423- 12)
In the case where eccentric loading exists aboul two axes .

the modi fi ca ti oll fac tor, Vlu.N. shall be compu ted for each
axi s indiv idually and the product of these (actors used as
V/~'.N in Eq. 4235.
423.5.2.5 Th e modification factor for edge effec ts for
si ngle anc hors or anchor groups load ed ill le nsio n,

shall be co mputcd as
th e ll
Jf
C(I,mil,
<
Vlcd,N=
1.0
Ifltd,N.
(423- 10)
1.5h rf
t Ilen
III
"f'
.4.,.,
e
= O.7+0.3~~~I 51
(423- 11)
It'f
423.5.2.6 For anchors located in a reg ion of a concretc

member where analysis indica te s no c racking a t service
load levels, the foll ow ing modificill ion fac tor s hall be
penni tted :
VIr,,.. = 1.25 for castin anchors; and
VI",\' :::: 1.4 for post-installed anc hors, whe re the
val uc of k, uscd in Eg. 423-7 is 7.
Where the va lue of kc used in Eq. 423-7 is taken from the
ACI 355.2 prod uct evaluation rcpon for post-installed
~lI1 cho rs qual ified for lISC in hoth c racked and unc rac ked
concretc, Ihc vallics of kc and V'c-.N shall be based all the ACI
355.2 produc t evaluation reporl.
W here t h L~ v<tl ll l" of k" used in Eq . 4237 is taken from the
ACI 355. 2 produc t eva lua tion repoll for pose-insta ll ed
an chors qu alified for lise in u ncracked conc rele , Vlc.N shall
be taken as 1.0.
(,123-13)
but II'(p,Nd eten n in cd fr olll Bq. 423- 13 shall flot be taken less
than 1.5h,,! Ie", . wherc the c ritic a l dista nce ell( is defined in
Scction 423.8.6 .
For all othcr cases, incl uding c<l st-in anc ho rs,
taken as ! .0.
1fI'l"1\'
shall be
423.5.2.8 Where an addi tiona l pl ate or washer is added at

th e head of the anc hor, it shall be permi tt ed to calculate the
projected area of thc fa ilure surface by projec ting the fa ilure
surfacc outwa rd 1.5h r/ from the e ffec tivc perimete r of the
plate or washcr. The effec ti ve peri meter shall not exceed
the valuc at a sec ti on projecte d outward more than the
thickness of the was her 01" plat c from the outer cdge of the
he'ld of the anchor.
423.5.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
accordance with Section 4 I 2 on both sides of the breakout
surface, the design strength o f the anchor reinforcement
shaIl be pemlincd to be lI sed in stead of th e co ncrete
breakout strength in determining Nn. A strength TI'duclion
fac to r of 0.75 s hall be used ill the dcsign of lilt: anchor
re info rcement.
423.5.3 Pull oul S trength of An ch o r ill T ellsi o n
4 23.5.3.1 The llomin;11 pull o ut strength
i ll te nsi on , N"", s hall Ilot exceed
where
qlc,l'
is defined in Section 4 23.5.3.6.
Wh en ana lysis indicates crackin g at service load lc:vels, lI' c,N

s hall be taken as 1.0 for both cas t-in anchors and postinstall ed anc hors. Pos t-installed anc hors shall be quali fied
for usc in crac ked concrete in accordan ce with ACr 355.2.
Association of St ructura l Eng ineers of the Philippin es
or a ~ illtk . ~ic h or
CH/,Pi t: .;
423.5.3.2 For post inswllcd expansion and undercut

iUH.:hors, (he values IIf Nf sh;11I he based 011 the 5 percen l
fracti lc of results of les ts perfo nncd and evaluated
Hccof(l ing 10 AC I 355.2. II is not permissib!e to c alc ul ate
the pull o llt strength in tcnsion fo r such anchors .
423.5.3.3 For singlc (,'<lsl*in headed studs and hemkd bolts,
it shall be permitt ed to ev.tluate th e pull ollt strength 'in
tcnsion using Sec ti on 423.5.3.4. For sin gle J. or L*bolts. it
li hnll be permill cd (0 evalu<Hc (he pullout strength in tension

lIsing Secti on 423.5.3.5. Alte rn a ti ve ly, il shall be pcrmitted
10 use values of Np based on (he 5 perce nt fractilc of tesls
pe rformed and evalu<llcd in thc sa me Ilwn ner as the ACI
355.2 proced ures but without the benefit of friclion .
T he pullout strength in tcnsion of a si ngle
headed stud or headed bolt, N,., for usc in Eq. 423* 14, sha ll
not exceed
423.5.3 .4
;lOchors sllsceptihle 10
nol exc..'cc<!
'''r.
it
'Ilk- rae!.: blo\\'OIII railu re N" ,_~ sllilll
.1") N
= I + _
(
., It- I
6{'
(42) I X)
,.11
,01
where s is [he distance be tween the otHer anchors al() ng tlie

edge, ,l1le! N ,II! is obtained from Eq. 423 *17 wit ho ut
modi fi cati on for a pe rpendkular edge d istan ce.
426.6 n csing Requirements for Shcm' Loading
423.6.1 Steel S trength of Anchor in Shear

423.6.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in shear as
governed by steel. \/",. shall be evaluated by calculalions
based on thc properlies of Ihe anchor material and the
phys ic'll di Ille nsio ns of the anchor.
(421- 15)
423.5.3.5 The pull out stre ngth in tension
or
a sin g le
hoo ked bolt. Nt" for LJ S~ in Eq . 423* J 4 shall not excee d
423.6.1.2 Th e no m inal strengt h o f a single anchor or gro up

of' anchors in shear, \/."" shall not exceed ( I ) thro ugh (3) :
I.
For cas(*in headed stud ancho r
(42316)
423.5.3.6 For an ancho r located in a region of a concrete

membc r where analysis indicates no c racking a t service
load levels, the following modi fi cat ion fa(,'tor shall be
pennilted
VIc,/'
(423 19)
where II is the Hu mber of anchors in the group, A .... 1, is
{he effec tive cross*secli ona l area of a si ngle anchor in
shear, mm2, and!."., shall nOI be taken grealer Ihan the
s malle r of 1.9[,." a nd 860 MPa.
2.
= 1.4
For casl*jll headed boh and hooked bolt anchors and

for posl*installed anch ors where sleeves do not extend
through the shear plane
(423-20)
Where analysis in dicates cracking at service load levels,

Iflc.p shall
be taken as 1.0.
where
II
is the number of anc hors
ill
the group, A ~ <"y is
the erfective cross*sccti otlal area of a si ngle " lIchor in
shear,
423.5.4 Concrete Side-Face Blowout Strength of a

Headed Anchor in Tension
and };'1<1 shall !lot be taken gre ater th an th e
smaller of 1.9};" and 860 MPa.
3.
For a sin gle headed anchor with deep
e mbed ment close to an edge (h.1 > 2.5c(,,) , the Ilomi n<l ! sidc*
face blowout strength, NJ/J. shall not exceed
423.5.4.1
2
1111n ,
For post-installed an chors where sleeves ex tend

through the shear pl ane, VJ<I shall be based on th e
resu lts of tests performed and evaluated accord ing to
ACI )55.2. Alte rn at ively,
perm itt ed to be used.
Eq .
42320
shall
be
(42317)
4 23.6.1.3 Where anchors arc used wilh bu ill -up grout
If en1 for the single headed anchor is Ic.."s than Jell" the
value of N. b shall be lIlultiplied by the faclor (I +(1121(.'",)/4.
where 1.0 S; en/cal ::; 3.0.
pads, Ihe nominal strengthS of Section 423.6. 1.2 shall bc

multiplied by.\ 0.80 factor.
423.5.4.2 For mulliple headed an cho rs wi lh deep

embedment close to 3n edge (II!,! > 2.5cll l) and anchor
spacin g less th an 6c a f, the nominal strength of thos e
National Structural Code of the Pili li ppines 6
lil
Eclition Volume 1
-,
"
423.6.2 COlltTcl<' Hn' a kou ( St r cn~th of AndlOr ill Shea r

42],6,2, I '1'11\' !lomina! connell' hrc<l koUI sl rcnglh. V,,, or
V'h.~' in shL:'u' o j' a single arKhO!' or group or anch ors sh;d l
no( exceed :
I.
nitiL."al. and all of Ihe s heil!" ~hall he assumed 10 be ca rri ed

hy Ihis nilica l anchor row "lo ne .
423.6.2.2 The haf\ il: (.'Ollcn:tl' hn'a knu t o;: trcngth in shear of
a sin gle anc ho r in Cfilcked COllncte, 1'". shall not e xceed:
(423 -24)
For shear f'on:c perpendi clliar 10 th e edge on a sin gle

anchor
A,.
(42J.2 1)
V.I, = -A '-. '"

'" "I V
'f' ",{.I' 'f' ,.1" '" ".I' "
H ..
2.
Por she Hr ro rce perpendicu lar to Ih ~ edge o n

anchor.-;
iI
4.
I,.
= h'f
I...
= 2d" for torque-controlled ex pan sion :tllchors with !l

distance sleevc separated from expansion sieev(..
and in no e'lse shall I,. exceed 81" in all c<lses.
group (If
(42).22)
3.
vi.here I,. is th e load -bearing length of the au t hor fe' ., 'l e<lr:
For shear force parallel 10 an edge. V,." or 1"'/;K she, ll be

prnnilted 10 be twice thl' v,lluc of the shear force
determined from Eq. 42l-2 1 o r 423-22, respectivcly.
wi lh (he. Sh Cili' force aSS trrn l~<..I (0 ,1(;1 pc'~rpc ndi cular to (he
edge and with 1,II"dy taken equa l (0 1.0.
For ilm.: hors loc a(l~d at a c"Orner, Ih e li rn itine nomin al
concrete bn~lIko Ui strength sha ll be delerJ11ine~j for cac h
edge, and the minimum va illc sh all be used.
lo r andlOfs wit h a consl;UH stiffness over the

full length o f embedded sec tio n. :.;uch as he,h ir;l
stud s or post-in sta lled anchors wit h one wInd;,,,
she ll ovcr full length of the embedmcnt de pth;
r-or cast-i n headed st uds, headed hoils , Or

hooked bolts OWl ;ire cOlltinuously we lded to s leel
nua chmcnts having a rni nimuill th ickness equal to the
greate r of I () 111m and half of the an chor diam eter, the bas i<'
co ncrete breakou t stre ngth in shear of C! sin gle anchor I \
crac ked concrete. VII> shall not exceed :
423.6.2.3
\I,.
Factors '1'., .1'. Vlr,I.\ ', VIr. I'. and '1III.v are defined in Sec ti o ns
423 .6.2.5.423.6.2.6, '123.6.2.7, and 423 .6.2.8, respeclivcly.
\I" is the basic co nc rete brea kout stre ngth va lu c for a si ngle
anchor. A I', is the projected areH of the fai lure surface on the
s ide of the conc rete member a l its edge for a single anchor
o r a group of ancho rs. It shall be permitted to e.valuate All,
as the base uf a tru ncated half pyra mid projec ted on the side
face of the me mbe r where the top of the ha lf pyramid is
gi ven by (he ax is of the anchor row selected as c ri tical. The
value of C-li shall be taken HS the di stance from the edge 10
this axi s. A ve shall not exceed AI,cOl where n is the number
of anchors ill the grollI'.
A vn, is the projec ted area for a single anch or in a deep

memb er with a di stance from edges eq ual or greater than
1.5ca ! in the directi on perpe ndicular 10 the shear force. It
shal! be permitted to evaluate AI'n' as the bnse of a ha lf
pyramid with a side length pamllel to the edge of 3c", and il
depth of 1.5c;o1
A \'r.o
= 4 .5('(I/)~
=066(1:rJd~Aff(C."Y'
(4232:> j
where I.. is defin ed in Sec tion 423.6.2.2. prov ided that:

I.
For grou ps of anchors. (he strength is dctermined bas...,)

on the strength of {he row of anchors farthest from I t,:
edge:
2.
Anchor spacing. s, is not less than 65 mm .: and
3.
Re inforcement is pro vided at the corners if Col'S 1.511,":"
423.6.2.4 Whcre an chors arc inO uellced by th ree or 111m,'.

e dges, the va lue of e(l} used in Eqs . 423 -23 through 423 - 2~)
shall not exceed th e greatest of: c,JI.5 in either dirccli O!; ,
h(l 11.5; and one ~ third of the maximum spaci ng bctwc(;:ij
anc hors within th e group.
423.6.2.5
The modifi cation faClOr fo r anchor grOt!p .
loaded ecccntric<.l ll y in shc ar.lf/rc. "\ shall he compu ted a~::
(42326)
(423-23)
\Vhcre anchors are loe,lted at vnrying distances frol11 the.

edge and !he anchors arc ' . . e lded to the attach ment so as to
di stribute the force to all anchors, it shall be pennitleo to
btu V'n."shall not be l<iken g reate r than 1.0 .
evaluate the strengt h based on the dista nce to the farthest

row of an cho rs frolll the edge. In this case, it shall be
permi tted to base the value of CII / on th e di stance from th e
edge to the nxi s of the fart hest anchor ro w that is selected as
[f the loadi ng on .111 an chor group is such that on ly some

anchors are loaded in shear in the sa me direction. {,'.Jy
those anchors th at arc lo aded in shear in the sa me dii :[' ; .. 1
shall be considered when determining th e eccentri ci ty ui
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of the Pllilippines
for usc in Eq. 423-26 and for the calculation of V,b/: in Eq.
423.6.3 Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in Shear
423-22
423.6.2.6 The modification factor for cdge effect for a
single anchor or group of anchors loaded in shear, VI,.,!.\' '
shall be computcd as:
423.6.3.1 The nOlllinal pryou( strength, V"I' or V,I'!: shalj no!

exceed:
j.
For a 5i nglc anchor

(423-30)
thcll
W~d,I!=
1.0
(423-27)
2.
For a group of anchors

(423-31)
If Ca2 < 1.5to'

where
(423-28)
k,p:= 1.0 for 11'1< 65 mm.; and
k,.p = 2.0 for h,/2:. 65
423.6.2.7 For anchors located in a region of a concrete
member where analysis indicates no cracking at service
loads, the following modification factor shall be pennilted:
/flc.v :::
1.4
/flcY
Wc,\'
Ncb and N cbg shall be determined frorn Eqs. 423-4 and 4235, respectively.
423.7 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces
For anchors located in a region of a concrete member where

analysis indicates cracking at service load levels, the
following modification factors shall be permitted:
WcY
mill.
J.O for anchors in cracked concrete with no

supplementary
reinforcement
or
edge
rcinforcemcnt smaller than a l2mm diameter bar;
=J.2 for anchors in cracked concrete with
reinforcement of a 12 111111 diameter bar or
greater between the anchor and the edge; and
::: 1.4 for anchors in cracked
concrete with
reinforcement of a 12 mm diameter bar or greater
between the anchor and the edge, and with the
reinforcement enclosed within stirrups spaced at
not more than 100 mm.
:::
Unless determined in accordance with Section 423.4.3,

anchors or groups of anchors that arc subjected to both
shear and axial loads shall be designed to satisfy the
requirements of Sections 423.7.1 through 423.7.3. The
value of N'I shall be as required in Section 423.4.1.2. The
value of VI shall be as defined in Section 423.4.1.2.
423.7.1
Vlh,V
- J1.5C.,
Il"
(423-29)
but Wh. vshall not be taken less than 1.0.

423.6.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is either developed
in accordance with Section 412 Oil both sides of the
breakout surface, or encloses the anchor and is developed
beyond the breakout surface, the design strength of the.
anchor reinforccment shall be permitled to be used instead
of the concrete breakout strcngth in determining VII. A
strength reduction factor of 0.75 shall be used in the design
of the anchor reinforcement.
2:: Nlw '
423.7.3 If V"" > O.2V" and N,," > O.21N,,, then
!i..",_ + N ,,,
N"
shall be computed
'fh.y -
rfNlI
423.7.2 If N,," S O.21N", ihen full strength in shear shall be

permitted: VII 2: V,w.
423.6.2.8 The modification factor for anchors located in a

concrete member where ha < I.Seal>
as:
If V,," S O.2V", then full strength in tension shall
be permitted:
~ 1.2
(423-32)
V"
423.8 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and

Thickness to Preclude Splitting Failure
Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors and
minimum thicknesses of members shall conform to
Sections 423.8.1 through 423.8.O, unless supplementary
reinforcement is provided to control splitting. Lesser values
from product-specific tests perfornied in accordance with
ACI 355.2 shall bc permitted.
423.8.1 Unless determined in accordance with Section

423.8.4, minimum center-to-center spacing of anchors shall
be 4d(l for untorqued cast-in anchors, and 6d(l for torqued
cast-in anchors and post-installed anchors.
423.8.2
Unless determined in accordance with Section

423.8.4, minimum edge distaaces for cast-in headed
anchors that will not be torqued shall be based on specified
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6~h Edition Volume 1
t:ovcr rC(lu in'tJlc llI S for rL'infIJlTC llh!ll t in St't'l ion 407.X. For
t:;lsling hC<ldcd 'lIlellOr..; tha i will Ill' torqued. lhe minim ulll
edge di st'!Ilt'cs ~ ha ll he 6d".
423.8.3 Unless determined in ;H..- c.:ordilllt"l' with Se<.: tion
423.8.4. millillltll1l edge distan u:s for posl -in slalicd anchors
shall be based on the gn':'l!t~f or specified COV\!!'
requircmellts for reinforcclllell[ in Sl.!c tion 407 .8, ur
minimum edge di slancc requireme1lts for the product s as
determined by "':'-s ts in <lCCOrdi! r ll: ('~ with ACI \"'1. 2, and
sha ll not be Ics.'\ lhan 2.0 limes the maximum aggregate
size. In Ihe <lhscncc of prodw.: t-spcd li e ACf 355.2 lest
infonnillioll. the min imum edge di stan cc shall be taken as
not less than :
UnderCUI anchors .... ... .. ... ....... .. .... .. ...... ..
SECTION 424
-~:?sl
ALTERNATE DESIGN METHOD
,
424,1 Notations
Some notat io n defi nitiolls arc modi li ed from thost" in lh~~
main body or th e t'otl e for ~pccific lise in Ihe :q)plication of'
Sec (ion 424.
;\J:
A,.
Af
A}
... 6d"
Torque-controll cd anchors ...... ... ......... ..... ... .... . 8d"

Displaccmelll-controlJeu ,.II1CI1OI"S ....... .. .
..... IOd"
423.8.4 For a nc hors where install at ion docs not prod uce a
s pl itti ng forcc a nd tha t wi ll remain ulltorqued , if the edge
distallce or spacing is less th an those speci fied in Sections
423.8.1 to 423,8.3, calculations sha ll be performed by
substituting ror d" a smaller va lue d'" (hal meets the
requirements of Sections 423. 8, I to 423.8 .3. Calc ulated
forccs applied to the anchor shall be limited to th e va lues
corresponding to an anchor havin g a diameter of cI'O'
h"
b"
d
E,.
E,
j',.
""1
423.8.5 The va lue of

for an ex pansioll or undercut
posi- installed anchor shall not exceed the grealcr of 2/3 o(
thc member thickness and th e member thi ckn ess minus 100
mm.
f,
423.8.6 Unless determined from tension tesls ill
accordance with ACI 355.2. the cri tical edge distance, clI("
shall nol be takcn less tha n:
f,
M
/I
U ndcrcut anchors ....

Torque~con troJled
2.511"
anchors
.... 4h(,/
Displacement-controlled an c hors ...
. 4h~!
423.8.7 Proj ect drawings and project specifications shall

specify use of anchors with a minimum edge dist ance as
assumed in des ign.
I'
423.9
In s lal1 ~lti o n
of Anchors
423.9.1 Anchors shall be in stalled in accordance with the

proj ect
drawings,
project
spcc ifi cations
and/or
manufacturer's installation procedures.
PI"
= gross an.:a or secti on, mm 2

o f shear rcinforccmclH wit hin
a
distalH.;c x. mill:!
= londed area
= maxi mum urea of the portion of Ill'.' upponing
surface thilt is geomctrica lly si mil ar to and
conccntri c with the loaded area
= perimcter of critical scction for slabs and
footings, mm
= wcb width , Of diametcr of circultlr s('.ct in n, mm
= dislanc.:c from ext reme co mpressioll flbcr to
centroid o( tension reinforcement, mill
= modulu s of elasli city of concre te. IviPa. See
Secti on 408.6. J
: ;:;: modld us o f elasticity of rcinforcement, MPa.
Sec Section 408.6. 2
= specified com pressive stren gth of concrete,
Mr". Sec Section 405.
= square root of specified co mpressive slrength of
= <lrca
concrete, MPa
:::: average spliuing tensile strength of lightwe ight
aggregate concrete. MPa. Sec 40.') .?.4
= permissible tensile st ress in reinfort:cm::n; , MP:l
:::: specificd yield strength of rei nforcement, MPa.
Sec Secti on 403.6.3
= design moment
:::: modular rnli o o f elas ti city
= .1/(,
= design axia l load normal to noss :;eclion
occurring si multaneously with Vj to be taken as
positi ve for co mpression, negative [or tensioll ,
and to include effects of tensioll due :(: creep
and shrink age
= spacing of shear reinforcemen t in dir('ction
parallel to longi tudinal reinforce.Jnr.nt , ): 1!: ;
:::: des ign shea r stress
= permissible shear stress carri ed hy n i: ' ,t.:ir,
MPa
:::: permissiblc horizonlal shcar strcss. Ml ';(
= design shcar force at section
:::: angle between inclined st irrups .ntO longia:dina!
axis of member
= ratio of long s ide LO short side or (;OWT = . .d
load or reaction area
= rali o of tension re inforcement
=Alb,,"
Association of Structural Engineers of the Pililippines
CHAP TE R
= stre ng th reduct io n raclOr. Sec Sectio n 4243. 1
<1 --
Strllc!tua! Con:rcte
Jois ts:
S he:l r carried by concre te,
1'( .
0.09/]'.
424.2 Scope
Two-way slabs Clnd footings:
424 .2.1 Nonprcslrcssc d reinforced concrete members shall
be penni tied 10 be. designed using serv ice loads (w itho ut
load fac tors) and perm issible serv ice load st resses in
acco rdance. with provis ions o f Section 424.
by
Jr.
''"li.
Shear carried by cOll crele, 1',. 1 .. ('/ 12 ) (1+21/3..)

but not greater th an
3. Bearing 'o n loaded area l.
0.3!"
424.2.2 For design of members 11 0 ( covered; Sect io n 424,

appropriate provisions of thi s code shall appl y.
424.3.2 Tensile stress in reinforce ment It sha ll not exceed

the fo ll owing:
424.2.3 All app licable provi sions o f th is cod e [or

nonprestressed conc rete, except Section 408.4, shall app.l y
to members desig ned by the Alternate Design Met hod .
I.
Grade 275 reinforcement
140 Mr.
2. G rade 415 reinforccment or greater and welded wire

fabric (plain or deformed)
.... 170 Mra
424.2.4 Flexural members shall meet require me nt s for

deflecti on co ntrol in Sect ion 409.6, and requirements of
Sections 410.5 through 4 I 0.8 of this code.
3.
424.3 General
424.5 Development and Splices of Reinforcement
424.3.1 Load fHctors and strength reduction fac tors shall

be taken as unity for members designed by th e Alternale
Design Method.
424.5.1 Development and splices of re inforce ment shall be

as required in Section 412 of this chapter.
424.3.2 It shall be permitled to proportion members fo r 75

perce nt of capacities required by o lher parts of Section 424
when considering wind or earthquake forces co mbined with
o the r load s , provided the resulting sect ion is no t less than
Ih at required for the combinatio n of dead and live load .
424.3.3 When dead load reduces effects of ot her loads.

m embers shall be designed for 85 percent of dead load in
combination with the other loads.
424.4 Permissiule Service Load Stresses
For flexural rei nforcemcnt , mlo mm or less, in o ne way

slabs of not more than 4 In spa n but not g reat er th an
200 MPa.
0.50 J,
424.5.2 In satisfyin g requirements of Sectio n 4 I 2.12.3, Mil

shall be taken as computed moment ca pacity assumi ng all
pos itive moment tension reinfo rcement at the secti o n to be
stressed to the permissible tcns il e stress h, and Vu shall be
taken as un factored shear force aI the section.
426.6.1 Flexure
Fo r investigation of st resses at service loads, straight-line
theory for flexure shaH be used with the following
ass umptions:
424.6. 1 Strains vary linearly as th e di stance from the

neutral axis, except for deep flexural members with overall
424.4.1 Stresses in concretc shall not exceed the foll owing::
depth span ratios g reater than 215 for continu ous s pans anti
I.
4/5 for simple spans. a nonlinear di stributi on of strain shall

be co nsidered . See Section 410.8 of thi s Chapter.
Flexure
Extreme fiber stress in compress ion .
2.
Shear'
Bcams and olleway s hlbs and foolings:
Shear c"rried by co nc rete,
\Ie ..
......009 JT
, If shear reiuforcement is provided, see Sectiolls 424 .8.7.4 and 424.8.7.5
Maximum shear carri e d by concrete plus shear

reinforcemen t,
lie
**.
O.38JT
, For morc detailed calcula!ion of !he shear slress carried by COI\C [\~tc
and shear values for lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 424.8.4.
H Desiglled in at:cordi111Ce with Section 408. J 2 of this code.
I',
I When the !iuppor!ing SurfOlCC is wider un all sides 111:111 the loaded ilrC:l.
permiss ible bearing stress Oil the loaded area sh:tll be permitted 1(1 he
multiplied by ~ 1\ I A, but not more than 2. When the slIr>porting surface
is sloped or stepped , Al shall be permitted to be taken as the area of the

lower base of the largest f!1Jslum of a Tight pyramid or cone contained
wholly within the support and baving for ils upper base the loaded area,
and having side slopes of I vc:rtical-to 2 horizontal.
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Vol ume 1
4 14 6
CHAPT U l <'l -. StrucltJraf CO rlCI('!tc
t;
424.6.2 Stn::'ss-slnlin rel ationship or l.:Olil.:rCIC i ~ .. st ra ight

linc UIH..I CI' se rvice loads wilhill pC!rmissible sCfvil.'c load
suesses.
torsion shall be taken as 55 pcn.:c nt of thl! v.li u('s givcn in

Section 411 .
424.6.3 III reinforced t'oncrclc members. concrete resists
424.8.4 ShCHI' Stress C;lrri ed by COIl<'Tctc
no tension.
424.6.4 It sh all be permitted (() take th e modular ratio,

E IE, .. as Ihe nearest who le !lumber (but no t less Own
6) . Excepl in calcu lations for deflec tions , vallie of 1/ for
lightwe ight conc rete shall be ass umed to be the s<unc as for
norma l we ight concrete o f the same st rengt h.
ff :;:
In doubl y reinforced nex ural members. an

effect ive modul ar ratio of 2E/,. shall be lIsed (0 transform
424.6.5
compression reinforcemenl for stress co mpuuH ioll s.

Co mpress ive stress in suc h reinforcement sha ll not exceed
permissible tensile stress.
424.8.4. J Por members subjec t to shear and flexure Only,

~ hear stress carried by c o n('~l'ctc 1', sh"n not exceed 0.09
J~
lrnlcss a more dcwiled calculntiun is made in
actordance with Section 424.8.4 .' .

424.8.4.2 Por members subject 10 axial co mpression , shear
stress carried by concrete 1/(' J shall no t exceed 0.09
IT:
unless a mo rc de tailed c<lleulmion is made in accordance

wi th 424 .8.4.5.
424.8.4.3 For membeJ's subje ct to significant 'Ixial tension,
shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry lotal shear,
unless a more detailed calculation is made lIsing
424.7 Compression Members With or Without Flexure

I', = O.09( I + 0.6N/A,)
424.7.1 Combined flexure and axial load capaci ty of

compression membcrs shall be takcn as 40 percent of that
computed in accordance with provision s in Sec tion 410 of
thi s C hapter.
424.7.2 Sle nderness effects shall be included according to
requi rements of Sections 410.10 through 410. 13. In Eq s.
410 I3 and 4 1022 the term p" shall be re placed by 2.5
times the des ign axial load. and the fa c tor 0.75 shall be
taken equal to 1.0.
424.7.3
Wall s s hall be desi gned in accorci:a nce with

Section 414 of thi s secti o n with ncxurc a nd axial load
capacities ta ken as 40 percent of thaI compu ted using
Sectioll4 14. III Eq. 4141 , shall be taken eq ual to 1.0.
JT
(4242)
where N is ncgative for tcn sion . Quantity NIA g shall be

expressed in MPa.
424.8.4.4 For members subject to shear and flexure only,
it shall be permitted 10 co mpute IIr by
l',
but
Vc
= 0.085
If: + 9p".vdIM
simI! not excecd 0. 14
(4243)
JT .Quanti ty VdlM shall not
be. taken greater than J .0, where M is des ign moment

occurri ng simu ltaneously wi th Vat sec ti o n considered.
424.8.4.5 For membcrs subject to axia l compression. it
shall be pennilled 10 compu te 1'(' by
v, = 0 .09( I + 0 .09N/A,)
If:
(4244)
424.8 Shear and Torsion

Quantity NIA, ,hall be expressed in Mra.
424.8.1
Design shear s tress v shall be compu ted by
" = VI(b.d)
(424 I)
where V is design shear force at section considered .
or
424.8.4.6 Shear stresses carried by concretc 110 apply to

norm al weigh t conc rcte. When Iigiliweight aggregate
concrete is used, one of th e following modifications !-ildl
appl y:
4 24.8.2 When the reaction, in d irect io n

app lied shcar.
introduces co mpress ion in to the e nd regio ns
.11 member,
sec tions loc ated less lim n a dis tance d frol11 ftJ<.:e
SUppOl1
s ha ll be perm itted to be designed for the sa me shear v as
(hat computed at a distance tf.
I.
424.8.3 Whenever applicable , effects of torsion, in

accordance with provisions of Section 4! 1 of this section,
shall be added. Shear and torsio nal momellt strength s
provided by Conc rete and limiting maximum strengths for
2.
or
or
When In is spec ifi ed ,111<1 concre tc is proportioned ill

accorda nce wi th Secti o n 405.3, [../6.7 shall be
s ubstituted ror
exceed
When
If:
bu t the va lu e of [../6.7 shall not
\1 f 'r .
Ie/
is not s pcci f-,cd, the valu e of !l~~ shaH bt~
multiplied by 0.75 fo r "all~lighlweight" concrete and

by 0.85 for "sand~lightweight " co ncrete. Linear
Associ ation of Structu ral Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPT ER 4 .- S tructura l Concrcte
inlc rpo]'ll ion sha ll be pcrm illctJ whcn pania l sand

re pl accmc nt is used .
4 .47
424.8.5.5 Mini mum She;! r Uci nforcc mcnt
or !-ohear re info rce ment Shilli

be prov ided jll ali re info rced concrete flex lI f<l 1 me mbe rs
whe re desig n shear strc:ss )I is g rc.llc r than o n e~ hal r the
r e rlll is~ i b ic shear st ress \If carried by conc re te. e xcept :
424.8.5.5.1 A minimulIl area
424.8.4.7
In de tc rmi ning shcar stress carried hy co ncrete
1'(., whenever appli cab le. effects o fa x. i al tensi on duc {O

creep and shrinkage in restrained mem bers shall be
incl uded and it shall be pcrmillcd to in c lud e e ffec ts or
incli ned flexural compressio n ill variabl e-dep th members.
I.
2.
Co nc rete joist cons(rll cti o n defi ned by Sect ion 40g , 14

of this section;
424.8.5 Shea r Stress C;l r ri cd by Shear Ucinfo rcemcnt

3.
424.8.5. 1 Types of Shea r Reinforcement
Slabs and footin gs;
Bea m with total depth Jl o t greater than 250mrn. 2.5

times thic kness of flan ge, 0 [" o n e~ha l f the wid th of we b,
whicheve r is gre atest.
Shear re in forceme nt shall consist of o ne o f the fo ll ow ing:
J.
StiITups pcrpe nd ic ul ar
2.
W el ded wi re fa bric with wi res located perpendicular to

ax is of mem ber mak ing an anglc of 45 degrees or more
wi th longitudin al tensio n reinforcem ent ;
3,
10
ax is of membcr;
Longi tud inal re info rce ment wit h bent portion ma king
an ang le of 30 degrees or mo re wilh lo ngitudinal
ten sion rei nfo rce me nt;

4.
5.
424.8.5.5.2 Minimu m shear re inforceme nt req uire ~m e n( s

of Sec ti o n 424.8 .5.5. 1 shall be pcnni tled to be waived if
shown by test that required ultim ate fl ex ural a nd shear
stre ngth ca ll be developed when shear reinfo rceme nt is
o milted.
Combinat io ns of sti rrups and bent longitud inal rein forcement ;
A,. = b,sI3(,.
(424 5)
wh e re bl< ' and s are in 111m .
Spira ls.
424.8.5.2 De sign yie ld strength of shear re info rcement

shall no. exceed 41 5 MPa.
424.8.5.3 Stirrups and olher bars or wires used as s hear
rein fo rcement sha ll extend Lo a dista nce d from ex treme
compression fi ber and shall be anc ho red at both end s
accord ing to Secti o n 412. 14 of thi s sec ti o n to develop
design yie ld stre ngth of re inforcement .
424.8.5.4 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinfo rcem ent

424.8.5.4.1
424 .8.5.5.3 Where shea r re info rcement is requ ired by

Sec tion 424 .8.5.5. I o r by anal ysis , minim um are a of she ar
re info rce ment shall be compu ted by:
Spacing
of
shear
reinforcemen.
424.8.5.6 Design of Shea r Reinforcement

424.8.5.6.1 Where design shear stress \' exceeds shear
stre ss c arried by co nc rete \/f , shear re inforcemen t shall be
prov ided ill accordance wit h Sec tions 424.8 .5.6. 2 thro ugh
424.8.5.6.8.
424.8.5.6.2 W hen s hear re in fo rce me nt perpendic ular to
axis of member is used:
A,. = (v - v,)b"s 1[,.

placed
perpendicular to a xis of me mber shall no t ex ceed d/2, nor
(4246)
424.8.5.6.3 When incli ned stirrups are used as shear

rei nforccmel1 t;
600 mm .
(v-v , k ."
424.8.5.4.2
Inc lined sti rru ps and be nt lo ngitudin a l

re inforcement shall be so spaced lhat eve ry 4 S ~ deg ree line ,
extending toward the reaction fro m Ill i d~d ep{ h o f me mbe r
(d/2) to l o ng itudinal tCrl:-;i on reinforceme nt . shall be crossed
by al icasl o ne li lle of shear re in forcemen t.
424.8.5.4.3 When (v-ve) exceeds 1/6 f f , maxi mu m

spacing given in See. ions 424.8.5.4.1 and 424.8.5 .4 .2 shall
be redu ced by one half.
A,.
(4247)
= (,(s in a + cos a)
424.8.5.6.4 Whe n shear re inforcement consis(s o f ;l s ingl e

bar or a single group of para lle l bars, all ben t up at the sa me
di sta nce from the suppo l1:
A,.
{l'-v,}b.d
(424 8)
(.si n a
where (v v, ) shall not exceed ( 1/8)
National Struct ural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volum e 1
ff.
4-14{j
CHAPTEJi 4 -~ Str"uCl(Jral Concrete
424.8.5.6.5 When :>hcar reinforcement con:>i:>t:> or a series

of paralic! benl-up bars or groups of parallel bent~up bars at
differcnt distances from Ihc support, required area shall be
computed by Eq, 424-7.
424.8.5.6.6 Only the center three-quarters of the inclined
pOI1ion of any longitudinal bellt bar shall be considered
effective for shear reinforcement.
424.8.5.6.7 When more th If! ,one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the saille portion of a
member, required area shall be computed as the sum of the
various types separately. In such computations, v(" shall be
included only oncc.
424.8.5.6.8
Value of Iv - v,) shall not exceed (3/8)'[1';.
424.8.6 Shear-Friction
Where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a
given plane, such as an existing or potential crack, an
interface between dissimilar materials, or an interface
between two concretes cast at different times, shear-friction
provisions of Section 411.8 of this Chapter shall be
permitted to be applied, with limiting maximum stress for
shear taken as 55 percent of that given in Section 41 I .8.5.
Permissible stress in shear-friction reinforcement shall be
that given in Section 424.4.2.
424.8.7 Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings
424.8.7.1 Shear capacity of slabs and footings in the
vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by
the more severe of two conditions;
424.8.7.1.1 Beam action for slab or footing, with a critical
section extending in a plane across the entire width and
located at a distance d from face of concentrated load or
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall be
designed in accordance with Sections 424.8.1 through
424.8.5.
424.8.7.1.2 Two-way action for slab or footing, with a
critical section perpendicular to plane of slab and located so
that its perimeter is a minimum, but need not approach
closer than dl2 to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction
area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall be
designed in accordance with Sections 424.8.7.2 and
424.8.7.3.
424.8.7.2
Design shear stress v shall be computed by

,.
(11(1),,<1)
(424-9)
where V and b" J shall be taken al the critical section

defined in Section 424.8.7.1.2.
424.8.7.3 Design shear stress v shall not exceed I',. given by
Eq. 424-10 unless shear reinforcement is provided
", =
but
1'("
I( + 7{2)1---
12
(424-10)
V!',
shall not exceed (l/6)J7~: f3,- is the ratio of long side
to short side of concentrated load or reaction area. When

lightweight aggregate concrete is llsed, the modifications of
Section 424.8.4.6 shall apply.
424.8.7.4 If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or
wires is provided in accordance with Section 411.13.3 of
this section, II,. shall [lO! exceed (1/12) Ir~:, and \' shall not
exceed 0.25 [1;.

424.8.7.5 If shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or
channel-shaped sections (shcarheads) is provided in
accordance with Section 411.13.4 of this section, I' on tlie
critical section defined in Section 424.8.7.1.2 shall nut
exceed 0.3
and I' on the critical section defined in
rr:,
Section 4 I l. I 3.4.7 shall not exceed (1/6)
ff . In Eqs.
411-
41 and 411-42. design shear force V shall be Illultiplied by 2

and substituted for VII .
428.8 Special Provisions for Other Members
For design of deep flexural members, brackets and corbels,
and walls, the special provisions of Section 411 of this
section shall be used, with shear strengths provided by
concrete and limiting maximum strengths for shear taken as
55 percent of the values given in Section 411. In Secfior:
41 J .11.6, the design axial load shall be multiplied by 1 '2 if
compression and 2.0 if tension, and substituted for Nw
424.8.9 Composite Concrete Flexural Members
For design of composite. concrete flexural mer,
permissible horizontal shear stress Vir shall not exccr,rl '/j
percent of tbe horizontal shear strengths given in SCi',', ;
417.6.3 of this section.
CHA PTE: H 4 - Struct ural Concre te
<1.
1 4 ~,
425.410.4 General Prin ciples and Requirements
425.1 Scope
Des ign fo r flexure and axi a l load by provis ions of Section
425 shall be permitted. When Section 425 is used in design.
Sec lion , 425.2. 425.2.1 . 425.2.2. "nd 425.2 .3 shall replace
the corresponding provisions in Section 408 ; Section
425.410.4 .3 shall replace Seclions 410.4 .3. 41 0.4.4. and
410.4 .5, excepl Section 410.4.5.1 shall remain; Sections
425.418 .2.3. 425.418.9. 1. 425.418.9.2. and 425.418.9.1
shall replace the com!sponding numbered sec tions in
Seclion 418; Seclion, 425.418.11.4. 425.418.11.4 . 1.
425.418.11.4 .2. and 4 25.418. 11.4 .3 s hall re place Secli ons
41 8. 11.4 . 418 .11.4.1 .4 18. 11.4.2 and 4 18. 11.4.3. [f any
sec lion ill Section 425 is used. all secti ons in Section 425
shall be substituted for the corresponding secti ons in the
body of the code, and all other sections in the body of the
code s hall be applicable.
425.2 Redistribution of Negative Moments in

Continuous Nonprestrcssed Flexural Members
For cri teria on momcllI redistri bution for prestressed
concrete members, see Sec ti on 425.41 8. 11.4 .
425.2.1 Except where approximarc values for moments
are used , it shall be pcnnilted to decre ase factored moments
calculated by elastic theory at sections of maximu lll
negative or maximum positive moment and in any span of
continuous nexu ral members for any assumed load ing
arrangemcill by not more than:
20 (I- P;,p')
percent
(425 - 1)
425.410.4.3 For flexural members and members ~ubject to

combined flex ure ilnd compressive axial load where P" is
less than the smaller of O. IO!c...A . . an d Pb , the rat io or
reinfo rcement , P. provided sh all not exceed 0.75 of the ratio
PI, that would produce balanced st rain c onditions for the
section und er flexure without axi(\1 load. For members with
compression rei nforcement. the portion of PI> equali zed by
compression reinforceme nt need not be reduced by the 0.75
faclor.
425.418.2 Scope
425.418.2.3 The following pro visions of thi s code shall nol
apply to prestressed concrete, except as specifically noted :
SccliollS 406.4.4. 407.7.5. 408 . 13.2. 408.13.3, 408 . [3.4 ,
408 .13. 410.6. 410.7. 410.10.1. 410. 10.2. and 425.2.
425.4[0.4.3; Seclion 413 ; alld Seclions 4[4 .4 . 414 .6 alld
4 14 .7.
425.418.9 Limits for Reinforcement of Flexural
Members
425.418.9.1 Ratio of prestressed and non prestressed
reinforcement used for computation of moment strength of
a member, e xcept as provided in 425.4 18.9.2, s hall be such
Ihal co,. [(oJ, + (dld,)(co - <0' )J. or [<0,. + (dldp)(<O . - 00 )] is
not grea ter Ihan 0.36Pl. except as pe rmitted in Secti on
425.41892.
Ratio (tll' is co mpuled as p,fp//t. Ratios 0)... a nd wpw are
co mputed as 0) and wI" respectivel y. except that when
co mputi ng P and PI' b". shall be used in place of b and the
area of reinforcement Of prestressing steel required to
develop the compressive strength of the web only shall be
used in place of A, or A pI' Rati o w'... is computed as 00',
except that when computing P'. b ... shall be used in pl ace of
b.
425.2.2 Redistribution of moments shall be made only
whcnlhc section at whi ch moment is reduced is so design ed
th at fJ or p - p' is not greater th an 0.501'11>
w he re:
p, = .0.85
fl, f', (~_)

f,.
600 + f ,
425.418.9.2 \\' hen a reinforcemen t rati o exceeds the lim;t

specifi ed in Section 425.4 18.9. 1 is provided, de.<;igll
moment slre ngt h sha ll not exceed the moment st rength
based on the co mpress ion portion of the moment couple.
(425-2)
425.2.3 The redu ced moment sh all be used for calculatiIlg

redistributed mom ents at all other sections within the spans.
SIalic equilibrium shall be maintained after redistribution of
moments al each loading arrangement.
Naliona l Struc lu ra l Code o f the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volume 1
4 I !)O
CIfI\PTEr1 11 _. StruclUfal Concrete
425.418 .9.:\ Tma l

allloun!
of
prestressed
and
lIonprcstn:ssc::d reinforce mcnt shall be i1dcquatc to deve lop iI
fac tored load ilt least 1.2 limes the cracking load computed
1)1} tile basis of the 11IOd uius of rupture!, specil'ied ill Section
409.6.2.3. This provision shall be permitted to he \v.lived
for:
1.
425.418.11.4.3 The reduced nwment shall be used for

calcui<tling redistributed moments :11 all other sect io ns
wi thin the spa ns . Static equilibrium shnll be maintai ned
<lncr redistribu tion of momen ts ror CHcli loading
ammgemenl.
.::~~~:~~/~~,*':~~~~i.f;i ~;' :.",:;'1.
Two-way, unho nded post -tc nsio ncd slabs; and
2 . . Fl exura l members with shear and n ex ura l st rength at

. leas t twice that required by Section 409.3.
425.418_11 Static'llly Indeterminate Structures
425.41 8.11.1 Framcs and continuous co nstruct ion of
prestressed concrete shall be des igned for satis f actory
pe rfo rm ancc al se rvice load co ndi tions and for adequate
strength .
425.418.11.2 Pe rfonnance at service load condit ions shall
be dctermi ned by el astic anal ysi s, considering reac ti o ns,
mome nt s, shea rs . and axial forces produced by pres tress in g,
creep, shrinka ge. tcmperature change, ax ial deform ati on,
restraint of attached structural elemcnt s, and foundati o n
sc tll clne nt .
425.418.11.3 Moment s to be used to co mpute requ ired
strength sha ll be lhe sum of the mome nts due to reac ti o ns
induced by prestressi ng (with a load factor o f 1.0) a nd the
moment s due to fac tored loads. Adjust ment o f th e sum of
these l110menl S sha ll be penn itt cd as all owed in Section
425.418.11.4.
425.41 8. 11.4 Redistribution of Negati ve M om ent s ill
Continll olls Pres tressed Flexural M embe r s
425.418.11.4.1
W here bonded rein force ment is provided
at supports in accordance wit h Section 418.10, nega tive or
posi tive moments calcul ated by elastic theo ry fo r any
assu med loadi ng, arrangement shall be perm itt ed to be
increased or decreased by not more than:
WI'
+ (d Idl')(w - (V')]perccill
0.36/3,
(4253)
425.4J 8. 11.4.2
Redistributio n of moments shall be madc
onl y when the section at which moment is reduced is so
designed that COp. I'd" + (dld,,)(w - w).J or Ico,,,,. + (dltlp)O",(I)',J.I. whichever is a ppl icable, is not greate r th an O.24P .
Assoc ia tion of S tructural Engine ers of Ole Philippi nes
. .:
CHAPTEfl -1 . StfllClllral COllcrelC
1j 151
426.409.2.5 If resistance_ to iJllpat.'1 cfTct.'ts is taken into

'JCCOli nt in design , slich effects shall be included with L.
426.409.2.6 Where structural cJTc('(s oj' differential
settlelllent . creep. shrir)kagc, expansion or sh rinkage
compensati ng (;Or1crcle. or temperature <.:hange. T. arl~
signifll.:alll , U shall not be less than the larger of Eqs. 426-5
and 426-6:
426.409.1 Scope
Structural concrete shall be pennillcd to be designed lIsing
th e load combinations and strength reduction factors of
Section 426. When Section 426 is used in design, Sections

426.409.2. I through 426.9.2.7 shall replace Sections
409.3. I through 409.3.5, and Sections 426.409.3. I through
426.409.3.5 shall replace Section 409.4.1 through 409.4.5.
U=O.75(1.4D+ 1.47'+ I.7L)
(426-:':}
U ; 1.4(1) + 1)
(426-6)
Estimations or differential settlement, creep. shrink<lge,

expa nsion of' shrinkage-compensating concrete, or
temperature change shall be based on realistic assessment
of slicii effects occurring in service.
426.409.2 Required Strength

426.409.2.1
Req uired streng th U '0 re,ist dead load D
and live 10:ld L shall not be less than:
U; I.4D+ 1.7L
426.409.2.7 POf pos t tensioned ,mchofage zone design. ~

load factor of J.2 shall be applied to the maximuill
prestressing stee l jacking force.
(426-
I)
426.409.3 Design Strength
426.409.2.2 For stlUc tures thaI also re sist W, wind load, or
426.409.3.1 Design strength provided by .1 mcmber, its

connections to other membcrs, and its cross sections. in
terms of nexurc, axial load. shear, and torsion. shall be
taken as Ihe nominal strength calculated in accordance with
requirements and assumptions of this Code, multiplied by
the [actors ill Secti ons 426.409.3.2, 426.409.3.4. and
426.409.3.5 .
E , the load effects of earthquake. U shall not be less than
the larger of E<I" 426- I. 426-2, and 426-3:
U; 0.75(1.4D + J7L) + (J.6W or J.O)

(426-2)
and
U=0.9D+(J.6Wor 1.0)
(4263)
Where W has not been reduced by a direc tionality factor, it

shall be permitted to use I.3W in place of 1.6W in E<IS. 4262 and 426-3. Wh ere E is based on service-level seismic
forces, 1.4 shall be u'ed in place of 1.0 in Eqs. 426-2 and
426-3.
426.409.2.3 For stmctures that re sist H, loads due to

weight and press ure of soil. water in soil. or other related
materials, U shall r,ot be less than the larger of Eqs. 426- I
and 426-4:
U= I.4D+ 1.7L+ 1.7/-1
426.409.3.2
follows:
Strength reduction f<lcwf shall be <IS
426.409.3,2.1 Tension-controlled secti ons, as defined III

Section 410.4.4 (Sec also Section 426.409.3.2.7) ........
0.90
426.409.3.2.2 Compression-controlled sections, as defined
in Section 410.4.3:
I.
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to

Section 410. 1003 ..
0.75
2.
Other reinforce.d membe rs
0.70
(426-4)
In Eg. 426-4, where D or l. reduce the effect of II, 0.9/J

shall be substituted for lAD, clnd z.ero value of L shall be
used to determine the greatest required strength U.
426.409.2.4 For struct ures that resist F, load due to weight

and pressure of nuids with well-defined densities, the load
factor for F shall be lA, and F shall be added to all loadi ng
combinat1ons that include L.
For sections in which lhe net tensile strain in the exlre!l1(~

tension steel at nominal strengt h, c" is between the limits
for compression-controlled and tension-controlled sections.
shall be pcnnillcd to be linearly in cre~lscd from that for
compressioncontrolled secti ons to 0.90 as 1:1 increases from
th e compression co ntrolled strain limit to 0.005.
Alternatively, when Section 425 is used , for members ill

which ];. docs ' not exceed 415 MPa. with symmetric
reinforcement, and with (d - d')/h not less than 0.70, shall
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
,
4 -1 ~2
C'; HAPT f: Fl 4 . Structural Concrete
be pcrmiltcd to be increased linearly to 0.90 as (JP"

dec reases from O. IOf'.A g to zero. Fo r ot he r reinrorccd
members, shall be permilled 10 be incrca ~c d linearly 10
0.90 as rfJPII decreases from O.JOj;"Ag or rpp". whi che vcr is
smaller. to zero.
426.409.3.2.3 Shear and torsion
... .. .. ... . 0.R5
426.409.3.2.4 bearing on concre te (except for posttcnsioned

anc horage
zones
and
stnlt-<Ind-lic
models) . . . .
0 .70
426.409.3.2.5 PosHensioned an chorage zones.
0.80
426.409.3.2.6 Strut-and-ti e models (Section 427), and

slnl!!), lics. nodal zones, and bearing areas in such model s
0.85
426.409.3.2.7 Flexure sections without axial load in pre~
ten sioned mem be rs where strand embedment is less than
the development length as provided in Section
412. 10. 1. 1...... ..... .... ......
.. .... ............................ ... 0.85
426.409.3.3 Development lengths specified in Sec tion 41 2
do not require a -factor.
426.409.3.4
For structures lhat rely on intermediate
precast structural wall s in region s of high seismi c risk or
assigned ( 0 hi gh seismic performance o r design categories
(seism ic zone 4), spec ial momenl frames, or special
struclU ral wall s to resist E, sha ll be modified as given in
(l) through (3):
i.
2.
For any structural member that is designed to resis t E.

for s hear shall be 0.60 if the nomi nal shear
strength of the member is
less than
th e shear
correspondin g to the development of the nominal
flexural
strength
of
the member. TIle nominal
flexural strength shall be determined cons idering the
most critic al factored axial loads and including E;
For diaphragms, if> for shear shall not exceed the
for shear
used
for
the vertical
mi ni mum
component s o f
the primary latc ralforcewresisting
system;
3.
427. 1 Definitions
B-REG ION. A port ion or a member in which th e pianC'.
sections ass um ption of nexurc Iheo ry from SC(;iion 410. ':. 2
call be applied.
DISCONTINUITY. An abrupt chan ge in geome try nr

loading.
D-REG10N. The ponion of a Incm ber withi n <I di stance, h,

from a force discontinuity or ~ geometric dis(;olltinu it/
DEEP BEAM. Sec Sections 410.8.1 and 4 ! 1.9.1.
~~~~..:.
Figu re 427 -2(,). 427-2(b), and 427- 3.
NODAL ZONE. The volume or co nc rete ,1I'OllllU ;t ',ode

that is assumed to trans fer strut -und-tic forc!.';,. ; 1I1rou;', the
node . Hi slOrically. hyd rosl3tic noda l zones ;j ~; s h o ",r~ ii,
Figure 427- 4 werc used . These we re largely S('li, : "'_ ;:, ' ">
whal a rc called extended noda l lones, shown in Fi l~.ur(' :12 7
5.
NODE. Th e point in a joinJ. in a strut-and-ti c model wll e re.
the axes of the s tnllS. tics, a nd concent rat ed (ll rco :.;.1, :: ,. ! !I
the joint intersect.
STRUT. A compression member in a slrul ":I!HI-lie IlL'del.
A st rut represen ts the resuhalll of a parall el or a fall-shaped
compression fi eld.
BOTTLE-SHAPED STRUT. A strut th at is wieler at mil'
length than a t its cnd s.
STRUT-AND-TIE MODEL. A tru ss model nf a struc- 'I;'!
member or of a D-region ill such a mClllb, .', \ ;-'i ! de
\J,
struts a nd ties connected at nodes, cap<lbk ,Jl i,;-;dd: ': "- .',
the factored loads to the supports or (0 adj;:I{"'!.
TIE. A te ns ion memb er in a strut -and -tic I~ , : <
ror joints and diagonally reinforced coupli ng bea.ms ,

fo r shear shall be 0.85.
426.409.3.5 In Secti on 422, if> shall be 0.65 for n exure,

compression, shear, and bearing of st ru ctu ral plain concre te.
Association of Structu ral Engineers of the Philippines
CHI\PTFH 4
427. 1. 1 J)isl'on tinuily
A dis(.olll illuity ill the stress distribution occurs al a chan ge

in the geome try of:l stru ctural clemcnt or at II cO Jl('cntratcd
10<ld or n!'K ti oli . St. VellHIl( 's principle indi cates that the
stresses due to axial load and bending approach" linear
di stributi on at <I di stance approximaICly cq Ll<I1 to th e overa ll
height or the member, 11, away from the discontinuit y. For
this rcaso n, discominuilics nre assumed (O ex tend a distan ce
h rrOJ11 'lIlC secti on where the load or change in geometry
occurs.
F:igll re 427- J (a) shows typical geometric
di scontinuities, and Pigure 427-1 (b) shows combined
geome tri ca l and loading discontinuities.
427.1.2 Dregio ll
Co ncrete
res ult!i in bearing stresses thin arc equa l 10 the st resses ill
the Mruts. The bea rin g phne 011 the left s ide of Figure 4274(h) is used to represe nt an aCIU,d l ie an chorage. The tic
force <.:<lrl be anchored by a plate. or through developmenl
or st raight or hoo ked hm's, ilS shown in Figure 4274{c).

The shaded areas ill Fi gu re 427 ~ 5(a) lind (b) nrc extend ed
nodal zones. A n exte nded nod:11 zolle is thaI porti on o f a
member bou nded by lhc inlCJ'seclion of the cffec livcq rut
width , I!I" and th e effective li e widlh, 11', (sec Sec ti on
427.4 .2).
The shaded reg ions in Figu re 427 1(a)
and (b) show Iypical D-regions. The pl ane sections

ass umpti on of Sec ti on 41 0.3.2 is not applicable in such
regions.
Each shear span of the beam in Figure 427-2 (a) is it D

as show n in Fi gure
427-2{b), they ca n be considered as a singl e D ~ reg i o n for
design purposes. The ma ximum l e n g t h ~ t o -d ep th ratio of
sll ch a D-rcgion would be approx.imatcly 2. Th us, the
small es t a ngle be tween the strut and the tie in a D-rcgio n is
regi on. If two D-region s overlap or meet
arctan V,
.~ S lfllCtl.JF(l!
= 26.5 degrees , rounded to 25 dcgrees .
If there is a B-region between th e D-rcgi o ns in a shear span,

as shown in Figure 427-2(c), the st rength of the s hear span
is governed by the strength of the B-region if the B- and D
regions have simil ar geomctry and reinforcemcnt. This is
because the shear strength of a B-region is less Ihan the
shear slrength of a comparable D-region. Shear s pans
427.1.3 Hydros lalic Noda l Zone has loaded faces
perpe ndi cu lar to the' axes of the strut s and ties actin g on the
node a nd has equa l stresses o n the loaded faces. Fi gure 427 ~
4(a) shows a C-C-C nodal zone. If th e stresses on the face
o f the nodal zone are thc sa me in all threc struts, the ratios
of th e lengthS of the sides o f the nodal lone, w~ J: w.2: \II 3
are in the sa me proportions as the three forces C: C,: C).
The fa ces o f a hydrostatic nodal zone ~re perpendi c ul ar 10
the axes o f th e struts and lies ac ting on the nodal zo ne.
H
These nodal zo nes <Ire called hydrostalic nodal zones

because the in -plane stresses are the same in all direc ti ons.
S tri ctl y speaki ng. thi s te rminology is incorrect because the
in Mplan e strcsse.."i arc not equal to the out-or-plane stresses.
A C-C-T nodal zone can be represented as a hyd rostatic

nodal zone if the ti e is ass umed to extend through the node
10 be anc hored by a plate on the far s ide of Ihe node. as
shown ill Figure 427-4(b), provi ded lh at the si ze of the plate
'h
National Struc tural Code o f Ihe Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
CHAP I F f ~ t1 - - Str'llcl(Jr~11 Cr)fl(.;r el {~
-'I 1!;ll
h1I(tf=r~--.Gi-)I h2
- D-region
J......I ... -+-t
mm
h1 h2
(t
(a) Shear span, av< 2h, deep beam
i:"':'
h'1
WillWlill
(a) Geometric discontinuities
I I
av =2h , I
1._~_=_2--,L
h_ . t
Min. of 25 deg "I
(b) Shear span, av = 2h, limit for a deep beam
1-
D-region
(t{ , - , tDIh
I.
[h
I I
2h
D-regio
,I
I'
.Jl
mmlll HI III
CJ
t t t
(b) Loading and geometric discontinuities
l
Ii+-:
_~h_h_ :I
_ h--'-'C
a'v_> _2h_ _, 1 - ,_------'
av_>
(c) Shear span, av > 2h, slender beam
Fi gu re 427 -1 I) -Regions An d Disco nt inu ities

FiguI'C 4272 Descripti on of Deep and Slender Beams
Bottle-shaped
strut -
"r Nodal 7.one

--Idl>allzed
I
prismatic
strut
/
/
/
/
/
Tie
Figure 427-3 Description of Slrllt-and-Ti c Model
(8) One layer of slee'
(,sinO
w,
t.~,
see A.4.3.2
(b) Dislribuled sleel
Figure 4274 Hydrostati c Nodes

N. B. : For A.4.1.2, refer to 427.4.3.2
In the nodal zone shown in Figure 427-6 (a), the reac ti on R

equilibrates the vertical components of the forces C, and
C1.. Frequently, calculations are ea.sier if lhe reaction R is
divided into R I , which equilibrates the vertical components
of the force C, as shown in Figure 427-6(b).
th
N<~non(ll Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
"
tl 1S6
.,.,
CHAP fEFl4 .. S!ruCiUfi!1 Concrete
c,
c,-....".....,~
(8) Noda/ zone

(a) Gooma/ry
c,
(b) Subdivid8(i l1c>C/"r .OJ,

Figure 427-6 Subdivisioll of Noda l Zone
(b) Tension force anchor(J(} by 8 plate
C
\
\
\
\
t.m::. see AA .3.2

I
I,~-----c
I
I
I
:C
(a) C-C-C Node
~ Critical soction for

f
~T
(b) C-C- T Node
development f)(
tie reinforcemenl
c
(c) Tension force anchored by bond
Pignrc 4275 EXlcndcd Nodal Zone Showing the

Effect of the Distributi on of th e Force
N. 13 . : For A.4.3.2, refcr to Scction 427.4 .3.2
T
(e) C- T- T Node
(d) T- T-T N(,,:,!
Fi gure 427 -7 Classificat ion of Nudes
427.1.4 Nodes
/
Crack
For equilibrium, at lcasllhrcc forces should act on a node in
a strut-and-lic model, as shown jn Figure 427-.7. Nodes
classiticd according to the signs of these forces. A C-C-C
node resists three compressive forces, a C-C- T node resists
(wo compressive forces and one tensile

force, and so on.
Tie
""-~:f
afC
~~ed
" ,":>-' .'
~---
/~-
Strut
/
to compute Ao
(8)
(b)
427.1.5 Strut
In design, struts arc usually idealized as prismatic
Figure
compression members, as shown by the straight line

outlines of the struts in Figures 427-2 and 427-3. If the
427~8
Bottle-shaped Strut: (a) Cracking of a

Bottle-shaped Strut; and (b) Strut-andTie Model of a Bottle-shaped Strut
effective compression strength};", differs at the two ends of

a strut, due either to different nodal zone strengths at the
two ends, or to different bearing lengths, the strut is
idealized as a uniformly tapered compression member.
Bottle-shaped struts - A bottle-shaped strut is a strut

located in a part of a member where the width of the
compressed concrete at mid length of the strut can spread
laterally. The curved dashed outlines of the struts in Figure
427-3 and the curved solid outlines in Figure 427-8
approximate the boundaries of bottle-shaped struts. A split
cylinder test is an example of a bottle-shaped strut. The
internal lateral spread of the applied compression force in
such a test leads to a transverse tension that splits the
specimen.
To simplify design, bottle-shaped struts are idealized either
as prismatic or as uniformly tapered, and crack-control
reinforcement from Section 427.3.3 is provided to resist the
transverse tension. The amount of confining transverse
reinforcement can be computed using the strut-and-tie
model shown in Figure 427-8(b) with the struts that
represent the spread of the compression force acting at a
slope of 1:2 to the axis 'of the applied compressive force.
Altematively for to' not exceeding 40 MPa, Eq. 427-4 can
be used. The cross-sectional area At of a bottle-shaped strut
is taken as the smaller of the cross-sectional areas at the two
ends of the strut. Sec Figure 427-8(a).
427.2 Strut-andTie Model Design Procedure

427.2.1 It shall be permitted to design stI1Jctural concrete
members or D-regions in such members, by modeling the
member or region as an idealized truss. The truss model
shall contain struts, ties, and nodes as defined in Section
427.1. The truss model shall be capable of transfen'ing all
factored loads to the supports or adjacent B-rcgions.
427.2.2 The strut-and-tic model shall be in equilibriulll with
the applied loads and the reactions.
427.2.3 In determining the geometry of the truss, the
dimensions of the struts, ties, and nodal zones shall be taken
into accounl.
427.2.4 Ties shall be permitted to cross struts. Struts shaH
cross or overlap only at nodes.
e,
between the axes of any strut and any

427.2.5 The ang1e,
tie entering a single node shall not be taken as less than 25
degrees.
427.2.6 Design of struts, ties, and nodal zones shall be
based on:
(427-1)
where Fu is the factored force acting in a strut, in a tic, or
on one face of a nodal zone; 1~1 is the nominal strength of
the strut, tic, or nodal zone; and is specified in Section
409.3.2.6.
th
427.3
S(J'c l1 ~th (If
(4274)
Struts
427.3.1 The l1 omin ;d comp ressive strength of' ;1 str ul

'\lilhoHI h)lI gilUdinal n:i nfon..:elllcllI. r~", sh;dl be wkcll as
the smallcr value of:
r~,\
=./;,A"
(4272)
al th e IwO end ... of II}!! stru t, where 11(1 is thL ..:.oss-stttion:tI

al Ol h! end of Iht' sI nH. and /.1' is the slllilJ lrr ()f ( I) <I nel
ilrca
(2):
I.
2.
The clTcctivc compressive strenglh of the conc rete in

the SInH given in Secti on 427.3.2;
The effecti ve compressive strenglh of th (.'. concrete ill

the nodal 7.0nc given in Scc iion 427.5.2.
427.3,2 T he effecti ve comprcssi ve

concrete, };.,. in a strut shall be taken as :
strength
of
/.e = (J.XS/IJ.'
the
(427 ) 1
427.3.2.1 For a stlllt of un iform cr()ss~seclion a! area over

ils lel1glh ...
... .. .............
/1, = 1.0
427 .3.2.2 For stmls located such thai Ihe width or the
midsecti on of the sinH is large r than th e widt h (II Ihe nodes
(bottleshaped slnns):
J.
Wit h reinforce ment sati sfy ing Sec ti on 42 7.3.3 .

p, =0 .75
2.
WithOl1t
427.3.3 ...
reinforcement
sati sfying
................ If,
Section
= O.6(J!'
where the VIII lie of I.. is defined i n Secti on 408.7.1.

427.3.2.3 For struts in tension members, or the tension
Oanges of members .... ......... ..
/1, = OAO
427.3.2.4 For all other ease s
p, = O.60i.
427.3.3 Ir the value or p, speciried ill Section 427 .3.2 .2( I) is

used. the axis of the st rlll shall be crossed by reinforccmcllI
propoJlioncd to resist Ihe tran sverse ten sile force res ulling
fro m the compression force spreading ill the SInH . It Sh'll!
he permitted to assume the co mpressive force in the strut
spreads <It <I slope of 2 longillldinal to 1 transverse 10 the
wil en! A" is th e tollil ,Ire;! of sli rfaL' c r~inrorc cmelll al

spaci ng x, in the Hh I<l ye r ~ If reinforcement crossing a Slnu
:It an <1I1!;1..:: Uj to thl: ;)xi:-: of ihe stnll .
427.3.3,2 TIll' rc inh>n.:e mcn! requ ired in Sect ion 427.3 .3
shall be placed in ei ther two orthogona l directi ons at ang les
(.(, and 11.1 10 the axis uf the st rut. or in one dircction at an
angk (I. !O the axis or the strut. If the reinforccment is in
only one directi on, 0. sha ll not be less thall 40 dcgrees.
427.3.4 If docllmentcd hy tests ,tnt! atwlyses, il shall be
permitled 10 lise an increased effective compressive
strength of a strut due to confining reinfo rcement.
427 .3.5 The usc of compression reinforcement shall be

pe rm itted {O increase Ihe si rength of it SinH . Comp ression
reinforcement shan be properl y anc hored, parallel to the
axis of the SUIII . located wit hin the stru t. and encl osed in
tics or sp irah salisfying Section 407. 11. In such cases, the
Homin,,1 stre nglh ('I f il longi tudinall y re in forced strut is:
1':,., =};,A ,., + A:);'

427.4 Strength or ncs
427.4.1 The nom inal strengt h of a tic. F,,,, shall bc taken as:
(427-6)
where (f..,. + 1:-:../;'; shall not exceed

nonprcst resscd members .
;;I.\"
and A,l' is zero for
In Eq. 427-6, it shall be pCllnillcd to (ake (~hl equal (04 15

MPa for bonded prestressed reinforc ement, or 70 MPa for
ullbonded prestressed reinforcement. Otller values of (51;,
shall be permitted whcn justified by analysis.
427.4.2 Th e axis of th e reinforcement ill II tie shall coincide

with the axis of the ti e in Ihe stl1l tand-tic model. The
effec ti ve tie width assumed in design WI can vary betw{'('11
the following limi ls. depending on the di stribution of the ( i(;
reinrorcement.
I.
If the hars in the tic- <If!.! in olle layer. the crrecti ve lie
width C'1n b(~ taken a~ the diameler of tile bars inlilc tic
plus twice th e cover to [he su rfa ce of the bars, as
show n in Fi gure 427-5(a); ;llld
2.
A practical uppcr limil of thc tic width cn n be Ifll:(1\ ::s

thc wid th cO ITcspomlin g to the width ill a h ydro~t:'hC
nod al zone, calc ulat ed as :
axis of the strut.

427.].3.1 For
//
110t greater Ihal1 40 MPa, th e
requirement of Sectio n 427.3.3 shall be pcrmiHed to be
satisfi ed by the axi s of lhe sInH being crossed by layers of
reinforcement th at satisfy Eq . 427-4:
(4275)
"" _. =1-:, {(f..b.)
Association of Structural Engineers of tile PI)ilippines
(4277)
.. .
where I. IS computed for the nodal zone in

accordance with Section 427.5.2. If the tic width excccds
tlw v,due from (a), the tic reinforcement should be
distributed approximately uniformly over the width and
thickness of the lie, as shown in Figure 427-5(b).
427.4.3 Tic reinforcement shall be anchored by mechanical
devices, posttensioning anchorage devices. standard hooks.
or straight bar devclopment as required by Sections
where the value or IJ" is given in Seclions 427.5.2.1 through

427.5.2.3.
427.5.2.1 In nodal I.ones bounded by struts or bearing

areas, or bOlh .
ji" ~ J.():
427.5.2.2 In
lie ..
Jlodal
zoncs
anchoring
/1"
011('
0.80;
427.4.3.1 through 427.4.3.4.
or
427.4.3.1 Nodal lones shall develop thc difference between

the tic force on olle side of the node and the tic force 011 the
other side.
427.5.2.3 In nodal zones anchoring two or more lics

/i" ~ 0.611.
427.4.3.2 At nodal zones anchoring one lie. the tic force

shall be developed at the point where the centroid of the
reinforcement in a tic leaves the extended nodal zone and
enters the span.
427.5.3 In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie model, the area

of each face of" a nodal zone shall not be less than thaI given
in Section 427.5. I. and the shape of each face of the nodal
zones shaJ! be similar to the shape of the projection of the
end of the struts onl0 the corresponding faces of the nodal
zones.
427.4.3.3 At nodal zones anchoring two or more tics, the lie

force in each direction shall be developed at the point wher~
the centroid of the reinforcement in the lie !eaves the
extended nodal lone.
427.4.3.4 The transverse reinforcement required by
Section
427.3.3 shall be anchored in accordance with Section
412.14.
427.5 Strength of Nodal Zones
427.5.1 The nominal compression strength of a nodal zone,
f~"" shall be:
(427-8)
where Itt is the effective compressive strength of the

concrete in the nodal zone as given in Sect. 427.5.2, and An;;
is the smaller of (I) and (2):
1.
The area of the face of the nodal zone on which Fu acts,

taken perpendicular to the line of action of Fu;
2.
The area of a section through the nodal

taken perpendicular to the
resultant force on the section.
zone,
line of action of the
427.5.2 Unless confining reinforcement is provided within

the nodal zone and its effect is supported by tests and
analysis, the calculated effective compressive stress, fee. on
a face of a nodal zone due to the strut-and-tie forces shall
not exceeclthe value given by:
ic, ~ 0.85/3,".'
(427-9)
th
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condom iniullI I
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: .ill?920nJill!lliYgmai l.com
Website: hft p:llwww.aseponline.org
th
Nalional Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
CH AP TEl1 5 " Steel an d Metals
5 '
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5 STEEL ANI) METALS SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ..................... II
PAIr!' I SPECIFICATION FOR ST EE L MEMBEHS ...................... ............ ..... ............................... ............................... 11
SyMBOLS ..... ................................................. .............................. ........ ................................. ................... ... ................. ............ II
DEFINITIONS ...... ............................................... ........................................... .. ............ ....... .................................................... 18
SECTION 501 . GENERAL PROVISIONS .. ..... ............... ......... ...... ........... .... ...................................................................... 28
501. 1 Scope ... ..
...............
.. .................. ..... .. ..... .... .......... .... ........ ....................... 28
50 1.2 Referenced Specifications. Codes and Standards ......
501 .3 Matena!. ... ................ ...
... .... ..... .....
... ....... ......... .. .... .. ...... ....... 28
.........................
50 1.4 Structu ra l Design Drawings and Speci fi catiolls.... ..
.. ........... ................... 30
...............
...............
............. .........
. ...... 32
SECTION 502 DESIGN REQUiR EMENTS .................. ........................................... ......................................................... 32

502.! Gcneral Pro visions ..
502.2 LoaJs and LoHd Combi llal ions ..... .
502.3 Design B'ISis,
............ " .... ...... ........ .
502.4 Classification of Sections for Local Buck li ng .............................................. .
502.4. Un sriffencd Elements ......... .. ..... .
502.5 FabJi c.: ation , Erection and Quality Co ntrol ..
502.6 Evaluation of Ex istin g Stnlctures.
.. .......... 33
.... 33
.. ..... 33
.......... 35
..35
........... .... ....
...... ....... ........ ..... 36

...36
SECTION 503 ... ................................. ................. .............................................................................................................. ....... 39

STABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESI GN .... ................... .............................. ..................................... .................. .................. 39
503. J Stability Design Requirc l11cllls ...
503.2 Cal c ulation of Required Strength s...
.. ... ...............
........ .... .. ......
...39
. ... .... .....
. ...... 40
SECTION 504 . DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION ..................................................................................... .......... 42

....... 43
.. ... 43
.. .. 43
... ... . 44
504 . J Sle nderness Limi tations ...... .. .

504.2 Tensilc Strength .... ............... .
504.3 Area DClermin:uion
...... .... .... .
504.4 Bui(( up Members ..... .. .......... ... ..

504.5 Pin -Co nnected Membe rs ... ....... ....... ...... ...... " ..
504.6 Eyebars
..... .. ...... .
.. .... ....... ...... ...... 44
...... 46
SECTION 505 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSJON ........................ ...................... ...................................... 46

................... 46
505.1 General Provisions ................ ............................ .
505.2 Slenderness Limit.llion s a nd Effective Le ngth
.......... . ,, '
......... .46
505.3 Compress ive Strcngth for Flexural Buckling of Members With out Slende r Elcmc lH s .
.... . .. ... ......... .... .
.. .. 47
505 .4 Compress i ve: S trength for Torsio na l and Fl ex ural-Tors ional Buck l ing of Members without Sle nder Ele ment s, ........ ... 47
505.5 Single Angle Co mpression Membe rs
............ ,.....
....... 48
505.6 Bu ilt- up Mc mber,
.. ................
...............
..............
505.7 Membe rs with Slender Elements
.. ......... 49
.. .... 50
SECTION 506 DES IGN OF MEMB ERS FOR FLEXURE .............. .......... ........................... ............................................ 52
506. 1 Gen eral Provisions

..... ........ ..... ....... .........
506.2 Dou bly SY lllm e tri c Com pac t I-Shaped Me mb ers and Channel s Bent abou t their Major Axi s.....
..... 53
. ..... 55
506.3 Doubly Symmc lric I-S haped Members with Com pac t \Vebs and Noncompacl or Sle nder Fl a nges Ben l about their
Major Axis ............................ ...... ... ......... .......................................................................................... ..... .............. .. ...... 56
506.4 Other I-Shaped Members w ith Compact or Noncompac\ Webs Bent about their Major Axis ,........... .... ,..... .................. 56
506.5 Doubl y Symmetric and Singly Symmetric IShaped Members with Slender Webs Bcnt about their Major AxiL ........ 58
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6
111
Edition Volume 1
5 ?
C HAP T!: H 5 . Steel and Meta ls
506.6 1Shapcd Mcmbr.:rs and Ciwllnl!is Gent abo ut their Minor Axi s
506.7 Square illH.1 Rct:liUlgu!ar HSS and Box-sh,lpcd Members ........ .
506.8 Rou nd IISS
............. .. .... .........
.. .......... ..
506.9 Tees and Dou ble A ngles Lo,lded ill the Plane of Symmetry ................ .
506.10 S ingl e Angles................. ................
.. ..................... ..
506.11 Rcclangular Bars and Rounds ..
... ........... .... .... ........ . ........... .
506.1 2 Unsymmetrical Shapes
....... ................... ................ .
506.13 Prop~r! ions of Beams and Girders.... . .......... ....... . .. . ...... ... .... . ......... ....... . .
..................... .')~
.. .. 59
..... 6u
.. ..... 60
61
. ..... ... 62
..... ........ ...... ...... ... 63
.. ........... ...... 63
SECTION 507 DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR ................................................................................................ 65

507.1 General Prov isions...
. ............ .
507.2 Mcmber!'> with Unstiffened or Stiffe ncd Webs ..
507.3 Tension field A clion .. ...................... ............ ... .. ..... ....... .....................
507.4 Single Angles ................................
.. .......... ..
507.5 Rectangula r HSS and Box Members .............. ..
507 .6 Round HSS .......................... .... .. ................. ..
507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Do ubly Symmetric Shapes .................................................................. .
507 .8 Beams and Girders with Web Openings ................ ......................... ...................................... .
.... .. .. 6)
.. .... .. 65
..... ........ 66
. . ... .. ..... C'}
.. ..... 67
.. 67
.... 67
.. ... 67
SECTION 508 . DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COM IlINED FORCES AND TORSION ............................................ 68
508. 1 Do ubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flex ure a nd Axial Force ... ... ........ ............. ....................... ..
508.2 Unsymlllctric and other Me mbcr$ Subject to Fl exure Ilnd Axial force ..... .. .... ........
... ......................... .
508.1 Members under Torsion <lnd Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear andlor Ax ial Force ..
SECTION 509 DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBE RS ................................................................................. .. .

509.1 General Provisions ........ ............. .
50~.2 Axial Members ....
509.3 Flexural Members ..................... .
503.3 Flexurlll Strength of Concrete -Enc ased and Filled Members..
509.4 Combined Axi a l Force and Flexure..................
...............
... ...............
.. ................
509.5 Special Cases ......................................................... .....................................................................................
68
.. .69
.. .70
. ..... 71
. .. ...... 72
. .. 7:'
.... ' .,
. .. .._...... 7g
. ..... 79
..... 79
.,'
SECTION 510 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................ ...... ....... .. .. 79

510.1 General Provis io ns
510.2 Welds.. .......... .. ............ .
510.3 Bolls and Threaded Pans ... .......................................... .
510.4 A ffected El e ments of Members and Connecting
Elements .... ............ .
510.5 Fill ers..
............... .. ............ ........
.. ................. .
510.6 Splices.. .. .. ...
.. .. ......... ........................ ........... ..... .
510.7 Bearing Sirength ...................
.. .......... ........... ................ ..
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing o n Concrete .... .
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedments ...... .............. .. .
SID.IO Flanges and Webs with COllcentrated Forces ........ ...... ....... ... ... .......... .
... 79
... 81
..87
. ..... ....... _.. .. 92
.... 9:\
........ .. 93
.91
.. 0,'~
. ... i)/t
. ... ... 1) . ;
SECTION 511 . DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS ............................................ .

51 1.1 Concentrated Forces on HSS ..
5 11 .2 HSSto HSS Truss Connection s ...... ..
5 11 .1 HSS toHSS Mo ment Connecli ons .. .
. .. 10"
.. 106
SECTION 512 DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY ................................................................ ..... .............. .... .................. 110
512.1 General Provis io ns .............................. .
512.2 Camber ...........
.. .................................................................................................................. ..
512.3 Defiections ................................................................ .................. ........................................ .................. . ..
512.4 Drift ............................................................................................ ............................................................... .
512.5 Vibration ......................... .................... ......................... .... .......................... ...
512.6 WindInduced Motion ........................... .. .............. .......................... ........... ........................ .
Association of Siructural Engineers of IIle Philippines
.. , I Ii
;.
512 .7 EXP;IIISioll allJ Culltra<.:tiull ................ " ...... " ......................................... ............................. ....................................... . 110
5 12 .8 CU fl IlC<:t IOJ1 Slip ..................
.................. ...... .................................................................................................. ____ 110
SECTION 513 - FAURI CATION, ERECTION ANI) QUALITY CONTROL_ ............................................. ............... .. 110
5 13. 1 Shop ;lIld Ef'c(.lion I)l'il\vings ............................ ........................................... ................................................................

5 13.2 pahrilillioll ... ...................................................... ..........................
.. ......................................................
513 .3 Shop Paillling..... .
...........................................................
................................................
.....
5 J 3.4 Erectioll ....... .................... ................................ ................. """ ... ,, ...
513.5 Qualil v Conlrol
.... .... ........................................... .............. .
. ................................ .......................
II J
111
112
112
113
APP E NDIX A-I - INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN ....................... _.................................................................... , 114
A I . J Gc ne,...1 Provisions .......... " ............................. .................................................. ........ ..................................................... ) 14
A-I .2 Mal erial s ................ ................................................. , ............... ,.. ,........................................ ........... ,........... ,.. ,................ 114
A ] .3 M0111cnt Rcdi stlibuli on ................................................................................................. ................................................ J 14
A-I,4 Local Buckling .................. ......................................................................................................................................... 114
A- 1.5 SI.bilily .nd Second-Order EffeCIS ..............................................
.. .............. ................................................ 115
A- I .Sa Braced Frames ............ ............................................................................. ...... . ........ .... ... ........................................ . 115
A ~ J .5b M OlllCll 1 Fr;ullcs .................... . "...................................................
............ ................................. .............................. J 15
A- I.6 Columns and Olher Compression Mcm bers....... ................
.............. ." ................................................. J 15
A I .7 Beams and Ollicr Flexural Mcmbers.. . .................. ........ ......
.. ..................................................... 11 5
.. ............................................ 11 5
A- I.S Members under Co mbi ned Forces ....................... ........ ... .... .
A-I .9 CO rlnecli olls
.. "5
APPENDIX A-2 - DESIGN FOR PONDING ......... ""." """""" .. " .......... """"""""""" .. "",,.,, ... ,,.,,""""""""""." .. " .. "" .. 116
J\ ~2 .J Simplifi ed Design for Ponding
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding
.... . 116
116
APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE """"""""""""", .. """"""""""""" .. ,, ....... ,,""""""""""" " ,,"""""""", .. ,,'" 117
A-3. 1 Ge ner;d .,', ........ ,......... ........ .................. ,.......................................................................... ,..................................
A3.2 Calculation of Maximulll St resses and Siress Ranges ........................................................... .......................................
A-3 .3 Design Siress Range
.......... ....................................................................................... " ..................................... .......
A-3,4 BoilS and Threaded P.rts ...... .. ....................... " ........................................................................................................ .. ..
A-3.5 Special Fabrication and Erection Req uirements .............. ... ............ ................................................................. " ..........
11 7
I J8
118
119
119
APPENDIX A-4 - STRUCTURAL DESI GN FO R FIRE CONDITlONS" ....... "."""" .. ..... ."" .. " .. "."".""",, ...... ,, .......... Il9
A-4.1 General Pro vi sions ... ........................................... ................................. ................ ..................... ................ .. ,........... ...... 120
A-4 .2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Ana lysis ......... .. ................................................ .. ................... ...... .............. .... 136
A-4 .3 Design by Qn.lificalion Tesling ................................................ ,.. ,............ ..................... .................................... ,.......... 138
APPENDIX A-5 - EVALUA TlON OF EXISTIN G STRU CTURES .. ,_"""." .. """"", .. "".""" .. "."""""" """,,.,, ........ ,,",139
AS. I Ge neral Provisions ............ ......... .. ................................................... .. ................... ...................... .... ............................. 139
A-5.2
A-5.3
A-5,4
A-55
Material Pro pel1i es ............................. ........... ...... .. _............................. .................................. .............. .. ......................
E valumion by Slmclural Anal ysis ......... ................. _......................... .. .................... .............. ,........................................
Evalllalio n by Load Tests ....................................... _............................... .............. .. ,... ,............... .. .................................
Evalualio n Reporl ." ............... .... ............................ _........ ....... " .............. ... ............................................ ,......................
139
140
140
140
APPENDIX A-6 - STAB ILITY BRA CING FO J( CO L UMNS AND BEA MS ........ " " " """" ... " ...... """""""",, .. ,, ......,," 140
A6. J General Pro visio ns ..
A-6.2 Columns ................... ..
A-6.3 Bea ms ........ .. ............. ..
............................. ............................ .......... .... ..................... ,..................... ,............ 141

.. ............... .. ............................................ .. ........................... ...... 141
.. .................................................................................................................................... 141
APPENDIX A- 7 DIRECT ANALYSIS M ETHOD "' _" " """""""".""""."."" .... _" ... ""." .... """".",, ..... ,,"",, ......... ""'"'' 143
A7. 1 Gener.1 RequirelllenlS .............................. . ,........... _....... ,......... ,........................................... ...................... ........ " ........ 143
A-7.2 Notion.1 Loads ... .
.. ......................................... ....... "..... ....
.. ......... " .............. .. ..... " ................. 143
.......... ... ........... ... ........ ..... ............ 143
A-7.3 Design -A nalysis Constraints ....
PART 2A SEJSMIC PROVISION FOR STRUCTUHAL STEEL BUILDINGS ,,'''''''''''''''''''''''''''',,'''''''''' ,,"" " " " ,," 145
th
National Structural Code of the PI1ilippines 6 Edition Volume 1
:}4
CHAPTER 5 . Steel and Metals
SyMBOLS ....... ................... ................... ........... .. ................ ... ........ ... ................................. ........................ ............. ................ 145
DEFINITIONS ..... ... ................................ .............. ........................ ............................... ................ .... .. .. ..... ............................. 147
PART 2A . SECTION 514 STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING PROVISIONS ...... ............................ ......................... 150
. ............ ................ ... .... ISO
514 . Scope .. ... ......... ................................. ................................. .
SECTION 515 REFERENCED SPEC IFI CATIONS, COnES, AND STANDARDS ............. .................. ....... 151
SECTION 516 GENERA L SEISMIC n ES IGN REQUIREMENTS .............. .... ..... ............. ... ............................ ....... .... 151
SECTI(h 517 LOADS, LOAD COM B I NATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS .................. .. .. . ... ............... 15i
517. 1 Loads and LO<ld Co mbinations ................ .. .... ....... .
5 17 .2 Nominal Strength ... ... ......... .
..... 152
.. . .. .......... .. 152
SECTION 518 STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRA WINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DHAWINGS, AND
ERECTION DRA WiNGS .............. ............................................ ..................... ............. ................. .......................... .............. 152
5 18. 1 Structural Design Drawings Hnd Spccifictltimls .......... _..

.......................... .
5 18.2 Shop Drawings ..........................
....................................................................
5 I 8.3 Ercction Dra\vings ....... ............ .
...... ........ .......
............ ...... .. ........ .. ................. , .. .
152
..... 152
............. ......... 153
SECTION 519 MATERIALS .................. ....... ........... .......................................... ............................................................. .. 153
. ........ 153
...... 153
. .. .. 154
5 19 . 1 Material Specifications ....... .,......

.................
. ............ ................... .
5 19.2 Material Propcni cs for Delcnn inalion of Rcqui red Strength of Mcmbers and Co nnect ions, ..... ..
519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requireme nts.
..... ... .... ......
. ... .. .... ... .... ,., .. .
SECTION 520 CO NNECTIONS , JOINTS, AND FASTENERS .................................................................................... 155
520.1. Scope ... ............... ...

520.2 Bol ted Join ts .......... .................... .
5203 Welded Joint s ............................ .
520.4 PrOleeled Zone.
520.5 Continuity Pl ates and Stiffeners
........ .............
.... 155
............. 155
.... ....... 155
.................... .. .. ......... .......... 158
.................. 158
SECTION 521 . MEMBERS ........ ..... ............... ........................................................ ............................................................ 159
.......................... 159
.. 159
. . . . ....... 159
159
.. IGO
. 160
52 1. 1 Scope ........ ............. .. .... .. ... ............ ... ........ .

52 1.2 Classification or Sections for Loca l Bucklin g ....
52 1.3 Column Stren gth ... .... .... ...... ........ ..... ..... ..... ..
52 1.4 Column Splices ...... ...... .... .
52 1.5 Column Bases .. ................ ... .
521 .6 HPiles ..... .
SECTION 522 SP EC IAL MOM ENT FRAMES (SMF) ..................................... ...................... ....................................... 161
522.1 Scope ............ ........... .. .. ....... ............ ................. ........... ... ...... ....... .............. .............. ................
522.2 Beam-Io-Columll Connections ,.................................... ...... , ....... ,
522.3 Panel Zone of Bcam-to-Colulllll Connecti ons (Beam Web PClrallcl lo Col umn \Veh) ............ ..............
522.4 Beam and Column Limi tati o ns
. .............................
.')22 .5 Continuit y Plat es ..............

............. ,. .... . ............ ...
522 .6 Column- Beam Mome nt Ratio.
........ .... .. .. .......... ... ...... ... .. .................
522 .7 La teral Bracing at Beam -In-Column Connections ..... ...... ... ........ ... ... .... ...... .
522 .8 Lateral Bnlci ng of Beams .. ......... .....
522.9 Column Splices .... ............ ... .
............. 161
.. 161
. ..... 167.
.... .... ...... .

..... .... .. ...........
.I (,?
.. l( '
. l: - ~
. 1(>:\
.... H)';
..164
SECTION 523 I NTERMEI))A TE MOMENT FRA~-IlCS (IMF) .. .......................... ............................. .... ....................... ](.4
523 .1 Scope ..... ........ ....................... ........ . .. ...... .. .. ...
........................ ......... ............
............ .. .. .... ........... .......... . . ' "
523 .2 Beanl-to-Coiunlll Co nnect ions ...... ........... ,... , ....

........ , ........ , ....... ............... , .... .... ........... , ... , .. , ..................... , ....... " ,
523.3 Panel Zone of Beam-la-Column Connections (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web) ............ ............................ ....... .. . .J
523.4 Beam and Column Limitations. ............ .... ............... .. ........... ............. .... ...
.. .... ,.. .....................
,(,5
523 .5 Contin ui ty Plates.. ...... ..
........ ...... .
.. ................... .. .... .... .
Associa tion of Structural Engin eers of the Philippines
..... ............. .. ... .. .. .... ...... ...
. ' 65
CHAPT Eri fi . Sleet and Melals
523 .6 Col umn -Beam MOnlclll Rat io ....... .. .............. .
~i
.................... ............ 165
SECTION 524 . ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OM F) ....................... ............. ... ............. .......................... ....... ,....... 166
524.1 Scope .
....... .......... .. .... .... ....... ... ..... ........... ..... ...... .......... ............... .
.........................
.... 166
524.2 BeamluCol umn ........... ......................
....................
..................
.............. .. ................. 166
524.3 Pimcl Zone of BcanH o-Column Con necti ons (Beam Web Paralle l To Colu mn Web)
... 167
524.4 Beam and Col umll Limitations........
....... ........
........ ....... ......... ......... ..
.. .. 168
524.5 Conlinuily I'lllle5.. .....
. ... ............. ......
.... ........ ...
............... .168
524.6 Columll-Beam Moment Ratio.........
...............
.................
. loS
524.7 Lateral Bracing al Beam-Io-Column Connections .................................................... .. ........................... " ... ........... 168
524.8 Laleral Bracing of Bea ms ............. .. .......... ...........................
.. ............................................................... 168
524.9 Col umn Splices.. ......... ........................................... ........... ............ ....
.................. .. ......... .....................
.... 168
SECTION 525 SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES (STMF) ......................... ........................... .............................. 169
525.1 Scope ............... .
525.2 Special Segmenl
.... ........... .
525.3 Slrenglh of Special Segmenl Members .... ..... ..
525.4 Sirengih of NonSpecial Segmenl rs.......................
.. ............. .
525.5 WidlhThickness Limilalions .......................................... ................... ........... .
525.6 Laleral Bracing ........................................... ...... ..
... . 169
.... ... 169
.. 169
.. ........ 169
.. ............................................... 169
.. ......................... 170
SECTION 526 SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (SCBF) ....................................... .................... 170
526.1 Scope ..... ........ ...... ... .......... .... ........ ...............
. . ..........
170
526.2 Members
............ .. ....... .......... ...... ............. ....... ..
............ ...
.. .. 170
526.3 Required Slrenglh of Bracing Conneelions ..
.. .. 17 1
................ .. 17 1
526.4 Special Bracing Configuration Requiremenls ......................... .............. ................... ....................
526.5 Column Splices ........................................................... ........... ....... .................................... ........................................... 172
526.6 Protected Zone ..... ... ......................... .. .... .. ... ......... ............... ............... .. ..... ........ ... ...... .. ... ............................................ .. 172
SECTION 527 ORDINARY CONCENTRI CALLY BRACED FRAMES (OCBF) ...................................................... I72
527.1 Scope.. ..................... ............................. ..............................
.. ...... ........ ................................................ 172
527 .2 Bracing Members
........ ..... .. . .. ................ .
........ ......
..... ........ ....
... 172
527.3 Special Bracing Configuralion..... ..........................
.... ............... .. ..... ...... ......
.. ... 172
527.4 Bracing Conneelion'...... .... ............... ........................ ...............
........... .. ....
............... .. ..... 173
527.5 OCBF above Seismic Isolation SySiems..................................................................................................................... 173
SECTION 528 ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF) ................................................................................... 173
528.1 Scope ... ............................... ................. ............................................................................................... ........................... 173
528.2 Links ......................................................................... .. .............. ..... ........................... .. ..................... .. ........................... 173
528.3 Link Stiffeners .......... ....... ....................... ............. .......
.. ............................................... 174
528.4 Lin kl oColumn Connections ............................................... ..........
.. ......... ..... ............... .... ............ 174
528.5 Lateral Bracing of Link ... ........................... .......... .........................
.. .... .... ............. ............ ...... ....... .......... ........... 175
528.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link .............................................................................. ....... ............................. 175
528.7 BeamtoColumn Connections ......... ... ..................... ..... ................................................................................................ 175
528.8 Required Slrenglh of Col umns .................................. ... ................................................... .................................. ...... 176
528.9 Protected ZOlle .......................... .. ............ ........ ............................ ......... ..... ............ .. .................. ..... ................................ 176
528.10 Demand Critical Welds................. ............................................
.. ...... .. ............................................. .. .............. 176
SECTION 529 IlUCKLINGRESTRAINED IlRACED FRAMES (IlRIlF) .................................................................. 176
529.1 Scope .. .........................
....................... ........................................ ....................... ... ............. .
.. ............. 176
529.2 Bracing Members .......................................................................................... .................. ........................ .. .................. 176
529.4 Special Requirements ......................................................................................................................... ....................... 177
529.5 Beams and Columns ............................... .... ............................................................................. .. ................................... 178
529.6 Protected Zone .. .. ........ .. ....................... ..... ............................... ... ........... ............................................ ... ........................ 178
SECTION 530 SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SI'SW) ......................................................................................... 179
Nalional Structural Code of the Philippi nes 6'" Edilion Vo lume 1
'i.10 . I Scope .... ............ .. .. .......... ............ ............ .. .. ... .

'i30.2 Webs
.'DO,) Conllcclion s oj' Webs {O Boundary Element s .
.') )0.4 Horii'3.lfllal and Vertical BtltlJldilry Elements ...... ....... ..... __ ........... .
.. ... 17~
...... . 179
.. ...... ... .179
.. ...... .. 17~
SECTION 5]1 QUALITY ASSUHANCE PLAN ............ ................................................................. ....... ......................... 180
5.1 1. 1 Scope ........ ...... .... ........................................................................... .................... ....... ........ .......... ...... ... ..
.. ........ 180
PART B APPENDiCES ............... .......... ...................................................................................... ... ..... ........... .......... ... ...... . 180
Jl-!. PHEQUALIFICATION
BI . I Scope
OF BEAMCOLUMN AND LINK-TO COLUMN CONNECTIONS ...................... .. 181
........ .......... ............. ............ ...... .. ..
8-1 .2 General Requirements

B*!.4 Prcqualificmioll Variables..
B ~ J .5.
Design Procedure...
B ~ 1.6.
Prcqll,llil1c,ui oll Record ...
.. .. .. .... ... ..
.. .................. ..... ... ...

....... ... ...... ........... ... ..
. ........ .... .".. . ................ .......... .. ....... ....
. ...... ........ .... ....
. ......... 181
181
.. ...... .. ..... 181
. ....... .. 182
..182
B-2. QUA L1TY ASSU RA N CE PLA N .............................................................. ................................ ....................... ........... 183
B2 .1 Sco pe ... ........................................................................................ ..................................................................... ..... 18 3
8 -2.2 In spec tion and No ndestructive Tes ting Perso llnel. .
. ..... ,.......
.. ..... 183
132.3. COlllraclOr Doeumellls..... ....... .............
................
.............. .
... 183
.. ................. 183
13 -2.4 Qualj( y Assurance Agc ncy Doculllcnts ................ ..
8 2.5 rn spcctioll Poillls and Frequencies ....
. ... 183
113. SEISMIC DESIGN - COEFFICIENTS AND APPROXIMAT E PERIOD PARAMETERS .......... ....................... 187
B3.1 Scope ........ ...... .
B-3.2 Symbols
.. .. .......... .. 187
.. .. ......... ...... .... ... .......... .... 187
Jl4_ QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAMTOCOLUMN AND LINKTOCOLUMN CONNECTIONS ...... 189
B4 .1 Scope .................. ..... . ...............

.. ............................................ .. .... .. .. ........... .
.. .. 189
.................... 189
B4 .2 Symbo ls.........
.. ........................................ .
8 -4 .3 Definitions .......... .. ........................... .. ........... .
.. .. ...................... 189
B-4.4 Test Subasscmblagc Require ments
.................... . ................... 189
0-4.5 Essential Test Variables
...... .... .... .. ... ................ ..
.. ............... ... 189
.... 191
IJ4 .6 Loading History. .............. ........
.. .......... .......... ..
.... 191
B-4.7 Instrumentation . ................... ..
.. ............ ..
.191
B-4 .8 Materials Testing Requirements
. .............
.. ........... .
8 -4 .9 Tesl Repol1ing Requirement s .... ... ... ........ .... ....... .. "
... .... .... .. ..... .................. ... ......... ........ ... .
192
193
B-4 . 10 Acceptan ce Criteri a ........... ... . ........ .. ...................... ... .... ................ ...................... .. ..... ............................... .
BS. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BUCKLINGRESTRAINED BRACES ........................................................ 193
B5 . 1 Scope .. .............................................. .. .. ........................ ....................... ....................... ... ....... .. ............. .. ......... .. .......... 191
B5 .2 Symbols ...................... ........................................... ... ... ... ............................
. ... ................. ... ... ...................... 193
B-S .3 Definitions... ...... ...... ...
.................... ........
...............
.. .. 194
.. 194
135.4 Subassemblage Tes t Specimcn .
..19'1
13-5.5 Brace Test Specimen ......... ......... ............ .
: 195
B-5 .6 Loading Hist ory.. . .............. .. ....
.. ...... ........ ........ .......... ...... .. .. .. ............ .. .. .. .
. .. 195
8 -5.7 Instrumentati on. ..
. .. ............... .. ..
. .. 195
.... ........ ...... .. ..
B-5.8 Materials Testin g Requirements. .. ............ ........
.. ... .... ...... " ....... .... ... .
.. .............. 196
B-5.9 Test Repon ing Requiremcms ............ ..............
.. ................................................. .
. .................. 196
B-5.10 Acceptance Criteria .............................. ................ .... .. .................. .. .............
..... ............ .
B-6. WELD I NG PR 0 V lSI 0 NS ................................ ........................................................ .................................................. " 197

B6. 1 Scopc ........................................................................ ............... ............. .................... ..... .... ................ ........................ 19',
B-6.2 Sll1lctural Design Drawings and Specifications, Shop Drawings, and Erection Drawings ............. .. ..... .... ......... ........ .. i en
B-6.3 Personnel ..... ....... ..... .. .... ...... .. ................ ..
.................
.. .... llJ7.
B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures ...
Association of Struclural Engineers of the Philippines
............................... .... .... 19~
13-6.5 Additional Welding ProvisicHls ..

13-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand Critical Welds Only ..
........ 19X
......... 199
n7 WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION TESTl99

B 7.1
B-7.2
13-7.3
8-7.4
Scope ............................................................... ..
Test Conditions ..
Test Specimens
.......................................................................... .. l ....
Acceptance Criteria ...
. ....... 199
. ...... 200
.. 200
.. ..... 200
PART 2B COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS ....................... 201
DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 201
SECTION 532 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................ 202
SECTION 533 . REFERENCED SpECIFICA TIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS ................................................... 203
SECTION 534 . GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 203
SECTION 535 . LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS ................................................ 204
535.1 Loads and Load Combinations .............. .
535.2 Nominal Strength ....................................................................... ..
.. .... 204
. .................. 204
SECTION 536- MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................................. 204

536.1 StnlCturai Steel ................................................. ... ...
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement ............... ..
.. 204
.. ...... 204
SECTION 537 COMPOSITE MEMBERS ....................................................................................................................... 205

537.1 Scope...
. ....................... ..
537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs ... .
537.3 Composite Beams ......... ..
537.4 Encased Composite Colomns ........
537.5 Filled Composite Columns
.. .............................. 205
.. ..... 205
.. ...... 205
. .................... 205
... . ................
.. ... 207
SECTION 538 COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................. 208

538.1 Scope ........................ ..
538.2 General Requirements ............. .
538.3 Nominal Strength of Connections ....
.. ...... 208
. ................... 208
. ...... 208
SECTION 539 - COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED (pR) MOMENT FRAMES (C-pRMF) ...................... 209
539.1 Scope ......... ..
539.2 Columns .............................................................................. ..
........................................................................... ..
539.3 Composite Beams
.. ............. ......... 209

........ 209
.. ..... 209
....... 209
539.4 Moment Connections ...... .
SECTION 540 COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (CSMF) ..................................................................... 210

540.1 Scope ......................... .
540.2 Columns.
540.3 Beams ...................................... ..
540.4 Moment Connections ..
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio .................... ..
...... 210
. .. 210
.. .. 210
. .... 210
. ................................................ 210
SECTION 541- COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (CIMF) ....................................................... 211

54 J.1 Scope ...................... ..
......... 211
541.2 Columns ........................... ..
.. .................................... 211
541.3 Beams ........... .....
. ........................................................................................................ ..
.. ................... 211
541.4 Moment Connections .. "" .............. .
................................ ............... .................................... ................... ............... 211
SECTION 542- COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (COMF) ............................................................... 211
rh
National Structural Code of tl're Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
!)
CHAP"!"!: n:.:,
Steel (]n(J /Act,jb
542. 1 Scope ......................... .... .

542 .2 Colulll lls ... .. ............................... .. ..
542.3 BeClllls ..
542.4 M ome nt COllllcelion s
.. ............ .... ......................... .. ...... .. .. ..

. .... 2 11
.... .................. ... .... ...........
.. ..... 2 11
.. ...... ............ ..... .... ............... .... .... ............................. .......... 21 1
................................
........ 211
SECTION 54J - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CON CE NTRICALLY BRA CED
FRAMES (C-eBF) ............................. 211
543.1 SCOP" ....

........... ................... ................
.. ........................................................ .................... 2 12
543.2 COiUt11IlS ....... .......... ...................
................
.. .. ....... ............ ..................................... ............ 212
543 .3 Beams
...................
......... .. .... ...............
...... .... .........................
.. ........... 212
543.4 ilrace.s ........ .. ............
.......................... ..................
................ ............ ...................................
.. ........ 212
543.5. Conllc(:lions.. ......... ..... ....... ... ......... .. .......... ................... ..................
.............. ...... .,........... .................... ... . 212
SECTION 544 - COMPOSITE OHDINARY BRACED FnAMES

544 . 1 Scope .................................. .... .
544 .2 Columns..
................................ ..
544.3 Beams ...... ............................ ..
544.4 Braces ................................................................. ..
544 .5 Conneclions .......... ..
(C-OBF) ........................................ .................... 212
.. .................................................... 2 12
.............................................................................................. 212
................
.. ............. .................. 212
.... ........ ........
.. ........... ............ ........................ 212
. ..................... .............................
.. ... 212
SECTION 545 - COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FnAMES (C-EBF) .. ...... .. ............................................ 213
.. ............. .. .... .... 213
.. ........ . 213
.. ... ... 213
.. ............. 213
.. . . . 213
545. 1 Sco pe .. .
545 .2 Co lullllls ..
545.3 Links ........ ............................. ....... ..
545.4 Bra""s ......................................... .................... .
545.5 Connec[ions ..
SECTION 546 - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW) .............................................................. .. ....................................................................... 213
.................. 214
.. ..... ............ 214
.. ............ 214
.. ............... 214
546.1 Scope ....

.. .................................... ....... ..
.. ................ .
546.2 BOllndary Members ...
546.3 Steel Coupl ing Beams
............. "..
546.4 Encased Com posile Coupling Bcams ...
SECTION 547 - SPECIAL REINFOHCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COM POSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) ............. ....... ................. ............. ................................. ........................ .............................. 215
547.1 Scope........ .
......................................................
.....................
....... .... ....
.. ........... .... 215
547.2 Boundary Members ................................................... .. .. ......... .............................
.. ............................................ 215
547.3 Steel Couplin g Beams
...................... .. ......
. ................................................................................. 215
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams ...... ............................... ....
.. .. ....................................... .... ...................... ... 215
SECTION 548 - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-SpW) .................................................................. 216
548 .1 Scope. ...........................
.. ..... .............................................. ........................................... .. ........ .......... ............... 216
548 .2 Wall Elements.. ...
. ............................................................... _...................... ..................................... 216
.. ........................................................ 216
548.3 Bo undary Members ... ............... " .... .... ......................................... ............... .
..................................... .. 2 16
548.4 Open in gs. ....... .. ............... .. .... ........
.. ..... ... .............................. ............. .
SECTION 549 . STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRA WINGS AND SpECIFICA nONS, SHOP ORA WINGS, AND
ERECTION ORA WiNGS" ........................................................... ..... ................................ .. ........... ....................................... 21 7
SECTION 550 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN ....... .............................................. ........ .... ..... ....................................... 217
PART 3 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ........................................ ................... 2I ~
SyMBOLS ................................................... ........................................................................................................................... 2L
DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 22-"1
SECTION 551 GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................ 228
551.1 Scope, Applicability and Definitions ................ .... .......................... ..
.................. ........................ .................. 228
55 1.2 Material ........................................................................................................... .

.................................................... 22<)
55 1.2. 1 App li cable Steeb ......... .. .................................................. ..... ..... .............
.........................
.... ............ .... 22~
55 1.3 Loads ....................
. ................................................................................................................................ ........... 231
55 1.4 Allowahle Strength Des ign .................... ............ ....................................
. ............................................... .......... 2) I
551.5 Load and Hcsis(;.IIH:C Fal:lOr Design ................................................ ".... ... ........... .....
................
..... 23 1
551 .7 Yield Siress and Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming .
............... .. .. .........................
.212
55 1.B Serviceahi lity.
.......... ........... .
.............. .. .. ...............
............................... ... ... ..... .. ... 2J2
551.9 Referenced Doculllents ..... ....... .............................
, . ... .......
.. ............ .... . 232
SECTION 552 - ELEMENTS ........................................................................................................: ................................. ..... 234

552. J Dimcilsiorwi Limits .lIld Considerations ... ....................... .................
............ ......................................... 234

552 .2 Effective Widths I)f Stilfened Elements ...................................................... .......... ....................................................... 235
552.3 Effecti ve Widths or Ullstilfcllcd Elements ................................................. ................................................................... 238
552.4 Effeclive Widlh of Uniformly Comprc~scd Elcmcllt~ wilh a Simpl e Lip Edge Stiffener ......................................... "." 240
522.5 Effective widths of Stiffened Elcmcnls Willi Single or Multiple Intcnllcdiale Stiffeners or Edge Sti lTened Elements
with In lcnncdiate Sliffc l1cr(s) .......................................................... ............................. ................................ , ...... , ........ 241
SECTION 553 - MEMIIERS .. __ ........ _......... _............... _......_.. __ .. _......................... _.. _......................................... _.................... 243
I
,
or
553. 1 Propcnics
Sections , ....... ........... ........ .. ...................... ............................................................................................... 243
553.2 Tension Member.; .........
.. .......... .. .................................................................................................................. 243
553 .3 Flex ural Menlbers ...... ,...
.. ........................ ,.....
..............
. ... ..................................... 24]
553.4 Conce ntri cilily
Loaded Compression Members ..
.....................
.. .................. 259
553.5 Co mbilwd Axi,ll Load and Bending.. .............. .
................
.. ....... 262
SECTION 554 - STRUCTURAL ASSEMBLIESAND SySTEMS ................................................................................... 2G5

554. 1 Built-Up Sections..
....................................
................ ....
.. .............. .. 265
................ .......... .... .. .. .. ......... ..............
.............. ......................
...266
554 .2 Mixed Systems ...........
554.3 Lateral and Stability Bracing .... .................... ............. .................
.. .............................................. 266
554.4 Cold -Formed S teel Light-Frame Construction .......................................... ...
.. ................................................ 268
554.5 Floor. Roof. or Wall SteCi Diaphragm Construction ...................... ,............. .. ............................................ .............. 268
554 .6 Metal Roof aud Wall System .... .................................................................................................................................. .. 269
SECTION 555 - CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS ...... ...... _.. _..................... _......... __ ..... _...... _................................................ 275
555.1 General I'ro"isions .......... ............................................................................... ..... ........................................................... 275
555.2 Welded Connections .............................. ................................................ ............................... ......................................... 275
555.3 Bolted Connec ti on ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 1
555.4 Screw Connections ............................. ........................................................
.. .. ..... ...... .. .................................. ... .. 283
555.5 Ruplure .................................. ...... .................................................................... ..... ......................................................... 285
555 .6 Connecting to Other Materials .. ...... .... .......................................................... ............. .................................................. 286
SECT/ON SSG - TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES ....... _........ _.............................................................................................. 286
556. J Tests for Determining Structural Performance .. . .......................
. .......... .... ................. ... .................
.. .... 286
556.2 Tests for Confirming Structural Performance" .. "........................ .... ......
.. ............. "."..........
.. ... 288
556.3 Tests for Determinin g Mechanical Properties ." .................... ".............. ..
.. ..................................... . . " .,288
SECTION 557 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS FOR
CYCLIC LOADING (FA TIGUE)................................ ....... .................... ................................... ........................................... 290
557. 1 General ................................... ..... ................................................................................................................................. 290
557.2 C<llculalion of Maximum Stresses and S tress Ranges ............ ....................... ......................... ................ ...................... 29 1
557.3 Design Stress Range ............... ..................................................................................... ..... ............................................. 29 I
557.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts .......... ...... .. ............................................................................................................................. 29 1
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements ............................................ ... ................ .... ......................... ............... ..................... 292
SECTION C-I - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS USING THE DIRECT
STRENGTH METHOD .................. _................................................................................................................. .................... 292
C-I Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members Using the Direct Strength Method .................................................... 292
1h
National Structural Code of the Pil ilippil10S 6 Edition Volume 1
SECTION C2 . SECON()ORnEIt ANA I. I'SI'S ........... .................................................................. .................................. 299

C.2. 1 Gellera l HcquirclIlcllts ...................... .
C.2.2 Design and Ana lys is COIlSII':li IlI S ....... .
................................... ....... 299

............................ .. 299
SECTIO N C3 - Af)()ITlONAL PROVi SiONS ... ... ............................. ... ........ ......................... : .......................................... 300
C.3.1 Scope .
................ .
.........................
.... 300
C.3.2 Olhor Sle<is .................. .
................
............ 300
..... .. ....... .. ..
C.3 .3 Londs ..
........... .... . .
........ 300
C.3.4 RcfcrclH.:cd Documellts ................ ,' . ........... _......... .
... .... ..... ........ .............................................. ...... . 300
C.3 .S Tension Members ..... .
. 30 1
..................................................................
C.3.6 Liglll-Framc Steel Constru clioll ...
. ..................... .. ..... .............. ......... ........ ........... ..... ..... 301
C.3.? Welded Connections
... ........... ............... ................ .......... ... ..
.... .. ............... .............
..302
C.3.8 Bolted Connecti ons .... .
..... :~O7.
C.3.9 RuplUrc..... .................. . .................. ................. ......... ..... .. ... ..... ......... .
......... ......... ...... ......... - ........ .... 30(j
CHAPTERS
STEEL ANI) l\1J!:TA~S
SI'ECIFICkttQNEQR
STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
A;,
AJ.~
A1;,
Aji
A,
. Ag
The Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, hereafter

referred to as the Specification, shall apply 10 the design
of the structural steel system, where the steel elements arc

defined in the AISC Code of Slttlidard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges, Section 2.1.
This Specification includes the following

Part I
Specification for Steel members
Part A
Appendices for PaIl 1
Fal12
Seismic Provision for StJ1lctural Steel Buildings
A,
AJ ,
/llJll
Part 2A Structural Stee! Buildings - Provisions

Part B
Concrete Buildings
A,
A"
Part 3
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel
Pan C
StJ1lclural Members
AI\"
A"'i
Appendices for Part 3
PART 1
SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL
MEMBERS
A,
A,
/J
SYMBOLS
Alii
A,
A,
Cross-sectional area of the overlapped branch,

2
mm
Area of COllcrete, mm 2
Area of concrete slab within effcctive width,
mm
B
Overall width of rectangular I-ISS main member,

connection,
measured 90 to the plane of the
Factor for lateral-torsional buckling in tees and

double angles
Overa!! width of rectangular HSS branch
member, measured 90 to the plane of the
connection, mm
Overall branch width of the overlapping
branch
Overall branch width of the overlapped branch.
V.,lidth of plate, transverse to the axis of the main
mm
111m2
Il1m?
Area of an upset rod based on the major thread

diameter, 111m2
2
Effcctive net area, mm
Summation of the effective areas of the cross
section based on the reduced effective width, b ,',
mm
Stiffener area, mm~

Net tensile area, 111m2
Web area, the overall depth times the web
thickness, til", , 1111112
Effective area of the weld, mm 2
Effective area of weld throat of any ith weld
element, mm 2
Area of steel concentrically bearing on a
2
concrete support, mm
Maximum area of the portion of the supporting
surface that is geometrically similar to and
concentric with the loaded area, 111m2
Overall width of rectangular HSS member,
measured 90 to the plane of the
connection,
Q
Column cross-sectional area, mnl

Total cross-sectional area of member, nun:?
2
Loaded area of concrete, mm
Cross-sectional area of the base metal, mm 2
Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or
threaded part, mnl
Cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch,
AI)
Shear area on the failure path, mill::

Area of continuous reinforcing bars, Illm~
Appendices for PaIt 2
Part 2B Composite SIJ1lctural Steel and Reinforced
Area of compression llange, Illrn~

Gross tension Hange area, tnm 2
Net tension flange area, !lln/
Area of tension flange, IYIm 2
2
Gross area of member, rnm
Cjross area of section based on design wall
thickncss mm!
2
Gross a'r~~l of composite member, Jl1m
2
Chord gross area, mm
J
Gross area subject to shear, Illm
Net area of member, 111m2
2
Net area subject to tension, mm
Net area subject to shear, 111m2
2
Projected bearing area, mlll
Area of adequately developed longitudinal
reinforcing steel within the effective width of the
concrete slab, 111m2
Area of stcel cross section, mm?
Crosssectional area of swd shear connector,
member, mm
Factors used in determining Mu for combined

bending and axial forces when firsl-order
analysis is employed
HSS torsional constant
111
c,.
(,
1.:ttt:r;ll-lorsional buckling lllodifit,lI ion factor

for nonu niform momCIH diagrams when hoth
F,.,
ends of (he.' unsupported segment ;lrc braced
I;/:x,\"
COCfriC iCll1 rclaling rela tive brace stiffn ess and
1':.,.
axis, MPa
t.:U(V;IHJrc
COm>lil1l1 lHlscd 011 slress ca tegory. giVl'1l in
Table
501').1
Coefficient assu ming no lateral tr;lll slalion of th e
frame
Ponding
c.
C,
C,.
Cn
D
ncxibilit y
coefficient
fo r
primary
member in a flat roof
Coefficient for web 5idcsway buckling

Ponding flexibility coefficient for second.try
member in a flat roof

Web shear coefficient
Warping constant , rnm ('
f)
Nominal dead load

Outside diameter of round HSS member.
f)
Outside diameter, mill
!Hill .
Ou tside diameter of round HSS main member.

111 III
Chord diameter. mm
D"
Outside diameter of rOllnd I-tSS branch meJ1Jber.
Ec
"
P"
mill
Factor us ed in Equation 507 .3 -), depe ndent on
type of transverse stiffeners used in a plme
girder
In slip-critical co nn ections, a multiplier that
rencets the ratio of the mean installed bolt
pretension (0 the specified minimum bolt
pretension
Modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000 MPa
Modulus of elasticity of concrete =
JT:.
0.043w/'
MPa
Modulus of elasti ci ty
or
concrete. at elevated
1'.
te mperatu re, MPa.
Es
F"
Elastic nl!xul"ill bllc~ling stl"l'SS about the major

axis. MPa
ElcCll"odl! class ification number, MPa
Elastic l1exural buckling stress about the minor
Effective stiffness of composite section, N_mm 2

Mod ulus of elastiCity of steel at e1evatcd
temperature, MPa
Modulus of elasticity of steel =200 000 Mra
Available ax ial stress at th e. point of
consideration, MPa
Nominal strength of th e base metal per unit area,
MPa
Available flexural strc.ss at the point of
consideration about the major axis, MPa
Ava ilable flex ural slress at the poi nl ' of
consideration about the min or axis, MPH
Available stress, MPa
Critical stress, MPa
Buckling stress for the section as determined by
analysis. MPa
Critical stress about the minor axis, MPa
Critical torsional buckling st ress, MPa
EI:!stic critical buckling stress, MPa
F,
Elastil.' torsiollal huck ling stress. MP"

A caltu latcd strcss lIsed ill the calculation of
nominal flexural strength. MPa
Nominal torsional stre ngth
Nominal tensi!!: ..:trcss Fill ,or shear stress, rnv
from Table: ) I 03.2. M I'a
Nominal tcnsile strc.'iS from T<lblc 510.3.2, MPa
Nominal tensile stress Illodilied 10 include th e
effects ofshe;Jri ng stress, MPH
Nominal shear stress from T:lblc 510.1.2, MPa
Design stress range, MPa
Threshold fati gue stress range, maximuill stress
ran ge ror indefinite design lil"e frolll Table 501) . 1. Mla
Specified minim um tensile st rength of the type
of steel being lIsed, MPa
Specified minimu m tensile stre ngth of a stud
sh("1I" connect or, MPa
Specified minimum tcnsile st rength of the
cOllfl ec ted material , MPa
Speci fi ed minimum tensil e strength of HSS
material. MPa
Speci fi ed minimum tensile stre ngt h of thc type
of steel being used at elevated temperature, MPa
Nominal strength of th e we ld metal per unit
MPa
area.
Nominal stress in any ilh weld c.icmcnl, MPa
x component of stress Fwi , MPa
y component of stress Fwi , MPa
Specil1ed minimum yield stress of the type of
steel being lIsed, MPa. As used in (h is
Specification, "yield stress" denotes either the
specified minimum yield point (for those steels
that have a yield point) or speci fied yield
strength (for those steels that do not have a yield
point).
Spccilied minimum yield stress of the
compression flange, MPH
Specified minim um yield stress of the colu mn
web. MPa
Specified mi nim um yie ld stress of HSS member
material. MPa
Specified minillllim yield stress of HSS main
member material , MPa
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch
member material. MPa
SpeCified 1ll11lJIll UIH yield $ ~ reS1> of Il l"':'
overlapping bra nc h material, MPa
Specified 1l1immUIl1 yield ~t rcss of I!!:'
overlapped branch materi al, MP;l
F'f
Specified minimum yield st ress of the flange.
I.
MP"
PI''''
Speci fied minimuill yie ld stress of the I)'I>C of

steel heing used al ele vated IcmpcralUrc. MPa
Speci fi ed minim um y ield ~>lrCSS of plate, MPa
SpcciJi cd minimulll yield stress o f reinforci ng
bH fS, MPa
Spccilicd minimum yield stress of the stiffener
material . MPH
"iJ'
Specified minimum yield stress o f the web. MP;l

She;lf modulus of elasticity of steel :: 77 200
Ml'a
Story shear produ ced by the lateral forces used (0
co mpu te II JI N
Overa!1 height of rectangul ar HSS member,
measured in th e plane of the connection, 111111 .
Overall height of rectangu lar HSS main member,
measu red in the plane of the connec li on, mill.
L.
H
H
Flexural constant.
iii,
Ove rall height of rectangul ar !-ISS bmnch

member, measured in the pl a ne of lhe
co nnec ti on. 1111ll .
Overall depth of th e overlapping branch.
Moment of inertia in the place of bending, mm~ .
Moment of incllia about the axis of bend in g,
,
nUll .
I.
I"
I"
Is
I,
I"
I), I,.
I,. .
I,
I),
K
K,
K,
L
L
L
L
L
Moment of inertia of the concrete section. mllf1.

Mome nt of inenia of the steel deck supported 011
seco nd ary members. mm4.
4
Mome nt of inertia of primary members, I11m ,
4
Moment of inertia of secondary members, 111 III .
Moment of inertia of steel shape, mm",
Momen t of inertia of reinforcing bars, rnm4.
Momen t of inertia aboU\ the principal axes. I11m4 .
Outof-planc momcnt of inertia. 11111l4.
Minor principal axis moment of inertia. nlln4.
Moment of inertia about y-axis referred to the
compression flange, or if reverse curvatu re
bending referred to smaller flange , mm4.
Torsional constant, mm4.
Effect ive length factor determined in accordance
with Section 503.
Effect ive length factor for torsional budding.
Effective length factor in the plane of bending.
calcu lated based on the assumption of no latera l
translation set equal to 1.0 unless analysis
indicates that a smaller value may be used .
Effective length fac tor in the plane of be ndin g,
calcu lated based on a sidesway buckling
analysis.
Story height, mm
Length of the member. mill.
Actual length of end-loaded weld, mm .
Nominal occupancy live load.
Laterally un braced length of a member, 111m .
Span length, 111111.
1..."
l.pi'
Length of" member between work POilllS a\ truss

chord cenlcrlincs. mill .
Length bctwc('!1 points that :If(~ cit her hr:u:cd
against lalerClI di sp l<lcClllCllt o f cOlllprcssioll
n a nge or braced tlgainst twi:>t of the l.TOSS
secti on, mill .

Distance between bnl(.cs. 111111 .
Length of channel shca r co nll ector. Illlll.
Clear dis tance. in the direction ~)f thc force ,
between the cdge of the hole and \I;~ edge of the
adjacent hole or edge of the mate ri al. mill.
TOlal effective weld length of groove and fillct
welds to rectangular HSS. mm.
Limiting laterally unbraced lengt h for the limi t
slate of yieldi ng mm.
Column spacing in direction of girder. m.
Limiti ng laterall y unbraced length for plastic
ana lysis, mm .
.
Maximum unbraced length for Mr (t he reqUIred
ll exural strength ). mm .
L,
L,.
M il
M b,
Me
M..
M"
M,
M,.
M,.
Limiting laterall y unbraccd length fo r the limit

Slate of inehlsti c latera l-torsional bucklin g, mill .
Column spacing perpendi cul ar \0 direc tion of
girder, m.
Distance from maximum to zero shear force.
mm.
Absolute va llie of moment at quanel" point of the
unbraccd segment, N-mm
Required fle xural strength in chord, usi ng ASD
load combinati ons, N-1ll111
Absolute value of moment at centerline of the
unbraced segment. N-mITI
Required bracing moment. Nmm
.
Absolute value of moment at three-quarter polin
of the un braced segment, N-mm
A vailable flexural strength determin ed III
accordance with Secti on 506. N-mm
Available Oexural-lorsional strength for strong
axis flexure determined in accordance wi th
Section 506, N-mm
Elastic lateral-torsio nal bucklin g moment. N-mm
First-order moment under LRFD or ASD load
combinations caused by lateral translat ion of. the
frame only. N-f11Tn
Absolute val ue of maximum Illomelll in the
un braced segillent, N-mm
Nominal flexural strength, N-I1Ull
First-order moment using LRFD or " SD load
combinations assuming there is no lateral
translation of th e frame, N-mm
Plastic bending moment. N-nun
Required second-order flexural strength under
LRFD or ASD load combinati ons, N-ml11
Required fiexural strength using LRFD or ASD
load combinati ons, Nmm
Required flexural strength in chord , N-mln
th
National Stru ctural Code of til e Pll ilippines 6 Edition VO!lJnlC 1
. ..
.~,>
\,
M, 'f'
R cq llir~d in-plant.' Ik xura l st rength ill branch.
/'
N- 1Il1ll
1',
Rcqui rt.'d ow-or-plant' flexural strcngth in

hnllich . N- mm
M"
Required l1 exllral strength in chord_ using. LRFD
load cornbil\iII i on~. N-1ll1ll .
M,
Yield moment aholJt the <lx is or bcnding. N-Illlll
MI
S!lIaller Illome nt , calculated from a firsi-Mder
nJlalysis, at th e ends of that portion of' the
mcmbcr unbmcc{. i;! th e plane of bending linda
considera ti on, N-mm
M"!,
Larger moment , c.llc ulatcd from a lirst-(Inlt.'r
i11l<1l ys is, lit the ends of that P0l1i oll of the
member unbracccf in the plane of bCllll ing tinder
ct Hlsideration, N-mm
N
Length of be<l ring (nol less than k for cnd beam
reactions). mill .
N
BCilrin g length of-the load. measured parililel to
the axis of the HSS member, (or measured ilt TOSS
the width of the HSS in the case of the loaded
cap plates), mill.
N
Number of slress range flu ctuatioJl s in desi gn
life .
N"
Number of bolts carrying the appli ed tension.
N,
Additional lateral load.
N,
Notional lateral load applied al level j, N
Number or slip planes.
N
0,.
Overlap connection coefficient.
P
Pilch, Ilun per thread.
PI"
Required brace strength, N
P,.
Avaiitlble axial compressive strength, N
P,
AV<lilable tensile strength. N
Pc"
Avai lable compressive strength ou t of the plane
of bending. N
P("I,P("] Elastic critical buckling load for braced and
unbraced frame, respectively, N
Pd _
Euler buckJing load, evaluated in the plane of
bending. N
ptrUJ
Firsl~order axial force using LRFD Of ASD load
combinations as a result of lateral translation of
the frame only (ten sion or compression), N
P II(I.r J
First~order axial force using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, assuming there is no lateral
translation
of
the
frame
(tension or
compression),N
1'"
Nominal axial strength, N
P"
Nominal axial compressive strengt h wit hollt
consideration of length effects, N
P"
Nominal bearing strengt h of concrete, N
Pr
Required seco nd-order axial strength using
LRFD or ASD load combi nations, N
Pr
Required axial compressive strength using
LRFD or ASD load combinations. N
P,
Required tensile strength using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, N
Pr
Required strength, N
M , "I'
P"
1',
(i
00
/I
/I
/I"
NUl.
/I",
R"
Rcq ui rnl <lxiil l :-.tfcngth in hra nch. N

Rcqui n:d axial stfl' ogth ill chord. N
Req uired :Ixial strength in c:olllprc','iinn. N
Memher yie ld st r~ l1 g t h, N
pull reduction factor for slende r t:omprcss io ll
cknH.'llts.
Rcdut'tion
for
slender stiffelled
compression clements.
Cho rd-st ress interac tioll p;\rarncte.r.
Nominal st rength of one slUd shear l'Ollllc.cior, N
Reduction
f"m:tor for slender u n ~ l i fTe n('.d
comprcssion clements.
Nominal load due to fili nwalc r or snow,
exclusive of the pon ding t'olllrihulill!l, i\1Pa
Sei smic response modiliea ti on coe ffici!.":nt .
Required strength (ASD).
Redu ction factor for joints using a pair or
Inllls vcrsc fillet welds only.
Coefficient 10 account for group effect.
Faclor in Equation 50J-6h dcpcm.l en t on Iype of
system.
Cross-sec ti on Illollosy mrnctry parameter.
Nominal st rcngth , spct' if"ied ill Section 502
through.') J I.
RII
R'I
R,
"
R"JI'
N fl/
R"'f
S
S
S
S
Sc
Sy
T
Nomina! slip resi sta nce, N

Position erfect factor for shea r studs
Web piast ifi cat ioll factor
Reduction factor for reinforced or nonrcinforced
transverse pani al"joilH"pcnetralioJ) (PJP) groove
welds
Web plastificalion faclOr corresponding to the
tension nange yielding limit Slate
Required strengt h <LRFD>
Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded
fillet welds, as determin ed in accordance with
Table 5 10.2.5
Tala.! nominal strength of transversely loaded
fillet welds, as detennined in 'lccordance wil h
Table 510.2.5 without the alternate in Sect ion
510.2.4 <a>
Elastic section modulus of round HSS, Illml
Lowest elastic section modulus rel<lti ve to the
axis of bending, mm J
Spacing of secondary members, Ill.
Chord elastic secti on modulus, 1ll1l1"'
Elastic section modulus to Illt~ toe il '
compression relative to lhe axis of bending, mn<
Effecti ve section modulus about Inajor <lxis, Ill m ;
Elastic section modulus referred to tension and
3
compression flan ges. respecti vely, mm
Elastic secti on modulus taken about the prillcip;!l
axes, mm 3
For channels, taken as the minimum see:;:)) :
modulus
Nominal forces and deformations due !o L::
design-basis fire defined in Section 1\-4.2.1
Association of Siructural Engineers of Ihe Philippines
CHI\PTEH :J . Steel and Met HI s
. he width b is th e distant:e from the free edge to

'-:!stcHers or line of we lds , o r the
d i 'itancc bc t wc<.~ 11 adjacclII lines or fa ste ners o r
li l ~ cs of welds: fo r rectang ul ar HSS , the widt h b
is Ille clear di stance between the webs less the
insi de corner radills on each side, mill
Wid!.!j of thl! angle leg resisting the shew' for ce,
mm
Width l)f column fl ange, mm
Rcducuj erfec tive width, mm
Effecti ve edge distance; the distance from the
edge of t l}(~ hole to the edge of the pari me asured
in the di recti on norma l (0 the applied force, m m
Effective w idth or the branch face welded to the
chord
Effe.Cliw 'wi dth of the branch face welded to the
Qverlapp<,'d brace.
Tensioll force due 10 ASD load combinations,

kN
Min im um fasten er
SIOJ. I ,kN
tens ion
g ive n
in
I 'le first row of
Table
Available tors ional strength, N-Ill!ll

Nomin:d IOrsiona l strength, N-IllJ11
Required torsional strength, N-Il1J11
Tension force.: due to LRFD load combi(1alions,

kN
h'i
b,
Sheil!' hig (;II.:lor

Utiliz<lt ion nui o
U.,
Reduc tion coefficient. used in calcul ating bloc k

s hear rupture strength
Stress index
b ..... ,
U,
V
Stress index
bN W
V'
Required shear force transfen"cd

co nn ectors, N
Available s hear streng th , N
u
u,'
V,
V"
V,
v,
v,
)',
z,
a
bItT
Required shear force introduced to colu mn, N
by
shear
Nominal shear st rength. N

Req ui red shear strength eH the locati on of the
stiffener, N
Required shear strength usin g LRFD or ASD
Gravit y load from the LRFD load co mbination
or J.6 tim es the ASD load combinmion applied
at level i, N
Hole re du cti on coefficie nt, N
Plasti c secti o n mod ul us about the axis of
bending, mill)
Branch plastic sectio n modulus abou t the correct
axi s of be nding, 111111"
Plastic sec tion modulus abou t the principal axes,
J
mm
C lear d istance be twee n transverse sti ffeners,
b,
"
a
D islallCC between cOll nectors in a built -up

member, 111111
Sh0l1 est di stan ce from edge of pin hole to edge
of member measured parallel to direction of
force, mm
Half th e length of the nonwelded root fa ce in the
direction
th e th ickness of the te nsio!l-loCl ded
or
bf ,
hI
b"
b,
d
d
d
d
Nominal fastener lliametcr, mm

Full nominal depth of the section, mill
Full nomin a! de pth I 'f tee, 111111
Depth of rectangular bar, 111m
d
d
Full nonunal depth of It 'C, mm
d
d
d
dlJ
d
ti,"
l!
e"""'!'1
ii!
plate, Illlll
(1,,-
/,
b
b
Rat io of two times the web area in co m press ion

due to appli cati on of major axis bendi ng moment
alone lO the area of the comprc.o.;sion !lange

components
Outside width of leg in compression, Illlll
Full width of longest angle leg, mill
'Widt h o f ullstiffcncd com pression e leme nt ; for
fl anges of I-shaped members and tees, the widt h
b is ha lf the fil II -flange width, bf ; for legs or
angles and flanges of cha nn els and zees, the
width b is the full nominal dim ension; ror plates,
Flange w idt l), mm

Compression nangc width, 111 m
Width oftensiv il fl ange. mill
Longe r leg of a f, gle, mill
S honeI' leg o r .11} /~Je. mill
Stiffener width for o ll e-sid ed stiffeners, 1111ll
"f,'
111111 .
S l:i
Full nominal deplh of ",cctlon, 111m
Dinmeter, 111m
Pin diameter, mill

RoBe r diameter, mill
Beam depth. I11Ill
Nominal diameter (body or sl .:mk diameter), Illill
Column depth, mOl
Eccentricity in a truss c.;oll llectic..n. positive being
away from the branches, m ill
Dist<lIlce from the edge of slUd sila.llk to the stee l
deck web, measured at mid-heigh!. of the deck
ri b, and in th e load bearing direction I) f th e stud
(in otller word s, in the direction of I.naximum
moment for a simply supported beam ), 1ll ,'1 }
Required axial stress at the poiI'I , of
co nsideration lIsi ng LRf-n or ASO ,!,)ad
.Ii"",. :,
combinations. MPa
Required fl ex unl l stress .11 {he point 0 1
considerat io n (major .. xis. minor axis) using
/'c.
Spec ifi ed minimulll co mpress ivc stlcngth of
LRFD or ASD IO<ld combinatio ns, MPa
[ 1'1"
J,
j.,
N,'ltional Structufi::11 Code of the Philippines
conc rcte., MPa

Spec ified minimum compressive stn 'ngth or
concrete at clevtt tc temperatures, MPa
Slress due to D + R (the nominal dead lead + tloc
nominal load due to minwater or snow c.xcl lls ive
of the ponding contribu tion), MPa
Req uired shear st rength pCI' unit area, 1\1]> 1',
Gi ll
h@on Volum e 1
5 1(j
"
"
",.
h"
II f'
h~, .
k
k
k,.
k.\
CHAPTEn
~l
. St(wl and Metals
Transvc rsL' c:.:cntcr-h>-rcnter spadng tgage)

between fastener gage lines, 111m
Gap hetw(.~cn lUes of branch members in a
gapped K- co nnc ctioll, neglecting th e wdd s, 111m
Clear distance between /langes less the liJIel or
corner r.adius for rolled shapes; fl Jr built -up
sections. the di stance between adj(l( ellt li nes of
fasteners or the dear distance bct v.'ccn Jlangcs
when welds arc used; for tCC!'i. the ove rall depth;
ror rectangul<lr I-ISS, the clear di st<tncc between
the flanges less the inside comer radius 011 each
side, mm
Distance between centroids of individual
components pcrpendiculnr to the member ClJ>;is or
buckling, mill
Twice the di sta nce from the ce ntroid {o the
following: the in side face of the co mp res sion
nangc less the fillet or corner radius , for rolled
shapes; th e nearcs t line of fasteners at the
compression nangc or the ill side faces of the
compression l1ange wh en welds arc used, for
builHIj> secti ons, mm

Distance between flange .;cnt roi ds, mill
Twicc the di slallce frolll the plastic neutral axis
to thc nearest line of faste ners at th e co mpression
llallge or the inside face of the compression
nange when welds arc used, mill
Hole factor
Factor defined by Equation 507.2 -6 for
minimum
Ploment of' incniH for a
transverse stiffcnr r.
Distance from ouler face of flange to the web toc
of fillel, mm
Outside corm:.r radius of the HSS, which is
permitled 10 he taken as I.St i r unknow n. Illlll
Coefficie nt tor slender ullstiffened clements, mill
Slip-criti c.ll combined ten sion and shear
coe ffici ~ nt
k,_
I
II
II
q
r
r,
radius
of
gyrat ion
of individunl
component in a built-up rncmht.:L I11Ill

Radi us or gyralU)1I uf indi vidu al co mponent
relative (0 its centroidal axis paralkl 10 member
axi s of buckling. mill
r oO
Pola r radius of gynllion alHHIl the shear t.:c ntcr,

n1l11
r,
Radius of gyralion oj" the !lange comp(1)L!llls ill

flexur;!l compression plus one-thi rd of the web
arca in cumpression due to app lil;alion of maj or
axis bending mome nt alone
Effective radius of gyration used in th e
Lr for the lateral-torsional
determination
buckling limi t stale fo r majo r <lJ>;is bending of
doubl y symmetric compact I-shaped members
ilnd channels
Radius of gyrati on aboul geometriC axis paraUcl
or
r,
r,
r
to connected leg. mill

Radius of gyra ti on about y-iIXis, mill
Radiu s of gyrati on for the minor principal axis,

ml1l
Longitudilwl ccnter-iQ-(;CIHCr spacing (pitch) of

any two consecutive ho les, mill
Thickness of clemen!. mm
Wall thickl1 ess, mill
Angle leg thickness. mill
Width of rectangul ar bar parallcl to ilxis or
bending. 111m
Thickness of connected material, 111m
Thickness of pliitc , II1Ill
Design Willi thi ckne ss for HSS equal to 0.93
times the nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS
and equal to [he 110minal wall thickness ror SA W
I-ISS,
Illill
Total thickness of fillers, mill
r"
Web pl,ale buckling coefficient

Largr st laterall y unhraced length along either
flan i!-c at the point of load , mm
L(' nglh of be.aring, mill
tl'nglh of cOll nection in th e direction of loading,
111m
Number or nodal braced points within the spa ll
Threads per mill

RHtio of cleme nt i deformation to its deformation
at maximum stress
Proj ected length of the overlappin g branch o n the
chord
O vcrlnp le ngt h lIlea:mrcd along the connecting
face of the chord bene at h th e t wO branches
Governi ng radius of gyratio n, mm
Distance frolll instantaneous cellter of rOlation to
we ld clement with minimum u hi ratio, nun
Mini mum
t".
I,..
Design wall thi ck ness of HSS ma in membe r, mm

Design wall thi cknes s of HSS branch member,
mm
Thick ness of the overla pping branch. I11Ill
Thickness of the overlapped branch. mm
Thickness of the column nan ge, Illlll
Thicknes:-; of th e loaded flange, Illlll
Flange thickness of channel shear co nnector, mm
Compression flange thickness. mill
Thickness or plale, 111m
Thickness of ten sio n loaded plale, mm
Thick ness or the .Htac hed transverse pl at(~, Jllin
Web sliffener thickness. mill
Weh lhickness o f ciw lln c l :-;hear conncctor, I11Ill
Beam web thickn ess, 1ll1ll
Web thickness, mill
Column web thickncss. 111111
Thickness of clement, 111m
\I'
Width of cover plate, Inm
\I'
Weld leg si ze, mill
CHAPTEfi 5 . Steel and Metals
{/
Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis

bending
Plate width, mill
Leg size of thl' reinforcing or contouring ri Ilet , ir
any, in the direction of the thickness or the
tension-loaded plate, mm
Weight or COJlcrete per unit volume (90 '.s II', <
1
155 Ibsm or 1500 W,':' 2500kg/m\
A vcr-age width or concrete db or haunch, mm
Suh'\'Tipt relating symbol to strong axis
Coordinates of' the shear center with respecI to
the centroid, mm
Connection eccentricity, mill
Subscript relating symbol to weak axis
Subscript rclating symbol 10 minor principal axis
bcnding
FaCIOI' uscd in 132 equal
1/
Scparation
II'
w,
11',
,\
ratio
for
built-up
Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the

branches of a gapped K-connection to the width
oj" thc chord for rcctangular HSS
Load length parameter, applicable only to
rcctangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
contact 'of the branch with the chord in the plane
oj" the connection to the chord width
Slenderness parameter
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact
clement
Limiting slenderness parametcr for compact
nange
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact web
Limiting slcnderness parameter for noncompact
element
Limiting slendcrness parameter for noncom pact
flange
Limiting slenderness parameter for noncom pact
'/
compression
web
members:;;:; __ .12......"
2rib
/1
/1
/1,
If"",1
jJ"",
/1"
Reduction factor gi ven by Equation 5 J 0.2-1

Width ratio; the ratio or branch diameter to chord
diameter for round HSS; the ratio of overall
branch width to chord width for rectangular HSS
Brace stiffness requirement excluding web
dist0I1ion, N-Il1Il1/radian
Rcquircd brace stiffncss
Effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters
of the two branch members ill a K-conncction
divided by eight times the chord width
Effective outside punching parameter
Web distor1ional stiffness, including the effect of
web transverse stiffeners, if any, N-mmlradian
Section propCI1y for unequal leg angles, positive
for short legs in compression and negative for
long legs in compression
First-order interstory drift due to the design
loads, mill
First-order interstory drift due to lateral forces,
mm
.1"
)'
517
Deformation of weld elements at intcrmediatc

stress levels, linearly proportioned to the critical
deformation based on distance from the
instantaneous center of rotation, ri, mm
Deformation of weld clcment at maximum
stress, mm
Deformation of weld clement at ultimate stress
(fracture), usually in clement flU1hest from
instantaneous center of rotation, 111111
Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the
diameter to the wall thickness for round HSS; thc
ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness for
rectangular HSS
()
",
Mean slip coefficient for class A or B surfaces,

as applicable, or as established by tests
Resistance nlCtor, specified in Section 502
through 5 I 1
Resistance factor for bearing on concrete
Resistance factor for flexure
Resistance factor for compression.
Resistance factor for axially loaded composite
columns
Resistance faclOr for shear on the failure path
Resistance factor for torsion
Resistance factor for tension
Resistance factor for shear
Safety factor
Safety factor for bearing on concrete
Safety factor for llexure
Safety factor for compression
Safety factor for axially loaded composite
.columns
Safety factor for shear on the failure path
Safety factor for torsion
Safety factor for tension
Safety factor for shear
Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal
reinforcing
Angle of loading measured from the weld
longitudinal axis, degrees
Acute anglc between the branch and chord,
degrees
Slrain corresponding to compressive strength,
f'c
Parameter for reduced flexural sliffness using the
direct analysis mel hod
1h
1))4
5 -18
CHAP rER 5 . Steel and Metals
BATTEN PLATE. Plcne rigidl y cunnected to t \Yu

pamllel components of a buill-up colulll ll or be a:?l
designed LO tra ns mit sht.:iIf between the (;umpOllcnt:o..
Terms thilt appear in this Glossary are ifalicizn/
throughout the Specification, where they first " ppe:lr
within a sub -section.
BEAM. Stnu:tura l member IlwI hilS the primilry fUIlClioll

of resisting bending mome nts.
Now.\'.'
BEAM-COLUMN. Structural member Ihat resists both

axial force and bending Illomenl.
J.
7l' rtI ' \' designated wilht art' common AISIAISC

term.\' thai are coordinated bellveen
thl' two
sta" r/ardJ developers.
BEARING. In :1 boiled co nnec lion, limit stale 01 shear

rorces transmitted by th e bolt to the con nectio n clements.
2.
Terms desig nated with * are usually qualified hy Ille

type of load effeel, for example. lIominoi tel/sile
strenglh, available compressive slrclIglh, design
flexural.'itrenJ.:lh.
BEARING (LO CA L CO MPR ESS IVE YIEL[)[NG )_

Lim it state of loca l compressive yielding due to the ac ti c!:
of a member bearin g against another member or slllfacc.
3.
Terms desig nated with U ore usually qualified by the

ryp e oj compOIlt'Ilf. for examplt>, web local buckling.
JIlmge local bending.
BEARING-TYPE C ONN ECTION_ Bolted conncction

where shear forces are trans mitted by the bolt bea ri !:;.!
ag.linst (he conn ecti on c lement s.
ALLOWABLE STRENGTH_ Nominal strength dividcd

by th e safety factor. R "I D.
BLOCK SHEAR RUPTU RE. In a connecti on, li mit

state of tension fra ctu re alo ng o ne path and shear yielding
or shear fracture along another path .
ALLOWABLE STRESS. Allowabl e strcngth dividcd by

the app rop ria te section property, such as secti on mod ul us
or cross-secti on area.
AMPL IFI CA TION FACTOR Multipli cr o f the
resu lts o f first-order ana lysis to reflect second - o rder
efrccts _
AS!) (ALLOWABLE STRENGTH DES IGN). Mct hod
of propol1ioning stmc tural components slI ch thaI the
allowable st rength equals or exceeds the required strength
of the component under the ac tio n of th e ASD load
combinations.
ASD LOAD COMllINA TION _ Load comb inati o n in
th is code intended for allowable strength design
(a llowable stress des ign)_
HAVING
JURISDI C TION.
AUTHORITY
Orga ni z:lIion. political subd ivision, office or indi vidua l
charged wi th the responsibility of admi ni stering and
enforcing the provisio ns of thi s code.
AVA ILABLE STRENGTH _ Des ign
allow:tble strength, as appropriate.
strength
or
AVA ILAB LE STR ESS_ Dcsign strcss or allowahle

stress, as appropriate.
AVERAGE RIB WIDTH. Average wid th o f the ri ll of a
corrugat ion in a fonned sleel deck.
BRACED
FRAME.
An essent ia ll y vertical tn:

resistance to latera! forces ;''''~
provides stabilit y fo r the structural system.
sys tem that provides
BRANCH FACE. Wall o f HSS branch I11cmber.

BRANCH M E MBER. For !-ISS co nnecti ons. melll! ,. _
th ai tem1inatcs at a chord member or main meil iber.
BUCKLING. Limit state of sudden change in I ~ ;C

geometry or a structure or an y of its clements unde: i.
cri tical loading condition.
BUCKLING STRENGTH. Nomina l
buckling or instabilit y limi t stales.
strength
for
BUILT-UP
MEMBER,
C RO SS-Snr";'!c; : '.
SECTION, SHAPE. Member. cross-s",:ti"n. ,,-," ,-,:
shape fabricated from structural stee l ~:, 'I1I {" JiI -; i- .:
weldcd or bolted together.
CAMBER . Curvature rabricated int o ;t hC; ! ~1 1 (' 'rll ~s
so a~ to compensate fo r denection indt :~l~ d by III .. i:;.
C!-IARPY V-NOTC H IMPA CT
dynamic test mc;tsuri ng notch
specimen.
T EST.
I\;~ :: L!lt';';,
CHORD MEMBER. For !iSS. pri.:. :.::.extends through a truss co nn ecti on.
Associa tion of Stru ctura l Engineers of the Philippin es
St.. "d"rd
CHAPTE:li 5 . Sleel and Metals
CLADDJNG. E Xlcrior cove ring
or slrLl(; llI rc.
COLDFORMED
STEEL
STRUCTURAIL
MJt:MIIEn . Shape manufaclu rcd by press-bnlking
blanks shc<lrcd from sheets, cut length s of coi ls o r
plates. or hy roll fonning co ld - or hot- rolled co il s or
shects; both fOllning operations being performed at
ambient nXlJll Icmpenlture. that is. without mani fest
addition of hem such as would be required for hot
(arming.
COLUMN. Stru ctural member that IHI!; the primary

function of resisting (lxi nJ forcc.
COMDINED SYSTEM. StnlCture comprised of two or
more lateral load-resisting syslems of diffe rent type.
COMPA CT SECTION. Section capable of developing .a
fully pi<lsti c stress distribution and possessing a rotation
capacity of approximately three before the onset of local
buckJing.
COMPLETEJOINTPE NETRATION
GROOVE
WELD (CJP). Groo ve weld in which weld mctal
extend s th roug h the joint thickncss , except as permitted
for HSS connections.
COMPOSITE. Cond il ion in which steel and concrete
elements and
members work as a unit in the
distribution of internal forces.
CRUSHING.
CONCRETE
Limit
state
of
comprcssive railure in concrete havi ng reached the
ultimate strain .
CONCRETE HAUNCH. Section of solid concrete
that results fro m stopping the deck 011 eac h side or the
girder in a composite floor system constructed using a
fomled steel deck.
CONCRETE ENCASED BEAM. Beam totally encased
in concrete cast integrally wi th the sial>.
CONNECTION. Combination of struc tu ra l eJemeHls
and joints used to trall!;mi t forces between two or mo re
5 19
CROSS CONNECTION. HSS co nn ec ti on in which

forces in bran ch members or connecting cle meJlt s
transve rse to the main member are primarily equili bra ted
by forces in otliel' bra nch members or connecting
elciTlcn l ~ 011 the opposi te side of the mai n member.
DESI GN LOAD. App lied Iliad detcnnincd ill
accordance with either LRFD load co mbinati ons or
ASD load combinations, whichever is applicable.
DESIGN STRENGTH. Resistance factor multiplied by
the nominal stren gth. RI!.
DESIGN STRESS RANGE. Magnitude of change in
st ress due to th e repeated appli cHtion and removal of
service live loads. Por locations subject 10 stress reversa l
il is the algebraic difference of the peak stresscs.
DESIGN STRESS. Design strength divided by the
appropriate sec tion propcrty, such as section modulus
or cross section area.
DESIGN WALL THICKNESS. HSS wall th ickness
assumed in the determination of sec ti on propeI1i es.
DIAGONAL BRACING. Inclined structural member

canyin g prima ril y axial force in a braced frame.
DIAGONAL STIFFENE R. Web s tiffener at column
panel zone oriented diagonally 10 [he ~anges, on one
or both s ides of the web.
DIAPHRAGM PLATE. Plate possess ing inplane shear
sti ffness and strength, lIsed to transfer forces 10 the
suppol1ing elements.
DIAPHRAGM. Roof. floor OJ" olher mem brane or
bracing system th at transfers in -plane forces [Q the
lateral force resi sting system .
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD. Design method for
stability that captures the effects or residual stresses and
initi al out-of-plumbness or frames by reduci ng
stiffness a nd appl ying flotional londs ill a second-o rder
analysis.
members.
COPE . Cutou t made in a structura l member to remove ,\

nmlge and co nform to the sha pe oj' an intersect ing
member.
COVER PLATE. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of

a member to increase cross-sectional area, section
m odulus or moment of inertia.
DIRECT BOND INTERACTION. Mechan ism by

which force is transferred between stee l and concrete
in a com posilc seclion by bo nd stress.
DISTORTIONAL FAILURE. Limit state 'of an HSS
truss connect ion based on distortion of a rectangular
HSS c hord member into a rhomboidal shape.
DISTORTIONAL STIFFNESS. Oulofplane flexural
stiffness of web.
or tl1 8 P ll ilippines G!II Edition Volume 1
:) ~lO
CHAPTUi [) . Steel and Metals
DOUBLE CURVATURE. Deformed shape of a beam

with one or more inflection points within the span.
DOUBLE-CONCENTRATED FORCES. Two equal
and opposite forces that form a couple on the same
side or the loaded member.
DOUBLER. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam or

column web 10 increase resistllllce to concentrated forces.
EYEBAH. Pin-connected tcnsion rneml)(:r of uniform

thickncss, with forged or thermally cut head of greater
width than the body, propo!1ioncd to provide
pproximately equal strength in the head and body.
FACTORED LOAD, Product of a load factor and the
nomina! load .
FASTENER. Generic term for bolts. rivets. nr other
cOllnecting devices.
IHUFT. Lateral deflection of' structure.

EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR, K. Ratio between
the effective length and the unbraccd length of the
member.
EFFECTIVE LENGTH. Length of an otherwise
identical column with the samc strcngth when analyzed
with pinned end conditions.
EFFECTIVE NET AnEA. Net area modified to account

for the effect of shear lag.
FATIGUE. Limit state of crack initiation and growth

resulting fro III repeated application of live loads.
FA YING SURFACE. Contact surface of cOllnectioil
elements transmitting a shear forcc .
FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN. Composite colulll;]
consisting of a shell of HSS or stee! pipe lJ!led with
SLJ:uctural concrete.
FILLER METAL. Metal or alloy
10 be added
in making
a welded joint.
EFFECTIVE SECTION MODULUS. Section modulus
reduced to account for buckling of slender compression
clements.
FILLER. Plate used

component.
to
build lip the thickness of
O]]C
FILLET WELD REINFORCEMENT. Fillet weld ,;
EFFECTIVE WIDTH. Reduced width of a plate or

slab with an assumed uniform stress distribution which
produces the same effect on the behavior of a structural
member as the actual plate or slab width with its
nonuniform stress distribution .
FILLET WELD. Weld of generally triangular CI""; ,.

section made between intersecting surfaces of clcments.
ELASTIC ANALYSIS. Structural analysis based on the

assumption that the structure rcturns to its original
geometry 011 removal of the load.
FIRST-ORDEH ANALYSIS. Structnral analysis in

which equilibrium conditions arc formulated on the:
undcformed structure; second-order effects arc neglected.
ENCASED COMPOSITE COLUMN. Composite

column consisting of a structural concrete column and
one or more embedded steel shapes.
FITTED BEARING STIFFENER. Stiffener used at ,.

support or concentrated load that fits tightly against Oi'"
or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load throul'.! 1
bearing.
END PANEL. Web panel with an adjacent panel on one

side only.
END RETURN. Length of fillet weld that continues
added to groove welds.
FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELD. Weld in a groove

formed by a member with a curved surface in contact \\
a planar member.
around a corner in the same plane.
ENGINEER-OF-RECORD.
Licensed
professional
responsible for sealing the contract documents .
EXPANSION
ROCKER.
SUppOit with curved
surface on which a member bears that can lilt to
accommodate expansion.
FLARE V-GROOVE WELD. Weld in a groove formed

by two members with curved surfaces.
FLAT '''IDTH.
minus twice the
knowledge of the
taken as the total
thickness.
Nominal width of rectangular ll ~ ,' ~ '

outside corner radius. In ab~ ("
corner radius, the flat width Iii: ,} b(;
section width minus three times the
EXPANSION ROLLER. Round steel bar on which a

member bears that can roll to accommodate expansion.
j~ssociation
of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
C H APTE:~~ ~
FLEXURAL BUC KLINC. Buckling mode in which
mode
ill
whi ch
II
BUCKLING.
com pression
mem ber
Buck ling
S?!
GRA VfTY LOAD. Load, such as that produced by dr.:aJ

and live loads, acti ng in the downwa rd direction .
(om pn:ssion memher de flects lalcrn ll y without twist

or change in LTOSS ~sct..' t j() nal shape.
il
FLEXURAL-TOHSIONAL
. Stee l and Metals
GUlP (OF HOLT). Th ickne~s of materia l th rough whic h

a bol! passes.
bends and
(wists simultaneo usly wi thout change ill cross-sectional

shape.
ROOVE WELD. Weld ill a groove between t:o lln cc lioll

clements. Sec also AWS D 1.1.
.
FORCE. Hcs ult ant of di stribution of stress over a

presc ribed "rca.
GUSSET PLATE. Plate clement co nnecti ng tru s:\

members or <l stru t or brace 10 a beam or colum n.
FORMED SECTION. See cold- fo rmed stee l structural
HORIZONTAL SHEAR. Force at the in terfa('('

between steel and concrete surfaces in <I composih.:
beam.
member.
FORM ED STEEL DECK. In co mposite construc ti o n.

sleel col d formed inlo a decking profile used as a
pennanenl concrete form.
F ULLY RESTRAINED MOMENT CONN E CTlON_
Connection capable of Iransfen'i ng moment with
negligi bl e rot ati on betwee n connected members.
GAGE. Transve rse ce nter-Io-center spacing of fasteners.

GAP CONNECTION. HSS truss connection with a gap
or space on (he chord face be tween intersecting branch
HSS. Squa re, rectangular or round hollow stnlctural steel

section produced in acco rdance wi th a pipe or tubing
product specificali on.
User Now: A pipe can be designed using the same
design rules for round HSS sections as long as it
confonns to ASTM A53 Class B and the appropriate
parameters are used in the design.
INELASTIC ANALYSIS . Structural anal ysis th aI takes
members.
int o acco un t inelastic material beha vior, incl uding plastic

analys is.
GENERAL COLLAPS E. Li mi l stale of cho rd

plaslificalion o f opposi ng sides of a round HSS chord
membe r at a cross-co nnection.
IN-PLANE INSTABILITY. Lim iL state of a beamcolumn bem about its major axis wh il e lateral buck li ng or
lateral-torsional buckling is prevented by lateral bracing.
G EOMETRI C AXIS. Axi s parallel to web. flange or

angle leg.
it
GIRDER FILLER. NalTow piece of s heet steel used as a

fi ll between th e edge o f" a deck sheet and th e flange of a
gi rd er in a composite floo r system co nstru cted using a
formed steel deck.
INSTAIllLlTY. Limit state reached in the loading of

sll1Jctural component. fra me or structure in whic h a
slight disturbance in the loads or geometry product.....
large displacements.
JOINT ECCENTRICITY. For HSS tru ss co nn ec tion.
perpendicular distan ce from chord member ce nt er oj'
gravity 10 infersection of branch member work poi nts.
GIRDER. Sec Beam.
GIRT. Horizo nt al st llH;tura l member th at su pport s wall

p:lIlels and is prim aril y subjected to bending under
horizon tal loads, such as wind load.
GOUG E. Relatively smooth surface groove or cavi ly
n:.sulting from plasti c dcfoflllfltion or remo va l of material.
GRA VITY AXIS. Axis through the cent er of gravity of a
member along its le ngth.
GRAVITY FRAME. Poni on of the framing system not
included in the la ternl load resisting system.
Joi nt t. Area wh ere two or more ends, surfaces, or

edges arc aft ached. Calegorized by type of fastener or
we ld used and method of force transfer.
K- CONNECTION. !-ISS connectio n in which forrt'.....
in bnmch members or cO llnecting elemen ts tnllls vcrsc
10 the ma in member [Ire primarily cquilibriated by fOref!,
in other branch members or connecting elemenls 011 the
same side of the main member.
LA C ING. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in "
lattice confi guration, th at connects two steel sil nlh::;
together.
1h
National Structural Code of the Phili ppi nes 6 Edition Volume 1
LAP JOINT. Juint between two ovcrl<l pping cO llllect ion

c1cments in parall c l planes.
LATERAL BRACING. Diago nal brat'ing. shea,.
walls o r equivalent mC'lIls for provid ing in pl allc
lateral sta hilit y.
LATERAL
LOAD
RESISTING
SYSTEM.
Structural sys tem dcsigned to resist latent! lo;nds ;Jlld
provid e stabilit y for the struchu:e as.l whole .
LATERAL LOAD. Load. suc h as Ihal produced by
wind or c<u1hquake effects. acting in a latera l
directi o n.
LATERALTORSIONAL
BUCKLING.
Buckling
mo dc of a Ilcxural member invol ving de llcction
no rmnl to the plane of bending occurring sillluit:lIlcolisly
wilh twi st :tbou! the shear center of fhe crossscclioll.
LEANING COLUMN. Column designed 10 ca lTY
gnlvi'ly loads only, with connections that ::Irc nOI
int cnded to provide resistance to lateral load s.
LENGTH EFFECTS. Considermion of the redu ctio!]

in streng th of a member based on its unbraccd leng th.
LIMIT STATE. Condilion in which a Sll'llclurc or
component brcolllc~ unfit for service <.IIld is judged ei ther
to be no longe;' usefu l for it s intended fUJl cti on
(servi ceability limit slate) or to have reac hed its ultim<uc
load-ca rrying capac it y (strength limit siate).
LOAD. Force Of Olher ac tion that resu lts fro m the we igh t
o f building mate ri als. occupants and their possessions,
envirollJ1lcnl<ll effects.
differential
1ll0VC IIll!I l1 1,
or
restrain cd dimensional changes.
LOAD EFFECT. Perces. Stresses and ucfonnat iolls

produ ced in a stru ctu ral componenl by
LOCAL C IHPPLI NG. Lillli t SW l l' 0 1' 10(.";11 ra il ul"llofweb

plat e in the immed iat e vicinit y of a n)lll"C nl r .. l l~d load or
rcm:linn.
LOCAL YIELDING. Yi~ l ding that occurs in;1 local arC'l
or un element.
Ull'D ( L()AD AND
R ESISTANCE
DESIGN ).
Method
of
propol1iu ~l illg
FACTOR
struct ural
cOlllponent s sllch that the design slI ':-'i l~th l~l ual s or
cxcccJ s the required strength of the component under the
acti o n of the LRFD IOtid cOl nbill tlt iol1s.
LRFD LOAD COM nINA TlON. Load com binali o n in
this code inlcnded for strength dcsign (load amI resista nce
fclclOr design) .
MAIN MEMBER. For HSS
connect io ns. cho rd
member, column or other H SS membcr 10 whidl bmnch
members or other connecting clements arc allachcd.
MECHANISM. Structuntl sys tc m that includes a

sufficient number of real hin ges, plastic iii l1):,cs or
both, so as to be abl e 10 articulate ill 011(' in IliO]"C'
rigid body modes.
]'VIILL SCALE. Ox ide surface coating on sted i"m mc (] by
tile hot ro!ling process.
MILLED SURFACE. S urface [hal has beell Iln(:h:ll(~d
nm by a mechalli c,ill y gu idcd too l to it !;,!l, :;l\1oolh
condi tion,
CONNECTION.
MOMENT
momcnt
tra nsm it s
bendi ng
Conllection
that
( ('Ilncctcd
bCI weell
members.
MOMENT FRAME. Framing 'ysle m Ii;;" .lro" d,.;
resistance to lateral loads and provides sltlbilipf' 10 the
structural system. primarily by shear i!nd ' ;, '::,: ..:. Gf
the framing mcmbers and the ir connection:.

Ihe appli ed load,.
NET AREA. Gro5s area reduccd

material.
to aCCOIE1< ~o :
LOAD FACTOR Fac IoI' {hilt acco unt s for dev iations
o f the nominal load from the actu al load. for
uncertainti es in the an al ys is thal l ransfo rllls the 10,1d! ill w 11
load effect and for the probabilit y that more tha n olle
ex tre me load will occur simultaneous ly.
or twist indcpendentl y o f 0:]; I

adjaccllt brace po ints (sec relati ve brace),
LOCAL H1~NDING. Limit stale of la rge deformation

o f a O:lI1gc under a concentrated te nsile force.
dimension , as in Ihe tahles
LOCAL BUC KLING. Limil Slale of buckling of a

compression element within a cross section.
this code.
NODAL
BRACE.
Brace
thaI
1'1\..';.:,1:;
Illo vc m c n t
;,:
,\'C~:
I ;' .
iii..'J _: .,i
NOM INAL DI !'VIENSION. Designated or llieordic;,;
or
section pi ,.:--:.
NOMINAL LOAD. Magniwtl e of Ihe 1o,, '!
Association of S tructural Ellginc(;)["s of the Philippines
NOMINAL lUll H E IGHT. I-ki gh t of I' ".,ned steel

deck mcaslII'cd from the underside of th e lowest point
to (he top o f th e hi ghest point.
PIPE. Scc HSS

PITCH .
Longitu din al ccn\ (:I'-((H.'c ntcr spaci ng oj'

CClltcr-IO-CClltcr spac ing or bol l th reads along
axis of bolt.
f~l stclle rs.
NOM INA L STRE 'GTH. St rength of a stru cture or

com ponent (wi tho ut th e l:csisl;IIlCC f<ttlOf or safety r<lclor
applied) to re sist load effects , as dctcnni rwd ill
accordance wi th this SpecificHtion.

NONCOMPAcr SECnO N. Section that can dcvelop
th e yield stress in it s co mpression clemen ts before loca l
bUl'kling occurs, but can not develop a rotati on capacity of'
three.
NO NDESTR UCTIV E
procedure wherein 110
TESTING.
Ins pection
tnaterial IS destroyed and
PLASTI C ANALYSIS. StrllcllIral ana lysi s based on lhe

assumptio n of rig id-plaslic behav ior, in olhe r words. tilat
equilibrium is sm isfi ed throughout the slrtlcturc and the
stress is at or be lm'>' the yield stress.
PLASTI C HINGE. Yielded I.Oll e th at form s in n
structural member \vhcn th e plasti c moment is at tained.
The member is assumed to rot ate further as i f
hinged, exccpl that such rotat ion is restrained by the
phlsti(' mOlllc-nl ,
illlcgrily of the material or compo nent is not alTcctod.

NOTCH TOUGHNESS. Energy absorbed at a specified
PLASTI.C 1\tIOMENT. Theoretical rcsisting momen t

de veloped within a fully yielded cross section.
temperature as measured i n the Charpy V -Notch lesc
NOTIONAL LOAD. Virin a) load applied in a " roetura)

;mal ys is 10 accotlnt for dcswbili zi ng cJTccts Ihill are not
otherwise accollllled for in the design pro visions.
OUT-OJi'-PLANE IIlJCKLING. Lim it state of a
its
Jll (~io r
axis while
hea m-col um n belll about
lateral buckling or lateral -torsional buckling is not
prevent ed by laleral bracing.
PLASTIC STRESS DISTHIB UTION METHOD.

Method for determi ning the st resses ill a composite
member assumin g Ihat the stee l secl ion and the concrete
in the cross section arc fu lly plilstic.
PLASTIFICATION. 111 an HSS con ne cti on, limit stale

bHsed 011 an oU I-of-pla ne ncxural yie ld line mechanism in
the chord <It a branch member connection.
PLATE G IRD E R. Buill -up beam_
OVERLAP CONNECTION. HSS lru ss coll ileeti oll

in wh ich imersecting imUlch members overl ap.
PANEL ZONE. Web arc;] or bemll-IO-colull1l1

connection delineated by the extension of bea m and
column fhlll gcs through the connecti on, transmitting
moment through a shenr pane l.
PAHTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION
GROOVE
WELD (PJ]. Groove weld in which the penetrati o n
is intentionall y less than the co mpl ete thickness of the
connected clement.
PARTIALLY
RESTRAINED
MOMENT
CONNECTION. Con necti on capable of transferrin g
moment with rotati on between connected members that is
not negli gib le.
PERCENT ELONGATION. Measure of d uctilil y,
determ ined in a tensil e test ns the max imum elongation () f
the gage length d ivi ded by the original gage length.
PERMANENT LOAD. Load in which variations
over time arc rare or of small magnitude.. All other
loads are variable loads.
PLUG WELD. We ld m.ute in a circular hol e in one

element of ajoint fusing that clement to an othe r element.
PONDING. Retention of water d ue solely to th e
deflecti on of Oat roof framing.
POST-B UCKL!. G STRENGTH. Load o r fo rce that
can be ca rried by an element, member, or frame after
initial buckling has occ urred .
PRETENSION E D JOINT. JOilll wilh high-strength
bolts lightened to the specified minimum pretension.
PROPERLY DEVELOPED.
Reinforcing bars
detClilcd to yield in a ducti le manner before crushing
of the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions
of ACJ 3 18 insofar as deve lopmclll lenglh, s pacing and
cover shall be dee med to be pro perl y developed.
PRYfNG ACTION. Amplifi cation of the te nsion force in
a bo lr caused by leverage between the poin t of applied
load, the bolt and the reliction of the connected elemcm:-i.
P UN CHING LOAD. Compooellt of brallch member
force perpendicular to a choro.
Nationa l Structural Cod e of th e Philipplnes 6
th
Edition Vol ume '1
PlJRLIN. Horizontal structural member that supports roof

deck and is primarily subjected to bending under vertical
loads such as snow. wind or dead loads.
~(5 EFFECT. Effect of loads act! ng on the deflected
shape of a member between joints or nodes,
P -A EFFECT. Effecl of loads acting on the

displaced location of joints or nodes in a structure. In
tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting
011 the laterally displaced location of floors and roofs.
QUALITY ASSURANCE. System of shop and field

activities and controls implemented by the owner or
his/her designated representative to provide confidence
to the owner and the building authority that quality
requirements arc implemented.
ROTATION
CAPACITY.
Incremental
angular
rotation that a given shape can accept PrJor to

excessive load shedding, defined as the ratio of the
inchl:>tic rotation attained to the idealized clastic rotation
at first yield.
RUPTURE STRENGTH. In a connection, strength

limited by tension or shear rupture.
SAFETY
FACTOR. Factor that accounts for

deviations of the actual strength from the nominal
strength, deviations of the aClUal load from the nominal
load, uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the
load into a load effect, and for the manner and
consequences of failure,
SECOND,ORDER ANALYSIS. Structural analysis in
QUALITY CONTROL. System of shop and field

controls implemented by the fabricator and ereclor to
ensure that contract and company fabrication and erection
requirements are mel.
RATIONAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS.
Analysis
based on theory that is appropriate for the situation,

relevant test data if available, and sound engineering
judgment.
REENTRANT. In a cope or weld access hole, a cut at an

abrupt change in direction in which the exposed surface is
concave.
which equilibrium conditions are formulated on

deformed structure; second-order effects (both
and P-Il, unless specified otherwise) are included,
the
p-()
SECOND,ORDER EFFECT. Effect of loads acting on

the deformed configuration of a structure; includes P-O
effect and P-/1 effect.
SEISMIC
RESPONSE
MODIFICATION
COEFFICIENT. Factor that reduces seismic load
effects to strength level.
SERVICE LOAD COMBINATION. Load combination

under which serviceability limit states are evaluated.
RELATIVE BRACE. Brace that controls the relative

movement of two adjacent brace points along the length
of a beam or column or the relative lateral
displacemcnt of two stories in a frame (sec nodal brace).
SERVICE LOAD. Load under which serviceability limit

states are evaluated.
SERVICEABILITY
REQUIRED STRENGTH. Forces,
stresses
and
deformations acting
on
thc structural component,
determined by either structural analysis, for the
LRFD or AS]) load combinations, as appropriate, or as
specified by this Specification or Standard.
LIMIT
STATE.
Limiting
condition affecting the ability of a structure (0

preserve its appearance, maintainability, durability or the
comfort of its occupants or fUllction of machinery, under
normal usage.
SHEAR BUCKLING. Buckling mode in which a

RESISTANCE FACTOR. Factor that accounts for
unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from
the actual strength and for the manner and consequences
of failure.
REVERSE CURV ATURE. See double curvature
plate clement, such as the web of a beam, deforms

under pure shear applied ill the planc of the plate.
SHEAR CONNECTOR. Headed stud, channel. plate or

other shape welded to a steel membcr and cmbedded in
concrete of a composite member to transmit shear
forces at the interface between the two materials.
ROOT OF JOINT. Ponion of a joint to bc welded where

the members are closest to each other.
SHEAR CONNECTOR STImNGTH. Limit state of

reaching the strength of a shear connector, as governed by
the connector bearing against the concrete in the slab or
by the tensile strength of the connector.
Association of StructuI'81 Engineel's of the Philippines
~--- -
CHAPTER 5 ~ Sleel and f",./etals
SHEAR
10 shc<lr.
I~UPTURE.
5-25
Limit state of rupt ure (fracture) due
SLlpCRITICAL CO NECTION. Boiled conneclion
SHEAI{ \VALL. \Vall that provide:) resis tan ce to lateral

loads in the plan e of th e wall and provid es st ab ility for the
SlJllClU ru l systc:m.
SHEAR YIELDING. Yielding that occurs due to shear.
SHEAR
YIELDING (PUNCHING). In an HSS

connectioll. limit state. based on out-of-plane shear
strength of the chord wi.tll to which branch ITlcmbe rs are
'I tlHelled.
des igned to resist movemen t hy rriction on (he raying

surface of the conn ection under th e clamping for ces of the
bolts.
SLOT "VELD. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an
e lcmel1l 10 another Cle ll1 CIll.
SNUGTIGlfTENED
Joint
with
JOINT.
lilc
connected plies in firm contact as specified in Section
510.
SPECIFIED
SHEET STEEL. In a comp osite floor system, st eel used

for closure pl<u cs or mi scellaneo us trim min g in a form ed
steel deck.
SHIM. Thin layer or Ilwtcri,ll used to fi ll a space hetwee n
raying or bearing surfaces.
SIDESWA Y
IlUCKLING. Limil sla lc o f lalcra]

buckling of the tension flange opposite (he location of
a co nccn tr::ncd compress io n force.
SIDEWALL CRIPPLING. Limil slalc of web crippling

01" the si dewall s of i.I chord member at a HSS truss
connection.
MINIMUM
TENSIL~;
Lower limit of tensil e strength

Illaterial as defin ed by ASTM.
STRENGTH.
for a
specified
SPECIFIIW MINIMUM YIELD STRESS. Lower limil

oj" yicl d siicss speciried fo r a material as defi ned by
ASTM.
SPLICE. Co nnec ti o n between two structura l clements
joined at their ends (0 rorm 11 single. longer elemenl .
STABILITY. Condition re ached in lhc loading of ..1
structural co mponent, frame or structure in which a
slight di sturbance in fhc load s or geometry does !lot
produce large d ispl;'lcemcnts.
SIDEWALL
CRUSHING. Limil Siaic based o n

bearing strength of chord member sidewall ill HSS
truss cOllnect i oJl .
STIFFENED ELEMENT. Flal compression elemenl

with adjoi ning out -o f-plane clements along both edges
parallcllo the dirct:tion of loading.
SIMPLE CONNECTION. Connection thm lnmsmi ts

neg l igible
hending
moment
between connected
lllcm bcrs.
STIFFENER. StruclU ral element, usually an angle or
SINGLE-CONCENTRATED
FORCE. Tensi le or
compressive force applied normal to the fl ange of a
member.
STIFFNESS. Rcsfslancc lO deformation of a member o r

structure. measured by the ratio of the appli ed force (or
moment) to the. corresponding displacement (or rotation).
SINGLE CURVATURE. Deformed shape of a beam

with 110 inflection point within the spall.
STRAIN COMPATIIlILITY
plaLc, <luached to a member to distribute load, transfer

shear or preve nt buck ling.
,!
SLENDERELEMENT SECTION. Cross secl ion

possessing
plate
components
of
suffi cien t
METHOD.
Method
for determining the stresses in a compos it e member
considering ihc s tress~st raiJl relalionships of each
material and its location with respect to the neutral axis
of the cross sectio n.
slenderness such that local buckling in the elasti c range

will OCC llr.
STRENGTH
S LIP. In a boiled connection, limit stale of relative

motion of connected pans prior to the attainment of the
available strcngl h or the conneclioll.
LIMIT STATE. Limiling condilion

affecting the safety of the stfllc ture, in which th e
ult im ate load-carryi ng capaci ty is reached .
STRESS. Force per unit area cau sed by ax ial force,

moment, shear or tors-ioll .
National Structura l Code of 111(-J Ptlili ppine s 6 f'. Edition Volume 1
.,
..
STHESS
CONCENTItATION.
I.ocalized
st ress
considcrnb ly
higher
than
<lvcrage
(even
in
uniforml y loaded <:ross set:ti ons of lilli fofm thic.:kne ss)
due to ahrupt changes in geollll'try or localized loading.
TIE PLATE. Plate clelllcllI lIscd to join two p~l ra1iel

l;omponcllts of .1 huilt -uJ> (":ol ulI)l1 . girder or strut ri gidly
connected 10 the parallel l.:ompullcn ts and (k ~ iglle d to
transmit shear hCl\vct!1l them.
STnONG AXIS. Major principal wlIroidal axis or a

cross sectiull.
TOE OF FILLET. JUlll'lion or a rillel wel d race

and base mC la !. TangclH point uf il rolled secti on
fllle!.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS. DClerminalioo or 10ild

effects on members and COllllcc lions bmicd on principles
TORSIONAL HHAC1NG. Br;lci ng resis ti ng twist of i~

beam or column.
of'sll1IclUral mechanics.
STRUCTunAL COMPONENT. Member. w nneclOr,

connecting element or assemblage.
STRUCTURAL STEEL. SICcl clemeols as de lined in
Seclion 2.1 or Ihe AISC Code of SIaooard Pracl ice ror
Steel Buildings and Bridges.
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM. An assemblage of load
can'ying components thaI arc joined together (0 provide
imcracliol1 or interdependence.
TCONNECTION.
HSS
conneclion in
TORSIONAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode ill ,',h ieh

a compression membe r twi sts about its :-.11<'.,:- c.. : nt cr
<IX IS.
TORSIONAL YIELI>ING . Yielding Ihal Occ urs due

torsion.
10
TRANSVEnSE
REINFORCEMENT.
Slcel
reinforcement in the forlll or closee! ties or welded
wire fabric providing confinement for (he concrete.
surrounding the steel shape core in an encased concrete
composite column .
wh ich Ihe
bmnch member or connecting element is pcrpcndi cu J,u'

to the main member and in which forces lransverse to the
TRANSVERSE STIFFENER. Web sl iffenCl' (,riented

perpendicular to the flange s, att ac hed to the web.
main member arc primaJily equilibriatcd by shear in th e
main member.
TUBING. Sec HS S.
TENSILE RUPTURE. Lim il Slale or ruplllre (rraclure)

due to tensioll.
TURNOF NUT METHOD. Procedure whereby rhe

specified prelens ion in high-s trength bolts is controlled
by rotating the fastener componellt a predetermined
amount aher the bolt has been silug lightened.
TENSILE
STnEWGTH
(OF
MATERIAL).
Maximum tensi le stress lhat ~I material is capablc of
sustaining as defined by ASTM.
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MEMBER). Maximum
tension force th at a member is capablc of sustaining.
TENSILE YIELDING, Yielding Ihal occurs clue
te nsio n.
10
TENSION AND SHEAR IWPTUn E. In a bol'l, lim il

s tal e o r rupture (rractu rc) due lO simultaneous tcns ion and
shear force.
UNDRACED LENGTH. Distance between br:H:ed points

or a membcr, mCilsu rcd between the ce nters o~ ~:l . : .i:.; >l[
the bracing members.
UNEVEN LOAD D1STRIIlUTION. In "" lISS
connection, cond ition in which th e In:.;! :';
distriblll cd through the cross secti on nf" ("olHlfTf n i
clemel1ls in a manner thai can be rC<tdily d ct~' i H'::lU;.
UNFRAMED END. The end or a',.'." ..
res trained against ro tati on by stiffener:.; or { {lJllj(~cl iol1
cl ements.
TENSION FIELD ACTION. Behil vior of a panel

under shear in which diagona l tensile forces develop
in the web and compressive rorces devclop ill the
transvcrse stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt truss.
THERMALLY CUT, elll wilh gas, plasma or laser,
UNSTIFFI~NED ELEI\'IENT. Flat COllljl i\;'Wlil I:kmc.n!

with an adjoining oUI-of-plane elemeJlt
.;;.: :
parallel to the directi oll of loadin g.
<
VARIABLE LOAD. Load nOI class iG,:.!

loael,
Associati on of Stru ctural Engineers of the Philippines
VEHTlCAL BHACING SYSTEM. SYSlCIll of shc"r

walls. hraced frallles or bOlh. extending through one or
lI10re HOOfS of'l building.
WEAK AXIS.
M illOI'
principal cCHtroidal axis of' a crOss:
sect ion .
YIELDING
(PLASTI C
WEATHEnING STEEL. High-strength, low-alloy steel

L
paint coaling.
WEn BUCKLING . Limit Slat e of lateral instabi lit y of a
web.
WED COMPHESSION DUCKLING. Limil S1ale of
ollt-or-plane compression buckling of the web due

concentrated compression force.
10
WEB SIJ)ESWA Y BUCKLING. Limil slale of lale ral
buckling of th e tension fl ange opposite the location of a

concentrated compression force.
WELD METAL. Portion of a fusion weld th at has been

completel y melted during welding . Weld metal has
elements of filler metal and base metal melied in the weld
themlal cycle.
WELD ROOT. See rOOI of joi nt.

Y-CONNECTION.
HSS conneclion in which Ihe

or connecting e lement is not
perpendicular 10 the main member and in which
forces transverse to the main member arc primari ly
equilibrialcd by shear in the main member.
branch
Yielding
ilS
the
YIELDING (YIELD MOMENT). Yielding allhe

extreme fiber on the gross sec tion of a member when the
bending m O llll'!lI rcaches Ihe yiclc.l moment.
:hat, with suitable precautions, can be used in normal

atmospheric exposures (not marine) without protective
MOMENT).
throughout Iht cross section of it member

bending moment reaches lhe plasti c moment.
member
YIELD MOMENT. In a member subjecled 10

bending, the mom ent at whi ch the ex treme outer fiber
first attains the yield stress.
YlELD POINT. First stress in a material at which an
increase in strain occu rs without an increase in sHess as
defined by ASTM.
YIELD STRENGTH. Stress at which a material exhibits
a speci fied limiting deviation front the proportio nalit y of
stress to s lr~lill as defin ed by ASTM.
YIELD STRESS. Ge neric lerlll 10 den ole eilher yield
point or yield strength, as appropriate for th e materiaJ.
YIELDING. Limit state o f in elastic deformati on thal
OCcurs after the yield stress is rcached.
Naliona l S iruciural Code of Ihe Philippines 6'" Edilion Volume 1
!; 2H
CHAP rE n
~J
'
Steel ane! Me tals
8.J.!}QTION,{$Ql : ; ..
GENERAt "PROV'isIONS
SO1.1 Sco pe
Th is section slatcs the scope or the Specifica tio n,
sll flli llari zcs rcfefcllccd spccificalioll, code. and standiu'd
documents, and providl!s rcqllircmcnls for materials and
contract dO<.:V lllcnl s,
Th e secli on is orgal1i ~c d as follows:
501. 1
501.2
SOl.)
501.4
Scope
Hcfereneed Specifications. Codes ilnd Sttlnd:lrds
Material
Slfu<.:lufal Design Drawings and Spccific~H i ons
The User NOlcs interspersed Ihroughoul arc not pan o r the

Spcci fi c.: atioll,
Buildings (NSCP Chapter .<i 1',111 2)' in adtJitilill to Ihe

provisiolls of th is Spc6Iil';lliol1 .
501.1.3 Nudc a r App li cat ions
The desi gn or IHlt:lear stnlt'llI fCS shall (;o mply with th e
requirclllcllt~ or the SI)cl' ific;'tionfof the
Design,
Fahricill ioll , and Erec tion <l IS lecl Safety-Re la ted Structures
in Nuclear rac ililics (ANSI/A ISC N(90) inclu di ng
Su pplement No,2 or the Load ;lIld Rcs ist;!I1cC F;.lctor
Des ign Spec ific atioll ror Stee l Su rely- Related SlrtlCLurcs
for Nuclear Facilities (A NSIIA ISC N()90 L). in add ition to
the prov isiuns of thi s SpcciliL:ilt ion.
50 1.2 Referenced Specifi ca tions. Cndcs and Standards
The rollowing specifications. (;Odl~S and stilndards arc
refe renced in this Specification :
AC llnlcrn" li o na l (AC I)
AC I3 JS-08
User Note: User notes arc intended to provide concise

and practical gu idance in the application of the
provisions.
Thi s Specificatio n sets fort h criteri a for the des ign,
fabricati on, and ercc ti on of structural steel buildings and
oth er st niClUreS, where oth er structu res arc de fined as
those stnJcrures designed. fabricated, and crectcd in a manner
similar to buildings. wiLh building-l ike vert ic;.!1 and lateral
load resi~tin g element s, Where condi tions are not covered
by the Specificmion. designs are permitted to be based on
tes ts or analysis. subject 10 the approval of the authority
havi ng jurisdiction. Altematc methods of analys is and design
shall be pcmliucd, provided such alternate methods or
criteria arc acceptab le 10 the authority havi ng jurisdiction,
User Note: For the design of structural members, other
Ihan holl ow structu ral seclions (HSS). lhal arc cold formed to shapes, with elements not more than 25 mm
in thickness, the pro visions in the AISI North American
Specifi calio n for Ihe Design of Co ld- Formed Sleel
Structural Members are recommended,
5 01 .1.1 Lo w-Seis m ic Appli ca ti ons
When the seismic respo nse modifi cation coeffi cient. R,
(as specified in this code) is taken eqlwl to or less than
3, the design, fabrica tion. and erection of stfllcllIr<ll steel-framed huildi ng~ and olher st ruc tu res shall co mply
with this Specification ,
50 1.1.2
Hi g h ~Sc i s mi c
Applica ti olls
Whe n the scismic response modi fi catio n coefficicnt, R,
(as specified in this code) is taken greater than 3, the
design, fabrication and erec tion of struc tural-steel-framed
build ings and other stnlctures shall comply wit h Ihe requirements in the Seismic Pro visions for Stl1lctural Steel
Buildillg
Code
Requir('metlls
f or
St'-Ul'llll"a/ COllcre te (llId CUllltII!'lIrary
AC I 3 JSM-08 M errie /Ju i/dilll{ Cude /?('qllirem<!IIf,,' f or

SrJ'l(Cfu!'(I / COllcrete alld Co mlll (, I1 !~! "y
Am eri ca n Institute of S teel COII!-.Irll ctio n, Inc. (AlSC)
AISC 3 03-05 Code of SUlIIdard Prac tice for Sleel

Bui/ding!; and Bridges
ANS I/ AISC
34 10 5
Se ismic
PreJl' isions
Jor
S/rllcl lira / S teel Bu i l ding!;
ANSIIA ISCN690-1994(R2004)
Specification Jor t"e
Design. Fabricatioll and rec rirJlJ of Stet'! Safefr-Rl'faled
Structures lor Nuclear Facililies. includ ing Su pplement

No. 2
AN S I/AISC N690 L-03 Load and Resistwlce FaclOr
Design Sped[ica lioll fo r Steel Safety !?"lated StfU Clllres
fo r Nuclear Facilities
Am erican Society of C ivi l E ngin ee rs (ASCE)
SEIIASCE 702 M inimum Design LO(l(/s for l1uifdin,p',

(llld Other SII"f-l(.'llIres ASCElSFPE ',l9-99 SUIII./Ufu'
ClI/cu/llIioll Methm}sfl)I' Structural Fire PrcJl('clicm
Am er ican Society or Mecha ni cal Engineers (ASI\'l E)
ASME 13 1 8.2,6~96 Fasteners /0 1' U.W~ ill '\'(I'UN ii:,-'Applications

ASM E B46.1-95 SlIrJacc Textllre. SlItiace ROllgh""
H'avil1ess. alld Lay
Association of Slructural Engineers of" the Philippines
CHAP1TH 5 SIGel and Melals
5(!9
ASTM Intcrnlltiolllll (ASTM)
A500-03'1 Standard ~iJl'cijic(J/ioll fiJI' ColdFm11ltd We/tit'll

(Illd Scumle.,",," Carbull S(l'('1 Structural Tubing ill f(ound,"
A6IA6M()4a
SWI/dard .~i}ecijic{/f;oll for

Cit-neml
!?('l!u;rl'lIIel1/s jiJI" Nul/cd SlruC:lllml Sleel iJars. 1'/(11(,,\' ,
alld Shape.,"
ShaJ)e,\', (llId Shc('f Pi/inK
ASOJ-OJ Slandard Sj)('cUiclIliol/ for Jim Formed Hle /ded

(IIu1 Sl.'lImlt'sJ GII"boll S(c'cl Stn,(.'tumJ Tubin!:
A36/A36M-04
SWlldard Sped/ieaf;oll Jor
Corium
AS02 -03 SI(11I(I(lI"(/ Specific:alioll [or Sleet Stnn:rural
StrU('lura! Steel
i?ivefs
AS3/ASJM-02 ~'((mdard Specijicalioll for Pipe. Sled.

Black lIlId HOI- Dipped, Zillc-COlunJ, Welded and
S(,(lIl1les:l'
A5 14/A5 14MOOa Sumc/o,-t/ Sju'"ijiwtioll fodlighYieid

Strength, QUlmclwd lUul Tempered Alloy Steel PfaH'.
Suitable Jor Welding
A 193/A I 93M-04a SfUlu/urd ~i}ecificatioll Jor AlloySteel

lind Slainless Stcel BO/lillg MlIIerials Jor High ,
Tt.~tllper{1 lure Sen/ice
A I 94/A J94M-04 Sllmdard ~i)ec~{icari()11 Jor Carbon and'
Alloy Steel NUls J(JlBolls For High Prl'ssure o r
Higli''/'l1mperol/(u: S(,I"I'i('(', or 130th
A216/A2 J 6M93(2003) Slam/ard SpaijiclIliofl for Steel

Castings, Carboll, Suitable for FIlSioll Welding, for High
Tempemtul'r! Service
A242/A242M-04 Standard Specijicafiol1 for HiKh-Strength
wlv-Alloy Structural Steel
A283/ A283M-03StGlldard Specificatioll for Low and

Illtermediare Tef/sile Strength Carbon Sleel Plale.'i
A307 -03 Standortl Specification for Carbon
Gild Sluds, 60,000 PSI Tellsile Slrellgl"
St(~el
Boils
A325-04 Standard ,~i)ecificar;oIlJor SrrllclUral BO/IS, Steel.

/-leaf Treated. 1201105 ksi Minimum Tensile Slrength
A325M-04 Standard SpecijiclJ.Iiol! for
Bolts for SlruclUrai Steel Joints (Metric)
High-Strength
A354-03a Stalldard Specificatioll for Quellched alld

Tempered Alloy Steel BolES, Studs, and Other Externally
Threaded Fasfell ers
A370-03a Standard Test Methods alld Definitions Jor
Mechanical Testing o/Steel Products
A449-04 Stamlord SpecificationJor Quellched alld Tempered

SteeiBolts and Sluds A490-04 Standard Specification for
Hem-Treated Sleel Structural BoilS, J50 hi Millimum
Tel/ sile Strength
A490M-04 Slandard Specification forliigh-Slrengl" Sleel
BoIlS, Classes 10.9 alld 10.9.3, for Slruclllml Sleel Joillls
(Metric)
AS29/A529M-04 Stanc/ard Specification for High -Strength

Carbon-Mangallese Steet ofS'truclUral Qua/ity
A563-04 Standard Specification for Carbc)1I and Alloy
Steel NUls
A563M-03 S'umdard Spec(/icarioll for Carbon and Alloy
Sleet
NUIS
I Metric]
A568! A568M-03
SlIlIdard
Specificarion for Steel, Sheer, Carbon. and High-Strength.
Low-Alloy, HOI-Rolled alld Cold-Rolled, Gelleral
Requirements for
A572!A572M-04 Slalidard Specljicolioll for Hi ghStrengfl! Low-A 1I0y Columbium- Vanadium StrUCTUral
Steel
A5881A588M-04S(Qndard Specificalioll
S trength Low-Alloy Sfrllctural
far
High-
Steel wilh 345 MPa Miliimuf1I Yield Poinl 10 100 mill

Thick
A606-04 Standard Specification Jor Steel, Sheet and
Slrip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, fl OE-Roiled and ColdRolled,
wirh
improved ATmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
A618/A618M-04 SWlldard Specificalion for HOI-Fomlfd
Welded and Seamless High -StrengTh LowAlloy Struclural
TII.bing
A673/A673M-04 SIandard Specification for Sampling
Procedurefor Impact Teslillg ofStruclllrtll Steel
A668/A668M-04 Standard Specificalioll for Sleet
Forg illgs, Carbon and Alloy, for Genera/Industrial Use
A709/A709M-04 Slandard Specificalioll for Carboll and
liighStrength Low-Alloy Stmcrural Steel Shapes. Plates,
and Bars and Quenched-and- Temp ered Alloy Structural
Steel Plates for Bridges
tl1
National Structural Code of tl18 PlliJippines 6 Edition Volume 1
!5-30
CHAf)TU~~)
. Steel and Melals
A 751-0 J SWI/dard Test M('[hods, Pracliu's, and

Tf/rmil1o{ogyfor Chemical Alwlysis of Steel Products
American Welding Society (A WS)

AWS Dl. JlD I, IM-20()4 S!mClllral We/din~ Cor/e"Steei
A847-{}{}a (2001) S'lwulord 5j)('ciji('(ltiO!l for ('o/d-Fom1('d

We/dnl dlld Seam/e.l's 1-1I"!;h-Slrellgth, Low-Allo), StmcfUrof
'jilbi'l~ with Il1Ipr(JI'ed AlfllO.spheric CO!Tosion Resisl(lIJCe
Fo/' Shielded
A852/A852M-01 Standard ,~jJe(.'lfic(Jtion for Quellched and

Tempered Low-Alloy Stl'llctum/ Steel Plate wiTh 485 MPa
AWS AS.5-96 SpeC/jicalioll for Low-Alloy

E!eumdesfor Shielded Mew/ Arc Wel</il/I;
A WS A5, 1-2(X)4 .~j}('c(/ic(l/ioll for Carbo/l STeel Efecfrodes

MeW/An: Wddi!/~
Steel
Minimum Yield Slrenglh 10 iOO mill 711ick

A9J3/A9I3M-04 Slandard 5jJecijication for HighSlrel/gtll Low-Alloy Steel Shap(!s of Srructura/ Quality,
Producl'd by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process
(QS7]
A992/A992M-04 Standard Specificatioll for Steel for

Structural ShapesJor USl' in Building Framing
User Note: ASTM A992 is the most commonly

referenced specification for W shapes.
AWS AS. 17/A5. 17M-97 Specijic(l/j(jh j()r Carbol1 ,\'teel

Eleur()(ks and F/uxesj()r '<;Ilbmerxed Arc Wdding
AWS AS. 18:200 I Sj)ec(/icatioll /or Carbon Stec/

Electrodes and Rods/or Gas Shidded Arc Welding AWS
AS.20-95 Spec{{icariol1 for Carbon Steel Electrodes jor
Flux Cored Arc Weldillg
AWS. AS.23/AS.23M-97 Specificatio" for Low-Allo), Steel

Electrodes and Fluxes/or Submerged Arc Weldillg
AlOI I/A10l IM-04 Standard Spec(ficationfor Steel, Sheet
AWS AS.2S/AS.25M-97 5jJeq'(icalionj()r Carbon and LowAlloy Stee! Elec!l'Odes alld Fluxes /or Electroslag Welding
and Strip, /-lot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy and High-Srrellgrh Low-Alloy wiil! Improved
Formabilil),
Alloy Sleel Elecrrodesfor Electrogas Welding
C33-03 Standard Specification/or C()ncrete Aggrl.!gales

C33004 Standard Specification
Aggregates for Structural Concrete
for
AWS A5.26/A5.26M-97 Specificationfor Carbon and Low-
AWS A5.2896 SpecificaTio/l for Lmv-Alloy

Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc We/ding
Sted
Lightweight
A WS AS.29: 1998 Specification for Low-Alloy Sled

Electrodesfor Flux Cored Arc We/ding
El 19-00a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Consrruction and Materials
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
E709-0 I Standard
Examination
S'pecification for SfrucfUra! Joints Using ASTMA325

orA490 Bolts. 2004
Guide
Jar
Magnetic
Particle
F436-03 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel

Washers
F959-02 Standard Specification jar Compressible-WasherType Direct Tensioll indicators for Use with Structural
Fasteners
F1554-99 Standard Sp(~cificatiol1lorAnchor Bolts, St(?el, 36,
55, and 105 ksi Yield Sfrlmgrh
User Note: ASTM FI554 is the most commonly

referenced specification for anchor rods. Grade and
weldabiity must be specified.
FI852-04 Standard Specification!or "Twist-Off' Type
Tension Control Structural Bolt/NutIWasherAssemblies,
501.3 Material
501.3.1 Structural Steel Materials
Material test reports or reports of tests made by the
fabricator or a testing laboratory shall COI1::\ ; iJ! C sliffi, :CJl!
evidence of conformity with one of n'
,,, '
ASTM standards. For hot-rolled structur,:
and bars, sllch tests shall be made in 'ii.X: ;cI;'"ii(:,' \ :; :.;
ASTM A6/A6M; for sheets, such tests sl;:':
l~i:'
' 11
accordance with ASTM A568/A568M; lur lubJlIi. :::;d
pipe, such tests shall be made in aeco:,1 '(: wi:',
c
requirements of the applicable ASTM ~!:'!:d~rrl<.: 11"",(1
above for those product forms. If requc
shall provide an affidavit stating that
furnished meets the requirements of the
Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 hi Minimum Tensile Strength
CHAPTEH [) . Steel Hnd Molars
.,
i
501.3.1 a ASTM Designations
501.3.1< Rolled Heavy Shapes
," ;rnwfIlral .\"/('C'/ material conforming to one of the

followi Ilg ASTM speci ficatiolls is ;lppro vC<! for usc unde r
(I l is Spcciri(;;tliUlI
ASTM A6/A6M hOI -roiled shapes with a nangc thick ness

exceeding 50 mill , used as membe rs subj ec l to primary
(co mput cd) ten s ile forces du e to te nsion o r nexu rc and
spliced using complctc-joint-penclnuion groove welds
thilt fu se through th e thickness
Ihe member, shall be
specified us follows
I.
H OIrol led struc.:lural shapes
ASTM A16/AJ6M
IISTM 11529/11529M
ASTM ,,5721 A572M
IISTM A5 881 A588M
ASTM A 7091 A 709M
ASTM A9131 A913M
IISTM A9921 A992M
2.
3.
Supplcmcnlary Requircment 530, Charpy V -Notch Impaci
'c.
Pipe
Plmcs
AS,),M 1136/1136M
IISTM 11242/11242M
IISTM 1128.1/1128JM
IISTM 11514/11514M
ASTM A529/A529M
ASTM 11572/11572M
IISTM 11588/A588M
ASTM A 7091 A 709M
ASTM A852/A852M
ASTM AIOIIIAIOIIM
Bars
ASTM A36/ A36M
ASTM 11529/A529M
ASTM 11572/A572 M
ASTM A709/11709 M
6.
The contract documents shall require thut such shapeo; be

supplied with Charpy V-Notch (CVN) impact (cst results in
accordance with ASTM A6IA6M.
impact tcst shall meet a minimum average value of 27 J

abso rbed energy at +21
1150n
11501
MI8
11847
ASTM ASJ/ A53M. Gr. B

4.
or
Test for 5 lIUciuraJ Shapes - A llernate Core Locat ion. TIle
Structu ral tubing

ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
5.
!j-31
Sheets
The above requirements do nol apply if lhe splices amJ

cOllnections arc made by boltin g. The abo ve requirements do
not apply 10 hot-rolled shapes with II flange thickness
exceeding 50rnm that have shapes with flange or web
clements less than 50 mill thick welded with complete-joint penetration groove welds 10 th e face of til e shapes with
Ihicker elements.
User Note: Additional requirement s for joiIlts in heavy
rolled members are given in Sections 510. 1.5, 510.1.6,
510.2.7. and 513.2.2.
501.3.1d Built-Up He"vy Shapes
Buill-UP cross -sections consisting of plates with <l
thickness exceeding 50 III III , used as members subj ect (0
primary (computed) tensile forces due to te nsion or
n cxure and spliced or connected to olher me mbers using
co mplctc-joinlpenetralioll groove weld s thaI fu se through
Ihe Ihickness of the plates, shall be specified as follows.
The conLIact document s shall require thai the steel be
supplied wilh Charpy V-Nolch impacI lesl resuits in
accordance wilh ASTM A6/ A6M, Supplementary
Requ irement S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The
impact test shall be co nducted in accordance with ASTM
A673/A673M. Frequency p. and shall meet a minimum
a"e rage va lue of 27) absorbed energy at +21
oc.
IISTM A606
AIOIIIAIOIIM
Thc above requirements also apply 10 builtup crosssections consisting of plates exceeding 50 111m th<lt are
welded with complete-joint-penetration groove welds to the
face of other sections.
5S IISLAS
HSLAS -F
50J.3.1b Unidentified Steel
Uniden tifi ed slee l free of inj urioll s defects is permitted to
be used for unimportant members or details, where the
precise physica l properties and weldabiity of the steel
would not affect the stre ngth of the structure.
User Note: Additional requirements for j oin ts in heavy

built-up members are given in Sections 510.1.5, 510.1.6,
.'
..
510.2.7. and 513.2.2. '
th
National Structural Code of til e Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
[)32
CHAPTEH
~J.
Steel and Metals
501.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings

Cast stee! shaH conform to ASTM A2J6/A2J6M, Gr.
WeB with Supplementary Requircment S 11. Steel
forgings shall conform to ASTM A668/A668M. Test
rcpOi1S produced in accordance with the above reference
standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of
conformity with such standards.
Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform 10

the Unified Standard Series of ASME 13 I X.2.6 and shall
have Class 2/\ tolerances.
Manufacturer's cCI1ification shall constitute
evidence of conformity with the standards.
sufikiclll
501.3.5 Filler Metal ::lnd Flux for Welding
501.1.l Bolts, Washers and Nuts

Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under
this Specification:
I.
Filler metals and fluxes shall conform 10 one ".):' Ihe

following specifications of the American VvclcJing
Society:
AWS AS.l
AWSAS.S
AWS A5.17/A5.17M
AWS AS.lS
AWSA5.20
AWS A5.23/A5.23M
AWS AS.25/AS.2SM
A WS AS.261 AS.26M
AWSAS.2S
AWSAS.29
AWS AS.32/AS.32M
Bolts:
ASTM A307
ASTM A325 IA325M
ASTM A449
ASTM A490 I A490M
ASTM 1'1852
2.
Nuts:
ASTM A194/A194M
ASTM AS631 AS63M
3.
Manufacturer's ceI1ification shall constitute sufficient

evidence of conformity with the standards. Filler metals and
fluxes that arc suitable for the intended application shall bl:
selected.
Washers:
ASTM F436/F436M
4.
Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension

Indicators:
ASTM 1'959 IF9S9M
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient

evidence of conformity with the standards.
501.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one
of the following ASTM specifications is approved for use
under this Specification:
501.3.6 Stud Shear Connectors

Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the
requirements of Structural Welding Code-Steel, AWS
[) 1. 1.
User Note: Studs are made from cold drawn bar, either
semi-killed or killed aluminum or silicon deoxidized,
conforming to tile requirements of ASTM A291 A29M-04,
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,
Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for.
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute

evidence of conformity with AWSD 1 1.
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A193/A193M
ASTM A354
ASTM A449
ASTM AS721 AS72M
ASTM A5881A588M
ASTM 1'1554
sufficicJ!!
501.4 Structural Design Drawings and Specifkatioll.'j
User Note: ASTM F 1554 is the preferred material

speeificationfqr anchor rods.
The design drawings and specifications shall meet (lie

requirements in the Code of Standard Practice for Stee)
Buildings and Bridges, except for deviations specifically
identified in the design drawings and/or specifications.
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor

rods and threaded rods of any diameter.
C Hr~P T E R
S02'}. J3 Gross a nd Nct Arca De(e rmina(ion

J. Gross Arc ;!
Th e gross arC,I,
('ros s-s l~c t i(l nal
2.
I'.~.
or
a mcm ber is the IOtal
area.
Net Arca
The net area. II,,, or a member is the SLIm of the
products of the thickness and the net width of

each clcmcn! co mputed as fd!iows :
In computing nct arc" for tension and shea r. the
width of.1 bolt hol e shall bc taken as 2 111m greater
than the nominal di mension of the hole.
For a chain of holes extendi ng across a pan in any
diago nal or z.igzag linc. the nct width of the part shall
be obtained by deducting from the gross widt h the

sum of the dia meters or slot dimensions as provided in
Section 510.3.2, of all holes in the chain. and adding,
for each g'lge space in the chain , Lhc quanti ty s "!. /4 J:
where
::;:: longitudinal center to-center spacing (pitch) of

any two consecutive holes, Illlll.
;;;; transvcrse celltertocenter spacing (gage)

between fastener gage lines, mm .
For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent legs

shall be the sum of (he gages from the back of th e angles
less thc thickness.
All
to a maximum
502.4 Classification of Sections for Local !3ucklillg

Secti ons are classified <lS compact, noncompact, or
slcnderelemcnt sections. For a section to qualify as
compact its !langcs must be cont inuolls ly co nnected to
the web or webs anti the widtlH hi ckness ratios o f its
co mpression eicmcnts must not exceed the li mi ti ng wid thth ickness ratios J.." from Table 502.4.1. If the width-thickn ess
rat io of one or more compression clements exceeds 1.1" but
does not cxceed Iv
from Table 502.4 . 1. the section is
noncom pact. If the widtlHhickness ratio of any elemcnt
exceeds )~F"' the section is referred LO as a slender-clemen(
seclion.
Me !a l~
!) ], ',
502.4. Unstiffcned E1elllelits

For unstiffened elements supported along onl y one edge
parallel 10 the directi on of the compression loree. the
width shall be taken as follows:
I.
For !bnges or I-shaped members and leeS. the width b i ~

oJlclwlrthe ful!t1angc width, bj.
2.
For legs of angles and flanges of channels and lees,

the width b is 'the full nominal dimension.
J.
For plmcs, the wid th b is the distanc e from the free

edge 10 the firsl row of fasteners or linc of we lds.
4.
For stems aftees, d is taken as the fullnomin4ll depth

of the section.
User Note: Refer to Table 502.4.1 for the graphic

representation of unstiffencd element dimensions.
502.4.2 Stiffened Elelllents
For stiffened clements supported along two edges parallel
10 the direction of the compressionforce, the width shall
be taken as follows:
I.
For webs of rolled or formed sections. h is th e clear

distance between nunges less the fillet or comer radius
at each flange; h.. is twice the distance frolllihe centroid
co the inside face of the compression flange less the
fillet or corner radiu s.
2.
For webs of built-up secti ons, II is the distance

between adjaceJll lines of fastene rs or the clear
distance between flan ges when welds arc used, and
hr is twice the di stance frol11 the centroid to the nearest
line of fa<;teners at the com pression flange or the
inside face of the compression flan ge when welds
are used; IIp is twice the distance from the plastic
neutral axis (0 the nearest line of fasteners at the
compression flange or the inside face of the
compression Oange when welds are used.
3.
For flange or diaphragm plales in buill-up seclions, the

width b is the distance between adjacent lines of
fasteners or lines of welds.
4.
For flanges of rect angular hollow structural secti ons

(HSS), the width b is the clear distance betwee n webs
less the inside comer rad ius on each side. For webs of
rectangular HSS, " is the clear distance between the
flanges less the inside comer radius on each side. If
the corner radiu s is not known, b and II shall be taken
as the corresponding outside dimension minus three
times the thickness. The thickness, I, shall be taken as
lhe design walllhickness, per Seclion 502.3 .12.
For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An,
is the gross area minus lhe product of the thickness and the
total width of material that is removed to form the slot.
In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the
weld metal shall Jlot be considered as addin g to the net
area.
User Note: Section 510.4.1(b) limits

of 0.85A, for splice pi ales with holes.
5 Steel :1110
User. Niite: .Refer to ' Tabl~ .. 59ntl;, for , the lIT~phic

~~p'te;2Ilt1i~<iii 'i;htifr6i1~~ 'ei~\):jbn fllirrr~nsi bi).~ ;:' ::. .. ..
th
National Structural Code of tile PI1ilippincs 6 Edition Volume 1
53G
CHAPT[n S . S1eel and Metals
iti~,iif'~lUC()jnplres:sioil
Description of Elements
Limiting
Width
Til ic kness 1Ratio
)'p
-
Elements
Wiclth~Thjckncss
Ratios
""""--1
A/
-""-""" - - -- " - - " " "- ""T"" " - - -" -c -" - "" " "
I\l
111
III
Flexure in flanges of rolled 1shaped sections and channels
I; I I
Flexure in flanges of doubly and

singly symmetric I-shaped built-up
sections
1;11
Uniform compression in flanges of

rolled I-shaped sections, plates
projecting from rolled I-shaped
sections; outstanding legs of pairs
of angels in continuous contact and
flanges of channels
1;11
NA
o 56jtj F,
Uniform compression in flanges of

I-shaped sections and
plates or angle legs projecting from
built~up l~shaped sections
I;
NA
O"64kJ/F,
Uniform compression in legs of

single angles, legs of double angles
with separators, and all other
unstiffenecl elements
I;
NA
Flexure in legs of single angles
"!
built~up
For tapered flanges of rolled sections , the thickness is the

nominal valuc halfway betwecn the free edge and the
corresponding face of the web.
Example
i<>i
0"54)/ F,
502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures

Provisions for the evaluation of existing structures are
presented in Appendix A -5, Evaluation of Existing
Structures.
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control

Shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection,
and quality control shall meet the requirement s
stipulated in Section 513, Fabrication, Erection, and
Quality ControL
.,
SECTION 502
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The gCIl!!rai rcqui rl!lllC nts I ~)/' the anal ysis and des ign or steel
slru<..:tu rcs Ihal i!I\! appiit. : ablc 10 all scclioll of the
spc('i li catioll are given in this scctiOl1 .
The section is orgilJlizcd as follows:
502 .1
502.2
502.3
502.4
502.5
502.6
General Prov isi ons

Loads and Load Combinati on!)
Design Basis
Classification of Sections fo r Local But:kling
Pabrical io n, Erection and Quality Control
Eva lua tion of Existing Structures
502.1 General Provisions

The design of members and t:onnccl iollS shall be consistent
wi th the intended bch.wior of Ihe frami ng system and the
assumptions made in the structural analysis. Unl ess
restricted by the this code. lateral load resistance and
stabilit y may be provided by any combination of members
and connecti ons.
502.3.2 Limit States

Design shall be based on the principle that no ClppJic<l blc
strength or serviceabilit y limit state shall be exceeded
when th e st ructu re is subjected to all approp ria te load
co mbin ations.
502.3.3 Design for Strength Using Load and Itl'Sis tancc

Factor Design (L RFD)
Design according to the provisions for Load anti
Resistan ce FactoI' Design (LRFD) ~atisfies th e
requirements of Ihis Speci ficati on when the desi gn
strength of each structu ral component equals or exceeds
the required strength detennined on the basis of the LR FD
load combinations. All provisions of this Specification,
except for those in Section 502.3.4. shall apply.
Design shall be perfonncd in accordance with Equation
502.3- I:
R,j $ RIl
where
R" = requ ired strength (LRFD)

RII = nominal strength, specified in Section 502 throu gh
511
502.2 Loads and Load Combinalions
t/I
loads :Uld load combinations shaH be as stipulated by thi s

code. In the absence of a building code, the loads and load
combinations shall be those stipulated in SEIJASCE 7. For
design pu rposes, th e nominal loads shall be taken as th e
loads stipulated by thi ' code.
511
(JR, = des ign strength
TI1C
User No"': For LRFD designs. the load combinations in

SElJASCE 7. Section 2.3 apply. For ASD designs. the load
combinationS in SElJASCE 7. Section 2.4 apply.
502.3 Design Basis

Des igns shall be made according to the provisions for
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or to the
provisions ror Allowable Strength Design (AS D).

The required strengt h of stru ctura l mcm bers and
con necti ons shall be determined by structural an alysis
for the appropriate load combinlltions as stipul ated in
tion 502.2.
(502.3- 1)
Sec ~
specified in Section 502 Ihrough
502.3.4 Design for Strength Using Allowable

Strength Design (ASD)
Design according to the provision s for Allowable
Strength Design (ASD) satisfies the requirement s or thi s
Specification when the allo wabJe strength of each
structural component equals or exceeds the required
s trength determi ned on the bas is of the ASD load
combin at io ns. All provisions of thi s Specification ,
except those of Secti on 502.3.3. shall app ly.
Des ign shall be performed in accordance with Equation
502. 3-2:
(502.3-2)
whe re
R.
RII
Design by clasLic, inelastic or plastic analysis is p!rm.iltcd.

Provisions for inelastic and plastic anal ysis are as slipulated in
Appendix I, lnela~ li c Analysis and Design. The provisions
for moment redi strib ution in continuous beams ill
Appendix A, Section A-J.3 are penllitted for elastic
analysis only.
= resislancefactor,
= requ ired s trengt h ( ASD)

= nominal s trength , specifi ed
through 5 11
Q
= safety fa c tor , s pec ified
thr o ugh 5 1 I
/l oW = all owabl e strength
in Sectio n 502
in
Sec tion
502
502.3.5 Design for Stability

Stability of the struclure and its elements shall be
determined in accordance with Secti on 503.
5 :J-1
CHAP'-!::" ~ . Sled and MalClls
502.3.6 Dc."lign of CO lln ct'liOlls
Connection clements shall be designcd in ;lccorcbnrc with

the provbions of Sections 510 and 511 . The forces and
defonll<lIions used in design shall he consistent with the
intended pclionnancl' of the COllllcclion ilnd the ;l,,!mmptioIlS
used ill tIll.' structural analysis.
User Note: Section 3.1.2 of the Code of Standard
Practice . addresses communication of nece:.sary
information for the design of connections.
502.3.8 I)csign for Pondin~

The roof systcm shall be investigated through . . :!"m.:turA
anal ysis to assu re adequilte !'trcngth ;111<1 SI :';:: . ;'nd
ponding condi ti ons, un less the roof Stlfra<: c. IS !HOVld(' (t
with a slope of 20 nl1ll per mc tcr or grc<Hcr hm :!i , ! P{)jlii ~
of free drainilge or all adequate ~yslCIll of dr;!inagl' IS
provided to pre ve nt the acc umu lation of wilter.
Sec Appendi.': A2, Design for Ponding, for methods of
checking ponding.
502.3.9 Design for
502.3.6. Simple Connections

A si mple connection transmits a negligible moment
across the connectioll. In the analysis of the SlruclUrc,
simple connections may be assumed to allow unrestrained
relative mImi on between the framing clements being
connected. A simple connect ion shall ha ve suffi cient
ro tatio n capaCit y to acco mmodate the requ ired rotati on
dctermin ed by the analysis of the struclUre. Inelastic
rotalion of the conncction is pcrmitted .
502.3.6b Moment Connections

A momen t co nnection transmits moment across th e
co nnec ti on. Two types of momelll co nnecti ons, FR and
PR, arc permitted, as specified below.
I.
2.
FullyRestrn ined (FR) Moment Connections

A full yrestrai ncd (FR) moment connecti on trJ.llsfers
momclll with a negligible rotation bel"'een the
connected Inembers. In the analysis of the structure,
the connection may be assumed to allow no relative
rotati on, An FR con nection shall have sufficient
st ren gth and st iffness to maintain th e angle between
the con nected members al the strength limit states,
Parti all y Reslrained (PR) Moment Connections
Partiall yrcslrained (PR ) moment connections
transfer moments. but the rotation between connected
members is not negligible. In the analysis of Ihe struc
ture, the forccdefonnation response chanlctenstics of
the connection shall be included . The response
charactelistics of a PR connection s}lall be
documented in the {echnical literature or established
by analytical or experimclllal me'lns. The
componc nt elements of a PR con nection shall ha ve
sufficiel1l strenglh, stiffncss. <111(1 dcforl11il1i on
capacity at the strength limit Slales.
502.3.7 Design for Serviceability
Thc overall structure and the individual members,

and connectors shall be checked for
serviceab ilit y.
Pcrformance
req uirements
for
servicea bility design arc given in Secti on 512 .
co nnections,
F~ I(iguc
Faliguc shall be considered in accordance wilh A !'~" .':lld i-:

A3, Design for p.lIigue, for memhcJ.; :Itjd !: . i
connections subject to rcpeated loading. Fali ;'ll' ;It d
be considered for seismic effects or for the cffl: t.:I~ 01 willci
loading on normal bui lding Ia.lentl load resisilll;' ::Y~Ic.! ..:
and building encl osure compone nt s.
502.3.10 Design for Fil-c Co nditi ons
methods of des ign for fire co ndi tiom; are
provided ill Appendix A4, SlrlIctunll Dr,sij' 1I [Ui ' Fire
Conditions : Qualification Testing and I ~ ll ?i)](';:, i,l! '
Analysis. Complianc e with the fire pj( Jlo'd (If,
rcquircments in thi s code shall be deemed , il if
requirements of thi s sec ti on and Appendix Aof.
T wo
I' : ,
Nothing in th is sec ti on is inte nded to cn';,k w i :n IJl~';1

contractual req uircme l1l fo r th e engir:: t rof H:Ciif(;
responsible for th e stru ctural des ign ( : r ::ny f'!OlCr
member of the design team .
User Note: Design by qualification [( ~,> iijji'. i:. :h:'.

prescriptive method specified in mosi I.)llHdill t I,de.!;.
Traditionally, on most projects where the ::rd rfK,,:1 >, file.
prime profcssionaJ, the architect has been i1. ";;!;;'.;: :~'.
party to specify and coordinate I:'
i,'(J' : ';: " ': 1
requirements. Design by Engineering An:' "
i . .- I . \!
engineering approach to fire protection. D, ,., """, .. ,.. ,.
person(s) responsible for designing for fire rn'ldilin,,' , ..
contractual matter to be addressed on cae!: i -; " ;
502.3.11 Design for Corrosion Effect s
Where corrosion may impair the 5lrc n g t l ~ " ' n'WI : ":;,;-,'
of a structure, sU1lctural componellls sh,,;
,;. \1:"
tolerate corrosion or shall be protected a;: ..!-' .t ::\:l I I:~.i ,j ...
502.3.12 Design "Va ll Thickness for 1I ~;:)

The design wall thickness, t, shall be lI srti !;l c:'!(':!!':!ions
invol ving the wall thi ckness of hol low SUI:' i;;; ,: !-':, . : ;Ol! ::
(HSS). The design wall thi ckness. t. sh",: :',. : -'., .. ,
to 0.93 limcs the nominal wn ll thick i ,. !,,,' t- . '
resistanccwelded (ERW) I-ISS and equal ill ,Ii:: "'-1,; ,: 11:,.
thickness for submerged-are -welded (SA \1' ) ; S ;.
CHAPTE R 5 - Steel Clnd Iv1elal$
"
'"
~
Dcscription of Elcmcllls
W idth
Thickncss
Ratio
Limiting W idth-Thi ckncss Rati os

)",,1
A,
-I.Opi/ F,.
Flexure in fla nges of lees
bI I
0.38)E/ F,.
Uniform compressio n in stems

of tees
dl l
NA
o 75)tjF,-
Flexu re in webs of doubl y

symm etric I-shaped secti ons and
chan nels
h l t...
3.76)E/F,
5.70)E/ F,.
10
Uniform comp ression in webs of

doubly sym met ri c
I -shaped
sections
/i1'1".
NA
t.49)E/F,-
Flex ure in webs of sin glysymmetric I-s haped sec tions
h .. / I".
Mp
2
- 0.(9)
My
(0.54 Unifonn compressio n in nanges

of rectangul ar box and hollow
structural sections of unifonn
thickness subject to bending or
compression; nange cover plates
and di aphragm pla tes between
of fas teners or welds
Flexure ill webs of rectan gula r
HSS
bl l
1.l2)E/F,-
h/ (
242.Ji,/ F,
Nationat Structura l Code of the Philippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
Examplc
[[
5 3;
"'''ll
Description
Element s
14
or
Unil<)J"Jll compression ill all other

st iffcncd c lement s
Limit ing Width Th ickness Ratios
Width
Th ick
Ness
Ratio
,,/
E};;U llpi;.'
ie,
, ,
, I
NA
Circ ula r holl ow sect ions
15
In Flexure
I~I k,.
/J/ {
NA
(U 1 1 1',.
I)/{
Il.07 E / 1',
0.31 Ell',.
In unirorm compression
= -;:;::;::=
, but s hall
~, h l r\\"
nol be taken less than 0.15 nor grc;lI l.!r Ihan 0.76 for ca ktd .ttion pU 'l)oscs. (See Cases 2 and ,I)
Ihl Fl. = O.7/~, for minor-axis bending, major axis bending. or sl c l1d ~~ r wcb built-up I -sllilpcd mcmbers, and major ;,:\; ; bend in g
of compacl and nOllcornpact web built-up I shaped mcmbers wilh SlI / S" ?: 0.7 ; F,_ = F/;,I / S" ~ O-SF, for
bending of co mpact and JlollcOmpacl web buillUp I-shaped llll~ ll1h crs with S',J S". < 0.7. (See Case 2)
Associati on of Structu ra l Engineers of tl1e Pililippirl es
CHAPTEH
SECTION
'503
,_ . -, .1.\. ".'_" . , '... ' .
. _ .',
..
,,'
STABILITY ANALYSIS AND

DESIGN
This sc<':lion
adul'l"!sscs general requi remen ts for the slabili ly

anal ys is anti desi gn of members and frames.
The section is organized .as fo ll ows:

503.1
503.2
Stability Desigll Requirem ents

Calculation of Required Strengths
. Slee!
;'lilt!
Me! als
~j 3 ~1
or sat isfying this requ ire men t are provided in Append ix 1\6, Stabilil Y Bracing for Columns and Beams
503.1.3 System Stability Design Requirements

Latera l stabi lity shall be provided by morncnlframes,
bmccdframcs, shear walls, .lndlor other cquivaicill lateral
load resisting systems. The {)vcilurning elTer!s of drifl and
the desta bilizing inll ucllcc of gravity loads shall be
considered. Force {r::lnsfer and load sharing between
clemen!s of the fra ming sys tems shall be considered .
Braced -frame and shca r-wlIlI sy5 tclllS, moment rra mc~,
gravit y framing systems, an d co mbined systems shall
satisfy the fa llowing speci fic requirements:
503.1 Stability Design Requirements

S labilil Y sha ll be provided fo r th e struc ture as a whole <lnd
for cac h of it s clements. Any method that considers the

influence of second-order effec ts (incl ud ing P- tl and P(5
effects) , fl exu ral. shear and axial deformations, geometric
impe rfectio ns, and member stiffness reduction due to
res idual stresses on the stabili ty of the struclUrc and its

elemeili s is permitted . T he method s prescribed i n thi s
secti on and Appendix A-7, Direc t An alysi s Met hod,
SiHisfy these requi re ments . All compo nent and
cOllnection <.iefonnations that contribu te [0 the lateral
displacements shall be considered ill the stability analysis.
503.1.3a Braced-Frame and Shear-Wall Systems

In strucllJres wh ere IHtend stnbility is provided solely by
diago nal bracing, shCH r walls, or cqui valent means, the
effective length factor, K , for compression members shall
be taken as 1.0. unless structural analysis indicates that a
smaller valuc is appropriate. In braced-framc systems. it is
permitted to design the colu rnns. be;.ulls. and diagonal
members ns a vc nically c;;Inlilevered. ~imply connected
truss.
User Note: Knee-braced frames function as momenlframe systems and should be treated as indicated in
Secti on 503. L3b. Eccentri cally braced fram e syslems
function as combined systems and should be treated as

indicated in Section 503 . I.3d.
In stru ctures designed by elast ic analysis, individual

member siability and slabilil y o f the st ruct ure as a whole
are pro vi ded jointly by:
I.
C:.liculation of the re qu ired stre ngth s for

mem be rs, connections and other clements usi ng
one oflhe methods specified in Section 503.2.2, and
2.
Satisfaction of the membe r Hlld connec ti on design

requireme nt s in thi s specification based upon those
required strengths.
S03.!.31J Moment-Frame Systems

in frames where lateral stability is provided by the
flexural stiffness of con nected bemns and colu mns. the
effcc ti ve length fac tor K or elas ti c critical buckling stress.
Fe, for columns and beam-columns shall be determined as
specified in Section 503 .2.
In stmctures designed by inelastic ana lysi s. the provisions

or Appendix A I . Inelasti c Analys is and Des ign, shall be
satisfied.
503.1.2 Member Stability Dcsig n Requirements

Individualmcmber stability is provided by S(l ti sfying the
provisions or sections 505, 506, 507.508 a nd 509.
User Note: Local buckling of cross section components

can be avoided by the use of compact sections deli ned in
Sectio n 502.4.
Where clemen ts arc designed to fUllction as braces to

define. the un braced length of colum ns and beams, the
bracing sys tem shall have sufficien t sti ffness and strength
to control member movement at the braced points. Methods
503.1.3c Gravity Framing Systems

Columns in grav ity framing sys tems shall be desig ned
based on their actual length (K = 1.0) unl ess analysis
shows that a smaller value ma y be used. TIle lateral stability
of gravity framing systems shall be provided by momcn t
frames. braced frames, shear wa lls, and/or other equi valent
lateral load res isting systems. P-IJ. effects due to load 011 the
gravity colu mns slwll be Imnsfc.lTed to the lateral load resisting sys tems and shall be considered in the cal<:ulation
of the required st ren gt hs of th e lateral load res istin g
systems.
S03.1.3d Combined Systems
The an alysis and design of members. cOllnections and other
elements ill combined systems of moment frames, braced
frames, and/or shear walls and gravi ty frames shall meet the
requirements of thei r respecti ve systems.
5-40
CHAP1Tn
~l
Steel <lnd Metals
503.2 Cuiculation ()f HC(IUircd Strcngths
Except as pcrmitted in Se.ction 503.2.2 h, required

strength s shall bc dctcrrnincu lIsing II sCl'o nd -ord cr
a na l y~is as specifi ed in Sect ion 503.2. 1. Design hy eit her
second-order or lirst-ordc r an alysis shall mee t the
requ irements speci fied in Secti on 503,2.2.
503.2.1 Melhods of Second-Ord er Analysis
Second-order an ti lysis shall confo rm to the requ irements

in this Secti on.
503.2.1. General Sccond-Orde, Elaslic Analysi.'
An y second-order clastic anal ysis method thai cOllsiders

both P-6. and P-o cffeclr may be used.
obtained. for instance, by a firsl-orderelastic ana lysi s) by

Ihe 8, amplifie r, in other word s, M, B2(M"1 + Mil }.
/J,=
and
a = I.OqLRFlj
503.2.10 Second -Order An.lysis OJ" Amplified FirS!Order Elastic Analysis

1',
Uscr Note: A meUtod is provided in thi s section to

account for second-order effects in frames by amplifying
the axial forces and moments in members and connecti ons
from a firs t ~ ord er analysis.
(503.2-l a)
(503.2- 10)
PI,
C",
a= 1.6c(AS~
= requ ired seco nd-order Oex ura l strength usi ng

LRr-O or ASD load combi nations. N-llllll
= fi rst-order moment using LRFD or ASD load
combinations, assuming there is no lateral
translation of the frame, N- mm
= firs t-ord er moment using LR FD or ASD load
co mbi nat ions caused by 1<lleral trallslation of
the fmllle onl y, N-rnm.
;::: required seco nd -order axial :-; trcngth using
LRFD or ASD load co mbination s, N.
= fi rs t-order axial i()rec using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, t.lssum ing there is no
lateral lransJati on of Ihe frame, N.
= total vert ical load supported by the story using
LRfD or ASD load co mbillatiom;. including
gravi ty column loads, N.
= first-o rder axial force using LRFD or AS!?
load combi nations caused by lateral
translati on of the frame only, N.
= a coe rfi cicnt ass umi ng no Itt te ral transla tion
o r th e fr ame whose va lue shall be laken as
foll ows:
a.
where
__ -,C,-,, ",,-_
(503. 2- 3 )
Uscr Nole: Note th at the 8 , ampl ifier (Eq. 503.2-3) can

be estimated in preliminary design by using a max imum
lateral drift limit corresponding to the story shear H in
Equation 503.2-6b.
The amplified First-Order Elastic Analys is Method

defined in Section 503.2. 1b is an accepted mcthod for
second-order clastic analysis of braced. moment, ,Hld
combined fram ing sys tems.
The following is an approximale second-order analysis

procedure for calculating th e req uired n exural and axial
stre ngths in mc mbers o f lateral load resisting systems. The
rcqu ired second-order fle xura l st rcngth, Mr. and axia l
strength, PI", shall be determin ed as follows:
"I
L /~'2
M,
I
!s
1_ aL /~~1I
For beam-co lu mns not subject to Intnsvcrsc

loading between SUPP 0l1S in the plane of
bending.
(503.2-2)
(503.2-4)
For members subjected to axial compression, lJ, may be

calculated based on th e first-o rd er es timat e PI"
Pili +
where MI and 1'4 1 , calculaled from a fi rs!orde r anal ysis, arc th e small er and larger
moment s, respecti vc ly. ill (he cnd s of lil,ll
p0l1i on of th e member un bn.lced in the
plane of bending under co nsideration.
M/Ml is positive when the member is ben(
in reverse cu rva ture. negative when bent in
single curvature.
I- a
1', /1'"
"I
P i t.
User Note: ill is an amplifier to account for second order

effeclS caused by displacements between brace poin ls
(P-S) and B, is an amplifier to accoun t for second order
effects caused by displacements of braced points (1'-6.) .
:s
For me11lbers i~ .w~ich .!l,

1.05, il is conservative to
amplify Ihe sUm of Ihe .non-sway and sway momenls (as
b.
For beam-columns subjected 10 transverse

loading between supports, the value of C...
shall be detennincd either by analysis or
conservatively taken as l.0 for all cases.
Associa tion of S truclura l Eng ineers of the Ph ilippines
CHAPTE: H ~ . Steel and Metals
',.
503.2.2 Des ign Require m e nt s
P l=~
(503.25)
,'. (K,Lj2
P",
= CI,ISlic
crilkal
!io11
rcsi ~ I ;IIl (:l'
buckling
of
Ihclll!.!mbcr in the plane of hcndil1!!. (,.' lIk'ulatcd

based olll hc m;su!1l ption oj' zcm side.sway. N.
= clasti c cri ti ca l buckling resistan ce for (h e story

determ in ed hy sidcs way bu ck ling,:HIl<lJ ysis, N.
For moment fram es, where sidcsway buckling effect i ve

K~ nrc dete rm ined for thc col umns, il is
perm ined 10 calculate thc c last ic slOry sides way buckl ing
'Illesc requi rcments apply 10 all types of braced. momcnt,

and combined 1i~\lll i n g sys tcms. Whcre the ratio of second
orde r drift 10 first order drift is cqual to or less lhall 1.5. lilt,
required ~ Ircnglh s of members. conneclions and other
clements shall be determined by one of Ihe methods
specified in Sections 503.2.2a or 503.2.2b, or by the Direct
Anal ysis Method of Appendix A-7. Where the ratio or
seco ndorder drift to first ~ order drift is grcater ,th an 1. 5,
the required st rength!,; shall be determined by the DiIeel
Analysis Method o f Appendix A 7.
lengt h fac(ors
User Nole: The ratio of second-order drift to ftrstorder

drift can be represented by 82. as calculated using
Equation 503.23. Alternatively, the ratio can be
calculated by comparing ule results of a second-order
analysis to the results of a first-order analysis, where the
analyses are conducted eiuler under LRFD load
combinations directJy Or under ASD load combinations
with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD gravity loads.
rcsi slancc as
I.I'" =I
1[ '
Ef
(503.26,,)
(K ,L)'
For a ll IYPCS of lalc l" ll load resisti ng s),ste ms, il is

pen n itied 10 lISC
For Ihe methods specified in Sections 2.2a or 2.2b:

(50326b)
I.
Analyses shall be conducted according to the design and

loadi ng requirements specified in either Section
502.3.3 (LRFD) Or Section 502. 3.4 (AS D).
= modulus of elast icit ), of steel =200 000 MP"
2.
.- ! .O for braced-fmllle systems;

0.85
for momclH-frame and co mbi ned
syste ms, unless a larger v.tltle is justified by
analysis
The st ru cture shall be analyzed llsing the nom inal

geomet ry and the no mi na l elastic sliffness for all
elements.
503 .2.23 Desig n by Second-Ord er Analysis
where
E
= moment of inertia in the planc of bending,

mm
K,
K2
= slUry height, Illlll

= effective length factor
Where required stre ngths are determ ined by a sccondorder

analysis:
in Ihe plane of bending,
I.
'nlC
provisions of Section 503.2. J shall be satisfied.
calcul ated based on the assumption of no

lateral translation. scI eq ual to 1.0 un less
analysis indicates Ihal a sma ll e r value mny be
used
= effective length factor in the plan e or ben ding,
calculated based on a sidcswa y buckling
analysis
2.
For design by ASD, anaJyses shall be canied out under

1.6 timcs the ASD load co mbinations and the rcsults
shall be di vided by 1.6 10 obtain the required
strength!';.
USCI' Nole: TIle amplified first order analysis metllod of

Se<:tion 503.2.lb incorporates the 1.6 multiplier directl y
in the 0 and lh amplifiers, such that no other
modificati on is needed.
1
User Note: Methods for calculation of
K2
are discllssed
jn the AISC Commentary.
1:11/
r.,.,
J.
= first-order i lltt.~rs{()ry drift due to Imeral forccs,

mill. \Vhcrc flu varies over Ihc-plan area of the
st ru cture. !J. II shall be th e average drift
weighted
in proportion to vcrliC<ll load
or, al ternatively. thc maximulll drift.
= story shea r produced by the latera l forces used
10 compute, N
All gravity-onl y load combinati ons shall incl ude it

min imuill Ialeral load applied a( each level of the
Slnlc(ure of O.D02}',-, where Yi is (he design gravity
load applied at level i. N. This minimum lateral load
shall be considered independently in two orthogonal
directions.
User Note: The mini mum Jaleral load of O.OO;2Y/, in

conjuPclion wilh the oute'r designalH;lysis cOristrilirits
lisied .' htlhlS section, liriiitS Ihe en-at . that would
oUlerwise be caused 'by neglecti~g' initial out-of-plumbnes,
National Stru c tural CoeJe of the Ph ilippin(~s G Edition Vol ume 1

th
..~
and member stiffness reduclion due to residual stresses

in the analysis.
:1.
Where the ralio of second-order drift 10 lir$I-Ord~f

drift is less Ihall or cyual 10 1.1, members ilrc
permitted 10 be designed using K = 1.0. Otherwise.
columns and heam-columns in moment frames shall
be designcd using a K fnctor or co lumn buckling
Siress, Ft', det ermin ed from a si desway buckling
an:! ~ ysis of the slniclUre. Stiffness reduction
adju:il:nel1t due to column inelasticity is p!;rmillcd in
Ihc determination of the K factor. For braced frames,
K for compression members shall be taken as 1.0,
lIllless structural analysis indicates a smaller value
may be used.
This additional ialcr:1i loml shall he

independemly in two 011 hogonil I directions.
3.
The non -sway :llIlpliliCiUioll or hea nH :olumn 11I{)!IlCntJ;

is considered by i1pplying th e JjJ amplifier of Seclion
503.2.l to the IOlal member momellls.
503.2.21> Design I>y First-Order AnalYSis

Required strengths arc permitted 10 be dcterminc:d by a
fina-order an'llysis, with all members designed using K
1.0. provided that
!.
The: n.'tllJircd compressive strengths or all mcmbers

whose flexural stiffncsses are consitlcred to contribute
10 the lateral stability of the stn.lcture sati sfy the
following limitation:
aP, $ 0.5/\
(503.2-7)
where
a = 1.0 (LRFD)
1\
2.
a = 1.6 ( ASD)
= required axial compressive stre ngth under

LRFD or ASD load combinations, N.
= mcmbcr yicld strength (= A F.,.), N.
P,
All load combinations include an additional la teral

land, Nj , applied in combination with other IOtld.s al
each level of the stnlcture, where
N, = 2. I (IVL) Yi 2 0.0042Y,
(503.2-8)
where
l'i
AIL
= gravit y load from the LRFD load combination

or 1.6 times the ASD load combination " pplied
at level i, N.
= the maximum rario of f1 to L for all stories in
the structure
= first-o rder intcrs!ory drift due to the design
londs, Illlll . Where /J. vaJies over the plan area of
the stnlcturc, 6. shall be the average dli fl
weighted in proportion to vertical 10:(\<1 or,
altcmtltivcl y, the maximum drifl.
= story height, mill .
. d rift tJ.
is
c~culatcd
<':ollsidcrcd
urider .Lil.FJjload
"'idfto
"r un<ld
A~b .l?W4 .'d;ill$.i.O\itiCi~s
the ASD
gr#~ii)"oads':r:'
Association of S tru ctural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTI:= n 5 - Sleel and Metals
SEC'I'lON:5(i4 '< :, : . '" :,
1/1, =11.75 (LRFD)
! .'.
])Estgl:~Fj~Am~~ FQR :
=2. 00(ASD)
;:: effecti ve n e l <.I rea, 111m 2

= gross arCH or member. mm2
;:: specified mi nim um yield slreSli of the type or
!H ccl heing used, MPa
;:: specified minimum tensile strength of the type of
sttel being used. MPH
Thi s sectioll applies 10 members subjec t 10 axia l tension

caused by sialic forces aCli ng Ihrough the centroidal fiX is.
F,
The secli on is orgttnizcd as follows :

504. 1
43
where
TENSlbN . .. ' " \ " .' ,
504.2
504.3
504.4
504.5
504.6
0.,
~i
SICIHJc rness Limitations

Tensile Strength
Area Determination
When Illcmbers without holes arc full y connected by
welds, the crfective net area used in Equation 504 .2-2

shall be as defined in Section 504. 3. When holes arc
prescllt in a mcmber with welded end cOllnection s, or at
the welded cOJlJleclion in the case of plug or SlOI welds, lhc
efrectivc net arcn through the holes shall be used in Equation
Built-Up Members
P ill -Con nected MClnbers
Eyehars
User Note: For cases not included in this section the

following scctions apply:
504.2-2.
504.3 Area Determination
502.3.9
508
5103
510.4.
tension.
510.4,3
Members subjcct to fatigue

Members subject to combined
axi{ll tension and flexure.
Threaded rods.
504.3.1 Gross Arca

The gross area. A.>:, of a Illember is the total cross
sectional area.
Connecting elements in
504.3.2 Net Arca
Block sheau rupture strength at
cnd connections of tension
T he net area, Ar., of a member is the SUIll o f tile products o f

the thi ckness and Ihe !leI wid th of each clement computed
members.
as follows:
504.1 Slenderness Limitations

There is flO maximu m slenderness limi t for design of
members in te nsion.
User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension ,
the slendemess ratio VI' preferably should not exceed
300. This suggest ion does nOI apply to rods or hangers in
tensiou.
504.2 Tensile Strength
In computing Ilet area fo r tension and shear. the width of a

boil hole shall be taken 2 111111 greater th an the nomi nal
di mension of lhe hol e.
For a chai n of holes ex tending across a part in any diagonal
or zigzag line. thc nct width of the pan shall be obtaincd by
dedu cting from the gross width the sum of the diameters or
slot dimensions as provided in Section 510.3 .2, of all hol es
in the chain, Ilnd addin g, for ellcll gage spilce in the chain.
the quamity J)/ 4g
The design tensile strengt h, , /~, . and the allowable tensile
wh ere
strength, I~JQI of tension members. shall he the lower

value obtained according to the limit st,l tes of tensil e
yielding in th e gross secti on and tensile rupture in the net
section.
1.
For an glc:s, the gage. for holes in opposite adjacent Icg ~

shall he the sum of the gages from the bac k of the an gles
less the thi ckness.
For tensile yieldin g in the gross section :
I~,
= F.r A.'i
1/1, =0.90 (LRFD )

2.
(504.2- 1)
D, = 1.67
(AS D )
For (ensile rupture in (he net sect ion:

(504.22)
= longitudinal center-to -center spacing (pitch) of

any Iwo conseclltive holes. mill .
= transverse ce nter-to-centcr spacing (gage)
between fast ener gage lincs, mill.
por slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the nel area, /\'"
is Ihe gross area millus the product of the thickness and the
total width of material that is remo ved to form {he 5101. III
delcnnining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld
metal shall not be considered as adding to the net area.
th
National Struc tura l Cod e of 1/10 Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
~) 44
CHAPTEH 5 Steel and Metals
(504.5-2)
User Note: Section Sl 0.4.1 (b) limits All to a maximum of

O.gSA, for splice plates withholes.
.
504 .3.3 Effetlive Nel Area
The clTectivc area of ten ~ i on
dClc nnincd
Wi
mcmbers slwll
he
follows:
(504.3 1)
where U, thc ShCM
I;Jg
factor, is determined ltlO showI'
If1
Table 504.3. I.
Members such as si ngle angles, double angles and WT

sections sh<lll have connections proportioned such thaI U is
equal to or greater than 0.60. Ahemativcly, a lesser value of
U is permitted if these tension members arc designed for
the effect of eccentricit y in accordance with 508. 1.2 or
508.2.
n" =2.00 (ASD)
where
A.,
= 2t(a + (112).
= slw rl csi distance from edge of the pin hole to

the c:dge of the membe r measured parallel to
the direction of thc rorce, mill .
= 21 + 16. mm bu t no t more than the aClu,,1
distance from the edge of the hole to the edge of
the pan measurcd in the direction nonn.}1 to the
applied force
= pin d iameter. mill .
= thickncss o f platc, mm .
b~1I
3.
4.
504,4 Buill-Up I'vl embcrs
=0.75 (LRFD)
J1l1ll :!
For be ari ng on the projec ted area of the pin. see

Section 510.7 .
For yield ing Oil the gross section, usc Equation
504.2-1.
limitations on the longilUdina l s paci n ~, of conncctors

betwcen clements in continuou s contac t consist in g of II
platc and n shape or two plates, sec Sectio n 5 10.1.5.
P OI'
Either perforated cove r plates or ti c. pl<HCS without lacing

me pCfm iu e(\ to be used all the opell sides of built -up
tells ion mcmbers. Tie plates shall have a Jengul not less than
two-thi rds the distance between the li nes of welds or
fasteners connecting them to the components of the member.
The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less thnn onefiftieth of (he distance between these lines. 'I11e
longitudin al spacing of inrennittcnl welds or fasteners at
lie plates shull 1101 exceed 150 mill.
504.5.2 Dime nsional Requir cmcnl s
The pin hole shall be located midway bctween the edges

of the member in the directi on normal 10 the applied
force. When the pin is expected to provide for ['thrive
movement between co nn ec ted parts while under full
load, the diameter of the pin hole shall not bc more than I
mm greater than the diameter of th e pin.
User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors

belween componenls should preferably limil the
slenderness ratio in any component between the
connectors 10 300.
504,5 Pin-Connected Members
504.5.1 Tensile Slrenglh

'n1e design tens ile sirengrh, $)~, . and the allowable tensile
strength. ~.JQt of of pin-connected members. slwll be

the lowl~r va lu e obtain ed accordin g to the li mit states of
tcm;ilc ruplllre, shear Illpturc, bearing. ,tOd yie lding
I.
For tensile J1JplUrc 011 the net effecti\'e area:

(504 .5 1)
rA
2.
= 0.75 (Ll~FD)
0, = 2.00 (AS D)
POI' shear rupture 011 the effectivc area:
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of the Philippj n~) s
CHAPT[ H S - Swel <311(.1 Metals
~)
4:;
,-----------------------------------------------------------------,;,, ' :Ta,b'!~ 504.3.1

,
'
, ; , Sheilr~ilg ,Fa~tots forCo~nections to Tension Members '
'.','
C:ISC
':. "
'
Description of Element
"
AlIlcnsion members where Ihe tensio n load is tra ns millcd
directl y 10 each or cross-secti onal elcmelHs by faste ners or
welds. (except ,IS ill Cases 3. 4. 5 and 6)
All tension Ill'! Plbcrs. except plates .mel HSS, whcre the tens ion
load is Irans'miHcd to some but nol :)j J of the cross-sectional
clemellls by fa stencrs or longitudinal welds (A ltern ately. 1'01'
W. M. S and HI', Case 7 may be used,)
Alllcnsion members where thc ten sion load is transmitted by

transverse welds to somc but not all of the cross -sectional
elements.
Plmcs where (he tension IO<ld is tr<l nSmiHCd by longitudinal

welds only.
Rotlnd H SS with a single concentri c gusse t plate .
She <II' Lag Fac"'"o,,

r,-,U
" --_j__-cE
".::x':"::':'-"1'1',,10'---__1
u= 1,0
U :::.1_ "i:11
U= 1,0
and
All =area of the direct! y
con nected elemenls
1,, 2,,' '" U = 1,0
2w> I" 1,5 ""., U = 0.87
1.5w>I"", ,,. U = 0.75
.q~
~~_l
1 ?I.3D.. 1J = 1.0
D :-:: 1<1.3D ... U =1- :;:1/
x-Din
- ---1----------------_._-,---,---------------+---_.------------1
I ~ H ... U = 1-'' ' '
with a single conce ntric

gusset pl.ate
Rect'lngular HSS
'1 S or HI) ,hapes

S
v.., 1\.
or Tees
7
4(8 + 11)
I ~ H ..U=I-;/I
wi th two side gusset plates
>
8'+2811
wilh nange connected with

.3 or more fasten-crs per I'Ine
' d'
,
f'
I'
cut f rOIll these shapes . (1 f' U is 1_--c',;:n-",l.::re;::>c",,,,o,,ll,-o,,,_,,IOc;a""c.,,::.,,g~;calcu lated pCI' Case 2, the larger
with web connected with 4
value is permitted to be used)
or more fasteners per line in
direction of loading
With 4 or more fastcners per
line in direction of loading
Single angles ( If U is calculated
With 2 or 3 fastte ners per
per Case 2, the larger val ue is
permi lied to be used
line in the direction of
loading
8'
x--:-:-::---:-:-:4(8+/i)
"r" 2/3d .,, U=0,90

"1< 2/3d '" U=0.85
1-.---- - -- - --+-----"-----1
U = 0.70
U=0.80
U = 0.60
I = length of connecti on, mm,

w= plate width, mill ;
X;::. con nection eccentricity, mill ;
B = overall width of
rectangular HSS member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of' the connect ion, mm
H = overall height of reclangular
HSS member, measured ill th~ plane of th e cSHl nection, 111111 ____ _ __ _ _ __ _,_ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ ______ _
National Structural Code of
(1'10
th
Philippines G Edition Volum G 1
54G
CHAPTE:H 5 . Steel and Melals
The width of the plale al the pin hole shall nol be less
Ihilll 2b,g + d and the mini mum extension. (I, beyond the
bCClring end of the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the
member, slmll not be less than 1.33 X b 4J
The corners beyond th e pin hole me pcnnillcd to be cu t at
45" to Ihe axis of the member. provided the net ,Ifea
beyond the pill hole, on a plane perpendicular La the cut.

is not I c.~s than thaI required beyond the pin hole p.lr:Jllcl (()
the axis of the member.
This secti on addresses members subject

compression th rough the centroidal axis.
The scctiPil is organized il S rollows:
504 ,6.1 Tensile Strength
"
The i.lvailable tensile strengt h of eyeba rs shilll be

determi ncd in accordance with Section 504.2, with A",
tak en as the cross-sectional area of (he body.
User Note: For members not included in this section the

following sections apply:
508.1 - 508,3
For calcu llll ioll purposes, the width of the hod y of the
cycba rs shall not exceed eight tim es its thi ckness .
504.6.2 Dimensiollal Requirem ents

Eycbars shall be of uniform thickn ess, witholll
reinforcement at the pin holes. and have circular heads
wit h the periphery concentric with the pin hole.
The radiu s of transition between the circular head and Ihe
eyebar body shall not be less than the head diameter.
The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times
the eyebar body width, and the pin hole diameter !-i hall not
be more than I mm greater than the pin diameter.
For steels having F,. greater than 485 MPa. th e hole
diameter shall not exceed five times the plate th ickness. and
the width of the eye bar body shall be reduced accordingly.
A thickness of less than 13 mm is pennissible onl y if
external nuts are provided to tighten pin pl ates and fill er
plates into snug contact. The width from the hol e (~dge to
th e plate edge perpendi cular to the directi on of applied
load shall be greater than two~ {h irds and, for the purpose
of calculation, not morc th an thiee-fourths times the
eyebm' hodywid th.
axi al
General Provisions
Slenderness Limillliions and Erfective Lcnglh
Compressive Strenglh for Flexural Buckling of
Mem be rs withou t Slender Elcmcllis
505.1
505.2
5053
504.6 Eycb;lrs
h>
508.4
5lO.4.4
50902
Members subject to combined axial

compression and Dcxure.
Members subjcci to axi al compression
and torsion.
Compressi ve strength of connecting
elemenL".
Composite ax ial members.

The design compressive strength .
Ie' 1" 1, and !he
allowable compressive strength . I'n/ n c" ,Ire dClermincU

as follows :
The nomi nal cO.'l1prcssive strength, I'n. shall he the lowest

value obtained according to the limit states omcxur;;~
buckling, (orsional buckling and nexural-torsional buc kling.
I.
For doubly sYlllmelric and singly symmetric members

the limIt state of Ilcxural buckling is applicable.
2.
For singl y symmetric and ullsymmetric members, <Inc!

certain doubly sy mm elric members, such as cnl ciform
or built-up colum ns, lhe limit slates of torsional or
nexural~tors i o nal buckling arc also applicable.
505.2 Slenderness Limitations and EITective Lenglh

The erfectivc length faclOf, K, ror calc ul;lIion or column
slenderness, KLlr, shall be detcrmined in accordance with
sec ti on 503,
where
L
r
= huerall y unbraced length or the member,

::::; governing radiu s of gyration, mill .
= the
effective length ractor

accord ance with Section 503.2
Association of Str uctural Engineers of the Philippines
Illlll .
determined
in
CHA P TEf~ [j .
User Note: For members designed on ' the basis of

compression. d,e slenderness ratio KUr preferably
should not exceed 200.
Stewl aneJ Mutals
505.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Bucklin g of

Members Without Slender Elements
505.4 Compressive Stl'cnglh for Torsional and

Flexural -Torsional Buckling of Mcmbt'.fs withou(
Slender Elements
This section app lies to singly ~Y!ll!1lctric and UIl... YIll!11Cl rH"
members. and cCI1Hin doubl y symmetric members. such
This secti on appli es to compression members with
as cruciform or built-u p columns with co mpact allt!
compHel and noncompact sections, as defined in Section

50~.4, for uniforml y compressed clements.
Iloncompaci sections, as de fined in Secti on 502.4 for

uniformly compressed elements. These provision:; arc nil!
required for single <Ingles. which arc covered in
User Note: When the tOrsiQ'iJaJ 'iiilb~ -/el@l! is larger

than the lateral unbfiiced Iclihlh; 'iJij' ~\>i.iIi:lliy;.to~t!Ul
the design of wide l1angeliild~iiiillarWsliaJ*i cbiUffii!s . ..-
The nominal compressive sucngth. P", shaH be dClemlincd

based on !.he limil state of fle xural buckling.
(505.31 )
Ii
.-U
The nom inal compressive strength, P,!, shall be

determined based on the limit states of f1 cx ural- toJ'sion. iI
and torsional buckling. as fo llows:
(505.4-1 )
I.
The fl ex ural buckling stress, F'r:r. is det ermined as follows:

I.
ft
-KL $4.7 1 r
F).
when
or (F,
Fcr = 0.658 P, F,.
2.
ft
when -KL > 4.71 -
F,
For double-angle
mcmbers:
(505.32)
tcc ~ s hap cd
comprc~s i {)n
wherc Ferr taken as Fer from Equal ion 505 .32 or

505 .3-3. for nexura l buck lin g abo ut thc y-axis of .
KL
symmctryand -
KL
=-
, and
ry
or (F, < 0,44F,.)
F
en
2.
where
= GJ
(5054-3)
A;=2
g
(505.3-3)
Fr
and
O.44F,.)
P,.]
1,
<iC('\ !, iE !
505.5.
For all other cases, Fer shall be determined according

Equ ati on 505.3-2 or 505.3-3. using Ihe lorsi onal or
nexural~t o rsional
elastic buckling stress, F'r,
determ ined as follows:
10
::;; clastic
critical buckling stress determined

according to Equalion 505.3-4. Sectio n 505.4. or
the provisions of Seclion 503_2. as applicable.
MP.
a.
For doubly symmetric members:
b.
For singly symmctric members where), is Ihe ';,: is

symmetry:
,,'E
(~Lr
F= -
User Note: TI,e two equations for ~alcu\ating the limits

and ajJpljcability of Sections 505.3{aj"and 505.3(b). one
based on KU, and one based on F,. provide the same result.
F=
( F~)' +
l'c,
' 2 f1
c.
r
1-
I-i
\ - 4FnF"
-----,!.
(Ft'J' + FCl ), !.
For un sYIllI11ctJ"ic members, Fe is the 1\)\'. \ i

the cubic equation :
1h
, ,j
:U( II
oj'
5 tH.!
CHAPTEH 5 ' Steel and MeWls
)( -XO )2
(F{' - F('.r )(Fl' -Fl'y )(Fe _Ieez )_Ft' 2(F'(' - Iee y
"',
_P(' 2( F(' -p( ' \ '

.
)(X- o )'_ F~ 2( FI' - Fe x

)(Y")
=o
~
(505.4-6)
where
e...
-2
I .. "" J )'
(505.4-
ro ::; x" + y + - - /.
As
The effects of ccccmricity on single angle members arc

pcnniUcd to be neglected when the members arc evaluated
as axially loaded compress ion members using one of the
efleeti ve slenderness ratios specified below, provided tllat: (I'
members are loaded at tllC ends in compression through lilt..
same one leg; (2) members arc attached by welding or by
mjnimum twoHbolt COIUlCCtions; and (3) Ihere arc no
intermediate trans verse loads.
:::: gross arei~ of member, mm 2

: : warping constant , mm b
A,
505-3 or Section 505-7, as appropri ate, for axially loaded

members, as well as those subject to the slcndcmess
modification of Secti on 505-5(a) or 505-5(b), provided th e
members meet the cri ICrl (\ imposed.
I.
For equal~ l cg angles o r unequal-leg angles conn ected

throu gh the longer leg that are individua1 members o r
arc web members of planar trusses with adjacent web
members atl ached (0 the same side o f the gusset plate
or chord:
a.
when
7)
)
11=1_..to +yu
-,r
(505.4 -8)
(K,,, L)'
05- 580:
'-x
(505 .4-9)
r
7(2
(505.4- 10)
/'" =(KrLJ'
b.
I)'
r ;:
G
l x, i y
Xo , y o
r,
rx
KL
..
(505.5-1)
> 80:
=
32+ 1.25 -
,.,
I'
$ 200
(505.5-2)
(505.4 - 11 )
-2
iI,r,
:::: shear modulu s of elast ici ty of steel

= 77 200 MPa.
:::: moment of inertia abo ut the princi pal axes.
mm4.
J
K,
wben -
F=("'(K,L)
EC GJ)_I-
= to rsio nal cons tant, mm'! .

:::: effec ti ve length fac lor for torsi onal buckl ing
:::: coordinates of shear center with respect to the
centroid. mm.
:::: polar radiu s of gyration about the shear
center, mm.
:::: radius of gyration about y-ax is, mm.
For unequal leg angles wi th leg length rali os less than 1.7
and connected through the shorter leg, KU,. from
Equations 505 .5- 1 and 505.5-2 shall be increased by
adding 4 [(bib.,)' - I], but KU,. of Lbe members sball not be
less than 0.95U,., .
2.
For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connect ed

through tbe longer leg that arc web members of box or
space trusses with adjacent web members attached to
the same side of the gusset pl ate or chord:
a.
when
05- 5 75:
rx
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped sections,

r
C w may be laken as I yh; / 4, where 110 is tlle distance

between flange centroids, in lieu of a more precise
analysis. For tees and double angles, omil tenn with Cw
when computing F" and take X o as 0,
505,5 Single Angle Coml>rcssion Members

The nominal compressive strenglh , p~, of single angle
members s hall be detenni ned in accordance with Sect ion
b.
wben -
rx
(505 .5-3 )
> 75:
':1'
KL
=45 + -$200
rx
(505.5-4)
CHAPT EI1. 5 . Slee l and Metals
For 1Illcqual leg angles with leg length ratios less than 1.7
,lIld connccted through the shorter leg. KU,. rrom
""Iuations 505 .5-3 and 505..1-4 shall be increased by

adding 61(bl1>,)' - II. but KU,. of the member shall not be
less than 0.82I1r"
~~~)
54Y
= modified column slenderncss of buil l-Up
'"
(~L)o
member
= column slenderness or bu ilt-up member
where
acting as a ullit in th e buckling

L
::: Ic ngth of member between work point s at

truss chord centerlines. mm .
= longer leg of angle. mm.
= shorter leg of angle. mm.
= radi us of gyration about geometric axis
parallel to connec ted leg. mm.
== radius of gyration (,or the minor principal axis.
mm.
b/
h,
I's
r:
3. Single angle members with differem end conditions

from those described in Section 505.5(.) or (b). with
leg length ratios greater than 1.7. or with transverse
loading shal l be evaluated for combined ax ial load
and nexurc using the provisions of section 508. End
connection to different legs on each end or {Q
bothlegs, the usc of singlc bollS or the attachment of
adjacent web mcmbers to opposite sides of the gu sset
plate or chord shall consti Lute different end conditions
requiring the use of seclion 508 provisions.
505.6 Built-up Members
;::
f,
. ;::
= radius of gyra t i on of indi vidual component

relative to its ccntroidaJ axis parallel 10
member axi s of buc kling. mill.
== separation rati o;:: hl2rib
== distance betwccn ce nt roids of individual
compo nent s perpendicular to the member
axis of buckJing. mill .
'ill
a
If
2.
distan ce between connectors. mill.

minimum radius of gyration of indi vi dua l
component. mill.
The nomina! compressive strength of built -up

members composed of two or morc shapes or plates
wi th at leas{ onc open side interco nnected by
perforated cover plates or lacin g with tie plates shall
be detennined in accordance with Sections 505.3.
505.4, or 505.7 subject to the llloditicatiOil given in
Section 505.6.I(a).
505.6.2 Dimensional Requirements
505.6.1 Compressive Strength

1. The nominal compressive strength of builtup
members composed of two or more shapes that are
interconnected by bolts or welds shall be determined

in accordance with Sectio ns 505.3. 505.4, or
505.7 subject to the following modificati on. In

lieu of more accurate a nal ysis. if the bucklin g mod e
involves relative deformations th at produce shear
force s in the connecto rs between individual shapes.
d ir ection bein g considered

(l
Individual components of compression members composed

of two or marc shapes shall be co nnccted to one another at
intervals, a, such that the effecti ve slende rness ratio Ka/ri
of each of the component shapes, between the fasteners,
docs not exceed threefourths limes the govcming
s lenderness ratio of the built-up member. TIle least radius
o f gyration, rio shal l be used in computing the slenderness
ratio o f each component part. The end connection shall be
welded or pretensioned bolted with Class A or B faying
s urfaces.
KUr is replaced by (KUr)m determined as follows:

For intermediatc conncctors
that are snug.tight
bolted:
User Nore:. It is apceptabl~ ..td , design .. a bolto,d ' eod
of
a.bJiUt,up coinPfl'Ssi9tl: 1I)ernbe\' for tbefuU

oomp~iW l6iithvith,.\liiIt,ii{l.. ,Sh~..andi/)olt :~.'!iues. bal;cd
corinectioii
biuing;v<iJu,ei how.~veii ;ipi!.ht\lt$ /n.1\StbC;J'ti;tl'l15i.odcd.

The. i-eqii.ire!IJeJ;1l:.f!)tJ;;li!s.s,-A, Qr,J~, ~aY.Wl\ $iuf~ces." $ not
OD:
(505.6-1)
b.
For interm ediate connectors that arc welded or

prelcnsioned boil ed:
a , (..'!...)'
'
C)..
Pl '.,.
KL
. 082
(505.6-2)
intended 'fdifue -resistanCe 'tIf the ax'iaHorce.in.tMi;mill-up

member, but~~tlie:r to PIJiveiit ;.elaiiv~ moyement between
tlle c~niP9ji~n~ "at jile ,~nd ;a.s .tl1e Quiltiup.}g~mtxrr t!l,k!lsa
curved $hape:
'
. ' : : '",.
At the ends of buihup compression mcmbers bearing on
base plates or milled surfaces, aU components in colllact
Witll one another shall be connected by a weld having a

length not less than the maximum width of the member or
by bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters

apart for a distance equal to II f2 times the maximum width
where
of the member.
Along the ICIlgih or buill-up cOlllprcssi()n members betwecn

thl: l~ l1d connections required above , longitudinal spacing
for i!llCfm illCIlI welds or bolts shall be adctluatc 10
provide for the transfer of the rC<luirr.d forces. For
limitations on the longilUdina! spacing of fasteners
between clements ill continuous conl<lct consisting of a
plate and a shape or two plates, sec Section 510.3.5.
Where a component of a built-up compression member
consists of an outside plcue, the maximum spacing shall
not exceed the th ickness of the thinner outside plate
ollc-half of Ihis di stance. The Ihickness or lie plll{cs sh<lll

be not less than onc-fiftieth of the distan ce between lines
of welds or fasteners connecting themtn !he. segments of the
memhers. In welded construction, the welding on each line
connecting II tie plate shall toW I !l0l less than onethird the
length of the plme. In bolted construction, the spacing ill
the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not more than
six diameters and the tic plates shall be con nected to each
segment by at least three fasteners.
tilnes O.7SJ 1~1 Fy , nor 305 mm, when intermittent
Lacing, including nat bars, angles, chan neb, or other

shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced Ihat the Ur
ratio of the flange included between their connections
shall not exceed tiu'cc-fourths times the govcming
slendemess ratio for the member as a who le. Lacing shall
be proportioned to provide a sheari ng strength nonnal to
~,e axis of Ihe member equal to 2 percent of the available
compressive strength of the member. The Ur ratio for
lacing bars arranged in single systems shall not exceed
140. For double lacing this rati o shal l not exceed 200.
Double lacing bars shall be joined at the intersections. For
lacing bars in compression. I is pemlitted to be taken as the
unsupponed length of the lacing bar between welds or
fasteners connecling it to the components of the built-up
member for single lacing, and 70 percent of that distance
for double lacing.
welds arc provided along the edges of the components

or when fasteners arc provided on all gage lines al cach
section. When fHslcnen; are staggered, the maximulll
spacing on each gage line shall not exceed the thi ckness
of Ihe Ihinner oUlside plale limes 1.12JE/ F y nor 460
mm .
Open sides of compression members built up from plates
or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover plates
perforated wilh a succession of access holes. The
unsupported width of such plates al access holes, as
defined in Section 502.4, is assumed to contribute to the
available strength provided the following requirements
are mel:
1.
The widlh-Lhickness ratio shall conform to the

limitations of Section 502.4.
User Note: ]{ is conservative to use the limiting

width/thickness ratio for Case 14 in Table 502.4. 1
with the width, b, taken 'as the transverse distance
between the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of
the plate is taken at the widest hole. In lieu of tills
approach, the limiting width thickness ratio may be
detennined through analysis
User Note: TIle inclination of lacing bars (0 the axis of~~

member shall ~referably be not less than 60 for si;',~L~:
lacing and 45 for double lacing. When the distaij~
between the lines of welds or fasteners in the f1ange~'iJ~l
more than 380 mrn, the lacing shall preferablY';' IJA
double or be made of angles.
..".<.:;
For additional spacing requirements, sec section 510.3.5.
505.7 Members with Slender Elements
2.
The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of

hole shall not exceed two .
This secti on applies to compression members with slender

sections. as defined in Section 502.4 for unifonl1ly
compressed elements.
3.
The clear distance between holes in the direction of

stress shaH be not less than the transverse distance
between nearest lines of connecting fasteners or
welds.
The nominal compress ive strengt h, P", shal l be delerminctl

based on {he limit states of flexural, torsional and flexural
torsional buckling.
4.
The peliphery of the holes at all points shall have a

minimum radius of 38 mm.
As an alternative to perforated cover plates. lacing with

tic plates js permitted at each end and at intennediate
points if the lacing is interrupted. Tic plates shall be as
Ilear the ends as practicable. In members providing
available strength, tile end tic plates shall have a length of
not less than the distance between the lines of fasteners or
welds connecting {hem to the components of the member.
Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than
Association of
Str~ctllral
(505.7-1 )
a. when -KL $4 .71 ~E

- -
QF,.
Fa
Ql'l
~ Q O.658/~ {)'
Engineers of the Philippines
(505.7-2)
~.
2.
h. when -KL > 4.7 1 - - '-.

r
QI';.
(or r~,
< 0.44Q1'.,,)
I~, = 0877f'~
(505.73)
a.
using Equations 50534 and 505.4-4 for
Ek,.
F.\.
(505.7-7)
Q, = 1.0
clas tic <.:ritical buckling stress, calculated
doubly sYlnll1ctric members, Equations 50,5..3-4
1*
whcn - ,; 0.64 - I
where
Fr
For Ilangcs. angles. and plates projecting from bu ilt up columns 01' other compression members:
h.
pJ,'k
members, except for single angles where F, is

1.0
for
members
with
compact
and
noncompac( sections, as defined in Section
502.4, for uniformly compressed elements
Q,fQ(I for
members
with
when
c,
slender-element
sections. as defined ill Section 502.4, for

uniformly compressed elements,
User Note: For cross sections composed of only stiffened

slender elements, Q Q, (!2. = LO). For cross sections
composed of only stiffened slender elements, Q = Qa (Q,

= 1,0). For cross sections composed of both stiffened
Ql =
I, ,.
F,
Q,=1.415 -0.6
calculated using Equation 505.3-4.
PF.'k
0.64 - " < b/I ~1. 17 ~
when
and 505.4-5 for singly symmetric members,

41lld Equmioll 505.4-6 for unsYlllmcl ric
{")Rt"
(
(505.7-8)
-'
Ek(.
'k
b/I > I. 17 -:!-\ 1- ,
O.90Ek ,.
F,m
(505.7-9)
where
k =_ _
4_ and shall not be laken less than 0.35 nor
, Jh1I:
and unstiffened slender elements, Q = Q, Q, .
grealer than 0.76 for calculation purposes
505,7.1 Slender Unstiffened Elements, Q,

The reduction factor QJ for slender unstiffencd elements
is defined as follows:
3.
For single angles
For flanges. angles, and plates projecting from rolled
a.
when -b ~ 0.45 -
I.
columns or olher co mpression members:
a.
when -~ 0.56 I
Q,. = 1.0
F,.
b.
Q, = 1.0
b.
v!i
i '7 ) (F;
=1.415-07\
b
when 0.45 JE/ F, <b/ ISO.9IJE/ F).
Q,=134-07{lf)H
(505.7-5)
c.
, F,(7)'
Q., =
(,,)2
F Y I
(505.7-6)
(505 .7- 11)
when bIt> O.9 IJE/ Fy
Q = _._~~3E
0.69
(505.7-10)
(505.7-4)
when O.56JtjF, <bll <l.03JE/F,
Q,
J*
I F ,.
(505 .7- 12)
where
"
4.
= full width of longest angle

For stems of tces
leg, rulll.
5-52
whe n
iI.
2.
~$().75 r~
{i ;.
Q. =1.0
seclions of uniform Ihickne" wilh
.1*'
'f ~ 1.40J!j:
(505.7- 13)
1*.
(505.7- 18)
when 0.75 -:- <d/I <; 1.03 - -
b.
Fy
/ 'y
Q, = 1.90S- 1 2{
c.
For flanges of square and rccl 'lngul ar slender-element
where
!f-)fi
/= P,/A'f!
(505.7- 14)
'
1*
when tI/ l > 1.03 -
Fy
Q,
0.69
(505.7- 15)
Fur
3.
For axially-loaded circular sections:
when
where
=width of ullstiffcned compression element, as
= th e full llomi nal depth ortee, mill .
0. 11 - < - <0.45 Fy
) ~Q =..'l..038
defined ill Section 502 .4, mm .
:;: thickness of elemem. TllJl1 .
:;: out side diameter, mill .

= walllhickness, mOl.
A,f!
(505.7-16)
where
:;: total cross-sectional area of member, mm 2 .

:;: summation of the effec tive areas of th e cross
A
A ~1f
section based on the reduced effective

width, be, mm2 .
'nlC
reduced cffccH ve width, b", is de termined as follows:
I.
For uniformly cO l1wresscd slender elements, with
~. ~ 1.49 fI, except

I
VI
flanges of square and
rectangular sections of uniform th ickness:
where
f is laken as Fa will! Fa calculaled based on
+3.
F,{D/l) 3
where
505.7.2. Slender Stiffened Elements, Q.

The reduction factor, Qo for slender stiffened elements is
defined as follows:
(2,=-
f 'y
Q= 1.0.
Association of Structulal Engineers of Ihe Philippines
(505.7-19)
and the nominal Ilcxural strength. M,I' shaH he dctcnnincd

according to Sections 506.2 through 506. 12.
This section applies to members slIbjec t to simple bending
about OIlC pJim:ipill Ilxis, For simple bending, (he member is
loaded in a plane parallel to a plincipal axi s that passes
througl~ the shea!" cCiHcr or is restrained ngai nst twisting at
load POJll!S and suppons ,
The .section is organized
506.1
506.2
506.3
506.4
5065
506.6
506.7
506.X
506.9
506.10
506. 11
506.12
506.13
<IS
User Note: For members not included iri this section the
folibiiiing'sdlilins ~~"ly:
::
.. ;
., .:.
508.1-508.3
M,mbers subject to.biax;a!flexure or to
co.jJiiinciUiexure and1lXi:iiirofee.
"... .
508.4
. , .einbers subject to f1exure;~nd..torsion.
SeCtion 507
Memberssubjlitt!""f~ti
Design
oY ,
piOvisiorisJ(jr's~iir:
.
.. ,
506.1 General Provisiolls
nexura l strength,
foll ows:
1,
c.
c;,
lateral~torsional buckling modification fact or

for nonuniform moment diagrams when both
ends of the unsupp ortcd segment arc braced
and the allowable
A111 If'l/>. shall be determined as
(506. 1-1 )
where
= absolute
value of maximum moment in the
unbraced segme nt, N -mm.
Me
II ,
= absolute value of moment at quaner point of the

unbraced segmenl, N-mm ,
= absolute value of moment at centerline of Ihe
unbraced segment. N-mm .
= absolute value of moment at three-quarter
point of the unbraced segment, N-mm,
= cross-sectio n monosymmctry parameter
= 1.0. doubly symmetric members
= 1,0, si ngly symmetric members su bjec ted to
single curvature bending
= 0,5 +
I,
',.("
2(!.L)2,
1,-
singly symmetric mcmbers
subjected to reverse curvature bending

= moment of inertia about the principal y~axis,
mm4.
:: momenl of inertia abou t y-axis referred (0 the
compression flange, or if reverse curvature
bending, referred to the smaller flange. mm'l .
In singly symmetric members subjected 10 reverse

curvature bending, th e lat era l~t orsionaI buckling strenglh
shall be checked for both n anges.
The available flexural strength shall be greater than or
equal to the maximulll required Illoment causing
compression within the flange under consideration G, is
permined to be conservatively taken as J.O for all cases ,
For cantilevers or overhangs where the frec end is
unbraced, C.
=1.0.
For all provisions in this Section
1'. =O.90(LRFq
R", $3.0
125M",,,
25M,,,,,+ 3MA +4M/J + 3Mc
. ..
.
For guidanCe in determining tlw aiipropriates~tiOllS of tills

section to apply, Table User Note 506.1.1 may be used.
The design fl exural strength , rp" M
The provisions in Ihis Secti on arc bnscd on the

ass umption that points of supporl for beams imd girders
arc rcslmincd against rotation abotH their longitudinal
axis.
The following teITI1S are commOiJ 10 the equations in this

Scction except where noted:
follows:
General Provi sions

Doubly Symmetric Compact l ~Shapcd Members
and Chmmcls Bent abou t Thei r Major Axis
Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with
Compact Wcbs and Non-compact or Slender
Planges Dent about Their Major Axis
Olher I ~ Shapcd Members with Compact or
Noncompacl Webs Benl about Their Major Axis
Doubly SymmclJ'ic and Singly Symmetric 1Shaped Members wit h Slender Webs Bent
about Their Major Axis
I-Shaped Members and Channel s Bent about
Their Minor Axis
Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped
Members
Round HSS
Tees and Double Ang les Loaded in the Plane of
Symmetry
Single Angles
Rectangular Bars and Rounds
Unsymmetrical Shapes
PropoI1ions of Beams and Girders
Append~A,3
2.
fl.. = 1.67 (ASj
Nalional Structural Code of Ihe Philippines 61h Edition Volume 1
.~
5-5 4
CHAPTER 5 - Steel and Metals
In
Seclion 506
506.2
506.3
5064
506.5
Cross Section
T-]
-1-.
II
-1--- T
Slenderness
Web
S len derness
Limit
States
Y, L1'8
NC,S
LTB,FLI3
C, NC,S
C,NC
Y, LTB ,FLB,TFY
C. NC,S
Y.LTIl,FLB,TFY
C. NC,S
N/A
Y,FLIl
C. NC,S
C, NC
Y.FLB, WLB
N /A
N/A
Y, LB
C,NC,S
N/A
Y, LTB, FLD
N/A
N/A
Y,LTB , LLB
Flange
-t-t--LJ 506.6
506.7
506.8
t-+
o
-e -
506.9
506. 10
I
____ ~ ___.
-1=:.-- / ... "
506. "
.1
N/A
N/A
Y, LTIl
506.12
Unsymmetrical shapes
N/A
N/A
All limit states
Y = yielding, LTD = laleral-Iorsional buckling, FLB ;, flange local buckling, WLD

yielding, LLB = leg local buckling, LB =local buckling, C =compacl,
NC = non com pact, S :;; slender
= web local buckling, TFY =lension flange
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of the Fhilippines
User Note: For doubly symmetric members with no

transverse loading between bnlce po,ints, Equation 506.1 1
red uces 10 2.27 for the case of equal en d moments of
opposi te sign and to 1.67 when olle end moment equals
zero.
(506.2 4)
where
of' steel::: 200 oon MPa.
506.2 Doubly Symml'fric Compact ISlwpcd Members

and Channels Bellt about their Major r"ix is
: : . modulus
This section applies to doubly symmetri c Ishapcd mcmbers
.S'..
= torsional conStam, 1111ll4 .

::: elastic section modulus taken about lhe x-axis,
mm).
and channels bellt about their major <IX is, havi ng compacl
webs
a l1d CO mptlCl
flanges
<IS
of~ cla s tj ci t y
defined in Section 502 .4.
User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, S, M, C and MC

shapes except W21x48, W 14x99, W14x90, W1 2x65,
WIO x I 2, W8x31, W8xlO, W6x15, W6x9, W6x8.5, and
M4x6 have compac t fl anges for F, :5345 MPa; all current
ASTM A6 W, S, M, HP, C and MC shapes have compact
webs al F ,.$450 MPa .
User Nole: The square root tenn in Equation 506.2-4 may

be conservati vely taken equal to 1.0.
The limiting lengths L/,<llld L. arc determined as follows :
'-" =I. 76r,.
The nOllli n<l1 flexural stre ngth, M", shall bc the lower
va l ue obta ined according to the li mit states of yie lding
(plastic moment ) find latend -torsional buc kl ing.
Jf-,-----o
-.F,.
E
4=1.95;,-_.
0.7/',
HeSA, I
(506.2-5)
-. - . \ 1+ \ 1+6.7{07/';
- . -s/\,JE
Jc
506.2,1. Yielding
M .. = M
(506.26)
t.=F .,.Z.
(506.2-1 )
where
where
yield stre ss of the t ype

of s leel being used. MPa.
= plastic sec ti on modulus abolll the x axis . mm '.
506.2.2 Lateral-Tors ional Bucklin g

I.
2.
When u. S L,.. thc limit Slale of lateral-torsiona l

buck ling does n OI appl y.
When L
I'
< LJ. ~ 1...,
M" =C"[M,, -(M" -07l';.s,)(4,

=L"J]~M"
L, Lp
(506.2-2)
3.
= specified minimuill
F.
When L" > L.
, =J',C"
- -b
(506.2-7)
S,
and
For a doubly symmetric Ishal'c: c= I
(506.2-8a\
For n c han nel:
(506.2-80)
where
= distance between the flange centroids, mm.
II,)
User Note: If the square root lerm in Equation 506.2-4 is

conservati vely taken equal to I, Equation 506.2-6 becomes
(506.2-3)
whcn.~
= length bl!lwccn points Ihat arc either braced

against ]<ltem ] displacement of comp ression
flange or bra ced against twist of the cross
section. IllIlL
approximation
Note Ulat this

conservati ve.
can
be
extremely
Par dOHP!X sJ.ni'P~lIjc~-strape$ ,'~,;tb re~tangular flanges,
C . ~1;;'~~.~
w
...
4 'md tliusEqu alion506. 2-7 beCOfQes

111
National Structural Code of tile Pllilippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
A1'.1
:::::
Ap is the lilllillng. skndcrlu::-,:-,
I ~} r it
( (lmpaCI niUlge.
Tahle 502.4 . 1
may bc approximated accurately and conscrvi:UivcJy as

the radius of gyration of the compression fl anges plus OIlC.ixth of the web:
TIS
A'l::::: }')' is the lim iti ng :-. Icndcrncss ror it Illlil compact
!lange,Tahle 502.4 . 1
g
:=
~_4~
Jill!..
and shal l nol he take n less {han 0.35 nor

~
grea ter tha n O.76.for cakul;uioll IHlrposcs.
506.4 Othn JShapcd J\1t'll1iJcrs with Com pHer or

NOIiCOllllwcl " ' cbs Bent <lho ut Iheir Major Axis
506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members wil h

Comp:'lct \Vcbs and NOllcompact or Slcnciel" FJangt's
Dellt about their Major Axis
Thi s section applies to doubly symmetri c 1- sll<tpcd rncmbcl":-'
bent about their major axi s hewing com pac t wehs and n Oll
compilcl or slender Oanges as defined in SectioJl 502.4 .

User Note: The following shapes have non co mpact
flanges for F,::; 345 MPa: W21x48, WI4x99, Wl4 x90,
W12x65 , WIOx l2, W8x31, W8x 10, W6 x 15, W6 x9,
W6 x 8.5, and M4x6. All other ASTM A6 W, S, M, and
HP , hap"' have com pact flanges for F,,::; 345 MP .
The nomina! ncxu ral strength , M 1/ '
shall he the lower

the limit stat es or latcra ltors ional buckling and compression nange l oca l buckling.
value obli.lincd accordi ng
This section <Ipplies to: (a) doubly symmetric 1- shaped

members bent about their 11l ,~or axi.s wi th nOll com pact wcbs;
and (b) singl y sym metric Jshaped mcmbers with webs
iHLached to the mid-wid th ' or the fl :m gcs, bent about their
major ax is. wi th COI11I>;l( t
Or' nOll
User Note: I-shaped members for which lhis section is

applicable Illay be designed conse rvatively using Seclion
506.5.
The nominal Ilc xural strcngth , Mil, shall be the lowest value
obtaincd according to the limit stal CS or compression fhmge
yielding. laleral -Iorsional huckling. com pression nangc local
buckl ing and tension nangc yie ld ing.
(0
506 .4.1 COIllJlression Flange Yieldin g
Mn =R,wM .w ::; R,K F., S.U
506.3.1 Lateral-TOI'sional Buckling

For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section
506.2.2 shall apply.
506.3.2 Compression Flange Local Buckling

For secti ons wi th non co mpact fl anges
I.
\Vhen!J, ~ LJl. lhc li mit st:.1l e of lateral-torsional

buck ling docs not ilpply.
2.
When L" <Lh :S: L
=+V1" -(~)1" -/).S,{~, =~j]sJS.M"

(506.4-2)
(506.0 -1 )
3.
Fo r sections wit h slender flanges
)..2
(506.3-2)
(506.4-1)
506.4.2 Laleral-Torsional fiu c kling
Al"
M /I .._ _0_
.9_E""k-'..,,_~x'-
compact wcbs, as defined
in Sec ti on 502.4.
\Vh c n
1.111
4, > L
=:
1'~, S\l :5
where
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of the Philippines
R ill
M ".
(506.4-3)
M
" I
S""S'
(50(, 4 4 )
=2" r .. -;:-/.6S"F,
= das( ic section modulus referred [0 tensi ol1 lind
co mpressi ol1 nallgcs, rcsp l.!(l ivc!y. Illml
= h, / 1"
= l p, the lim iti ng sle nderness for il compact web,
Table 502.4 . ,
= /t, the li miting \Icmlcrncss for a nOllcolllJlilc t
I.
web, Table :')02.4.
'
' or
!L < 0.20. J ell,I'lle t IkeIlaszcro

_
The effec ti ve radi us of gyration j'ur la teral-torsiollal
'.\'
buckling. r( is determined as follows :
The stress, Fl., is determ in ed as follows:
For I-sh apes with
!.
Sn 0.7
I",or -.-~
I;
Sx/"
S(I
rccwngular compression Oangc:
b,/.
I{ :;
(506.4-6al
For _.- <;;0.7
S.U
<J
(506.4- 10)
+ "" :.:,:, )
where
r:1.= ,:\' -S", - >05F

- '
\'
. Src
"J ...
brJ I'
(t\\ , : : = - --
(506.4 6b)
The limit ing latc rally ullbra ccd length for the limit stale
yielding, L/I. is
or
;;::
:;; co mpression lliinge thicknes s, mm
1',
The limiting unbraccd length for the li mit stme of inelasti c

lateral-torsional buckling, Lr, is
(/".
(506.48)
The web plaslification factor,
NI,,:, is determi ned as
follows:
111111
For I-shapes wit h chan nel caps or cover plates atlached

the compression nange:
10
(506.4-7)
compressi on flange width,
bj <
'ic
2.
f'-+'/=I;=6='.7=r{=P
=,..=.s=.'=
"'=1)=0,
(506.4 1' )
rad iuS of gyration of the flange components in

flexural compress ion plus one-third of thc wel>
area in compress ion due to application of n1:ljor
axis bending moment alone, mm.
;;:: the ratio of' I wo times the web area ill
compression du e to appl icati on of major ax.is
ben ding momcnt alone to the area of the
co mpression fl ange components
::
User Note: For I-shapes with a rectangular compression

r
flange.
t may be approximated
accurately and
conservatively as (he radius of gyration of the
compression flange plus one-third of (he compression
porti on of (he web; in other words,
a.
(506.4 9a)
b.
506.4.3 COlllpression Flange Locailluckling

L
For sections with compacl flanges . (he limit sla te

local buckling docs 110! apply.
2.
For sections wi th non co mpact flan ges
w here
or tl10 Pllilippines 61h Edition Volum e
or
:i~H
~.
C H APTE R 5 . Stcc-!I a ne! M e tals
i.
= 11.11"
} p ll'
::: J.p ,t hc liJllili ng slende rness for
i.nl
defined in Tabl c 502.4. I

::: )' '-, 1he limit ing slc nde rn ess for
,veb. defined in Tahle 502.4 . 1
;t
<I
c.:ompilt:l web,
nOll l'olll pac!
For secti ons wit h slende r flanges
M"
SUfI.5 Doub ly Symmetric ~llId Singly Syml1lctrk 1-
O.9Ek,Sx..
'.
A
(506.4 - 13)
Major Axis
where
Fl.
;:: defined in Equa tions 506.4 -6<1 ,md 506.4-6 b

lhe wcn pl astifi cali o n racto r. dete rm i.ned by
RJ/< .
::
Eqmlliolls 506.4-9
k,. =
Shap ed Mcmbtl's with Slr lHlc r '""c bs Bent about their
<l nd s h.1I 1 nol he wken Icss Ih illl 0 .35 no r
v"/' .
greater thall 0 .76 fo r ca lc ulalion purposes
= (I',.J 2,fo)
This scclioll applies 10 doubly sYllll11c lrk" 'IIH..I singly

symmc(ri c 1- slwpcd mc mbe rs wilh sle nde r webs aUl.Ichcd to
Ihe mid-w idth 0 1" Ihe !langes. be lli abou l Iheir 1I1:1j Ol" (IX is, as
de fin ed in Secti on 502.4
Thc no mimll flex ural sifengih. M". shall be the lowes! value
obt ained accordi ng 10 (he lim il slates of compressio n n.mgc
yielding, lalc ral-I o rsion al buck li ng. <:o lllprcssio ll llimge IOC'11
buckling and tens io n !la nge yie ld ing.
506,5 . 1 C ompr ess ioll Flangc..' Yielding
:;; 1.11 ,the limiting slenderness fo r il cO lnpact

Ilange, Table 502.4.1
= J.,.,the limiting ' slenderness for <I Iloncompact
Dange, Table 502.4. I
!tr1n ::;; Rpgr~\};.I'("
(5065- 1)
50fl.5,2 Latcral-Torsion;d Bu tk ling
506.4,4 Tension Flange Yielding

I.
When
(506.52)
SXI ~ Sxc the l imit state of' tensioll fl <tn g<.~
yi eldillg does not apply.
2.
Wh e n
I.
:s
Whe n U.
th e limil stale of late ra ltorsional
I '.
buckling docs not apply.
SXI < S.\'( .
M il ::: R,J,M yt
(';06.4- 14)
2.
Wh c nL ,. <:. L/.S: L.
where
"
('
I."'-'-1L,,)] S F '
[ F .' - fO.:lF \ { /
. 1
JI
(506.53)
The we b pl as tifi l:tIl io n faclOr corres po nd ing 10 Ihe tensio n
Oangc yieldin g limit st ale, R I , is determi ncd as fol lows:
.1.
Whe n
LI~ >
L ,
a.
w here
(506.4 15,, )
h.
It,
L I' is defi ned by Eq ual iO Il
For ->11. 11 11'

I ".
(II
rA-A''' )J
--)
[ M" - (M"
= -
II
M YI
My!
'A.rw-Af/\\'
L :::
r
M"
<-
M YI
(506.4 - 15b)
where
1..r
I
S06.4 ~ 7
R,i'
-
(506.5-5)
--
O .7 /~\,
RIlf. is the bending stre ngth red uction fac!O r:

iI"I'
~I
a".
1200+300(1 \,.
Association of Stru ctUrA l Engineers of the Philippines
(':.r.._' S.7
(I<'
1l),I.O
{i~,
CHAPT En 5
(506.5-6)
M" = M I' = F,.2,. $1.6FrS,.

506.6.2 Flange Local HUl'kling
exceed 10 and
J.
= the erfective radius of gyration for late ral

buckling as defined ill Sectioll 506.4 .
For Sections with compact Ilangcs the limit

yield ing shaH appl y.
(.'i06.5 -7)
For sect ions wit h com pact flanges. the limit si ale of
2.
compression Oangc local buck lin g does not apply.
For sect ions with noncom pact flanges
Mn =M - (M -O.7F.s{ 2-;'"I )S M
'hI - ;'"I
I'
(506.5 -8 )
"[~r
(506.6-2)
(506.6 -3)
Por secti ons with sle nder flange sections
of
For secti ons wit h nOIiCOlllpact flan ges
3.
Slat e
Us~rN~J~: All curren! ASTM A6 W,S,M,C and MC shapes

excepLW21i<48;W14x99, W14x90, W12x65, . WIOx12,
\V8x3!, W8xlO, W6xlS;: W6~9;,;W6x8!5; arid' M4x6 have
compact ftingesal Fy =345 Mpa.
506.5.3 ComI~rcssion Flange Local Bu ckling
2.
(506.6- 1)
= defined hy Equat ioll 506.4 - 11 hu t sha ll not
I\"
,.
I.
559
506.6 .1 Yieldin g
where
SI()c f <lnd Metal
wh ere
= 0.9k,.
(506.5 -9)
(506 .6-4)
where
4
k = - - - and s hall no t be la ken less than 0.35 nor

c
~h/I"
great er than 0, 76 for
calcu lation purposes
).
= b,,I2I,c
i'pl
= J.p, lhe limiting slenderness for a compact flange.

Table 502.4. 1
= .J.r,lhe limiting slenderness for a nO llco mpacl
fl angc, Table 502.4. I
J. lf
2.
When SXI ~S:\'{. th e limit state of te nsioll flange

yie lding doe s not apply.
When 5.rI<SXf"
M"
= r,.s u
; bit
J.pJ
= Ap,the limiting slenderness for a co mpact fl ange,
i.rf
:::;
Table 502.4. I
~.r,the
li mitin g slenderness for a Iloncompact
flange,Tab le 502 .4 . 1
= for a chan nel shall be taken as thcminimum
sectio n mod ulu s
506,7 Square a nd Rectangul ar HSS and Box-shaped

Members
506.5.4 Tension Flange Vielding
I.
(506..'i-IOj
Thi s secti on applies to square and rectangul ar !iSS. and

doubly symmetric box-shaped mCll1bcrs bent abou t ei th er
Hxi s, ha ving co mpact or non co mpact webs and co mpact,
nOll co mpact or slender Ilangcs as defin ed in Section 502 .4 .
The nomina l Ilcxura l strength. Mil, shall be the lowest val ue

obt ai ned acco rding III the lim it stales of yieldi ng (pJa:->tir
mome nt ). nangc 10c.1I huckl ing amI web local buckl ing
un der pure I1 cxufc.
S06.6 1Shapcd Members and Chann els Bent ahout th eil'
Mino r Axis
This sec tion applies
5(1(, .7 .1 Yieldin g
10
I-sh aped mCmbCf!\ and channels bent
Mil =Mfl:;::: I~.z
about their minor axis.
(506-1- 1)
where
The nomina! ncxura l strength,
11111 " shall be the lower val ue
obtained according to the limit states of yieldi ng (plaslic

moment) and flange local buckling.
modul us aboll t the 'Ixis o f
:::; plastic section
bending, 111m'
N;l\ional Stru ctura l Code of tllE) Phil ippinc'ls GIll Edition
VOIUlliG
:iGO
j'
506.7.2 Flange Local Buckling

I.
For compact sections, the limit state of Ibnge local
O.02IE.
M" ~ -..
-~-- + l-y .1
[
buckling does no.! apply.

2.
(506.8-2)
For sections with non compact flanges
3.
For sections with slender walls
{ "j?i'; )
MIFMI' -(MI' "-f;S 1ST - -4.0 "M1,

.
,E
(506.7-2)
3.
(506.8-3)
where
For sections with slender flanges
F = 0.33E
cr
(506.7-3)
where
S('jf is the effective section modulus determined with the
effective width of [he compression flange taken as:

b,
~1.92,
._10. . . [
JF,.
0.38
if]
E
. - 1--- -,- "b
bl'
(506.84)
= clastic section modulus, mm)
506.9 Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of

Symmetry
This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the
plane of symmetry.
(506.7-4)
['y
506.7.3 Web Local Buckling

1.
For compact sections, the limit state of web local

buckling does not apply.
2.
For sections with non compact webs
The nominal flexural strength, Mil> shall be the lowest value

obtained according to the limit states of yielding (plastic
moment), lateral-torsional buckling and flange local
buckling.
506.9.1 Yielding
Mn=Mp
(506.9-1 )
where
Mp
(506.7-5)
506.8 Round HSS
This section applies to round liSS having Dlt ratios of less
= FyZ;t
(506.9-2)
:::; 1.6M y for stems in tension
(506.9-3)
:::; My for stems in compression

506.9.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
0.4510
tlao
I
--
Mil =Mcr
Fy
ff)ElyGJ [
r:-::z]
B+vl+BH
L"
The nominal flexural strength, M'l'shall be the lower value

obtained according to the limit states of yielding (plastic
moment) and local buckling.
(506.9-4)
where
(506.9-5)
506.8.1 Yielding
M,,=M/,=~.Z
(506.8-1 )
506.8.2 Local Buckling
1.
2.
For compact sections, the limit state of flange local

The plus sign for J3 applies when the stem is in tension and the
minus sign applies when the stern is in compression. If the tip
of the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced
length, the negative value of B shall be used.
506.9.3 Flange Local Buckling of Tees
For non compact sections
(506.9-6)
S xc the elastic section modulus referred to the compression
flange. j<~rdetermined as follows:
Association of Siructural Engineers of Ihe Philippines
CHAP1E H 5
I.
For (.'olllpac t sections, the limit state or flunge local

huckling docs not apply.
2.
For nOll comp.lcl sections
Steel and Metal
561
(506.10:1)
. .[
{b Jfi'-"J
/',., = /'y 1.19 - (J.S(
i
21 i
~~
--,.
L
(506 .9 7)
.l
where
A1/. the clastic latcral-Iorsi olwl buckling moment, is

).
For s "~ ndcr sections
dCl c nnincd as follows:
"
I.
F = 0.69E
For bending about one of tile geomeuic axes of all cqual-
leg angle with no lateral- torsional buckling I)10mCllI
(~r
iI.
With maximum comprcss ion at the IOC
(506.9-8)
506.10 Singlo Anglo,

This secl ion applies to single angles with ilnd without
(506.10-4a)
cOrltinuolls lateml rcstraint along their Icngth .

h.
Single anglcs with continuous lateral-torsional restraint

along the length shall be pcnlliued LO be designed on the
basis of geometri c axis (x.),) bending. Si ngle anglcs without
continuous Imeral-torsional restraint along the length shall be
designed llsing the provisions for principal axis bending
except where the provision for bending about a geometric
axis is permitted.
User Note: For geometric axis dcsign , use section

properties computed about the x- and y-axis of the anglc,
parallel and perpendicular 10 the legs. For principal axis
design use section properties computed about the major and
minor principal axes of the angle.
The nominal flexural strength, 111" shall be the lowest valu e
obtained according to the limit Slates of yielding (p lastic
moment), lateral-torsional buckling and leg local buckling.
(506.IOAb)
My shall be taken ;\s 0.80 times the yield moment caJculalcd

using the geometric sectiorl modulus.
User Note: M n may be taken as My for single angles will'

their vcrtical leg lac in compression, and having a span-todepth ratio less than or equal to
1.64E
Fy
I.
(!...)2 -1.4 F,.

b
For bending .tbolll one of the geometric axes of an

eq ual-l eg angle withlateraltorsional restraint at the
point of maximulll moment ani),
(506. 101 )
Me shall be taken as
where
M,-
066~;4/C~ ( I+ O.7(~ )+1)
M,
506.10.1 Yielding
M ,,= LSM,.
With maximum tension at the toe
= yicld
1ll0mCIlI about th e axis of
bending, N-
mill .
limes M(, computed using
geometric section !llodulllS.
506.10.2 Lateral-Torsio"al Buck ling

For single angles without comilluous lateral-torsional
restraint alon g the length (a ) When Mr 5; M,
2.
For bending abou t Ihe rnajor principal axis of equal-leg

angles:
M,
M"JO.92-0. 17M')Mr
J .25
Equation 506.104" or 506.1 04b .

M .\. shall be taken <I!'; the yield moment calculated using the
M"
(506. 10.2)
3.
0.46b,,',2 CI,
L
(506.10-5)
For bending llbout the major plincipal axis of unequal -leg

angles:
when M t >M )"

th
Nalional Siructtlfal Code of tile Philippines 6 Edition Volwne 1
5 6?
CHAl'lTIl 5 . Sleel and Mela ls
506.1 J Recta ngul ar 1I3rS and Rounds
M'f~~;lCb)( (pw'+oostJ)+p"')
'nl is section applies to rccwngular bars bent about either

geo metri c axis and round s.
(506. 106)
Th e nom ina! flcxunl l stren g th , M ", shall he (he low('. 1"
value obtained according
where
\0
the limit stales of yielding
(plastic moment) and lateral -torsional buck ling, :IS required.
ell
= computed
using Equat ion 506. J" I
wi th
maximum val ue of 1.5.
506.11.1 Yielding
:: laterally un braced length of II member.

=:
minor principal axis
momCllt
111111 ."
of inertia, mm4 .
"..or rcc t'Ulgu l1Irbar Wit' I1 -L"d

,
(J.08!i
.
- bent abou t tIlCl' r major
F'.,.
::;: radiu!i of gyralion for the minor principal axi s.
axis. rcctangular bars bent about thcir minor axis. and rou nds:
min.
= angle leg thickness , mm.

= a section property for unequal leg angles, positive
for short legs in compression and negative for
long legs in compression. If the long leg is in
compression anywhere along the unbraced length
of Ihe me mber, the negative value o f
shall be
used.
Ph'
(506.11- 1)
506.11.2 Lateral-Torsiona l Buckling
I.
0.08
L.d 1.9
ror reclang ular bars with - - < - - $ - - ben!
F,.
,2
Fy
about their major axis:
User Note : The equation for 3w and values fo r common

angle sizes arc lis ted in the Commentary.
M" =C.[1.52- 0.27 {LbdJF

~2' E My ~ M"
y
506. 10. 3 Leg Loca l Bu ckling

The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of
the Jeg is in compression .
I.
(506.1 12)
Lvd
2.
For rectangular bars with -2- > -F bent abou t their

1
For com pact sections. the limit state of leg local
For sections with
3.
For sections with slender legs
Mil
110 n
compact legs
=F::rS("
(506.1 1-3)
(506. 10 8)
where
(506.109)
b
S,.
'y
major axis;
buckli ng does not apply.
2.
1.9
:; ollt5ide width of leg ill compression, mill.

= clastic section modulus to Ihe toe in compression
relative to the axis of bending. mm l, For
bending abou t o ne of the geometri c axes of
an equa l-leg angle with no lateral-torsional
restraint , Sc s hall be 0.80 of the geometric axi s
secti on modu lus.
Associa tion of Structural Eng ineers of the Philippines
CHAPTER 5
where
(506. 1 J 4 )
2.
For Full /'1 < Y, FyA fl>. the nomin al flexural strength. at
the locati on of th e holes in th e te nsion flan ge shall nol
be taken greater than :
{2
= widlh of rec tangula r bar pcua llcl to axis o f

bending, mill ,
;;; depth of recwngular bar, in . mill ,
;;; length between poillls Ihal arc either braced againsl
lateral displ acement of the compression region or
braced agai nst (wist of Lhe cross section , in . mm.
1..,.
3.
For rounds and rectangular bars bell( about their minor

ax is , the limit stale of lateral*lorsional budd i ng need
not be consid ered.
This sec tion applics to all un symmetrica l shapes. except

single angl es.
The nomin al flexural s trength, M n, shall be the lowest value
o bt a in ed according 10 the limit states of yield ing (yie ld
moment), lateraJ*torsional buckling and local buckling whe re
Mn =F"S
F;/Afrl
M" = -- S,
(506. 13 -1)
Aig
where
Alt
;::: gross tension fl ange area , calcul ated in

accordance with the provisions of Scclion
AI'I
;;; net tension flange area, ca lculated in accordance
y{
504 .3. I. 111m2.
506.12 Unsymmelrical Shapes
with the provisions of Section 504.3.2. 111m2.

1.0 for FIF, S 0.80
;::: 1.1 otherwi se
506.13.2 Proporlioning Limils for I Shaped Members

Singl y symmetric I shaped members shall satisfy (he
fo ll owing limit:
O.I~/)'c ~0.9
(506.12-1)
whe re
S
563
docs not apply
F = 1.9EC"
cr
LlJd
()
Steel and Meta:
(506.13 -2)
I ).
1* shaped members with slender webs shall also sati sfy the
following limits:
= lowest clastic modulus relative to the axis o f
bending, mm 3.
I . For ~"1.5
"
506.12.1 Yielding
F" =F)'
(.!!..J
I1\'
(506.12-2)
= I 1.7
max
[f
V i~y-
(506. 133)
506.12.2 LateraITorsiol1aI Buckling

2.
-F.cr -<F}'
Fn-
For ~ > 1.5
(506.123)
where
Fer
"
0.42E
F"
;;; buc kling stress for the section as dcte rmined by

analysis. MPa.
(506. 134)
where
506.13 Proportions of Beams and Girders
"
506.13.1 H ole Reductions

This section applies to rolled or built -up shapes, a nd COVCI'*
plated bea ms with boles, pro portioned on the basis of
flexural strength o f the gross secti on.
In additi on to the limit slates specified in other sections of
this sectio n , the no minal flexural stre ngth,
M'l shall
be
limited accordi ng to the limit state of tensile rupture of the

te nsion Oange.
;;; clear distance bet ween tran sverse stiffeners . mill
tn unstiffened girders IJI ... shall not exceed 260. 1l1C ratio of the
web area to the compress ion flange aren shall not exceed to.
506.13.3 Cover Plates

Flanges of welded beams or girde rs may be varied in
thickness or width by spli ci ng a series of plates or by the
use of cover pl ates.
The total cross-sectio na l a rea of cover plates o f bolted
girders shall no' exceed 70 percent of 'he ,olal fl ange area.

1.
For Fit A/II 2: Y, F." AIe' the li mit state of tens il e rup ture
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6"' Edition Volume 1
.'".,
5-64
..'
High-strength bolls or welds co nnccting tlangc to web, or

<.:ovcr plate to na ngc, shall be propol1iollCd 10 resist the total
horizontal shear resulting from the bendi ng forces on the
girder. The longitudinal distri bution of these bolts or
inlcrmiucllt welds sha ll be in pro portion to the intensity of
the she;IL However. the longilIIdinal spacing shall not exceed
the maximum pcmlitted for compression or tension members
in Section 505.6 or 504.4, respectively, Bolts vr welds
connecting fl ange to web shall also be propollioiled to
tran.s mit to the web any loads applied directly to the flan ge,
unl ess provision is made 10 transmit such loads by direct
bearing.
Part iallength cover plates shall be extended beyond the
theoreti cal eUioff point and the extended portion shall be
attached to the beam or girder by hi gh-strength bolts in a
slip-critical connection orfillet welds. TIle attachment shall be
adequate, at U,e applicable strength given in Sections 510.2.2,
510.3.8, or 502.3.9 to de velop the cover plate' s portion of the
flex.ural slfength in the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff
point
For welded co ver plates, the welds connecting tlie cover plate
termination to the beam or gi rder shall have continu ous
we lds along both edges of the cover plate in tile length a',
defined below, ruld shall be adequate to develop U,. cover
plate's portion of the strength of the beam or girder at the
di stance a' from the end of the cover plate.
!.
W hen there is ,I continuous weld equaJlO or larger !hnn

th ree-fourths of the plate th ickn ess l.Icross the end of the
plate
[1'=
IV
(506. 135)
where
w
2.
= width of cover plate, mill
When Ulcre is a continuous weld smaller than lhr('-cfo urths ortlle plate thickness across th e end of th e plate
a' = L5w
3.
(506. I 36)
When there is no weld across the end of the plate
a'= 2w
(506. 137)
506.13.4. Buill-Up Beams

Where two or morc beams or channels are used side-by-sidc
10 fonn a fl exu ral member, Lh ey shall be connected loget her
in compliance with Sec tion 505.6.2. When concentrated
loads are carried from one beam to another, or distributed
between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to
distribute the load shall be welded or bolted betw c(",u the
beams.
CHA PTER 5
Steel and Melal
5-65
h/I... 0; 224) Ej F,.

This secti on :lddresses we bs of singl y or doubly symmetri c
members subjec t II) shear in the plane of the web. single
anglcs and /iSS sC( lions. and shear in the weak direction of
.singly or doub ly symme tric shapes.
,. = I .OCXLRFl1
0,. = 1.5QASLj
and
C,. =1.0
(507.2 -2)
The secti on is organi zed as foll ows:

507. 1
507.2
507.3
507.4
507.5
507.6
507. 7
507 .8
General Pro vision s

Members with Unsti ffe ned or Sl iffened Webs
Tension Field Action
Single Angles
Rectangu lar HSS and Box Members
Round HSS
Weak Ax is Shear in Singly and Doubly Synunctrk
Shapes
Beams and Gi rders wit h Web Openings
2.
For webs of al l other doubly symmetric shapes and

singly symmclJic shapes and channels. except round
HSS, the we b shear coeffi cienl , C1" is determ ined as

foll ows:
a.
C,. =1.0
b. For
UujV/Fy <lttw o; 1.37Jk.,E/ Fy

C = 1.51E~.
Two method s of calculating shear strength are presented

below. The method presented in Sec ti on 507.2 docs not
ulili ze the post buckli ng strength of the member (tension
field action). The method presented in Section 507 .3 utili zes;
I'
c.
For ,,/Iw
lension fi eld action. The design shear strength, vv,. , and

th e all owable shear strength , ~'/fJ... , shall be determi ned.
as fo llows.
For all provisions in thi s section except Section 507.2. l a:

~.
= 0.90 (LRFD)
Q,
This secti on applies 10 webs of singly or doubly symmetric

members and channels subject to shear in the plane of the
web.
The nom inal shear strength , V", of unstiffened or stiffened
webs, according to the limit stat es of shear yielding and shear
buckli ng. is
(507.2 1)
(507.2-4)
hllll'
> 1.37)I<.,.E/1';.
1.51E~.
(507. 2-5)
(h//,.lFy
where
= the overall deplh times Ihe web thickness. mm2
The web plate buckling coefficient. k l . , is detennined as

follows:
a.
507.2. 1 Nomin al Shea r S trength
v" =O.61';.A" .C,.
C,.
A..
=1.67 (ASD)
507.2 M embers wilh Uns tilTened or StilTened Webs
1.
(507. 2-3)
For unstiffened webs with
hit <260.
1<.,. =5cxeept for
the stem of lee shapes where kv ~ 1.2 .

b.
For stiffened webs,
k,. = 5 + (a/h)2
=5 when
or alh>
a/ h > 3.0
260 ]2
[(lift... )
For we bs of rolled ' shaped members with

Nalional Siruciural Code of Ihe Philipp ines 6th Edilion Volume 1
5 66
CHAPTEfi S . Steel and Metals
whe re
II"
= dear di stance between transverse st iffeners, lllln.

= for rolled shapes, the clear distance bclwecn llanges
less the fillet or comer radii, mill.
= for built -u p welded sections, the clear distance
be twccn fla nges, mill . .
= for built -up boiled sccti ons, the distance bctween

fastener lines, 111111.
wh ere hi t I\" S 2. 46J
EJFy , o r
strength is less than or equal
members when
3.
2A w /(A lc +A ft 2.S; or
a/"
exceeds 3.0 or 260/("/ ',,}';
4. "/bl, or "/bl' >6.0
= area of compression nange, mm
All
= a rea of tension flange, I11m
bfi.
bff
= wid th of co mpress io n flange , m m
= w idth of te nsion
n ange.
m Ol
III these cases, the no minal shear strength,

are
where
to
2.
AIr
507.2.2 Transverse Stiffeners

s tiffeners
c nd panel s in all membe rs wit h transverse Stiffcn crs;
wherc
= for tces . the overall depth, mm.
Trans vc rse
J.
requ ired
1I 0 t
th e
rcqu ired
shear
the available shear strength
provided ill acco rdance with Section 507 .2. 1 for k I'
::::
5.
V'P shall be
de termined according to the provisions of Section 507.2.

507.3.2 Nominal Shear Streng th with Tension Field
Action
Wh e n tension field ac ti o n is pe rmitted acc ording to
Section 507.3.1, the no mi na! shear strength, VII' with
Tran sverse stiffeners lIsed to devclop the available web shear

strength, as provided in Section 507.2.1, shnll have a mom ent
of incrtia abollt an axis ill the web center for stiffen er pairs or
about the face in contact with the web plate for sin gle
tension field action, accordin g to th e limit state of tensioll
field yielding, shall be
stiffencrs, whi ch shall not be less than at ;'. j, wh ere
2.5
j = - - -nO.5
(al II)'
(507.3 I)
(507.26)
2.
Transverse stiffene rs arc pennitted to be stopped sha n of thc
tc nsion fl a nge, provided bearing is not needed to ;t ran smit a
concentrated load or reaction . The weld by wh ic h 1ransvcrse
stiffe ne rs are 311ached 10 the web shall be terminalCd lIot less
than four ti mes nor more than six limes the web thic kness from
the ncar toe to the web-to-nange weld. When si ngle. stiffeners
are lISed, they shal l be attached to the compression fl ange. if it
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due
to torsion in the flange. When lateral bracing is altached to a
stiffener. or a pair of stiffen ers, these, in tum, shall be
COlUlccted to the compression fl ange to transmit 1 percent of
the lotal fla nge fo rce, unless the fl ange is co mposed o nl y of
angles.
Bolts connecting sti ffeners to the girder web shall be spaced
no t more than 305mm on center. l f imenlliHent fillet welds arc
lIsed, the clear distance between welds shall not be morc than
J 6 times the web thickness nor more Ihan 250 mill .
'II,., > 1.1OJk,.E/ Fy
For
h{C" + I
1'" =0. 6 F y A
(507.32)
where
kl' and
C,. arc as defined in Section 507.2. 1.
507.3.3. Transverse Stiffeners

Transverse stiffeners subject to tension field aclion sh ~;i :ncel
the requ ire me nts of Section 507 .2 .2 and the !"oHm, jog
limi tat ions:
(b/t) t $ 0.56 -
2.
A,, >
.s
507.3 Tension Ficld Action
507.3.1 Limits on the Use of Tension Field Action

Consideration of tension field action is pennitted for fl anged
members whe n the web plate is supported on all four sides
by flan ges or stiffeners. Consideration of tens ion fi e ld
ac ti on is not permitted for:
(-t..
J.
Fyst
~, [O. ISD,JtI".(I-CJ;\ (" - 1 8 t~.J;,()
(507.3-3)
FY,'I
where
(bit)"
= the width-thi ckn ess rati o of tile stiffener
Association of Siructural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEH 5
= srcl:i fir.::tl
1',
D,
minimum yield stress of the stiffener
material. MPa.
;:; coeffki ent defined in Section 507.2.1
;:; 1.0 for stiffene rs in pairs
V,.
F,., shall be the Jarger of

F
=- 2.4 for si ngl e plate stiffeners

;:; required shear strength at the locati on of the
stiffene r, N.
= avai lable
shear
v,'/D." (ASD)
slrenglh;
<PI'Vn(LRFD)
with V , as defined in Section
fii(7)~
0.78
and
V,,, of a si ngle angle
Equat ion
leg shaJl be
(507.2-1)
wi th
f'~r =--3
she ar force . mill and k,.:: 1.2
507.5 Re ctangular HSS and Box Members
A,<:
L".
!
!
I,
i
I,
wall
gross area of secti on based on design
thickness. mm 2.
:=; outside diameter, mm.
::: the di stance from maximum to zero shear force,
:=;
mm.
:=;
The nominal shear strength. \I'll of rectangu lar HSS and box
(507.6-2b)
but shall not exceed 0.6F,
C" = 1.0, AI\' :: bl where b = width of the leg resi sting the
I!
(507.6-2a)
(7)'
The nomi ll~11 shear strength.
J.6
507.4 Single Angles

lIsi ng
or
507.3.2, N.
determined
567
where
:: 1.8fof single angel stiffeners

\I,
Steel Hnd Metal
mClllbcn; shall be de termined us in g th e provis ions of

= 2ht where h for th e width
resisting the shear force shall be taken a<; the clear distance
between the flanges less th e inside corner rad ius on each
Section 507.2.1 with A .-
side and '", = I and k l = S. lf the comer radius is not known,

It shall be taken as the corresponding outside dimension minus
three limes the lhi cluless.
507.6 Round HSS
The nominal shear strength, Vn of rou nd HSS. accord in g to
the limit Slates of shear yi elding and shear buckling, is

(507.6-1)
design wall th ickness. equal to 0.93 limes the

nominal wall thi ckness for ERW HSS and equal
10 the nominal thickness for SA W HSS,
mm .
User Notc: . The shear buckling equations, Equations

507.6-2a and 507:6-2b, will control for Dlt over 100, high
strength steels, and long lengths. If the shear strength for
standard sections is desired, shear yielding will usually
control'
.'
.
507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly Symmetric
Shapes
For singly and doubly symmelric shapes loaded in the weak
ax is without torsion, the nominal shear strength, V'I' for
each shear resisting element shall be determined using
A =b f
Equation 507.2-1 and Section 507.2. J(b) with w
f!
and k" = 1.2
507.8 Bemns and Girders with Web Openings

The effect of ali web openings 0 11 the no mina l shear
strength of steel and composite beams sha ll be dctennilled.
Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the
required strength exceeds the available strength of the
member at the opcning.
NaJionaJ Structural Code of the Philippines 6 'h Edition Volume 1
."!!!I
..
,~
568
CHAPTER 5 . S leel and Melals
x
y
:::: su bscript relati ng symbo l .to stron g axis

bendin g
:::: subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending
For design cH,;cording to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD )

This secti on addresses members subject 10 ax ial force and
flexure abollt one or both axes, wilh or without torsion, and
to members subject to torsion o nl y
PI'
The section is organi %;cd as foll ows:
Mr
508.1
Me:
508.2
508.3
I
I
Doubly and Singly Synunctric Members

Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
Unsymrnctric and Other Members Subjecl 10
Flexure and Axial Force
Member.; under Torsion and Combined
Torsion, Flexure, Shear ;Uldlor Axial Force
Pc
c
b
For design according
Pr
508.1 Doubly and S ingly Symmetric Members Subj ect
PI'
to Flexure and Axial Force
M,
508.1.1 Doubly and Singly Symmet ric Members in
Me
Flexure and Compression

The interaction of flexure and compress ion in doubly
symmetri c members and singly symmetri c members for
which 0.1::;; (! )Ie / I y ) ~ 0.9, that are con strained to bend
aboul a geometric axis (x andlor y) shall be limiled by
Equations 508. 1 1a and 508. I 1 b, where I yr the momenl of
in ertia about the
y~axjs
referred to the compression flange,
mm4.
USer. I)lQI~; .SectiQI.15!J8Q,ispcPnitte<!to ~ usC<! ill:lieu of the
~Visi~~;(jf{tbtS~8Cctj6li: j~I~:\n~;-~:~;;~.I ' ..~:}'-:~;-., ~-;.;:. ,!:,.:. :, ; -.; .-
= rcquired .txial !,;omprcssivc slrength lIsing U?FD

load combinations, N .
:::: design <Ixiill compressive strength, determ ined in
accordance wilh Secti on 505, N.
= req uired fl exural strengt h usin g LRPD load
com binations. Nmm.
= bMIl=design flexura l strength determined in
accordan ce wi th Secti on 506, N~nml.
:::: resistance factor for co mp ress ion :::: 0,90
= resistance fa ctor for flexure;::: 0.90
Dc
fl.b
10
Seclion 502.3.4 (ASD)
:::: required axial comp ressive strength usin g ASD

load combinations, N.
:::: P,IQI.::::a lJ owable axia l comprcssive strength,
dctermincd in accordance with section 505, N,
:::: required flexural strcngth using ASD load
co mbin at ions, N-mm ,
=MnIQb:::alJowab le
flexural
strength
determined in accordance wi th section 506, N
mm.
= safety factor for compression:::: ) .67
= safety factor fo r flexure = 1.67
508.1,2 Doubly and Singly Symmetric M e mb er s in

Flexurc and Tension
The interaction of flexure ~U1 d lension in doubly synunctric
members and singly symmetric members constrained to bend
about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be li mited by
Equalions 508. I . I a and 508.11 b,
where
For design accord ing to Seclion 502.3.3 (LRFD)

P,
(508.11a)
Pc
Mr
2. For - ' < 0.2
Me
Pc
!5...+(M"
+ MoJS I.Q
2Pr
Mn Mcy
(508. 1 I b)
where
<p,
"'/I
= required tensile strength using LRFD load

combi nalions, N.
= ,Pn::::design tensil e stren gth, determined in
accordance with Section 504.2, N.
= required fl exural strength lIsing LRPD load
combinat ions, N~mm.
:::: bM,,::::design flexura l st re ngth determined ill
acc ordance with sectIon 506, N ~ll1ll1,
= resistance fact or for tension (see Secti on 504.2)
: : resistance faclor for flexure:::: 0.90
For do ub ly sy mm et ric members, C b in section 506 may

:::: required axial compressive strength, N,
;:: avai lable axial compressive strength, N.
= required flexural strength, Nmm.
= available flexu ral strength, Nmm.
be increased by
p
I +_11
for axial tension that acts
p(!)'
concurrently with flexure, where
CHAPTER 5
Steel and Metal
569
where
p....
M.o).
For design according to Sec tion 502.3.4 (ASD)

1'1'
1',
M,
M,.
n,
0"
::: req uired t cn~ il c strengt h us ing AS!) load

combinatio ns, N.
= P,I!2 I =a ll owable te nsil e stre ngth , dete rmined
in accorda nce wi th Sec tion 504.2. N.
::: requi red fl exural stre ngt h us ing ASD load
combinations, Nmm.
= Mn/Db=allowable flexuraJ strength determined
in accordance with section 506, N-mm.
::: safelY factor for tcnsion (see Section 504.2)
= safety factor for nexure =:: 1.67
= available compressive sirength out of the plane

of bending. N.
= available Oexural -torsional strength for strung
axis n cxurc determincd from sec tion 506. N
mOl.
If bending occ urs only abou t th e weak axi ~, the momen t

ra ti o in Equa<ion 508 .1-2 shall be neglected.
For members with significant biaxial moments (MrlMr 2: 0.05
in both directions), the provisions of Section 508.1.1 shall be
followed .
508.2 Unsymmetri c and othe r Membe rs Subject to
Flexure and Axial Force
rol' doubly symmetric members, C b in section 506 may be
1+ 1.5P'1
incrcased by
\
for axial
ten sion that acts
Pry
This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial

stress (or shapes not covered in Section 508.1. It is
permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape
in lieu of the provisions of Section 50S. I .
(508.2 1)
concu rre ntl y with fl exure where
A morc detailed analysis of the inte raction of fl exure and

tensio n is permj tted in lieu of Eq uations 508.1- 1a and
50B.I - Ib.
where
fa
MPa.
Fo
508.1.3 Do ubl y Sy mme tric M e mb er s in S in gle Axis
F lex ure and Compression

For doubly symmetric members in flex.ure .Uld compression
with moments primarily in one plane, it is perm.issible to
consider the two independent limit SLates, in-plane instability
and out-oC-plane buckling or flexural torsiollal buckling, separately in lieu of the combined approach provided in
Section 50B. I. I.
I.
2.
= requ ired axial stress at the point of consideration,

= available axial stress at the point of
consideration, MPa.
fb ... JlJ:
= required flexura l stress at the point of
conside ration, MPa.

Fb. .~Fb~ = available flexural stress at the point of
I\'
considerat ion, MPa.

= sUbscripl relating symbol to major principal axis
bending
= subscript relating symbol to minor principal axis
bending
For the limit stale of inp lane instability, Equations
50B.1.I shall be used with Pc, M c. and Me determined
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
in the plane of bending.
/,
For the limit state of out-of-plane buc kling
F,
-;!-+
P (--'
M J' ~ l .O
M
co
(508.1-2)
0:
fb ....fb ~
Fb ...., Fb1
(lc
= req uired
axial st ress usin g LRFD load

combin at ions. MPa.
=desig n axia l s tress, determined in
for
accordance
with
sec t ion
505
compression
or
Section
504.2 for
tension,MPa .
= required Oexural Slress at Ihe specific locat ion
in the cross sec ti on using LRFD load
combinations. MPa.
= ;bMnIS=design flexural s tress determined
in accordance
with s ection 506, MPa .
Use the section modulus for the spec ifi c
location in the cross section and consider the
sign of the stress.
= res istance factor for compression := 0.90
National S tructural Code of the P hilippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
5-70
,,,
CHAPTER 5 - Sleel and MOla is
;::; resistance faclOr for tension (Section 504 .2)

=rcsist<lncc factor for flexure == 0.90
.
F
Fa
fb ..Jbt
;: required
axial
stress
us ing
ASD
lUcid
co mbinations. MPa
= FrIDt' ::: ililowable axial stress determined in
:'lcconJancc
with
section
505
for
compression, or Section 504.2 for ten s ion,
MPa _
;::; required flexural stress at the specific locati on in
the cross section using ASD load combinations.
Mr._
rb .... Fbl
;
I!
Qr
Q,
Q"
;::;
M" / Q~' = allowable flexural slress detcnnincd in
accordance with section 506, MPa. Use the section

modulus for the specific location in the cross
section and consider lhe sign of lhe stress.
;:; safety factor for compression = ).67
=safey faclor for tension (Section S04 _2)
;::; safely. factor for flexure;::; 1.67
Equation 508.2-1 shall be evaluated using [he principal

bending axes by considering the sense of the fl ex ural stresses
at the cri tical points of the cross section. The nexura l terms
are either added to or subtracted from the axia l tcrm as
appropriate. When the axial force is compression. second order
effects shall be included according to the provisions of
secti on 503.A more detailed analysis of the imeraction of
nexure and tension is-pcnniUed in lieu of Equation 508 .2- J.
(508.32b)
but shall not exceed 0.6F)"

where
L
D
I.
:=; length of the member, 111111 .

= ou tside diameter, mill.
For rcctangular !iSS
a_ For h/T$ 2A5JEf F,

(508.33)
h . For 2ASfE/ F,. < II/T S 3-07JEri~
F" = 0_6F!. (2.4SJEj Fy
c.
For 3_07
Q r =L67(ASD)
The nomina l torsi ona l strength. Til according to th e limit

states of torsional yieldin g and torsional buckling is:
I
(508_3 J)
Fer
JE/ Fy < hiT S 260
User, Note! - 1"1!e torsional
torsional strength. Tn/fl r for round and rectangular HSS

sha ll be detennined as follows:
(50B.3-4)
(SOB.3 -S )
.she~r . con~\lIu~
con_se!'Y~~v~!y t.I\k~/l-.aS: .. "" -
The de sign torsional strength , rpr~,. and (he allowable
where
)/(h/T)
=OASSn' E/(h/T)'
F"
Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force

50S.3.1 Torsional Strength of Round and
Rectangular HSS
2,,)
and
50S.3 Members under Torsion and Combin ed Torsion,
(ir =0.90 (LRFD)
(50~ . 3
" fEe:):
For design "ccording 10 Seclion S02.3.4 (ASD)
In
1.23E
=--.----
. '.,. ",' -itf.p ..:. tf,.t

C
Foq round HSS :
..
::
For' l'&WigliJaf HS~-:;
-.; 2;;).{}j.'. ,Xif -i-Xi-4W:.."jt'.'

508 _3.2 HSS Subject to Co mbin ed Torsion, Shear,
Flexure and Axhll Forct'

When the requi red torsional strength. 7~. is less thall 01
equal to 20 pcrcellt of the avai labl e torsional strength.
Tc .the interaction o f tors ion, shear, nexure and/or axial

is the HSS torsional constant
force for HSS shall be determ ined by Section SOB_I and Ole
shall be determined as follows:
torsional effects shall be neglected . When exceeds T"
1_ For round HSS, Fa shall be the larger of
percent of
20
Te the interaction of torsion. shear, flexure and/or

J
axia l force shall be limited by
Association of S tructura l Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPT En S
(50X.3 -6 )
For design according 10 Seclion 502.3.3 (LRFD)
= required
axial
strength
using
LRFD
load
M,
combinations, N.
= ,pPII design tensile or compressive strength in
accordance with section 504 or 505. N.
== required flexural strength using LRPD load
M,
==
combinations. N-mm.
bMIl,design flexural strength in accordance
\I,
with section 506, N-Illm.

: :;: required shear strength
combinations, N.
\'e
= design
P,.
5-11
508.3.3 Slrength of Non-HSS Members under Torsion

and Combined Stress
The design torsional slrellglll.lPTI~1' and (he .lIlowablc
where
Pr
Steel and Metal
using
LRFD
load
IOrsional strength. I~JQT' for llonHSS members sha ll be

the !owest value obtnined according to the limit states or
yield ing un der norm al stress, shear yieldillg under shear
stress, or buckling, de termin ed ;]s follows:
tPr =O.90(LRFD)
1.
fiT
=1.67 (ASD)
For the limi t stale of yielding under normal stress

(508.3-7)
2.
For the limit state of shear yie lding under shear stress
F" = O.6Fy
shear strength ill accordance wi th
(508.3-8)
seclion 507, N.
= required
T,
torsional strength using LRFD load

combinations. N-Il1:m.
: :;: design torsional strength in accordance with
Section 508.3 . 1. Nmm.
For design according 10 Seclion 502.3.4 (AS D)

P,
Pc
: :;: required axial strength using ASD load

combinations, N.
= P,1D, allowable ten sile o r compressive strength
M,
in accordance with section 504 or 505,

N.
= required flexural strengtll using ASD load
Me
V,
3.
or the lim it Slate of buckling
(508.3-9)
where
::: buckling stress for the section as determined by
analysis, MPa. Some constrained local yielding
is permitted adjacent to areas that remain elastic.
combinations detemlined in accordance with

Seclion 502.5, N-mm.
::: M,/D1" allowable
Oexural
strength
In
accordance with section 506, N~l1lm.
::: required shear strength llsing ASD load
combinations, N.
Vi'
T,
1~
::: allowable shear strength in accordance with

seclion 507, N.
::: required torsional strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm.
:::: T,/DT allowable torsional strength in accordance
with Section 508.3. 1, N~mm .
National S lruclural Code 01 the Philippines 6 'h Edilion Volume 1
5 72
CHAPTER 5 . Sicel ilflU Metals
Thl' s tr~ss' ~ l r a ili rcl;Hi ollsh ips for stccl <l nd

shall he ohwilll'd ffOlll tes ts or from publis hed
results fnr s illli !ar ma terial s.
IIlIll/nllll.
l'OIKr~t l'
This sc<.: tion ac.h.Jrcsxes composite columns com posed or

roll ed or buill-up struclUral steel shapes or HSS. and
strucltlral co ncrete acting togclher. and stcel heams
supp0l1ing a reinforced conc rete slab so intcrconn ected
that the beams .1I1d the slab tiCI toge ther to resist hcndillg.
Silllple and cOJ}li'lu(}uS composilc beams with shcar connectors
and concrctc-encased bemns. constnti;ted with or wil hout
temporary shores. arc included .
The scction is organized
509. 1
509.2
509.3
509.4
509 .5
,IS
User Note: The Slrain compalibility method should be us:e.i"

10 determine nominal strength for irregular sections -a nd
for cases where tbe "eel dO eS not exhibit e)a,'to-pJW).~
behavior. General guidelines for the slrain-compatibiUfh
tnedlOd fO'r encased columns are given 'ip 'AISC De~rg-Ir
Guide6 alld ACl31 8 Scclions 10.2 and 10.3.
'?("
509.1. 2 Material Limitatiolls

Concrete and ~ I cd reinforc ing bars in c.:()lllposi{~ sys tems
511<111 be subject \0 the fo llowi ng lilll ililliolls.
follows:
General Provisions
Axial Members
Flex ural Members
Combined Axial Force mnl Flexure
Special Cases
509. 1 General IJrovisiolls
In dctennining load effec ts in mcmbers and co nnec ti ons of' <I

stru cture that includes composite members, co nsideration
shall be given to the effcctive sections at the lime each
increment of load is applied. The design. detailing and
mate ria] properties related to Ihe concrete and reinforcing steel
portions of composite const ruction shall comply with the
reinfo rced co ncrete and rei nforcing ba r design
specifications stipulated by Ihis code. In the absence of a
building code, the provisions in Chapter 4 shall apply.
509.1.1 Nominal Strength of Co mpos ite Sections
Two Inethods .ne provided for dctcnnining the nominal strength
of composite secti ons: the plastic stresS distributi on method
and the strain -compatibility method.
The tensile strength or thc concrete shall be neglccted in th e
determinat ion of the nomin:ll strength or composi te
mClllbers.
509.1.13 Plastic Stress Distribution Method
For the plastic stress distribution method. the nominal

strength shall be compu ted ass uming th at steel components
ha ve reached a stress of F \' in either tension or
co mpression and concrete co mpon ent s ill co mpression have
rcac hed a stress of 0. 85/; For roun d HSS fillcd w ith
concrete, it stress of' 0.95/c is pCI111illed to be used for
concrete components in uniform compression to account ror
the errects of concrete confi nemcnt.
509 .1.1b Strain-Compatibilit y Method
For the strain compatibility mClhod, a linecu' distribut ion or
strains across the section shan be assumed . with th e
maximulIl concrete co mpressive strain cqual 10 0.003
I.
For the determi nation of the availablc strength. COnCrete

shall have:1 com pressive stre ngt h f,~ ornot less than 21
MPa nor morc than 70 MP" for normal weight

concrete and not le.'\ s th an 21 MP" nor more than 42
MP" for light weight cOI1<.:rcte.
User Not.e:. Higher strength cqncrete materials lTliIY be us"q.
for stiffness calculations but may not be relied ,Jlp~.n JiiF
strength calculations unless juslified by testing or analysis.
2. The specified minimum yield stress or s tru c tural

stecl a nd reinforcing bars lIsed in calculating the
strength of a compositc colum n shall not exceed 525
MPa.
Hi ghcr material strengths are permi llcd when their use is
justified by testi ng or analysis.
User Note: AdditiolHll reinforced concrete materia'l~

limitations are specified in Chapler4.
509.1.3 Shear Connectors
Shea r connectors shall be headed sleel studs not less than
four stud diameters in length after installation, or h ot ~rolkd
steel channels. Shear stud design values shall be taken as p. r
Secti ons 509.2. 1g and 509.3.2d (2). SlUd connectors sh;.; i
conform to the requirements of Section 50 1.3.6. Cham:d
connectors sh<l ll conform to the req uire lllclHs of Sec(lu ll
501.3. 1.
50Y.2 Axial Members
This sect ion applic!-. to two types of composi te axial
members: cncased and filled secti ons.
509.2. 1 Encased Composi te Col umns

509.2.1.1. Limitations
To qualify as an encased co mposite col u111 11, lhe foJ! ;~~';;; ..:
limitatio ns slwll be met:
Association of Structural Engineers o f tile Philippines
I.
The cross-seetio/wl area of' the steel core shall cornprisc
where
aI least I percent of rhe total composite cross section.
2.
Concrete cnr,lsc mc nl
or
= area of th e steel section, 111 m2
= are a of concrete. mm 2
= area o f co ntinuoll s reinforcing
th e steel core shall be
reinforced with cOlltinuous longiludilll1l bars illld

latent! lics or spirals . The minimum transverse
reinforcement shall be at lcast 6 mm 2 per mm of lic
spa ci ng .
3.
The minimulll rcillforccmcn(
ratio
longitIJdinal reinforcing, P.I"/"' shall
PSr' is
for continuoll s
be 0.004. where
bars, mm 2
:::; modulus of elasticity of cOll crelc
( 004 3",:5
f:.~
/'.
given by:
F,.
,1"
P.1, - 1\
(509.2-1)
== modulu s of elasti city of slee! :::; 2 10 MPa.
= specified compressive strength of concrete,

MP,.
= specified mi nim um yield stre ss of steel section.
MP .
:=; specified minimum yield stress of
reinforcing bars. MPa .
= mo ment o f in e rl ia o f th e co ncr e te
wh ere
A'i
Ag
sec ti o n , mill
::; area of continuQu s reinforcing bars, 111m2

;; gross CIrca ofcomposilc member, mm 2
509.2.1.1 b Compressive Strength
I,
I"
K
The design compressive sirenglh , cf!p and all owabl e
P,JQ c ' for axially loaded encased
compressive strength,
composite columns shall be determi ned for the limit state
of fle xural buckling based on column slenderness as

follows:
When p,
moment of inerti a of steel shape, mm-l

4
moment of inerti a of reinforcing bars, mm
=thc effective length factor determined in
accorda nce with Secti on 502
= laterall y unbraced length of the member, mill
= wei ght of concrete per un it volume
(90S we S I 55/bs/ filo, 1500S we S 2500kg/m l )
:=;
:=;
n., =2.00 (ASD)
:;:: effective stiffness of composi te section.
N_mm 2
EJ,jJ = E, I, +0.5E, I" +C,Eel e (5 09.2-6)
0.44 p ,
-[
P" - Po 0.658
2.
where
/~ff
<Pc =0.75 (LRFD)

I.
jZMPa )
(~l]
where
(50 9. 2-2)
When Pe <0,44Po
P" =0.877p"
CI ~ O . I +2 (
A,
A(' + A ,
) ~ O .3
(509.2-7)
509.2.1.1 c Tensile Strength

(509.2-3 )
The design tensile slrength,
4>1 P'll and
allowable tensile
strength , Pn / Q./ I for encas ed composite columns shall be

determined for the limit state of yielding as
where
(509.2-4)
(509.2-5)
(509.2 -8)
1/>,
=0.90(LRFD)
12, = 1.67 (ASD)
509.2.1.1<1 ShclIr Strength

The avail3ble shear strength shall be cal culat ed based on
eithcr the shear stre ngth of the steel secti o n alone as
specified in Secti on 507 plus the shear strcngth provided by
ti c reinforcement, if present, or the shear strength of the
reinforced concrete portion alone.
1h
5- 74
CHAPTE n 5: - Swel and Melals
User Note:. The nominal shear strength of tie reimfprcel1lQQt

rnay~e<itt~mll~e.d .s>,4"t"'iJ4jf),w~iflt.f4~ii;;jiii~; ~~~\t
of tie reinforgernent, dis ' the-'effective .; depth of the
concrete ' "seetion,'" and . 'so' is':" 'ih6' ,. s~iidrig ::, of' the . tie
reinforcement. The ' shear dlplidt)f of reinforCeil ' concrete
may be determined according to ACr 318, Chapter 11 .
509.2.1.1 r Load Transfer
Loads applied to ilx ially loaded ellc<lscd composite columns
shall be trilllsfcrred between the sleel ilnd concrete in
tlccord'lJlcc wi th the following requircmcnt s:
I.
When (he extcrnal force i s applied directly (o the stee!

section, shear connectors shall be provided to transfer
th e required shcar force, V', as follows:
1" =V(I - AJ F.).
/p )
(I
encased composite column above an d below th e IO;JfI

tnm sfcr region. The ma ximum connector spacing :-!1:1!1 h , ~
405111111.
Co nnectors (0 transfe r ax ial IO~ld shall be placed on :\~ k:!:.;!
two faces of the steel shape in a configuratioJl symn](.'lric,d
about the steel shape axes.
!~ . the composite cross section is built up from Iwn or
morc encased stcel shapes, the shapes s 1 ~:l !l i ...
interconnected with lacing, tic plates, ballcn pl<tles or simil;l[
componcn ts 10 prevcnt buc kling of individua l shnpcs dii (: i.)
load.5 applicd prior to h ~lfdeni ng of the concrete.
509.2. L 1g Strength of Stud Shear Connectors

The nominal strength of one slUd shear connector el1l h ~{i ._ ; c( :
in solid conc rete is:
Q, =05As<);;:t~
where
:::; required shear force introduced 10 column, N.
:::; arca of steel cross sec ti on, mill:!
:::; nominal axial compressive strength without
consideration of length effects, N.
2.
Wh en thc external force is app li ed direcUy to thc

concrete encasement. shear co nn cctorS shall lx~ provided
to transfer the required shear fo rce, V', as follows:
(509.2- 10)
3.
When load is applied to the concrete of an encased

composite colum n by direct bearing the desig.n bearing
stren gt h, lnPp' and tile allowable bearing st rength,
pp /fl./J' of the co ncrete shal l be:
Ii = 0,65 (LRF~
Q Il =2JI(ASD)
F"
509.2.2 Filled Composite Columns

509.2.23 Limitalions
To qualify as a fill ed composite column the fo!1 o\'.. -::
limitations shall be rnet :
The crossM
scctional area of the steel /iSS shall
least 1 percenl of
509.2.1 . Jf Detailing Requirements

1\( Icas t four continuo us iongilUdinal re infnrcing ha rs shall
be lIsed in encased co mpos it (' columns . Transve rs . .
rcinforcemcllI s hall bc spaced at the slll al lc:st or 16
longi llidill al hal" diameters. 4g tic btu di;UllCICI"S or 0.5
times lhe leasl dimcnsion of the co mposite sec ti on. Tht
e!lcasemcnt shall pro vide at IcaM 38 mill of' clear cover
to thc re info rcing steel.
Shear con ncc tors :-oha ll be provided 10 Irall sfc r th e

required shea r force specified in Sect ion 509.2 . Ie. The
shear connectors shall be distribut ed along th e length of the
member at leas t a distance or 2.5 times the depth of the
comp; ~ ~,~ :H
The low l composi tc cross secli on.
2. The maxim um bit rati o [or a rec tangu lar I-ISS \

a
compositc
column
sha!1
be
cqlwi
, j
2.26J E/ F.r .Hi gher ratiO,S are permitted whe~

lISC
:::; louded area of concrete, mm:!
(5092 i 2)
:::: cross Mscc li onal area of stud shear co nnetl or, liH,,:
:::; specified minimum tensile strength of it !i 1\Jd
shear connec tor, MPa.
AJC
where
An
AJ;,
whe re
I.
(509.2-1 1)
1.
is justified by tes ting or analysis .
The maxim um D/, ratio for a rollnd !i SS fii! \" l

co nc rete shall he O. I 5 E/ Fy . Highr.r ra:i,
permilled whe n th eir use is j ustifil!d by
tlIlillysis.
.,'.
!l:
~,;.
509.2.21> Compn.'ss h 'c St reng th

The dc."igll (':olllprcs~ivc strength, tPl.I~ I ' tUld il li\i\\,tblc
co mpressive st rcngth, Pit / 0.1"' for ax ially IO:H[":

(:omposiic colum ns shall be det ermin ed for thc.li m:l . ..:..' ...,1
ncx ulIll buckling based on Section 509.2. Ih '.
;1i.followi ng modificcltions:
Association of StructlJral Ennineers of the Phil ippines
(51}) ..' i ,j
CHAP H . n !j
C2
::::: 0.85 I'm reclangular sec ti ons ;l lld 0.95 for

circular sccli om;
(509.214 )
c, =06+ 1-~)$0.9
.
lAj"+A.\.
it distance or 2 .5 limes the width of a

rectangu lar HSS or 2.5 ti mes the d iml1CICr pf a rotlnd HSS
hoth abo ve ilnd below the load tnill sfc r region . '111C maximu m
connect or spacing Shllll he 40SIllJll . .
member at least
509.3 Fltxural Mcmh crs

509.3.1 General
The design tensile strength. $(~" and allowable te ns ile
P" jn ,. for
5 7!,
(5092 15)
509.2 .2c. Tensile Strength
strength,
Steel and Melal
fi ll ed com posite columns shall be
509.3. 1:1 Effective Width

The effective width of (he conc rete slab is the sum of the
effective widths for each side of the beam centerline, each
of whic h shall
nOl
exceed:
dClCnnincd for the limit siale of yield in g as:
I.
n, = 167 (ASD)
, =O.90(LRF!i
S09.2.2d Shear Strength
The available shear st rength shall be c<l lculalcd based 0 11

ei ther the shear strength of the steel secti on alone .(I S
specified in Section 507 or the shear strength of the
reinforced concrete portion alone.
User Note: The shear strength of reinforced concrete may

be determined by AC13 18, Chapter 11.
509.2.2e Load Transfer
Loads applied to filled composite columns shall be transferred

between the steel and concrele.. Wh en th e ex ternal force is
applied either to the steel section or to the concrete infill,
tran sfer of force from the steel sec tion to the concrete co re
is required from direct bond interaction, shear connecti on or
direct beari ng. The force transfer mechan ism prov iding the
largest nominal strength may be used. Th ese force transfer
mechanisms shall not be superimposed.
When load is applied to th e concrete of an encased or fi lled
compo!)ite column by direct bearing th e design bearing
strength, ' 8 Pf!' an d the allowable bearing strength,
p"ln.n of th e co ncrete shall be:
one-eighth of the beam span , center-Io-cen ler of
SUPPOl1s:
(509.2. 16)
2.
one-half th e distance to th e cente rlin e of the adjacent

beam : or
3.
the di stClllcC to the edge of the shib .
509.3. 1 b Shear Strength

The avai lablc shear strength of co mposite bC;Jllls wi th shear
co nnectors shall be determined based upon the properties of
th e steel sect ion alon e in (lccordance with Section 507 . The
available shear st rength of concrete-encased and fill ed
com posite members shall be deterrn ined based upon th e
properties of the :){ccl sec tion alone in accordance with
Section 507 or based upon the properties of the concrete and
longi LUdi nal stcci rei nforcement.
User Note: Thc shear strength of the reinforced concrete
may be detemlined in accordance with ACI 318. Chapter
11.
509.3.1c S trength During Cons truction
Whe n temporary shores are not used du ring constructi on,
the steel sec tion al one shall have adequate strength to
support all loads app lied prior LO the concrete attaini ng 7S
f;
pe rcent of its specified strength

.The avail able llexural
strength of the steel sec ti on shall be determined according
to Section 506.
509.3 .2 Strength
(509.2 17)
0." ~ 23 I(ASD)
where
Au
= lhe loaded area, 111m2
Shear
of
Co mpo s ite
Beams
with
Connectors
50 9.3.2" Posi tive Flexura l Strength
The desi gn positive fl ex ural strength, ~bMI1 ' and th e

all owable positive fl exu ral strength, M,)D.1pshali be
dete rmined fo r the limit slale of yielding as foll o ws:
509.2.2f Detailing Requirements
Where required, shear connectors transferring the required

s hear force shall be distributed along the length of the
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
57G
CHAPTE n 5 . Steel and Metals
M" shall be dctcnnined from the plastic strl!S~ di stribution
wi th welded slUd sheilI' connectors It) mill or less in

diamcter (A WS D 1. 1). SlUd~ shall be welded either
through the deck or dircl: tly 10 the steel l:n>ss sectioll. St ud
shear COllncl:lUrs, 'Ifler inslall;uiun. shall cxtend 110{ less
Oil Ihe: composite secti on for the limit slate of yie ld ing
(plastic
IIlOIllCnt).
than 38 IllI11 above the lOp of the steel de ck (!Ild there

shall be at leasl 13 mill of concrete COver above the (OP
of the installed slluls.
User Nole: All current ASTM A6 W. Sand HP shapes

satisfy the limit given In Section 509.3 .2.(a) for Fy $
'"
345 MP .
2. For 1>/1 ..
c.
> 3.76~Ej F,..
,]0{
Ic.ss
th an 50 mill.
Mil shall be dc te rmined From the ~lIpcrposi ( io l1 of elastic

stresses, considering lhe effects of shori ng. for thc limit
sHlte of yieldi ng (yield moment).
d.
Steel deck shall be illlc horcd to all suppol1i ng members

at a spacing 1101 10 exceed 460 111 Ill . Such anchorage
shall be provided by !>Iud connecto rs, a co mbinalion
of stud conneclors and arc spot (p uddl e) we lds, or
other devices specified by the designer.
2.
Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicul;lf 10 Steel Beam

Concrete below the top of the steel deck shal! be
neglected in dc termining composi te section propcI1ics
and ill calculating At, for deck ri bs ori e nted pef
pendicular to th e stecl beams.
3.
Deck Ribs Oriented Parall el to Steel Beam Concrete

below the top of the steel deck may be included in
determining composite section properties and shall be
included in calculating A~ .
4.
Formed steel deck ri bs ovcr supp orting beams may be

split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete
509.3.2b Negative Flexurnl Strength

The design nega tive ncxural st rength, (AM 1/' and the
Mn /n" ,
allowahle nega tive flexura l st reng th,

sha ll be
determined for the steel secti on alone, in accordance with
th e requircments of Section 506.
Allernatively, the available negative flexural strengt h shal! be
dctermined from the plastic stress di stributi on 011 th e
compos ite section, for the limit s13te of yi elding (plastic
moment ), with
1/>" = 0.90 (LRFd)
haunch.
provided that :
1.
Thc slab thickness above the steel deck shall be
The steel beam is compaci and is Rdeq ual ely bmced

according 10 Secrion 506.
When the nominal depth of steel deck is 38 mill or greater,
2.
Shear connectors connect the slab ( 0 the steel beam in

the negative 1Il0 lllc nl region.
the averagc width, HI r of thc sUPP0rled haunch or rib shall

be nOI less than 50 mill for the first stud in the transverse
row plus four stud diameters for each add itional stud.
3.
The slab reinforcement parallcl (Q the steel beam,

within the effecti ve width of the slab, is properly
developed.
509.3.2d. Shear Connectors
509.3.2c Strength of
Formed Sleel Deck
1.
Composile
Beams with
General
Tile availab le ncx ural strength of composite cOIl~tl1lction
consis ting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck
connectcd to steel beams shall bc dctermined by tlie
applicable. POl1i oilS of Seeliol l 509.3.2a and 509.3.2b, wil li
the following requi rements:
l'I.
shea r force, V',between tile point of maximum positive

momen t and the point of zero momenl fihaJJ be taken as the
lowest value according to the li mi t states of concrete cl1lshing.
te ns ile yield ing of the steel sectioll. or strength of the shc:c:'
COllllcctors:
u.
Conc rete crushing
This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib

height not greater than 75 mill . The average 'v.'idlh of
concrete rib or haunch, w ,. shall be nol less than 50
mill, but shall not be taken in calculations as morc than
the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck.
b.
1. Load Transfer for Positive Momen t

The entire horizontal shear at the interface between the steel
bea m and the concrete slab shall be .ssumed to be transferred
by shear connectors, except for concrc t c~encased beams as
defined in Secti on 509.3.3. For composite action with
concrete subject to nexural compression, the total horizon tal
The co ncrete slab shall be connected to the stc-.el beam
(509.3- 1a)
b.
Tensile yielding of th e steel sectio n

(509.3-lb)
c.
Strength of shear conllectors
CHAPTEli 5
(509J-Ic)
where
A,.
: ; - arca
III III 2
A,
EQ"
or concrete s lab within effecti ve widt h
= area of .'lIce! cross section, 11)111:.'

: ; - sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors
between the point of maximum positi ve 11lOlllcnt
and the point of zero moment, N.

2.
In
Load Tran s fer for Negative Moment

continuous composite beams where
longiludin:ll
/II'
reinforcing steel in the negati ve IllOlllent regions is

cons idered to act compositely with the steel beam, the total
horizontal shear force between the pOint of maximum
negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be
taken as the lower value according to the limit states of
yielding of the steel reinforcement in the slab, or strength of
the shear connectors:
a.
Fyr
steel shape iJnd the rati o of the average rib width

to rib depth ~ 1.5
:; 0.85; (a) for two studs welded in a steel deck rib
with the deck oriented perpendicular (0 the steel
shape ; (b) for one ' IUd welded through steel
deck with th e deck oriented parallel to
the steel shape and the ratio of the average rib
width to rib depth < 1.5
:::: 0.7 for three or more studs welded in a steel deck
rib ':"ilh the deck oriented perpendicular to the
steel shape
1.0 for studs we lded directly to the stee l shape
(in other words, not through steel deck or sheet )
and having a haunch delaiJ with not morc
lhan 50
percent of the lOp flange covered
by deck or sheet stccl closures
0 .75; (a) for studs welded in a composite slab with
the deck oriented perpendicular to the beam
and
(509.3-2a)
= area of adequHtely developed lon gitudina l

reinforci ng stee l within the effective width of the
2
concrete slab, mm
= specified minimum yield stress oftlle reinforcing
Sleel, MPa.
emid-hl
(509 .3-2b)
We
distance from the edge of stud shank to the steel

deck web. mea. mea.surcd at mjd~height of the
deck rib. and in the load bearing directi on of the
stud (in other words, in the direction of
maximum moment for a simply supported
beam). mm.
= weight of concrete per unit volume (1500 ~ w e :::
2500kg/m'.
;::;
3. Strenglh of Stud Shear Connec tors

The nominal strength of one slUd shear connector embedded
in solid concrete or in a composi te slab is
~RgRpAscl'~,
(509.3-3)
where
Asc
= cross~scctional
area of stud shear co nn ector
2
'
'
Ec
= modulus of e lasti city of concrete ::::
n1l11
( 0043",~5 J/, MPa)

FII
= specifi ed minimulll tensile streng th o f a stud
IIg
= 1.0; (a) for one stud welded in a steel deck rib with
2:2io. (50 mm); (b) for studs
emid-ht ~ in. (50 mm)
(~""d./JI
a. Strength of shear connectors
Q n ;:::;O.5A sc Jf;E c
i"I
welded
through steel deck, or steel sheet
used as girder filler material, and embedded in a
com posite slab with th e deck oriented parallcl10
the beam
:::: 0.6 for studs welded in a composite slab with
deck oriented perpendicular to the beam and
where
A,
:j
Tensile yield ing of the slab reinforcement
V ' ::;;- A"P,I'"
Steel and Metal
shear connector, MPa.

the deck oriented perpendicular to the s teel
shape; (b) for any number of studs
welded in a row directly to the steel s hape; (c) for
allY number
of studs welded in a row Ulrough
steel deck with the deck oriented parallel to the
National Struclural Code of Ihe f'11i1ippin es 6'" Edition Volume 1
.,
5-78
CHAPTEH 5 - Sleel and MCIaIS
horizontal shcilr force as determined in SC((iOllS 509.).211( I )

and 509.1.2t1(2) dividcd by the nominal strength of nIH:
~hear l'onncclOr as determined from Section 509.3.2d(1) or
Section 509.1.2d(4).
7. Shear Con nector Place men t Hnd Spacing
Shea r connectors required on each side or th e poi nt of
nwx imum bending moment, po~ilive or ncglllive, shall be
d i~ triblltcd uniforml y between that point and the adjacent
points' of zero moment, unlc~s ()thcrwisc specified .
However, the number or shear connec tors placed he tween
any concelHfated load a nd the nearest point of zero moment
sl1<l1l be sufficient to develop the maximum moment required
at the concentrated load point.
Shear
conneClOrs shall
have at Icast 25 mill of lateral

the ribs of
formcd steel decks. The diameter of studs shall nol be
greatcr than 2.5 limes the thickness of the nange 10 which
they arc welded. unless loemed over Ihe wcb. The minimum
center-to-center spacing of slUd COllncclOrs shall be six
diamcters along the longitudinal axis of the support ing
co mposite beam and rour diameters transvcrse to the 1011 gi llldinal axis of the supporting composite beam, cxcept that
withi n the ribs of form cd steel dec ks oriented perpendicular
10 the steel bea m the minimum cen ter-la-center spacing
shall be four diameters in any direction. The maximum
cc ntC.f-lO-cc nter spacing of shear connectors shall not
exceed eight limcs the total slab thi ckncss .
concrete cover, except ror conneCLOrs installed
;0~~~~~'~~;~~~1~Lr~z~~!;!~l~~~~~~~;~:c~~s~hear
to the
of
maybe
such as
~. fPiili,!1
t
efflid_1r1
5. Strength or Channel Shear Connectors

The nominal strength of one channel shear connector
slab is
embedded ill a solid
concrete
503.3 Flexural Strength of Concrete Encased and Filled

Members
Thc nominal flexural stren gth of concretc-cncased and filled
following
membcrs ~ shall be dctcnni ned using onc of
methods;
the
a.
TI1C superposition of clastic st resses on the composite

section, conSidcri ng thc effects of shori ng, for the limit
stale of yieldin g (yield lllo l11enl),
where
where
=:::
1ft, =O.90(LRF~
flange thi ckness of channel shear connector, Jl1m .

chann el shea r con nector,
= web thi c kne ss of

mm .
L,.
in
b.
The plastic stress distribution on the steel section aIOl)(:,

for thc limit slale of yielding (p lasti c moment), where
c.
If shear connectors are provided and the concretc
= length of channel shear conneClOr, mill.
l 1lc strength of the channel shear COllllcctor shall be developed

by wclding ule channel (0 the beam flange for a force equal
to Q". considering eccentricity on the connector.
6. Required Number of Shear Connectors

The nu mber of shear connectors required between the section
of max imum bending moment, positi ve or negative, and Ihe
adjacen t secti on of zero moment shall be equal to th e
mects the requirements of Section 509.1.2. Ihe

nominai flexural strength sha1l be computcd based IIj}vll
thc plastic stress distribution on the composi te section
or from thc strain-compatibility method,
where
fA =O.85(LRF~
Associa lion of Struclural Engineers of Ihe Pililippine s
CHApn~fi
50~.4
Steel and Metal
[)l9
Combined Axial Fonc and Flexure
The interaction be(ween axial forces and flcxure in

composite mcmbers shall account for stJbility as required
by Sec(ion 503. The design compressive strength. J~I' and
allowable compressive strength, I~Jflc' and the design

flexural strength,
Mjflt"
hMn! and allowable flexural strength,
arc determined as follows:
,. = 0.75 (LRFD)
11, =0.90(LRFq
I.
2.
0., =2.00(ASq
This Section addresses connecting clements, connectors,

and the affected clements of the connected members not
subject to fatigue loads.
The Section is organized as follows:
510.1
510.2
0." = 1.67 (ASq
The nominal strength of the cross section of a composite

member subjected to combined axial compression and
flexure shall be determined using either the plastic
stress distribution method or the strain-compatibility
method.
To account for the influence of length effects on the
axial strength of the member, the nominal axial
strength of the member shall be determined by Section
509.2 with Po taken as the nominal axial strength of the
cross section determined in Section 509.4 (1) above.
510.3
510.4
510.5
510.6
510.7
510.8
510.9
510.10
General Provisions
Welds
Bolts and Threaded Parts
Affected Elements of Members and Connecting
Elements
Fillers
Splices
Bearing Strength
Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
Anchor Rods and Embedments
Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces
509.5 Special Cases

When composite construction docs not confonn to the
requirements of Section 509.1 through Section 509.4, the
strength of shear connectors and details of construction shall
bc established by tcsting.

510.1.1 Design Basis
The design strength,
#?", and
the allowable strength
R'l / flof connections shall be determined in accordance

with the provisions of this Section and the provisions of
Section 502 .
The required strength of the connections shall be detemlined

by structural analysis for the specified design loads,
consistent with the type of construction specified, or shall be
a proportion of the required strength of the connected
members when so specified herein.
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded
members do not intersect at one point, the effects of
eccentricity shall be considered.
510.1.2 Simple Connections

Simple conncctions of beams, girders, or trusses shall be
designed as flexible and arc permitted to be proportioned for
the reaction shears only, except as otherwise indicated in the
design documents, Flexible beam connections shall
accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic,
but self-limiting defOImation in the connection is permitted
to accommodate the end rotation of a simple beam.
!:j.[)()
CHAPTEH 5 . Steel and Metals
510.1.3 Moment Connections
5IU.1.6 Beam Copes and \Veld Access Holes
End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trusses

shall be designed for the combined effect of forces resulting
from moment and shear induced by the. rigidity of the
cOllnections. Response criteria for moment connections m'e
provided in Section 502.3.61>.
All weld access ho!c.s required (0 facilitate welding

operations shaH have a length from the toe o/" the weld
preparation /l0{ less (han 11/2 times the thickness oj" the material
in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be
User Note: Sec Section 503 and Appendix A-7 for analysis
requirements to establish the required strength and stiffness
for desigll of connections.
510.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints

1.
When columns bear on bearing plates or are finished to

bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to
hold all parts securely in place.
2.
When compression members other than columns are

finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors
shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be
proportioned for either (i) or (ii) below. It is permissible
to use the less seve-re of the two conditions:
a.
An axial tensile force of 50 percent of the required

compressive strength of the member; or
b.
The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load

equal to 2 percent of the required compressive strength
of the member. The transverse load shall be applied at the
location of the splice exclusive of other loads that act on
the member. 'D1e member shall be taken as pinned for the
determination of the shears and moments at the splice.
User Note: All compression joints should also be

proportioned to resist any tension developed by the load
combinations stipulated in Section 502.2.
510.1.5 Splices in Heavy Sections

When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to
be transmilted through splices in heavy sections, as defined
in
Section 501.3.1e and 501.3.1d,by completc joint-
penetration groove (CJP) welds, material notch-toughness

requirements as given in Section 501.3.lc and 501.3. ld,
weld access hole details as given in Section 510.1.6 and
thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements
as given in 513.2.2 shaH apply. The foregoing provision is not
applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes that arc
welded prior to assembling the shape.
User Note: ClP groove welded splices of heavy sections
df:~~~~~e~e:;f[~ec~ts of weld shrinkage. Members
that are also
to tensile
shrinka:~e if
j 1/2
times the thickness of the matelial with the access hole, t W'
but not !css tlHU1 25 !lllll nor docs it need (0 exceed 50 mll1.
The access hole shall be detaikd to provide room for weld
backing as needed.
Fo!: sections that arc rolled or welded prior to cutting, the
edge of the web shall be sloped or curved from the surface
of the flange to the reentrant surface of the access hole. In
hOI-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove
welds that join the web~to-Oange, all beam copes lmd weld
access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant
comers. No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radills
less than 10 mill.
In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration
groove welds that join the web-to-flange, all beam copes
and weld acccss holes shall be free of notches and sharp
reentrant comers. The access hole shaH be permitted to
terminate perpendicular 10 the Oange, providing the weld is
terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size away
from the access holc.
For heavy sections as defined in 501.3.ic and 501.3.ld, the
thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld access holes
shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either
magnetic particle or dye penetrant methods prior to deposition
of splice welds. If the curved transition pOJ1ion of weld
access holes and beam copes arc formed by predrilled or
sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not
be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes
need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
magnetic pal1ic1e methods.
510.1.7 I'hlcement of Welds and Bolts

Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member which
transmit axial force into that member shall be sized so that
the center of gravity a/" the group coincides with the centcr
o/" gravity of the member, unless provision is made for III
eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to c;
connections of statically loaded single angle, double ang);
and similar members.
510.1.8 Bolts in Combination with Welds

Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in
combination with welds, except that shear connections v,< .
any grade of bolts permitted by Section 501.3.3 installed i:.!
standard holes or short slots transverse to the direction of the
load are permitled to be considered to share the load with
longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such connections the
available strength of the bolts shall not be taken as greater than
CHAPTER 5
50 PCft:1.!1l1 of the available strcngth of bcarin g-type bolts ll1

("onnctlioll.
!h~~
In making welded aherillions to structures, ex.isting rivets and

high strength bolt . . ligillcned to Ihe requi rcmcnts for slipcrili<..'aJ COlllh;!Ctions arc permittcd 10 beuliJized for ca rryin g
JO;ld s pre-scllt <II th e tim c of alteratioll and the welding
IIced on l y provide the addi tional required stre ngth .
510.1.9 Iligh-Slrenglh
with
Bolls
in
Rivets
Combinafion
III both new work and allenHiolls. in connec ti ons designed

<I S slip-c rit ic.1I cOllllec tions in accordance with the
provision s of Section 5 10.3, high-s trength bolts are
permitted 10 be considered as Sharing th c loud with exi sting
ri vets.
510.1.I0 Limitalions on lIolled and
Welded
Connections
Pretensiollcd j oirHs, slip-crit ical joints or welds shall be.
used for thc following connec tions:
J.
2.
3.
Column spli ces in all mult i-story structures over 38 m

in height.
Connection~
of all beams and girders to columns and
,IllY other beams and gi rders on which the bracing of

columns is dependent in Slmc(ures over 38 In in height
In all structures carrying cra nes of over 50 k.N capacity:
roof truss splices and connecti ons of trusses to
columns. column spli ces, col umn bracing, knee braces,
and crane supports

4.
Conn ecti ons for the suppon of machinery and other live
loads that produce impact or reversal of load
Snug-li ghl ened joinlS or joinls wilh ASTM A307 bolls shall
be permitted exccpt where otherwise specifi ed.
Slcol anci Mela l
!; 61
510.2 Welds
All provisions of AWS DI.I apply under thi s Specification,

with the cxception that th e provisi ons of the listed NSCP
Spccific'Hion Sections apply under th is SpecifiGation in lieu
of the ci led A WS provisions as follows:
NSCP Sleel and Melals Seelion 510. 1.6 in lieu of AWS DI.I
SCClion5.I7.1
NSCP Sleel and Melal'; Seelina 510.2.2.. in li eu of AWS
DI.I Seelion 2.3.2
NSCP Sleel and Melals Table 510.2.2 in lieu of A WS D I. I
Table 2. 1
NSCP Sleel and Melal s Table 5 I 0.2.5 in li eu of A WS D 1.1
Table 2.3
NSCP Sleel and Melals Appendix A3. Table A3. 1 in lieu of
AWS D I. I Table 2.4
NSCP Sleel and Mel als Seeli o n 502.3 .9 and Ap pendix A
3 in lieu of A WS D 1.1 Seelion 2. Pan C
NSCP Slccl and Melals Sccli on 513.2 ill lieu of AWS DI.I
Secliolls5. 15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4
510.2.1 Grooye Welds
510.2.10 Effective Area
The effec ti ve area of groove welds shall he considered as
the length of the we ld times the effective throat thickness.
The effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penclfation

(P1P) groove weld shall be as s hown in Table 510.2.1.
User Note: The effective throal size of a partial-join!:
penetration groove weld is dependent on the process used
and. the weld position. TIle contract documents should either
indicale the effective IlU'Oal required or Ille weld streoglh

required. and 'the fabricalor should detail the joinl based 00
Ille weld process and position 10 be used 10 weld the joint.
The effecti ve weld size for fl are groove welds, when filled
flu sh to the surface of a round bar. a 900 bend in a fonned
section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table
510.2.2. unless other effective throat s arc demonstrated by
tests . The effective size of Oare groove welds filled less
than flu sh shall be as shown in Table 510.2.2, lcss the
greatest perpendicular dimcnsion measured from a line flush
to the bnse metal su rfClce to the weld surface .
Na tional S lruc lural Code of Ihe Philippines 6 'h Edition Volume 1
5-,B2
CHAPTEr{ [) . Sled and Metals
-----------------------------Table 510:2.2
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove
-,;;; -,; '-,_ -", 'Welds

Welding
Process
Welding
"""""1'"n Process
Posi{:on
F(llai), H
(horiz.),
V(vcrt.),
I
Shielded Meta! Arc

(SMAW)
All
Gas MClal Arc

(GMAW) Flux
Cored Arc
All
W)
Submerged Arc
(SAW)
Gas Metal Arc
(GMAW) Flux
Cored Arc
(FCAW)
Shielded Metal Arc
(SMAW)
Gas Metal Arc

(GMAW) Flux
Cored Arc
(FCAW)
F,II
All
V.OH
Flare Bevel Groove!;01 Flare V Groove
1------ -------------------- -----------Groove
GMAWand
Type
Effective
Throat
(AWS
DI.I.
Figure
3.3)
SAW
Groove
60' V
J or U
Groove 60'
Bevel or V
4S
Depth of
Groove
'/2 R
ra)Por Flare Bevel Groove with R< 10 mm llse

only reinforcing fillet weld on filled flush
joint. General Note: R"", radius of join I surface
(can be assullled to be 21 for I-ISS), mm
Bevel
Minus 3
mill
Bevel
5/16R
I,
Depth of
5/8 Ii
Depth of
Groove
4S
5/16 Ii
Bevel
4S
3/4 Ii
------------------1-----SMAWand
FCAW-S
J or U
5/8 Ii
FCAW-()
Material Thickness of
Thinner Part Joined, mOl
Minimum Effective
Throat Thickness,!a) mIn.
Groove
Depth of
Groove
nus
3!
To 6 inclusive
Over 6 to 13
Over 13 to 19
Over 19 to 38
Over 38 to 57
Over 57 to 150
Over ISO
5
6
8
10
13
16
1"ISee Table 510_2_ L
Material Thickness of
Thinner Part Joined,

To 6 inclusive
Over 6 to 13
Over 13 to 19
Over 19
I11Ill
Minimum size of Fillet

weld,r'l) llun.
3
5
6
Dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds

be used.
Note: See Section SIO.2.2b for maximum size of
welds.
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Pl1i1ippines
C HAP TE F~
Larger dlcctivc throat thicklll!s~cs than those ill Table 510.2.2

arc permitted, pro vided the fabricator C<.Ill establish by
qualdic<ltion the consistent production of slich larger effective
throilt tllicklu!sscs. Qua lilicHtioli shall consist of sectioning
the we ld normal to its <Ixi~, at mid-length and Icnninal ends.
Such sectioning shall be made Oil a number of combinations
or material sizes rcprc scll1<Hivc of the range 10 be used in the
fabri c.1t i on.
510.2.lb Limitations
The minimum effective throat thickness of ;:1 partial ~joiJ1(
penelnllion groove weld shall not be less Ihan the size required
to transmit calculated forces nOT the size shown in Table
510.2.3 . Minimum weld size is determined by the thinn er of
the two parts joined .
:)
5-13:3
The minimum effecti ve Icngl h of lilkt welds designcd 011

the basis of strength shall be no! less than fOllr tillles thl'
nominal size. or else the size of the weld shall be considered
not IU exceed 1/.1 of it s effecti ve Icngth. If longitudinal fillet
welds arc lIsed al one in end conneclions of nat-Imr tension
membcrs. Ihl'. length of each fillet weld shall be nOI less lhan
the perpendicular distance between Ihem. For the effect of"
longitudinal fillet weld length iJ~ end cOJlnections upon the
effectivc arc;\ of the connectcd '.Jllember,
sec Section 504.3.3.
.. For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 limes the
leg dimension, it is pemlitled to take the erfective length
equal 10 the aeluallenglh. When the lenglh of the end-loaded
fillet weld exceeds 100 times the' weld size. the effective
length shall be delcnnined by multipl ying the nc(Ual lenglh
by the reduction factor, p,
510.2.2 Fillet Welds
,6= 1.2 -O.OOJ:l/w)~ 1.0
510.2.2. Effective Arca

The errective area of a fillet weld shall re the effcctive length
multiplied by the erfectivc throat. The effective lhroat of a
fillel weld shall be the shortest dislance from lhe root 10 the
face of tile diagrallll1lmic weld. An increase ill effecti ve Ihroat
is permilled if consistent penetralion beyond the root of the
diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using lhe
producti on process and procedure variablcs.
S!ce! tl nc.! Met;)!
(510.2 1)
where
L
\\'
= actua llenglh of endloaded weld, 111111 .

= weld leg size. mm .
When the length of lhe weld exceeds 3(X) times the leg size.
Ihe value of {J shall be laken as 0.60.
For fillct welds in holes and slots, the effective Jenglh

shall be Ihe length of Ihe cenlerline of Ihe weld along Ihe
center of the plane through the th roat. In tbe case of
overlapping fillets. the effective area shall nOI exceed the
nominal crosssect ional area of the hole or slot, in the plane
of lhe faying surface.
In tcnnittem fillet welds are pennitted to be used to transfer

cakulated stress across a joint or faying surfaces when (he
required strength is less than that developed by a continuous
fillet weld of the smallest pemlilted size, and (0 join
componenls of built-up members. The effective length of any
segmel1l of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less lhan
four times the weld size, with a minimum of 38mm.
510.2.2b Limitations
The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not Jess than the
size required to tra nsmit calculated forces, nor the size as
shown in Table 510.2.4 . These provisions do not apply to
fillet weld reinforcements of partial or cOT11plel e~joilll
penetration groove welds.
In lap joints, lhe minimum amount of lap shall be five

times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less
than 25 nml _ Lap join ts joining plates or bars subjected to
axial stress that utilize transverse fillet welds only shall be
fillet welded along Ole end of both lapped parts. except where
the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficientl y restrained to
prevent opening of the joint under maximum loadi ng.
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall

be :
Fillet weld temlinalions (I.fe pennilted to be slopped short or

extend 10 the ends or sides of parts or be boxed except as
limiled by the following:
).
Along edges of material less than 6 mm thick, nol

grea ter than the thi ckness of the material.
2.
Along edges of material 6 111111 or Illore in th ickness,

not greater th an th e thic kness of the mat eria l minus
2 mm, unless the weld is especially designated 011 the
drawings 10 be buill oul. to obtain [uJl!..Ilfoat thickness. In
the as-welded condition, the distan ce between the edge
of the base metal and the loe of the weld is pcnnined 10 be
less than 2 mm provided the weld size is clearl)'
verifiable.
1.
For lap joints jn which one connected part extends beyond

an edge of another connccted part that is subjecl to
calculated tensile strcss, filicI welds shall terminate not
less them the size of the weld from Ihat edge.
2.
For cOllnections where nexibility of th e oll tslanding

elements is required, when end returns are used, the
length of rhe retum shall not exceed four times the
nominal size of rhe weld nor half the width of the part
3.
Pillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder
th
584
CHAPTEr'1:
~j .
Steel and !v1ctals
webs J 9 mm thick or less shall end 110\ less than fou r

times nor morc than six times the thickness of the web
from the web toe of the web-lo-flange welds, except
where lhe ends of" sliffeners are welded to lhe flange.
4.
Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common

plane, shall be interrupted at the com er common to both
welds.
The thickness of plug or slot we lds in lllmerial mm or Ic.<.;s in

thickness shall be equal to the thickness of (he mat erial. In
material over 16 mm thick, the thi ckness of the weld shall hi;
at least one~ ha lf the thickness of the materia l but not less
than 16 111m.
510.2.4 Strength
The design
Usc!" Note: Fillet weld tCJlllinations should be localed
app,r\~xj~~latcly Qilt;,.,.wel'~,I .:sizeJ~om :'. o( ~le~:,.~ge ()f th~

sqJ~Jli!c:90Ji" ,18 , : ~)~niiWA~. H9l~~~f)ij:~'~:, :,: ths~~~e. ' JP~~l,~l. -yillpl
~e\ds t"rminated at tll~ cnd ~fth e joint,' other 'ilion tllOse
cOlln~Jhlg .s tiffe))efs to -'girdei ,wcbs, ;aie ,noLa. ~!ltlse

correCtioi~' . :" \'.
,, :'
" ' <, :'" .-,v""
< ,,.,,
"t?<
stre ngth, rjJ Rn and
the
allowable
strength.
n,
Rn/ of welds shall be the lower v:.ilue of the base material

and rile weld metal strength determined according to the iilllil
states of tens ile rupture, shear ruplllre or yielding as
follows:
<, ,,'c',"I", ''-''''''.:., ,':'','
For the base metal

Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be used to
transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or
separation of lapped palis and to join component s of built-up
members. Such fillet welds may overlap , subject to the
provisions of Section 5 10.2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are
not to be considered plug or slot welds.
(510.22)
For the weld metal
(5 I 0.2-3)
where
510.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds
= nominal stren gth of the base metal per unit area,
510.2.3a Effective Arca

AIJM
= nominal strength of the weld mcta! per unit

area, MPa
= cross secl i on al area of the bas e metal,
AI\'
mm
= effective area of th e we ld . 111m2
MPa
The effecti ve shearing Mca or plug and slot weld s shall be

considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of' the hole or
slot in the plane of the raying surface.
51O.2.3b Limitatious
Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear
in lap joints or to prevent buckling of lapped pans and to join
component parts of built-up members.
The diameter of the holes for a plu g weld shall not be less
than the thickness of the part containi ng it plus 8 mm, rounded
(0 {he next larger mill, nor greater than the minim um diameter
plus 3 mm or il4 times the thi ckness of the weld.
The minimum cen ter-to-center spacing of plug wclds shall
be four times the diameter of the hol e.
The lenglh of slot for a slol weld shall not exceed 10
times th e th ickness of the weld. The width of the slot slmll be
not less than the thickness of the pan containing it plus 8 mm
rounded to the next larger mill, nor shall it be larger than 21/4
times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be
semicircuhu' or shall have the comers rounded to a radius of not
less than the th ickness of the part containing it, except those
ends which extcnd to the edgc of the part.
The minimum spaci ng of lines of slot welds in a direction
tran sverse to their length shall be fo ur limes the width of the
slot. The minimum cent cr- l() ~cen ter spacing in a longitudinal
direction on allY line shall be two times [he length of the slot.
The values of , Q,F/JM,f~l'and limitations thereon arc

given in Table 510.2.5.
Alternatively, for fillet welds loaded in-plane the design
st ren gth, Rn and th e all owable stre ngth, 11II (0., of. we 11(S 'IS
penniued to be determined as follows:
I/I=O.75(LIIF~
I.
0.=2.00(ASI~
For a linear weld grou p loaded in-plane tbrough the

center of gravity
(5 I 0.2-4)
where
Fw =O.60F"xx (J.()+O.50sinI. 5 e)
(510.2-5)
and
A...
= electrode classification number, MPa.

= angle of loading measured from the weld
longitudinal axis, degrees
= effective area of the weld, mm2
Associatio n of Stru ctura l Engineers of tile Philippines
CHAPTER 5
User Note! . A jinear weld group is , one in _'which nil
clements ~re in a ii~l e or a;c paralieL
-'.
R""
For weld clements wi thin a weld group that <I rc loaded
2.
illpJane and an alyzed using an instantaneous cen ter of

rotati on method, the compollent's of the nomina l
s trengt h, RIIX and R " .~.;"are 'permitted 10 be determ ined
as fo ll ows:
(510.2-6)
where
= effect ive area of weld throat of any i th weld
A"y
clement , 1ll1l1 2
= 0.60
F",j
""XX
(1.0 + 0.50 ' in
e)/ (I')
(510.2-7)
/ ( ,,) ~ [p (I .9 - 0.9 p )]0 '

(5 10.2-8)
= nominal stress in any it h weld eicment. MPa.
=
x co mponc lll of s tress ,
F Wi
= y compon ent of s tress, Fl1'i

= LI;/ Ll"" rat io of clcmcill i deformati on to its
deformati on at maximum stress
= weld leg size, mIll.
= disl<lncc from insta ntaneolls center of rotl1t ion to
)I'
weld clement with minim uill b.u /'; ratio,
5JO.2.5 Combination of Weld s

If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillct ,
pl ug. slot) arc co mbi ned in a s ingle joint, the st rength of each
shnl! be sep.mllcly co mput ed with reference to the axi s of the
group in order to determine {'he strength o f the combination.
5JO.2.6 Filler Melal Requirements

The cho ice of eleclrodc ror use with comlctejoim
pcnctrati on groove weld s subject lO tension normal to the
effec tive are a shall comply with the requirements 1'01'
matching filler meta ls given in AWS Dl .1
User Not~: TIle following User Note Table summari zes

the A 'WS 0 I :_. I provisi ons for matching fiBer metal s,
fest ric, ti6n,~, ~xist. , For 3. complet~ l.is.~or.base ll}ctals
c:hhcr
and prequali1ied h'1atching tiller metals',see AY'lS '".

Dl.l , Table 3. 1.
. ,
111111,
stress ievels, lincarly pr o po r tion e d 10 the

critical de f ormation based 0 11 distance
fr o m the instant aneous cent er o f rotati on, Ii,
111111.
/j. III
0 . 209
(6 + 2to.:n
III,
dcf'o rmationof
weld clemenl at maximum stress, in. (mm)
= 1.087(0 + 6ro.c, :'i1l' ~ O. J 7\\', deformalion of
All
weld clement at ulliJ113le stress (fracture),

usually in elemen t furthe st frorn instantaneous
cen le r of rotati on, mill .
l.
Fo r fille t weld groups concentrically loaded and

consistin g of e lement s that arc oriented bot h
longitudinally nnd transversely to the directio n of
applied load, the combined strength , RII, of the fillet
weld group shall be determined as the gretHer of
(510 .2-911)
or
(5 10.2-9b)
where
R1,.,
585
= the Lolal nomin al strength of transversely loaded

fillet welds, as determined in accordance with
Table 510.2,5 without the alternate in Section
5 10.2.4(a), N.
= defonn nti oll of we ld elements at int ermediate
LI;
Sieel and Metal
= the total nom in al strength of longitudinall y

louded fillet weld s, as dctermjn ed in accord ance
with Table 5 10.2.5. N.
Nati on(~ l Structu ral Code of Iht7 Pililippin es 6 Edition Volume 1

th
:586
CHAPTIOR 5 - Slc QI and Metals
Load Type and

Direction
Relative \0
Nominal
Pertinent
Metal
Arca
Strengt h
(FilM
Weld Axis
(1/'
FlY )
lAHM or A w )
mm1
Mmching filler metal shall

be used. forT and comCf joints wilh
backing left in place, notch lough
Strength of lhe:joint is controlled

by the base metal
Tension
Nannal to weld ax is
Required
Fi ller
Effective
metal is requirecl . See Section 510.2 A !

Fill er meta l wilh a .
Compression
Normal to weld axis
Strcnglh of the. joint is controlled

by Ihe base metal
level equal 10 or olle

strength level less than
matching filler metal is
Tension or
Tension o r cOlnprcssi'01l in pans joined parall el
Compression
to a weld need not be considered in des ign of
Parallel to weld ax is
welds joining the parts.
level equal to or less Ihan

r
Matching filler metal shall
be used. Ie}
~==-'~::-:-
Base
Tension
Normal to weld axis
$ ~ O.80
Weld
Column to base
than columns as
described in 510. 1.4{b)
Co mpression
Connections not
fin ished-la-bear
Fy
O.6OFlixx
Q ~ 1.88
Sec
5 10.4
Sec
SIO.2.1a
Compressive stress need 110 1 be considered in
Plate and column

splices design ed
Compression
Conncctions or
mcmbers designcd
to bear other
$ ~ O.90
design of welds joining the part s.
Base
Weld
=:
0.90
Q= I.67
= 0.80
n ~ 1.88
Scc
Fy
5 10.4
O.60f;,:xx
Sec
SIO.2. Ja
F.\,
Sec
Filler metal with II strength

level equal 10 or less than
penniltoo.
Base
Weld
Tension or
Compression
P.arallello weld axis
9=
n '"
9
n=
510.4
Lli7
O.90FEXX
Sec
510.2. 1'
Tension or compression in parIS joined parallel
to a weld need not be con sidered in design of

welds
the
O.60FEXX
Weld
Sec
510.2.1a
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Philippine s
CHAPTEH 5
Lo;;ld Type and

Di recli on
Relati ve 10
Weld Axis
S hear
= 0,75
n = 2.00
Efrcctivc
Area
Requircd
Filler
(A1JMol'A,.,)
Strcngth
Lcvc!lallbl
Sec
Filler me tal wilh ;t strength

level equal to o r less than
matc hing filler metal is
permitted.
510.2,2:1
Te nsion or comprcssiolll in pans joined parallel

1011 weld need no t be considered in design of
welds '
the
weld axis
Base
Shear
Pa mllel to f;'lyi ng
surface on the
Filler metal wilh II st rength

level equlIlto or less than
Governed by 5 J 0.4
$ = 0,75
Weld
cffccti vc area
5-87
Mewl
mill:!
Weld
Tension o r
Compression
J>ar~tI!ellO
NOlllimll Sirength
(11J11f or '~vl
I'eltinent
Melal
Steei a nd Metai

pcnnittcd .
510.2.3<1
Fur nmtch ing, weld IIlclal sce I\WS 1)1 . 1, Secliun JJ..
Fillc r mel;11 with;o ~!rcnglh kl'd nile .~ I ren<,t h
grc;l1er 11i:1Il m;IlChi11~ is
Filler metals wilh ;1 ~u<: nglh !cl'\!! h:.~s lhan tll;uclti ng may be u~cd fo r groo",.. w,-Ids bc!wecn the webs and fI;!lIgc s ur buill-Up sections tt,II1SICITilig shcar loads. ~\r
j'
.
. \\'h('n~ high r<:s!raim is a concern. In thc~c applieatitln~. the weld joinl sh;tli IX' det,\iletl and till', weld shall be designed lIsing lhe lhickn~ ss of lh~ malerial as
kwl
lhroat.
:=o.SQ n", I.SS
~~; ~:':;:,~:;::~;:,,:":~',;I';i:O::" :i:sii,~o;n.~ of

~.
Iii
p-ermined.
:Llld O.60FE:XX liS the nO!ninal strcng,lh.
510.2.4(,1) are pennillcd ]llOvided the Ilcforma\ion c(llllr~\ihi ]i l yoI' the I':lr;j)us weld clclllenls is ennsidCf("1. ,\llcmalivc1y. Scctions 510.2A(b)
510.2.4(:1) tha i prO\'idc fur deformation
compat ibil ity.
510.2,7 Mixed Weld Metal

Filler metal with a speeified Charpy V-Notc h (CVN)
tou gh ness o f 27 J at 4'Cshall be uscd in the !'o llowin g
joints:
When Charpy V-Notch toughness is specified, the process

consumables for all weld metal , tack weld s, root pass and
subsequent passes deposited in a joint shall be compati ble to
ensure notch-tough composite we ld mctal.
1_ Complete-joint-penetrati on groove welded T ,md
510,3 Bolts and Threaded Parts
comer joillls with sleel backing left in placc. s ubject to

tension normal to (he effective area, unless the joints
are designed using the nominal strength and resistance
factor or safety factor as applicable for a PJP weld.
2.
Complete-joint-penetration groove welded splices

subject to tension normal to the effective area ill heavy
secli ons as defined in 50 1.3. Ie and A3_ Id.
510.3,1 High-Strength Bolts

Use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of
the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325
or A490 Bolts. hereafter referred to as the RCSC
Specification, as approved by the Research Council on
Structural Connections, except as otherwise provided in thi s
Specification,
The manufacturer's Certificate of Con formance shall be

sufficient evidence of compliance.
National Structural Cod e of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volu me 1
'-
588
CH APTER 5 Steel and
r -'"
~I/leta!s
<
Table 51 O.3~1
-',-
I::,,:::;: F1~~~ ."r:~~.::'

I' ,":\~,
, . " ... , .~"
'"
,.
-,.,
'\.",.')5"
;;;"
;"" .. -"
,'i. ," .(MiiiimulJj!Jlolt\l'i'ete~~io#;i~'~ " .W'gi
:~~
:~!
M24
205
M27
267
~~~
257
01
Nominal Shear
Description of Fasteners
Nominal
Ten sile
Stress, l4~1I' Con nections. l~:,v'

MPa
MPa
A107
boll~
310 [allt>1
165 tbl!cll fl
620 lei
330 If!
A125 or A325M tXlII!>, when

threads
~ 1:.qlli\1
1(1 0 70 Ulnc,~ lhe tlLmullum 1t'11!.1It' J'lrt'/Iglh uf bolts.

ountk d orr LO 11l'.U~St kN.
S st>CClficd III AsrM sp<.'Clflcallo ns for A125M and A490M
loll, \\Ilh UNC lllle,ub;
Stress in
Bearin g-Type
ilre
nol
I!xc!uded
from shclIr planc);
4 !4t11
A325 or A~25M bolts, when

threads arc excluded from
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those alij,acent

to the washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
All ASTM A325 or A325M and A490 or A490M bolts shall
be tighrened to a boll tension 1101 less than th ilt given ill
Table 510.3.1. except as noted below.
Except as permitted below. install ation shall he assured by
allY of th e following methods: tlirn-of~l1ut method, a direct
tension indicator, calibrated wrench or alternative d(~sign
bolt.
shear planes
~-~------~----~-I-~- -----~
7801<'1
A400 or A490M bollS, wilen

threads: arc not excluded
414 [0
from shear pl,l1les
._- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - 780!d
A490 or A490M bolls. when

Ihreads arc excluded from
520 In
shear planes
Bolts are permitted to be installed to only the snug .. tight

condition when used in
paris meeting the
requirements
of
Section
510.3.4, when threads arc nOI
excluded frorn shear planes
Thrc..ldcd
I.
bearing-t ype connec ti ons.
2.
tension or combined shear and tension applications, for

ASTM A325 or A325M bolts only, where loosening or
fati gue due to vibration or load flucllHuio ns arc not design
considerations.
The sil ug-tight condition is defined as the tigbtness attained

by either a few impacrs of an impacl wrench or th e full
dfolt of a worker with an ordinary spud wrench thaI brings
the cOllnected plies into firm contact. Bolts to be tightened
only to the snug-tight condition shall be clearly iden!ified
on the design and erection d rawings.
When ASTM A490 or A490M boils over 25 mm in diamcter
are lIsed in slotted or oversized holes in ex tern al plies. a
single hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436. except
with 8 111m minimum thickn ess, shall be used ill lieu of (he
standard washer.
User J'lote: Washer re.quirements are proyided in the R.CSC
Specification, Section 6.
-
O.75F., [(1ld)
..
Thrcadetl parts mecting Ihe
requiremcnts
of Scc li o n
510.3.4. when threads arc

excluded from shell!' planes
050FII
!.oISubjl.'CIIO Ihe rc! luiremc ll b or l\ppt!lIo.iix 3.
[~I r'"(l" 1\107 holls the I:lhlllatcd ",IIIlCS sh:11! hI.' rcdu('('d by 1 rlCrcc nl
over 5 diame[crs of ICII!![ h ill the grip.
J'1"nUo.!ilds permitted in ~ tlCilr planes.
fIJI'
\'ach 2 111111
[d""he nominal tensile slreng!h of !hc threaded ponioll o f an upset rot!. bilscd UpUIl
the cro.~ scct ion:l l area :ll il.!; major thrcad diamclcr. AD. which sh~n be larg<.'r Ihall
tm; nominal bod)' ;UC;I of the rod hefore upseuil1~ times I /~)'
) For A32 5 0)' A32 5M il11d A490 or 1\490M bolls su hject 10 tell~il c fali gllc loading,
sec /\ppc nd ix 3.
1'1Whcn hcari ng.typc COIlIlcctiulIS u~l'd 10 splice tcOSill1l mcmhcrs h:I\'~' :i (listener
jl,mcnl who!ic:: kngtll, I1Ic.'Rl>u rcd parallcl 10 the hne or force. c.uc('(L~ 1270 mill.
lahuhucd valucs sh;lll be reduced by 201lCrccIIL
Asso ciBtion of Stru ctu ral Enginee(s of the Philippines
fiN
'i"
:;0
CH APTER !)
In sl ip-critical con nections in w hich the d irec ti on of k}(lding

is toward a n edge of a connected parI, adequate ava il able
bearing strength shall be provided based upon the applicable
req uirements of Secl ion 5 10.3. 10.

V\' hcn bolt requirem ents cannot be provided by ASTM A325
lIn ei A325M, FI 852, or A4 90 anel A490M bolts because o j'
J'l 'quiremcn ts for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or diameters
exceeding 38 1m}). bolts or threaded rods conforming to

AST M A354 Gr. BC, A354 Gr. BD, or A449 arc perllli lled
to be used in acco rdance with the provisions for lhrci.ldcd
roels in Table 510.3.2.
W he n AS TM A3 54 G r. BC, A3 54 Gr. BD. or A449 bo its
a nd th readed rods arc ll sed in slip-cri tical co nnections, the
bolt geometry including the head and llut(S) shall be equal
La or (if large r in diameter) proportional to that prov ided by
AST M A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 a nd A490M
bolts. Installati on shaH comply with all appli cab le
requirement s of' the RCSC Specification with modilicatioll s as
requ ired for the increased d ia me ter andl OJ' length to provide
the design pretension.
510.3.2. Size 'Illd Use ofl-loles

T he ma ximum sizes o f ho les for bo il s are given ill T a bl e
5! 0.3.3 , except that larger holes , required for tolerance on
location of anchor rods in concrete foullu at ioIlS, ~l l'e penniucd
in columll b;'ls e details.
Steei and Meta!
5-89
Ove rs ized holes arc perm itt ed in any o r all pl ies of slipcri ti cal con ncct ions, but they sh,,11 Ilot be used in bearingtype connections . Hardened washers shall be installed over
overs ized holes in an Oll ter ply.
S hort-sl otted hole." are pcnni tted in any or all p lies of slipcritical or bearing-type conn ections . The slots arc permitted
witho ut rega rd to d irect ion o f loading in s lip-criti ca l
connectio ns, but the length shall be norm;ll to the direct ion
of the load in bearing-lype connectiOns. Vvashers shall be
insta ll ed over Sh0l1-slo tled holes in an ouler ply; when highstrength bolts are used, such washers shull be luU'<lcned.
Long-slott ed hol c!-i arc permitted in only one of th e
con nected parts of e ithe r a slip-crilical or bearing-typc
connection at an indivi dual raying surface. Long-slolled holes
are permitted w itham regard lO direction of loading in slipcritical connecti o ns, but shall be normal to the di rect ion of
load in bearing-type connecti ons. W here long-sloHcd holes
arc llsed in an outer ply, plate washers, or a contlnllolls bar
w ith standard ho les, havin g a si ze suffi cient to compl etely
cover t he slot afte r installati on, shall be provi ded. 1n hi ghstrength bolted connections, sllch plate washers or continuous
bars shall be noLless than 8 mm th ick and shall be of SU11cturai
grade mate ri al, but need not be hardened. If hardened washers
arc required for use of hi ghstrength bolts, the harde ned
washers shall be pl aced over tile outer surface of the pl ate
washer or bar.
510.3.3 Minimum Spacing

The di sta nce be Lween centers of stand ard , oversized , o r
slotted ho les , shall no t be less than 2 2f:, times the nomi nal
diameter, d, of the fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred .
Hole Dimens ions
13,111
O;alU~l.:'r
M1 6
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
?:M36
_ .
S!;lIldanl
(DI;t )
IS
22
24
27
Owrsi~.o.:
(Dia)
20
24
28
30
30
35
33
d+3
38
d+8
Sho n -Slot
(Width x l..englll)
8).; 22
22x 26
24 x 30
27 x32
30 xl?
33 x 40
(i/+3)x(d+ 10)
L(llI~ S !"t
( Width xLcngth)
18 x 40
22 x 50
24 ;( 55
27 x 60
30 x 67
33 x 75
(,/ + 3}.\' 2.5 (/
--
Standard holes or short-slott ed holes transverse to the

direct ion of the load shall be provided in accordance wilh
the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes,
ShOIl-sloned holes parallel to the load or 10ng-sloHed holes
are appro ved by th e e ngin eer-of-record. Fin ger shims up to
6 mIn are permitted in slip-c ritical connection s designed on
the bas is o f standard holes w ith out redu cin g the nomin al
shear strength of the faste ner to that specifi ed for slo Lted
510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance

The distance from the center of
i.\ s ta nda rd ho le to an
edge o f a co nn ected part in a ny d irection sh all not be less
th an eit her the <lpp licabJ c value from Table 5J 0 .3.4, or as
required in Section 5 J 0.3 . 1O. The di stance from the ce nter
o f' an ove rsized or slotted hole to all edge of a conll ected
part shall be no t less tha n that requi red for a stHllda rd hole to
an edge of a con nected part plus the <.lpplic.:1ble increment
C2 from Table 5 10 .3.5.
User~~~~: '['h~ edg~. 9istaIl~es< in T,~l>les . ~ JO.~.4 me
minil!ju,rn ""e,dg~ " ".djstal~~es : ,:,' bas~ .on stal1~ard fa~ric~,tion

Pf"J.cticcs and . workmanship tolerances. The appropdate
provi sions of S eclions 510.3.1 0 and 5 J0.4 muSI be
sa ti sfi ed .
holes.
l\lationa l Structu ral Cod e of tile P hili ppines
(-3(11 Editio n
Vo lume 1
[;.gO
GHAPTEFl S . Steel and Metals
;\;:",;,.; :::,';' '.. ':Tjbjt51013~5,' ','
510.3 .5 Maximulll Spacing a nd Edge Distauce
", '.
':'vid~isilf;EdglDJ~lliri'~~Iiicr~riieilt Ci,:itiJh:~'"
The IIl<lXilll1l1ll dislilnce from the cC lllcr of ilny boll or rivet

Ihc IIcarcsl edge of pallS in conlact shall he 12 limes thc
thickness of lhe conncctcd pall um.ler considcrati on. but shall
lUll exceed J 50 mill . The Jongiludinal spaci ng of faslcners
bCIWCCIl clcmenls in cominllous COll\;lct consisting or .1 pIcHe
and a shape or two plates shall be as follows:
(0
Slo((ed Holes
-.-----~---
Nominal
l)iamctcr of
Fastener
(mm)
I Al ug Axis Pcq ){'lUlkulilr
wEdl:1!
Oye rslzed
I AlII~ Axis
I'andle! (0
Edge
Holes
<22
2'
LOllf,
ShUr1 Slots
Sims . 1
3
3
O.75d
>27
Boll Dj.ullcle!" (mill)
AI
Sheared
Edges
1. IWhcn !cnVlh of ~ t lJl is bs tliall n~.timutll aHI)W"~bt~ (see Tallie ~IO. 3.JMJ. C2 hi
pcnniucd to be rcduC'c-U by olleh:oIr the tl iffercnc\! txll"."Cen til ... maximulll :mtl
:K'lu.l1 ~IOI !C'flg!hs.
A. Rolled Edges of
Platc,o;.
Shapes or Bars. or
Thermally Cut Edges
I~I
I
!
fal
28
3'
22
26
28
30
3'
'6
20
22
2'
27
30
36
42141
6<
38
'6
Over 36
1.75d
I.2sd
38 hll
'8
52
1,c~~1 ... d~ discttlCti JR permitted 1(1
Ix used pn1\'ided pro\isiolls
I.
For painted membe rs or unpainted mc mbers not subject In

corrosion, Ihe spacing shnl! nOl exceed 24 limes 111<:.
thickncss of thc thinncr plate 01' 305 III Ill.
2.
For unpainted members of weathering steet subject III

atmospheric corrosion. the spacing shall lIot exceed l--i
limes the th ickness of thc Ihilmer platc or 180 mm .
5JO.3.6 Tension and Shear Strength of Bolts and

Threaded Parts
0(
Scchuu :'i IO.1JO. II~ appropri:uc .1I1! S3li ~l'i ... d.

!bl FOI ovcfsilCd or ~ t(111cd hok:~. sec Tab le 51003.5
fel All edge distances in 1 111~ co\umn ;"c permitted 10 be ,cducl,:d 3 I1In\
Ihe hok U ;I! a [)Oin!
where required s lreuglh docs not exceed 2:'i perccill of the m:u.:illlulO Slten&th
IheciemCn! .
Idlll,e~c .\IC pcmliltcd 10 be 32 nun ~t the em.1I of bealll eonOC(1ton ~n&lc$ .
sh... ar end plates.
The des ign tell sion or shear sirength. f/J RII and the 3110wablc
tension or shear strength , R,JQof a silug-lightened or
pretcnsioned high-strength bolt or threaded p:ut shaH he
dctermined according to the limit states of tensile lupturc Hnd
shear mpturc as follows:
(510.3- 1)
=O.7':{LRFQ
Q =20CX:ASD)
wl)ere
F,,,.
J:;,
= nominal .cnsile SIre"
A/,
Slress, F,,,.from Tab le 51 0.32,M p"

:::: nominal unthrca(/cd body area of bolt or
threaded pan (for upset rods, sec footnot e d,
Table 5 10.3.2). m",'
or shear
The required tensile strength shall include any I!'l ';;' }

resulting from prying action produced by dcfoflnali ul;"': : , .~
connected pm1s.
Association of Structural Engilleers of Ihe Philippines
CHI\PTEH 5
510.3.7 Combint'd T ensioll and Shl'ar in Ilc.ilringType C onn ec ti uns

The ilvailablc tensil e strength or <l bolt subjc(lcd 10
com bi ncd tensi o n <lnd shear shall he determ ined according 10
the lill li t simes of (CI1SiOll aile! shear I1Jpture :L'i f() ll ows:
(0 I 0.3-2)
= 0.7 _~LliFlJ
resistance. R"jQ,shall be detcrm ined for the li mit

slip as follows:
For co nn ections .in
whi ch prevention
or sli p is a
se rv iceability limit state
f~, ::::: nomi na l (ensil e Slress modified

effec ts of sheari ng stress, M pft
(0
ind udc the
For connec tio ns designed

strength leve l
I~"f\. S F", (LRFD )

F,l,. ::::: 1.3F,,, - $F,w
1'1= LSO (ASD)
:$;
(0
JI
;; mea n slip coeffi cient for Class A or B surfaces,

as appli cable . or as es tablished by tests
;; 0.35 fo r Class A su rfaces (unpai nted clean mil l
scale sleel surfaces or sUlfaccs wit h Class A
coalings on bl a<;I-eJeaned steel and hot-dipped
Fm = no mi n<l l shea r s tress fro m T able 5 10.3.2, MP a

=the req uired s hear stress, MPa
galvanized and ro ughened surfaces)
= 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted bl as t-
Thc available sh ear stress of the fastener shall equal or cxceed

the req uired shear s trength pe r unit Jrea,F,
User Note: Note that when the req uired stress,f. in either
shear o r tcnsion. is less than or equal to 20 percent of the
corresponding availab le stress, the effects of combined
stress need not be invest iga ted. Al so note th al Equations
5 10.3-3a and 51 0.3, 3b can be rewritten so as to find a
Du
cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B

coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
;:: J .13; a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the
mean installed bolt pretension to lhe specified
minimum boh pretension. The use o r other va lues
may be approved by the engineer-of- record.
11.\( = hole fac tor determined as follows:
nomina l shear stress, F~\" as a fu nction of the required

[ensile stress.[,..
For standard size holes
(II)
Slip- C riti cal
Connections
High-s trength bolts in sli p-c riti cal connections arc permitted
to be designed to prevent slip either as a serviceability limit
slat e or at the required stre ngth limit slate,
connection
mu st also oc checked for shear strength in Hccordancc with
Sectio ns 510. 3.6 and 5 ! 0.3.7 and bea ring stre ngth in
accordance with Sec tions 510.3. 1 and 5 10.3.10.
nlC
Slip-cri tical connecti ons shall be designed as follows. unless

otherwise des ignated hy the cnginecr- of- record. Connections
with stJndard hol es or slots transverse to the direction o r rile
load shall be de sign ed ror slil) as a scrvicc:lbility limit
state, Connections with oversized holes or slots p"rallel 10
Ihe directio n of the load shall be designed to prcvclll slip;,1t
the rcquired strength level.
h,,_= I .00
(b) For ovcrsizcd and
short-slollcd holes
in
.Q= L76(ASD)
where
Fm. (ASl)
. 'J
510.3.8 High-Strength !lolls
prevent slip at (he req ui red
= 08S(LRFLi
~II =nominal (cnsile stress fro m Ta hlc 5 10.3.2 , M Pa
I ..
sl(II C o r
(5 10.3-4)
</! = LOO (LRFq
1'",.
5,91
The design slip resistHl1ce, R,p and the allowable slip
whe re
~ -n./~1I
l "m::::: 1.31-,,(
-'- . /'..
S!eei and Metal
Nl
Til
h,,, =0.85
(e) For long-sloHed ho lcs

h". =0.70
::;: number o f slip planes
::;: minimum fastener tension given in Table
510.3.1, kN
User Note: TIlere are special cases where, with oversize .

holes and slots parallel to the load, the movement possible
due to connection slip cou ld cause a structural fai lure.
Resistance and safcty faclors arc provided for connccti ons
where slip is prevented unt il the req uired strength load is
reached.
Design loads are used for either design method . and all
connections must be checked for stre ngth as beanngrype

connections.
U1
Nation al Structural Code of the Philippines G Edi tion Vol ume 1
CHAPTEH:> Steel and MClals
592
510.3.9 Co mbined Tension and ShcH!' in Slip .. C riti cal
Fu
= specified mini m um ten sil e strength of the
Le
= clem' di stance. in Ihc direction of the force,
ConnecOo ll s
connec ted materia l, MP"
When a slipcritica! connection is subjected to ;;111 applied

ten sio n that reduces Ihe nct d<llllping forl:c , the available
slip res isl<lllcc per bolt, from Section 5JO . 3. 8 ~ shall he
between the edge of the hule and th e edge of

th e .uljacelll hole or edge o f the mat erial.
mill
ll1ulliplied by the factor, k.r , as foll ows:
= thi ckness of cOllllec ted material. mill

(510.35a)
k,
=I
(5 10.351
where
= number of bolts carrying the applied te:nsion

= tensi o n force due to ASD load combin a ti ons,
7~,
=:
510.3.1, kN.
tcnsion force due
kN.
to LRI~D
The nominal strength of spec ial fasteners o ther than the

bolts presented in Table 5! 0.3.2 shal! be verified by tests.
load combi nati ons.
510.3.12 Tension Fasteners

When bolts or other fasteners in (e'nsion arc attached to an
unstiffened box or HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall
be determined by rational analysis.
510,3.10 Hearing Strength at Holt Holes

The available bearing strength,
q,Rn and R,Jn, flt
bolt
holes shall be detemlined for the limit sta te of bearing as
follows:
=O.75(LRFf~
I.
a.
510.4 Affected Elcmcnts of Members and Connecting

Elements
This section applies to elements of membe rs at connections
Q=200(ASq
and connecti ng elements. such as plates. gussets , angles,
For a bolt in a connection with standard. oversized, and

Sho ll- sJolted hol es, independent of lhe direc tion of
loading, or a lon g-s lolled hole with the s lo t parallel
to the direction ort he bearing force:
when deformation at the bolt hole al service load is a
de sign co nsideration
R" = 1.2LJF"
Bcaring strcngt h shall be chec ked for hoth bearing-type

and s ljp ~c ri(i caJ co nn ection s . Th e usc of overs ized holes
and short and lo ng -s loH ed holes para ll e l ( 0 th e line of
force is restri cted to s lip -critical co nnecti ons per Section
510.3.2.
510,3,11 Special rasteners
kN.
= minimum fastener tension given ill Table
1i,
For co nnections, the beating resistance shall be taken as the

sum of the bearing rc~i s lan c cs of the i ndi vidual bolts.
5, 2.4d1F"
(510.36a)
find
5 10.4.1 Strength of Elements in Tension

The design s tre n gth ,
Rn /n ,
and the a llo wab le s tren ti h,
of affected a nd connecting clements loaded in
For tensile yielding of connecting elements:
when defoml<H ion at the bo ll hole at service lo,ad is not

a design considerat ion
11" = 1.5J.,1F" o,3.OdIF,.

C.
R".
tension shall be the lower value obtained according lo the

limil slates of tensile yielding and tensile n1pture .
1.
b.
brackets.
(510.4- 1)
=090(LRFq
(5 10.36b)
For a bolt in a connection with long-s loHed holes with
2.
= 1.67 (ASD)
For tensile nlplurc of connecting e le me nts:
the SIOI [>Clpcndicular to the direclio n of force:

(510.360)
d.
For connections made using bolts that pass compll~ lcly

through an unstiffencd box member or HSS, see Section
510.7 and Equation 510.7l,
where
= 1l01!linal holt diameter, mm
=O.7S(LRFD,
Q=200(ASq
where
At'
= effective net area as defined in Section 50~. :; 3,

111m 2; for bolted splice plat es ,
A, = A" 5, 0.85A,
Association of S tructura l Engineers of the Philippine s
CHAPT [11 :;
Steel r.wc! Met;li
510.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear
for KUr > 25 the provisions of Sectio n 505 apply,
The ilvaililhlc ~hc<lr yield strenglh of affec ted and connecting

d~~ lllcnt s in shear shall be the lower value obtained according
510.5 Fillers
III the limi! stales uf sl1ear yielding and shear IlJplurc :
For sheilI' yielding of the clement:
J.
(51043)
Q = 1 .5()(AS~
= Loo(umJ
2,
For shear rupture of the clement:

(5104-4)
=O.7S(LRFq
In welded consllllction. any filler 6 mill or more in thickness

shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall be
welded to the part 011 which il is Ijtt ~d with sufficient weld 10
l rall~mit th e splice plate load, applied at the su rfac.:c of the
filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be
sunicicllI 10 transmit the splice plate load and shall be long
enough [0 avoid ovcrJotlding the filler along the toe of th e
weld . Any filler less than 6 111m thick shall have its edges
made nush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld
size shall be the sum of the size necessary 10 caJTY the sp lice
plu s the thickne ss of the filler plate.
When a bolt th at carries load passes through fillers thai arc
equal [0 or less than 6 mm thick, the shear strength shall be
used without reduction. When a bolt that carries load passes
through fillers Ihat arc gretltcr Ihan 6 !Hm thick, one of lhe
following requirements shall apply:
where
A,iI'
~)-93
== net area subject to shear, mnl.
510.4.3 Block Shear Strength

Th e available st rength for the limit sta te of block shear
rupture alollg a shea r failure path or path(s} and a
perpendi cul ar tension failure path shall be taken as
I.
For fillers that are equal to or less than 19 mm thick, the

shear slrcnglh of the boilS shall be mul1iplied by the
factor II - 0.4(1 - 0.2 5)J [S .I.: II - 0.01 54 (1 - 6)JJ.
where I is the total thickness of the fill ers up to ! 9 mm

2.
The f,lIcrs shall be extended beyond the joint and the

filler extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
unifomll y distribute the total force in the connected
element over the combined cross section of the connected
clement and the fill ers;
3.
The size of the joint shall be increased to

accomlllodate a number of bolts thai is eq ui valent to
lhe lOla I number required in (2) above; or
4,
The joint shall be designed to prevent sli p at required

strength Icvels in accordance with Section 5 10,3,8.
(5IOA5 )
Q=2.00(ASq
where
A g ., = gross area subject
(Q
shear, 111m2
Am ::::- nci aren subject to tension. mm2

Am' :;:nct area subject
to shear, mm ]
Wh ere thc tension stress is uniform, Ub.t == J: where the

tension stress is non uniform, V')s :;:0,5.
User Note: The cases where Ubs must be taken equal to
0.5.
510.4.4 Strength of Elements in Compression
For KUr $25

(510.4-6)
Groove~welded s plices in plate girders and beams shall

develop the nomi nal strength of the smaller spliced section.
Other lypes of splices in eros-ii sections of plate girders and
beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at the
point of the splice.
510.7 Bearing Strength
The ava il able strength of connectin g clements in

compression for the limit stale., of yie ldillg and buckling
sll<lll be determined"as follows.
P" = FyAg
510.6 Splices
The design bearing st rength, R11 ilnd the allowable
In,
bearing strength, R/I

of surfaces in contac t shall be
determined for the limit stale of bearing (local compressive
yielding) as foll o ws:
=O.7S (LRFq
= 1.67 (ASD)
The nominal bearing strcngth,Rl/,is defined as follows for
the various types of bearing:

Nalional Struclural Code of the Philippines 6 'h Edition Volume 1
.'-'"1)
!; 9t1
I.
CHAPTER 5 . Steel and Meta ls
For mi lled SUrf'ICCS, pins in reamed, drilled. or hored

h()les.lmd ends offiued bearing stiffeners:
(510.71)
where
= specified minimum yield stress, MP,I

:; projected bearing area, Illln 2
2.
For expansion rollers and rockers
n.
fd S635mm
5 10.9 AndlOr Rods Hnd Embedments

Anchor rod s shall be designed 10 provide Ihe rClJui l'cd
resi stance to loads on the. completed strucHlrc al the base Dr
columns including the !let tensile components of illly bendin g
momenl Ilwl Illay rcsu l1 from load combinations s lipuJ;llcd in
Section 502 .2. The anchor rods shall be de.... ignc-d in
accordance wI,h the requirements for thread ed parts in
TaI1I 0 510.3.2.
Larger oversized ;\nd slotled holes arc permitted in base
plates when adequ<l1c bearing is provided for the nU L by
using slruclHra l or plate washers to bridge the ho le.
(5 10.72)
r~e rl11 i tted ho le s izes and corresponding
washe r dime nsions are given in the AlSC Manual of Steel
Construction
User Note: The
b. If d > 25 635 min
(SI ; Rn = 302(F) -90Y,1/20)
(51O.7}M)
(S IO.7.})
where
;: d iameter, 111m
= length of bearing, n11ll
d
J
W hen horizon tnl forces nrc prcsclH at column bases, th ese

rorces should, where possible, be resis ted by bearing agai nst
concrete eleme nts or by shear frict ion between the column
base plate and the foundation. Whcn anchor rods <-I re (~ s igncd
to res ist horizontal force th e base plate hole size, the anchor
rod setting toleran ce, a nd th e horizo lll al movement of the
column shall be conside red in th e des ign.
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete

Proper provision shall be made to transfer th e co lumn loa ds
and mome nt s to the fOOlings and fou ndati ons.
User Note: See Chapter 4 for embedme nt design and for

shear friction design. See OS HA for special erection
requirements for anchor rods.
In Ih e absence of code regulations. the design bearin g

strength , fA PI"
and the allowa bl e bearing strengt h,
510.10 Flanges and Weos with Co ncentrated Forces
P" l ilc ,for the limit state of concrele cru shing arc
penni tl ed
10
be taken
ilS
fo llows:
<1>, = 0.60 (u mi
.Q, = 2S(ASD)
The nomi nal bearing strength, PI" is de termined as follows:
I.
On the full area of a concrete support :

Pp =O.85f~A,
2.
(510.8 1)
On less than th e full area of a conc rete SUPPOI':
(510.82)
where
A,
A2
;: area of sleel concentrica ll y bearing 0 11 a

2
concrete su pport, rnm
;;; maximum area of the portion of the suppol1ing
surface that is geometrically similar 10 and
co nce ntric wi th the loaded area, mm 2
This
sec ti on
applies
to
sing lea nd
doublec oncentrated force app lied norma l to the fl ange(s) of
wide flange sect ions a nd simi lar built -up shapes. A singleconcentrated force can he ei the r tensi le or compressive .
Double-concentrated forccs are o nc tensi le and one
compressive and form a couple on the same side of the
loaded member.
When the required strength exceeds the available strength as
dctennined for the limit states listed in this section, stiffener.-;
andlor doublers shall be provided and sh~ll be sized for Iht
difference between the required strength and the avai lahlc
strength for the appl icable limit state. Stiffeners shall also lll(;t1.
the design requirements ill Section 5 10. 10.8. Doublers ~; h: .i i
also mce{ the des ign requ irement in Scc li o n 510. 10 .9.
User Note: See Appendix A-6.3 for requirements fo r the
ends o f cantilever members.
or
Stiffeners arc required at unframed e nds

beams ill
accordance will I the requirclnents of Seelioll 510.10.7.
510.10.1 Flange Local Bendin g

Thi s section appli es to ten sit e sin gle-co ncentrated forces
and the tensile compone nt of doub le-conce nt rated forces.
Associa tion of Structu ra l Enginee rs of the Phi lippines
CHAPTER 5
The design strength, Nn , and the allowable strength,
R,)r.2.f'or the limit state of flange local bending shall be

determined as follows:
Ii" = 6.251 j 1",1
(510.10-1)
Q= 167(AS~
=O.90(LliFll
where
= specified minimum yield stress of the flange,
MPa
I".
web thickness, 111m
510.10.3 Web Crippling

This section applies to compressive single-concentrated
forces or the compressive component of doubleconcentrated forces.
The available strength for the limit state of web local
crippling shall be determined as follows:
=O.75(LliF~
If the length of loading across the member flange is less

than O. ISlh, where h, is the member flange width, Equation
510.10-1 need not be checked.
I.
When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted

is applied at a distance from the member end that is
greater than or ~ual to &2:
R"
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be

provided.
=08CX~.[I+-l NY ~)J.5l
"\d AI!
2.
a.
When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted

is applied at a distance from the member end that is less
than d12:
For Nld $0.2
The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:

When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at
a distance from the member end that is greater than the
depth of the member d,
R" =(Sk+N)1",.,)",
2.
(510. I 0-2)
When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at

a distance from the member end that is less than or
equal to the depth of the member d,
R" = (2.5k
-I-
N )1"),,,,/ '"
(510.10-3)
where
k
. FyII'
= distance from ouler face of the flange to the web

toe of the fillet, mm
= specified minimum yield stress of the web,
MPa
N
'I<'
Q=150(AS~
=IOO(LliFlJ
1.
EF),,,I J
(510.10-4)
This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both

components of double-concentrated forces.
The available strength for the limit state of web local yielding
shall be determined as follows:
Q=200(AS~
The nominal strength, Rn , shall be determined as follows:
When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a

distance from the member end that is less than
10 I! , H'I shall be reduced by 50 percent.
510.10.2 Web Local Yielding
595
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners OJ' a doubler

plate shall be provided.
= thickness of the loaded flange, mm
If
::::;
Steel and Metal
= length of bearing (not less than k for end beam

reactions), mm
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Votume 1
(51O.10-5a)
596
CHAPTEH 5 . Steel and Melals
b. For NIt! > 0.2

II"
=-C,I~.f1
-2h
[0.4(hll",)']
--
(5 10. I 0-
Il bl
7)
b. por, (h/ I,.:
(5 1O. 10-5b)
XI/b I
1.7. the limit stille of web sidesway
where
When the required strength of the web ex.ceeds the ,wailable

strength. local lateral bracing shall be provided at bOlh flanges
althe point of application of Ihe concentf3tcd forces.
= overall depth of the member, mm
= flange Ihi ck nc~s. mm
If
When required. a transverse stiffener, or pair of transverse
stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending at Icasl one-half Ihe
In Equations 510.10-6
definitions apply:
and
510.10-7,
Ihe
following
deplh of Ihe web shall be provided .

hf
510.10.4 Web Sidesway Buckling
C,
This Section applies only to compressive singlc-colltcnl nllcd

forces 'Ipplied to members where relative lateral movemclll
between the loaded compression Oangc and lhe tension
flange is not restrained at the point of application of lhe
concentrated force .
"
The available strength of the web shall be determined as

follows:
=0.8S(LRFQ
Q = 1.76(ASD)
The nominal strength , R,p for the limit state of web

sidcsway buckJ ing shall be dClcnnined as follows:
if the compression flange is restrained against rotation:
a.
For (1l/ l w XI/b f )5,2.3
C'I~.r/[ {h l.. )3]
R = -2 - 1+0. -l -
"h
b.
For
I/bl
10" MPa when 1.1" <My ( LRFD) or

1.51.1" <My (ASD) al Ihe loealion of the force
= 3.31 x 10' MP. when 1.1" ~ My (LRFD) or
I.SMa ?: My (ASD) at th e ioccl1ion of the force
= clear distance between flan ges less the fillet or
corner radius for rolled shapcs; distance between
adjacent lines of! asteners or the clear distance
between l1anges whcn welds arc used for builtup shapes, 111m .
= iargestiatcrally unbraced lcngth along either the
flange at the point of load, mm.
= Oange thi ckness. mill .
= web thickness. mm .
User Note: For detenninalion of adequalc restraint, ref~~1!r

Appendix A-6.
-:.;
510.10.5 Web Compression Buckling

This Scction applies to a pair of compressive singJcconcentrated forces or the compressive components in a pair of
(510. 10-6)
(II/I .. 'N/b f )> 2.3,lhe limit slale of web sidesway
double-concenlrated forces, applied at bolh flanges of a

member at the same location .
TI1C available strength for the limit slatc of web local buckling
shall be detennined as follows:
When the required slrengUl of (he web exceeds the available

strength, local lateral bracing shall be provided at the tension
nangc or either a pair of transverse stillcners or a doubler
plate shall be provided.
I.
If
I .
= nangc widlh, 111111 .
= 6.62 X
If the compression flange is not restrained against

rotation:
(510.10-8)
R"
=090(LRFQ
0. = 1.67 (ASD)
When the pair of concentrated compressive forces [0 be

resisted is applied at a distance from the member end (hat is
less Ihan dl2,
R" shall be reduced by 50 percenl.
When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of

transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending the fuIl
deplh of the web shall be provided.
CHAPTEH 5
510.10.6 Web I'II/IC I Zone Shear
Steel and Metal
591
This section appli es to double-concentrated forces applied

In one or bo th na ngcs of a member al lhc same locati on.
When required. doubler piate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners

511<111 be provided withi n the boumhtries the rigid conncction
whose webs lie in a common plane.
The ava i l~l bl c strength of the web panel zone for the li mit state
ofshc.u' yielding shall be de termined as foll ows:
Sec Section 5 I 0. 10.9 for doubler plale design req uiremen ts.
';
=O.90(LRFLj
Q = 1.67 (A SI~
When lh (~ '.! ffcCI o f panel-zone deformat ion on frame

sf{Jbilil), i.\' not consider ed ill rhe allaly.\';s:
510,10,7 Unframed Ends of Hearns and Girders

At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise
restrained aga inst rotati on about th eir longitudinal axes, a
pai r of tnlllsversc st iffeners. ex tend ing the fuJI depth of the
web, shall be provided,
For Pr S O.4 P...
510,10.8 Add itional
The Ilomina! strength, R /I shall be determined as follows:

I.
<.1.
Stiffener Requirements
for
ConcentraCed Forces
R" = O.60F,.dJ '"

b.
Fo r p ,
(5 10 10-9)
> O.4Pr
(510.1- 10)
J.
When
frame
stability,
incl uding
pl astic panel-zone
Stiffeners required to rcsist tensile conccntrated forces shall

be designcU in accordan ce with th e requirements of Section
504 and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The welds
10 the flange shall be sized for the difference between the
required strength and avail ablc limit stale strength. The
sti ffe ner to web welds shall be sized to transfer to the web
the algebraic difference in tensi le force at the ends of the
stiffener.
defonnation. is considered in the anal ys is:
a. For p, :.sO. 75Pr
(510_10- 11 )
b . Fo r p ,
>
0_ 75P,
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces

shall be designed in accordance with the requirements in
Secti ons 505,6 .2 and 5 10.4,4 and shall either bear on or be
welded to the loaded fl ange and welded to the web. The
we lds 10 the nange shal l be sized for the difference between
the required strcngth and the applicable li mit stale strength.
The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web the
algebraic difference in compression fo rce at (he ends of the
stiffener. For fitted bearing stiffeners. sec Section 5 10.7.
Tn.1Ilsvcrse full depth bearing stiffeners for co mpressi vc
forces il pplicd to a beam or plate girder flangc(s) shall be
designed as ax iall y co mpressed members (co!unUls) in
accordanc(". with the requirements of Sections 505.6.2 and
In Eq u3Iions 510. 10-9 through 5 10_I 0- 12, the followi ng

definitions appl y:
A
1;<1
db
de
F.I
P,
P,
P,.
1\
Ie!
t".
mm 2,
= column cross-sectional area,

= width of column fl ange, mm.
:;:;; beam depth, mill.
:= column dept h, mm.
:= specified mi ni mum yield stress of the column
web. MP._
= P y,N (LRFD )
= O.6P y.N (AS D)
:= required strength, N.
:= FyA ,axial yield ~ trc n g lh of th e co lumn , N.
:= thi ckness of th e column fl ange, mill .
:= coJ umn web thi ckness, 111m.
51Oo4A.
The member properties shall be determin ed using an

effective length of O.75h and a cross section composed of
two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of 2St at
intcrior stiffeners and 121 at the ends of members. TIle weld
connecti ng full depth bearing stiffeners to the web shal l be
sized to transmit tile differcnce in compressive force at each
of the stiffeners to the wel>.
Tnlllsvc rse :tnd diagollal stiffen crs shall compl y with the
following additional criteria:
I.
The width of each stiffener pl us o lle ~ hal f the thickness

of the column web shall not be less than one-third of the
width of the Oange or moment connection plate
deli vering the co ncentratcd force.
2.
TIle thi ckness of a stiffener shaH not be less than onchalf the thi ckness of thc flangc or moment connecti on
National Structural Code of the PI1ili ppines 6'" Edition Volume 1
!j9S
CHAPTER 5 . Steet and Meta ts
plate del ivering the concclllfiucd load, and grea ter tlwn or
equal 10 the width divided by 15 .
3.
Transverse stiffeners shall extend it mi nimul1I o f ollehal f the dept h of the member except as required in
5 10.10.5 and 5 10.10.7.
510.10.9 Add itio nal
Concentrated
Doubler
Plate
for
Forces
Doubler plmes required for compression strength shall be

designed in accordance with Ihe requirement s o f Section
505.
Doubler plates required for tensi le strenglh shall be designed
in accordance with the requirements of Section 504 .
Doubl er plates required for shear strength (see Section
510.10.6) shall be design ed in accord ance ' with the
pro vis io ns of Section 507.
This Section covers me mbe r strength design consider<ltions

perwining 10 connections to HSS IIlclllhers and box SCt~t ion s
of unifo rm wall th ic kness. Sec also Sec ti on SIO for
ad{lition al requ ire ment s fo r bolt ing to lISS.
The Sec tion is organized as follows:
511.1
511.2
5 11.3
Concentrated Forces on )-I SS

I-ISS-to- HSS Tru ss Connections
HSS-Io-HSS Moment Connections
SIl.l Concentrated Forces on IlSS
In additi on, doubler plates shall comply wi th the fo ll owi ng

c riteria:
511. 1.1 Definitions of Parameters
I.
The thickness and extent of the doubl er plate s11<111

provide the additionalmalerial necessary to equal or
exceed the $(rength requirements .
I!
2.
111e doubler plate shall be welded to devel op the

proporti on of the lotal force transmitted to the doubler
plate.
Bp
J)
Fy
Fyp
PI(
H
Ip
:::: overall width o f rcct<ln gular IISS member,

measured 90 degrcc$ to the phlllc of the
connect ion, 111111
:;:: width of plate, measured 90 degrees to the plane
of the connec li on , I11Ill
= outside diameter of round HSS member, mill
=specifi ed minimum yie ld Slress of HSS
member material , MPa
= specified min imulll yie ld stress of plate, MPa
= speci fied minimum tensi le strength of HSS
material , MPa
= overa ll height of rectangular I-lSS member,
measured in the pla ne of the connection, mm
:::: bearing le ngth o f the load. measured parallel
10 the axis of the HSS member, (or measu red
across the width of the HSS in the case of loaded
cap plates). mm
:::: design waJl thickness of HSS member. mOl
=thi cknc:cis of plate. mm
511.1.2 L imits of Appl icability

'OlC cri tcria hcrcin are applicab le onl y when the connecl::l';
configuration is within the following limi ts of applicah;l i:::
I.
S trenglh : Fr S 360 Ml'a for /iSS
2.
Ductility: F)/F" S 0 .8 for II SS
3.
Olhcr limits apply for speci fic cri lcrin
511.1.3 Concentrated Force Dis tributed Trans\,("-';<:i

511.1.3. Criterion for Round IISS
Whcn a conccntrated force is di stri buted 1l'lI nsvcrsciy Ie; ; .....
axis of the HSS th e desi gn strength, fRII, Hnd the allowable
Association of S truclural Enginee rs of the Philippines
CHAPTEH 5
sifeng lh, Rilln, fOf Ihe limit siale of local yielding shall be
dClermined as follows :
Rn = Fy l' 15.5,{ 1 - 0.8IJJpID)JQf

= 0.90 (LRFD)
f}
This limit state need 110 \ be chec ked unless the chord
member and brall ch member (connecting clement) have
Ih e same widlh
(5 11.1 -1)
= 1.67 (ASD)
(P = 1.0).
c. l . 1 For the limit state of sidewall loca l yielding.
where Qj is given by Equation 5 11. 2 ~ I.
R" = 2F,.r[5k + N]
Additional limits of app li cability arc
l' = 1.0 (LRFD)
i.
0.2 < 8p1V "5 1.0
2.
Dlr S 50 for Tconnccl ions and DII
5 9!~
SIGl?l and Metal
(511.l-4)
f}
= 1.50 (AS)))
where
~ 40 for cross-
co nnections
= o Ulsidc comer radius of Ihe HSS. which is

pcrmitlcd to be taken as ! .51 if unknown , mill
Sl1.1.3b Criteria for Rectangular HSS

When a concen tratcd force is distributed transversely to (he
axis of Ihe HSS Ihe design slrength, Rn, and Ihe allowable
sire nglh, RnlfJ., shall be the lowest value according to [he
limit states of local yielding due to unevcn load dis lrib uti on,
shear yielding (punc hing) a nd sidewall strength.
c. I .2 For the limit stat e of sidewall local crippling, in Tconnections,
RII
=1.612[1 + 3N/(H -
3 1)]
(EFy )o"Qf
(5 11.1-5)
Additional Ii mils of applicability are
= 0.75 (LRFD)
f}
= 2.0 (ASD)
I.
0 .25 < 8,,18 '" 1.0
where Qf is given by Equation
2.
8/1 for Ihe loaded HSS wall '" 35
c.I.3 ror the Iimil slate of sidewa ll local buckling in cross
It.
For the limit Slate o f locaJ yielding due

distribution in the loaded plate,
10
connections,
uneven load
1111 = 14813,{H - 3r)] (EFy )05Qf

(51 1. 1-2)
= 0 .95 (LRFD)
h.
= 1.58 (ASD)
l' = 0.90 (LRFD)
(5 11.1-6)
n = 1.67 (ASD)
where QJ is given by Equati on 511.2-10.
For Ih e limit state of shear yielding (punching),
R" =0.6/::" I
[211, + 2Bep]
= 0.95 (LRFD)
(511. 1- 3)
= 1.58 (ASD)
where
B"p
Thc nonun iformity of load transfer along the lin e of weld ,

due to the fl ex ibilit y of Ihe HSS wall in a transverse plate
toHSS connection, shall be considered in proportioning
such welds. This requirement can be satisfied by limi ting
th e total effeclive weld lenglh, u, of groove and fill el welds
10 reclangular HSS as follows:
= I OB"/(BIt) ~ Ell'
Thi s limit Slate need nol be c hecked whe n 8p > (13 21), nor when 81' < 0.85 8 .
C.
5 1 1.2~lO.
For the limit Sl,lte o f sidewa ll under tens ion loading, the
available strength shall be ta ken as the strength for
sidewall local yielding. For the limit slale of sidewa ll
under compression loading, ava ilable strength shall be
taken as the lowe st va lu e obtained ~ccording to th e
limit s lales of s id ewall local yieldin g, sidewa ll local
c rippling and sidewall local buckling.
Lc = 2[10/(Bh)11(Fy l),{FYfllp)]Bp~ 2B"

(511.1-7)
where
I~
;:; total effective weld length for welds

sides of lhe transverse plate, in. (mm)
011
both
In lieu of Equation 511.1-7, this requirement may be

satisfied by other rational approaches.
5-100
CHAPTEI1 5 - Sleel and Melal!;
51 J.J.4 Concenlraled
Force
Distributed
Longitudinally al the Center of the
HSS
J)iaIlH'tcr or Widlh,
and Actin,.;
PCrlH!IIdieufar 10
Ihe IISS Axis
When a cOllccntrti(cd forcc is di stributed long ttudinall y
a long the axis of the HSS a! the center of the HSS diillllc tcr
511.1.6 Concentrated Axial Foret' 011

of a ncctangular HSS with a C "p Plat e.
or widlh , ilnd also acl s perpendicular to Ihe axis directi o n of

th e i-ISS (or has a co mponent perpendicu lar to the. axis
dircr;ti'}[I o r Ihe HSS), the design slrength, IfJR'I, ,Iud the
allowable stre ngth, RIlIn, perpendicl.;J(If to thc IISS axis
shall be dClcrmincd fo r Ihe limit state
c hord piaslificlHioli
as follows .
When (l COIlCClllnllCd force aCls on the end of iI ca pped HSS,

and th e force is in the direction of thc HSS axis. the des ign
strengt h, JRn, and the al lowa ble strengt h. Rl1/n, 511 .11 b e
dctermined for lhe limi t states o r wall local yielding (due to
tcnsile or comprcss ive fo rces) an d wa ll locn l crippling (du e
to compressive forces on ly), wi th consideration for shear
of
the
I~ nd
lag, as follows.
511.1.4. Crilerion for Round HSS
An additional limit o f applicability is:
DII S 50 fo r Tco nnectiolls and 0 11
connec tio ns
.s
Rn = 5.51')' n( I + O.25NID)Q;
tF 0.90 (LRFD)
40 fo r cross-
(5 11 . 1-8)
n = 1.67 (ASD)
where Q/ is given by Equation 511.2-1.
If (SIp + N) ?: B, the ava ilable Slrength of the I-lSS is

co mputed by summing th e contribulion s of all four HSS
walls.
If (SIp + N) < /3, th e available strength of Ihe HSS is
co mputcd by summing (he co ntributions of thc two walls
SI!.1.4b Criterion for Rectangul ar HSS

An I1ddilional limit of applicability is :
into which the load is di stributed.

a.
8/1 for the loaded HSS wall" 40
For the limit stale o r wall local yielding, ror one wall.
R. = 1',. 1[511' + N)
R. = [/'>" 2ItI - Iplli) [2NIB + 4(1 - IP/iJ)' Qj]

(5 11.1-9)
= 1.00 (LRFD)
=1.00 (LRFD )
f)
= 1.50 (AS D)
b.
BI',. 1
(5 11.1-1 J)
=1.50 (ASD)
For the lim it stale of wall local c rippling. for one wall,
where
Qf= ( I - U2)o ,
(511.1 -12)
V is given by Equalion 511.2-12
ifF' 0.75 (LRFD)

511.1.5 Concenlrated
Force
Distributed
Longitudinally at the Center of Ihe
HSS
Width, and Acting Parallel to the H SS Axis
When it conce ntrated rorce is di stributed 10 ngilUdin a il y
alon g the axis of a rectangular HSS, and a lso aCls parallel
bUI eccentric to the ax is direc ti on of the member, the
connection shall be verified as fo]lows:
Fyptp ~ Ful
(5 11.1 -10)
Association of Structura l Engineers of Ihe Pllilippin es
=2.00 (ASD)
CHAPTI:. n ~)
StGel nnd Metal
511.2 HSStolISS Truss Connections
511 .2. 1 Definitions of Parameters
IISS-(() - I-fSS truss connections <Ire llc1incd as connections
IJ
th at cons ist of one or morc branch members lhal afC directly
welded 10 II cominu.ous chord that passes through the

connection and s hall be classified us follows :
J.
When the punching load (Pr sinfJ) in a brandl memher

is equilibrated by beam shell f in the dlOro member, the
connecti on shall be classified as a T-connection when
the branch is perpendicular to the chord and it Yconnection otherwise.
2.
When the punching load (Pr sin8) in a branch member

is essentially equilibraled (wi lhin 20 percenl ) by load s
in other branch member(s) on the same side of the
connection, the connection shall be classified as a Kco nnection_ The relevant gap is between lhe pJimClry
branch members whose load s equilibrate. An Nconnectio n can be considered as a lype of K connec tio n.
IJb
connection, mill
;;- out side diamc ler o r round HSS main member,
Db
= olltside diam eter of round HSS branch member,
;:;cccenlricity in a truss connection , posili ve being

away from Ih e branches, mm
;:; specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
member matcrial , MPa
;:; specified min imu m yie ld stress of HSS branch
mcmber mat eri al. MPa
;:; specified minimum (en sile st rength of HSS
material, MPa
;:; gap between lUes of branch members in a ga pped
K-conncctioll, neglecting the: welds , mm
= overa ll height of rectangular HSS main member,
measured ill the plane of thc co nnecti on, mill
== overall hei ght of rectangular HSS branc h
member, measured in the plane of the
connection, mm
;:; design wall thickness of HSS main member, mm
;:; design wall thickness of HSS branch member,
111111
!lUll
Fy
I'rb
Fu
g
3.
4.
';; 'J'., ,
When the punching load CPr sill fJ) is transmitted

through the chord member and is equilibrated by
branch member(s) 011 the opposite side, the connection
shall be classified as a cross-connection.
When a conn ection has more than two primary branch
members or branch me mbers in more than one plane,
the co nn ec ti on sha ll be c lassified as a general or
Inulliplanar connection.
1/
lib
,
Ib
mill
f3
When branch members tran smit part of their lo ad as K connections and pan o f their load as T-, Y -, or crossconnecti ons, the nontinaI strength shall be de termined by
interpolatio n all the proponi on of eac h in total.
For the purposes of thi s Specification, the cen terJincs of

branch me mbers and chord members shall lie in a co mmon
plane. Rectangular HSS conneclions are furth er limited to
have all members oriented with walls parall e l to the plane.
For trusses that are made wi th HSS that are connected by
welding branch members 10 chord me mbers, eccentricities
w ithin the limits of applicability are p.ermitted wi th o ut
consideration <;>f th e re sultin g moments for the design of the
con necti on.
= ove rall width of rectangula r I-ISS milin membcr,

measured 90 deg rees to th e pl ane of the
(;oll llection. m ill
;:; overall widlh of rc(;wngular HSS branch
member, measured 1)0 degrees 10 tile plan e of the
Us~r Noti'! .kK.~iii)~Ii\)fi\YiIh 'oii~'brancIi !Jle.ri!ji.ular

to liie'cbord,is often Cl!liOd .anN-'comi.,qUoniY ;,:'
5-10 1
r
'1
o
S
::: the width rat io; th e ratio of branch diameter to

c hord di ameter =- DblD (or rou nd HSS; the ratio
of overall branch width to chord widlh ;:; Bbl B
for rectangular HSS
;:; the effect ive width i'Cilio; lhe Slim of the
perimeters of the two branch members in a K
connection divided by eight limes the chord
width
:;::: the c hord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half
the diameter 10 the 'wall thickness = DI2I [o r
round HSS; the ratio o[ onehal[ the width to
wall thickness:;::: Bnl for rec tangular HSS
= the load length parameter. applicable only to
rectangular IISS; Ihe ralio of Ihe lenglh of
contact of the branc h with the chord in the plane
of the connection to the chord width ;:; NIB.
where N:: I1blsi nO
=- acute .angle bet ween the branc h and c hord
(degrees)
= lhe gnp ratio; the rafi o of th e gap between fil e
bran chcs o f a gapped K connection to lhe width
of Ihe chord = 8/B for rectan gular HSS
National Structural Code o f the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volu me 1
5 102
CHAPTER 5 . Sleel and Melals
511 .2.2 C rileria for Round HSS
3.
The in teraction of stress due to chord member forces and

local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
through the chord-s tress in teraC li on parameter Q/.
Tension branch wall slenderness: mti o of diameter to

willi th ick ness less than or equa l to 50
4.
Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio o f diameter

to wall thickness less th an or equal to O.OSEIFy
Vlhc n the chord is in tension,
5.
Width nuio: 0.2 < DhID:::: 1.0 in general. and 0.4

DblD ~ 1.0 for gapped K-connections
6.
If a gap connccti on: g grcalcr thall or equal

of the branch wall thi ck nesses
7.
If an overlap connecti on: 25%:5 Ov ~ 100%, where 0"

= (qlp)xlOO%. P is Ihe projected length of lhe
overlappi ng branch on the chord; q is Ihe overlap length
measured along the con necting face of the cho rd
beneath the two branches. For overl ap con nect ions, the
larger (or if equal diameter, the thicke r) branch is a
'th ru member" connected direct ly to the chord.
8.
Branc h thickness ratio for overlap con necti ons:

thic kness of overlappin g branch to be less th an or equal
(0 Ihe thickness of the overlapped branch
9.
Srrenglh: F,.:s: 360 MPa for chord and branches
0 =I
When the chord is in compression,
0= 1.0 -
0.3U (J + U)
(511.2-1)
where U is the utilization ratio given by
V=
IP,IA,F~
+ M,ISF,I
(51 1.2-2)
where
P,
= required axial stren gth in chord, N;

for K-conncctions, P, is to be determined on the
side of til e j oin I Ihat has the iowercomprcssion
stress (lower U)
=required flexural streng
th in chord, N-m m
= chord gross area, mm 2
=available stress, MPa
M,
Ag
I-",
= chord elasti c section modulus, mm
= Pu =:. req uired axial strength in chord, using

LRFD load combinations, N
M,
::::: Mu ::::: required flexural strength in chord, using

LRFD load combinations, Nmm
= Fy , MP.
Fc
0.8
Sll.2.2b Branches with Axial Loads in T, y ~ an d

CrossConnections
For T and y. connections, (he design slrength of the branch
~Pn, or the allowable strength of the branch, P,,/fl shall be
the lower value obtaincd according [0 the limit stales o[
chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
I.
For the limit Siale of chord ptastificati on in

connections,
T~
and Y-
P"sin9 = F; ('[3.1 + 15.6/fJ-1''QJ
For design according 10 Seclion 502.3.4 (ASD):
p,
the sum
Fo r design according 10 Secli on 502.3.3 (LRFD):

p,
10. Ductilily: 1-",.1 F"
(0
(511.2- 3)
::::: Pa::::: required ax ial strength in chord, usin g AS!) ,
::::: Mo::::: requi red flexural strength in chord, using

AS D load combinati ons, Nmm
n = 1. 67 (AS D)
= 0.90 (LRFD )
2.
For Ihe limit Slale of shear yielding (punching).
Pn = O. 6Fy mDb[(J + si nS)/2sin'S]
F, = 0.6 Fy , MP.
= 0.95 (LRFD)
511.2.2a Limils of Applicability
.Q = I. 58 (AS D)
The criteria herein arc appl icable o nl y when the connection

configurati on is within lhe foll ow ing limits of applicabilit y:
This Iimil Slale need nol he checked when
loint eccentricity: -0.55D $ c $ O.2SD, where D is the
3.
c hord diameter and c is positive away from the branches
fJ> ( I -
ror the lim it sta le of chord plaslificati on in cross-
conneclions,
P"si nS = 1',",, [5.7/(1 - O.81,8)]QJ
I.
Branch angl e: 9 ;, 30'
2.
Chord wall slenderness: ratio of diameter (0 wall

thickness less Ihan or equal 10 50 for T -, Y - and Kconnectio ns ; less th an or equal (0 40 for crossconnecti ons
Ify).
if = 0.90 (LRFD)
.Q
(511 .2-:,)
= 1.67 (ASD)
CHA PTE:I ~
S!eel and Meta!
511.2.2(.' Branchl's wi lit Axial Loads in K-C onnections
For K COllll ct'lions, the des ign s lrl~llglh of the bmnch, P.. ,
iUH ll hl' ;llIowabh.' s tfl'lll! th of the brand l, I',,/n, shall he the
lower vill uc ohtaincd a(.:(;or<i ing to Ihe li mi l states of chord
pl;lstj lic'l li(111 1(l f g:ll lpc(1 ;lnd 11 verlappcd co nnecti ons and
shear yiddi ng (ptJJH.:hingJ f()I' gapped.connections only.
I.
hlJ" the limit
s[illl~
of chord plastifi<.'a tioll,
h I !'
where
/'
= req uired ax ial strength in chord, N. foor gapped

K-conllections, 1', is to be determined on the
side of the jOil)! thaI has the higher compression
stress (higher U).
:;: required flexural strength in chord, N-mlll
:;: chord gross area, mrnl
= available stress, MPa
:;; chord clastic sec ti on mod ul us, mml
1\"
the nllllprcssion branch :
F,.
S
!'.sine = 1"./,12.0 + I U3D,/D]Q,Q,
For design accord ing to Sec tion 502.3.3 (LRF D):

(51 12-6)
where
(SI1.2-12)
M,
n = 1.67 (ASD)
= () 9() (I.RFD)
J)"
refers to the co mpression branch only, <lnd
5 10J
;:;:: P II = required axial st rength in chord,
using
:;; Mu ;;:;; required flexural strength in chord. using
.LRFD load co mbinations, N-nliTI
= F.. MPa
P,
Mr
r.
(511.2 7)
For des ign accordi ng to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
In gapped connectiolls, g (meas ufed along the crown of" the

chord neglecting we ld dimensions ) is positive. In
overlapped connections, X is negative and eq uals q.
For the tension bnwch .
(5 11 2-8)
2.
POf the limi t state of shear yielding {punching} in

gapped K-connectioJls,
!,,, =
O. 6Fr mIJ;,1 (I ,. sinG)i2sin 'e]
= 0.95 (LRFD)
(SI I.2-9)
n = 1.58 (ASD)
M,
1',
When the chord is in tension,
1.
Bntllch angle:
3.
or overall wall width to

thickness less than or equ al to 35 for gapped Kcon nectio ns and T, y . and cross-connections; I e..~s than
or equ al to 30 for overlapped K-connections
5.
Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overa ll

wall widlh 10 Ihi c kness less than or equal 10
1.2S(J::IF r,,)05 and also less than 35 for gapped Kconnections and T ~, Y- and crossconnections; less than
or cq llalto 1.1 (/'.11;\./)).5 for ove rlapped K,colln ecliolls
6.
Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to

overall wa ll width of chord greater than or equal 10 0.25
for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-conncctions;
greater than or equal 10 0,35 for gapped K-connec tiolls
7.
Aspect ratio: 0.5
When the chord is in compression in gapped Kcon nectills,
4.
(S I1. 2- 11 )
Chord wall slenderness: rati o
4 . Te nsion branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall

width 10 thickness less than OJ' equal to 35
When the chord is in comp ression ill T -. )' -, and crosscon nections,
0= I. 3 - 0.4 U!Jl<ffS I
e ~ 30 ,
2.
(S II2 IO)
3.
Joint ecce ntricity: -O.S5H $ e 5 0.251-1, wh ere H is the
chord depth and e is posi ti ve away from th e branches
Qr= I
2.
Limits of Applicability
The cri teria herein arc applic ab le only w hen the connection
configuratio n i s within the fo llowi ng limits:
S11.2.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS

The interaction of SU'cst,; due (0 chord member forces and
throu gh the chord-s tress in terac tion parameter Qr.
I.
:;: P"
511.2.3~
PI/sinS = (P"si nS) com press ion branch
req uired axial strength in chord, usin g

ASD load combinations, N
:::: Mil :::; required flexural strength in chord, usi ng
ASD load combinations, N-mm
= 0.61', . MPa
P,
ratio of dcpth to width
Where U is the utili zation ratio given by

th
National Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volum e 1
2.0
~j
J(Jtl
C HAPTUi 5 Sleel and Metals
~.
Overlap: 25% ~ u, $ 100%, where (),. = ('III') x 100%.

{J i!-i the..: projCl:tco length or the overlapping bmnch on
the dlOrd ; q i!-i the overlap length measured a long the
L'onnec ti ng face of the chord beneath the two brallches.
For overlap connections. the larger (or if equal width,
the thicker) branch is a "thru member" connected
directly to the chord
9.
Branch width ratio for overlap connec tions: ratio of

overall wall widt h of overl apping bra nch to ove rall wall
widt h of overlapped branch greater than or eqll"sI to
0.75
bmllchcs in compression shall be taken as the lower of the

strcngths for sidewall 10c:1I yiel ding and sidewa ll local
crippling. For Cf(1s:H;on nccli ons with a branch angle less
than 90 degrees. all additional check fo r c hord sidcwf.l1I
she'lr failure mu st be made ill tteCOrdilllcc wi th Sec ti on
507.5.
This limit state need not be checked unless the chord

member and branc h member have 'he same width (B = 1.0).
For the limit state of loca l yield ing.

P "sin9 =
'0. Branch thic kness ratio for overlap con nec ti ons:
thic kness o f overlapping branc h to be less than o r equld
to the thic kness of the overlapped branch
II . Strengt h:
I'~\' S;
1.50 (ASD)
where
= outside
comer radius of the I-:I SS, which j~i

permilted to be taken as f .sf if unknown. mm
= bea ring length
th e load, ptlrallel to the <lxis of
the HS S lll'lin member, Hbls illO. 11m,
12. Duc lilil y: 1',.11'" $ 0.8
or
13. Ot her limits apply for specific criteria

a.
51 1.2.3b Bntnehcs with Axial Loads in '1'-, yand Cross Connections

For T, Y~, and cross-connections, the design stre ngth of the
For the limit stale or sidewa ll 10CHI cri ppling, in T- and

Y-connections,
P" sine = 1.61'[ 1 + 3N I(H - 3t))(EF) )05 Qf

(511.2-16)
=0.75 (LRFD)
b.
n = 2.00 (ASD)
For the limit state of sidewall local c rippling in crossconnections.
P" sine
0.25.
I.
(5 11.2-15)
n=
$= 1.00 (LRFD)
360 M Pa for chord and branc hes
brun ch, rpPII, or lhe allowable strength of the bran c h, P,/fl,

shall be the lowest value obtained accordin g to the limit
stales of chord wall piastificati on, shear yi elding
(punching), sidewall strength and local yielding due to
uneve n lo ad distribution. In additi on to the l.imits of
applicability in Seeli on 5 11.2.3a, fJ shall not be less Ihall
2Fy l[Sk + NI
= [4 81'/(H -
31))(EF)' )05 Q;
(51 1.2- 17)
For the li mit slale of c hord wall plastifi cation.

P"sill O = 1', 1212'1/(1 -
fJJ + 4/(1 - fJJ.lJQJ

($ 11.2- 13)
t/J=
1.00 (lRFD)
= 0.90 (LRFD)
4.
n= 1.67 (ASD)
For the lim it state of loca l yielding due to uneven load

distribution,
P,,= F),blb[2Hb+ 2b<o; - 41b)
fJ= 1.50 (AS D)
(5 1 L2I g)
This limit'state need not be checked when f3 > 0.85.

2.
=0.95 (LRFD)
For the limil stale of shear yielding (punching),

l'"sinO = 0.61'" 8[2'1+ 2fJw,,)
=0.95 (LRFD)
(5 11.2-14)
fJ= 1.58 (ASD)
In Equation 5 11. 2- 14 , the effect ive out s ide punc hing
n = I. 58 (ASD)
wherc
bro , = I I O/(BII)JI F, II(F" ,lh)]B h ~ B"
(5 11 ) is-')
Th is limit state need not be c hecked w hen B< 0.85.
jlillTlmctc r /In,, = Sj31y slm ll not exceed P

This lim it state need not be c hecked when
f3 > (l - l /y), nor
when fJ < 0.85 and BII" 10.

3.
For the
st ren gth
available
glale of
limit sl ate of sidewall strength, [h e available

for branches in tension shall be take n. as the
stre ngth for sidewall local yielding. For the limil
sidewall s(renglh, the available strenglh for
Sl1.2.3c Branches wilh Axial Loads in Gapped K Connections

. For gapped K-co llncc!ions, the design strength oj' !l
branch, P n , or th e allowable streng th of the branch, p" 1/(
shall be the lowest value obtained according to th<.
states of chord wall plaSlificati on, shear yi , idlfJ,l',
(pullching), shear yielding and local yielding due to Uil(:yeU
Associati on o f Structural Engineers of tl18 Philippines
C HAPTU'~~)
Slewl and Metal
load distribution. In additi o n to (he limils of i1pplic,abil ily in

SCl:tioll K23a. the following limits shall apply:
lh 11/ ? O. I ; . Y/50
2.
/hl ? 0.35
).
:5 0. 5( I - fl.t!)
4.
Gap : g greater tl1<l0 or equal to the sum of the branch

wa llthicknessc5
5.
Th e smaller fib > 0.63 times the larger 8/,
(511.224 )
P,,::: f<~I'I"
i'" sinO ~ 1',. t'19.8fJ,IiY''JQr
0.95 (LRFD)
(5 11.22 1)
lib,
;: :;: overall branch widt h of the overlapping branch ,
B /JI
;::
Fy/li
5pccificd minimum yield stress of th e

overlappin g branch material, MPa
::: specified minimum yield stress orthe overlapped
. branch material, MPa
111m
FYhi
For the limit stale of shear yielding of the chord in the

gap, available strength shall be checked in accordance
wi th Section 507.5. Thi s limi t Slale need only be
checked if the chord is not square.
For th e limit state of local yielding due to un eve n load
distribution,
i'" ~ F,.blb[2f1" + IJ" + h,,,, - 4th]
~ 0.95 (LRFD )
Q ~
(511.2 22)
1.58 (ASD)
overall branch width of Ihe overlapped branch.
mm
Thi s limil Slate need only be checked jf BiJ < (8 - 2t) or the
branch is not square .
b.
b"",.
(5 11228)
1.'i8 (ASD)
In the ,lbovc cqlJ<Hj on, the effective ou tside punching

p:lramctcr jl'IJJJ == 5 Ply shall nOI exceed P
~.
(5 1! .225)
is the effeclive wid lh oflhe branch face welded 10

the chord.
~ [ I O!(BIt)J[ (1')" ,Y( F,bi I., ) ]Bbi 00 Bb,
(51 1.227)
is the effective width of the branch face welded (Q
the overlapped brace.
~ [ I Of(Bbj !tbi )]I (F""i 110, YC!'~'bi I", )] Bbi :5 Bbi
b,.",
Q ~ 1.67 (ASD)
+ b~m + b..",. J
where
foor the limit state of shear yieldi ng (punch in g) ,
4t/II
For the ove rl apping br'lf)ch. and for overlap 80% :::: 0,. ~
100% measured with re spect to the overlapping branch,
(5 11.2.20)
P" sinO ~ 0.6F,. 1 131 211 + fJ + ~"''' ]
[2Hhi -
fhi
(51 1.226)
For the li mit state of chord wall plastification ,
a.
I 0:)
POI" the overla pping bntnch, and for overlap 50P/v ~ 0 ,. <
80% measu red wit h rcspeci 10 the overlapping branch,
I.
~ 0.90 (LRFD)
~) .
;:::;:
If"
= overall depth of the overlapping branch. nun
Ib/
;::
114
= thickness of the overlapped br~nc h , mm
Ihickness of th e overlapping branch, mm
For the overlap ped branch. Pn shall not exceed PII of the
overlapping bra nch. calculated using Equation 511.2-24 ,
511.225. or 5 11.226, as applicable, multip lied by the
factor (A bj Fybj lA b; F yui),

where
where
b,,,, =[I O!(I)!t)II F,. 1!(r,.iJlb) ]13" 00 13"
(5 1 1.223)
This limi l stale need only be checked if (he branch is not

square or Blr < 15.
511.2.3d llranches with Axial Loads in Overlapped

K - Connections
For overlapped K-connccti ons, the design strength of the
branch, (1P". or the allowab le strength of the branch, PI/fl ,
shall be det ermined from the lim it slate of local yielding due
to uneven 10ild di stril>lllioll ,
511.2.3e Welds to llra nches

The nonuniformi ty of load tran sfer along the line of weld,
due to differences in relative flexibility of HSS wall s in
HSS-Io- HSS conn ectio ns, shall be considered in
proportionin g such welds. This can be considered by
limiting the total effective weld length , 1..<. of groove and
fillet welds (o rectangular I-l SS as follows:
I.
().9S (LR FD)
In T-, Y - an d cross-connecti ons. for 0
50 degrees
Q ~ 1.58 (AS D)
For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 25% ~ 0 1' :S

50% measured with respect to the overl apping branch.
P"
= cross-secti onal area of the overlapping branch

;:: cross-secti onal area of the overlapped branch
AI,,'
Abj
~ F,,, lbi [(O,/50)(2f1bi - 41bi)
2 (11" - 1.21,, )
L, = . --.-- - - + (/J" - 1.21,,)
Sill
for
e? 60 degrees
+ b",; + b,... ]
National Structural Code of tl1e Philippines 6'11 Edition Volume 1
(511.229)
~i
C HAl'rEI~
lOG
5 . Steel and Malals
2( 11" -- 1.2,,, )
(5 11 .2-30)
L e, .----.--.---.-- .
'"
sin (}
Lincilf inlcrpnhui OIl shall bc-used

ofe hctwccn50a nd 60 degrees.
2.
t t)
delermine J..,.. for va lues
In ,gapped Kcoll neclions, arou nd each branch,

for e $ 50 degrees
2(11 , -1.2,,)
.
+2(11,,- 1.2,.)
Sill
for
I
I
(511.2-31)
e ;, 60 degree s
_2(11,,-1.2,,)
L,.-
510
(8
1,-1 " 11)
r
(5 11.2-32)
Linc;lr inLCrpoli.llion shall be used 10 dCLcrmine /...,. for va lues

of a between 50 and 60 degrees. In lieu of the above criteri <l
in Equati ons 51 1.22910 511.2 32. olher raLional criteria arc
pcnnillcd.
511.3 HSS-to-HSS MOlllent Connections
HSS to HSS moment connec ti ons arc defin ed as
conn ections titat co nsist of one or two branch mcmbers that
lire directl y welded to a co ntinuolls chord that passcs
through th e connection, with [he branch or branches loaded
by bending moments.
A connecti on shall be classi fi ed
1.
2.
jJ
As a Tconnection when there is one branch and it is

perpendicular to the chord and as it Y-connection when
there is one br:lnch but nOLperpendic ular to (he chord.
"
511.3.2 Crileri" fo r Round HSS

The interaction of stress due to chord mcmber forces n.nd
local branch connection forces shall be incorpormed
through rhe chord -);trcss interaction parameter Qr.
When the chord is in tension.
Qr = 1
Whcn the chord is in compression ,
As a cross-c:onnec tio n wh cnlhcrc is a branch 0 11 eac h

(opposite) side of the chord .
For the purposes of th is Specification, the centcrlines of the

branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie ill a
common plane.
511.3.1 Definitions or Param eters
B
:;:: overall width of rectangular HSS main member,
measured 90 degrees LO the pl.me of the
con nec tioll, mm
E'l
:;:: overall width of rectangular HSS bra nch
mcm be r, mcm;;u red 90 degrees to [he plane of thc
con nec tion. nUll
/J
:;:: outside di<llllelcr of round HSS main memher.
Db
mm
::: outside diameter of round HSS branch member.
mm
Fy
=:
specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
FI'/J
:::
memOcr, MPil
specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch
member, MPa
:;:: ultimatc st rength of HSS mem ber. MP"

:;:: overall he ight of rec tan gular IISS main ml~ llIbn.
m ca~u rcd in the plan e or th e connct..:liDIl. rllill
:=: overall
hcight o\" rccwngul ar !-I SS branch
membcr. 111c:lsurcd in the plane of lilc
connecti()U , mill
:;:: dcsign wall thickncss or IISS m<lin mcmber. mill
:;:: design wall thi ckness of HSS brnnch member,
mm
:;;: th e width mlio: the rati o of branch diameter ! ~.
chord diamctcr :;:: D1IDror rou nd IISS ; Ihe rmit>
of ove rall hru llch widt h to dlOrd wi(lI h = IJbli;
foJ' rec tan gular HSS
:;;: thc chord slendern ess ratio: the ntlio of o nc~ha ir
Ihe diameter to Ihe Wil li thic kn ess::; 012, for
round HSS; Ihe rati o of one-half the width h'
wa ll th ickness = 812, for rectangular HSS
:;:: the load length paramcter. applicable only 10
rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
contact of the branch wilh the chord in the plane
of the connection 10 the chord width ::; NIB,
where N::; Ht/sine
:=: acule angle betwccn
the branch and cho; ;;
(degrees)
Qr= 1.0 - O.JU(1 + U)
(51 U "
where U is the uti li zati on ratio gi vcn by

U= IP,IA, F, + M,ISF, I
where
1',
M,
A,
F,
S
:;:: requi red axial strength in chord. N

:::: required Oexural strength in chord. N
2
:;:: chord gross area. mill
:::: 'lva ilablc stress. MJ>'I
:;:: chord clasti c section modulus, mil'"
111111
CHAPTE.n~)
For design according

:=
M,
Po.
:::.0
:::: M I, : : :
to
S!e<::1 <llld Metal
511.3.2c Branches with

Out-of-Plane
Bending
Moments in '1'-, Y- and Cross-Connections
Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
required axial strength ill chord, using

required llexural strength in chord, using
LRFD load combinations, N-J11l11
:::: Fl' , MPa
The design strength, Mil, and the allowable strength, MnlQ,
shalt be the lowest value obtained according to the limit

states of chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
I.
For the limit state of chord plastification,
M"sin8
= F),I'Db[3.0/(1
- 0.81,8)JQr
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):

1',
M,
Fc
:)-101'
(511.3-5)
= PI!
required axial strength in chord, using

:0: M"
required llcxural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N-mm
= 0.6F,.. Mra
= 0.90 (LRFD)
2.
For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),

M" = O.6/S.IDb'[(3 + sinG)l4sin'G)QJ
= 0.95 (LRFD)
511.3.2" Limits of Applicability

The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the foHowing limits of applicability:
e 2 30
fJ = 1.67 (ASD)
fJ =
(511.3-6)
1.58 (ASD)
This limit state need not be checked when
fJ > (l
- l/y).
I.
Branch angle:
2.
Chord wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to wall

thickness less than or equal to 50 for T - and Yconnections; less than or equal to 40 for crosscoonections
SI1.3.2d Branches with Combined Bending Moment

and Axial Force in T~, Y and Cross - Connections
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch in-plane
bending moment, and branch out-of-plane bending moment,
or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy the
following.
3.
Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to

\\Iall thickness less than or equal to 50
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):

(P/p,) + (M,-iplrf!M,-ip)2 + (M,-oplrjM,-op) " 1.0
4.
Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter

to wall thickness less than or equal to O.OSEIFr
5.
Width ratio: 0.2 < DblD" 1.0
where
6.
Strength: Fy:5 360 MPa for chord and branches
P,
7.
Ductility: FrlFII:5 0.8
(511.3-7)
511.3.2b Branches wilh In-Plane Bending Moments in
T-, y ~ and Cross-Connections

The design strength, M", and the allowable strength, M"IfJ,
shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit
states of chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
I.
For the limit state of chord plastification,

M"sin8
= 5.39F,.I'Y'SfJ Db QJ
r(F 0.90 (LRFD)

2.
fJ =
required axial strength in branch, using

= design strength obtained from Section 51 J .2.2b
:0: required
in-plane flexural strength in branch,
using LRFD load combinations, N-l11m
:0: design strength obtained from Section 511.3.2b
= required out-of-plane flexural strength in
branch, using LRFD load combinations, N-mm
= design strength obtained from Section Sl1.3.2c

(511.3-3)
(P,/(P';fl)) + (M,-ipl(M,,-iplfl))' + (M,-opl(M,,-op/Q)) " 1.0
(5113-8)
1.67 (ASD)
where
For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),

M" = 0.6F,.ID,,'I(I + 3sinO)l4sin'O)
= 0.95 (LRFD)
8M ,I .ip
M r , ofl
::; PI!
(511.3-4)
fJ = 1.58 (ASD)
This limit state need not be checked when fJ> (I -
lly).
P,
= Po
P,/Q
:0:
Mr.;!'
:0:
:::: required axial strength in branch, llsing

allowable strength obtained from Section
511.2.2b
required in-plane flexural strength in branch,
using ASD load combinations, N-mm
Mn-iplS2=. allowable strength ohwined from Section

511.3.2il
Mro{) =. required out-of-plane flexural strength in branch,
using ASD load combinations, N-Il1!ll
MII-ojJ/S2=. allowable strength obtained from Section
511.3.2c
1.25(UF,h)O.5 and also less tll"l1 ::\)
).
Width ratio: ratio of ovcrall wal] width of branch (0

overall wall width of chord greater than or equal to 0.25
6,
Aspect ratio: O.S :S ratio of depth
7.
Strength: Fr S: 360 MPa for chord and branches
5 I 1.3.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS
~,
Ductility: F/F" ~ O.X
The interaction of" stress due 10 chord member forces and

through the chord-stress interaction parameter QI~
9.
Other limits apply for specific criteria
Whcn thc chord is in tension,
When the chord is in compression,

(51 1.39)
QI= (1.3 - OAU!j3):" 1
For the limit state of chord wal! plastification,
J.
+ M, ~)f)
M" = 1',.1'11,,[(11211) + 2I( I - ~)05 + '1/( I - P)[Q{

(511.31/)
(511310)
= 1.00 (LRFD)
where
P,.
=.
M,
=.
Ag
=.
Fc
=.
=.
required axial strength in chord, N

required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
chord gross area, mm 2
available stress, MPa
chord elastic section modulus, mm 3
Pu
M,
MOl
F,
P,.
::; Pa
Mr
=.
F,
;:;;:
Ma ::;
> 0.85.
(511.312)
M" = O.5F:t(Hld 5,)2

(3 = 1.50 (AS D)
where
for
F,:
::;
I~,.
F:
=.
0.8F,. for
T~connectio!1s
cross~c()[Hlections
f)
For the limit state of sidewal! local yielding,
2.

required flexural strength in chord,
usingLRFDload combinations, N-mm
= F,., MPa
(3 = 1.50 (ASD)
= 1.00 (LRFD)
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
P,
:s 2.0
51 I.3.3b Branchcs with In~Plane Bending Momcnts

in T~ and Cross-Connections
where U is the utiliz<lIion ratio given by
= IP,/A,r~
width
The design strength, MJl, and the allowable strength, Mil/D.,

shall be the lowest value obtained according to the limit
states of chord \vall plastification, sidewall local yielding
and local yielding due to uneven load distribution,
Qr= I
to
3.
fJ < 0.85.
For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven load

distribution,
M" = F,.b[Zb - (I - b,,,;lB,,)B,,li,,l,,j
(511.313)

required flexural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N~mm
= 0.95 (LRFD) (3= 1.58 (ASD)
where
= 0.6F,., MPa
511.3.3a Limits of Applicability

The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits:
1.
Branch angle is approximately 90"
2.
Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to

thickness less than or equal l() 35
3.
Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall

width to thickness less than or equal to 35
4.
Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall

wall width to thickness less than or equal to
/Jeoi
= IIO/(B/t)J[hl/(F,blI,)]B,,$IJt.
Zb
::::: branch plastic section modulus about the axis

bending, fnm 3
(511.314)
This limit state need not be checked when j3< 0.85.
or
Ou(of-Plane BCIl(ling
Momellts in '1'- and Cruss-Connections
51 J .3. 3(' Br:lIlChl'S
with
The design slr(.~ n gl h , ~~M". and Ihe allow'lulc streng th . Mil/P.

shall be the lowest va lu e ohtained according to the limit
slates of' chord wall plastificat ion, sidcv.l<I lI local yield in g,
loca l yi eldi ng due [ 0 uneven load distribution ,lIld chord
1,
di slOn i o llltJ failure .
M ,, = ,..,,'10.511b(1 + /J)/(I - /J! +1 2[JIl/,(1 + fJ)I( I-(J}J"'JQr
P,
(JP"
M,.w
Mu .,1'
Mr-.'I'
(511.3-15)
11 = 1.50 (ASD)
8= 1.00 (LRFD)
This lim it stl.1lc need nOI be checked w hen P>
2.
0.85.
For the limit s(fttc of sidewall local yieldin g.

M" = F'I(Il-I)(I1/, + 51)
+ (M,.ip/(Mn.ipln.) + (Mr.fI,,!(M'H!pln) 5 J.O

(511.3-21)
where
P,
;:: P<I
= required axial strength in bra nch. usi ng
ASD load combinati ons, N

= aIlowable st rength obtai ned from Section
5" .2.3b
M r.i!'
;:: required in-plane flexural strength in branch,
using ASD load combinations, N-mm
M".,,)l1 = allowable strength obtained from Section
5 I 1.3.3b
M'-hfl
= required out-of-plane flexural strength in
branch, using ASD load combinat ions, N-mm
M" .(1,1Q ;:: allowable strength obtained from Section
5 I 1.3.3e
P"IQ
I~\ '
= F , for T-COllnCClions
I~r'
= O. SFy for cross -conn ec tions
This limit state need nO{ be checked when
fJ < 0.85.
For the limit state of local yield ing du e to uneven load
distribution,
M" = I',.lz" - D.5( I t/F 0.95 (LRFD)
= required axia l st rength in br'lIlch. lIsing

LRFD load cornbinmions. N
;:: design strength obtaincd from Sec ti on 51 1.2..31>
;:: required in-plane flexural strcngth in branch,
using LRFD load co mbinations, N-mm
;:: design strength obi<lined from Section 511.3.3b
= required oUI-of-plane Ilexuml strength in bmllch.
using LRFD load combinations. N-mm
:;: design strength obtained from Secti on 51 1. 3.3<:
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
(511.3- 16)
where
3.
rpM".""
= PIt
(Pr /( P"I11
fJ= ISO (AS D)
t/J= 1.00 (LRFD)
+ (M'"I'/lM1 .. -opJ ::: I.U

(51 10320)
where
For the limit sl ate of c hord w;tl i plastificalioll.
I.
(I', II'.. J + (M, ;pltP-W.. ;I')
b,,,,18')1B'2II,J
(5 11.3-17)
fJ = 1.58 (ASD)
where
(511 .3- 18)
z"
= branch plastic section mod ulus about th e axis of

bending. mm)

4.
f3 < 0.85.
For the limit state of chord distortional failure.

M" = 2F,. I[lib l + [Blil(1l + H)JO.5J
(5 11.3- 19)
= 1.00 (LRFD ) fJ = 1.50 (AS D)

This limil stale need nOI be checked for cross-con nections
or for T-conllcctiolls if chord distortional failure is
. prevented by ot her mea ns.
Sll.3.3d Branches with Comuined Bending Moment

and Axial Force in '1'- and Cross-Connections
Con nections subject to brf'lllch axial load, branch in-plane

bending moment, and branch out-of- plane bending moment.
or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy
National Structural Code of U,e Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
."
5 110
CHAPTUi5 ~ Steel and Metal:,
SE0TION,,512
~. .
1;. ' :
.
DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
l {. ~'
'rhis Section addresscs s~rvice<lbj l i l y perf()nnanl'c cJC!'tigll

requi rements. The Section is organized as rollows:
5 12.1
5 12.2
512.3
5 12.4
5 12.5
512.6
5 12.7
512 .8
General Provisions
Olln[)';,
Dcncuions
Drift
Vibralion
members, the additional denections duc to the shrinkage

and creep of the concrete should be considered.
512.4 Drift
Drift of a ~trllc ture sh<lJl be cv,dualco under service loads to
pro vide for sCJ'vi ceability of the SIl'lIC':lUf'C . including the
integrit y or interior partitions and exterior cladding. D rift
under strength load combinatiolls shall nol cause l'olli s i(lll
with adjacent structures or exceed the limiting "alues d
such drifts th at may be specified by this code.
Wind wlnduced Motion
5 12.5 Vibration
Expansion and COlllraclion
The effect of vibration 011 Ihc comf0l1 of the occupants an,!

the fUllction of the Sl ru<.:turc shall be considered. Th~
sou rces of vibration 10 he considered include pedestrian
Connection Slip
512.1 GCII Cr:tI Provisions
loading, vibratin g machinery and o thers identified for t h ~
Serviceability is a sUite in whic h lhe functi on or a building.

its appeara nce, maintainability. durabilit y, .. nd comfol1 or
it s occupants arc preserved undcr no rmal u S~lgc. Lim iti ng
values of structural heha vior for scrviceabi lil y ( rOf' eX<l mplc,
maximulll deflections, accelerations) :-;h'llI he chosen Wilh
due regard to the intended functi on of the structu re.
Serviccability shall be evaluated using appropriate load
combinations for the serviceability lim i t Slates iJclllili cd .
structure.
User Note: Additioii.rinforination on serviceability limit

states, senilce' lo.iid;i'lUid appropn~te load cOl1lbin ations for
serviceability h!qui!iments' '",an be fou n:d in ' ASCE 7
Appendix' . B
t,;).nQlehiary. inc ' perfonuan~
requit'emeitts fof~erVi2~abiiilY' In 'iiiis S&tioli :ite consistent
with those rCquiieinehtsiSeiVke'loads, as stipulated herein,
''hllii '.lts
are those that act on the StructUIC at an arbitr~tY point in

time. That is, the appropriate .load combinations are often
less severe. than those in ASCE 7, Section 2.4, where the
LRFD load 'combinations are given.

512.2 Camber
Where camber is used to achieve proper position and

location of the structure, the magnitude. direction and
location of camber shall be specified in the stru ctural
drawings.
5 12.6 \.vi ndlnduced Mo tio n

T he effec t of windi nd uced mOlion of buildings on the
t~olllf()n
of oCCtJP!lJlIS shal l he considered .
512.7 Expansion and Contraction

The efrects of th ermal expa nsion and co ntraction of ;1
building shall be co nsidered . Damage 10 bui lding claddiE i~
can c.luse water pe.nc\r:uiotl and Illay lead to corrosio n.
512.8 Conncclion Slip
The eerects of conneclion slip s hall he included in ilL;
design where slip at bolted connections may cau~ c
deformations. tilat impair the serviceability of the structure.
Where appropriate, the co nnection s hall be designed to

preclude slip. For the design of sl ip wcriti cal connections sec
Sections 510.3.8 and 510.3.9 .
User Note: For more infonnation on connection sli p, rer
to tbe RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Usi" g
ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts.
User NQle: Camber recommendations are provid.ed in the

Code of St'!'ru!ar4 Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
512.3 Deflecti ons
DcOcclions ill structural members and stru,ctura i systcms

undcr appropriate service load combinations shall !lot
impair th e serviceability of the structure.
User Note: Conditions to be considered include levelness
of floors, alignment 'of structural members, integrity of
buililiP8 finishes/ 'and .bther :factors that aJfect tb.e normal
u ~ag'e .ai\d f~.i)2iion ofthesti-u~ttire: For composite
Association of Structu ral Enginee rs of the Philippines
C HI\P n~ n !J
SECTION 513
FABRICATION~' ~~rl0N AND

...
111
requin::IHcllls of SC1.:tioll 5/0. /.6. Beam cope!'. amI wdds

'H.'cess holes ill Sh<lPl~S thm arc to he g.dv;mizcd shall b~
groUJld. For shapes wi th flange thic kness not exceed ing SO
mill the rough ness or the rmally cu t sUffaces of (:op ~s shall
be 110 g.reener [han iI surf,l<.c roughness v,ti uc or 50 }. un as
dcfined in ASME 1346.1 Surface Texturc (S urfill'("
Rou ghn ess, Waviness, and Lay). For beam copes and we ld
ac cess holes in which Ihe curved part of the accc))S hole is
thcnll<1J1y cut in ASTM A6/A6M hot rolled shapes wi th a
flange thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded buill-Up
shapes with materi al thi ckness greater than 50 111m', a
preheal lemperature of not less than 150 F (66 C) shall be
applied prior to thermal CUlling. The thermally cu t surface
of access holes in ASTM A6/A6M ho t-rolled shapes wi tha
flange thickness exceeding 50 mm and built-up shapes w ith
a material thickness greater than 50 mm shall be ground
and inspected for cracks using magnetic panicle inspection
in accord ance with ASTM E709. Any crack is unacceptable
regardless of size or location,
,I
QUALITY CONTit()L ...
Th is Section addn!sscs requirements for shop drawings,

fabri cation. shop painting. erection and qualit)' cO Jltrol.
The Section is organi zed <\.'0 follows:

513 .1
513 .2
5 13.3
5 13.4
513.5
Sl eet and Mc ta!
Shop and Erection Drawings

Fa brica tion
Shop Painting
Erection
Quality Control
513.1 Shop and Erection Drawings

Shop drawi ngs shal! be prepared in advance of fabrication
and give complete information necessary for the fabrica tion
of the component paris of the structu re. including the
focation. type and size of welds and bo ils. Erecti on
drawings shall be prepared in advance of erect ion and give
information necessa ry for erection of th e structure. Shop

;]nd erection drawings shall clearly di stin gui sh between
shop and field weld s and bolts and shall clearly identify
hi ghstrcngth bolted
prctensioned and slip-critical
connections. Shop and erection drawings shall be made with
due regard to speed and economy in fabri cation and
erection .
513.2 Fabricalion
513.2.1 Cambering, C urving and Straightening

Local appl ication of heat or mechanical means is pennilted
to be used to introd uce Of correct camber. curvature a.'1 d
straightness. The tcmpcralUre of healed areas, as measured
513.2.3 Planing of Edges
Planing or finishing of sheared or thermall y cut edges of

plates or shapes is not required unless specifically called fOf
in the contract documents or included in a stipulated edge
preparation for welding,
513.2.4 Welded Construction
The ' technique of welding. th e workmanship, appearance
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting
nonconforming work shall be in accordance wi th AWS
D1. 1 except as modified ill Secti on 510.2.
by approved methods, shall not exceed 1,100 ' F (593 'C)

for A5 14/A514M and A852/A852M steel nor 1,200
(649 'C) for other steels.

513.2.2 Thermal Cutting
Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of AWS

Dl.l , Sections 5. 15. 1.2, 5. 15.4 .3 and 5. 15.4.4 wi th the
exception that thermall y cut rree edges Ihal will be subject
to calculated stat ic tensi le stress shall be rree of rou ndballom gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp V-shaped
notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and notches shall be
removed by grinding or repaired by we lding.
Reentram corners, except reentrant corne rs of bea m copes
and weld access holes, shall meet the requirements of A\\'S
DLI , Section AS.J6 . Jf anothe r s pecified contour is
required it must be show n on [he conlract documents. Beam
copes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical
513.2.5 Boiled Construction

Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and
rigidly held together during assembly. Use of a drift pin in
bolt holes during assembly shall not distOl1 the metal or
enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be ca use for
rejec ti on .
Bolt ho les s hall comply wi th the provisions of the RCSC
Speci fi cati on for Structural l oi nts Using ASTM A325 or
A490 !lollS, Sect ion 3.3 except that thermall y cut holes
shall be pCl'lnitled with a surface roughness profi le not
exceeding 25 ,un as defined in AS ME !l46.1. Gouges shall
not exceed a depth of 2 mm.
full y inscned finger shims, with a lOla] thi ckness of nol

more than 6 111m within a joint, are permitted in joints
wi thou t changing the strength (based upon hol e type) for the
design of con nections. The orie nt at ion of such shims is
National Siru ciural Code of the Philippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
:;i-112
CHAPTLH:}
Steel (]nd Met<-lis
indepcndent of thc direction of application or the load, The

use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements
of the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, except as modified in Section
510.3.513.2.6 Compression Joints
Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part
of the splice strength shall have the bearing surfaces of
individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, sawing, or
othcr suitable means.
513.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances

Dimensional tolerances shall be III accordance with the
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges.
513.3 Shop Painting

Shop painting and. surface preparation shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the AISC Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Shop
paint is not required unless specified by the contract
documents.
513.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces

513.2.8 Finish of Column Bases
Column bases and base plates shall be finished in
accordance with the following requirements:
J.
2.
3.
Steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in thickness are

permitted without milling, provided a satisfactory
contact bearing is obtained. Stcel bearing plates over 50
111m but not over 100 BUD in thickness arc permitted to
be straightened by pressing or, if presses arc not
available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as
noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to
obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing
plates over 100 111m in thickness shall be milled for
bearing surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs 2
and 3 of this section).
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop

assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if
required by the design documents.
513.3.3 Contact Surfaces

Paint is permitted in bearing-type cOllnections. For slipcritical cOllnections, the faying surface requirements shall
be ill accordance with the RCSC Specification for Stnlclural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. Section 3.2.2(b).
513.3.4 Finished Surfaces

Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected again.sl
corrosion by a rust inhibitive coating that can be removed
prior to erection, or which has characteristics that make
removal prior to erection unnecessary.
Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and colulllll bases

that are grouted to ensure full bead ng contact 011
foundations need not be milled.
513.3.5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds
Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when

complete-joint penetration groove welds arc provided
between the column and the bearing plate.
Unless otherwise specified in the design documents,

surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location shall be
free of materials that would prevent proper welding or
produce objectionable fumes during welding.
513.2.9 Holes for Anchor Rods

Holes for anchor rods shall be permitted to be thermally cut
in accordance with the provisions of Section 513.2.2.
513.2.10 Drain Holes

When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either
during construction or during service, the member shall be
sealed, provided with a drain hole at the base, or protected
by other suitable means.
513.2.11 Requir'emcilts for Galvanized Members

Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed,
detailed and fabricated to provide for flow and drainage of
pickling fluids and zinc and to prevent pressure build-up in
enclosed parts.
CHAPTEH !>
Sleel anclMe tal
511 ::5
513.5 Quolit), Control

513.4 Erection
513.4.1 Alignmenl of Column Bases
Column hascs sh.tll he SC I level and 10 correct clcvmioll with

full bearing 011 concrete or maso nry.
513.4.2 Bracing
The frame o f steel ske le ton buil di ngs shall be cflrricu lip
true and plumb within the limits defined in the A l SC Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Bui ldings and Bridges.
Temporary bracing shall be provided. in accordance with
the requ irements of the Code of Sta ndard Practi ce for Sleel
Buildings and Bridges, whe rever necessary to suppOrt the
loads to whi ch [he struc ture may be subjected, in cluding
equipment and the operati on of same. Such bracin g shall be
left in place as long as required for safe ty,
T he fabricator s hall provide qualit y control procedures to

the C.Xlent that the fabric.:ator deems neccssary (() assure thm
thc work is performed in accordance with this Spccific<ltion.
In i.ddilioll 10 the fnbric.uOf's q uali ty comrol procedures,
materia l a nd workmanship at all tim es Ill ay be su bject to
inspecti on by qu al ified inspectors representing th e
purchaser. If such ins pection by represent ati ves of the
pu rch aser \\,i ll be required, il s hall be so stated in the design
documents.
513.5.1 C ooperati on
As far as possible, the in spection by re prese ntati ves of the
pu rc haser sha ll bc mad e at the fab ri cator'S plant. The
fabricator shall cooperate with th e inspector, permitting
access for in spection to all places wh e re work is being don e.
The purchaser's inspector sha ll schedule th is work for
mini mum int erru pt ion to the work of the fabri cator.
513.4.3 Alignment
No pe rmanent bolt ing or welding sha ll be pcrfonncd un til
Ihe adjacent affected portions of Ihe structure h;we been
properl y al igned.
513.4.4 Fit of Column Compression

Base 1>lates
Joints and
Lack o f contac t beari ng not exceedi ng a gap of 2 mm ,

regardless of the type of splice used ( paJ1 ial -joint
penetrat ion groove welded or bo lted). is permitted. If the
gap exceeds 2 mm, but is Icss than 6 mm, and if a n
e ngineeri ng in vestigati on shows that suffic ie nt cont act area
does not exist , the ga p sh all be packed out with nonlapered
steel shims. Shims need not be oth er than mild steel,
regardl ess of the grade of the ma in materi al.
513.5.2 R ej ections
Mmerial or workmans hip not in conform ancc wi[h the
provisions of this Specificatio n may be rejected at any ti me
du ring the progres s of th e work. Th e fabricat or shall recei ve
co pies of all reports furnished to the purc haser by th e
inspecti on agency.
513.5.3 Inspect ion of We ldi ng

The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance
wit h the provisions of AWS 0 1.1 except as modifi ed in
Secti on 5 10.2. Whcn visu al in specti on is required to be
perform ed by A WS certifi ed weldin g inspec tors, it shall be
so specified in the des ign documents. When nondestructive
testing is req uired , the process, ex tent and stand ard s o f
acceptance shall be cl earl y defin ed in thc design documents.
513.4.5 Field Welding

Shop pai nt on surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded
shall be wire brushed if necessary to assure weld qualit y.
Field welding o f attachments to install ed e mbe dme nts in
contact with concre te shall be done in suc h a mann er as to
avoid excessive thennal expansion of the e mbedment which
could result in spallin g or c rac king of the co ncrete or
c xcess i ve stress in the c mbedmelll anc ho rs.
513.5.4 Ins pection
of
Slip-Critical
High-Strength
Bolted Connections.
T he in specti on of slip-criti cal hi gh-strength bolted
co nnection s shall be in accordan cc with the provisions of
the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A4 90 Bolts.
513.5.5 Id entifi cation of Steel

513.4.6 Field Painting
Responsibility fo r touch-up painting, clea ning and field
pa inti ng sh all be allocated in accorda nce with acceptcd local
practices, and tb is allocat ion shall be scI forth exp lic itl y ill
the des ig n docum ents.
The fabricator !ihall he able to dcmonstrate by a wrillcn

procedure and by actual practi ce a mc thod of material
ide ntific ation, visible at leas t through th e "fi t-up" operatj on,
for the main sl rtlctural clements of each
"1
513.4.7 Field Connections

As c rec[i on progresses, the structu re shall be secure ly bo lted
or welded to support the dead, wind and erection loads.
Na tio na l St ructura l Code of the Philippines 61b Edition VolLlme 1
!)
11 t!
CHAPTl~n:)
Stet?i and Metal::;
APPENDIX Al
INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Design by inelastic analysis is sub.iect to the supplementary
provisions of this appendix.
The appendix is organized as follows:
A-I.I
A-l.2
A-1.3
A-I.4
A-1.5
A-1.6
A-t.?
A- J.8
A-I.9
General Provisions
Materials
Moment Redistribution
Local Buckling
Stability and Second-Order Effects
A-I.Sa Braced Frames
A-I.8b Moment Frames
Columns and Other Compression
Members
Beams and Other Flexural Members
Members under Combined Forces
Connections
where
Ag
Fy
::: gross arca
or mcmber, mm?
:=specified minimuill yield stress of the

compression flange, MPa
::: resistance faclOr for compression::: 0.90
:::safety factor for compression::: 1.67
<pc
nc
A-I.4 Local Buckling

Flanges and webs of members subject to plastic hinging in
combined flexure and axial compression shall be comp:H.:\.
with width-thickness ratios less than or equal to the limil;I);!
Ap defined in TabJe 502.4.1 or as modified as follows:
~,
For webs of doubJy symmetric wide flange members
and rectangular fiSc)' in combined flexure and
compression
I.
--j
E
2.7S1~,
1'.1'
ehl y
hl[", <;3.76 -_-(1---,-)
A-I.1 General Provisions

Inelastic analysis is permitted for design according to the
provisions of Section 502.3.3 (LRFD). Inelastic analysis is
not permitted for design according to the provisions of
Section 502.3.4 (ASD) except as provided in Section A-I.3.
A-1.2 Materials
Members undergoing plastic hinging shall have a specified
minimum yield stress not exceeding 450 MPa.
A-1.3 Moment Redistribution

Beams and girders composed of compact sections as
defined in Section 502.4 and satisfying the unbraced length
requirements of Section A-I.?, including composite
members. may be proportioned for nine-tenths of the
negative moments at points of support, produced by the
gravity loading computed by an elastic analysis, provided
that the maximum positive moment is increased by onetenth of the average negative moments. This reduction is not
permitted for moments produced by loading on cantilevers
and for design according to Sections A-IA through A-I.S of
this appendix.
If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly

framed to the beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may
be used in propor1ioning the column for combined axial
force and flexure, provided that the axial force does not
exceed O.15f,Fy A, for LRFD or O.15f,A,IQ, for ASD,
(A-l-l )
where
= modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
:;:: specified minimum yield stress of the type uf
steel being used, MPa
:;:: as defined ill Section 502.4.2, mm
:::: required axial strength in compression, N
:::: member yield strength, N
::: web thickness, mm
:;:: resistance factor for flexure;::: 0.90
r:r
h
PI!
1\
I",
$"
2.
For flanges of rectangular box and hollow stnl'

sections of uniform thickness subject to bendi;
compression, flange cover plates, and diaphraglll
between lines of fasteners or welds
bit
S;
O.94JE/F).
where
b
3.
::: as defined in Section 502.4.2, lllm

:::as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm
For circular hollow sections in flexure
DI[ ,; O.04SEIF,
!llr~;l
!.... l ! }\P1EH:,
~) l i ~j
.sW(!i:1 rlU M CIil I
whcn.'
A-1. 7 Bea ms a nd Othe r Fl ex ur:tl M emb ers
I)
T he required mO lHent slrcngth. M il, of hea lll s dc!<Oigned on
;:: outsitlc diameter of fOund HSS mcmber. nUll
Ihe h;I!<Oi" of inelastic.: iIIwl ysis shall not exceed the dc!<O ign
A I.S S iubilif y and Second -Order Efl'crls
slrcnglh. $M". wher.,;
Continuous beams nOl subjected to <lxial loads ;lIld thill dl)

nO( contribute to 1;l!t'ral Slability of framed strut'lU rcs ma),
be des igned based on (I first -order inelastic analysis or it

plaslic Il1cchani!; 111 antilysi s. Braced frames and moment
fnllllcs may be designed bi.lsed 011 a firs t-order ine l:.\ stk
una lysi s or ;t pl<lslic Il1cch;mislll analysis provided th:tt
stabi li ty and second-order effects arc taken into accoulll .
'.
Structures may be designed on the basis of a second-ord er

inelastic ana lys is. For beam-columns, connections and
connected members, the required strengths shall he
determined from a second-order inelas tic analysi s , where
equi li brium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking
into accounllhe c hange in stiffness due to yie ldi ng.
(A - I-Il)
$ = 0.90 (LRFD )
Design by inelastic analysis i!<O permitted for members that
arc co mpact as dcfined in Section 502.4 and as modified in
Section A- 1.4 .
The latcrally unbraced length. 1.)1, of the compression nangc
adjacent to plastic hinge locations shall not exceed Lpd ,
detc rmincd as follows.
I.
A-l.Sa Braced Frames
For doubly symmelric and singly symmc tric I-s haped

membe rs wi th the compression nange equal to or la rger
than the len!<O ion n,lJlge loaded in the planc of the web:
In brac ed fmflles designed 011 the bas is of inelastic analysis.

braces shall be des ig ned to remain clastic under lhe design
loads. T he required axial strength for col umns and
com press ion braces sha ll not exceed tj;.. (0. 85 I-~)"A,).
where
w he re
M!
= smaller moment at e nd of un braced length of
M2
= la rger moment at end o f unbrnccd length of
1)
= radius of gyralion about mi nor axi s. mm(MIIM2)
<1>..
=0.90
L"" = IO.1 2+ 0.076(-M' )](F)r,

2
(A-I-7)
beam, N-ffilll
LRFD)
beam, N-mm
Al.Sb M oment Fra mes

In mo ment frames designed on the basis of inelast ic
analysis , the required axial strength of columns shall not
exceed ~(0.75F)"A,).
is positive when moment s calise reverse

curv<tlllre and negative for single curvature.
2.
For so lid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams:
where
M
E
E
L pd =[0.17+0.10(-' )I( - ) r,. ~ O. L O(-)"r
M,
F,. .
F,.
c = 0.90 (L1~FD)
(A-I-8)
A-1.6 Columns and Other Compression Members

In addi ti on to th e li mits set in Sections A- I .5.a and A-1.5 .b.
the req uired axi al stre ngth of col umns designed on the basls
of inelastic a nal ysis shall not exceed the design strength,
cf>cPn, detemuncd according to the provi sions of Section
505.3.
Design by inelastic am'lysis is pennitted if the colullln
slenderness rali o, U r, does not exceed 4.71J / Fy
where
L
r
= lalerall y ullbracc-d length of a member, mm
= govern ing md ius of gyra tio n. m m
111erc is no li mit on Lb for members with circular or square

c ross sections or for any beam ben I about its minor axis.
A- 1.8 M e muer s under Co m bin ed F or ces

When ine lastic analysis is used for symmetric members
subj ec t to bending and axial fo rce. Ihe provisions in Section
508. ) appl y. Inelastic analysi s is lI ot permitted for members
subject 10 torsion and combined torsion, flexure. she..1r
an(Vor axial force.
A-1. 9 Connecti ons
Co nnections adjace nt to plnsti c hing in g regions of
co nnected members shall be designed wi th suffi cient
strength and ductili ty 10 sustai n the forces and deformations
im posed under the req uired loads.
National SLructural Code of tile Philippines 6'" Edilion Volu me 1
5-11 G
CHAPT EH 5 - Steel and Metals
=r:::r :: _:
34 ~
3 2 - - -
=_ -.
3.0 - ---- - 2.8
This appendix provide!; methods for delCnn ining whether a

roof system has adequate strength and stiffness 10 resi st
pondin g.
_._-
2.6
---
-- - - - .- - ...
2.4
-- .-.. -.... --- ._, ..- .- .
2.2 -
~ 2.0 -~=--j~~-:-t---i::~-'%:j:: - -1- -:: ~ : ~ ==

1.8 - _ _ _ . _
- -+ _- .-t -
The appendix is organized as follows:

A-2.1
A-2.2
:ll
Simplified Des ign for Ponding

Improved Design for Ponding
e~ 16
.
A-2.t Simplified Design for Ponding
1.2
The roof sys tem shall be considered stable for pond in g and
no funher in vestigati on is needed if both of the following
two conditions are mel:
1_0
Ct' + O. 9C, :" 0.25
I" ~ 3940 SA
where
504L,L"
C=-__-.,
1
4'
0.6
0.7
0 .8
0.6
(A-2- 1)
0.4
(A- 2-2)
0.2
oiJI
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.4
0.5
Upper Limit of Flexi/)ilily Cons/ani Cp
Fig.
C,
_ . -
5045L,'
A-21. Limiting flex ibiliry coefficienr for

systems.
rh e primaJ)'
f-or secondary members, the stress ind ex shall he
l,
V =(
= column spaci ng in direclioll of girder (length of
0.8F,. -
10
10
(A-2-4)
primary members), m
Ls
= co lumn spacing perpendicular \0 direction of
S
Ip
Is
Id
girder (length of secondary members), m

== spacing of secondary members , III
4
moment of inenia of plimary members. mm
= moment of inertia of secondary me mbe rs, Illm4
== mome nt of inenia of the sleel deck supp0l1ed on
4
seco nda ry members, mm per III
For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia Is shall be

decreased 15 percen t when used in th e above equation. A
steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it
is directly supported by the primary members.
A-2.2 Lmprovcd Design for J)onding

The provision s given below are permilted LO be lIsed \",hen a
more exac t de termination of framing stiffness is nceded
than that given in Section A-2 . 1.
where
In
D
= stress due \0 the load combination (D + R)

= nominal dead load
= nominal load due to rainwater 01' snuw, exclusive
of the pondin g cOlU ribution, MPa
For roof framin g consisting of primary and secondary

members, the combined stiffness shall be evaluated as
follows: enter Figure A2 1 at the level of the computed
stress indcx Up determined for the prim ary beam; move
horizontally to the compu ted Cvalu c of the secondary
bcnnu; and the n downward to the abscissa scale. The
combined stiffn ess of the primary a nd secondary framing is .
suffic ient to prevent ponding jf the n ex ibi lity constanL read
from this laller scale is more than the va lue of Cp computed
fo r the given primary me mber; if not, a sliffer plimary or
secondary beam, or combination of bOlh, is required .
For primary members, the stress index shall be
V,,=(
0.8F, -
10
10
(A-2-3)
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of tile fj hilippines
CHAPTE n ~J
Sl<!c! and Mewl
~) .
I 17
A similelr p n x:cd ur~ must bc followed using Figll re A-2-2.

3 ~
-- - -
I - r~!
32 ~
=~~ :J
-
=
- --_~.
r=~Y. - ':1
3.0
2.
2-1li~I?1~Iiittll
'1_. .._
2.2
1-""-'-'
!} 2.0 - -
A3 .1
A 3.2
' .8 _. - 1.-/
A3.3
A 3,4
A3.5
1.2
1.0
0 .
O.
04 --
0.2
00
The lolppendix is organized as roll ows:
"
... 1.6
,~
,
This appcndix applies 10 members and COllllcctiollS sllbjecI

to high cycle loading within the clasti c range of stresses of
frequcncy ,md magnitude sunil' jelll (0 initiate cracking and
progressive. failure, whi ch defines the limit slate o f fatigue .
0. 1
02
0.3
0.-1
0 .5
06
0 .7
General
Calculation of Maximum Stresses and
Stress Ranges
Design Stress Range
Bolts and Threaded P ailS
Special Fabrication and Erecti on
Requirements
A3,\ General
The provisions of this Appendix apply to stresses calculated
on the basis of service loads. Thc maximum permitted slress
due 10 unfaclOre:d loads is O.66Fy.
Upper Limit of FlexilJilty Consr8ri Cs
Fig. A -2-2. Lilllilitlg fleXibility (:oc/ficieru for rile secolldtll),

s),stems.
For roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced

wall-bearing beams, the stiffness shall be evaluated as
fo llows. The beams are considered as secondary members
sup ported on an infinitely sliff primary member. For (his
l:lISC, enler Figure A-2-2 with the computed STress index UJ .
The limiting value of Cs is determined by the intcrce pl of a
horizontal line reprcsenting the U~ value and the curve for
el ,:::. O.
Uscr N9(el Ti1e pooding<!eflectioll c<in.l!ibuted by ,a metal
deck is' 4S'uhlIY i $uch h(siii~lfpartiQtilit:iQiill, iX.Jrl~i'Jg
deflection of ~ r<>of prul~f\liat it IS suffiiiienlm:erely:.to'\UiUt
its mOIl!~nt, of)l!~riia ~r:)n~te~ 9.f!l'.id./!1 ri9~aJ to :it~ ,..p,~
10
3940,mm/m.
',.: " .,'
...
:c~' ...
In the case of complete-joint-penetration but( welds. the

maximum de sign stre."iS range calculated by Equat ion A-3-)
applies only to welds wiLh intemal soundness meeting the
acceptance requirements of Section 6.12.2 or 6. 13.2 of
AWSDLL
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the live
load stress range is less than the thresho ld stress range, Fill.
See Table A3 L
;-" ." ' : , ..,:,; , . .
For roof fram ing consisting of melal deck spanning between

beams supported on columns, the stiffness shall be
evaluated as follows. Employ Figure A-2- 1 or A-2-2 using
as CJ the flexibility constant for a I III width of the rooC deck
(S
Stress range is defined as the magnitude of th e change in

stress due to the application or removal of the service live
load. In the case of a stress reversal, the slrc.."is range shall be
co mputed as the nu merical sum of maximum repeated
tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of
maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at the
poi nt of probable crack initiati on.
= 1.0) .
National Structural
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number

of cycles of application of live load is legs than 20,000.
The cyclic load rc sistnnce detcrmined by th e provisions of
this Appendix is appl icable to structures with su ilable
corrosion prolection or subject only to mildl y corrosive
atmospheres, slIch as normal atmosphelic conditions.
..
nle cyclic load resistance determined by the pro visions of
thi$ Appendix is applicable onl y to structures subject to
tem peratures not exceeding 300F (ISOC).
Code of the Philippines 6'"
Edition Volume 1
The engincer-or-record shall provide ei ther compl lelc deUl ils

incl uding weld sizes or shall specify the planned cycle lire
:11111 Ihe 1ll:l.\:i IlHlIlI rtlllgc of lllomenJ:... shears and n:ilt.: lions
for the c.:o nncl'tions.
Calcu lated st resses shall be b<:lsed upon clastic alwl ysis.

St rcsses shall not he amplified by st ress concel1t nuion
filClors for geometrical discoJllinuitics.
a.
For axially loaded angle members where th e center of

grav ity of th e cOllnecting welds lies between the !tne of th e
ce nt er of gravi ty of the angle cross section and the ce nter of
the con nected leg, the effects of eccentri cit y shall be
ignored. If the center of gravi ty of the connecting we lds lies
out side this lone, the total stresses. incJuding those due to
joint cc.:cclltricit y. shall be included in the calculation of
stress range .
b.
C,
F,"
TH
IIf
(5 I )
(A -3-3)
_."
Based upon crack ini ti ltti on from the root of the weld
the design stress nlllgc, F SH, 011 the lell5io[1 loaded plme
clement usin g transverse PJP groo ve
we lds, with OJ
without reinforcing or con touri ng fillet welds, I !"
design stress ran ge on th e cross secti on al the toe of !!::
weld shall be determin ed by Equation A-3-4, stress
category C_ as follows:
14.4XIO"
N)
0.333
(A -3-4)
(5 .1.)
where
Rp)p
reinforced or
groove welds
the reduc ti on factor for

nonrcinforced transverse P1P
dctennin ed as follows:
is
0333
10 (5.\.)
(A-3- 1)
If RPJP = 1.0, usc stress category C.
2a
= design stress range, MPa
= constant from Table A-3-1 for the categ()ry
= number of stress range flu ctuati ons in de-.s ign life
= number of stress range fluctu atio ns pe r day x
365 x years of design life
= threshold fatigue stress range, maxi mum stress
range for indefinite design life from Table A-3 ~
I , Mr"
2.
Fm = 111'11' (
where
For Slress calegories A, B, B_, C, D, E and E_lhe

design stress range, FSR , shall be determined by
Equalion A-3 -1.
FSR -- (e[ X 329 )0.333
P.\-H
>F
_ ( 14.4XIO")0JJ3>689
1\-3.3 Design Stress Range

The range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the
design stress range computed as rollows.
I.
)". 11,'
Based upon crack initiation from the loe of the weld On

the tension loaded plate clement the design stress rang... .
F SR. shall be dcteOlli lled by Equation A -J-3, for strcs:-.
category C which is equ31to
F,,-
foOl' members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners

and welds shaH be arranged sy mmetrically about the axi s of
the member, or the total stresses including those due to
ecce ntricity shall be included in the calcu lation of the stress
I':l nge .
For tension-loaded pl atc dements t.:olllll"t.:lcd ilt Ihcii

end by cruciform. T. or corner dcta ils wi th complelcjoilll~pcneiratioll (CJP) groo"e welds ()f partial joillt
penetration (PJP ) groove welds. fillet we lds, or
co mbination s of the preceding. tntllsvcrse-. to I/!,:
direction of stress, the design stress range 011 Ihe ("rl)'-.'
section of the tension-loaded plate clement ill the toe l. J (
the weld shall be detcnnined as follows:
A-3.2 C'llcul;slion of Ma xi mulIl Stn'sscs and Str"css

n a Jl gcs
For bolts and threaded rods subject 10 axial tension. the

calculnted stresses shall include the effects of pryill1g aClion.
if any. In the case of ax ial stress co mbined with bending.
the maximum stresses. of each kind , shaH be those
determined for concurrent arrange ments of the 3pplie(J load .
_(c:rI IX IO'
.'iN -
For stress category F, the design stress range, Psn, shall

be determined by Equation A-3-2.
= the length of the Jlollweldcd
roOl
direction of the thi ck.ness of Ihe

plate. 111m
w
tl'
c.
face in
( :. >
Icnsion- l o~H.h..c
=the leg sile of the reinforcing or contonrin"

fillet, if any. in the direction of the t hi cklll::,~> ,.:
the tension-loaded plate. 111111
= thickness of tension loaded plate,
II1Ill
Based lIpon crack initialion from the root s of :1 :', .

transverse fillet we lds on opposite sides of til(: t ,:.; ..
loaded plate element th e des ign stress range, h/i, Oil tli,;
Association of S tru ctural Enginee rs of tile Philippines
c ros ~
section <II the lOt! or the we lds shall he determined
by Equation A-1- 5, strcss Ciltcgory C as follows ;
,..
.'"
_/I
m.
( 14.4XIOII
N- - )
U.3.1I
(S. I. J
(A -3-5l
where
Hm. is the reduction facI o)' for joints llsing a pair of
transverse fillet welds only.
I,)) S 1.0
0.10;. 1.24("'/ 1
RFIJ. [
0. 167
1I'
Jf R"'IJ. = I .0, usc stress category C.
The nlngc of st ress .11 sen'ice IO<1ds shall not exceed th e

stress runge computed as follow s.
2.
A-3.S Specia l Fabrication
~lIld
For mechanicall y fastened connections loaded in shear.

the m:lximum r:mgc of siress in the cOllllccted material
at service loads slwlt not exceed Ihe design stress rilngc
co mputed using Equ:uion A-3-1 where C, and F rot arc
wken from Sectioll 2 of Table A-J. I.
For high- strength bolts, comm on bolts, and threaded

anchor rods with CUI , ground or rolled threads, the
maximum range of tensile stress on the net tensile area
from applied axial load (lnd moment plus load due (0
prying action shall not exceed the design stress range
computed using Equation A+3-1.
The fac tor Cf shall be taken as 3.9 x 108 (as for stre ss
category E'). The thresho ld stress. Fnl shall be laken as
48 MPa (as for stress cmego r), D). The net tensile arc'l
is given by Equation A~36 .
(S. I. )
(A -3-6)
where
Lon gitudin<:l l backing bars afC permittcd to remain in place ,

and if used, shill: be' continuous. If splicin g is necessary for
long joi nts. the har shall bc joined wit h complete
pCllctnllion bUll joints and the reinforcement ground prior 10
assem bly in the joint.
P
Db
= pitch, mm per thread

= the nominal diameter (body or shank diameter).
'1
= threads per 111m
In tran sverse complete-jojnt ~ pe llelrati on T and corner jOints,

a reinforcing lille! weld, not Icss than 6 mm in size shall be
added .11 rC -cll tralll co rners.
The surfacc roughncss of
~lIn.
I
!
cut edges subject
to
where AS ME B46.1 is the refercnc:c standard.
Reentrant corne rs at cut s. copes and we ld access holes shall

fonn a radius of not less than 10 I11Ill by prcdrilling or
su bpunching and reamin g a hole, or by thermal cutting to
form the radiu s of th e cuI. Jf the radiu s portion is for med by
therm al cutting, the cut surface shall be ground to a bright
metal surface.
For transverse bUH joints in reg ions of hi gh tensile stress,
run -off tabs shall be used to pro vide for cascading the weld
termination olltside the finished joint. End dams shall not be
used. Run~off tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
fini shed nush with the edge of the member.
See Section S I0.2.2b f Of requirements for end retu rns on
ceI1ain fillet welds subject to cyclic service loading.
For join ts in which the mat erial within th e grip is not

limited 10 steel or jOints whi ch are no! ten sioned 10 the
requirements of Table 5 10.3. 1, all ax ial load and moment
applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall be
assumed to be c arried exclusivcly by th e bolts Or rods.
nil/He
signifi cant cyc lic tensi le stress ranges shall nOI exceed 25
mm
Erection Requiremcnts
In tra nsversc joints subject to tension. backing hal'S, if used.

shall be removed and thcjoillt back gouged and welded.
A-3.4 Bolls and Threaded Parts
I.
the tensile stress nlllgc in the prctcnsiollcd holts due to the

total service Ii ve load and moment plus effects of any
pryin g acti on. Alternatively. Ihe stress ran ge in the bolts
shall be ass umed to he equal to the stress on the net tensile
arca due to 20 pen:':l!1lt of the absolute vn lue or the service
load ax iilllo<ld and Ill ome nt from dC<ld. live ancJ other loatis.
For joints in which the material within the grip is limited 10

steel and which are tensioned to the requ irement s of Table
510.3. 1. an analysis of th e relati ve stiffness of the connectcd
parts and bolts shall be permi(led 10 be used 10 determine
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Vot ume 1
APPENDIX A-4
~T,RtJ<;;n.!~LDESIGN FOR F~RE
CONDITIONS
Thi s 1Jppcndi x provides criteria fOl' th e design and
evaluation of' struc tural stee! com pollcllIs, sys tems and
frames for fire condi tions. These cri teria provide for the
determination of the heat input, thennal expansion and
dcgradatinn ill mechanic .. ] propcItics of materials at
clcv.ltcd iCilIpcraturcs that cause progressive decrease ill
strength and stiffness of structural components and systems
at eJcvoHcd temperatures.
The appendix is organized as follows :
A-4 .1
A-4 .2
A-4 .3
Gcncml Provisions
StruclUml Design [or Fire Conditions by
Analysis
Des ign by Qualificalion Testing
A-4.1 Gcncntl Provisions

The mClhOLl s co ntained in this appendi x provide regulatory
evidence of compl iance in accordance with the: design
applicati()n~ outlined in this section.
The appendix uses the following terllls in addition 10 the

terms in the G lossary.
ACTIVE FIRE PROTECTION: Building m.lerials and

systems that a.re activated by a. fire to mitigate adverse
cffects or (0 notify people 10 take some action Illiligare
adverse effects.
COMPARTMENTATION : The enclosure of a buildin g
space with clcmcllIs Ihal have a specific fire endurance.
CON VECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER: The Iransfer of
th ermal energy from a point of higher temperature to a point
of lower temperature. through the motion of an int ervening
medium.
DESIGN-IlASIS FinE: Asel of condilions Ihal define Ihe
development of a fire and the spread of combustion

products throu ghout
11
building or portion thereof.
ELEVATEIJ TEMPERATURES: J-iealing condilions

experienced by building elements or structures as a resull of
fire. which (lrc in excess of the amicip'IICd <11llbient
conditions.
FIRE: Destructive burning, as manifested by any or all of

th e fQllowing: light , flame, heal, or smoke.
Association of Structural Enginee rs of the Philippines
..
------------
-----------.-~.,-.-----.------~-.
- - --- -J-----
-r---------- -r---- ------- -
Table A-3.t
Fatigue Design Parameters
---
,
SIJCSS
Cltegol)
Des(11 )!IOl)
I
--T-~-~
(onstant
Till eshold
,
Potent),,1 (r,lCk
InltJdtlllll PUlill
Cj
III
III'"
- - - -- -- - -- --- -- ------ ---------------- -------- - - ---- - ----- ---- ----- --------- ---SECTION I -PLAIN MATEItIAL A
WA Y FROM ANY WELDING
-----_._. __ .--_._---. .. _---_.-------- . . --_ ... ,--...
-,---.
"-I-.I-B,l.~c~~~~.;: exc~~;;~' -;I-;:;~:oal~I-T---'-
wealllcrilig sled, with rolled or

cleaned surf'ace. Flwl1e-cut edges
with surface roughncss value of 25
pm or less but witllOU! recntrant
corncrs,
---.~,,~--.---.-,-~
---.~-~.~-----.
2511 x lOs
--
....
1.2 NOll-coaled welilhering sleel

base metal with rolled or cleaned
surface. Flame-cut edges wilh
surface roughness value of 2S pm
or less, but without reentrant
corners .
.------..
13 MClllbef wilh drilled or
reamed holes. Member with
reentrant corners at copes, Cllls,
b!ock~Ollts or other geometrical
discontinuities
made
to
requiremellts of Appendix 3.5,
_~~~.'::.~J2.~~:~(L!.~.~~~5s hoi e s.
1.4 Rolled cross sections with
weld access holes made to
requirements of Section 510.1.6
and Appendix A-3.S. Members
with drilled or reamed holes
corllaining bolts for attachment of
light bracing where there is a
small longitudinal component of
brace force.
~----.----
Away from all welds ur

structur,ll connections
165
------------- - - - - - -
120 x lOX
II
__
Away from aJJ welds Of

structural connections
1111
-_. _._ .. _----
--
~-,
120 x 10'
13
A! any external edge or ,H

hole peri meter
110
..
44 x 10'
At reentrant corner of weld

access hole or at any small
hole (may contain bolt for
minor connections)
69
- - - - - - ---------- ----------SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap

joints connected by high-strength
bolts in joints satisfying all
slip-critical
requirements
for
connections.
2.2 Base metal at net section of

high-strength
bolted
joints,
designed on the basis of bearing
resistance, btlt fabricated and
installed to all requirements for
slip-critical cOllllections. .. _---_._._----_._---_.
__
120 x 10'
110
Through gross section near

hole
110
In net section originating at

side of hole
.._-
---~-.~.,,-
."....
120 x lOx
--~.-
..---
_._--
....
~.---------.-.~.--
...... _-----,.
2.3 Base metal al the net section

of other IllCc!1I1l11cally fastened
joints except eye bars and pin
plates
-...
--~-
..---
2.4 Base meta! at net section of

eyebar head or pin plate.
22 x 10H
48
----- - - - - - - - _..- -------- .- E
II x 10"
31

side of hole
-~-.-~.--

side of hole
--'--
Nationa! Structural Code of the Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
_--,,-=::!~Ta:::b::.le'..:A:::'!!!:3::c.l~(
z::n~t.)=:.:.....--------~---------~~------l
Fafigue.Desigll.Pal'!.m!ters_~ .... _ .... _
CO'::_
IlluSlrative Typical Examples
f. J and 1.2
- - - - - - - _ . _ - - - - ----_.
__.__ __._._----_.__ ._--_._--_._-._-_. _._-_.._ - - - - - - ..
1.4
..
-----.--.-~~~
SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MA TERIAL IN M~~II_i\,l'I!~:\!:LYl'~l'.!'NED JOIN.,-,T"S,---~_____._______...

2.1
Ie!
2.2
2.3
---------2.4
.----~-----------------------
CHAPTEf1 5
Stress
Category
Descriptioll
Steel and Metal
C)123
Potential Crack
Initiation Point
Constant
Cj
,;
Jl
3.2 Base metal and weld metal in

members without attachments buillup of plates or shapes, connected by
continuous longitudinal complelejoint-penetration groove welds with
backing bars not removed, or by
contin UOU$ pal1 ial-joi Ilt-penetration
termination of longitudinal welds at

weld access holes in connected
120 x 10~
110
From surface or internal

d;scontinuitics in weld away
from end of weld
ll'
61 x 10
83
From surface or internal

discontinuities in weld,
including weld attaching
backing bars
22 x 10 6
48
From the weld termination

into the web or Oange
II x lOs
31
In connected material al start

and stop locatiolls of any weld
deposit
11 x 10
31
In flange at toe of end weld or

in flange at termination of
longitudinal weld or in edge of
flange with wide coverplates
E'
3.9 x 10 8
3.4 Base metal at ends of
longitudinal intermittent fillet weld

segmellts.
3.5 Base metal at ends of partial

length welded coverplales narrower
tban the flange having square or
tapered ends, with or without welds
across the ends of coverplatcs wider
than the flange with welds across
the ends.
Flange thickness:5 20 mill
Flange thickness> 20 mill
18
18
In edge of fiange at end of

coverplate weld
loaded members with longitudinally

welded end connections. Welds
shall be on each side of the axis of
the member to balance weld
stresses.
t
:5 20 mm
t>
Illm
31
11 x 1o~
18
E'
th
Initiating fro111 end of allY

weld termination extending
into the base metal
5- 124
CHAPH,H 5 - Steel <in(1 Mel<lls
l i~;;( . ' \(,
i:':<:-:.'
",
....
Table A'3.1(cont.)
' FMigUe J).e$igl) J!ilfaml.ltllrs
.'
"'.
" '-
Illustrativt' Typil'a l E.'(itmpic-s
,~eTlON 3-WELDEUJOINTSJOjNING
3.1
COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
{- f::
---,
~a,:1'
-::::....~~
. ~:.:(....
Rj
(<il l
-~
(hl--~~.J
<- -
- / ...
.. _--------_.
3.2
/.-
((I~
~~,
:::,..;;:-.-
..
_._---------
'-
....
''I C~~t7iJ}-~---4t ::.~":.
(oj
---
3.3
C-;---.
(a)
]:1
~~:" j
( I)) ~
~.
. )I
~~
--.~ -. -.--- - --- -- .--
..
..- - -.
--
..
3.4
(a)S~4 (b)~
~. ~
(C~
3.5
(~;.-~
~JL)
(.)
--:-:t'
(b)
(el
~
---"-'
--_._-_._----_._.__
..-
-.
..-
3.6
(a)
~~N'~'
1~1h>.
----c;
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELIDED END CONNEC'fIONS
-----"-
4.1
___ ~
___
"'~1(~~"'7
(al~~~
~~
:,-: . . . .
- .....
U-.:"""'t"~1k
(b)
"'"~I , u":I.:' '''''7
/'
.,,~....
""'---. .....-
--
Descri pti on
adjacent It) cOlnplclc-joinlpcnclnlliol1 groClvc wclded spl ices

with wclds ground essen tially
parallel j() the direction of stress :11
transitions in thic kness or width
made 011 a slore no great er than 8 to
20%.
F:.- < 620 M P.t
Slfl"SS
Potential Crack
C,uegory
Initiation Poinl
x.
10~
120
120x 10"
6 1 x I O~
110
Il iJ
83
From interna l di~colll i lluilies

in lill cr metal or along the
ru ~ ioll boundary
From internal discontin uities

in ril](:r metal Of along fusion
boundary o r .11 start of
transi ti o n wht!! F, ~ 620 MPa
5.3 Basc mctal with Fy equal to or

greater than 6 20 MPa and weld
mctal ill o r adjacent to co mplclcjoint -penc tration groove welded
splices with welds ground
essentially parall el to the direction
of stress at Iran sitio ns in width made
on a radius of nO! Jess than 600mm
with the point of tangency <ltthe end
of thc
i I or
adjaccnt 10 the toe of complctcjoint-penetration T or corner joint s
or splices, with or withou t
trans iti ons in thickncss having
slopes no greater than 8 to 20%,
when weld reinforcement is nOI
120x10' 'Si
110
44 x 10 6
69
From internal discontinuitics

in filler metal v
discontinuities a long the
fusion boundary
from surface di scontinuity

loe of weld eXI~. lldi!l~ into
base metal or along fu :-;ion
boundary.
;11
al
transverse end connecti ons of

te nsion -load ed plate clements using
par1ial-joini- pe netrat ion bUll o r T or
comer joints. wilh reinforcing or
contouring fill ets, FSR shall be the
sma ller of the toe c rack o r ront
c rack stress ran ge.
Crack initiating from
weld 10C :
Crack initialing frolll
Weld roOI:
In iti ating from geometrical

discontinuity at toe of weld
extending into base metal or,
initialing :11 weld ront subject
C
C'
4-1
~:
10"
(i9
to ten sion cxtendi ng up and

then ()til through weld
Nunc provided
Eqn .
A-) 4
National St ructura l Code of the Philippines 6
1h
Edition Volume 1
5 126
CHAP l ER 5 Sler:! and Met als
Jilustrllli vc Typical
f~xa ll!pJcs
5. 1
t:f1
(b )
5.2
5.3
l~i.
r .-L{
(b)
5.4
5.5
Association of Structu ra l Engineers of the Philippines
'. ,,!i . ':
Tabl~ A-~.l (cont.)

Faiis!~e'j)eSt2ij'ir.iriilrieters
Description
Siress
COllstant
Category
Ci
Threshold
Pm
Polcntial Crack
Init iation Point
M I'a
SECTION 5 'iWELPED-.f OINTSTRANSVERSE:rO DIRECTION OF StRESS (cont'd

5.6 Base melal and filler metal al
transverse end COIl IH!c tions of
Icns]oll- io:ldcd plate clements using
pl,ir of fillet welds on opposite
sid es of the plate r~H !:ih'lll be the
smaller of the toe crack or rool
"
crack stress range.

Crack in itiating frolll
weld toe:
Crack initialing from
C..
weld root:
44 x lOt(
69
&tn.
Nonc provided
Inililll ing from geometrical

discontinuity al loe of weld
ex tendi ng inla base
A- 3-5
melal or,
initialing at weld rool subject

to ten sion extend ing up and
then ou t through we ld
5.7 Base metal of tension loaded

plale clemcnls and on g irders and
rolled beam webs or flan gcs <II IOC
of trullsve rse fillet we lds adj acent 10
welded transverse stiffeners,
44 X
108
69
From gCOI llctrieal

d iscontinuit y at lac of fill et
ex tending into base meW I
SE<;110N 6 - BASE METAL A'f WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBE~ CONNECTIONS

6, I Base metal at detail s au ached by
complete-j oint penetratio n groove
weld s
long itudinal
subject
10
IO<lding only wheu the de tail
embodies a transi tion radi us R wilh
termination
g ro und
Ihe weld
smooth.
B
R?: 600mm
C
600mm> R?: 150mnl
ISOcllm > R ~ SOmlll
0
E
120 x 10'
11 0
44 ;tIOS
69
22 x I O~
48
I I x IO!;
31
50lllm > R
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edi tion Volum e 1
Ncar point of tangency o f

radius at edge of member
!i l?H
CHAPTEIl 5 STeel <lml Metals
~.
Jllu slr<ltivc Typicill Examples
5.6
fj'
r.~: :I!
r
.I
(oj
J-i~r!
f - r
(c)
-J-
f ,.-<
,~, . ~~ ..
Initiation Po int
thi ckness altachC{j

joint-penetration
groove
su bject to trall sverse load ing wit h or
without longitud in al loading when
the detai l embodies a transi ti on
mdi us R with the weld lenninalion
ground s moolh:
When weld reinforcement is not
removed :
R ;:: 600mlll
110
600n1l11 > R 2: I.sOmm
69
I S01l111l > R ;:: 50llUII
22 x Jog
48
50mm> R
I I x: I O~
31
Near points of tangency of

radius or in the weld or aI
fusion boundary or me mber o r
atlachl nenl
When weld reinrorccmclH is not

removed:
R ~
600mm
600mm > R ;:: 150mlll

J 50mm
c
c
69
48
69
At toe of the weld either alo ng

edge of member or the
attachment
> R 2: 500101
50mm > R
II
22 x JO~
101i
31
thickness attached by completcjoi nt - penetration groove welds

su bject 10 tranSVCfse loading with or
without longitud inal load ing when
the detail embodies a transition
radi us R with the we ld termination
ground smooth.
Whe n
weJd
removed:
R > 50mm
reinforcement
is
48
At toe of weld alon g edge of

in weld
(hinner material
termination in SI11(1I1 mdius
31
R ?: 50mlll
At toe of weld along edge of

thin ner material
When weld re inforcement is nol

fCmoved :
II x 10'
31
Any radius
National StrucllJral Code of the Philippin es 6'" Edition Volum e 1
'SECTIONii'-" BASE METAL AT WtWEJ)TJUNSVE8SEMEMBER'CONNECTlONS

6.2
~
(0'
--~
(b)
- -
~
(e)
6.3
~
Ie)
~
(d)
I\ssociation of Structural Engineers of th e PI1ilippines
:r1!~1~.4:~3.l (f!9I!~)
.'
Stress
Calegory
Description
. :: ."j.,::" . ,:.: ~:
. F$Ui!ile' i)i\sIi!n;:Pa~meters
....
:~p.'tr:'::
Thres hold
f'm
Constant
C/
'\'\'"
PUlcllIial Crack
Init iation Point
.or
SEQUON;/i ;4'BASE META:LA'I'WELDEO TRANS~RSE;MEMBERCONNECT[ONSJCifimil)

6.4 Base metal su hject to
]ollgilu di nul stress al lntllSYcrsc

members. wit h or wit hout l r a n .~vc rsc
stress, illIachcd by lilk'l Of ran ia l
penetration groove welds parallel to
direction of stress whellthe detail
In we ld Icnninalion or from
embodies a tranl>ition radius. R. wi th
the IOC of the we ld ex tendi ng

into member
the weld terminati on ground

smOOlh :
22x 10'
4&
II x 101
31
R > 50mnl
R 2::5011l1ll
SECTION 7 - BASE METAL AT SHORT .:\TTACHMENTS1

7. 1 Base metal subject to
iongih.:dinaJloading at details
atlachcd by fillet welds parallel or
tra ns verse (0 the di rection of stress
where the de ta il e m bodies no
tnmsitioll radiu s and wi th detail
lengt h in direct ion of stress, a, and
auachment height norma l 10 the
surface of the member, b:
a < 5001111
69
44 x 10"
50mm ::; a ::; 12b or

1000101
22
a> J2b or JOOIllIll

when b is :5 25mm
II x l Oll
a> 12b or IOOmm

when b is > 25mm
E'
3.9 x 10'
7.2 Base metal subjcct
48
X
10
In the member ctt the end of

the weld
31
18
\0
lo ngitudinal stress at detail s

::Iuached by fi lle t o r parti:-tl jointpenetrati o n g roove welds, with or
with ou t transverse load on detail.
when the detai l embodies a
transi ti on. R. wi th weld termi nati on
ground smooth :
In weld te rmination extendi ng

inlo member
D
2 x 101i
48
Ii
II x lOS
31
R> 50111111
R 5 S0mm
1
I .
Attac hments" as used herein. is defi ned as any steel detail welded to a member which, by ils mere presence and independent of ils
loading. causes a discOl~il1uity in the stress now i~llh c member and thus redu ces Ihe fati guc resistance .
..
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
Steet and
Melal~~
Illustrative Ty P!C,\
'" I LX<Illlplcs
'
6.4
Ss
(dl
(b~
.
Association of St'ructural En glneers
of the Philippines
Descri pi i on
Iniliation Point
CHtegory
"','
8. 1 B:I.~c melal ill s l ud~lypc she'lr

con nCClOrs ilH:lchcd by filici or
clcclric s tud welding .
8.2 She,lr on throat of corHinu ulIs ()r

intcrmitlc nt longil udinal o r
44 x I
AI toe of wcld in basc metal
150 xJO LO
Iransvcrse fi llct we lds .

or slol welch.
69
(Eqn
A -3-2)
In Ihro<11 of weld
II x I
31
At end of we ld in b;lSC lIlet:.!
150
[
high.
strcngth holt s. COllllll on bali s,
threaded anchor rods and han ger
rod s with cui , ground or rolled
threads. Stress rangc all tensile
stress area due to li ve l oad plus
prying acti on when applicable .
(Eqn
A -3-2)
55
AI fay ing surface
E'
3.9 x 10'
48
A t the root of the [hreads

extending into the ten sile
stress area.
th
Nolional Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
Il tuslralivl! Typical Examples
8.1
8.2
-.. c.?~~,
fa)
.~~~. :::-
~,
(b)
8.3
---~
-_._.._.._---_
..........
_-- -_......._._._----,----- - - - - _ . _----_._._...._...._...._

-_.
8.4
8.5
ti?-(d)
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of tile Pililippines
.. _
CHArTE I~
FIRE BARIUER: ElcmcllI of con stru ction formed of fircresist ing materials ,1Ild lested in acco rd ance with ASTM
Sl<Indard E 11 9. or other approved st'lndard fi re resistance
lc st, 10 dCIllOnSll'<He compliance with the Building Code.
FIRE ENDURANCE: A meas ure of the elapsed time
during which a material or (lsscmbly con tinu es to exhibit
fire resistance.
FIRE RESISTANCE: That property of asse mbli es that
preve nts or retards the pnssage of excessi ve heat, hot gases
Or names uluJe r cond itions of use and enables them to
continue to perform a stipulated function.
FIRE RESISTANCE RATING: The period of time a
building clement , component or asscmbly maintains the
abilit y to contain a fire. continues to perform a given
structural fUllction, or both; as detennined by tcst or
methods b<rsed 011 tests.
FLASHOVER: The rap id transition 10 a slate of total
su rfi:Jcc in volvement in a rire of combustible materials
within an enclosure.
HEAT FLUX: Radiant energy per unit surface area.
HEAT R ELEASE RATE: The rate at which thermal
energy is generated by a burning material.
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION: Building materials and
systems \vhose abili ty 10 resist the cCfecls of fire does not
rely on any outside activat ing condition or mechanism.
PERFORMANCE-BASED DESIGN:
An en gineerin g
approach to st ru ctural design that is based on agreed-upon
performa nce goals and objectives, engineering analysis and
qua ntitative assessment of altematives against those design
goals and objectives using accepted engineeri ng tools,
methodologies and performance criteri a.
Slel:1 all(f
Met~1
A 4.1.1 Performance Objective

w
Structural components. members and building frame

systems shall be designed so as to maintain their loadbearing function during the design-basis fire and 1O slII isfy
olher performancc rcquirements specifil:d for the building
occ up ancy.
Deformmion critelia shal l be applied where the means of
providing structural fire resistance. or the design criterill for
fire barriers, requires co nsiderati on of th e deformat ion of
the load-carrying structure.
Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and
deformations from the design basis fire shall not cause a
breach of hori zontal or vertical compal1mentati on.
A-4.1.2 Des ig n by Engineering Analysis
TIle analysis me thods in Section A-4.2 arc permitted to be
used to document the anti cipated performan ce of steel

framing when subjected to desig n-basis fire scenarios.
Methods in Section A-4.2 provide evidence of compliance
with perfonnancc Objectives established in Secti on A-4 .1.1.
The analysis methods in Section A-4. 2 are permj tted to be
lIscd to demonstrate an equ ivalency for an alternative
material or method, as permined by the building code.
A-4.1.3 Design by Qualification Testing
The qualification testing methods in Section A-4.3 are

permitted to be used to document the fire resistaJlce of steel
framing subject lO the standardized fire testin g protocols
required by building codes.
A-4.1.4 Load
Strength
Combinations
and
Required
The required strength of the struclUre and its elements shall

be determined from the following gravi ty load combinat ioll:
(A-4-1)
[0.9 or 1.2JD + T+ 0.5L + 0.2S

PRESCRIPTIVE DESIGN: A design method that
documents compliance with general criteria established in a
building code.
where
D
L
RtSTRAINED CONSTRUCTION: Floor and roof
assemblies and ind ividual beams in buildings where the
surrounding or su pport ing stl1iclUrc is capable of resisting
subst antia l thermal expansion throughout the range of
an ti cipated elevated te mpera tures.
UNRESTRAIN ED CONSTRUCTION: Fl oor and roof
assemblies and individual beams in buildi ngs that arc
assumed to be free to rotale and expand throughout th e
range of ant ici pated elevated temperatures.
:; 135
= nominal dead load

= nominal occupancy live load
;::: nomi nal snow load
nominal forces and deformations due to the
design-basis fire defi ned in Section A-4.2.1
A lateral noti onal load, N; =O.002Y;, as defined
jn
Appendix
A-7.2, where Ni = notional lateral load applied at framing

level i and Yi= gravity load fro m co mbination A-4-J acting
on framing level i, shall be applied in combinati on with the
loads stipulated in Equation A-4- 1. Unless otherwise
stipulated by the authorit)' havi ng jurisdiction. D. Land S
shall be the nominal loads specified in ASCE 7.
National S tructural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
!) n G
CHAPTEI1 5 StC'cl and Metals
A-4.2 Structural Design for Fire Conditi ons ul' Analysis

It is permil{cd to design structural members, components
<lnd buil di ng frames for clcv<Hcd tem peratures i n acco rumlcc
with the requireme nts of th is section.
A-4.2.1 ncs ign-fiasis Fire
A design-basi s lire shall be id cntifi l!d to dcscribe th e
hea ting conditi ons for Ihe sl nl clure. These heat ing
conditio ns shall relate 10 the fuel commodities and
comp:H1 mcnt characteristics prese lll in the assumed fire
area. The fuel load densit y based on th e occ upa ncy of the
space shall be considered when de termin ing the tOLil l fue l
load. Heating conditions shall be ,~pccj(ied either in terms of
a hea! flux or tempe rature of the upper gas layer created by
Ihe fire. The Vttriali on of the heatin g cond it ions with time
shall be dete rm ined for the du ration of the firc.
When the ana lysis met hods in Section A-4.2 arc used to
dClllonslnltc ~1I1 equi va lency as an ah cfnat ive material or
met hod as perm itt ed by a bui ldi ng code, (he des ign basis
fi re shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 11 9.
Table A-4.2.1
Properties of Steel lit Elevated Tem Jeratures
Sh :d Tt lll f)('r& lur('
('FII'C)
)20
193
1204
13 16
399
427)
538)
649 )
17601
87 1)
19821
11 0931
11 204 1
k,;",E.,.I
1.00
0.90
0.78
0.70
0.67
0.49
0.22
0.11
0.07
0.05
0.02
0.00
/ty::: / ,..JF1
1.00
0.94
0.66
0.35
0 .16
0.07
O.o.,
0.02
0.00
/t " ", F... / f ,
..
1.00
0.94
A-4.2.1.2 Pust-fl ashovt.'" Co mpartm ent Fires

Where the hea t release rm.c from thc fi re is sufficient to
callse fl ashover. a post " f1 a~h()vc r (';omparlmCIl1 fire shall be
assumed. The detc'rmination of the Icmj>eralurc versus Ii Ille
pro fil e resu lt ing fro lll the fin.: shall include fue l load,
ve nt ilati on cha rac teristics In Ihe Spil(';(" (natural .and
mechanical ),
compan rnelll dl nlcnsJons and thermal
t'har;:tl'!cristics of the cornpilrLlllCJlI bounda ry.
A-4.2.1.3 Exterior Fires
The exposure of eXlcrior structu re ( 0 names projecling from
windows or other wall openings as a result of a postflashover companmenl lire shall be considered along wit h
the rad iatio n from the interior fire through the opening. The
sha pe and length of the fl ame projec tion shall be used along
with the dis tance between the flame and the ex terior
steelwork to determine (he heal flux LO the steel. The
met hod idclH ifi ed in Section A-4.2.1.2 shall be used for
desclib ing the charac teri stics of th e int crior co mp arlment
fire.
A-4.2. I.4 Fire Duration
The fire du ration in a parti cular area shal! be determ ined by
considerin g the tolal combustible mass, in othe r wo rds. fuel
load ava ilable in the space. In the case of eit her a locali zed
firc or a post-flashover compartment fire, Ihe time dura ti on
shall be determined as the total combusti ble mass divided
by the mass loss rate, except where determined from
Seclion A-4.2. 1.2.
0.66
0.35
0.16
0.07
0.04
0.02
0.00
... Usc ambient pro >ertie5.
A-4.2.1.S Active Fire Prote('.tion Systems

The efrcels of <lclive fire protection systems shall be
considered when describing Ihe design~ba s is fire.
Where automatic smoke and heal ve nts are installed in nonsprinklered spaces, the resu lting smoke temperature shall be
detenn ined from calcu lation .
A-4.2.1.1 Localized Fire
Wh ere the heat release rate from the fire is insuffi cient 10
C,IIISC nashover. a localized fi re exposure shall be ass umed.
In sllc h GISeS , the fuel composition, arrangemem of the fuel
array ami nnnr area occupi ed by the fuel shall be used 10
dete rmin e the radiant hea t flu x from [he n ame and smoke
plume to the slmcture.
A-4.2.2 Temperatures in Structural Systems "der

}i'ire Conditions
Tempera tures within structural members, components anJ
frames due to the healing condi tions posed by the des ign.
bas is fire shall be determined by a heal transfer analysis.
Associalion 01 Structural Engineers 01 lhe Philippines
"
Tuble A-4.2.2
Properties of Conc"ete at Elevated TemperatUres '
A-4.2.4 Stru ctural Design Requireme nts
(;ulu: n .-Ic
Tl'lI1lH'nllun'
A4.2.4.1 General Stru ctural Integrity

The structural rrame sl);111 be c"pable of providing adl!<ju:II1!
slrt!ngth and deformalion capacity 10 withstand. as a system.
th e structural actions developed during the fire within the
prescribed limits of deform ation. The str uctural system shall
be des igned to sustain l oca l damage with the structural
sys tem as a whole remain ing stahh- .
k.
=F<- IF.
I~.II'.
t', . ( % )
NWC
1.W<:
_ ffil"CI
c- I .we
1.00
.-I<~~---~----u.;j3~ ~~
11J .1 ]
_ () ,~~_
I.UO
--":=F.i~IL ._~~ .... _g:.~.~. ____I . ~~__. - .--0.75

...--12HH)
1~1 61_"_
1'271
1.538)
1(49)
17601
IR71)
19R21
110931
(12M)
- ..
..
_-
0 .71
0 .54
~-
0.21
0.10
0.05
0.01
0.00
0.46
0.6 1
- i)5l1..-'::
0.98
0.57
0.85
0.71
0.38
0.20
0.092
0.073
0.055
0.036
0.018
0.00
0.62
O.RO
I.Of>
.1.32
O.H6
OX!,
_ ....
(J,34
._--
LOO
0.58
0.45
0.31
0.18
0.05
0.00
1.43
1.41) -1.50
Con tinuolls load paths sha ll be provided to transfer a!l

force.; from the exposed region 10 the final poi nt of
rcsisl<Jncc. The foundation shall be designed to resist the
fon:c!' illld to accommodate the deformations developed
during Ihl' design-basis fire.
1.50
A-4.2.3 Malcrial St rengths at Elevated Temperatures

Malcrhd propcJ1ics at elevated temperatures shall he
dClcmlincd rrolll lest data. In the absence of such claw. it is
permillcd tn use th!! material pro perties stipulated in this
section. These relationships do not apply for steels with a
yield streng th in excess of 448MPa or concretes with
specified compressio n strength in excess of 55 MPa.
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For
calclilmions m temperatures above 65C, the coefricicnt of
thermal expansion shall be 1.4 x I O~/<C:: . Thermal
expansion of nonnal weight ' concrete: For calculalions at
temperatures above 65C, the coefficient of thermal
expansion shaJl be 1.8 x IO"'C.
Thermal expansion of li ghtweiglll concre te: For calculations
at temperalUres above 65C, the coefficiem of thermal
expansion shall be 7.9 x JO'IC.

A-4.2.3.2 Mechanical Properties at Elevated
Temperatures
Thc deterioration in strength and stiffness of structural
members, components, and sys tems shall be taken into
accou nt in the structural analysis of the frame.
The values r~\7111 Film, Em. f _CIII, Ecm and Lnl at eleva ted
tcmperature to be used in s(llJctural analysis. ex pressed H....
the r<ltio wilh respect to the propeny at ambient, assumcd 10

be 68 1' (20C). shall be derined as in Tables A4 .2. I lind
A-4 .2.2. It is permittcd to interpolate between these valucs.
I'or lighlweighl cOllerele (LWC). values of lju shall be

obtained from tests.
A4.2.4.2 Strenglh Req uirements a nd Deformation

Limits
Co nformance of the structural sys tem to these requirements
.; hall he demonstrated ~y constructing a mathematical
model of the structure based 011 principles of structural
mechanics and evaluating this model for the internal fo rccs
and deformations in th e mcmbers of th e structure developed
by th e temperatures from Jhe design-b asis firc.
Individual members shall be provided with adequate
strength to resist the shears, axial forces emu moments
detclll1ined in accordance with these provisions .
Connecti ons shall develop the strength or (he connected
members or the forces indicated above. Where the means of
providing fire resistance requires the considerati on of
deformation criteria. the deformation of the structural
~)'S lCIl1. or members thereof, under the design-basis fire
s hall not exceed the prescribed limits.
A4.2.4.3 Methods of Analysis

A-4.2.4.3a Advanced Methods of Analysis
The methods of analysis in thi s secti on arc perm ill cd for the
des ign of all steel building strll ctures for firc co nditi ons.
The design-basis fire exposure shall be lhat determined in
Sct:lioll A-4.2.1. The ana lysis shall include both CI thermal
response and the mechani cal response to the design-btlsis
fire .
The thermal response shall produce 11 temperature field in
each structural element as a result of the des1t!ll-hasis fire
and shall incorporate temperature dependent thermal
propenies of the structural elements ilnd lire-resistive
materials as per Section A-4 .2.2.
The mechanical response results in f(lfCl:S and deflections ill

the structural sys tem subjected to the thermal response
calculated from the desi gn-basis firc. The J11 cr.;hanical
National Structural Code of U"le Philippines 6
111
Edition Volum e
!; 138
CHAPlEH 5 Sleel a nd Metals
responsc shall take into <lccoUIH explicitly the <.ictcriof'{ltiull

in strength and stiffness wi th incre<ls ing tempcr~tturc. ti ll.:
effects of thermal expansions and large defonnatiolls.
Boundary t.:ondi{iolls lind connection fixity lIlust rcprescill
the proposed slnlclUral design. Material propcrtil!s s hall hc
dcfincd ilS per Section A-4.2.3.
The resulting annlysis slwll cOllsidcr all relevant limit Slatcs,
!i:ucI: as exccssive denections, connection fractures. and
ovel'lll or 10c<l1 buckling.
A-4.2.4.3b Simple Methods of An"lysis
The methods of analysis in this section are applicttble for
the evalu mion pf the performance of individual members :.u
elevated temperatures during exposure to firc.
The support and rest raim conditions (forces, moments and
boundary condit io ns) applicable ill normal lemperatures
may be assu med to remain ullch.lIlged throughout the fire
ex posure.
I.
Tension members
It is permined to model the thermal re sponse of a lCIl Sioll

clemcnt using a oncdirnensiona! heat transfer equation with
heal input as directed by the design -basis fire defill ed ill
Secti on A-4.2.1.
The des ign st rength of a tcnsion mcmber shall be

dct ermined usi ng the provisions of Section 504. with steel
properties as sti pulated in Section A-4 .2.3 and assumin g it
unifonn temperature over the cross section using the
temperature equal 10 the maximum steel temperature.
2.
C;ompression members
It is pemliHed to model the thennaJ respon se of a

compression element using a onc-dimensional heat transfer
equation with heat inpu t as directed by the design-basis fire
defined in Section A-4.2. I.
The design strength of a compression member shall be
determined using the provisions of Section 505 with steel
properties as stipulated in Section A-4 .2.3,
3.
Flexural members
It is permiHed to model the thermal response of flexural

clements using a ollc-dimensional heal tr:msfer equation to
calculat e botlom flange temperature and to assume that this
bouom nangc temperature is conSl<1nt ovcr the depth of the
member.
The design strength or a flexural member s.hall he

determined usi ng the provisions or Section 506 wilh steel
properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3.
4.
Composite floor members
dimcnsiOll<ll hC:1l trans!"er equatioll to cak:ulatc honom

/lange (Cmper:Hurc. That tcmperature sll<lll be taken as
constant between the bOIlOIll nangc and mid-depth of the
web and shall dccre:lsc lin t.:arly by no more than 25 percent
from the mid-depth of Ihe web tu the lOp fl<.lIlgc of the
beam.
or a composite llexlIfil l member shall

be determined using the provisions of St!ction 509. wilh
reduced yie ld slrt!sses in th e sleel consistent w i t!~ the
(emperature varimioll described under thermal response.
The design strength
A-4.2.4.4 Design Str ength

The design strength shall be dClennined as in Section
502.3.3. The nominal strength. Rn. shall be calculatcd using
material proper1ies, as stipulated in Section AA.2J. al the
temperature developed by the dcsign -bnsis lire.
A-4.3 Design by
Qualjftc~'lion
Testing
A-4.3.1 Qnalification St;\Ildards

Stru ctunl! members and compone nts in steel buildings shall
be C]unlified for th e ratin g period in conformance wilh
ASTM El19. It shall be permitted to demonstrate
co mpliancc with these requirements using the procedures
specified for steel construction in Section 5 of ASCE/SFPE
29.
A-4.3.2 Restrained Cons truction

For Ooor and roof asse mblies and individual bemus in
buildings. a restrained condition exists when the
surrounding or suppor1ing stmcture is capable of resisting
actions caused by lhermal expansion throughout [he range
of anticipated elevatcd temperatures.
Steel beams, girders and rrames supporting concrete slabs
that are welded or bolted to integral framing members (in
other words, columns, girders) shall be considered
restrained constmclion .
A4 .3.3 Unres trained Constru ctio n

Steel beams, girders and frames that do nOl support a
concrete slab shall be considered unrestrained unless the
members are bolted or wclded 10 surroundin g cOl1stlllcti w.
that has been specifically dcsigned and detailed to re~.; '.:
actions caused by therm al ex.pansion.
A steel member bearing on a wall ill a single span or at the

end spa n of multiple spnns shall be considered unreslrain c(!
unless the wall has been designed and detailed to n: :.. ,
effec ts of therma l expa nsion .
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural

elements supporting a concrete slab using a one-
A.'pPEND,Jx: A.S . .
EVALUATtON:QFEX1STING
STR
. uCttJRES <,," ": ... .
"
" . .
This appc.ndix applies to lhe evaluation of the strength and

stiffness under sIalic ve rtical (grav it y) loads o f existi ng
s truc tures by Sl fll t'l ural anal ysis. by load le!>ls, Of by .1
combination of struc tura l cuwlysis ,lIld load lests when
specified by the cnginccl"-o[ rccord or ill the con:raCI
docum ent s, For slIch evaluation, th e steel grades afC not
limi lCd to those li sted ill Section 50 1.3.1. This appendix
docs not address load testi ng for Ihe effects of seismic loads
or moving loads (vibrations).
ava ilable, th e us c uf app licable projCt.:1 records ~haJ! he

pcrmi Hcd to rcducc or eliminate the need for IC!-i ting.
A-S.2.2 Tt'nsilc Proper ties
Tensi le properties or members shall be considered in
evaluati on by stnl clu ral analysis (Secti on A 5 . ~) Of load

tc~;(s (Secti on A-SA). Such propcI1ies shall include the yield
stre ss, (ensi le strength and percellt elongat ion. Where
avai lable. ccnified mill test reports or CCrlified rcporiS of
tests made by the fabricator or a te sting la bo rat ory in
accordance will' ASTM A6/A6M or ASD8/A568M, as
applicabl e, shall be permitted for this purposc, Otherwise,

tcnsi le tcsts shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTMA370 from sa mples cu t from components of lhe
structure.
The Appendix is organi zed as follows :

A-5.1
A-5.2
A-5.3
A-S.4
General Provisions
Material Properties
A-5.2.l Determination of Required Test

A-S.2.2 Tensile Properties
A-S.2.3 Chem ical Composition
A-S .2.4 Base Metal Norch Toughness
A-5.2.5 Weld Melal
A-S.2.6 Bolls alld RivelS
Evaluation by Structural Analys is
A-5.3. 1 Dimensional Data
A-5.3.2 Slrenglh Evalualion
A-5.J.3 Serviceabi lity Evaluation
Eva luation by Load Tests
A-SA.' DClermina(ion of Load Rating by
Testing
A-5.4 .2 Serviceability Evaluation
A-5.5 Eva lu ation Reron
A -5.1 General Pro visions

These provisions sha ll be applicable when the evaluation of
an ex isting sleel structu re is specified for (a) verificati on of
a specific set of design loadings or (b) determination of the

avai lable strength of a load resisting mClnber or system. The
evaluation s hall be perfonncd by st ructural analysis
(Secl ion A-53). by load lesls {Seclioll A-5A}, or by a
co mbination of structural analysis and load test s, as

specifi ed in the contract documents. Where load tests arc
used. the ~ n gi l1 eer-of- record shall first <1 nalyze the $I I'llCl urC .
prepare <I lc~ting plan , and develop iI wrilicil procedure tn
prevenl excessive permanell t deformi1 tion or catastrophic
co llapse during lc ~tillg .
A-S.2 Material Properties
A-S.2.1 Determination of UC(1I1ircd Tes ts
The e ll g ine er-o f~rc cord shall determin e th e specifi c lests

Ihm are required from Section A-S.2.2 lhrough A-S.2.6 and
specify th e locations where they arc required. Where
A-S.2.3 Chemical Composition

Where we lding is 31l1icipated for repair or modificalioll of
exis tin g structures, the chemical com pos ition of the steel
shall be deter mined for use ill preparing a welding
procedu re specificat ion (WPS). Where available. resuhs
from cCI1ificd mi ll test reports or certi fied rcpor!.') of lests
made by lhe fabric.nor or a tes ting laboralory in <lccordance
with ASTM procedures shall be pennilled for this purpose .
O therwi se, an alyses shall be co nducted in accordance with
ASTM A 75 1 from the sa mples used to determine tensile
properties. or from samples lakcn from the same locations.
A-S,2.4 Base Melal Nolch Toughness
Where welded tension splices in heavy shapcs and plates as

defi ned in Section 501.3. 1d are critical to the performance
of the structure. the Charpy V-Notch toughness shall be
determ ined in accorda nce with the provisions of Section
50 1.3.1 d. If til e notch tou ghness so determin ed docs not
meet the provisions of Sect ion 50 1.3. 1d , lhe engineer of
record shall determine if remed ial actions are required.
A-S.2,S Weld Metal
\Vh ere structura! performance is dependent on existing

we lded connections, representative sa mples of weld metal
shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and mechanical tests
shall be Ill<tde to characterize the weld met al. A
determin ation shall be made of the magnitude and
consequences of irnperfectioll~ . If th e requirements of AWS
D 1.1 {l rc not mct, the enginecrof-rccord shall dctermine if
re medial ac tioll s are req uired ,
A-S .2.6 Bolts lind Hivets
Rep rcsent ative samples of bolts shall hc inspecled to
determine markings and classifications. \Vhere bolts cannot
he properly idcntincd visuall}'. represcnt ative samples shall
be rem oved and tested to determine tensile strength in
acco rdance wilh ASTM 1'606 or ASTM F606M and Ihe boll
classified accordingly. Altemalively. the assumption that

Ihe bolls are ASTM A307 shall be permilled. Hivels shall be
lh
National Structural Code of Ihe Phili ppines 6 Edition Volume 1
~) 140
C HAPTE:r~ ~;
. Steet anti Met als
assumed IU he ASTM A502, Grade I, unless a higher grade

th rougil dOcUIHclHation or testing.
i s csw hli shcd
A-S.3 Evaluation by Strueturnl Analysis

A-S.3.' DimclIs ionnl Data
All dimensions lIsed in Ihe evaluation, such as spans,

column heigills, memher spaci ngs, bnlcing locati() lIs, cross
sectio n dimcllsioJ)s, thicknesses and connecti o:. dct ai ls,
shall be detcrmined fmlll a field survey. Alternatively, when
available, it shall be permitted 10 determine such
dimensions from appli cable project design or shop drawings
wilh field verificati on of cri tic.:al va lucs.
A-5.3.2 Strength Evaluation
Forces (load effects) ill members and co nnectiolls shall be
determined by structllral analysis appli cable to the type of
stru cture evaluated . The load effec ts shall be detcrmined for
the loads and faclOred load combinations stipul ated in
Secti on 502 ,2. The ava il able st ren gth of members and
connections shall be determ ined from il pplica blc provisio ns
o f Sections 502 through 5 1J of this Speci ficalion .
A-S.3.3 Serviceability Evalualion
Where required, the deformati ons at service loads shall be

calcul ated and repo'ned ,
A-S.4 Evaluation by Load Tests
A-5.4.1 Determination of Load Rating by Testing
To detennjnt the load rating of an existing Ooor or roo r
stru cture by testin g, a test load shall be applied
increment al ly in accorda nce wi th the engineer of record 's
plan. The Slnlclure shall be visually inspected for signs of
di stress or imminent failure at each load level. Appropriate
measures shall be taken if these or any othe r unusual
conditions are encountered.
The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as {he

ma ximum applied test load plus (he in-sit u dead load. The
live load rating of a fl oor stru cture shall be dete rmined by
such as member dellcctiulls, shall be monito red at criti cal
locati ons during Ihe test, referenced 10 the initiLl I position

before loading, It sball be de!ll onstfil tcd, while ma int aining
maximuill test load foJ' Olle hour that the deformation of the
structu re does not in crease by more than I () percent above
that ,II the beginning o f the holding period, It is permissible
10 repeal the seq uence if necessary to demonst rate
co mp liance.
DefoJ'IllHtions or the s tru c t~lre shall also be reco rd ed 24
hours after the test loading is removed to determine the
amount of perm anent set. Because the "mounl of acceptabl e
permimcnl deformat ion depends on the specific structure. no
li mit is specified for permanent de formation at maxi mum
load ing. Where it is not reasible to load {cst the entire
structu re, II segme nt or l onc of not less th an onc complete
bay, representative of the most crilical conditions, shall be
selec ted.
A-S.4.2 Serviceability Evaluation
Wh en load tests arc prescribed, the SlruClU rc shall be loaded
increment all y 10 lhe servi ce load level. Deformations shall
be monitored for a peri od of aile hour. The structure shall
th ell be unload ed and th e deformation recorded.
A 5.5 Evaluation Report
After the ev,alua ti on of an existin g structure has been

co mpl eted, the engineer-of-record shall prepare a repon
documentin g the evaluation. The report shall indicate
whethcr the evaluation was performed by structural
anal ys is, by load testin g or by 11 co mbination or structural
ana lysis and load testing. Furthermore. when lestin g is
pcrfonned. the repon shall include the loads and load
combination used and the load-deformat ion and timedcfOJ:lllation
relationships observed.
All
relevant
information obtained from design drawin gs. mill test reports
and auxiliary material testing shall also be reported , Finally,
the report shall indicate whether the stmc{urc, including all
membe rs and connecti ons. is adequate to withstand the load
effec ts.
setting the tested strength equal to 1.2D + 1.6L, where D is

th e nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load ratin g
for the structure.
The nomjnal live load rating or the noor stnlctu re shall nOI
exceed th at which ca n be calcul ated using applicable
provisions of the spccification . For roof structures, Lr, 5, 01'
R as defined in the Symbols, shall be substitut ed for L.
More se vere load combin ati ons shall be used where
required by thi s code. Peri odic unl oading shall be
considered once th e service load level is attained and after
the onset of inelastic structural behavi or is identified to
document the amount of permanent set and the magnitude
of the inelastic deformations. Deformations of the structure,
Association of Structural Engineers of Ihe Philippines
, .', ~.;~)i"':'_~f.~tf.
; _",.: \ 'J
.'i":i,~):<?i~
C i IAprUl
~i
~.
Sii2(::1 and Metal
141
'1l1C rcqu ired br:lcc JriJj;I('.).\ is
fl,,,
1(21' )
A[21',) ,
[J,,, = " - --
= - - ' (I..RFD )
0 \ I.},
. L,.
(AS !)
(A-n-21
This appendix addre sses the minimum brace .')trcnglh and
stiffness necessary 10 provide member strengths based 011
th e unh :~c('d length betwccn braces with all cfTcctivc length
factor. !" {'qual to l.O .
where
~
L"
The appcndix is organizcu
.IS
= 0.75 (LRFD)
= 2.00 (AS)))
:; disliUlce between bnlccs, in. (mm)
follows:
For desig n according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
A-6.1
A-6 .2
A -6.3
General Provisions
Columns
Bcams
p,
Usrr' Note: The requirements for the stability of braced[rall le ~ystems are provided in Section 503. The provisions
required axial co mpressive slrength using LRFD

load combin .tliOils. N
:=
For design according to Section 5023.4 (ASD)

p,
in Jus appendix apply to bracing. intended to stabilize
:::. required tlxiai compressive strength using ASD

load combinati ons. N
in, ljvidual members.
AG.3.2 Nodal Bracing
A . 6.1 General Provisions

H I acing is assumed 10 be perpendicular [ 0 th e members to
r..~ braced; for inclined or diagonal bracing, the brace
~ trength (force or moment) and stiffness (fo['ce per unit
Ji splace ment or moment per unit rotation) shall be adjusted
for the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness
ThL~
required brace strength is

1',,, = O.() J P,
The required brace stiffness is
[J,,, = Q ( 81' ) (AS!)
furn ished by a brace shall include its member and gcometric

properties. as well as the effecls of connecti ons and
anchOling detail s.
(A64)
~
Two general type~ of bracing system s arc conside red,

relative and nodal. A relati ve brace cont rols th e movement
of lhe brace point with respect to adjacent braced poin ts. A
nodal brace controls Ihe movement at the braced poinl
wit hout direct interaction Wilh adjacelll braced point s. The
ava ilable strength and stiffness of the brac ing shall equa l or
exceed the required limits unless analysis indi c at es thai
smaller values arc justified by analysis.
A seeond~order analysis that includes an initial out~of

straightness of the member to obtain brace strength and
stiff~ess is permitted in lieu of the requirements of this
appendix.
A6.2 Columns
It is permined to brace an indi vidual col umn .11 e nd and
intermediate points al ong its le ngth by either relat ive or
nodal bracing systems. h is assumed that nodal braces arc
equall y spaced along the columll.
A-6.2 .1 Relative Bracing
The required brace strength is
= 0 .75 (LRFD)
= 2.00 (ASD)
P,
:=
required axial compressive slrenglh using LRFD

load combimuions. N
for design according to Seclion 502.3.4 {AS D)

PI'
:; required axial compressive strength using ASD

When Lb is less than I...t/, where /..,q is the maximum unbraced

length for the required column force with K equal to J.O.
then IAI in Equation A~6 -4 is pcrmiued to be taken equal to
/..q
A6.3 Beams
AI points of suppon for beams, girders and tnlsses, restraint
against rotation about their lo ngitud inal axis shall he
provided . Ream bracing shall prevent the relati ve
di splacement of the top and bottom flanges. in other words ,
twi st of the secti on. Lateral stHbility of beams shall be
provided by laleml
(A-6- 1)
(A(,.})
braci ng, torsional
bracing or a
(Q doubJr.
combination of the Iwo. In members subjected
th
curvature bending, the in!lcclioll pOin! shall not be

<.:onsidc n:d a brace point.
:::: required flexural strength using LRFD lCld
combinations, N-m/l)
A6.3.1 Lntcral Bracing
For design <lccording to Seclion 502.3.4 (ASD)
Brac ing shall he .ulachcd Ilcar Ihe compression flange.

execpt for II c31lfilcvcred member, where an end brace shall
be illliIchcd ncar the lOp (tcm ioJl) flange. Luera! bracing
stull I be mUlched 10 hOlh nanges at the brace point nearest
lhe inllcclioll poinl for beHIllS subjected 10 double c ur valure
be nding along the length 10 be brHced.
M.
ncxufill strength
combinations, N-IllIH
= reyuired
When Lit is less than

M". then Lh in
using
AS!)
itud
u,. the m:'ximulll unbraccd lcngrh for
Equatio!l A-6-S shull be permilled to be taken equal to ! "/.

A-6.3.l.Ia Relative Ilntcing
The required brace stre ngth is
(A-6-5)
The required brace stiffness is
not be attached ncar the compression flange . Th ,.~

conncction bet wcen a torsional brace and the beam shall b ~
able 10 support Ihe required mo ment g iven below.
(A-6-6)
where
$ = 0.75 (LRFD)
A-6.3.2 Torsional Uracing

II is pennillcd 10 provide either nodal or cO lllinu~':> us
tors ional bracing along (he beam length. It is pe rmitted 10
attach (he bracing al any cross-sectional location and it nC t! d
A-6.3.2.2a Nodal Bracing

The required bracing moment is
= 2.00 (ASD)
M/u
iz"
Cd
LI,
:::; distance between flange ce lllroids, mill

:::: 1.0 for bending in single curvature; 2.0 for
doubl e curvature; Cd = 2.0 only applies to the
brace closest to the infl ection point
=- laterally unbraced length. mill
= required flexural strength using LRFD load

combinations, N-mm
= required
flexural strength
combinations, N-mm
using
(A-6-
nCbLb
The required crossfrarne or diaphragm bracing stiffness i;
fir)
(A- u- :(-.
AB = [ 1- -
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
Mr
_0'_
02_4M-,-,L-,-,
9)
M,.
ASD
load
fiscc
where
=~(2.4LM':)(LRFD)
Pr =0.(2.4LM':)(ASfiJ
IIElyC
IIElyC.
"
(A -G- II)
A-6.3.1.1 b Nodal Bracing
The required brace strength is
(A -6- i:O )
(A-6-7)
.where
The. rcq uircJ brace stiffness is
$ = 0.75 (LRFD)
(A-6 -8 )
$ = 0 _75 (LRFD)
= 3.00 (ASD)
User Note: Q = 1.521$ = 3.00 in Equation A-6-11 bee_us"

the moment term is squared.
where
!2 = 2.00 (ASD)
For design according to Section S02 .}.3 (LRFD)
l\.::so::.:iation of Structural :::n9ir.eers
= span lengt h, mm
= number of nodal braced poinls wiLhin the :-: ~ .
= modulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000 i\ :. '

= out-ofplane mornelll of inertia, mm~
= modification fRctor defined in Section 506
or the Pililippines
I",
= beam web thic kness.
t,
= web sl i/fcncr thickness, mm
fJ,
= stiffener width for one-sided slifft'ncrs (usc twice

the individual stiffener width for flilirs of
stiffe ners ). 111m
= hrace stiffness excl udin g web disto lli oll.
N-mm/radia n
= web distortional sliffncss, including th l! effect of'
web transverse stiffeners, i f any. Nmmlradiiln
/if
Illlll
= required flexural strengt h using LRFD load

combinati ons. N-mm
= required Ilcxura! strength

combinat ions. N1ll1ll
The appendix is organized as follows :
A7.3
General Rcq uirclllcllts

Noti onal Loads
DesignAnalysis Constraints
A-7.1 General nequircmcnts

Mcmbers shnll satisfy the provisions of Section 508. 1 with
f or design according 10 Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
M"
Thi s appendi x addresses thc direct :!J1alysis method for

st rw..'llInli sys t ~ms compri sed of moment [nunes. braced
frames. shear walls, or combinalions the reof.
A7.1
A7.2
Mr
APPENDIX A7
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD
usin g ASD load
If B.uT < PT. Equation A6 IO is negati ve . which indicates

that tors ional bea/JI bracing will not be effective due to
inadequa te web distorti onal stiffness.
When required. the web stiffener shall extend the full depth
of the braced member and shall be aHac hed to the flange if
the torsional brace is also altached to the flange .
Alternati vely, it shall be permi ss ible to stop the stiffener
shon by a distance equal lO 4(,, frolll any beam flan ge that is
not directly attached (Q th e torsional brace. When uJ is Jess
than Lq. then Lb in Equati on A-69 shall be permitted to be
taken equal to i.,q .
A-6.3.1.2b Continuous Torsional Bracing
For continuous bracing, use Equations A-69, A-6JO and

A-6 13 with Un taken as 1.0 and LII taken as l .q; the braci ng
moment and stiffn ess are given per unit span length . The
distonional stiffness for an unsliffencd web is
(A6-l3)
the nominal column slrcngths. 1'". determined usin g K =

1.0. Thc required st rength s for members, co nnecti ons and
other structural elemelHs shall be determined using a second
order elastic annlysis Wilh the cons traints presented in
Secti on A7 .3.
All componenl and connecti on dcfofmtll ions that contribute
to th e IHlcral displacement of the structure shall be
cOl1sidcrc<.l in the ana lysis.

A 7,2 Notional Loads
NOlionalloads sha ll be applied to the lateral fr aming system

account for the effects of geometric im perfections.
inelastici ty, or both. Notional load s arc lateral loads that arc
applied at each framing level and specified in terms of the
gravity loads applied at that level. The gravity load used to
dc(cnn inc the noti onal load shall be equal 10 or greater than
the gravity load associated with th e load combination being
evaluated. Notional loads shall be applied in the direction
that adds to the destabilizing effec ts under the specified load
co mbination.
(Q
A-7,3 Design-Analysis Constraints
I. The second -order analysi s shall consider both po and

p .6. effects. It is permitled to perform the analysis
lIsing any general second order analysis method. or by
the amplified firstorder analysis method of Section
503.2, provided that the 81 and 8 2 [Helors are based on
the reduced sti ffncsses defi ned in Equations A7-2 and
A7 3 . Analyses sha ll be conducted according to the
design and loading requirements specified in either
Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) or Section 502 .:1.4 (ASD). For
AS D, the second-order analysis shall be carried out
under 1.6 times the ASD load combinations and th e
results shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
strengths.
Methods of analysis that neglect the effects of P-o o n
the lateral displace ment of the struc ture arc permitted
National Structural Code of the PhilipPInes 6 Edition Volurm~ 1

1h
where the axi.!l loads in all members whose flexural

sliffllcsscs ,Irc considered to l'olltributc to (hc lillcral
stability of the structure satisfy the following limit :
OPr
< 0.15P,/.
(A 7) )
shall he uscd for all
= required axi.t/ COl lpressivc strenglil under LRFD
Pl" .
or ASD load com~l;lla!ions, N

1
= rc EJI/}, evaluated in the plane of bending
/"
/'y
2.
a = 1.6 (ASD)
A nOlionalload. M = 0.002Y;. applied independently in

two orthogonal directions, shall be applied as n ItlI('ra l
(oad ill all load combinations. This load shall be in
addition to other latcral loitd s, if an y,
= noti ollill I<lh.:ral load applicd .1( level i . N

= gravity load from Iht: LHFD load combination or
1.6 tillle s thl; ASD load cOlllbination applied at
level i .
N
I
I
J.() for al', /P)'~ O .5

;: : 41 ap,.IPr (l-aPrll'.\")J for 0.1', IP y > 0.5
~ 1"I.~4uircd axi,lI compressive strcrigth under tUr/J
or ASD load t.:ombinations, N .
:::;: APr, lllC'mber yield strellc,h, N
and
where
mOIll(,.IlI of inertia "hou t the ,Ixis or hCIlJing,

4
Jl1m
:lIld
a = 1.0 (LRFD)
The llolitllHti Ivad ltldl icicnl of {Ul02 b h<ts('d {Ill ,Ill

ass limed inilia) !-tto,.~' 0I11.0fpltllllhnc-.:-. ratio of IIS00.
(1
= 1.0 (LRfD)
4.
A rr.!duccd axial stiffness, fA 1,: ,
IA7) )
shall be lIscd for members whose axia l s tiffness is

<';ollo;;idcred to cont ribute to the lateral stability of :11t""
struclUrc. whcre A is the cross~scctiollal mcmber area.
\'.'hO!I"l' 111. ralio of set:ond-nrdC'1" drir. :0 fi r~I'

III or less than 1.5. it j ., jlCI 'li i~.i ihlc tu
app ly Ihe Iltli l on;I/ 10il.:l. Ni, as :.t minillllllll l:ucl"::1 ioml for
"IOIIl1\',
order Jrifl : ~. {.qua l
the gril\ it~ unly JO;ld nJillbinationl' <llld nol ill (ombin:ttion
with (llhl~ r ialrraJ 10<lcl-..
For illl
it I~ permissible III lI~e Ih(' \i~"ulllcci ~'ul()r

!,'.("ollldry in the anal)'!.\ {)f
~. tn! :P II "~ In ]it'll
L;b(,S.
plllmblH.' ~~
nw
of <..Ipplyinr, ;s noliollal load or a minimum !:tIc-lid loud

defined :Ihmc.
<I"
User Not e: The unreduced stiffncsses (I ~I ilnd AF) af(' u.;r.d

in the above c~klliation s. The rat i,) 1)1" ~cco lld - ()nkr drift 10
first-order dJifi can be represented by H2. ;1" cOl.klll ill :?d
using Equation 503.2-3, AllCm<1tivd y. Iht~ f<llio ,_''' I I tIC
calculated by cOl1lp3ring the r(' .lt u/l~ ,., :' ';{{'.'III.t " 1 'er
analysis 10 the re.'\ults of a firsl~ord cl ;Bli.dy"i:-. ,'. r~c\ ihe
analysc~
are conducted either under 1 j{FD l ~ )ad
combinatiolls directly or ulI{kr ASD loal1 ('ombinatiolls
with" 1.6 factor applied to the !ISO gruvily loads.
3.
A reduced flexur:1I stiffness, EI*,
Ei' = O.8t" EI
a = 1.6 (ASD)
In lieu of using '[I, < 1.0 where aPr /1\ > 0.5. tit = 1.0 Ill:l)'
be lIsed for all members. provided 111<11 an additive not io nal
load 01"0.00 1Yiis added to the nOlio!lalload rcqllircd in (2).
Where a ~m;lI!l~r a~sul1!cd ollt-of-plu;llhlles~ j ", justified , th e

no tioliallo;ld l..."ocfTi cil..."II' may be ad"ll" ll.'d plOponiullHlly.
For
whose t1cxunll stiffness is

I hr'
where
where
PI
lllelllbcr~
(onsidercd to cOnlributc to the lateral stabilit y of

structure,
(A 72)
AssociBtlon 01 Structmal Engineers of the Philippine s
"r
PART2A
..i
I,
SEISMIC PRQVI~tQN 11'OR,

STRUCTURAL S'i1EEL BUILDINGS
SYMBOLS
A,
Cross-SCCliOllni <lrC<l of n hori:lOlltal bound<lf),

clemen! (I-mEl, 111m2
Cross -sc~li onall1rca of a ve rtical boundary clement
K
I.
L
L
L"
(VBE), mm2
flange arc<l, 111m2
Gross area, 111m2

CroS!i-scctional area of the s truc tural steel core,
111m2
Area of the yielding segment of steel core, rnm2
Minimuill arca of tic reinforcement , mm2
Hori zontal area or the steel pl ale in compos ite
sheaf wall, mm2
A"
Area of link stiffener, mm 2
A".
Link web area,
C"
Cd
Ratio of required strength to available strength.

Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness ilnd
1ll1ll2
L,
M"
M,,,
curvmurc
C"
C,
E
E
E
I
I',
If
Deflection amplification
Parameter lI sed for determining the approximate
fundamental period
Dead load due to Ihe weighl of the structural
clements and pc nnanelll features on the building.
Outside diamcter of round HSS. mm
E:,u1hquakc load
EfreCl of hori z.ontal and venical earthquake
induced loads
Modulus of elasticity of sleei, 200,000 MP"
Flexural clastic st iffncss of [hc chord mcmbcrs of
the special segment, Nmm2
Specified minimum yicld stress of the type of steel
to be used, MPa . As used in the Specification,
"yield stress" denotes either the minimum
specifi ed yield poinl (for Ihose Sleels that ha ve a
yield point) or the specified yield strength (for
those steels that do not have it yield point)
Fy of a beam, MPa
Fy of a column, MPa
Specified minimulll yield stress of the ties, MPn
Specified minimum yield strc::>s of the steel core, or
aewal yield stress of tile steel co re as determined
from a COHPOJltcst, MPa
Specifi ed minimulll tensile strcngth, MPa
H cight of story, which may be takcl1 as the
distance betwee n the centerline of Iloor framing al
each of the levels above and below, or the dislnnce
between the top of Ooor slabs aI each of the levels
above and below, mm
Moment of inertia, mm4
Moment (If im:11ia or <I v(!rtif.:al boundary dl'mt:ut

(V BE) taken perpendicular \() thc direct ioll of thl~
web plilLC linc, t1lm4
Effec:tivc length factor ror prismatic membcr
Live load due to OCf.:upalH:y alld 1ll0Vl',Ihk
equi pment, kN
Spa n length of the tru ss,
IlUll
Diswllcc between VilE cCI1[CrIiIlCS, mill

Length between points whkh are ei ther braced
against lateral <.lisplaceiiu!1lI or compression flange
or braced against twist of the cross section, mill
Link length. 111m
Clear diSlnncc between VUE flanges, mm
Distance between plastic hinge locations, 111m
Limiting laterally unbraced length for fuli plastic
flexural strength, uniform momenl case, rom
Limiting laterally unbraccd length for plastic:
analysis, Illlll
Length or the special seg ment , mm
Required nexural strenglh, using ASD load
combinations, NlTun
Additional moment due to shear amplificntioll
from the local ion of the plastic.: hinge to the colullln
ce nterline based on ASD load combi nati ons, Nnun
M"
M,,,
M
"
MI'"
M,,
Nominal flexural strength. N-mm

Nominal flexural strength of the chord me mber
of the special segment. Nmm
Nominal plastic Oexural strength , Nmtn
Nominal plastic flexural strength modified by ax. ial
load, N-mm
Nominal plastic flexura l strength of the beam, N-
mm
Expec ted plastic moment, N-mm
Nominal p l a~ilic nexural strength of the column,
N-mm
M,
M ..,.
Expected nexural strengt h, N-1ll11l

..
Additional moment due to shear amphfical1ol1
from the location of the plastic hinge to the column
ce nterline based on LRFD load combinations, N111m
M"
P,,,.
P,.
P"
P"
Required flexural strength, using LRFD load

co mbinations, N-mm
Expected requ ired flexural strengt h, Nm111
Required axial strength of a column usjn~ ASD I
oad combinaliolls, N
Required compressive stfength lI sing ASD load
combinations, N
Required strength of lateral bmce ;It ends of the
link, N
Available axi:11 strength of a column , N
Nominal axial strength of a column , N
Nominal compressive strength of the composi te

column calcul ated in accordance with the
Specificalion, N
National Structural Code of the PhilipPules 6
1h
Edition Volume 1
Nomina! axial compressive strength of diagonal

members or the special segment, N
Nomina! axial tensile strength of diagonal
(/
members of the special segment, N
Nominal axial strength of a composite column at

zero cccc!Hricity, N
P
F r,
Required compressive strength, N

Required compressive strength using ASD or
Required axial strength of a column or a link using
LRFD load
P"
P",
combinations, N
Required axial strength of a composite column,

N
Required compressive strength lIsing LRFD load
d
d
d,
d:
combinations, N
P,
Nominal axial yield strength of a member, equal to

fy Ag, N
/"
P l I,
Axial yield strength of steel core, N
Ii
/I"
R,
R"
R,
R,
V"
VII<.
v"
Maximum unbalanced venical load effect applied

to a beam by the braces, N
Axial forces and moments generated by at least
1.25 times the cxpected nominal shear strength of
the link
Seismic re~ponse modification coefficient
Nominal strength, N
Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the
specified minimum tensile strength Fu, as related
to overstrcngth in materia! yield stress Ry
II
II
Required strength
Panel zone nominal shear strength

Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified
minimum yield stress, Fy
Required shear strength using ASD load
(olllbinations. N
Nominal shear strength of a member, N
Expected vertical shear strength of the special
seglllent, N
Nominal shear strength of thc steel plate In a
composite plate. shear wall, N
Nominal :--hear strength of an active link, N
Nominal shear strength of an active link modified
by the axial load magnitude, N
Required .~hcar strength using LRFD load
combinations, N
Distance from top of steel beam to top of concrcte
slab or encasement, mm
Mnxilllum distance from the. maximum concrete
compression fiber to the plastic ncutral axis, mill
Plastic section modulus of a member, mm3
Plastic section mociulus of the beam, mm3
Plastic section modulus of the column, mm3
Plastic section modulus x~axis, mm3
Minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced
beam section, mm3
II"
I
r,
I"""
Angle thaI diagonal lllembers make with the

horizontal
Width of" compression clement as defined in
Specification Section502.4. I. Ill!ll
Width oj" COIUIllIl flange, mill
Flange width, 111m
Width of the concrete cross-section minus the
width of the structural shape Ille;n" d
pc:'p'.'ndicular to the direction of shear, 111m
Nominal fastencr diameter, mm
Overall beam depth, nlln
Overall column depth, mill
Ovcrall pancl zone depth between contiI1U;l.','
plates, mm
FIJF link length, mill
Spccificll compressive strength of concrete, lvl!'u
Cle<tr distance hetween flange.s less the filL '
corner radiu:-- for rolled shapes; and for ht:.i;,
sections, the distance between' adjacent lin;',
fasteners or the dear distance bc!\vecn flanges
when welds are used; for tees, the overall delhi.;
and for rectangular ItSS, the clear dis!:tIlCl
between the flanges k'ss the inside corner ladil
on each side, mill
Distance between horizontal buundary clemellt
centerJines. mIll
Cross".~cctional dimension of the confined t"
region in composite columns measured tl":]',,'
to-center of the transycrse reinforcement, I11rll
Distance between flange centroids, mill
Unbraced length between stitches of bUll: t'j)
bracing 11ll'"mbers, mm
Unbraccd length of compression or br:v.:ing
member, Illm
Governing radius of gyration, m!Tl
Radius of gyration about y-axis. 1l1m
SpaciJlg of transverse reinforcement me;).I:;! tI
along the longitudinal axis of" the Sill"
composite member, 111m
Thickness of connected paJi. m111
Thickncss of e1emcnt, mill
Thickncss of column web or doubler plate, ill:,l
Thickness of beam flange, 111m
Thickness of" columll nange, I11Ill
Thickness of flange, 111m
Minimum wa!] thickness of concrcU"
rectangular HSS, mm
Thickness of panel zone Including doubler
mill
Thickness of web, mill

Width of panel zone between column
mm
Parametcr used for determining the approx;;;, .:::

fundamental perinci (I-R2)
Association of Structural En9ineers of the Ptlilippines
z./J
Minimuill plastic secti on modulus at the redu ced

sect ion ,m m1
M0I11!.!1l1 (1\ beam and column cCllIcrii nc
determ ined by projecting the slim of the nominal
col ulllll pl:lslic mome nt strength , redu ced by lhc
axial st ress Puc/Ago from the 101' and bo[\om of
th e be illll moment connect ion
MOllle1l1 at the intersection of the beam <lltd
hC11m
column ccntCrliilCS determined by projecting the

beam maximum developed moments f ro m the
column
/1
,1
11/,
I
I
!
!
II
II
I
I
!I
r
face.
Ma xim um
developed
mom ents
shall be determined from {cst resu ll s.

Co mpress ion strength atljwamcn t factor
Design story drift
Deformation qUtJlllilY used to co ntrol loading of
tes l specimen (lOtal brace end rotation for th e
subasscmhlage lest spec imen; lowl brace axial

Dcfortnlltiol1 for th e brace test specimen)
I1bm
V"luc of deformati on quamity,
I1b,
corresponding to the design story drift
I1by
Value of defo rm ation quuntity. 6b, <It firs:t
signi ticanl yicld of test specimcn
Q
Safcty f.lctor
Qb
Safely factor for flexure = 1.67
Qc
Safe ty factor for co mpression:::;: 1.67
Do
Horizontal seismic overstrengt h facror
Q,'
Sa fety f'H;ror for shear strength o f panel zone of
bellm-to-column connections
A ngle
of
diagonal
members
w ith
the
horizontal
a
Angle of web yielding in rad ians. as
measured relati ve lathe vert ica l
Dc:fonml1ion
quantity
lIsed
to
control
load ing of test specimen
/jy
Value of deformation quantity 0 al first
significant yield o f lest specimen
p'
Ratio of required axial force Pu to required shear
strength Vu of a link
J.I', AI'S Limiting slenderness parameter for com pact
eleme nt
Resistance factor
'I'
Resistan ce factor fo r flexure
'I'b
<pC
Resistance fact9r fo r compres$ion
(PI'
Resistance factO!" for shear strength of panel zone
of beam -to-column con nee li o ns
Rcsistance fac(or.for shc" r
'1'"
(Pl'
Resistance faclOr for th e shear strength of a
composite column
Ii
lnt crstory drift angle, radians
),10(0/
Link rolation angle
Strain hardening adjustHlc l1I factor
DEFINITIONS
ADJUSTED BRA CE STRENGTH.
Strengrh of' a brace
ill a hucklillg- rcslraincd braced frame at dcJol"ln;tliolls

c.:o rrcsponding to 2.0 times the design story drift.
ALLOWABLE STRENGTH.
by the safcty faclor. Nil / n.
Nomi na! strengr h d ivided
NSCH CODE. Build ing code under which {il e structure is

designed. NSCP 6,h Edi 'ion,
AMPLIFIED SEISMIC LOAD. Horizon'a! componen,

of earthqu,lke load E mult ipli ed by no, where E and the
horizontal component of E arc speci fied ill the NSCP code.
AUTHORITY HAVIN G JURISDI CTIO N (AHJ ).
Organization. political subdivision. oftice or individual
charged with th e responsibi lity of administcring an d
enforcing th e provi sions of this standard.
A VAILABLE STRENGTH.
nllowablc st rength , :IS appropriate .
Design
strength
or
ASD (ALLOWABLE STRENGTH DESIGN),

Method
of proponio ning structural components suc h th al tile
allowable strength equals or exceeds the requi red stre ngth
o f th e component under the action of thc ASD load
co mbin at ions .
ASD LOAD COMIJINA TION. Load combinarion in 'he
NSCP code in'ended for allowable streng,h design
(al !owable srress design).
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED
BRACED
FRAM E
(IlRBF).
Diagonally braced frame saflsfyin g 'he
requircmellts of Section 529 in which all members of the
brac in g system are subjected primarily to {lxial forces and in
which the limit statc of compression buckling of braces is
prec luded at forces and deformati ons correspondi ng to 2.0
times the design story drift.
BUCKLING-RESTRAINING SYSTEM. Sys tem of
restraints that limits buckling of the steel core in BRBF.
T hi s syste m includes the casing o n the sleel core and
structural cJC111CrHS adjoining its connections. The buckli ngrestrain ing system is intended to permit the tran sverse
cxpans ion an d longitudinal contraction of the steel core for
deformations concsponding to 2.0 ti mes {he design story
drift.
CASING. Elemcnt that resists forces transverse
to
the axis
o f the brace thereby re~ trailling bllckling of th e core . T he

casing requires a mea ns of delivering thi s force (0 thc
remainder of the buckling-restraining systelll. The casing

resists little or no fo rce in the axis of the brace.
th
Ncltional Struclural Code of the Philippines 6 Edi\ion Volume 1
s.
5 148
CHAPTER 5
Sf0.Ul [lnd r...-ietais
COLUMN BASE.
Assemblage of pla (c~, cOl1nC,~lO r s.

bolis, and rods at Ihe base o f a column lIsed to tra nsmit
EX PEC TED YIELD STRENGTH. Yield slrength in

te ns ion o f a member, equal 10 the expecLed yie ld sI!'css
forces bClwcenlhe steel superstructure and the foundatioll.
mul ti plied by A. .~.
CONTINUITY I' LATES. Column stiffe ners al II", top

and bottom of the panel zo ne; also known as transve rse
EXPECTED TENSILE STRENGTH. Tensile strenglh 0.1'

a mem ber, equal to the specified minimum tensile strengt h,
Fu, mu ltip lied by R,.
stiffeners.
C ONTRACTOR. Fa bricalor or ereClOr. as app li cable.
DI<:MAND CIUTI CAL WELD. Weld so designateD by
these Prov isions.
EXPEC TED YIELD STR ESS. Yield stress of Ihe

material , equal 10 th e specilicd minimum yield stress, Fy,
mullipl ied by R,. .
INTERMlmlATE MOM ENT FUAME (1M F). Momcnt
DESIGN EARTHQUAKE. The earthquake represenled by

Ihe de sign response speclll llll as specifi ed in the NSC P
code.
frame sys tem that meets th e re qui remcllLs or Sect ion 523.
I NTERSTORY DRIFT ANGLE. InlerSlo.ry displacement
divide.d by story hei gh t, radians.

DESIGN STORY DRI FT. Ampli fied story drift (drifl
un der th e desi gn earthquake, including the effccfs of
inelastic action), determined as specified in the NSCP code.
DESIGN STRENGTH . Res is tance factor multiplied by the
nominal strenglh, <rRn.
INYERTED-V-BRACED FRAME. Sce V-braced r,.am e.
K-A n EA. The k-arca is the region of the web that extends
from the tangent poi nt of the web ilnd the flange-web fi llet
(AISe 'Ok" dimension) a distance uf 38 lllm into the web
beyond the " k" dimens ion.
DIAGO NAL nn-ACING. Inclincd stru ctural members

carrying primarily axi al load that arc empl oyed to cn<lbJc a
st ru ctural frame lO act as (L truss to resist lateral loads.
DUAL SYSTEM. Siructural syslcm wilh the fo.llo-wing
features: (I) (In essenliHlly complete space frame that
provides support ror grav it y loads; (2) resiSi<lIlce to laleral
load provided by moment frames (SMF, IM F or OM F) that
m\~ capable of resisti ng at least 25 percent of the base shear,
and concrete Of slee l s hear wails, or steel hri.lced frClrnes
(ERF, SeRF or OCB F); <1nd (3) c(lch system designed to
re~i-;i the tolal ialenli load in proportion to its rdati ve
rigidi l).
DUCT ILE LIMIT STATE. Du ctile limil ,tates in"'udc
member :ll1d cOJ1nec ti on yielding, bearin g deformation at
bolt holes. as well as huckling o f members th al I.:onform to
the width-thickness limitations t)r Table 52 J -I. FraclUre of a
member or of i.l connection, or buckling of a conne.ction
e lem cnl. is not a ductile limit s tale.
(EBF).
ECCENTRICALLY
BRACED
FRAME
Diagonal ly braccd frame meeting the requirements of
Secti on 15 that has at least one e nd of each brac ing me mber
con nected to a hcmn a short distance from another beam tobrace connection or n beam-to-column con necti o n.
EXEMPTED COLll MN.
Column not
rt:quircments of Equat ion 522-3 for SMF.
mccting
the
K-BRACED FRA1\-'1E. A bracin g co nfiguration in which

braces COllllect to a colum n a( a location with no diaphragm
or other OUt-of-plane SUppOI1.
LATERAL BRA C ING ME~mER.
Member that is
designed 10 inhihil Iment! buckl in g or !meral-tor sional
buck lin g of primary fram ing 111~ll1b ers.
LI~K.
In EBF, the segmc nt or it beam Ihat is located

bClweclllhc ends
two diagonal br;'iccs or between the end
of a di ag on:!! brac e and il column. The length of the link is
defined as the clear di st ancc between the end s of two diag
o llaJ braces or hetwee n the di agona l brace find the column
face .
or
LINK I NTERMEDIATE WEB STIFFENERS. Vertical

web stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
LINK ROTATION ANGLE. lnelmaic angle between thc
link and the beam outs id c of the li nk whcn Ih<.' to\,tl story
drirt is equal to the des ign story drift .
LI NK SHEA R DESIGN STR ENGTH. Lesser of the
avail able ~ hear slrength or the link developed rrom the
mo mcnt or sheilI' strength of the link.
LOWEST
ANTI CIPATED
SERVICE
TEM PE RATURE (LAST). The Io.west I-hour average
tem perature with a IOO-year mean recurrence intcrval.
FACTOR
RED UCE D BEAM SECTION. Redu ction ill cross scc,ion
DESIGN). Method of proportioning structural component s
LRFD
(LOAD
over a discrete len gth that promotes a i.O!le or inelastici ty in
such that the design st rength equal s or exceeds th e required

strength of the component under the HClion of the LRFD
the member.
load combi nations.
AND
RESISTANCE
REQUIRED
'
LRFD LOAD COMlIlNATION. LO<1d combination in 'he

NS CP code intended for strength design (load and
resistance factor design).
STRENGTH.
Forces,
sli-esses.
and
deformations proulIl:cd in a structural co mponent,

determined by either stru ctur<11 analysis, for the LRFD or
ASD load combinations, as appropriate, or as specified by
the Specification and these Provisions.
MEASURlm FLEXURAL RESISTANCE. Bending

momelll mea sured in a beam at the f;lce of the column, fo r a
bea m-to-column tcst s pecimen tested in accordance wilh
Section B-4.
RESISTANCE FACTOR, 'I). FaclOr ,ha, accounl s fur

unavoidable dev iations of the nominal strength from the
actual st rength and for the manner and conseque nces of
fai lure.
NOMINAL LOAD. MagnilUde or 'he load s pccificd by

'he NSCP codc.
SAFETY FACTOR, n.
Factor that accounts for
deviations of the actual strength from the nominal strengt h,
deviation s of the actual load from the nominal load,
1I11certailltics in th e analysis thnt transform s the load into a
10;:ld erfect and for the manne r ,JIld consequences or fail ure.
NOMINAL STRENGTH.
Slrengl h of a slnlclurc or
com pon ent (without the resist ance ractor or sa fely factor
applied) to resist the load cffecls t as determined in

accordance with thi s Specification.
ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
(OCBF). Diagonally braced frame- meet ing the

requiremcnts of Scction 527 in which all members or th e
brndng system arc subjected primarily In axial forces.
OlWINARY MOMENT FRAME (O~11'). M lllllcll! li'ame
syste m that meets the rc quiremcnts of Section 524.
OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR, QO. FacIOI' spcci lied by
th e NSCP code in order to determine the amplili cd 'iC'ismic
load, where req uired by these Provi sions.
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY. ClassiOcalion assigned

to a building by lhe NSCP code based upo n its seism ic ll Se.
group and the des ign spec tral res po nse acce lcnnioll
coefJicicnt s.
SEISMIC LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM (SLI~S).
Assembly of structural e lements in the building that resi sts
seismi c load s, incl udin g struts, l:ollectors, chords,
di aphraglns and tru sses. Seismic respomic mudilication
coeflkicnl, R. Facto r that reduces seismic load eCfects to
strength leve l as specified by the NSCP code.
SEISl\1lC USE GROUP. Classification assigned to a

structure based
PREQUALlFIED CONNECTION.
COI1I1lion
compli es with the requiremen ts of Section B-J.
PROTECTED ZONE.
Area or l11emb",,, in whi ch
limitations apply to fabrication and .auac hllll.~ Ill S . Src
Section 520.4,
PROTO TYPE. The cOl1neclion or brace design Ihat
bc used in the building (SMF, 1MI', EBF, and BRBF).
Oil
its use as specified by the NSCP code.
,hat
IS lO
PROVISIONS. Refers to thi s document, and in reference'

to the AISC Seismic Provisio ns for Structural Steel
Buildings (ANSIIAIS C 34 1).
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN. Wri((cn dcscrip'ion or
qualifications, procedures, quality inspections., rcsouru: s\
and record s to be used to provide assu ralll.:n Ihal Ihe
st ru ct ure compl ies with the engineer's qua lit y rcqu:rcmcllls,
specificat ions and con trac t doc uments.
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME

(SC BJi'). Diagonall y braced frame meeting the requirements
of Sectioll 13 in whi ch all members of the bracing system
,1i1~ subj ected prirmll'il y lO axial forces.
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF). Momen! frame
system that meets th e requirem en ts of Section 522.
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALL (SPSW). Plalc shcar
waIJ system that meets the requirements of Section 530.
SPECIAL T1WSS MOMENT FRAME (STMF). Truss
mOllll!1l1 frame system (hal meets rhe rcq ui re mcllls of
SCCliotl 525,
SPECIFICATION. Refers 10 'hc AIS C Specific", ion for
S'nlcl ural S'eel Buildings (ANS I/A IS C 360).
[i ISO
CHAPTFri (S ~ St()(:t and fvh)[aL;
STATIC YIELD STRENGTH. Strength of a structural

member or connection determined on the basis of testing
conducted under slow monotonic loading until failure.
STEEL CORK Axial-foree-resisting clement of braces in
BRBF. The steel core contains a yielding segment and
connections to transfer its axial force to adjoining clements;
it may also contain projections beyond the casing and
transition segments between the projections and yielding
segment.
TESTED CONNECTION. Connection that complies with
the requirements of Section B-4.
V-BRACED FRAME. Concentrically braced frame
(SCBF, OCBF or BRBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
located either above or below a beam is conn ccted to a
single point within the clear beam span. Where the diag
011<;1 braces are below the beam, the system is also referred
to as an inverted-V-braced frame.
X-BRACED FRAME.
Concentrically braced frame
(OCBF or SCBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces crosses
ncar the mid-length of the braces.
Y-BRAClm FRAME. Eccentrically braced f!'ame (EBF)
in which the stem of the Y is the link of the EBF system.
PART2A
SECTION 514 STRUCTURAL STEEL
BUILDING PROVISIONS
514.Scopc
The Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
hcreinafter referred to as these Provisions, shall govern the
dcshw, fabrication and erection of structural stcel members
and '-'connections in the seismic load resisting systems
(SLRS) and splices in columns that arc not part of the
SLRS, in buildings and other structures, where other
structures are defined as those structures designed,
fabricated and erected in a manner similar to buildings, with
building-like vertical and lateral lond-resisting-elemcllts.
These Provisions shall apply when the seismic response
modification coefficient, R, (as specificd in the NSCP code)
is takcn greater than 3, regardless of the seismic design
category, When the seismic response modification
coefficient, R, is taken as 3 or less, the structure is not
required to satisfy these Provisions, unless specifically
required by the NSCP code.
These Provisions shall be applied in conjunction with
Chapter 5 Steel and Metal, hereinafter referred (0 as the
Specification. Members and connections of the SLRS shall
satisfy the requirements of the NSCP code, the
Specification, and these Provisions.
Wherever these provisions refer to the NSCP code and there
is no local building code, the loads, load combinations,
system limitations and general design requirements shall be
those in SEllASCE 7,
Part 2A includes H Glossary that is specii1cally applicable to

this Part, and Section B-1, B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5. B-6and B-7
Association of StnJctural Engine81'S of the Philippines
CH APTEH G
SI0(~!
8nd jvk;i<11
5151
SECTION 515
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
.CQl)ES~ AND STANl)A.llliS
SECTION..!;16
GENE:RAI;.sE~~MIC DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
The documenls refcrencto in these Provision s shall include

those listed in Specification Section 501.2 with the
following additions tlnd modifications:
Thc required strength :md other seismi c provisions for

seismic Zones 2 and 4 including limilations on height and
irregularity shall be (IS specified in the NSCP code.
American InstilUlC of Sleel Construction (AISC)
The des ign story drift shall be determined as required in the

NSCP code.
Specification Jor Structural Steel Bllildillgs, ANS/IA/SC

36005 Prequlllified COllnections for Special (llld
Intermediate Sleel Momem Frames for Seismic
Applications, ANSIIA/SC 358-05
Ameri c,lil Society for Nondes tTucti ve Testin g (ASNT )
RccOJl1Jnendcd Practice for the Training and T esting of
No ndestru ctive Testin g Personnel, AS NT SNT TC- I a-200 1
S tandard for the Qualifi cation and Ce rtifi cati on of
Nondestructi ve Testin g Personnel, ANSIIAS NT CP- IS92001
Am erican \Vcldin g Society (A WS)
Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusib le

H yd rogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferrit ic
Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Weldin g, A WS A4.393R
Standard Methods fo r Mechanical Testing of Welds-U.S.

Customary, ANSII A WS B4 .0-98
Standard Met hods for Mechanical Testing of We lds-Metrie
Onl y. ANSIIAWS B4.0M :2000
Standard for the Qualification of Welding l nspectors, AWS
B5.1:2003
Describing Oxygen-Cu t Surfaces. A WS C4. 1
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA )
Recommended Seismic Design Criteria fo r New Steel
Moment -Frame Buildin gs, FEMA 350, Jul y 2000
National Struclu ral Code of tile Ph iljpp in(~ ~; 6~i""i [clition \lolurn o
"1
517.1 Loads and Load Combinations

The loads and load co mbinati oll s shall be as sti pulat ed by
the NSCP code. Where amplified seismi c loads arc requ ired
by these Provisiolls, the horizontal pon ioll of the e;u1hquakc
load E (as defi ned in the N S.(P code) shall be multiplied by
the ovc rstrength factor. Q u. prescribed by the NSC P codc.
517.2 Nominal Strength
The nomi nal strength of systems. members and conllections
shall co mpl y with the Specificmion, ex<:epl as l110diried
tllroUghout these Provi sions.
S18. 1 Structural Design Drawings and Sr~ ecifi ca fiol1s

SlnlclurllJ design drawings and spcci ri c~ltions shall show the
work \0 be performed , and include items required by the
Speci fi cation find Ihe following, as app licable:
I.
Desigllalion of th l! seismi c load resisting syst em

(S LRS)
2.
Designation of the members and connections thaI are

part of the SLRS
3.
Configuration
4.
Connec ti on materia! speci ri c!llions Hnd sizes
~.
Loca ti ons of dema nd critical wc lds
6.
Lowesl anli cip<.ned service temperature (LAST) of the

sleel stru cture , if the structure is not enclosed and
Illaintained at a Icmpermure of JO C or higher
7.
Locations and di mcnsions ofprotcctcd zones
8.
Loc<.H ions where gusset pl ates arc

accom modate inelastic rotation
9.
Weld ing requirements as specified in Secti on B6,

Section I36.2 .
o{"
the con necti ons
10
be detai led to
Uscr Note: These Provisions should be consistent witlLtlie

Code or Siandard Praclice, . s designaiM in Section 501.4':(i(
Ihe Specifica tion. There may be specific connections . ~fl
appHcitiiins 'for 'which 'details aretiol specifically:a d
"
by O,e ' Provisions. If such a condinon exists, 'ihe .c
documents 'spould 'inclu& appropriate requirerri~
those ipplicitlions: Th~e may ind ude ' .'nondeS ..
testing requii-ements beyond those in Section B-2i :b'Ql(
fabrication requirements beyond those pennitt~ bY ".'5~~
Specification. bolting requirements other than those' j n<ilje:
Research Council on Structural Connections (lttScj
Specification for Structural )oinl$ Using ASTM A:i2~~~r
A490 Bolts, or weiding requiremenls other than Ihose'i ii
Section I3-6.
.",.,.:-
5 I 8.2 Shop Drawings

Shop dr'lwings shall incl ude items requi red by \he
Specifi ci:ltioll and (he following, ,IS applicable:
I.
Designation of the members and co nnect ions thal arc

pa,1 of the SLRS
2.
Con necti on matelial specifications
3.
Locations of demand critical shop we lds
Association of Structural Engineers of Ibe Philippines
4.
Loc;lliol1S and dimcnsions of protectcd
5.
Gusset plates drawn 10 scale whcn tlley arc detail ed

m:cc)JlllllodalC inelasli<.: rotation
6.
Welding rcquircmcnls as speci fied in Section B6,

Secli on B-2.2.
ZO IlC:';
\0
519.1 Material Spccific.~tions

Structural steel uscd jll the seis mic load resisting system
(SLRS) shall Illccllhe fl::qu ircmcms of Specificati on Section
50 1.3.1 ;1, excepl as modified in these Prov isions. The
speci fi ed Ininimlllll yield sH'ess of steel \0 be used for
members in wh ich inelasti c bchavio!" is expec ted shall 110t
exceed 345 MPa for sys tems defined in Sect iolls 522, 523.
525. 526, 528, 529, and 530 nor 380 MPa for syslems
defined in Sections 524and 527, unl.css the suitability of the
material is determined by testing or oIlier rational criteria.
Thi s limitation docs nOt apply to columns for which the
only expected inelastic behavior is yielding at the column
b'ISC.
518.3 Erection Drawings

Erection drawings shall include ilems requi red by the
Specification and (he [ollowing, as applic.lble:
I.
Designa(i on of (he members and cOllnections that arc

pari of Ihe SLRS
2.
Field connection material specifications . lIld sizes
3.
Locati ons ofdernalld criti ca l field welds
4.
Locat ions and dimensions of protected zones
5.
Loca ti ons of pretensiolled bolts
6.
Field welding requireme nts as specified in Secti on B(),

Seclion B-2.3
User Note: 'TIlere may be specific connections and

applications for which delails are not specifically addressed
by the Provisions. If such a condition exists, the erection
drawings should include appropriate requirements for that
application. These may mclude: b-oltirig requirements other
than .those in the RCSC SpecificatioJi for" Stiucturiil Ioints
Using A,STM - A325 or A490 .:Bolts, and.. :welding
r~uirc;\llents other than tliose in SCIOtion B-6. See Section
Mf . '::ule Specification for R.dditional pro~ision; on
erection drawings.
'
.
of
The struclUral steel used in the SLRS described in Sections

522,523,524,525,526, 527. 528, 529 and 530 shall IllCCI
o ne of the fo ll ow ing ASTM Specifica lions: A361 A36M.
A53/A 53 M , A500 (Grade B or C). A501. A529/A529M,
A572/A572M IGrade 42 (290 Mpa), 50 (345 Mpa) or 55
(380 Mra ), A588/A588M, A913/A913M IGrade 50 (345
Mra), 60 (415 Mpa) or 65 (450 Mpa ), A992/A992M, or
A 101 I HSLAS Grade 55 (380 Mra). The struclural 'Iccl
used [or column base plates shall meet onc of the preceding
ASTM specifications or ASTM A283/A283M Grade D.
Other steel s and non-stcel ma terials in buckling-restraincd
braced frames arc permitted to be used subject 10 Ihc
requiremellls of Section 529 and Section 8-5.
User Note: This sec\io~ only.,coyers malerial prqperties for
strUClural sleel used in !be SLRS ai,d included in the
4etjffip.9-B 8~ , ~,u,uCI'!f"l . s~"t, I'!Y~\l io ,.~,Cflion
of .~,e
AISC, G.oo~ .of,1\tand;tr<J !>(aG!icc. (:jthetsteel; snch as cables
fQrpe@.~;'\ bn;~il)g, [s'n;( ilJiOiud. '. ' ..
.
519.2 Material Properties for Determination of

Required Strength of Mcmbcrs and Connections
When required in these Prov isions, th e required strength of
an element (a member or a con neclion ) shall be delcnnjned
from the cx:pecled yield stress, R)" F,., of an adjoining
member, where Fy is the specified rninimum yield stress of
the grade of stecl to be used in the adjoining members and
RI. is th e ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified
1l1inimum yield stress, "~n of lhal material .
National Structural Code of the Pililippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
. Talil~ Sl~l
Rv and
. ......
.._ ______.._.~E!.iE.i!~'2~ _ __._____ __ ~L_

lint -roiled slnK' lu rid shapes and bars:
AS TM A36/36 M
ASTM A 572/572M Grade 290
ASTM A572/572 M Grad e 345
or 380
ASTM A9 13/A9 13M Grau e 345
,4 15,450
ASTM A588/A588M
ASTM A992/A992 M . AIOII
HSLAS Grade 380
ASTM A529 Grade 345
ASTM A529 Gmde 380
Holl ow structura l sections (HSS)
ASTM A500 (Grade B or C) ,
ASTM A501
Pi pe
ASTM A53fA53M
Plat es
ASTM A36/A36 M
ASTM A5721 A572M Grade 34 5
ASTM A5881 A588 M
S l9.3l1 cavy Section CVN Hequir(l l1lenfs
Ri ValueS ctit Different Meril/lcr.T;,nes
1.5
U
1.1
Rt .-
J.2
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.1
1.2
IA
1.3
1. 6
For structu ral steel in the SLRS, in add iti on (0 the

rcqu ire mcnt s or Spccif'icatiol) Section 501.3. k. hoI rolled
shapes with na ng!.!s 38 I1lIll thick and th icker shall have 11
minimum Charpy V Notch toughness 01'20 f't lb (27 J) a\ 70
lIF (2 J DC), tested in the alt erna te core loca tio n as describcd
in ASTM A6 Supplclllcillilry Rcquirement S30. Plates 50
I11Ill thick and thi cke r shal l ha ve II minimum Cha rp y Y ~
Notch toughocss of 20 ft l b (27 J) at 70 ' I' (2 1 ' c) ,
measured .1I any locHti oll pCI~jnittcd by ASTM A673. where
the plate is used in the following:
I.
Members built-up frolll platc
2.
Connection plmes where inelastic strain under seis m ic

loading is expected
3,
At the steel core of buckling-restrained braces
1.2
1.2
1.3
J.2
1.1
1.2
User Note: Examples of connection plates where inelastic

behavior expected include. but are not lim ited to . g'u sset
plates intended to func ti on as a hinge and allow Oll t-O(
plane buckling of braces, some bolted flange plates for
moment connections, some end pl ates for bolted moment
connections. and some column base plates designed as a pin
is
The available strength of the element, rpR" for LRFD and R,/
Q for ASD. shall be equal to or grea ter than the required
stre ngth, where R" is the nomin;.11 st rengt h of the connecti on .
The expected lensil e strength , RfF", and the ex.pected yield
stress, R. F\, arc permiltcd to be used in lieu of F.. and FI>
respectively. in dClcnni ning the nominal strength. Rno of

rupture and yie ldi ng limit Slales wi th in the same me mber
for wh ic h (he requ ired strength is dctcnnined .
User Note: In several instances a member, or a coniIe'~Jjon

li mit state within that member, is required to be designed
for forces corresponding to the expected strength of- the
member itself. Such cases include brace fracture limit states
(block shea r rupture and net section fracture in the brace in
SCBF), the design of the beam outside of the link In EilF,
etc. In suC;h cases it is permitted to use the expected material
st rength in the detennination of availab le member strength .
For connecti ng elements and for other members. specified
matetial strength should be used.
The values of HI' and R, ror various stee ls are given ill Tnbl e
5 J 9 1. Other v.~ l ues o f RI , and RI 51mll be permitted ir the
values arc determined b)' testi ng
spccimcns si milar in
s izc and source conducted in accordHl1cc with the
req uire mc nts ror Ihe specified grade
s tee l.
or
or
Association of Stru ctural Eng ineers of the Philippines
(;:1-11\1) 1En s
Sleel ,lild Metal
S 1SG
SECTION 520
CON.NJJ:GPONS, JOINTS, AND
normal to the force resisted by welds, such as a moment

connection in which welded flanges .transmit fJe~ure and a
bolted web transmits shear, is not considered to be sharing
the force.
.
520.1. Scope
520.3 Welded Juint s

Vlclding shall be performeJ in accordance with Section B
6. Welding Shilll be performed in accordance wilh it welding
procedure specificatio n (WPS) as required in AWS DJ.I
<l nd appro ved hy the engineer-of-record. The WPS v~riHblcs
sll:\l1 be within thc parametcrs cSl<lhlished by the filler mewl
FASTENERS
Con nections, joirHs :IIlU fasteners Ihal arc P,1I1 of the se ism ic.:
(SLRS )
shall
Specification Section 510, and

requl rcmellts of th is Section.
load
resisting
sys tem
with
,om pI)'
the
with
additional
The design 01" connections for a member thai is a pan or tile
Illanu f [leI urer.
SLRS shall be configu red such IIial ..I ductile limit slale in
either the co nll ection or the member cOlltrols the design .

User N~te: An example of a ductile limit state is tension
yielding. It is unacceptable to design connections for
mcmbers that are a part of the SLRS such that the strength
limit state is governed by nonductile or brittle limit states,
such as fracture, in either the connection or the member.
520.2 lloltt'd Joints
All bolts shall be prctcnsio ncd high strength bolls and shall
meet lhe rcquircrncllls for s!iIH .Ti[icnJ rayin g surfaces in
accordance wi th SpcdficiHi o ll Section 510. J.8 with a Class
A surface. Boils shall he installed in standard holes or in
short- sloHed holes perpendicular to the applied load . For
brace diagoll<lis, oversi zed holes sh.all be penniucd when
the connection is designed as a slip-critical joint, and the
oversized hole is in one ply only. Alternative hole types arc
permitted iC designated in the Prcqua lified Connections for
Special and Intermediate Momell! Frames for Seismic
Applications (ANSUAISC 3S8), or if otherwise determined
in a co nnection prequaiificatioll in accorda nce with Section
B-1 , or if detemlincd in a program of qualification testing in
accordance with Section B-4 or B5 . The avaibble shear
strength of bolted joints usi ng standard holes shall be
calculated as that for bearing-type joints in accordance with
Specification Sections SI O. J.3 and 510.1.10, except that th e
nominal bearing strength at bolt holes shall not be wken
greater than 2.4dtFu.
Exec/Jlion:
Th e laying sill/aces for (,lid plllle II/omelll COIIIl(XliOI/!i ore

permirred to be COaled with comings 110( tested for slip
rcsi.\'/allce or with cOOling.\' lI'ilh a .\"lip coejJici(J11I /('.\',\' 1/1011
11/(/( (~ra Class Af(lying sUI/ocr.
Bolts <Iud welds shall nOl be designed 10 share force in a
joint or the same force component in a con necti o ll.
User Note: A member force, such as a brace axial force,
must be resisled at the connection entirely by onc type of
j oi nt (in o.t her wqrds, either entirely by bolts or entirely by
welds). A connection in 'whkb bolts resist a force that is

All welds used in mcmbers and cOJ)llcetions in thc SLRS
Sllldl be mmle wi th a filler metal that ca n produce welds that
have a minimum Charpy V-Notch lOughncss of 20 fI-lb (27
J ) a! 0 ('F (minus 18C), as determined by th e appropriate
AWS A5 classification test method or manufacturer
certi ficiHiOl)' This requirement for notch toughness shJII
,ll so apply ill other cascs itS required in these Provisions .
520.3.2 Demand Criticul 'Velds
Where welds arc designated as dcnHmd cri ti cal , they shall
be mad e with <l li ller metal capable of providing a minimum
Charpy V-Notch (CV N) toughness of 27 J at 29 C as
dctcnnincd by the appropriate AWS cl as si fication test
method or manuracturer certification, and 54 J at 2 1C as
determined by Section B 7 or other approved method, when
the steel fra me is normally encl osed and maintained at a
lemperat ure of 10C or higher. For stmclUres wit h service
temperatures lower than 10 e, the qualiric31ioll
temperature for Sec ti on 13-7 shall be II C above the lowest
anticipated service tcmperalU re, or aI a lower temperature.
SMAW electrodes classified in AWS AS.I as E7018 or
E7018-X , SMAW electrodes classified in AWS AS .S as
E7018C3L or E8018-C3, and GMAW sol id electrodes arc
exempted fro m produclioll lot testing when the CY N
toughness of the electrode eq ual s or exceeds 27 J at a
temperature not exceeding 29C as determined by AWS
classification test method s. The manufacturer' s certificate
of compliance shall be co nsidered sufficient evidence of
mectil}g thi s requirement .
User Note: Welds designated demand critical arc

specifically identified in the Provisions in the section
applicablc to the designated SLRS.
There rnay he spccific welds similnr 10 those designated as
demand cri tical by these Provisi ons that ha ve not been
specific~l ll y identified as demand critical by these
Provisions that warrant such designation . Considerati on of
lhe demand criti cal designation Cor such welds should be
bnsed upon the inelastic strain demand and the consequence
National Structura! Code of tile Philippines G ' Edition Volume 1
of failure. Complclc-joint-pcnelfillion (CJP) groove welds

between columns and hase plales should be considcred
oem,lIlo criticlll similar to colulIlll splice welds, whcn CJP
groove welds llsed for COIUIlIIl splices ill th e desig nated
SLRS ha ve bcc n designated dcmand crit ical.
I
1
pm special alld intcrmediate moment frumes. typica l

ex.amples of delll<llld critical welds includc the fo llowi ng
CJ P groove welds:
I.
Welds of beam flanges to columns
2.
Welds of single plale sJlcar conncc ti ons to col umns
3.
Welds of beam webs to col umns
4.
Column splice we lds, incJuding colum n bases
Por ordinary moment frames, Iypica l exa mpl es incl ude Cli>
groove welds in items 1, 2, and 3 above .
!;
f
I,
Association of St ~uctura l Engineers of the P hil ippines
'I- .
. 4,) . .'." , ';'
;1 . '
,m.':: ~;. ,
::. ;\~,~-S' ;.:

~ :~~~~:~.;.
. ,:;,;,.,
hit
- - ..- -bit
- -.,---,,-,-.,---,, --c--_\--- -. --
Uniform compre ssion in ilangc:s of rolled or buill-up t
sharx:d:;cl'liom/b]'lhl
-";~:~j~~'~c~(:;~~:el~:on in l1:mgcs Qf rolled or built-up I
Unifo rm cOlllpn!ssi()11 in fla nges of channels. outstand in g
:~f~:r pairs of ang les ill continuous contac t, ;j nd braces
__ :~
hll
. ....
,"',
O.38jE[F;
1- - -- - - - - - -- -- ---1-
- -- - --1
O.30 .fEli~
1'111
do uble lingle me mbers wilh sc pc ralOrs, or Oang.cs of ices
'. "
lS i
Uniform compression in
,.-
0.30JE/Fy
--- -- - -- -- -- - - - j - - - -- - -- - - -- - --1
~ ~;~J~J,a~,~I'~f~ "';~~:,'c~,7.~.I ;'l,-'-'I-~re-'--'.7i-o-r~'-,7,-,~le- -g.-~, o~r;,~h-,-g7.--,c~-a-'-'-g. 7,-C-,-.,~,--c.-g--,.- <-,7,-.--~--=--- ----.-----.--..---.~~~~~-"1,~,~, '.:.~ ~~~~~-~--==t=========~=~j2t.5~-~=~=========~
'.';:.:.\:.:. . ..:.;.....:
" '" .,.~ ;.
O.JOJ E/Fy
- - j- - -- - - ' - -. -- ---j
Unlfo"" comp", ,,lo,, I" ",nges of H-pll' 'C<~li(-m-'-----\-------I-,'-'------+-----O-.4-5-.fEi-;=E=1'~F=>~'- - - - - j
." ,
_;.i~.~
Flexure in !langes of fOiled or Imill -up l-shilJX:d scl'lions:
l'l.lel.lel.l sl.lhl
SiC Ill:.
(J f Ices 19l
Webs in flexural co mpn:ssion in

522 .unlt-ss noted o lher .....ise
OC,tlllS
hIt
O.30ji IFy
till
a.3ofi IF,.
in S M F. Scct iull
2.4 5
hIt..
Webs in !1cxuraJ comprcssion or combin cd flc.'(ur(: and

axial compression !u].[c ].!g],[hl,lij./j)
hl1\\'
.. -!!/
'F/t:y
V~
For C. SO .125[kl
- - -- - -\
3.I,JEIFY (I . I.54 C,)
=~
111)
, . .,S
'
"ii5 ..
; .... 'C!
...
:}~
For Ca > 0.1 25 IkJ

1.1 1 ,iEIFy
' en
'.
hII.
(2 .33C, )
1.'9 Jf:IFY
Roun d HSS in axial and/or fl c.xur<ll C<l m p'r~'~"~';~

Oi~'~I'~I~,IH.II~_\ ------~I~)A
"---------I -----'O~.04
""-4'-'( EJF
.~.~F.LLY_ __ _ -j
Rec tangular HSS in :u :ial and/o.>r flexural compression
O.64/EIF"
.leU.)
bII or loll.
,
..
1-_ _ __-'--'W'-""b"s"of"'I"I..:.P"'''"'''''e,,c,,tio,,'-' '' --_ _______ _ _
_ --'_____-',,,,,,"',_ ____.___-'-_ _____._a.9~ElFy}
[a j Req uired for b<!anl~ in SMF Section 522 und SI'SW S~c tion 530
Required for columns in SMF Section 522 . onlcH the r,llios ftom Eq.522.} arc gre:lter than 2.0 where il is l>crmillcd to usc J,. in spcc ilic:ltion Table 50 2,4 1
Required for br.ccs ilnd co lunl1ls in ScnF SCClion 526 and brat"cs in OCBF Seclioll 521
It is pemlillcd 10 use),. in Spocific:iU ion Table 502A.I fOt columns in STMF Section 522 and colllmils in EBF Seclio n 528
Req uired fOf link in EBF Seclion 528 CJ.cCpl iti is per millcd 10 use l.t in Ta ble 502.4. 1 of the: ~p;:ci ricalion fOI n:tnges of links or JcnSlh 1.6 M,fY pa re dcfill: <.l in Secl;l,\n 528
III Di ~gonal web mcbers with in Ihc s pecial segment of STMF Section 5ZS
IsJ Cllord members of STM F SeClion 525
IhJ Requiled for beams and colu mns in ORlJF Seclioll 529
Ii) Required for colu lI1ns in SJ>SW Seelion 530
[j] For colum ns in STMF Section 522 c\llu(1)n ~ in SMI'. ;rthe (<llim [10m E'l. sn Jarc gre.alel Ih~11 2.0: for colunms in Eli I' Section 52 8: or EI3 F wcb$ of lin ks of I.::nglh 1.6
M/V ~ (lr less, it is permillcu lU US(' the following f()r I, .
fbi
le J
(d]
Ie)
For C.
~0.125.
""= 3.76 'Ii /FY(I .2..1S C.I
For C, :;:. 0. 125. >'r = 3.76 JE f FY (2.33 C.) ? 1,49 ,JEIFy
for ASD. C, = (0" 1'/1\1

where
I ). ::: required compressi\'\! slr-cuglll (ASOJ. f'l
f . = required comprcssh'C stlcngth ( LRFO). N
PT a~i 3 1 yield strc nglh. N
~= O.90
Q~ -
1.67
1h
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
I~
158
CHAPTEF{ 5 Sleel and Metals
For l!ccciltricilil y braccd frames (EBF). typic.!! cx;unpl cs of

demand <.:n ti cal we lds include CJJ> groove welds betwc\!1l
link b\!,UllS and columns. Other welds, such as those joining
the web plale to flange plates in builtup ESr:- link bcams,
and column splice welds when made using CJP groove
welds, should be considered for designation as demand
cri ti cal welds.
weld. II" a cu rved clip IS used. il s h.d l have :1 m i l. ;:~:; : ;:1

rad ius of 12 I1Ull.
AI the end of th e weld udjaccnt to the column wch/lh ngl..'
juncture, weld tabs for co ntinuity plates shall nut he lI st.'d.
except when permitted by the e ngil1 cc r~ of~ rcco rd. U!l les~:
specified by the cllginecJ'of"rccord Ihill th ey be I-C,!ll OVt'(L
weld tabs shall not be removed when used in this locatiO:\.
520.3.3 Recommcll(l,d Joint
Tile usc of Type I welded joints is nO( allowed in seismic

Zone 4. Type' II joints arc recommended as in the usc of
Proprietary W ~~ l ded Joint .
520.4 Protected Zone
Where a protected zone is designated by these Provisions or

ANSIIAISC 358. il shall comply wilh the following :
1.
Withi n the protected zone, discolllinuit ies created by

fa bri cati on or erection operations, slich as tack welds,
erection aids; airarc gouging and thermal cutting shall
be repaired as required by the engineefof record.
2.
Wt~lded shear studs and decking Httachmcilts til at

penetrat e Ihe beam flange shall not be placed on beam
fl anges within the protected zone. Decking arc spo t
welds as required to secure decking shall be permitted .
3.
Weldcd, bolted. screwed or shotin attachments for

perimeter edge angles. exterior facades. panilions, duct
work, piping or other construction shall not be pl aced
within the protected zone.
E.rception :
Welded s"eor studs and ot"er ('0,,"ectioIJ5 s"all be

permiued when desigllated ill the Prequalijied Connections
f or 5iJecioi and Intermediate Momelll Frames for Seismic
Applications fANSIIAISe 358), or as Ofherwise determined
in accordall ce with a conrl eetioll prequo/ijicatiofl ill
accordance wilh Section B 1, or aJ determined ill (l
program of qualification testing in accordan ce wilh Section
84.
Outside the protected zone, calculations based upon the

expected moment shall be mnde to demonstrate the
adequacy of the member net secti on when connectors th at
penetrate the member are used.
520.5 Co ntinuity Plates and StifTcncrs
Corners of continui ty plates and stiffeners placed in the

webs of rolled shopes sholl be clipped as desc ribed below.
Along Ihe web, Ihe clip shall be deloiled so Ih a! Ihe clip
ex lends a distan ce of at least 38 nllll beyo nd the published k
detail dimension for the rolled shape. Along the flange. the
c lip shall be delailed so Ihal lhe clip does nOI exceed 0
di slOnce of 12 mm beyond Ihe published kl delail
dimen sion . The clip shall be delailed 10 facililale suilable
weJd terminations for both the flange weld and the web
CHAPTE. ll
SJj)~'flQN;5,21 '
MEMBE~ ;.
or Sections for Locailluckling
52L2,1 COlllp"ct
When requi red by Ihese Provisions, members of the SLRS
shall have flanges continuously connected to the web or
webs (lnd dlC width -t hickness r<Hios of its com pression
clements shall
nOI
~}159
52 I .4.1 General
Members in the seismic load resisting syste m (SLRS ) ~ha ll

compl y wilh the Spccitic'lIioll and Section 521. For
col umn s that arc !lot pari of the SLRS, sec Sect ion 52 J. J .2.
Classifita~ion
Sleel and Metal
521.4 Column Splices
521,1 Scope
521.2
[j
The requi red strength of colu mn splices ill the seismic load
resi!'>ling sys tem (S LRS ) shall equal [he required st rength of
Ihe COI Ullll1S. including that determined from Sections 521 .3,
522.9,52).9,524.9,526.5 and 529.5.2.
III addition, welded colum n splices th aI are subj ect 10 a

calcul ated net ten si le load effect dctcnn;ilcd using th e load
co mbinations st ipulated by the NSCP code including the
am plilicd seis mi c load, shrtll salisfy both of the foHowi ng
requirements:
J.
Th e available strength of partial-joint-penetration ( P1P)
groove welded joillls. if used, shall be at least eq ual to

200 percent of the required strength.
exceed the limiting width-thickness:
r:ltios, ).'). from Specific:llion T'lblc 502.4 . 1.
2.
The available strength for each nange splice shall be al
52L2,2 Seismic"liy COlllpact
le ast equal to 0.5 fI,F,A, (LRFD) or (O .S/l.S) R,F,A,
When required by these Provisions. members of the SLHS
(AS D), as ap propriatc, whe re U)'l~. is the expected yield

stress of the column material and AI is the nange area of
th e smaller column connected .
must hnvc flanges continuously cOllllected (0 the web or

webs and the width-thickness nHies or its compression
clements shall nol exceed the limiting width-t hi ckness
nHios , APS, from Provisions Table 52! -! .
521.3 Column Strength

When PI< I Pn (LRFD ) > 0.4 or D,P,;P,. (AS D) > 0.4, as
ilppropriare. wi thout consideration of the <lInpliricd seismic
load,
where
~,.
= 0.90 (LRFD)
Q,. = 1.67 (ASD)
= required axial strength of a column using ASD

Load co mbinat ions, N
:::: nominal axial st rength of a column, N
:::: required ax ial st rength of a colum n usi ng LRFD
load combi nations, N
P"
P"
P"
The following requirement shall be mel:

I.
The req uired axial co mpressi ve and ten sile strength,

considered in the absence of any applied moment. shall
be determined lIsing the load combinations stipu lated
by the NSCP code including the amplified seismic load
2.
The required axial compressive and tensile stren gt h

shall not exceed either of th e following:
n.
The
maximulll load transferred to the column

conside rin g LlRy (LRFD) or ( 1.1 11 .5) Ry (ASD), as
appropriate. times the nomi nal stl'engths of the
connecting benm or brace clements of lhe building.
b.
The limit as determined from the resistance of the

fo und ation (0 overturning uplift
Beveled transitions arc not required when chan ges in

thickness and wid th of Ilangcs and webs occur in column
splices where flJP groove welded joints are used.
Column web splices shall be either bolted or welded, or
welded (0 one column and bolted to the other. In moment

frames using bolted splices, plates or channel s shall be used
on both sides of the column web.
The centerline of column splices made wi th fillet welds or
pa ni a l ~jojJl{-penctraiion groove welds shall be located 1.2 III
or more ,",way from the beam-to column co nn ections. When
the column clear height between beam-ta-column
connections is less than 2.4 Ill , splices shall be at half the
clear height.
521,4,2 Columns Not Part of lhe Seismic Load

Resisting System
Splices of col um ns that are not a pan of the SLRS shall

satisfy the following:
I.
Splices shall be located 1.2
III
or morc away from the
beam -Io column conn ections. When the column clear
hei gh t betwee n bea m-to column connecti ons is tess

than 2.4 Ill , splices shall be (11 half the clear height.
2. Th". required she<lr streng th of column splices Wilh
respect to both orthogonal axes of the co lumn shall be
Mpc IH (LRFD) or Mpc 11.5H (ASD), as appropriate,

where Mpc is the lesser nomin al plasti c fle xu ral
strcngth of (he colu mn sections for the di recti on ill
question , and H is the story height.
1h
National Siructural Code o r the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
s- 1GO
CHAPTEH 5 . SI(;.'el and Melnls
521.5 Colulllll Bases
where
The required stre ngth of colum n bases shall be ca!culillcd in

;u.:con.hlllcc with Sectiolls 52 J .5.1.52 I .5.2. <IIul 521.5.3. The
avail<tblc strength of anchor rods shall be determined in
accordance with Specification Section 5 10 .3.
IJ
The available st ren glh of concrete clement s at the column

b<lsc, including anchor rod embedment and reinforcing
b.
steel, shall be in accordance with ACJ 3- 18, Appendix D.
,. .
=:::
height of swry, which may be taken as the

distance. helwccilthc centcrline or 1100r framing
ill car.:ll of the levels above and below, or the
distillH.:e helween the top uf noor slabs OIl cach or
the levels above and below. mill
The shcilr cakulHtcd using the IO<1d combina ti ons or the

N~;c: r code, including the amplified seismic load.
Secti on 52 1.5.2. Requ ired Flexural Strength . The required

flexura! strength of column bases, including their
att ac hment 10 the foundation, shall be the summati on of th e.
required strengt hs or the stcel c1cmcnts thai arc conncc ted to
lhe column base as rollows:
I.
For diagona l bracing. the requi red nexural strength

shall bc a\ lenst equal 10 the required strength or
bracing co nncctio ns for the SLR S.
2.
for columns, the required flexural strength Shill! be ,H

lea!;t equal 10 the lesser of the (ollowing:
a.
1. 1 R,F,Z (LRfD) or ( 1.111.5) Ii,F,Z (ASD). os

appropriate, of the column or
b.
the moment calcu lated using the 1000Id com binations o f'
the NSCP code. includ ing the amplifIed seismic load.
Exceplion:
The special requiremel1l5 in ACI 3 JB, Apptmdi:t' D. for
"regions of moderme or high seismic risk. orfor sirucllfre.r
assigned 10 illlermedime or high seismic per/ormllllce or
design categories" lI eed
//0/
lu.' applied.
521.5.1 Required Axial Strength

The required ax ial strength of column bases, including their
altachmcnl 10 the foundation, shall be the summation of Ihe
venica l components of the requi red strength s of the steel
eleinents that nre connec ted to the column basco
521.5.2 Requi red Shear Strength
The required shear strength of colu mn bases, including their
attachments to the foundations . shall be the sll lllmmion of
the horizontal component of the requ ired st rengths of the
steel elements that arc connected to the columJl base as
follows:
I.
For diagonal bracing, the ho rizontal component shall be

determined from the required strength of bracing
connections for the seismic load resisting sys tem
(S LRS)
2.
For columns, the horizolllal component shall be at least

equal to the lesser of Ihe fo ll owing:
a.
2R.,. F). Zx IH (LRFD) OJ' (211.5) Ii,. F, Z, If! (ASD). as

appropriate. of th e columJl
..
521.6 H-Piles
521.6.1 Design of HPiles
Design of H-piJes shall compl y wi th the provisions or the
Specification regarding design of members subjected to
combined loads. H -p iles shall meet the requirements of
Sectioll 521.2 .2.
521.6.2 B.Hered H-Piles

Ir baltered (sloped) and vertical piles arc used in a pile
group, the v.crtica l piles shall be designed to support the
combined effects of the dead and live loads without Ihe
participati on of the baltered piles.
521.6.3 Tension in H-Pile
Tension in each pile shall be transferred 10 the pile cap by
mechanical me'lIls slI ch as shea r keys. rcin forcing bars or
studs welded (0 (h e embedd ed porti on o/' the pik . Dircc!l y
below the botlom of the pile ca p, e:lch pi le shall he free of
all:lchmCllls .lnd we lds for a length al least equal to the
depth of the pile cross section.
CHA P 1E: '~ !>
SECTION 522
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF)
Bcam-to-columll cOllllecti ons used in the seismi c lo,\d
resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the follo wing Ihrce

requirements:
I.
The connec tion shall be capable of sust:.umng an

iu(crstory drift angie of at least 0.04 radia ns.
2.
The Illci.lsurcd flexural rcs islancc of the COIHlccl ion,
determined <1\ Ihe column face, shall eq ual al least

O.80Mp of th e connected beam at an inlcrslOry drift
angle 0[0.04 radians .
3.
The required shear strength of the cOllnecti on shall be

determined usin g th e followi ng quantit y for the
earthquake load efrect E:
= 211.111., M,,) 1 L.,
(1:'1. 522- 1)
where
R.,
Mp
L
"
:::: ratio of the expec ted yield stress to the speci lied
minimum yield stress, F,
= nominal plastic fl exural strength, N - Illlll
:::: distan ce between plastic hinge locat ions, 111111
When E as defined in (Eq. 522-1 ) is used in ASD load

combinatio ns that arc addi ti ve with other transient loads and
that arc based on SEIIASCE 7, the 0.75 co mbination factor
for transient loads shall not be applied to E.
Co nn ec tions that acco mmodate the required illicrstory drift
a ngle within the co nnection clements and provide the
measured flexural resis tance and shear strengths specified
above are pe rm itted. In addition to s<ltisfying the
requirements nOled ahove, the dcs ign shall de monstra te that
till y additio nal drift due to con nect ion deformatioll call be
accommodated by the SlruClUrc. The design shall incl ude
anlll ys i$ for stabilit y effects of the overall frame, induding
seco nd-order effects.
5 22.2.2 Co nformance Demonstrati on
Beam-la-column con nections used in the SLRS shall satisfy

th e requirements of Section 522.2 by one o f th e following:
J.
Use of SMF connecti ons designed in accordance with

ANSIIA ISC 358.
~-
16 1
Usc of a connecti on prcqualified

acr ordam.:c wit h Section B- 1.
J.
Provision or qualifyi ng cytl ic lcst result s in <lc<': llrd ancc

wit h Section B-4. Results of at least two cyclic
cOllnct:tioll tests shall be provided and are permin ed to
be based on one of' the following:
iL
Tes ts reported ill th e research literature or docull1ented

tes ts performed for other projects that represe nt the
project conditions. Ivi th in the limits specified in Section
1l-4.
b.
Tests that arc conducted specifically for the project m}d

are represcntati ve of project member sizes, matcri<tl
strengths, connection configurations, and matching
co nnection processes , with in the limits specified in
Section 8 -4.
522.2 Bc;.un-toColuJUI1 Connections

522.2. 1 Requiremen ts
<'I nd Metal
2.
522. 1 Seo!,c
Spec ial moment frallles (S MF) arc cxpe(.~ lcd 10 withstand
significant inelastic deformations when subj ec ted to the
forces resulting from th e 1I10[ions of the design ca nhquak~.
SMF shall satisfy the require ments in this Section.
.
S l (~c l
for SMF in
522.2.3 Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSIIA ISC 358, or

otherwise determined in a connection preq uali fi cati on in
<lccordancc with Section 13 - 1, or as dctcrmined in <l program
of qualificnlion test ing ill accordance with Section B-4,
cOlllpl ctc-joint-pcnetration groove welds or beam flanges,
shear plates, and beam webs to col umns shall be demnnd
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2 .
User Note: For the designation of demand 'critical .we)~.s.
staltdatds such as ANSIIAlSC358 and tests addrci'sitig
sp.;.,itic cOriiJectionsand j oin~) .h\'uld ,. be.tlse&1ii lieu of the
moIt general ' tenns of >thest , )P.JoYisio~..c "Wbere these
Prqyisio~ iri\licate that a p,artlc.,.lar , ,,,,~)d ~ i~ , aesigtia)cd
demaiid t:ritical. but the more specific stll;nilaro.'!>r test does
n<ii ri1*e:'uch, a de$ignatiQ~,. the mOre sj;ei~,itaJidard, or
tcil.t shQiild govert. .. Lik'ewis~,. these starida(~S'_.nd leS~; iriay
design~ic.-welds as ,demand'.critical that are,- n6t'<identificd 8S
such'liy theSe Provisions.
522.2.4 Protected ZOlles
The regi on at each end of the beam subject to inelasti c

straining shall be design ated as a protected zone, (l1ld shall
thee t the requirements of Section 520.4. The extent of the
protected zo ne shall be as designated in ANSIIAI SC 358, or
as otherwi se determined in a connection prequalification in
accordnnce with Section B-1 , OJ' as detennjncd in a program
of qualification testing in accorda nce wi th Section 13-4.
User Note: The plastic :hinging zones at the ends of SMF

beams shoul d be treated as' protected zones. The plastiC
hinging zones should be established as part of a
prequalification or qu'a1ificatioQ"prograni for:the ,cpnneetion.
per ,...s.<;clJ~P' 05~2,,2,2. " W.,1 ,gen:~raI, , fOf " , unrein(orcOd
cOli~~C:\i.o~s; ih.~ ~r9t,*t~ 10~~ Wiil :~Xl~M :frOtli t~,~ 'f~c~ .\\f
ht!Wf,u~~
iii
t: :W,bhe ~W'- 0fiW~,~~~~l ;~~ptl!bey<ind the plastic
, ge:-p.0m ,:,, ;; ' ,' , ' , "
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6
1h
. :" ':
Edition Vol ume 1
'
~)--H)?
CHAPTEH~)
Steel and Metals
522.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections
522.4.1 Width-Thickness Limitations

Beam and column members shal! meet the requircmcnts (:.;'
Section 521.2.2, unless otherwise qualified by tests.
(Beam Web Parallel to Column Web)
522.3.1. Shear Strength

The required thickness of the panel ",one shall be
determincd in accordance with the method used in
proportioning the pancl zone of the tested or prequalificd
COll'lCction. As a minimum, the required shear strength of
the ~~:illel zone shall be determined from the summation of
the moment~; at the column faces as determined by
projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge points
to the column faces.
The design shear strength shall be f{JvR" and the allowable

shear strength shall be R/QI' where
9'1'
= 1.0 (LRFD)
Q, = 1.50 (AS D)
and the nominal shear strength, R,., according to the limit

state of shear yielding, is determined as specified in
Specification Section 510.10,6.
522.3.2 Panel Zone Thickness
The individual thicknesses, t, of column webs and doubler
plates, if used, shall conform to the following requirement:
(Eq. 522-2)
522.4.2 Beam Flanges

Abrupt changes in beam flange area arc not permitted ii,
plastic hinge regions. The drilling of nange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if tc.';[~ng or
qualification demonstrates that the resulting conngunlli(\,~
can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shaH [;,.;:
consistent with a prequalified connection designated ;;.
ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise determined in
connection prequalification in accordance with Section B :
or in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
Section B-4.
522.5 Continuity Plates

Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalificd
connection designated in ANSIJAISC 358, or as otherwise
determined in a connection prequalification in accordanc
with Section B- J, or as determined in 11 program (;1
qualification testing in accordance with Section 3-4.
522.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio

The following relationship shall be satisfied at beanHo-
column connections:
where
L:
[ L:
=thickness of column web or doubler plate, mIll.

dz
Wz
= panel zone depth between continuity plates,
111m.
= panel zone width between column flanges, mm.
Alternatively, when local buckling of the column web and

doubler plate is prevented by using plug welds joining them,
the total panel zone thickness shall satisfy (Eg. 522-2).
522.3.3 Panel Zone Doubler Plates
Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges using

either a complete joint-penetration groove-welded or filletwelded joint that develops the available shear strength of
the full doubler plate thickness. When doubler plates are
placed against the column web, they shall be w61ded across
the top and bottom edges to develop the propol1ion of the

total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate. When
doubler plates are placed away from the column web, they
shall be placed symmetrically in pairs and welded to
continuity plates to develop the proportion of the total force
that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
522.4 Beam and Column Limitations
The requirements of Section 52 I shall be satisfied, in
addition to the following.
p,.
1.0
(10'1.522-3)
M p"
where
= the sum of the moments in the column above and
below the joint at the intcrsection of the beam
and column centerlines. IM"e is determincd by
summing the projections of the nominal flexural
strengths of the columns (including haunches
where used) above and below the joint to the
beam centerline with a reduction for the axial
force in the column. It is permitted to lake EM,,,.
=ElJ F". -1',,, IA,) (LRFD) or I2AIF,/i.5) Po,
lAg)] (ASD), as appropriate. When the
centerlines of opposing beams in.the same joint
do not coincide, the mid-line between centerlincs
shall be used.
= the sum of the moments in the beams at the
intersection of the beam and column centerlines.
EM,,/! is determined by summing the projections
of the expected flcxural strengths of the beams al
the plastic hinge locations to the column
centerline. It is permitted to take
EM"b=(l.iR,E'~bZ,,+ M",.) (LRFD) or
E[(l. 1I1.5)R y F)bZ" + M,,,.] (ASD), as
appropriate. Alternatively, it is pennitled to
determine EMp/J consistent with a prequalified
connection design as designated in ANSlIAISC
M",.
P,,,
P,,,
Zh
Z,.
ZIIIIS
358, or as otherwise determined in a con nection

prcqlwlific(llioll in ilccordancc with Seclion B-1 ,
or illli program of qualific,Hion testing in
accordance with Section B-4. When connccti ons
with reduced bc;nH sections lIrc used, it is
permitted 10 lake l'Mph=I.{ 1.IRJF,h
ZIIIIS+M,,,.)( LRF))) or .1.1r 1.1I1.5)R,F,b ZRlIS
+ M",. ) (AS))), as "pprapriale.
.
7' gross area of column , Illm 2
;: spcdficd minimulll yield SIF"~;S of colu/1lll, MPa
;;: the add itional moment duc [0 shear amplification
from the location of (he plilslic hinge lO the
COIUIllIl cCIHcrline. based on ASD load
combin3lions. N-mm.
:::: the additional moment due to shear amplification
frolllthe location of Ihe plastic hinge to the
column centerline, based on LRFD load
combinations, N-mm.
= required compressive strength using ASD load
combinations, (a positive !lumber) N
= required compressive strength using LRr=D load
combinations . (<1 po!)itivc number) N
::: plastic section modulus orille beam, I111ll3
::: plasti c section modulus of the column, 111m3
= minimum plastic section modulus at the redu ced
bealll section, IlHll ~.
= PUC> required comfJr('ssil'(~ .l'treIlKth, usilllt LR Ff)

load combillllliolls, N.
P" .
For design (l('(:ordillg to Specijicatioll Sl'('lioll 502.3.4

(ASf)),
P,
Pro'
2.
= FI'.A,,//.5. N
;;:; P:., . required (ompl'('s.,i\( srrength. usillg A.St)
load c()l1Ibill(l(ioIlS, N
Columns ill any story that has a ralia (~(~jv(lilabl(' .die'ar
Strength to I'l'quired sheor strength Ihal is 50 perci!l1f
grea ter Ihall Ihe !ilory above.
522.7 Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Co nn ection s
522.7.1 Braced Connections

Colum11 f1ange.~ at beam-to-column connections requirc
lateral bracing only at the level of the top Ollngcs of th e
beams, when the webs of the beams and column are coplanaI'. and a colu mn is shown to remain clast ic outside of
the panel lOne. h shall be permitted 10 asstll.ne that thc
colulllil remains clastic when the ratio CaJculnlcu using (Eq .
522-3) is greater than 2.0.
When a column c(lnnot be shown to re main elastic outside
of the panelzonc, the following requiremcnts shall apply:
Etception:
This requirement does not apply
two conditions is satisfiul:
J.
if either
of the following
Columlls with Pn' < O.3Pc for all foad combinatiolls

other than dIOse determined using the amplified seismic
load ,har sariJf1' either of 'he following:
n_
CO/UII1I1S used in a one-story building or the top story

oJ (l multistory building.
b_
Columns when': (J) Ilw sum oj tlie available shear

sfrenRlhs of all exempted colllml1.~ ill (he slory is It!SS
than 20 percellT of (he sum of til(! CIvailable shear
Sirengths of al/ mOll/ellf Jrame columns in Ihe story
acting ill the same direction; and (2) the su m of the
Gl'al/able shear slrellgt!Jj' of all exempu'd COIIlIllIlS all
each moment frame column line IvirhilJ fhat .<NOf)' is tess
lhall 33 perullI of rhe CJvailabJ(' shear sll'('llglil oJ 01/
moment fram e COIUIII IlS 011 that COIUIIIII linc. For lilt!
purpOSl' of this e.xct!ptioll, {1 col WHO lille is defined as (l
single lille of columns or parallel lifU','j (~r CO/UI1lI1.'i
located within ]0 percent of the plan dimensiol1
peljJendicular to the lille of columlls.
IVhere
For design according to 5j)ecijicmion Sectioll 502.3.3
(LRFD),
Thc column flanges shall be I[tlerally braced at the levels of

both the top and bottom beam nanges. Lateral bracin g shall
be either direct or indi rect.
User Note: Direct lateral suppolt (bracing) of the column
f1iu1lle is 'iichieved through iise of braces or other members,
deck' arid 's!iih'; attached ta 'the column flange at or near the
desired br4ci ng pOint ta resist lateral budding. Indirect
iate\iU suppon refers to braCing that is achieved tllfough the
stiffness:ofmembers and connections that are noL directly
attached Lo the column f1anges, but rather aet tlu"Ough tllC
column web or stiffener plates.
I.
Each column-flange lateral brace shall be designed for

a required strength th at is eq ual to 2 percent of the
available beam flange strength 1~\'bflf4 (LRFD) or /;:"bj thj
11 .5 (AS))), as appro prime.
522.7.2 Unbraccd CO lln ect ion s

A column containing a beflln-to-column cOllllectio n with no
latcral bracing tran sverse to the seismic frame at the
connection shall be designed lIsing the distance between
adjacent lateral braces as the column height for buckling
transverse to the seis mi c frame and shall conform to
Specification 508, except that:
1. Thc required column strength shall be determined from
the appropriate load combinations in the NSCP code,
NaJional S iruciural Code 01 Ihe Plli1ippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
except that 1:: shall be Ii.lkCIi CIS the Jesse!" of:

;1.
The ampJified scis mit: JOild .
11 .
125 percent of tile frame avai lable strength based upon

either the heam av,ji lahlc /lcxuf,d strength or pilllel
zo ne aVili JahJc sht.'ar strength.
2.
The slenderness l.Jr for lhe column sh.tlln OI cx(;(:cd 60.
3.
The t.:ol ullln rC{lujr~d nexuret' strength lransvc.s' 10 lhe

seismic frame shall include that JIlOlllenl t.:<lused by tile
applicatioll of th!! beam flilnge force speci fi ed . in
Secli on522.7.2 ill addil ion 10 the second-order mOIllCll1
due
II
I
r
10
nu' rCf(lIirc' c/ ....'reI1XIfI oj Iflt' ("01U11111 spliC<1 comic/nil1k

(lpprofJriu/(1 S/n'.H cOIweli/ntiiOIl [cu.:lOrs or ji'u ctun:
lIIl'dlllllics slre.\.\" illl(,JI.'.ily jllC/or.r lI('ed I/ot t'xn'cc/ flult
de/ermilled by illdo.Hie tl/w{y.I'l'.I".
the resulting column flange displaccmcili.
522.8 Latent. Bracing of Hc,alJls
DOlh fla nges of beams shall be I.uerall y braced. with ,I

maximum spacing o f LI/ ;::; O.086ryElF\.. Braces sha ll mee t
the provis ions of Equations A-I -7 and A-1-8 of Appendix
A-I.6 of the Specification. where M, = M. = R,ZP, (LR FD)
or M , = M" = R,ZF,.11.5 (ASD). as appropriate. of the beam
;lIld Cd = 1.0.
.
III 'J(ldi ti OI1. lateral braces shall be pl aced ncar cOllcen trated
forces, changes in cross .. scction , and o th er locati ons where

anal ysis indicates Ihal a plastic hinge wi ll fOf m during
inelastic defo rmations of the SMF. The placement of lateral
bracing shall be consistent with that documented for a
prcqualificd connection designmcd in ANSUAISC 358. or
as otherwise determined in a con necti on prcqualificalion in
accordance wit h Section BI , or in a program of
qualificmion testing in accordance wit h Section 8 -4.
The required st rength of imcral bracing provided adjacent to

plastic hinges shali be p. = 0.06 M. Iii" (LRFD) or p. =
O.06M 1/1" (ASD). as appropriate, where II" is the distance
between flange centroids; and the req uired stiffness shall
Illeet the provi sion s of Equation A-J-8 of Appendix A-1.6
Q
of the Speci fi cat ion.

522.9 Co lumn S pli ces
Column splices shall comply wi th the req uirements of
Secti on 521.4.1. Where groove we lds are llsed 10 make the
spli ce, th ey shall be complete-joinl-penetration groove

we lds that meet the req uirements of Sect ion 520.3.2. Weld
labs shall be removed . When column split.:es are not I1lmlc
with groove welds. Ihey shall have a required flexural
strenglh thaI is at least equal to RyI~\2.1 (LI~FD) or RrF..\Z.1 /
1.5 (ASD). as appropriate. of the smalicr columl1. 11,e
required shear strength o f colum n web splices sllil ll .be ill
least equa l to EM, ... 111 (LRFI) ) or EM,,,. 1/.5H (ASD). as

appropriate. where LMpc is the sum of tile nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the columns above and below the
spli ce.
Exception:
SECTION 523
INTERMEDIATE MQMENT FRAMES
(IMF)
designate welds as demand critical that are not identified as
such by these Provisions.

523.2.4 l)rotected Zone
The region at cHeh end or Ille beam subjcl"t 10 inelastic
523.1 Scop"
IntcJ'fncdial c
1l10mCll! frames (lMF) arc expected !o

withSland limited incJasli c deformations in thei r members
and co nnecti ons when suhjectcdlo the forces resulti ng from
the motions of the design earthquake. IMF ~; hal! meet the
requiremcn ls ill thi s Section.
523.2 Beam to-Column Connections

523.2.1 Requiremenfs
BcmnlO-columl1 COIHlcclions used in the se ismic lo'ld
rcsisling syslcm (SLRS) shall sati s fy the requ irements of
Section 522.2. with the following exceptions:

I.
2.
The required inlcrslory drift angle shall be a minimu lll

of OJJ2 radian.
The required strength in shear shall be dClcrmined as

specified in Section 522.2 . 1, except thaI n lesser valut'
of V" or V(I' as appropriate, is permitted if justified by
analys is. The requi red shear stre ngth need not exceed
the s hear resulting from the appli cat ion o f appropriate
lood combinations in the NSCP code using the
amplified seismic load.
straini ng shell I be Irt!ntcd itS a prot ected zone. ;l nd ~ ha ll meet

the requiremcnts or Section 520.4. The ex tent oj" the
prot c<.: tcd zone shaH be as dcsig nat ed in AN SIIA IS C 15 8, or
as otherwise detcrmined in it <.:onnctt il)n prclj ualifi cill ion in
accordance with Scction 8 - 1. or as detcrmined in a program
o f qu.lliHciltion tcsting in a<.:cordar.cc wi th Section B-4.
User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of IMF

b~aJ11s should be treated as ' pioteCted 'wnes. The plastic
hinging zo'nes should be established as part of a
prequalification or qualificiuion program for the connection.
In general, for unreinforced cOnriections, the protected zone
will extend from the face of the column ' to one half of the
beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point.
523.3 Panel Zone of llea mto-Column Connections
(lJen," Web ParaUel to Column Web)
No additional requircmellts beyond the Specification.
523.4 Bcam and Column Limitations.

The requircmcnts of Section 521.1 shall be sati sfi ed, in
addi[ion to the foll owing.
523.4.1 Widlh- Thickness Limitations
523.2.2 Conformancc Dcmonstration

Conformance demonstration s hall be as desc ribed in Section
522.2.2 to satisfy th e requirements of Section 523.2. 1 for
IMF, exeepl that a connecti on prcqualificd for IMF in
accordance with ANSIIAISC 358, or liS otherwise
determined in a connection prequalilication in accordance
with Section B l. or as delermined in <1 program of
qualification testing ill accordance with Section 0-4.
523.2.3 Welds
Unless otherwise designated by ANSIiAISC 358. or
otherwi se determined in a connection prequalification in
::lccordilnce with Section Bl, or as determined ill a program
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4,
comple te joint penctratio ll groove welds of beam nanges.
shear plates, and beam webs 10 columns shall be demand

cri tical we lds
<I S
described in Section 520.3.2.
User Note: For the designation of de mand critical welds,

standards such as ANSII AISC 358 and tests addressing
specific connections and joints should be used in Jieu of tJ)e
more g~ner.al. . teqns of these Pr~JVisiol.1S. Where these
PrQvis!ons j~d,i.9.a\e tl)at , R ' p;uticular . ",eld i$. ,designated

demand critical, b),i.i. the 'l1)0re spe,Wc staI),Qd'Or te.sl does
nQt Jilak~ ~l'~~;"l . 4sigl),a~6Iidtw: mQr~ ' spefj@ s,tan~,~d or
lesLSAQulq go)i~J;Il, .Like\~ise, thesest"!4iu:ds .,~nd.,.i\'~is: may
Beam and column members shall meet the requireme nts of

Section 52 1.2 . 1, unl css otherwise qualified by tests .
523.4.2 Beam Flonges
Abrupt changes in beam flange arca arc not permitted in
plastic hinge rcgions. Drilling of flange holes or trimming
o f beam n angc width is permiued if testing ur qualification
demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop
stable plastic hinges. The configurati on sha ll be consistent
with a prequalified con nec ti on dcsignated in ANSIIAISC
358, or as otherwise determined in a connection
prequalification in accordance with Secti on B-1 , or in a
program of qualifica ti on tes ling in accordance with Section
1J4 .
523.5 Continuity Plates
Continuity plates shall be provi de d to be consistent with the
prcqu alified con nec ti ons design.lle.d in ANSIJA ISC 358. or
as otherwise delermined in it con necti on preq u,llificalion in
accordance wi th Section 13-1 , o r as deten n in ed in a program
of qualificati on testing in accordance with Scction B ~ 4.
523.6 Columnlleam Moment Ratio
No additional requirement s beyond th e Specification .
Lat eral Bracing at Beam-lo-Colulllll COllllecti ons No
National Struclura l Code of the Philippines 6:1; Edition Volum e 1
addi tional rcquirclllcllts beyond th ~ Specificl.ltion. Latcml

Bracing of Beams BOIh flanges sh,lIl be lat crilJly braccd
dirc<.:lly Of indin!<.:ll y. The LJnbril ccd kllglh betwecn latcral
hr<lccs shall nOI exceed O. J 7 R,. I:YI ~. Braces shall meet the
provisions of Equations A-I-7 ;lIld I\ - I-H of Appendix A-
1.6 of the Specificmion. where M,= M,,=R,ZF, (LRFD ) or

M. =M,=R,ZF,.II.5 (ASD). '" appropriate . 01" Ihe bealll. and
C" = 1.0.
JIl addi lion, lateral braces shall qc placed nc.u concentr<lIed
loads, changes in cro.'>S-section and other locations when:
analysis ind icates tbm a plasti c hinge will fC)J'Jl1 during
inelastic deformati ons of the IM F. Where the design is

based upon assemblies tested in accord:lllce wit h Secti on B4, the placement of lateral bracing for the beams shall be
consistent with Ihat used in the tests or as required for
prequalification in Section 8-1. The required stren gth of
lateral bracing provided adjacent to plaslic hinges shall be
P.=O.06 M" Ih. (LRFD) or p. = O.06M. I .. (ASD). as
approprime. where. ho = distance hetween nange centroids;
and the required stirrness shall meet the provisions of
Equation A-I-8 of Appendix A- 1.6 o f the Specificati on.
Column Splices Colllmn splices shalt comply will! the
requirements of Sect ion 521.4.!. Where groove welcls arc
used (0 make the splice, they shall be complete-jointpenetration groove welds that mee! the requirements of
Section 520.3.2.
...
'
SECTION 524
..
;,..1 .'iii
Q~WAAY.:M()MENT F~;i,i;iJ~1~\.\
(OMF)
" ~t::iri
524.1 S,opc
Onlill;.lrY mOlllcnt frallles (OMF) nrc expected 10 withstand
minim al inelastic (/eronumions in their members and
co nnections when subjec ted to the forces resulting from the
motions of the design c.lrthquakc. OMF shall meet the
rcqlJirClllcnts of thi s Section. Connections in conformance
with SCClions 522.2.2 and 522.5 or Sections 523.2.2 and
523.5 shalt be permitted for usc in OMF without mceting
the requirements of Secti ons 524 .2. 1,524.2. 1. and 524.5.
,!ss[J'fJ!1!: j.'Ilil,~ UI~seef?visi.Qn". for9MF. )r,~~;P~~!y

deY.el?,~ t?r.,se_ll'!tt~ wtde fiarge sb~peS . With JU~~~~J ,
they may ruso be ~liPtt<;\l to pthet s~~pes sucfi . ~. clianne1s'

buiit-up sections, and hollow s truei~ral sections (HSS): . c>'.
524 .2 Bcam-to-ColuIl1l1
Connections 13eanHocolumn cOllnections shall be made
wilh welds andlor hi gh-s trength bolts. Conncctions are
permitted to be fully restrain cd (FR) or partially restrained
(PR) momenl connect ions as follows.
524.2. Requirem ents for FR Moment Co nnections
FR moment connections that are part of the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) shall be designed for a required
nexu,.al strength that is equal to 1.1 Ry Mp (LRFD) or
(1.111.5) R, Mp (AS D). as appropriate. of the beam or
girder. or tile maximulll moment that ca n be developed by
the sys tem. whichever is less.
FR cOllllections shall meet the rollowing requ irements.

I.
<I.
Where Rteel backing is used in connections with

co mplete-joint-penetrati on (CJP) beam flange groove
welds, steel backing and tabs shall be removed, except
that top-flange backing attached to the column by a
continuous fillet weld on the edge below the CJP
groove weld need not be removed. Removal of steel
hacking and tabs shall be as follows:
FOllowing the removal of backing. the root pass shall
be back gouged to sound weld metal and back welded
wil h a reinforci ng fill et. The reinforcing fi llet shall

ha ve a minimullllcg size or 8 mm .
h.
Weld tab removal shall extend Lo within 3 111111 of the

base metal surface, except at continuity plales where
removal to within 6 mm of Ole plate edge is acceptable.
Edges of Ihe weld tab shall be finished to a surface
roughness value of 13 ~111 or betler. Grinding to a flush
conditi on is not required. Gouges and notches are not
permitted. The transitional slope of any area where
gouges and notches have been removed shall nof
Association of S tructural Engineers of tile Philippines
excecd 1:5. Malcri4l1 rem()vcd by grinding Ihal cxtCIUJ.s

morc than 2 111111 below th e surrace of the base Illct.1l
sha ll be lillcd with we".! mctal. The contour of Ihc weld
11 the ends shall providL'" II SllloOlh transition. free of"
notc hes illld sharp corners.
2.
3.
'
Where we ld access holes arc prov ided. the), s!1iI11 be as

shown in Fi gurr 524 - 1. The we ld access hol e shall have
il surfill'c roughness v:llue not to exceed 13 'lin, and
shall he free of nOlch.es and gouges. Notches ilne!
go uges shall be repaired as required by the engineer-of
record . Weld access holes arc prohibile.d in the beam
web adjace nt 10 the end-plate in boiled mOIllC IlI end
plate con necti ons.
The required st rength of double-sided panial-jointpenet ration groove we lds and double-s ided fillet welds
that resi st tensi le forces in COllllcctions shall be
I.IJlJ ' ,A, (LRFD) or ( 1.1 / 1.5) JI,F,A , (AS D), as
appropria te, of th e connecled element or poln. Singlesided panial-joinl'penctrm ioll groove welds and !<iinglcsided fill et welds sha 1J not be llsed to res ist tensile
~, ...."
) '-f''''''
~ I> '"
, \', '"
nh''''
''I'
".>1....
'111 ,,'m' "'''','''''''' "oJ"" ' rl.. , ...... fo.."I.....
~ .1 '.,' 1 II: '" "t II."",.
''''n~'
,1>." .... . ""~' I,' ",
II,
,b.' ~ ..". " h ..), ,u' ,.. ,) .... 11:\"...
....,b.~.".,-d,;!o
For PI? moment con neelions, (he required shea r

st rength, V" or II", as appropri ll te. or th c cOllncc tion
shall bc determined using th e following qua nti ty for tile
eart hquake load effect :
E; 211 .1".,. Mel / L"
,,,,n,,...
l:>l,'~n '1o~1l .~ ~ :"'~"",I .... ~. 'I...
fo rces ill the con necti ons.
4.
I U... ~I .., ""f"'~II, .. ....1.....,,-.1 , .... ....... ~ ..I

: 1.;00,." "i .., ... ~; ... I l l _... lrl~. 1/:(.... ,.- '''' .... , '.~
~;
r.; 'd fl O
n,,,~,n
lit
(Eq . 524 1)
Where (his is llsed in AS D load combi nations Ihat arc

additive witli other transi ent loads ilnd that are based o n
SEIIASCE 7, the 0.75 combination factor for transient loads
shall not be applied to E.
Altertlillivcly, 11 Icsser valuc of V" or \1" is permitted if
justifi ed by anal ysis. The required shear strength need not
exceed the shea r resu lt ing from Ihe app li cati on of
appropriat e load combinations in the NSCP code lIsing the
a mplifi ed seismk load .
Fig. 5241 Weld Access hole detail ( rro lll FEMA 350,
"Recommended Seismic Des ign Criteria for New Steel
Moment-Frame Buildings")
524.2.2 Requiremenfs ror PR Moment Con llections
PR momen t connections are permitted when the following

requiremen ts are mel:
I.
Such connections shall be designed for the requ ired

strength as speci fied in Section 524.2. 1above.
2.
The nomin al flcxuml strength of the connection, M".

shall be no less th an 50 percent of M il of the con nected
beam or column, whichever is less.
3.
The stiffness and strength of the PR moment

connec tions shall be considered in the design, includin g
the effect on overall frame stability.
4.
For PR moment connecti ons, VII or Va, as appropriate,

shall be determined from the load combination above
plus the shear resulting from thc maximum end
mOJl'lcnt 1h;]1 the connection is capablc of res isting.
524,2.3 Welds
Comple te-joill t-penetrat ion groove wel ds of beam l1anges.
shear plates, and be.1111 webs to columns shall he demand
critical welds as described in Section 520.J .2.
524.3 Panel Zone of BeamtoColumn Connecti ons
(Beam Web Parallel To Column Web)
No addi ti onal req uirement s be yo nd the Specification .
th
Na tional Struclura! Code of lhe Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
524.4 Beam and Co lullllI Limitations

Nu requirements hl!yond
S~ction
521 . 1.
524.9 Column Splices

Columll splices shall comply with the rcquircmcnls or
Sectioll 521.4.1.
524.5 Continuity Platl's
When FR moment t'ollncctiollS arc madc by me,tIls uf welds

of beam l1angcs Or bC<!!ll nangc con ncction platcs dircct ly
to col umn fl anges, con tinuit y piCll cs sllll il be provided ill
accordance with Section 5 : (; of the Specification.
Con tin uity pi ales shall also be required when :
l' ,.
td< 0.54
Jb {'/I/ F,,"{F,(,
or when
1"
< bf l6
Where cOnlinu it y plates arc reCjuired, th e thickncss of the

plates shall be determined :JS fo ll ows:
J.
For onesidcd conncclions. continuity plate thickness

shilll be at least one half of the thi ckness of the beam
flange.
2.
For twosided connections thc continuity plates shall be
at least equal in thi ckness to the thicker of the beam
flanges.
The welded joints of the continuity plates to the columll
nanges shall be made with e ither comp!ctcjointpenctration
groove welds, Iwosided partial-joim penetration groove
welds combined w ith reinforcing fillet welds, or two-sided
fillet weld s. The requi red strength of these j oint s shall not
be less than the avai lable strength of the contact area o f the
plate with the column flange. The required strength of the
wel ded joints of the continuity pl atcs 10 the column web
shall be the least o f the foll owing:
a.
The sum of the available strengths at the connection s of

the contin uit y plate to the column flange s.
The avai lable shear s trength of the contact area of the
plate with the column web.
b.
The weld avai lable strength that develops the avai lable
shear strength of the column panel zone.
c.
The actual force transmitted by the sti ffener.
524.6 CohunnBcam Moment natio

No additional requirements beyond th e specificati on
524.7 Lateral Bracing at lleam-loColumn Connections
No additional requirements beyond the Spccifi ca tio n.
524.8 Laleral Bracing of Beams

No additional requirement s beyond the Specifica ti on.
SECTION 525 . _ . . . . .
SPECIALTRUSSM(j'MENl'FMMES
(STMF)
< :'. ..
525. I Scope
Special tru ss mo ment frames (STMF) arc expected 10
withs tilnd significant inelasti c deformation within a
speciall y designed segment of the tru ss when subjected 10
the forces from the Illotion~ of the desi gn earthquake. STMF
shall be limited to span lengths betwee n colu mns not to
exceed 20 III and ovcm1J depth not to exceed 1.8 m. The
columns and truss seg ments o utside of the speci al segments
shall be designed 10 remain elasti c under the forces that call
be generatcd by the full y yieJded and strain-hardened
special segmcnl. STMP shall meet the requirements in th is
Section.
525.2 Special Segmenl
Eac h horizontal tru ss lhal is pall of the seismic load

resisting system (S LRS) shall have a special segment thm is
located between the quartef point s of the span of the tfUSS.
The length OJ the special segment shall be between 0 .1 am.l
0.5 times the truss span length . The lengtlHo-deplh ratio OJ
any panel in rhe special segment shall ne ither exceed 1.5
no r be less Ihan 0.67 .
Panels within a special segment sha ll e it her be all
Vi ercndeel panels or all X-braced panels; neither a
combination thereof nor the use of other truss diagonal
configurations is permitted. Where diagonal rnember:s afC
used in the special segment , Ihey shall be arranged in an X
paHcm separated by vertical mem bers. Such diagonal
members shall be interconnected al poin ts where th ey cross.
The interconnection shall have il required strength equal to
0.25 times the nominal tensile stren gth of the diagonal
member. Bolted connections shall not be used for web
members within th e special segment. Diagonal web
members within the special segment shall be made of nat
bars of identical sections.
Splicing of chord members is not permitted within Lhe
special segment , nor within one~halJ the panel lenglh from
th e ends of th e special segment. The required axi al strength
of lhe diagonal web members ill the special segment due to
d ead and li ve loads wi thin the special segment shall not
exceed O.03(-~A g (LRFD) or (0.03/1.5) F,A, (ASD), as
appropriate.
The speci al seg ment shall be a protected i:'.one meeling th e

requi rements of Section 520.4.
525.3 Strenglh of Special Segmenl Members
dlOnl mrmhc r!\ through ncxllr~ . and thc shcar strcngt h

correspo nd ing to the availab!e lCIl!'iilc strengt h and 0.3 limes
tht: avai bhJc co mpressive stre ngth of the diagomil mcmbers.
when they arc used. The top and bottom chord members in
th e spccial segmcnt shal! be mad e of identical scctions and
shall provide at !ea~ 1 25 pen.:C!l1 of the requircd vert ical
shear slrcngth . The required axial strength in Ihe chord
mcmbers. detCfmined according to the limit St<\tc of tensi le
yie lding, shall not exceed 0.45 limes rpP,j (I_Rr-D) or P" / S)
(ASD). as appropri"le,
n = J .67 (ASD)
'P = 0.90 (LRFD )

wh ere
T he end connection OJ diagonal web members in the special

segment shall have a required stre ngth Ihal is at lea!;1 equal
to th e expected yi eld stre ngt h. in tension, of the web
Illember. II, r ,A, (LRFD) or R,F ,A, 1 1.5 (ASD). as

<lpprOflriate.
525.4 St rength of Non-Special Segment rs.

Members and connecli ons of STMF. except those in the
special segmellt specified in Seclion 525 .2. shall have a
requ ired strength based on the appropriate load
co mbinalions ill the NSCP code . replacing the earthquake
load term E with the late ral load s necessary to develop the
expected vertical shear strength of the special segment Vne
(LRFD) or V" /1.5 (ASD), as appropriale, al mid-I englh ,
given as:
VII" = 3.75R y M",.
L~
+O.075 El-(L_'_~_,-) +R ,.(P", + O.3Pnc)sill

L(:
'
(1'.'1.5 25-1)
where
M,,(
El
L
LJ
Pili
P,,,
:::: nominal ncxu ral streng th of a chord mcmber or

the special segment, N-mm .
:::: nex ural elastic segment of a chord member of
the special segment. N-mm2
:::: span length of the [russ, mill.
:::: length of the special segment, in. (mm)
:::: nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of
th e special seg ment, kips (N)
:::: nomina! compressive strength of a di agonal
me mher of th e special segment. kips (N)
:::: anglc of diagonal memoers with the horizon tal
525.5 \Vidth -Thickness Limitati(lils
Chord members and diagonal web members within the

special segmclll shall meet the requircments of Section
52 1.2.2.
The available shear strengl h of Ihe special segmenl sl,,11 be

calculated as the sum of the available shear strength of the
111
!i i '/0
CHi\Pl
/:, n b . Steel anti fI.~(H<lIS
525.6 La(crul Bracing

The top and bouoJl1 chords of Ill e trusses shall be lall~ral!y
br:lccd at the ends of' the special segment. and at irllc rva ls
nOI to exceed I", ac('ording 10 Spccific:lli oll Secti on 506,
along the entire length of the (russ. The requ ired strengt h of
each latcr;,ll brace a[ Ihe ends of ilnd wi lhin the special
segment shall be
1'" = 0.06 II, 1' . (LRFD) or
P" = (0.06/ 1.5) II,. P,,, (ASD). as appropriat ~.
whcre
= is Ihe nomina! compressive strength of the
-special segment chord mcmber.

Lateral braces outside 01' the special segment shall ha ve .1
rc()uired strength of
SEC:rION 526
..
SPEClALONCENTRlCALLY
BRACED FRAMES'(SCBF)
526.1 Scope
Spcl'i:t1 concen trically braced fmrnes (SeRF) arc Cx.pcctcd
to withstand sig nificant inelastic deformations whe-II

subjected (0 !:!lC forces rcsuhi ng from the Illoti ons of Il!::
design earthquake, SeBf- shall meet the requirements in (hi:;
Secti on.
User Note: Sectioh 527 (OCBF) should be used for tile
design of tension-only bracing.
526.2 Members
P" = 0.02 II,. P_. (LR FD) or
526.2. 1 Slenderness
1'" = (0.0211.5) II, I',,, (AS D). as appropriate.
Bracing members shall ha ve
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of

Equmion A-I-4 of Appendix A-l.6 of the Specification,
where
I'r
= I'll =11,.1',.. ( LI~FD ) or
PI" = Pa = II!. Pm / 1.5 (AS D). as appropriate.
Exception:
/Jraas with 4 ,IE If). < Kllr S 200 a re permillfd ill jr(ll1l<'S
ill 'which th e (lvoilable Slrel1!; lh of Ihe cO!/im ll is at le(l.r!
('qua/ to !he lI1aximum load [ramferred tv the CO/1I11111 n Il!
sideriflg R,. (LRFD) or (//1.5) R\. (ASD). as appropriOi ('.
time.\' 'he ' 1I0mil/(// slrenglli:) oj fhe cOllnecting brace

l'/twen ls of the building. Column forces need IIOT excp(!/!
those determined by illelaSTic analysis. 1/01' ril e maximwa
load effects that CllII be del'e/oped by tire system.
526.2.2 Required Strengt h

Where the effective net area of bracing members is less than
[he gross area, th e required tensile strength of the brau :
based upon the limit state of frac tu re in the nct section shall
be greater than the lesser of the following:
I.
The expected yield strength , in tension, of the bl'<l{'in j~

member. determined as II!F.A, (LRFD) or R!F,A,!1 5
(ASD). as appropriate.
2. The maximulllload effect, indica ted by analysis th:1l

can be lnlllsferrcd to the brace by (he system.
USCI' Note: This provision applies to bracing memh(,Ts

where the section is reduced. A typical case is a slotlcd l i~:, ..
brace at the gusset plate cOll nection.
526.2.3 Latera( Force Distributi on

A long any line of bracing. braces shall be depl")' :
altcrnate dircctions such that, for either di rectio n I;] : .".,
parallcl to the bracing, alleast 30 percent ~ut no more li,;:i ~
CH/I.[)]"r:n~}
70 percent of the total horijl,ontal force along that line is

resisted by braces in tension, unless the available strength of
each brace in compression is larger than the required
strength resulting from the application of the appropriate
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code including
the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this
provision, a line of bracing is defincd as a single line or
parallel lines with a plan ofl<;e( of 10 percent or less of the
building dimension per pendicular to the line of bracing.
Sleel and Ivlelai
~)1'l1
526.3.2 Ucquired Flcxural Strength

The required flexural strcngth of bracing connections shall
be equal to 1.111, Mp (LRFD) or (1.111.5) II, Mp (ASD). as
appropriatc, of the brace about the critical buckling axis.
EtCepfion:
Brace connections thot meet the requirenwflfs of Sectio/J

526.3.1 and can accommodal(' the inelastic rotations
associated with brace post-buckling deformations Ileed not
meellhis requirement.
Column and brace members shall meet the requirements of

Section 521.2.2.
User !\lOW: HSSwallS.iil~~W$UtfenC4 (ocom.plY With thjs
requirement.
. .
526.2.5 Built-up Members
526.3.3 Required Compressive Strength
The spacing of stitches shall be such that the slenderncss

ratio 1/,. of individual clements between the stitches docs not
exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of the
built-up mcmber.
Bracing connections shall be designed for a required

compressive strength based on buckling limit states that is
at least equal to 1.111/'" (LRFD) or (1.1/1.5) II,P" (ASD), as
appropriate, where Pn is the nominal compressive strength
of the brace.
The sum of the available shear strengths of thc stitches shaH

equal or exceed the available tensile strength of each
clement. The spacing of stitches shall be uniform. Not less
than two stitches shall be used in a built-up member. I30lted
stitches shall not be located within the middle ane-faunh of
the clear brace length.
Exception:
526.4 Special Bracing Configuration Requircmcnts
526.4.1 V-Type and Inverted-V-Type Bracing.

V-type and inverted V-type SeBP shall meet the following
requirements:
J.
The required strength of beams intersected by braces,

their connections, and supporting members shall be
determined based Oil the load combinations of the
NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no
support for dead and live loads. For load combinations
that include earthquake effects, the earthquake effect,
E, 011 the beam shall be determined as follows:
a.
The forces in all braces in tension shall be assumed to

be equal to I?.J~\AI:.
526.3.1 Required Tensile Strength
b.
The required tensile strength of bracing connections

(including beamH to~column connections if part of the
bracing system) shall be the lesser of the following:
The forces in all adjoining braces in compression shall

be assumed to be eqllal to O.3Pn.
2.
Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both

flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of Lho::.Lpi/, as specified by Equation
A-I.I-7 and A-1.1-8 of Appendix A-Iof the
Specification. Latera! braces shall meet the provisions
of Equations A-! .67 and A-I.6~8 of Appendix A-I.Gor
the Specification, where M ro::.M"o::.l? y ZFr (LRPD) or
M,=M,,=R,ZF,. II.) (ASD), as appropriate. of the beam
and Cd = 1.0.
Where the buckling oj braces about their critical bucking

aJ.:is does no! cause shear ill lhe stitches, the spacing of the
stitches shall be such rha! the slenderness ratio I/r of the
individual elements between the stitches does nor exceed
0.75 times the governing slenderness ratio of the buiit-up
member.
526.3 Required Strength of Bracing Connections
1.
The expected yield strength, in tension, of tile bracing

member, determined as RyF\Ag (LRl-;"D) or RJ'~A/I.5
(AS D), as appropriate.
2.
The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that

can be transferred to the brace by the system.
As a minimum, one set or lateral braces is required at the

point of intersection of the V-type (or inverted V-type)
bracing, unless the beam has sufficient oUl-o[..,plane
th
Edition Volume 1
5 172
CHAPTER 5 . Steel nn<l Metals
strength <Iud stiffness

brace poilus.
10
ensure stability between ildjaccnt
527.1 Scope
Bracing Ktype braced frames are not permitted for SCBF.
Ordinary concentrically braced fml11es (OC13F) arc expected

to withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members
and conneclions when subjeclcd 10 the forces rcsuhing froln
the mOlions of the design earthquakc. OCBr shalL!llcet thc
requirements in this Section. OCBr tlbovc Ihe isolation
system ill seismically isolated structures shall meet the
requirements of Sections 527.4and 527.5and need nOl meet
the requircments of Sections 527.2and 527.3.
526_5 Colullln Splices
527.2 Bracing Members
In addition (0 meeting the requirements in Section 521.4,
Oracing members shall mcet Ihe. requiremenls of Seci :oll

521.2.2.
526,4,2 K-Type
i
i
i,
column splices in SCBF shall be designed 10 develop 50

perce nt of the lesser available flexural strength of the
con nectcd mcmbers, The required shear strength shall be
EM"c Iii (LRFD) or EMpc /J.5H (ASD), as appropriale.
where Mpc is the sum of the nominal plastic flexural
strengths of th e columns above and below the splice.
526.6 Protected ZOlle
The protected zone of bracing member$ in SCOF shall
include the center one-quarter of the brace length , and n
zone adjacent to each connection equal to the brace depth in
Ihc plane of buckl ing. The prolecled zone of SCBF shall
include elements that connect braces to beams and colum ns
and shall salisfy Ihe requirements of Section 520.4 .
Exception.'
/ISS braces thar are filled with

with this provision ,
COl1crl.'/c' lJ(~ed
flor cOII',Ay
Bracing members ill K, V, or inverted V configurations

shall have
KI/ r
S;
4J / Pi"
User N9te: Br1\WD.& mem~... tI,1~t lj!e desig!led as tcn~id.ii

;;;,]y (iliaCi . tiegjecting .ih~1r ;trength .ip C9!l)Pif:iS~OI~~
nol apprPP!iate for K. V. and Ulverted V cQnfigurnli6iis.
Such.praces m~y be used in other configurations andru:e .np1

I);!Iuired . tQ.. sati~fy .thjs .provisi9.n. ~ucb members ,!,},a),',
(~c'iude)\e,n.,q~i.i!Pgl"" .p~~te. qr Gabl~ oracing, whh;h, are,!lqt.

excluded by Seclion 519.1.
.
527.3 Special Bracing Configuration
Requirements Beams in V-type and invel1cd V-type OCBF

and columns in K-type OeBF shall be COnlinuous at bra( ing
connections away from the beamcoluml1 connection Rnd
shall meet thc following requirements:
1.
The required strength shall be determined based on the

load combinations of the NSCP code assuming that the
braces provide no support of dead and live loads. For
load combinations thai include em1hquake effccts, the
earthquake effect, E. on the member shaJi be
detennined as follows:
a.
l1lc forces in braces in tension shall be assumed to be

equal to R.lFJA G ror V.typc and inverted V-type
OeBr, the forces in braces in tcnsion need not exceed
the maximum force that can be developed by the

system.
b.
The forces in braces in co mpression shall be assumed

to be equal to Q,3P w
2.
Both flanges shall be laterally braced. with a maximum
Association of Stru ctura l Engineers of the Philippines
CH/\PTUi
spacing of L" = '-I'd, as specified by Equations A- J .7-7

and A-U~-g of Appendix A-J of the SpeciflcatioJl.
Lateral braces shall meet the provision.s of Equations
A-I.6-7 and A-I.6-H of Appcndix A-J.6 of the
Specificatioll, where M,=M,,=R\ZF,. (LRFD) or M,=
Mu=/(ZF\. 11.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the beam and
C,= 1.0. As a minimum, one set of laten.d braces is
required at the poillt of intersection of the bracing,
unless thc member has sufficient out-of-plane strength
:?nd stiffness (0 ensure <;\abiJity between adjaccnt bracc
p()il1ts.
UsH Note: See User Note in Section 526;4f<?r~ni~ojI.of

establishing sufficientout-of-plarte strengt/t afidstifl'ri:ess 'of
thebe~:
"
':. ::";"',
: " ' .:, ~.'~:,:.":,::/:',,~,::,.~>.~{;:::.>
527.4 Bracing COllnections

The required strength of bracing cOllnections shall be
determined as follows.
1.
2.
For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of

bracing connections shall be that determined llsing the
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code, not
including the amplified seismic load.
For other limit states, the required strength of bracing
connections is the expected yield strength, in tension,
of the brace, determined as R.J~\AIi (LRFD) or R/;',\A g
11.5 (ASD). as appropriate.
~i
Sluel and Mel;:ll
:;1"1::'
528.1 Scope
Eccentrically braced frames O::BFs) arc expected to
withstand significant inelastic deformations in the links
when subjected to thc forces resulting from the motions of
the design earthquake. The diagonal braces, columns:, and
beam segments outside of the links shall be designed to
remain essentially clastic under the maximum forces that
can be generated by the fuJly yielded and strain-hardened
Jinks, except where permitted in this Section. In buildings
exceeding five stories in height, the upper story of an EBF
system is permitted to be desigilcd as an OCBF or a SCBF
and still be considered to be part of an EBF systcm for the
purposes of determining system factors in the NSCP code.
EBF shall meet the requircments in Ihis Sectioll.
528.2 Links
528.2.1 Limitations
Links shall meet the requirements of Section 521.2.2.
Thc web of a link shall be single thickness. Doubler-plate
reinforcement and web penetrations are not permitted.
Exception:
528.2.2. Shear Strength
The required strellgth oj the brace connectioll need not

exceed either of the following:
tpvV", and the allowable shear strength, V,/Qv, according to
1,
The maximum for(.'(' that can be developed by the

system
the limit state of shear yielding shall be determined as

follows:
2.
A load (ffect based upon using fhe amplified seismic

load
Except as limited below, the link design shear strength,
\I"
::: nominal shear stre ngth of the link, equal

lesser of Vp or 2Mp Ie, N.
rpv = 0.90 (LRFD)
527.5 OCBF above Seismic Isolation Systems
.~
The cffect of axial force on the link available shear strength

need not be considered if
527.5.2 K-Type Bracing
1'" S 0.151', (LRFD) or
K-type braced frames are not permitted.
27.5.3 V-Type and Invcrted-V-Type Bracing.

Beams in V-type and inve11ed V-type bracing shall be
continuous between columns.
= 1.67 (AS D)
= "'1' Z, N-J11m
= 0.6F,. A,n N
= link length, mm
= (d-2t t)t".
Bracing members shall meet the requirements of Section

521.2.2 and shall have
4)i;"'".-
the
where
527.5.1 Bracing Members
Kif,. <
-
QI'
to
1'" S (0.15/1 .5)1',. (ASD). as appropriate.

\vhere
= required axial strength

combinations, N
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6\h Edition Volume 1
Llsing
LRFD
load
5- 17"
CHAPTEr. 5 - Steel MId Me tals
P"
= rcquired axial strength using ASD

combinations, N
= nominal axial yield strength = FJ. A", N
load
If I'u > 0.151',. (LRFD) or

P" > (0.1511.5) P,. (AS D), as approp,;atc,
the following additional requirements shall be met:
I.
Thc availablc shcar strength of the link shall be the

lesser of ~vV,m and 2qJVM,,,, Ie (LRFD) or
V,,, I Q, and 2 (M,,,, le}/D,. (ASD), as appropriate,
where
<jlV
=0.90 (LRFD)
nv = 1.67 (ASD)
and 2.6Mp IVp.

528.3 Link StitTeners
Full ~ depth web stiffeners shall be provided on both sides of
the li nk web at thc diagonal brace ends of th e link _The se
stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than (hI'
2t w) and a thi ckn ess not 1C".."i s lh.Ul O.75tw or 10 mm,
Whichever is larger, whe re hf and {ware the link
\yidth and link web thickness respectively.
Links shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners ;\';

fol lows:
I.
Links of lenglhs 1.6Mp /Vp Or less shall be provided

with inlenn ediatc web stiffeners spaced at intervals no!
exceed ing (301w -dl5) for a link rotation angle of O.Uil
radian or (52 tw -dl5 ) for link rotation angles of 0 .02
radian or less. Linear interpolation shall be used fl1:values bel ween 0.08 and 0.02 radian.
2.
Links of length grea ter than 2.6Mp IVp and less th at:
5Mp IVp shall be prov ided with intc nned iatc web sii ;
fell ers placed at a dist ance of 1.5 timcs bf from cae!.
end of the link.
3.
Links of lenglh between /.6Mp IVfl and 2.6Mp /V I'

shall be provided with imemle<.i iale web stiffener!>
meeting the rc quirements of (a) and (b) above.
4.
Intermediate web stiffeners arc not required in links of

lenglhs grealer lhan 5Mp IV".
5.
Intermediale wcb stiffeners shall be full depth. Fo;'

links th at are less than 635 mm in depth, stiffeners an;
required on only one side of the link web. The
thickness of ollc~sid ed stiffenc!'s shall not be less than
tw or 10 mill, whichever is larger, and th e width shal:
be not less lhan (bf /2)- lw. For links lhal arc 635 Ill'"
ill deplh or greater. similar imcmlediate stiffeners arc.required 011 both sides of the web.
(Eq . 528- 1)
M". = I.IS Mp
(Eq.528-2)
1', = 1'" (LRFD) or
P" (ASD), as appropriate

P,. = P,. (LRFD) or 1',.11.5 (AS D), as appropriate
2.
The leoglh of the link shall not cxceed:

a.
I LIS - O.5p'(A.JAg}] 1.6M"N"
whcn p' (AwIA, ) ?: 0.3
(Eq. 528-3)
nor
h.
1.6Mp N ,
when p'( A,JAg} < 0.3
(Eq.528-4)
where
AIV= (d - 21/}1".
pi = P,IV,
and
where
V,
V,
Vo
= V, (LRFD) or V. (ASD), as appropriate

= required shear strength based on LRFD load
combinations. N
= required shear strength based 0 11 ASD load
combinations, N
528.2.3 Link Rotation Angle

Tile link rotation angle is the inelastic angle belwecn the
li nk and the beam outside of the link when the total story
drift is equal to the design story drift. 6 . The link rotation
angle shall not exceed the followin g values:
I.
0.08 radiaos for links of length 1.6Mp /Vp or less.
2.
0.02 radians for links of Ienglh 2.6Mp /Vp or grcaler.
3.
The value detennined by linear interpolation between

the above values for links of length between 1.6Mp /VI'
nal\g ~'
The required st rength of fillet welds connecting a li nk

stiffener to the link web is As,FI' (LRFD) or As,Fr I 1.5
(AS D), as appropriate. where Ast j's the area of the stiffcIII!.
The requ ired strength of fillet welds connecting the stifkH,'"
lO the link flanges is A"F, /4 (LRFD) or A"F,. /4( 1.5) (liSP).
528.4
Link~toCl)lumn
Connections
connections must he capable of sustainin:l.
the maximum link rot~tioll angle based 0 11 the length of 11;;:
link. as specified in Section 528 .2.3. The strenglh of ti ",
connectio n mea sured at the column face shall equal at h' m..!
th e nominal shear strength of the link, Vm as specified iil
Section 528.2.2 at (he maximum link rotation angle. Link~
to ~ co lumn connections shall satisfy the above requirements
by One of the following:
Link ~ to ~colunlll
J.
Usc a connection prcqualified for EBF in accordance
CHAPTEH
with Section
B~ 1.
2.
Provide qualifying cyclic I('S I results in accordance wilh

Section (l4. Resulls of:ll leasl Iwo cyclic connection
tes ts shall be prov ided and are permitted to be based on
one of the fo llowi ng;
il .
Tests rcpm1cd ill resca rch literature or doc umentcd tests

performed for other projects lhal arc rcpresentative of
project conditi ons. within the limits specifi ed in Secti on
B -4 .
t,
h.
Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and

are represenl ativc of project mcmbe r sizcs. matcrial
strcngths. connection con fi gurati ons. and match ing
conncction processes, ~vi t h i n thc limits specified in
Scc tion 84 .
exceptioJl:
Wh ere reill/iJrcem em of fhe beal1l-/()-coJlIlIIll cOl/flecfion at

the link end predudes yieldillg oj fhe beam twl'r th t'
reinforced leng,h. Ihl' fink is permi fl eti to be the beam
seKm(~1II from 111(' eml of the reillforcemeJll 10 rh e JHacl'
CorUl{lCfioll. Wh err such links (lI'{I used alld the link lellg,l!
does nol exceed J.6Mp / \11', cyclic leslinc of Ihe reinforced
connection is not required if rife available .r/rangr" of the
rl!illforced section ami th e COlUwction eqlia/s or eXl''eds the
required strellgrh calclilated based upon tile stra in hardened lillk as described ill Section 528_8. Full depth
sfiffellers as required ill Seclioll 528.2 .3shall be placed a r
the Iillk~ to- ,.eillforcem ell1 im elface.
528.5 Latcl-al Br aci ng of Li nk

Lateral bracing shall be provided at both the lOp and bottom
link fl anges at the ends of the link. The required Strength of
each latcra! brace at the ends of the link shall be Ph = 0 .06
Mr III", where 110 is the distance between flange cClllfoids ill
mill.
For des ign accordi ng 10 Specificati on Section 502.3.3
(LRFD)
Mr =M,1,exp
= R)Zf~r
Sleel <lnt! Me la l
l 1fj
force s and moments gCJlcralcd by at Ie.!!)! J .25 times the

ex pec ted nominal shea r strength o f Ih c link RyV" , wherc V"
is as defincd in Sec tion 528.2.2. The available strcngth or
th c diagona l brace shall comply with Spedfical ioll Section
508.
Brace membe rs shall meet the requ iremcnls of Section
52 1.2.1.
528.6.2 Beam Outside Li nk

The requi red combined ax.ia l and flexural sirengt h o f Ih e
bcam outside of the li nk shall be dctermined based on load
combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For lo;,td
combinations including seismic effects, a load QJ shall be
substituted for the term E where Q I is defincd as the forccs
gencratcd by al least 1.1 timcs the expected no minal shcar
strength of lh c link, RyV,,, where V.. is as defincd in Section
528.2.2. The available strength of the beam outside of the
link sha ll hc ac term ined by the Speci fi catio n, llluiliplied by
Ii,,,
AI the con neclion between the di agonal brace and the beam
at the link end of the brace, the intersection o f the brace and
beam centerlincs shall be at the end of the link or in thc link ,
528 .6.3 Braci ng Con llectiuns

The required strength of the diagonal brace connections. at
both ends of the bracc. shall be at least equal to the required
strength o f the diagonal brace, as defined in Section
528.6. 1. TIle diagonal brace co nn ection s shall also satis fy
the requirements of Section 526_3.3 _
For des ign accord ing to Specification Section 83.4 (AS D)
M,
= M", ex"I1.5
The required brace stiffness shall meel the provisions o f

Equation A ~ 1.6~ 8 of the Specification, whcre Mr is defincd
ahove. Cd = I. and Lb is the link length .
528.6 Diago nal B.. ace and Beam Outside of Li nk

528.6. 1 Diago na l Bracc
The required co mbi ned axial and flexural strength of th e
di agoll ul brace shall be determin ed based on load
combi nati ons st ipu lat ed by the NSCr code. For load
combi nati ons including scismic effec ts, a load QI shall be
substituted for th e term E, where Q l is defincd as the axia l
No part of Ihe diago nal brace conncc tion at thc link end of
the brace shall cxtend over the link length. If the brace is
des igned to resist a pOI'lion of the link end moment , then the
diagonal uf<lce connection at the link end of the brace sha ll
he designed as a fully~restraincd moment co nnect ion.
528.7 13ca m-to-Co!UIIlIl Connec ti ons

If the EI3F system factors in Ihe NSC P code require moment
resist ing con ncctions away frolll the link, th en the be.mHOco lumll connections away from Ih e lin k shall mect the
requirement s for bcaJll-lo-column connections for OMF
specified ill Sections I 1.2 and 11 .5.
Na tionat Structural Code of Ille Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
5- 176
CHAPH: 1i
. Sleel (lnd Me tals
If the EBF system fll 1:IOI"S in the NSCP code do not require
moment resistin g cOllnections away from the ti!lk . then the
bcam-lo-colulIlli conllections lIW,lY frolll the lin k arc
pennillcd 10 be designed as pinned in the plane oflhe web.
SECTION 529
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED
528.8 Required Strength of Columns
529.1 Scope
Buckling-restra ined braced fram es ( BRBFJ; arc expected In
withstand significant inelastic deformations when subjected
10 the forces resulting from the moti ons of the design
eanhquake. DROP shall meet the requirements ill thi s
Section. Where th e NSCP code docs not contain design
coefficieflls for BRBF, the pro visions of Section B-3 shall
apply.
In addit io n to the requiremcnts in Section 52 1.3. the

req uired stren gth of columlls shall be det erm ined from load
combinatiolls as stipul;l(ed by the NSCP code, except that
the seismic IO,ld E.sJmll be the forces gencnHed by 1.1 limes
the expected nominal shear strength of all links above the
level under considertll ioll . The expected nominal s h e~ r
strength of a link is RyV/lI where VII is as defined ill Section
FRAMJS'il\JinF) ..
."
528.2.2.
Column members shall meet [he requirements of Section

521.2.2 .
528.9 Protected Zolle
Links in EBFs 3re a protected zone, and shall satisfy the

req wrements of Section 520.4. Welding all links is
permitted for attachment of link stiffeners, as required in
Section 528.3.
528.10 Demand Critical Welds

Complete-joint-penClration groove welds attaching the link
flanges and the link web to the column are demand critical
529.2 Bracing Members

Bracing members shall be composed of a structural steel
core and a system tlim restrains the steel core frolll
buckling.
529.2.1 Steel Core
The steel corc shall be designed
force in the ~race.
10
res ist Ihe en tire axial
The brace design ax ial strength , fl)F'y." . (LRFD), an d the

brace allowable axial strength, PrJ' /0 (ASD), in tensi on and
compression, according to the limi t slate of yield ing, sha ll
be determined as follows:
welds, and shall satisfy the r~qujrement s of Section 520.3.2.
(Eq. 529- 1)
<r
0.90 (LRFD)
!l
1.67 (AS D)
where
Fysc
= specified minimum yield stress of the steel core,
Asc
or actual yield stress of the steel core as

determined from a coupon test, MPa.
=net area of steel core, 111m2.
Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater
shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness requirements of

Sec ti on 519.3.
Splices in the stcel core are not permitted.

529.2.2 Buckling-Restraining System
The bucklingM
restraining sys tem shalt consist of the casing
for th e steel co re. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gu ssets connecting the core shall be considered part s of
this .system.
The buckling-restraining system sha ll limit local and overall
buckling of lhe steel core for deformati ons corresponding to
2.0 times the design story drift. The buckling -rest n~ ;Jl illg
system shall not be permitted to buckle within defonnhiions
corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift.
Association of Struct ural Engineers of the Philippines
User Not.c:Con{onnance t~ thi~ Wf>)'ision is qempnslraled

by means of testing as described in Slltioh5;!9,2,3,
529.2.3 Testing
The design of braces shall be based upon results from
qllalifying cyclic lests ill accordance with the procedures
and acceptance criteria of Section 13-5. Qualifying tcst
results shall consist of al least Iwo successful cyclic tests:
onc is required to be
it
test of a brace subasscmblage thaI
includes brace connection rotational dcm:lI1ds complying

with Section B-5, Section B-5.4 and the other shall be either
a uniaxial or a subasscmbJagc test complying with Section
135, Section 13-5.5. Both test types arc permitted 10 be
b~lscd
!.
529.3.1 RC<fuired Strength
The required strength of bracing connections ill tensioJl and

compressioJl (including bcam-to~~:()lul1ln connections if part
of the bracing system) shall be I. t times the adjusted brace
strength in compression (LRFD) or 1.111.5 times the
adjusted brace strength in compression (ASD).
upon one of the following:
Tests reponed in research or documented tests
performed for other projects.

2.
corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift) to Fr." of

the test specimen. The larger value of (0 from the two
required qualification tests shall be used. Where the tested
stec! core material docs not match that of the prototype, (I)
shall be based on coupon testing of the prototype material.
529.3. Bracing Connections.
Tests that are conducted specifically for the project.
Inlerpolation or extrapolation of test results for different

member sizes shall be justified by rational analysis that
demonstrates stress distributions and magnitudes of internal
strains consistent with or less severe than the tested
assemblies and that considers the adverse crfects of
variations in material properties. Extrapolation of lest
results shall be based upon similar combinations of steel
core and buckling-restraining system sizes. Tests shall be
permitted to qualify a design when the provisions of Section
B-5 are mel.
529,2,4 Adjusted Ilrace Strength

\\'here required by these Provisions, bracing connections
and adjoining members shall be designed to resist forces
calculated bi1sed on the adjusted brace strength.
529,3,2 Gusset Plates

The design of connections shall include considerations of
local and overall buckl.ing. Bracing consistent with that lIsed
in the tests upon which the design is based is required.
User Note: This provision may bernet by designing tile
for a..lfan,$VerSe f9rc~ cQD.sisteQt wi~).Jrap.sverse
bracing forces qetermilled from testinl\, by~dqing a
stiffener to it to re~i$ltl~s, fOrc~,or by providing ab.race to
the gt\sset plate or to !he bra"" i!!;elf. Where ,clwsupporting
tests didnN,includetransverse ~racing, ,nosucbbracingis
required. A~y attachment of bradng to the sieel core must
be included in the qualification testing,
gus.s~t p'l~~e
529.4 Special Requircmcnts

Related to Bracing Configuration. V-type and invcrted-Vtype braced frames shall meet the following requirements:
I.
The required strength of beams intersected by braces,

their connections, and supporting members shall be
determined based on the load combinations of the
NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no
SUpp0l1 for dead and live loads. For load combinations
that include earthquake effects, the veI1icai and
horizontal earthquake effect, E, on the beam shall be
detennined from the adjusted brace strengths in tension
and compression.
2.
Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both

nanges of beams shall be laterally braced. Lateral
braces shall mect the provisions of Equations A-I.6-7
and A-l.6-8 of Appendix A-l.6 of the Specification,
where M, ~ M" ~ II, ZFv (LRFD) or M, ~ M" ~ II,. ZF\'
/l.S (ASD), as apPI:opriate, of the beam and Cd ~ I.e).
As a minimum, onc set of lateral braces is required at
the point of intersection of the V-type (or inverted vtype) bracing, unless the beam has sufficient out-ofplane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
adjacent brace points.
The adjusted brace strength in compression shall be

fJwRyPysc. The adjusted brace strength in tension shall be
(vRJ\ . \(".
EJ..:ception:
The factor R.I need nol be applied if Fnc is established using
yieid stress determined from a coupon lest.
The corn pression strength adjustment factor, rl, shall be

calculated as the ratio of the maximum compression force to
the maximum tension force of the tcst specimen measured
from the qualification tests specified in Section 13-5, Section
13-S.6.3for the range of deformations corresponding to 2.0
times the design story drift. The larger value of [) from the
two required brace qualification tests shall be used. III no
case shall 13 be taken as less than 1,0,
~
The strain hardening adjustment factor, cu, shall be

calculated as the ratio of the maximum tension force
measured from the qualification tests specified in Section B5, Section B-S.6.3 (for the range of deformations
Uscr Note: The beam has. sufficient oUI,of-plane strength

and stiffness if the beam bent in the horizontal plane meets
th
5 178
CHt\I)T I::r~ !j -
Sleel an(i MelJI:>
For purposes of brace design and jesting. the calculated

ma xi mum deform atioll of braces sha l! he increased by
including th e effect of the vertical deDcction of the beam
und er the loading defined in Section 529 4.
K ~ I Ypc braced frames Hrc not penniltcd I.:'":: 9ROF.
529.6 Protected Zone

The protcctcd I.o nc sh.1l1 include thc steel tore of' h rac ing
members and clements that connccl1hc steel core to hea ms
and columns, and shaH satisfy th e requirements of Section
520.4 .
529.5 Beams and Columns

Beams and columns in BRBF shall meci the following
requirements.
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of
Section 521. 2.2.

The required strength of beams and columns in BRBF shall
be determined from load combinations as stipulated in the
NSCP code. For load combinat ions lhal include earthquake
effects, the canhquakc effect, E, shall be determined from
the adjusted brace strengths in tension and compression.
Th e required strength of beams and colu mns nced not
exceed the maximum forc e thal can be developed by the
system.
529.5.3 Splices
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 52 1.4:
colu111n splices in BRI3F shall be designed to develop 50
percent of the lesser available flexural strength of the
connected members, dctermi ncd based on thc limit Slale of
yielding. The required shear strength shall be l.Mpc !II
(LRFD) or EMpc 1I.5H (ASD), as appropriate, where EMpc
is the SlIm of the nominal plastic flexural st rengths of the
columns above and below the splice.
Association 01 Structural Engineers of the PI1 ilippines
530.2.3 Openings in Webs

Opening:-; in webs shall be bounded 011 all sides by H BE (lnd
VUE extending the fill! width and heigh! of the panel ,
res pec ti ve ly, unl ess otherwise ju:-;tificd by t(' siing and
ana lysis.
530.1 Scope
Special plate shear wall s (SPSW) afC ex pected 10 withstand
significant in elastic deformations in the webs wh en
subjected to tile forces resulting from the motions of th e
design cJ rlhquakc. The horizojHal bound ary clements
(HBEs) and vertical bou ndary elements (VBEs) adjacent to
Ihe webs shall be designed 10 remain essentially elastic
530.3 Connections of ~'c bs to Boundary Elements

The required stren gth of web co nn ec tions to th e surro unding
HBE and VBE shall equal the expected yield strength, ill
tension, of the web calculat ed at nn a!lgl~ ll. dcli ncd by
under the maximum forces that can be generated by the

fully yielded webs, except that plastic hin ging at the ends of
HBEs is permiUed. SPSW shall meet the requirements of
530.4 Horizontal and Vertical Boundary El ements
this Section. Where the NSCP code docs not contain desi gn
coeffi cients for SPSW, the provisions of Section B-3 shall
apply.
530.2 Webs
530,2.1 Shear Strength
The panel design , hear strength, q> V" (LRFD), and the
a llowable shear stren gth, V,/Q (ASD), according to the limit
s tale of sh ear yielding, shall be detennined as follows:
V" ~ 0.42 P,. 'w L,rsin 2a
(Eq .530-1)
n ~ 1.67 (ASD)
'" ~ 0.90 (LRFD)
where
1".
== thicknes$ of the web, mm.
L er
= clear distan ce between
VBE flanges, mm .
a is the angle of web yielding in radi ans,

relative to the vertical, and it is given by:
itS
measured
IIIL
tan
I +-2A
A"
AI'
1(.
L
The req uired stren gth of HB E shall be the greater or the

forces cOITcspondi ng to th e expected yield strength , in
tension, or th e web calc ul ated at an ,mglc a or th'lI
determ ined from th e load combinations in the NSCP code
assuming the web prov ides no su pport for grav it y loads.
The beam~coJumn mOlllent rat io provisions in Secti on 522.6
shall be met for all HBf.YVB E intersecti ons with out
consideration of the effects of the webs.
530.4.2 HB[' to- VBE Connections

J-m E~ to- VBE conn ections shall s.uisfy the req uirements of
Section 524.2, The required shear strength, VI" of a HBE-toVB E connection s hall be determined in accord;:1I1ce wi th the
pro vis ions of Secti on 5.24.2, except that the required shear
strength shall not be less than the shear correspond ing to
moment s at each end equal to I.IR,M" (LRFD) or ( 1.111 .5)
+,,, "(1~ + 36i~~L J

(Eq .5302)
iI
530,4.1 Required Strength

In addition to the requi re ments of SCt.1ion 52 1.3, the
required stren gth of V8 E shall be based upon the forces
corresponding to the expected yield st rength , in tension , or
the web calculated at an angle n.
R)Mp (ASD). as appropriate. together with the shear

resulting from the expected yi eld strength in tension of the
webs yielding at an angle a.
Eq .S30-2.
== distance between HU E centcrlincs , mill.
=cross~scc ti ona l area of a HB E, mm2.

= cross-sectional area of a VI3E, 111m2 .
= moment of inenia of 11 YBE take n perpendicular
to the direction of the web plate line, mm4 .
= disl:m cC'- bet ween YBE ccnl crlin c:-; , mill.
530.2.2 Panel Aspeel Ratio

The rat io of panel length to height, VIT, shall be limited to
0.8 < Vii 50 2. 5.

HB E and VBE members shall meet the requ irements of
Section 521.2.2.
530.4.4 Lateral Bracing

HU E 511nll be lalernll y braced at all intersections with VI3E
and 11t a spacing not to exceed 0.086 RJ:JF.,.. 1301h fl anges of
HB E shall be braced ei ther directly or indirect ly. The
required strengt h of lateral bracing shall be at least 2 percellt
of lhe HBE fl ange nominal strength, P,. bf tf. The requi red
stiffness of all lateral bracing shal t' be detcnnined in
accordan ce with Equation A-I .6-8 of Appendix A-I .6 of the
Specification. In these equations, Mr shall be co mputed
11S
RJZP,. (LRFD) or Mr shall be computed as R)ZF,. 11.5

rh
National Structural Code of Ihe Plli1ippines 6 Edition Volume 1
(AS D), as appropriat e, and Cd ::: I.O.5l0. 4. 5. VB E Splic.:cs .

VBE ..:pl icc..: ..:hall com pl y wit h 11K'. n:quirenH:ms oj" Sectio n
521.4.
530.4,6 Pancl Zoncs
531.1 Senpe
Thc VUE pa nel i'.olle next 10 the lOp and h;I SC !-IBE of the
SPSW sha ll com ply wi th the requin~ll1 e nl s in Sec ti on 52 2.3 .
When required by the NSCP code or th e cnginccI"Hof' rccord,

a qmdi l), ass urance plan shall be pro vided . The qu ,llil y
assurance plan shaH in cl ude the requirement s or Sc<.:ti on H2.
530.4.7 Stiffness or Vcrtical
BOllnd ~ II'Y
Elcments
The VBE slwl! have momc nt s o f in~rt i: 1 about an axis taken

pcrpendicu lar 10 Ihc plane 01" the web, I" 110t less th an
0.00307 "" MIL.
User Note: The
consider~d ad'''luate.
of a response modification factor of 3 or '
assumption of system, clement, and ~:~~~.: ~;~I~~~J~~

reduce design forces. The qualily assu""""",e
to ensure thaI the seismic
. .sy'sfe.rl.:~;,:;is
significantly free of defects that
.
tMiJ&:llj[
ductility of the system. There may be cases
.
non-redundant major transfer members; or whereWot'Kftff
penonned in a location that is difficult t<f itce;iS) '<Wb'iii!!
supplemenlal lesting might be advisable, Ad\lilionaiJ.\<
where the contractor's quality control
has.
demonstraled the capability to perform'some laskSihis Pl~
has assigned to qualilY assurance, modification of the.pIM
could be consIdered.
.;:'1
examp}e;
program .
'~~~i
:'"
PARTB'
APP}!;NDICES
B1. PItEQUALIFICi\TION OF
BEAM,:COLUMNANDLINK.tO.
cotoMNcdNNECTIONS
B- I.l Scope
'nli s appendix contains minimum requirements for
prcqualificntion of beam to-column mOJllent connections ill
special moment frames (SMF), intermediate moment frames
The CPR sha ll ;!lso provide the sam e informa tion when
limits arc It) be changed the COIiIlCt:tioll has the ability and
reliabilit y 10 undergo the required illicrstory d!'in angle for
SMF and IMI~ and the required link rotati on ilngle for EBF,
where the link is adjacent to columns . The limits on
member sizes for prcqualificatioll shall 1101 c,x<.:ccd tile limits
spc.cificd in Section 13-4. Section 132's.2.
n 1.4 Prcqualification Variables

In order to be' prequalified, th e effect of the following
(lMF), and Iink-to-colul1ln conn ection s in eccentricall y
variables on connection performance shall be conside red.

Limits on the permissible values for each variable shall be
eSl<lblished by the CPRP for the prcqualified connection.
braced frames (EBF) , Prequalified connections arc

penni lied 10 be used, within the applicable limi ts of
I.
Beam or link parameters:
a.
Cross-section shape: wide na ngc, box, or other
b.
Cross-section fabric:l! iOIl method: rolled shupe. welded

shape, or other
c.
Depth
d.
Weight per foot
c.
Flange thickness
f.
Material specification
g.
Span-ta-depth ratio (for

(for EBF)
h.
Width thickness ratio of cro ss-sec tion clements
I.
Lateral bracing
j.
Other parameters peninent to Ihe specific con necti on

under consideration
2.
Column parameters:
<l.
Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or mile!'
b.
Cross-section fabrication meth od: rolled shape. welded

shape, or other
c.
Column orientation with respect to beam or link: beam

or link is connected to column flange, beam or link is
connected to' column web, beams or links are connected
to both the column flange and web. or other
d.
Depth
c.
Weight per foot
r.
Flangc thickness
g.
Material specification
h.
Width-thickness ratio of cross-section elemcnts
i.
Lateral bracing
j.
Other parameters pCI1incnt to tile specific connection

under consideration
prcqU<llilicat ion, without Ihe need for funhcr qu.alifying

cyclic tests. When the limits of prcquuJificatioll or design
requirements [or prcqualificd connections co nOiel with the
requirements of these Provisions, the limits of

prequalilicatioll and design requirements for prcqualiricd
connections shall govern.
B-I.2 General Requirements

B-1.2.1 Basis for ('re'lualiticalion
Connections shall be prcqualificd based on test data

sat isfying Section 8-1.3, suppot1ed by analytical studi es and
design models. The combined body of evidence for
prequalification must be sufficient (0 assure that the
con nection can supply the required inlerslory drif[ angle for
S MF and IMF systems, or Ihe required link rotation angle
for EBF, on a consistent and reliable basis withi" the
specified limits of prequalification . All applicable limit
states for the connection that affect the stiffness. strength
and deformation capacity of the connection and the seismic
load resisting system (SLRS) must be identified. These
include fracture related limit states, stability related limit
states, and all other limit states pertinent for the connection
under consideration. The effect of design variables listed in
Section B- lA shall be addressed for connection
prequalification.
11-1.2.2 Authority for Prcqualification
Prcqualificat ion of a connection and the associated lim its of

prcqualitication shull be established by a connection
prcqualification review panel (CPRP) approved by the
authority having jurisdiction .
Section U-1.3 Testing Requirements
Data lIsed to SlipPOll conneclion prequalifiCfllion shall be
based on tests conducted in accordance with Section 134.
The CPRP shall determine the number of tests and the
variables considered by the tests for connection
prequalification.
SMF or IMF), or link length
3.
Bcam (or link) colu mn relat ions:
the
iI.
Panel zone sl rcnglh
h.
Doubler pl;lI c all ac hmcl1t det'lils
c.
Column bea m (or li nk) 1l1OIllcni r<t!io
4.
Continuit y platcs :
a.
Idcl1t ific.uion c< conditions under whi ch contin uity

plates arc rcquir-.;u
Thi ck ness. widt h and de pl h
c.
Atlachment d eta il s
5.
Welds:
a.
Location, ex tent (including ret urn s), type (CJP, PJP,

fill et, CIC.) and an y reinforcement or co nt ouri ng
required
h.
Fi ller me tal classiliCluion st rength and lIolch toughness
c.
Detail s and Irca(mCIlI of wel d b':lck in g and weld tah!)
d.
Weld access holes: size, geometry and fi nish
c.
Welding q uali ty control and qu ality ,\ssurancc beyond

that described III Secti on 18, including th e
nondestructive tes ting (NOT) method, inspec.tion
frequency, acceptance criteria Imd docu mentation
requirements
6.
Bolts:
a.
Bolt dia meter
b.
Bolt grade: ASTM A325. A490. or other
c.
Installmioll requirements: prctcilsioncd, snug-tight, or

other
!-lole type: standard, overs ize.
$ho r{ ~slot,
long-slot, or
other
c.
f.
connec tion
hy the CPRP
consideratio n,
as
B-l .6. PrC<Jualilica ti oll n.ccord

A prequ alitied con nection shall be provided wit h a wri tte n
prcq ualiric31ion record with the fo llowi ng information:
J.
General dcsc riplion of the prcqu alified connec tion an d

drawings th at dea rl y identify key fea tures and
components of th e cOllnection
2.
Descripti on of the expected behav ior of the connection

in the clastic and ine lastic ranges of behavior, intended
)ocati on(s) of inelastic <lc lion. and II descri pti on of li mit
slates controlling the strengt h and deformation cnpacit y
of the con necti on
3.
Listi ng of systems for wh ich connection is prequalified:

SMF. IMF. Of lOBI"
4.
L..ist ing of li mits for all prcqualificati on variab les listed

in Section 13- 1.4.
5.
Listi ng of deman d cril ical welds
6.
Definiti on of t he region of the co nnection th at

co mprises the protec ted zone
7.
De tailed descri ption of the design procedure for the

connection. as req uired in Section B- 1.5.
8.
Lis t of references of test reports, research reports and

other publications th at provided the basis for
preq ualiflca ti on
9.
SUlllmary or quali ty co ntrol and quality assurance

proced ures
Hole fabricati on method: drill ing, punching, su bpunching an d rea ming, or other
Other parameters pertin ent to the specific connection

un der co nsideration
7.
Work manship: All workma nship para illcle rs lhat

exceed AlSC. RCSC and A WS requ irements, pCl1incnt
to the specific connecti on und er consideration, sllch as:
a.
Surface roughness of thennal cu t or gro und edges
b.
Cutt ing to lera nces
c.
We ld reinforcement or con touri ng
d.
Presence of holes, fasteners or we lds fo r aUachmellls
8.
Additional connecti on detail s: All variables pertinent to

.~
un der
B-I.S. Design Procedu re

A comprehensive design procedure must be available fo r a
prcqualificd co nnec liull. The design procedure must add ress
all applicabl e li mi t states within the limits of
preq uali fication .
h.
d.
specific
e~labljshcd
C:HI\Pil: l~
!)teel <lrrd Metal
:)- HB
I.
M;lIcrial test rcpOJ1S for structura l steel, boll s, shear

conncctors. and we ldi ng materials
11-2.1 Scope
2.
Inspcction procedures
Quality control (QC) and quality <lssur;tJlcc (QA) shall be

pro vided as specified in thi s Section.
3.
NOIK'o nforrnancc procedure
4.
Matcrial cont rol prm;edurc
5.
Bolt installation procedure
6.
Welder perform,wee qualilicalion record s (WPQR j,

including any suppl emental testi ng req liiremellls
13-2.2 Inspection and Nondest ructive Testing Personnel

Visual welding inspection and nondestructive testing (NOT)
shall be cond~Jctcd in accordance with a written practice by
personnel qualified in accordance with Section B-6.
7.
QC Inspec tor qualifi cations
8-2.4 Quality Assurance Agency Documents
Bolting inspection shall be conducted in accordance with a

written practice by qualified persollnel.
B-2.3. Contractor Documents

The following documents shall be submitted for review by
the engineer-of-record or designee, prior to fabricat ion or
erection, as appl icable:
1.
Shop drawin gs
2.
Erection drawings
3.
Welding Procedu re Specifications (WPS), which shall
specify all applicable essential variables of A WS D I

and the foll owing, as applicable
a.
po wer source (constant current or constant voltage)
b.
for demand cri tical welds, electrode manufacturer and

trade name
4.
Copies of the man ufacturer's typical certificate of

confonnance for all electrodes, fluxes and shield ing
gasses to be used. Certificates of conformance shall
satisfy the applicab I~ A WS AS requirements.
5.
6.
For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's

certifications that the filler metal meets the
supplemental notch toughness requirements, as
applicable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not
su pply suc h supp lemen tal certifica tions . the contractor
shall have the necessary testing performed and provide
the applicabl e test reports.
Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog d'lta fo r
SMAW, rCAW and GMAW co mposite (cored) filler
metals to be used. The data sheets shall descril?c the

product, limitations of usc, recommended or typica l
welqing parameters, and storage and exposure
requirements, including baking, if applicab le.
The following documents shall be available for revi ew by
the engineer-of-record or designee prior to fabrication or
erection, as applicable, unl ess specified to be submitted:
The agency responsible for qualit y assurance shall submit

the following docum ents to the authori ty having
jurisdiction, the engineer-of-record, and the owner or
owne r's designee:
!.
QA agcncy's written practices for the monitoring and

control of the agency's operations. The wrilten practice
sha ll include:
a.
The ;tgency's procedures for the selection and

admini st ration of inspection personnel, describing the
trainin g, experience (\nd examination requirements for
qualification and certificati on of inspection personnel ,
and
b.
The age ncy's inspection procedu res, including general
inspection. material controls, and visual

inspection
weldin g
2.
Qualifi cations of management and QA personnel

desi gnated for the project
3.
Qualitic<lIioll record s for Inspectors

technicians designated for lhe project
4.
NDT procedures and equipment calibration records for

NOT to be performed and equipment to be used for the
and
NDT
project
5.
Daily or weekly inspection repoI1s
6.
Nonconformance reports
B2.5 Inspection Points and Frequencies
Inspection points and frequcncies of quality con trol (QC)

and quali ty ass urance (QA) tasks and doc umentation for th e
seismic load resistin g sys tem (SLRS) shall be as provided in

the followin g tables.
The following entries are used in the tables:
Observe (0) . The inspector shalT observc these functions

on a random, daily basis. Weldin g operation s need not be
delayed pending observations.
...
!) 184
CHAP "t t:1i!~
Stl:el and tv1etat5
Perform (1') - These inspections shal l be performed prior to

tIll: !ina! acccpt ,lncc or the item. Where a task is noted to be
pcrf{)J"Jllcd by both QC and QA, il shall be pCfJJliltcd to
(:oordinale the inspection fU llc tion bel ween QC and QA so
tlllli the inspectio ll fUllct ions need he performcd hy only one
p'lrty. Where Q/\ is to rely upon inspection rUllctions
performed by QC, the approval of the engineer-of-record
Clnd the authority having jurisdiction is required.
Doculllent (I)) ~ Thc inspector sh.}11 prepare reports
indicming that the work has been performed in acc'lmJance
with the contract docullleJlts. The repol1 need Jlot provide
dctclilcd measuremcnts for joint fit-up, WPS scltings,
complctcd welds, 01" . other individual items li sted in the
Tables ill SCCliolls B-2.5.I, B-2.5.3, or B-2.5.4. For shop
fabrication. Ihe report shall indicate the piece mark of the
piece inspected. For field work. the report shall indicate the
reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work
not in compliance with the contraCt documents and whether
til e noncornpliance has been satisfactorily repaired sha ll be
/loted in the inspection rerml.
B-2_5.1 Visual Welding Inspection
Visual inspection of welding shall be (he primary method

used to confirm that the procedures, materials, and
workmanship incorporated in construction arc those that
have been speci fied and approved for the project. As a
minimum, tasks shal l be as follows:
B-2,S,2 Nondestructive Testing (NOT) of Welds
Nondcstnlctive testing of welds sha ll be performed by
qualit y assurance personnel.
I.
Procedures
Ultrasonic tcsting shall be performed by QA according {o

th e procedurcs prescribed in Section B-6, Section 13~6.1.
Magnetic particle tes ting shall be performed by QA
according to the procedures prescribed in
Section
B~6,
Section B-6.2.
2.
Required NDT
a.
k-A rea NDT
When welding of' doubler plates, continuity pllnes. or

stiffeners has been performed in thc k-arca, the web shall be
te.sted for cracks lIsing magneti c particle testin g (My). The
MT inspection fuea shall include the k-arca bnsc Tlletal
\." ithin 75 Illill of the weld.
b.
c.
Base Metal NDT for Lamellar Tearing and Laminations
After joilH cOlllplction, base mC1i'1i thicker than J1-\ 111m

loaded in tension in the through Ihickncss direction in lee
and COffler joints. where the conn ected !Hateri,,! is great er
than 19 mill ;lild con tains CJP groove welds. shill I be
lIltrasonically tcsted for discontinuities behind and adjacent
to the fusion line of such welds. Any base met;:}1
dbwvIltinuities fOlllld within tJ4 or the steel surfac.:e shall be
accq>tt!d or rejected on the basis of criteria
AWS D 1.1
Table 6.2, where t is thc thi ckness of the P;:111 sul~icC1Cd to
the Ihrough~thickJlcSS strain .
or
d.
Beam Cope and Access Hole "DT
At welded splices an d connection!>, thermally cui surfaces

of beam copes and access holes shall be tested lIsing
m;lgnctic particle testing or penctrant tcst ing. when the
nangc thickness ex.ceeds 38 mm for rolled shapes, or when
the web thickn ess exceeds 38 mm for built-up shapes.
c.
Reduced Beam Section Repair NDT
Magnctic particl e test ing shall be performed all :IIlY weld

and adjacent area of the reduced bC<lln section (RI3S) plastic
hinge region lhat has been repaired by weldin g, or on t}lC
base metal of th e RBS plastic hinge region if a sharp notch
has been removed by grinding.
f.
Weld Tab Removal Siles
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on the end of

welds from whi ch the weld tab s have been removed, except
for continuity plale weld tabs.
g.
Reduction of Percentage of Ultrasonic Testing
The amount of ultrasonic testing is permitted to be reduced

if approved by the eJ1gitleer-of~rccord and the authority
having jurisdiction. The nond estructive testing rate [or an
individual welder or welding operator may be reduced to 25
percent, provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be 5
percent or less of the welds tested for the welder or welding
operator. A sampling of at least 40 completed welds for <I
job shall be made for sllch reduction evaluatioll. Reject rate
is the number of welds containing rejectable defects divided
by the number of welds completed. For evaluating the reject
rate of continuous welds over I III in Iength where the
effective throat thickness is 25 111111 or Icss, each 300 mill
increment or fraction Ihereof shal l be considered as one
weld. For evaluating the. rej ect rate on continuous welds
over I m in length where the effective throat thickncss is
greater than 25 mill, each 150 mill of kngtl1 Of fraction
thereof shall be considered one weld.
Cll' Grbove Weld NDT
Ultrasonic testing shall b.e performed on 100 percent or CJP

groove welds in materials 8 mm thick or greater. Ultrasonic
res ting in materials less than 8 mm thick is not required.
Magnetic panicle \esting shall be performed on 25 percent
of ali beam-to-column Cll' groove welds.
h.
Reduction of Percentage of Magnetic Pm1icic Testing
The amount of MT on ell' groove welds is permitted to be

reduced if approved by the engiJleer-of~record and the
authority having jurisdiction. The MT rate for an individual
welder or welding operator may be reduced to 10 percent,
provided the reject nte is delllonstntecl to he '5 percent or

less of the welds tested for thc welder or welding operator.
A sampling or at !east 20 completed welds for a job shall be
made for sueh reduction evaluation. Reject rale is the
!lumber
welds containing rejectable defects divided by
the number of welds completed. This reduction is nOI
permitted on welds in the k-area, at repair sites, weld tab
and backing removal sill'S and access holes.
or
r-,7
V"'is-u-a]-;--'j"n-sl'-ec-,-:u"o--n---;;T"'a'7
sk - -
WPS followed
- Selling on welding
--~~.~~~-~~~~~.
"
......_.... ~
.. '.I.'.r(ly.~.I .. ~p'~~.~J.
- Selected welding
.~--- .... .. -~.

"
-o-C----- ------QA'----:i _-"~4~;;~;~I\~;gg;;S {y;;c;iT(,;;;-
Before Welding
Task
Doc, _ Task DOc,
f--77-'~:--:'::;=~-c:--Material idelltifica!iol1
0
0
(Type/Grade)
__________ ~ _ _ __
Fit-up of Groove Welds
(including joint g~om~L
~ Joint rreparation
...~. DiIII cl-;<;i~)-;~~<;-(~ll j W1 mcn-t:-P/O**

root opening, roo! race,
bevel)
- Cleanliness (condition of
_.~!~~l sur!~~~~.L ______......._____ _
- Tacking (tack weld
..
"'.~.': ... _ _ _ _ _ I__ ~
- Backmg type and fJl (II
P/OH
0
applicable)
_~ --.-;c:-- _____
___ ~
Configuration and finish of
0
0
quality. and location),
Task I-,;;---c,..:<i
CC~----t-,;;c-.,-"i
CA"",-cTask
Doc, Task' Doc.
Visual inspection
During Welding
ratc,, ___7C'-:-_______ _
- Preheat applied
- Interpass temperature
maintained (rnin.lmax.)
- Proper position (F, V,H,
_.mlt____ ___ ._. ___.._____

- Intermix of filler metals
._~\voi~_~~._~~~~I_~~~.~IPp~~~~~.~_. __ ---;::------ ~~___ -;:::---- .____ ..
.__~~~_~.~~C~L~\.~~.~.~_~. .~::.~~~~E:~~_. ~. ......~Q
0
COl1trol and handling of
welding conslJ!nables
.. :..... Pac k <t.gi !l g ____.____...____ .. _______ _

- Exposure control
"j~~y;7:~)!1-;1;~~(;1~Z;~dili~;~---
- Wind speed within limits

- Precipitation and
te m per~~l..!..~~ __.__ .m_. _______ ~._" ___ _
.____.__._.______ _
access holcs_~ _ _ _ ------I----/-------i

Fitup of Fillet Welds
Welding techniques
- Dimensions 9alignmcnt,
()
- Intcrpas;- <~Ild final
o
gaps at root)
cleaning
- Cleanliness 9condition of
P/O**
o
--~+---J----j.---. =-Each pass within profile
slee.! surfaces)
Imitations
- Tacking (tack weld
o
o
- Each pass meets quality
quality and location)
requirements
.. _______ .. __
**Foll()wing pcrforln~i"iluoftl;Tsill~I;;"ctTo~l--(ask for len
----.--+---l~_____I
NO-~~eld i J1go~~;:-c;~~(j<c(i-welds to be made by a givcn welder, with the welder
o
o
tacks
demonstrating adequate understanding of requirements and
possession of skills and tools to verify these items, the
Perform designati~n of this task shall be reduce to Observe,
and the welder shall perfonn this task, the task shall be
returned to Perform until such time as the Inspector has
reestablished adequate assurance that the welder will
perfonn the inspection t~sks listed.
tll
~)-
1HCi
Yls~;H ...
CHAPTHi :) . Steel and Metals
InSpection
Tasl(
AfieiWCld.ltig
.. x A
.. QC
Task ])0",.. TililK \1)OC1
0
Welds cleaned
Welder idc;i'iTifc~;;tioll -_. __ ..-
legible
..
Vcrify size, length, and

0
location or welds
- - --_.\!F;:l!ly inspect welds t o ~!ilnc~ criteria
... __..- Crack porhibitiol1
Weld/base-metal fusion
- Crater cross*section
P
--
- - _.__._.
-
._-_
.~.-
---~
fillets
--Backing bar:<;-~C~10ved alld
weld tabs removed and
. finished (if required)
Rcoair activities
~-.-
--_.-.
~--
--
Inspeclion
Solting
----_.
p
j)
3.
QA
Bolting
Task
Doc. Task
- Proper bolts selected for
0
0
the joint detail
Proper bolting procedure
0
0
selected for joint detail
Connecting clements arc
fabricated properly,
including the appropriate
faying surface condition
0
o
and hole preparation, if
specified, meets applicable
requirements
r-===~-----+--I---~------p
()
Doc.
.. _~)~er ras~~!2.~~",~!.l~I?Q~CI1[~~ ~~ ___.____ .. __
---
--I
QA
QC
Task
Doc.
Task
bos]
j)
_ __
... ... ...-
Documentation
All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop

fabrication, the NOT report shall identify the tested weld by
piece mark and location 111 the piece. For field work, til:,'
NOT feparl shall identify the tested weld by location in the
structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
B-2.S.3 Inspection of Bolling

Observation of bolting operations shall be the prima;,y
method used to confirm that the procedures, m<iteriais, and
workmanship incorporated in construction are those th;ii
have becn specificd and approved for thc project. As ,;
minimum, the tasks shall be as follows:
---D
...._ .. ----- ----1-------1

0
After
QC
Inspection Task Prior to
Task
Document accepted and

rejected connections
-~--~--~~~~----'----~~----.---~~--,
Pre-installation verification
testing conducted for
fastener assemblies and
method used
I-"'="'-"=-~----- . Proper storage provided for
bolts, nuts, washers, and
QA
Task:. "~
~- - .---.
- Weld profiles
Weld size
- Undercut
_._---- Porosity
Placement-or reinforcement
..QC.
.. ,Task Poe!
"'---~---
--
...
Task . P~(itlll ,
Fastener assemblies placed

in all holes and washers (if
()
0
required) arc propcrly
positioned
------_._.__. ..
...
....Joint brought \0 the snug
0
0
tight condition prior to thw
1
pretem;ioninp- operation
..
----_.
__.
._--Fastener components not
0
0
returncs by the wrench
prevented from rotating
------- - - - - ----Bolts arc pretensioned
progress systematically
0
0
from most rigid point
toward free edges
--_
-----
!qspeG~on
lOIWi1!g ..
B-2.S.4 Other Inspections

Where applicable,
perfonl1cd:
the
following
inspection
be
shall
QCQA
Other Inspection Task
/--;;-;-_-,--_ _~---+-T'c!a~s"-k+",D:<:>o,:cc'__1_'as~k
.I?;
Reduce beam section
(RI3S) requirements, if
_"JljJlicabJc
.. .-- - ..
,
",.,".~
\)
j)
- contour and finish

- dimensional tolerances
Protccted zone-no holcs--'--'-- .-.-... ~.---- .~----.. ------~+'"---------i
and unapproved
attachments made by
contractor
...---....
----- .----
.~
~.---.--~-.---.
j)
l'
---- ------_.- ---- ,,--
---- ----
P
-~--.--
D
l _
I
I
B3. SEISMIC DESIGN

COEFF'lC~N'l'~*~R
'.
APfJlQ~TE':~EiUQJ).;
PARAMETERS ". .' . . .... . .

fl3 .l Scope
This apPl'.ndix contains des ign cocmcicnts, sys tem
lim itat ions and design panl mcl Crs for seismic load resisting
systems (SL.RS) that ,Ire incllJdcd ill th ese Provisions but
1101
yet defi ned in thi s code for bllCk!illg ~ rcstraincd braced
frames (BRBF) and special pl ate shea r walls (S PSW). The
values prcsclHcd in Tables B-3-1 and 13-3-2 in this appendi x

shall only be used where neither Ihe NSCP code nor
SEIIASCE 7 contain such va lues.
User Nciie:The design. co'dficicnts' :and . parameters

prcse\l~1f:$\~' aOPf~<!i~ ,,~~~ ,fron'.tl,l2l1Q~ NE.ffRP
Rec8,mmei)P.e4 .PIPX~s[~qsJarSeistl.iic RejiulatiOns for New
Buildings and < Oilier Stiii,ctures, ]l1is appcnaix will be
deJeted ,fro!U Ulcs~Jm1visigl1,~ ,9~cc . S..EIi'.1S91}
7 an~ : Ulis
codes .acld the. BRBl'illldSPSW tatli~irlis,t of acCcpmhlc

strnctlihil$ys!\irnfJtis ;~i*i~. tii~i.}lI.li il~te6 wlll
be in,!lI.deil ill an .pperl$$"'~ ' SE,i!.;:)\S~ .' ?;,'W!\l~~ ' is
cxpectl:lhob<i'pi1bli~h~jn i)iidt6 i~te 'Z<X)5\": ':'::" Yo', :, ,:'
B-3,2 Symbols
The fOl/owing symbols arc lIsed in thi s appendix.
!l"
R
Deflecti on amplifi cation fac tor

Paramelers
used
for
determining
approximate fundament al period
Syslem ovcrstrcngth factor
the
R es ponse mod ificatio n coeffi cient
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6" Edition Volume 1
:',,,
!;- i 88
CHAP TER 5 - Steel and Metals
Basic Seismi c
Load Resisting
Sys tem
Response
Modification
Coefficient
R
System
Ovcrslrcngth
Factor
no
Deflecti on
Amplification
Factor
Cd
B&C
(Zone 2)
Bucking- Restrained
Braced Frames, nOIl -
Design Coefficients and Factors for basic Seismic Load Resi sting Systems From (AISC)
Associ ation of Stru ctural En 9ine8fS of t!18 Philippines
(Zone 4)
(Zone 4)
B4. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS

OF BEAMTOCOLUMN AND LINK
TOCOLUMN CONNECTIONS
B-4.1 Scope
This appendix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic
tests of bcam-to-column moment connections in special and
intermediate
moment
frames
and
link-la-column
connections in eccentrically braced frames, when required
in these Provisions. The purpose of the testing described in

this appendix is to provide evidence that a beam-la-column
connection or a link-to-column connection satisfies the
requirements for strength and interstory drift angle or link
rotation angle in these Provisions. Alternative testing
requirements arc permitted when approved by the cnginccrof-record and the authority having jurisdiction.
This appendix provides minimum recommendations for
simplified test conditions.
mcmbers and connection clements. For bea!lHO~colul11n

moment connections in special and intermediate moment
frames, inelastic rotation is computed based upon the
assumption that inelastic action is concentrated at a single
point located at the intersection of the centerline of the
beam with the centerline of the column. For link~to-colul11n
connections in eccentrically braced frames, inelastic
rotation shall be computed based upon the assumption that
inelastic action is concentrated at a single point located at
the intersection of the centerline of the link with the face of
the column.
Prototype. The connections, member sizes, steel properties,
and other design, detailing, and construction fcatures to be
used in the actual building frame.
Test specimen. A portion of a frame used for laboratory
testing, intended to model the prototype.
Test setup. The supporting fixtures, loading equipment, and
lateral bracing used to support and load the test specimen.
Test subassemblage. The combination of the test specimen
and pertinent portions of the test setup.
Values of Approximate Period Parameters from (AISC)
Totallink rotation angle. The relative displacement of one

end of the link with respect to the other end (measured
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the un deformed link),
divided by the link length. The total link rotation angle shall
include both clastic and inelastic components of
deformation of tbe link and the members attached to the link
ends.
B-4.2 Symbols
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first
used.
B-4.4 Test Subassemblage Requirements
()
Interstory drift angle (Section 13-4.6)
The test subassemblage shall replicate as closely as is

practical the conditions that will occur in the prototype
during earthquake loading. The test subassemblage shall
include the following features:
y total
Total link rotation angle (Section B-4.6)
1.
The test specimen shall consist of at least a single

column with beams or links attached to one or bon1
sides of the column.
2.
Poims of inflection in the test assemblage shall

coincide approximately with the anticipated points of
inflection in the Prototype under earthquake loading.
3.
Lateral bracing of the test subassemblage is pennilted

ncar load application or reaction points as needed to
provide lateral stability of the test subassembJage.
Additional latcral bracing oj' (he test subasscmblage is
not pcrmitted. unless il replicatC's lateral bracing 10 be
used in thc prototype.
B-4.3 Def1nitions
Complete loading cycle. A cycle of rotation taken from
zero force to zero force, including one positive and one
negative peak.
Intcrstory drift angle.
story height, radians.
Interstory displacement divided by
Inelastic rotation. The pcrmancnt or plastic portion or the

rotation angle between a beam and the column or between a
link and the column of [he lest specimen. measured in
radians. The inclastic rotation shall be computed based on
an analysis of test specimcn deformations. Sources of
inelastic rotation include yielding of members. yielding or
connection elements and connectors, and slip between
B-4.S Essential Test Variables

The. test specimen shall replicate as closely as is practical
the pertinent design. detailing. construction features. and
material properties of the prototype, The fol!owing variables

shall be replicated in the test specimen.
I.
The yield stress shall be determined by materi~d tests OJ]

the actual materials used for the lest specimen, as
specified in Section B-4.8. The use of yield stress
values that are reported on certified mill test reports arc
not permitted to be llsed for purposes of this Section.
2.
The yield stress of the beam shall not be more than J.')
percent below RyF)" for the grade of steel to be used for
the corresponding clements of the prototype. Columns
and connection elements with a tested yield stress shall
not be more than 15 percent above or below R.J~~\" for
the grade of steel to be used for the corresponding
clements of the prototype. R.J'y shall be determined in
accordance with Section 519.2.
B-4.S.1 Sources of Inelastic Rotation

Inelastic rotation shall be developed in the test specimen by
inelastic action in the same members and connection
clements as anticipated in the prototype (in other words, in
the beam or link, in the column panel zone, in the column
outside of the panel zone, or in connection clements) within
the limits described below. The percentage of the total
inelastic rotation in the test specimen that is developed in
each member or connection clement shall be within 25
percent of the anticipated percentage of the total inelastic
rotation in the prototype that is developed in the
corresponding member or connection element.
Jl-4.5.6 Welds
3-4.5.2 Size of Members
Welds on the test specimen shall satisfy the following

requirements:
The size of the beam or link used in the test specimen shall
be within the following limits:
I.
Welding shall be performed in strict conformance with

Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) as required in
AWS D 1.1. The WPS essential variables shall meet the
requirements in AWS D1.l and shall be within the
parameters established by the filler-metal manufacturer.
The tensile strength of the welds llsed in the tested
assembly and the Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
used in the tested assembly shall be determined by
material tests as specified in Section B-4.8.3. The use
of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that arc
reported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of
conformance is not permitted to be used for purposes of
this section, unless the report includes results specific
to Section B-7 requirements.
2.
The specified minimum tensile strength of the filler

metal llsed for the test specimen shall be the same as
that to be used for the corresponding prototype \velds.
The tested tensile strength of the test specimen weld
shall not be more than 125 MPa above the tensile
strength classification of the filler metal specification
specified for the prototype.
3.
The specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler

metal used for the test specimen shall not exceed the
specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler metal
to be used for the corresponding prototype weJds. The
tested CVN toughness of the test specimen weld shall
not be more than 50 percent, nor 34 kJ, whichever is
greater, above the minimum CVN toughness that will
be specified for the prototype.
4.
The welding positions llsed to make the welds on the

test specimen shall be the same as those to be used for
the prototype welds.
5.
Details of weld backing, weld tabs, access holes, and

similar items llsed for the test specimen welds shall be
the same as those to be used for the corresponding
prototype welds. Weld backing and weld tabs shall not
1.
The depth of the test beam or link shall be no less than

90 percent of the depth of the prototype beam or link.
2.
The weight per foot of the test beam or link shall be no

less than 75 percent of the weight per foot of the
prototype beam or link,
The size of the column llsed in the test specimen shall

properly represent the inelastic action in the column, as per
the requirements in Section B-4,5.1. In addition, the depth
of the test column shall be no less than 90 percent of the
depth of the prototype column.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this Section
shall be permitted subject to qualified peer review and
approval by the authority having jurisdiction.
Jl-4.5.3 Connection Details

The connection details used in the test specimen shall
represent the prototype connection details as closely as
possible. The connection clements used in the test specimen
shall be a full-scale representation of the connection
elemellls used in the prototype, for the member sizes being
tested.
3-4.5.4 Continuity Plates

The size and connection details of continuity plates used in
the test specimen shall be proportioned to match the size
and connection details of continuity plates used in the
prototype connection as closely as possible.
3-4.5.5 Material Strength

The following additional requirements shall be satisfied for
each member or connection element of the test specimen
that supplies inelastic rotation by yielding:
/I,ssociation of Structural Engineers of the Pililippines
CHAPTEH 5
be removed from the tes t specimen welds unless the

correspondi ng wel d back-ing and weld tabs arc
remo ved from the prototype welds,
e= 0.00375 rad
6 cycles at
2.
6 cycles at 0 = 0.005 md
3.
6 cydes at 0 =0.0075 rad
4.
4 cycles at 0 = 0.01 rad
B-4.S.7 Bolts
5.
2 cycles at 0 = 0.Ol 5 rad
T he boiled po rt ions of the test speci men shall rep licate the
bolted porlions of the prototype conncction as closely as
possible. Add itionally, bolted portions of the lest spec imen
shal l satisfy the fo ll owing req ui rement s:
6.
2 cycles at 0 = 0.02 rae!
7.
8.
Methods of inspection and nondestructive testi ng and

standards of accept ance used fo r test spec imen welds
sha ll be the same as those to be used for the prototype
we lds.
1.
T he boll grade (for exa mple, ASTM A325, A325M,

AST M A490, A490M. AS TM F1852) used in the test
specimen shall be the same as that to be used for the
prototype, except that ASTM A325 bolts may be
substituted for ASTM F 1852 ho lts, and vice vcrsa.
2.
T he type and orien tation o f boll holes (standard ,

overs ize, shOll slot, long s lot, or other) used in the test
specimen shall be the same as th ose to be lI sed for the
correspondi ng bolt holes in the prototype.
3.
W hcn inelastic rotation is to be developed either by

yielding or by sli p within a bolted portion of the
conncction, the met hod used to make the bolt hole s
(d rill ing, sub-punching and reaming, or other) in the
test spec ime n shall be the sallle as that to be lIsed in fh e
correspondi ng bolt holes i n the prototype.
Bolts in the tcst spec imen sh<\l1 have the same
4.
installation (pretensiolled or other) and faying surface

preparati on (no specified slip res istance, C lass A or 13
slip resi stance, or other) as that to be Ll sed for the
corresponding bolt s in the prototype.
Continue loading at increments of 0 = 0.01 radin n, with two

cycles o f loading at each stcp.
B-4.6.3 Loading Sequence
I.
6 cyc les at fw!al = 0.00375 rad
2.
6 cycles at f tola l = 0.005 rad
3.
6 cycles at Y,o",' = 0.0075 rad
4.
6 cycles a t 110131= 0.01 rad
5.
4 cycles at Yloull = 0.0 15 rl.ld
6.
4 cycles at flOlal = 0.02 rad
7.
2 cycles at flot,ll = 0.03 m d

J cycle at Ylotal
= 0.04 rad
9.
J cycle at
= 0.05 fad
11 -4 .6.1 General Req uirements
10. J cycle at f lOlal = 0.07 rad
The test specimen shal l be subjected to cyclic loads

according to the require ments prescri bed in Secti on Section
B-4.2 for beam-to-column moment connections in special
an d interm ediate moment frames, and according to th e
requi rcmcI1ls prescribed in Section Section BA.3 fo r linkto~col u l1ln con nections in eccelll rically braced frames.
II. I cycle al fto lnl = 0.09 rad
Bealll-to-Colullln
Link-to-Column
Qun li fy ing cyclic tests of link -to-co lumll mo ment

connecti o ns in eccentrically braced frames shall be
conducted by controll ing the total li nk rotation <.I ngle, l' total ,
imposed on th e test specimcil, as follows:
8.
B-4.6.2 Loading Sequ ence for

Moment Connecti ons
for
C Ollnections
11-4.6 Loading History
Loadi ng sequences other th an those spec ifi ed in Sect ions

Section B-4.2 and Section B-4.3 may be used when they are
dc monstrated to be of equivalent or greater sever ity.
5-191
sha ll be conducted by controlli ng the interstory drift angle,

0, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below:
I.
6.
Steel and Metal
YIOI.:II
Contin ue loading at increments of YlOtal = 0.02 rad ian, with

one cyc le of loadin g at each step.
B 4,7 Instrumenta tio n
M
Suffi cient inst ru mentation shall be prov ided on the test

speci men to perm it measurement or calculat ion of the
quantities listed in Seclion 8-4.9.
B-4.8 Materials Testing Requirements

B 4.8. 1 Tension Testin g Requirements for S tru ctural
Steel
M
Quali fying cycl ic tests of bea l11 ~ t o - col lJ mn 1110 men t

connecfions in special and int ermediate moment frames
Tens ion testi ng siUll! be conducted on samples of sleel ta ken

from the materia l adj at.:cnl to each test specime n. Tensio n ~
!\]ationa! Structurai Code of the Philippines
6!il
Edition Volume 1
S 192
CHAPTEn: ~i Sleet and Metals
tes ( res ults from cCI1i llcd mill tes t reports shall he reponed
hut arc not permitted to he used ill place of speci mcn testing.
for the purposes o f this Section. Tension-test results shall be
based upon test ing that is conducted in acco rdillH':c with
2.
cle ments, wel di ng details including fi ller mewl, the size

and locati on of holl hol es, the size and grade of boils,
and all other pertinent de tails of the connection.
Section B4.8.2.
Tension testing shaH be conducted and reported for th e
following portions of the test specimen:
I.
Flange(s)' and web(s) of bc;.:~, s and columns at standard
~.
A listing of all othcr esse nti al va riables for thc lest

specimen, as listed in Section 13 -4.
4.
A listing or plot showi ng the applied load

displacement hi s1.?ry of the test specimen.
5.
A listing of all dcmand critica l welds.
6.
Dcfinition of the regio n of the connection that

co mprises thc protected zones.
7.
A 1'101 of the applicd load versus the di splacement of
locations
2.
Any e lcment of thc connection that supplies inclastic
rota ti on by yielding
11-4.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing for Structural
Steel
Tensio n testing s hall be conducted in accordance with
ASTM A6IA6M, ASTM A370. and ASTM E8, wit h the
fo llowing cxccpt ion s;
I.
2.
The yield Sl ress, Fl" that is repol1cd from th e tcst shall

be based upon thc yield strength definit ion in ASTM
A370, using the offset mcthod at 0.002 strain,
The use of
H~ n s il e s1reng1 h
8.
A plot of beam moment versus interstory drift angle for

beam-to-column moment connccti ons; or a plot of link
shcar force versus link rotation angle for link-to
column connections. For bcall1-(Qcolumn connections,
the beam momenl and the interstory drift angle shall be
computed with respect to the centerlin e of the column.
9.
The interstory drift ang le and {he total inelastic rotation

de veloped by the test specimen. The components of th e
test specimen contributing to Ihc totai inelastic rotation
due to yielding or sli p shall be identified. The portion
of the total inelastic rotation contributed by each
co mponcnt of the test specimen shall be repolled. The
method used to compute inelastic rotati ons shall be
clearl y shown.
and r:VN IOllghn(',ss v:l liles Ihat
are reported on the manu fac turer's typical certifi cate of

conform<l!lce is not permi tted to be used for purposes of th is
sect ion, unlcss thaI rep0l1 includes result s specific to
Section B~ 7 rcquirements.
A single lest plate may be used if the WPS for the tcst
specimen wclds is within plus/minus 0.8 kJ/mlll of the WPS
for the test plate.
Tensile specimens and CVN specimens shall be prepared in
accordance with ANSIIAWS B4.0 Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds.
or
the tcst spcci mcn. TIle di splacement re ported in (his

plot sha ll bc measured III or near Ihe poinl of load
application . 1lle locations on the tcst spccimen where.
the loads and di splace men ts werc mcasured shall be
clearly indicated.
The loading ratc for the tension tcst shall replicate, as

closely as practical, the loading rate to be uscd fo r th c
tcs t speci men.
1l-4.8.3 Weld Metal Testing Requirem ents

The tensile strength of the welds used ill the tcsted assembl y
and the CV N toughness used in the tested assembl y shall be
determined by l1latcri~1 tcsts as specifi ed in Section B-7.
A draw ing of Ihe connccti on dClail s howin g lilcmher

sizes, grades of steel, th e si"l.-cs o f all connec tion
10. A chronological listing of significall t test observations,

including observations of yielding, slip, in stability, and
fracture of any porti on of the tes t specimen as
applicable.
II. The controlling failure mode for the test specimen. If
the test is terminated prior to failure, thc reason for
terminating the test shall be clearly indicated.
12. The results of the materi al tests specified in Scction B4.8.
B4.9 Test Reporting Requirements

For ei.lch lest spec imen, a written test report meeti ng Ihe
requirc mcnts of the authoJit y havi ng jurisdicti on and the
requirements of th is Scction shall be prepared. Thc repoll
shall thoroughly document al l key features and resul ts of tile
tes t. The report shall include the following in formati on:
I.
1].
T he Welding Procedure Spccilic"Hi olls (W PS) and

welding inspection repolls.
Additional drawings . data, and disclission of the test

specim en or tes t resul ts are permitted to be included in the
repo rt.
A drawing or clcar description of thc test

subasscmblagc, including key dim ensions, boundary
conditi ons at loading and reaction points, and location
of-lateral braces.
CHAP1Tfi 5
B~4.10
Steei8nd M(:)!.;]I
~)-19J
Accephtncc Criteria
The test specimen must satisfy the strength and interstory

(li"ift angle or link rotation angle requirements of these
Provisions for the special momcnt frame, intenncdj,ile
momcnt frame, or eccentrically braced frame connection, as
applicable. The test specimen must sustain the required
interstory drift angle or link rotation angle for at least one
complete loading cycle.
B-S.l Scope
This appcndix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic
tests of individual buckling-restrained braces and bucklingrestrained brace subassemblages, when required in these
provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is
to provide evidence that a buckling-restrained brace
satisfies the requirements for strength and inelastic
deformation by these provisions; it also pcrmits the
determination of maximum brace forces for design of
adjoining elements. The purpose of testing of the brace
subasscmblage is to provide evidence that the brace-design
can satisfactorily accommodate the deformation and
rotational demands associated with the design. Further, the
subasscmbJagc test is intended to demonstrate that the
hysteretic behavior of the brace in the subassembJagc is
consistcnt with that of the individual brace elements testcd
uniaxially.
Alternative testing requirements arc permitted when
approved by the engineer-of-record and the authority having
jurisdiction.
This appendix provides onJy minimum recommendations
for simplified test conditions.
B-S.2 Symbols
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first
used.
,db
Deformation quantity used to cOl1trol loading of
the test specimen (total brace end rotation for the
subassemblage test spccimcn; total brace axial
deformation for the brace test specimen) (Section
-5.6).
dbm
Value of deformation quantity, 6b, corresponding
to the design story drift (Section -5.6).
,db)'
Value of deformation quantity, db, at

significant yield of test specimen (Section
-5.6).
first
5.
The calculatcd margins of safety for the prototype

conncction design, steel core projection stability,
overall buckling and other relevant subasscmb!agc test
si)cciJ}1en brace construction details, excluding the
gusset plate, for the prototype, shall equal or exceed
those of the subasscmblage test specimen construction.
6.
Latera! bracing of the subassemblage test specimen

shall replicate the lateral bracing in the prototype.
7.
The brace {Cst specimen and the prototype shan be

manufactured in accordance with the same quality
control and assurance processes and procedures.
B-S.3 Definitions
BRACE TEST SPECIMEN. A single buckling-restrained
brace clemen! llsed for laboratory testing intended to model
the brace jn the Prototype.
DESIGN METHODOLOGY. A set or step-by-step

procedures, based on calculation or experiment, used to
determine siles, lengths, and details in the design of

buckling-restrained braces and their connections.
INELASTIC DEFORMATION. The permanent nr plastic

portion of the axial displ<.lccmcnt in a buckling-restrained
brace.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated ill this section

shall be permitted subject to qualified peer review and
approval by thc authority having jurisdiction.
PROTOTYPE. The brace. connections. members, steel

propcl1ics, and other design, detailing, and construction
features to be used inlhe actual building frame.
SUBASSEMBLAGE
TEST
SPECIMEN.
The
combination of the brace, the connections and [esling
apparatus that replicate as dosely as practical the axial and
flexural deformations of the brace in the prototype.
TEST SPECIMEN. Brace test specimen or subassembJage
test specimen.
B~5.4
Brace Test Specimen

The bracc test specimen shall replicate as closely as is
practical the peninelH design, detailing, construction
features, and material properties of the prototype.
B~S.5
B-S.S.l Design of Brace Test Specimen

The sallle documented design methodology shall be used for
the brace (cst specimen and the prototype. The dcsirr:
calculations shall demonstrate, at a minimum, the followin;:
req ui rcments:
Subassemblage Test Specimen

The subassembJage test specimen shaH satisfy the following
requirements:
I.
The calculated margin of safety for stability again:::

overall buckling for the prototype shall equal or exceed
that of the brace test specimen.
The mechanism for accommodating inelastic rotation in

the subassemblagc test specimen brace shall be the
same as that of the prototype. The rotational
2.
The calculated margins of safety for the brace test

specimen and the prototype shall account for
differences in material propeI1ies, including yield ;m' i
ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness.
1.
deformation demands on the subassembJage test

specimen brace shaH be equal to or greater than those
of the prototype.
2.
3.
4.
The axial yield strength of the steel core, Pl'sn of the

brace in the subassemblage test specimen sh'all not be
less than that of the prototype where both strengths are
based on the core area, Asp multiplied by the yield
strength as determined from a coupon test.
The cross~sectional shape and orient<ltion of the steel
core projection of the sllbasscmblage test specimen
brace shall be the same as that of the brace in the
prototype.
The same documented design methodology shall be
used for design of the subassemblage as used for the
prototype, to allow comparison of the rotational
deformation demands on the subassemblage brace to
the prototype. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered
parts of this system.
B~S.S.2
Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen
The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be

manufactured in accordance with the same quality contn:)
and assurance processes and procedures.
B~S.S.3 Similarity of Brace Test Specimen and
Prototype
The brace test

requircmcnts:
specimen
shall
meet
thc
follo\\<11.:'
J.
The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel

core shall be the sanie as thaI orthe prototype.
2.
The axial yield strength of the steel core, 1\,(,> o(

braee test specimen shal! not vary by !llor~ {h~"
percent from that of the prototype where both strenglils
arc based on the core area, A.ln multiplied by tbe yield
strength as determined from a coupon test.
The material 1'01', and mcthod of. separation between

the stec/ core ill1d the. buckling restrainin g mechanism
in the brace test Spct..:lll1cn shall be thc sa me as tha t in
I he prototype.
Ex trapolation beyond th e limitations staled in th is section

be pcnnittcd subject to qualifi ed peer review and
Clpproval by the authori ty havingjurisdictioll .
.~ha ll
US.S.4 Conned ion Details

The connection detail s lIsed in the bmcc Icst specimcn sha ll
represent the prototype connection details ns closciy as
pmcl iea l.
be applied and maintained as the protocol is folloWL!d for

axial deformation.
B-S.(. 3 Loading SC(llICIl('('

Loads shall be applied to the test speci men 10 produ(;c the
following deformations, where the deformation is Ih l~ steel
core. axial deformation for the {cst specimen ilnd the
rOlational deformation dema nd for the subassclllblagc test
specimcn brace:
I.
2.
2 cydes of loading at the ucformation correspondi ng to

lib = IIby
2 cycles or IOilding
= 0.50<111111
CIt
the deformation corres ponding 10
<111
US.5.5 Materials
I.
Steel core: The following requireme nts shall be

sat isfied for the stee! core of the brace test specimen:
n,
The specified minimum yield st ress of the brace lest

specimcn steel (;orc shall be the senne as th aI or the
prototype.
b.
The measured yield stress of the material of thc steel

core in the brace lest spec imen shall be at least 90
percent of that of the prototype as det ermined from
coupon tests.
c.
The specified minimulII ultimate stress and strain or the

brace test specimen stee) core sha ll not exceed those of
Ihe protolype.
2.
Buckling-res training mechanism

Materials used in the buckling-restraining mechanism
of the brace test spec imen shall be th e same as those
used in the prototype.
115.5.6 Connections
The welded, bolted, and pinned joints on the tcst speci men
shall replicate {hose 011 the prolOlype as c10sc as practi cal.
115.6 Loading History
B-S.6.1 General Require ments

The test specimen shall be subjected to cyc lic loads
accord ing to the req uire ments presc ri bcd in Secti ons D5.6.2 and 8-5.6.3. Addit ional increments or loading beyond
th ose desc ribed in Section 13-56.3 arc pennillcd. Each cycle
shall include a full tensi on and full compression excursion
10 th e prescribed deformation.
IlS.6.2 Test Control
3.
2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to

lib = 11111111
4.
2 cycles of loading
.db = 1.5.dbm
5.
2 cycles of loadi ng at the dcrOrinaliol1 correspondi ng to

.db = 2.0.dbm
6.
Additional complete cycles of loading Ut the

deformation cOITespondillg 10 db::::: 1.5/.Jbm as required
for th e brace test speci men 10 achieve a cumu lative
inelastic axial deformation of (\( !east 200 times the
yield deformation (not required ror the subasscmblage
lest spec imen ).
at
th e deforma tion corresponding
to
The design story drin shall no t be ta ken as less th an 0.0 1

times the story height ror th e purposes or calculating /.fbI/I.
Other loading sequences are permitted to be used to qualify
the tcst specimen when th ey are demonstrated to be or equa l
or grea ter severity in terms of' maxi muIll and cUlllulat ive
inelastic deformation.
Il-S.7 Instrumentation
Sufficient instnlmentati on shall be provided on the test
specimen to permit measurement or calculation of the
quantities listed in Section I3~5.9.
D-S.S Materials Testing Requirements

85.8.1 Tension Testin g Requirements
Tens ion testing shall be cond ucted on samples of steel taken
rrom the same material as that lIsed to manuraclure the steel
core. Tension test results from cenified mill test repo rt s
shall be reported but arc not permitted to be used in place oj'
specimen testing for the purposes of this Section. TCIl Sio lltest resul ts shall be based upon testing that is conducted in
accordance with Section B~5,8.2.
The test shall be condu cted by cont rolling the level or axiCli
or rotati onal deformation, LIb, imposed on Ihe lest speci men.
As an alternate, th e maximum rotational deformati on may
th
Edition Volume 1
~) 19G
CHAP1TFl5 Stet;i ancJ Met als
Bs.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing

Tension iCsting shall be C(lIH.lucted ill accordance wilh
ASTM A6, ASTM A37(), and ASTM EH, with th e lollnwing
Add itional drawings, data, and discussio n or the test

speci men or test results arc pcrmillcd (0 be inclu(k~d in the
rcpol1.
exceptions:
I.
The yield st ress Ihm is reponed from the test shall he

based upon the yield stre ngth definition in ASTM
A370, lIsing th e olTset method of 0.002 strain.
2.
The Joadiq; !atc for the (cl)sion lest shall repliciUc, as

closcly as is practical, th e IO}lding ratc L1sed for the test
specimen.
3,
The coupon shall be machined so thai its longitudinal

axis is parallel to the longitlldinal axis of the stcel core.
H-S.9 Test Reporting Requirements

For each tcst specimen, a written test rcp0l1 mce.ting th e
requ irements of thi s Section shall be prepared. The rcpol1
shall thorough Iy docu melll all key fea lUres and resul ts of the
test. The repO[1 shall include the following information:
J.
2.
A drawing or clear descriptioll of' the lest speci mell ,

including key di mensions, bou nd ary cond itions al
loadin g and reactioll points, and location of lateral
bracing, if any.
A drawing of the connection delHi ls showing member
sizes, grades of steel. th e sizes of all con necti on
clements, weldin g details including tiller metal, the size
and location of bolt or pin holes. the size and grade of
co nnectors, and all other peninent details of the
connections.
3.
A listin g of all other essential varinbles as listed in

Section B-5.4 or 3-5,5, as appropriate.
4.
A listing or plot showing the applied load or

displacement hi slory.
5.
A plot of the appli ed load versus the deform ation, 6.b.

The method used to delennine the deformations shall
be clearly s hown . The locations on the lest specimen
where the loads and deformations were measured shall
Acccpt~lncc Criteria
Icast olle subassem blagc test til al sati sfies th e
requi re ments 0(" Section 85.4 shall be performed. At least
one brace lest that satisfies the requirements of Section B
4.5 shall be performcd. Within the requ ired protocol ran ge
all tcsts shall satisfy the following requirem ents:'
BS. I ()
At
I.
"
The plot showing the applied load
vs. displ llccmcllt
history shall exh ibi t stable. repe<ltable beha vior with
positive illcrementa! stiffness.
2.
There shall be no fracture. brace in ~tabil i ty or brace end

connection failure .
3.
For brace tests, each cycle to a deform ation greatcr than

!.1by the maximum tension and compression fortes shall
not be less than the n omi n ~1 stre ngth of the core.
4.
F~'o r brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than

/.Jby the ratio of the maxim um com press ion force to the
maximum tension force shall not exceed 1.3.

Other acceptance criteria may be adopted for the brace test
speci men or subasse mbl age test specimen subject to
qualified peer reyiew and appro val by the authority hav ing
juris~~ction.
......
be clearly identifi ed,
6.
A chronological listing of sign ificant test observations,

including observations of yielding, slip, instability,
transverse displacement along the tesl specimen and
fraclure of any portion of the test specimen and
co nnecti ons, as app licable.
7.
The results of th e material tests specified in Section U5,8,
8.
The manufacturing qu ality control and quality

ass uran ce plans used for the fabricati on of tbe lest
specimen. These shall be included with the welding
procedure specifications and welding inspection
reports,
..
'
B-6.2.3 Erection Dnlwings

Ercc!ioll drawings shall
B-6.1 Scope
foll owing in formation:
This ap pe ndi x provides addi tiona l d ew il s regardi ng we ld ing
I.
and welding inspection, and is included on an interim basis

pendin g adoption of such critcriu by A WS or ot her
2.
Structural Design Drawings .wd Speciflcatiuns,

Shop 'D rawings, and Erection Drawings
/16.2. 1 Structural
Specifications
Design
l)rawings
J.
Location s where backup bars arc req uired

removed
2.
Locations where supplemental fill ct weld s arc req uired

whe n backing is pCfm ill cd 10 remai n
3.
Loca tion s where fillet wel ds arc used
10
(0
be
reinfo rce
a minimum. the
Locati ons where backing bar.-; to be removed

Loca!ions where su pplemental lWets arc required when
3,
Loca ti ons where weld hlbs are to be rem oved
4.
Those joints or groups of joints in whi ch ;" sl.'.cdfic

asse mbl y order, welding sequ ence. welding tech niqu e
or other special precau tions arc re4ui rcd
and
Stru ctunll design dra wings <lnd specificat ions sh;:11 1 include,
tiS a minimum, the followi ng inrormati on:
<IS
backing is penn ilied to remain
acc redi ted org.\I\iZell ioll .

n~6.2
inclu de .
B6.3 Personnel
B-6.3.1 QC Welding Inspectors
QC weld ing inspection personnel shall be associate welding
ins peclOfs (A WI) or high cr; ~ as defined ill A WS 85.1
Standard fo r thc Qualificati on of Welding Inspectors, or
ot herwise qua lified undcr the provisions of A WS 01. 1
Secti on 6. i.4 and to tile satisfaction of the con tractor's QC
plan by the fabricator/erector.
groove welds or 10 improve con necti on geometry

4.
Loca tion s where wel d ta bs are required to be rem oved
5.
Spl ice locations where ta pered tran sitions are req uired
Usr Ni1tC':Butt spIi~ SUbjeCt tp [eliSion greatenh"" 33

peC~iit ohii'e' ~itPi!i;\\!d 'y;,iM " tte"ngih iinder ' anY ':ldad
ti~!~m!t:D1~o2i~~~~~;!tf~~s:t:;iffff.~ ii~'~tr;o~
cofur.d>pld cause\~ yi&\ding~heilllie tehSlle. siYess

excee;i~ :)3p.,tcentoYYiddI.6wet levels of ~tfess would be
accepta~Ic w'i"ih the ~StiiSs concentration from a non tapered
transition.
B-6.3.2 QA Welding Insp ecto rs

QA welding inspectors shall be welding inspcc tors (WI), or
senior we lding inspectors (SW I). as de li ned in A WS B5.1,
except AWls may be used under thc direct supervision of
WIs, 0 11 si te and available when weld inspection is being
co nducted.
B6.3.3 Nondestructive Testing Technicians

NDT techni cians shall bc qu alifi ed as follows:
I.
.
sha l ~
6.
The shape of we ld access holes, if a special

required
7.
Joints or gro ups of joints in which a specific assembly

order, welding sequence, wclding tcch ni que or othcr
special precautions are required
Society for Non destructive Testing, Inc. SNT TC-I A

Recommended Practice for the Training and Testin g of
Nondestru ctive Personnel, or of ANSIIASNT CP- 189,
Standard for the Qualification and Certification of
Nondestructi ve Testin g Personnel.
is
2.
Ul trason ic testin g for QA may be performed only by

UT tcch nicians certified as ASNT Level III through
examin ati on by the ASNT, or certified as Levcl II by
their employer for flaw detection. If tile engineer-ofrecord approves the use of fl aw siz.i ng techni ques, UT
technici ans shall also be qualifi ed and certified by their
em ployer for fla w sizing.
3,
Mag neti c p,utide tes ting (MT) and dye penetrant

testing (PT) for QA Illay be perforilled only by
technicians certifi ed as Level 11 by their e mployer, or
certified as AS NT Level III throu gh examination by th e
ASNT and certified by th eir employer.
B-6.2.2 Shop Drawings

S hop drawin gs shall incl ude, as a minimum , the foll ol,l,.'ing
informat ion:
I.
Access hole dim ensions , surface profi le and fini sh

requirements
2.
Locations where backing bars are to be removed
3.
Locm iolls where we ld tabs arc to be removed
4.
NOT to be pcrfotrned by the fabri cator. if any
In accordance with their employer's writte n practi ce

which shal l mcet or exceed the critcria of the American
u
National S tructural Code of the Philippines 6 , Edition Volume 1
!j 19B
CHAPH:11 S . Steel iln<J Mal,lls
B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures
III. The steel used for the qualification testing shall

same type and grade as will be llscd in production.
!)l'. of
the
U-6.4.1 Ultrasonic Testing

Ultrasonic test ing s hall he performed accordi ng 10 the
procedures prescrihed in A WS D 1.1 Sect ion 6, Pan F
following a written procedure containing thc clements
prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F

procedures shall be qualified using wcld mock-ups having
1.5 mlll-diamctcr side drilled holes similar to Annex K,
Figure K-3.
.'
B-6.4.2 Maglletic Pmtiele
Testing Magnetic particle testing shall be performed
{lceording to procedLlrcs prescribed in A WS D 1.1 , following
a wrillen procedure utili zing the Yoke Method thtH
conforms 10 ASTM E709.
B~6.5 Additiollal Welding Provisions
B-6.S.1 Inlermixed Filler Mettlls

When rCA W-S filler metlll s arc used in cOlllbin,lIion wil h
filler metals of other processes, including rCAW G, a test
spccimen shall bc prepared and mechanical testin g shall be
conducted to verify that the notch toughn ess of the
combined materials in thc intermixed region of the wcld
meets thc notch tough ness requ irc ments of Secti on 520.3.1
and, if req uired, the notch toughness rcquirements for
demand critical welds of Section 520.3.2.
The max im ulll heal input to be used in production sha ll be

used in the qunJilicatioll tesling. The qualificd Illaximum
intcrpliss temperature s hall he th e lowe:.;t intcrpass
temperature used for any pass during qualijicatioll testing.
Both weld melal and HAZ shall be tested. The weld meta!
':l1all meet all the mechanical properties required by Section
520.3.1, or th ose for demand cri ti cal welds or Scction
5203.2. as appli cable. The hem "ffeeled ?olle CVN
toughness shall mect a minimum requircment of 27 J at 2 I
C with specimcns taken at both J and 5 mm from the.
fusion line.
B6.5.5 Weld Tabs
Where practicable, weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge
of the joint a minimulll of olle inch or the thi ckness of the
par!, ~hichever is greater. ExtensiDns need not exceed SO
1l1111.
Where used, weld labs shall be rcmoved to wi th in 3 illJll of

the base metal surface, except at continuity plates where
rcmoval to with in 6 !llmof th e plate edge is acceptable, and
thc end of the weld finished. Removal shall be by air carbon
arc cutting (CAe-A), grinding, chipping, or thermal culti ng.
The process sha ll be con trolled to lIlinimiz.e errant gouging.
The edges where weld tabs have been removed shall be
finished to a surface roughness of 13 ~ln1 or betlcr. Grinding
to a flush condition is not required. The contour of the weld
end shall provide iI smoo th tran sition, free of notches and
sharp comers. At T-joints, a mini mum rad ius in the corner
necd not be provided. The weld e nd sha ll be free of gouges
and notches. Weld defects not greater than 2 nun deep shall
bc faired to a slope not greater than I :5. Other weld defects
shall be excavated and repaired by welding in nccord ancc
with an applicable WPS.
B-6.5.2 Filler Met,,1 Diffusible Hydrogen

Wclding electrodes and cicctrode nux combinati ons shall
meet the requirement s for H J6 (16 mL maximum diffusible
hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal ) as tested in
accordance with AWS A4. 3 Standard Methods for
Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of
Martensitic, Bainil!c, and Fcrrit;c Steel Weld Metal
Produced by Arc Welding. (ExCel'l ion: GMA W solid
electrodes.) Thc manufacturer's typical certificate of
conformance shall be considered adequatc proof that the
supplied electrodc or electrode-flux co mbination meets this
requirement. No testing of filler metal samples or of
production welds shall be required.
When using weld access holes to facilitate eJP groove

we lds of beam bottom flanges to column flanges or
continuity plates, the groove wcld shall be sequenced as
follows:
.
1J-6.S.3 Gas-Shielded Welding Processes
1.
GMA Wand FCA v.,'-G shall not be performed in winds

exceedi ng 5 kill/hI'. Windscreens OJ' ot her shelters may be
used to shield the we ld ing operation from excess ive winci.
2.
11-6.5.6 Bottom Flange Welding Sequence
Maximum inlerpass temperatures shall not exceed 290 oc.

measured at a distance not exceeding 75 rnm from the St31t
of the weld pass. The maximuill illlcrpass temperature Illay
be increased by qualification lc.<;ting thal includes we ld
metal and base metal CVN testin g using AWS D 1. J Annex
Each la yer shall be completed across the full width e,l'

(he llange before begi nni ng the next laycr.
:~.
B-6.S.4 Maximum Intcrpass Temperatures
As far as is practicable, starts and stops shall not be

placed directly under the beam w('.\).
For each la yer, the weld s{(trts and stops shall be nil :h!'
opposite side of the beam web, as compared to the
previous layer.
\!\i) iii;
B-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand

Critical \"('Ids Only
B-6.6.1 Welding
pl'()C(~sses
SMAW, C;MAW (except short circuit transfer), FCAW and

SA W may be used to fabricate and crect members governed
by this specification. Other processes may be used, !Jrovidcd
that onc or Jllore of tile fo!lowing criteria is me!:
I.
The process is part of the prequalified conllection

details, Wi listed in Section B-!,
2.
The process was used to perform a connection

qualification test in accordance with Section B-4, or
3.
The process is approved by the engineer-of-record.
B-6.6.2 Filler Metal Packaging

Electrodes shall be provided ill packaging Ihal limits the
ability of the electrode to absorb moisture. Electrode from
packaging that has been pUllctured or torn shall be dried in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, or
shall not be used for demand critical welds.
Modification or lubricatio/l of' the electrode after
manufaclUre is prohibited, except that drying is permitted as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B-6.6.3 Exposqre I....imitations on FCA \V Electrodes

After removal from protcctive packaging, the perJnissible
atmospheric exposure time of FCA W electrodes shall be
limited as follows:
I.
Exposure shall not exceed the electrode manufacturer's

guidelines.
2.
In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations, the

total accumulated exposure time for PCA '0/ electrodes
shall not exceed 72 hours. When the electrodes are not
in usc, they may be stored in protective packaging or a
cabinet. Storage time shall not be included in the
accumulated exposure time. Electrodes that have been
exposed to the atmosphere for periods exceeding the
above time limits shall be dried in accordance with the
electrode anufaclurer's recommendations, or shall not
be used for demand critical welds. The electrode
manufacturer's recommendations shall include time.
temperature, and number or drying cycles permitted.
B6.6.4 Tack Welds
Tack welds attaching backing bars and weld tabs shall be

placed where they will be :ncorporated into a final weld.
B7 WELD METALIWELDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
NOTCH TOUGHNESS
VERIFICATION TEST
This appendix provides a procedure for qualifying the weld
metal toughness and is included Oil an interim basis pending
adoption of s!Jch a procedure by the American Welding
Society (AWS) or other accredited organization.
B-?.! Scope
This appendix provides a standard method for qualillcation

testing of weld Illler metals required to have specified notch
toughness for service in joints designated as demand
critical.
Testing of weld metal to be used in production shall be
performed by filler metal manufacturer's production lot, as
defined 1Il AWS AS.O I, Filler Metal Procurement
Guidelines, as follows:
I.
Class C3 for SMA W electrodes,
2.
Ciass S2 for GMA W -S and SA W electrodes,
3.
Class T4 for FCAW and GMAW-C, or
4.
Class F2 for SA W fluxes.
Filler metals produced by manufacturers audited and

approved by one or more of the following agencies shall be
exempt from these production lot testing requirements,
provided a minimum of 3 production lots of material, as
defined above, are tested in accordance with the provisions
of this appendix:
J.
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS),
2.
L10yds Register of Shipping,
3.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (AS ME),
4.
ISO 9000,
5.
US Department of Defense, or
6.
A quality assurance program acceptable to the

engi Heer-of-record.
Under this exemption from production lot testing, the filler

metal manufacturer shall repeat the (esting prescribed in this
appendix at least every three years on a random production
lot.
th
(l7.2 Test Conditions

Test s shall be conduclCd <It the ran ge of heal inputs for
whi ch th e weld liller met al will be qualified under the

weldin g pfOt:cdurc specification (WPS). It is recommend ed
that test s be co ndu cted at the low heal input level and high
heat input level indicated in Table 0 7.2 /'
assembly has rcm.: hcd the inlcrpass temper.Hure prescribed

in Table 13 -7.2- 1. The inlcrpa ss temperature shall be
maimaincd for the rema inder of the weld. Should il be
!letcss.lr)' 10 in terrupt weld in g, the asse mbl y sh,11J be
allo wcd (0 cool in air. The assc mbl y sha ll then he heated 10
th e prescribed interp;!ss temperature befo re welding is
resumed.
No thermal treatm eIH or weldment or test :-.pecimcns is
permitted, except that rnach!lled tensile test SpC(;!lllenS may
be aged at 200 F (93C) io 220 F (104C) I,),. lip to' 4 8
hours, then cooled 10 room temperature before testin g.
Heat Input
Low heat
30 klIin.
input test
( 1.2kJ/mm)
High heal
input les t
80 kJlin.
1.2kJ/mm)
AhermHivcl y. Ihe filler melal manufacture r or contractor

may ci cc I to test 11 wider or narrower ran ge of heat input s
and interpass temperatures. The range of heat inputs and

interpass temperatures tested shall be clearly stated on the
test report s and user data sheets. Regardless of the method
of selecting tes t heat input, the WI'S, as used by th e
contractor, sIJall fall within the ran ge of heat inputs an d
interpass temperatures tested.
B7.3 Test Specimens

Two test plates, one for each heat input, shall be welded
following Table 13-7.2-1. Five CVN specimens and one
tensile sped men shall be prepareeJ per plate. Each plate
shall be steel, of any AISC-listed structural grade. Tlw test
plate shall be 19 mill thi ck with a 13 111m root opening and
45 included groove angle. The test plate ~lId specimens
shall be as shown in Figure 2A in A WS A5 .20, or as ill
Figure 5 in AWS A5.29. Except for the root pass, a
minimum of two passes per layer shall be used to fill th e
width.
B-7.4 Acceptance Criteria

The lowest and hi ghes t Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
values obtained from the five specimens from a single test
plate shall be di sregarded. Two of the remaining three
values shall equal , or exceed, the specified toughn ess of 54
J energy le vel at the tesl ing temperature. One or Ihe three
ma y be lower, but not lower than 41 J, and Ihe average of
the three shall not he less than the required 54 J energy
level. All tcst sam ples shall meet the Jl otch toughness
requirements ror th e electrodes as prov ided in Section
520.3.2.
For filler metals classi fi ed as E70, materi als shall provide a
minimum yield stress of 58 ksi , a minimu m tensile st rength
of 70 ksi , and a minim ulll elongation of 22 percellt. For
filler metals cl ass ified as E80, materi als shall pro vide a
minimum yiel d stress of 68 ks i, a minimum tensile strength
of 80 ksi, and a min imum elongation of 19 percent.
All test specimens shall be taken from near the centerline of

the weld at the mi d-thickness lo cati on, in ord er to minimi ze
dilution e ffects. CVN and ten sile specimens shall be
prepared in accordance with AWS B4 .0, SHindard Methods
fo r Mechanical Testing of Welds . The ICst assembl y sllall be
restrained durin g we ld ing, or preset at approximatel y 5 10
prevcnt warpn ge in excc;;:) of 5. A welded Icst assembl y
that has warped more than 5 shall be di scarded. Weld ed
(cst assembli es shall not be straightened.
The lesl asse mbly shall be l<ick we ldeu and heated to the
specified preheat tempcrnturc, measured by temperature
indicating cra yons or sUifacc (emperature thermometers one
inch from the ce nter of the groove al the location shown in
the figures ci ted above. Weldin g shaH co ntinue until the
j.l"ssociation of Structural Engineers of the Phili ppines
transfer load 10 an d bc tween clements of the seismic load

resistin g system.
COMPOSITE
SPECIAL
CONCENTHICALLY
BHACED FRAME (e-CBF). Composi le braced fraille
mee ting th e req uirements of Section 543.
BOUNDARY MEMB ER. Portion along wa ll and

diaphragm edge strengt hened with slj"uclural steel sections
and/or longitudinal sleel reinforcement and transverse
reinforcemenr.
COLLECTOR ELEM ENT. Member that serves to
Inll1sfer loads between floor diaphrngllls :lI1d the members
of the seismic load resistin g sys tem.
COMPOSITE BEAM. Structural steel bea m in contact
with and actin g compositely with reinforced co ncrct(~ via
COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (C-8MF).

Composite moment frame I1lcetjng tl.1c rcqu irements of
Section 540.
COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALL (CSPW). WHI! consisting of steel pl ate with reinforced
concrete encasement on one or both sides that provides OU Iof-plane stiffening to prCYCIH buckling of the steel plate and
mee ting the requirements of Secti on 548.
COUPLING BEAM. Structural steel or co mposite. bemll
connecti ng adjacent reinforced concre te wall clements so
that th ey (lct together to res ist lateral loads.
bond or shear connectors.
ENCASE!) COMPOSITE IIEAM . Composite beam

COMPOSITE BRA CE.
Reinforced-concrete-cncased
structural sleel section (ro lled or built-up) or concrete-filled
steel section used as a brace.
COMPOSITE COLUMN. Reinforced-concrete-encased
comp letely c ll c loscd in reinforced concrete.
ENCASE!) COMPOSITE COLUMN. Structural steel

column (rolled or built-up) completely encased in
reinforced concrete.
structural s teel sec tio n (ro ll ed o r huilt -up) or co ncretc-fi ll ed
steel secti on used as a columll.

COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
(CREDF). Composite braced frame meeting the
FACE IIEARING PLATES. Stiffeners a[[ached to

structural sleel beams that arc embedded in reinforced
concrete wa lls or colum ns. The plates are located at Ihe face
of the reinforced concrete 10 provide confinement and to
require men ts of Section 545.
transfer londs to the concrete th rough direct bearing.
COMPOS ITE INTERM EDIATE MOMENT FRAM E

Co mposite moment framc meeting the
requirements of Scction 54 I .
FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN. Roun,! or rectangu lar

structural steel section fill ed with concrete.
(C~IMF).
COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAME (COBF). Composite braced frame meeting the requirements of
Section 544 . .
COMPOSITE ORDINAHY MOMENT FRAME (COMF). Co mposite moment fra me meeting the requirements
of Section 545.
COMPOSITE
PAHTIALLY
HESTHAIN ED
MOMENT FnAME (CPRMF). Composite lllomen t
frame meeting {he requ ire ments of Seclion 539.
COMPOSITE SHEAH WALL. Reinforced conc rete wall
that has uncilcased or rcinforced ~co ncrete,cncased
structural steel sections as boundary members.
FULLY COMPOSITE IIEAM. Composite beam that has

a sufficient number of shear conllectors to develop the
nominal plastic flexural strength of the composite secti on,
INTERM EDIATE SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Sei smi c
sys tems designed assumin g moderate inelastic action occurs
in some mem bers under the des ign earthquake.
REINFORCEMENT.
LOAD-CARRYING
Reinforcemen t in composi te mcmbers designed and detailed
to resist th e required !oil(b.
ORDINARY REINFOR CED CONCRETE SHEAR

W ALL WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS (CORC'V). Co mposite shear walls meeting the requirem ents
of Section 546.
COMPOSITE SLAB. Concrete slab suppOIted on and

bonded to a formed steel deck Ihat acls as a diaphragm to
111
ORDINARY SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Seismic systems

de_signed assllming limited inelastic action occurs in some
members under the design earthquake.
PARTIALLY
COMPOSITE
BEAM.
Unencascd
composite beam with a nominal flexural strength controlled

by the strength of the shear stud COllllectors.
PARTIALLY
RESTRAINED
C0MPOSITE
CONNECTION. Plll1ially restrained (PR) C01l!Icctions as

defined ill the Specification that connect partially or fully
composite beams to stee! columns with flexural resistance
provided by a force couple achieved with steel
reinforcement in the slab and a steel scal angle or similar
connection at the bottom flange.
REINFORCImCONCRETE-ENCASED
SHAPES.
Structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete.
RESTRAINING BARS. Steel reinforcement in composite

members that is not designed 10 carry required loads, but is
provided to facilitate the erection of other steel
reinforcement and to provide anchorage for stirrups or tics.
Generally, such reinforcement is not spliced to be
continuous.
SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR

WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL
ELEMENTS (C-SRCW). Composite shear walls meeting
the requirements of Section 547.
SPECIAL SEISMIC SYSTEMS. Seismic systems
designed assuming significant inelastic action occurs In
some members under the design earthquake.
UNENCASED COMPOSITE BEAM. Composite beam
wherein the steel section is not completely enclosed in
reinforced concrete and relies on mechanical connectors for
composite action with a reinforced slab or slab on metal
deck.
SECTION 532
SCOPE
These Provisions shall govern the design, fabrication, and
erection of composit9 structural steel and reinforced
concrete members and connections in the seismic load
resisting systems (Sl.. .RS) in buildings and other structures,
where other structures are defined as those designed,
fabricated, and erected jn a manner similar to buildings,
with buJjding~like vertical and lateral load-resisting
systems. These provisions shall apply when the seismic
response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in the
NSCP code) is taken greater than 3.
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, i:
taken as 3 or less, the structure is not required to satis!
these provisions unless required by the NSCP codc.
The requirements of Pall 2B modify and supplement tk'
requirements of Part 2A and form these Provisions. Thev
shall be applied in conjuJ1c tion with the AISC Specificalio;l
for Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC 360, hereinaf"i"
referred to as the Specification. The applicable requiremCiii:i
of the Building Code Requirements for Structural Concl"u'
and Commentary, ACI 318, as modified in these Provisio'o'-;
shall be used for the design of reinforced concre!.
componcnts in composite SLRS.
For seismic load resisting systems incorporating reinforce':
concrete components designed according to ACI 318, (ii':
requirements for load and resistance factor design
specified in Section 502.3 of the Specification shall be used.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffnl'!

propeJlies of the component members of composite systCi:"
shall reflect their condition at the onset of signific,IL',
yielding of the structure.
Wherever these Provisions refer to the NSCP code and the""
is no local building code, the loads, load cornbina!i{;:;.
system limitations and general design requireI~ents shall i,:.;
those in SEllASCE 7.
Pail 2B includes a Glossary which is specifically applic: .
to this Pall. The Part 2A Glossary is also applicable to j 'i":
2B.
CHAPTEn ~)
The documcnl s refercnced in Ihese provisions shilll include

Ihose lislcd in P'1!1 2A Sceli oll 5 J 5 with the follo wing
mlditions:
American Socicl y or Civil Enginccn; .Standard for thc
Structural Design of Composite Slabs, ASCE 3-91
American Welding Sociely Structural Welding CodeReinforcing Steel, AWS D 1.4 -98
':
Steel nn(j Ivletal
[)203
The required strength and olher I>J"{)visions for seismi c

de sign catego ries (SDCs) and seismic usc groups and the
limitations on height and irregularity shall be as specificd in
the NSCP code.
The design story drift and story drift limits shall be
determined as requircd jn the NSCP code.
;~.~::fri~~i;~t~rf~p!~~l$~1l~~r~~\~~1tr~~f.jt~;!i{~~~~;~{~~~';;1:W;;~/:
: :.f'~~ :,:;::';ii~ ?~.: ~~~::~{:;' /f:~f~\~,~~W{~:!:.~~~,}~~~@~t~tNfH(::i{:; ~:~X:~~:~~{f0:~{;)~>'
Nolional Siruciural Code of the Philippines 6 'h Edition Volume 1
:)-204
CHAPT[H 5 . Sleel and Metals
535.1 Loads and Load Combinations

Where amplified seismic loads are required by these
Provisions, the horizontal portion of the e<lI1hq uake load E
(as defined in the NSCP code) shall be multiplied by the
ovcrstrcngth fac tor Do prescribed by the NSCP code.

For the seismic IO<ld resisting system (SLRS) incorporating
reinforced concrete components designed according to ACI
318, the requirements of Section 502.3 of the Specification
shall be used.
536.1 Structural Steel

Structural steel members and connections used in composite
seismic load resisting systems (SLRS) shall meet the
requirements of Specification Section 501.3. Structural steel
used in the composite SLRS dC'~cribcd in Sections 539,540,
543, 545, 547 and 548 shall also meet the requirements in
Pa.1 2A Sections 5 19 and 520.
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite
components in composite SLRS shall meet the requirements
of ACI 318. Sections 21.2.4 through 21.2.8.
Exception:
535.2 Nominal Strength

The nominal strength of systems, members, and connections
shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of
the Specification, except as modified throughout these
Provisions.
Concrete and .\"led rdnjorcement used ill the composife

ordillary seismic sysfems described ill Sections 542, 544.
(lnd 546 shall meel lh e requiremen ls o[Secfioll 509 {llld AC/
318.
21.
~~~~~;~~~~l$~%~~ltg~~~~!RtW~fi~Z:~:t?'~Y:"~;;~t:f(~+,'}~;:~::~t.~~Wj:~.;;: ,:'
CHAPTEfi 5
St r:::cl an d Metal
~i2 0:)
537.4 .2.
537.1 Scope
The design of composite members in the SLRS described in
2.
The con trihuti on of ,the reinforcedconcrete-encased

shape to the strength of the colulllll as provided in AC I
3 18.
3.
The seismic requirement s for reinforced concrete

columns as speci fied in the descript ion of the
composi te seism ic systems in Secti ons 539 through
548.
Sec tions 539 throu gh 548 shall meet the require ments of
Ihis Section and th e Jll<llcriaJ requirements of Section 536.
537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs

The desi gn of composite flo or and roof slabs shall meet the
requirements of ASCE 3. Composite sla b diaphragms shall
meet th e requirement s in thi s Section .
537.2.1 Load Transfer
537.4.1 Ordinary Seismic Syslem Requirements

The followin g requirements for encased com posi te columns
are applicab le to all composite systems, including ordin ary
seism ic systems:
I.
The available shear strength of the co lumn shall be

determined in accordance with Specification Section
509.2.1 .1d. The nOr'ninal shear strength of the ti e.
reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with
ACI 3 18 Secti ons 11.5 .6.2 through 11.5.6.9. In ACI
318 Sections 11.5.6.5 and 11.5 .6.9, the dimension bw
shall equal the width of the conc rete cross -section
minus the width of the slIl1ctura l shape measured
perpendicular to the directi on of shear.
2.
Composite colum n!; designed to share the appli ed load s

between the stl11c tural steel section and the reinforced
co ncrete encascmem shall have shear connectors th at
meet the requirements of Specification Section 509.2.1.
3.
TIle maxi mum spaci ng of transverse tics shall meet the

requirements of Specificat ion Sect ion 509.2.1.
Details shall be des igned so as 10 transfer loads between Lhe

di aphragm and boundary members, collector clements, and
clements of the hori zomai framing system.
537.2.2 Nominal Shear Strength

The nominal shear strength of composite diaphragms and
concrete-filled steel deck diaphragms shall be taken as the
nom inal shear stre ngt h of the reinforced conc rete above the
top of th e steel deck ribs in accord ance with ACI 3 18
cxcl u'ding Chapter 22. Alternatively, the composite
diaphragm nominal shear strength shall be determi ned by
in-plane shear [~st s of concre te-filled di aphragm s.

Com posite beams shall meet the require ment s o f Section
509 . Composite beams Ihat are part of compos ite-special
moment frames (C-S MF) shall also mect the requirement s
of Sec tion 540.3.
537.4 Encased Composite Columns

Thi s sectio n is appli cable to columns th at
1.
consi st of reinforccd-concrcte encased shapes with a

struclural steel area lhal comprises at least J percent of
the total composite column cross section; and
2.
meet the additional li mit ati ons of Speci ficati o n Section

509.2. J. Such co lumns shat! meet the requi rements of
Specification Section 509 , except as modifi ed in thi s
Sec ti on. Additi ona l require me nts, as speci fied for
intermediate an d specia l seismi c sys tems ill Sections
537.4.2 and 537.4 .3shall apply as required in th e
descriptions of the com pos ite seismi c sys te ms in
Sections 539 through 548.
Transverse ti es shall be located vertically within one-haif of

the lie spac ing abo ve the top of the footin g or lowest beam
or slab in an y story and shall be spaced as provided herein
within one-half of the tic spacin g below the lowest beam or
slab framin g into the column .
Transverse bars shall have a diameter th at is not less than

one-fiftieth of the greatest side dimension of the composite
member, except that lics shall not bc smaller than Diam
10Illm bars and need not be larger than Diam 16 mm bars.
Alternatively, welded wire fabtic of equiva lent area is
permitted as trans verse re inforcemen t except when
prohibited for intermediate and special seismic systems .
4.
Load-ccHTying rein fo rcement shall meet th e detai ling

and spli ce requiremcilts of ACI 318 Sections 7.8.1 and
12.17. Load-carryin g reinforcement shilll be provided
at e very corn e r of (I rectangular cross-secti on. The
maximum spacing o f other load carryin g or resu:ai ning
longitudinal reinforcement shall be one- half of the least
side dimensio ns of the compos ite member.
5.
Splices an d end bearing details for e ncased com posite

co lumns in ordill ary seismic systems shall meet th e
requirements of the Speciiicatio n and ACI 3 }8 Section
Colum ns that co nsi st of reinforced-concrete-en cased shapes
shall meet the requirements for re inforced concre te COIUIllIIS

0(' ACI 31 8 except as modified for
I.
The st ructural steel secti on shear con nectors in Section
National Stru ctural Code of the Philippines 6 '1> Edilion Volume 1
:)20G
CH I\P T[j ~~)
Sloe l iJnd Metals
7.X.2. The design shall comply with ACI 318 Sections

2 J .2.6, 21.2.7 and 2 1. 10. Th e design shull <':ollsi<icr all Y
adverse behavioral effects due to abrupt changes in

either the member sti ffness or Ihe nominal tensile
strength . Such locations shull include transitions to
rei nfon.:cd conc rete sections without embedded
structural steel members, transitions to hare structural
steel sections, and column bases.
A".
The maxi mum spacing of trans verse bars at the top and
bOllom shall be lhe Jeasl of lhe following:
iI.
onc-half the least dim ension of the section
b.
8 longitudinal bar diameters
c.
24 tie bar dimneters
d.
300 mOl
These spacings shall be mai ntained over a verti cal distance

equal to the greatest of the following lengths, measured
from each joint face and on both sides of any secti on where
flexural yielding is expected to occur:
1l.
one-sixth the venical clear height of the column
b.
the maximum cross-secti onal dimension
c.
450 mm
2.
Tic spacing over lhe remaining column lengl h shall nOI

exceed twice the spacing defined ab ove.
3.
Welded wire fl.lbric is not permitted as trans versc

reinforcement in intermediate seismic systems.
h,.,.
I~,
A,
P"
The required axi al strength for encased composite

columns li nd splice det ai ls shallmcet (he req uirements
in Part 2A Section 521.3.
2.
LOilgitudinal load -carrying reinforcement sllall mcet

the requircments of ACI 3 18 Section 2 1.4.3.
3.
Tra nsverse reinforcement shall be hoop reinforceme nt

as defined in ACI 318 Cha pler 21 and shall meel lhe
foll owing requi rcmellls:
a.
The minimum area of ti e reinforcement Ash shall meet

lhe following :
(&J. 537 1)
cros!; ~ dcc{ional dim ensi on of the co nfined corc

measured cC llt er- t o~sC llt c r of the tic
reinforcemen t, mm .
:::; spacin g of transverse reinforcement measured
along the longitudinal axis of the structu ra l
member, mill:
:: specified minimum yie ld stress of the structural
steel core, MPa.
:: c ros s~scc ti on(l l area of the structu ral corc, JllJ1\2
:: nominal compressi ye strength of the composi tc
column calcul.tted 'in accordance wit b the
Specifi cation, N.
:: specified compressive strength of concrete, Ml-'a.
:::; specified minimum yield stress of the-ties, MPa .
:::
Equation 537- l nccd not be sa ti sfied if the nomin al strength

of the reiJlforced~ c oncre te-en cas cd structural steel section
alone is greater than the load effect from a load combi nati on
of 1.0 D + 0.51...
b.
The max imu m spacing of tran sverse reinfo rcement

along the length of the column shall be the Icsser of six'
longitud inal load-carrying bar diameters or 150 mill.
c.
When specified in Secli ons 537.4.3(4). 537.4.3 (5) or

537.4 .3 (6), the maxim um spacing of transverse
reinforce ment shall be th e lesser of onc~follrth {he least
member dimension or 100 mm. For thi s reinforccment,
cross li es, kgs of overl apping hoops, ,1IId ot her
confining reinforcement shall be spaced not more th an
350 mill on centcr in the tran sverse direction.
4.
Encased composite columns in braced frames with

nominal compressive loads (hat arc larger than 0.2
times Pn shall have transverse reinforcement as
specified in Secl ion 537.4.3 (3)(iii) over lhe 10lal
elcment length. This requirement need not be satisfied
if the nomi nal strength of the reinforced-concreteencased steel section alonc is grea ter than the load
effecl from a load combination of J .OD + O.SL.
5.
Composi te columns suppor1ing reactions from

discontinued stiff members, slIch as walls or braced
frames, 51Ia)) Ilave tr.ansverse reinforcement as specified
in Sectio n 537.4.3 (3)O;i) over the. full length beneath
the level at which tb e discontin uit y occurs if th e
nomin al compressi ve load exceeds 0,1 times Pn .
Transvcrse rein forcement shall extend into th e
di scontinued member for at leas t the lengt h required to
develop fuJI yielding in th e reinforced-concrcte-encased
shape and longitudinal reinforcement This requirement
necd not be satisfied if the nominal strength of th e
rejnforced-concrete encased stlUctural steel section
537.4.3 Special Seismic System Requirements

Encased composite columns in special seismi c sys tems shalJ
meet the foll owing requirements in addition to those of
Seclions 537.4 .land 537.4.2:
I.
~~
whcre
1.
, -,](r'
.. .J
(1- -F).A
I"
I
yh
537.4.2 Intermediate Seismic System Requirements

EncHscd composite columns jn intermediate seismic
systems shall mcet the following requirements in additi on to
those of Secti on 537.4 .1:
= O'(l9h,.,.s
Association of Stru ctu ral Engineers of th e Phili ppines
CHAPTE I~
alone is greater th an the load effect from a load

combinat ion of I.OD + O.St.
6.
Em:,lsed composite colullllls used in a C-SMF shall

meet the following requirements:
a.
Transverse reinforcement shall meet the requ irements

in Seetinn 537.4.3 (3)(c) at the top and bottom of the
column over the region specified in Section 537.4.2.
b.
The strong-column/wctl k-bcull1 design requirements ill

Section 540.5shal (bc stltisfied. Colulllll bases shall be
detailed to sustain inelastic fle xur<-l l hin ging.
c.
The rcquired shear strengt h of the column shall meet

the requirements of ACI 318 Section 2 1.4.5.1.
7.
When the column terminates on tl footi ng or mat

foundation, the transverse reinforcement tiS specified in
this section shall extend into the footin g or mat at least
300 Illm. When (he column terminates on (t wall, the
transversc rei uforccmenl shall extend into the wa ll for
a t least the length required to develop full yielding in
the rei nforced-concrete-encased shape and longitudinal
reinforcement.
8.
Welded wire f'lbri c is not permitted as transverse

reinforcement for special seismic system s.
C.
The nominal shear strength of the composite column

shall be the nomin al shear strength of th e structural
steel section alone, based on its effective shear <lrea.
The concrete shear capacity may be used in conj ullction
with the shear strength from the steel shape provided
the design includes <\11 appropriate load transfen'ing
mechanism.
2.
In addition to the requirements of Section 537.5(lj, in

the special seismic sys tems described in Sections 540,
543 and 545, the design loads and column splices for
filled composite columns shall also meet the
requ iremen ts of Part 2a Section 521.
3.
Filled composite columns used in C-SMF shall meet

the following requirements in additi on to those of
Section s 6.5(1 ) and 6.5(2):
a.
The minimum requ ired shear strcngth of th e column

shall meet the requirements in ACI 318 Section
21.4. 5.1.
h.
The strong~co lul1ln/wea k-beam design requirements in

Secti on 521.5 shall be mel. Column bases shall be
designed to sustain inelast ic flex ural hin ging.
S!Cel and
The minimuill wall th ic kness

rectangu lar HSS shall be
Im in =:
.fi;)./2E
k~(!lll l
:)20/
of concrclc-/i lled
(E'I. 5)7 .- 2)
for th e flat width b of each face, where b is as defined in
:!:i:'~i~:X~:i:~': .,IT;rabb:llli~C'502.4.1.
53i.S Filled Composite Columns

This Section is applica ble 10 columns th at mee t the
limita ti ons of Specification Section 509.2.2. Such columns
shall be designed to meet the requirements of Specification
Section 509, except as modified in thi s Section .
I.
:)
National Structural Code of the Ph il ippi nes 6'" Edition Volume 1
~i-2()(3
CHAP1T li
~)
. St()el and Met"!:;
The nOlllin;il be,lring and shear-friction strengths shall
SECTION 538
. . ... .. .. .
COMPOSITE CONNEC,l'IONS
Iw'eJ I he. reql!i r t'! . mcnl~ of ACr 1! H Chaptcr~ 10 and
I I. Unl ess a hi ghe r slrcngth is substantiated hy cyclic

tcsling. the nominal hearing and shea r-fricti on strengths
shall he rcdtu,;ed by 25 percellt for the compOsite
seismic systems described in Secti ons 540, 543, 545.
547. and 548.
538.1 Scope
This Secti on is applicable to cOJlncI:tiolls in buildings thai

utilize composite or dual steel and concrete systems wherein
seismic load is transferred between structural steel and
reinforced concre\C components.
2.
Th(> available strength or struclllral steel components in

CO!!~t)osite
connections shall be determined in
accordance with Part 2A Hnd th e Specificati on.
Structura l steel clements Ihat arc encased in confined
reinforced concrete arc permitted (0 be considered to be
braced agllinst () lIt ~o f~plane bucklin g. race bearing
plates co nsi sting of stiffeners between the Oanges of
steel beams are required when beams arc embedded in
reinforced co ncrete columns or wall s.
3.
The nomin al shear strength or reinforced-concreteencased steel panelzoncs in heam-to~column

connections shall be calculated as the su m of the
nominal strengths of the struclUral steel and confined
rein forced concrete shear clement s as determined in
Part 2A Section 540.3 and ACI 3 18 Section 21.5,
respectively.
4.
Reinforcem ent shall be provided to resist all tensile

forces in reinforced concrete components of the
connectiolls. Additionally, the concrete shall be
confined
with
tran sverse
reinforcement.
All
reinforcement shall be fully de ve loped in tension or
compression, as appropriate, beyond th e point at which
it is no longer required to resi st the forces.
Development lengths shall be determined in accordance
with ACI 3 18 Chapter 12. Additi onally. development
lengths for th e sys tems described in Sections 540, 543,
545. 547, and 548 shall meet the requirements of ACI
318 Section2l.5.4.
5.
Connections shall
requirements:
a.
When the slab transfers horizontal diaphragm forces,

the slab reinforcement shall be designed and anchored
to carry the in ~ plane tensile forces at all critical sections
in the slab, including cOJ,1nections to collector beams,
colum ns, braces, and w'llls.
b.
For con necti ons between st mclural steel or composite

beams and reinrorced concrete or encased composite
columns, tran sverse hoop reinforcement ~ha ll be
provided in th e connection region of the column to
meet the requiremen ts of ACl318 Section 2 1.5, except
for the followiilg modifications:
Composite connect ions shall be delliunstnlled to have

strength, ductilit y :md tough ness co mparable to lhat
exhibited by simi la r structural steel or re inforced concrete
conncctions that meet the requirement s or Part 2A and ACI
318, respecti vely. Methods for calculating the connection
strength shall mee t the requircment s in this Section.
538.2 General RC{luirclllcnts
COJl!leClions slwll h,l ve adequ ate def(mnalion capac it y to

resist the required stren gth ilt the design slOry dri ft.
Add iti onally. co nnec ti ons that arc n~ qlljrcd for the lateral
stabi lity of' th e building under seismic loads shall meet Ih e
requirem ents in Sections 539 through 548 based upon th e
specific system in which the connecti on is used, When th e
available strength of the connected members is based upon
nominal material streng ths and norninal dimensions, the
determination or the available strengt h or the con nec ti on
shall Clccount for any effects that res ult from the increase ill
th e actual nominal strengt h of the co nnected member.
538,3 Nomina l Strength of Connections
The nominal strength of connections jn com posite structural
systems shall be determined on the basis of rational lllodels

that satisfy bo th equi libriulll of int ernal rorces and tlw
strengt h li mitation of component Ill(l{cria ls and clements
based upon poten tia) limit states. Unless the cOllllec ti on
stren gth is determined by anal ysis and testing, the models
used for analysis of connecti ons shall meet the requirements
of Sections 538.3(1) through 538 .3(5).
1.
When required, force shall be transferred betwee n

structural steel and reinforced co ncrelc through (a)
direct bearing of head ed shear studs or suitable
l.l hern ative devices; (b)by oth er mcclwnic'll mc.U1S; (c)
by shea r fri ction wi th th e necessa ry clamping forcc
provided by reinforce ment normal to the plane of shen r
transfer ; or (d) by a combination of thest means. Any
potenti.d bond strength betwee n structural slee! and
reinforced co ncrele shaH be ignored for the purpose of
the connection force transfer mechanism. The
contribution or different mech ani sms can be combined
onl y if the stiffness and deformation capacity of the
mechan isms are com patible.
meet the following additional
b. ) Stl1lctural steel sections framing into the

connections are co nsidered to provide conrinemcnt
over a wid lh equal to thal of facc bearing plales
welded to Ihe beams between th e flanges.
Association of Structural Enginee rs of the P!lilippin es
b.2 Lap splices are pcrmitted for pcrimctcr tics when

confinement of the splicc i:-; provided by face
bearing plates or other me,lIlS thm prcvents sp<l lling
of the concrete co ver in the system:-; described ill
Sections 541,542.54 1 and 546.
'~.
:'
b.3 The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in reinforced
concrete and composite columns shall be detailed

to minimi ze slippage of the bars through the b~am
to-column connec tion due 10 high force ~rallsfcr
associated with lhe change in colll/nn 1ll01l)Cnts
over the height of the connection.
539.1 Scope
This section is applicable to framcs that consist of strllc!llral
stc!'1 '('plumns and composite beams that are connected with
ol.lrlially restrained (PR) momenl con nections Iha\ meet Ihe
requirement s in Specification Section 502.3.6b(b).
Compos ite partially restrained moment frames (CPRMF)
shall be designcd so that unde r earthquakc loading yielding
occurs ill the ductile compollcllts or thc compo:-;itc PI{

bcanHowcolumn mom ent cOJlllections, Limited yielding is
permitled at other locmiolls. such as column base
connections, Connection ncxibility and composite be am
action shall be accounted for in dctermining the dynami c
characlCrislics, strength and dfifl of Cw PRMF.
539.2 Columns
Structural steel columns : .: hall mect the requirements of

Section 5 J 9 and 521 and the specification.

Composite beams shall be unenc ased , full y composite <l nd
shall meet the requiremcnts of Speci fication Sectio n 509,
For purpose of anal ysis , the stiffness of the be am s shall be
dCl cnnin ed with an effec ti ve ll10mciH of inert ia of the
composite scction,
539.4 Moment Connections

The required strength of the bcanHowcolumn PH. moment
connecti ons shall be determincd considering the effec ts of
conncction nexibilil y and second-order mome nts. In
add ition, composite connections shall have a nominal
strength that is a( least equ al to 50 percent of M" , wh ere M"
is the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connec ted
structural steel
beam ignoring composite action.
Connections shall meet th e requirements of Section 520 and
shall have a total interstorcy drift angle of 0,04 radians that
is substantiated by cyclic testing as described in Secti on
522.2b.
, ,','
th
National Siruclul'e:l l Code of U'18 Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
~;
2 10
CHAP TEH 5 - Steel and Metals
540.1 S"opc
This section is applicable to moment frallles lhat consist of
ei ther ciJmpositc or reinforced concrete columns und either
stru cturai steel or composite beams. Composite special
momcnt frames (C-SMF) shall be designed assuming that
significant inelastic deformations will occur under the
dcsign earthquake, primarily in the beams. bUI with limited
inelastic deformations in the column andio r con necti ons
540.2 Columns
Composite colullllls shall meet the requirements for special

seismic sys tems of Sections 537.4 or 537.5, as appropria te.
Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirem ents of
ACI 318 Chapter 21. excluding Section 21.10.
540.31lcams
Composite beams that are part of C-SMF shall also meet the
following requirements:
I.
The distance from the maximum concrete compression

fiber to the plastic neutral axis shaH not exceed

The required st rength of beam-to-colu mn mOlllcm
connections shall be determined from Ihe shellr and flexure
associated with the expected fl ex ural strength, RyMn
(LRFD) or R,At" 11.5 (ASD). as appropriate. of the beams
framing into the connection. The nominal strength of lhe
connection shall Illeet the requirements in Section 538. In
addition, the connections shall be capable of sustaining a
total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radian. When be ~1'.!1
flanges are interrupted at the connec ti on, the connections
shall demonstrate an interstory drift angle of at least 0.04
radian in cyclic tests that is sub~talltiated by cyclic testing as
described in Part 2ASecti on 540.2.(b). For co nnections to
reinforced concrete columns with a beam th at is continuous
through Ihe column so that welded joints are not required in
lhe flanges and the connection is not otherwise susceptible
to premature fraclurcs, the inelastic rotat ion capacity shall
be demonstrated by tcsling or oth cr substantiating data.
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio
The design of reinforced concrete columns shall meet the
requirements of ACI 318 Section 2 1.4.2. The column-tobeam moment ratio of composite columns shall meet the
requirements of Part 2A Section 522.6 with the following
modifications:
1.
The available Oexural strength of the composite column

shall meet the requirements of Specification Section
509 with consideration of th e required axia l slrength.
Pre
2.
The force limit for Exception (a) i n Part 2A Section

522.6 shall be P" < 0. 1P, .
3.
Composite columns exempted by the minimum flexural

strength requirement in Part 2A Section 522.6(a) shall
have transverse reinforcement that meets the
requirements in Section 537.4.3(3).
(Eq.540 -1)
1700Fy
1+ - - -
where
= di stance from the lOp of the steel beam to the lOp

of concrete, mm.
= depth of the steel beam, mm.
= specified minimum yield stress of the steel
beam, MPa
E
2.
= elastic modulus of the steel beam, MP"

Beam flanges shall meet the requirem ents of Part 2A
Section 540.4, except when reinforced - concre te ~
encased compression elements have a reinforced
concrete cover of at least 50 mm and confinement is
provided by hoop reinforcement in region s where
plastic hinges are expected to occur under seismic
defonnations . Hoop reinforcement shall meet th e
requirements of ACJ 3 18 Section 21.33.
Neither structural steel nor composite tnlsses are
permitted as Oex ural members to resist seismic loads in
C~SMF unless it is demonstrated by; testin g and
analysis that the particular system provides adequate
ductility and energy dissipation capacity.
CHAPlET!
~;
Steel ailel Mc!al
~)-211
541.1 Scope
542.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to moment frames tl1al consist of

cithcLcompositc or reinforced concrete columlls and either
This Section is applicable to mOlllenl frames that consist of

either composite or reinforced concrete columns and
structural steel or composite beams. Composite {)r<ijnary
moment frames (C-OMF) shall be designed assumiilg that
limited inelastic action will occur under the design
earthquake in the beams, columns andlor connections.
structural sleel or (:ompositc beams. Composite intermediate
monient frames (C-IMF) shall be designed assuming that

inelastic deformation under the design earthquake will
occur primarily in the beams, but with moderate inelastic
deformation in the columns and/or connections.
542.2 Colullllls.
541.2 Columns
Composite columns shall
meet
the requirements
for
intermediate seismic systems of Section 537.401' 537.5.
Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements

ACI 318 Section2!.12.
or
541.3 Beams
Structural stee! and composite beams shall
meet the
Composite columns shall meet the requirements for

ordinary seismic systems in Section 537.4 or 537.5, as.
appropriate. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the
requiremcnts of ACI 318, excluding Chapter 21.
542.3 Belllns
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the
requiremcnts of!hc Specification.
requirements of the Specification.


Tile nominal strength of the coonections shall meet the
requirements of Section 538. The required strength of
beam-lo-column connections shall meet one of the
following requirements:
1.
The required strength of the connection shall be based

on the forces associated with plastic hinging of !he
beams adjacent to the connection.
2.
Connections shall meet the requirements of Section 538

and shall demonstrate a total inters tory drift angle of at
least 0,03 radian in cyclic tests,
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in

accordance with Specification Sections 502.3.3and 502.3.4,
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements in Section 520 and Section 524.2 of Part 2A.
th
~S-212
CH AP'/[: F{ :> Steel and Mu tals
544.1 Scope
543.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to braced framcs that consist of
concentrically co nnc cted members. Minor eccentricities :.I rc
permilled jf they Hre accounted for in the design. Colunins
shall be struct ural steel , composite stru ctural steel , or
reinforced concrete. Beams and braces shall be either
structural steel or composite stl1l clllral steel. Composite
special concentrically braced frames ( C ~CBF) shall be
designed assuming that inelastic acti on under the design
earthquake will occur primarily throu gh tension yielding
and/or buckling of braces.
543.2 Columns
Sti'UC!uml steel columns shall lIlee t the requ iremellts of Pm1
2A Sections 537 and 539. Composit e columns shall meet
the requirem ent s for special sei smic systems of Section
537.4 or 537.5 . Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the
requirements for structural truss clements of ACI 3 I 8
Chapter 21.
543.3 Deams
Structural steel beams shall meet the requirements for
special conce ntri cally braced frames (SC BF) of Part 2A
Section 526. Co mposite beams shall meet the requirements
of the Specificflli on Sectioll 509 and the requirements for
special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) of Part 2A
Section 526.
543.4 Ilraces
StruclUral steel braces shall meet the require ments for SCDF
of Prul 2A Sec ti on 526. Composite. braces shall meet tile
requirements for co mposite columns of Section 543.2.
This Section is appli cable 10 concentrically braced frame

systems that consist of composite or reinforced concrete
columns. structural steel or composite beams. and structural
steel or composite braces. Composite onJinary braced
frames (C~OBF) shall be designed assuming that limited
inelastic action under lhe desig n cal1hquake will OCc ur in
th e beams, column:;, braces, and/or connecti ons.
544.2 Columns
Encased composite columns shall meet the requirements for
ordinary seismic systems of Sections 537.4. Filled
composite columns shall meet the rcquircmcnts of Section
537.5 for ordinary seismic systems. Reinforced concrete
columns shall Illeet the requiremen ts of ACI 3 18 excl udin g
Chapt er 21.
544.3 Beams
Structural steel and co mposite beams shall meet the
requirements of the Speci fi cation.
544.4 Draces
Stru ctural steel braces shall meet the requircme nts of thc
Specifi cation. Composi te braces shall meet th e requirements
for composite co/umlls of Sections 537 .4<1, 537 .5, and
544.2.
544.5 Connections
Connections shall be designed for the Joad combinations in
accordance with Specification Sections 502.3.3 and 502.3.4 ,
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements in Sec ti o J ~ 538.
. ' :, .).,. " ., '~"
543.5. Connections
Bracing connec ti ons shall meet the requi rements of Section
538 and Part 2A Section 526.
Associalion of Siruclural Engineers of the Pllilippincs
'. '; ,
>',
C HJ\Pl"I:n~)
SECTION 545
qpMtfO~IrE ll;P;~N1;~~A!~,"Y .
BRACED FRAMES (CEBF)
545.1 Scope
This Sect ion is applicable to braced frames for which one
end o f each brace intersects a beam al an eccentricity from
th e intersection of the cC!Hcrlincs of the beam ,IIHI co lumn ,
or intersects a beam at all ecce ntricit y from the in tcrsCC: li oll
~; lee l
and rv1e tal
S-2 13
545.4 Ilraecs
Structural steel braces 'shall meet the requirements for EBF
of Part 2/\ Section 528 .
545.5 Conllcdions
In addition to the requ iremen ts fo r ESF of Part 2A Section

.128, connectio ns shall meel the requirements of Section
520.
of the centerlines of the beam and <tn adjacellt brace.
Composite eccen trically braced frames (C>EBF) shall be

designed so that inelastic deformation s under the design
carl hquak c will OCClIr only as shear yielding in l ile links.
Diagonal braces, columns, and beam scgm en Is olltside of

th e link shaH be designed to remain essentially clastic under
the maximum forces that can be- gCllcfmcd by the fully
yielded and strain-hard ened link. Columns shall be either
compos ite or reinforced concrete. Braces shall be struct ural
steel. Links shall be stnlctural steel as described jn this
Sectioll. The avai lable strength of members sha ll meet the
requiremellts ill (he Specification, except 'IS modifi ed in th is
Section. C-EBF shall meet the requiremen ts of Pari 2/\
Section 528, except as modifi ed in this Section.
545.2 Columns
Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements
for structural tru ss clements of ACI 3 18 Chapter 2 J.
Composite columns shall meet the require-ments for special
seismic systems of Secti ons 517.4 or 537.5. Additionally,
where a link is adjacent to a reinforced co ncrete column or
encased
composite
column,
tran sverse
col umn
reinforcement meeting the requirements of ACI 318 Section
2 1.4 .4 (or Sect ion 537.4c(6)a for composite co lumn s) shall
be provided above and below the link connection. All
columns shall meet the requirements of Part 2A Sect ion

528.10.
545.3 Links
Links shall be uncllcased stlllctural steel and shaH meet the
requirement for eccentrically braced frame (ESF) link s in

Part 2A Section 528 . It is pel"mi Hed ( 0 encase the portion or
the beam outside of the link in reinforced concrete. Beallls
cont aining the link arc permitted to act compositely with the
floor Sl;lb lIsing sI\c<H" COllneClors along ,111 or any port ion of
(he beam if the composite action is considered when
determining the nominal strength of th e link.
111
N(llional Structural Code of lhe Philippines 6 Ed ition Volume 1
[5- ?1 t1
CHAprF F~
5 . Steel and Metals
546.3 Steel Coupling /leallls

StruclUral steel coupling beams lhm am used be twee n ( V.'O
adjacent reinfo rced concretc wall s shall meet th l:
requircments of the Speci fica ti on 1l11d th is Secti on:
!.
Co upling bea ms shall have tin cmbcd mcllI Ic ngth into

Ihe rei nforced concrete wa ll tl1m is suffi ci ent 10 de vel o p
the maximum possiblc combi nati on of momcnt and
shear that ca n be gcncnlled by the;,!lominal bending an d
shear strength of the coupling bea m. The embcdnH:: :i
length shall be considered to begin inside th e first lay, ;
of confining reinforcement in the wall hou nda !-~;
member. Connecti on strength for the transfer of h id :
between the coupling beam an d the wall shall meet tlh~
requ irements of Section 538.
2.
Vertical wa ll reinforcement with nominal axiHJ streng th

eq ual 10 the nominal shear stren gth of th e coupling
beam shall be placed over the embedment length of the
bea m with I wo ~lh i rd s of the steel located over the firs t
half of lhe embedment length. Thi s wall reinforceme nt
shall extend a dist ance of at l ea~! one tensio n
de ve lopment length above ,lI1d below the fl anges of' the
co uplin g beam. It is permitted \ 0 usc vertic;,\
reinforcement placed for oth er purposes, such as fe,,'
verti cal bo und ary members, as par1 of Ihe requ ired
verti cal rei nforcement.
546.1 Scope
The requirements ill thi s Sec tion apply when rei nforced
concrete wa lls are composilc wit h slmcturaJ stcel elemcnts,
either as infill panel s. such as reinforced co ncrete walls ill
stru ctural steel frames with unencased or reinforced ~
concrcte ....encased structllrlt l steel secti ons Ihal act as
boundary members, or as stl1lctural steel coupling beams
that connect tw o adjacent reinforced concrete wall s.
Reinforced concrele walls shall meet the requ iremenls of
ACI 3 18 exciliding Ch apter 21 .
546.2 Boundary Members
Boundary mcmbers shall /Hect th e requ irement s of this

Secti on:
I.
2.
When une ncased structural steel sections fun ction as

boundary mem bers in reinforced concrete infill pa nels,
the structural steel sec ti ons shl1li meet the requi rements
of the Specificati on. The required axial strength of the
boundary mem ber shall be determined assuming lhal
the shear forces are carri ed by th e rei nfo rced concrete
wall and the entire gravit y and ove rturnin g fo rces are
carri ed by [he boundary mem bers in conjunction with
the shear wal l. The rei nforced concret e wall shal l meet
the requirements of ACI 31 8 excl uding Chapter 21.
When reinforc ed ~con crete ~ encas ed shapes fun ction as
boundary members in reinforced concrete infill panels,
the anal ys is shall be based upon a transfonn ed concrete
section using clastic material properties. The wall shall
meet (he requirements of ACI 3 J 8 excluding Chapter
21. When the reinforced~ c on c ret e ~en c ased structural
steel boundary member qu alifies as a composite
colum n as defined in Speci fication Secti on509, it shall
be designed to meet th e ordinary seismic system
requirements of Section 537 .4a. Otherwise, it shall be
designed as a composite column lO meet the
rcquirements of ACJ 318 Section 10.16 and Section
546.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams

Encased co mposi te seclions servin g as co upling beams sh all
meet the requirements of Section 546.3 as modified in [hi:'.
Section:
I.
Coupling beams shall have an e m bedme nt Icnglh into

the rcinforced concrete wall tl1at is suffi cient to deveJ o)'
the maximum possible comb ination of momen t <lnd
shear capac ities of the encased composite steei
coupling beam .
2.
The nominal shear cap acity of the encased composi te

steel coupling beam shall be used to meet the
requirement in Section 546.3(1 ).
3.
The stiffness of th e encased composite steel coupli ng

beams shall be used for calculating th e req ui red
strength of the shear wall and coupling beam.
4.
509 of the Specifi cation.
3.
l"Icad eci shear stu ds or welded rein forcement anchors

shall be provided to transfer vertical shear fo rces
between thc structural steel an d reinforced concrete.
Headed she ar st ud s, if used, shall meet th c
req uircmctH s of Specifica tion Section509. We lded
rei nforcement anchors, if used, shall mee t thc
requirements of AWS D1.4 .
requirements for boundary members of AC I 3 18 Section

21 .7 .6.
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams

Encased composite sec ti ons serving as coupling beams shall
Illeet th e requirements or Section 546.3, except the
req uirements of Pm1 2A Section 528.3 need not be met.
547.1 Scope
Special reinforced concrete she'::1 walls composite with
structural steel elements (CSRC W) syste ms shall meet Ihe
requirements of Section 15 for C-ORCW and the shear-wall
requirement of ACI 318 including 0haptcr 21 , except as
modifi ed in this Section.

In addition to the requirements of Section 547 .2( I) ,
uncncascd structural steel columns shall meet the
rcqu ircrncnts of Pa rt 2A Sect ions 519 and 521.
In addition to th e requirements of Section 15.2(2). rhe
requ ire ments in this Section s hall apply to walls wi th
rei nforced-conc ret e-encased structural steel boundary

members. The wall sh all meet the requirements of ACI 3 18
incl udin g Chapter 2 J. Rcinforccd -co ncrctc-cncascd
st ructural steel boundary me mbers that qualify as co mp()site
columns in Specification Section 509 shall meet the special
seismic sys tem requi re ments of Section 537 .4. Otherwise,
such mc mbers shall be designed as co mpos ite compression
members to ' meet the requi rc mclHs of AC I 318 Section
10.1 6 includ ing the special seismic req uirements for
boundary members in ACI 318 Section 2 1.7.6. Transverse
re.inforcemcnt for confin ement o f th e composit (: boundary
member shall ex tend a di stance of 2h into the wall , where h
is the overall depth of th e boundary member in the plane of
the wall. Headed shear studs or welded reinforcin g bar
anchors shall be provided as specified in Section 546.2(3).
For connection to uncncased structural steel sections, the
nominal stren gth of welded reinforcing bar anchors shall be
reduced by 25 percent from their static yield strength.
547.3 Steel Coupling Beams

In addition to the req uirements of Sec tion 546.3, structural
steel coupling beams shall meet the req uirements of Part 2A
Scctions 528.2 and 528.3 . When requ ired in Part 2A Sec tion
528.3, the cou pling rotation shall be assu med as O.OS radian
unl ess a smaller valu c is justified by rational anal ys is of the
inelastic deformati ons thlll are ex pected under the des ign
ea rt hquake. Face bea ring plates shall be provided 011 both
s ides of th e coupling beams at the face of the reinforced
concrete wall. These stiffeners shall meet th e detailing
requi rements of Part 2A Section 528.3.
Ve rtical wall reinforcement as specified in Secti on 528.3(2)
shall be confin ed by trans verse reinforcement that meets the
1h
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volu me 1
~) 216
CHAP T: H 5 - Steel and Melal:.
members wit h we lds andlor slip-crit ical high- strength

bolts to develop Ihe nom in al shea r strength of the plate.
The design of welded and bolted con nectors shall meet
the additional requirements of Part 2AScction 520.
Section 548.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to structural walls consisti ng of

stee l plnt cs with reinforced concrete t!1casemcnl 0 11 One or
bOlh sides of the plate and structulaJ steel or compos ite
boundary mcmbers.
Structural steel and composite boundary members shall be

designed to resist the shear capacity of plate and any
reinforced concrete p0I1iol1s of the wall active at the design
story drift. Composite and reinforced co ncrete boundary
members shall also meet th e requi rements of Section 547.2.
Steel boundary members shall also meet the requirements of
Part 2A, Scclion 530.
548.2 Wall Elements

The avail able shca r slrcnglil sha ll be 9'Vns (LRPD) or V,jj I n
(AS D), as appropriate, according (0 the limit slate of shear
yielding o f composite steel plate shear wa lls (CSPW) wit h
" stiffened platc confomling 10 Seclion 530.2( 1) shall be

(Eq.548-1 )
<p
= 0.90 (LRFD)
n = 1.67 (ASD)
V".,
::;: nomi nal shear strength of the stee l plate, N
A sp
= horizontal area of stiffened steel plate, mrn 2.
f~\.
= speci fied minimum yield stress of the phnc,

MPa.
548.4 Openings
Boundary members shall be provided around openings as
re~cd b ~ ana lysis.
..:'~~!~.3~_r~)~~~::~~1~Z~~~!~'~~.~I!~:~~~~~~)\\1~~!~t:W~~t\~~~1~~:
The ava il ab le shear strength of CwSPW with a plate that

does not meet the stiffening requirement s in Section
530.2(1) shall be based upon Ihe strenglh of the plate.

excluding the strength of the reinforced concrete, and meet
th e req uiremen ts of the Specification Secti ons 507.2 and
507.3.
I.
The stecl plale shall be adequ alely sti ffened by

encasement or aU8chmcnt to the reinforced concrete if
it can be demonstrated with an elastic pi me buckling
analysis that the composite wall can resist a nominal
shear force equal to V,lS . The concrete thickn ess shall
be a minimum of 100 111m on each side when concrete
is provided on bOlh sides of the Sleel plale and 200 mm

when concrete is provided on one side of the stcel plate.
Headed shear stud connectors or other mechanical
co nn ectors shall be provided to prevent local buckl in g
and separation of the plate and reinforced concrete .
Horizonta l and vertical reinforcement shall be provided
in the co ncrete encasement to meet or exceed the
detai li ng requirement s in ACI 318 Secti on 14.3. The
rei nforcement rat io in bot h directio ns shall lIot be I c~:-;
(han 0.UU25 ; (he ma ximum spaci ng between bars shall
not exceed 450 111111.
Seismic forces acting perpendi cu lar to the plane of the wa ll

as specified by this code shall be considered in the design of
th e compos it e wall system.
2.
The steel plate shall be continuously connected on all

.edges to structural steel framing and boundary
Associ ation of Structu ral Engineers of the Philippin es
CHAPTEn. [;
Steel and Mel,1l
021 7
When required by Ih is code or thc cngineer-or-record, a

qu alil y assu rance plan .s hall be pro vided. For th e sleci
portion or the cOllstructi on, the provisions of Part 2A,
Secti on 53 1 apply.
Structural design drawings and specifications, shop
drawings, and erection drawings for composite steel mId
steel building constructi on shall meet the requircmcn ts of
Pal' 2A $eclion518.
For reinforced concrete and composite steel building
construction, the con tract documents, shop drawings, and
crec tion drawings shall also indicate the followin g:
I.
Bar placement, cutoff<;, lap and mechani cal splices,

hooks and mechanical anchorages.
2. Tolerance for phlccment of tics and other transverse

rei nforccll1cllI .
3. Provisions for dime nsional changes resulting from

tem perature changes, creep and shrinkage.
4.
Location, magni tude, and sequenci ng

prestresssing or posH ensio ning present.
5.
If concrete floor slabs or slabs on grade servc as

diaphragm s, connecti on details bet ween the diaphragm
and the mai n l a {eral~ l oad resistin g system shall be
clearly identified .
of
any
National Structura l Code of the I'llilippines 6'" Edition Volu me 1
~) ?18
CHAPTUi
~) .
Sleel and Metals
bf '
b ,.b,
h,.h]
C
, I,' .,
,'d!
.' "
full unreduced cross-sectional arC,l of member
Area of dircctly connected elements or gross area

hfl + A
for bearing stiffcner at interior SUppOJ1
and or under concentrated load , and b21 + As, for
bearing stiffeners at end support
Gross cross-sectional area of bolt
18t2 .... A Sh for beari ng stiffener at interior support
()f under co ncentrated load, and
IOl2 of- A s!. for
bearing stiffeners at end suppor!
Effec tive area al stress Fu
AI;
Ab
Ac
Ae
N
Ag
Ag
j ,
Effective net area

Cross-sec tional area of compression flan ge plus
edge stiffener
Gross area of element including stiffeners
Gross area of section
Gross arca subject to shear

Net area subject to tension
Nct area subject to shear
Net area of cross-section
Reduced area due 10 local buckling
Gross-sectional area of roof panel per unit width
Cross-sectional area of hearing stiffene r
Gross area of stiffener
Gross area of shear stiffener
Net tensile area
Area of web
Net web area
Shear panel length of unrein forced web clement, or
distance between shear stiffeners of reinforced web
clements
Interncdiatc fastener or spot weld spacing
F<lstcner distancc from or outside web edge
Lcngth of bracing interval
1J,.
Term for determinin g tensile yield point of corncrs
b
b
Effect i ve design width or compression element
Agv
A n!
A ll v
All
Ad
AI'
As
As
A s!
Ar
Aw
Awn
a
a
a
",f
b,
b,
b,
or
b,
ba
Flange width
Effective wid th for oeOection calculati on
Effec ti ve width of elements, located at ce ntroid of
clement including stiffeners
Effecti ve width
Effect ive width determined eithcr by section 552.4
Section 552.5. 1 depending on Sliffness of stiffeners
Total flat width of stiffened element
Tolal Oat width of edge stiffened elemen t
eh
Cr
C"
Cm
Cmll:
Cmy
CN
C"
CR
C,
C rF
C
Cw
C wr
Cy
C"C"
La rgest sub-elemen t nm width

Effective widths
Effective widths of bearing slifTcncrs
For comprcssion mcmbers, ratio or total corner
cross-sectional area to tOl1l1 cross-sec tional area of
full section; for nex uJ"ClI members, ratio of tOlal
corner cross-sect ional area of co ntrolling llangc to
full cross-sccti cmal area of COJl trolling flange
Coefficicnt
Bearing factor
Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient
Constant from T able 557. 1
Web slenderness coefficient
End moment coeffi cient in interacti on formula
End moment coefficient in interacti on formula
End moment coefficient in interacti on formula
Bcaring length coeffi ciellt
Correction factor
Inside bend radius coefficient
Coefficient for lateral-torsional buckling
End moment coefficient in interactioll formula
Shear stiffener coefficient
Torsional warping co nstan t of cross-sec tion
Torsional warpin g constant of fl ange
Compression strain factor
Axial buckling coefficients
C3
ClIO
Coefficients tabulated in Tables 554-3 to 554-5
C6
CI/>
Calibration coefficient
c
c
D
D
Strip of flat wi dth adj acent to hole

Distance
.
Amount of curling displacement
Horizontal distance from edge of clement {o
centerline of stiffener
Outside diameter of cyl indrical tube
Overall depth of lip
D
D
DZ, D3
Shear stiffener coefficien t

Dead load
Lip dimension
Depth of section
Nomi na l screw diameter
d
d
d
Flat depth of lip defined in Figure 552')

\Vid th of arc sca m weld
Visible diameter of out er surface of arc spot weld
'f
ci
Diameler of boll
Average di amcter of arc spol weld at mid thickness of t
Average width of seam weld
CHAPTEJi S
db
fI,.
d,.
d"
(h
""
dj1iJ
d~
ds
d ,
d".,\
d"
E
Nominal diamcter (body or shank diamclCr)

Effcctive diamet er of fused area
Effective width of arc scam weld at fused surfaces
Diameter of hole
Depth of hole
Dia meter of sl.mdard hol e
Distance alon g roof slope between the itll purljJl
line and thejth anchorage device
Reduced effective width of stiffener
Depth of stiffener
Effective width of stiffener calculated according to
Section 552.3
Screw head or washer diameter
Larger value of screw head or washer diameter
E'
Tensile strength of virgin steel specified by Section

55 J.2 or establi shed in accord ance with Section
556.3.3
Lower value of Fy for beam web or Fy.\ for bearing
stiffe!lerS
Tensile strength of electrode classification

FI/I
Mod ulus of elasticity of steel , 203,000 Mpa, or

2,070,000 kg/cm'
F"
e nl ;"
C~x,Csy
'.,.
F
F.SJI
Pm
Fl
Fer
Fd
Fc
Fe
I;~>I
F~,
Fn
Fill
l'~II.
F'nl
Fsy
Li ve load due to earthquake

Twist of stud from initial, ideal, unbuckled shape
Reduced modulus of elasticity for flexural and
ax ial stiffness in second -order analysis
Distance measured in line of fOJ'ce from center of a

standard hole to nearest edge of an adjacent hole OJ'
to end of connected part toward which the force is
directed
Distance measured in line of force from center of <l
standard hole to nearest end of connected pal1
Minimum allowable distance measured in line of
force from centerline of a weld to nearest edge of
all adjacent weld or to end of co nnected part
toward which the force is directed
Ecce ntricities of load components measured from
the shear center and in the x and y directions.
respecti vely
Yield strain = FIE
Fabrication fact or
Design stress range
Threshold fatigue stress range
Critical buckling stress
Plate elastic buckling stress
Elastic di stortional buckling stress
Elastic distortional buckling stress
Elastic buckling stress
Mean va lue of fabrication factor
Nominal buckling stress
Nominal strength of bolls
Nominal tensile strength of bolts
Nominal shear strength of bolls
Nominal tensile st rength for bolts subject
to
combination of shear and tension
Yield stress as specified in Section 551.2. 1,
52 Hl
5.11.2.2, 551.2.3
Nominal tensile stress in flat sheet
Tensile strength as specified in Section 551.1.1.
551 .2.2, or 551.2.3.
F'.\.
E
Steol ,Hld Melal
Tensile strength of members in co ntact with screw

head
Tensile strength of member not in contact wilh
screw head
Nominal shear stress
Yield stress used for desi gn, not to exceed
specified yield stress or stabli shcd in accordan ce
with Section 556, or as increased for cold work of
fonnalling in Section 551 .7.2 or <IS reduced for low
ductil ity steels in Section.
A verage yield stress of section
Tensile yield stress of corners
Weighted average tensile yield stress of
nat
pOl1ions
Yield stress of stiffener steel

Tensile yield stress of virgin steel specified by
Section 551.2 or established in accordance with
Section 556.3.3
Stress ill compression element co mpweci 011 has is

of effective design width
Average comput ed stress in full unreduced fl ange
width
Stre ss at service load in cover plate or sheet
Normal stre ss du e to bending alon e at the
maximum nonnal on the cross section
due to combined bending and torsio n
Normal stress due to torsion alon e at the
maximum normal stress on the cross
section due to combined bending and
torsioll.
Co mputed compressive stress in clement
being considered. Calculations are based
011 effective section at load for which
serviceability is determined.
C6m puted st resses fl and f2in un sti ffened
clement, as defined in Figures 552-5 10
552.8. Calculations arc based on
effec tive section at load for whi ch
serviceability is determined.
Required shear stress on a bolt
Stresses on unstiffened element defi ned
by Figures 552-6 to 552-8
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 'h Edition Volume 1
:5"2:<'0
CHAP1Tf::J
:i " 5 10el anej
Me tals
Stresses at the opposite ends oj" web

G
Shear modulus of sleel.

78,000 Mpa or 795,000 kg/e m'
Vertical dislance betwcclllWO rows of"

cOllnections nearest to top an d bouom
flanges
Transvcr.'i( ! (enler-Io-cenler spaci ng
between faste ner gage lines
Gauge. spacing of fastene r perpendicular
to force
g
g
II
A pennancllI load due to lateral canh

prcssure, incl uding groundwater
Depth of fl.H portion of web measured

along pl ane of web
section parallel to web using ullrcduc.:cd

sect ion
y-ax is moment of incrlia of llange
Index of stirre ner
Index of each purlin line
.I
Saint-Venant torsion constant
il
Saint- Venum torsion constant of
compression flang plus edge stiffener

about an x-y axis located at Ihe centroid
of the nangc
Section propcI1y for torsional-flcxural
buckling
Index for cach anchoragc device
j
j
K
K'
"
h"
Iz,
h,,"("
h,
Width of clemcnts adjoining 5ti ffelled

clement
Lip hcight as defined in F"igurcs 555 15 to
555 18
Overall depth of unstiffcncd C-scct ion
member as defined in Figure 552-8
Depth of soil supPOJ1ed by the structure
Coped nat web depth
x di 51<IIlCC from the centroid of flange 10
the fl ange / we b junction
Ka
Kat
K,.IJ;J
Knq
KJ)"S
K,
K,owli
Importance faclOr for earthquake

K", "
Iw
I"
I'JJ
I,
I,
Importance factor for wind

Adequa te moment of inertial of stiffe ner,
so that each compo nent elemcnt wil!
behave as :1 st iffe ned clement
Effective momcnt of inertia
Gross moment of inenia
Actual moment of inertia of full stiffencr
about its OWJl centroidal axis parallel to
element to be stiffened
Minimum moment of inerti a of shear
stiffen er(s) with respect to an axis in plane
of web
MOlllenl of inertia of .stiffener about
ccnterl ine of flat pon ion of element
Moment of in cliia of full unreduced
section abou t principal axis

x-axis moment of inertia of the fl ange
Product of inertia of full unreduced
section about major and minor cen troida!
axes
Product of inerti a of flange about maj or
and minor centroidal axes
Moment of inertia of co mpression pOl1ion
of secti on about centroiclal ax is of ent irc
Effective length factor

A constant
Lateral sti ffncss of :'lnchoragc dcvice
Parameter for determini ng axial strength
ofZ-Secti on member having one fl ange
fastened to sheating
Effective lateral stiffness ofjth an chorage
device with respect to ilh purlin
Required stiffness
Lateral stiffness of roof system,
neglect in g anchorage devices
Effective le ngth factor for torsion
Effective lateral stiffncss of all elements
resisting force
Effective length f<lctor for buckling about
x~axi.s
K.r
Effecti ve length factor for buckling about

y- axi s
Plate budding cocfficicnt
Plate buckling coefficicnt for di slortiOTwl bll<:kJi ng
k
K if
Kille"
K,"
K
kjl"
k" /I:
k{o,,","
k."
(1
"""~
Plate buckling cocfficicnt for local sub-element

buckling
Shear buckling coefficient
Rotational sti ffness
Elasti c rotati onal stiffness provided by the flange
to the flange/web juncture
Geometric rotat ional stiffness demanded by the
Oange from the Dangc Iwcb juncture
Elastic rotational stiffncss provided by thc web to
the flan ge/web juncture
Geometric rotational stiffness demanded by the
web from the flan ge/web juncture

L
Full span for simple beams, distance h CI \'.'C{'Jl

inflecti on
point for continous bea ms, I\"j , ' :
member length for cantilever beam s
Span length
C HAP'lT. H~)
Lcngth uf weld
Lcngth of longitudi nal welds
Len gth of SCll m weld not in clu ding circ ular
Lengt h of con necti on
l1nbraced length of member
L,
L"
L,
Lv
Lt/
M
M
Req uired allowable flexural slrenglh, ASD

Bending moment
M ud
Distortional buckling moment
M err
Overall buckling moment
A1u!
Local buckling moment
A1d
Nominal moment with consideration of dcflection
MJ
Facto red moment
MJx .
Moments due to factored )o<tds with respect to
M.ti'
ce nt roidal axes
M'n
Mean va lue of material factor
M.,U}....
Absolute value of moments in unbraced segme nt,
"'" A.M/J, lIsed for determining C h
Nominal flexural strengths ,thout Section 551

Nom ina l flexural strengths IrcsistanceJ about
Cell troidal axes J elef"llll!lcd in accordance willi
Section 553 .1 excl ud ing provisions of Secti on
553 . l. l.b
Nomi nal flex ural strength abou t cen troid.d axes
determined using gross , unreduced cross-secti on
propenics
M~,
Requi red all owable fl exura l stren gth wit!: respect .\ '.
to ccntroid al axes for ASD
My
Required fl ex ural strength with respect to

Cenlroid"1 axes for LRFD
moment causi ng maximum strain c)'
Yi eld momelll (= S,F,)
Small er end moment in an 1I1lhraccd scgmenl
Larger and moment ill an unbraced seg men t
Required flexural strength
M,
Required n exural strengt h
M"
M"y
M,.
My
M,
M,
My
M,
Torsional momen t. of required load P aboll l shear

center
III
Degrees of freedom
Teelll fro determinin g tensil e yield point of corners
Distance frolll shear center of one C-section to
mid -plane of web.
Modifi cation factor for type of bearing connection
1/1
III
N
N
N"
N,
N
/I "
/I
/I
/I
/I
/I
Me
M 'l
Nom inal flexural strengt h

Nominal flexural strength for distortional buckling
Nomina l flexura l slrenglh for overall buckling
Nominal flexu ral sirengih for local bu ckling
:)-2;: 1
M,u.
l!1l(is
Overa lilen gih

Live load
Minimum of L", and Lm
Distance bet ween braces on one compressio n
IllclJ} ber
Unsupported length between brace points or other
restraints which restrict distOl1iolwi buckling of
clcment
Summation of critical path lengths of each segment
Critical unbraced length of distortional buckling
Gross failure path length parallel to force
Lenglh of hole
Distance between discrete restraint s thai restrict
distortional buckling
Net fai lure path lengt h parallel to force
Overhang length measured frolll the edge of
bearing (0 the en d of me mber
Net fai lure path len gth inclined to force
Length of bearing stiffener
Un braced length of compression l11em hcl for
torsion
Net failure path length normal to force d ue to
direct tension
Lim it of lInbraced length below which IHleral torsional buckling is not considered
Unbeaced leng th of compression member for
bending about x-axis
Unbraced length of compression member for
ucndill g about y-axis
Length at which local b uck ling stress eq uals
flexural buckling stress
Dsitance fro m concentrated load to a brace
SIt'QI Jild Melal
Actual length of bearing

Num be r of stress range flu ctuations in design li fe
Number of anchorage devices along a lin e of
anchorage
Notio nal lateral load ap plied at level i
Number of purlinlines on roo f slope
Coefficient
Number of stiffeners
Number of holes
Number of tests
Num ber of equ ally spaced intermediate brace
locati ons
Number of anchors in test assemb ly with same
tribu tary arc,} (for anchor fai lure), or number of
pan els with identical spans and Jocad ing to failed
span (for non -JTlchord -failure)
Number of threads per inch
Number of boll hol es
Numbe r of compression flange stiffeners
Number of web sti ffeners andlor folds
Number of tension fl ange st iffe ners
Required allowable stre ngth fo r co ncentrated load
reaction in presence of bendi ng moment for AS D
National St ructural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volu me 1
5.222
CHAPTEli :; . Steel ami Melnls
Required allowable strength (nominal force )

transmitted by weld lor ASD
Required ll llowahle compressive axia l strength for
AS!)
Professional factor
Required concentrated Jocad within a distance of
O.3a on each side of a brace. plus 1.4 (! -lIa) Ii mes
each required concentrated load
located fan her
than O.3a but not farther than 1.0a from the brace
Required nominal brace strength for a single
compression member
Elastic buckling strengths
p
p
p
Pu,P u Lateral bracing forces

Lateral force to be resist ed by the jlh anchorage
Plj
device
Dis(Qr1ional buckling load
Petti
Local buckling load
P..rl
Axial force due to factored loads
1',
Conce ntrateu load or re~lc tio n due to facto red loads
1',
Lateral force introduced into the system al the ilh
I' ,
purlin
Mean va lue of the tested-tn-predicted load ratios
Nominal web crippling strength
Nominal axial strength of member
Nominal axial strength of bearing sti ffener
component
Nominal strength of connection
Nominal bearing strengt h
Nominal tensile strength of welded member
Nominal bolt strength
Nominal web crippling strength of C or Z-Section
with overhang(s)
Nominal axial strength for distOl1ional buckling
Nominal axial strength for overall buckling
No minal axial strength for loca l buckling
Nominal axial strength of member determined III
accordance wit h Section 553.3.4 with F,,=F,<
Nominal pull-out strength pel' screw
.
Nom inal pull~over strength per screw
Nominal shear strength per screw
P,,~
Nominal
tension strength per screw
1'"
Required axial compressive strength
1',
Concentrated load or reacti on
1',
Nominal shear strength of screw as reported
by
PS .1
manufacturer or determined, by
independent
laboratory testing
Nomina! tension strength [resistance] of screw as
reported by manufacturer or determined by
independent laboratory testing
Required axial strength for LRFD
weld,
for
Factored force transmitted by
LRFD
Pu
Required strength for co ncen trated load reaction
in presence of bending moment for LRFD
Pwe
Nominal web crippling strength for C-
1).1\
I'\"
j;
I)
"
Section flexlJI"lll member

Components of required loml P parallel
ax is. res pectively
Me mbe r yield strength
\0 x and
Required strengt h for concentrated load o r

reaction concentrated load reaction due 10
factored loads ill presence of bending moment
Required compressive axial strength
Pitch (mm per thread for SI units and cm per
thread for MKS units)
Req uired allow(lb le shear sl rength of connecti on
Required shear strength ofconnection
Q,
q
Load effect
Design loead in plane of web
Reduction facIO!"
CfJ
Ii
I?
Ii
II
Required allowable strengt h for ASD

Modification fac tor
Reduction faclor
Reduction factor
Reduction factor determined from uplift tests in
accordance with AISI S908
Coefficient
Inside belld radius
Radius of outside bend surface
lJ / la
r,
Allowable design strength

Reduction factor
Reduction factor
effect of factored loads
Nominal strength
Nominal block shear rupture strength
Average val ue of all test results
Reduction factor
Req uired strength for LRFD
Correction facto r
Least radius of gyration of full unreduced cross~
section Centerline bend radius
Minimum radius of gyration of full unreduced
cross-section
r"
Polar radius of gyration of cross-section about

shear center
Rad ius of gyration of cross-secti on about
cenlroid al prinCipal axis
128 fEj!"
Variable load clue to snow, including ice and

associated rain or rain
Elastic section modulus of effective seel ie :)
calculated relastive to extreme compression fiber ::~
F,
Elastic section modulus of effecti ve section
calculated relative to extreme compression or
s,
s,
. Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEFi S
tension fiber at F I,
S"
.\'
.\'
,\'
.\'
S
T
T
T
T
T
I,
I,
I;
I.,
Ill'
I, , I,
I,
I,
V,
Vf
Vf
VM
V"
Vp
VQ
Steel (Inc! Metal
~)-223
V"
Required shear strength for LRFD
Elastic scclion s~>ction modulus of full unreduced

section relative (0 extreme compression fiber
Elastics section modulus of full unreduced section
relative to extreme fiber in firs! yield
V"
Required shear strength of connection for LRFD
Required shear strength
In-plane diaphragm nominal shear strength

Ccntcr-Io-ccnlcr hole spacing
Spacing in linc of .slress of welds, rivets, or boils
connecting a compression cover plate or sheet to a
nOll-integral stiffener or other clemen!
W
W
Wind load, a variable load due to wind

Required strength from critical load combinations
for ASD, LRFD, or LSD
Total required vertical load supported by irh purlin
in a single bay
Components of required strength W
Flat width of element exclusive of radii
Flat width of beam flange which contacts bearing
plate
Flat width of narrowest unstiffened compression
element tributary 10 connections
Width of Oange projection beyond web for 1-
Sheet width divided by Humber of bolt holes in

cross-section being analyzed
W tId spacing
Pitch, spacing of fastener parallel 10 force
Longitudinal ccnlcr-tQ-ccntcr spacing of any
consecutive holes
Clear distance from the hole a1 ends of member
Maximuill permissible longitudinal spacing of
welds or other connectors joining two C-sections
to form an I-section
Required allowable tensile axial strength for ASD

Required allowable tension strength of cOllllection
Load due to contraction or expansion caused by
temperature changes
Nominallensile strength
Design strength connection in tension
Required tensile axial strength for LRFD
Required tension strength of connection for LRFD
Required tensile axial strength
Required tension strength of connection
Base stell thickness of any clement or section
Thickness of coped web
Total thickness of two welded sheets
Thickness of thinnest connected part
Lesser of depth of penetration and t2
Effective throat dimension of groove weld
Thickness of incompressed glass fiber blanket
insulation
Thickness of stiffener
effective throat of weld
Based thickness connected with fillet weld
Thickness of member in contact with screw head
Thickness of member not in contact with screw
head
Reduction coefficient
Required allowable strength for ASD
Coefficient of variation of fabrication factor
Shear force due to factored loads for LSD
factored shear force of connection for LSD
Coefficient of variation of material factor
Nominal shear strength
Coefficient of variation of tested-to.:predicted load
ratios
Coefficient of variation of load effecl
Will
W"
w
HI
IV
1'1-;
w.1'
beams and similar section::;; or half distance

w,
w"
It'l
IV]
x
x
Xo
XQ
Y
Y,
Yo
a
a
a
a
between webs for box-or U-type sections

Required distributed gravity load supported by the
i/h purlin per unit length
Out-to-out width
Leg of weld
Leg of weld
Non-dimensional fastener location
Nearest distance betwccn web hole and edge of
bearing
Distance from shear center to centroid along
principal x-axis
Distance from centroid of flange to shear center of
flange
Distance from shear plane to centroid of crosssection
Yield point of web steel divided by yield point of
stiffener steel
Gravity load from tile LRFD or 1,6 limes the ASD
load combinations applied at level i
Y distance from centroid of flange. to shear center
of flange
Coefficient for purlin directions
Coefficient for conversion of units
Load factor
Coefficient for strength increase due to
overhang
Coefficient aCCOllnts for the benefit of an unbraced
length, L"" shoner than Lo
Magni ficatioll factors
jf
jJ
fibr, I
Coefficient
A value accounting for moment gradient
Required brace stiffness for a single compression
member
Target reliability index
th
5224
CH AP T H i ~)
St eel and Me tals
Lateral displ:Jcemc lll of purJi n l Op ll ange jlt the line

rcslrailll
Coefficient
General Terms
~:",,,,,
St ress gradient in web
APPLICABLE BUILDING CO DE. Building Code un ki

th
which the structure is dcsigned (i.e NSCP 6 Edition).
Yi
Load factor
Angle between web and bC'-Iring surface > 45 " but
11 0 more than 900
Angle between vertical and pJanc of web of Zsection, degrees
()", (~,
y; r;
(I), ( 1
II
II
II" II,
BI,A RING (LOCAL COMPRESSIVE YIELDING).

Local co mpressive yielding du e to the action of II member
bearing against another member or surface.
Angle of segment of complex lip
A,2,
Slenderness factors
). /. ).1.
Parameters used in dClCrmining compressio n strain
A" A"
F'ICIOT
At
A"
Slendcmcss factor
BLOCK SHEAR RUI'TUR E. In a con neclion, Icns ion

mptures along one path and shears yieldin g or shear rupture
along anothe r path.
Slenderness factor
/'
Poisson's ration for slecl:::0.10
Reduction fHelor
0',
BRACED FRAM E. Essentially venical truss system that

provides resistance lO lateral loads and provides stability for
the structural system.
(rr2E) / (K,L, / r.)'

(rr2E) / (I., / ,j
(rr2E) / (K,.L,.
/ r,J'
. . 1
(rr2E) / (L / r,.)
Torsional buckling Slress
BUCKLING. Sudden change in the geometry of a structure

or any of its clements unde r critical loadi ng condition.
Reistancc factor
Resistance fac tor bending
Resistance factor for conce ntri call y loaded
co mpression strengt h
Resistance fac lOr fo r diap hragm s
Resistance faclor for tensile stre ngth
Rcsistance factor for fracture 011 net section
Re sistance factor for shear strength
Resistallce factor for web crippling st rength
I f/Ji I
Parameter for reduced stiffness lISing

analysis
fl
flb
fl,.
n"
n,
fl,.
n ...
BEARING. In a co nn ection. the ultimate shelr forces

transmitted by the mcchanical fastencr to the cv!..1cction
c1cments.
sccond ~ order
Safely factor
Safety facto r for bending strength
[aclor
[or
concciltricnll y
Safety
comp rcssion st rcngth
Safcty factor for diaphragms
Safety [actor for tension strength
Snfely factor for shear strength
Safety factor for web crippling strcngth
loaded
BUCKLING STRENGTH.
instability limits slates.
Nominal
Slrenglit
for
COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBER.

Shape manufaclUrcd by press~braking blanks sheared from
sheets, cui lengths of coils or plates, or by ro ll forming colelor- hot rolled coils or sheets: both formin g operations bei ng
performed at ambient room temperature, thai is, without
manifest addi tion of heat such as woul d be required for hot
forming.
CONFIRMATORY TEST. TeSi made, witen desired, on
membcrs, connections, and assemblies designed in
accordance with the provisions of Section 551 through
Section 557, Appendices 1 and 2, and Section C~3 of this
Specification or its specific references, in order to compare
actual to calculated performance.
CONNECTION. Combination of stru ctural clements and
joi nts lIsed to tran smit forces between two or more
members.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA: EFFECTIV E AREA.
Effec ti ve area, Ae, calcubted using the effective widths of
component elemen ts in accordance with Sec tion 552. If the
effective widths of all component clements, determined in
accordance with Section 552, arc equal to the actu<ll ; ,, ';
widt hs, it equals the gross or net area, as applicable.
FULL, UNREDUCED AREA. Fu ll , unreduced area, A, .
Association of Structural Engineers of 1118 f>hili ppines
cakulaled without considering joca! buckling in th e

componellt clements, which equals either Ihe gross area or
net area, Os applicable.
Gross An::t. Cross area, At, without dcdlH.:lions for hol es,
openings and culouts.
NET AHEA. Nel area, An, equal
of holcs,'opcnings, and ClIlOuts.
10
gross arca less the
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING.
Buckling
mode in which a compression member bends <lnd twi sts
Si!lluJWllCOllSly without change in cross- sectional shape.
Horizolltal structund member tilm SU ppOJ1s Willi

p,mels and is primaril y subjected 10 bending under
hOlizontal loads, sllch <is wind load.
GlUT.
arCH
CURTAIN WALL STUD. A member in the steel framed

cxterior wall system that transfers transverse (oul-or-plane)
loads and is limited to a superimposed axinl load, cxcilJsivc
of sheathing materials, of /lot more thllll 1460 N/m, or
superimposed axial load of /lot more that 890 N per stud.
DIAPHRAGM. Roof, floor, or other membranc or braCing
system llulI transfers in -plane forces to the lateral force
resisting system.
DIRECT STRENGTH METHOD. An alternative design
method deHl llcd in Section C-I that provides predictions of
member strengths without the usc of effective widths.
DISTORTIONAL BUCKLING. A mode of buckling
involving change ,in cros s~sec tional shape, excluding local
buckling.
DOUBLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION.
A section
symmetric about two orthogonal axes through its centroid.
EFFECTIVE
DESIGN
WIDTH
(EFFECTIVE
WIDTH). Flat width of an clement reduced for design
purposes, also known simply as the effective width.
IN-PLANE INSTABILITY. Buckling involving in the

plime of the frame-or the-member.
INSTABILITY. Ultimat e loading of a structural
componen1, frame, or strllcture in which a slight disturbance
. in the 10(l(ls or geometry produces large displacements.
JOINT. Area where two or more ends. surfaces, or edges
arc altnched. Categorized by Iype or fastener or weld uscd
and the method of force Inlllsfe r.
LATERAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode
of a flexural member involving deflection out of the plane
of bending occurring simuhaneolJsly with twist about the
shc'll' center of thc cross -section.
LOAD. Force or other action that results from the weight of

building materials, occupants and their possessions,
ellvironmental effects. differential movemcnt, or restrained
dimensi onal changes.
Forces, stresses, and defonnations
LOAD EFFECT
produced in a structural component by applied loads.
FACTORED LOAD. Product of a load factor and the

nominal Imld.
Load Factor. Factor that aCCOU!llS for deviation of the

nomina! load from the actual load, (or uncertainties in the
analysis that transforms the load into a load effect and for
the. probability that more than one extreme load will occur
simultaneously.
FATIGUK Crack initialion and growth resulting from

rereated application of live loads.
LOCAL BENDING. Ultimate state of large deformation

of a flange under a concentrated transverse force.
FLANGE OF A SECTION IN BENDING (FLANGE).

Flat width of flange including any intermediate stiffeners
plus adjoining comers.
LOCAL DUCKLING. Buckling of a compression clement

where the line junctions between elements rem ain straight
and angles between clements do not change.
FLAT WIDTH. Width of an clement exclusive of corners

measured along its plane.
LOCAL YIEL[)ING. Yielding that occurs in a local area

oi' all element.
FLAT-WIIlTII-TO THICKNESS RATIO (FLAT

WIDTH RATIO) . Flat width of on element measured
along its plane, divided by its thickness.
MASTER COIL. One co ntinuous. weld-free coil as

produced by a hal mill , cold mill, metallic coating line or
paint line and identifiabl e by a unique coil number. In some
cases, thi s coil is cut into smaller coils or slit into narrower
coils; however. all of these smaller and lor narrower
finished coils arc said to have come from the same mast er
coil if they arc traceable to the original master coil number.
FLEXURAL BUCKLING. Buckling mode in which a

compression members defl ects laterally without a twist or
change in cross-sectional shape.
National Structural Code of Ihe Philippines 6'" Edition Volum e 1
~; 226
CHAI'T E:FI
~)
Sl(~cl
and Metal5
MOMENT FRAME. Framing system that pro vides

resi stance 10 lateral loads and provides stability 10 th e
struct ural sys tem primarily by shear and Ilexure of the
fra ming Illcillhers alul thei r cOllllecl ions.
RESISTANCE FAC TOR, q>. Factor that "cco unts for

unavoidable deviatiolls of the nominal strength from the
tlc!U,l l strength and for the manne r .111<1 COJl Sl.qIlCllc CS o r
fai lure.
MULTII'LE-STIFFENED ELEMENT_ Elemen t stiffened

between webs, or between a web and a stiffened edge, by
means or intermediate stiffeners parallel to the direction or
stress.
RUPTURE STRENGTH. Strength limited by breaking or

tcari ng of members or cOllnecting clements.
NOTIONAL LOAD. Virtual load applied in a structural

analysis to account for destabilizing effeCls that arc not
otherwise accollllIed for in the design provisions.
OUT-OF-PLANE IlUCKLlNG. Ultimate state of a beam,
column or bea m-column involving lateral or lateraltorsional buc kling.
PERFORMANCE TEST. Test made on structural
mem bers, coullect ions. and asse mblies whose performance
can not be determined in accorda nce wilh Section 551 to
Section 557 of this specifica tion or its specific references.
PERMANENT LOAD. Load in which variations over tim e
arc rare Or of small magnitude. All other loads are variable
loads.
POINT-SYMM ETRI C SECTION. Section symm etrical
about a point (ce ntroid) such as a Z~scc( i on havin g eq ual
flan ges.
PUIlLISHED SPECIFICATION. Requiremen ts for a steel
listed by a manufacturer, processor. producer, purchaser, or
other body. which ( I ) arc generall y available in the public
domain or arc available (0 the public upon request, (2) arc
established before the steel is ordered. and (3) as a

minimulll, specify Illlnimum mechanical properties,
chemical compos iti on lim its. and . if coated sheet. coati ng
properties.
PURLIN. Horizontal structural member that supports roof
deck and is primarily subjected to bending under vCltica l
loads such as live. wi nd , or dead loads.
PA EFFECT. Effect of loads 'Icli ng on the deflected shape

of a me mber be tween joints or nodes.
SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS. Structural analys is in

which equilibrium conditions arc formulated on the
deformed struct ure; sccond ~ ordc.r crfects (both P-O and P-A,
unless specified otherwise) are induded.
SECOND-ORI)lm EFFECT. Effect of loads actin g on the
deformed configuration of a structure; includes P-O effect
and P-Il effect.
~HEAR IlUCKLING. Buckling mode in whi ch a plate
e leme nt , suc h as the web of a beam , de forms under pure
shcCll" applied in the pl ane of the plate.
SHEAR \VALL. Wall that provides resistallce to late ral

loads in the plane of the wall and provid es stability for the
structural system .
SINGLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION. Sec ti on sym metri c
3bout only one axis through its cenlroi(/.
SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRESSES. Lower
limit of yield stresses speci fied for <I material as defined as
ASTM.
STIFFENED
on
PAnTiALLY
STIFFENED
COMPRESSION ELEMENTS.
Flat co mpression
elements (i.e., a plane co mpressi oll flange 0(" .1 f1exural
member or a plane web or fl ange of compress ion member)
or whi ch both edges paraliel to the directi on o f stresses are
stiffened ei th er by a web . flange. stiffenin g lip. in termediate
st iffener, or the like.
SS (STRUCTURAL STEEL). ASTM designation f<o:.
celtain steels intended for stlUcturai appli cati ons.
Stress. Stress as used in this Specifi cation meilllS force pc :'
unit area.
STRUCTURAL
P- A EFFECT. Efrect of loads actin g on the displ aced

location of joints or nodes in a structurc. In tiered building
structures, thi s is the effect of loads acting on the laterall y
displaced location of floo rs and roofs.
RATIONAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS. Ana lysi s

based on theory th at is appropriate for the situation, an y
relevant lest data, jf available, and sound engineeIing
judgment.
ANALYSIS.
Dete rmination
of 10';<;
effects on memb ers and co nnections based on princip les oj"
structural mechanics.
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. Sec the definition of (\ : .
For med Structural Steel Strllclunli Me mbers
STRUCTURAL COMPONENT. Member,
connecting clemen t, or assemblage.
Ass ociation of Structural Engineers of the Pililippines
COl" :
.v,.
SUB-ELEMENT
ELEMENT.
OF
MULTIPLE
STIFI'ENED
Port ion of a multipl e stiffened clement
YIELD STRESS. Ge neric term to denote either yield

strength, as appropriat e for Ihe material.
between IIdjaccnt inlCJ'lll Cdialc stiITeJ)!'!!"s, bL~Lwccl1 web and
intermediat e stiffener , or between edge ,tilt! inlCnlH:dialc
YIELDING. Lilllit stal e of incias\j(,; deformation that
stiffener .
occ urs whe n the yield st ress is reached.
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MATERIAL ). Maxim ul11

tensile stress thaI a rn;ncriaJ is capable of sustaining ;t S
defined by ASTM.
YIELDING (PLASTIC MOMENT). Yielding Ihroll ghoul

the cross section of a member us th e bending mOlll ent
reaches the plastic momellt.
TENSION AND SHEAR RUPTURE. in a boll or olher
YIELDING (YIELI) MOMENT). Yield ing allhe cxlreme
type of a mec hani cal fastener, limit slate of rupture du e
fiber 011 the cross secti on of <l member when the bendin g
moment reaches the yi eld moment.
10
simultan eo us tension and she ar force.
THICKNESS. The thi ckn ess, t. of <lil y clement or sectio/l

is the base steel thickness. exclusive of coatings.
TORSIONAL BUCKLING.
Buckling mode wh ich a
compression member twi sts about its shear center axis.

UNSTIFFENED COMPRESSION ELEMENTS. FI:ll
compress ion ele me nt sti ffe ned ill o nl y O IiC edge parallel to
thc directi on of stress .
UNSYMMETRIC SECTION.
Secli"n nol symmclric
either about an axis or a poil1t.

VARIAULE LOAD,
load.
ASD and LRFD Terms

ASD (ALLOWAIlLE STRENGTH DESIGN). Melhod of
propol1i o ning
structu rn l component s sll ch as th at the
allowabl e strength equal s or exceeds the required strength

of th e component und er thc action or thc ASD load
combi nati ons.
ASD LOAI) COMBINATION. Load combin ,"ion in Ihe
appli cable bui lding code intended for al lowable strcngth

design (allowable strcss design).
Allowabl e Strength . Nominal Strength divided by th e
safe ty r'letOJ'. R.,Ifl .
Load nol classi fi ed as permanent

A VAILABLE STRENGTH. Desi gn Sirengih or allowa ble
strength as appropriat e.
VIRGIN STEEL. Steel as received frolll the steel produce r
or warehouse before being cold worked as a result of
fabricating operations.
DESIGN LOAD. Appli ed load del ermined in accord ance

with ei ther LRFD load combinations or ASD load
combinatio ns wh ichever is appl icable.

VIRGIN STEEL PROPERTIES. Mec hani cal propcni es
of virgin steel such as yi eld

elongati on.
stress, tensile strength, and
DESIGN STRENGTH.
Resistance raclOr llluiliplied by
the Iluminai strength, H".
WEB. In a member subjected to flexure, th e portion of the

section that is joined to.two flanges, or that is joined to onl y
one flange provided it crosses the neutral axi s.
WEll CRIPPLING. Loca l failure of we b plate in Ih e
immedimc vicinit y of a concentrated load or reaction.
LRFIl
(LOAD
AND
RESISTANCE
FACTOR
DESIGN). Method of proponioning stru ctural component s

sllch that the design strength equals ur exceeds the required
strength of the component under the action of the LRFD
load co mbin ations.
LRFD LOAD COMBINATION. Load co mbinal ion ill Ih e
YIELD IVIOMENT. In a me mbcr subjec ted to bending, the

moment at which the c xtr(,~ JllC outer fiber first attains th e
yield stress.
appli cab le building cod e intended for stre ngth design (Load
and Resistance Factor Design).
YIELD POINT. First stress in a materi al at which an
by the applicahle bu ilding ( ode.
NOMINAL LOAD. The ma gllillides or Ihe loads specifie d
increase in strain occ urs without an j-ncrcasc in stress as

NOMINAL STRENGTH.
defined by ASTM.
YIELD STRENGTIL Sires> "I whi ch a maleri"ls exhibits
a specified Iimiling de viation from the propo rtionalit y of
s tress to slrain as defined by ASTM.
Strenglh of a slruetllre or
component (without th e resistance facto!' or safety factor

applied) to resist the load effects, il S determin ed in
accordance with this Specificati on.
th
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Vol ume 1
S2~~8
CHAPTE ii 5 ~ Siee! and Metals
REQUIRED
STRENGTH.
Force,.
stresses.
and
deformations acting on a gtructural component, determined

by either structural analys is, for the J. ... RFD or ASD load
combinations , as appropriate, or as specified by this
Specincation.
RESISTANCE. See the definition of Nominal Strength.
SECTION 551 . .
GlfNERALPRO,VlSI(}NS
Thi s see-tion states the scope of the Spcl.:ification,
sum marizes refcrenced specification , code, and sHindard
doctllllents, and provides requirements for materials <lIld
contract documents.
SAFETY FACTOR, U.
Factor that accou nts for
dev iations of the actual strength, deviati ons of the actual
loads from the nominal loads, uncertainties in the analysis
that transforms the load into a load effect , and for the
manner and consequences of failure.
552
SERVICE LOAD. Load under which serviceability limit
553
554
STRENGTH LIMIT STATE.

which the maximum
components is reached.
The section is organized as follows:
551
General Provision
Elements
Members
Structural Assemblies <1I1d Systems
Connections and Joints
555
556
slales are evaluated.
strength
Limiting condition, in
of a
Test for Special Cases

Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural members
557
and Connections for Cyclic Loading (Fatigue)
structure or its
55!.! Scope, Applicability and Definitions

551.1.1 SeQl'C
This specification applies to the design of stru ct ural
members cold-formed to shape from carbon or low-alloy
steel sheet, strip, plate, OJ' bar not more than 25 mm in
thickness and used for load -carrying purposes in
1.
Buildings; and
2.
Struclurcs othcr than buildings provided allowances are

made for dynami c effects.
551.!.2 Applicability
Thi s Specification in clud es Symbols and Definitions,
Section 551 through Section 557, Section C-I, to Section C3 that shall apply as follows:
Sect ion C- I
Desi gn of Cold-Formed Steel Struct urell

Members Using Direct Design Stren glh
Method
Seclion
C~2
Section C-3
Second -Order analysis.

Addition al Provisions
This Specification includes dcsign provisions for
I.
Allowable Strength Design (AS D), and
2.
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
The nominal strength and st iffness of cold-formed steel

elements, membcrs, assemblies , connections, and details
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions in
Section 552 to Section 557. Section C-I to Section C-3 of
the Specification.
Where
the
composition
or
conf"iguralioll
of
such
C HAPTU~
co mponents is such thal calculati o n of strength andlor

stiffness cannot be made in accordance with those
provisions, struc tural performance shaH be established from
either of the following:
J.
Available strength or stiffness by te:m;, undertaken and

eva luated in accord iulce ~'ith Section 556,
2.
Ava ilable strength or stiffness by rHtional engineering

analysis based on appropriate theory, related testing if
data is avail able, and en gineering judgmen t.
Specifically, the available strength is determined from
the calculated nominal strength by appl yin g the
following safet y factors or reSiS1<lIlCC factors:
For Members
Q
= 2.00 (ASD)
= 080 (LR FD)
For Connec tions

Q = 2.50 (ASD)
Si. 00! and Motal
5 ~229
ASTM A572/A572M, Standa rd Specification for HighStrength Low~Allo y Coiumbiulll- Vanadium Strucllll'<ll Steel
ASTM A588!A588M , Standard Specification for HighStrength Low-All oy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
Minimulll Yield Point to 100m111 th ic k
ASTM A606, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
Strip, High-Strength, Low- Alloy, Hot-Rolled and ColdRoll ed, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A 653M/A653 M (SS 230 MPH , 25 MPa, 275 MPa,
340 MPa Class I , Class 3 and Class 4. and 380 MPa;
HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 275 MPa. 340 MPa, 380 MPa Class
I and 2, 410 MPa , & 480 MPa and 550 MPa , Standard
Specification for Slccl Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanizcd) or
Zinc - [ron Alloy-Coa ted (Galvan nealed) by the l'lo t-Dip
Process
= 0.65 (LRFD)
551.1.3 Definitions
In thi s Specification, "shall" is used 10 ex press a In<llldatory
requirement, i.e., a provisions that the user is obli ged to
satisfy in order to comply with the Specification; and "shall
be permitted" is used it express an option or that which is
permissible withinlhe limits of the Specification.
551.1.4 Ullil. of Symbols alld Tenns
The unit systems considered in .-hose sections is SI units.
551.2 Material
551.2.1 Applicable Steels
This Specification requ ires the llse of steels intended for
structural applications as defined in general by the
specifications of the American Society for Testing Mat erials
listed in this section. The term SS shall designate sheet
material and the terms HSLAS and HSLASF s hall
designate hi gh- strengt h low-a ll oy steels.
ASTM A36! A36M , Standard Specificatio n for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM A242/A242M, Sta ndard Specificati on for Hi ghStrength Low- Alloy Structu ral Steel
ASTM A283!A283M. Standard Specification for Low and
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formcd
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round s and Shapes
ASTM A529/A529M, Standard Specificatio n t"r High Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Slructural Quality
ASTM A792!A792M. (230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa, and

340 MPa Class I and Class 4), Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, 55% Alum inum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the HotDip Process.
ASTM A847!A847M, Standard Spccification for ColdFormed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy
StJ'l\ctllJ'aJ Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Res istance
ASTM A875/A875M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa.
and 340 MPa Class I and 3; HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 340
MPa, 410 MPa, 480 MPa, and 550 MPa) , Standard
Specifi cation for Steel Shed, Zinc-5% Aluminum AlloyCoated by the Ho t -Dip Process
ASTM A1003/AI003M (ST 340 MPa H, 275 MPa H, 255
MPa H, 230 MPa H), Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Carbon, Met allic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for ColdFormed Framing Members
ASTM AI008/AI008M (SS 170 MPa, 205 Mra, 230 MPa
Types I and 2, and 275 MPa Types I and 2; HSLAS
Classes I and 2, 3 10 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa, 410 MPa,
450 MPa, and 480 MPa; HSLAS-F 340 MPa. 4 10 MPa, 480
MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard S pecification for Steel,
Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength LowAlloy,
High-Strength
Low-Alloy
with
Improved
Formab ility, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenab le
ASTM AJO ll /AIOllM (SS 205 MPa, 230 MPa, 250 MPa
T ypes I and 2, 275 MPa, 3 10 MPa, 340 MPa, and 380 MPa
; HSLAS Classes 1 and 2, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa,
410 MPa, 450 MPa, and 480 MPa ;HSLAS-F 340MPa, 410
MPa, 480 MPa, and 550MPa), Standard Specification for
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled , Carbon, Structural,
High-S trength Low-AllOY and High-S treng th Low- Alloy
National Structural Coele of tile PhilippinEls
Gt:l
I:':dition VOIUIT1e 1
5--230
CHAPTEr:=: 5 - St081 and Metals
strength in Sections 551 to Section is taken as 75

percent of the specified minimum yield stress or 410
MPa, whichever is less, and
with Improved Formability

ASTM AI039/AI039M (SS 275 MPa, 340 MPa, 380MPa,
410 MPa, 480 MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard Specification
for Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and
Structural, Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process.
Thicknesses of 380 MPa and higher that do not meet the
minimum 10% elongation requirement are limited per
Section 551.2.3.2.
551,2,2 Other Steels
See Section 551.2.2 of Section C-3
551,2,3 Ductility
Steels not listed in Section 551.2.1 and used for structural
members and connections in accordance with Seclion
551.2.2 shall comply with ductility requirements in either
Section 551.2.3.1 or Section 551.2.3.2:
551,2,3,1 General
The ratio of tensile strength to yield stress shall not be less
than 1.08, and the total elongation shall not be less than 10
percent for a 50 mm gauge length or 7 percent for a 200mm
gaugc length standard specimen tested in accordance with
ASTM A370. If these requirements cannot be met, the
following criteria shall be satisfied:
1.
Local elongation in a 12.7 mm gauge length across the

fracture shall not be less than 20 percent, and
2.
Uniform elongation outside the fracture shall not be

less than 3 percent. When material ductility is
determined on the basis of the local and uniform
elongation criteria, the use of such material shall be
restricted to the design of purlins, girts, and curtain wall
studs in accordance with Sections 553.3.1 (a), Section
553.3.2, Section 554.6.1, Section 554.6.2, Section
554.6.2a, and requirements given in Section C-3.2.1 of
the Section C-3. For purlins, girts, and curtain wall
studs subject to combined axial load and bending
moment (Section 553.3.5) rJJJIP'1 shall not exceed 0.15
for ASD, P,! ,?" shall not exceed 0.15 for LRFD.
Steels conforming to ASTM A653! A653M SS (550 MPa),

AIOOSI AI008M SS (550 Mpa), A792/A792M (550 Mpa),
A875! A875M SS (550 Mpa), thicknesses of ASTM AI039
Grades (380Mpa), (410 MPa), (480 MPa), and (550MPa)
that do not meet the minimum 10 percent elongation
requircment in Section 551.2.3.1, and other steels that do
not meet the provisions of Section 551.2.3.1 shall be
permitted for cOllce11lrically loaded closed box section
compression members as given in Exception 2 below and
for multiple-web configurations such as roofing, siding, and
floor decking as given in Exception 1 provided that:
The yield stress,
The tensile strength, Fm used for determining nominal

strength in Section 555 is taken as 75 percent of the
specified minimum tensile strength or 427 MPa,
whichever is less.
Alternatively, the suitability of such steels for any multiweb configuration shall be demonstrated by loads tests in
accordance with the provisions of Section 556. Available
strengths based on these tests shall not exceed the available
strengths calculated in accordance with Section 552 through
Section 557, Section C-J to Section C-3, using the specified
minimum yield stress, F,Y' and the specified minimum
tensile strength, PI/"
Erceplion l:
For multiple-web cOI{figuratiol1s, a reduced .specified
minimum yield stress, R"Fs )', shall be permitted for
determining the nomina! flexural strength in Section
553. 3. la, for which the reductio/1 factor, Rb , shalf be
determined in accordance \v;th (a) or (b):
a.
For stUTened alld partia!!y sfUTelled compression

flanges
For
wi! -::;O.067EI F.,),

(Eq,551.2-1)
Rb = 1.0
For 0.067 ElF". < wit < 0,974 E I F,y
Rb= 1-0,26/1
IV
For 0.974 ElF,)
Fsy I (tE)),O.067/"
~
J"~\"
wll
500
Rb= 0.75
b.
For unstllfened compression/langes

For wit
0.0173 EI F"
(Eq. 551.2-2)
lib = J,O
1"01'0.0173 EI F,y
551,2.3.2 Steels
1.
2.
lib = 1.079 - 0.6
used for determining nominal

< I,vlt ::;60
CHAPT ER 5
Steel and Meta l
5-231
551.4 Allowable Sh'cngth Design

w
=
::::
::::
::::
Flat width of compression flange

Thickness (~f section
Modulus (~r elasticity o/steel
,S'peClfied minimum yield st((~SS determined in
accordance ""iill Section 551.6 5.550 MPa.
The above Exception shalJ not appl y to the use of steel deck
for com pos ite slabs, fo r which the steel deck acts as the
tensile reinforcemenl of slab.
EJ:ceptioll 2:
For concentrically loaded compression members lVith a
closed box section, a reduced yield stress, O.9Fsy, shall be
permilfed to be used ill p lace (~f F.\. ill Eqs. 553.4.2, 553.4.3,
and 553.4.4 for determining the axial strength in Sec/ion
553.4. A reduced radius of gyration (R,)(r) shall be used in
Eq. 553.4.1 when the value of the effective length KL is less
than 1.1 La is given by Eq. 551-3, and R,. is given by Eq.
551 -4.
(Eq. 55 1.2-3)

Design under thi s section of the Specification shall be based
on Specificati ons shal l be based 011 Allowable St rength
Des ign (ASD) principles. All provisio ns of thi s
Speci l1 cati on shall Hpply, except for those in Sections 551.5
and in Secti on 55 3 and Section 556 designated for LRFD.
551.4.1 a ASD Requirements

A design satisfi es rhe req ui rements of this S pecificati o n
when the all owable strength of each structural component
eq uals or exceeds the requ ired strength, determined on the
basis of the nomi nal loads, fo r all appli cable load
combinatio ns.
The design shall
Eq. 55 1.4: I - I:
(Eq. 551.2-4)
I. J Lo
u41ere
L"
R,
KL
= Length at wh ich local buckling stress equals

jle:rural buckling stress
= Radius gyration offull unreduced cross section
Minimum critical buckling slress for seClioll
ca/cu/aled by q. 552.2
Reductionjllctor
= Effective lenglh
=
=
551.2.4 Dclivered Minimum Thickncss

T he uncoated min imum steel thi ckness of the cold-formed
steel product as delivered to the job site shall not at any
location be less than 95 percent of the th ickness ,t, used in
its design; however, lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at
bends, such as corners, due to cold Mforming effects.
in
accordance with
(Eq.551.4- 1)
where
=Req uired strength

=Nominal Strength specified in Section 552
through Section 557 and section e-l.
=Safety factor specified in Section 552 through
II,,1D
Section 557 and sectio n C I.

= All owable streng th
R
II , = 0.65 + O.35( KL)
be performed
RII
551.4.1b Load Combinations for ASD

Load combination for AS D shall be as stipulated by Section
C-3.3. l. la of Section C-3.
551.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design

Design under thi s sec tio n of th e Specifi cation shall be based
Load and Resistance Fac(o r Design (LRFD) principles.
All provisions of thi s Specification shall appl y except for
those in Sections 551.4 anel in Chapters 553 and 556
designated for ASD and LRFD.
a ll
551.5.1.1 LRFD Requirelnents

A design satisfi es the requ irements of thi s Specification
551.3 Loads
Loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the
appli cable provisions in Section C-3.3 of Section e-3.
when the design strength of each st ructural component

equ als or exceeds th e required strength determined on the
basis of the nomi nal loads, multiplied by the applicable load
factors, for all applicable load combinati ons.
The desig n shall be performed in accordance with the
Equ ati on 551.5- 1:
II" ~~II,,
(Eq. 55 1. 5-1)
where
Nati onal Structural Code of tile Phili pp ines 6th Edition Vo lume 1
p,;;SY
!)-2~32
CHAPTEB 5 - Steet and Metals
:= Required ~lrcngl h
:;; Resistance facIO!" specified in Seelio!) 552
through 557 and Appendix C-!
::;: Nominal slrcngth specified in Section 552
through 557 and Appendix C-l
::;: Design strength
R"
nange
flan ge
F r (,
551.7.2 Slrenglh Increase from
Cold
Work
of
r:"I "\'L' : :
I.
for axially loaded cumpression members and flexural

members whose proportions arc such that the quantity p
for strength determination is uni ty as detcrmined in
accordance with Section 552.2 for each of the
component clements of the sec tion, the design yield
stresses, F)'(f> of the steel ShllII be determined on the
basis of oJ~e of the following methods:
a.
Full section Icnsile lesls [see paragraph (a) of Seclion

556.3.11,
b.
Stub columl1 tests [see paragraph (b) of Section

5563.11.
c.
Computed in accordance with Eq. 551.7- 1.

J~'II :::: cr~n
+ ( I -C)
1'~f'S. F,,,.
(5517-1)
where
== Average yield stress of full unreduced section of
compression members or full flangc sections of

flexural members
:::: For compression members, rati o of total corner
cross- sectional area to total cross-sectional area
of full scction; for flexural mcmbers, ratio of
tOlal corner cross-sectional area of controlling
tensile yield
~ trcss
or corners.
1.2, Hil :$ 7, and the included
angle <; J 20" .
II
~ 3.69 (1'",11',.,.)-0.819 (F,,,/J.~...)' - 1.79

.
(Eq.55U -1)
::;:: Tcnsile yield stress of virgin steel specified by
Section 551.2 or established in accordance with
Set ion 556.3.3.
~
Inside bend radiu !;
:::: Thickness of section

m
Fit,
~ 0.192(1',,,11',.,.) - 0.068
(E'1 . 55 1.7-4)
= Tcnsile streJ~gth of virgin steel spccified by
Section 551.2 OJ' established in accmdancc with

r~\f
Forming.
Strength increase from cold work of forming shall be
pennittcd by substitutin g Fya for I~\., where I~II is the nverage
yield stre:;:; of the full section. Such increase shall be limited
to Sections 553.2. 553.3. 1 (excluding Section 553.3.1.1 (b)).
553.3.4. 553.3.5, 554.4. and 554.6.1. The limits and
methods for detennining F ya shall be in accordance with (a),
(b) and (c).
::::lJ,FpJ (N/t)'1I,
Eq . 551.7-2 applies only when
'~.,.
551.7.1 Yield Stress

The yield stress llscd in design, I;~. , shall not exceed the
spccificd minimum yield stress of steels as listcd in Scclion
55'1.2.2.1 or 5512.3.2, as established in accordance with
Section 556, or as increased for cold work of formin g ill
Section 551.7.2.
full crosssect ional area of l:Olllrolling
(liq. 551.7 -2)
SSI.S.lu Load FHctors and Load Combinations fol'

LRFD
Load factors and load combinations for LRFD shall be
stipulatcd by Section C-3.3.1. J b of Scction C-3.
551.7 Yield Stress nnd Strength [ncrea froll1 Cold

Work of Forming
(0
Section 556.3.3.
:::: Wei ghted average tensile yi eld stress of nat
portions established in accordance with Section
556 .3 .2 or virgin steel yield stress if tests arc not
made
2.
For axially loaded tension members, the yield stress of

thc steel shall be determined by eithe r method '( I) or
method (3) prescribed in paragraph (a) of this sect ion.
3.
The effect of ,my we lding on mechanical propeJ1ies of;:\

member shall be determined on the basis of tests of full
section specimens containing, within the gauge length,
such welding as the manufacturer intends to u ~e . Any

necessary allowance for slich effect shall be made in
the structural use of the member.
551.8 Serviceability
A structure shall be designed to perform its required
functions during its expected life. Serviceability limit statc~;
shall be chosen based on the intended functi on of tbe
slructure and shall be ev<tluated using realistic loads and
load cOlnbinations.
551.9 Referenced Documen ts
The following documents OJ' portions thereof arc refcrellc(:~d
in this Specification and shall be c()ll sidered p ~\J1 of the:
requirements of this Specification.
I.
American Iron and

Steel Inslitute (AISf) , 1]. 1C
Connccticut Ave., NW. Washington . DC '20036:
AISI S20007, North American Standard for ColdFormed Steel Framing - General Provisions
AlSI 5210-07, North American Standard for ColdFormed - Floor and Roof System Design
Associalion of Slruclural Engineers of Ihe Philippines
AISI S211-07, North Aillerican Standard for ColdFormed Steel Framing - Wall Stud Design
AISI S212-07, North American for Cold-Formed Sleel

Framing - Header Design
AISI S214-07, North American Standard for CoJdFormed Steel Praming- Truss Design
AISI S901-02*, Rotational Lateral Stiffness Test
Method for BcanHo- Panel Assemblies
AISI S902-02, Stub-Coluilln Test Method for Effective
Area of Cold-Formed Steel Columns
ASTM A490M-04a, Standard Specification for High

Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for
Structural Steel Joints [Metric]
ASTM A500-03a, Standard Speci lieation for Cold
FOJ'n)ed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A529/A529M-05, Standard Specification for
High Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural
Quality
Note: * A/5;/ {est procedures previously designated as

7:)!I-XX are reo-designated to A/SI S9n-x).,:, where
"/1" is flU' (eSf procedure sequence number and "xx" is
tlw year the standard was dcwdoped or updated.
and Alloy Steel Nuts
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),

1828 L Strret, NW, Washington, Dc 20036:
ASTM A563-04, Standard Specification for Carbon

ASTM A563M-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts IMetric)
Surface
ASTM A572/A572M .. 06, Standard Specificatiun fur

High -Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),

100 Barr Harbour Drive, West Conshohocken,
Pennsylvania 19428-2959:
ASTM A588 I A588M-05, Standard Specification for

High- Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi
1345 Mra) Minimun Yield Point to 4-in. IIOOmm)
Thick
ASME B46.1-2000, Surface

Roughness, \Vavincss, and Lay
3.
ASTM A490-06, Standard Spc...:ification for Structural

Bolts, Alloy Steel, Hcat Treatcd, 150 ksi Minimuin
Tensile Strength
AISI S906-04, Standard Procedures for Panel and

Anchor Structural Tests
A/Sf
2.
Usc.
Texture,
ASTM A361 A36rn-05, Standard Specification for

Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM AI94/A 194M-06, Standard Specification for
Carbon and Alluy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High .
Pressure and High~Tempcraturc Scrvice, or Both
ASTM A2421 A242 M-04el, Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
ASTM A307-04, Standard Specification for Carbon
Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A325-06, Standard Specification for Structural
Bolts, Steel, I-leat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum
Tcnsile Strength
ASTM A325M-05, Standard Specification for
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa
Minimum Tcnsile Strength [Metric]
ASTM A354-04, Standard Specification For Quenched
and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Extcrnaslly Threaded Fasteners
ASTM A606-04, standard Specification for Steel, Sheet

and Strip, High-Strength, Low alloy, lIot- Rolled and
Colel- Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
ASTM A6531 A653M-06, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, ZincCoatcd (Galvanized) or Zinc>Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the l'lot-Dip Process
ASTM A847 I A847M-05, Standard Specification j()r
Cold Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength,
Low alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM AS75 I A875M-05, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy- Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A I 0031 A I 003M-05, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and NOll MetallicCoated for Colel Formed Framing Membcrs
ASTM A370-05, Standard Specifications for Standard

Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
of Steel Products
ASTM A100S1 A IOOSM-05b, Standard Specification

for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Roiled, Carbon, Structural,
I-ligh- Strength Low Alloy, High- Strength Low Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardenable
ASTM A449-04b, Standard Specification for Hex Cap

Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, I-leat Treated,
120/1 05/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General
ASTM AIOIIlAIOIIM-05a, Standard Specification for

Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low alloy
tll
National Structural CodG of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
5292
CIiA P lE H ~)
Steel ami Meta l!;
where
A1
db
"
:::
Net tensi Ie area
::: Nomi nal diameter (body or shrank di ameter)

::: Pitch (mill per thread for SI unit s)
557.5 Special Fabrication RC<luircmcnts

13<1cking bars in welded connections that an: ,,:Ir<i1lcl to th e
stress fi eld shall be permillcd 10 remain in pl<tce. and if
used, shall be continllous.
Backing bars that arc pcrpcndicul;!r to the stress fi eld, if
used, shall be removed and the joint bad gouged and
welded.
Flame cu i edges subj ect
10
cycl ic siress ran ges sh ... 11 have a

11111 in accord ance with
surface roughness not to exceed 25

ASME 1346. )
Re ~entrant co rners at cuts, copes, and weld Hccess ho les

shall form a radius of not less than 10 mm by pre-drilling or
sub-p ul\ chin g and reaming a hole, or by t!l enni!! cutting to
forlll th e rad ius of the cut. If the radius porti on is form ed is
formed by thermal cutting, the cut surface 511(111 be gro und
to a bri ght metal contour to provide a radiu sed transition,
free of notches, with a surface roughn ess not to exceed /lot
to exceed 25 liI1l in accordance with ASME 846. I or
anoth er cquivalent approved standards.
For transverse bUll joint s in regions of hi gh tensile st ress,

we ld tabs shall be used to provide for cascadin g the we ld
tcrmination outside the fini shed j oint End da ms shall not
be used. Weld tabs shall be removed and (he end of the
weld fini shed flush with the cdge of the member.
!;.):ceptioll
Weld tabs shall no! be requiredfor sheer material iJthe

weldiflg procedures used result ill smoOlh, flush edges.
SECTION C-l
DESIGN OF '"'v'......,.-J.' v ..... ~.''"'v.
STRUCTURALC
' ~~~~~
THE DIRECT Si
C~l Design of ColdFormed Steel Struc;,turClJ Members
Using (he Direct Strength Method
C-I.I. GcncrClJ Provisions

C-l.l.l Applicability
The prov isions of this Secti on shall be permitted 10 bc used
( 0 del ermine the nominal Hxial (P,,) .md fl ex ural (Mil)
sire ligths of coldformcd stecl 1l1cmbcrs. Sections C. I.2.1
,1Ild C. 1.2.2 prcscnt a mcthod appli cable to all coldfonned
steel colu mns and bc.uns. Those members meeting the
gcomct ric and IllClterial limitati ons of Secti on C. I. I.I.I for
columns and Section C. J. 1. 1.2 for beams have been
prequatificd for usc, and the calibrntcd safety factor, D, and
resistance facwr, , given in C.1.2. 1 and C. 1.2.2 shall be
pcrmi[{ed to apply. Th e usc of the provisions of Section
C.!.2.! and C. J .2.2 for other colullIlls and beams shall be
permitted, but the standard Q and factors for ration.a}
engineering analysis (Section AJ.2 (b) of. the. main
Specification) apply. The main Ame.rican SpeclficatlOll for
the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
Currentl y, the Direc t Strength Method prov id e~ no cxpl~ ci t

provisions for membe rs in tension, shcar, com bmed bendm g
and she'lI", web crippling, co mbined bending and web
crippli ng, or combined ax ia l load and bendin g ( beam~
colum ns). Fun her, nO provisions arc given for structura l
assc mblic!) or conn ecti ons <lnd joi nt s. As detailed in mai n
Spccification, Scct ion 55 J. 1.2, Ihe provisions of thc main
Specification, when appl icable, shall be used for all cases
listed above.
It shall be permitted to sub stit ute the nominal strength,
resistance factors, and safety factors from this Appendix for
the corresponding values in Secti ons 553.3.!, 553.4.l.l,.
553.4.1.2, 553.4.1.3, 553.4. 1.4, 554.6. 1.1. and 554.6.1.2 of
th e main Specilicalion.
For members of si tuations to which Ihe main Specification
is not appJicHblc, the Dircc t St rength Method of thi s
Ap pen dix Sh'1 1J be permitted to be med, liS :lppJicahl~ . TI~c
usage of the engineering analysis procedure, as detailed JIl
Section 55 11 .2 (b) of the mai n Specificati on:
Association of Stru ctural Engineers of tile fJhilippin es
CHAP IT. n
I.
app lirable provi siolls of 1I~c. main Spccificllt ion shall he

follo w ( ~ cI whelllh,~y f'XiSI ,
2.
;lIld
in cn!<l scd safety faclOrs, n, and reduced resi stance

facto rs, . shall be employed for strength when rat io n;1i
engincering analysis is conducted.
C. J .1.1 ,iI Prc-<Iualificd Columns
Unperformed columns that fall within [hc geometric and

material limitations given in Table C-l ~:hall be permitlcd 10
be design cd using the safe ty factor, il, and resistancc faclor.
, defined in Section C. 1.2. I.
c.1.1.1 b Prc-qllalilicd Beallls
Un perforated bca ms Ihal rail wi lhin the geomctric and

marcritll limitations gi ven in Table C-2 shall he pennillcd to
be designcd using (he s;lrety ractor. il, ~II}(I resistance faclor,
, de fined in Secti on C.1.2.2.
C.1.1.2 Elastic Buckling
Analysi s shall be uscd for the determination of th e clastic

buckling loads and/or moments used in this Appendix. For
columns, this includes the local, distortional, and overall
buckling loads (P,.,.(, Pnd , and P('f(" of Section C.!.2.!). For
beams, this includes the local, distortional, and overall
buckling moments (Ma (. Mm/, and Mat of Section C. ! .2.2).
In some cases, for a given column or beam, al! three modes
do not exist. In such cases, the non-existent mode shall be
igno red in the calculations of Sections C.1.2.1 and C.1.2.2.
The commentary {Q this Appendix provides guidance 011
appropriate anal ys is procedures ror clasti c buckling
dctcnninatio n.
M ct~li
S29:.J
C. I.2.1 Column Design

The nominal axial sirength jresisia/lce ]. fJ'l> shall be the
minimum of P"''' Fill, and Pm/ as gi vcn in Sec.tions C.l.2.1.1
to C. 1.2.1.3. For columns mceting the geometric and
material criteria or Section C.1.l.! <I, Qc and c shall be as
follows:
Q, = 1.80
(ASD)
$, = 0.85
(I,RFD)
For all other columns, Q and of [he main Specification,

Section 55! .1.2(b), shall appl y. The :lVailablc strength shall
be dctermined in accordance with applic"ablc mcthod in
Section 551.4 . or 551 .5 of the main Speci fi cation.
C.I.l.I .. Flexunll, Torsinllal, or FlexurnI-Torsional
Buckling
The Ilomina! axial strength, PIll"~ for flex ural, torsiona!, or
Oexural -torsiona! buckling shall be cidculatcd in accord.mcl'
with the following:
For",~1.5
(aJ
I~"
=(0.658),;
y>,
(Eq. C.1-2)
For I"~ ~ 1.5
(b)
p
III'
=(0.877)1'
...t;
(Eq. C.1-3)
.I"
where
(Eq. CI-4)
(Eq. C. I . I)
where
P,.
Pm
where
SlOe! and
C. 1.2 Members
C. I.t.3 Serviceability Determination
The hending deflection at any moment, M, due to Ilominnl

loads shall be pcrmiltcd to be determined by reducing the
gross moment of inertia, I g , to an effective momcnt or
inertia fOf deOeclioll, as given in Eq. C.l- L
Md
~~
::;:; Nomina! ncxural strength, M'I! defined in

Section C.1.2.2, but with M,. replaced by M in
all equations or Section C. (2.2
=:: Momcnt du e to nominal loads on membe r 10 be
conside.red (M ~ My)
A,F,.
(Eq. C.I-S)
= Minimum of the critical elastic column buckling
load in flexural, torsional , or flexural-torsional
buckling determined by analysis in accordance
with Section C.1.1.2.
c.J.l.l b Local Buckling

The no minal axial strength, Pur, for local buc kling shall be
calcu lated in acco rdance with the following:
I.
For AI S 0.776
(Eq. C. 1-6)
(E'I. C.1-7)
th
National Structural Code of the Pililippines 6 Edition Volume 1
s?ut)
CH AP TUl
~i
. Sl eel
;}llcj M (~ I,I I S
For 2.78 M,. i: M, .. ? O. 56M,
2.
wh crt'.
;~::'" ~ J----I~'rt
(Eq. C 1-8)
= A valu e as defined in Secti on C. J .2. ).1

= Critical clastic local column buckling lo,ld
determin ed by analys is in accordance with
Secli oll C. 1.1.2
:1.
L~ M
<)
(E'I. C I - IO)
where
36 M or
(Eq. C. I-I.1)
CEq. C. 1-14)
where
;;;: Criti cal clasti c lateral-torsional buckling momCn t
determined by anal ys is in accordance wilh
Secti on C. ! .1.2
(Eq. CI-15)
where
-Sf
= Gross section modulus referenced

fiber ill first yield
For J." > 0.561
I~", ~ [1- 0 21.JI~~ )0."](.!;~.!!.. )".<, P,
[I. .~.A::. -:._ ')
A1,,,. = A1,.
Thc nominal axi Hi strength, Pili" for distortional buck ling

shall be calculated in accordance with the followin g:
(10'1 _CI-9)
For M,.... > 2_78 M ,.
M,.".
CI.2.! c ()jstortional Buckling
2.
'0
1/,'
(O
the extreme
C.1.2.2h Local Buckling

The nomin al flex 1I 1'<1 I sl re ngth, M.". for local buckling shall
he calculated in accordance wil h the following:
1.
For /..( S 0. 776

(Eq . C. 1-16)
(Eq. C I - II)
2.
Fod, > 0_776
where
Py
Pml
= A valu e as given in Eq . C. 1-5

::;;: Critical clastic distorti onal column bucklin g load
determi ned by anal ysis in accordance wi th
Section C. 1.1.2.
Mill
(ASD)
Specifi cation.
l.
For Mm < O.56M.I'
)"-') (_':!
crt.
M ,W
)"-'
M ne
, -. JM,~
11.-1 ...-
(10'1. C. l-IS)
---M a l
= A val ue as defined jn Section C.1 .2.2. 1

;:;: Criti cal elastic local bucklin g mome nt
determined by analysis in accordance with
Scctioll C I.1.2
C.l .2.2c Distortional Buckling
The nominal fl exural strength , Mm/, for distortion:l l budl i
shall be calculated in accordance with the followil1 g:
I.
C.1.2.2a La(cral~Tor s ional Buckling

Th e nominal nexural strength, M ilt' . for lateral-torsional
buckling shall be. cal culated in a CCOrd<lIlCC with th e
foll owing:
1- 0. 15 M crt.
Mflt'
where
,= 0.90 (LRFD)
For all other beams, Q and of th e main Speci fi cati on,

Sec tion 55 I. 1.2.(b), shall appl y. 111e a vai lable st rength
[factored resista nce] shall be de te rm ined in accordallce wi th
appl icable meth od in Section 55 1.4, or 551.5 of th e main
[ [
0" 1. CI- 17)
C.1.2.2 Bealll Design

The nominal flexural strength, M,,, shall be the minimum of
M ilt'. MII { . and Mud as given in Section s C. 1.2.2. 1 to
C . 1.2.2.3. for beams meeting th e geometric and mat ena l
crite ria of Section C. 1.1.1.2, 0 " and , shall be as foll ows:
O,~1.67
=:
For ),,, S 0 .67 :\
(6'1 . CI !'))
2.
For 2" > 0 .673
lUI
:::: 1-0.2
Mad
(Eq. C. 1-12)
Association of Structura l Engineers of the Phil ippines
)'
"'5J(MM J0.5 M .I.

J
Cf d
(10'1 . C. J20)
where
(10'1. <:. 1-21 )
M..
M,.,,,
= A value as given in Eq. C.1.2.2"4
= Critical clastic distortional buckling moment
determined by analysis in accordan ce with

Sectioo C I.I.2
National" Struclural Code of the Philippines G'" Edition Volum e 1
~) ' 296
CHAPTEI1
!j .
Steel and Metats
Table C- I
LIInb Icf ~ CoI\IIMW.

For aU C_<ma;
boll <02
bolt < 159
4 <: D/t < 33
0.7 <: hoIb" <: 5.0
0.05 < O/b" < 0.41
Upped C..s.ctio ....

Simpl" lipo :
I<- .. ....,
P."
1)-
90"
..
> 340 Ify < 86 bI (593 MY. or (,o()!lO i<8/<m'l1

I'ot C-.:tiont with C:OIllf"ex lips:
D:z/t < 34
D:z/D< 2
~/Fy
'*
Complex Lips:
~)
I.
0,
.1
Lipped C.secoon with Web

Stiff.,.,.".(.)
~t<:
34
D;j~< 1
N~
.) Ih is permill>ed 10 .....ry (D" lip i!I penni1kd in ""Sic inw..nt

outwml, etc.)
ollh I.s IX'mllttoo to vary iDlllp Is oormdtted to ahcle lID, down.. etcOt
Far .OC'U! or two intamcduk- ltifienars.:
hoIl < 4Il9
Io-~-i
fC
l-&>ctkmf!U(~
b,,/t <: lW
6 < 0/1 <33
1.3 < hoIb" -< 2.7
0.05 ~ Olt.., < Q.l
"IFy> 340 IPT < 86 bj (593 MI'. OT Y.iO i<8/<m'l1

I\,jl < 137
bolt <: 56
O<O/I<:
1.5 < hoIbo 1.7
0.00
<:
01 b" '" 0.73
". W'
6ff, > 590 If,. <: 50 ~ (J.45 MY. or .352t11os/cm')1
Rack Uprlgftt
rC!~~
See C-5octian with Compb Lips
Hili
n..JI < 51)
r
T
1'"
N04~ :
bzl<-
b,
i'-
fO
...
~.- - ~
..
b,,/ t ""i!!IJ- t{!;

< 0/1 < (,
1.0 <: I\,jb. <: 1.2
D/I;,, {).n
E/Fy > nil !F~ <: ~ hi {476 Mf'lI <)I' ~'I(I ~/<m')1
- the a:ntMti~ IHmd r.aditliil
.. :r l ~ < 10~ whl!t"l:! r IS
1>" - C7Vef'OJl "'idth; D ...,.'<!roD Wp d..,.h.! I ~ ~ mql>/ol r.'IJ.*"ta<; ""
Association of Struclural Engineers of Ihe Philippines
._.1
M
eovertll deplf'
Table C2
c-sectJoru
stmple Ufl'$;
I--
For .U Csectklos
hoIl < 321
-oj
boft<75
........
0<0/1<34
1.5 < ho/bo " 17.0
I\,
0" 0lb" "0.10
lL-......Jt
44'" e" 9Ir

B/Fr " 421 /F y < 70 bi (483 Mr. oc 4920 kg! em1 )]
For C~OT6 with complex
lips:
OYI<: 34
Complex Ups ;
DlID" 2
D:3/1" 34
D:3/Dl" 1
Note:
a) Ih 1$ permitted to VAry (D, lip i. pt!fIIlittrd to .ngle inward or
outward)
b e., is
Upped C-StJons with Wtb
Stiffener
1<-""-1
,.r
h,,/1<l5S
b,,/I<58
14 <: D!t < 17

5,S" 1>0/1>0 <: 11.7
027 < D/bD < 0,56
oz
1 ~
9(t'
E/Fy "578 (Fy "51 ksi (352 MPa or 3590 kgleml)]

For all z..-:ti0IlB:
hoi I < 183
boll" n
Z-Sectiono
Simple Ups;
10" 011 < 16

2.5 < hoIb" < 1
0.15 0/1>0 '" 0.34

36< < 0 < 90"
E/Fy" 440 [Fy < 67 ktil (462 Ml'lI or 4710 k8l="H
For Z-sect:ioo<) with wrnplex lips;
Dz/I <: 34
Complex Lips:
~
b,
0, G,
I.
oyO<: 2
D:3/t < 34
D:l/Dl < 1
&,
0,
.1
National Stru ctural Cod e of the PI1ilippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
Umltatlons for ~WlltfIed aaaIM (COntInued)

ho/l<97
bolt < 467
O<d s/t<26 (d. =Depth of stiffener)
Hats (Decks) with Stiffened F1al18" in

Compression
A
fh,
0.14 < ho/bo < 0.87

0.88 < bo/hj < 5.4
0< n ~ 4 (n = Number of compression Ilange stiffeners)
E/Fy > 492 [Fy < 60 ksi (414 MFa or 4220 kg/cm')]
"';1:\1+-
Trapezoids (Decks) with Stiffened

Flange in Compression
r-b'i
~
I+-
.J
b,-+i T
ho/I < 203

boll < 231
0.42 < (ho/.tne)/bo < 1.91
1.10 < bo/b, < 3.38
0< I\: ~ 2 (I\: ':' Number of compression flange stiffeners)
Number of web stiffeners and/or folds)
o < nw S 2 (nw -
0< "t S 2 (nt Number of tension flange stiffeners)

52' < 9 < 84' (9 = Angle between web and horizontal plane)
E/Fy > 310 [Fy < 95 ksi (655 MFa or 6680 kg/em')
Note:
r I I < 10, where r is the centerline bend radius.
See Section 1.1.1.1 for definitions of other variables given in Table 1.1.1-2
SECTION <:;~~ .
SECOND<iliDl!:R ANALYSIS
P,
This Scclion C.2 addresses second-order an til ys is for

stru c tural systems comprised of moment fram es, braced
frames, shear wa!ls, or combinations thereof.
C.2.! General Rcquil'cmcnL'j
Members shall salisfy the provisions of Section 553.5 with

th e nominal COIIlI11I1 strengths Inominal axial rc:-;istanccj,
Pn, determ ined usin g K~ and Xx = 1.0 , as well as (,l X= 1.0 ,

ay= 1.0, e".. = 1.0. iHld e m .l .= 1.0. The required strengths
Ifaclored forces and moments) for Il1clnbcrs. con nections,
nlld other structural clements shall be determined llsing a

sccond~ordcr analysis as specified in this Sectio]). All
co mponent and connection deformations that co ntribute to
the lateral displacclllcn! of the structure shall be co nsidered
in the t.lnalysis.
;:: Required axial co mpressive strength Ifactored

;!xiai n)lllpressivc force], (N)
:.:. : Member yield slrenglh (;AF\., where A is the fuJI
unreduced cross-sec ti onal are a), (N)
= 1.6 (ASD)
~ 1.0 (LRFD)
III (;!ses where llexibilit y of other structural componcllts

such as connections, fl exible column base dctails. or
l1orizo!\wl trusses acting as diaphragms is modeled
explicitly ill the analysis. thc stii'fnesscs of th e other
st ruc tura l co mponent s sllall be reduced by a factor of 0.8.
If notio nal loads arc used. ill li eu of using rb < 1.0 where
> 0.5. rb = 1.0 shall be pcnnit(ed to be lIsed for all
members. provided that all Hddi tional notional load of
O.OO! Yi is "dded to the noti onal load rcquircd in Section
C.2.2.4.
(~P/Pr
<:'2.2.4 Nolionallonds
C.2.2 Design and Am'lysis Constraints
Noti onall o,lds shall be appli ed 10 the latera l framing system

,H:count for the effects of geometric imperfecti ons.
Notional loads arc lateral load s that arc applied al each
framing level and specificd in terms of the gravity loads
applied al that level. The gravity load used to determine the
notional load shall be equal to or greater than the gravity
load associated with the l()ad co mbination being eva!u~ted.
Noti onal loads shal l be applied in the direction th at add s 10
the destabili zing effects under the specilied load
co mbinatioll .
10
C.2.2.l General
The second-order analysis shall consider both the effec t of
loads acting on the deflected shape of a member between
joints or nodes (P-& effects) and the effect or loud s acting on
the displaced location of joints or nodcs in a structurc(P-6
effec ts ). It shall be permitted to perform fhe anal ys is using
any general sccond-order amllysis mct hod . Anal yses shall
b(~ conducted accordin g to the design and loading
requirements specified in Section 551. For the ASD, the
second-order analysis shall be carried out under 1.6 times
th e ASD load combinations and the results shall be divided
hy 1.6 to obtain th e required strengths at allowable load
levels.
A notional load, N; = (1/240) Yi shall be appl icd

independe ntly in two o[1hogonal directions as a lateral load
in all load combinations. Thi s load shall be in addition to
other latcral IOlHis, if any.
Ni
C2.2.2 Types of Aunlysis
Yi
It shall be permissible to carry out the second-order analysis

either on the out-or-plumb geometry without noti onal loads
or on the plumb geometry by appJying notional loads or
minimum latera! loads as defined in Section C.2.2.4.
For second-order clastic analysis, axial and fl ex ural stiffness

shall be reduced as specified in Section C.2.2.3.
= Notionallntcrnl load applied at level I, kips (N)

; Gravity load from the LRFD load combination
or i .6limes the J\ SD load combinati on applied
at level I, N
The notional load coefficien t of 11240 is based on an

assumed initial story ou t ~of-pluIl1bness ratio of 1/240.
Where a differcnt assumed out - of~ plumbness is justified , thc
notionnl load coefficient shall be pcnniHco to be (l(lj usted
proportionally to a value not less tha n 11500.
C.2.2.3 Reduced Axial

, and Flexural Stifrnes""
Flexural and axial stiffness shall be. reduced by using E* in
place of E as follows for a!1 members whose flexural and
axi~1 stiffncsscs arc co nsidered to contribut e to the lateral
stability of the. structure:
E*
= O.8rbE
(Eq. C2-1)
where
rb
= 1.0 for 0"1'11',:0 0.5

=4[0"1'11',.11 - al'll',.!] for 0.1',11',. > 0.5
National Structura l Code of the Pllilippilles 6[h Edition Volume 1
fj 300
C H I\PTH~
!i . Steel and Metals
This Section provides .design provisions or supplements to

Secti on 551 through 557.
C.3.1 Scope
Designs .~:!;:. Jl be made in accordance with the provi sions for
Load and Resistance FaClOr Design, or with the provisions
for Allowable Strength Design.
C.3.2.1 Ductility
In seismic design ca tegory I), E or F (as defined by
I\SCEJSEI 7), when materi al du ctility is dl:te rmin cd on the
basis of the local and uniform elo ngation cri teria of Section
C.3.3.I, cllrtain wall studs shall be limited to the dead load
of the curtain wall assem bly divided by it s surface area, but
no greater tllilll O.75kN/m 2 .
C.3.3 Loads
C .3.3.1 Nominal Loads
C.3.2 Olher Sleels
The nominal loads shall be as stipul atcd by the appli cable
The listi ng in Section C.3.1 shall not ex.cl ude the use of
steel up to ,\11<1 including 25 mill in thickness, ordered or
produced to othe r than the listed specifications. provided the
following rcq uireme lli s arc me l:
I.
2.
The steel shall conform 10 (he chelllical and meciwnic(ll

requi remcnt s of one of the listed specifications or othcr
publ ished specification.
The che mica! and mechanical properti es shall be
determincd by the producer, the su pplier. or the
purchaser, in accordance with the foll owing
specifications.
For coated sheets, ASTM A9241
A924M; for hal-rolled or cold-rolled sheel lind slrip.
ASTM AS681 A568M: for plate and bar. ASTM A61
A6M; for hollow structural sections, sllch tes ts shall be
nwcJc in accord ance with tlie requireme nt s of" A500 (for
c<!rilon sleel) or A847 (for IISLA steel).
J.
The coating propcrl ies of coated sheet shall be

de tc lill iue Li b y Ille I'rUf.Juccr, lilt.' suppl ier. or the
pu rchaser, ill accordance wilh ASTM A924/ A924M.
.L
The steel shall meet the req uireme nts of Secli n!) C.3.3.
5.
If the steel is to be \VeldC"~l. its suitability for th e

intended we lding process shall be established by the
produce.l". the supplier, or the purch <l~cr ill accordance
wilh A WS D 1.1 or D U as applicabl e.
building code under wh ich the Slnlcturc is designed or as

di ctated by the co nditi ons in volved . In (he absence of a
building code, the nominal loads Shlill be those stipulated in
the ASCEISEI 7.
C.3.3.l.1a Load Combinations for ASD
The structure and its components shall be designed so that
the allowable strengths equal or exceed the effects of the
nominal loads and load combinations as stipulated by the
applicable building code under which the structure is
designed or, in the absence of an applicable building code,
as slipulated in Ihe ASCE/SEI 7.
C.3.3.1.1b Load Factors and Load Combinations for
LRFD
The structure and its co mponent s shall be de signed so that
des ign strengths eq ual or excced the effects or the factored
loads and lond co mbinatioll s stipu lated by the applicable
building code under which the structure is designed or, in
the absence of an a ppli c ab le building code. as stipulat ed in
Ihe ASCE/SEI 7 .
C.3.4 Referenced Documents
The, following document s are rercrefl(~ed in Section C-3:
I.
American Inslilule of Sleel ConstlUclion (AISC), One

Easl Wacker Drive. Suite 700. Chi cago, Illinois 606011802: ANSI! AISC 360-05. Specificalion for Siruciural
Steel Buildings
2.
Amcrican Iron and Steel inslitutc (A ISI), 1140

ConnecliclIl Avenue. NW, Washin gton, DC 20036:
If th e idenlificalion lind documentalion of Ihe producli on of

Ihl! sled have not heen established , th e ll in addition to
rcquirC!l1lmts (I) through (5), the manufacturer of the cold
formed steel product shall establi sh that the yield stress and
t(:'lls il ~ strength of the IlHlstcr coi l <lrc al l e a~ t 10 percent
!!n'ilh: 1
than
sJJL'Cilicd
III
the
rcf"e rcm:cd
AISI S211-07 . North Ameri can Siandard for Coldrormed S Ie!.! I pmming - Lateral Design A ISI S90804,
Base Test Method fo r Purlins Supporti ng a standing
Sea m Roof Systcm
pu blis hcd
s p~ ,.: i fi~ali on.
3.
Amcrica n Sociely of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801

Alexande r J3ell Dri ve, Reston VA, 20191: ASCE/SEI
7-05. Minimum Design Loads in Bui ldings and Other
Structures
C HAP 1T H
4.
Vole/din g Code-Sheet Stee l A WS C I.I /CI. I M-2000,
sec tion. The safel y fa..-wr ,HI d th e resistance ra<: lOr prov id ed
in this section shall be applied to the nomina! strength. M".
calculated by r~l. 554 .6.1.2-1 10 determine the availab le
strengths ill accorda nce with the appli cli ble method ill
Scclion 551 .4 or 55 1.5.
Res istance Weld ing
C.3.S Tension Members

strength, 1;" shall be the smallest value obtained in
accordance with the limit States oj" (a). (b) and (c). Unless
otherwise specified. Ihe corresponding safety faclOr am.! the
rcsislancc faclor provided in thi s section shall be lIsed to
determine the available strengths in accordance with (he
applicable method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
0,= 167 (ASD)
= 0.90 (LRFD)
:::: Nominal strength of member when loaded il;

tensi on
:;;: Gross arc a of cross section
:::: Design yield sucss as de lermined in accord ance
with Section 55 1.7. 1
r 'Of
q,,,=0.90
(ASD)
. ; ..
(LRFD)
where
= Reduction factor determin ed in accordance with
AISI S908
See Section 553.3.1. I for definitions of S,. and F.r-
Flange Fastened 10 a Standing Scum Roof

These prov isions shall apply to Z-scctiOllS <:oncentrica!ly
loaded along their longitudinal axi s, with -only one flange
<lllached 10 standing seam roof panels. Allcnwli vely, de sign
values for a particular system shall be pcrmined 1O be based
on discret e point bracing locations, or on tests in accordan ce
with Section 556.
rupture in net secti on away from connection

(Eq. C32)
0,= 2.00 (ASD)
1,= 0.75
(LRFD)
where
3.
Q,,=1.67
C.3_6_2 Compression of Z-Section Members Having One
where
F"
(Eq . CJ:!)
For yielding in gross sectio n
(Eq . C31)
A"
:)30 1
discrete point bracing and thl! provis ions of Secti on

553.3. 1.2. 1. o r shall be c.:;:llculatcd in "Iccordance with thi s
For axially loaded tension members, the nominal tensile
2.
Slee l and Metal
Amcrican Welding Sodcty (AWS ), 550 N.W . I...cJcunc

Road, Miami , Florida 33 J 35:A WS D 1.3-98, Sl l"ucltJral
RCcolllllwnucd Practices for
I.
= Net area of cross section
= Tensile strength as specified in eilher Section

SS 1.2 . 1 or SS 1.2.3.2
The nominal axial strength of simple span or continuous Zsec tions sh all be calcul :lted in acco rdance with (a) and (b ).
Unless otherwise specified, the safety fa<:lor and the
resistance factor provided in thi s section shall be used to
de tcnninc the available strengthS in accordance with the
applicable method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
J.
For weak axis available strength

(Eq. C.34)
For rupture in net section at connection
The available tensile strength shall also be limited by

Sections 555.2.7, 555.3, and 555.5 for tellsion members
using welded connections, bolted connections. and screw
connections.
Q= 1.80 (ASD)
= 0.85(LRFD)
where
<l .
For dlt ::; 90

ko/ = 0.36
C.3.6 Light-Frame Steel Construction

In ;]ddilion 10 th e cold-formed steel framing standards lisled
in Section 554.4. Ihe followin g standard shall be followed,
b.
2501
0/
Light-framed shear wall s, diagona l strap bracing (lilat

is p;'1rt of a structural w,l ll) and diaph ragms to resist
wind. seismi c and other in-plane lat eral loads sha! 1 be
designed in <l ccordance with AISI S2 13.
C.3.6.l Flexural Meml>ers Having One Flange Fastened

to a Standing Scam Roof System
The available flexural strength of a C- or Z-section, loaded
in a plane parallel to the web with the top flange supporting
a standing seam rooC system shall be determined llsing
130
d
k = 0.72 - --
as applicable:
1.
For 90 lit
c.
(Eq. C.35)
For til t > D O

k,,j= 0.20
:::: Reduction factor determined from uplift tests
= Full unreduced cross-sectional area of Z-scctioll.

= Z-section depth
performed usi ng AISI S908

d
= Z-scction thickness.
See Section 553.3.1.1 for definition of F,..
National Stru ctural Code of tile PI1ilippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
~530~
C Hfl. I:>TE:li 5 SlO el and Metals
Eq. 554.6. J -4-1 shall be limited to roof sysle mg mccling the
C.3.7 Welded Connections
fo llowing con d itions:
Welded l.:on ncclions in whic h Ihe lh i {. knc ~s of Ilw Ihinncst
Purlin th ickness, I.:n mill :::; ,::: ).22 mill
b.
150 mm ::; d ::; 300 111111
c.
Flimges arc edge stiffened compression clemcnts
Except as muddicd herein, arc clds
d.
70 "" dlt Oo 170
c.
2.8 S d / b < 5, where b= Z section flange width.
one of the the con nected parts is 5 mm or less ill th ic kn ess

shall be made in accordance wi th AWS D1 3. Welders and
weldi ng procedures shall e qualified as specified in AWS
flange flnr width
wilh ANSJlII ISC360.
I6 5
g.
OOl h flanges arc prevented from moving hltcrall y at the

supports
h.
Yield stress,
2.
The available s trength about the strong axis shall be

determined in acco rdance with Section 553.4.1 and
1'~\. :5 483
< 50
steel where at Icas!
D 1.3. These provisions arc intended to co ver the welding
Res istance welds shall be made in conformance wit h the

procedures given in AWS C I .I or AWS CIJ .
Tabl e C.31
MPa
Welding
553.4.1.1.
' - '- -
In addition to the provisions pro vided in Section 554.6.2. 1.
for load combinations that include wind uplift, the nominal

wind load shall be peflnitl ed 10 be multiplied by 0.67
provided the tested system and wind load evalu ation
satisfies the foll owin g co nditions:
I. The roof system is tes ted in accordance with AISI

S906.
Th e wind load is calcu laled using ASCfJSEI 7 for
components and cladding, Method I (Simplified
Proced ure) or Method 2 (Analytical Procedure).
3.
Th e arca of the roof bei ng evalu.alcci is in Zone 2 (edge

zone) or ZOll e 3 (corn er zone), as defined in ASCE/SEI
7. i.e. Ihe 0.67 faclor does nOl appl y 10 Ih e field of Ihe
roof (Zone I).
4.
The base metal thickness of the standing seam roof

panel is greater than or eq ual to 0.60 mIll and less than
or equal to 0.80 mill.
5.
For trapezo idal profile standin g seam roof panels, the

dis tance between sidelaps is no greater than 600 ITIm.
6.
For vertical rib pro file sta nding scam f(Jof panels, the
di stance betw een sideJ aps is no greate r tha n 450 Illlll .
Th e observ ed failure mode of the test ed svstem is o rH~
of Ihe foll owing:
(i) The standing scam roof clip mechanically fai!.s
by sepa rat ing from {ile panel side lap

(ii)Thc st and ing sca m roof clip mechanically fails
by the sliding lab separating from Ihe stationary basco
Groove
. But(
..
Arc
~ ..
Weld
Sheel
10
sheet
P() ~;i ti on
Covered
Weldin Position
~quare
Con~~ .
C.3.6.3 Strength of Standing Scam Roof Panel Systems
2.
Oil
posi(ions as li sted in Table C.3.1 .
f.
7.
connected p<u1 is grea ter than :') mill shall be in ,-icco rdan cc
it.
F
H
l'ilje'
WOld,
. 'Up '
orT
F
1-1
11
Fla{e
. Bevel
drOOve
F
11
Flare'
Weld
F
II
OH
0 11
OH
Shcctto
Support
F
11
11
ing
011
0 11
( I _ 031. Ii _
- hOfi lOnI.ll. V -_ \erll\;al. 011 _ O'Ct head)
v'''
Groove
0 1-1
Member
AA
~~.~:
Weld
C.3 .8 Bolted Connections

In add ition to the design criteria gi ven in Section C3 .8 of
thi s Specification, the following design requirements shall
also be followed for bolted connecti ons used for coJdform ed steel structu ral members in which the thi ck ness of
the thinnest connected part is less than 4.76 mm. Bolted
connections in whi ch the thickness of the thinnest con nected
parr is equal to or greater than 4.76 nlln shall be in
acco rdance wilh ANS I IA ISC360.
The holes for bolts shal! not exceed the sizes specified in
Table C.3-2, except that larger hol es arc pcrmitted to be.
used in colullln base details or st ructu ral systems connected
to concrete walls.
Standard holcs shall be lIsed ill bolted connections, except
that oversized and slotted holes shal1 be permitted to be
used as approved by the designer. The length of sloued
hol es shall be nor mal to the direction of the shear lond.
Washers or backup plates 511<111 be installed over oversized
or slotted holes in an outer ply unless suitabl e performan ce
is demonstrat ed by tests in accordance with Secti on 556. In
the situati on where the holes occurs within the lap of lapped
an d nested lee members, the above requirements regardin g
the direction of the slot and the usc of was hers shall be
Associa tion o f Structural Engineers of the Philippines
permittcd not to apply, subject to the following limits:

I.
12.7111111 diamctcr boll.,> only,
2.
Maximulll slot size is 14.3 mm x 22.2

vertically,
Maximum oversize hole is 16 mm diametcr,
4.
Minimum member thickness is 1.52
5.
Maximum mcmbcr yield :.;tress 410 MPa,
6.
Minimum lap length measured from center of frame to

end of lap is 1.5 times the member depth,
Illlll
mll1
slotted
nominal,
Table C3-2
Nominal
Bolt
Diameter,
d
< 12.7
MO.8
d+I.6
212.7
MI.6
d+3.2
(d+0.8) by
(d+6.4)
(d+0.8) by
(2';) eI)
(d+1.6) by
(d+6.4)
(MI.6) by
(2';)d)
C.3.S.1 Shear, Spacing and Edge Distance

The nominal shear strength, PII , of the connected part as
affected by spacing and edge distance in the direction of
applied force shall be calculated in accordance with Eq.C36, The corresponding safety factor and the resistance factor
provided in this section shall be used to determinc the
available strength in accordance with the applicable method
in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
(F.q. C3-6)
When I'~I F" 2 1.08
(b)
For oversized and slotted hole:.;, the distance between edges

of two adjacent holes and the distance measured from the
edge of the hole to the end or other boundary of the
connecting member in the line of stress shall not be less
than the value of e-(dhl2), in which e is the required
distance used in Eq. C3-G, and dh is the diameter of a
standard hole defined in Table C.3-2, In 110 case shall the
clear distance between edges of two adjacent holes be less
than 2d and the distance between the edge of the hole and
the end of the member be less than d.
C3.8,2 Rupture in Net Section (Shear Lag)
mOl
(a)
In addition, the minimum distance between centers or bolt

holes shall provide sufficient clearance I'DI' bol! heads, nuts,
washers and the wrench but shall not be less than 3 times
the nominal bolt diameter, d. also, the distance from the
center of any standard hole to the end or other boundary of
the connecting member shall not be less than I Y2 d.
= 2.00
(ASD)
(ASD)
(a)
For flat sheet connections not having staggered hole

patterns
(Eq. C3-7)
(J)
When washers arc provided under both the bolt head

and the nut
For single bolt, or a single row of bolts perpendicular to the

force
(Eq. C3-8)
= 0.70 (LRPD)
When Pu / Fsy , 1.08
n = 2.22
The nomina! tensile strength of a bolted member shall be

determined in accordance with Section 553. For rupture in
the effective net section of the connected part, the nominal
tensile strength, PI! shall be determined in accordance with
this section. Unless othcrwise spccified, tbe corresponding
safety factor and the resistance factor provided in this
section shall be used to determine the available strengths in
accordance with the applicable method in Section 551.4 or
551.5.
For multiple bollS in the line parallel to the force
= 0.60 (LRFD)
where
f~
= FII
(Eq. C3-9)
For double shear:

:::: Nominal strength per boll
Distance measured in line of force from center of
a standard hole to nearest edge of a adjacent hole
or to end of connected part.
:::: Thickness of thinnest connected part
:::: Tensile strength of connected part as specified in
Section 551.2.1,551.2.2 or 55 1.2.3.
:::: Yield stress of connected part as specified in
Section 551.2.1,551.2.2 or 55 1.2.3.
= 2.00
(ASD)
l' = 0.65 (LRFD)
(ASD)
1 = (J.55 (LRFD)
:.0:
F,I)
For single shear:
n = 2.22
(2) When either washers are not provided undcr the bolt
head and the nut, or only one washer is provided under
either the bolt head or the nul
th
National Structural Code of tile Philippines 6 EcJition Volurnc~l
CHAI'TE:n
S':Wif
~i
. Steel
all{j
Metals
For single bolt . or <I single row of bolts peqJcnd ic ul ar to the

force
F = (2.5,-d/,)<'
1"1/ -< /'
f
(Eq. C 3- 11)
2_22 (ASD)
::::: Nominal Tensile stress in Oat sheet

= Nominal bolt diam eter
= Shee t wid th di vided by num be r of bolt holes in
cross secti on being analyzed (w hen evaluati ng
!',)
::::: Tcnsile strength of cOll ncct ed part as spccified in
Secti on 55 1.2.1, 551.2.2 Or 551.2. 3.
I~
l~,
= Dist;!lH;e from shear plane to ce ntroid of the
cross
= Lengt h of cO llllec tion
C.3 .H.3 Shear ~lIId Tension in HoU~
= Net Area of connected,pan
(b) Fo r flat sheet con nectio ns hnving staggered ho le

patic lll s
The nominal bolt strength, PII , resu lti ng from shear. {cnsi(w
or of combination of shear and tension shall be calc ulated ill
accordan ce wi th th is secti on. The correspondi ng safety
factor and the res istance factor prov ided in Table C.3-3
shall be used to determ ine the available strengths in
accordance with Ihe appl ica ble mcthod in Section 551..4 or
55 1.5.
(Eq.C. 3-17)
whe re
(Eq. C3- 12)

Q = 2.22 (ASD)
= 0.65
= determined in accordance wit h Eqs. E3.2-2 to

E3.2-5.
= 0.90 [A, -- nbdhl + (.[s'214g) t]
Eq. C.3- 13)
= Gross area of mem ber
= Lo ngitudi nal center-Io-cen ter spac ing of any tw o
consecutive holes
= Transverse ceni er-Io-eelller spac ing between
fastener gauge lines
:::: Num be r of bolt holes ill the cross secti on being
an alyzed
= Diameter of a slandard hole
A"
A,
g
nb
db
::;: Gross cross-sectional arca of bolt

:::: Nominal strength ksi (M Pa) is determined in
accordance with (a) or (b) as foll ows:
(LI~FD )
where
F,
(E(I. C.3- 16) blli IJ ~ 0.5.
where
= 0.65 (LRFD)
where
A"
U = 1.0 -- 0.3(, xli. dl.9
(Eq. C3- 10)
/I
For multiple boils in Ihe linc parall el 10 the force
Q =
(2) For channc l mcmbcrs having two or more bolts in the

line or r{)n. l~
(a) When bolts are subjected to shear onl y or tcnsio n only

F" shall be given by Fm. or Fill in Table C.3 -3.
Co rrespo nding safety and resistance factor. Q and ,
shall be accordance with Tablc C. 3-3.
The pullover stre ngth of the connected sheet at the bolt
head, nut or washer shall bc considered where boll
te nsion is involved. See Section 555.6.
(b) When b olts arc su bjected to a co mbination of shear and
tension, F" . isgi vcn by F'II I ill Eq .C.3-1 8 or C.3- 19 as
fo llows
See Sec tion C.3.8. 1 for the defini tion of I.
For ASD
(c) For other than n at sheet
F'fI1 ::;: 1.3 F'll - QF",/v:S; 1'~11
Fil"
(Eg. C.3- 14)

Q
= 2_22
(AS D)
= 0.65 (LRFD)
(Eq. CJ- J 8)
For LRFD
w here
AI'
/:
= A"U, effec tive net area wi th U defin ed as

fol lows :
:::: I .U fo r members when lhe load is lransm iHf..'d
di rectl y to all of the cross-secti ona l cleme nts.
Otherwise, the reduction coefficient U is
determined as foll ows:
( I ) For A ngl e member:-; having two or more bolt s in the
li ne o f force
u = 1.0 -
1.20 xlL < 119 (Eq. C.3- 15) hut U ~ 004
Association of Slnlclum! Engineers of the Philippines
(Ell. C.3- i 0)
F"..
whc re
F'III
I'~' I
":".
F"
s)
Nomi nal tcns ile stress modified 10 include 111\.~

effc(;ls of required shear stress, MPa
= Nominal tensile stress from Table (:,1-1
;:: Nominal shear stress from THble C.3 -3
:::: Required :o;hear stress, MPa
;:: Safety factor for shear from Table C.1-3
:::: Resistallce factor for shear from Table C.3-3
;::
...,~.
In addition, the required shear stress,!.., shall not cx(;eed the

allowable shear stress, f~", I 12 (ASD) or (he design shear
stress, $ F",. (LRFIl), of the fasteoer.
Table C.3 3
Nominal Tensile and Shear
. for Bolts
Safely
Factqr
Boll'
Fa~tor
q)
Mpa
' Mp"
:!.15
279
165
2.25
.110
IR6
621
372
621
496
696
407
0 .75
6.4 mm S d < ! 2.7 mm, when threads

.lre not excluded frol1l shea r :Illes
A449 Bolts
6.4 111m Sd < 12.7 111m, when threads
Slre,i Pi.
streSs Pnl
2.00
\I,'hell threads <lfe not excluded from

shear
696
2.4
0.65
621
558
,\2-1
558
,1%
776
465
776
621
A490 Bolts
when threads arc not excluded from
shea r
In Table C.3-3, the shear st rength shall apply LO bolls in
holes a$ limited by Table C.3-2. Washers or back-up plates
shall be installed over long-s Jollcd holes and the c<lpaci ty of
connections ll sing long-slotted holes shall be determin ed by
load tests in accordance with Section 556.
C.3.S.3.1a Connection Shear Limited by End [)i!;lmlcc
The nominal shear strength per screw, 1"11 shall not exceed
that calcu l<lIcd in accordance with Eq. C.3-20 where the
di stance to an end of the con nected pm1 is parallel to the
line of the applied force. The safety factor and the resistance
factor provided in this section shall be used to determine the
available strengths in accordan ce with the applicable
method in Section 551.4 or 551.5.
National Structural Code of Ole Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
~)
30G
CHJ\PT [H
~j .
Steel and tv-tetal:;
(liq.Cl20)
{) - ).00 (AS D)
mct hod in Sl'l.:liol1 551.4 or 551 5.

(13'1. C.322)
= 0.50 (I .R !'D)
when.'.
('
(Eq. CJ231
= Thickness of pari in which end (jisllUlce is

Illcasurcd
= Distance measured in lille of for!';c from center of
11 standard hole to nearest end of con nected pan.
= Tensile strcngth of pall in '::ilich end distan<.:c is
For bolted t:ollncctiolls
= 2.22 (ASD)
n = 2.50
(AS D)
At bcamwcnd connec tions, where one or more flanges arc

coped and failure might occur along a plane through the
fasteners, the nomin al shear strcngth, Vn shall be calculated
in accordance with Eq, C.3 21. The safcIY factor and Ihe
resistance factor provided in this section shall be used to
determine the available strengths in accordance with thc
applicable method in Sect ion 551.4 or 551.5.
Gross area subject 10 shear

Net arca subject to shear
Net area subj ect 10 tension
(Eq.C.321)
Q
= 2.00
(ASD)
= 0.75 (LRFD)
where
A"."
II".,
"
d"
Fu
t = 0.60 (/'RI'O)
wllcrc
C.3.9.1 Shear Rupture
0.65 (LRI'D )
For welded connections
measured.
C.3.9 Rupture
t=
= (h",<, - nd/j)t
= Coped flat web depth
= Number of holes in cri ti cal plane
= Hole diam eter
= Tensile strc ngth of connected pMt as specificd in
Section 551.2. 1 or 551.2.2
= Thickness of coped web
C.3.9.2 Tension Rupture

The av'lilable tensile strength along a path in the affected
elements of connected members shall be determined by
Section 555.2.7 or 555.3.2 for welded or boited
connections, respectiv ely.
C.3.9.3 llIock Shear Uuplure
When the thickness of the thinncst connected part is less
than 4.76111111, the block shear rupturc nominal strength, N",

sha ll be determined in accordance with thi s sec tion.
Connections in whi ch the thi ckness of Ihe thinnest
connected part is equal to or greater than 4.76 mm shall be
in accordance with ANSI/ AIS C-360.
The nominal block shear rupture strength, R , shall be
"
determined as the lesser of Eqs. C.322 and C.3-23. The
corresponding safety factor and the resistance factor
provided in thi s section shall bc used to determine the
avai lable strengths in accordance with the applicable
NSCP C10110
Chapter 6
WOOD
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium I
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines lion
Tel. No: (+632) 4100483
Fax No.: (+632) 4118606
Email: .ll5.l)on!i!l.@.lgmai!.com
Website: http://www.aseponline.org
111
CHM)T F n G
VI/ OO(j
() 1
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6 . WOOf) .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
SECTION 60 1 - GENERA L ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
601.1 Scope ..
60 1.2 Design Method ........ ..... ..... ..... ... ..
...... 4
. ..... 4
SECTl () N 602 - DEFI NITI ON S ..................................................................... .'................................................. ,....................... 4
602.1 Definitions ..
........ 4
SECTION 603 - MINIMUM QUA LITY ................................................................................................................................. 5
I
I
603.1 Quality and Idcnlifical;oll ... ... ...... .. ....... ...... .

603.2 Minimum Capacity or Grade ....... ........................... .
603.3 Timber COllllectors and Fasteners ....
603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture ,., .
..5
... 5
.... 5
. .... 6
SECTION 604 - DESIGN AND CONSTIWCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 7
604.1 General.
...7
Part 1 - nequircmcnts AppJie3ulc (0 All Design
Methods ....................... " ....................................................... "" ........ 7
SECTION 605 - DECA Y AND TERMITE PROTECTION .................................................................. ,.............................. 7

.. .. . 7
.7
.... 7
605. 1 Preparation of Building Site ....

605.2 Wood Suppon Embedded in Grou nd ..
605.3 Under-Floor Clearance .. ..
605.4 Plales, Sills and Sleepers ...
605.5 Columns and PosIS..... .......... .
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete Wall s
.... 8
.8
..8
.... 8
605.7 Under-Floor Ventilation .. .
... 8
....... 8
605. 8 Wood <1nd Earlh Separation ............................................... .
605.9 Wood Supporting Roofs and Floo rs ..

605.10 Moisture Comcnl of Trcatcd Wood ..
605 .11 Retaining Walls ...... .
605.12 Weather Exposure ... ....... .... ....
605.13 WalerSplash .. ..
........... .... .......... .... .. ..
.. ....
' 8
....... . 8
...8.
.. ... 9
SECTION 606 -WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY OR CONCRETE .............. ,................ ,...................... ,.. ,.................. , 9
..... ............. 9
.... 9
606.1 Dead Load ...

606.2 Hori zontal Force ..
SECTION 607 - WALL FRAMING ................................................................................................... ,......... ,......................... : 9

SECTION 608 - FLOOR FRAMING ............................... ,................ ,.................................................. ,....................... ,........ 10
SECTION 609 - EXTERIOn WALL COVERINGS .......................................................... ,........................................ :........ 12
.. 12
..... 12
......... 12
.. ... 12
.. 12
.. ........... 12
... I3
609.1 Gen eral.

609.2 Sidiug ......... .......... ... ..
609.3 Pl ywood .. .
609.4 Shingles or Shakes ..
609 .5 Parlicleboard ..... .
609.6 Hardboard .. .... . ................ .. .
609.7 Nailing..... . ..... .. ........................ ...... ........... .. . .
SECTI () N 610 - INTER! () R P A NELIN G .. ,.... ,.... ,............... ,..... ,.... :.......................... ,....................................................... ,.. 13
National S tructural Code o f U1e Philippines 6
th
Ed ition Volume 1
62
CHAPlLfi 6 . Wood
SECTION 61 I . SHEATHING ............................................................................................................................................... 14

6 J I" I Structural Floor Sheathing ..
61 J.2 Structural Roof Sheathing ..
.. ................. 14
...... 14
SECTION 612 - MECHANICALLYLAMINATED FLOORS AND DECKS ................................................................. 14

SECTION 613 . POST-BEAM CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................................ 14
SECTION 614 WOOD SHEAR WALLS AND DIAI'HRAGMS .............................................. ....................................... 15
614.1 General ..
.. .. ............. 1,')
614.2 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal Forces Contributed by Mas(wry and Concrctc ..................................... Ie
614.3 Wood Diaphragms..
............................. 16
614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms ..
.............................
17
614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4 ..
. ...... ........
. ..................... II
614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms ..
. .................................................. 18
SECTION 615 . STRESSES ................................................................................................................................................... 18

615.1 General ..
615. J.I Repetitive Member System ..

615.2 Stresses in Piles Used as Structural Members ..
6iS.3 Adjustment of Stresses ........................................................................... .
SECTION 616 HORIZONTAL MEMBER
6i6.1
616.2
616.3
6 J 6.4
.. ..................... 18
.. ................. I g
. ............................................ IS
........... .... 19
DESIGN ................................................................................................... 22
Beam Span ..
................. 2?
.......................... 2;
............................. 27
................ 22
. ..................................... 2!
Flexure ..
Horizontal Shear.
Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams ..

6 J 6.5 Design of Joints in Shear ..
616.6 Compression Perpendicular to Grain ..
616.7 Lateral Support..
.................
. .............. ..
616.8 Lateral SUPPO!1 of Arches, Compression
Chords of Trusses and Studs ..
. ............ 23
.......... 2:l
............. 24
SECTION 617 COLUMN DESIGN ..................................................................................................................................... 24

617.1 Column Classifications..
617.2 Limitation on lid Ratio..
617.3 Simple Solid-Columll Design.
617.4 'rapered Colunlns ............ ........................ ........................................................................
SECTION 618 FLEXURAL AND AXIAL
. ................... 24
. .............. 24
... ,............................ 24
.... 25
LOADING COMBlNED ........................................................................... 25
618.1 Flexure and Axial Tension ............................... .

......... 26
618.2 Flexure and Axial Compression ............................................................................................................ .
. ... 26
. ... 2()
618.3 Spaced Columns
........................................................................................... .
6 J 8.4 Truss Compression Chords..
. ................... ..
....................... 26
..... 21
618.5 Compression at Angle to Grain ............................................................ .
SECTION 619 . TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FASTENERS ........................................................................................ 2'7
619.1
619.2
619.3
619.4
Gelleral ................... .......................... ......................................................

Bolts...
...............................
Nails und Spikes..
Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors..

619.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners.
....................... ..............
............................................ ..................
619.5.2 Spike Grids.
..... 2"1
..27
.. ...... 27
.. .... 28
.. .. 28
........ 28
SECTION 620 - CONVENTIONAL LlGHTFRAME CONSTRUCTION DESIGN PROVISIONS ............................ 28

620.1 General ............................................................................................................. ..
620.2 Design of Portions........... ............................
............... .
620J Additional
Requirements for Conventional Construction in High-wind Areas.

.... 29
29
...29
G ",
620.4 Addit ional R(:qlliremcllI s for Conven ti ona l CU llslnKlioll ill Se ismic Zone 2
620.5 Additional Requirements for COllve ntional Consllw:tioll in Seismic ZO IW 4 " .
620.6 G irders
620.7 Floor Jois ts ..
620.8 Subnoorin g ..
620.9 Part icle boa rd Undcrlaymcnt.
620.10 Wall Fram ing"
""""""""" """" "" """""."
.... 2t)
,,"" 29
.JO
.30
.... 31
..31
"".3 1
SECTION 621 - METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSS DESIGN.".""""""".""".""""" .. "".""""".".".".".,,34
62 J. J Design and Fabrication..
.. ... ........ ...... ""
621.2 Performance ........ .................................... ... ,'

621.3 Jn ~ PJant Inspection .... .
621.4 M arkin g
.. 34
. """" " 34
." 34
" 34
SECTION 622 - USE OF MACHINE GRADED LUMBER (MGL)" ... ""." ................................................ " .................... 35
622. 1 General "." .... "" .. " ................. . "." .. "
622.2 Design Properties for Machine Graded Lumber .....

6223 Des ign Us in g Machine Graded Lumber ........................ .. .
622.4 Prese rvat ive Treatment ............................................ .
622.5 Mois ture Co nt em .

622.6 Markings """""""",,,, ",,""",,",, " """" .,, "" """. """"" " " ."
National Structural Code of th e Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
........ "" .. " ..... " .. ,," 35

...,," 35
. . ." .. 35
... 35
"" 35
" 3S
CHAPTER 6
WOOD
FIBERBOAHn is a fih rous-fell ed, homogeneous P'U1ci

made from li gnocellu los ic libel'S (usua ll y wood or SUgiU
<: alH,~ bagasse) lIlld havin g 11 de llsity o f kss than 497 kg/m.l
but morc than 160 kg/ nr',
SECTION 601
GENERAL
601.1 Scope
T he qu al ity and design of wood membe rs an d their
fa stenings shall co nform
\0
the pro visions of Ihis chapter.
601.2 Desigll Method

Des ig n shall be based
Oil
one o f the foll owing methods:
601.2.1 Allowable Stress Dcsigll (ASD).

Design usi ng alhlWit b!c stress design methods shall res ist
th e different load cO lllbinations in ac(';o rd ancc wi th th e
app licabJe rcql]irCIllCllis of Section 604.
FOREST PRODUCTS RESEAR C H AND DEVELOP_

MENT INSTITUTE (FPIWI) is the Department 01'
Science and Tcdlll ology's (DOST) rcsearch and
development arlll on forcs t prod ucts utili zation. It !"
mandated 10 conduct basic an d ap pli ed research to help the
woodHusing ind ustries di sscmirwl c in ronnati on ;:1l 1d
technologies on forest produ cls \0 end users,
GLUED BUILT-UP MEMBERS a rc st ruc tural cle mc",s.
the sections of which arc composed of built -up lumbe r,
wood structural pan els or wood structura l panels in
co mbination wi th lumber, all pa rts bonded IOgcther Wi lh

adhesive.
GRADE (Lumber) , th e cJass ili cat io ll or lumber in regard
to strength and utility in accord ance with th e grading rules
of an approved lumber gnloin g agc l1 CY.
(0) .2.2 Conventional Light-Frame Construction.
The design and construction of conventional li ght -fram e

wood slnJ clUrc.s shall be in accordance with th e applicabl e
rcquircmcllIs of Section 604 and the NSCP Volume 3 on
'-lo usi ng.
MACHINE GRADED LUMBER (MGL) is a IUlllbu

evalu atcd by a mach ine usi ng <1 n on~dc$t ruc ti ve lesl <Iu d
sorted into different stress grades.
SECTION 602
DEFINITIONS
'"11(,,"11
602. 1 Definitions
The following tefm s used in thi s chapter shall hnve the

me anin gs indi cated in this section:
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGM is a diaphragm ill whi ch all
"ht.::;ltll i ng edges not occun'ing on framin g mem be rs are
S LlPI' { H ' (~'d on and connected to blocking.
BR,\ C J::Jl WALL LINE is a scrics of braced Wil li pa ll cls
ill a si ngic story that meets the requiremellts of Secti on
620. 11 ),,\.
CO NVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME
CO NSTR UCTION is a type o r COll s tlllCt ioJl in whi ch the
pr imm)' stJ'UclUral clement s nrc formed by a system of
re petiti ve wo()(I rr;l ming members.
I)lAl'l-IRAGM is
HARDBOARD is a fib rotl s (cit cd , homogeneolls panel

made from lignocellul osic fi bers co nsolidated under hc,i\
and pressure in a h OI press 10 a de nsit y not less than Ij\ i )
kg/Ill'.
il
hori z.ontal or nearl y horizontal sys tem
actin g to tra nsmit late ral forces to the ve rti cal resisti ng
C k~ Jll e nI S. Wh en the term "diaphragm is used, it incl udes
hori l,OIHal bracing systcms.
MOISTURE CONTENT (M e) is the

o f moist ure
in wood, usuall y measu red as the p:!rcc nt age of w;lt er to tli!
oven dry wei ght of the wood .
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber) refers to th e co mmercial si?-i.:

designation of width and depth , in standard sawn lUlllh~;
grades; somewhat larger th an the standard nct size \i1
dressed lurnber.
NORMAL LOADING . a dcs igll load that stresse':
mcmber or fastening to the full all owable stress tabula{c, '
thi s chapter. This loadin g may be appli ed for appro xim;"
J() years, eit her continuously o r cum ulativc/ y, and 90
pe rcc nt of th is load may be applied fo r the remainder of tl),;
lire of' th e mcmber or fasteni ng.
I)ARTJCLEBOARD is a malltlfactured pa nel pn"in,
co nsistin g o f pal1icies of wood or combinations of ':,'0.,, ;
particles and wood fi bers bonded togeth er wi th sYl,dlctit:
resins or other suitable bondin g sys tem by a h llld ing
process, in accordance with app roved nati onally r(',cognized
standard.
Associati on of Structu ra l Engineers of the Philippine s
PLYWOOD is it pane! of lalllinated veneers conforming [0

Philippine Nation,ll Standards (PNS 196) "Plywood
Speci II cations".
nOTATION is (he (orsiollal
about a vertical axis.
III 0 V,'""," (
01 a diaphraglll
STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER rs

any member comprising an assembly of laminations of
lumbcr in which the grain of al! lalllinatioJl.~ 1.'-;
approximately parallel longitudinally, in which the
laminations arc bonded with adhesi ves.
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a larger wood

diaphragm designed to anchor and transfer local forces to
primary diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
TREATED \\I00n is wood trc,\(cd with an approved
preservative under treating and quality control procedures.

WOOD OF NATURAL RESISTANCE TO DECA Y OR
TERMITES is the heartwood of the species set forLh
below. Corner sapwood is permiLted on 5 percellt of the
pieces provided 90 perccll! or more of the widLh of each
side 011 which it occurs is hcartwood. Recognized species
arc
Decay resistant: Narra, Kamagong, Dao, TangiJe.

Termite resistant: Narra, Kamagong.
WOOD STRlJCTlJRAL PANEL is a strtlcttlral panel
product composed primarily of wood and mecting the UBC
Standard 232 and 23-3 or equivalent requircments of
Philippine National Standards (PNS). Wood structural
panels include all-veneer plywood, composite pancls
containing a combination of veneer and wood-based
material, and mat-formed panel such as oriented stranded
board and waferboard.
SECTION 603
MINIMUM QUALITY
603. J Quality and Identificatioll
All illlllbcr, wood structural panels, particleboard, Limber.
end-jointed lumber, Ilberboard shemhing (when used
structurally), hardboard siding (when used sLructurally),
piles and poles regulated by this chapter shal! conform to
the applicable standards or grading rules specified in this
code and shall be so identified by the grade mark or a
certitlcate of inspection issued by an approved agency.
603.2 Minimum CHpacity or Grade
Minimulll capacity of structural framing members may be
established by performance tests. When the tests Me noL
made, capacity shall be based on allowable stresses and
design criteria specified in Lhis codc.
SLuds, joists, rafters, foundation plates or sills, planking 50
mill or more in depth, beams, stringcrs, posts, structural
sheathing and similar load-bearing mcmbers shall be of" at
Jc.ast the minimum grades set forth in Table Nos. 6.1 or
Table 6.2 or Table 6.35.
Approved end-jointed lumber Illay be used interchangeably
with solid~sawn members or the same species and grade.
Such usc sha!l include, but not be limited to, light-framing
joists, planks and decking.
Wood structural panels shall be of grades specitled in
accordance with Philippine National Standards (PNS).
603.3 Timber Connectors and Fasteners

Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and
fasteners 110t mentioned or fully covered ill Section 6 I y,
lllay bc determined in a manncr approved by the building
official.
The number and size of nails connecting wood mcmbers
sha!l not be less than that set forth in Tahles 6.:1 and 6.4.
Other connections shall be fastened to provide equivalent
strengLh. End and edge distances ilnd nail penetrations shall
be in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sectio])
619.
Fasteners for prcssure-preservative treated ,lJ1d f"ircretardant treated wood shall be of hot-dipped I.inc coated
galvanized, stainless stcel, silicon bronte or copper.
Fasteners required to be corrosion resistant shall bc either
zinc-coated fasteners, aluminu1Tl alloy wire. LIsteners or
stainless sleel fasteners
6 ()
C H!\P 1[r~ G . VI/oud
COII IlL'ctions depending on joist h:mgc rs or fra ming JIIH.:hors.

fi es, mid other mechanical fastenings nol otherwise covered
lJla y be used where 'Ipprovcd by th e Building Offici'l!.
603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture
Fabri<.:ation, installation, and manufllcture of wood clements
shall be in accordance with the following guideli nes:
60 . ~ . ,i ,J
General
Prepa rmion, fabrication and installation of wood members

rind th eir fastenings shall conform to accepted engineering
practices and 10 the requirements of this code. All members
shall be framed , anchored, tied and bmced to deve lop Ihe
strength and rigidity necessary for the purposes for which
th ey arc used.
603.4.7 Shrinkage
Conside r'l li on shall be given ill tht, d e"ig n 10 Ihl..' pm:~ j hl t"_
elTect uf cros s-g rain dimcnsilHlill l: han!,~l:s l'OIl.'.;(] Cl':>, j
ve rtically which ma y occur in IUIll lwl' r"bric<lted in a give l]
condition.
603.4.8 Rejection
The building official may delly pClll1i ss io[] for the lIse oj' a
wood member where permissible grade charac( eri<':';'.:s ()r
defects arc present in sllch ,.\' comb ination that they allcC(
detrimentally the serviceability of th e member.
603.4 .2 Timber Connectors :md Fasteners.

T he install ation of limber connectors and fasteners s hall be
illllccordllncc with the provisions set forth ill ScclioJl 6 19.

603.4.3 Mct:ll-Plate-Collnected Wood Trusses
Metal -plate-connected wood trusses shall conform 10 the
provisions of Section 618. Each manufacturel' of trusses
Ilsing metal plate connectors shall retain ,1I} approved
agellcy having no financial interest in the plant being
inspected to make nonscheduled inspecti ons of tru ss
fabrication, delivery, and operations. The inspection shall
cover all phases of truss operation, including lumber
storage, handlin g. cutti ng, fixtures, presses or rollers.
fabrication, bundling and banding. handling and deli very.
603,4.4 S tru ctura l Glued-Laminated Timber
The manufacture mul fabrication of stru ctural glucdla!llinatcd tiln bcr shall be under the su pervis ion of qua lified
personnel.
603.4.5 Dried Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood
Fire-retardant treated wood shall have been dried. following
treatment, up to maximum moisture content (Me) as
follow s:
J 9% - for so lid sawn lumber up to 501ll1ll thick
15% ~ for plywood
603.4.6 Size of Structul'al Membel's

Sizes of lum bcr referred 10 in {his code are nominal sizes.
Compulati oJl$ to determinc (he required sizes of me.mbers
sha ll be based Oil the net dimensiolls (acl ual Si7.C) ilnd not
the nomina l sizes. The- rough size lumber shall not be less
than the nomina l size .and the red ucti on in face di mensions
of dressed lumber shall not be morc than 6 mm of the
nominal sizc.
CHA pnl~G
SECTION 604
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
REQUIREMENTS
PAjlT I . . ; . '.
. ' .
'-.' , ,'.
, ..... ,
Th e foll owi ng desig n requirements apply.
SE(;TION',@S
,"
6()4.1.f All
PROTECfldN'"r,.<. . ;i ..(
604.1 G I.'m'ral
slnH.: turcs
shall
be
' "
,', .
'.,
DECAY. AN6;TERMIT-E
designed
G-t'
REQUIREMENTS'APPJ;JCABI.,E TO
ALL DESIGNM'ETnODS . ' .
' ' ' ' :'r'.''.f;'''' -'
wood
Wood
and
constructed in m:conlanct: ,. .ith the requirements of Section

()(J J up to St!ction 611.
604.1.2 Wind and c<ul hquake load-resi stin g sys te ms for all
cJlg jn ~c rcd
wond sl ruclU res shall be designed and

construc ted in accordance w ilh the requi rements of Section
6 14.
User Note: Ahe rn ati vely, lateral load-resisting' sys tems for
single family dwellings may be propo!1ioncd accordiJ1g to
the provisions of NSCP Volume 3 on Housing.
604.1.3 T he design and construction of wood structures

ll si ng all owable st ress design (AS!)) methods shall be in
accordance with Section 615 and Section 6 J 8.
604.1.4 The design and construction of" conventional light
fraille wood structures shall be in accordallce with Sectioll
620.
604.1.5 The des ign and installation or limber conllectOrs and
fasteners sh;lI l he in 'Kcordallcc with Scclion6 19.
604.1.6 Mcta l pblcnHlnected wood tru sses shilll conform

to thc provisions of Sec tio1l 62!.
.'
. ."','",'>. __ .-.';.
".
,,'
;,/
I ,
605.1 Preparation of Building Site

All Slumps and roots shall be removed from the so il to a
depth o f at least 300 mm below the surface of th e grou nd in
the area to be occupied by the bui lding.
All wood forms whi ch have been used in placing concrete.
if within the ground or between found.llion sills and the
ground, shall be removed before a building is occ upi ed or
used for any purpose. Before completion, loose or casual
wood shall be removed from direct conwct with the ground
under the building.
605.2 Wood Support Embedded ill Ground

Wood embedded in the ground or in di rect contact with the
earth and llsed for the support of permanent structures shall
be treated wood unles s continuously sub merged in fresh
water. Round or rectan gular posts, poles tln d sawn timber
coluillns supporting permanent stru ctures which arc
embedded in concrete or masonry in direct cont act wit h the
earth or embedded in concrete or maso nry exposed to the
wea ther shall be treated wood. The wood sha ll be treated
for ground contact.
605.3 Undcr~Floor Clearance
When wood joists or the bottom of wood st ru ctu ral 1100rs
without joists arc located closer than 450 mill or wood
g irders are located closer th an 300 mm to exposed grou nd
in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas located within the
periphery of the building foundati on. the floor assembly
including posts, girders, joi sts and subfloOf, shall be
approved wood of natural resistance to decay as listed in
Section 605.4 or treated wood.
When th e above under-rIoor clearances arc required, the

under"l1 oor area shall be accessibl e. Accessible und er~noor
arC,I$ shall be provided with a min imum 450 mill by 600
mill openin g unobslructed by pipes, ducts and similar
co nstrucli on. All under-floor access open ings shall be
effec tivel y screened or covered. Pipes, ducts and other
co nstructi on shall not interfere with the accessibil ity to or
wit hin under-floor areas.
ll
National Structural Code of tile Pililippines 6 \ Edition Volum e 1
6[)
CHAPll:f~
G . \Nood
605.4 PIHtCS, Sills and Sleepers

All fOllnd;l1ioll plates or sills and sleepers OJl a concrete or
masonry slab, wh ich is ill direct co nt ac t with earth, and sills
thai rcs t 0 11 concrete or masonry foundations, shall be
treated wood, all marked or branded by an approved
agency. Foundation wood marked or branded by an
approved agcncy may bc uscd for sills in localities subject
to moderate hazard, where termite damage is nol frequent
and when specifically approved by the building oiiwial. In
localit ics where ha zard of termite i s slight, any spccies or
wood pcnnillcd by thi s chapter ma y be used for sills when
specificall y appro ved by the building offi cial.
605.S COIUIIIIIS "lid Posts
Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry floors or
decks exposed 10 the weather or 10 water spla<;h or in
basements and which supp<H1 permanen t structures shall be
supported by concretc piers or metal pedestals projectin g
above floors unless ;:Ipproved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood is used. The pedes tal shall project at ,
Icas( 200 mill above exposed earth or at least 2S mill above
finish floor level of sLl ch floors.
Individual co ncrete or masonry pi ers shall project at least
(llld located ncarer than 150 min (0 eHrth shal l be treated

wood or wood of lI,tlllral n;!)istmlCc Iu dc(;,ty. Where loca ted
on concrete slabs placed on coll'lh. wood slwll be tre ated
wood or wood or natural resistance to dec<ly. Where not
subject to Willer splash or (0 exterior moisturc alld located
on concrete hav ing 11 minimum thicknL"s!) of' 75111111 with an
imperviolls membr an(~ installed between co ncrete and earth,
Ihe wood may be untreated and of any species .
Whew planter boxes arc in!)ta!ied adjace nt 10 wood frame
wa ll s a 50 I11Ill :IiI' sp;:lce shall ilt least be provided bet ween
(he planter and the wa ll. Flashing shall hc installed when
the air space is less th an 150 mill in width . Wherc Oas hing
is used, provisi ons shall be made to permit circulation of
the air in the air space. The wood frame shall be provided
with an exterior wall covering conforming 10 the provisions
of Section 609 .
605.9 \\food Supportillg Roofs Hnd Floors
Wood stnlctura l members su ppo rting concrete or masonry

slabs which arc permeable 10 moisture and nrc exposed to
the weather shall be approved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood unless separated from such noms or
roofs by an impervious moisture balTic!'.
200 mm above exposed ground unl ess the supported
columns or posts arc treated wood or of approved wood

wi th natural res istance to decay.
605.10 Moisture Content of Treated \\food
When wood whic h has bee n prcssurc-trcalCd with
<l
water-
born prese rvat ive is used in enclosed locations where
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrele Walls

Ends of wood girder entering masonry or co ncrete walls
shall be provided with a 13 mm air space on tops, sides and
ends unless approved woud or natural resistance (0 decay or
treated wood is used.
drying in service ca nnot readil y occ ur, slich wood must

have 11 moisture con lc.nt of 19 percellt or less before being
cove red with insula ti on, intcrior wall finish 11001' coverin}"
or other materials.
605.11 l{c(aining Walls

605.7 Under-Floor Venlilalion
Under-floor areas shall be ventilatcd by an approved

mechanical mea ns or by openings in exterior foundation
walls. Such ope nings shall havc a nct area of not less than
0.067 111 2 for each 10 rn 2 of under-floor arca. Openings shall
be located as close to corners as practical and shall provide
cross ventilation. The required area of such openings shall
be approxim ately equally distributed along the length of at
least two opposite sides. They shall be cove red with
conosioll-resistant wire mcsh with mesh openings of 6 I11Ill
dimension. Where moist ure due [0 climatc and grou nd watcr
conditions is not considered excessive, the building official
may allow opclable louvers and ma y allow the required net
area of vent openin g 10 be reduced to 10 percent of the
above, provided th e under-floor ground surface area is
covered with an approved vapor barrier.
605.8 Wood and Earth Separation
Protection of wood against deteriorati on as set fort h in the

previous sections for speci fied applications is required. In
addition, wood used in construction of permanent stIUctures
A ll wood llsed as permanent part s of retain ing or c rib walL

shall be treated wood.
605.12 Weathcr' Exposurc

Those pm1ions of glued- lam inated timbers that form l:j' ~
st ructural supports of Cl building or other stru cture and
which are exposed to weather and not propcrly protected by
a roof or cave ove rhangs of similar covering, shall be
press ure -treate d wi th an approved preservati ve or \;(~
ma nuf:tctu red fro m wood of natunli resisl;mcc to decay.
All wood structural panels, whcn designed !O be exposed ill

outdoor application, shall be or exterior type, exce pt ns
provided in Section 605.2
In geogra phi cal areas where ex perience has demonstrated a

speci fi c need , approved wood of natural resi stance to decay
or trea ted wood shall be used for those stru cturfl!.
co m.ponents of buildi'ngs or similar perm anent buiJdih ; ~
appurtenances whcn such members are exposed 10 til
weather and are without adequate protection provided by ?
CHAPH:J~
G WOO(j
69
roof. C; IV(,\ overhang or other covering against moisture or

wat er <lc(:umulatioll on the surface Of al joints between
mcmben:, SlIt' ll Illt'.mhers Illay indude: hori zon !,,1 memb(;'.~
sllch as girder.Ii, joists and decking; or vertical members

such as posts, poles and columns; or both hori zo ntal and
vertical mcmhcrs.
605.13 W'Hcr Splash
Where wood-framc walls and partitions arc covered on the
interior with plaster, tile or similar materials and are subject
10 water splash, the framing shall be protected with
approved waterproofing .
. ':W :: '<II"';': .:.-: .:'1
~' .
3..
I
, ,'
606.1 Dead Load

Wood men1bers shal! not be lIsed to permancntly support
dead :oad .9f.any masonry or concrete except in cases listed
below or allowed by relevant sections of NSCP Volume 3
Oil HOllsing.
Exceptions:
1.
Masonry or concrete lion-structural floor or roof

surfacing !l0/ more than 100 mIT! thick may be
supported by wood members.
2.
Any structure may rest upon wood piles cons/rucled itl

accordance with the requirem etJIs of Chapfer 3 on
"Excavations and FOllndations"
3.
Veneer of brick or concrete stOlle may be supported by

approved (n!ated woodjoufldafions when tile maximum
height of veneer does lIot exceed 9.0 m aboY(! the
foundations. Such lIelleer used as all iflferior wall finish
may also be supported on wood jIoors which are
designed to support the additional load, and be
designed to limit the deflection and shrinkage to 1/600
a/the span a/the supporting I1u!miJers.
4.
Wood may be Ilsed to suppor! glass block masonry

having an installed weight of 98 kg/m2 or less. When
glass block is supported 011 wood floors. fhe floors
shall be designed to limit deflection alld shri"kage to
1/600 of the span of the supporting member,\ alUl the
allowable stresses for the framing members shall be
reduced in accordance with Section 615.3.4.
606.2 Horizontal Force

Wood mcmbcrs shall not be used to resist horizontal forces
contributed by masonry or concrete ' construction in
buildings over one story in height except where allowed by
provisions of Section 614.2 of this code.
National Structural Code of the Pililippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
610
C IM p ! E n G WOO(t
SECTION 608
FLOOR FRAMING
The framin g of exterior and interior wa lls shall be ill
accordan ce with provisions specifi ed ill Section 620 unl ess
a specific design is furnished.
Wood studs walls and bearing partitions shall not support
more than two noors and a roof unless .1Il anal ys is
satisfactory to Ihe bui lding official shows th.1I shrink age of
wood framing will not have adverse effect upon the
st ructure nor any plumbing, electrical, mechani cal systems
nor other equ ipment installed therein due 10 Ihe excessive
shrinkage or differential movements caused by shrinkage.
The analysis shall also show that the roof drainag~ system
and the forcgoing systems or equipmcnt will not be
adversely affec ted or, as an alternate, suc h systems shall be
designed to accommodate the differential shrinkage or
mo vements.
Wood.joist ed floors sh;lll be framed and co nstructed and

anchored to supporti ng wood stud or masonry walls.
Fire block and draft stops shall "Ie in accordance with thc
follow ing provision:
I.
In combustible const ru cti on, fi re bloc ks and draft

regu lators shall be install ed to cu t off all concealed
draft ope ni ngs (both venical and hori zontal) and sh all
form an effective barrier between floors. between a top
story and a roof or attic space, and shall subdivide attic
spaces, concealed roof spaces and floor-ceiling
assemblies. Th e integrit y of all fire and draft SlOps shall
be maintained.
2.
Firc. bloc ks slwll

locati ons:
he provided in the following
2. t In concealed spaces or stud walls alHl pa!1ilions,

including furred spaces , at the ceiting and floor levels,
and at 250 mm intervals along the Icngth the wall.
or
E'(ceptioll:
Fire bloi'ks may be omitted at floor and ceiling levels when
approved smoke-actual(~d fire dampers are installed at
these levels.
2.2 At all interconnections betweet) cOllcealed ve rtical and

horizontal spaces such as those that occur at soffits,
drop ceilings, and covered ceilings.
2.3 In concealed spaces between stair stringers, at tbe top

and botlom or the r Ull , and betwee n studs along and in
line with the nm of the stai rs if the walls under the
stai rs are unfinished .
In open ings around vents, pipes, du cts, chim neys,

fire places. and similar openings which afford a passage for
the fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible
materials.
3.
Fire blocks shall consist of SO mm nominal lumber or

one thi ckness of 18 mill plywood wi th joints backed by
18 mm plywood or one thi c kness of 19 111m Type 2-I\-;
particleboard. I. . jrc stops may also be of gypsu m board .
mineral fiber, glass fiber or other approved material:;
securely fastened in place. Walls having parallel (I,
staggered studs for sound-trallsmission co ntrol shall
have stops of mineral fiber or glass fiber or ot/:
approved non-rigid materials.
CHAPTErl6 . Wood
4.
Dnlfl SlO pS shall be provided in the followi ng

l oe<llions:
4.1
the grealest hori i'.olll:1I dime nsion docs not exceed

18.0
Ill .
Exception:
Floor-Cei ling Assemb lies.
4.1.1 Single-fami ly dwellings. As recommend ed in NSCP

Volume 3 Oil I'lousing or when there is usablc space
above and belqw the concealed space of :l llo0J"M
ce iling assem bly in a singlcMfamily dwelling. draft
stops shall bc il,stalled so that the ' area of the
concealed space does not exceed 90 1112. Draft stops
shal l divide the concealed space into approximate ly
equal areas.
4 1.2 Two or more dwelling units and hotcls. Draft stops
shall be installed in Ooor-ceiling asse mblies of
building havi ng more than one dwe lling unit and in
hote ls. Such draft stops shall be in line wi th wa lls
Where approved automatic sprinklers are j'Htalled. 'he

1
area between fhe draft STOpS may he 800 m and fhl'
greatest horizontal dimensiolJ may I)(~ 30 m.
4.2.4 Draft stopping materials shall bc 110\ Icss than 12 mill

gypsum board. 9 mill plywood . 9 111m Type M-2
particleboard or other approved mat erials adequately
supported. Openings in Ihe partitions shall be
protected by sc lr~cJos ing doo rs with au tomatic
latches constructed as rcquired for lhe partitions.
.. ;:
'.'
. , .. '
.: .... .., . ,.
..~
sc panll ing lenants from Cl.tch o ther a nd scpanui ng
tenants fro m other areas.

4.1.3 Olher uscs. Draft stops shall be installed in nOOI"M
cei ling assemb lie s of buildings or ponions of
buildings used for other than dwelling or hOle I
occ upanci es .so that the area of concealed space docs
not exceed 90 1ll 2. and so that the hori zo ntal
dimension between stops docs /lot exceed 18.30111.
Exception:
Wh ere approved automatic sprinklers are installed within
th e COli cealed space. the area between draft stops may be
270 nl. a nd the ho";zontal dimellsion may be 30
4.2
4.2. 1
f1l.
Attics.
Si ll gle~ f;unil y
G 1t
dwellings. Refer to NSCP Volume 3 on
Housing.
4.2.2 Two or more dwelling unit and hotels. Drafts stops
shall be installed in the attics, mansards, overhangs,
false fro nt s set Ollt from walls and similar concealed
spaces of buildings containing more than one
dwelling unit and hotels. Such drafts stop shall be
above and in line with walls separating tenants from
each oth er and from other uses.
Exceptions:
Draft STOPS may be omitted along one of rhe corridor walls.
provided draft stops at tenant separation walls extend to rh e
remainillg corridor droll stop.
Where (lpproved sfJrillklerj' are illstalled, drajtstoppill8 may

be as specified ill the exception below.
4.2. 3 Ot her UScs. Draft stops shall be install ed in ;:\Hi es.

mansards. ovcr~ hangs , false fronts set Ollt from walls
.and similar concealed spaces of building)) havin g
uses other than dwellings or hotels so that th e area
between draft stops does not exceed 270 m2 and
th
National Structural Code of tll('; Pllilipplnes 6 Edition Volume 1
6 12
CHAPTU16 Wood
shipla ps or joillls ::.hall he lapped hori zon tall y or otherwise

1l1acl(~ w:l!erpn)of
609.4 Shingles
609.1 General
Exterior wood stud walls shal! be covered 011 the outside
with the materials and in the :mlllllcr spccit1cJ jn this
section Or elsewhere ill this code. Studs or sheathing shall

be covered on the outside face with a weatherresistive
barrier when required. Exterior wall coverings or the
minimum thickness specified in this section arc based upon
a max imulll stud spacing of 400 mill unless ot herw ise
specified.
609.2 Siding
Solid wood sidin g shall ha ve lin average thickness
or 9 I11Ill
unless placed over sheathing permitted b y thi s code.

Siding patterns known i~S rustic, drop siding or shiplap shall
have an average thickness in place of not less than IS 111111
and shall have a minimum thickness measured not less than
9 111m. Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness
m eas ured at the butt section of" nol less than 11 mrn and a
lip thi ckness of not less than 5 mm . Siding of lesser
dimensions may be used, provided such wall covering is
placed over Sheathing which conforms to the provisions
specified elsewhere in this code.
All weatherboarding or siding shall be secu rely nailed to

each slud wilh no( less (han one nail , or to solid 25 I1Ull
n omi n ~11 wood sheathing or J 2 mm plywood ShclHhi ng or
13 111m particleboard sheathing with not Ie.... s than o ne li ne
of na ils spaced nol more than 600 IIl1l1 on center in each
piece of the weatherboarding or siding.
Wood board siding applied horizontally, diagonally or

vertically shall be nailed to studs, nailing strips or blocking
set maximum 600 mm on center. Fasteners shall be nails or
screws with a penetration of not less than 40 mm illto studs.
studs and wood sheathing combined, or blocking. Distance
between suc h fastenings shall not exceed 600 111m for
horizontally or vertically applied sidings and 800 111111 for
diagonally applied sidings.
Of
Shakes
Wood shingles or shakes may be llsed for exterior wall

covering, provided the framc of the structure is covered
with building paper. All shingles or shakes attached to
sheathing other than wood sheathing shall be secured with
approved corrosion-resistant fa steners or 011 furring strips
attached to the studs. Wood shi ngles Or shakes may be
applied over fiberboard shingle backer and sheathing with
annular grooved nails . The thi ckness or wood shingles Or
shakes between wood nailing hoards shall not be less than 9
mill . Wood sh ingles or shakes o r siding Illay be nailed
directl y to appro ved fi berboard nail base sheathing not less
than 13 mill nominal thickn ess with annular grooved nail s.
The weather cxposure or wood shingle Or shake siding lIsed
on exterior ,>,.'alls shall not exceed maximum set forth in
Table 6.6.
609.5 Particleboard
When particleboard is used for coveri ng the exterior of
outside walls, it shaU be of the M-I. M-S and M-2 Exterior
Glue grades. Particleboard panel siding shall bc installed in
accordance with Table 6.3 and 6.7. Pancl shall be gapped :3
mm and nails shall be spaced not less than 9 mm from
edges and cnds of sheathing. Unless applied over 16 mIll
net wood sheathing or 13 mm plywood sheathing or 13 mill
pClrticleboard sheathing. joints shall occur over framing
members and shall be cove red with a continuous wood batl'
or joints shall be lapped horizonta ll y or ot herwise mad~
waterproof 10 thc sa ti sfaclion of the building official.
Pal1icJcboard shall be sC<l led and protected with exterior
quality finishes.
609.6 Hardboard
When hardboard siding is used for coveri ng the outside of
exterior walls, it shall conform to Table 6.8. Lap siding
shall be installed horizontally and applied 10 sheathed or
. unsheathed walls. Cornel' bracing shall be installed in
conformance with Section 620.6. A weather-resistive
barrier shall be install ed under the lap siding.
Where pl ywoud is used ror cove ring the ex teri or or otll::.idc

walls, il shall be of (he exterior Iype not less Ihnn 9 Illill
Square-edged, non ~gro(}ved panels and shiplap grooved or

nOll-grooved siding shall be applied vCl1 ica ll y to sheathed
or un sheathed wa lls. Siding Ihal is grooved shall not be less
than 6 nUll thick ill the groove.
thi ck. Plywood panel siding shall he inslalled in accordance

with Table 6.5. Unless applied over 25 mm wood shea thing
or 12 mm wood structural panel sheathing or 13 mill
particleboard s heathing joints shall occur over framing
members and' shall be protected with a continuous wood
batten, approved caulking, flashing, vertical or horizontal
pcnetrate framing 38 mill. Lap si ding shal! overlap 25 I11 Ill

minimulll and be nailed through both courses and il1lo
framing members with nails located l3 mm from bottom ,~.
the overlapped course. Square-edged non-grooved pane;';.
609.3PI),1\'00d
Nai l size and spaci ng shall follow Table .6.8 and shall
shall bc nailed 9 111m from the perimeter of the panel and

intermediately into studs. Shiplap edge panel siding with
Associa ti on of Structural Engineers of the Philippirws
CHAPT En G . W O(Jd
I) IlUll shipl ap shall be Il<li led 9 m ill from the edges Oil bot h
sides of the shiplap. The 19 mm shiplap shall be Iwil l!d 9
mm from th e edge and pcnctrmc through hoth the ove rlap
<llld urHJerJap . Top and bottom edges of the panel shal l be
nailed 9 mill from the edge. Shiplap and lap siding shall not
be force fil. Square-edged panels shall maintain a 2 mm gap
i!! joints. All jOints and edges of siding shall be over
framing members, and shall be made resistant 10 weath er
penetratioll with battens, horizontal overlaps or shiplaps to
the sHlisfac ti on o f the building official. A 3 mrn gap shall be
provided around all opcni!igs.
;... ' ....
All softwood wood structural panel s shall conform to the

provisions of the previous Chapter and shall be installed in
accorda;'{"cc with Table 6.3 Panels shall comply with UI3C
Standard 23-3.
609.7 Nailing
All faste ners used for thc attachmcnt of sidin g shall he of it
corrosion-resistant type.
:.:.: !.<i"i~.:
'j',.\.
., . ':; .~.... : ;.; ..\'
'.
.:..:.:<
.' .;;'Ji::.<-;,;- :-
.~::
,.\, .
(j - I ~:!
..... :.:.
111
614
CHAPTEr! 6 . Wood
SECTIoN 6.12
MECHANICALLY~LAMINATED. ;
FLOORSANr> DECKS
611.1 Structural 1'1001' Sheathing
Structural floor sheathing shall be design ed in accordffncc

with the general provisions of' this code and the special
provisions in thi s scction.
Sheathing used as subflooring shall be de signed to SUPPO!1
al! loads specified in this code and shall be capable of
su ppOJ1ing concentrated loads of not less than 1.33 kN
without failure. The concemra(ed load shall be applied by a
loaded disc, 75 mm or smaller in diameter.
Flooring, including th e finish nom, ulldcrla yment l.Uld
sub noo r. where used, shall meet the following
requirem ents:
I.
Deflection under uniform design load limited to 1/360

of the span between supportingjoi sls or beams.
2.
Detlec tion of fl ooring rei at; ve to joists under a 25 mm

diam eter concentrated load of 0.90 kN limited to 3 min
or less when loaded midwa y between supporting jois ts
or beams nOI over 600 mm on ce nter and l/360 of lhe
span for spans over 600 mm .
Floor sheathing conforming lo Ihe provisions or Tablcs 6.9,

6.10. 6 . 12. or 6. 13 shall
be deemed to
meet
the
requirements of thi s section.

611.2 Structural Roof Sheathing
Structural roof sheal hing shall be designed in accordance
with th e general provisions of this code and the special
provisions in this section. Structural roof sheathing shall be
designed to support all loads specified in thi s code and shall
be capable of suppolling concentrated loads of not less than
1.33 kN without failure. The concentrated load shall be
applied by a loaded disk, 75 mm or smaller in diamet er.
Structural roof sheathing shall meet the following
requiremellt :
1.
.... ..... .,
;;'Y."',""
A I.uninuted :.:JJllber flo or or deck built up of wood

mcmbers sct 011 edge. when rnecling the fOllowing
requirements, may be designcd as u solid floor or roof deck
of the same thi ckncss and continuous span may bc designed
on the basis of the full crOSs section using the simple span
moment coeflicicllI .
Nail length shall not be less than 2~J/2 times the net
thickness of each laminat ioll. When deck supports are 1.20
m on cc nter or less, side nai Is shall be spaced not more than
750 mm on centcr and staggered olle third of lhe spaci ng in
adjaccnl laminations. Wh en supports arc spaced more 'than
1.20 III on ccnter, side nails sha ll be spaced not more than
450 mm on ccnter al lcrn.l1ely near lOp and bottom edges,
and also stagge rcd onc th ird of Ihe spaci ng in adjacen t
laminations. Two side nail s shall be used at each end of
butt-jointed pieccs.
L1minalions shall bc toe nailed to suppons with 20d or
larger common nails. Whcn supports arc 1.20 III 0 11 center
or less, alternate laminations shall be toe nailed to alternate
suppons; when suppons arc spaced more than 1.20 m on
cente r, alternate laminat ions shall be toenai led to every
support.
A single-spall deck shall have all laminations full length.
A con tinuolls deck of two spans shall have not more than
cvery fourth lamination spliced within quarter points
adj oi ning support s.
Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered

across the deck but within th e adjoining quarter spans.
No lamination shall be spliccd more th an twice in any span .
Deflectio n und er uniform design live and dead load

limited to 1/180 of the span between supportin g ruflcrs
or beams and 11240 under live load onl y.
Roof sheathing conformi ng to th e provisions of Tables 6.9

or 6.10 and 6.11 shall be deem ed to meet th e requirements
of thi s section.
Wood' structu ral panel roof sheathing shall be bond cd by
intennediate or exterior glue. Wood structural panel roof
sheathin g exposed 011 the underside shall bc bonded wit h
exterior glu e.
SECTION 613
POST-BEAM CONNECTIONS
Where post and beam or girder construction is used, (!11.~
design shall be ill accordance with Ihe provisions of Ihis
code. Posi tive connection shaH be providccJ. to ensure
a~ains[ upli~'t and lateral di splacement.
.'"
SECTION 614
WOOD SHEAR WALLS AND
DIAPHRAGMS
614.1 Gelleral
Unless permitted by the Building Official or by relevllnt
pro v i s i n l ~s of NSCP Volume 3 Oil Housing. usc of' wood
shear walls and diaphragms shall be limited to I !O 2-5torcy
dwellings. Where applicable, succeeding provisions of this
Section shall be used as bases for their design.

Particleboard vertical diaphragms and lumber and wood
structural panel horizonwl and veni ca! diaphragms may be

used to resis t horizontal force s in horizontal and verticul
distributing or resisting elements, provided the deflection in
the plane of the diaphrag ms, as determined by calculations,
tests or analogies drawn therefrom . does not exceed the
permissible detlection o f attac hed distrib ut ing or resisting
clcments.
Permissible deflection shall be that defl ection up to which a
diaphragm and any auachcd distri buting or resi sti ng
element wi!! maintain its structural integrity under assumed
load conditions, i.c. continue
10
support assumed loads
without da nge r 10 occ upant of the stmclurc.
Connecti ons and anchorages capable of resisting the design

forces sha ll be provided between the diaphragms and the
resisting elements. Openin gs in diaphragm which materially
aff~(.;1 Iheir !) llcnglh shall be fully detailed on the plAns and
shal! have their edges adequately reinforced to transfer all
shearing s t]"I.!SSCS.
Size and shape of each horizontal diaphrngm and shear wall

sha ll be limilcd as se l fOllh in Tablc 6.14. The height of <l
shear wall shall be defined as:
I.
The maximum clear height from foundation to bottom

of diaphragm framing above, or
2.
The maximulll clear height from top of diaphragm 10

boltom of diaphragm framing above.
The width of a shear wall shall be defined as the width
or
sheathing.
Where shear walls wilh o penings arc designed for force
transfer around the openings, the limitations of
Table 6.14 shall apply to the overall shear wall including
openings and to each wall pier at the side of an opening.
The height of a wall pier shall be defined as the clear height
of the pier at the side of an opening. The width of a wall
pier shall be defined as the sheathed width of the pier at the
th
National Structural Code of the Pl1ilippines 6 Edltion Volume 1
6-16
CHAP"! Ef l 6 - W ooc1
side of HII opening. Des ign for force tran sfe r sha ll be based
011 a rtuiollal an al ysi s.
In buildings of wood-frame construction where rOlati on is

provided for, the depth of the diaphragm Ilorma! to the open
side shall 1I0 ( exceed 7.50 III or 2/3 the d ia phragm widt h.
whichever is the smaller depth . Strai ght sheathi ng sh:Il J not
be pCJ'lll i((cd 10 resis t shears in diaph rag ms acting in
rotat ion.
Exceptions:
1.
2.
Olle-story, wood-framed structures willi the depth

norma/to th e open side not greater than 7.50 m. may
have a depth equa/to the width.
Wh ere calculations show that diaphragm deflections
caf! be tolerated, the depth normal to th e open end may
be increased to a depth-Io-width ratio II0t greater Ihan
J.5: J for diagorral sheathirrg or 2: J for special
diagonal sheathed or plywood or particleboard
diaph ragms.
I n nwsonry or con crete buildings, lumber and wood
stm ctural pa nel diaphragms shall not be considered as

transmitting lateral forces by rotation.
Diaphragm sheath in g nail s o r other approved sheathing
connectors sha ll be driven nu~h but shall not fracture the
surface of the sheathing .
614.2 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal Forces

Contributed by Masonry and Concrete
Wood mem bers sh all not be used to resist horizontal forces
contributed by ma sonry or concrete construct ion in
b ujld ings over one story in hei ght .
Exceptiolls:
1.
Wood floor and roof members may be used if!

hariZOll/at trusses alld diaphragms to resist horizontal
f orces imposed by wind, earthquake or earth pressure,
provided such forces are not resisted by rotation of the
truss or diaphragm.
2.
Ver/jeal wood sfructural panel-sheathed shear walls

may be used to provide resistance to wind or
ear/hquake forces in two-slOt}' buildings of masonry or
concrete construction,
provided the follo lVing
requiremcfIls arp. met:
2.1 Story-to-story wall heights shall not exceed 3.6
meters.
2.2 Horizorllal diaphragm shafl not be considered to
transmit lateral forces by rotation or camilever action.
2.3 Deflection of horizontal and vertical diaphragms
shall not permit per-slory deflection of supported
mm.olll), or concrele walls 10 {!x("(!ed 0.005 lime., each

story hei,;"t.
2.4 Wo od structural panel sliemhing in horizontal
diaphragms shall havc all unsupported edgcs blocked.
Wood sfruNliral panel sheathing for bOlh ,\'lOries of
vertical diaphragms shall have all unsuppor!(~d edges
blocked alld for Ih e lower walls have a minimum
thickness of J2 mm.
2.5 There ,~'''all be no olltol-plane horiz.ol/tal offsets
between the first alld secon d stories of wood srructural
pane! sh ear wails,
614 .3 Wood Diaphragms

Wood Diaphragms shall conform wit h the fOllO wing
guid clincs:
614.3. 1 Conventional Lumber Diaphragm
Construction
Such lumber diaphragms shall be made up of 25 mm
nominal shcnthing boards laid at an angle of approx imatdy
45 degrees to supports. Sheat hin g boards shall be di rt~cil y
nailed (0 each intennediate bearin g member with nO( less
th an two 65mltl nails for 25 111m by 150 111m nominal
boards and three 65111J1l nails for boards 200 mm or wider;
and in add ition, three 65 mm nai ls and four 6S mill nai ls
shall be used for 150 mm and 200 mm boards, respeclively,
at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards

shall be separated by at least one joist or stud space, and
there shall be at leas t two boards between joints on the
same support, Boundary members at edges of diaphragms
shall be designed to resist direct te ns ile or comp res!; i"e
chord st resses and adequately tied together at corners,
614.3.2 Special Lumber Diaphragm Co nstru ction

Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall conform :0
conventional construction and in addition, shaH have ;; il
elements designed in conformance with the provisions of
this code.
Each chord or ponion thereof maybe considered as a beam
loaded with a uniform load per meter equal to 50 percent of
the unit shear due to diaphragm act ion, The load shall be
assumed as acting norma! to the chord, in the plane of the
diaphragm and eithe r towards or away from the diaphr<lgm.
Th e span of chord, or porti on thereor, shall be th e dis tance
between structural members of the diaphragm such as the

joists, studs and blocking, which se rve to transfer the
ll ss lIIned load to Ihe sheathing,
Special diagonally sheathed diaph rag ms shall includr.
cOllventional diaph ragm s shea thed with two layers c(
diagonal sheathin g at 90 degrees to each other and on the
sa me face of the supportin g members.
CHAPTErl E . Wood
(.14 ..1.3 \Vood Slrudul':tl ))and Dblphnl J.!. 1U
Horizo nlill and ve rtical diaphr:lgm s shea thed wi th wood

slructural pimcis Illay be used 10 resist hori/.onwi rorces for
horizontal di,lphraglll and for vertic al diaphragms, or may
be calculated by principles of Jllechan i(~s without limi!atioll
by usin g values of nail strength lHld wood structural pane!
shear values as spec iii cd elsewhere in this code . Wood
structural panels for horizontal diaphragms shall be as sct
forth in Tablcs 6.10 and 6.11 for corresponding joist
spacing "and londs. Wood structural panels in shear wnll s
shall be :II least 8 mill thick for studs spaced 400 lllill on
ccnter and 9 mm thick where studs arc spaced 600 mill 011
center.
Maximum spa ns for wood struclUral panel subtloOl'
ulldcr!aymcnt shall be as set forth in T<tble 6. 12. Wood
stmclUraJ panels used for horizoillill and vert ical
di aphnlgms siwli conform 10 UB C S,.md.lr<J 23-2 and UHC
Stand ard 23 -3 or equivalent Philippine National Slandards
(PNS ).
A ll boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced

where necessa ry 10 transmit direct stresses. Framing
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimension s
to whi ch the plywood is attached. In general, pancl edges
shall bear on the framing mcmbers and butt along th eir
centerlines. Nails shall be placed not less than ]0 mrn ill
from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than ]50 min
011 center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly
driven into the framing members. No unblocked panels less
th an 300 mill wide shall be used .
Diaphragms with pa nel edges supportcd in acco rdance with

Tables 6. I 0, 6. 11 and 6. J 2 shall not be considered as
blocked diagrams unl ess blocking or ot her means of shear
tran ~ fer is provided.
614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms

Vertical diaphragms sheathed with pal1icleboard may be
used to resist horizontal forces.
All boundary mcmbers shall be proportioned and spliced

where necessa ry to transmit direct stresses. Framing
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimension
to which th e pa[1icleboard is attached. 111 general, panel
edges shall bea r on the framing members an d butt along
Ihei r ce nt erlines . Na ils shall be placed nol less than 9 mm in
from Ihe panel edge, ~11iI1I he spaced nol more Ihan 150 I11 Ill
011 ccn ter along panel edge beari ngs, and sha ll be firmly
driven into the framing members. Unblocked p;lIlcls less
(h an 300 mm wide shall not be all owed or used.
Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance with
Table 6.13 shall not be considered as blocked diaphragms
unless blocki ng o r olhe r meilns of

provided.
~ h car
G 17
t n Ul ~fc r
is
614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphnlgms iII Seismic

7-0'1<' 4
Section 614.).1 10614.5 .5 shall be used for wooden shear
Willis and diaphragms dcsign for Seismic 7..\)Jlc 4 areas.
614.5.1 Scope
Design and cOllstruction of wood shear walls and
diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4, as allowed by provisions o f
Seclion 6 14.1 and NSCP Volume 3 on Housin g, shall
confo rm 10 the req ui rements oflhis sect ion.
614.5.2 Framing
Col lector members shall be provided to transmit tension
an d compress ion forcc~. Perimcter members <"11 opcnings
s hall be provided and shall be dClailcd to di stribule the
Shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing shu ll not be used to
splice these members.
Diaphrag m chords and tics shall be placed in, Or tangent to,
the plane of the diaphragm framing unless it can be
demonstrated that the moments, shear and deflections and
deformations resulting from other arrangements can be
tolerated.
614.5.3 Wood Structural Panel

Wood structura l panels shall be manufact ured us ing
ex terior glu e.
-t
Wood slnlclUrai panel diaphragms and shear walls shall be
co nstlllcted with wood stnictural pa nel sheets not less th.m
1.20 III by 2.40 111 , except at boundaries and changes in
fr:imi ng where minimum sheet dimension shall be 600 mm
unless all edges of the undersized sheets are sUPPol1ed by
framing members or blocking.
Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the
edges of all sheets in shear walls.
Wood structural panel sheathing may be llsed for splicing
members, other than those noted in Section 6 14 .5.2, where
the additiona l nailing required to deve lop the transfer of
forces wil l not cause cross-grain bendin g or cross-grai n
tension in the nailed member.
614.5.4 Ilea,'), VVood Panels

Diagonally sheathed panels uti lizing 50 I1l1l} nom inal boards
may be used 10 r~li st the sa me pern~i ss i blc shear as ~5 Jlllll
nominal lumber, exeept thm 16d n ~lI 1s shall be used lIls1ead
of8d.
Nalional Structural Code of Ihe PI1 ilippines 6'" Edition Volum e 1
G ! 8
C HI\P1t: H f:
Woc(i
Pallcls IHili zing strai ght dccking overlaid wit h plywood

10 resist shear forces usin g the SiUn c shear
V.dll(.~ S a.~ permi ned for the wood stn!l:llIfal pan!.!! "Iolle.
may be uscd
Wood structural panel joints parallel to the decking shall be

locilwd at least 25 /llJll offset from any parallel decking
join!.
Heavy decking panels utilizing dowel pins, or vcnit:ally
laminated panels connected by nailing units 10 olle another,
resist shear forces based 011 the permissible shear values of
th eir connectors.
614.5.5I'articlebo,,,d
Pal1icleboard shall nOI be less th an Type M "Exteri or
G lue" .
SECTION 615
STRESSES
615.1 General
Except as herein provided, str(.~s~cs shall not l~xceed the
allowable unit stresses for th e respective spcc ies and Li:ldc'
\i(' fabricated products as se t forth in Table 6.1 and I'a:
6.15 for lumber. Values thcrein indicated are rek,
de::;ign values. All the tabulat ed design values (cxcep! (h e
ave rage modulu s of elasticity E) include reduct iolb
s<lfcly and arc primaril)' intended for direct applic<Hi(m ,:~
ASD.
Reference design v<l lucs arc give n th e symbol of uppercase
Shear walls shall be shea thed wit h particleboard sheets not

less than 1.20 III by 2.40 m except aI boundaries and
changes in framing. The required nail size and spaci ng in
F. and a subscript ._. I for tensio n. c for compressio n, b for

bending -.- is added to indicate the type of' st ress.
Table 6.3 apply to panel edges only. All panel edges shall
be backed with 50 mm nominal or wider frailling . Sheets
arc permitted to be installed either horizontally or
vertically. For 9 111m particleboard sheets install ed with the
Reference design values for wood represent a starling point

in the determination of the allowable stress for a pani n llar
design. Adjusted ASD design va lues are determined hv
multiplying the reference values by the appro])1
adjustement factors. A prime is added to the symbol o( i
reference value 10 indicate th at th e necessary adjustJl:c:. i "
have been applied to obtain the adjusted design value:
long dim ensi on parallel lO the studs spaced 600 111111 on

cenler, nails shall be spaced at 150 mm on cent er along
intermediate framing members. For all other co nditi ons,
nai ls of th e sa me size shall be spaced at 300 llllll all center
along intermediate framing members.
614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms

Wood stud walls sheathed wit h fibe rboard shcathing may
be used to resist hori zont al fo rces nOI exceeding Ihose SCI
forth in this section. The fibcrboard sheat hing. 1.2 m by 2.4
Ill. shall be applied verticall y [Q wood stud s n OI less than 50
mm nominal in thi ckncss spaced 400 mm on cent er. Naili ng
shall be provided at the perimeter of the sheathing board
and at the intermediate studs. Blocking not less than 50 nUll
nominal in thickness shall be provided at horizontal joints
when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel, and
sheathing shall be fastened to the blocking with nails sized
spaced 75 mIn on centers each side of joint. Nails shall be

spaced not less than 9 mm from edges and ends of
shea thing, Marginal studs of shear wall s or shear-resisting
clements shall be adequately anchored at the top and
bottom and designed to resist all forces, The maximum
height -width ratio shall be 1.5: I .
I~'
= F~ x
(product of adjustlnen t factors)
For a design to be acce ptable, the actual stress. i .c. It r!lH.'.,:

be Jess lhan or eq ual to the adjustcd design va lue F,' :
615.1.1 Repetitive Memoer System

A repetitive member system is defined as one that /Ja.':
three (3) or more parallel members of Dimension lun -.l ;
structural composite lumber; (2) Members spaced not lllUi ,;
than 600mm; (3) Members connected together by a
distributing clement such as roof, floor, or wall sheathi:
For a repetitive member system, Ihe reference Fi} rlW\'
multiplied by a repetilive member factor, C, = 1.15. 1-(;
olher framing systems, C, = 1.0.
'"
Va lues for species and grades not tahuhlled shall !';,'

approved by the building official.
615.2 Stresses in Piles Used as Structural Mcmb(~rs

Induced stresses for normal loading of round poles Pl"' .
when used as a st ructural member, except modI;;;::'; " I
elasticity which shall be the same as for sawll lum ber, sh~lll
not exceed 60 percent of the basic unit working stresses WI'
the species as forth in Table 6.1
CHM' lTnGWou(i
6J5.3 Adjustlllcnl ofSlresscs
2.
The allowable uui! stresses specified in this chapter shall be

su bject (0 applicahle adjustmen ts.
615.3. 1 Gcneral.
G1!J
When the ,1C(.;UIllUl tttcd durati oll of the full maximu m

load during the life of the member docs not exceed the
period indicated below, the val ues may he inc reased in
the tabl e as follows :
--~
--r~ ---- ---- -'- '- -------- ---~---
The adjustments shall be as sc t forth in the footnotes to the

approprialc Slrcss wbk~s and 1(; the requiremen ts or th is
section:
::: load dunll;ofl faclor
;;;. wei servi ce fact or
:= size faclor
::: form factor
:;: Ial lI SC faclOr
:;: support factor
:;: incising Iclor
:;: temperature fact or
:;: repetitive member factor
:= column stability factor
= beam sla bili t y factor
:;: slenderness factor
=. coeffi cient of variation
:::: volume factor
These adjustment factors do not ap pl y
design values.
to
al! reference
6 J5.3 .2 Preservative Treatment.
The values for wood press ure impregnat ed with an

approved process and preservative need no adjustment for
trea tment but arc subjected to ot her adj ustments.
615.3.3 Firc-Retardant Treatment

The values for lumber and plywood pressu re imprcgnated
with approved fire~ retard a nt chemi cals, including fastener
value s, shall be recommended by ihe Ireater and su bmitted
to the building official for approval. Submittal to the
building official shall include all substanti ating data, Such
y,llues shall be developed fl'Om approved test methods and
procedurcs th at consider potential strength -reduction
characteristics, including effects of elevated temperatures
ilnd moisture.
Increase
Period
.- - - --- For seve n days dunllion. li S for roof
25%
load s
---I
:13.3%
f.'or e,lr! hquake
Co
.~--- __:_ -__:_____c---- - - -. - - --
1.25
1.33
.--~- .-=---~=------'--.----'
For wind (for connect ions and

fasteners)
1.33
60%
For wind (me mbers only)
1.60
100%
For impact
2.0
:n.J%
The fo regoing examples arc no! cumulative. For combined

dural io n of loadings the resultant struc!urnl membe rs shall
not be smaller than the required for the longer duration of
loading.
The duration of load factors in this ilem shall 11 0 1 appl y 10
compressionperpendicular-tograin design values based on
1I deformation limi t, or 10 modulus of el(lslicit y.
3.
V'llues for normal loading conditions may be used

without regard to im p(lct if the stress induced by impact
does not exceed the val ues for normal loading.
615.3.5 Size Factor Adjustment

When the depth of a rec tan gular sa wn lumber bending
member 125 I11Ill or thicker exceeds 300 mm, the bending
vHlues , 1"1" shall be multiplied by the siz.e factor, C,.., as
determined by the Equatio n (615- 1):
_(300)"9
Cr - -
(6 15- 1)
where:
Other adjustments are applicable, except thm the impact
lo ud-duration factor shall not apply.
615.3.4 Duration of Load

Values for wood and mecha ni cal fas tenings (when the
',yood delennines the load capacity) are subj ec ted
adjustments based on (he following vi:l riati olls in the
duration of load:
!.
Where a member is fully stressed to the max imum

allowable stress, either continuously or cumulatively,
for more than 10 years under the conditions of
maximum design load, the values shall not exceed 90
perce nt of those in the tabl es.
C"
d
:::: size factor

:::: depth of beam, mill
For be<llllS of circul ar cross sec ti on thaI have a diameter

greater than 340 mill, or 300 I11Ill or Inrger sq uare beams
loaded in th e pJ <lIl C of the diagonal, the size faclor C'. may
be determined on the basis of an equivalellt conventionally
loaded square beam of th e same c ro ss ~ s ect io Jlal area.
Size factor adjustments are cumulative with form factof
adjust ments specified in Section 615.3.7, except for lumber
I beam and box beams, but arc not cu mul ative with
slendemess factor adjustmen ts specified in Section 615.3.6.
The size factor adjustment shall 1I0t 'apply to visually
National Structural Code of the Philippines 61h Edition Volume 1
620
CHAPTEH 6 Wooel
graded lumber 50 mm
(0
100 nun thi ck or to machinc-
strcss-rtllcd lumber.
When the slenderness factor C, is greaLer than I () but docs

not exceed CI;. the all owable unit stress ill bending 1-"" sha ll
he determined from the following equati on:
615.3.6 Slenderness Factor .Ind Flexural Stress.

When the depth of a bending member exceed s it s breadth ,
F 'b
latera! support may be required and the slenderness factor

Cs shall be calculated by the followin g Equation:
= F/J
[I - .3I. (~:t)'
l
C'
o
(615-3)
where:
(i7[
. =v/7
C,
(615-2)
where:
Cs
If
d
b
:::;
slcndc mcss factor

length of bea m, mill from the followin g
tabl e
(615 ..
= mod ulus of elasti ci ty
Fb
= allowable unit stress ror extreme nbe!" in bend ing

= allowable unit stress for cKtremc fibcr in bending.
adjusted ror sle nd erncss.
= effective
F'/J
:::; depth of beam, 111m

:::; breadth of beam, mm
When the slenderness factor C is greater than Ct but less

than 50, the allowable unit stress in bending F';, shall be
determined by the following Equation:
The effective lengths, I.. in the tabl e arc based on an Ijd

rati o of 17. For oth er f../d ratios, these effective lengths may
be multiplied by a factor equal to 0.85+2.55/(1,/d) except
that thi s factor shall not apply to a single-s pan beam with
equal end rnomems Or :::; 1.841u) or [0 a single span or
cantilever beam with any load (ii' = 1.921u).
When the slenderness facLor Cs doe s not exceed 10, the full
allowable unit stress in bending Fb may be used .
Effecti ve Length of Beams
Type of Beam Span and Nature
of Load
Value of Effecti ve
Length, [,
Single-span beam, loael

1.611"
concentrated at the center
Single-span beam, uniforlnly
1.92/1/
distributed load
Single-span beam. equ al end
1.84[.
moments
Cantilever beam. load
1.69[.
concentrated at unsupported end
Cantilever beam, uniformly
1.06["
distributed load
Cantilever beam, uniformly
distributed load with
1.69["
concentrated load at c'lIltilcver
end
Single-span or cantilever beam,
1.92["
. anY_<l~!2er load ...__ ..
--- -_.'.
- - -- - -.--..- ..-'"--..
{II =unsupported length of beam, mIll
- .-.--.~
' _ 0.4 38E

Fb,
C,-
(6 15-5)
In no case shaH C.. exceed 50.

The design valu es for ex treme fiber in bending, F h , and
modulus elasticity, E, used in the formulas for F'b shall 1:0(:
modified to account for moisture service condition, duratiol l.
of loading, temperature and type of treatmen t in accordance
wi th the Section 615.3 except that the modification for size
faclOl' shown in Secti on 6 15.3.5 shall not be used. Design
va lues for extreme fiber in bending adjusted for slendemess
factor, F'b. are not subject to further modifications for
moisture service co ndition, duration of loading,
temperature, type or treatment or size.
The design value for ex treme fiber in bending. F'b, shall not
exceed the full design value for ex treme fiber in bending.
FI" modified as allowed in thi s section. including the size
factor adjustment.
When the compression edge of a beam is suppOited
throughout its length to prevent its lateral di splacement, and
the ends at points of bearing have lateral support to prevent
rotation, th e unsupported lengt h 11/ may be taken as zero.
When latera l SU ppOI1 is prov ided to prevent rotation at the
points of end beal;ng but no other lateral support is

provided throu ghout th e length of the beam, the.
un supported III is th e distance between such points of end
bearing, or the length of th e cantilever.
When a beam is provided with a lateral support to prevent
rotational and lateral di splacement at intermediate points as
. well as the ends, unwppo rted length lu is the di slilW;.;
between such points of intennediate lateral su pport,
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philipp in es
CHAPTEFl G \Nood
(liS.3.7 Form Fador Adjustments

The allowable unit strcss in bcnding for non-prismHtic,'
Illcmbers shall not exceed thc value established by

mulliplyillg such stress hy the form faclOr Cj dctcrmincd liS
follows:
Beam Section
Form Factor (Cj-)
Circular
1.180
1.414
Squ <l re (\\1111 diagonal vertic,l l)

Lu mber I Beams and Box Beam
0.81
1+[( 2~> r2~~~3 -Ijc,]
(615-6)
--_._- ) + 88
( 25.4
where:
Ci
C,:
P
= form
raCIor
=s upport f'lclor =/',(6 -
(615-7 )
8p + 3/) (I - q) + q
= f<stio of" depth of" cumpression nange to full

\l,l
615.3.9 Temperature
The allow:lble unit stress for unlrcatl.'.d and prcscrvalivctreated wood specified in this chapler Hlld as modified in
this sc!.:tion applies (0 uses within the ran ge or climatic
tempcra ture ordina ri ly encoulltered in buildings. Wood
members shall not be usctl in areas suhjcl:t to tempcratures
above 66(' unless the expos ure is infreque nt and any
permanent loss in strengt h is accounted for in the design.
The al lowable un i! streSS for lirc-rcl:u:dant-trealcd soliJ .
sawn lumber and plywood, including fas\Cners va lucs.
subject to prolonged elevated temperatures from
manufacturing or equipmcnt processes, bUI not exceeding
66C, shall bc developed frol11 approved tes t methods that
properl y
consi der
potential
st rength-redu cti on
cha racteri stics, including cffects of heat and moisture.
615.3.10 Moisture Service Condition

Where sawn lumber and fastenings arc exposed 10 service
conditions causing the wood to possess morc than 19
percent moisture colHent, the t:lbulmcd design vaiues 5htll l
be reduccd as specified in Table 6.16
depth
of beam
= ratio of thickness of
eb or webs to the full width
o f beam
615.3.11 Boiled Joinls

Bolt values used in conjunction with mctal side plates shaH
be in accordance with Secl ion 619.
Thc form (newr adjustment shall be cumulative with the

size factor adjustment, except for lumber I beams and box
beams.
615.3.8 Modulus of Elasticil), Adjuslmenl

Thc usc of avcrage modul us of elasticity E va lues is
appropriate for the design of normal wood structural
members and assemblies. In special applications where
deflections arc critical to the stability of structures or
structural componcnl s, and where exposcd to varying
temperature and relative humidity under sustained loading
co nditions, the average values of the modulus of elasticity E
listed in Table 6.1 shall be reduced to account for
variability. Coefficients of variation Cv in the modulus of
elasticity E for lumber as foHows:
c,'
Visllally graded !'i(lwn lumbor.
Machine Sll'css*rated sawn lumber.
G :~ l
..(US
... 0.11
The average modulus or claslicily E valucs listed in the

table shall be Illultiplied by 1*(\" or 1-1 .65Cv to oblain a
modulus of elasticity E va lue exceeded by 84 percent or 95
percent indi vidual picces, re specti vely.
The duration-or-load adjustments specified in Section

615.3.4 do not apply to modulus of elaslicil y va lues.
or the Philippines 6tl1 Edition Volume
6 "2
CHAPTEH G . Wood
616.4 Horizon(HI Sht':lf ill No(chcd Bemns

Whcn rcclangular-shapcd girder. bl~.tlns or joists <Ire
notched at points of support 011 lht! tension sid{', they shull
me!.!t thc design requiremcnts of thaI section ill bellding and
ill shear. The llorizor1! ;d sh~'ar Stl\~SS at such point shall not
exceed the value calculated by Equillion (61()-2):
SECTION 616
HORIZONTAL MEMBER DESIGN
616.1 Bel"n Span
For simple beams, (he span shall be taken as the distance
from fac!..: to face of support, plus one half the required
l ength or bearing at each end; for continu'.1us beams. the
span is the distance between centers of Lea
j:"g~
on slJppon
over which the beam is continuous.
where:
d
d'
616.2 Flexure
= lOud depth of beam.

= acwal dcpth of beilln lit 110(ch.
616.2.1 Circular Cross Section

A beam of circuli'll' cross section may be assumed 10 ha ve
the same st ren gth in Oexure as a sq uare beam having the

S;UllC cross-sectional area. If a circular beam is I<Ipercd, it
sha ll be co nsidered ~I beam of variable cross seclion.
Whcn girder, beams or joists with circular cross section are

notched al poillls of support Oil the tension side. they shall
meet the design requirements Of lha! scction in bending .and
in shear. The <lc tual shc:lr stress at SIK h point shall not
exceed the value calculatcd by Eqll<ltioll (616-3):
616.2.2 Notching
If possible, notching of beams should be avoided. NO[chcs
in sawll lumber bending members shall not exceed oncsix th the depth of the member and shall not be loca ted in
thc middle third of the spall. Where mcmbers arc notches at
til e cnds, the notch depth shall not exceed onc- fourth the
beam depth. The tension side of the sawn lumber bending
members of 100 mill or greater nominal thickness shaH nOt
be nOlched cxcept at ends of members. Cantilevered
portions of beams less than 100 111111 in normal thickncss
shall not be notched unless the red uced secti on properties
and lumbe r defec ts afe considered in (he design.
616.2.3 L'ltC'rall"lolllcnt Distribution
Lateral mOlllent distribution of a cOllcentf<lted load fmm a
criticaHy loaded beam to adjacent panlilel beams shnll be
calculated.
616.3 Horizontal Shear

The maximulll horizontal shear stress ill a solid-sawn wood
shall not exceed that calculated by mean, of
Equation (616-1):
l.
(-~l('-~!'l
2A"
till
(616-3)
where:
All
= cross-sectional mea of l10tched member
d
d"
= total depth of beam

= actual depth of beam at nOlcil
For bending members with other th an rectangular or

ci rcular cross section and notched at point of SUppOl1 on the
tens io n side. the <lctual shear stress parallel to grain shall be
cakuillled in accord ~mee wi lh conve nti onal engineeri ng
mechanics.
When girders, beams or joists arc notched at point of
support on the compression side, they shall meet design
requirement for that net section in bending and in shear.
The shear at slich point shall not exceed the value
calculated by :
(616-4)
where:
3t'
2bd
f.
(616- 1)
artual unit shea r fl' shall !lot exceed the allow,lblc ror
th e species and lIH.~ grade as givcn in Table 6. I adjusted for
duration of loading. as provided in Section 615.3.4 .
Tlh~
'-"hen calculating the shear force, \'. distribution or load 10

<HljacclH pilra!lcl benms by r100ring or other members InRy
be considered, ami all loads \vithin a distance from either
support equal to the depth of the beam may be neglected for
beams support by full bearing 011 O!W surfacc and loads
applied to th e opposite surface.
d'
('
= IOlal depth of bC<l1ll

::::: <Icltm l depth of bC<11ll at /lotch
::::: dista nce notch cx tends i nside the inner edge of
support
The shear ror the not ch on the compression side shall 1)('
further limited to the value determined for a beam of ,:.
d' if e exceeds d'.
(116.5 Design of J()inl~ in Shear

Eccc!l1ri c connector and bolted joints and beams SUppOil by
conlleClOrs or bolt shal! be designed so thai li, in Equation
(6 16-5) does not exceed the allowable un it stresses ill
horizon ta l shear.
For hea ring of less thMI 150 mill in leng th an d not IIc;trcr
than 75 111111 to the end of a member, the maximulll
allowa ble load per SYUl.lfC olin ma y be oblain c,d b),
multiplying the allowable unit stresses in compress ion
perpendicular to grain by th e factor indicated by:
(6168)
. 3V
j,. = ._._.
2b{{,
(6165)
in whi ch !" is theJe))glh of bc<tring in mIl) Ille,u;urcd alon g

the grain of the wood.
where:
d,. (with co nnectors) = the deplh of the member less the
dislance from the unloaded edge of the member to the
nearest edge of the nearest con nector.
d(' (with holts or lag screws)
The multiplying factors for indicated length of bearing on
such small areas as plates and washers may be:

Lcngth
=- the depth of the member less
of
the distance from the unloaded edge of the member to the

center of the nearest bolt or Jag screw.
Al lowable unit stresses in shear for joint involving bolts or
con nectors loaded perpendicular ( 0 gra in may be 50 percent
. greater th,m (he horizontal shear values as set f011h in Table
6.1 and, provided thaI the joint occurs at least five times the
depth of th e member frol~l its end. Wh en the joint is less
than five times the depth of the member from its end, the
included shear st ress is calculated by:
\'
=_~.~.J~)
2bd c
ld(.
(6 166)
and the 50 percent increase in design values for shear in

joints docs not apply.
616.6 Compression Perpendicular to Grain

In appli cati on where defonnation is cti ti cai, Equation
(616-7) shall be lIsed to calculate the compression
pClpcndiculnr-tograin design val ues.
Fe.1' = 0.73 Fe.1
Bearing
(mill)
Factor
Fo'
The durati on of load modification factors give n in Section

615.3.4 shall not apply to comp rcssion -perpendicula:-to
grain values for sawn lumber.
The allowable unit stresses for compression perpendicular
to grain ill Table Nos. 6.1 and 6.17 apply to bearings of any
length at the ends of the beam and to all bearings 150 mill
or more ill length at any other location.
38
50
100
75
or
more
1.75
1.38
__
"i.13._- . 1.10
1.25 _. 1.19
.
..
1.00
In joists sUPP0I1ed on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked

to the studding, the allowable stress in compression
perpendicular to grain may be increased 50 percent.
616.7 Lateral Support
Solid-sawn rectangular lumber beams, rafter and joist shall

be suppoI1ed laterally 10 prevent rotation or lateral
displacement in accordance with the following:
ff the depth-to-thic kness
dimensions, is:
nHio,
based
all
nom inal
I.
Two to one, or 2: I, no lateral support is required.
2.
Three to one, 3: I or four to one, 4: I, the ends shall be

held in posi,ion, as by [ulldep,h solid blocking,
bridging, nailing or bolting to other framing members,
approved hangers or other acceptable means.
3.
Five to one, 5: 1. one edge shall be held in line for its

entire length.
4.
Six to one, 6:1 , bridging, fulltiepth solid bloc king or

cross bracing shall be installed at interval s not
exceedi ng 2.4 meters unless:
(616-7)
compression-pcrpendicu iar-to-grain values from

Tables 6. 1
::: critical compressiollpe rpendicular-to-grain value
25
In us ing the preceding equation and table for round washers

or bearing areas, usc a length equal 10 the diameter.
where:
Fel
150
13
Both edges of the member arc held in line or,
The co mpression edge of the me mber is support ed

throughout its length 10 prevent lateral displnccmcm, as
by adequate sheathing or sub-flooring, and the ends
and all points of bearing have lateral support to prevent
rotation.
Nalional Siruclural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volu me 1
62~
5.
CI1AI'TE'li r; . Wood
Seven 10 one, 7: I, both edges shall be held ill line for
th eir cn{in:~ Icngth.
SEC'llION'6 p . ' ..
GOLitMN ;pSIGN "
If a heam is subj ect 10 both fl ex ure ~l lld co mpressio n

parallel to gra in, the ratio may be as mu ch as 5: I if one
edge is held tlrmly in!inc. If under any combil1atioll of load
the un braced edge of the member is in tension, the rati o
may be 6: I .
In lieu of providing lateral support by the methods specified

in items 2 th rough 5 above, the ;IIJOWllhlc stresses shall be
reduced by the slenderness factor sci forth in Secti on
615.).6.
616.8 Lateral Support of Arches, Co mpression Chords

of Trusses and Studs
617.1 Column C lassifications
617.1.1 Simple Solid-Wood Columns

Simple column consist of a single piece or of pieces
properly glucd together to (W!ll a Si~lglc mcmber.
617.1.2 Spaced Column , Co nn ector Joined

Spaced columlls arc formed of two Of mo re indi vi dual
members with th eir longitudinal axcs parallel, separated at
the ends and middl e points of their Icngth by blocking and
joined at the ends by timber connectors capable of
developing the required shear resistancc.
Where roof jni.l;( or purJins are llscd between mehes or
compression chords, th e largest value of I)d, calculated

using the depth of the arch or compression chord or
calculated using the breadt h (Icast d i men~ i o ll ) of the arch or

co mpressioll chord bctween poillts of inlcnni nent lateral
suppOI1, shall be uscd. TIIC roof joist o r purlins shall be
placed to account for shrinkage (for example, by placing th e
upper edge~ of unseasoned joist approxi mately 5 percent of
the joist depth above the lOpS of the arch or chord) but also
placed Jow enough to provide adequate lateral support.
Where roof joist or purlins are pl aced on top of an arch Or
co mpression chord and are secu rely fastened to the arch o r
compression chord, the largest va lu e of !,Jd, calcu lated
using the depth of the arch or compression chord or
calculated using the breadth (least dimension) of the arch or
compression chord between points of intermittent lateral
support. shall be used.
Where planks are placed on top of an arch or compression
chord and securely fastened ( 0 the arch or compressio n
chord, or whe n sheathing is nai led properly to the top chord
of trussed rafter, the depth rather Ihan Ihe breadlh of Ihe
arch, compressio n chord or trussed raflcr may be used as

the least dimension in determinin g Vd. Where stud walls in
light~frame construction are adequ ately sheathed on at least
one side, the depth rather than breadth of the stud, may be
laken as the least dimension in calculat in g the Ijd ratio.
617.1.3 Built-Up Columns

Bu ilt-u p colu mn s. other IIwn cOllneclof-joined spaced
col umns and glued- laminated columns, ~ h all n Ol bc
designed as solid colullllls.
617.1.4 Glulam Columns
Gi lliam columns shall be composed of at least four
laminations, with their grain essentially parallel.
Lil1lit~ltion on lid Ratio
For simple sol id columns. /1 d shall not exceed SO.
617.2
617.3 Simple SolidColumn Design

The cffective column length, I,. shall be used in design
Eq uations given in thi s sec tion. The effective column
length. I, shall be detcrmincd in accordance with good
engineering practice. Actu al column len gth, I, may be
multiplied by the factors given in the following table 10
determine effective column length, I".
Allowable unit stresses in newton per square millimeter of
cross-sectional area of sq uare or rectangu lar simple solid
columns shall be determined by the followin g formulas, but
such unit stresses shall not exceed values for co mpression,
parallel 10 gra in Fe in Table 6. 1 adjusted in accordance wilh
provisio n of th is secti oll.
(6J 71)
Associalion of Structural
Engin~ers
of the Pililippincs
CHAPTEH E Wood
SUppO!1 Conditions:
Largc end fixed, small cnd unsuppoltcd
Small end fixed, large end un supported
where:
= 0.8 for sawn lumber.

for round timber piles.
= 0.85
_
r, -
K"L'
(i;-i--;;Y
BOIh ends simply supported:

Tapered toward one end
Tapered toward both ends
= E~ilcr <.:ritica! buckli ng stress for columns

Fc* = lahuhllcd co mpress ion design value multiplied by all
of the ,Ipplicab!c adjustment L1 ctors.
gel:" = 0.3 for vis uaJl y graded l u m~}er.
Kc = 0.418 ror products such as machine S (rC s~Hi.He d
sawn lumber.
...
_--- ---._- - _. _.
.Ii".
, ~
,, ,,
,,
,,,
,,
,,
Buckling
Mo(h~!
t ~
Ii
,
,
,,,
,
,,,
,
,,,
1.00
2. 10
\
\
Ji. II,
0.65
O.SO
,p
,
,,
,
,,
,,
,
,,,
,,
,,
,
,
,,
\ .
\
\
...
i
bQCIdin
...... -,
K,
I. 20
The design of a column of rou nd cross section shall be

based on lhe design c,llculali olls for a squa re colu mn 01" the
same cross ~sectional area and having the so\!l1c degree of
,,
,,,
,
,,
,,,
,
2.'
('Ilattd
..,.
End
Condition
Code
I
User Note:
Rotation fi x.
.,.Y'
Rotzrti.ou frcc , traNiatiotl fIXed
Rotation fr ee, lIanslation free
Rotation fixcd, translation free
t, = K; I
617.4 Tapered Columns
When designi ng a tapered colum n with a rectangular cross

section, tapered at one or both ends, the representative
dimension, dul' fo r each face of the column slwll he deri ved
as foll ows:
d n p
= dm in + {cimax - dmil,Ha-.Q. 15 ( [dmifl I dm"J1
a = 0.50
a = 0.70
(617-3)
condltto,..
approJj.
a = 0.70
a = 0.30
For all other SU pp011 conditi ons:
Do .....
f.dot,
(-j?S
(61 7-2)
where:
thc minimum dimension, d, for that face of the
column
d"'lI.l = tbe maximum di mension, d, for that face of 'he
colu mn
d"'ifl
th
626
CHAPTU! G . Wood
and (2 ) w he n checkin g the design perpendic ular 10 the

plane of bend ing the ~Ie ndt~rn('.s~ nHio. Uti. in -Ihe plan e o f
bending shall be \lsed 10 <.:ldculatc F', and J shall be SCi.
equal
618.1 Flexul'e and Axial Tension

Members subjected 10 bOI!~ .-lcxu['c .and axial tension shall
be so proportioned that
(6 181 )
<
and
Iv - I,
I~ **
(6182)
10
zero.
6JX,3 Spaced ColulIlIls

In the case of spaced columns, this co mbined stress formula
maybe applied only if the bending is in a direction paralIcl
to the greater d of the individual member.
618.4 Truss Compression Chords
Effect of buckling of a 50 mill by 100 mill or smaller tIllSS
compression chord hav ing effec tive bucklin g lengths or
2.40 III or less and wi th 9 mm or thicker pl ywood sheathing
nailed to the IUlITOW face of the chord in accordance with
the appropriate slandllrds 5h"1 1l be determined from the
equil tion:
C,.
= 1 + O!,2!,
where:
*'
EO.05
"
applicable adjustment factors except beam stabi Jjt y
factor. CI.
=
Fb ** =
F/
f,
ft,
(618-6)
tabulated bending design value multiplied by all
F (C")(C,,,)(C,)(C,.)(C)(C,) for sawlllu",ber

Fb" (C,,)(CM)(C,) (C,.) for glulam
tabulated bending design value multiplied by all
applicable adjustment factor except volu me faclor.

Cy .
= Fv (CO)(CM)(C,)(CL)(C,)(C,)(C,) for sawll lumber
= F. (Co)(CM)(C,)(CLl for gilliam
= allowable tension design value parallel to grain
= actua l unit stress in ten sion paraJl ellO grai n.
= actual unit st ress for extreme fiber in bending.
618.2 Flexure and Axial Compression

Members subj ected to both flexure and axial compression
shall be proportiolled that
J.L
Ib'
F' c F' I>~
S I
(6 18-3)
lie
where:
Cr
"'" buckling of the stiffness factor

"'" 0.819 for rnachine-strcssnucd lumber
f,.
.,"'" effective bucklin g length used in design of chord
for compression loading
Eo.o.l = 0.589E for visually graded lumber
= Modulus of elastici ty from tables of allowable UTlit

stress. N/mmJ
The va lues of C r determined from th is eq uati on arc for

wood seasoned to a moi sture content of 19 percent or less al
the time th e plywood is nailed to the chord. For wood that
is unseasoned at the time of pl ywood auachmcnt, Cr slwlJ
be determined from the Equalion (6187):
,
CT
1+0.331,
EO.05
(618-7)
For chords with an effective buckling length greater thall

2.40 Ill, C shall be taken as the value for a chord having an
effective lenglh of 2.40 m.
The value of J shall be derived as

/, ! d -II
J = -'---
K-II
-_.
E
K =0.67 1 JF,
(6 18-4)
(6 18-5)
except that J shall not be less than zero nor greater thull Olle
(0 5!, 1$ 1).
F'e and K shall be determined in accordance with the

provision in Section 617.3, except (I) when checking the
design in the plane of bending the slenderness ratio, Vd, in
the plane of bending shall be lIsed to calculate F'e and J
The buckling stiffness factor does not appJy to shari

col umns or trusses used un der wet co nditions. The
{Il1owablc unit co mpress ive stress $hall be modified by the
buckling stiffness factor whcn a truss chord is subjected (0
combined fle xure an d com pression and the bendi ng
moment in th e di rection thaI induces compression slres:,,--,
in the chord face to wh ich the plywood is attached.
The buckling stiffness factor CT shall apply as follows:
Short column ( /, 1 d of II or less ):
Associat ion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEH G . Wood
629
620.4.2 Veneer
Anchored masonry and sto lle wa ll veneer shall not exceed
J 25 Illlll ill thickness.
620.1 Genel'al
The requireme nts in this section arc intend ed for
conventional li g ht ~fram c construction. Olher methods may
be used provided a satisfactory design is submitted showing
compliance wi th other provisions of this code.
620.4.3 Unusually Shaped Buildiugs

When building is of an unusual shape as defined in Section
620.5.3, buildings of light-frame co nstructio n in Seismic
L,one 2 shall have a latcral~force~ rcs i stillg sys tem designed
to resist the forces specified in Chapter 2.
620.5 Additional Requirements for Con ventional
Construction in Seismic lAne 4
Onl y the fol/owing occupancies ma y be cons tnlClcd in
620.5.1 Braced Wall Lines
accorda nce wit h (his di vision:

I.
2.
O n c~,
In areas under Seismi c Zone 4 and where the basic wind

speed exceeds 125 kph. hui Idings shall be provided with
two- o r three-story residential buildings.
IV bui ldings, us
ex te rior and interior hnlccd wa ll lines not exceeding 7.50111
defined in Table 103-1, when constructed on a slah -ollgrade floor.
O ne -story Occup.lncy Category
on cen ter in both the longitudi nal and transverse directions

in each story.
3.
Category V Occupancies
Exception:
4.
Top-story walls and roofs of Occupancy Ca tegory IV

buildings not exceeding two storeys of wood framin g.
5.
Interior non-load bearing partitions, ceilings and

curtain wa ll s in all occ upancies.
In one- and two-stmy dwellings and lodging houses,

imerior braced wall line spacillg may be increased to lIot
more than 10.0 m on center in order to accomnwdate one
single room per dwelling unit flot exceeding 84.0 m2 The
building official may require additional walls to contaill
braced panels when this exception is used.
Olher approved repet itive wood mem bers may be llsed in
lieu of solid-sawn lumber in conventional constluction

provided these members com ply with the provisions of thi s
code.
620.2 Design of Portions
When a building of otherwise conventio nal constructi on

contains
non -conventi911aJ
structural
elemen ts,
those
elements shall be designed in accordance with Section

"Rationality of Design Method" on the previous chapter.
Oil
620.3 Additional Requirements for Conventional

Construction in High M
wind Areas
Provisions for conven tional conSiIllction in high ~willd areas
shan apply when specifically adopted.
620.4 Additional Requirements for Conventional
Construction in Seismic Zone 2
620.5.2 Veneer
Anc hored masonry and stolle wa ll ve neer shall 1I0 t exceed
125 mill in thi ckness and shall not extend above the fi rst
sto ry.
620.5.3 Unusually Shaped Buildings
When of unusual shape, build ings of light-frame
construction shall have a latcraJ-force-rc!iisting sys tem
designed to resist the forces specified in Chapter 2. One or
mOre of the following shall be considercd to constitute an
llnusual shape:
620.5.3.1 When exterior braced wall panels, as required by
Section 620.10.3, arc not in one plane veltically from the
foundat ion to the upperm ost story in which they arc
required.
Exceptions:
620.4 .1 Braced Wall Lines

In areas under Seismic Zone 2 ;:lIld whe re the basic wind
speed obt'li ned frolll Figure 207-) is not gre ater than 125
kph, buildings shall be provided with exterior tl nd in terior
braced wall lines not exceeding 10.0 m on center in bot h the
longitudinal and transverse directions in each story.
Floors with can tilel'e!:'; or setbacks not exceeding/ow times

the nominal depth of the floor joists may support braced
lVall panels provided:
1.
Floor joists are 50 mm by 250 mm or larger and

spaced at not more thall 400 mm 011 center.
2.
The ratio of the back span to the cantilever is at least 2

to 1.
National Structural Code Df the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
6 30
CHAPTEH 6 . Wood
3.
Floor joists at ends of braced IVall panels are doubled.
4.
A continuous rim joists is cOflnected to ends of all

cantilevered joists. 1'liC rim joist may be spliced using
(J metal fie no/less than 1.47 mm (/6 galvaniz.ed gage)
and 38111111 wide/astened with six 16 d nails.

5.
Gravity loads carried at the end of cantilevered joists

Gre limited to uniform wall and roof load alld the
reactions/rm!z headers having a span of 2.40 m or less.
height, .!l1 illlerior braced waJl p;'lIlcls shall be supported on

continuous fOllndations.
Exception:
Two-story buildings may have interior braced wall lines
supported on continuous jOUlu/mions al il/tervals he....
exceeding 15.0 m. provided:
1.
Cripple l,<'!al! h(!ighr does nOl exceed 1.20 m.
2.
First - floor braced wall panel~i are supported ,.,'.

doubled floor joist, COllliIZU O U~' blocking or FO{ir
beams.
3.
Dislallce between bracing lines does not exceed li l 'i, " _'
the buildillg width parallel (0 lhe braced wall line.
620.5.3.2 When a section of floor or roof is no! lmcrally

Sllppol1cd by braced wall Jines on all edges.
Exception:
PoriioTIS of rooff or floors which do 110/ support braced
waJ/ panels above may extend up to J .80 111 beyond a
braced wall/ine.
620.5.3.3 When the end of a required braced wall pallel
exte nds more than 300 mm over lin opening in the wall
below. This provision is applicable to braced wall pancls
offsc t in plane and to braced wall panels offse t ou t of plane
as permitted by Section 620.5.3.1.
F..xceprion:
Braced wall panels may extend over an opening 1101 more
than 2.40 nl. in width when the header is a 100 mm by 300
mm or larger member.
620.5.3.4 When an openi ng ill a floor or roof exceeds the

lesser of 3.60 m or 50 percent of the least fl oor or roof
dimension.
620.6 Girders
Unless ol herwise permitted by pro visions in NSCP V Ol:J!:1 , ~
3 on I-l ousing, girders for single-story construclinJ'r ',r
girde rs supporting loads frolll 11 single nOol' shall not be- k:-::s
Ihan lOOmm by 150 IlUll for spans 1.80 III or less, provided
that girders are spaced not more than 2.40 Jll on center.
Other girders shall be designed to suppo rt the I()ad~,;
specified in this code. Gi rder end joints shall occur over
supports. When a girder is spliced Ove r a support,
adequate tic shall be provided. The end of beams or gillh:; s
suppo!1ed Oil masonry or concre te shall not have less lll:ii!
75 111m of bearing.
620.7 Floor Joist s
620.7.1 General
The limits of defects by grade ill joists and plalli;s fur
620.5.3.5 Construct ion where pOrl ions of a nODI' level are

verticall y offset such that the framing members Oil either
side of the offset cannol be lapped or lied lOgcthcr in an
approved manner as req uired by Section 620.7 .3.
Exception:
Framing supported directly by foundations.

620.5.3.6 When braced wall lines do not occur in two
perpendicular directions.
620.5.3.7 Other config urations which, in the opinion of th e

building official, create irregularities or di scontinuities
wh ich arc 1101 addressed by this Section.
620.5.4 Lumber Roof Decks
Lumber roof decks shall have solid shemhing.

620.5.5 Interior Braced Wall Support
In one-story buildings, interior braced wall lines shalt be
suppol1ed on continuous foundation s at intervals not

exceedi ng 15.0
111.
In buildings more than one-story in
seasoned wood arc set forth in Table 6,15.

620.7.2 Bearing
Except where supported on a 25 mill by 100 mm ! ;; ,1-:-'1:
strip and nailed to th e adjoining stud, the ends of eaell
shall not have less than 38 Illlll of bearing on wood or
metal, or less than 75 mm on masonry.
620.7.3 Framing Details
Jois ts shall be supported laterally {It th e ends and at (";;" 11
support by solid blocking ex cept wh ere th e ends or .! <)
arc nailed to a header, band or rim joi st or to an iHI.i o~lLJ ',i:
stud or by other <Ippro ved means. Solid blocking shall not
be less 50 mill in thi ckness and the full depth o f joist.
Notches on the ends of joists shall 1101 exceed one-fou rth

the joist depth . Holes bored in joist,; shall not be wit hi n ~n
mill of the top or bottom of the joist and the diamch': l .,' ")
such hole shall not exceed one-third the depth of {[;\. jl; )sL
Notches in the top or bottom of joists shall not eX<T\ ' . ~ :i , .
sixt h the depth and shall not be located in the middle dl!; d
of the span.
Associa tion of Structu ra l Engineers of the Philippines
C HAPTE.!' G . WooO
Joist framing from opposite sides o/" a beam. gintcr or

pani tioll ,.,hall he lapped al Jc.ast 75 mm or the opposing
joists shall he tied together In an 'lpprovcd manner.
Jo is ts frelllling il1lo the side or a wood girdcr shall be
supp(mcd by framing ,lIlellors or nil ledger strips IH)[ less
tlWll 50 mill by 50 mill.
620.7.4 Framing Around Openings
Trimmer amI header joists shall be doubled, or of lumber of
equivalent cross sec tion, when the span of the header
exceeds J .20 Ill. The ends of header joists more than 1.80
m lon g shall be su pported by framing anchors or joist
hallgers unl ess bea ring on a beam, panition or wall. Tail
joists over 3.60 III long shall be supported at header by
framing anchors or 011 ledger strips not less th'lIl 50 I11I1l by
G31
620.8,3 Plnnk Flooring

Plank floo ring shall be designed in ;Icconlancc with the
genera! pro vis ions of thi s codc .
In lieu of such dcsign, 50 Jll1l1 tongue -and -groove planking
Illay be llsed in accordance with Tabl e 6.22. Joints in such
planking may bc 'randomly spaced, provided th e system is
applied to not less than three continuous spuns, planks arc
center-matched and cnd~1l1atched or spli ncd, eac h. rlank
bears on at least one support and joints are ~;c para.tl~d by at
least 600 mm in adjacent pieces. 25 mill nominal strip
square-edged flooring; 13 mm tongueand -groove flooring
or 9 mill wood structural panel shall be applied at right
angles 10 Ihe span of Ihe planks. The 9 mm plywood shall
be applied with the face grain at right angles lO the span of
the planks.
50mm.
620.7.5 Supporting Bearing P~lrtjtions

Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists shall not be offset
from support ing girders, walls or partitions more than the
joist deplh .
Joists under and parallel
doubled .
to
bearing partitions shall be
620.7.6 Blocking
Floor joists shall be blocked when required by the
provisions of Section 620.7.3.
620.8.4 Particleboard
Where used (IS structural subOooring or as combined
subfloor underlaymcnt, particleboard shall be as set f0I1h in
Table 6.13.
620.9 P~lrticlehoard Underlaymcnt

In accordance with approved recognized standards,
particleboard floor undcrlayment shall co nform to Type
PBU . Underlayment shall not be less than 6 mm in
thi ckness and shall be identified by the grade mark of an
approved inspection agency.
Underlayment shall be
installed in accordance with this code and as recommended
by the manufacturer.
620.8 SubOoOling
620.10 Wall Framing
620.8.1 Lumber Subnoor
620.10.1 Size, Height and Spacing
Sheathing used as a st ructural sub-floor simi I conform to the

limitations set (ol1h in Table 6.9.
'Jlle size. height and spacing of studs shall be in accordance
Joints in subtlooring shall occur over SUpp0I1S unless cndmatched lumber is used in which case each piece shall bear
on at least two jOists.
wit h Table 6.23 except that utility grade studs shall not be
spaced more than 400 mm on center, or sup port more than a
roof and ceiling, or exceed 2.40 111 in height for exterior
walls and load-bearing walls or 3.00 m for interior non
loadbearing walls.
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not

exceed 400 111111 and 25 mm nominal tongue-and-groove
wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular to the joi sts.
620.10.2 Framing Details
620.8.2 Wood Structural I'"nels

\:Vhere used as structural sub nooring, wood st ru<.:w ral
panels s hall be ns sci forlh ill Tables G. 1O and G. II . \Vooel
stru ctural panel co mbination subfloor 1I1lde ri ayment shall
ha ve maximum spans as set fort h ill Table 6.12.
When wood structu ral pane) noOl"s are glued to joists with
an adhesive in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's
directions, fasteners may be spaced a maximum of 300 mm
on center at all supports.
St ud s shall be placed with th eir wid e dimension

perpendicular to the wall. Not less Ihan three st uds shall be
insta lled at each corner of an exterior w,l l1 .
L::xceptiolls:
At comers, a third stud may be omifled lhrough (he use of

wood spacers or backup cleats of 9 mm wood structural
pallc/, 9 111111 Type M "Exterior Glue" particle-board, 25
mm lumber or other approved devices rliat will serve as an
adequate backing for the attachment of facing materials.
Where fire resistance ratings or shear values are involved,
Natio~,al Structural Code of (he Philippines 6"; Edi(ion Volume 1
632
CHAPT"" 6 . Wood
than 9 ml11 for (lOn I11Ill stud spacirlt in <I<.:cordancc with

Tables 6.5 lind 6.25.
wood spacers, backup cleats or other devices shall flot be

used unless specifically approved for Stich use.
Dearing and exterior w<l1I studs shall be capped wilh double
lOp plates install ed to provide overlapping at corners and at
intersections with other paI1itions. End joints in double top
plates shall be offset at least 2.40 fll .
Exceptions:
A single top plote
lIIay
When bearin g studs arc spaced at 600 111m intervals and EOr
plates arc less than 50 nun by 150 mm or 70 mill by 100
111m members and when the floor joists. floor tl1lSSCS or roof
tru sses which they support are spaced at more than 406 Illlll
intervals, such joists or tmsses sha ll bear with in 125 mm of
the studs beneath or a third plate shall be installed.
Interior nonbearing partitions may be capped with a single
top plate in stalled to provide overlapping at corners and at
interscctions with other walls and pal1itions. The plate shall
be continuously tied at joints by solid blocking al least 400
mill in length and equal in size to the plate or by 3 min by
38 111m metal ti es with spliced sections fastened with two
16d nails on each side of the joint.
Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than
50 mill in thickness having a width not less than that of rhe
wall studs.
620.10.3 Bracing
Braced wall lines shall consists of braced wall panels which
meet the requirements for location, type and amount of
bracing specified in Table 6.24 and arc in line or offset
from each other by not more than 1.20 111. Braced wall
panels shall start at not more than 2.40 m from each end of
a braced wall linc. All braced wall panels shall be clearly
indicated on Ihe plans. Constnu.:tion of braced wall panels
shaIl bl! by one of the (oIlowing method s:
2.
3.
Fiberboard sheathing 1.20 III by 2.40 III panels 110t less

than 13 Illlllihick applied vCrl icall y on studs spaced not
over 406 mill on center whcn installed il) accordance
with Seclion614 .6 and Tablc6.27.
5.
Gypsum board (sheathing 13 mrn thi ck by 1.20 III

wide, wallboard or veneer base) 011 studs spaced not
over 600 /llill 011 center and nailed at 175 mill on center
with nail s as required by Table 6.28.
6.
Particleboard wall sheathing panels where installed in

accordance with Table 6.29.
7.
Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 400 mm on

center installcd in accordance with Table 6.28.
8.
f[~lrdboard panel sidi ng when installed in accor<ian(.:c

with Section 609.6 and Table 6.8.
be used, provided Ihe plate is
adequately tied al joints, comers and intersecting walls by

at least the equivalent of 75 111111 by J50 mm by 0.9 111111
galvanized sleel that is nailed to each wall or segmenl of
wall by six 8d nails or equivalent, provided the rafters,
joists or tmsses are centered over the studs with a tolerance
of flO more than 25 mm.
I.
4.
Nominal 25 111m by 100 mill con tinllous diagonal

braces let into 101" and bott om plates and intervenin g
studs, placed at an angle not more than 60 degrees or
less thall 45 degrees from the horizontal, and attached
to the framing ill conformance with Table 6.3.
Wood boards of 16 mm net minimum thickness applied
diagon ally on studs spaced not over 600 mm on center.
Wood structural panel sheathing with a thickness nOI
less than 8 111m for 400 mm stud spac ing and not less
For cripple wall bracing. sec Section 620.10.5. For Methods
2, 3, 4, 6 and 8, each braced panel rnust be at least 1.20
111 in
Icngth, covering three stud spaces where studs are spaced
400 111m apart and covering two stud spaces where studs arc
sp~\ccd 600 mill apart.
For Mcthod 5, each braced wall pancl must be at least

2.40 III in Icnglh when applied 1O onc facc of a braced wall
panel and 1.20 m whcn applied to both faces.
All vcr1ical joints of pane.! sheathing shall OCCllr over studs.
Horizontal joints shall occu r over blocking equal ill size to
the studding except where waived by the installation
requirements for the speci fic sheathing materials.
Braced wall pancl sole plates shall be nailed to the floo r

framing and top plates shall be connected to the framing
above in accordance with Table 6.3. SiIls shaIl be bolted to
the foundation or slab. Where joists are perpendicular to
braced wall lines above, blocking shall be provided under
and in line with the braced wall panels.
620.10.4 Alternate flraced Wall Panels
Any braced wall pnllci req uired by Sectioll 620. 10.3 lIla y be
re placed by an nlternatc brnced wall panel cOllstruc ted jl~
accordance with thc following:
1.
In one-story buildings, each panel shall have a length

of not less thnn 800 111m and a height of not more than
3.0!ll. Each pan el shall be sheathed 011 o ne face with 9
mm plywood sheathing nailed with 65mm common or
galvanized box nails in accordance with Table 6.3 and
blocked at all plywood edges. Two anchor bolts
installed shall be provided in each panel. Anchor bolts
shaIl be placed at panel quarter points. Each panel end
stud shall have a tic-down device fastened to the
Association of Structural Engineets of the Pililippines
CHAP '!'En 6 . Woo(1
2.
G<l:I
foundtlti oll. capahle of providing un approved uplifl

capaci ty of not less Ihan 820 kg. The lie-dow n device
stltllJ be installed ill llccordancc with the manu fac turer' s
recommendati ons. The panels shall be" suppol1cd
direcll y on a foundation or on floor framin g SLJPIJO l1Cd
directly On a foundation which is continuous acroS5 [he
entire length of the braced wall line. This foundati on
shall be reinforced with not less than one 12 IllIl1 bar
lOp ilnd bOlIOfll.
joisls unocrnc:H h stich parti tions slwll he doubled and

spaced 10 perm it the passllge of such pi pes and shall be
briuged. Where plumbing, hea ting or olher pipe.Ii arc placed
in Or paI11 y in a partition, necessit ating the cuttin g of the
soles or plales, a metal tic not less tl wn J.4 7 mm (16
galvanized gage) and 38 mill wid e shall be fastened to each
plate across and to each side of' th e opening with not less
than six 16 d nails.
In the first story of two-story buildings, each braced

wall panel shall be in accordance with Secti on
620. 10.4, item I, except that the plywood sheathin g
shall be provided on both faces, Ihree anchor bolts shall
be placed alone-fifth points, and tic-down device uplift
capacit y shall not be Jess than 1360 kg.
620.10.8 Bridging
Unless covered by interior or ex teri or wa ll coverings or
sheathing meeting the minimum requirements of' this code,
all stud partitions or walls with stu ds ha ving a hci g ht - to ~
least thi ckness rati o ex~ceedill g 50 shall ha ve bridging not
less than 50 mm in thickness and of Ihe same width as the
studs fitted SJlugl y and nailed thereto to provide adequate
lateral support .
620.10.5 Cripple Walls

FOllndalion cripple wall s shall be framed of studs fl ot less ill
size than the studding above with a minimum length of 350
mm, or shall be framed if solid blocking. When exceeding
1.20 m in height, such walls shall be framed of studs having
rhe size required for a!1 additional story.
Cripple walls having a stud height exceeding 350 mm shall
be braced in accordance with Table 6.26. Solid blocking or
wood structural panel sheathing may be used to brace
cripple walls havin g a stud height of 350 mm or less. In
Seismi c Zone 4, Method 7 is not permitted for bracing any
cripple wall stud s.
Spac ing of boundary nailing [or requ ired wall bracing shall
n OI exceed 150 111m on cenler along the foundation plate
and the top plate of the cripple wall. Nail size. nail spacing
for fi eld nailing and morc restricti ve boundary nailing
requirements shall be as requi red elsewhere in the code for
the speci fi c brac ing material used.
620.10.6 Headers
Headers and lintels shall conform to the requirements set
forth in thi s paragraph and together with their supporting
systems shall be designed to support the loads specified in
this code. All openings 1200 mm wide or less in bearin g
wa1l5 shall be provided with headers consisting of either
two pieces of 50 mIll framing lumber placed on edge and
securely fa stened together or 100 mm lumber of equival ent
cross secti on. All openings more than 1.20 m. wide shall be
provided with headers or lintels. Each end of lintel or
hc.ader shall have a length of bearing of not less than 38 nun
for the full width of the lint el.
620.10,7 Pipes in Walls
Stud partitions containin g plumbing, heating, or other pipes
shall be so framed and the joists underneath so spaced as to
give proper clearance for the piping. Where a partition
conlaining such piping runs parallel to the floor joists, the
620.10.9 Cutting and Notching

In exteri or walls and bearing partitions, any wood stud ma y
be cut or notched to a depth not exceedin g 25 percent of its
width. Cutting or notching of stud s to a depth not greater
than 40 percent of the width of th e stu d is pcnnitted in
nonbearing partitions supp0l1ing no loads other than the
weight of the partition.
620.10.10 Bored Holes
Bored holes may be peonitted in any wood stud provided
th e holcs arc not greater than 40 percent of the stud width .
Bored holes not greater th an 60 percent of th e wid th of lhe
stud y is permilted in Ilonbea ring partitions or in any wall
where each bored stud is doubled, provided not more than
two such successive dou bled st ud s arc so bored.
III no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than 16
to the edge of the stud . Bored holes shall lIot be
located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch.
11m}
620.10,11 Roof and Ceiling Framing

620.10.11,1 General
The framing details required in thi s secti on apply to roofs
having a minimum slope of 3 units vertical in 12 units
hori zo ntal (25% slope) or greater. Wh en the roof slope is
less than 3 units vertical in 12 units hori zon tal (25% slope),
members supporti ng rancrs and ceiling joisls such as ridge
boa rd, hips and vall eys shall be des igned ~IS beam s.
620.10.11.2 Framing
Raft ers shall be framed directl y opposite each other at Ihe
rid ge. There shall be a ridge board at least 25 mill nominal
thi ckness at all ridges and not less in depth than the cut end
of the rafter. At all valleys and hips there shall be a single
valley or hip rafter not less than 50 mIll nomin al thickness
and not less than the Ctlt of the raft er.
National Siructural Code of th e Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
.~
620.10.11.3 Notches and Holes

Not c hin g at the e nds of nlficfs or ceiling joists sh all not
exceed olle fourth th e depth. Notches ill (he top or bottom

of the rafler or ceiling joist shall nOI exceed one sixth the
depth and shalt not be located in the middle one third of the
span , excepl (iHI! a not ch not exceeding one third of the
depth is permitted in the top of the raft er or ceili ng joist 11m
fUl1hcr from the face of the SUppOI1 than the deplh of the
member.
Holes bored in rafters Or ceiling joists shall not be within 50
mill of the top and bottom and their diameter shall not
exceed one third the depth of the member.
620.10.11.4 Framing Around Openings

Trimmer and header rafters shall he doubled. or of lumber
620.10.11.9 Roof Planking

Pl allk ing shall be de signed in accordance with the gencr:d
pro visions or thi s code.
In lieu of ~uc h design, 50 mill lOnguc-:'lJlll-groovc planking
lila), bc uSI..'d in accordance wit h Table 6.22. Joints in slIe i l
planking Illay be randomly spaced. provided the system is
applied to not less th an three COl1linliOLlS spans, the plank s
lire ce nter matched and end-matched o ::~ plined , cach pla nk
bears on at least one SUppOI1, and the j0lll\.S arc separated by
at least 600 mm in adjacent pieces.
620.10.11.10 Exit Facilities

In Seismic Zone 4. exterior ex it balconies, stairs and simib r
exi t facilities shall be 'lOchored 10 the primary st mcture <II
not over 2.40 Ill. on cen ter or shall be designed for later,;)
of equivalent cross section, when the span of the hcad(:r
forces. Such attachment shall not be acco mpli shed by
exceeds 1.20
of toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal.
The ends of header rafters more than 1.80

m l ong shaH be supported by framing anchors or rafter
hangers unless bearing on a beam. pa!1ition or wa ll.
Ill ,
'ii'.:,::.,'.:" .,,; .
620.10.11.5 Raner Ties

Rafter shall be nailed to adjacent ceiling joi sts (0 form a
con tinuou s tic between exterior wa lls when such j oists are
paralic I to the rafters. Where not parallel, rafter. shall be ti ed
to 25 mm by 100 Illlll (nominal) minimum-size crossties.
Rafter ties shall be spaced l10t more than 1.20 III un center.
620.10.11.6 Purlins
The maximum span of 5011)111 by 150 111m purJins shall be
1.80 m but in no case shall the purlins be smaller than 50
mm by 100 mm members. The unbraced length of strut s
shall not exceed 2.40 m and the minimum slope of the struts
shall be 45 degrees from the horizontal.
620.10.11.7 Blocking
Roof rafters and ceiling joists shall be suppor1ed laterally
to prevent rotation and lateral displacement When required
by Section 616. Roof trusses shall be supported laterall y at
points of beari ng by solid blocking or by other equivalent
means to prevent rotarion and lateral displacement.
620.10.11.8 Roof Sheathing

Roof sheathing shall be in accordance with Tables 6, I 0 and
6.11 for wood structural panels, and Table 6.9 for lumber.
Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over support unless
approved end-matched is used, in which case each piece
shall bear on at least tw o supports.
Wood structural panels used for roof sheathing shall be
bonded by intermediate or exterior gille. Wood structural
panel roof sheathing exposed on the underside shall be
bo nded with exterior glue.
lI s(,~:i
,,..:.'~ ~W .H.;; ,
"~~ .~~~ .. ~ :. !,~, :,;..~~.~ ~;}. ,:.1:1;,,:, ;:;" .~;'.!': ~!r?( .

C@NNE(]!~Eni;w(j)'(;)D
.. ;::.:;.
;.:~"';if\~";".
621.1 Design and Faurication

The desi gn and fabri cation of metal plate connected wood
tmsscs shall be in accordance with ANS IrfPI 1 199:;,
National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood
Truss Construction of the Truss Plate Institute.
621.2 Performance
FuJI-scale load tests in accordance with ANSlfTPJ 2 may be
required at the option of the building official to provide a
means of demonstrating that minimum adequai e
performance is obtainable from specific metal plate
connector plates. various lumber types and grades. it
particular truss desi gn and a particular fabricatiot!
procedure. ANSlffPI 2 provides procedures for testing an d
evaluating wood tl1JsseS designed ill accordance wit h
ANSlffPI I.
621.3 In-Plant Inspection
Each truss manu facturer shall ret ain an approved agcnr ,'
ha ving no financial interest ill the plant being inspcc(c.:
make nonscheduled inspections shall cover all phases of the
truss operat ion, in cl ud ing lumber sto rage, handling, cu ttin g,
fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication bundling and
ba ndi ng, handling, <md delivery.
621.4 Marking
Each truss shall be legi bly branded, marked or otherwi <;(~
have permanently affix ed thereto the following inform31iol!
located within 600 mm of the centcr of the span on the face
of the bottom chord:
CHAPTEH G \'Voo<1
J.
Identity of the company m<lnuf<lcturing the truss.
2.
The design load .
3.
The spacing of trusses.
(j35
622.1 General
In cases where the identification of a particular wood
species is 110t known. thereforc-,working stresscs CtUlilOl be
found in Table 6.1, machine grad~d lumber can be lIsed for
general and structural applications.
622.2 Design Properties for Machine Graded Lumber

The design propcrlics for mach ine grn<.led lumber
developed by the Forest Products Research and
Development Institute arc shown ill Table 6.31 - 6.34 .
These propenies .Ire appli ca ble for dry lumber (moislure
content :S 16%) only. In green lumber (moisture content ?::
28%) , the design strength shall be reduced by 40% and
Illodulus of elasticity by 20% For lumber with moisture
content between 16% and 28%, the dcsign properties may
be obtaincd by direct intclpolation.
622.3 Design Using Machine Graded Lumber
The bas ic work ing va lues given in Secti on 622.2 may be
llsed to de sign timber structures in accordance with th e
rul es given by NSCP and other appropriate national and/or

international standards.
622.4 Preservative Treatment

To ensure the durability of MGL against bio-deteriorating
agent s such as fun gi and insects, MGL should be treated
wit h an ellvironment -friendly prescfv,l{ive.
622.5 Moisture Content

A given piece of lumber is considered dry, partially
seasoned, and green, when their respective moisture
contents is above 10%, 22% - 28%. and greate r than 28%
. 622.6 Markings
Prior to usc, each machine graded lumber should be
inspec ted for a mark that co ntains the mill in which the
lumber was graded, organi7..atioll that eellifies the quality of
the grading procedure, timber size, stress grade and
moi sture content.
National Siruciural Code of 1i1O Philippines 6'h Edilion Volume 1
G':lG
CHAPTEr! G . Wood
Table 6.1 - Working Stresses for Visually Stress-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of I)hilippine Woods "
..
Specie'S
(Com ilion and not .'H1ieal Nmncs)
~~.-
....------ . - ---.-
( 1)
I.
..
~- - . -- - '-
-..__.._._-"-'" r
80% Stress Grade

Compression
l)arltll('llo
GrHin
Compr('."sion
(3)
x IO"
(4)
(5)
._----.
(6)
MPa
MPa
MP"
MPa
MP"
263
25 .0
28.7
25.8
24.0
21.8
31.3
8.22
9.36
830
9.63
6. 54
8.33
9.72
14.5
15.6
15.8
16.0
15.4
13. 7
21.60
5.91
4.3 1
8.70
6.03
6.34
4.97
10.2
2. 95
2.64
3.02
2.78
2.8 8
2.6 1
3.38
24.5
9.78
15.8
6.27
2.49
18.6
18.9
18.1
16.2
20.8
21.8
20.9
19.0
5.35
6.57
6. 36
5A 3
6.84
8.47
7.20
7.56
10.8
I 1.4
11.3
9.44
13.5
13.2
I 1.7
11.2
3.90
3.27
3.4 1
2.27
3.52
4.26
4.39
3.95
2.06
2.24
2. 18
1.92
2.3 6
2.40
2.47
2.35
18.8
18.4
19.8
16.5
6.82
8.04
7.9 2
4. 66
11.9
10.6
11 .8
10.5
4 .84
3.46
).98
3.83
2.29
1.96
2. 18
2.7 1
20.5
18.9
6.72
6.66
11 .4
11.1 2
3.70
2.32
2.40
2. 14
18.0
16.6
5.94
6.53
11.4
10.0
3.07
2.50
1.91
2.05
16.5
16.6
16.3
14.3
15.0
7.31
6.4 8
6.38
5.3 3
606
9.56
9.89
9.20
8. 16
2.20
2.33
7. .48
1.99
2.02
1.73
1.87.
1.98
1.90
1.8'1
13 .9
13.8
16.8
15.4
15 .7
16.2
13.8
14.7
15.7
5.83
5.41
5.94
6.30
6.50
5.56
5.98
6.66
5.67
8. 18
8.54
9.51
9.33
8.83
9.17
8.38
8.29
8.83
1.72
1.96
2.92
1.48
1.59
1.85
Modulus of
Elast icit)' in
Bending
..... _--
High Strength Group

Agoho (C(Jsuarin<l equiset ifoli a Forsl)
Liusin (Parinari corymbos,,(lllullle) Miq .)
MaJabayabas (Trislania SPIJ.)

Manggachapui {Hopea sP!> .)
Mojave (Vitcx parviOora Juss.)
Narig (Vatica spp.)
Sasa lit (Tcijmanniode ndron lIhcrniiinum (Merr)
llkh .)
Y akal (S hore!! spp.)
II.
Bending lind
Tcn."ion
j'aritllello
Grain
(2)
~,".---
Moderately High Strengtl I Group
Ant ipolo (Arlhocarpus spp. )
Binggas (Tcnni na lia spp.)

Bokbok (Xanth ophyllum ex ccls um (Bllllne) Miq.J
Dao (D racontomc lon spp.)

Gat.lsan (Garci ni a vcnulosa (Blanco) Choisy )
Gu ijo (S horea spp.)
Kamagong (Diospyros spp. )
Kamatog {Erythrophloeum dcnsiOorum (Elm)
Merr.)
Kalmon (Dillcn ia spp)
Kata (Amoora spp.)
LOJll <lrau (Swintouia foxwo rlhyi Elm.)
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swi etcnia macrophylla

King)
Makaasim (Sysyg iulIl nitidt1111 BCllIh)

Malaka uayan [D ec Lisocarpll s philippiIleIlsi~ (Foxw.)
de u llIb.)
Naml (Pterocarpu s indicus Willd)
Pahu(an (Mangi fera spp.)
III
Medium Strength Group

Apitong (Diptcrocarplis sPP .)
Bagtikan [Parashorea malaa nonan (Blanco) MeIT_)
DangkaJan (Ca lophyllum sp p.)
Gi sa u (Canariul11 spp.)
Lanutiln-bagyo fGol1ysly lu s ma crophyllllm (miq.)
A iry ShilW]
Lau<ln (Shorca spp. )
Malaanonang (Shorca spp.)

Malasag ing (A gJa ia spp.)
Malugai (Polllctia sp p)
Miau (Dysox)'lulll spp.)
Nato (Palaquiu m spp.)
Palosapis (Ani soptcra spp.)
Pine (Pinus spp.)
Salaki n (A hanamixis s 1 1.)
8.96
Sh('ur
I'arallello
P'pcndicul;u-
to Grain
Grain
:1 .0"1
2.01
2.78
2.33
2.7:1
1.88
2J)(,
1.98
I ,(i ~~
p'I ___L ',..
()3i"
CH APTEH G Vv ood
__..-
Species
nClldin~ alld
(Commun and Botanical Names)
l'a rnUcI til
T('n.~i()11
(;rlliu
(2)
IV
__
........._.... _..
Modulus of
Elaslidl)' in
Iltonding
COlllprl'ssio n
Parallel lu
Comprc)oosioll
Sh~ar
I"pendicular
l'arall el (0
Graill
III Gra in
-_.._--
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Vidal lalluta!) [Hibiscus campylo.sipiloll l\m:1..

var. glabrcccns (Har. Ex. Perk.) 1
.---
80% Stress
Grade .....-~~
-.-,-;---.------ .--~
G"aiu
to'
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
Ml'a
19.5
5.83
8.54
2.65
2.39
5.47
4.75
4. 13
5.36
2,75
4.09
6.27
733
6.85
7.46
7.23
7,87
1.44
1.30
2.00
1.97
3.32
3.40
1.4 7
1.20
1.66
1.44
2 ,07
1.96
:' .>
Moderately Low S(rengtl~ Group

A Inmciga rAg'lIhis dtlHlIllar<l (Lamb.) Ri III . J
Bayok (Plcrospcrmum spp.)
Lingo-lingo (V itcx IUfczaninowii Merr.)
Mangasinoro (Shorea .spp.)
Rain1ree [Samanca Sillll<lll (Jacg.) Mcrr.]
Yemanc (Gmc1in <l arborca R. Br.)
11.8
12.6
13.2
12.8
11.9
12.6
._- -
--,--,-- - -- - -- -- - -
---.
. - ---
63% Stress G rade
E1aslicity III
Bcnding
COlllprcs."ion
"a ra llel Til
Gr:lin
Compression
I" pcudicul ar
To Grain
S hc:lr
f'ar.lll ci To
Gr<lin
MPa
x I O~
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
20.7
19.7
22.6
20.3
18.9
17.2
24.7
6.47
7.37
6,53
7.58
5. 15
6.5 6
7,65
11.4
12.3
12.5
12.6
12. 1
10 8
17,0
4,65
3.39
6.85
4.75
5,00
3,92
8.07
2,3 2
2,08
2,38
2, 19
2,27
2,06
2,67
19.3
7.70
12,0
4,94
1.96
14,7
4,21
14.9
5,17
5,01
4,28
5,39
6.67
5,67
5.95
8.53
8,98
3,07
2.57
8,90
2.68
1.79
8,79
1.62
1.77
1.72
LSI
1.86
1.89
1.95
1.85
Hendin g And
Tens iOIl
Pan-lllc1to
S peci es
(COIllJllOIl and Bo(anical NUlllcs)
Modulus Of
(1)
I.
Hig h Strength Group

Agoho (Casuarina equisclifoli a r orsl)
Liusin (Parinari corymbosa (Bl ume) Miq.J
Malabayabas (Tri slilnia spp.)
Manggaehapui (Hopea spp.)
Molave (Vitex parvinora Juss.)

Narig (Vatica srp .)
Sasal it [Tcijmanniodcnciron ailernianlllll
(Men")
Bkh. ]
Yakal (Sho re. spp,)
JI.
Moderately High Strength Group

Antipolo (A rthoearpus spp.)
Binggas (Terminali a spp.)
Bokbok (Xanlhophyllum CXCCISllll1 (Blumc) Miq.J
Dao (Draconlomcion spp.)
Gatasan {Garcinia venulosa (Bl anco) Choisyj

Guijo (Shorea spp.)
Kamagong (D iospyros spp.)
Kum310g IErythrophlocuJll
Merf.]
Kalmon (Di llcnia spp)
densiflorum
(Elm)
Kata (Amoora spp.)

Lomarau (Swintonia fox worlhyi Elm.)
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swintonia mClcrophylla
King)
Makaasim (Sysyg iul1l nilidul1l Bcnlh)
Malakauayan (Dccusocarpus philippinensis (Foxw.)
de Laub,]
)_ _ _
Narra (Ptcrocarpu s indicus Wi !l",dL
14.3
12,8
16.4
17. 1
16.6
15,()
7.43
10.6
10 .4
9.2 1
1.80
!.54
1.71
2,13
8,95
3.81
2.n
2.34
3'o!
2,92
8 ,79
1.83
1.69
5.37
6,:n
9.38
14.5
15.6
13.0
6. 24
3,67
8.34
9.30
8,24
16.1
5.29
14 ,9
5.24
14.8
2,77
3.35
3.46
3,1 )
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" l"ditiOIl Volu me 1
1.89
...
_----
-- -~ -- - - ---- -.- ----.-- . - --~- --- -- -- ---.--
(Common
~'nd
Hobluica l Nanlt.'s)
-_..__._._-- ---_._._.._-;-::-- ---
__
.._
_ _ _____
(_1>-._
Teu.~ j oll
j\-iodulus or
ElllstkH)' In
l'ur.tJlello
Bcuditll,\
Bellding And
Spcdcs
- -_..._.- ._--- .
63% Stress Grad(,'
---
C()l1lpJ"(~ ssion
" ' pcndicu.hl ..

To (;rll ill
- - ---
Grllill
____12.L_~ ~-::::~_(!_O
-. _...J1L_. _ ._ (8)---
________ .__ _
Clllnpression
!'arullel To
Gruiu
..-.-...-- ..
.-
---
-'~~i;~i~,
I'urallt'l Ttl
G roth
i-==- __ _.l.!.!)_
..
1
X 10.
III
--MPa
1.6 1
7.53
7.79
7.24
6 .4 3
7.06
1.73
1.84
1.96
1.56
1.59
136
1.43
1.56
1.49
1.45
4 .59
4.26
4.68
4.96
5. 12
4 .38
4 .7 1
5.24
4.47
6.44
6.72
7.49
7.35
6 .96
7 .22
6.60
6.53
6.96
135
1.54
2. 30
2.42
2 . 19
1.84
2.15
1.48
2 .32
1.17
1.25
1.46
1.63
1.62
1.56
1. 33
1.23
1.48
15.4
4 .59
6.73
2.09
1.88
9 .26
9.94
10.4
10.0
9.37
9.90
4 .30
3.74
3.25
4 .22
2. 16
3.22
4.94
5 .78
5.39
5 .8 7
5. 70
6.20
1.1 3
1.03
1.58
1.55
2.61
2.68
1.1 6
0.95
1.31
1.14
1.63
1. 55
Bending and
Tension
Parallel to
Grain _.
(12)
Modulus or
Elaslicity in
Bending
Compression
Parallel 10
Grain
Compression
()'pcndicular
to Grain
Shea !:
I'arallel to
Grain
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
MP.
MPa
MPa
906
9376
93 90
10.0
9 .60
8.59
13.5
3.69
2.69
5.44
3 .7 7
3.96
3 .11
6.40
1.84
1..65
1.89
1.74
9 .55 .
3.92
MPa
MPa
MPa
13. 1
5. 15
7 .88
ApilOllg (I)iptcrocarpus spr.)

Bagtikan IParashorca malaanonan (Blanco) Me IT.J
Dangkalan (Calophylluill spp.)
Gisau (Canariulll spp.)
Lan u ta n ~bagyo fGonys tylus m<lcrophyllulll miq .)
Airy Shaw }
Lauan (Shorca spp.)
13.0
13 .1
12.8
11.2
11 .8
5.76
5 . 10
5 .03
4 .20
4.77
10 .9
10.9
13.3
12.1
12.3
12. 7
10.9
11.6
12 .4
.-
Mcdiuoll Slrcngth Group
Malaanonang (Sh orca spp.)

M,\Iasaging (Aglaia spp.)
Malugai (romcli !! spp.)
MimI (Dysoxy luJl1 srp.)
Nato (Palaquiulll srp.)
Palosapis (An isoptcra spp.)
Pine (Pinu s spp .)
Salakin (Aphanamixis spp. )

V ida l lanu tan lHibi scus camp ylo siphon T mel..
var. gJa brccens (H af. Ex. Perk.) J
IV
MPa
1.97
- _.
Modcl'atcly Low Strength Group

Almac iga {Aga thi s dam mara (Lamb.) Rilh .)
Bayok (Ptcrospermu m spp.)
Lingo-Jingo (Y itcx turczaninowji MelT.)
Mangasinoro (Shorca spp.)
Raimrec [Sarnanca samail (Jacq.) MelT.}
Ycmanc .(Gmclinft arborea R. 13]J__._..... __ _ _
.-
50% Stress Grade

Species
(Common and Botanic.. 1 Names)
(1)
MPa
I.
High Strength Group

Agobo (Casuarin a cquiselifoli<! Forst)
Liusin IParin ari corymbosa (B lume) Miq.}
Malabayabas (Trisl<lnia spp,)

Manggachapui Olopca spp.)
Molave (Vitex parvinora Juss.)
Narig (Va tica spp.)
Sasalit {Tcijmanniodcndron
Bkh.]
Yakal (Shore. ""'.)
.-
ahernianulll
(M en")
16.4
15.6
17 .9
16 . 1
15 .0
13.6
19.6
xlO
MPa
5. 14
5.85
5. 19
6.02
4.09
5.20
6.08
15.3 __ , -. 3. 11
I.BO
1.63
2.12
--
~J
CHAP TEn G Wood
639
- --. - --------_._._..Specics
(Common ,Hid Botanical Names)
-
(I )
II.
Puhutan (Mangilera spp.)
Shcllr
Parallel to
Grain
--
(14)
(15)
(16)
MP"
(13)
x 10'
MP"
MP"
MPa
MP"
11.6
I 1.8
I 1.3
10. 1
13.0
13 .6
13. 1
11.9
3.34
4.11
3.97
3.39
4.27
5.30
4.50
4. 72
6.77
7.13
7.06
5.90
8.42
8.22
7.31
6.98
2.44
2.04
2.13
1.42
2.20
2.66
2.74
2.47
11.7
I 1.5
12.4
10.3
4.26
5.02
4.95
2.9 1
7.44
6.62
7.38
6.54
3.03
2.17
2.86
2.39
1.43
1.23
1.36
1.69
12.8
11.8
4.20
4.16
7.10
6.98
2.31
1.45
1.50
1.34
11.2
10.4
3.71
4.08
7.12
6.25
1.92
' 1.56
1.20
1.28
103
10.4
102
8.93
9.39
4.57
4.05 .
3.99
3.33
3.79
5.97
6.18
5.75
5.10
560
1.37
1.46
1.55
1.24
1.26
1.08
1.14
1.24
1.1 8
I. 15
8.68
8.63
10.5
9.62
9.80
IO.I
8.65
9.19
9.83
3.64
3.38
3.71
3.94
4.06
3.48
3.73
4.1 6
3.54
5. 1 I
5.34
5.95
5.83
5.52
5.73
5.24
5.18
5.52
1.07
1.23
1.83
1.92
1.74
1.46
1.70
1.18
1.84
0.93
0.99
1.16
1.30
1.29
1.24
1.05
0.98
1.18
12.2
3.64
5.34
1.66
1.50
7.35
7.89
8.27
7.98
7.43
7.86
3.4 2
2.97
2.58
3.35
1.72
2.55
3.92
4.58
4.28
4.66
4.52
4.92
0.90
0.8 1
1.25
1.23
2.07
2. 13
0.92
0.75
1.04
0.90
1.30
1.23
1.29
1.40
1.36
1.20
1.47
1.50
1.54
1.47
Medium Strength Group
Api long Diptcrocarpus spp.)

Baglikan [Parashorea maiaano nan (Blanco) Mer r.]
Dangkalan (Calophylilllll spp.)
Gisau (Canarium spp.)
Lanulan-bagyo fGonyslylus macrophyllum (miq.)
Airy Shaw]
Lauan (Shorca spp.)
Malaanonang (Shorea spp. )
Malasaging (Aglai a spp.)
Malugai (Pometia spp.)
Miau (Dysox ylum spp.)
Nato (Palaquiulll spp.)
Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.)
Pine (Pinu s spp.)
Salakin (Aphanamixis spp.)
Vidal lanutan IHibi scus campylosipholl Tu rez.,
var. glabrccclls (Har. Ex. Perk ,) ]
IV
50% Stress Grade

Coml'rcS$lon
Modulu,,, or
Comprcs..'iion
P'pcndicular
I'arallcl to
Elasticity In
10 Grain
Gn.in
8cndill~
Moderatcly"High Strcngth GrouJl
Antipolo (Arthoclirpus spp.)

Binggas (Tcrminl1lia spp.)
Bokbok (Xanthophyllulll CXCclSUIll (B lume) Mi q.]
Dao (DracontolllcJoll spp.)
Gafi.ISan IGarcinia vcnulosa (Blanco) Choisy]
Ouijo (Shorea spp.)
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.)
Kamatog IErythrophloculll densifIonlfll
Elm)
Men.]
Katmon (Dillcnia srp)
Kato (Amoora spp,)
L.oll1arau (Swilltonia foxworthyi Elm,)
Mahogany. Big-leafed (Swinlonia macropJ,ylJa
King)
Makaasirn (Sysygiulll nitidurn Bellth)
Malakauayan IDcclIsoc,uvus philippinensis (Fo xw .)
de Laub.]
Nana (Ptcrocarpll:-l indicU:-l Wind)
III
Bcnding and
Tcm;ion
Parallel to
Grain
'(12)
Moderately Low Strength Group
Almaciga /Agatbis dammara (Lamb.) Rilh .]

Bayok (Plel'OSpCnnUlll spp.)
Lingo-lingo (Vilcx turczaninowji Merr.)
M<lJlgasinoro (Shorea spp.)

Rainlree [Sa manca samail (Jacq.) Merr.)
Yemane (Gmclina arborea R, Br.)
National Siruciural Code ollhe Philippines G'" EdiJion Volume 1
GtH)
CHI\Pl Ul
(j
Wood
Tllblr 6.2 - Grouping of Spcc.:it's for Determining AlI()w~d)I<. LfHld . . for Timher Joints
~-.--- -.-.--
..
Spcdcs
::=:::..
I
--- ~.
Relativc
__ ..~cnsi!'y
(2)- - (iL.~~=-. _ . _
II
Spcdcs
(3)
. ~.----.-.-
~-.--.--
._._- - _._----_._----_..III
_-_.. -- ---_....
Rchltivc
__ Dcnsitl_
(4)
--~ . -
..-
Sp('('ies
--_. _-_._- _.
-~.~-
Itclnti\'c
~~t.L
1
--'--'--iV--- ' - -Species
--- ---_.-
_____..._. ______..
--. __.-.JQ.L....... ..
RdHti VC
Dcnsity ._
_ .J:!l...._....... .... J~)
Mlllabayabas
0.90
Makaasim
0.74
Malugai
0.61
Lingolingo
0.48
Sasalit
;).90
Kama gong
(J.72
DangakalHn
0.58
R.]ilHreC
0.48
Agoho
0.84
Guijo
il .70
Api(ong
0.57
Bayok
0.44
Liu sin
0 .79
Binggas
0 .70
Salakin
0 .56
Allllac iga
0.42
Yakal
0.76
K a llllOIl
0 .68
Pinc
0.55
Manggasi noro
0.42
Narig
0.72
GalaS<ln
0 .67
Lanulan-bagyo
053
YC Il)(l l) C
0.42
Manggachapui
0.71
Bok-bok
0.64
Mi,lU
0.52
Mo lave
0.69
KalT1<1tog
0.64
Pal(Jsapis
0.52
Lomarau
0.64
Malllsaging
0.5 I
Kal a
0.59
Vidal Lanutan
0.50
Pahutan
0.55
Gisau
0.50
Mahogany. big
0.54
Nato
0.49
A ntipo lo
0.52
Bagtikan
0.44
NaITI:l
0.52
MalmUlonang
0.41
Malakauayan
0.50
Lauan
Dao
0.48
Icaf
a See Table 6.35 for Working Stresses for Other Visually Stre ss-Graded Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods.
SOURCE: Philippine Timber Design Standards (1. E Rocafort and J. O. Siopongco)
November, 1991 (FPRDI Temlinal Report)
Association of Siructura l Engineers of the Philippines
CHM' lTH
(~Wood
i;(~
Tahle 6.3 - Nailing Schedule

I.
2.
3.
1 .
7.
nail
50 mm sub r!ool' (0 joist or girder, 'blind and face nail
Sole pJa[(~ 10 joist or blocking. typical face nail
So le picHe ,10 joist or blocking, at braced wall panels
Top plat e 10 slud , end nail
8.
$lU d 10 sole plale
9.
10.
Double studs, fa ce nail

Doubled lOp plates, typic.tl face nail
Double lOp rim es. Iilp splice
Blocking between joists or nlftcrs to top rlate, {oenail
o.
6.
I,
!
I
II
I;
Co nlwt'lioll
Joist 10 sill Of I~ jnkr. toco;jij
iJridginl::! 10 jois t. [oena il c,le h end
25 III x I SO Jllill su bflooJ' or less!{) each joist, far e nail
Wider than 25 IlUli x 150 mill slIhnoor 10 cach juist. f~lcc
I I.
12.
11
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20
21
Rimjoisl to top plate, toenail

Top phll cs. laps and intersections, f<lcC nail
Con tinu ous header, two pieces
Cei ling joists to plate, toena il
COll ti nuous header 10 slUd. tocnai l
CC iiingjoists, lap s over partitions, face nai l
Ct~i ling jOis)s !O parallcl raftcrs. face nail
__ ...~. __
1-65Jll!ll
2-651l1ll1
2-6SIllIll
3-65mlll
Na!!~l1g-~~__~'~='==
2-901ll1ll
90mJll al 400 Illlll O.C .
3-90mlll pcr 400 IllIJl
2-90111111
4-65mm, toenail or 2-90mlll. end nail
90mm at 600 mm D.C.
90mm at 400 111111 O.C.
8~90m lll
3-65mm
65111111 at 150 111m o.c.
2-9001m
90mm at 400 mill
O.C.
along each cdgc
3-65m!ll
4-6511)11)
3-901ll1ll
RaJkr 10 plale, toenail
3-90mm
3-65n1l11
25 mm brace to each stud and plate , face nair

25 Illlll x 200 mill sheathing or less (0 each bearin g, face
2-65mm
2~65mm
nail
22
23
24
25.
26.
Wider than 25 nun x 200 lnm shcmhing to cach bC<1ring,

face nai l
Buill-Up comer studs
13l1ilt-up gird er Hnd beams
50 mill planks
Wood structural panels and particleboard 2;
Subnoor and wall sheilthing (to framin g):
12 I11Ill <lnd less
l6 IllTll- 20 mm
22 mm - 25 mm
28
Illlll -
32 mill
Combination subfloor-underJayment (10 framing):

20 mm and less
25 mill
30111111 - 32 mill
Panel siding (to framing/
12 mill or less
16 mill
22
27.
Illlll -
3-65rnl11
90mlll at 600 Illlll O.C .

lOOmm at 800 ml11 D.C. at lOp and bottom
and siaggered 2- 1OOmn) <'It ends and at each spli ce
2-90mm al each bearing
50mm )
65Jl11ll ~ or SOHlIn
.I
65mm .!
75 mlll J or 65111111
SOmm S
6501m .~
75m!Jl
50mJll
or 65mm
.1
.. 651l11ll _'_ _... ___ ~ ___~. __ _~ _________ .__________
th
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6 Edition VO!Ull1C 1
6 -42
CHAP TEH 6 - Wood
-. - ~ --
...-
Table 6.3 - Nailing Schedule (Col\('d)

~~ -
..
Ts~bcrboard sheathing 7:
12 111m
---_._-
- -.----.- .-- - -.-~~~ . -
Nailing
-- - --.--. --
IOmnl x 40111Jll s
50mm-l
IOmm x 30111111 y
lOlllm x 40rnm II
20mm
65 mm
IOJr.m x 30mm \I
29_
Inlerior panelin g
40mm
6 nUll
JOmm
JO
50nlln~ _ ____ ___ ~ _______ ~
- - -----------
Nares Fol' Table 6.3

I
Com mon o r box nails may be u.~ed i!XCCP' where otherwise sWlcd.
} Nails sluIced af 150 m/1l 01/ ("(/liN 01 edge:;, 300 111m at illlemJcc/ialc SIIPI'lHl.\' e:lTCpl 150 IIlIIlllI (Ill sfll'porl s where .f/milS afe 1200 111111 01"
more.
For ,wilillg a/wood Slrucfu r(J.1 panel and pa r(icle/JoCJrd diaphragms (ll1d sllf'(//' wol/s. (('fl.'" /0 Secfiolls 6 /4.3.3 (I/ld 6 14.4. Nails f or 11'011
J
sheathing ma), be ('ommon, box or casing.

ComlllOIl or deformed shank.
Camlllol/.
Dejonm:d shank.
Corro.riofl-rcsiS/(1Il1 Siding or {'(Ising flails cQIl/arming /0 Ihe rel/llirelllt'nlS o/S(,"Iioli 603.3,
75 111111 on ("Cllft'r at e,ncrior edgt.'i anA 150 mlf! on cemer Of h!/('rmediOf(' l'IIf'POrfS.
Corrosion-resiswn/ roofing nails wilh 10 111m head (lnd 40 mm lell8th for J2 mill .rheathing and 45 mm fen grll filr 20
1 Faslener.l" s/1{Iced
1111/1
s!II:(}/hiIl8
con/onnin8 to 'h e f('q uiremCIIIJ o[Sectioll 603. 3.
~ CorrosiOfl'resisfatl' staples wilh 1I0mil/a i 10 mill croW/I 30 mill length for 12 /11111 sheathillg alld 40 11/111 iI'1I8111 f or 20 11/11/ s/telllltillg
cOll/omlitlg to th e requirements o[Sectioll 603.3.
10 Pan('/ supports at 400 mill (500 mm if sire/18th axi.\' in the lont: direc tion of th e pa lle!. ullloJ othawi,\"(.' marked). C/lsing or/ill ish lIail.~
spaced 150 IIIITI on palle! edges, 300 11111/ at i'l/ermediale supports.
II
P(lfleJ SIIP/wrtS 01600 trim, Casillg Qr finish ,wi/of spa('Cd 150 111m all paneJ edges. 300 mill aI illlenlt('diatl' SIl/'I.'!)rt.f.
CHAr'TEf, G - Wood
6-43
Table 6.4 - Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule

---------- ---------~ROOF FASTENING ZONifT-- --WIND REGION
_.~~==~~.-]=~==}____===T==_====3=_==
PANEL
LOCATION
NAILS
Fastening Schedule
_________. __.___. __~m on ccnter)
Greater thall J 45
_~..__.Jcj,!l
-~c----j---~-------
Greater than ! 29
~kjlh to
145 k h
129 kph or less

I
6Smlll common
65mmcomillon
65mm common
--'-P-"a~nc'_"I__'c"dli'c""s'__-_
__+----.J.2<l....-150
150
300
150
300
Panel Field
__ Panel cdgc2.
Panel Fi('.ld
-Pa!lclcdg~
Panel Field
'~------.-----,----
Applies ollly to 1I1('WI r()(~r heighl.I' lip 10 10.5
ilL
__. .J..5Q
----100-,----ISO ' ---.-
-_._---- ISO
100
150
150
300
150
150
ISO
300
For melll! roof heights oW'r 10.0 m., Ihe !wiling ~'h(/II be designed.
TIl(' mo/fiHtelling WIIl'.I" Ill"(' shown below:
1.20 rn
110m - .
+-
--..
... _
I.:!()m
-*-1 ,,"it) III (INCLUDING O"I(j
1------1- 1 - - - - - 1
1
1
1
1
1
:C)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
m
V
1
1
1
1
ROOF RlDGE
Roof Fastening Zones

Edge spacing also applies Ol'er roofframing
Use 65111111 ring-shank nails ill fhis wne
at
if mean
gable-end wa/,'s.
rooflleight is greater than 7.50 III
th
Ill.
OVERHANG)
"""
6~44
r----.
CHAPTER 6 ~ Wood
~ ______________---,,'Ir-'able
6.5 - Exposed
I~ywood
Panel Sidin
Stud Sp:lcing
Plywood Siding Applied Directly to
Studs or Over Sheathing
Minimum Thickness]
Minimum Number of Plies
10 111m
400 2
12 111m
600
n .
. . ~~. _ _ _ _ _
_.~
_ _ _ _ _ _. _
1Jllckness of gram'cd ponds /.1" measured (/( bO/f()111 of grool'('S.

May he 600 111111 If plywood siding applied with face grain fN.'rpelldirular 10 SlUffs or ()I'('T olle of fhe following' (/) 25 min board
sheathing, (2) 10 mm wood sfl"ucfllml pm!!'! sheathing or (3) 10 mill wood Slm({lIral pallet shcO/hing willi .l'Irl'n[.:111 axis (which i.r rhe
long direction oflhe pm!l!1 unless otlwnl'ise marked) ofs/U'alhing pc/pendiCIIla!" {(J slut/s,
Table 6.6 - Wood Shingle and Shake Side Wall Exposures

Shin1!lc or Shake _.
__.
Length and Type

400 mm shingles
450mm shingles
~_2QO nun shingles .___ .
. _-----450 nun rcsawn shakes
450mm straight-split
shakes
L_~OO mm rcsawr~._~}"~~~~~ __ ~~_
Maximum Weather Exposures (mm)

DOllbl('~Coursi n
Single-Coursing
No.2
No.1
180
180
"
210
210
----290
290 .
-- - - - - - ------_.
180. _ - - - _
180
1 - -.300
..
350
- - 400------ - _ .
No~
~----
~-----.
290
...." ...
---_._--
__
350 _...-
-"-
'M~'_"~
_- -_.__..--
~--~--
------_ ...
400
-........-.- -... ...SOO
-~
-- -~~~
--_._-
-_...._.
Table 6.7 - Allowable Spans for Exposed Particleboard Panel Siding

,-----------,-----------,
Grade
M~I
M~S
Stud Spacing
Minimum Thickness
Siding
400
f-~M~~~2~'~'E~x~te~r~io-r~G~I-uc~~'-+-----~6~00~--------------1~6~I-n-,n----~---
JOmm
10 n-,-n-,---~~-----I-O-,-n-n-, .~
I
G-4~)
CHAPT cn 6 . Wood
--j
Table 6.8 - Hardboard Siding

.
Minimal
Nominal
Thickness
SIDING
(mm)
.,,
IAlP Sidina
I.
..
Direct to SllJd~
Over Sheath in '
~-.-
~~~re ~e
Direct to
I
I
__
Framing
(SOIlIJI1 x 100mm)
Maximum Spacing
_..
~9_"-f
10
____
.~_.400
4(X)
o.c.
Illm O.C .
I
I
- - ----I
65
75
Stud~
600 nun o.c .
10
600 mlTIo.c.
10
..1:...._hiplap Edge I'anel Sid~!R. __ - - ---=--- r-Dirccl lo SlUds
10
150 mill O.C.

edges; 300 mm
o.c. at
intermed iate
supports
150 nun o.c.
edges; 300 mm
o.c. at
50
65
intcrrnediatc
suppo rts
--- - ---
400 mill O.C.
._-_.. .._...._-Over Sheathin g
150 mill o.c.

edges; 300 mill
o.c. al
intcflncd iate
supports
150 mm o.c.
edges; 300ml11
o.c. at
intermediate
suppons
50
-10
400 mill o.c.

400 mill O.C .
._-
-_.-
Over Sheathing
111111
NAil. SPACING'"-- '' - -'''

- GCller:]uraCin g Pallels ,--
(!lUll)
_._-----_. -_._-
Panel Siding
I---
1.-.. --- -- -
N.iI--Size
'.'
-
400
l1un C.C.
65
1I
Not 8Ep liclI blc___

Not applicable
- - - - - - .---100 ':1lI1
O.C.
intermediate
supports
) 00 mm o.c. edges;
200 111m O.C.
intermediate
SUpp OI1~
-- --100 !llm o.c. edges;

200 mill O.C.
inlermediale
supports
100 mm o.c. edges;
200 mmo.c.
intermediate
SUPPOI1S
" wah SectlOlI 6/ 9.

Nmls shall be corro.flon reslstan/ III accorda1/ce
1 Minimum acceplabfe nail dim ensions (mm) .
Shank diiln-'-cC"'cr--- - - - ._.______ !~_~ncl

Head diameter
J
edges;
200 mm o.c.
When /I.H~d 10 comply wllh
Si~.~~lg (mOl)
-~--
--1----------7'-;;-------- ..-6.0
SeC/lOll
La p Siding
2 .. 5
6.0
(m~;)
_ _ _
620./0.3.
Table 6.9 - Allowable Spans for Lumber Floor and Roof Sheathing 1.2
Minimum Net Thickness (mOl) of Lumber Placed
Span
~_-==:====t~~- 7~ ----~1.
___ ~ __=J__.__~~_~~I=-JL_~=
- - ---- -- -- -, -- - ""7~..- -- - ,- -.. - ___

ROOl_S - - L.:.:J'-;--c--:,,6=00---:-..,,--'-c1 ---,,---,:,,
16,--.-::--:--:-:-,1.--- 16
f
----- .--- .....

16
Instal/a/ion deltll/.f JIm" c:ollfonll (0 SecllOIl 620.8./ (Jnd 620.1 1.7 for floor atlll roof s/watl/mg, 'l'.f/Jee/wel)'.
1 Floor 01" roof silem/Jillg cOI\fo nllillg wilh Ih is fable shall be deemed 10 meet lit e design crilnia oj Sefliofl 620.10.11 .
J
MaximUIII 19 pcrcel/ll/loiSfl/,." callfenl.
-- -
20
6A6
CHAPTEH 6 Wood
Tahle 6.JO ~ Allowable Spans and Loads for Wood Strllctul'HI Panel Sheathing and Single~Flo()r Gradts Continuous
Over Two or More Spans with Strength Axis P(~rpcndiclllal' to Supports /,?
~I;
I,', ~ Grades
Floor '
Roor '
Pa;;~':i~~'111
Spl,:,~''''noor
1 {I
1\
Wi th ou' [~dgc
~:,~:lp~;~tg6e ... ..... Support
300
300
400
400
500 . . 500
600
500'
600
600
800
700
1000
800
1200
900
1350
1000
1500
1200
(mm)
300/0
400/0
50010
60010
600/400
800/400
200/1\(\0
1350/800
150011200
8, 9
8, 9
10,12
12
12, 16
16, 20, 22
20, 22
22, 25
22, 25, 30
. Grades
::::~~ ~~l~'~)
Span
(kN/ m2)
Total Load
Live Load
Maximum Spall
(mm)
ti
'.'1.44
1.44
1.44
1.44
1.92
1.44
1.44
1.68
1.68
1.68
1.92
1.92
1.92
1.92
2AO
1.92
1.92
2.16
2.16
2.16
0
0
0
400
400"
500 ' .'
600
SOO
~~'~p~~g6e
Wi~~~~~~~ge
600
SOO
1200
1200
1500
600
800
900
1000
I ZOO
..
l2()(i
Load ~ (kN/n/)
Total Load
Li ve Load
2.40
1.92
1.68
2.40
1.92
1.44
1.20
1.92
2.40
2AO
Milx imu m Span

( mm)
400
500.
600
800
12(X)
Applies to f)(lllels 600 mm or Wider.
Floor a",1 roof sllealhillg cOllforming wilh IM.{ lable sha/l be d('cm('d 10 mN t Ille desigll criteria of Sectioll 6. J /.
J
Ulli/on" load deflectioll JimilalioflS 1/111(} of Slmll IlIlder lil'e load I)ills d ead load, 1610 under iiI'(' I<)(u/ ol/I)'.
Panel edg es sh{/ff have appro ved fOltlill eandglOolic joinf.~ or Jlralf be SUf'llOrted Wilh blocking Imle.ts 6 mm lIIill i lllum IhicJ;nes.~
Imdcr/lI),mcn{ o r 40 mm of approw!d cel/ular or ligh/w('igh/ concrete is placed m'e/" Ihe subjloo,., or finish floor is 20 111m wood strip.
Allowable IIIIi/onn load based 011 deflection oj/I)U) of span is 4.8 kNlm 2 ('xcep l Ihc span mling oj J200 111m on CCII/C/' is /Jased ( 11/ /I lowl
load oj 3. /0 kNlm.
Allowa/1fe load (It maximulIl span.
Tongul! . and.groo\,e edges, pan'" edge clips
on arUNj, lumber blocking, or olher. 0111)' Ilimbe! blocking !ilwll slIli!)j), blocked diapilmgm.f 1"11(jW'l"ellll!lll.r.
" -01" /2 111m punel. maxilllum spml shall be 600 mm.
1/
Ma y bl' 600 111111 0/1 eenrer wh<'re ZO 11/111 woad strip flooring is installed at riSlu (mgles to joist.
(01lC
Floor
Maximum Span (mm )
P'lliel Thickness
12,16
16,20
20
22
. 28, 30
110[)r'
(mill)
400 D.C.
500 D.c.
600 D.C.
8000.c.
1200 D.C.
Load
Maximum Spall (nun)
Pmlcl Thi ckness
midway betwc('1/ ('(l eh support, except
/ W(J
equ(lIf.)' SP(1C('t/ be/w('('n supportS 1200
v Ma)" he 600 mill 0 11 ('ellter forflaol"s where 40 tlUlI (If ccl/ular or lighrweiKhl concrete is Ol1piil'd (II'cr th e panels.
Association of Structura l Engineers of tile Pililippines
Imll
CH f\PT EH G Woud
G4!
Table 6.1 1 ~ Allowable Loads for Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Continuous
Over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Parallel to Supports
r .___~__ ~~~~~-,(~P~I,IL'"
:.:'.::o:::oTd-,sc:t::ru",c"t",u,-,r:::a,-l,,1":::""n",c",ls"a'T,,,c,,fic:"v,-e,,-,,p,c:,II'l:',,,,fi,,l;;vc,_'-'.la,,'YL(c'ir,-"u:.:
1l1.~ss otherwise noted) 1. 1
.
r---~.-.-Tlli
cklless
(111111)
MaxilllUlll
51)"11
..
______
._~~~i!
at
fv!.~'!!...~.P_~!.
U
J~_~.pn.l
. .-__,. . -._...._. _.
Panel Gnuk
(mill)
l.Ave
Iowl
._-- ---s;;:;;-ct;;;;;(I- -"-- " "- ")2" -"'-'--"
~-- '''0:96-'''-''-''''-' - -- ......"1"'.4"4'-- -'- -
"--'-'-600--"-'-
12
--'-12
;=....... ___.:=,:", _=+_. .

-----------~--
-. 600
. 60IJ
...~ ... ---
1.68
-!'T2"T- ...... -
2. 16 .1
..
----2~40'--~-
~---
600
-.
3.35
~- --3:8'l----~
...
4.N
600
4.3 1
.__.
Othel' Grades Covered in
J2
2.40
400
1.92
--;-;;~;"'::':':;=::~:';;::':':~'::-I---..--;.;::.~--+.. ~~,-- --+----~~.--t_-__:_;;_;:_-- ..
une Standard 232 Of' 23-3
12
I. 20
0.96
600
1.20
600
600
1.92
....
600
2. 16
W
2.87 '
3. 11 '
600
Noo/ shcar/rlllf.: COli/On/tillS WIlIt tJIIS wblt- shall be dl'emed /0 //lCt'l rhr dr.\"I"f.[l1 (Tlleria II/Sec /lOll 6.11 .
U"iformload dejleclioll /im ilatioltJ: 11180 oj 5pWI undl'r li\'(' 10(1(1 pIllS til'lul loa(/. 1124() under liI'I' load ollly. Edge.\" .Ihalf />e bloc-h'd
wilh lumbl'l" or OIlier appn!l'l'd fyp<' 0/ NIgl' supporlJ
For composite alld /tm rl'iy 1' /YlI"fJod .~/ruCflll"lll ,umrl. Imul shol/ be rCI/II( w il,y 0.72 kNlm'.
Table 6.12 - Allowable Span for Wood Structural Panel Combin<ltion Subfloor-Underfloor-Underlayment
(Single Floor) U
Panels Continuous over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Perpendicular to Support.;;
r-~--- '
Maximum Spacing of Joists (mm)

400
1200
I
600
I
800
I
500
c_~S~p~e~c~ie~s~G
~,~r~o~u~p_
' _'I __~~~~~-'~~__~7'~~~r-~T~h~i~c~k~n~es~s,,(~n~'m~)'-____ '__~~~~-r~~~~~~~_1
I
12
16
20
1___ _~2,~3~_~1 _ __~16~_~ _ __ ~20~__ ...~ _ _ _~22~_~_ _~_ _ ~ _ _ _ __ ~~
4
20
22
25
1200 o.c.
Span r.ling'
4000.c.
500 o.C.
6000.c.
800 o.C,
Identification
S,)(lIU Imliled II) mille sllOWII becO/ue of po.t.nbi(' ehecfs of CQflCl"lItrofed food.f. Allowable lilli/un" itJllds ' }(Iud 01/ deft/'CIIOtI of 'IJ6/} of
span i.l 4.8 kNlm'. ('XCCPI afll)I\'able 101/'11 uniform load for J() "u" wood SlI"Il c tliral pallel.l OI'er joisfS spaced 1200 mill 011 eellter is 3.1
kNlm ). Panel ttfgCJ shaf/ }'(II'e app/"()\'(!d IOngue-al/d-croO\'e joillis or shaf/ be .wppo("wd Il'it!t block in!;, III1IeSS 6 mm minimulli 'lrickn ess
IIndcrlaYlIlcm or 38 mill of apllrmwi cd/Illn r or lightweight com:rett> is ploccd (lI'('f tilt .wbfloor, or fillishflool' is
2011/111 wooff Jlrip.
1 Floor JUme/s conformillg with tlli.~ table ,tholl be deemed fa weer the de.~ig/! criteria ofScctioll 61 1.
.1 Applicab le to af! grades of,landed eXlerior-lype plywood. See UlJC Sr(JIuiard 23-2for pl),wood slu'cies groups.
Appfica /llt~ 10 IInderlaymem grade WId C-C (plugSrd) plywood. alld single floor grade wood struCluml p(meIJ.
National Structural Code of tile fJllilippines 6'" E,dition Volume 1
~-
Thickness (mill)
-- -
12
16
20
20
----
All pallels art' continuous oW'r /11'0 or II/ore spalls.

Floor sheathing cO/lforming wilh fhis table slwfl hi' deemed 10 /lweI/he dt's;!?n cri{{'riu oj.';('clio/l 6.1 I.
J
Uniform defiediol) limira/ion: '1J6() oflhe span Imdcr 4.8 kNII1/ minimuII! food.
Edge,\" shafllwl'e ronglw-and-grool'l' joim.\" or shall be xuppor/ed wilh blocking. The /Oil/:UI'-tJlld-gro()\'I' palli'ls arc illstaf/ed lI'ill! rhe
IOllg dimension peq)<'lUiitu/ar /0 supports.
A finish wearing surj(lce is /() be applied 10 rhe lOp ojfhe p{lIId
-----
Table 6 14 - Maximum Diaphragm Dimension Ratios
~--------==~~===-=-=;="-===-==~~~~~--Hortizontal Diaphragms
Vertical Di3phragms
I-'-''''-'-'=''''-'''-'''''''-'-'''''-''''---i--'.:::=:==.::.::!=-------Maximum
Maximulll
Material
S[)an~Width Ratios
Height-Width Ratios
Diagonal sheathing, conventional
3; J
I: J
.. ~2. Diagonal sheathing, special
1-____..24,,:I'------+--------~=~=E~-=~~-.::~=
3. Wood structural panels and particleboard, nailed all edges
1______4=.:1'--____
~._. .~~~-._----_.---._
4. Wood structural panels and pal1icleboard, blocking omitted at
4: 1
_ _interIn~i<!~c;joints.
.~_~_. _________ ... _. __.__ ,.. _ ........... __ ._. __.__ ~ .. _~ _____ .... _ _._ .... _. __.... _
I.
+ ____ .. ___
III Seismic Zolle 2, the maximum ratio may b(.' 2: 1.
2 111 Seismic Zolle 2, the maximum ralio may be 3%: J

3
Nor permitted.
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Pllilippines
CHA fYlT f~ 6 . Wood
Table 6 IS - Limits of Defect. bl' Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned
._____ _
A
N~lturHJ
I.
3.
Wo~_
d ________
Stress Grade
Sln'~s Grade
Stress Grade
Kit~d of Defect.~ _____________ 80 %_~ ____ ___ __ !i!!~ _______ _.__ ~_~_~_2.!'~&___ ___ _
Dcfcds
Worm holes, average diameter

(1ll1lximum allowable size in mm)
:1.
2.
(j tl9
Individual
b.
Quantity limitation
Slope of Grain (maximum variation in
mm from longitudinal axis per 300
nun within middle half of length)
Checks and Shakes
Sil.C of each check and shake, or
if in combination, Ihc sum of
a_ thc sizes of all checks and
shakes within middle half of
depth of thc piece shaJl not
exceed:
Not pcrllliued
No! permiued
Not clustered
6
Not cl ustered
20
25
}2
Ij.j
of thickness
IA of thickness
.1/ "(,
of th ickness
----.. -----E;~di1enec;:-ati~i;~'cf;e-cks~;~I--- - .. _..- . ' .....---... --.-- .....-.--- -_.-.-_.-- --,---.

h.
splits at the middle half of the

depth of the piece shall not
'.>11
of thickness
!/4 of thickness
extend a distance greater greater

than:
c -- I--:-N-:-a-rr- o-"-'--,- - - - .. ...... --N~~~~~--'-"

Knots (Maximum allowable size of ir;"di-v.,-;d7u--a-l
knOI in mm I)
Nominal width o f face. in mm
face on
edge of
wide face
within th e
micklle
third of
length o f
piece
-........- - - ---_._._-Nam)w
face on
edge of
Along
center line
of wide
face
50
6
75
12
100
20
125
25
150
30
ZOO
35
40
250
300
45
50
350
400
50
450 and over
50
The SIze of knots orl the narrow face wuhm rhe mIddle tlilrd of
20
25
30
40
50
55
65
70
75
wide face
within the
middle
third of
length of
piece
12
20
25
30
45
50
55
65
70
75
75
fllce On
edge of
Along
center line
of wide
face
wid e face
witb in lhc
midd le
(hird of
--.-- -
Along
ce nter line
of wid e
face
lengt h of
piece
20
25
40
50
60
70
80
90
95
100
38
40
50
40
60
50
75
60
100
80
110
90
125
100
125
100
125 ....
IOO ____.--'-----'-'
IO,~Oc . ---I----"=-
length may be Ulcreascd proportlOl1mcly lOwards rhe ends

of th e piece of twice the size permitted Of! fhe narrow fa ce bUI not to exceed that allowable alol!g the allier fin e of the
wide face. The size of kllol,'i 011 the edge of wide face within rhe middle fhird (llengrh may be incrca.'ied pl'Opol"tiollOfe/y
toward\' fhe eel/fa of rhe wide face and towards the ends of flU! piece to the size permitted alollg fh e all fer fille of the wide
face. 111C sum of the .\'ii:,e:o of 01/ knots ;11 ally 150 mill of lellg," of fhe piece shall 110 1 exceed twice fhe m axi mulII
p ermissible size of kllots. Two knots of maximum shall tlO! be allowed itl the same J50111111 of leng th Ofl Otl)' faa . CiIlSla
knots and knots ill group shallllot be permilled.
CHAPTEI1 ti - Wood
6 -S0
Table 6.15 ~ Limits of Defects by Grade in Joists and Planks for Seasoned Wood
(;-ra-d;--- St~:;~s G;"lIdc- - - ---st;'t~SS (;';:~ \(I ; --~~~____~____~~~~_t_______~

80~O~~~_____~ _______~6~3~%
500/.
Kind of Dcf<.'c (s
n.
---~-- --~Str"s-'
s
Handling, Manufacture or Processing I)efc('fs

I,
Wall e (maximum tlllowablc size in Illlll)
Nominal fact dimension ill nUll
12
12
IO(l
3
6
125
SO
75
15
12
12
15
15
150
10
15
20
200
250
300
12
22
15
18
25
28
350
20
25
30
45
50
20
25
30
38
45
50
55
width x 100
widt h x 100
2
width x IlX)
3
I skip per 5 m or
I skip per 5 m or
400
450 and ovcr
2.
Torn grain (allowable depth if! 111m)
.).
Skips. ,liiowablc size not to exceed:
surface arc,\
(Widt h mill x length )
Depth mm
Quantity
I
J
skip per 5 m or
~_. _.~ ._. _

. .~!~~~.~~~:...L~.I. ~g~_I. ~_._. _ _ _
38
.__._.....!!2r.!U.~~~g_~.!. )._.._ .____ .. .._. .__ ......s1!E~r_t~<::E..!.~.!.~R[.I1
CHAPTU1 G Wood
-~-----
,~---.--
---.--~-.-.--
Species Group
----_.-
Grain, (N)
.... _------_ ...
___ S
)e~es Gn~.!!p
Diameter
(mill)
24
20
18
16
14
12
10
9
8
7
6
.. _-"._- ._..
..
-~
Gage
LatcI'HI Load in Sidc
Withdrawal Load from Side Grain per 25 mill of Pcnetration of

Threaded Portion l (N)
Screw Size
9.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.8
3.5
II
2695
2315
2130
1940
1750
1565
1375
1280
1185
1095
1000
III
1985
1710
1570
1430
1290
1155
1015
945
875
805
735
.--.-~
1370
1180
1085
985
890
795
700
650
605
555
510
IV
II
950
820
750
685
620
550
485
450
420
385
355
31 (X)
2295
1935
1610
1315
1045
810
700
605
510
425
266;
1970
1665
1380
1130
900
695
605
520
440
365
SOURCE: Philippine Timber Design Standards (1. E. Rocafort and J. O. Siopongco)

November, 1991 (FPRDI Terminal Report)
National Stl"uctul"ai Code of tile Philippines 6(\' Edition Volume 1
(iC)l
~I
2190
1620
1370
1135
925
740
570
495
425
360
300
IV
1825
1350
1140
945
770
615
475
415
355
300
250
Tahle 6.17 Allowable Loads in kN on One Bolt in Seasoned \Vood Load at Both Ends
( Do u hI(' SI~ e_~1 ~L ~_~~!:~~!~JJ~~_~F~! J~(.~I~_ _._.~~_~_______ . ___... _._...._________ ..
...__ ____ ~.,, ___ _
___ ,_ _,,,-'_ .. _.. __ ~P_~_~~~~_ Groul~jl!.~.~':'.~ to li~.i--'~K in_Tabl~..:.~ ___ ... _.~_ .__._ ..___._.___ _
.... I
Length of
Diameter
Bolt in
of Boll
d
Main
Member
L
Parallel
to Grain
(mm)
p
... 1
Perpcndicular to
_._.~%~_"
+ W _ ___ I
Parallel
to Grain
Perpendicular to
Parallel
to Grain
Pcrpcndicula!' to
... IV
Parallel
to Grain
--
PcrpcndiM
rular to
____'p_____(_;~-.a~~--_ "~_';?'~ __G_~_liI~__'___,:::-,_+_~~~~~_
(mm)
--;;c--i----~1__-,(~I)~-j __ .j.21.__
.......-
(3)
. ._'2.._.. _
:---)6_.__
..- - - ...- - , . . . - - . - - - - . --~-..j-~ccCC"--+--;;cc-+~.cc____.I
( 4 ) _ ....J2)___
(6)
(7)
:929-==_0.,,-1 -_~=.:~I3_.=:=::J~i3-~552
(9)
(10)
2.07
3.26
1.82 ._
2.30
4.01
2.()2
2.67
S.Q2
2.35
2.77
5.52
2.43
3.01
6.27
2.64
2.59
3.99
2.27
2.88
5.00.~
2.53
3.34
6.27
2.93
3.46._~~~i.._
3.76
7.84
3.30
I
- -...J!l)c-
7.08
3.76
4.86
1.98
4.20
8.75
. 4.19 _ _... 6.01 ___ 2.21
5.20
40
20
11.0
4.85
7.55
2.56
6.53._
22
12.1
5.04
8.30
2.66
. _L~~_
_ . _ _ _ _ ~..._~._. 13.7
5.47
9.43
2.89
8.16
12
8.38
4.70
5.75
2.48
4.98
16
10.8
5.23
7.42
2.76
6.43
13.7
607
9.38
3.20
8.12
50
20
.__.21. ... _...__.. 15.1 . . - . . 6.30
10.3
3.32 __ =~-8.95~ ____ .
25
-; i}--- 6.83-- ---11-.8---- --- 3.61
10.2
3.36
_468
---2~i
6.80 ....
8.95
3.59
7.74
3.74
6.29 __
3.29
I
65
20
17.4
7.89
11.9 ._~ __ ._.10.3
4.34
8.10
-~.84..
22
19.3
8.19
13.2
4.32
11.4
4.50
8.97
3.96
-ZU---s:88---1S.2-- 4.69
13.2 .4.89
10.2
4.29'
12
9.35
6.84
6.42
3.61
5.56
3.76
4.79
3.30
16
13.8
7.85
948
4.14
8.2 I
4.32
6.85
3.79
75
20
13.3 .._..
4.81
11.5
5.01
9.22
4.40
- -19.4
------- -_..9.10
. -----_._
_.~ __ ._fl:2..... ~_ 9.45
15.0.__ 4.99___...
13.0
5.20
10.2
4.56
75
255
10.2
17.5
5.41
152
5.64
IIY
4.95
12
9.4~
7.14
645
3.77
5.59
3.93
4.84 .. ~~
16
14.1
8.37
9.66
4.42
8.36
4.61
7.09
4.05
80
~_ 20_.__ ~2.9:l9.7 1-::: ::=- I 4c9:===
I 3=:=- :=:- I 2L_ _ .2~ =_977
4.69
22
22.9
___ ~.~~_ 15.7 _.
5.32
13.6
5.54
10.9
4.87
25
26.9
10.9
184
5.77
16.0
6.01
12.5
5.28
12
9.39
7.42
6~44--- - 3.92
5.58
4.08
4.84
3.59
16
.--i4J.... - 9":20
9.79
4.86
848
5.06
7.28
4.45
90
_ .._.1.2...___ 21.3
10.9
14.6
5.77
12.7
6.04
10.5
5.28
22
24.9
11.3
17.1
5.98
14.8
6.24
12.0
548__
25
294
12.3
20.2
6.49
17.5
6.77
13.9
5.94
_ll.... ____9.40_._ :-7.40- --6A~'i.--.-~.
5.58
4.07
4.84
3.58
100
16
14.2
9.84
9.78
5.19
-8.4"7-- 541 .. : -f34.___ .-l_6_.
2 o j i - : i l : = .. J2,I__ . __15.1....... __.._. !l.:il.. __ .__
13J..._. ....._ ...!l.(",~ ___ ILl
5.87
__ B_ ___ 25.9 ...__ ~._L~,L_ ...._._.1Zc.8_. ...._.2,65 _._. 1504
7.35
12.8
6.45
1_ _ _ ~+-.. -..3~.. -31.8
1:\.7 .............21.8
...... _.~J-'_.
18.9
7.52
15.3
__6cCJ~
12
9.3 8
()J2.._ . __.6,-4.'1:._._ __--'''62....._. 5.57
3.81
4.83
3 34 __
. . ._.....I.CJ..._._ 14.2
10.1._
9.77
533
846
_._5S6 __ ~.~. 4.89
20
22.3J..'1.:~ _. . ....... 153 ...._._..
7.53
13.2
7,~ _ _1_1,~_.. 6.1'9_
125
22
.._ 2690......1S.} ____ .....1.8.:.5......___. 8.10
160
844
13.8
7.42_
25
3404
17.1
23.6
9.02
204
940
17.3
.f:
L -_ _ _- - ' - _ . 28
41.8
__
18_.5_ _ _ _
28_.7._. 9.78
24.8
10.2
20.5
12 ..............
_~_._~ __.
_. _.___ =25"-..
__
=:-.5
.----.---. ------...
Ll'llglh clf
Bolt in
Ma in
Mcmbcr
DiHIIH.'I l' r
of Boll
d
(mill )
..---.----.----== :_:_::'_c_ -,.-c:.-:--c.----.-.-----.---...--.-...- ....- .

__..~_...___ . _ _ _ _ S I'I ~!f:~G lli~ U I~i!!<'Icr l<>. listill ~'3 I!!!:.21L __ .. _....._._.. __._ ..
_.-- .. ...... 1__..__.____ ._____ -''--_. __...___ ~_ _ _III.__..___... _____ ._._-'-".__. ___ ._ .. .
-~- -~.--- .-
Pa rallcl to
Pcrpl' fHIi (;rain
('lIlar to
" .'".._" .. ~ _ _ ~~. __
I'
Q
Parolll cl to
Grain
w _._. _ _ _ _ _
I'
Pcrp cnd i- Parallcl to Pcrpcnd i.

Parallcl to PcrpcndiculHr to
Grain
tul ar to
G I' ~lin
t ulnl'to
._0 .__ Grai~ .. _ . _
._._ _ ._~; rail~ ___ __ .. _______ ... _ _ .__Q.~~. ~~_
Q
Q
Q
I'
I'
(mm)
___ _ _ ._ . . _~_ ._. ___ ._ . _._. ____ . _ _ ___
- ..- j. - - = c - - . - - - -..- ... ~~.- .
. ___(_1)___ ._ _.G L.. _.
(1)
(4)
_ 1-__
(6)
.. __ S!.l..._ .
(8)
_.
-@L.-
12
16
140
150
'--"'20-"
--22-- ..-.
938
14.2
22.3
26.90
__ ~._
4 1.8
14.2
22.3
22
26.9
25
34.6
-28- - '
43.5
25
28
16
20
----i2l,.---..
12L_
6n
10.1
6 44
15.3
17. 1
18.5
9.59
14.7
16.7
19.7
21.9
18.5
23 .6
28 .7
9.76
15.3
18.5
23.S
29.9
9.77
14:":l" -- i~G"--
3 65
5.3:'
-- - - -
557
8.46
----753----m
8. 10
9.02
9.78
5.06
7.78
8.84
10.4
11.6
3.8 1
4.83. ___ 334.
,
5.56
7.33
4.89
- '7 .85----iT5--6~89
8.44
13.8
7.42
9.40
17.3
8.26
- - IO.2 ---..-iO's ----S9S-5.28
7.33
4.64
8. 11
11.5
7. 13
9.2 1
13.8
8.09
10.9
17 8
954
12.1
22 1 ---~6-
.-~:---j
16.0
20.4
24.8
S4 5
13.2
16.0
20.6
25.9
-.-.----- -'-16-'-- 14.2 . "'884'-'- -''9'j'2- '-" 4'-6(~- - -842"-'-'''"'486---732'--- ' -"427 - -iiJ'- ----.............--.-----.--'.------.- .... ........:....---.~.-6.82 . .
180
..._. __ ............._22-'~_ . ....._ . l~J......_.._. . .._...1.5..2..._. __._L45
-. ~
22
16
26.9
16.6
18.5
~~= =:i~:~== :=.::~~. ;
== :=:
8.75
:;~
._L7!:....__.!.!.:i.._ --~C;:---j
8.44
4.73
7.30
4.15
--7:61-- " - 1-1-.4-.- -6~69-
9. 12
13.9
8.01
~~r' -'''-:~~ ''-::::~* ::'- ~~0--
14.2- .... 8~59----9:75---- 4.54
..- 20 -Z2.:1- -I3S ---....i5J"-
I 3.2 _
16.0
-"'"'"7.36---"13~2 -
16. 0 ._ ~~_
13.9
7.90
20.7
11.4
17.9
10.0
_ _j_--,2~8:-__
25 .9
13.8
22.5
12. 1
16
8.44
4.61
7.30
4.05
- . -- ..
20
13.2
740
11.4
6.50
200
22
16.0
8.84
13.9
7.77
25
20.6
113 :-:.._ =~-I7.8_._ 9.9 1_ .
~-i8--~4i'6'"'-'29.9-'
25.9
139
22.4
12.2
--- - -1--;::
20'--22.2
12.7
--1 5.2~"
13.2_._ .....::6.97
11.4
6.12
__
22_ __ 26.L_.
15. 1
18.4
15.9
_~.:~_
2 _ .__ J3.9 ____ 7.3 1
25
34.7
19.7
23.8
20.6
10.9
17.9
9.54
230
28
43.5
24. 8
299
25.9
13.7
22.5
12.0 ._
32
56.8
31.9
39.0
33.8
17.5
29.3
15.4._
20
22.2
12.4
15.2
13.2
6. 81 __ __-IJ.A ._.
5.98
.
22
268_
14.8
18.4
16.0
8. 15
13.8
7.16
240
~ ___ ._ .._ ..~~L._ . ._._1 9.4
23 .8
20.6
__ 10.7 _ _ . .....!22. . ___ 9}2._._
2S
43.6
24.6
29.9
25.9
13.5__ . __ ._~?':'~ ___ ....J.IY__.
.._._---_.
--.32
57.0
3 1.9
39.1
33.9
17.5
29.4
15.4
- -..- -'22 - '-26~ --i-;f4'- -'18:4- - 7:61--- - 15.9 .- 7.93 -. 13.8 ' '-6~
-:C:::---f--::-~--II -~'-;;--' --;,-::-- ---~ - . - -- . . - - - - - - - - . _ - - . - - . -25
34.7
18.8
23,R
9.93
20.6
10.4
17.9
9Jl2........
260
28
43 .5
24.0
29.S
12.7
25 .8
13.2
22.4
11.6
- 32--- 56.7
3 1.5
38.9
16.6
33.7
17.3
29.2
15.2
190
22
25
26.9
34.8
43.6
14.2
22.2
26.8
34.6
16.3
20.7
25 0
8.37
13.5
16.1
20.5
-"'''m-''
IS.5
2:1.9
299
9.90
15.2
18.4
23.8
8.63
10.9
13.2
4.42
7. 13
8.48
1(l.S
13.3
6.69
7.98
10.4
13. 1
16.8
6.54
7.S3
10.2
13.0
16.8
th
Nationa! Structural Code of the Pililippines 6 Edition Volurn e 1
6!)01
Leng(h of
CHA PTCH
(j
Wood
......... --............ ::=.~=== =:=::::.:.~:~ ~i;iiCii;si;R{jij!;(RCic~i;;-ii;;ungiiiTablc6.2j- - ~~====~.~ -==. --.. -~---.,---.---- - -----' , -~- - - _ __-"L ____ ---.-..1X--- ..
Dialllt.~ ('r
Holl in
of Bolt
d
(111m )
Main
Member
Parallel (0
Grain
Perpendi
c-ular (0
Grai n
.... _--,-,--.. - ....
Q~ --
L
(mrn)
---(1)-'-" --'(2)'''-
290
~4-32
25
- -2
-f -
f-____j__.._--iT72-_-==
.~ ._
__43.4 _
18.1
Pcrpendi.
cular 10
Grain
- j;---' - -Q- - --
308
17.8
22.7
--56.8-- W:-4~-
_.
17.3
Parallel to
Grain
---'-p-" -
(S) -------w-.- 23.8
9.53
---.1l- ~~ __ J_~_
56.9
34.7
43.5
34.7
--- "(4)-- -
(3)
-~- .. - ---- i5-----3-4-.6--~
280
I),u"a llcl to
Grain
39.0
23.8
29.9
16.3
9.39
12.0
--39.0----T6-:-i-. 238 _ ..._ .._~Jc~ __ .
l'crpcndi.
cular to
Grain
Parall el to
Grain
'- - Q- ' - --"-
(7)
(8)
20,(,
9.94
~_
33.8
20.6
25.9
33.7
. 20.6
12.6
17.0
9.79
12.5
16.7
9.51
Pcq;cndi.
('uJar to
Grain
p --' - -Q"-
--- (9) -- -~(TO)-
17.9Sj; 22.4
11.129.3
14.9
17.9
8.60
__._
22_.4___ ~_1.!Ji_
29.3
14.7
17.8
8.36
-_-_~;:+
:.:'-.-_..- --~.- . . -~H-- ---~J-- --iH-----iH--- ---":-7~: .: :~-+--;::;~H- - :~~F- J
L-_
30_5_-'-.
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Pililippines
, Ullit 'md Holt ill ..

,
,
. AlIow;lblc I, o'HIs in SC'l,.so lll'd Wood (Normal DUI"ltion
) for Onc Shc'lrPhte
. Table
_ _(,:._J8._=
._--------.-
Sillgl~~_hl'lIr .
Loudrd "nralldln
Gndn(O"J
NUlI1bt'f
Sh(',U"
nolt
dilllu.
I'lale
diam.
(111m)
(mill)
of Fll t't of
Ilit-n'
wilh
ConIlN'tors /JC
Nt'!
Minimum
Thickness
uf Lumber
Edge
Distam'c
(mill)
(mill)
Samc
------ --_._---- .-~~ .._--_.

I
oj
=. .
__.. -- - _._- _ ..
II
- -- . ..._.
11 .70
I HII
minimum
. ..
--Allownhtc I~~ld-i;~~Connector Unit nnd

Bolt (kN)
Sl'l'(: il'3..g!:OI!l!._~
I
1{)
Llladcd Perpendicular to Grain (9U")
_---------_._.._..-
----
Allowahle LOll(i per

lJ niland HoH
Edge Distance (mm',
C()lllll'Cl 0r
____
(k
--- _._- ---~ ===---fu~~s
GrOlll
~L.
Un luaded
LoadedEdgl'
Edge
(min.)
III
------
45
10.10
min imulll
70 m
more
2
()5
20
40
minimuill
9.rJ74
10.90
45
7.g28
45
45
1:"1.26
50
minimum
1.03
70 or
more
45 or
more
70m
9 .5 19
more
4S
GS &
._-----
th ic ker
40
minimum
----
..
14.01
I 1.70
10. 10
19.15
16.46
1'1.1 9
- . mininlUIU
70 or
morc
70
minimllm
95 or
mor(!
70
minimuill
4S &
th icker
4.1
ml ni Jl1um
? l.I7
17 .66
15.2 J
J4.I O
11 .74
10.14
95 or
Illore
70
minimum
95 or
rn on~
13. 12
\ 5.75
50
70
)1.;-10
minimu lll
95 OJ
more
2
100
I ~A 6
65
15. :\9
I:U5
70
70
20
I
75
20.JO
16.72
50
1,1.'16
70
minillllllll
95 \)r
more
7()
minillluln
95 or
more
70
II
III
8.1 40
6.76 1
5Y72
9.1:130
8. 184
7.072
6.316
5. 293
4.537
7.65 1
6 ..'6 1
5,47 1
(,.405
5.5 16
9.296
7. 740
6.672
K. 140
(,.761
5.87 1
9.8:10
8. 1
7.072
lIAS{)
9 ..
8.229
13 .&30
II .52
9.964
12.280
10 .23
8.807
14.810
12 .37
8.184
(,. 805
5. 871
9 .8 75
8. 229
7 . 117
9. 118
7(
6.583
II J130
9. 163
10 .720
8.9'10
7.695
12.940
10. 7fiO
9.296
...-
7.605
1--
._--_.
-10
19.:'7
mill iIllll III
_AW_' _ _
I
________.__ ..1 _______ --- _.__.._---
17Nl
1. 17
'1 5 III
15.2 j
9.697
K.362
II. 740
10.10
12.280
10. 2~O
1:U;}O
12..
11.650
Ill,lr,'
1(l .Hl
70
14. 19
1l1inill1U11l
\)) , )1
IIA XO
70
- --- ~-
_~~~_.L
9 ..)(
I:uno
12.0 I (l
i to.
Hl(IIl
-_._-------'------,--_.- L __ ..
14 .()60
minimum
90&
[hid-.n
10.68
,,
I I..
____~__
8 .807
656
~ .- --
Shell!"
Plate
dilllll.
(mill)
CHAP1:H 6 Wood
. _-- , -_ ..... . _..._---
Bolt
dialll.
(111m)
,--.
Grain (0")
Number
of Flll'l' of
I'ieee
Net
Thil' kncs...
of Lumber
wilh
Councc-
(Illm)
lor ... of
DislllllCC
(null)
-- - -
- ---.,.. -
Conllector Unit IIlId

Holt (kN)
..
...
S }ccies Grou )
-.
I
..
-2 1.17
45&
Allowahle l..{lad,)Cr--
Minimum
l.:dl:c
SIIIIlt.'
._1!g.I~~_
.1.olldcd 1)llrallcilO
II
III
(kN)
l<:d~c
(min.)
- - -'
Loaded-
95
15.2 1
more
14 .10
! 1.74
16. 19
13.12
22
70
65
I HAll
15.39
13.26
70
minimum
2(}.IO
16.72
14.46
thicker
2 1.17
17.66
!5 .21
minimum
7.! 17
9. 11 8
7.606
6.583
'"
11 .030
9.1 63
7.917
70
minimum
10 .720
8.940
7.695
95
'"
12.91()
10,760
9.296
70
minimum
95
11.650
9.697
8.362
)01 .060
11.740
10.10
I:U80
10.230
0
8.807
Iuno
12.370
10.6&
'"
"'
70
minimum
95
more
Association of Structural Engineers of Ille Pililippines
10.68
()
8.229
more
90
12.J70
9.875
more
15 &
14 .810
5.918
more
100
- -- -.
6.805
70
minimum
95
11.30
thicker
III
II
--- -----
~.184
more
50&
'"
70
minimum
95
10.14
_~~l'~S Gro~~=--
Edge
_.__.-
th icker
45
min imum
Conllector Unit alld nul{
Edge Distallce (nun)
. - - - - .Unloaded
- - -11,66
_._---- --_.._-_. _ ------ -_..'- --,. . -" - "'-AlloWl~bi;'- Loaa" jiC~'----" -
'"
CHAP TUl G . WOO(j
657
_._ ----_..
, '(Joilled
lUng
diufl\.
(n ull )
Nu mbcr
or FII('c
Bult
of I'i('('("
diaUl.
with
Cu nncr-
(mill )
t OI'S
of
Luad cd PUnlll('\ tn
Nt't Thickm'ss of
Lumhel'
Minimum
(mill)
(mill)
Edge
Distllnrc
Sa Ill('
-------All ownhlf.) Load
25 minimum
C(JIIIIC("l or Unit lind

11011 (kN)
_..
..--.fu ceics G roup
1
II
III
'i.J:j~
4.804
4.181
.87 1
40 & thicker
._-
p C I'
.-... _....__.- .- ---
--- -- _._--..-- _.. _ Holt

----- .. _---_.
50
l"(I:I<I('d J'crl'cmlicuil!.l' to G ruin (90")
Grain (0)
5 . 29.~
Edge Distance ( mm )
Unloaded
Edge
(minimum)
LoadedEdge
32
millimum
50 or more
)2
minimum
50 or more
4.581
12
.HS
4.804
.871
5.293
4.51\1
25 minimum
'.(}{X)
7.2()6
6.227
0.01
8.%5
)2
mi nimulll
50 or morc
32
minimum
500r more
45
minimum
60 or morc
45
minimum
4.11\ 1
50 & thicke r
40 & thicket
7.823
60 or more
16
8 .(X)6
40 minimum
50
.852
7.206
7.962
6.227
45
6.891
45
minimum
60 or more
45
minimum
60 or more
45
minimuill
10 .0 1
I();1 1
65 & thicker
25 minimum
8.985
9.385
60 or morc
7.828
8.1'0
55
minimulll
80 or morc
14 .()6
40 & thicker
85
20
Ik N)
S ceics Groll )
I
.-
II
III
.
2.758
---
).20)
).20)
3.647
3.647
3.158
3.5 14
3.514
3.069
4.003
4.003
3.469
32
40 minimum
65
AllowRhlc Load per

Conllector Ullit and Bolt
12.63
10.94
55
55
40 minimum
55
minimum
80 or more
10 A!
9.385
8.140
55
minimum
80 or more
-_.. -- '---- .------
National StrLlctural Code of the fl ilipprnes 6'" Edition Volume 1
3.20)
) .203
2.758
3.647
3.647
3.158
3.5 14
3.5 14
3.069
4.003
4.003
3.469
'.804
4.804
4.181
5.'17 1
5.471
4 .759
6.005
6.005
5.204
6.805
6.805
5.916
4.804
4.804
4. 181
5.47\
5.47 J
4.759
5.293
5.293
4.581
6.716
6.672
6.049
6.005
5.249
5.204
7.562
6.939
6.805
6. 227
5.91 6
5,427
8.229
9.385
7,428
8.451
6.45()
7.295
11.I2()
10.0 10
8.674
6.9:19
6.227
5A27
8.229
7.428
60450
--_..-
-" -" -- -' - -'- l ~-
._ .._.-
-- - --- - ~-- -, -- -.
i
'l 't)4)llll'd
Hing
"'~j
(mill)
Boll
cliam.
Number
of Fal'e
of I)iccc
wilh
( mill )
CUllIle('
torS or
Sallie
- --_... _----- -
. -- ~-. -- , - --- -
Loaded I';lrnllel Itl

Grain (0")
Net
Thick
uess of
Lumber
(mm)
MinimulII
f<::dgc
Distallce
(mOl)
Allowa.ble Load pcr

Connector Unit ~nd
Uolt (kN)
Loa(ktll'l'rIH'IHlkular to (;ruill (I}O")
.
F
..
=-~.)(!cics Gro~J~._._ "lj~11

I
Boll
.,
Table
- (conlinued)
-_.... 6.19
.......--- ._---
50
. 11.39
65
)) .03
75 &
14.06
II
10.27
I J .74
III
F
(min
~-.--- .
---- ._ --9 .029

h.71 X
R.09:,)
7.U?K
7.R28
6.605
10.320
9.365
9 .296
8.1151
K051
7,29:;
80 or mor('
11.120
10.010
8.674
70
8.362
7.s! 7
6.494
95 or more
JO .050
9.029
7.8n
7()
minimu m
10.850
9.786
8.451
95 or !!lOfe
!3.030
! 1.743
1(),19
8.162
7.517
6.494
9.7&6
70
minimum
90 or Ill(lfe
10.050
9 .029
7.828
9.029
8. 139
7.072
10.59
70
minimum
95 or more
10.850
9.186
BA51
70
minimum
10. 190
9. 163
7.962
&.&%
RO Of 1ll1)rC
10.1 9
55
mil1irnull1
80 or more
55
minimum
12.63
10.9<1
lhickcr
m ininwllI
12.54
25
11.30
9.786
minimllm
16.32
40&
100
thic ker
20
14.68
12.72
70
70
12.54
40
11.30
minimum
50
13.57
12.19
65
15.)0
13:101
11.92
95 or more
12.230
10 .990
1).$19
75&
16.32
14.68
12.72
70
minimum
95 or more
I C.B50
1) .700
8,45 1
13.030
11.740
10. 12 ..
thi cker
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Pllilippines
CI-lAPTEfl 6 . Wood
659
Taole 6.20 - Allownbl c Load.Ii in Seasoned Wood (No rmsl Duration) for One Split.Ring Unit and Bolt in Single Shear
._ _ .
- - -- .. - - --
No. uf
Flicc uf
Split
Rill":
Diam.
(mm)
nul!
DiIUII.
(1II1ll)
Piece
with
COlillce
tors of
- - --
Net
Thick
nc ....~ of
Lumber
(mm)
SUIIIC
Bolt
- - T- - - -
M in.
Edge
Dis lalll(.'
(kN)
III
40 &
thicker
Edge dt'itlmec
(1II1n)
40
minimum
(kN)
S des Group
Unlolld('d
Edge
(Min.)
Loaded
Edge
III
(56)
5,471
4 .7 15
45 minimum
70 or more
7.784
6.494
5.560
I:U5
11.12
9519
45 minimum
7.873
6.583
5.649
70 or more
9385
7.784
6.672
45 minimum
(58)
5.471
4.715
70 or more
7.784
6.494
5.560
9.252
11.12
14.19
17.03
7.962
9.519
12.23
70
45 minimum
7.872
6.583
5.649
70 or morc
9.385
-'.784
6.672
70 minimum
9.875
8.229
7. 11 7
11.830
9.875
8.496
9 5 or more
25.53
thicker
40
minimum
70
17.92
21.26
14.90
18.37
12.90
50
20.599
17. 17
14,8 1
66
25.04
20.90
18.06
75&
25.53
th icker
---._._-_..
II
7.962
13.25
40 &
9.252
11.03
25
minilllum
20
Allowable Load Per
Connector Unit And lIolt
45
50 &
thicker
100
..-.
11.0.1
45
12
2
LUlld ed P('qx'ndicular to Grain (90)
---- --_._------_._- ---- - -- ----- - - - 25

minimulll
64
II
--
S H,'eies Groun
(111111)
L(ludcd l'itrallel to Grain

(0')
Allowahle Load pcr
CmHlcCI(jr Unit und Holt
..
21.26
-----..-.-- ._.
__.-
1837
..---_..
70 minimum
14.810
12.320
10.6)0
95 or more
17.790
14.810
12.110
70 minimum
10.360
8.629
7.413
95 o r more
70 minimuill
9S or more
12.450
11 .970
14.320
10.360
9.963
11.970
8.985
8.585
10.320
70 minimum
95 or more
14.540
17.440
12.100
14 .540
10.450
12.540
7()lllinimum
14.810
12.320
10.6)0
17.790
14.8 10
12.770
95 or more
.--~--.
-_._--
National Siructural Code of Ihe Philippines G'h Edition Volume 1
__
-_.
... ..-_.
6 60
CHAPTE:11 6 Wood
Table 6.21 - Common Wire Nails and
Length
(mm)
N
A
I
L
Loads in Seasoned Wood-Normal Duration

-- -- .~
Desi~natioll
'(1)--"
Spikes~Allowable
(mill)
into (he Member Holdin1!. the Point (N )

Species Group
IYII
I
III
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
805
750
690
685
590
495
455
4011
345
550
510
470
435
400
340
31 0
275
235
340
3 15
290
265
245
210
190
170
145
2 15
200
180
170
155
130
120
\05
90
Diam eter
(2)
150
125
11 0
105
100
90
75
65
50
(3)
150
140
125
115
100
90
75
65
50
..
Withdrawal Loud from Side Grain per 'Latc,;;! LOlid in Side G raj~\.( N) '"''
25 nllll or Penetration of Nail or Spike
Size of Nail or Spike (mm)
6.5
6.0
5.75
5.25
4 .75
4.00
3.75
3.25
3.00
~- .
Species Grolll)
- ,- .' . - - - -
_._.. __._- ..._ - .. J2L._

,.
II
- -..III
(10 )== J.!J.L.

-=
I
1320
1180
1045
920
825
640
555
465
370
P
I
K
3/8
3/8
150
140
125
110
100
90
80
75
2 15
180
150
140
125
115
100
90
80
75
9.5
8.0
7.0
7.0
6.75
6.0
5.75
5.25
5.0
5.0
1035
860
780
780
725
675
620
570
530
530
705
590
535
536
495
460
425
390
360
360
435
360
325
325
305
280
260
240
220
220
275
230
205
205
195
180
165
150
140
140
2020
1535
1325
1325
1185
1060
940
830
740
740
1735
1320
1140
11 40
102()
910
805
7 10
635
635
935
84()
750
665
585
525
525
,-;-;. ----_._-,.. - _...
"
SOURCE.
PllihpplOe TImber DesIgn StandlUds (1. E. Rocafort and 1. O. SIOpongco)
November, 1991 (FPRDI Terminal Rep0r1)
1425
1085
935
Ji~f775
930
830
735
650
580
450
395
325
260
1iJ5
1010
895
790
705
550
480
400
320
.- - -_ ...
S
IV
695
615
540
48.\
375
330
275
220
-
1190
90.\
780
780
700
625
555
490
435
435
CHAPf Ul E . Woo(i
--- ~~~~_ ._ _ _ __
Table 6.22 Allowable S >ans for 50 mm Ton Jlle and Groove Decking
---- - [ - --
J./ ~%;;,~~~"
.__.,_
IlEFLECTION J./ MIT

,--_
(N"~"" I
j- ~N~::,:~-~=I
I I O?
1171,)()
1763.84
Roofs
-------... --~--.--
O.95H
1/360
. -
---'~3-7---- =~~~~==Y--,II.'l;;~-=='==
--~~J~;;'''--.----- =~_. . .
ov
12(X)
1.916
- - -..-- - - - -...-..-
6 6 1
1/240
..
J 763.84
2(;45-.-;;7;-
.
~---234i60----
I.H60
. -
+ _____._____J__-_-_-__"'35;Si"''r'''(;8::--__-===-1
..-.
/3c:6<l".... _ _ _
- - - -- .- , ____- j ' - _.__ .-;1"'
1/240
0.958
1350
1/360
1/240
1!360
1.437
1.37H
\667 .38
1.860
2101.01.5
2501.07
- - 2790.45 " - ' - -
------I.'-)1-6--- ' --~==-.----ill.:'4~O'=--:...---- /-----2-.4-,-,----1---~31"3C;4".7~6---
+__---;4"'9"'95".2"'5_ _ _-1
_ . __ . _ _. __.._ .. _. __ ._ __ __ _ _.. _ _ ___. 1136<l

0.958
1/240
______--I____
1500
J .437
1650
0.958
1/240
1/360
-._----si 12.38
2.894
11240
1.437
~::=:'.===:~~"'
_ ... _~._. _ ____.______ ._._.'"._ ..-._--- - - -- . - - - 1 - -..

0.958
'4.547.40
6890.00
2.067
3045.38
+ _____,,4-::54,,7
".4', ,0c-___
1.437
1/240
1/360
--..- . - .- ----.-.- - -.2.756
"1724.Q_.__ ~==
4561.18
6876.22
,,-- c;O<)()j(;----"---
_ _ _ ____
3.445
._ _ .. ____.__ -;9,,';;6:-3.,,7';-1_ _
... _
2.480
3961.75
1/360
.
5939.18
----j----~~-----+------------------~S~~---I
11240
3.307
5939.18
1/360
8922.55
1.9 16
0.958
19S(}
_ __...,'''''8'-;7".4-::8_ ___
3445.0{)
----,----. - --)4J"(l.5-.
I ----
_____._______ --7I/"'lo:6<lc.--_ . ____. ____._____________
- ..-.--.-,-----~ I .916
1800
1/240
_. ___ -""=-36~;Oc.-..- - _ __ ._227~_ .. _._. __
...-~~-~;:.--..- - -- .
_ _ __ ._
- 1 - - -- - . - - __
1.722
_
--;';1/3~6"'0---+ __ ._ _ _
11360
1-_ _---"l/o;24;:;OC_
1.'240
------ - -----1- ---;:c;,;;"'~;;1.437
4. 14 3
1136<l
1_ __ -"::0120:;4,,_ .___
2 894
11919.70
__
_. __ ._.__~Q9Jl.55 __.. _ _
. --- - ----:-.-.. ---.-..--- --- - - {~:;~~i----
1/360
-----.._--...-.------ ----., ___ _~.~~2 ._. ___._H_

1.9 16
792350
.____
" -'-'-'-~923z~760;;----1
3.858
"~---'-- --.----~::
_.J!.L22J ()-..~----
Ji360
;1.823
119J9.70
-'1"i2"4"'o- - - - - I - - - .- - - - - - - -j ----"",2'6;'"'
9."'90, ;-----
0.958
3376
~"-----~1/=36<l~-._.-_---------4----'9~3~70~42--11240
4.478
9439.30
1.437
11360
_'"'I3;o:78"'0"'.00c.---__ _
11240
12539.80
1.916
11360
5.581
18775.25
- - -0-9-58-- - - - - --.-",12"'4"'0- -- +----3.-85-8 - - - + - - - - - - 07"'75"',"".2;:;5'---1
. .
11360
11609.65
1-_______
2100
1 - - -- - - -- -/- 2250
1.437
11240
5.168
-.J..!...~7'50- - -..
1.9 16
11240
6.408
17431.
_ _---'0(;55';',,2.,;
500 '-____ _
1---- -- - - - I - ---:Ie;I3C;6;cO------ _. __._ _________.
- . - -.--------.- ------------I-----;';:~:;:~"'o----2400
-.---.._
0.958
. _- -
'
-.--.--.--.----+----~;;,,;"'~8"-;4(=2;i-_-_
-4.410
11360
14055.60 ---
11240
14055 .60
1.4 37
---.-.--.~-~'7._---5.856
___ ._". __ L...... __ ._. _ ___ _ _ .. _._ ...... _...
"'60
____________ _ _ _ _._
th
Nalional Siruciura l Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volum e 1
___
21083.40
6 62
CHAPTER 6 - Wood
Table 6.22 - Allowable Spans for 50
mOl
Tongue and GrooYe Decking (Cont'd)
Floors
1200
__ ~
5.788
~~~-_-_-_--_~--,-:;"Z,,~,-----_~-. ~___ '_9~_'--:--c-:c-:---,JL-,---:----:----:-'-,.-'{,..."- -I
--
-~-----6K9(l .()()-~--
"j
==~-~-=.D~~ ---=---l~=~~~~={,~~~~~~~~:~-- . - -_
..
Span-\' (lrc ba.\'ed Oil simple ht'am tic/ion with 0.50 kN/I// dead load mul provi.riO/lS for a 1300 N conanu(l{/'d /o(1d fill
.1
(I
.i(X) mm widlll fljp,'> O!
dl'cking. Rando/ll laY-Ill' p('I"mil(('d i'lll(.'cortiu!lcc willi t}w ()TOl'isio/ls ojScctioll 620.8.J or 620. 10.11.9. i.rw))/' r l/ticlall'ss OSJUIIl('(1 IJ/1{) mll1, /W/
CHAPTE.F1 G . WOO(j
...
~-~~~~-----
(jG3
Hci~ht and Spacing of Woods Studs

._- ...
..-.-----Hearin' Walls
_________~ on~ BCi!!'i~~KYV ails
Supporting
Supporting
Supporting
Latcrally
One Floor,
Two Floors,
Spadng
Roof and
Unsupported
Roof and
Roof and
Stud Height I
Ceiling Only
Ceiling
Ceiline- - - - _ .._....- --------_.._--,
(mm)
(mm)
Spacin2 (mm)
_-- ""-'--_._-- Table 6 23 Size
~-------.---~.-.--.---.-
Laterally
Unsupported
Stud Height I
Stud Size
~~~
---.~
(mm)
SO x 75
(mm)
~.-
50 x 100
250
250
250
250
75 x 100
50 x 125
SO x ISO
600
600
600
600
400
600
600
600
3000
4200
4200
4800
6(XIO
--.~.-.---
400
~
400
{ U.fted heights are d,sf(/nces between points of la{('tal supporf placed perpendicular 10 Ih(' plane of Ih(' waf!.
permirred where jllstified by an analysis.
1 Shall not hi' used in eXlerior walls.
Seismic
Zone
Condition
One~story,
top of two or
Table 6 24 - Braced Wan Panels I

Construction Method ',J
1
2
5
3
4
6~_ 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
three~story
--_..- -First- story of two~story or X

X
X
second-story of three-story
--_.
First~story of three-story
X
-- X
One-story, top of two~story
X
X
or three~story
First-story of two~story or
X
X
second of three-story
.~--~
First-story of three-story
__..
X
...
'XT X
X
--- - ..
~
X'
X
X
X
~-
8
X
X--
II/CTNlSeS
--
4()()-~~~
----
600
600
600
600
t------.~
~----
in IlfIsufJPorll!d helghl
(if{'
Braced Panel Location and

Length"
Each end and not more than
7500 mm on center
--X
~
X'
X'
X'
X'
1111.'; (able specifies mill/mum reqUirements Jor braced pands whu:hJonu /rIterlor or exterior braced walllmes.
See Section 620.10.3 forJull descriptiol/.
) See Sec/ion 620.10.4 for altemate braced panel n~quirement,
Buildillg length is the dimensioll parallel 10 the braced wall length.
5 Gypsum wallboard applied to suppons at 400 mm on cell IeI'.
6 Nol permiffedJor bracing cripple walls in Seismic Zone 4. See Section 620.JO.5.
7 The reqllired lengths shall be doubledJor gypsum board applied to only olle filce oj a braced wall panel.
I
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'h Edition VolUlne 1

7500 mm on center
7500 mm on center but not less
than 25% of building Ieogth'
7.5 In on center but not less
than 40% of buildin~.~~,~~....
664
CHAI"TEfl 6 Wood
Table 6.25 - Cripple Wall Bracing

.
Seismic
Amount of Cripple Wall Bracing 1,1
One-story above cripple

wall
Two-story
above
cripple wall
lOmm wood structural panel with 65111111 at 150 I 300 111m nailing on 60 percent of wall
ienO'th minimum
lOmI11 wood structural panel with 65mll1 at 100 1300 mm nailing on 50 percent of wall
length minimum
(mm)
__ .~~.ne __
----
Condition
_-
"-_..
or
l0l11111 wood stnlctural panel with 65111111 at 150/300 mm nailing on 75 percent of wall
----_.. J~.g.!h n~]il11ul11
Ollc~slOry above cripple
lOmm wood su'uctural paneJ with 65mm at 150 / 300 mm nailing on 30 percent of wall
wall
length minimum
Two~story
above 10m111 wood structural panel with 65m111 at 100/300 mill nailing on 40 percent of wall
cripple wall
length minimum
2
2
or
lOmm wood structural panel with 65mll1 at 150 / 300 mm nailing on 60 percent of wall
length minimum
I
Braced panellenglh shall be or least two times the height of the cripple wall, bitt not less 1/)011 1200 mm.
All P(wels along a waH shall be nearly equal in lcngth and shall bc nearly equally spaced along the length of the wall.
Table 6.26 - WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL WALL SHEATHING

-Minimum
Thickness
Panel Span Rating
(mm)
-,,-_.
10
10,12
10,12
I
(Not eXDosed to the weather, strength axis Darallel or nemcndiculal' to studs)
1610, 1610, 2010 Wall -- 16 o.c.

16/0,2/0,24/0,32/16 Wall 24 o.C.
24/0, 24/16, 32/16 Wall - 24. o. c.
Stud SI)3cing (mm)

Siding Nailed to Sheathing under Coverings Specified in Section
Studs
1--_
620.10.3
Sheathing Parallel to
Sheathing
Studs
Perpendicular to
Studs
400
400
600
400
600
600
600
600
In }'(ference to Section 620.10.3, biockmg of honzonlai,loints is not required.
Table 6.27 - Allowable Shears for Wind or Seismic Loading on Vertical Diaphragms of Fiberboard Sheathing Board
Contraction for Type V Construction Only)
~-
Size and Application
12 x 1200 x 2400 mm
20 x 1200 x 2400 111m
I
Nail Size
_._-_._-_.
Galvanized roofing nail 40 mm long, 10
111m head
Galvanized roofing nail 45 111m long, 10
111m head
Shear Value in 75mm Nail Spacing

Around Perimeter and 150mm at
Intermediate Points
182.5"
256
Fiherboard sheathing diaphragms shall 1101 be used 10 brace ('onereI(' or III(1S01ll), walls.
The shear vallle may be 780 Nfor 12 by 1200 by 2400 mm.liberboard /lail-base sheathing.
f\ssociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAf'TEH 6 - Wooel
6-65
Table 6.28 - Allowable Shear for Wind or Seismic Forces in Pounds per Foot for Vertical Diaphragms of Lath
and Plaster or Gypsum Board Frame Wall Assemblies I Type of Material
Thickness of
Material (mm)
Constrllction
22 mm
Unblocked
I,
Expanded metal, or woven
wire lath and porliand

cement plaster
I.
I,
Shear
Value
-------
150
2628
125
1460
--
Minimum Nail Size 3 (mill)
-_.._----_._--------40 mm long, 10 mm head

Staple, 22 mm legs
10 mm lath and
Gypsum lath
2.
Nail Spacing 1
Maximum (mill)
Wall
Unblocked
! 2 111m plaster
Staple, 30 mm long, 6 mm head,
plasterboard blued nail
-12mmx600
3.
ml11 x 2,400 111m
Gypsum sheathing board
Unblocked
100
1095
Blocked
100
2555
Unblocked
175
1460
45 mm long, 10 mm head, diamond-point,

galvanized
12 mill x 1200
mm
12 mm x 1200
mill
175
Gypsum wallboard or venecr
base
4.
11mm
2 mm dia., 40 mm long, 6 mm head) or

wallboard (2 mm diu. 40 mill long,
Unblocked
100
175
Blocked
1460
r--100
175
1825
6 mmhead)
1825
2190
1679
Unblocked
100
175
2117
(2.5 mm dia., 45 mm long, 6 mm head) or

wallboard (2.5 mm dia. 50 mm long,
6 rum head)
2117
Blocked
16mm
100
Blocked
Two ply
Base ply: 225

Face ply: 175
2555
3650
Base ply - (2.5 mm dia. 50 mm long, 6 mm

head) or wallboard (2.3 mm dia. 50 mm
long, 6 mm head)
Face ply - (3.0 mm dia., 60 mm long, 6111m
head) or wallboard (3.0 mm dia., 60 mm
long, 10 mm head)
-~.-
111ese verfical diaphragms shallllof be used to resist/oads imposed by masolZl}' or concrete construction. Values shown are for shorl-term loading
due to wind or due to .I'dsmic loading. Values shown l/Iust be reduced 25 percent for normal loading. The values shown ill Items 2, 3 and 4 shall be
reduced 50 pen'(!l1Ifor loading due to earthquake ill Seismic Zones 3 and 4.
Applies to nailing {/{ all .wuls, top and bottom plates, and blocking.
Affel'l1ate I/ai!s lIIay be u.w!d {frlwir dimensiol)s are 1I0t less than the !'pec[(ied dimension.
National Structural Code of tile Pllilippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
CHAP TEI, Ci - Wood
6-(;6
Table 6_29 - Allowable Spans for Particleboard Wall Sheathing J

(Not exposed to the weather, Iong dimenslOll o f the panelI paralleI or perpencrleu I ar to stu(I s)
Stud Spacing (IInll)
-
Sheathing under Coverings

Specified in Section
620_10_3 Parallel or
Perpendicular to Studs
GRADE
THICKNESS (mill)
M-I
M-S
M-2 "Exteri or Glue"
10
400
400
12
400
400
/"
Siding Nailed to Studs
referellce TO Sec/ion 620.10.3, blocking (If lwrizoll{a! joims i.I' 1101 required.
Table 6,30 Scientific Name of Philippine Timber Species

J.
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) iuc ludcs:
8_
Dangakalan (C. obHquincrvium MelT.)
Mnlabayabas (1'. dccorlicata MelT.)

Tiga (T. micrantha Mcrr.)
2.
Bitangho! (c. blancoi FI. & Tr.)

Bitaog (C. inophyl1um L.)
M:mggilchapu i (Hopea spp.) includes:
9.
Gisau (Canarium spp.) includes:
Dalingdin gnn (H , foxw orlh),i Elm.)

Manggachapui (H. aCllminala MelT.)
Yakal-saplungan (H. plaga!a (Blanco) Vid.]
3.
Dull t [C. hirslltum Willd. Forma lllultipinna!u m

(Llanos) H. 1. Lam]
Gisau (C. vriescanum Engl.)
Pagsahingin-hu log (c. ealophyllum Perk.)
Piling-liitan (C. lu zonicum (lliume) A. Gray]
Nnrig (Valica spp.) includes:
Narig (Y. manggachapui Blanco spp. manggachapoi)

Narig, Thick-leafed (Y. pachyphylla Mer!'.)
4.
10.
r.
Malaanonang (Shorc<l spp.) includes:

Kalullli is. hope i folia (Heim). Syrn. J
Malaanonang (S. poli ta Virl.
12.
Dao (Dracontolllclon spp.) includes :

Dao ID. dao (Blanco) MCIT. & Rolfe]
L:unio {D. cdu!c (Blanco) Skee ls.)
Malasaging (Agiaia spp.) includes:

no ilo IA. iloilo (B lanco) Merr.]
Kuling-man ok lA. luzonicnsis (Vid.) Merl'. &
Rolfe)
Malasaging (A. diffusa Merr.)
Binggas (Tcrminaiia spp.) inc ludes:
Binggas [T. ci trina (Gaertn) Rox b.]

Kalumpit (T. microcarpa Decne)
L.1nipau (T. copclandii Elm.)
Sakat (T. Nitens Frcsl.)
Talisai-gubat (T. foetidissim:l Griff.)
7.
(Shorca spp.) includes :
Antipolo (Anhocarpus spp.) includes:

Anlipo lo IA. blanco (Elm .) Merr.]
Anubing (A. ovalo Blanco)
Kubi (A. nilida Tree. Spp. Ni tidn)
Nangka (A. hcterophy!1a ulm .)
6.
1~\Uan
Almon (S. ul mon Foxw.)

L..luan. Red (S. negrosensis Foxw.)
1.<1uan, White (S. contorta Vid .)
Mayapis [So squamata (Turcz. Dyer.]
Ta ngilc [S. polyspcrma (Blanco) MCIT.j
Yakal (Shorca spp.) includes:

Yakal (S.astylosa Foxw.)
Yakal-gisok (S.gisok Foxw.)
Yakal-Mabolo (S. c illat.1 King)
Yakal-malibato (5. malibato Foxw.)
5.
Dangkalan (Callophy llum spp.) includes:
J 3.
Malugai (Pomelia spp.) includes:

Malugai (P. pi nnata Forsl.)
Malugai-liitan (P. pinnala forma rc sponda Jacobs)
J4.
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) includes:

Kuli ng-bahui (0. alt issisulll Men .)
Miau (D. euph lc biu m Merr.)
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Philippin es
6--61
CHI\PTEP 6 . Wood
15.
Guijo (Shore:l spp.) includes:
2 1.
Guijo IS. guis(J (Blanco) Blume]
Kam'lg()l1g
(Dio~I1.)'f()S
i nd\ld~s:
lVlalak-malak IP. philippcllsc(Perr.) C. B. Rob.]

Maniknik (P. lCIlUipCI I()IH1111ll MelT.)
Nato W iuzon ic nsis (F. -Viii.) Vid. J
Parak -pa lak (P. lanccot\Wlll Bianco)
Malagu ijo (S. plagata Foxw.)
16.
Nato (pa laquium spp.)
!iPP.) includes:
22.
Anang D. pyrrhocarpa Miq.)

A nnng-guloll ( D. inelus:1 MeIT.)
Ala-lila (D. miudanaesis Merr.)
!>alosHpis (Anisoptcra spp.) includes:

Aru (A. brunnea Foxw. )
Bolollg-cta (D. piiosanlhcra Blanco)
Dagang (A. ,HlrCH Foxw .)
Kurnagong ID. phiJippincnsis (Rcs ... ) Gurke]
23.
Kamagong , Ponce (D. pOllcci Merr.)

Katilma (D. Ililidll Mcrr.)
17.
Pine, Bcnguct (P. kcsiya Royle ex. Gordon)

Pine, Mindoro (Po mcrkusil Jungh & de Yr.)
Katlllo n (Dilknia spp.) inchldes:

Katmon (D. Jlhi1ippinen~is Rolre)
K:llrnOn-bayani (D. megalanlha MelT.)
M(liakatmon ID. luzoniensis (Vid.) Martelli]
18.
24.
Sn!akin (Aphatl<ltl1ixis spp.) includes:

Kangko (A. perrotteliana A. Juss)
Salak in IA. c Ulllingiana (c. Dc.)]
Kato (Amoora spp.) includes :
25.
Kol\l) (A. aherniana Mcrr.)
Katollg-lakihall (A. m:lcrocarpa MelT.)
19.
Pillc (Pillus spp.) includes:
Bayok (Pterosperrnu m spp.) includes:

Bayuk (P. di versifoliu m Blume)
Bayok-hayo k.m (P. nivculll Yid.)
Pahutan (Mangifcl":l spp.) includes:
26.
Pilllllian (M. a hissima Blanco
P:thong-liitan (M. men'i llii Mukh.)
Manggasi noro (Shqrea spp.) includes:
Mangg<lsi noro IS.
assamicn
Dyer.
philippincnsis
(Brandis) Sym .]
20.
Mllnggasinoro ng - lakiha n (S. virenccns Parijs)
Apilong (DiplcmcalllUs spp.) includes:

Apitong (D. grandif10rus Blanco)
Apitong, Basilnll (D. basilanicus Foxw.)
Apitong, Broad ~w inged (D. spcciosus Brandis)
H ~.gakhak (D. warbugii Brandis)
Malapanau (D. Ken'ii Kin g)
Panau (D. grand is Blume)
Pannu, Lcaf-u.iled (D. cauclalus Foxw .)
Table 6.31 Basic Working Stresses and Modulus of Elasticity for Dry Machine Graded Lumber
Machine
Basic Working Stress (MPa)
Modulus of
Stress Grade
Elasticty
Bending
Compression
Shear Strength, Fv
Tensile
(GPa)
Strength, Fb
Strength, Ft
Strength, Fc
M5
1.48
5.68
MIO
10
1.64
8.57
MI5
15
12
1.79
11.45
M20
20
12
16
1.95
14.34
M25
25
15
20
2.10
17.23
th
National Structu ral Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
forma
CHI\PH' fl r; . Wood
(; G8
'!:a hi c_.~:g.!!asi.('. \V.~E.~i Jlgl.:'}ad,s.. I:~1' Nails i'I_I"'.~te..':!l!..!.:'lad!J11!jM ~!LL __.__._ ___
J ~ ulllbcl'
._-_. __.. - _._--_._.- ..-
Grade
(N)
_.__ Load--CapHcity
._-- . __ ...._. __... . _._._----_._-.
D*=2.5
D=2.S
D=3.15
D=3.75
D=4.5
- -.----. - - - -- + -- -11- - - -- -1- ----- . - - - - M5
92
112
m
188
25S
D=5.6
D=5
-----+ -- - -- - ---1
378
310
--
MIl)
136
166
204
276
380
c---- - - - - -------- -----..- -- 1- - - --
457
182
222
272
369
508
6 11
M20
229
279
279
466
641
771
779
937
- - -. -- -.---.--.-.-....-.. _--- - - 1 -- -- - + ----1 - -- 1- - -279
-i-::;lmbe~-
340
...------
340
566
557
- --- f - - - - - - -- -
MI5
M25
------ - -------745.
940
1143
Table 6.33 Basic Worki ng Loads for Nails in Withdrawal (MGL)

Load Capacity (N/mmj---- - -- -- - - -- -- -
____ Q~~l.<!.c... __. . :~~~_Q~;;~I_=:r: _D=2Jl..._
_ I)_~"~!..?_
M5
47
52
59
MIO
85
96
lOS
.__..J M 7L _ __J?~~2
70
----In
__ _.__ J)=..~______.
84
94
D=5.6 ___ _
105
- - - --1-- -:- - 1 --,,___--1

154
J71
19 1
-----MIS-- ---1:14- -- ----iSc)--- '- -"68--- ---"'20-1----24-1-- - .. 267'
30{)
--~,,____j-__:,,___-__I---_j----
--- MW-
192
-"- -'2 15 - ---24T .. - --T87-- ---"345""- --
M25
259
*D=nad dlal11ctcl (mill)
29C)--' 327 -
---~---
389
466
._--------- ._---_.._-
---- _._- - - _
5 I8
- - 4~--'581----'-'--'---'-- -.-
Table 6.34 Design Stresses for Machine Graded Lumber

Design Stresses
--.-.-----..
Allowable Strength Properties (MPa)
MS
Dcndi ng
--.-~- --
_._--_
..
Tension Parallel to grain

--- ~
._- - ' - '-
...... __
Tension Perpendicular to gra in
0.29
-_.
._-
MIO
MIS
M20
M2S
10
15
20
25
0.29
0.29
12
16
20
4.3
5.2
6.2
-_...._ --_.
Compression Parallel 10 grain
Compressioll Perpendicular to grain
2.3
3.3
.-
15
12
.. _.. _._._ --0.29
----_._030
.-
Shear
..-
Stiffness Propenies (GPa)
---
-,
Modulus of Elasticity (mean)
6.2
-..
Modulus of Elasticity (20th percentile)
--------_.
Shear Modulus
---
8.8
5.1
7.6
11.3
- ---10.1
0.39
0.52
0.65
- ~.-
..
----- .__._--
- - - - --
'--
--
13.9
16.4
12.6
15.1
0.78
0.91
_.
CHAPTEn
I).
6-69
Wood
Tahle 6.35 - (In addition to Table 6.1) \Vorking Stresses for VisualJ)' Stress-Graded
Unseasoned Structural Timber of Philippine Woods.
-. -..." .-.. --.------K(j,;,,-.~-;ri{I-:-.~-s(;TiAmt--~-------.---- --~-----------SO%S1l<ESS(jRAT)!-- .----~'"
Addilional Spcci(~,
(Common and BOlaniral
--iic';;~li-;;g-
Nilllll',)
and
Tension
paralll'l
to graBI
M~~thlhl.;" --C;;-;;!;rc'~;;i~ - C()mJ;;-~~~jo~;" "St~ar -1k;Jir~g

of
));Ir,lIk) 10
[wqlt'ndicuhlr
parallcl
alld
l'laslieily
Tt:n,ion
10 grain
in
pilralkl
grain
bcnding
to grain
'"
11
._-MPa _ ..
11
-~>;j"'-"
---..~--
MP;I
- -~'- Mr;;--"-
Modulus
or
Ci;ISlicily
in
bending
CO;I~i);:;;-;::~iw-
C)mprcssion
parallcllo
IK~ll)C!\(licular
grain
10 gralll
-- Shcill
paralkl
",
gr;lin
--I\W;-'-- ~;-- --
Hl'a
MPa
3.(H
190
.-..- .....-- --,;xX'- ....- ... -.....-- - - - - - - - - - - .-..

-----+--- - - - - - . - - --.-...- ..- - ----..- -- __ _ - - 1 - - - - + - - - 1 - - - - - - - . _.._. --..-
---.
- - - 1----1----
High Strength Group
A Commercial Species
Alupag amo [Litchi

chincnsis Sonl), ssp
pliilippinclisis
(RaJlk)Lcenh.J
A!a-a!a (Diospyros
mindanacnsis Men.)
.- ..
l3ilkauan (Rhizopho-;:;I
aniculata Blume)
KatilnUi (Diospyros nitida
--~-.--
28.U
7.98
- - 26,li'"'-
~--..~~ ~~
KubJ (Al1ocarpus IlItlOUS
Trecc. snn, nitidus)
Narig (Ya!ica mangachapoi ..
Blanco ssn. manpachanoi)
Narig, 'Illick leafed (Ymica
3 J .21
'---sJl- ---~--. -~3~.S~,--j-~2~.676~+~16~.735~~---'57.1~9c-+---'S~.O~2c--l---~cc:----j-",-j

2,21
1.66
_._....7.92
24.47
8.15
27.04
8.34
-.~~- ..- - 1 1.()4
5.47
10.29
6.42
-2~85'- ---I-~i.S
2.89
16.90
4.95
6.43
5.21
3.42
1.78
2.62
J.53
4.01
L81
pcchyphylla Mcrr)
Tiga [Tristeniopsis
micrantha (Merr) Wik &
1-'\\~'~"'~"~h~JL,-,...~_____
~~
=_._I--~~_
.._
Tindalo [Afzclia
'-)0.17
-8~88
---'Ti~i9--'-"' --~7ccS"6--I-~3~.471-i-"I8".8"6-1--S~.<C5SC-----~7'-.'-12;--I---;4~73
rhomboidea (Blanco) V.,;'~I.LJ-+~~~_I_~_._
Yakal (Shorca asty!osa-
Fo,w.)
Yaka!-yamban(Shofca
fakiferoides ssp.
faJdfcroidcs)
Yakal-malibato (Shore:!
malibato Foxw)
Yakal-sap!ungan [Hope;]
olaMta (Blanco) Vid.)
Diosp)TOS sp.
25.05
9.92
.. ~
_.. 29.17
38.22
.--~--
--9.50- -
9.8~
"'-(;:72 ...~ '----2:33- '~'l5---:66-'~ '-~'-(;:ii)"-- -"---'(~i'4'"-.~--I~=c-I-."~~.j--~

..~---"2.43
18.23
-S,94
2.13
--'-'-4.20 - -
--~
6.13
3.94
1.52
5.44
6.34
3.84
1.65
26.12
6.99
7.97
5.62
1.82
8.70
10.[4
6.15
11.18
12.76
9.00
24.67
7.98
8.48
5.71
2.64
15.42
4.99
5.30
3.57
1.65
27.47
7.62
9.44
5_08
3.00
17.17
4.76
5.90
3.17
1.87
26.85
],86
9.82
6.88
3.00
16.78
4.91
6.14
4.30
1.87
6.70
5.60
L80
7.12
3.42
-~,fl:79"
2.64
B. Lesser-Known Species
Alllsoan (Cassia javanica L.
iavenica)
AraClgen !GanophylJum
oblio;lUnI (Blanco) Mm,]
SSD.
Bansilai (Ochua foxwor1hyi

27.99
9.24
10,72
Elm)
SalirlWood (Chloroxylon
32.92
8.40
J 1.39
swicleuia DC.)
._. __~ _ _ _ _ _ ........ _ ._ _ _ .___1_ _ _ _..._
1.93
+__--j
- - . - i - - - - ...-~-..-. _ .._. __._j_____
I-c-~~~~~-_I_--_l---I-- ------ - - - . _...- . - - . -..-
II. Moderately High
- . - - - 1 - - - -+--1
.'lS.t"""""li'''"''.'C'G",to'''';,"-=O_~_--I .___--1 __.___1____--1_ ..___ ---..--.l-----I----i-----I------I--c-I

A. Commercia! Species
Aklc [Albizia ade (Blanco)
21.08
7.20
7.36
4.78
2.78
Morr.}
. _... _ . __.. __________ _
Amugis
19.48
6.71
[KoordersiodcndfOll
~innalum (Blanco) Mm.)
4.60
2.99
1.74
--A;;;';~(i)tll" I ;)'m~""'------ -
-'!):':!.'! .I~I"~}.~ !!Jl ______ _
An; 1I11: ' gllh)( l lJ)iv~ p yn l~
-."
-22.(JO - -
7.02 .-
'-'--'"7.41-'- -7.iij--- -- ~-).:i'i --.- ~I~~r;'- --'4~:W'-
--ili.2 () ----;,-.T5---1-------J.41
- - - -j"T,l---
'--;j7,7-- - --TT(~?-' -..-- )
Io:S---- - .Il;,j'---
U1 ),fU11'I)(aty'>' (JIii.'m J
Jbkh J
-'"il i' !i;o(;';T~I-;;;;i;;---- ---
--~
....!.l.!!!.(:D.:!.~t!.l!.~L.!)() 1 1 L ______.._
B iU Wt ~
ITl'fmin:tliil
( G:t ~~ nn.)
18.01'-'
,~ il ri n;1
.........
- - -- - - - - - - - - - ----.---.--- ---.-'"-----
'--'-- ~,-'---" -''' '---i~') 1
--1".2(;--' - -I--:-(;-J
_._.. _.__. __.._-_.. _.__._._- _ ... _-
"---?:'Io' .... . --..'". j:fij~r--- . . . :r-.1'.1 "'. _- ---T7?---
Hox h. cx, FlclIl,j
v .n
J)ungtlU (Iicri! icr;, syl \' ;tl ic ~

Vi(];il)
7.20
----- - '17."10-- ---6.18'
I5fS()KYium:~p.
Ipil l lntsia bijugll <Colcbr)
--~- I ---,~~--6.~!:I
2.38
.. -. - - --.- -.-- ..-----.. ---.----- - ...- ..----.-- .--.--'C2.00
IO.W
3.R6
4.10
1.49
1.25
.---
3.16
27.09
7.t14
25.04
7.74
8.54
6.t11}
3.00
IS.65
22.00
fJ .JO
6 .1:16
-1.82
2.19
1J.75
11.23
O . K t1.e J
Kanl1lgollg ( Diospyrtls
d iscolor Willd.)
Kumagong po nce
(Oiospyros poucci Mcrr.)
KaI1110rl -bay.tni (Oil!cn hl
21. 17
r---~
7.56
II1cgalanthli Men.)
Kawn g lakih an
8,22
45 1
6.69
3A2
'---'-rYJ- -'
3.98
2. 1J
1.90
'- '1 2.22
53"
4.06
1.87
3.94
4.29
3.0 1
1.37
. ....
4.7:\
4.04
2.K2
1. 33
2.1 4
1.19
4.114
_- --
- 5.14,-c-- --'-.'-i- .-
(D y~()); )'I \J III ~'r}'l(JhOlryum
1-::~-c
1 i"
q'L)______
Lithl)(;.lfTIlIS sp.
-~
~52-- '-g{~T'-
-T..iJJCkii ::Udcki":l- hcrnardt:;;-- ... '"-"24~)O--" ~7M-
- -'-TA9~-' ---JI:57- ----~5.0i--
---"-7,Jr' ...--, ---~~Ts-- ~-
-Ts .18
I_. ~=~_I __~,~_ ---0.9)

3.9.1
2.4<)
4.65
(Mcrr.) Rids d.J
-_.-
,1":24
- --_
..4.6 1
2.61
1.60
3.38
1.54
Malakaunon IDil!c nia

luw lliensis (Vidal) Martelli
cx Our. CI Jacks. l .
23.60
).40 -
7.37
SAO
2 A6
14,75
4.63
Malapan au (Diptcrocarpu~
kcrri i Kin ' J
Manggis IKoompassia
17 .26
6.86
6. 12
2.09
1.10
10 .79
4 .29
3.83
1.3 1
1.07
24 .96
8.94
9 .0?
3.79
2.2 7
IS~(~
5.59
5.(IR
2.37
1.4 2
cxccl sa (nccc.) Taub.)

M,mi\.:u ik (Palaquiurtl
18.6 1
6.30
6 .94
2,18
2.21
11.6 3
3.94
4.34
1.J6
1.4 2
IcnuipetiolalUtll Mcrr.J
Pi:mg;t !GOI l1 ua \)hU\,;lli (oli,l

(MaL) A ~~c lll i
20.60
6. I R
7.0 1
3.79
2.24
11 _88
3.86
4.1R
2.37
1.40
17.10
6.36
5.99
2.80
2. J5
10.69
3.98
3.75
1.75
1.34
6 .05
6.)8
7m
5~7i, -
18.27
HS~"~k.~"~(~T""~"~'i~"~<lI~i'-"~'i~"~"-'--+~2""f~'---5~.76'~'-~------- --~2~..7~)~-~----+ -'-iT?? ~- -----:-- --.- 1 .7 ~ -----
Prc~
l.) I Lil !l\lt'iHP U-;,
__=+-.=co+-~~-I --oo,U
l'li;lll
S lI;lnmii
17.67
5.55
.-----(, -.,-:.-- --~~-.uS
:l 21 ... - -,I.().1o-I-~=-I-~A 7
"4-.1-.1--(A. n C.)
l~c h d . 1
HT~"ili~";J~i.~,~"~h~a\~(~T~~~'-"~'i-".~"~i'-'--I-,)o,~",~.,-I-~).'.17.,- ---(1:~-- ---2.R,~ - - ---~ --1.1 .62
rl ...~ li d i s~ i lll; 1 Gtirf. )
TIlIl!! !I >":l": f:' i ;j!l l hu ~
~)- -
(1.:'1.1---
qu;,;tria latu s (/'.k rcl MI".e'll.-!.-.=c.--I-~c;

Y ;II.;;II Lllio; 11101'0;;1
2."\.96
:-:.2:'1-'-
~~~;,(tl hl,,\\'.l
B. l.esserKnowJl
-+---.+--- --
__
Sp,,:, i..:~
----t;.':p;--
--:~.7,1
------:!:o.l-
~JI -
"'"-)-.il~
H!I~"~1i7k~hi~k~;!t~'~(,~),",~.p~,,~,,-,----- 2 4.82
-~-
-'-.,-8
--:I:5"f"-- --uci"----- '-" '-~:;:,--- ~--,i":"im---
T.Ir-- -'-- iJl'
1.27
_~
---7.62 ----:t.~ -~1.7.5o
, -I-7.I7."~.9~"-I-~ -~,-'- "~I (l
~
____....___. ______ -.----i- - - - I-----I--- -
1j;' la~;I'iZl~.iri~~~I;J;ln;li- - ! 6.Hi)- --4~K7-- --X-.iiT- --TiJr-- - -2~.~17~+-~lcO~55 ---,1~O:-;-- ---~-- ---(Blall t"l ) Me lT.t
-'-'rc;i- '- --~-
2.0S-- -~. -
I.SX
1.36
4.)\'1---- ----:r-7(~--- ---f.~ ~
IUlig irlllin (Il lume) I ';l.~ 8.: K
~:;::~:::}I\Sal1;li Gmup
_._- -
--'4!N- -5~~)- --" -_..,,---:--_.--- --J.~- -2:14~ --9."14-' --~~ .---.-.-:...._..._ ... -----I .-:i}---I.34""
_(N c (ll1:n~~.!.~:!!..;:.rU______ _..___ ----------' _ _ _
__.___.__.._____._.___... _ ..~ "
._._ .. _.. __ _
.....
CHAPTEfl6 . Wood
''RiIJingag
l!I~rt'ad()i
(c~u;;-;-;;;mi-;;-;~""'--
iTiiy ". Tii:l" .. ----:fiT---. ---T;hr-'- 122
Vid.j
"-Ki lp(l l as;u'i{NtprlCri~~-'---""-
(;.1 1
'--U;:)(j--'
fl .1 7
1Ill!l3bile Bluml')
1":lIIgillAlhil.ia khh~k 0 .. ) .. -n~ ~.- --~- ----:<;j2- -
"--T7"H-
-'-i4.~
4 .16
2.)0
'--1.-,-,-'
).20
--J:j4
Ikn lh .1
P;llangis IM<lgu(tl i;t

\:<tndt)llei (Blume) Kl'lll:
var. candollei]
S:ar {PcllOphonml
2.23
4.6!
,.-;-;:;r .63
. '~
plcrt}(;<lrpurn (IX:.) K.
II~Yllc]
HI~.~m~"~)"~"~m-(~rS"'~"-"~"'~"-)S~i;t---I-)"O.575- -7:4:T- --16:-f~--' ~~ ---:u-2 J"i.J.09-I-'4.'675-1--~(',.")6;--+-<M--t-",,-j

1.95
5.06
-L~~:;i~~~~~:c~()lrcJ. --17:0.';"- --5.39- ---~5.(;(I- -- ----J.lJ2-- -2."f:f""~ -10.66 --- ).3~ --3."54- ---',--;;;;---+,,,",1
1.))
1.89
"(~B~',~"=,o~R~"d~ik~J~~___~'_'____ I_______
.. C. Planlatio n Species
AC:lcia erassicafTl:l A.
Cunn. ex BClllh
Acacia cincinrl;l(a
20JJR
Banaba /l...agcrslrocmi;l
spec io'~'j (L) PeTs.)
Ipil .ipil, Giani /!...cutacri:"jh:occx~cphala (Lam.) de
wit)
16.72
6.7H
15.25
S.ll
2.M
2.1}1
12.5 5
4.24
1.65
3.32
1.27
1.42
9.53
4JJ4
1.86
2.2H
3.61
--<5~3u6--+---'5<.~,---j----').-;;8"----I-",,--t~""-t-"""__i--""n-+--o,,:__-i-,:;;_1.42
2.27
lOA5
:'1.70
2.3H
3.35
---j534
-"~(4J~
.'i .50
hl"J1~.~M~'~d~iu~u~'''S~"~,,-,g~,,,,--'+----I---Group
._._----
_________ I _ ______----1
I-'A~.C"""::::
nm=,,,=.;,,07Sp::-:,,~;,c,-I---
).20
'''-'130-
-- 9.71
2.00
3.44
3.40
1.56
--------i-------j-- -4----1--~-----~---~---
..- ._-.- .-.-.----- -------j---j--- I - - - j - -- ------1- --1
.. Apilong (DiplcTocarpus -..- 17.6:' .~ -""8.01" - --(;:2"(;--- ~r--- --2.00---1--"c,~.o~S-I--;S...o"grandinorus Blanco) .__
~__
Apilong,i3asilan ---_. - Tlf.i6- 7~- 5 . H7"- ---1.9)~- ! -~- 11.4!- 4.76
(Diplerocarpus curYflchu s
Mio.)
Api!ong Bfa:ld.wi ngcti
16.57
6.76
5.51
10.36
4 .23
1.59
1--'--3.9)-"
1.5 I
1.25
,_
3.67-~---J:2i
J1}4
1.90
).44
1.19
1.00
300
0.99
0.86
(Oiplerocarpus kunsllc ri
King)
Bilaog (Calophy!lurn
inophyllum L )
111 ./6
6.3U
4.SU
8.85
1.59
1.94
HD2,=go"n~g'7(7A':'";C'SO!::'C;'''::':-'""::,,,,,: -1--'''4,,.9wgc-I-"c5'.'84"--- --5.24 - - --~- --;-1.76)"~-"9.')(;-'-1-~3'.6"5'--+-~)'.'''8;--f--"'.6"--11--'1."0,,--1

Fox w.)
""""H:igakliak'(6ip'icrocarP'1s
\"llidus Blume)
Kal llll1pil (Tcnnilmli-;;--'"
mic,ocarpa Deene.)
K:llmon (Dillcnia
philippinensis Rolfe)
.....
4.60
1&.38
5. 16
3.32
(lAO
).79
2.28
I 1.48
3.22
4.00
_._--_.._---2.08
1.54
2.37
1.42
r1KFu~I;7,g~.ib'~b~u?;(~D~)=
,o~,~y~h~
" ,~,-I--~'4'.49,-1---5<.~7''-~----'
S .'7),---t---~'~.6~,----I--;L-7;;6c-+-"C9'.06",-I--'3~.5'7c--I---'3~.5~8c---r---'l.no,,---1--~
1"",'~'~
'cl~,u~"='~D~lu~"~"~)~~----j-"~'-l--,",---j
Kuling-manuk
IAglaia
18.42
5.25
1--~7".""S8;--j--)-'.O"'8-- -~2;C.O;;;6,--1--;,<,<.5"-I-'3'.2;;;8- i - -'4'.7"'4 ---.1----.0;----+--,"'--1
1.92
].29
luzoniensis (Vid.) Merr &
I~olrtl
1....1miolDracOfltornelon
15.68
4.36
4.77
1.83
1.58
9.80
2.72
2.98
1.14
0.99
~c~d~u~Io~(~D~r"~"2'~U)~S~kS'2'~I'~I----I--".,,--I--'07--+---~7T---1----",----I"---+--",---I----",----j----,-,,,--1..1nirau (Tcnllinalia
15.63
5.94
6. 11
1.84
'--rTR-- -9~77
3.71
3.82
1.15
~
~'~o
~p~c'="~'d~;~;=E~'''~'f):c:,------ILokinai
lDacrydjum'~
-~
----"'----j----,~,_--1--,"'--II--oc"'--li
---.,"'3.65
2.09
1.70
9.65
2.10 --
IJeccarij Pari .)
H,-"
":=",,,=g7.(P';'="::";:-h':::""lia::---+"'9;-.;-,),- I--.'<f~ --5.-6)- -- - -,1ffi--
2.28
1.31
1.06
-2.09- 1-''''<.9''6-1-~3;-.'17''-- -- 3.52-- I----'2.n9~'- -I- 'I.,),,--i
~ct.1b i lis
Mere)
Magabuyo (Celtis luzonicil
- -)-. '-6 -- - ----;" .3"2--- - '-.-IJ-'-
Warb.)
"""'N7a~w""'V~;'~"-"~';~'~rP~o-"~"-n~,,---I-C,76-;.)~4--1--,cS.();~6 -1- - S'.5

''---- -'-'~27ii)-- -2:06' --'T5~ --"~."7:--+ --;;,'.4'8- -vilJallli!ii (Merr) BachniJ
Philippine mapic (Ater
15.77
laurinum
liassk. :'IpuJ Boe ven & de
Vriese)
Piling,liilan (CallariuUl
'5.89
4.66
5.41
2.09
2.08
9.93
2.9 1
IU7.0niconl (Blume) A.
Gray ]
NaHonal Structura l Code of the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volum e 1
338
<'-;.6'2--I-;1~
13 1
130
Gl2
C HAP TEr, f; . Wood
T;Ulgik'I Sh ()J'~a
- -!loly~peml:l (1I1:ul("o)
15.&3
MelT.1
Il .
--5J1)"----- - - I"1V '--
6 .2)
~~ -'"i).X(j---
_._-
.-- - ...
Lc.~scr-Klll1wl1 Spct'il'~
'-"-rK~
--_. -" - :i A1-- _.. .. ...... -1:"i2" "'--"

,
- - --
..
--.'--"- A,;;;;lg (DiosPY7c;s--- - - -l5.iiR - 5:1(; ...- ._-_.-.-._- - --f3S---' --_
[ ,R6 - '--''7i:(Tf-3.2.1
JI}Trhocarp 3 Mjq.)
-- _ .. _--- .._,-,-- -- 10 .54 - - -'4.(j-, AIIlll 1l3 1 (O"'phciI
6.34
16.86
6.42
n .I O
6.4 8
16.24
6.60
1.75
2.14
.....~.!!!i!~0I1a Vi~_____.__
Apani! !Maslillia pCJ]landra

Blume ssp. philippincnsis
- - '5',-'2-
- .- - 1.69 ... ..
1.65
- iTi:fiiJ -
2.4 3
1.60
' lUI
~-:i'm---
---2 .02--
1.63
l.51
-,
-'--"Ilj~-
.------- ----.~"- - -
- -"
:l.20--~
20.60
557
-.----s.!5-. '-- --1iJi--'-
1031
4 .67
__
...2.55
:1 .48
'1.13
.--- ; . ~
1..14
---,-_.1.06
__.. _
---.
.-
(WlIlIj!.) M all .) ,
O:lIukanal: IChisochclOJl
cu mingianu.<; (C. DC.)
Hamls ]
Danai-banai IRlidenllile-hem
....Jti.nnal<l (Blanco) Seem)
llitanghol (Cillophyliu m
blancoi PI. & Tr.)
Dalullg (PhylJocladus
hypopilyllus Hook f.)
Oapas-gllpas
ICamptostcmol1
philippincllse (Vid.) Becc.)
Jtangan j WeinmMnia
luzonicnsis Vid.)
Java sala jSloanca javrlllica
(Miq.) Koord & VaL]
Kangko IAplulllamiK.is
polyslachya Wall.) R.N.
Parker)
Malakmalak [Palaquium
phiJippcnsc (PefT.) C13.
----- -
...- ''".. -. .. ,,-.. -j A(j--" -'"
---:'.96 ---
12.Rif-- ~-"J . 22 "---'-"4.3:-1 --- ...-
---~ 1.92
2.92
-2.()4
12 .82
;;3.56
43D
'-'-'
0.90- -
5.36
7.26
1.85
1.44
11.2t!
3.35
4.54
1.1 6
13.92
4.85
4.74
1.67
1.62
g.7()
3.0.3
2.96
1.05
17.8 5'
5.36
6 .30
2.24
2.00
II .J6
3.35--
:1.9:)
1.4(}
' 6.08
5 .7 1
.-:uo-
13 .37
5.7 1
2.05
557
2.14
----. '-'-i~:26'-
1.27
18.04
--TO.05 .-
-'-.0-'-..-0;--
1. 25
--357"" ---YJi:""--- .--- "" "1.71"---
8.36
2.94
1.86
10 .45
3.40
~iS
.__..,..".--- ---Ui--
._-
1.8{)-
I.en
J.59
6.88
lJ.i9
. -- ~ -
0.94
5.70
--- -2.8.3
--I.Qij--
1.02
20.51
.-.-~-
- --T !(;-"
iTx)-
1.52
--
6.44
-'-(J,)-(;'-~
3.57
Rosh.)
Nato jPaJaquiunl
luzon iense (P. Viii.) V.i.~. __
Pagsahinginbulog
(Canarium a~pclUm Bentb)
Panang (paJaquium sp.)
Philippinc chestnu t
[Castanopsis philipincnsis
(llI:lnr:n) Virl j
Sagimsim ISYl.giunl brevislylum (cn. Rob.) Mcn.]
Snntiki fClcidion
spiciOorum (DUIli. E)
16 .72
5.45
6.66
16 .SR
14.44
5 .48
14.02
4.98
16.87
"-'15~7T" -
._.-
-----;us--
1.64
1.86
10.36
2.59
2m
9 .03
4.90
2.34
1.75
8.76
2.0)
10 .54
2.21
_.-_.-_.
~--
1.16
3.52
[.02
._---. --TT6
1.62
1.25
3.06
1.46
1.09
5.63
4.03
1.34
JA8
- .....--.
3.' 8
9.83
4 .16
3.42
"-:fT'!-
I.:m
252
- --_.
_.- ---"'-- 1.91;._---2.66
2.80
1.27
_ _. ..
MClr. )
Syzgium sp.
12 .05
4 .21
Tall -ag (KJeinhovia hosp;",
1534
4A 8
18.81
5.09
5.95"'
1.89
1.78
7.S3
2.63
2.47
l.91
- 919-
2.80
4.5 1
2 .63
1 1.76
3.'8
1.18
-_..3.12
_-- - - - 1.55---
1.12
'- 1:20
L)
Ui!lian (Lilhocarpus
celebicu$ (Miq .) Rehd. )
Usuang-saha (Endiandra
laK.iOora MelT.)
TemSlIocmia sp.
15.49
5.39
4.99
2.8 1
1.80
9.68
3.37
3. 12
19.51
5 .32
6.9-1
2.65
2 .1 2
12.20
3 .33
4 .34
C Plantation Specics
AC;"lcia mangiulll Wi!ld.
15.51
Nancka (Artocarpus
hctcrophyllu s Larnk.)
River red gum (Eucalyptus
camalduJcnsis Dchnh.)
Teak (Tee-lOna grandis U .)
20.55
...
.- ~ -
16.2 2
18.94
5.60
7.36
2A9
5.26
7.1H
2.04
--z:]4-
- - --
1 .49
-- - --
1.9 ' --~

1.92
1.51
4.99
4.93
2.8 1
2.01
6.14
5.48
1.63
1.4 1
IV . Moderately Low
Group
A. Commercial Species
_ .. 3.50
12.85
10 .14
3.29
-1 .',0
3.84
3.08
9.57- -3.83
3.43
2.82
1.64
1.76
1.1 2
1.66
J.J3
--l.~~-
4.60
3.1 2
II JN
1.22
1.27
1.20
---2:'18
0.94
1.76
1.26
1.02
0.88
2.62
1.17
---- ._ - -- - ----- ----- - --- --_.
S trcng~ 1
Almon (Shorea almon

Foxw.)
Anubing (Artocarpus
ovatU$ Blanco)
15.3 2
19 .46
4.04
5.34
4.19
1.87
12 .17
2.53
Association of Structu ral Engineers of tile Philippines
3.34
CHAPTEri G . Wood
'Ti~~'ik;;i;og{T;!;~-;;~;~:;;'~;~~
Mnr.)
G 13
'J:fu' --. '1."i6
1"5Uii!!C~;;;;-;Tt;;\Jlir.~lI{~;;;---- -'~'T2~lJ'-- --.~.5T-~-
----4,("j--_U- ----
1.21
'-'13X--' -7.~'- ---2:10- -----27JO--'f----~O~.7~5--+-cO~g~6~1

.... ..
~\;;;illd. Forma'
-~
Manggasinorong-!akihan
14.44
(Shore,] vircsccns Pari's)

MayJpis !Shorca paloslipis
(Blanco) Men.)
14.60
~--:--
- - . ---
---:--.
1.45
J.29
5.81
-;;1'~,g~"~:ri~o~g,;''':C,;(O('~':!~'a"o~,~y;;",~o"--I-"I5.~
--4:76'
(j,05
2.32
9.86
2.06
2.97
3.78
sUIlL,t'ranUI11 (Jack) Blume
ssp. sum,1IranuJ\l Robs.),

Tuai (Bischofia j,lVanica
Blume)
Shorea sp.
4. J 4-- 1--"'.67,,---1--4""."10"- 1-';;.8"'O"'-""2;C2;-+-';2'.5c;;,--I-~2;;.9",--1--2".c56,---1-"C".,"3;-1
14.75
.
13.92 -
---:fsr'- -------4':-2'(;----
-"- ---n};'l
1,15
oB-.i,~=s;;sc='~.Kv,~>o~w~"::cS~p'='''.ie='~.--1----- .-....--~ 1-----+--Anongo (Turpinia

ovalifolia Elm.)
1l.70
3.68
'-"-'~f78-~
Balakat-guhHI [Sapiurn
iUl.Onicunl (Vid.) Mcrr.J
1.30
l.38
1.55
,:CO-.
11~32~ -'3~8j
I3aJal;(i [J-lornalanlhus
populncus (GeiseL) Pax
1.'14
1.65
------:fO]
lUO
2,66
0,65
. 0.72
2.36
O.<.X}
0.8l
0.86
0.97
1.03
0.82
------ _...__._.. ~.-.--- ~-----+-.--I

7.31
1.31
2.30
7.07
2.39
~~~"~.~N~P"~"~"C~"~'~J~~~~+-.,,",_+_co~_
Eakle (Ficus ba!clc MCfT.)
J 3,84
~----1~-~,,-+-c17'"2c- -8~65'"
3,25-- --~.~.-
---cl.c44c----j--I'.O'"g;-
',.;--+---,;,.7.02".-+~'''O.'37c-i~~2''.9cc4c--j-~~~~I-~I~95--I~
16.59
0.94
Himbabao {Brou$$onctia
Jumnica (Blanco) Bur. var.
-- Q ] 5
0.87
0.83
1.20
0.86
12.83
404
4.45
2.24
2.00
8.02
2.53
2.78
! .40
1.25
14.49
3.56
4.26
LSI
J.32
9.06
2.23
2.66
0.95
083
luwnicaj
Katong-malsin
(Chisochclon pcntandrus
(Blanco) Mcrr.]
T
it o''ni'-''----I-,,,,,.''',,- -3~
philippincilsis (Braid.)
Gordonia sp.)
-;;C~
.. 7-p~,,~,,~,"':-,;~,~,,~S~p~ccC';~,,~'---t----I~.-..-
-----.--...- . -----1--
I-;B~'~g~"=,~(~E~'K=':>"):"~,,~,,;;,---1-'II'.7~'-I-~4~("}j':--
--'-4 .!SO --- ----"T.2"3"-
Hcc"7,, '"I"A'+""'' ' c-
--4-Ki---I;--'1.'63~--I "CC5".,C"-1~'8'.8"2'1--.;2'.3"8-1- -~2."88oc--i---,,c.O'2'--~ -O-.'-7~
dcglupt3 Blume)
Durian (Durio zibcthinus--
I 3.881--'''".''90;;--I--c5,.;c'5'-+--;':>8~()---
MelT.)
Para-rubber (lkvca
brasiliensis (HBK) Mucll
~;~;~l {Sandoricum
LJ3
- - ~'-'-.8-4--
. 3.9 I
--3-J-3--- ~~2'.~'9~-I-":.6"7c-j~:(').9"6c-+~2-;4C'5-1--c;2-;.O"'8---I
~2-.9-1--- --3.62---- --~'-.44~ ~T
-7.40---
LCk",ocCC"",jj"=p",,(B,,",,-',,"',,.~f.)"',"n"OIT,,.,-J_ ' -_ _.______.L_ _ _ _-'-_ _ _ _--'_ _ _.L____
th
J.37
1.05
~-1.-8f-- --'--2-.2-6- ~~O-.9-0 -~ -0-.8-2-- I'

_. ___ ._ _ _ ._. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'-~
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Vo}urne 1
674
CHAI'TEH 6 . Wood
'~V
".'I~.o~"~'''
S~".~
"~
,.,,,tI~,7G''m~"~,,'--'----'----'------
, - - - --..,---- r - --- - - - - -.-~.--- -----.-.---.. ~-
~A-.7C~o~,,~
"'~,,~,~
cic:.~J.'~r~'c:'~i"'~'--11- --+---.+-----If------+-~-
------..-- -----..-. ----.--.- ----.----...
Kalll!lI:\'~ ('1'0011<1 t'alanl:1S --1--;9~.(~">C:

-if-~3'.'""")- t---Yi):1- - ---(j~ (iR-~'-- --6.{~1-- --2"::11-" - -'''--T.ifi.")--' '--'--D~S:i'-- . -.
Men . & Rolfe)
~ Iun lpang {S(crc u~'- '-'7j2 ~~ '-'--:l'3if-- --- TIi!I----u:9i--- ------,l.Kf
'----}j:j ..... "-'---'f"i:!-'~-- .-.--....(l.(;~\ - -.- - .
hR~'-"-",c:g'[..Ec:,y~,J,,,7;,-,,, - --
+-----"s::u-
.83
2.22
- (f7T----- - -(Ug- _.
3.2r-- --Tl:s -"-'jjY'--" '-' "'---"-(J:;J:<;---
-()5S- -(),~7---
. --i)Ag~
subumurans (Hassk) MClT.]

Tra~mg (Shore:l uvma f)ycr-- ~-I1:5(;
ex Brandis)
TalulO IPlcrocymbium
f--7';~"~'~'''~d=",,''~'(~B~'~ar="~o~)":M~'::"~['-j----j----+------I- ___ 0_,_ .. _~~ _________ ._....___ .___ ..______....... , .___ .. __ .. _. ______,___..._
n. Lesser-Known Species
I-:A~n-'~b~;o-lI~g~r~r-"-n-"-on--,-,-,,7,,..,;-,+-5~.75,7,--l---;2~.3;;6C:-+-'2-:;.47.6--II--",.0"'-- - I j n - -,-,-,-- '---T'{-, -
H~"~"c'~~"'-"n7g7"--;('CM""'j;-,---.- --"-13-i-- --,-.,-(;- ----')ii-
---1.-5' -
--I.~----- ---"1":-72-- -"6.45 "-- 2~ '----D2--- -----0-.9-' - --- --TOs-
azedarltch L)
-~ -~-
6 .07
2. 15
Oinuang (Oclomclcs
9 .09
3.66
~!'_,
WaiL)
3.11
0.74
0.88
2.29
5.68
1.94
0.47
sumal(ana MiQ.)
n .5S
D'.a IAlsl()llia scholaris
. 64
J.9 1
It Dr. var. scholarisis)
10.14
).42
KaitanlL {Zanthoxylum
11.37
4.36
05.';
O.f1O
2.90
1.20
-:-
H I!
U4
0 .86
6.33
2.1'1
~AO
<l.U,
0 .96
1.29
7.10
(1..)
limonclla (OCI11151.) Alston )
Tallgisanr,-bay.\wak (Ficus+--c;c;c,+-",.--j-------4.32
J .56
varicgma Illume Vilr.
varicsa~ .. _ ._ __._ ._____
C. p J:mtation Species
-"--0:&1'-
-~ ----rC>l7-
--
034~ ~ i
--~~-
-i}'54'-j
-----o:c;,-- -"()JjJi
--{}:7!i-- -----------" (j!ir - ----:--- ._--O::W---2.70
0-:49-1I
+---+---+------ ___..__.. .._ .______. _. ________ .._____________ ,,[i
Alnussp.
9.66
2.53
2.81
1.78--I-~I--,,,'.04"-j--7'175';;---j--. - . T:;~1.11
hB~';:IS~""(=,~
Oc "o:c':n;:c'
:- - - ---1-o,'.,"'''-+---c;2.'no;---j---,-,.'6,.,-'----1----;".1"'0- --1---+-;c5'.4'8 _. - -----""."1- +- -'2'.2"'--1---;'''1.8"'1. -..---
~~"'' :>:"'' '",m,,,;d,,',,',,(\,:C,,'

'
,,'':)':-"U':'(c:>.J'c:--j_~,.,.---+_;-,-".+___
Bayabas (Psidiulll guajava
L.)
Ilans ilnng ICananga
odorata (Lmll.) Hook f. &
12.55
2.68
1.13"'1
----1
_ --+_. ___-j_ __+---,=-!__"",-j---- - - -......_._______._

1.68
7.84
- ---1---+--1------------1-- ---/--
-Illoms.}
Gubas (Endm:pemlUnl
pe ll ll UHIl Mr:rT I
KaalO<Ul bangkal
(Anlhocepha)us chincnsis
(Llimk .) Rich. ex . Walr)
9 .66
2.96
3.74
2.36
1.02
6.().1
1.1:15
2..14
1.48
0 .64
J 1.08
2.77
:UO
1.40
1.J3
6 .93
1.7.1
2.(X)
0 .88
0 .83
01>3 -
2.67--
I-+.K","po"i,"[SC"'-''':;b'',''"'','"'''',,'',d''',,L..--1I ---;.'.2,,,--I-'''1.'-''35~-I--TW- ---o.-:~
1-T(1
~"~)rG,,3'~"~"~'[~C7c---+---;,"-+---c;,"-I----77
__-+--~",,-~-,,"oo"Lumbang IAlcuri(cs
6.39
2.47
1.63
0.71
0.88
'-4.00
Illoluccana (L.) Willd.j
Malapapaya IPolyscias
nodosa (Blullle) Seem]
-.-I-="'--+-"";-__j----;-=----0.9" 10.92
4.04
5.25
------0:&4-- - -W- - - -0.46- --- ----0.39'~5--'-
---- i.oz- - --.~-----. {).55
_J
.--,'.",,-I-"'7=-II-cc;,-,;---I- -I- -;c.,-.,--+--;c=1

6.82
2.53
~.28
0.61
0.73
I--'iM
7o",",,",::,"n":;a""= ==--I-,,,O=.i..;;- --3-.8-'- - -4
-.-2(;-'- --".'II..---+-"~.2",--lI---;6-.""'2-+---c;2.--;42,,-+--'2;-.6"6~-I--"0".'''0--1-'0''.'''''--''
[Par8serianmcs ralcataria
(L.) Nielse n]
~s':p"::'":;;"ish'-"::,"id":ar"(rCc::,d:;:,:c";::,---j!--";0".9"4.---1--;-".6"'- -!--'4'.2"2--+---"'.3"'- -!--"'.2"0-- -"(rS4-- --""'2'.276 -+--"'2'.64"--+-'0"80'2,-----1 '0'.,"54

oooTlua
L.)c;I;)-(Spa!hodca
c:::==-j-,.-;;;c-+~=-I-......,,,,--+----;;--;
Tulip, Afri
6.OG
1.63
2.3.1
o.8T~- -----;;M--I-c;c;;;-+-;-=-I-.....,c:;-;~
0.98
3.79
1m
1.46
- ---0.53--'--""-'0-:6]
C311lpanutata I3cau v.)
'--""=,-""'-=:.L.._J.
_ _-'-_--'_ _ _ L ___ ______.__-'--_ _,_
______ ._. __ .. __ ._ _ _ _ _ .. <--.__.
Ass,ociation of Structural Engineers of ([le rOlJilippine s
NSCP C101-10
Chapter 7
MASONRY
VOLUME I
SIXTH EDITION

Suite 713. Future Point Plaza Condominium I
112 Panal' Ave nu e. Quezon City. Philippines 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483
Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: ascponlincUi)glnai l.colll
WeiJsilc: htlp:llwww.ascponline.org
H1
CHAP1T.I~
7 . MW;Oilfy
"l 1
Table of Contents
CHAI'TER 7 - MASONRY ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
SECTION 7() 1 - GENERA L ......................................................................... ..
d .... ....................... " " " " ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' .....................
... 4
. .. 4
70 1.1 Scope.
. .................................... .. .. .. .
701. 2 Design Me thod s ...................................... .................. ....... ..
701.3 Defi niti ons ........................................................... ..
701.4 No tatio ns ..... ............................................... ...... .
.. ...... 4
.)
SECTION 702 - MATERIAL STANDARDS ............................................. ~ ........................................................................... 7
.. 7
702. 1 Quality........
. .......................................... .. .. ..
702.2 Standards of Quality.................
. ................ ..
..... 7
SECTION 703 - MORTAR AND GROUT ............................................................................................................... " .......... M

703. 1 General .. .
703.2 Materi als .. .
703.3 Monar .. ..
703.4 Gro ut ................... ..
703.5 Additives and Admixlllres .................... .............. .. .
................ 9
.. ...... 9
.. ..... 9
...... .. 9
. ......... 9
SECTION 704 - CONSTRUC'nON ..................................................................... ,.................................................................. 9

704.1
704.2
704.3
704.4
704 .5
.... 10
.10
...... 10
10
. .. 10
Gener,,1
M ateria ls: Handling, Storage and Preparation
Placing Masonry Units ..
Reinforcement Placing
................. ..
Grou ted Masonry ................................... ..
SECTION 705 - QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................................... 12

12
.12
12
.. ......... 14
.. 14
14
705. 1 General ................... ..... .

.. .............................. ..
705 .2 Scope ......
705.3 Co mpl ia nce wit hf'm .. .. ....................................................... .
705.4 MOt1ar Test ing
............... .
705.5 Grou t Testin g ........ ........................ ... .. .. ............ .
705.6 Recycl t1 Aggrega tes ....... .................. .. .
SECTION 706 - GENEHAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 14

706.1 General
. ................... ................ .............. .................... ..............
.. ................
..... .. ......... .. .... 14
706.2 Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design Requirements for Unreinforccd and Reinforced Maso nry ... ......... ......... 17
706.3 Altemative Strength Design (ASD) and Strength Des ign Reqn irements for Reinforced Masonry ...................... .......... 19
SECTION 707 - ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) OF MASONRY ..................................................................... 21
..... 21
..22
....... 26
707.1 General ............ ................... ..

707.2 Des ign of Reinforced Masonry .............. ............................... .. .
707.3 Design of Unrei n forced Masonry .. .
SECTION 708 - STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY .................................................................................................... 27

..... 27
. ................ ................................... 29
708. 1Genem l ....

708.2 Re inl()rced Maso nry ............................. .
SECTION 709 - SEISMIC DESIGN ...................................................... ................................................................................ 37

..... 38
.. 38
." 38
.. 38
. ... 38
709.1 Scope ..
709.2 Gene ral ............. ..
709.3 Seismi c PerforJ1lance Category A.
.. ...... ...... ... .
709.4 Seismic Performance Category B .... .............. .
709.5 Seismic Performance Category C ..
th
72
CHIII' TU1 7 Masun,y
709.6 Se ismic Performance Ca legory D ..

709.7 Seis mi c Performance Category E ..
.. .... 39
. ........ 40
SECTION 710 - EMPIRICAL DESIGN Of MASONRY ................................................................................................... 40

710. 1 Ileight..
.... .............
........ ........
710.2 Latera l Stability........ ................... .... ...
71003 Co mpressive Stresses..
.. ... ".. .............
7 J 0.5 Minimum Thickness ..................... .. .. ..... ............ .. .. ...............................
710.6 Bond.. .......... ...................... ............ ......... ...
.. .............. ........
710.7 AnChorage ...............................
...............
.............. ....
7 J 0 .8 Unburned Clay Masonry
.\.;
710.9 Stone Masonry.....................
................... . ................ ......... ...... ..
.. .................. . .40
.. ............... ..... .40
. ...... .40
........................ 4 J
.. ............ .41
.. .... 42
.............. .42
.. ...... .42
SECTION 711 .. GLASS MASONRy ................................................................................................................................... .. 43

71 1. 1 Genem l ...................................... .
7 11 .2 Mortar Joints ....................... .
7 11 .3 Lateral Support ................. .
7 J 1.4 Reinforce ment ............... .
7 11. 5 Size of Panels .... .
711 .6 Expansion l oints .................. .
711 .7 Rellse of Units ............................... ........................ .
. ........... ..... . 43
.. .................... 43
.. .... .......... ....... 43
..43
. .. 43
..43
...... 44
SECTION 712 - MASONRY FIREPLACES .................................................................................. ..................................... 44

7 12.1 Definition ................................. ........... ....... ........ ..
7 12.2 Footings and Foundations..
. ........ ........ .
7 12.3 Seismic Reinforcing.. ......... ...... .
712.4 Seis mi c Anchorage.
.. ................. .
712.5 Firebox Walls .................. .
712.6 Firebox Dimensions
712.7 Lint el and Throal. .... ............. .
712.8 Smoke C hamber Wall s ................................................................................ ..
7 12.9 Hearth and Hearth Exten sio n
7 12. 10 Hearth EXlcnsion Djmcnsions........
....................
. ... ................... .
7 12. 11 Fireplace Cleara nce..... ........ ..... ..................
.. .......................................... .
7 12.12 Fireplace Fireblocking ... ...... ...... . ...................
. ................... .
7 12. 13 Exterior Ai!'... ... .......................
.. ................................ .
......... ... .. ..... ... ....... .......... ............ .44

................... .4,1
.. ............. 4,;
.. ............... .. 45
........... 4S
............ ......... 4 5
.. ....... 4 ~i
.. .................. 45
......................... .45
.. ............ ... ................ ... .46
.. ................ .46
.. ..................... .46
................... ,,46
SECTION 713 .. MASONRY CHIMNEyS ............................................................................................................................ 47

. .................... ........ ..................... ...................... 47
713.1 Defini tion ......................................... ................. ........................... ..
. ....................... .... ... .................................... 47
713. 2 Footings and Foundations ................ ...... .. .................................. .. ..
713.3 Seismic Reinforcing ........................... .......... ..... ................. ..
.. ......... ... ... ........ ............ ......... ....... .41
. ............. .41,
713.4 Seismi c Anchorage ......................... ............ " ........... ..
.......... .48
713 .5 Corbeling. ..................................... ......
......... ...... .
713.6 Changes in Dimension
..4 1:
..................
............... . ...4 ;:
713.7 Offsets..
.............. ...... .
713.8 Additional Load .............. .
. .......... .4 0
7 13 .9 Temlinati on........ .................... ... .. .
............................ ................. .
. .. ..48
7 13. 10 Wa lllllickness ................
..............
........................ .............
.. ............... .48
7 13. 11 Hue Li ning (Matelial ).................
...................... ..............
.. ......................... ........... .48
7 13. 12 Clay Flue Lining (lnslall ation) .......
................. .. ................................. .. .................................. 50
7 13 .13 Addi ti onal Requi rements ... .
............... ..... ........... . ........................... ....................
.. .. ..... .... 50
713. 14 Multipl e Flues.................... ..... ... .. .................
.. .................................. 50
713.15 Flue Arca (Appliance)...................
........ .... .................
................
....... ..... ..
. ...................... 50
713.16 Flue Area (Masonry Fireplace) .......... ..........................................................
.. ... .. .......................... 51
713.17 Inl et .................... .................... ....................... .. .............................. ................... ................ .. ...... ................................. .
713.1 8 Masonry Chimney Cleanout Openings .................................... .
Association of S iru ciural Engineers of the Philippines
CHI\ PlU ~
7 13. 19 C himney Clearances .. .
7 J3.20 Chi miley FircbJocking ..
National Struclural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
7.
M()~~{Jnry
1 <l
. ..... 51
...... 52
AREA, NET is the gross cross-sectional arc.! minus (he

area o f" ungroulcd <.:orcs, notches, cel ls and wlbeddcd areas.
Net area is th e actual su rface area of cross sec tion of

m<lsorllY
AJ~liA, TRANSFORMED is the equivalent area of one
malerial 10 a second based Oil the nuio of modulus of
elasticit y of the first material to the second.
701.1 Scope
The materials, design, const ruct ion aild quality assur<lIlcc of
masonry shall be in accordance with Ihi s chapler.
BOND, ADHESION is the adhesion between masonry

and mOl1ar or grout.
units
701.2 Design Methods
Masonry shall co mply with the provisions of one of the

following design methods in this chapter as wei! as the
BOND, REINFORCING is the adhesion between steel

reinforcement and mOl1ar or grout.
requirements of Sections 701 through 705.

BONO BEAM is a horizontal grouted ele ment within
masonry in which reinforcemcnt is cmbedded.
701.2.1 Allowable Stress Design

Masonry {ksigncd by allowable stress design method shall
comply with the provisions of Secti ons 706 and 707.
CELL is a void space having a gross

greater than 970 111m 2.
701.2.2 Strength Design
CLEANOUT is an opening to the bott om of a grout space

of sufficicnt size and spaci ng (0 allow the removal of
debris.
M<lsonry designed by the strength design method sha ll
comply with the provisions of Sections 706 and 708.
c ross~scc[i() nal
area
COLLAR JOINT is the mortared or grouted space

between wythes of masonry.
701.2.3 EmpiricaJDesign
Masonry designed by the empiric a l design method shall
comply with the provisions of Sections 706.1 and 710.
COLUMN, REINFORCED, is a vertical structural

which both the reinforcement and masonry resist
compression.
member in
701.2.4 Glass Masonr.\"
Glass masonry shall co mpl y with the provisions of Secti on

711.
701.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows:
COLUMN, UNREIN FORCED, is a vertical structural

member whose horizontal dimension measured at right
angles to the thickn ess does not exceed three times the
thickness.
uni t which is in contacl with mortal' or the surface of
DIMENSIONS, ACTUAL arc the I11ca:-;urcd di mensions of

a designated ilem. The aelu.11 dimension shall not vary
fro m the specified dimension by more than the amount
.l!lowed in the appropriate standard o f quality in Scction
another masonry ullit in the plane: oflh cjoint.
702.
EFFECTIVE AREA OF REINFORCEMENT is the

cross-sectional area of rcinforccmcIH muhiplicd by th e
DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL of masonry unirs arc equal to

its specified dimcn:-;iolls plus the thickness of the joint with
whi ch the unit is laid.
AREA, BEDDED is the <Irea o f the
S llrl ~U.; C
of
11
masonry
cosine of the angle between the reinforcement and the
direction for which effective area is to be determined.

AREA, GROSS is the lotal cross-sectional area of a
specified section.
DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED are the dimensions speci fi ed

for the manufacture or collstmction of masonry, masonry
units, joints or any other compo nent of a structure.
CHAfY1TH l . Masonry
l,~)
GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the

total grout pour.
WALL, BONDED is a masonry wall in which two or more

wythes arc bonded to act as a structural uni!.
GROU'J' POUR is the IOtal height of masonry wall to be

grouted prior 10 the erection of additional masonry. A grout
pour will consist of one or more grout lifts.
WALL, CAVITY is a wall containing continuous air space

with a minimum width of 50 mm and a maximum width of
100 mm between wythes which arc tied with metal tics.
GROUTED HOLLOW-UNIT MASONRY is that form

of grouted masonry construction in which certain
designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with
grout.
WALL TIE is a mechanical metal fastener which connects

wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials.
GROUTED MULTl-WYTHE MASONRY is that form

of grouted masonry construction in which the space
between the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with
grout.
JOINT, BED is the joint with or without mortar that is
horizontal at the time the masonry units m'e placed.
WEB is an imerior solid portion of a hollow-masonry unit

as placed in masonry.
WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit
in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe.
701.4 Notations
JOINT, HEAD is the joint with or without mortar having a

vertical transverse plane.
MASONRY UNIT is brick, tile, stone, glass block or
concrete block conforming to the requirements specified in
Section 702.
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose
net crossHsectional areas (solid area) in any plane parallel to
the surface containing cores, cells or deep frogs is Jess than
75 percent of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the
same plane.
SOLID-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose net
crossHsectional area in any plane parallel to the surface
containing the cores or cells is at least 75 percent of the
gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
AI'
111m2
A,
A,.
A',
MORTARLESS MASONRY SYSTEM is a method of

masonry wall construction that eliminates the use of mortar.
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar (if

present) with or without grout used as a test specimen for
determining properties of the masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY IS that form of masonry

constl1lction in which reinforcement acting in conjunction
with the masonry is used to resist forces.
SHELL is the outer POI1ioil of a hollow masonry unit as
cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, mm 2

effective area of masonry, mm 2
gross area of wall, 111m2
total area of special horizontal reinforcement
through wall frame joint, mn/
;::: net area of masonry section bounded by wall
thickness and length of section in direction of
shear force considered, rnm 2
;::: area of tension (pullout) cone of embedded
anchor bolt projected onto surface of masonry,
::::
:::
::::
::::
b,.
placed in masonry.
b'
:;;: effective cross-sectional area of reinforcement in

column or flexural member, mm?
:::: effective area of reinforcement,
::: total cross-sectional area of rectangular tic
2
reinforcement for confined core, mm
:::: area of reinforcement required for shear
reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal
reinforcement, 111m2
:::: effective cross-sectionaJ area of compression
2
reinforcement in flexural member, mm
:::: depth of equivalent rectangular stress block, mm
:::: nominal shear strength of anchor bolt, kN
~ allowable tensile force on anchor bolt, kN
:;;: nominal tensile strength of mlcilar bolt, kN
:::: allowable shear force on anchor boll,kN
:::: effective width of rectangular member or width
of flange for T and I sections, mm
:::: factored shear force supported by anchor bolt,
kN
:::: computed tensile force on anchor bolt, kN
:::: factored tensile force supported by anchor
bolt, kN
:::: computed shear force on anchor bolt,
kN
:;;: width of web in T or I section, rnm
National Structural Code of the Philippi,nes 6'" Edition Volume 1
::-: nominal shear strength coefficient as obtained

from Table 70R-2
c
f)
:::: distance from neutral axis (0 extreme fiber, mill

:;;; dead loads, or related internal moments and
forces
:;;; distance from compression face of flexural
member to centroid of longitudinal tensile
reinforcement, mm
:;;; diameter of reinforcing bar, mm

:::: diameter of largest beam longitudinal reinforcing
bar passing through, or anchored in a joint, mm
== diameter of largest pier longitudinal reinforcing
bar passing through a joint, mill
E
:;;; load effects of c,u1hquakc, or related internal

moments and forces
::::
:::::
:;;;
::::
F,.
modulus of elasticity of masonry, MPa

eccentricity of Puf, mill
maximum u!->able compressive strain of masonry
loads due (0 weight and pressure of fluids or
related moments and forces
:= allowable average axial compressive stress in
columns for centroicially applieci axial load
only, MPa
:::: allowable llexuraJ compressive stress in
members subjected to bending load only, MPa
== allowable bearing stress in masonry, MPa
:::: allowable stress in reinforcement, MPa
:::: allowable compressive stress in column
reinforcement, MPa
== allowable Ocxural tensile stress in masonry,
MPa
;: : : allowable shear stress in masonry, MPa
;;
:::; computed axial compressive stress due to design
j"
J,
J,
J,.
J,
f./I
G
II
axial load, MPa

:::; computed flexural stress in extreme fiber due to
design bending loads only, MPa
;: : : computed comI)ressive stress due to dead load
only, MPa
:::; modulus of rupture, MPa
= computed stress in reinforcement due to design
loads, MPa
== computed shear stress due to design load, MPa
:::: tensile yield stress of reinforcement, MPa
:::; tensile yield stress of horizontal reinforcement,
MPa
;: : : specified compressive strength of grout at age of
28 days, MPa
== specified cornprcssive strength of masonry at
age of 28 days, MPa
;: : : shear modulus of masonry, MPa
:::: loads due 10 weight and pressure of soil, waler
in soil or ,"Ciated internal moments and forces
:::: height of wall between points of support, mm
:::: beam depth, mm
M,
:::: cross-section a! dimension of grouted Core

measured center to center o/" confining
reinforcement, mnl
:::: pier depth in plane of wall frame, mill
== effcctive height of wall or column, mm
::: moment o/" inertia about neutral axis o/" crosssectional area, mm~
== effective moment of inertia, mm'1
:::: gross, cracked momcnt of incl:tia of \'_ ~lll Cross
section, Jllm~
== ratio or distance between centroid of flexural
compressive forces and centroid of tensile forces
of depth, d
:::: reinforcemcnt cover or clear spacing, whichever
is less, mm
:::: ratio of depth of compressive stress in f1exura!
member to depth, d
;: : : live loads, or related internal moments and
forces
== length of wall, mill
== length of wall or segment, 111m
::: cmbcdment depth of anchor bolt, mm
:::: anchor bolt edgc distance, the least distance
measured from edge of masonry to surface of
anchor bolt, nUll
= required development length of reinforcement,
mm
== design moment, kN-m
:::; maximum moment in member at stage
deflection is computed, kN-m
;: : : moment capacity of compression reinforcement
in Oexural member about centroid of tensile
force, kN--m
= nominal
M"
M,
M.ICf
M"
II
P"
cracking moment strength in masonry,

kN-m
= moment of compressi ve force in masonry about
centroid of tensile force in reinforcement, kN-m
= nominal moment strength, kN-m
= moment of tensile force in reinforcement about
ccntroid of compressive force in masonry, kN-111
== service moment at midheight of p~nel, including
P!1 effects, kN-m
;::: factored moment, kN-m
:::: modular ratio
~ E/E
.'
m
;: : : design axial load, kN
:::: allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced
masonry columns, kN
1\
PI
II
P"
nominal balanced design axial strength, kN

load frol11 tributary floor or roof area, kN
nominal axial strength in masonry, kN
nominal axial load strength in masonry without
nexure, kN
~ factored axial load, kN
:::; factored load from tributary floor or roof loads,
kN
;: : :
:::;
=
:::
CHAP rUi
:::; factored weight of wall tributary (0 section

under cOllSidcralioll, kN
::;: weight or wall tribulary 10 section under
consideration, kN
:::; radius of gyration (based on specified unit
dimensions or Tables 7 I I - 1,7 I I -2 and 711-:1),
mill
;::; ratio of area of reinforcing bars cut oil to tol<1l
area of reinforcing bars at the section.
::::: s-C2tion !~loduILlS, mm 3
:.:: spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in direction
parallel to that of main reinforcemcnt, 111m
::;: effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage and
diffcrelHial settlement
::;: effective thickness of wythe, wall or column,
s
s
T
Ii
v
v"
V,
V"
W
Ll"
p"
JI'm
[j
= required strength (0 resist factored loads, or

related intcrnalmoments and forccs_
::;: bond stress pCI' ullit of surface arca of
reinforcing bar, MPa
:::: IOtal design shear force, kN
:;:: 10lal horizontal joint shear, kN
::;: nominal shear strength of masonry, kN
:::: nominal shear strength, kN
:;:: nominal shear strength of shear reinforcement,
kN
::;: required shear strength in masonry, kN
;:;:: wind load, or related internal momcnts in forces
::;: factored distributed lateral load
:::: horizontal deneetion at mid height under
factored load, mill
= deflection due to factored loads, mill
:::: ratio of area of flexural tensile reinforcement, A"
to area bd
~ reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions
::;: ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on plane
perpendicular to plane of AIII \.
:::: sum of perimeters of all longilUdinaJ
reinforcement, mm
:;: square
:;::
root of spccified strength of masonry at
the age of 28 days, MPa

strcngth-reduction facLor
SECTION 702
MA'fitful, STANDARDS
1 "/
Reclaimed or previously used masonry units shall mcct the

applicable requiremcnts as for new masonry units of the
same material for their intended usc.
702.2 Standards of Quality
The standards listed below labeled a "UBC Standard" arc
also listed in Chapter 35, Part II of UBC, and arc part of
this code. The other standards listed below arc recognized
standards. See Sections 3503 and 3504 of UBC.
1.
Aggregates
ASTM C 144, Aggregates for Masonry Mortar
1.1
1.2 ASTM C404. Aggregates for Grout
2.
CcnH.~Jlt
2.!
ASTM C9! -93, Cement, Masonry. (Plastic

cement conforming to the requirements of UBC
Standard 25-1 may be llsed in lieu of masonry
cement when it also conforms to ASTM C 9193).
2.2 ASTM C I SO, Portland Cement

2.3 ASTM C270. MOl1ar Cement
3.
Lime
3.1
ASTM C5-79,
Purposes
Quicklime
for
Structural
3.2 ASTM C207-91, Hydrated Lime for Masonry

Purposes. When Types Nand NA hydrated
lime arc lIsed in masonry mortar, they shall
comply with the provisions of UBC Standard
ASTM C270-95. Section 21.1506.7, excluding
the plasticity requirement.
4.
Masonry Units of Clay ot' Shale

4.1
ASTM C34. Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall

Tile
4.2 ASTM C56, Structural Clay Nonload-bcaring

Tile
4.3 ASTM C62-87, Building Brick (solid units)
4.4
ASTM C126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay

Facing Tile. Facing Brick and Solid Masonry
Units. Load-bearing glazed brick shall conform
to the weathering and stl1lctural requirements of
ASTM C73-85, Section 21.106, Facing Brick
702,1 Quality
Materials used in masonry shall conform to the

requirements stated herein. If no requirements arc specified
in this section for a material, quality shall be based on
fvla~~(){ily
generally accepted good practice, subject to thc approval of"

the building official.
mill
(j
j'
4.5 ASTM C216-86, Facing Brick (solid units)
1h
7n
CHI\P1TH I .
Ma~;o11fy
S.2 ASTM C270, Field Tcsts Spc<:imclls for Mortar
4.6 ASTM C90-H), Hollow Brick
4.7 ASTM C67, Sampling lind

Stnl(;luraJ Clay Tile
4.H
Te~tiJlg
CS30,
Struclural
Clay
9.
Non -Load
bearing Screen Tile.

S.
5.0 ASTM C 129-8), Nonload bearing Concrete
Masonry Units
ASTM C140, Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units
55 ASTM C426, Standard Test Method for Dryi ng
Shrinkage of Concrete Block
Grout
9. I ASTM C I 0 I 984, Mcthod
Rail~stccl Deformed and Plain Bars, Axle-steel

Deformed and Plain Bars, and Deformed Lowalloy Bars ror Concrete Reinrorccmcnt
10.3 ASTM A496, Part 11, Cold-drawn Steel Wire
.....
6.2 ASTM C73-85, Calcium Silicate Face I3ri ck

(Sand-lime I3rick)
6.3 ASTM C216, C62 or C652, Unburned Clay

Milsonry Units and Standa rd Methods of
Sampling and ASTM C 67, Testing Unburned
Clay Masonry Units
ACI 704, Cast Stone
ASTM E92b, Test Method for Compressive
St rcngt h of Masonry Prisllls
7.
Sampling and
10.2 ASTM MIS, A616, A617, A706, A767 and

A 775, Deformed and Plain lliJlet-Slcei Bars,
6. J Calci L11ll silicate
6.5
or
10.1 ASTM A82, Pan I, Joint Reinforccment fo r

Masonry
for COHcrete Reinforcement
Masonry Units of Other Materials
6.4
for
10. Reinforcement
ASTIV! C55-85, Concrete Building Brick
COllcretc Masonry Units
6.
Method
9.2 ASTM C476-83, Grout for Masonry
5.2 ASTM C90-85, Hollow and Solid Load-bearing
5.4
Standard Test
Testing Grout
Masonry Units of Concrete

5. I
cno,
Flexural B()Ild Strcngth or Mortar CC mC\lt
ASTM C212, Structural Cla y Facing Tile
4.9 ASTM
8.3 ASTM
Brick ;md
Connectors
7. I Wall ties and anchors made from steel wire
shall conform to UBC Standard 2 I -10, Part II,
and other steel wall ti cs and anchors shall

confonn to A36 in accordance with USC
Standard 22-1. Wall tics and anchors made
frolll copper, brass OJ' other nonferrous meta!

shall have minimulll tensile yield strength of
200 MPa.
7.2 All such items not fully embedded in mortar or

g rOllt sh,\11 either be corrosion resistant or shall
be coated after fabrication with copper, zinc or
a mctal having at least equivalent corrosjon ~
resistant properties.
8, Mortal'
8. I ASTM C270-95, Mortar for Unit Masonry and
Reinforced Masonry other than Gypsum
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phllippines
CHAP Il f~ '/
SECl'I:PN 7QJ
MQRTARAND
GROUT
. . '-.
...
" , -,
, '.
'.
,.'
703.1 G elleral
Monar and grout shall co mply with the provisions of this
sec tion. Special mortars, grou ts or bondin g systems Illay be
llsed, subject to satisfactory evidence
their capa bilities
when approved by the building official.
Ma~;orl(y
'/ 9
703.4.2 Selecting Proportions

Willer con tent slwl/ be adjusted to provide proper
workabil ity and to enable proper placclllclH under existing
field condi tions. withou t segregation. Grout shall be
spcd licd hy one of the followin g met hod s:
I.
or
2.
Proportions or ingredients and any additives ,shall be

hased on laboratory or field ex perience with the grou t
ingredients and the masonry units to be used.
The grou t sllall be specified by the pn'Jporti oll of its
tCllllS of parts by volume. or
constituents in
703.2 Malerials
Materials used as ingredients in mona!" and grout shall
conform to the applicable requirements in Section 702.
Ccmentitious materials for gro ut shall be one or both of the
lime and P0!11and cement.
Cemcmitious
following:
materials for lllo11ar shall be one or more of the following:
3.
Minimum compressive strength which wi ll produce the

required prism strengt h, or
4.
Proportions by grout type shall be used as given in

Table 703-2.
lime, masonry CCI1H:IlI , Portland cemellt and Illortar cement.
703.5 Additives and Admixtures
Ccmcntitiolls materials 01' additives slwll not contain epoxy

resins and derivatives, phenols, .lsbcstos libel's or fire da ys.
Willer lIsed in mortar or grout shall be clean amI free of
dclclei-iolls amou nts of acid, alkalies 01' organic material or
other harmful substances.
703.5.1 Gelleral
Addi ti ves and ad mixlUres to morta r or grout
used unl ess approved by lhe building offici al.
~ haJi
not be
703.5.2 Air Entrainment
703.3 MoriaI'
703.3.1 General
MOllal' shall consist of a mixture of ccmclll itiollS l11<ltcrials
and aggregate to wh ich sufricicnt waleI' and approved
additives, if any, have been added to achieve a workable,
plastic consistency.
703.3.2 Selecting Propol'(ivus
Air-entraining substances shall not be used in mortar or

grout unl ess tests are conducted to determine compliance
with the requirements of thi s code.
703.5.3 Colors
Only pure mineral oxide, carbon black or syn th etic co lors
may be used. Carbon black shall be limited to a maximulll
of 3 percent of the weight of the cement.
Mortar with specified proportions of jngredients lhat differ

from the mortar proportions of Table 703,1 may be
approved for usc when it is demonsu'ated by laboraLOry or
field experience that Ihis mortar wi th the specified
proportions of ingredients, when co mbined with the
masonry units to be used in the structure, will achieve the
speci fied compre~sive streng th ttl!' Water content shall be
adjusted to provide proper workability under existing field
conditions. When the proportion of ingredients is not
specified, the proportions by mortar Iype shall be used as
gi veil in Tablc 703-1.
703.4 Grout
703.4.1 Gelleral
Grout shall cOllsist of a mixture of ccmcntiti ous materials
and aggregate to which water has been added stich thaI the
mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents.
The specified compressive st rengt h of grout, 1'R' shall not
be less (han 15 MP.
111
National Structural Code of the Philippin es 6 Edition Volume 1
110
CHAI'TU1! " MasolllY
704.3 Placing Masonry Units
704.1 General
Masonry shall be constructed according to the provision of
this section.
704.2 Materials: Handling, Storage and Preparation

All materials shall comply with applicable requirements of
Section 702. Storage, handling and preparation at the site
shall conform also the following:
1.
Masonry materials shall be stored so that at the time of

usc the materials arc clean and structurally suitable for
the intended usc.
704.3.1 Mortal'
The monaI', whellllsed shall bc suiTicicn!ly plastic and unit-;
shall be placed with surticiellt pressure to extrude mOl"!,!!'
from the joint and produce a tight join!. Deep ftlfTO\VJl1!~,
which produces voids shall not be used.
When mortar is used, the
illitiallle:~
joint thickness shall
;l():.
be less than 6 m!l1 or llwrc than 25 mm; subsequent L,"

joints shall not be less than 6 mm or more than 16 mill in
thickness.
704.3.2 Surfaces
Surfaces to be ill contact with monar or grout shall be clean
and free of deleterious materials,
704.3.3 Solid Masonry Units
Solid masonry units sha!l have full head and bed joints.
2.
All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust

and other coatings that would inhibit reinforcing bond.
3.
At the tillle of laying, burned clay Ulli!s and sand lime

units shall have an initial rate of absorption not
exceeding 1.6 liter per square meIer during a period of
one minute. In the absorption test, the surface of the
unit shall be held 3 mm below the surface of the water.
704.3.4 Hollow-Masonry Units

Except for mortarless system all head and bed joints shall
be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the f'ael'
of the unit not less than thc thickness of the shell.
4.
Concrete masonry units shal1 not be wetted unless

otherwise approved.
5,
Materials shall be stored in a manner such that

deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is
prevented and that the material will be capable of
Head and bedded joints of open-ends units with bcvdc,!

ends that are to be fully grouted need not be mortared. The
beveled ends shall form a grout key which permits gr()\i~
within J 6 mm of the face of the unit. The units shall be
tightly butted to prevent leakagc of grout.
meeting applicable requirements at the time of mixing
or placement.
6.
The method of measuring materials for mOf1ar and

grout shall be such that proportions of the materials can
be controlled.
7.
Mortar or grout mixed at the job site shall be mixed for

a period of time not less than three minutes or Illore
than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount
of water required to provide the desired workability,
Hand mixing of stl1<l1l amounts of mOJ1ar is permitted.
Mortar may be re-tempered. Mortar or grout which has
hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement
shall not be used. In no case shall mortar be used two
and one-half hours, nor grout used one and one half
hours, after the initial mixing water has been addcd to
the dry ingredients at the jobsite.
704.4 Reinforcement Placing

Reinforcement details shall conform to the requircmcnts of
this chapter. Metal reinforcement shall be located ifl
accordance
with
the
plans
and
specification(:.
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior
to grouting by wire positioncrs or other suitable deviccs a!
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters.
Tolerances for the placement of reinforcement in wa!!s and
flexural elements shall be plus or minus 12 mm for d eqwtl
to 200 mill or less, 25 mm for d equal to 600 mm OJ
but greater than 200 mm, anc! 20 m!l1 for d greater thill:
mm. Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcl'.li'.
shaH be 500 mm
Exceptions:
Dry mixes for mortar and grout which are blended in the
factory and mixed at the job site shall be mixed in
mechanical mixers until lvorkable, but not to exceed 10
minutes,
CHAPT!: n 7 . Masonry
7 11
All cells Clnd spaces conta in ing reinforcement shall be filled

wi th grou t.
7()4.S Grotlted Masonry
clement.
704,5.2 Construt'tion Requirements

Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Bolts :-;haH
be accurately set with templates or by approved equ ivalent
Ill C"I!l S and held in place to preve nt dislocation during
gro utin g.
Prior [0 grou ting, th e gro ut space shall be clean so th at all

spaces 10 be filled with grout do not conta in mOrln!"
Segregation of the grout materials and damage to the

masonry shall be avoided durin g the grou tin g process.
704.5.1 General Conditions
Grouted masonry shall be constructed in such a manner that

all clements of the masonry act together as a stru ctural
projecti ons greater than
J2
mill, mOl1ar droppings or oth er
fo reign material. Grou t shall be placed so that all spaces

d es ig nated to be grouted sha ll be fi lled with grout and the
grou t shall be con lined (0 those s pecific spaces.
Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to

pro vide adequate fluidity for placement wit hout scgreglltion
of th e corlslihlcnts, and shall be mixed thorough ly.
The grouting of any section of walt shall be completed in
one day with no interruptions greater than one hour.
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall
be form cd by stopping all wythes at the sarne elevation and
with the grout stopping a minimum of 40 mm below a

mortar joint, cxcept the top of the wall. Where bond beams
occur, the grout pour sha ll be stopped a minimum of 10 nlln
below the 101' of th e masonry.
S ize and height limi tat ions of the grout space or cell shall
-no t be less Ihan shown in Table 704-1. Hi gher g ro ut pou rs
Of small er cavity wid ths or cell size than shown in T.able
704 ~ I
may be used when approved, if it is demonst rated

th at grou t spaces wi ll be properly filled.
Grout shall be consolidated by mechani cnl vihrnti on during

placement before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the
gro ut space. Grout pours grciHer than 300 mm in height
shall be reconsolidated by mechan ical vibrati on to
minimi ze voids due to wa ter loss. Groul pours )00 mill or
less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled.
111 olle-storey buildings having wood-frame exterior walls,

foundations not over 600 I11Ill high mc:tsurcd frolTl the top
or the footing may be constructed of hollow-masonry units
laid in running bond without mortared head joints. Ally
sti.lndard shape unit may be used, provided the maso nry
units permit horizontal flow of grout 10 adjacen t units.
Grou t shall be solidly poured to the full height in a ile lift
and sh<lll be puddled or mechanically vibrated.
In nonstnlctural clements which do Ilot exceed 2.4 m in
height above the hi ghest point of latera l support , including
fireplaces and rc:-;idential chi mneys, I11Ol1ar of pouring
consis tency may be substit uted for gro ut when Ihe masonry
b constructed and groute.d in pours of 300 mill or less ill
height.
In multi-wythe grouted masonry, vertical barri ers of

Cleanouts shaH be provided fo r all grout pours over 1.50 III
in height.
Where required, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom
course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more
than 800 mm on cent er for solidly grouted masonry. When
cJeanouts arc required, th ey shall be sealed after inspection
and before grouting.
Where. cleanouts arc not provided, special provisions .must
be made 10 keep the bottom .and sides of the grout spaces,
as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table
704~ I. clea n and clear prior to grolllillg.
Uni ts may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and
grout shall be placed in a continu ous pour in grout lifts not
exceeding 1.8 Ill . When approved, grout lifts may be greater
than 1.8 III if it ca n be demonstrated the grout spaces can be
properly filled.
masonry shall be built across the grout space the entire

height of the grout pour and spaced not more than 9 III
horizontally. The grouting of any section of wa ll between
baniers shall be completed in one day with no interruption
longer than one hour.
704.5.3 Aluminum Equipment
Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utili zi ng aluminum
eq uipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials
and equip ment to be used that there will be no dcleterio us
effect on the strength of the g rou t
704,5.4 Joint Rcinforcemcllt
Wire joint reinforcemen t used in the design as prin ci pal
rein force ment in hoJJ ow~ulli t construction shall he
co ntinu ous between supports unless splices are made by
lapping:
1.
Fifty-four wire diameters in a grou ted cell, or
National Structura l Code of the Philippinos 6'10 Edition Volume 1
1-12
2.
CHAPT[I,7 Moson,y
Seventy-fivc wire diameters in the mortared bed joint,

or
3.
4.
In allcrnatc bed joints of running bond masonry a

distance not less than 50 diameters plus twice the
spacing of the bed joints, or
As required by calculation and specific location
areas of minimum stress, such as points of ini1cctiOiL
J/l
Side wires shall be deformed and shall conform to ASTM

A82 Joint Reinforcement for Masonry.
SECTION 705
QUiUTYASSURANCE
70S. I General
Quality assurance shall be provided [0 ensure thai materials,
construction and workmanship arc in compliance with the_
plans and specifications, and the applicable requiremellts of
this chapter. When required, inspection records sha! I be
maintail}.cd and made available to the building officiaL
705.2 Scope
Quality assurance shall include, but is not limited to,
assurance that:
I.
Masonry units, reinforcement, cemellt, lime, aggregate

and all other materials meet the requirements of the
applicable standards of quality and that they arc
properly stored and prepared for usc.
2.
Mortar and grout arc properly mixed using specified

proportions of ingredients. The method of measuring
materials for mortar and grout shall be slIch that
proportions of materials arc controlled.
3.
Construction details, procedures and workmanship arc

in accordance with the plans and specifications.
4.
Placement, splices and reinforcement sizes arc in

accordance with the provisions of this chapter and the
plans and specifications.
705.3 Compliance withI'm

705.3.1 General
Compliance with the requirements for the specified
compressive strength of masonry 1'", shall be in accordance
with one of the sections in this subsection.
The actual compressive strength of masonry I'm shall not be
less that 4 MPa or the minimum requirement of NSCP
Volume on HOllsing, whichever is lower.
705.3.2 Masonry Prism Testing

The compressive strength of masonry determined in
accordance with ASTM E447 for eilch set of prisms shall
equal or exceed I'm. Compressive strength of prisms shall
be based on tests at 28 days. Compressive strength al seven
days or tllrec days may be used provided a relationship
between seven-day and three-day and 28-day strength has
been established for the project prior to the Wlli of
construction. Verification by masonry prism testing shall
meet the following:
l.
A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in

accordance with ASTM E447 prior to the starl of
constIUction. Materials used for the construction of the
prisms shall be taken from those specified to be used ill
CHAP TE n 1 . flAasolll y
the project. Prisms ~ h(lll be constructed und cr the

obse rva ti on of the cngi neer-of-record or special
inspct:lor or all lIpprovcd agenc y ,lIld tested by an
approved agCJH.:y.
2,
When full allowahle stresses are lIsed in design, a ~C ( of
pri$llls shall
three
be
buill
and
tested
705.3.4 Unit Strength Method

Verifi cation by the un it strength method sha ll mee t tht'
foll owing:
I.
during
construction in accordance with ASTM E447 for each

2
460 m of wall areH, but not less than One sc t of three

masonry prisms for th e project.
J.
2.
Exception:
in design, testing during construct ion is not requiJed.

A leiter of certification from the manufacturer and/or
suppl ier of the material s used to verify the /,,,, in
accordance with Section 705.3.2, Item J, sha ll be
provided at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the
materials to the j ob si te to ensure the materials used in
co nstruction arc represen tative of the materials used to
construct the prisms prior to constnlction.
;~
Prior to the start of constrllctioll, prism testing may be used

ill lieu of testiflg the lin;' strength. During cOflsfmclioll,
prism testing may also be used ill lieu of testing Ihe utlil
A masonry prism tcst record approved by th e building

official of at least 30 masonry prisms which were built
and tested in accordance with ASTM E447. Prisms
shall have been constructed under the observation of an
engineer or special inspector or an approved agcncy
and shall ha ve been tested by an approved agency.
Masonry pri sms shall be
corresponding cons truc ti on.
represen tative
strength and the grout as required by Section 705.3.4,

Item 4.
2.
When one half the ;:lllQwable masonry stresses are llsed

in design, testing is no! requ ircd for the units. A lett cr
of cert ification from the Ill,Ul ufacwfcr of the un its shall
hc provided at the time of, or prior to, de li very of the
units t9 Ihe job site (0 ass ure the units compl y wit h thc
com pressive stren gth required in Table 705-1; and
3.
Mortar shall comply with the mortar type .required in

Table 705-1; and.
4.
When full streSSeS arc lIsed in design for concrete

grout shall be tested for eHeh 460 III of wall
area, but not less than onc tcst per project, to show
co mpli ance wi th the co mpress ive strength required in
Table 705-1 , Footnote 4.
1ll<I.SOIlI Y\
of the
3.
The average compressi ve strength of th e test record

sha ll equal or exceed 1.33 I'm.
4.
When full allowable stresses are used in design , a set or

Ihree masonry prisms shall be built durin g constructi on
in accordance with ASTM E 447 for each 460 1112 of
wall area, but not less than one set of three prisms for
the project.
5.
Whcn fuJI allowab le stresses arc used in design, units

shall be tested prior 10 construction and lest units
during co nstruction for each 460 1112 of wal! area for
compressive strength to show compliance with th e
co mpressive strength rcq uirc(1in Table 705-1; and
When one lwlf the all owable masonry stresses arc used
70S.3.3 Masonry I'rislll Test Record

Compressive strength verification by masonry pri sm test
records shall meet !he follow ing:
I.
'I 1:1
When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used

in design, field testing during construction is not
required. A Jetter of cel1ification from th e supplier of
th e materi als to th e job sitc shall be provided at the
liJ~e of, or prior to, deli very of the materials 10 assure
the' materi als lIsed in const ru cti on arc representati ve of
lhe materials used to develop the prism te st reco rd in
accoillancc wilh SCl:tion 705. 3.3, Item I.
5.
When one half the all owable stresses arc used in design
fol' concrete masonry, lCs ti ng is not required for the
groll t. A Jetter of certification from the supplier of the
grOlJt shall be pro vided at the time of, or prior 10,
deli very of the grout to the job site to assure the grollt
complies wi th the compressive strength requ ired in
Tabl e 705- 1, Foolnote 4; or
6.
When full allowable stresses are used in design for clay

maso nry, grout proportions shall be verified by the
cngineer~of~record or special inspector or an approved
agency to conform wilh Table 703-2.
7.
When one half the allowable masonry stresses are used

ill de$ign fo r cla y masonry, a letter of cCI1iri cation fro m
(he suppl icr of Ihe grout shall he provided ilt the timc
of. or prior to, dcli ve.ry of the groul to the job site to
assure the grout conforms to the proporti ons of Table
703-2.
National Structural Code of the Philippines G'I> lodition Volum e 1
71-1
..
CHA F)"fEH ., . Masonry
70S.3.5 Tes ting Prisms from Constl'ucted Masonry

When approved hy the building official, ,Hxcptill1Ce of
masonry which docs not mcet the requirements of Section
705.3.2. 705.3. 3 or 705. 3.4 sha ll be permitted to be based
Jlla ~o nry construction il)
on tests of prisms CUI fro m the

accordancc with th e followin g:
I.
2.
A sel of three masonry prisms that arc at Icasl 28 days

old slwll bc saw cut from the masonry for each 460 ml:
of th e wall area thm is ill question but not less than one
sel of three maso nry pri sms for th e project. The length,
width and hei ght dimensions of Ihe pri sms shall
comply with the requirements of ASTM E 447.
Transporting, preparation and testin g of pris ms shall be
ill accordance with ASTM E 447.
The compressive stren gth of prisms shall be the value
calcul atcd in accordance with UB C Standard 2 J -1 7,
Secti on 2 J . 1707.2. except that the net cross-sectional

area of the prism shall be based On the net mort ar
bedded area.
70(,.1 Gcncral
706.1.1 Scope
The design or :llasonry structures shall co mpl y wit h th e
~l lJ owabJc ~trcs~' Jcs ign pro vis ions or Section 707, or the
strcngth dcsign provisions of Section 708 or th e empiric;!
design provi sions of Section 71 0. and with the pro visions of
this section. Unless otherwise slaled, all c<llculmiolls s h all
be made usin g or based on specified dimensions.
706.1.2 Plans
Plans submitted for approval shall desc ribe lhe required

de sign strengths of masonry material... and ins pection
requirements;' for whi ch all parts of (he structure were
designed, and any load lest requ irements.
706.1.3 Design Loads
3.
Compliance with the requ i" rement for the specificd

co mpressive st rength of masonry, f',~, shaH be
considered satisfied provided the modified compressivc
stren gth equals or exceeds th e specified /',,,. Additional
testing of speci mens cut from locat ions in question
shall be permitted.
705.4 Mortar Testing
Wh en required, mort ar shall be tested ill accordance with

ASTM C 270.
Sec Chapter 2 for dcsigll loads and load comhil li.llio ns.
706.1.4 Stack Bond
Jil bearing and 1I0nbearing Willi s, except veneer wa ll s, i f
less than 75 percent of the units in any transverse veJ1 icai
pl ane lap the ends of the unit s below a distance less than
one hal f Ihe height of th e unit, or less than one fourth the
length of th e unit, the wa ll shall be consi dered laid in stack
bond.
706.1.5 Multi-wythe Walls
705.5 Grout testing
Wh en required, grout shal! be tes ted in accordance with

ASTM C 476-83.
/105.6 Recycled Aggregates
Recycled aggregates shall refer to those materi als whose

mi xt ures are part of masonry blocks or concrete debris th at
have been crushed for fe-use. Recycl ed aggregates shall
pass the necessary (eSls before considered for re-use.
706.1.5.1 General
All wythes of multi wythe walls shall be bonded by grout

or tied togeth er by cOITOsioll-fesistant wall ties or joint
reinforcement co nforming to the requirements of Section
702, and as set forth in thi s secti on. ,
706.1.5.2 Wall Tics in Cavity Wall Construction
Wall ti es shall be of sufficient length
10
engage all wythc.s.
Th e pOl1ion of the wal! ties within the wythe shall ! ,,:
completely embedded in mortar or grout. Thc ends oj" t

wall lies shall be bellI 10 90-degrce an gles wit h an eXlc!l:.i:. i.t
nol less than 50 mill long. Wall tics not comptc.I<+,
cmbedded in mortar or grout between wYlhes shaH be it
single piece wil h each end engaged in each wythe.
There shall be ,it least one rnl 0 111m wall ti c for each OAO
of wa ll area. For cavity wall s in whi ch Ihe width of ir
cavit y is greater than 75 Illlll , but not more than 11 5 m lll . .least onc 10 mill diameter wall ti c for each 0.25 1112 oj ,. ;, ;;
area shall be provided .
Ti cs in alternate courses shall be staggered. The maximum

vertical dist ance between ties shall not exceed 600 mm and
Ihe max im u lll horizo nlu l distance be tween ti c~ sh all HOI
exceed 900 mill.
Add it io nal tics spaced not more (ha n 900 mill apart shall be
provided around openings wi th in 11 di stance of 300 mm
fro m the edge of the opening.
Adj ust able wall ti cs shall meet the foll owing req uiwmcn ts:
I. Onc ti e shall be provi ded for each O. J 6111 2 of wa ll area.

Ho ri zon ta l and ven ical slHlcing sha ll not exceed 400
I11 1ll. Max imum misali gnment of bed joi nts fro m o lle
wyt he to th e other shall be 30 ml11 .
2.
Maximum clearance between the conn ecting parts o/"

the lie shall be 1.5 mm. When used, pintle ties shall
have at least two 5 n Ull di amctcr pintle legs.
Wa ll ti cs of di fferent size and spac ing that provide

eq uiv:'ll elll stre ng th between wythes may be used.
706.1.5.3 Wall Tics for Grouted Multi-wythe

Construction
Wythes{)f multi -wyth e wall s shall be bonded together with
at leas t 4.8 mm di ameter steel wall tie for each 0.20 m2 of
area. Wall li es of different size an d spacing th at provide
eq ui va lent strength between wythes ma y be used.
706.1.5.4 Joint Reinforcement
Prefabricated j o ill t reinforcemeIll for masonry wall sh all

have at least one cross wire o f at least No.9 gage steel for
each 0.20 m2 of wall area. The vertical s pi.~cing uf the joilll
rei nforce ment sh all not exceed 400 mill . T he longi tudinal
wires shall be thoroughly embedded in the bed joint mortar.
The joi nt rei nforce me nt shall e ng:'lge al l wytlles.
W here (h e space betwee n tied wythes is solidly fill ed wit h
grou t or mortar, lhe all owable stresses and ot her provisions
for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Wh ere the space is
!lot filled, tied walls sha ll conform to the allowable stress,
lateral support, thickness (ex cluding cavity), height and tie
requi rements for cavi ty walls.
706. 1.6 Ve r ti cal Support
706.1.7 Lateral Support

Lat eral su pport of mason ry may he prov ided by cmss Willis,
(o lumns, pilas ters, countc rfor!s or buttresses where
spallning horizollla lly or by noon. , heams, gi rt s or roofs
wlle re spann ing vert ically.
Th e clear distance betwee n la teral suppon~ of" a be.ull shall

not exceed 32 limcs the leas! wid th of the compression area.
706.1.8 Protcction of 'I'ics ~Uld Joint Rcinforcement

A mini mulll of 16 I1Ull mortar cover shall be provided
between tics or joint rein fo rce me nt a nd any exposed face.
The thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units
and join t reinforcement sha ll nOI be less than 6mm, except
th at 6 mill or smaller diameter reinforcement or bo lts may
be placed in bed joints wh ic h are at least twice the thickness
of the reinforce ment or bolts.
706.1.9 I)ipes and Co ndui1s Embedded ill Masonry
Pipes o r conduit shall not be e mbedded in any masonry in a
manner that will red uce the capacity of thc masonry to less
l ilan that necessary for rcqlli red stren gth or req uired ti re
protection.
Placement of pi pes or condui t ~ in unfilled corcs of ho llow
uni t nwsonry 5h,1I1 nOI be considered as embedment.
Exceptions:
I.
Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in structural

lI!(Jsonry when their locations have been de tailed on
rh e approved plan
2.
Any pipe or conduit may pass ve rtically or horizontally

through any masonry by means of a sleeve at least
large enough to pass allY hub or coupling on (he
pipelille. Such sleeves shall not be placed closer Ihall
three diameters, cenrer to center, flor shalf they unduly
impair the strength of constructiolT.
706.1.10 Load Test

When a load test is required, the member or portion of the
structure under consideration shall be subjected 10 a
superim posed load equal to twice the design li ve load plus
one hal f of 'he dead load: O.5D + 0.2L
S tructu ra l members providing vert ica l support of masOIi ry
shall provide a bearing surface on whic h the initial bed joi nt

shall not be less th an 6 ml11 or more th an 25 111m in
thickness and shall be of noncombustible material, except
where masonry is a Ilolls tructural decorat ive fea ture or
wearing surface.
Th is load shall be len in position fo r a period of 24 hours

before remova l. If, du ring the tes t or upon removal of lhc
load, th e member or portion of th e structure shows evidence
of fai lure, such changes or modifications as are necessary to
make the sl"ruc ture adequate for the rated capacity shall be
made; or where approved, a lower rating shall be
established.
National Structural Code of tile I'llilippines 6'" Edition Volu me 1
"1 16
C/li\PIEli 7 Masonry
reinforcemenl or by hori zontal rei nforcement spaced

not over 1.2 III and fully embedded in grout or mortar.
A fl cxul'<ll member !iha " he cOllside red to h.lvc passed the
Icst if Ihe maximulIl deflection D ,H the end of the
24~ hour
period does not exceed the value of Formu la (706-1) or

(706-2) <lnd the beams and slabs show a rccowry oj" at least
7) percent of the observed dellcClio/l within 24 hOllrs aftcr
I'CIllO"'!! of the load.
f) ~ - - -
(706- 1)
200
."
:. ' .
12
D=-4,000,
(706-2)
706,1.11 Reuse or Masonry Units

Masonry units may be reused when clean , whole and
confonning 10 the olher requ irements of thi s sectioll . All
structural propcI1ics of masonry of reclaimed units shall be
determined by approved test.
706.1.12 Special Provision'5 in Area of Seismic Risk

706.1.12.1 General
Masonry struct ures constructed in the seismic zones shown

in Figure 208- J shall be designed in accordallce with the
design requirements of this chapter and the special
provisions for each seismic zone given in this sec ti on.
706.1.12.2 Special Provisions rol' Seismic ZQlle 2
Masonry stru ctures in Seismic Zone 2 shall co mpl y wilh the

following special provisions:
J.
Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sections

706.3.6,706.3.7 and 707.2.13.
2.
Vertical wall reinforcement of ,II Jellst J 30 mm2 in

cross-sectional area shall be provided continuously
froIn sUppOIl to su pport at each corner, at each side of
each opening, at the ends of walls and at maximum
spacing of 1.20 m apart horizontally throu ghOllt walls.
3.
4.
Horizontal wall reinforcement not less than J30 mm 2 in

cross-sectional area shall be provided (1) at the bottom
and lOp of wall openings and shall extend not less th an
600 mm Or less than 40 bar diameters past the opening,
(2) continuously at structurally connected roof and
fl oor levels and at the top of walls, (3) at the bottom of
wa lls or ill the top of foundations when dowel ed in
wa lls. and (4) at maximum spaci ng of 3.0 III unless
1Illiful"lnly di ~lributcd joilH rein fo rcement is pro vided.
Reinforce mcn{ at the top and bOil om of openin gs when
conlinuous in wa lls may be used in determini ng the
maximulll spacing speci fied ill Itelll I of th is
paragraph.
Where stack bond is used, the minimulll horizontal
reinforcement ratio shall be O.0007bc This ratio shall
be
satis fied
by
uniformly
distributed joint
S.
The follo wing m;'llcriais shall 1101 bc lIsed ;'IS parI of the
vertical or latcml IO;'ld ~ rcsi s ting system: Typc 0
mortar, masonry ccrnent. plasti c ccment, nOll-load
bearing masonry units and glass block.
706.1.12.3 Special Provisions for Seismic Zone 4

All masonry structures buill in Seism ic Zo ne 4 shall be
designed and construcltd in accordance with requirements
for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additional
requirements and limitations:
I. Column Reinforcement Tics
In columns Ihat are stressed by tensile Or compressive axial

overturning forces from sei sm ic loading. the spacing of
colullllI lies shall not exceed 200 mill for the full height of
such columns.
In all other columns, ti cs shall be spaced a maximum of

0.20 m in the tops and bottoms of the columns for a
distance of the greatest among ( I) one sixth of the clear
column height, (2) 450 111m, or (3) the maximum column
cross-sectional dimension.
Tic spacing for the remaining col umn height shall not
exceed the lesser of 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diamcters, lhe
least column cross-sectional dilllension, or 450 mill.
Column lies sha ll terminate with a minimum 135-degrec
hook with extensions not less than six bar diameters or J 00
mill. Sueh extensions shall cngtlgc the longitudinal colum.n
reinfo rcement and project into the interior of the column.
Books shall comply wilh Seclio n 707.2.2.5, It em 3.
Exceptions:
Where ties are placed ill horizontal bed joints, hooks shall
consist of a 90-degree bend having an inside radius of not
less than four tie diameters plus an extension of 32 tie
diameters.
2. Shear Walls
2.1 Reinforcement
The portion of the reinforcemcnt rcq uired to resist shcar
sha ll be uniforml y di stribut ed and shall be joill!
IcinfOi cclIlcnl , dcCormed bars or a combin ation thereo f.
The spacing of reinforcem ent in each direction shall !lot
exceed one half the length of the elemenl. nor one half tho:height of the elemenl , nor 1.2 nl .
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and cOllsid(:j"i' ~ .

the determination of the shear strength of the J1lcmh ~"
be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with i\STM "
& A 641.
Associatio n of Structural Engineers of Uw Philippines
CHAPTE:n 1 .
lv1a~>onf'y
"/17
Rcinforcement required to resist in-plane shear shall be

terminated with;! stalHlard hook
a~
defined in Section
707.2.2.5 or with an cx t e n ~ jon of proper embcdmcnt length

beyond the reinforcement at the end or the wall scction.
The hook or extension may be turncd up, down or
hori7.ontaliy. Provisions shall be made not to obstruct grout
placcment. Wall reinforccment terminatin g ill columns or
bcams shall be fully anchored into these elements.
2 . Bond
Multi-wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed
with consideration of the adhesion bond strength between
the grout ,lfld masonry units. When bond strengths are not
known frolll previous Icsts, thc bond stren gt h shall be
determined by tesls.
4. Concrl'-te Abutting Structural Masonry

Concre te abutti ng strm;tural masonry, suc h as at s(ancr
courses or ill wall in tersections not designed as true
separation joints, shall be rnughcncd to II full amplitude of

1.5 Jlllll and shall be bonded to the masonry in accordance
with the requirements of thi s chapter as if it were masonry.
Unless keys or proper reinforcemcnt is ptoyided, vertical
joints as specified in Section 706.1.4 shall be considered to
be stack bond and the reinforcement as required j'nl' st,\ct.;
bono shall extend through the jOint and be anchored into the
concrete.
706.2 Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design

Requirements for Unrcinforccd and Reinforced
Masonry
2.3 Wall Reinforcement

All walls shall be rcinforced with both vCl1icai and
horizontal reinforcclllcm. The sum of thc areas of
horizontal and vert iC'll reinforcement shall be HI least 0.002
times the gross cross~scctional area of the Willi, and the '
minimum area of reinforcement in either direction shall 110t
be less than 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area of
thc wall. The mjnimum steel requirements for Seismic
Zone 2 in Section 706. 1.l2.2, Items 2 and 3, may be
included in the sum. The spacing of reinforcement shall nol
exceed 1.2 In. The diameter of reinforcement shall not be
Jess than JO mm except that joim reinforcement may be
considered as a part or all of the requirement for minimum
reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be continuous around
wall corners and through intersections. Gnly reinforcement
which is continuolls in the wall or clement shall be
co nsidered in computing the minimum area of
reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforrning to
Section 707.2.2.6 shall be considered as continuous
rei nforecmen!.
2.4 Stack Bond

Where stack bond is used, the minimuIll horizontal
reinforcement ratio shall be O.OOISbl. Where open-end
units arc used and grouted solid, the minimum horizontal
reinforcement ratio shall be O.OO07bt.
Reinforced h o llow~lI nit stacked bond co nstru ct ion which is
part of the se i smic~ re sis till g .system shall USe opc ll ~c nd units
so that all head joints arc made solid, shall usc bond beam
units to faciJit,ltc the nnw of grout and shall be grouted
solid.
706.2.1 General
In addition to the rcq uireJllclll!> of Section 706. 1, the design
of Illnsonry struct urcs by the allowable stress desi gn method
and strength design method shall comply with the
requirements of this section. Additionally, the design or
reinforced masonry structures by these desi gn methods
shall comply with the requircments of SectiDIl 706.3.
706.2.2 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry
The Itll owablc stresses for the design of masonry shall be
based 011 value of
selected for the construction.
rill
Verification of the value of I'm shall be based on

compliance with Scction 705.3. Unless otherwise spccified,
f'm shnl! be based on 28 -day te-sts. If other than a 28 ~ day test
age is used, the value of j'HI shall bc as indicated ill dc'sign
drawings or specifications. Design drawings shall show the
value of m for which c<lch part of the slnlcturc is designed.
706.2.3 Effeelive Thickness

706.2.3.1 Single-Wythe Walls
The effective thickness of single-wythe walls of either solid
or hollow units is the specified thickness of the wall.
706.2.3.2 Multi-wythe Walls
The effcctive thickness of IlHilti -wythc walls is th e specific, )
thickness of the wall if the space between wythes is filkd
with mortar or grout. For walls with an open space between
wythes, the effective thi cknC'-ss shall be determined as for
cavity walls.
3. Type N Mortar
Type N mortar shall not be used as palt of the
laleral~load-resis(ing system.
ve l1ical~or
t1
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 ' Edition Volume 1
'( Iil
CHAP-rEF! "I
Masonry
01" the wal! parallel 10 the shear forces may be assumed 'to
carry horil.ollta] shear.
706.2.3.3 Cavily Walls
Where bOlh wylhcs of <l cavity wldl arc <lxi'llly IO;ldcu, c<lch
wythe shall be considcreD 10 ;1(;1 independently and the
effective thickn ess of" each wythe is as defined in Section
706.2.:1. I. Where only one wythe is axially loaded, the
effective thickness of the cavity wall is taken as the square
roOI of the Stllll of the squares of" the specified thicknesses
of the wythcs.
Where
cavity wall is composed of a single wythe and a

and both sides arc axially loaded, each side of
th e cavilY waH shilll be considered 10 aCI independently and
the effective thickness of each side is as defined in Sect ions
706.2.3. 1 and 706.2.3,2. Where only one side is axi ally
loaded, the effective Ihickness of the cavity wall is the
square root of" the su m of the sq uares of tile speci fied
thicknesses of the sides.
11
multi~wythc,
706.2.3.4 Columns
The effect ivc thi ckness for rectangular columns in the

di rcction considered is the specified thickness.
The
effective thickness for nOIl~rcctanglllar columns is the
thi ckncss of the square column with the same moment of
incrtia about its axis as that about the axis considered in the
actual column.
706.2.4 Effective Height
706.2.7 DistribuHon of Concentrated Vertical Loads in

Walls
The length of wall laid up in running bond which may be
considered cap"ble of working al the maximum allowable
('I)mpressive stress to resist vertical concentrated loads shall
L~; . exceed the cel1ter~IO~cclltcr distance between Stich
loads. nor the width of bearing area plus rour limes (he wall
thickness. Concelltrated vertical loads shall not be assumed
10 be distributed across continuous vertical monar or
con tro! joints unless clements designed to di stribute the
conce ntrated vcnica] loads arc employed.
706.2.8 Loads OIl NOlluearing Walls
Masonry walls lIsed as interior partitions or as exterior
surfaces or a building which do not carry vcrtical loads
imposed by other clements of the building shall bc designed
to carry their own weight plus any superimposed fini sh and
IHteml rorces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbcaring walls
shall be adequate 10 support (he walls and to transfer lateral
forces to the Suppo!1ing elements.
706.2.9 Vertical Denectioll
Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their

vertical deflection will not exceed 11600 of the clear span
under total loads. Lintels shall bear on supporting masonry
on each end such that al!owable stresses in the supporting
masonry arc not exceeded. A minimum bearing length or
100 mill shall be provided for lintels bearing on masonry.
The effective height of columns and walls shall be taken as

the clear height of members laterally supported at [he top
and bottom in (\ direction normal to the mcmber axis
considered. For members nOI supported at the top normal
to the axis considered, the crfective height is twice the
height of the member above the support. E:Jfective height
less than clear height may be llsed if justified.
706.2.10 Structural Continuity

Intersecting structural clements intended to act as
shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
706.2.5 Effective Area
706.2.11 Walls Inlersecling
The effective cross~sectional area shall be based 011 the

minill1l1!l1 beddcd area of hollow units, or the gross area or
solid units plus any grouted area. Where hollow unils arc
used with cells perpendicular to the direction of stress, the
effective (uea shall be the lesser of th e minimum bedded
area or the minimulll cross~sec ti o llal area. Where bed joints
are raked, the effective area shall be correspondingly
redu ced. Effective areas for cavity walls shall be that of the
load ed wythes,
7()6.2.6 Effectiv(~ ,\lidth of Intersecting \V;,lIs
Where a shear wall is anchored to an intersecting wall or

walls, the width of the overhanging flange form ed by the
intersected wall on ei ther side of the shear wall, which may
be assumed working with the shear wall for purposes of"
flexural stiffness calculations, shall nOI exceed six times the
thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective
flan ge may be waived if justified. Only the effective area
<l
unit
wHh Floors and

Roofs
Walls shall be anchored to all !loors, roofs or other
eleme nts which provide lateral SUpp0I1 for the wall. Where
noors or roors are designed to transmit horizontal forces to
walls. the anchorage to such walls shall be designed to
resis t the horizontal forcc.
706.2.12 Modulus of Elaslicity of Materials
706.2.12.1 Modulus of Elasticit)' of Maso",'),
The moduli for masonry Illay be estimated as provided

below. Actual values, where required, shall be established
by lest. The modulus or elasticity of masonry shall be
determined by the, secant method in which the slope of the.
line for the modulus of elaslicity is taken from O.05f'", to a
point on the curve at 0.33 I'm. These values arc not to be
reduced by one half as scI fonil in Seclion 707. J .2.
CIIAI'TEH I Maso",y
Modulus of clas ti<: ity of clay or s hal ~ unit masonry.

J ~.",
= 750/,,,,,
205 OPt! maximum
(706 -3 )
l 19
di st ribut ed 10 the wyllles accordi ng hJ Ihei r rcspt.:cti vc

Ikxu ral ri gidit ies
706.3 Alternative Strength Design (ASD) and S trength
Des ign Requirements for Reinfor('ed Ma sonry
Modulus of l!lasticity of concrele unit masonry.
1:," = 750/,,,,, 20.5 (JPa maximum
(706-4)
706.3.1 General
706.2.12.2 Modulus of Elasticit), of Steel

(70GS) .. ,
E,=200 GPa
706.2.13 Shear Modulus of Masonr),
G = 0.4 Ii:.,
(7066)
706.2.14 ('Iacemcnt of Embedded Anchorllolts

706. 2.14.1 General
706,3.2 Plain Bars

The use of pi<lin bars large r than 6 mill in diameter is not
permitted .
706.3.3 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement
requireme nts for plate anchor boll s, hcadcd

anc hor boilS find bent biir anchor bolts sha ll be detcrmincd
in accordance with this subsection. Bcnt bar anchor bolts
shall have a hoo k with a 90-dcgree bend with all inside
diam ete r of three bolt diameters. plus all cxtension of" one
and one Iwlf bo lt diameters at thc frce cnd . Plat e anchor
bolts shall have a plate welded to thc shank to provide
anchorage eqlliv Hlent to headed anchor bolts.
PIaCCIl"lCIll
The effec tive embedmen t depth Ib for plate or headed

anchor bolts shall be the length of embedment measured
pe'l)end icul ar from the surface of the masonry to the
hc.uin g surface of th e pl ate or head of the ancho rage , and II)
for bcnt bar anchors shall be the length of embedment

measured perpend icular from the surface of the mason ry 10
the bearin g surface of the bent end minus one anc hor bolt
d iameter. All bolls shall be grouted in place with ill leasl 25
Jl1m of grou t between the boll and the rnasonry. except th at
6 fllll1 bolts Illay be placed in bed joints which area al least
J 2 mm in thickness.
706.2.14.2 Minimum Edge Distance
TIle minimum anchor bolt edge distallce !l>c measured from

the edge of the maso nry paralle! with the anch or bolt to the
surface of the anchor bolt shall be 38 rnm.
706.2 .. 14.3 Minimum Embedment Depth
The minimu m embedment depth of anchor bolts
fOlll"
In addition 10 the requirem en ts of' Sect ions 706.1 and 706.2,

tbe design of reinforced masonry i; lructu res by th e working
stress design method or the stren gth des ign method shall
co mply with the require ments of thi s sec tion.
boll d iamclers but not less th an 50
Ih shall be
The dear di stance between parallel h'l!"s, except in columns,

shall nol be less than Ihe nominal diameter of the bars or 25
llllll. except thaI bars in a splice may be in contact. Thi s
clea r distance requirement applies 10 tile dc,lr di stance
be twee n a contact splice and adjacen t splices or bars.
The clear distance between th e su rface of a bar and any

surface of a masonry unit shall not be less th an 6 mm for
fine grou t and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of
hollow units may be used as support for horizontal
rei nforceillent.
706.3.4 Anchorage of Flexural Reinforcement

The tension or co mpression in <lily bar at any section shall
be devl'-loped on each side of th at section by thc required
develop ment length. The developme nt Ic ngth of the bar
Illn)' be achieved by a combi nation of an em bedment le ngt h.
anchorage or, for tensi on on l y, hooks.
Except at suppOJ1S or at the free end of cantilevers, every
rei nforci ng bar shall be extended beyo nd the point at which
il is no longer needed to re sist tensile stress for a distance
equal to 12 bar diameters or th e depth of the beam,
whichever is greater. No fle xural bar shall be terminated in
a tensile zone unless at least one of th e fo ll owi ng co nditions
is satisfied:
!.
The shear is not over one half" that permittcd, induding

,lIlow"Ulcc for shear rcin forcc mclH where pro vided.
2.
Add it ional shear rei nforcement in excess of th at

required is provided each way from the cutoff a
dist;mcc eq ua l to the dcpth of the bea m. The shear
reinforccment spacing shall nol exceed d/8 rJ,.
3.
The cont inu ing bars provide double lhe arca requ ired
for flexure at that point or double the perimctcr
required for reinforcin g bond.
111111.
706.2.14.4 MinimulIl Sp:ldllg bc(wcen Bolls

The minimum center-to-ccnter distance between anchor
bolts shall be four bolt di ameters.
706.2.15 Flexural Resistance of Cavity Walls
For computing the fl exural resi stance of cavity walls. lateral
loads perpendi cul ar (0 the plane of the wall shall be
1h
National Structural Code of the Pllilippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
720
CHAPTEFl 7 Masonry
AI least one third of the total rcin/{)fccmcnt provided for

negative mOllle/ll at the support shal! be extended beyond
the extremc position of the poill! of in(Jcdio1l a distance
sufficicllt to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar,
not less than 1116 of the clear span, or the depth d of the
mcmber, whichever is greater.
Tensile reinforcement for negativc moment in any span of a
e);j!inuous restraincd or cantilever beam, or in any member
of a rigid frame, shal! be adequately anchored by
reinforcement bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or
through the supporting member.
At least one third of the required positive moment
reinforcement in simple beams or at the freely suppOJ1cd
end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face
of the beam into the SUppOi1 at least J 50 mm. At least one
fourth of the required positive moment reinforcement at the
cOlltinuous end of continuous beams shall extend along the
same face of the beam into thc support at least ISO mill.
Compression reinforcement in flexural members shaH be
anchored by ties or stirrups not Jess than () mm in diameter,
spaced not farther apa!1 than 16 bar diameters or 48 lie
diameters, whichever is less. Such ties or stinups shall be
used throughout the distance where compression
reinforcement is required.
706.3.5 Anchorage of Shear Rcinfoffcment.

Single, separate bars used as shear reinforcement shall be
anchored at each end by one of the following methods:
I.
2.
3.
Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement

through 180 degrees.
Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam
on the compression side a distance sufficient to
develop the stress in the bar for plain or deformed bars.
By a standard hook, as defined in Section 707.2.2.5,
project beyond the end of the bend at least 12 stirrup

diameters.
706.3.6 Lateral Tics

AI! longitudinal bars for columns shall be e.nclosed by
lateral tics.
Lateral suppO!1 shall be provided to the
longitudinal bars by the corner of a complete tic having an
included angle oj' not more than 135 dcgree~' or by a
standard hook at the end of a tic. Tile corner bars :;liall have
such SUPPO!1 provided by a complete tie enclosing the.
longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal bars shall have
such lateral support provided by tics and no bar shall be
farther than 150 mm from such laterally supported bar.
Lateral tics and longitudinal bars shall be placed not le.';s
than 38 mm and not more than 125 mm from the surface or
the column.
Lateral tics may be placed against the
longitudinal bars or placed in the ,horizontal bed joints
where the requirements of Section 706.1.8 are met.
Spacing of tics shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar
diameters, 48 tic diameters or the least dimension of the
column but not more than 450 111m.
Tics shall be at least 6 mm in diameter for 20 mm or
smaller longitudinal bars and at least J 0 mm for
longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm. Ties smaller than J 0
mm may be used for longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm,
provided the total cross-sectional area of such smaller ties
crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger
tics at their required spacing.
706.3.7 Column Anchor Bolt Ties

Additional tics shall be provided around anchor bolts which
are set ill the top of columns. Such ties shall engage at least
four bolts or, alternately, at least four vertical column bars
or a combination of bolts and bars totaling at least four.
Such tics shall be located within the top 125 mill of the
2
.
column and shall provide a total of 260 nun or more l!l
cross-sectional area. The uppermost tie shall be within 50
111m of the top of the column.
considered as developing 50 MPa, plus embedment

sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to
which the bar is subjected. The effective embedded
length shall not be assumed to exceed the distance
between the mid-depth of the beam and the tangent of
the hook.
706.3.8 Effective Width B of Compression Area

In computing flexural stresscs in walls where reinforcement
occurs, the effective width assumed for running bond
The ends of bars forming a single LJ Of multiple LJ stirrup

shall be anchored by one of the methods set forth in Items 1
through 3 above or sha!l be bent through all angle of at least
90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not
less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project
beyond the bend at least J 2 stirrup diameters.
masonry shall not exceed six times the nominal wall

thickness or the center-la-center distance between
reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective
width shall not exceed three times the nomina! wall
thickness or the center-to-center distance between
reinforcemcnt or the length of one unit, unless solid grouted
open-end units arc used.
The loops or closed ends of simple U or multiple U stirn!ps

shall be anchored by bending around the longitudinal
reinforcement througb an angle of at least 90 degrees and
CHAPTEn 'l . Masonry
721
707. 1.4 Des ign Assutnl)(ions
The working stress design proced ure is bllsed Oil working

stresses and linear stress-st rain distribu tion assumpt ions
with al l strcsses in the cl astic range as fo ll ows:
707.1 Ge neral
707.I.I Sco pe
The design hI' inaso nry structures usin g all owa ble stress
design sh;ill compl y with the provision s of Sec ti on 706 unc.l
this sec tion.
I.
Pla ne sections be fore bendin g remain pla ne aft cr

bc nding.
2.
Stress is proportional to strain.
J.
Masonry clcmcnts combin e to form a IH) ll1o ge noLl,1

mem ber.
Stresses in cl ay or concret e maso nry under
service loads shall not exceed th e va lues given in this
707.1.5 Emuedded Anchor BoiL,
sec tio n .
707. 1.5.1 General

707. 1.2 Allowaule Masonry Stresses
When qualit y a$;su mncc provisions
do
not
incl ude
require ment s for spec ial inspecti o n as prescribed in Section

70 1, the all owilble stresses for masonry in Sec ti on 707 sha ll
be reduced by one h'llf.
\A/ hen one half all owa bl e ma sonry stresses arc used ill
Seismic Zone 4, the va llie of I'm from Ta ble 705~ J sh all be
limi ted to a max imum of J () MPa for concrete maso nry and
18 MPa for clay maso nry unless the value of/'/II is verified
by tes ts in a!.:co rdancc with Section 705.3.4, It elll!) 1 and 4
Allowa ble loads for pl ate <l llchor boll s. headed anchor boll s
and he nt bar " lIchor boll s shall be dete rmined in accord ance
with thi s :-;ecti o n.
707.1.5.2 Tension
All owable loads in tension shal! be the lesse r val ue se lected
from Table 707-1 and 707-2 or shall be determi ned from
the lesser of Forilluia (707-1) or Forillu ia (707-2).
(707 - 1)
or 6. A lettcr of certifi cation i!) not required.
(707-2)
Whcn one half all owab le maso nry st resses are used for
design in Seismic Zo nes 4, the value of/,,,, sha ll be limited
(0 10 M Pa for concrete maso nry a nd 18 M Pa fo r clay
maso nry fo r Secti on 705.3.2, item 3, a nd Sect io n 705.3.3,
Item 5, un less thc val ue of /,,,, is verifi ed during
construction by the 1csling requireme nt s of Secti o)) 705.3.2,
It em 2. A letter of certificatio n is not required.
The area A" sh all b~ the lesser of Fonmil a (7073) or

Fo rm ula (707-4) and where th e projected areas o r adjacent
707. 1.3 Minimum Dimensions for Masonry Structures

L oca ted in Se is mi c Zones 2 and 4
Elements of masonry stl1lc tures located in Se is mi c Z.olles 2
a nd 4 shall be in accordance with this section.
707.1.5.3 Shear
707.1.3.1 Bearing Walls

Thc nom inal thickness of reinforced masonry bearin g walls
shaH not be less than 150 Illlll except th at no mi na! 100 !TIm
load-bearing re info rced hollow-clay unit masonry walls
may be used, provided net area uni t strength exceeds 55
MPa, un its are laid in nlllning bond , bar s izes do nol exceed
12 mill w ilh no more tha n Iwo bars or o ne s pl ice in <l ce ll ,
and j o ints are flu sh cu t. concave or a protl1ldi ng V section.
707.1.3.2 Columns
The least nominal di mension of a reinforced masonry
column shall be 300 mm except th at, for AS D, if the
a ll owab le stresses are reduced by one hal f. the minimum
nomin al dimension shall be 200 mm.
anchor boilS c verlap, At' or each anchor bo lt shall be

reduced by o ne half o f Ihe overl a pping area.
A"
A"
(707-3)
(707-4)
Allowable loa ds in shear shall be the va lue selected fro m

Tab le 707 ~3 or shall be determined from thc lesser of
Formula (707-5) or Formul a (707-6).
B,. ~ 1070(1'", AI>
(707-5)
13,. = 0.12 A,l,
(707-6)
Where the anc ho r bolt edge di stance hr in the direct ion of

load is less than 12 bolt dia me le rs. Ihe va lu e of B. ill
Formul a (707-5) shall be reduced by iinc<lr inl c rpolal io ll to
z.ero at .1Il he- d istance o f 40 mill. Where adj accllI anchors

arc spaced closer th an 8th, the a ll owable shear of the
adj acent a nc ho rs delCrmined by Formul a (707~5) shall be
reduced by linear in terpolat ion to 0.75 ti mes the allowa ble
shear va lue at a center-to-cen ter spacing of fo ur bolt
diameters.
Nolional Structu ral Code of tile Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
7 -22
CHAPHT? 7 Ma.sonry
707.1.5.4 Combined Shear and Tension
707.1.8.2 Determination of Modulus of Elasticity
Anchor bolts subjected 10 combined s.hear and tension shall

be designed in accordance with:
h,
h,.
IJ,
IJ"
--+~1.0
(707-7)
The modulus of elasticity
or
each type
or
masonry in
composite construction shall be measured by tests if the

modular ratio of the respective types of masonry exceeds 2
\0 I as determined by Sectio!] 706.2. I 2.
707.1.8.3 Structural Continuity
707.1.6 Compression in Walls and Columns

707.1.6.1 Walls, Axial Loads
Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid

of wall may be computed, assuming uniform dis.tribution
over the effective area, by
f"
= PIA,.
(707-S)
707.1.6.2 Columns, Axial Loads
Stresses due to compressi ve forces appl led at the centroid

of columns may be computed by Formula (707-8) assuming
uniform distribution over the effective area.
707.1.6.3 Columns, Bending or Combined Bending and
Axial Loads
Stresses ill columns due to combined bending and axial

loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 707.2.7
where j;/Fo is replaced by PIP". Columns subjected to
bending shall meet all applicable requirements for flexural
design.
707.1.7 Shear Walls, Design Loads
When calculating shear or diagonal tension stresses, shear

walls which resist seismic forces in Seismic Zone 4 shull be
designed to resist J.5 times the forces required by Section
20SS.
707.1.8 Design, Composite Construction
707.1.8.3.1 Bonding of Wythes

All wythes of composite masonry clements shall be tied
together as specified in Section 706.1.5.2 as a minimum
requirement. Additional tics or the combination of grout
and metal tics shall be provided to transfer the calculated
stress.
707.1.8.3.2 Material Properties
The effect of dimensional changes of the various materials
and different boundary conditions of various wythes shall
be included in the design.
707.1.8.4 Design Procedure, Transformed Sections
In the design of transformed sections, one materia! is

chosen as the reference material, and the other materials arc
transformed to an equivalent area of the reference material
by mUltiplying the areas of the other materials by the
respective ratios of the modulus of elasticity of the other
materials to that of the reference material. Thickness of the
transformed area and its distance perpendicular to a given
bending axis remain unchanged. Effectivc height or length
of the clement remains unchanged.
707.1.9 Reuse of Masonry Units
The allowable working stresses for reused masonry units
shall not exceed 50 percellt of those permitted for !lew
masonry units of the same properties.
707.2 Design of Reinforced Masonry
707.1.8.1 General
The requirements of this section govern

masonry in which at least Olle wythe has
cOIllPosition characteIistics different from the
or wythes and is adequately bonded to act
structural elemcnt.
multi-wythe
strength or
other wythe
as a single
The following assulllptions shall apply to UK design of

composite masonry:
1.
Analysis shall be based on elastic transfolll1cd section

of the net area.
2.
The maximum computed stress in any portion of

composite masonry shall not exceed the allowable
stress for the material of that portion.
707.2.1 Scope
The requirements of this section arc in addition to the
requirements of Sections 706 and 707.1, and govern
masonry in which reinforcement is lIsed to resist forces.
Walls with openings used to resist lateral loads whose pier

and beam clements arc within the dimensional limits of
Section 708.2.6. J.2 may be designed in accordance wi til
Section 708.2.6. Walls llsed to resist lateral loads not
meeting the dimensional limits of Section 708.2.6.1.2 may
be designed as walls in accordance with this section 0,'
Section 708.2.5.
Association of Struc~ur81 Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEJl ., . Masollry
707.2.2 Heinforc('.mcnt
707.2.2.1 Mnximulll Hcinforccmcnt Size
The maximulll size of reinforcement shall he 32 111111.

Maximuill reinforcement area in cclIs shall be 6 percellt of
the ce Jl area withollt splices and 12 perCCll! or th e <-:ell area
with spli ces.
707.2.2.2 Cove,.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcclllclll, sha ll be
completely embedded in mortar or grout and have II
minimum cover, including the masonry unit, of at lca ~t 20
mJll, 40 nun of <..:over when the masonry is ex posed to
wea ther and 50 mill of cover when the masonry is exposed
to soi l.
707.2.2.3 Development Length
The required dcvelopment le ngth I" for dc formed hars or
t1cformcd wire shal! be cllkulated by:
I" = 0.29 d,,/s for bars in tension
I" = 0.22 d'i/: for bars in compression
(707 9)
(707-10)
Devel opment length for smooth bars shall be twi ce thc

length determined by Formula (707~9).
707.2.2.4 Reinforcement Bond Stress

Bond stress u ill reinforcing bars shall not exceed th e
following:
Pl ain Bars
4 10 kPa
Deformed Bars
1370 kP"
Deformed Bars without
kPa
~~~ In spectio~ _ __.__
- - -690
--------
707.2.2.5 Hooks
1.
The term "standard hook" shall mean one of th e

following:
1.1 A 180-degree turn plus extension of at least 4
bar diameters, but not less than 63mm at rrec
end of bar.
2.
!-2~
J . Inside diameter or bend for 16 mm or smalkr stirru ps

and tics shall not be less than four bar diameter.
Inside diame[c-l' of bend for 16 mill or larger stirrups
,Illd ties shall not be less than that sct f01111 in Table
71174.
4.
Hooks shall not be permitted ill the tensio n portion of

any beam, except at the ends of simple or cantilever
beams or at the freely supported end of co ntinuous or
restrained
bC,llHS.
5.
Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which

would produce a tensile stress in the bar grea ter than 52
MPa.
6.
Hooks shall not be considered effecti ve in adding to the

cO lupressivc resistance of bars.
7.
An y mcchani cal device c:lp,-I blc of developing. the

st re ngth of the bill' wit ho llt damage 10 the masonry may
he used in lieu of a hook . Data mu st be presented 10
show the adequacy of such devi ces.
707.2.2.6 Splices
The amount of lap of lapped splices sha ll be sufficient to
transfer the allowable stress of th e reinforcement as
spec ified in Seclions 706.3.4. 707.2.2,3 and 707.2.12. In no
case shall the length of the lapped splice be less than 30 bar
dia meters for compression or 40 bar diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connec ti ons shall develop 125
percent of the specified yield stre ngth of the bar in tension .
rceptioll:
For compressiotl bars itl columns lhat are ItOI parI of (h e

seismic-resistillg system and are !lot subjec f 10 flexure, ollly
III ; compJ'(~.HiI}e slrength Iwed be developed.
When adjacent spJices in grouted masonry are separated by

76 mill or Jess, the required lap length shall be increased 30
percent.
Exception:
Wh ere lap splices are staggered at leas! 24 bars diameters,
in crease ill lap length is required.
110
incrcase~.
1.2 A 90-degree turn plus c:xtension of al least 12

bar diameters at free end of bar.
Sec Secti on 707.2.12 for lap splice
J.3 For stirrup alld ti e anchorage o nl y, e ithe r a 90degree o r a J 35-degrce tum , plus an ex tension o f
at least six hal' dimllcters, bUI nol less than 65
mm at the free end of the hal'.
707.2.3 Design Assumptions

The followin g (Issumptiolls <Ire in addition w those stated ill
50clion707. 1.4:
Inside diamete r of bend of the ban" other th an for

stirrllps and ti cs, shall not be less than that set forth in
Table 707-4
!.
Maso nry ca rries no tens ile stress.
2.
Reinforcement is completely SlII'l'ounded by and

bonded to masonry material so th at they work together
as a homogenolls material within the ran ge of
allowable working stresses.
Nationa! Structura l Code of the Ph il ippi nes 6
th
Edition Volurne 1
e IMP'1 EFI 7 Masonry
724
707.2.4 Nonrcctangular Flexural El ements

Flcxunll cleme nl s of nonrccla ngular cross see lion sh all IJ...~
designed ill <lcconJance with the HS!i Ulllplions given 111
Secli ons 707. 1.4 and 707.2.3.
Where shear reinforcement desi gned to lake emirc shear

fo rce is provi dcu. the ullowahlc shea r siress.
in Ile XUf .d
me mhe rs is:
r,.
I'~. :::: O. 25~ , 1.0 MPa maximuJll
(707 -I H)
707.2.5 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress and Force
For members other than reinforced masonry columns, th e

allowable axia l compressive stress I;~, shall be determined
as follo ws:
I:;' =0.25!'... II_(~)2 J
Stress in Shear Walls
Where inplan e fl exural reinfo:~celllenl is provided an d

masonry is used to resist all ~jiLar, th e a ll o wHb le slw ,~r
slress Fv in shear wall is:
M
F, =1/36 (4- -M ),;-f' (80 -45 - ) ma x. imulll
,
Vd
/11
Vel
r" 99
I';,
Sh(!~lr
(707 - 11 )
140r
for h 'I
707.2.9 Allowable
(707-19)
= 0.25!'".c,~,rr
(707-12)
For M /Vd ~ I, r~,
; ; 1/12 ~
, 240 kPd max.im um

(707- 20)
for h'lr > 99
For re inforced
masonry co lumn s, the .a llowab le axial
co mpress ive fo rce P" shall be detcnllin cd as follows:
I;,
= 10.25!, ...
A, +0 65A,F"J[{ I~~r
r
J
(707-1 3)
(707- 14 )
for h'lr> 99
707.2.6 Allowable Flexural Compressive Stress

The allowabl e f1 exura l compressive stress F,! is:
F" = 0.33!,,,, ' 13.8 MPa maximum

Compressive
J'---
maximum
(707-2 1)
70r
707.2.7 Combined
IS
Fo r MIVd < J,
F , =1/24(4- -M ) f' (120-45 -M )

,
Vel
m.
Vel
for h'lr " 99
P" = /0 25!, ... A,. +0.65A, F" ]( T
Where shear rein forceme nt desi gned ( 0 t;'lke .111 Ihe shear
provided, the allowa ble shear stress F,., in ShCM wall s is:
Stresses,
(707-15)'
Unity
Formula
Elements subjected to combined axial and flexural stresses
shall be design ed in accordance with accepted principles of
mechanics or in accordance with Formula (707~16):
(707 - 16)
707.2.8 Allowabl e Shear Sln'ss ill Flcxuml Members

Wbere no shear re inforcement is pl ovided, the allowable
jll ncxural members is:
shear stress F,.
r-;, =a.083!!,,,;, 345 kPa maximum
M / Vd " I, F,. = O. 12~ ,520 kPa maximulll

(707-22 )
707.2.10 Allowable Bearing Siress
When a member bcar5 on the ful! area of
cle ment, the allowabl e heari ng stress Fllr is:
I~" =
masonry
(707-23 )
0.26['",
When a member bears of! one thi rd or less

e le ment, the allowable bearing stress F"r is:
11
or a masonry
(707-2'1)
Formula (707~24) applies only when th e least dimensi<m

between the edges of the loaded and unl oaded arc'ls is
minimu m o f one fo urth of Ihe para llel s ide di mcnsi01 I of l!i,'
lo.aded a rea. The all owable bearing stress on a reasonably
co ncentric area great er than one th ird bu! less than the full
area shall be interpolat ed between the valu es
(707-23) and (70724).
(707-17)
Exception:
For a distaltce of 1116 tlie clear span beyond rhe point of
inflection, th e maximum stress shall be 140 kPa.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phi lippines
or Formulas
CHAVITH"1 .
707.2.11 Allowahk' Stresses in Rcinf()IT('mcnt

'1l 1 {~ ;d low;lhlc s tresscs ill rci nfon:clllclll shall hc as follows :
1.
T(~nsilc
Stress
1. 1 Deformed hal's,
J;~,:::::
0.5;;- , Ie) MPa maximulll
(707-25)
J.2 Wire reinforcement ,
f~r::::: 0.5!y \ . 200 MPa ma xi muill
(707-26)
1.1 Tics, an chors li nd s mooth bars,
F,,::::: OAf;. , 140 MPa maximum
r\~ilSO!lry
;2:)
707.2.14.2 Walls, Bending or Combined Bending and

Axial Loads
Stresses in walls du e to combined bending and ax ial loads
shall satisfy thc requirements of Section 707.2.7 where);, is
givcn by Formula (707 . 8). Wall s subjected to bending with
or without ;Ixiallo<lds shall mcet .dl appli cable requirements
for flexural design. Th e design of walls with an II 'If ratio
larger than 30 shall be based on forc es and moments
determined fnun an ana lysis of the st ructure. Such llllal ys is
shall consider the illf1 Il(:nce of axial loads and variable
mome nt of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end
JllOlllents, effect of deflections 011 moments and forces and
the effec ts of duration of loads.
(707 -27)
707.2.15 Flexural Design, Rectangular Flexural
2.
Compressive Stress
2.1
Dcf()rrn~d
J;~,_ :::::
bars in columns,
0.4/;. , 165 MPa maximum
(707-28)
section.
I. Co mpress ive stress ill the masonry:
2.2 Deformed bars in flexural members,
Fl
:::
O.5 J.~.
, 165 MPa ma ximum
(707-2Y)
23 Deformed bar~ in shear walls whidl are confined by

lateral tics throu gho ut the distance where compression
reinforce ment is required and where sllch l<Hera! tics
are not Icss than 6 mm in diametcr and spaced nOI
farther apart than J 6 bar diameters or 48 tic diameters,
l:',.c= O.4/;. ,165MPamaximum
Elements
Rectangular clements shall be designed in accordance with
the rollowing formulas or othcr meth ods based o n the
assumptiolls g iven in Sect ion s 70 7. 1.4, 707 .2.3 and this
(707-30)
707.2.12 Lap Splice increases

In region s of moment where the design tensile s tresses in
thc reinforce ment are greatcr than 80 percent of (he
allowable steel tensile stress r" the lap length of splices
shall be increased /lot less than .)0 pen.~e n( of the minimum
required length . Other equivalent means of stress transfer
to accomplish the same 50 percent increase may be used.
707.2.13 Reinforcement for Columns

Columns shall be provided with reinforcement as specified
in (his section .
707.2.13.1 Vertical Reinforcement
The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than
0.005 A.. and 110t more than (l.()4 AI". A t le.}st four 10 n1l11
bars shall be provid ed . The minimulll clear distan ce
be tw ee n panlll ei bars in columns shall be IwO and one half
times the bar diameter.
M
2
/Jd 2 ik
~, =.~-(- )
.,
(707-3 1)
2.
Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcemeJll:
3.
/' = A'd
,J
Design coefficients:
=.fi~~;)2 + 2111' - "l'
(707 -32)
(707-33)
or
(707-34)
' i= 1- -
(707-35)
707.2.16 Bond of Flexural Reinforcement

In flexural members ill which tensile reinforcement is
paJ"<\!JC! to the compressive facc, the bond stress shall be
computed by the form ul a :
V
Ii
= -.--
["i d
707.2.14 Compression ill Walls and Columns
707.2.14.1 General
Stresses due to compressive forces in walls and columns

shall be calculated in accordance with Section 707.2,5.
National Stl'Llctural Code of the Philippines 6
th
Edition Volume 1
(707-36)
126
CI,APTfli?
Masonry
<I
.1..~ :. ,. . +ii,
--
707.2.17 Shear in Flexuntl Membtrs and Shear Walls
The shear stress in flexural members and shear walls shall

be computed by;
CI():
,,~,
.'J
(707-37)
7()7.3.5 Allowahle Tellsile Stress

Resultant tensile stress due [0 cOlllbined bending and aXI
load shall not exceed the allowable nexural tensile :;(1'cs.-; ,
F/.
For members or T or I section, tJ' shall be substituted for b.

Where j.. as computed by Formula (707-37) exceeds the
allowable shear stress in masonry, F,., web reinforcement
shall be provided and designed to carry the total shear
force. Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be
considered.
The allow;~blc tensile stress for walls in flexure \'.~ ! ho\l:

tensile reinforcement using portland cement and hydrated
lime, or using mOI1ar cement Type M or S Jllol1ar, sbl! n<'!
exceed the values in Table 707-5.
\I
bjd
The
area
required
for
shear
reinforcement
placed
perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be
computed by:
A,.
(707-38)
Where web rcinforccment is required, it shall be so spaced

that every 45~degree line extending from a point at d/2 of
the beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by
at least one line of web reinforcement.
Values in Table 707-5 for tension nOfmalto head joints ;n-!'

for running bond; no tension is allowed across head
ill stack bOlld masonry. These values shall not be 0:-.','0
horizontal flexural members.
707.3.6 Allowable Shear Stn'ss in Flcxural Members
The allowable shear stress Fv in flexural members is:
l~. = tl083JY:~, 345
kPa maximuill
Cl(:-'
Exception:
For a distance of 11/6 111 the clear .\pan beyond fhe p(
it(fleCfiofl, fhe maximum slress shall be /38 kPa.
if)! ;',"
707.3 Dcsign of Unrcinfol'ccd Masonry

707.3.1 Gelleral
The requirements of this section govern masonry in which
reinforcement is not used to resist design forces and arc in
addition to thc requirements of Sections 706 and 707.1
707.3.7 Allowable Shear Stress ill Shear Walls

The allowable shear stress Fv in shear walls is as follo\\ .;:
I.
P,
~0.25Fm
f~
is:
[1-(_h'_)'J forh'/r$99
(707-39)
140,.
(707-40)
707.3.3 Allowable Flexural Compressive Stress

The allowable Ocxural compressive stress Pi, is:
Ph
0.33Fm .
14 MPa maximum
707.3.4 Combined Compressive Strcsses,

FOl'mula
2.
Concrete units with Type M or S mortar, F,.

maximum.
::::23~)
U\,
3.
Concrete units with Type N monar, F,. :;:

maximum.
J 60
kPa
4.
The allowable shcar stress in unreinforced

may be increased by 0.2/lIId .
m:: ' _)f1~
707.3.2 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress.
The allowable axial compressive stress
F;, ::::: (J.(J25~, 550 kPa maximum
707.3.8 Allowable Beariug Stress

When a member bears on the full area of a
element, the allowable bearing stress Fhl' shall be:
FII(:;:
(707-41)
Unity
Elements subjected to combined axial and flexural stresses

shall be designed in accordance with accepted principles of
mcchanics or in accordancc with the Formula (707-42):
0.26/'1II
When a member bears 011 one-third or less of a

clcmcnt, the allowable bearing stress h" shall be:
n"
FiJI::: 0.38/,,,,
Formula (707-46) applies only when Ihe leasl <I;

.('.
between the edges of the loaded and unloaded (ti ' ,:, ,; a
minimulll of one fourth orlhe paralic I side dimension of the
loaded area. The allowable bearing stress on a re~lsonabJy
CHAPTU17
concentric area greater than olle third but less than the full
area shall be interpolated between the values of Formulas
(707 -4.1) and (707-46).
707.3.9 Combined Bending and
Compressive Stresses
Axinl
Loads,
Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial

loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 707.3.4.
707.3.10 Compression in Walls .md Columns
Stresses due to compressive forces in walls and columns

shall be calculated in accordance with Section 707.2.5.
Stresses due
(0
flexure shall not exceed the values given in
Sections 707.1.2, 707.3.3 and 707.3.5, where:
ii, = M,.I!
(707-47)
707.3.12 Shear in Flexural Members and Shear Walls

Shear calculations for flexural members and shear walls
shall be based on Forllluia (707-48).
J,.
= V / A,.
7??
S~CTIQN708 , ' .' .:' ;"N>',''''
'"
STRENGTH DESIGN Q:ifMA,SONRY

708.1 General
708.1.1 General Provisions
The design of hollow-unit clay and concrete masonry
structures using strength d~sig!l <;hall comply with the
provisions of Section 706 and this section.
EJ.:ception:
TlVo-wythe solid-unit maso!l1)' may
708.2.1 and 708.2.4.
707.3.11 FlexlIral Design
MasollfY
b(~
used under Sections
708.1.2 Quality Assurance Provisions

Special inspection during construction shall be provided as
set forth in Section 1701.5, Item 7 of UBe.
The required strength shall be determined in accordance
with the factored load combinations of Section 203.3.
(707-48)
707.3.12 Corbels
The slope of corbelling (angle measured from the horizontal

to the face of the corbelled surface) or unreinforccd
masonry shall not be less than 60 degrees.
708.1.4 Design Strength

Design strength is the nominal strength, multiplied by the
strength-reduction factor, $, as specified in this sectioll.
Masonry members shall be proportioned such that the
design strength exceeds the required strength.
708.1.4.1 Beams, Piers and Columns
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the

plane of the wall shall be such that allowable stresses are
not exceeded.
708.1.4.!.l Flexure
707.3.13 Stack Bond
Flexure with or without axial load, the value of 4) shaH be

determined from Formula (708-1):
Masonry units laid in stack bond shall have longitudinal

reinforcement of at least o.0002f times the vertical crosssectional area of the wall placed horizontally in the bed
joints or in bond beams spaced veI1icaily not more than
1.20111 apart.
(708-1 )
and
708,1.4,1.2 Shear
Shear: = 0.60
708.1.4,2 Wall Design for Out-of-Plane Load

708.1.4.2.1 Walls with Factored Axial Load of 0.04/,,,, or
less
Flexure: = 0.80.
708,1.4.2,2 Walls with Factored Axial Load Greater
than 0.04 /'m
Axial load and axial load with flexure: ~ = 0.80. Shear:
0.60.
National Structural Code of tile
Philippin~s 6'"
E:dilion Volume 1
$=
1,213
CI'lJ\F)T[n?
M;-lS()llIY
708.1.4.3 Wall Design for in-Plane Loads
70S.1.5 Anchor Bolts
708.1.4.3.1 Axial Load
70S. 1.5. I Required Strength
Axial load and axial load with flexure:
4) = 0.65.
For walls with sYlllmetrical reinforcelllent in which .I~, does

not exceed 4 I:) MPa, (he value of </> may be increased
linearly (0 0.85 as thc valuc of </> P" decreases from 0.1 () I'III
A,. or 0.25 f\ to i'.crn.
The, required strength of embedded anchor boilS shal! bc

determined from factored loads as specified in Section
70S.I.5.
708.1.5.2 No-ninal Anchor Bolt Strength
The nominai sirength of anchor bolls limes the strengthreduction factor shall equal or excced the required strength.
For solid grouted walls, the valuc of P" lllay be calculated

by Formula (708-2)
(708-2)
The nominal tensile capacity or anchor bolts sbaH be

determined from the lesser of Formula (708-S) or (708-6).
B'/I
where:
111, :::::
O.85d {e"," / /e"",
-I-
((,.I !~~)]}
::;;O.084Ap~
(708-3)
(708-5)
(708-6)
708.1.4.3.1 Shear
Slrear: <P
0.60.
The value of 4J may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its
nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
development of its nominal flexural strength for the
factored-load combination.
708.1.4.4 Moment-Resisting Wall Frames
The area AI' shall be the lesser of Formula (708-7) or

(708-8) and where the projected areas of adjacent anchor
bolts overlap, the value of All of each anchor bolt shall be
reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
A"
= hJ
1(
AI' = 1C 1,,/
708.1.4.4.1 Flexure With or Without Axial Load
Pf(
0.85- 2 (---)
An/'m
708.1.4.4.2 Shear
Shear: '" ~ 0.80.
708.1.4.5 Anchor
Anchor bolts: '"
0.80.
708.1.4.6 Reinforcement
708.1.4.6.1 Development
(708-8)
The nominal shear capacity of anchor bolts shall be

determined from the lesser of Formula (708-9) or (708-l 0).
(708-9)
The value of </> shall be as determined from formula (7084); however, the value of <p shall not be less than 0.65 nor
greater than 0.85.
008-7)
(708-4)
(708-10)
Wherc the anchor bolt edge distance, 1"<,, in the direction of

load is less than 12 bolt diameters, the value of BII! in
formula (808-9) shall be reduced by linear interpolation to
zero at an he distance of 38 1111ll. Where adjacent anchor
bollS arc spaced closer than 8th, the nominal shear strength
of the adjacent anchors determined by Formula (708-9)
shall be reduced by linear interpolation to 0.75 times the
nominal shear strength at a centeHo-center spacing of four
bolt diameters.
Anchor bolts subjected to combincd shear and tcnsion .';l1all
bc designcd in accordance with Formula (708-1 I).
Development: '" ~ 0.80.
(70SII)
708.1.4.6.2 Splices
Splices: <P
0.80.
708.1.5.2 Anchor Bolt Placement

Anchor bolts shall be placed so as to meet (he rdr,c
distance, embedment depth and spacing rcquircmc.ll; Jf
Sections 706.2.14.2, 706.2.14.3 and 706.2.14.4.
70R.2 n.cinfoncd Masonry
paralic! to the Dl'utl'al axis at a distancl' a ::: O.X5l rrorll till'

fiber or maximuill (omprcssivc strain. Distanc e c from
filwr or max imulll strain to (he neutral axis shall bl'
Illca..-ured in a direct ion perpend ic ular to that ax is.
708.2.1 Gene,",,1
70S.2.1.1 Scope
The requi rements of this sect ion arc in addition to the
rcquircmcrlls of Sections 706 and 70M. I and govern
m;:lsonry in which reinforcemcnt is used to res ist rorces.
The following assumptions appl y:

Masonry carries no tensile
~trcs s
708.2.2.1 Maximum ncinforcclIlent
The maximum si ze o r rci ll forc cmcill shall be 28 mill. The

diameter o r iJ bar shall not exceed on e fourth th e least
dimcns'iull or it cell. No more than two bars shall be placed
in a ceii oj' a wa!! or a wall frame.
708.2.1.2 Design Assumptions
of
708.2.2 neinfun:emcllt Requirements and Details
greater than the modulus

708.2.2.2 Placement
I1!plUi'C.
The place ment of reinforcement shall compl y with th e

Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to
masonry matclial sO that they work together as a
homogeneous material .
No minal strength of singly reinforced masonry waH cross
sections for combined Ilexure and axial load shall be based
on applicable conditi ons of equilibrium and compatibilit y
or stmins. Strain ill reinforcemeJlt and maso nry wall s shall
be ass umed to be directly proportional to the di stance from
th e neutral axis.
Maximum usabl c strain, enllO , at Ole extreme masonry

cOlllpressioll nber shall :
J.
be 0.003 for the design of beams. piers. columns and

walls.
2.
not exceed 0.003 for mom ent-resisting wall frames ,

unl ess lateral reinforcement as defined in Sec tion
fOllowin g:
In columns and pi ers, the dea l di stance helwccil vcrti cal

reinforcin g bars sh all not be less than one and one-half
lime s the nomina l bil!' diameter. nor less than 40 mm.
708.2.2.3 Cover
All reinforcin g bars shall be completely embedded in
monar or grout and shall ha ve a co ve r of not ICss than .18
mm nor Jess th<ln2.5 (ft,.
708.2.2.4 Standard Hooks
A standard hook shall be one of the following:
I,
A 180degrce turn plu..- an extension of <II least four bar

diameters. but not less thiiJl 60 mm ;u the free end of
the bar.
2.
A I 35 degree turn pi US an extensioll

diam eters at the free end of the bar.
Strain in reinforcement and masonry shall be assumed (0 be

directl y proportional to the distan ce from the neutral axis.
3.
A 90-degree turn plus an exten sion of at least 12 bar

diameters at the free end of the bar.
Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength f; for

grade of reinforcement used shall be taken as E~f times steel
st rain. For strains greater than that corresponding to J;.,
stress in reinforcement shall be considered indepcndent of
st rain and equal to1;..
708.2.2.5 Minimum Bend Diameter for Reinforcing Bars
Diameter of bend measured on the inside of a bar other th<lll

for stirrups and ties in sizes 10 111m through 16111111 shall not
be less than the values in Table 707-4
T ens ile strength of masonry walls shall be neglect ed ill

fl ex ural calculation of strength, except when computing
requirements for deflection.
Inside diameter of bends for sti rrups and lics shall not be
less than 4(", for 16 mill bars and smaller. For bars larger
than 16 mm di ameter of bend shall be in accordan ce with
Tabl e 707-4
708.2.6 .2.6 is lHili zed.
Relationship between masonry compressive stress and

masonry strain lIla y be assumed to be rectan gular as defined
by the following:
Masonry stress of 0.85 I'm shall be assumed uniformly
di stributed over an equivalent compression zone bounded
by edges of the cross section and a straight line located
or at
least six bar
708.2.2.6 Development
The calculated tension or compression reinforcement shall
be developed in accordance with the following pro visions:
The embedment length of reinforcement
determined by Formula (708-12).
111
National Structural Cod e of the Philippines 6 Edition Volume 1
shall
be
730
CHAI'TEI11
Masonry
008-12)
where;
(70S- J})
708.2.3.3 Balanced Reinforcement

Compression Limit Statf.'.
I.
The distribut io n of strain across th e sectio!) shall be

assumed (0 vary linearly from the maximum usable
strain, e"III' at th e extreme compressio n fiber of the
element, to II yie ld strain of fiE"~ at the ex treme tensioll
fiber of the clement.
..
2.
Compression fo rces shail be in equili brium with the

sum of tcns io n fo rces in the reinforcement and lhe
maximum ax ial load associated with a load ing
combinati on I .OD + I .OL + ( I AE or 1. 3 W).
708.2.2.7 Splices
Reinforcement splices shal! comply with one of the

followin g:
I.
The minimum length of lap for bl:lrs shall be 300

or the length determined by Formula (708~J 4).
2.
',= '",./'
Illlll
(708 14)
Bars spliced by non,contact lap sp lices sha ll be spaced

transversely a distance not greater than one fifth th e
required length of lap or more than 200 rnm.
2.
3.
for
Cilcullili on of the b.li<.lllced reinrOrtT IllCIl1 ratio, PI" shall be

b'lsed on the following assu mption s:
K shall 1101 exceed Jd".

The minill lulll embedment Icngtll o f' reinforceme nt shal l he
300 Illlll .
Ratio
1. The reinforcement shall be assum ed to be uniformly

distributed over the depth of the clemen t and the.
balanced rei nforcement ratio shal l be calculated as th e
area of this reinforce ment di vided by th e net :l rCll of the
clemen t.
4.
A ll longitudinal reinforcement sha ll be included ill

calcu lating the balanced reinforcement ratio except that
the contribution of compression reinforcement 10
resistance of co mpressive loads shall not be
considered .
A welded splice shall have the bars bu((cd and welded

to develop in tension 125 perce nt of the yield strength
of th e bar.!,..
708.2.3.4 Required Strength
Mechanical splices shall have the bars connected to

develop in tension Of compress ion, as required , al least
125 percen t of the yield strength of th e bar.f,..
Except as req uired by Sections 708.2.3.6 thro ugh

708.2.3. 12, the requi red strengt h shall be determi ned in
accordance with Secti on 708. 1.3.
708.2.3 Design of Beams, Piers and Columns

708.2.3.1 General
The requirements of thi s section are for the design o f
masonry beams, piers and columns.
The value of /,,,, shall not be less than 10 MPa. For

computational purposes, the value of/,,,, shall not exceed 28
MPa.
708.2.3.2 Design Ass umptions
Member design forces shall be based on an analysis whi ch

considers the relati ve stiffness of structural members. The
calcu lation of lateral stiffness shall include (he contribution
of all beams, piers and columns.
The effects of cracking on member stiffness shall be
considered .
Thc drift ratio of piers and columns shall sati sfy the limits
specified in Chapter 2.
708.2.3.5 Design Strength
Design strength provided by beam, pier or column cross

sec ti ons in terms of axia l force, shear and momen t shall beco mputed as the nominal strength multiplied by the
applicable strength -redu ction factor, cpo specified in Secti on
708. 104.
708.2.3.6 Nominal Strength
708.2.3.6.1 Nominal Axial and Flexural Strength
Thc nomina l axial st rength. P", and th e nomi na! n ex u r~d
stre ngt h. M", of a cross' secti on s hall be determ ined ;;\
accord ance
wit h
the
design
i\SSlimpt ions
or
Secti on 708.2.1.2 an d 708.2.3.2.
The maximum nominal axial compressive strength shall be

determined in accorda nce with Formula (708- 15).
p" = 0.8010.85/,,,, (A, - A ,) +fA,]
(70S-lS)
708.2.3.6.2 Nominal Shear Strength

The nomi nal shear strengt h shal l be
(708-16)
Associatior: of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAPTEn l l\1asonry
whe re:
Exception:
(708 17)
and
/31
V, = A,P,J;.
(708 I8)
Where seismic loads are derermill ed bfJSed 011 Rw 1101

greater than three and where all joirus satisfy the
provisions of Section 708.2.6,2.9, the piers may be used to
provide seismic load resistance.
708.2,3.6.2 Nominlll Shellr Strength
708.2.3,9 Dimensional L,imits
The nominal shear strength shall be:
Dimcnsions shall be in accordance wi th th e following:
1.
Thc ' nominal shear strength shall not exceed the value
given in Table 708 I.
2.
The va lue of V"' shall be assumed to be zero within any

region subjected to net tension factored loads.
3.
The va lue of V", shall be ass umed 10 be J 70 kPa where

M is greH1c r th.Ul 0.7 Mil" The required momen!. Mil>
"
for seismic design for compa rison with the 0.7 M"
V,\)u c of this section shall bc based on an R ... of 3.
J.
Beams
1.1 Thc nominal width of a beam shall not he
le~s
than 150
mm .
1.2 The clear di stance between local ions of laleral bracing
of the compression side of the beam shall not exceed
32 timcs thc leasl width of the compression area.
1.3 The nominal depth of a bea m shall not be less than 200
m ill.
I.
2.
Piers
Wh ere transverse reinforcement is required, thc

maximum spacing shall not exceed one half the depth
of th e member nor J 200 mm.
2. 1 The nominal width of a pier shalinOl be less than 153

mill and shall !lot exceed 400 mill .
2.
Flex ural reinforcement shall be uniformly di stribut ed

througho ut th e depth of the clement.
3.
Flexural clements subjected to load reversals shall be

symmetricall y reinforced.
2.2 The distance between lateral supports of a pier shall

not exceed 30 times the nominal width of the piers
except as provided for in Section 708.2.3.9, Itcm 2.3.
4.
The no mi na l moment strengt h at any sec tion along a

member shall not be less than one fourth of the
maxi mum momcnt strength.
S.
The flex ural rei nforcement rat io, p, shall not exceed
0.5 Ph.
6.
Lap splices shall comply with rhe provisions of Secti on

708.2.2.7.
7,
Welded splices and mechanical splices which develop

at leas t 125 percent of tile specified yield strength of a
bar may be used for splicing the reinforcemcnt. Not
more than two longitudinal bars shall be spliced at It
section. The distance between splices of adjacent bars
shall be at least 750 mm along the longilUdinai axis.
8.
Specified yield strength of reinforccmcll! shall not

exceed 415 MPa. The actual yield st rengt h based 011
mill tcsts shall not exceed 1.25 times the specificd
yield st rength.
708.2.3.8 Seismic Design Provisions
The lateral seismic load resistance in any line or story level

shall be provided by shear walls or wall frames, or a
combination of shear walls and wall frames. Shear walls
and wall frames shall provide at least 80 percent of the
lateral stiffness in any line or story level.
2.3 When the distance between lateral supports of a pier

exceeds 30 times the nominal width of 1he pier, the
provisions of Section 708.2.4 shall be used fo r design.
2.4 The nominal lenglh of a picr shall not be less than three
tillles the no minal width of lhe pier. The nomi nal
length of a picr shall not be greater tha n six times thc
nominal width of the pier. The clear height of a pier
shall not exceed fi ve tin1es the nomina l length or the
pier.
Exception:
The length of a pier may be equal to the width of the pier
wh en the axial force at the location of maximum moment i.'f
less than 0.04 f

3.
A,.
Columns
3.1 The nomina! widt h of a column shn Jl
l10t
he less th an
300 mill.
3.2 The di.'ilance bet ween lateral supports of" colullllI shall
not excced 30 times Ihe nominal widt h orlhe column ,
3.3 Thc nomina l lengt h of a CO)UIIl Il shall not be less th an
300 n1ln an d not greater th an threc tim es the nomi nal
width of the column.
National Structural Code of th o Pililippincs 6'" Edition Volume 1
7<32
CHAI'TUl 7 . Masonry
708.2.3.10 Bellms
708.2.3.10.1 Scope
Members designed primarily to resist flexure shall comply
with the requirements of this section. The factored axial
compressive force Oil a beam shall not exceed (LOS A,I'm.
708.2.3.10.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
708.2.3.1 1.3 Transverse Udnforcement

Transverse reinforcement shall be provided where V
exceeds VII!' Required shear, VII' shall include the effects of
drift. The vllluc of VI< shall be based on LlM . When
transverse shear reinforcement is required, the following
provisions shall apply:
I.
Shear reinforcement shall be hooked around the

extreme longitudinal bars with' a 180~degree hook.
Alternatively, at wall intersections, transverse
reinforcement with a 90-degrcc standard hook around a
vertical bar in the intersecting wall shall be permitted.
2.
The minimum transverse reinforcement ratio shall be

0.0015.
J. The variation in the- longitudinal reinforcing bars shall

110( be greater than one bar size. Not more
li~an two bar
sizes shall be used in a beam.
2.
The nominal flexural strength of a beam shall not be

less than 1.3 times the nominal cracking moment
strength of the beam. The modulus of rupture, f" for

this calculation shall be assumed 10 be 1.6 MPa.
708.2.3.10.3 Transverse ReinfOl'Cemcnt
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided where VI'
exceeds Vm' Required shear, VI" shall include the effects of
the drift. The value of VII shall be based on .dM . When
transverse shear reinforcement is required, the following
provisions shall apply:
708.2.3.12 Columns
708.2.3.12.1 Scope
Columns shall comply with the requirements of this section.
708.2.3.12.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement

Longitudinal reinforcement shall be.a minimum of four
bars, one in each corner of the column.
1.
Shear reinforcement shall be a single bar with

degree hook at each end.
2.
Shear reinforcement shall be hooked around the

longitudinal reinforcement.
3.
The min. transverse shear reinforcement ratio shall be

0.0007.
I.
Lateral ties shall be provided in accordance wilh

Section 706.3.6.
4.
The first transverse bar shall not be more than one.

fourth of the beam depth from the end of the beam.
2.
Minimum lateral reinforcement area shall be 0.0018 A g .
J 80-
I.
Maximum reinforcement area shall be 0.03 Ac.
2.
Minimum reinforcement area shall be 0.005 A.,.
708.2.3.12.3. Lateral Tics
708.2.3.12.4 Construction
708.2.3.10.4 COllstruction
Columns shall be solid grouted.
Beams shall be solid grouted.
708.2.4 Wan Design for Out-of-Plane Loads
708.2.3.11 Piers
708.2.4.1 General
708.2.3.11.1 Scope
Piers proportioned to resist flexure and shear in conjunction

with axial load shall comply with the requirements o/" this
section. The factored axial compression on the piers shall
not exceed 0.3 AJ'",.
708.2.3.1l.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement

A pier subjected to in-plane stress reversals shall be
longitudinally reinforced symmctrical!y Oil both sides of the
neutral axis of the pier.
1.
Olle bar shall be provided in the end cells.
2.
The minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio shall be

0.0007.
The requirements of this section are for the design of W,il is

for out-of-plane loads.
708.2.4.2 Maximum Reinforcement

The reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 0.5 p".
708.2.4.3 Moment and Deflection Calculations
All moment and deflection calculations in Seclion 7(!; 7.L1
are based Oil simple support conditions top and b,'.. )In.
Other SUppOI1 and fixity conditions, moments :tnd
deflections shall be calculated using established principles
of mechanics.
708.2.4.4 Walls with Axial Load of 0.041'm
or
less
The nominal shear strength shall be determined by Formula

(XOH -26).
The procedures SCI forth in thi s secti on, which c() ll ~ i dcr the
slende rness of walls by represellting e ffe cts of Hxial forces
and deflection in cakul<11 ioll or moments, shall be used

when the vertical load stress at the locat io n of maximum
moment docs not exceed 0.04/'1II as comput ed by Formula
(708- 19). The vaillc of!,,,, sha lillot excecd 40 MPa.
P", + PI
-----.
<
() 04 j"
Ag
_.
(7(i8-19)
III
(708-26)
708.2.4.6 Dellectlon Design
The mid-height deflcction, 6;, under service lateral and

vertical loads (without load factors) shall be limited by the
relation:
(708-27)
6 , = 0.007 Ii
Walls shall ha ve
<t
minimum (hi ckncss of 150 111m.
P6 effec ts shall be included in deflect ion calculation. The
Required moment and axial force shall be det ermi ned at the
mid -height of the wall and shall be used for design. The
midheight deflection shall be computed with the following

formula :
fa clOrcd moment, M,,, .11 the midhcight of the wall sha ll be

determined by Forliluia (708 20).
(708 -28)
It'
,,2
I'
- u
' P6.
"--8+ p11/'2+
/I
II
(708-20)
where:
(70829)
Li/l ;:: deflection at mid -height of wall due to factored loads

(708'-2 1)
The cracking momcnt strength of the wall shall be

determin ed from the formul a:
(708 -30)
M" = Sj',
The des ign st rength for out-of-plane wall loading shall be

determined by Formul a (708-22)_
(708-22)
J.
where:
Mo = A"j,. (d - aI2)
A Jr = (AJ;.
(J
Th e modulus of mplUre,J,. shall be as follows:
-I-
(708-2 3)
Pu}J;., effective are;'l of steel
(708-24)
II' =O.33..J1:
2.
=(P" + A,j,.) /0.85 I'", b, depth of stress bl ock due to

factored loads
(708-25)
708.2.4.5 Wall with Axial Load Greater than O.04['m

The procedures set forth in this section shall be used for the
design of masonry walls wh en the vertical load stresses at
the location of maximum mome nt exceed 0.04/,,,, but are
less [han 0.2/,,,, and the slenderness ratio h 'II docs not
exceed 30.
Design strength provided by the wall cross secti on in terms

of aXi al force, shear and moment shall be computed as the
nominal strength multipli ed by the applic ab le strengthreduction factor, <fl, speci fi ed in Section 708.1.4. Walls
shall be .propol1ioned such that the desi gn strength exceeds
the required strength.
For fully grouted hollow-unit masonry,
' 1.6 MPa maxim um
(708 -3 1)
For pal1iall y grouted hollow-unit masonry,
f" = 0.2 1.J1: . 0.86 MPa ma xi mum
(708-32)
3. For two-wythe brick masonry,
j,. = O.166..} I'm ,0,86 kPa
(708 -
maximum
33)
708.2.5 Wall Design for In-Plane Loads

708.2.5.1 General
The req uireme nts of this section are for the desi gn of walls
for in-plane loads.
The value of/'IIJ shall not be less than 10 MPa
than 28 MP.
1101'
greater
7<34
CHAPlEH! Masonry
3.
Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following:
J.
Minimulll reinforcement shall be provided in

accordance with Section 706.1.12.4, Item 2.3, for all
seismic areas using this method of analysis.
2.
When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the

nominal flexural strength of the shear wall shall bc at
least 1.8 times the cracking moment strcngth of a fully
grouted wall or 3.0 timcs the cracking momcnt strength
of a partially grouted wall from Formula (708-30).
3.
4.
The amount of vertical reinforcement shall not be less

than one half the horizontal reinforcement.
Spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region

defined in Section 708.2.5.5, Item 3, shall not exceed
three tillles the nominal wall thickness nor 600 mm.
708.2.5.3 Design Strength
Design strength provided by thc shear wall cross section in

terms of axial force, shear and moment shall be computed
as the nominal strength Illultiplied by the applicable
strength-reduction factor, , specified in Section 708.1.4.3.
r:or all cross sections within the region defined by the base
of the shear wall and a plane at a distance L". above the base
of the shear wall, the nominal shear strength shaH be
determined from Formula (708-39).
(708-39;
The required shear strength for this region shaH be

calculated at a distance L,,/2 above the base of the shear
wall, but not to exceed one half story height.
For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear
wall shall be determined from Formula (708-36).
708.2.5.6 Boundary Members
Boundary members shall be as follows:
J.
Boundary mcmbers shall bc provided at the boundaries

of shear walls when the compressive strains in the wall
exceed 0.0015. The strain shal! be determined llsing
factored forces and R". equal to i.5.
2.
The minimum length of the boundary member shall be

three times the thickness of the wall, but shall include
all areas where the compressive strain per Section
2108.2.6.2.7 is greater than 0.001 S.
3.
Lateral reinforcement shall be provided for the

boundaryelcments. The latcral reinforcement shall be
a minimum of 10 111m diameter at a maximum of 200
111m spacing within the grouted core or equivalent
confinement which can develop an ultimate
compressive masonry strain of at least 0.006.
708.2.5.4 Axial Strength
The nominal axial strength of the shear wal! supporting

axial loads only shall be calculated by Formula (708-34).
P" = 0.851'" (A,,- A,J + J; A,
(708-34)
Axial design strength provided by the shear wall cross

section shall satisfy Formula (708-35).
P,,::; 0.80
<P
Po
(708-35)
708.2.6 Design of Moment-Resisting Wall Frames
708.2.5.5 Shear Strength

Shear strength shall be as follows:
1.
2.
For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds

the shear corresponding to development of its nomin:tl
flexural strength, two sheacregions exist.
708.2.6.1 General Requirements
The nominal shear strength shall be determined using

cithcr Item 2 or 3 below. Maximum nominal shear
strength values arc detemlined from Table 708-1.
The nominal shear strength of the shear wall shaH be
determined from Formula (708-36), exccpt as provided
in Item 3 below
708.2.6.1.1 Scope
The requirements of this section arc for the design of fully
grouted moment -resisti ng wall frames constructed (,r
reinforced open-end hollow~unit concrete or hollowtini~
clay masonry.
(708-36)
where:
(708-37)
and
(708-38)
CHAPTEn'1 . Maso nry
73:)
708.2.6.2,3 Dcsign Asslimption for Nominal Strength

708.2.6.1.2 Dimcnsional Limits
Dimensions shall he in accordance with
lIH.~
following:
708.2.6.1.2.1 !loa illS

Clear span for the beam shall not be less than two times its
dcpth.
Tile nominal strength of member cross sections shall be

bHscd on assulnptions pn;scribed in Section 708.2. J .2.
The valu e of ['lit shall not he less th an 10 MPa or greate r

than 2H MPa.
708.2.6.2.4 Reinforcement
The nominal depth of lhe beam sha!! not be less than two
units or 400 n1ln, wh ichever is greater. Th e no minal beam
depth to nominal bCHIll width f<ltio sh:11I not exceed 6.
The nomin,,1 moment strength at any section along a
The nominal width of the beam shall he the great er of 2(X)

mm or 1126 of the clear spall between pier fa ces .
Lu]> splices shall be as defined in Section 708.2.2.7. The

center of the lap splice shall be the center of th e member
clear length.
708.2.6.1.2.2 Piers
The nominal depth of pi ers shall not exceed 2.4 m. Nominal
depth shall not be less than two full units or HOO mm,
wh ichever is gre.lIer.
T he nominal wid th of' pi ers shall Ilot he less than the
nominal width of th e beam, nO!' less than 2(X) mill OJ' 1114 or
the clear height bel wee n beam faces, whichever is greater.
member shaH not be less tlwll one -fourlh of the highcr

mOllle nl strength provided ill the two ends of the member.
Welded splices and mechanical connection conforming to

Sec ti on 412.! 4.3. Item J throu gh 4 of UBC, may be used
for splicing the reinforcelllenl al .my section provided not
more than alternate longitudinal b:trs arc spliced at section,
and the di stance between splices or alternate bars is at least
600 111111 along the longitudinal axis.
The clear height-to-dcpth ratio of pier shall not exceed 5.
Reinforcement shall not have a specified yield strength

greater Ihan 415 MPa. The actual yield strength based on
mill tes ts shall not exceed the specified yield strength times
708.2.6.1.2.3 AlIlllysis
1.3.
Member desi gn forces sha ll he the based 011 an analysis

which considers the rel ative stiffness of pier and beam
lllC!mbcr, includin g th e stiffening influence of joint s.
The calculation or beam mOlllen! cap;l city for the
determination of pier design shall include any contribution
of floor slab reinforcement.
The out-of-plane drift ratio of all piers shal ! sati sfy the drift
ratio limits specified in Section 2-47.
708.2.6.2 Design Procedure
708.2.6.2.1 Required Strength
Except as required by the Sections 708 .2.6.7 and
708.2.6,2.8, the required strength shall be determined in
accordance with Section 708. J.3
708.2.6.2.2 Design Strength
Design strength provided by frame memb er cross sections

force, shear and mom elH shall be
c.omputed as the nominal strength multiplied by the
applicable strength-redu ction factor. <p , specified in Section
708.1.4.4
in terms of axial
108.2.6.2.5 Flexural Mem bers (Hearn)

Requirements of this secti on apply !O beams proportioned
primarily to resist flexure a ~ follows.
The axial compressive force on beams due to factored loads

shall not exceed O. J 0 A,J'III.
1. Longitudinal Reinrorcement
At any section of a beam, each masonry unit through the
beam depth shall contain longitudinal reinforcement.
The variation in the longitudinal reinforcement area

between units at any section shall not be greater than 50
percellt, except multiple diam . 12 bars shall not be greater
Ihan 100 percent of the minimum area of longitudinal
rei nforcement contained by an y one un it, except where
splices occ ur.
Minimum reinforcement ratio calculated over the gross
cross section shall be 0.002.

Maximum reinforcemcnt rati o calculated over the gross
cross section shall be 0.15 j'", / f,.
Members shall be proportioned such that the design

strength exceeds the required strength.
National Stru ctu ra l Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
/<36
CHAPTEF! ? . Masonry
The minimuill transverse rcinfofCClllCrH ratio shall be
2.
O.O() I S
Transverse Ucinfor't'll1ent
Tran sverse rci llfon.:cmcllt shall be hooked arou nd top and

hOIlOIll longilUdinal hilI's wit h <I standard IRO-dcgrec hook,
as defined in Sec tion 708.2,-2.4 , and shall he single pieces.
:-"ithin an end region extending one beam depth from pi cr
faces and at any region at which beam flexural yielding

may occur during seismic or wind l()ad i nl~, maximuJll
spacing or transverse reinforcement shall not' exceed one
fOllJ1h the nominal depth of the bc;;m:
3. Lateral Reillfor'cclllcnt
L ueral rein forcemen t shall be pro vided to coniine the
grouted core when co mpressive strains clue 10 axial and
bending forces exceed 0.0015, corresponding 10 factored
forces with Rw equul to 1.5. The unconfined portion of the
cross section with strain exceeding 0.0015 shall be
neglected in computing the nominal strengt h of the sec tion.
total crossscct ionHI area of rectangul ar tie
rei nforcement for the confined core shall not he less than :
Thc
The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not

exceed one hal f the nominal depth of the beam.
Minimum reinforce ment ratio shall be 0.00]5
The first transverse bar shall not be morc than 100 mm
from the face of the pier.
708.2.6.2.6 Memuers Suujected to Axial Force and

Flexure
The requirements set fonh in this subsection apply to piers
proportioned 10 resist flexure in conjuJlction with axi al
loads.
1. Longitudinal Reinforcement
A minimum of four longitudinal bars shall be provided at
all sections o f every pier.
(708-40)
Alternati vely, equivalent confinement which can develop
an ultimate compressive strain of at least 0.006 may be
substituted for rectangular lie reinforcemcnt.
708.2.6.2.7 I'ier Design Forces
Pier nominal momCIll strength shall not be less than 1.6
times the pier moment corresponding to the development of
th e beam plastic hin ges, cxcept at the foundati on level.
Pier axial load based on the development of beam plastic
hinges in accordance with the paragraph above and
including factored dead an d li ve loads shall no t exceed 0.15
Anf'm
Flexural rei nforcement shall be distributed across the

member depth. Variation in reinforcement area between
reinforced cells shall not exceed 50 percent.
Minimum rei nforcement ratio calcu lated over the gross

cross seclion shall be 0.002
Maximum reinforcement ratio calcul ated over the gross
cross seclion shall be 0.15 I'm ( /'"
Maximum bar diameter shall be one eight nominal width of
The drift rati o of piers shall satisfy the limits specified in

Chapler 2.
The. effects of cracking on member stiffness shall be

co nsidered .
The base plastic hinge of the picr must form immediately
adjacent (0 the leve l of Ialeral support provided at the base
or fou ndation.
the pier.
708.2.6.2.8 Shear Design.
2. Transverse Reinforcement
1. General
Beam and pier Ilom in,ll she:\! slrength shall not be less thlln
1.4 limcs the shears cOIH',sponding ( 0 the development of
lhe fle xu ral yieldi ng.
Tran sverse reinforcement shall be hooked arou nd the

extreme longitudi nal b.ars wi th stand ard 180-degree hook as
defined in Secl ion 708 .2.2.4.
Within an end region ex tending one pi er dept h from the end

of the beam, and at allY region at wh ic h fl exural yielding
may OCCllr durin g seismic or wind loading, the maximum
spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed olle
fourth the nominal depth of the pier.
The max imulIl spacing of tran sverse reinforcemcni shall not
exceed one half th e nominal depth of the pier.
It sha ll be assum cd in the calcu lation of mcmber shear force

tllat moments of opposite sign act at the joint faces and that
the member is loaded with the tributary gravi ty load along
its span.
2. Vertical Memuer Shear Strength

The nominal shea r s(renglh shall be determined from
Formula (708-4 1).
CHAPTER l . Masonry
(10X-41)
where:
(708-42)
737
Picr longitudinal rcinfon:cmel1! tcrminating in a beam shall

be extended to the fur face oj' thc bcam and an chored by a
sumdard 90 or 180 degree hook, as defined in Section
708.2.2.4, bellt back to the beam.
and
2. Transverse Rcinforcemcnt
(708-43)
The vallie of II", shall bc zero within an end "cginn
extending one pier depth from beam fllecs and at any region
where pier flexural yielding may occur during seismic
loading. clOd at pi crs s ubj ected
Special horizontal joint shear reinforcement crossing a

pote nrial corner to corner diagonal joint shear crack. and
an chored by stf\lldard hooks, as defincd in Section
708 .2.2.4, around the ext re me pier reinforcing bars shall be
pro vided suc h thtlt
nel lcns ioll fa c tored loads.

The nominal pier shear strength, V,p 5h,,11 1101 exceed the
10
value determined from Table 708-1.
3. Beam Shear Strength

The nominal shear strength shall be determined from
Formula (708-44).
II",
= 001 A"".jT.,~
The value of \/m shnll be zero wit hin an end region
loading.
The nominal beam shea r strength, V,,, shall be dc1Crmined

frol1l Formula (708-4 5).
Am"R.
Venical shear forces may be considered to be carried by a

combination of masonry shear resisting mechanisms and
tru ss mechanism involving intermediate pier reinforcing
bars.
(708 -44)
extending one beam depth from pier faces and to any region
at which beam fl exure yielding may occur during seismic
V'I '5:0.33
(708-48)
3. Shear Strength
The nominal horizontal she ar strength of lbe joint shall not
exceed:
0.58..ff:: or 2.5 MPa, whichever is less.
<~~~i~;~~';";~.<:~~1~~r:~{lf7~ii~~~rltW~~~~~f~;~~1~~B1~f~&.;;~~1~;
(708-45)
708.2.6.2.9 Joints
1. General Requircl11cllts
Where reinforcing bars extend through a join t, th e joint
dimensions shall be proportioned such thaI
h, > 57827 d"" I f',
(708-46)
h, > 21685 d"" / f',
(708-47)
and
The grout strength shall not exceed 35 MPa for the

purposes of Formula (7 08-46) and (708-47).
Joint shear forces shall be calculated on the assumptiollthat

the stress in all flex ural tension reinforcement of the beams
at that pier faces is J.4 f~..
Strength or joint shall be governed by the appropriate
strength reduction factors specified in Secti on 708.1.4.4.
Deam longitudinal reinforce ment terminating in a pier shall

be extended to the far face of the pier and anchored by a
s tandard 90 or 180 degree hook, as defin ed in Section
708.2.2.4, bent back to the beam.
th
National Stru ctura l Code of the Pililippi nes 6 Edition Volum e 1
/ :38
CHi\PTEH 7 Masonry
709.2.1.3 Dcsign Strcngth
709.1 Scope
The seismic design requirements of this section apply to the
design of masonry and the construction of masonry building
clements, except glass unit masonry, for all seismic
The design strength of masonry provided by a mcmber, its

conncctions to othcr mcmbers and its cross sections in
terms of flexure, axial load, and shear shall be taken ilS the.
nominal strength multiplied by a strength reduction factor,
(a) Axial load and flcxure (.;.':cept for llexural
performance categories as defined in ASCE 7.
tension in unreinf0rced masonry

(b) Flexural tension in unreinforced masonry
709.2 General
Masonry structures and masonry elements shall comply
(e) Shear
(d) Shear and tension in anchor bolts embedded
with the requirements of Sections 709,3 through 709.7

based on Seismic Performance Categories A, B, C, D or E
as defined on ASCE 7. In addition, masonry structures and
masonry clements shall comply with either the

requirements of Section 706 or the requirerncnls of Section
709.2.1
709.2.1 Strength Requirement

For masonry struclures that are nol designed in accordance
with Section 706, the provisions of this section shall apply.
The design strength of masonry structures and masonry
elements shall be at least equal to the required strength
determined in accordance with this section, except for
masonry structures and masonry elements in Seismic
Performance Category A designed in accordance with the
provisions of Section 7 J O.
709.2.1.1 Required Strength
RequiI:ed strength, U, to resist the seismic forces in such
combinations with gravity and other loads, including load
factors, shall be as required in the em1hquake loads section
of ASCE 7, except that nonbearing masonry walls shall be
designed for the seismic force applied perpendicuhu' to the
plane of the wall and uniformly distributed over the wall
area in lieu of the provisions of ASCE 7 Section 9.8. L L
709.2.1.2 Nominal Strength
The nominal strength of masonry shall be taken as 2.5 times
the allowable stress value. The allowable stress values shaH
be determincd in accordance with Section 707.2 or Section
707.3 and arc permitted to be increased by one-third (1/3)
for load combinations including earthquake.
in masonry
0= 0.80
0=O.4()
0=0.60
0=0.60
709.2.1.4 Drift Limits

The calculated storey drift of masonry structures due to the
combination of seismic forces and gravity loads shall nut
cxceed o.cxn times the storey hcight.
709.3 Seismic Performance Category A
Structures in Seismic Performance Category A shall
comply with the requirements of Sections 707, 708 alld
710.
709.3.1 Anchorage of Masonr), Walls

Masonry walls shall be anchored to the roof and aU floors
that provide lateral support for the wall. The anchorage
shall provide a direct connection between the walls and the
floor or roof construction. The connections shall be capable
of resisting the greater of a seismic lateral force induced by
the wall or 14590 times the effective pcak velocity- related
acceleration, N/m of wall.
709.4 Seismic. Performance Category B
Structures in Seisrnic Performancc Category B shall comply
with the requirements of Seismic Performance Category A
and to the additional requirements of this section. The
lateral force resisting system shall be designed to comply
with the requirements of Sections 707 and 708.
709.5 Seismic Performance Category C
Structures in Seismic Performance Category C shaH comp).
with the requirements of Seismic Perf"onnancc Category B
and to the additional requirements of this section.
CHAPTEH'1 . Masonry
709.5.1 Dcsign of Elements that are Not Part of Latcral

F()rce~nesisting System
709.5.1.1 Load Bearing Frames
Load bearing frames or columns that are not part of the
latera! force resisting system shall be analyzed as to their
effect on the response of the system. Such frames or
columns shall be adequate for vertical load carrying
capacity and induced moment duel to 'the design story drift.
709.5.1.2 Masonry Walls and Elements

Masonry p;:uiition walls, masonry screen walls and other
masonry elements that are not designed to resist vertical or
lateral loads, other than those induced by their own mass,
shall be isolated from the structure so that vertical and
lateral forces are not imparted to these elements. Isolation
joints and connectors between these elements and the
structure shall be designed to accollllllodate the design story
drift.
709.5.1.3 Reinfol"{'cment Requirements for Masonry

Elements
Masonry elements listed in Section 709.5. 1.2 shall be

reinforced in either the horizontal or vertical direction in
accordance with the following:
709.5.1.3.1 Horizontal Reinforcement
Horizontal joint reinforcement shall consist of at least two
longitudinal WI.7 wires spaced not more than 400 mill for
walls greater than 100 mill in width and at least one
longitudinal WI.7 wire spaced not more 400 mm for walls
not exceeding 100 111m in width; or at least one 12 111111
diameter bar spaced not more than 1.2 Jl1. Where two
longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement are used, the space
between these wires shall be the widest that the 1110liar joint
will accommodate. Horizontal reinforcement shall be
provided within 400mm of the top and bottom of these
masonry elements.
709.5.1.3.2 Vertical Reinforcemen't
Vertical rei nforcement shall consist of at least one 12 mm
diameter bar spaced not more than 1.2 Ill. Vertical
reinforcement shall be located within 400 mm of the ends
of masonry walls.
709.5.2 Design of Elements titat are Part of the
Force - Resisting System
L~ttenll
709.5.2.1 Connections to Masonry Shear Walls

Connectors shall be provided to transfer forces between
masonry walls and horizontal elements in accordance with
the requirements of Section 706. Connectors shall be
designed to transfer horizontal design forces acting either
/-3q
perpendicular or parallel to the wall, but not less than 2.9

kN/m of wall. The maximum spacing between connectors
shall be 1.2
111.
709.5.2.2 Connections to Masonry Columns

Connectors shall be provided to transfer forces between
masonry columns and horizontal clemcnts in accordance
with thc requirements of Section 706. Where anchor bolts
are llsed to connect horizontal clements to the tops of
columns, anchor bollS shall be placed within lateral ties.
Lateral tics shall enclose both the vertical bars in the
column and the anchor bolts. There shall be a minimum of
two 12 mm diameter lateral tics provided in the top 125 mm
of the column.
.
709.5.2.3 Minimum Reinforcement Requirements for
Masonry Shear Walls
Vertical reinforcement of at least 129 mm 2 in crosssectional area shall be provided at comers, within 400 mill
of each side of openings, within 200 mm of each side of
movement joints, within 200 mm of the ends of walls, and
at a maximum spacing of 3.0111.
Horizontal joint reinforcement shal! consist of at least two
WI.7 wires spaced not more than 400 mm; or bond beam
reinforcement shall be pr~:)Vided of at least 129 mm 2 in
cross-sectional area spaced not more than 3.0 m. Horizontal
reinforcement shall aiso be provided at the bottom and top
of wall openings and shall extend not less than 600 mm nor
Jess than 40 bar diameters past the opening; continuously at
structurally connected roof and floor levels; and within 400
mill of thy top of walls.
709.6 Seismic Performance Category D
Structures in Seismic Performance Category D shall
comply with the requirements of Seismic Performance
Category C and to the additional requirements of this
section.
709.6.1 Design Requirements
Masonry clements other than those covered by Section
709.5. 1.2 sh,1I1 be designed in accordance with the
requirements of Sections 707.2 and 708.2.
709.6.2 Minimum Reinforcement Requirements for
Masonry 'Valls
Masonry walls other than those covered by Section
709.5.1.3 shall be reinforced in both the vertical and
horizontal direction. The slim of the cross-sectional area of
horizontal and vertical reinforcement shaH be at least 0.002
times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall, and the
minimum cross-sectional area in each direction shall be not
less than 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area of the
wall. Reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed. The
th
7-10
C HAPH:l-11
IV1.:1S01lf}1
I1l<1XimUIll spacing o f rc infon.:cmcilt sha ll hc 1.2 III provided

th at the w;lIls lIrc solid grouted and cons tructed of hollo w
opcrH~Jld units, hollo w units laid wi th full head joints or
two wythcs of so lid units. The ma xi mum slMc in g or
rcinfon;c rll CIl I shall be 600 Illlll for all other masonry.
SECTION 710
EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY
710.1 Height
Building relying Oil IlWS(}OI"Y will!s for late ral
resistance shall not exceed !() III inllcigill.
IO'ld
709.6.2.1 Shear '''all Reinforcement Requiremen ts

The maximum spacing of vertical and horizo ntal
reinforccment shall pc the Sllh'.llcr or; oncthird th e k~ngth
of th e shear wall, 911c-third the height of th e shear wull, 1.2
Ill . . The
minimuill cross-sectional area of vertical
reinforcement shall be one-third of the requi red shear
reinforcement. She;:lr reinforcement shall be anchored
.Iround ve rti cal reinforcing bars wit h .1 Slalldard hook.
710.2 Lateral Stability

Where the slrucill!"e depends 0 11 ll1i1sonry walls for lateral
stability, shear walls shall be provided parallel to the
direct ion of the lalcral forces r~si s t cd.
709.6.3 MinimullI Reinforcement for Masonry Col ulllils

L.ateral li es in mason ry columns shall be 5:p;lced nOI mor'c
Ihan 200 mill on cen tcr and shall bc <II lea ~;1 10 mill
diaillctcr. Latera l ti es sha ll be elllbedded in grout.
In each direclion in which shear walls <Ire requ ired for

lateral stabilit y, the minimum t: ulllul mivc le ngt h of she"'f
709.6.4 MHterial Requirements
Neither Type N mortar nor masonry cement shal l be used as

pan of th e lateral force resisting system.
709.6.5 Late"al Tie Anchorage
Standard hooks for lateral tic anchorage shall be either a
135 degree sta ndard hook or a J SO degree stand <lrd hook.
709.7 Seismic Performance Category E

Structures ill Seismi c Pelfonnance Category E shall com ply
with the req uirements of Seismi c Perform ance Category D
and to Ihe addi ti onal requircments of this section.
709.7.1 Design of Elements that
Force Resisting System
,\J'C
Not Part of Lateral
Stack bond masonry that is not pan of thc lateral forceres isting sys tem shall have a hori zontal cross secti onal area
of reinforcement of at least 0.0015 tim es the gross crosssec ti onal area of masonry. The maximum spacing of
hori zo ntal reinforcement shall be 600 mm. These elements
shall be solidly grouted and shall be constru c.ed o f hollow
open end units or two wythes of solid unit s.
709.7.2 Design of Elements that are Pal't of Lateral

Force Resisting System
St<lck bond Illaso nry thal is pa rt o f (he lateral force-res isti ng
system shall have a hOJi zontal cross secti onal area of
reinforcement of at least 0.0025 times the gross crosssecti onal arc<I of masonry. The ma ximum spacing o/"
hori zontal reinforcement shall be 400 mill. Thcse clements
shall be solidly grouted and shall be constructed of holl ow
open-cnd units or two wythes of solid units.
Minimulll nominal thickn ess

he 200 111 11l .
0 11
masonry shea r wall s shall
wall s provided shall be 0.4 times the dimension of the

building. The cumulative length oj" she ilI' walls shall not
Include openi ng.~.
The maximurll spacing o j" shea r WI.! !ls sll a!l flot exceed the
ratio listed in Table 710- I .
710.3 Compressive Stresses
710.3.1 General
Compressive stresses in masonry due to ve rt ical dcad loaJ."
plu s live loads, excluding wi nd or seismit: loads, shall Iv.:'
dctennined in accordance with Sct:lion 7 10.4.3. Dead <Iud
live IOilds shall be in uccordu ncc with th is code wi th
penni lied li ve load reduc tions.
The comprcssive stresses in maso nry shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table 7 J 0 2. The allowable slr(:ss(',,';
given in Table 71 0-2 for the weakest combination of the

units and mortar used in an y load wythe shall be used for
loaded wythes of multi wythe waH s.
710.3.3 Stress Calculations
Stresses shall bc calculated based on specified rather ~ '.
nominal dimensions. Calculated compressive slressc:: '. " ."
bc de term ined by di vi ding the design load by the gili ....;
cross-sectional arc,1 of the member. The arca oj" OpCIl >~'
ch<lses or recesses in wa lls shall not be inCl uded inlhe glOss
cross-sectional :lfCil of the W' IJI .
710.3.4 AncIror Bolts
Boll va lues shall not exceed those set forth ill Table 71O.j.
Association of Structura l Eng ineers of the Philippines
710.4 Lalcral Supp!u'l

Masonry walls sh Oll! be laterally supporlcd in eit her the'
horizoJltal or vertical direction no! exceeding (h e int erv al s
se t forth in T<lblc 7104
Lateral support shall he provided by cross walls. pilasters,
buttresses or structural framing members horit.ollli:llly or by
floors, roof or structural framing members vcrticalJy.
E.~ c cpt
for parapet' \;Valls. the rati o of height
10
nominal
thi ckness for cantilever Willis shall not exceed 6 for so lid
masonry or 4 for hollow masonry.
In computing the I'<\lio for cavily walls, the value of

thickness shall be the SUIllS of the nominal thickn ess of the
inner and outer wythes of the masonry. III walls co mposed
of different classes of units and monars, the ratio of height
or length to thickness shall /lol exceed that allowed fo r the
weakes t o r the combinations of unit s and monar of which
th e member is composed.
710.5 Minimum Thickness

710.5.1 General
Th e nominal thickness of masonry bearing walls in
buildings more than one story in height shall not be less
than 200 111m. Solid masonry walls in one-storey buildings
may be of 150 111m nominal thi ckness when not over 2.7 m
in height , provided that when gable construction is used, an
additional 1.8 111 is permitted to the peak of the gable.
Exception:
Th e thickness of unrein/arced grouted brick masonry walls
may be 50mm less than required by flii.'i section, bur i/l no
case less (han 150 111m.
710.5.2 Varialion in Thickness

Where a change in thickness due to minimum thickn ess
occurs between fl oor level s, th e greater thickness shall be
carried up to the higher floor level.
710.5.3 Decrease in Thickness
Wh ere walls of masonry of hollow units or rnasonr ybonded hollow walls are decrease in thi ck ness. a cours e or
courses of solid masonry shall be const ructed bet ween the
walls below and the thinner wall above, or special units or
construction shall be used to transmit th e loads from face
!> hells or wythes to the walls below.
710.5.4 I'arapels
Parapet walls shall be at least 200 mill in thickness and their

height -shall not exceed three times their thickness . The
parapet wall shall not be thinner than the wall below.
710.5.5 FOllndatioll Walls

Morl<lr uscd in nwsolll')' fou nd ation walls shall he
eitht~r
Type M or S.
Where the height of unb.liilllccti fiJI (ht~ight of flilishl.'d

grad e above basemcnt /loor or in side gradc) and the hei gh!
of the wall between lateral support docs not cxcced 2.4 Ill,
and when the equivalent Iluid weight 01' un balanced Iill
docs not exceed 480 kg/m 2, the. minimum thickncss of
foundation walls shall bc as set forth in 'rable 710~5.
Maximum depths of un balanced fill pcnniltcd in Table 7105 Illay be increased with the approval of the building
official when local soil condi tion s warrant such an increase.
Where the hcight of unbalanced fill, heigh t betwecil lateral
supports or equivalent fluid weight of unbalanced fill
exceeds that set forth above, foundation walls shall bc
designed in accordance with Chapter 3.
710.6 Bond
710.6.1 General
The facing and backing of multi-wythe masonry walls shall
be bonded in accordance with this section.
710.6.2 Masonry Headers
Where the facing an d backing of solid masonry
conslnlction are bonded by masonry headers, not less than 4
percent of the wall surface of each face slHllI be composed
of headers extending not less than 75 mm into thc backing.
The distance between adjacent full ~ le ngth headers shall not
exceed 600 mill either vertica!ly or horizontally. In walls in
..>,.'hieb a $ingle header does not extend th rough the wHII,
headers from opposite sides shall overlap at least 75 mm, or
headers from opposite sides shall be covered with another
header course overlapping the header below at least 75 mill .
Where two or more hollow unit s are used 10 make up {he

thickness of the wall, the stretcher courses shall be bonded
at vertical intervals not exceeding 865 mm by lapping at
least 75 mOl over the unit below, or by lapping at verti cal
intervals not exceeding 430 mm with units which are at
least 50 pe rcent greater in thi ckness than the units below.
710.6.3 Wall Tics
Where th e facing and backin g of masonry wall s are bonded
with 4.8 mill diameter wal! ties or metal tics of e-qllivi.i1cnl
stiffness embedded in the horizontal mOJ1ar joi nts, th ere
shall be ell least one metal tie for each 0.42 m2 or wall area.
Ties in allematc courses shall be staggered, tile maximum
vertical distance between tics shall not exceed 600 mm, and
the maximum horizontal distance shall not exceed 900 mill.
Rods ben I to rectangular shape shall be used with hollowmaso nry units laid with the cells vertical. III olher walls,
the ends of ties shall be bent to 90-degree angl es to provide
th
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volu me 1
hooks not less thall 50 mm long. Additiollal ties shall hc

prov ided a l 1.111 open ings, Spilccd !lot more (han 900 mill
apart aro und th e perimeter and. within 300 mm of the
opening.
The facing and b;!(' king of masonry Wil li s may be bonded
with prcfabri('ated joi nt reinforce ment. There sh<l!1 be at
least one cross wire serving as <I tic for each 0.25 111 2 of wall
arc'l. The verti c,,[ spacing of Ihe joint rei nforcement shal!
not exceed 406 mill . Cross wires of pre fabric:lled joint
reinforcement shall be at Ica~i No.9 gage wire. The
longitudinal wire shall be embedded in mortar.
I,
I
710.6.4 LOllgitudilllllllolld
In each wythe of masonry, head joints in successive co urses
shall be ofL.;;et at least one fourth of the unit length or the
wall s shall be reinforced longi tudinall y as required in
Seclioll 706. 1.1 2.3, IIem 4.
710.7 Allchorllgc
7]0.7.1 In(crsccting " '<Ills
Masonry walls depending 011 one another for lateral
support shall be an chored or bonded at locatio ns where th ey
meet or intersect by one of the following methods:
I.
2.
Fifty percen t of (he units at the intersection shall be

laid in an overlapping pattern, with alternating units
havin g a bearing of not less than 75 I11Ill on the unit
below.
Walls shall be anchored hy steel connectors having a
minimum section of 6 mm by 38 mOl with ends bent up
at least 50 111m, dr with cross pins to form anchorage.
Such anchors shall be al leas t 600 mm long and th e
maximum spacing shall be 1.2 rn verticall y.
I.
Wood fl oor joists ht'<tr ing on masonry wa lls shall be

an<: hored 10 the w~ 1 1I hy ;Ippro vcd mcwl strap :ulCho n;
a\ intervals not excc.eding !. 8 m . Joists paralle l ;1; i h,:
wall shall be anchored with melal straps sp;[(:(:,l l] '_,\
lHore than l .l{ m 011 center c:< tendin g over and under
mId secured to at leas t three joi sts. l3Iocking Shil ll lJt.
provided between joists at each strap anchor.
2.
Steel floor joists shall be anchorcd to masonry wall ,;

with 10 mill diamclCr bars, or their equ iv,lIcllt, "'p,l(X ';
not more than I.H m on celller. Where joist.'> :; '-,:
parallel to the wall , ancho rs shall be located at joi sts
cross bridging.
J.
Roof struclUrcs shall be tIllchored 10 1ll,Isollry w;-i' -;

with 12 I11Ill bolts at 1.8 III on center or their equivalent.
Bolts shall extend and be embedded at !cast 400 !')'!
into th e masonry. or be hooked or welded to Ij( l( i
than 130 mm l of bond he<llll re inforcement placed i i :;~
less than 150 mill from the top of the wall.
710,7.3 Walls Adjoining Structural Framing

Wherc wa lls arc dependcn t 011 the structu ra l ffa tne \"(;;.
latera l support, th ey shall be anchored to the s t rUt l"
members with metal anchors or keyed to th e Sln l'
members. Metal anch ors shall consist of 12 mill hl)u ~~
sp<lced al a max imum of 1.2 III on ce nter and el1lbcd d~:d ;"
least 100 mm into the masonry, or thei r equivalent arca.
710.8 Unbllrned Clay Maso nry
7 10.8.1 Gellcral
Maso nry of stabilized cl ay unburned units shall not be u~;ed

in any building more than one story in height. The
unsupported heigh t of every wa ll or unhunlcd clay units
shall not be more than 10 times the th ic kJless nfstleh w;: lls.
Bearing walls shall in no case be less than 400 n'r;1
th ickness. All footin g walls whi ch support maSOlJ'
unburned cl ay un its shall ex tend to an elevation nul [;.;:..:;
tlHlIl J 50 mm above the adjacent ground at all points.
3.
Walls shall be anchored by j oint reinforce ment spaced

at a maximum distance of 200 mm verticall y.
Longitudinal rods of such reinforcement shall be at
least No.9 gage and shall extend at least 750 111m in
each direction at the intersection.
4.
Int e ri o r no nbea ring wall s may be anc ho red at thei r
Bolt va lues sl1(l1l not exceed those set forth in Table 710/ .
intersection, at veJ1ica l spaci ng of not more than 400

mill with joint reinforcement or 6 mill mesh galvan ized
hard ware cloth.
710.9 Stonc Masonry
Ot her metal lies, joint reinforce men t or anchors Illily he

used, provided they arc spaccd to provide cquivnJellt
arca of anchorage to that required by th is section.
SlOne masonry is thaI form {)f co nst ruction made with
5.
710.8,2 Bolt,
710.9.1 Genel'lll
natura! or cast stOlle in which the units arc laid (mel

mOl1ar with all joints filled.
~, :(
)11
710.7.2 Floor alld Roof Anchorage

Floor and roof diaphragms providing lateral support to
masonry walls shall be connected to the masonry walls by
one of the followin g methods:
710.9.2 Construction
In ashlar maso nry, bond stones uniformly dislriill,t\ ,.:d ,\" '1
be provided to the extent of not less than 10 jKTC t'; ,i
-,(.'
arca of exposed facets. Ru bble stolle masonry GUO mill or
less in thickn css shall have bond stones with a maximum
spar.:ing 01'900 mill vertically and 900 Hlin horizonHil!y and,

jf tile masonry is of" greater thickness than 600 mm, shall
2
have one bond stone for each 0.56 m of wHII surface on

both sides .
SEC'f;IDl'iJ.71l
GLASS.MASQNRY
711.1 General
710.9.3 Minimum Thickness
The thickness of slOne masonry bearing walls shall not be

less than 400 mm.
..
Masonry of glass blocks Illay be used ill /lon-loud-bearing

cXlerior or interior walls ,lllti in openings wh ich might
ot herwi se be filled with windows, cither is oluted or in
cont inuous bands, provided the glass block panels h,lve a
miniI.11UJ11 thickness of 75 mm at the mortar joint and the
mortared surfaces of the blocks arc treated for mortllr
bonding. Glass block may be solid or hollow and may
contain inserts.
711.2 Mortar Joints
Glass block shall be laid in Type S or ~ mortar. Both

vertical and horizontal mortar joints shall be at least 6 mm
and not more than 10 mill thick and shall be completcly
filled . All monar cOnlac{ surfaces shall be treated to ensure
adhesion between mortar and glass.
711.3 Lateral Support
Glass panels shall be hlterally supported along each end of

the pancl.
Lateral support shall be provided by panel anchors spaced
not more than 400 mm on center or by channels. The
lateral support shall be capable of resisting lhe horizo ntal
design forces determined in Chapter 2 or a minimum of 3
kN/rn of wall, whichever is greater. The connection shall
accommodate movement requirements of Section 711.6.
711.4 Reinforcement
Glass block panels shall have joint rei nforcement spaced

nOl more than 400 111m on ccnter and located in the 11)011ar
bed joint extending the entire length of the panel. A
lapping of longitudinal wires for a minimum of 1SO mm is
required for joint reinforcemen t splices.
Joint
re inforcement shall also be placed in the bed joint
immediately below and above openings in the panel. Joint
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 385 and A 641.
Joint reinforcement in exterior panels shaH be hOI-dip

gal vani zed in accorda nce with ASTM A 385 and A 641 .
711.5 Size of Panels
Glass block panels for exterior wal ls shall not exceed 13.5
111 2 of unsupport.ed wall surface or 4.50 III in any dimension.
For interior walls, glass bloc k panels shal l not exceed 23.2
11)2 of unsuppol1ed area or 7.60 In ill any dimension.
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volume 1
711.6 Expansion Joints

Glass block shall be provided with cxpansion joints along
the .';idcs and top, and these joillls shall have surlicicnt
thickness [() accommodate displacemcnts of th e supporting
SllUclUrc, but /lot less than 10 mill . Expansion joints sJull1
be entirely free of mortar and shall be filled with resilient
material .
711.7 Reuse of Units
Glass block units shall !Hlt be reused after being removed
frolll an existing panel.
.~Yf~~~~\f:'(:;iri\::?~~~riitJ~\~?T;~W~:.:: .~., :_,. ~.
SECf1!J@N .712 ... . .

MASONRY FIREPLACES
7 I 2. I Definition
A masonry fireplace is a fireplace constructed of COllcret(~
or masonry. Masonry fireplaces shall be constl11C1cd i ;:
accordance with this section.
712.2 Footings and Foundations
Footings for masonry fireplaces and their chimneys shall be
cOllstnlcted of concrete Or solid JIlasonry al least 300 lllm
thick and shall extend at least 150 mill beyond the face of
the firepLace or foundation wall on :i11 sides. Footings shall
be founded on natural undisturbed earrh or engineered fill
below frost depth. In areas not SUbjected to freezing,
foolings shall be at least 300 nun below finished grade.
712.2.1 Ash Dump C1eanout
Cleanout openings, located within foundation walls below
fireboxes, when provided, shall be equipped with ferrous
metal or masonry doors and frames COllstlll(;ted to remain
tightly dosed, except when in usc. Cleallouts shall be
accessible and located so that ash removal will Ilot create a
hazard to combustible malerials .
712.3 Seismic Reinforcing
Masonry or concrele fireplaces shall be constructed,
anchored, su pported and reinforced (is required in thi s
chapter. In Seismic Design Category D, Illasonry and
concre te fireplaces shall be reinforced and anchored as
detailed in Section s 7 I 2.3. J, 7 I 2.3.2, 7 I 2.4 and 71 2.4. I for
chimneys servi ng fireplaces. In Seismic Design Category
A, B or C, reinforcement and seismic anchorage is not
req uired. In Seismic Design Category E or F, masonry and
concrete chimneys shall be reinforced in accordance WiUl
the requirements of Sections 701 through 709.
712.3.1 Vertical Reinforcing
For fireplaces with chimneys up to 1.0111 wide, four 10 mm

diam ete r continu ous vertical bars, anchored in the
foundation, shall be placed in the concrete between wythes
of solid maso nry or within the cells of hollow lInit masonry
and grouted in accordance with Section 703.4. For
fireplaces with chim neys greater than 1.0 III wide, two
additional 12 mill diameter vertical bars shall be provided
for cnch additional J.O III ill wid th or frac tio!) thereoL
712.3.2 Horizontal Reinforcing
Ve!1ical reinforcement shall be placed enclosed within 6
mill) tics or other reinforcing of equivalent net cro~
sectional area, spaced not to exceed 4S0 mm on center in
concrete; or placed in the bed joints of unit masonry at a
CHAPTFH l . 1,,1asonry
minimum of every 450 nun of vertical height. Two such

ties shaH be pro vided at CilCh bend in the vertical bars.
712.4 Scismic Anchorage

Masonry and concrete chimneys in Seismic Design
Category. D shall be anchored at each 11001', ceiling or roof
lille marc than 1.8 III above grade, except where const ructed
compl etel y within the exterior walls. Anchorage shall
confonn to the fo llowing requiremen ts.
712.4.1 Anchorage
4.8 mm by 25 mm straps sha ll be embedded a minimum of
300 mm into th e chimney. Straps shall be hooked around
the outer bars and extend ISO mm beyond th e bend . Each
strap shall be fastened to a minimum of four Ooor joists
with two 12 mm bolts.
712.5 Firebox Walls
, 45
712.7 Lintel and Throat

Maso nry ove r a fireplace opening sh all be su pported by il
lintel of noncombustibl e material. The minim um requ ired
bearing length on each cnd of the fireplace opcn ing shall be
100 mill. The fireplace throat or damper sh:.tll be hx:a tcd a
minimum of 200 mill above th e top of the IircpJacc
ope ning.
712.7.1 Damper
Masonry fireplaces shall be equi pped with CI fcrro\l"~": "l1letal
damper located at least 200 mill above the top of the
fireplace open ing. Dampers sha ll be installed in the
fireplace or at the top of the Ouc ventin g the fireplace, and
shall be operable from the room containing the fireplace.
Damper controls shall be permitted to be located in the
firepl ace.
7 12.8 Smoke Chamber Walls
Masonry fi reboxes shall be constru cted of solid masonry

ullits, ho llow maso nry units grout ed so lid, stone or
co ncrete. When a lining of firebri ck at least 50 mm in
thickness or ot her approved lining is provi ded, the
minimum thickn ess of back and sidewalls shall eac h be 200
mm of soli d ma sonry, includin g the lining. The width of
joints between firebricks shall not be greater than 6 mm.
When no lining is provided, the to tal minimum thickness of
bac k and sidewall s shall be 250 mill of solid masonry.
Firebrick shall conform to ASTM C 27 or ASTM C 1261
and shall be laid wit h medium-duty refractory mortar
confonning to ASTM C 199.
712.5.1 Steel Fireplace Unit,

Steel fireplace units are permitted to be installed with solid
masonry to form a masonry fireplace prov ided they are
installed acco rding to ei ther the req uirements of their listing
or the requirements of thi s sect ion. Steel firepl ace un its
incorporating a steel firebox linin g sh all be co nstructed with
steel not less than 6 mm in thi ckness, and an air-c irculating
chamber which is duet ed to the interi or of the buildin g. The
firebox lining shall be encased wi th solid masonry to
pro vide a total thickn ess at the back and si des of not less
than 200 mm , of which fl ol less than 100 mill shall be of
solid masonry or con crete. C ircul ating air duc ts employed
wi th stee l fireplace units shall be constructed of metal or
masonry.
712.6 Firebox Dimensions
Th e firebox o f a concret e or ma so nry firepl ace sha ll have a
mini mu m depth of 500 mm . Th e throm shall not be less
thHI1 200 mm above the fireplace o penin g. Th e throat
opening shall not be less than 100 mm in depth. The cross
sec tional area of the p assageway above the firebox,
in cludi ng th e throat, damper and s moke chamber, shall not
be less than the cross-sectional area of the flu e.
Smoke chamber walls shnll be constructed of solid masonry

unit s, hollow masonry units grou ted solid, stone or
concrete. Corbe ling of masonry units shall not leave unit
Cores exposed to th e inside of the smoke chamber. The
inside su rface of corbe led masonry shall be parged smoolh.
Where no lining is provided, the total minimum th ic kness
of frolll, back and sidewall s shall be 200 mm of solid
masonry. When a lining of fire bri"ck at least 50 mill thick, or
a linin g of vitrified clay at least 16 mm thi ck, is provided,
the total minimum thickness of front, back and sidewa ll s
shall be 150 mm of solid masonry, including Ih e linin g.
Firebrick shall conform to ASTM C 27 or ASTM C 1261
and shall be lai d wi th refracto ry mortar conformi ng to
ASTM C 199.
712.8.1 Smoke Chmnber Dimensions
The inside hei gh t of the sm oke chamber from the fireplace
throat to the beginning of the flue shall not be greater th an
the inside width of the firep lace opening. The inside surface
of the smoke chamber shall not be inclined more than 45
degrees (0.76 rad) from vertical when prefabricated smoke
chamber linings are us ed or when th e smoke chamberwall s
are rolled or sloped rather than corbeled. When the inside
su rface of the smoke cha mber is formed by corbeled
masonry, the wa ll s shall not be corbeled more than 30
degrees (0.52 rad) from venica!.
712.9 Hearth mId Hearth Extension

Masonry firep lace hcat1.hs and hea rth c-xtc..:lSions shall be
const lucted of concrete or masonry , sup po l1 ed by
noncombu st ible materials, and reinforced to carry their own
weight and all im posed loads. No combust ible materi al
shall rem ain against the underside of hearth s or hearth
ex ten sions aft er constructi on.
712.9.1 Hearth Thicklless

T he minimulll
!hickn l~ss
4.
of fircplm:c hc,lI1h s shall he 100
mill ,
712.9.2 Ht.'arth Extension Thickness

Th e minimulll thic knes s or hearth ex te nsi o ns shall be 50
Jlllll .
1;,~rCeIJl ;()1I :
Wh en th e b O/fOIll of the firebox o/)!nillg is raised at Ifast

0.20111 above the fOp of rhe heart" eXfell sifJII, (I !warlh
extension of not less than 10 mm thick brick, concrele,
,\'(OJle. [i if! o r other approved IIollcomJm.Hibh! 1II00erial is
Exposed combustible malltels o r trim is permitted to be

placed directly 0 11 the nlasolllY fireplaa from
surrounding the fireplace opening provided sl/ch
combustible malerials shall 1101 be placed within 150
111m of a fi replace opening, Combustible material
directly above alld with ill 300 mm of tlU! fireplace
opening shall fwt project more fhan 3,2 mm for each
25 mm distance from such opening. Combustible
materials located along the sides of the fireplac e
opening ihat project more than 40 mmfrom th e/ace of
the fireplace shall have all additional clearance equal
to th e projection.
permilfal.
712.10 H ea rth Extension Dimensions

Hearth extens ions shall ex te nd a l leas t 400 mill in fro nl of,
and at leas t 200 I11Ill beyond, each side or the lircplacc
opening. Where the firepl ace openin g is 0.60 111 1 or larger.
the hearth extension shall exte nd
~I\
least 500 mm in front
o f. a nd aI least 3<X) mm beyon d, each side o f !he fi rep lace

opening.
Figure 7 12.1
712.11 Fireplace Clearance

Any pOl1i on of a masolll)' fireplace loc-:IIcd in the interi or of
a building or within the exte rior wall o f a building sh all
ha ve a cl earance to combusti bles o f not less (han 50 Illlll
from the front fa ces and sid es of masonry fireplaces an d not
Jess than a . lOm frolll the back faces of maso nry fi replaces.
The airspace shall not be fill ed , except to- provide
firebloc kin g in accordance w ith Sec ti on 7 J 2. 12.
Excep tio."s:
I,
Mason ry fireplaces listed Qnd labeled fo r use ill

cOflfact' with combustibles in Qccordance wi,II UL 127
and illstalled iTl accordance with the manufacturer 's
installation instructiolls are permitted to have
combustible materia l in contact with their exterior
suifaces.
2.
When masonry fireplaces are cOllstructed as part of

.masonry or Concrete walls, combustible materials shall
110 1 be ill contact wilh Ihe masonry or COf1C,.el l~ walls
less thall 300 mm fro m th e inside surface of th e f/~ares{
firebox hn ing .
3.
Illustrati on of Excepti on to Fireplace Clearance Provision
Exposed combustible trim and the edges of sh eathing

materials. stich as wood siding, flooring and dl)ll1loll,
are pe rm itted to abut th e masonry {lrepltlce side walls
alld hearth extellsion. ill accordance with Figure
712 .11, provided such combustible trim or sh eathing is
a minimum of 300 mm from Ihe inside Sill/ace of the
nea rest firebox linillg.
712.12 Fireplace Fireblocking

A ll spaces between fire pl aces and floors and ce ilin gs
throu gh which fireplaces pass sh a!! be fireblocked with

noncombustible materi al sec ure ly faste ned in pl ace. Th e
fi rebl oc king of spaces between wood joists, be ams or
headers s hall be to a depth of 25 mm and shall on ly be
pJaced on strips of metal or metal lath laid across the spaces
be tween combustible material and the chimney,
712.13 Exterior Air

Fact ory-built or ma sonry firepl aces covered in this section
shall be eq uipped wit h an ex terior air su ppl y to ensure
proper fuel combustion unless the room is mechan icall y
ventilated and con troll ed so that the indoor pressure is
neutral or pos itive.
7 [2.13.1 FactOlylluilt Firephlccs
Ex te ri or combustion air due ls for faclOry-built fireplaces
shall be li sted compone nts of th e fi repl ace., a nd in stalled
'lccord ing to the fi replace manufacture-.r' s instruc ti ons ,
712.13.2 Masonry Fireplaces

Listed combustion ,a ir ducts for masonry firepl aces shall h~
installed accord ing (0 the lcnns of the ir listing ~\lid
manufacturer's in structions,
Associa tion of Structural Engineers of th e Philippines
CHAPTEFll .
712.13.3 Exterior Air Intake

The exterior air intllke shall be capable of providing all
combustion air from the exterior of the dwelling. The
exterior air intake sha!! not be located within the garage,
allie, basement or crawl space of the dwelling nor shall the
air intake be located at an elevation higher than the firebox.
The exterior air intake shall be covered with a corrosionresistant screen of 6.4 mm mcsh.
712.13.4 Clearance
~~asonry
7-17
713.1 Delinition
A masonry chimney is a chimney constructed of concrete or
masonry, hereinafter referred 10 as "masonry." Masonry
chimneys shall be constructed, anchored, supported and
reinforced as required in this chapter.
Unlistcd combustion air ducts shall be installed with a

minimum 25 Il1m clearance to combustibles for all parts of
the duct within 1.5
III
of the duci outlet.
712.13.5 Passageway
The combustion air passageway shall be a minimum of

1112, except thai
combustion air systems for listed fireplaces or for fireplaces
tested for emissions shall be constructed according to the
fireplace manufacturer's instructions.
0.040 m 2 and not more than 0.035
713.2 Footings and Foundations

Foo\ings for masonry chimneys shall be constructed of
concrete or solid masonry at least 300 mm thick and shall
extend at least 150 mm beyond the face of the foundation or
support wall on all sides. Footings shall be founded on
natural undisturbed eanh or engineered fill below frost
depth. In areas not subjected to freezing, footings shall be at
least 300 111m below finished grade.
713.3 Seismic Reinforcing
713.13.6 Outlet
The exterior air outlet is permitted to be located in the back

or sides of the firebox chamber or within 600 mm of the
firebox opening on or near the floor. The outlet shall be
closable and designed to prevent burning material from
dropping into concealed combustible spaces.
.\<'Wtx~ '~i.':;>::S;i~F":
Masonry or concrete chimneys sha!l be constructed,

anchored, supported and reinforced as required in this
chapter. In Seismic Design Category D, masonry and
concrete chimneys shall be reinforced and anchored as
detailed in Sections 713.3.1, 713.3.2 and 713.4. In Seismic
Design Category A, Bore, reinforcement and seismic
anchorage is not required. In Seismic Design Category Eor
F, masonry and conCrete chimneys shall be reinforced in
accordaQce with the requirements of Sections 701 through
709.
713.3.1 Vertical Reinforcing
For chin;neys up to J.O m wide, four 12mm diameter

continuous vertical bars anchored in the foundation shall be
placed in the concrete between wythes of solid masonry or
within the cells of hollow unit masonry and grouted in
accordance with Section 703.4. Grout shall be prevented
from bonding with the flue liner so that the flue liner is free
to move with thermal expansion. For chimneys greater than
1.0 m wide, two additional 12 mm vertical bars shall be
provided for each additional 1.0 III in width or fraction
thereof.
713.3.2 Horizontal Reinforcing
VeJ1icai reinforcement shall be placed enclosed within 6.4
mrn tics, or other reinforcing of equivalent net crosssectional area, spaced not to exceed 450 mm o.c. in
concrete, or placed in the bed joints of unit masonry, at a
minimum of every 450 mm of vertical height. Two sLlch
ties shall be provided at each bend in the vertical bars.
th
/,18
CHAPTEH 7 . Masonry
7 13.4 Scislllk Ant..'horagc
Maso nry and concrete chimneys and fo und ations in Seismic

Design Category D sha ll t)C anchored at each f1 oor. ceiling
or roof lille more th an 1.8 III above grade, exce pt where
constructed compl ctely wi thin the exlerior wall s.
Anchorage shall co nfo rm to lilc fol lowing rcq u i reme nl ~.
713.9 Termination
Chimneys shall extend at leas t 600 I11Ill hi ghcr than allY
porti oll of Ihe buildi ng wil hin 3.0 Ill, but shall not be less
th an 900 m ill above the hi ghest poin t where Ihe chi mney
passes through the roo f.
713.9.1 Spark Arrestors
713.4. 1 Anch orage
Two 4.8 mill by 25 mill straps shall bc embedded a

mi:li mum of 300 nun into the chimney. Straps shall be
hoo ked arollnd the outer b.w.; and extend 150 mill beyond
the bend. Each strap shall be fas tened to a mini mu m of fo ur
floor joists with two 12 mill bolts.
713.5 Corbeling
Masonry chi mneys shall Ilul be corbelled more th an half of
the chim ney 's wall thickness from a w.l ll or fou ndation, nor
shall a chimncy be corbeled from a wall or foundati on that
is less than 300 mill in Ihickness un less it prl.~ec t s equ all y
on each side of Ihe wa ll , exce pt that on thc second story of a
two -slO ry dwelling, co rbelin g of chimneys on the exterior
of thc encl osing wal ls is pennillcd to equal the wall
thickness . The projection of a singl e co urse shall not exceed
one~h a lf the unit hei ght or o n c~ third of the unit bed de pth ,
whichever is less.
Where a spark arrestor is installed on a masonry chimney.

the spark arrestor shall meet all c !' the follOWing
requirements:
I. The nCI free arca o f the arreSlOr shall not be less tha n
fo ur tim es the net free area of tile outl et of the chimney
flue it serves.
2. The arrcs tor sc ree n shall ha ve heat and co rrosion
res istance equi valc nt to 1 9~ 9a ge galvani zed steel or 24 ~
gage slaill lcss slee l.
3.
Openings shall not permit th e passage of spheres

havi ng H di ameter greater th2n J2 mill nor block the
passage of spheres ha ving a diameter less than 10 mm.
4.
The spark arrcs tor shall be accessible for cleaning and

th e s<.: ree n or chimney cap shal l be rem ovable to allo w
fo r clca ning of the chimney fl ue.
713.10 Wall Thickness

713.6 Changes in Dimension
The chi mney wa ll or c himney flue li ning shaH not cha ngc
in size or shape within 150 mOl abo ve or below where the
chi mney passes through noor co mponenls, ceiling
com ponents or roof com ponen ts.
Maso nry chimney walls shall be constru cted of concrete,

solid maso nry uni ts or hollow masonry un its grouted solid
with not less than 100 mm nominal thickness.
713.10.1 Masonry Veneer Chimneys
Where masonry is Llsed as veneer for a fra med chi mney,
th rough n ashing and wee p holes shall be provided as
required by Chapter 14 of me.
713.70ITsets
Where a masonry chim ney is construc ted with a fi reclay
flue liner surrounded by one wythe of maso nry. th e
rnax imum offset shall be such that the centerlin e of the flue
above the offset docs not extend beyo nd the center of the
chimney wall below the offset. Where thc chim ney offset is
supported by maso nry below the offset ill an approved
manner. the maximum offset limitations shall not apply.
Each indi vidual corbeled masonry course of the offset shall
not exceed th e projection limitati ons specified i~ Section
7 13.5.
713.11.1 ResidentialType Appliances (General)

Flue lining systems shall co mpl y with one of the followi ng:
713.8 Additional Load
I.
Clay flu c lining complying wit h the requircm cnts of

ASTM 0 15 , or equivalent.
2.
Lis ted chimney lining sys tems com plyi ng wi th UI .

1777.
3.
Faclory*built chimneys or chimney uni ts li sted fe:'

installat ion withi n masonry chimneys.
4.
Ot her approvcd materi als that will resist corrosion ,

erosion. softening or cracking from Oue gases an d
condensate at tem peratures up to 1,800' 1' (982' C).
Chim neys shall not support loads other than their ow n

weight unless th ey are designed an d constru ct ed to support
the additional load. M<\sonry chimneys arc permitted to be
constructed as part of the masonry walls or concrete Wil lis
of the building.
713.11 Flue Liniug (Material)
Maso nry chimneys shall be lined. The lining material shall

be appropriate for the type of appliance connec ted,
according to the tenns of the appliance listing and the
manpfacturer's inst ructions.
Association 01 Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CHAP TEfll . Mas on ry
'H 9
713.1 J.l.1 Flue Linings for Spedlk Appliances
Fhl(: li nil lgx other than those covered ill Sect!()!l 71 ~.I I.I
inte nded for usc with specific applian ces shall com ply with
Sect ions 7 13. 1 J. 1.2 through 713. 11.1 .4 and Sections
7 13 . 11.2 ilnd 7 13. 1 1.3.
713.11.1.2 G as Appliallt'es
Flue lining systems for gas app liances shall be in
acco rdan ce with Ihe T,lumlUfiol1a/ Flit!! Ga.~ ("ode.
713,11.2,) Lining
ConcrelC and masonry chiJl1lleys shall be !ined with ,lil
approved mediu m-duty refractory brick a min imum of 11 5
mm thi ck lai d o n the 115 Inm bed in an approved mcdiumdut y refractory m o r l(l J". The linin g shall start 6(X) mill or
more below the lowe st chi mil ey con nect or elllrance.
Chimlleys terminating 7. 5 III or less above a chim ney
conneClOr enlnUlce shall be li ned to (he to p.
7 13,11.2,4 Multiple Passageways
713.11.1.3 Pellet Fucl-nurning Appliances

Flue lining and venl systems for use in masonry chimneys
with pellet fuel-burni.ng appli ances shtlll be limi ted 10 flue
lining s y s tem s complying with Secti o n 71 3. 11.1 an d pellet
vents listed for in stallati on wi thin maso nry chimn eys (sec
Seclion 7 I 3. I I . 1.5 for markin g).
713.11.2.5 Termination Height
713.11.1.4 Oil-Fired Appliances Approved for Usc with

L- Vent
Concrete and masonry chimneys for medium-heat

applitlllccs shall extend a minimu m of 3.0 m hi gher than
any pon ion of allY building within 7.5 m.
Concrete and masonry chimneys containing more than one

passage wa y shall ha ve the liners separat ed by a minimum
lOO mill thick concrete or solid maso nry wall.
Flu e lining and vc nt syslems for usc in masonry chimneys
with oil-fired appliances appro ved for use with Type L vcnt
shall be limited to flu e lining systems co mpl ying with
Secti on 713. 11. '" and li sted chimney line rs co mplyin g with
UL 641 (sec Seclion 71 3. 11.1.5 for ma rking).
7]3,11.2,6 Clearance
A minimu m clearance of 100 Illlll shall be provided

be tween the ex terior surfaces of a concrete or maso nry
chimne y for medium-heal appli tlllces and combustible
materi al.
713.11.1.5 Notice of Usage

When a flu e is relined with a nateri a l not compl y ing w ith
Seclion 713. 11.1, Ihe chimn ey shall be plainl y and
permanentl y identifi ed by a la bel attached to a wall , cei li ng

or other conspicuous locati on adjacent to where (he
connector enters the chimney. The !abel shall include th e
following message or cq ui va lenl language: " Thi s chim ney
is for use only with (type or category of applian ce) that
burns (type of fllcl). Do not connect other types of
appliances."
713.11.2 Concrete and Masonry Chimneys for MediumHeat Appliances
713,11.3 Concrete and Masonry Chimneys for HighHeat Appliances

713,)1.3,) General
Concrete and masonry chi mneys for hi gh-heat appliances

shall compl y wilh Sec ti ons 7 13 .1 Ih rough 7 13 .5.
713.1 1.3,2 Construction
Chimn eys for high ~heat appliances shall be constru cted

with double wa ll s of solid masonry units or of concrete,
each wall to be a minimum of 200 mrn thick with a
minimum airspace of 50 mm between the walls.
713,)1.2,) General
713,11.3,3 Lining
Concrete and masonry chimneys for medium-heat

appliances shall comply with Sec tions 713.1 through 713.5 .
The inside of the interior wall shall be lined with an

approved high-duty refract ory brick, a minimum 115 mOl
th ick laid 011 th e 11 5 mm bed in an approved high-duty
re fractor y mortar. The lining shall start at the base of the
chimney and ex tend contin uously to the top.
7 ]3,) 1.2,2 Construction

Chimllcys for medium -heat appli ances shall bc constructed
of solid maso nry un its or of co ncrete with walls a mi nimu lll

o f 200 mm thick, OJ" with ston e masonry a mi nimu lll of 100
mm thick.
7l3.11.3,4 Termination Height
Co ncrete an d masonry chimneys for hi gh-heat appli ances

shall ex tend a minimum of 6.0 Jl1 higher th an an y porti on of
any building withi n 15.0 IH .
1h
National Structu ral Code of tile Phili ppines 6 Edition Volume 1
750
CHAPTEr:1 7 . Masonry
713.11.:1.5 Cle" ..."'"e

Concrete and masonry chimncys for highheClt appli:lf1ces
shall havc approved clearance from buildings and structures
to prevcnt ove rh eating combustible materials, penn it
inspection and maintenance operations on the chimney ilnd
prevcnt danger of burns to persons.
713.12 Clay Flue Liuing (Inst"U"lion)
Clay flue liners shall he in~talkd in accordance
withASTMC 1283 and cxtend from a point not less IIHlII
200 JIlin below the lowest inlet or, in the case of fireplaces,
from the top of the smoke chamber 10 a poilU above the
enclosing walls. The lining shall be carried up vertically,
with i.\ Ilwximum slope no greater (han 30 degrees (0.52
.rad) from the vertical. Clay flue liners shall be laid in
medium duly refractory mortar conforming to ASTM C
199 with tight mortar joints left smooth on the inside and
installed to maintain'lI1 air space or insulation not 10 exceed
the thickness of the flue liner separating the flue liners from
Ihe interior face. of the chimney masonry walls. r':-Iue lining
shall be supported on all sides. Only enough IDm1.1r shall be
placed to make Ihc joint and hold Ihe liners in position.
713.13 Addition,,1 Requiremenls
Ta ble 7JJ.16(1)
Net CrossSectio nal Area of Round Flue Sizes
Flue Sii'.c, Inside Dialllcicr
(mill)
- - ---- ,5(f-- ---- - --- -- i !i:()- ---' - -- -175 .- --.. -.-- -- - --245--
___
-.------ 200 - - - - - -
~=~=
.
Listed matcrials used as flue linings shall be installed in

accorda nce with the terms of their listings an d the
manufacturer's instructions.
713.13.2 Space Around Lilling

The space surrounding a chimn ey lining sysrclll or vent
installed within a maso nry chimney shall nOI be used to
vent any qtbcr 'lppiiancc.
Exception:
This shall not prevent the installation of a separate flue
linillg ill accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
713.14 Mulliple Flues
When two or more flues are located in the same chimney,

masonry wythes shall be built between adjacent flue
linings . TIle masonry wythes shall be at least 100 mm thi ck
and bonded into the walls of the chimne y.
32.3
.22.L_==_
.250_==-_ _~ ____ _ __
_ 275 __.__ ___ __
_-=5~8.~
1 - --
- -1
1-----"3~OO----._I---.--_:_'7:=::2."'9c----
_ _ _ -"-38~0c......._. ___ _ _ _ _~11;.;;3"!:.5----,

460
163.9
NCI
Table 713.16(2)
Cross-SecliollCli Area of Square
and Rectangular Flue Sizes
Flu e Size, Outside Nomin:tI

Dimensions (mill)
Cross Sectional Area

(mm' x 10')
114 x 216
14.8
...
- -' --1 14 x 336 - - -- -
21.9
203 x 203
27. 1
f--.
-216 x 216
31.6
43.2 ._ __ 1
2 16 x 305
..
--".
49
216x330
305 x 305
65.8
216 x 457
65 .2
.. ~
330
x
330
81.9
.._-J
-305 x 406
84.5
111 .6
330 x 457
....
f -.
406x 406
11 6.8
- 143.2
406 x 508
..- ------150~3----457 x 457
192.3
508 x 508
-- - _.
1---508x6 10
_. 216 .1
278.1
610 x 610
_-
_.
713.13.1 Listed Matedals
~-Cross,Scclionll l A;~~3
(1ll1ll2 x 10 )
-~
Exception:
When venting only Oll e appliallce, two flues are permittcd
adjoin each other ill the same chimlley with only Ihej!J,it.!
lining separation between them. The joints of the adj4.stf.i.t.
flue Iini1Jg s shall be staggered at least 100 mm.
.,
Association of Structural Engineers of th e Pllilippines
CHAPTEn "? . Ma sonry
7B.IS .Flue An.'lI (Appli:lI1ce)
7 ~1
Figure 711. 16
Flue SizeS" for Masonry Chimne ys
ChiJl1Jll~Y flues shall not be smaller in area than the arca t)f
the <.:OIIl1O<.:tOI' froJl1 the appliance. Chimney flue s connected
to Illore than olle appliance shal! not be less than the arC,l oj'
the largest COJlllector pills SO percellt of the areas or
additiollal chimney connectors.
Exceptions:
1.
2.
Chimney flues servillg oil-fir(d appliances sized in

accordance with NFPA 31,
",
Chimney flu es serving gas-fired appliances sized ill

accordance with {h(' illfemaliollol Fuel Gas Code,
,,,
2 to I shall have a minimum net cross-sectional area o f a

least 1/10 of the fireplace opening. Rectangular chimney
flues with an aspect ratio of 2 to 1 or morc shall have tl
minimum net cross-sectional are;] of at leas t dgof the
fireplace opening.
713.16.2 Determination of Minimum Area

The minimum net cross-se.c tiona l area of the flue shall be
determined in accordance with Figure 7 I 3. J 6. A fi ue size
providing at least the equivalent net cross ~sec !ional area
shall be used. Cross-sectional areas of clay nue linin gs are
as provided in Tables 713.16(1) and 713.16(2) or as
provided by the manufacturer or as measured in the field.
The height of the chimney shall be measured from the
firebox floor to th e top of the chimney flue.
713.17 Inlet
Inlets to masonry chimneys shall enter from the side. Inlets
shall have a thimble of fireclay, rigid refracwry material or
mctallhat wi ll prevent th e co nnector from pulling Oul of the
inlet or from extendi ng beyond the wall of the lin cr.
'"
--
._._- -
--7"
""
,,,.
_ .
"00
" ~
"
"
"
"
"
713.16.1 Minimulll Area

Round chimney flues shall have a minimum net crosssectional area of at least 1/12 of the fireplace opening. Square
chimney nues shall have a minimulll net cross-sectional
area of at least I/loof the fireplace opening. Rectangu lar
chimney nues with an aspect ratio less than
,~
'"
713.16 Flue Area (Masonry I'ircplacc)

Fille sizing (or chimneys servi ng fireplaces shall be ill
accord;mce wi th Section 713,16.1 or 7 13, J 6,2,
181)()
'"
"
"
"'"
'"
'00
,-
---+-- 1-- '"
- :----
713.18 Masonry Chimney Cleanout Openings

Cleanout openings shall be provided within 150 mm of the
base of each flue within every masonry chimn ey, The upper
edge of the cleanoul shall be located al least 150 mOl below
the lowest chim ney inlet opening. The height of the opening
sh<lll be al leasl 150 mm . The c1eanoul sha ll be provided
with a noncombustible cover.
E.xceptioll:
Chimney flues serving masonry fireplaces, where cleaning
is possible through the fireplace opening.
713.19 Chimney Clearances
Any portion of a masonry chimney located in the interior of
the building or within the exterior wall of the building shall
have a minimum airspace clearance to combustibles of 50
mm. Chimneys located entirely outside the exterior walls of
the building, including chimneys that pass through the soffit
or cornice, shall have a minimum airspace clearance of 25
111 1ll . The airspace shall nOI be filled, except to provide
fireblocking in accordance with Section 7 J 3.20.
Exceptions:
1.
Masonry chimneys equipped with a chimney tining

system listed and labeled for use ill chimneys in contact
with combustibles in accordance with UL 1777, and
installed in accordance with the numufacturer's
instructions, are permitted to have combustible
material in contact with their exterior sur/nees.
lh
Edition Volume 1
..",.
752
2,
CHAPTEn l . Masonry
Where masonry chimneys are constructed as part of

masonry or concrde walls, combustible materials shall
not be in conlact with the masonry or concrete wall

less than 300 mmJrom the inside sluface a/the nearest
flue lining.
3.
Exposed combustible trim and the edges of sheathing

materials, such as wood siding, are permitted to abut
the masonry chimney sidewalls, in accordance with
Figure 713.19, provided such combustible trim or
sheathing is a minimum of 300 mm from the inside

surface of the nearest flue lining. Combustible material
and trim shall not overlap the corners of the chimney
by more than 25 mm
Figure 713.19
lllu~lrali()n
of exception three chimney clearance provi:;ion
713.20 Chimney Fireblocking

All spaces between chimneys and floors and ceilings
through which chimneys pass shall be fircblockcd with
noncombustible matcrial securcly fastcned in place. The
fireblocking of spaces between wood joists, beams or
headers shall be to a depth of 25 mill and shall only be
placed on strips of metal or metal lath laid across the spaces
between combustible material and the chimncy.
Table 703-1- Mortar Propo!1ions for Unit Masonry
._--
AGGREGATE
MEASURED
IN A DAMP, LOOSE
CONDITION
PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME (CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS)
MORTAR
Cement -Ume
Mortar cement
._.Masonry cement
TYPE
M
S
N
0
M
M
S
S
N
M
M
S
S
N
Masonry Cement
Portland Ccmcnt
Blended Cement
I
OJ'
Mortar Cement
N
M
S
---:-- --_.__.
-:--
I
I
_._.
I
I
y,
-~
over l/.j to 1/1

ovcr 1/1 to I l/.j
...-over I I;' to 2 1/2
Not Jess than 2 1;.\ and Ilot

morc than 3 times the SUIll
of the separate volumes of
ccmcntitious materials,
---I
----~."
--....:-- __1...-
--j--
--
---_._---
----'--
I
Y,
I ._. -_...-.
Hydrated Lime or
Lime Puttr....
'I<
-~
I
I
0
I
Masonry cement conforrnlllg to the requirements of UEe Standard 21 11.
2 Mortar cement conforming to the requirements of UBC StHTldard 2 J -14.
--
Tablc 703-2 - Grout Proportions by Volumc
t
...
TYPE
PARTS BY VOLUME OF
PORTLAND CEMENT
OR BLENDED CEMENT
----~--
...
...
"-.~.
AGGREGATE MEASt)RED IN A DAMP.

LOOSE CONDrn9_N ..
PARTS BY VOLUr<.JE OF
HYDRATED LIME OR
LlMEPU1TY
---
-.-----.~-
Fine
--_._._-----------_._.---~~---~~--.
2!f.! to 3 times the sum of the volumes

of the ccmentltlouS mate! 1,lls
2 l/.j to 3 tUlles the sum of the volumes -- I to 2 times thc SUIll of the volumcs
I
to 110
of the cemcntitious materials
of the cemcntitious materials
Grout slMll atlalll a Jl1J1lI!llum compressive silength at28 d,lYS of 13.8 MI >.,\. The btll!dlllg offiCial may lcqulre ,\ comprCSSl\e ,dd strength test of grout
made in accordance with UEC Standard 21-18.
Fine
grout
Coarse
grout
010 I"
Association of Structural Engineers of the F'hilippines
CHAPTEH J lv1 asOI'II'Y
/ S]
Tabl e 704-1- Groul in g Limitations
- ... -- ....- ...- . ---MlNiMtJMj)ji;jNSi()N.~-6V;mi:Tol;A I . CI.I" I<

-~
AREAS WITltlN GROUT SI'ACES ANn CEI,I ,SLi
..._..~;I{()l2IJXJ~!L. __.._.~.;J{()U'I.!~.Q!!.l{ MA~.Iig~Q.Ul0.!!!!.~L~ ==~~.-.- '-------. r--=:=-~-'-~==--==-
'r;~,-;;---'-----r-'------'- )00 - -- - - - -- Fine

Fine
_ _ .-.!'1ultl.wr.~~ Ml.':..~..t. ___. _ __ .. _llllllow ~~n;I:r~ ~~____ '" _
] ,500
2.400
35
35
15 x. 50
3S x. 50
Fil1e
),6CX)
35
45 x 75
Fine
7,200
JOQ.] ,SCX)
2.400
3,600
7,200
50
35
1)
Coarse
x 75
35 x 75
Coar.~e
50
(); x 75
Co;lrse
50
x 75
Coarse
60
75 x 75
Coarse
75
7S x 100
Sec also SCCllOfI 2 ] O:l .6.
} 11\c ac tual gro ul space or grout cell dimen sions must be larger than the su m of the foll ow ing items (I) The required minimum dimensions of total c lear
areas ill Table 704 1 ; (2) The width o f an )' 1ll0J1tU projections within the space: .. nd (3) 11,e horizont;11 projections o f the d iameters of the horizontal
reinforcing bars wi!ilin II cross section of the grow space or cell.
~ Tile minimum dimensions of thc \Ol a! clear 'JI"ea s shaH be m:lde up of one of morc open ,lre;IS wilh at least onc arca being 19 mm or grcaLcr in wio!h.
is
Table 705 I . Specified Compressive Slrcnglh of Masonry, f", I MPa) Ba sed on

Specifying the Compressive Strength of Maso nry U nits
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTII OF CLAY

MA SONHY UNITS I,!
96.5
more
SI)ECIFlED COMPRESSIVE STRgNGTIl OF MASONI{Y, I'm

Type N MOIlar.l
(MPa)
(MPa)
'fype MOl' S Mortar l
(MPa)
.-
36. 5
32.4
27.6
23. 1
82.7
68 .9
,--
55. 1
41.3
26.2
22.7
18.6
15.2
11.0
18.6
33.lormon",
25.&
8.60
-----Jo.T ------~
13.8
27.6
COMPRESSIVE STRENGll l OF
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS''
(MPa)
19.3
--- _ ._----.. --- ---13-.1
--
'- -'
---
SPECIFIED COMI'IlESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY. f'.

Type N Mor1 1Ir~
Type M or S Mortar)
I
(MPa)
( MP.)
I
__
.-
20.7
17 .2
1).8
----- ~---
..ToY - --- -- -- .._ 6 .. 90
llJ.3
-_ ...._-
16, 19 1
12.7
9 ..30
6.. 50
.. masonry unus IS based on g loss area. Comprcsslve strcngth of ho !!ow d..ay nldsonry urllL~ IS based on nlll11lllum nct .\rCd .
compress ive slrenglh of solid clay
Values nl3y be interpo laled . When ho llow clay m,lsonr >' units .lre gro uted ,the grout shall con form to lhe prop<lJ1 ion in Table 7032.
2 A ssumed assemblage, The specificd compressive stre ng th of mason ry f'", is based on gross area strength when usi ng sol id un its or solid grouted mason ry
and nct area slrcngUI when using ungrou ted ho llo w units.
3 M ortar for unit masonry. proportio n specificatio n, as speci fied in Table 703- 1. These values apply to pOJ1land CeOlen! - li me mortars wi tho u! added
air - entraining materials .
Vatues may be interpolated. In groulCd concrete m,lsonry, the compressive strength o r grout shall be equal to or g rcak'r than the compressive strength o f the
CO!1CfCle m asonry u nits .
,,-~ .
1 501
CHA PTUi 7 .
M3~;ol1ry
Tabl e 707 - I - All owable Tension, 13/1 for Embed ded Am:hor
Bo/(s for Clay and Co ncrete Masonry, kNI.21
(~;~a)
-~:-- EMBE~~ENT LEN(;~~!, t", ()rJm(;lfl)jST~NCE;~~~~~'~):==~~~~=:-~-=:-2~~I::~_:_1
,-l~
---__-- _
__
124
13_8
I!!_ _ _2~_
1_25
----i-H--f
fI-- ___24;' __
-- ______
------,.--;------- ----- -------- - -27:0-'I
6-76__________________......2-74 __________1_7~ ------__ _ ~_
) ______ J..0}___ __ ______ J:.."_____
---..l2..!,_ -I
~ . ___
__
4_76
4_98
2_80
781
II 2
__
20_0_
312 __
: .~~
;!~
~~!---i]-- ---+H- ----~}---- --
27_6
1.78
3_96
7_08
I U)4-----_ -
15_9
344
41..3
1.96
2.146
445
4.85 -
7_92
8_68
12..37
13_ 53
17_8
19 ~5
28-~i------- -44-~i"
31.6
34_7
---- I
494 ---
'I
-~=_ ~_
allowable tensIon valucs In Tahlc 707- 1 arc based 011 compre ssIve strength or rn.lsonry a s~cmbl.lges. Wherc )'Ield slrength o[ ,me llor bolt
the :lllowable fellsion in kN is g iven in Table 7072 .
2 Vlllucs arc for bolls of 1II le;!!)1 A 307 qualify. Bolls shall be those specified in Section 706.2. 14 .1
) Values showll arc for work with or without special inspection .
;H----j
--
I nlC
Sled
govcms,
Table 707-2 - All owa bl e Tension, Bf for Embedded Anchor

Dolts for Clay and Concrete Masonry, kN 1.2
I,
_ _ _ _ _ _ __ __ __ -'-A
""N
=CHOR BOLT DIAMETER (111111)
6
1..56
I
12
6.27
10
3..5 1
20
14.1
16
9_83
Values arc for bolts of allcast A 307 quality. Bolls sha ll be tllose specified ill Sectio n 706.2.14. 1
Values shown aTe for work willI or with9ul special inspection .
Table 707-3- Allowable Shear, B,_, for Embedded Anc hor

Bolts for Clay and Co ncrete Masonry, kN
J 'm
(MPa)
10..3
12.4
---13.8
17_2
20_7
276
34 .4
41.3
..
_._- --- - 10
2.14
2_14
2. 14
2.14
2_ 14
2. 14
2.1 4
2. 14
12
-3_78
3.78
3_78
3.78
3.78
3_7 8
3_78
3_78
!\_i'lCHOR nOLl'
1.2
DIAMETER (inches)
5.92
5.92
5_92
._--
-_~---l
---- --_._- --_.----------------- ---_.20 - - ----- --22 --- -_._-25 ---28

-- T77.92
8.45
9_12
-- 10_ 1
8_28
9..35 __
9.57
-9)9
__
8.45
9.1 7
--- lOA
9_70 11 .0
10..4
845
11 _5
10.1
10.9
845
12;1
11.7
8.45
10.9
l3~i
11 .5
12.3
845
12_9
J:U
11 .6
8.45
- ----_._----------
16
5.92
5_92
- - ----_._."5_92
5_92
5_92
, V ,\ I uc~ ,Ill. f01 i)()lts of-C--,1\. -ic,\sl

.- _- - - ':-:-'_
A 307 quahty . BoilS sh,lil be those spec Ified 111 SCdIOJ1 7()6.2. 14.1.
--------~-
2 Values shown arc for work w ith or wit hou t specia l inspection .
.....1
CH/\PTEfl 1 . M<lsoruy
.,
~I~)
Table 707-4- Minimulll Di ameters of Bend
..i
Table 70 7-5- All o wabl e Flexural Tensi oll (kPa)
MORTAR TYPE
r-_~C~e~i~n~en~t~-~I~in~le~a~nTd~M~o~rt~a~r~C~e~"~l1~CI~lt~_-i.___ 77-~~M~a~s~o~nr~Ccnl~C~II~(~~---~
M or S
M or S
UNIT TYPE
I---;:;-,---"'T:':''-;-'--~'--:--+------r_------___.-- -------T---
Normal to bed Joints

Solid
276
/-Iollow
172
207
131
----I
103
62
165
103
No rmal to head joints

Solid
551
. . . . . ._-_Hollow
... . _-_._ - ---- - -_._ =222 -
267
330
262
2()7
_._-_._-- _ ._-- - -- --- - --------
Table 708-1 - Maximum Nominal Shea r Strength Values
,--
M IVd
V"
1.2
---_.._._ - -
MAXIMUM
Ii---r:::
50.25
6.0 A,1i I'm
2: LOO
4.0 A,liT,: 50 250 A, (214 A, Ii
50 380 A, (3 22 A,
207
.___--.!24_ ___
50 1691 A,
J'm
50 111 3 A,
M IS the Ilkl Xlmu m bendmg moment (h at occurs sImu!t,Ulcoust}, \\,Ilh the shear 10:ld \ al the section unde r considerat ion. Interpolation
may be by straight line for MNd values between 0.25 and J .eX).
Vn is in N, and 1'", is in kPa.
Table 708-2- No min al Shear Strengt h Coefficient
f
I
~~V;i
f~
_j
M is the maximum bending moment lhal occurs simu!t,llleously with the sh ear loatl \f at the sectioll under consideration . Interpolation
may be by straight line (or MlVd values between 0. 25 and 1.00.
Table 7 l0-1 Shea r Wall Spacing Requirements for Empirical Desi gn of Masonry
MAXIMUM RATIO
Shea r \Vall Spacing to
FLOOR OR ROOF CONSTRUCTION

Casl- in -p lace
Shear Wall Length

5: 1
4: 1
3: I
2: 1
2:1
CO tl C r c ( c
Precast Co ncrete
Mew I deck with concrete iiI!
Metal deck with no Ii II
Wood Di aphragm
1h
_.-
'756
CHAPTEn! Masonry
Table
710~2-
A!!owabJc Compressive Stresses for Empirical Design of I\1<1S011l")'
CONSTlHJC'TION: COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF UNIT, GROSS AREA
AIJ,OWABI,E COl\1PRR'iSIVE STRESSES

GROSS CHOSS-SEcnONAI. AREA (r'ftPaj
~'-l)i;~M~~~srVi~~;t;;'r
.c-c.c---....
~~.-.-
..---.--.
Solid masonry of brick and other solid units

Sand-lime or concrete brick:
55.1 pillS, MPa
2,41
1.55
1.10
0.79
31.0 MPa
17.2 MP"
10.3 MP"
Grouted masonry, of clay or shale;
~-~i~;iU;'r::fMOl"t;1 r
(;r da)-:~;~:~<;h,~ic';~'"'~'
salld~limc
2.07
138
096
0.69
or concrete:
31.0 plus, MPa

17.2MP"
1.89
1,48
""I..,'"'--~-;c
'-;-_
-;.c-_c";I0",.:c:eM
3
Solid masonry of solid concrete masonry units:
---:----~.-.----.-----
20.7 plus, MP"

13.8 MP"
8.27 MP"
Masonry of hollow load-bearing units:
13.8 pillS, MP"
10.3 MPa
6.89 MP"
4.82 MPa
1.38
0.96
0.69
1.2 I
--.------~-----
138
L55
1. 10
0.96
0.69
0.79
.~--j-------'-"-'-0.96
0.79
---l
0.83
0.69
OA8
0.52
OAI
0.38
Hollow wa!ls (cavity or masonry bondedt solid units:

17.2 plus, MP"
1--;-:---:-:-,-1",0.",-3 M=..P,::..a_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .._.. __
, -:,H"o",ll"o-,W,-,;,"J:;-:li",ts:..______ _____ _. __..__._-------_._-
LlO
0.96
0.79
- - - - - . - .. 0 52
0.69
--.------
Stone ashlar masonry:

Granite
Limestone or marble
Sandstone or cast stone
Ru bble stone masonry
."_..__ Coarse,_.~~ or rando-"m'--_______ ~_. _____ ~ _____.
Unburned clay masonry
0,48
. -~
4,41
4.96
3.10
2A8
0.837
0.21
2.76
2.20
0_69,
---------_.-
Linear InterpolatIOn llMy be IIsed for dcter=;nj~~~g~II~;~~~bk~i.~css~;f;~ mason;~ts havi;g~~;';~p~cssi-~~'"~'~-;:;-gtt;"s which-',!rc-Tr";u;'~'Tllediate Octween those
given in the table.
2 Where floor and floor loads arc can-ied upon wythe, the gross cross-section;11 area is that of the wYlhe under load. If both wythes arc loaded, the gross
cross-sectional area is that of the wall minus the area of the cavity between the wythes.
Tablc 710-3- Allowable Shear
OIl
Bolts for Empirically
Designed Masonry Except Unburned Clay Units
--.--~"".-
_______1_2_ _ _ _ _
..... ---~
Ion
L56
2A7
_ __
..... ---- --------: ~-~------.--..- ..--.------~

----4"'3"'~~'------j
--~ 150-------
4.45------6X7---------175----- ------5.56--18.2 2
.... --22------25
--~.--.---
..
~"--."----.--~
28
------------_._.
_ _ _ _ _ :20~___________..!>'_62 __ ~~__
__._
10.0" _ _
An additional 50 mill of embedment shall be provided for anchor bolts located in (he top of columns for buildings located in Seismic 7...ones 2 and 4.
2 Permitted only with not less than 17.2 MPa units.
I
Association of Structural Engineers of the fOhilippines
CHAPTErI ., . 1",1;\$()!1(Y
i :J 7
Table 71 04 Wall Lateral Su pport Rcq ujrc m <.~n l $

for Empiric.1I Design of Masonry
---- ----c~~~~~-
-::---c-_ -c'C",O,--,-N-,-,S,--,TIWC_"_rr_ON _________ _____M_A_X_I~_lJ_M

_I/I _oIJ_
,;/___ _
Bearing walls
Solid or solid grolltcc-I --------.--.
- --.,-.- ----.. 20
...- -...--.-18
----------. ,----- - - --,--" ------'-"---.__.. _
- - - - _.._---_.__._- -- - -j--18
36
~,--- ,----- --
All other
_~9_~lhearing
-.-----~ - .--- ,, -
walls
Exterior
Interior
Table 710-5 - Thickness of Foundation Walls for Empirical Design of Masonry

i
NOM INAL TIIICKNESS
MAXIMUM OEI'TI1 OF UNBALANCED FILL
(111111)
( Ill )
200
250
300
200
250
300
200
20
300
200
-1.22
l.52
1.83
1.52
1.83
2,13
2, 13
2,45
2.45
2,13
FOUNDATION WALL CONSTRUCTION
Mw;onry of hollow units, un grouted
- Mason ry (;f solid units
Mason ry of hollow or solid units, fully grouted
Masonry of hollow units reinforced vertically with

12 mm bars and grout at 600 mm o,c, Bars
located not less than 115 mm from pressure
Side of wall.
-,.. __..
Table 7 10-6 - Allowable Shear on Bolts for Masonry of Unburned Clay Units
DIAMETER OF BOLTS
(mm)
--
12
16
20
22
25
28
-
C_
EMBEDMENTS
(mm)
_.
300
380
457
- - --
.__
_____
2.2.2..______ - -----.
600
th
SHEAR
(kN)
0,89
1.33
1.78
2.22
2.67
_.-
--
----------,--_..
------- .--.~
Table 7! 1-1- Radius of Gyrat ion' for Concrete Masonry lJni t ~/
) The md ius of gyral iol) );lmB be based Oil ihe s pec ified d i.lllwsiolls o f Ihe masonry units or shilll be in ;u,:I:onl,lIICe w ith the va lue); shown wh ich arc based o n
lI!c m in imuill di , "clls i on ~ of hollow n)llcrcte masonry unit face sht' l1s an d IYd)~ in aCI,.'()Hialicc wilh UBC SI(Uldard 2 14 for llYO cell UllilS.
Table 7 ! 1- 2~ Ra dius
~U T
SPA CING (mm)
._ - ,
or Gyralio n
for Clay Maso nry Uni t Lcngt h, 400 MM ~
NOMINAL WIDTH OF WALL (mm )

_ .__.
..
300
250
150
200
86. 10
4 1.65
71.37
5664 .._
.. _...
.... _92.70
6 1.4 7
77.00
45. 20 .., .... .., . 63 75
95.80
47.00
79.50
97.80
47 .75-_.- _._.- 65.02
8 I .00
~-----sz:oO--- ' - 99. 1(1
'" .. .. ....'._48.50
65.80
99.80
49.00
66.29 ..
82.80
100.3(j
49.28
66.80 . ..
83.30
100.80
49.53
67.05
83.80
loi.35
84. 10
49.53
67 .30
,-104.9()
86.90
51.31
69.8 5
.- .
~. -.
100
Solid Groutcd
26.92
400
29.45.,..__
,
600
30.48
800
31.24
-..' ..' -' 1000 ..., - " '.. --_. ' -"31.75'--
._-
..
1200
1400
1600
1800
No grout
..-
32.00
32.26
---32.26
32.50
33.53
for smglc wYlhe m"son ry or for ,Hlll1o l v ldu<l1 wythe
,_
.. wall.
or a C,.Vlly
=..,,) !lA ,.
~' I hc mdill s of gYI';lI ion shal l lx: based 011 Ihe specified d imensi ons I)f Ihl! masonry uni ts or shall be in acc ord~lIIce wi th the v alu c~ s ho wn which IIrC'. based (II I
the minimum di ll1tllsions o( ho llow dny con crete maSQnry face shdls and webs in acct)rd<l nce wit h UB C Standard 2 1 ] for lW() cel ! U ll i l~.
Table 7 11-3- Radius

-. -.- -- .- - -.--.- - .- - ,,-- -. ~ -
or Gyrati oo ' for Clay Masonry Unit Length. 300 MM'
- -- -- ------ _._- -
__~!-'l(}_lJ:I:_"~!' AC!.N_(;J'll'llL ..._---_._- --_._ 100
. -----~~(~i'id Gn;uteu.---- -
----- -.._
- - --- - --"-_. __ ..
- - ----
- -- - --'-r ..
300
450
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
No grout
--- --
-_.
26.92-- - --
29.20
--- ------ 30.20---30.70
3 1.20
31.50
3 1.50
3 1.75
31.75
32.00
32.00
32.00
32.77
J ()f slllg IC-W} lhc masonry or for an IndIVIdual wythe ora C(lV lly wall.
-- _ .._ -------- -_..._---_. __...__._.- --- ---
NOMINAL WIDTH OF ".:~L L (mOl)

...-. __... ----- ---_..._.. _"---_. _ ------. - - --_.-.-.-200- _.".... - _._
250--- .._- .
150
---- --joo - -
".
41.90
45.00
46.23
47.00
47.50
47.75
48.00
48.26
48.26
48.50
48.50
48.50
49.50
56.90
61.00
- .. --- ------- 62.74
..
63.75
64 .26
-64.77
65.02
65.28
65.53
65.79
65.79
65.79
67.30
._-....
._-
.. _--.
86.60
71.63
9 1.69 ....._.
76 .20
- ---78 -23 == --94 23-- --95.50- ....
79 .25
80.00
-- - -- 9652
9706-~=
80.52
97 .54
81.03
97 .79
8 1.28
98 .00
81.53
98.30
8 1.53
98.55
81.79
:
9855
8 1.79
100.33
83.30
i
=-V' !IA,
Z111c radius of gyr:tlion sh;tll be ba sed on the speci fied dimensions or lhe Inasonr y unils or slmll be in :Jccord;ulce Wilh the valuC's shown which arc based on
the minimum dimension s or hollow clay concrete masonry rilec shells and webs in ileeordanec with UBC Swndard 2 1-1 ror two ecl1 units.
Nalianal Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edilion Volume 1
AI
APPENDIX A
CONVERSION FACTORS
----,--'"----.-
~-APPENDIX A: EQUIVALENCE BETWEEN SI-METRIC, MKS-METRIC, AND U.S.

CUSTOMARY UNITS OF NON-HOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
- -. . . . . . . -.. --.. . -.--.. . . . --. --- . .

~--
~ . --
SI-mctric stress
-~l --
. . -..-.-----..--- -. . . . . --------- --.--.--.-..------.--.-------.
U.S. Customary units stress i
mks -!l1ctric stress
_...______.__.__._ ....".""."....... _____________. . _. _.In M!~:.I__.____

.__. . ___. _". ._.~.~~.Y.!"~~~_.__
I MP"
10 kgl/CID
- --_....__..- ----.-~-:---------- -j- - - - - - -- -----;---,j', = 21 MP"
..
/" . = 210 kgllclll-- .......
f'.. = 280 kgllclll/" . - 28 MP"
'j _._. _ _ _
..l?~:n~ls per square inch (ps.i-L ..

142 .2 psi
.-
/" = 3,()(XI psi

/". - 4,000 psi
/" . - 35 MP"
f'.. = 350 kgUcm'
/" . - 40 MP"
j", = 420 kgUClll -
/" - 6,000 psi
/;. = 2,800 kgUClll '
f, = 40,000 psi
f, = 4,200 kgUClll -
f, = 60,000 psi
I,. = 280 MP"

f,:" 420 MP"
/" = 5.000 psi
-,._---
---_._------ -_..
,. - ---_. /,'" = 250,000 psi
J;m ;: : 1.725 MP"
/,'" =17,600 kgflclll
._---- -. - -._- ----- --_..
i,,,, = 19,000 kgf!c m/,'" - 270,000 psi
/,'" 1.860 MP"
-3. 18//,- in kgflcm~
12/r, in psi
f1' , in MPa
--_. fl'--~11 kgfk~~~2-----3.77jf:" in psi
OJI3 Jf': ill MPa
\ ,
._.... __.._------ .,--- --_._..
-0. 27 ji':- in kgfl(:Jl1~
\ r1', in psi
0.083 Jf': ill MPa
. . ...,,-_.- ----- - -_._._...__..._----_ ...--_.. __._-----
;:::
- - - _ - - - _ _ 0 ' _ _ -
0.170
Jf':
-o~5i/T.
in MP:!
/,,, - 1',. + 2.33s, -
Eg.405-2
- - - - -
In
2fT':
kgf/CIl1~
in psi
/", - /" + 2.33s, - 500
/" ., = /" . + 2.33s, - 35
1.5
--
1',., =J',. + 1000

1',., = 1',. + 70
- - --_._--- - ------_._._----_.f'cr - f'( + 1200
/", =/" . + 8.3
/"., = J',. + 84
- .... _... - .--- . -.
f' ("I ::: 1.10[',. + 50
f'cr - 1.1 Of ',. + 700
/", - 1.10/',. + 5.0
.. _. .. ._..._------ ....
- ...
..- .- .-.--...- - ... _-_ ..
-"'--0.00
18;60 000 ----- ....
0.0018x4200
(lJ10 I 8x.'l1Q
/" , =/" . ... 7.0
Table 405-2
. - .-. --~
_-_
---~- . -
Section
407. 13.2. 1 (3)
Secti on
408.6.1
t.... = ",/'0.043 Jf':
E, = ",,'-' 0.14 Jf':
-----
I:.~= 15,100
E'I. 409-1 I
J. =f., /(0.5 6 Jf':) <:, 1.0
A = f,., /(1.78
(1.65 - 0.0003w,.) ;0:,1.09
(004 +/,1700)
--.-
_.._-- -
.I,.)
I.
h ::::
(0.8,..- I[iii
J
.. .-..
.~------,,-'"
~.-
Eq . 4 10-3
Eq.410-4
Ji,
'.- 4/,. b...
90 mill
_._-
I,
/f',.
.._--
( 1.65 0.005"".) ~ 1.09

(0.4 +f,JIO,OOO)
I, = 750)" Jf':
1
II
II :::: ----.-.-.-- - - ;,:: 9cm
3(, + 9 fJ
I,
200.000
n. + 'r.)
- ...
(8
200.000
36~9fJ
3fT:
......
200
A . = - - - b d ?-b.ll
A . = - - b d >-- /) .d
S = 3{ 2800) _ 2.Se, :;; 3{ 2800)
S= l{
I,
I,
..-
/y
/,
Association of Structural Engineers of tile Pllilippin es
,.lJ\In
If
.
=..- .-.-----.-....,. ;?, 3.5111.
. --
14
(08 ...
.~:~~~. EC:~:~.~~~[~-(;;~:~.~~~}~~::~~_. ...
(08... [4.000
I, )
' .....n
33
J. =f;,1(6.70 Jf':) $ 1.0
1.0
(0.8 .... f, .... )
0.8//"
1.4
d ~T b...d
S = 38{ 280)_ 2.5e,. :;; 30{ 280)
/,
rr:) : :
1(1,1.5
;. = 57,000 Jf':
"
14.000
II == 3'(;':;~'s/T(a--"-=-o'-i) ;: 12 .scm
-........-..:---.--!:..:-.-~-.-.--...-... "'-I
361- 9jJ
A .
_--_..,._. . .: _ .::_i~:~~~~.~.:~~~,.:.:. ~:!.~ .~. .:.~~I~~_
Eq.409- 14
,JI';-
I, = 2.0)" Jf':
1 ( 0.8 +
"
1400
Eq. 409- 13
E,. ==
(1.65 - 0.0003",,) 2: 1.09

(0.4 + /,17000) _____ _
I, = 062), Jf':
--_..._.'"...
I,
f,.
E = 4700
Jf':"
.
Table 409-1
_-
I,
....
Sect. 408.7.1
__ __
... - /, ..
4~OO)_25<; :;;30t4~00)
AP-PENOii/i-: -EOTJIV flLEt,fCE BE'mEEN STMETRIC~- MI(S:METRIC, AND U.S. CUSTOMAFIVTiNIT

OF NONHOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
_._ -_._.
- ---- ro'
-51- met ri c st r~ss
M".i.- I',,(15 + 0 .(311)
1''1. 410-1 8
-:~~1~4T1-:-2.
i--
-- --.-.~-. --.- - . -
E'I.41'1-3
- -- ---
---".
------- ------
U.S. Customary units stress

..2.l:~~ls per sguare inch (psi)
M?..mm = Pu(O.6 + OJ))")
mk s- mctric s lress
inMPa
f,' '" 8.3 MPa
in kgllc1ll
M 2 .",,,, = PI 1.5 + 0.0311)
- - -- -------.,--- -----7/-"0
f,.' ~ 27 kgllc m-
-_..._-_._-- --_._-
V = 0.17!. f,.' b"d
V,.
--
I:~
----
= 0.53;;:- b"d
------_._-
v, =017(1 +
~ 0.291.
--
S 0.931. .fF: Ivi
.fF: b"d
E'I.411-7
~ =0 29()1 +~t).!jTb.d
V. =09{ \
Eg.411-8
O2
v. =0.17 ( I+ . : ,N" lAIT)" "~O
v.
E<I. 41 1-9
--Eq.411-IO
Eq. 41 1-12
-.- -- -- Sec!. 41 1.6.5 .3
=0 53(I +Jf;}JT),,"~O
O, 17i.j1: b"dS. V,. "S.O.42J.rr..b"d
O.S3..!j1; hOod ~
,',
20
d +V ;- Y:M ..,~
"" r
M "w.
--_..
M'
Eq.411-17
j"
O.3Sb!.!.--1
(2)
7~,
(3)
.J!', b,,(1
fb
A. .,,, . =0.75 fj',
J
S
V, =A,l, siIl6 ~ 0.8Jj,b"d
J.JTt~
) ~-"
p"
1+ o.33A, AIf:"
7:,<
"
SOb".!.
v,=
A,.j,. sina. ~ 3 j1, b"d
8 Jr,l)"(1
T,, <
-_...__._._._-_.
rfi..l.27 ArT , [A.~

.'.- )
--
Ii
- ( --;"A'
pO.27 J. Jr.
<
+V,
200
T,,<
1:,<
- 12
-
If
4.00 iT, b"d
2.2j1,b"d
.. _...-
M"\J'
I'
y,
1,1
.~ ;'~L (~: ) F: -~:~~i~~-
Sec!. 411.7. 1
'"
M", =(6A.f{, + I." - IJ.!..
"
2: 3.s0",~
0.66,if, b"d
1AlC(::"l
-_._--_..
=0.20 ff""s
f, --T'
7 ~f<
Sec!. 411.7.1
20
CO
400).
1.10 j1,b"d
A,.,.
v, = A,.f,. sine! '" 0.25 j1, h"d
Sec!. 4 117. 1
(I)
V = 12A fi: b d +V + V, Me!!

2: I7J.Jl,b"d
O.53fi': b"d
b s
I'
--
1.10!.j1,
f,t
-------"
Sec!. 4 11.6.7.9
2i./i b"d S V(5 5;,[f> .
v" ~(0.9'1t/T: +O.3/"h.d, + V; v" =l3.s;,fT +O.3f,.!).d"
0.33) j1,
A,." =0.062,J'T:
Eq. 411-J3
+~Mc~!"..
M", ...
\'
-,
OI7 J f', IMI
(6)
~O
V =( 12Aff. + 700 V" " },"

.
20
M,,
'
2: 045J.j1,b"d
0.33j1,b"d
. _ - ---- -_._- ----- - _ ._----_.-
Sec!. 411.6.6. I
+V
I'
M",=(J6 A.f{, + I" - IJ.!..
=(0.29J.[i'; +-03/,."".d" + V"
v, = 2(1+ 5~~, )AJI':'b""
v, ~ 1.33;./J: /),,1'
=3.2J. E~b
d
20
- _.
M", =(osA.f{, + /'.

- IJ!...
.
)"
\I",.
V
,',
}v~b."
V, =35( \/t+----"'
"--50M,
V
2A
V =(1 . 20ff." 49 M~
''')hd
~
2: O.14!.fj')J"f1
Eq. 4 1 I- II
~ 3.501..fF: b"d
- + 4.8 -" - b .d
V, = (,Iff
20
M ,,'
V =Aj/, b
,.
-;~+9AJT. +250Op" ::/F~
"
F3-35A,". }"Tb."
."
v,, )
V, = 2.00!';:- b"d
-\~. ='2(1+--~---llfT;'-~-2000 A
."
l;iT
=05J[I+i:O~
b""
}JT h" "
v.
-------- -- - - ------ - ' ---" ..._ -_.
-- " ---V
=(
U
.II>-<./T:
+1
7p
y"!')b"
(
~r
V") 6.<1
'"
=
0.5
1'.
+176P
.f.1
Eq . 4 11-5
.'
M"
E'I.411-4
---
-.--
100 psi
'i'
9,1
II- " ( ...A'-". 1
-,._- .-....-,.- -...--.-..
A.{F: [ A;, )
+ -.--~'.
P"
;.ff.
1'.t<
I ;- - - "
( ' )h--
0.27 A -Arr-
-~
A~Aff(
Pcr
th
P 'P
r"
-.~ .~.----.-.
7:, <
r--1,:-
"" 1
f 'c""
4.l /f',.
T"<
A ( -A:' ) F
1+ --"N -
National Structural Code of the Philippines 6 Edition Volum e 1
Per
4A.J..ff
A3
'APPENDIlC(:- EOUlVALENCE BETWEEN SIMETRIC. MKSMETRIC . AND U.S.

OF NONHOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
CUSTOMARVUNIT
Eq. 41 125
E<I 411 29
> 50b ....\'
> 3.5 b .s
I",
1.33/1'>'" _[.1)1.
""""
E". 4 1 130
.\.,
/.1'1
. .--.---==-"'---------.-1\.",,, =sf
)1,' p"
F;"', -(;
I"
.~ > ~~~~
s - /"
------------ ~~~~~----I-----~~~~~ --~---~~~~~------
(34 + O.OS};' )A,.
(3.3 + a.OS};.' )A ,.
(4S0 + O.OS};: )A,.
Sect. 4 11 .S.5
IIA"
1 lOA"
1600A,.,
1~~~~~______~5~.5~A~''________i _ ______~
55~A~,~,______~------~S~
OO~A,~,--.--------
Sect. 411.9.3
2.65
0.S3 jl'b"d .
(3.3 + D.OS}; ' )b"d
Section
411.10. 3.2.1
Section
ff b"d
(4S0 + O.OS};' )b"d
1600b"d':-,---;-_ _-I
(800 2S0a ,.)b"d
d
!
110b"d
(55 20a . )b"d
d
,-;:;265" /" lid
Section
10
b"d
"""{34 + D.OS};' )b"li
11b"d
(5.5 . .L2.,q,'j7)"d
d
41 LlO. 3.2.2
J/"
7"-~~:-;-,------j-----;-:c=-,--;;-;=-:-;-'7-" -'"
(5/6)y/',. li d
r r . - " I,
1O \1/', lid
......i.'.IJJ.)_ ..._ ....._ _....________ _ ._ ..__._ . ___....._._ _. _ ..___________.. . _.__......._~

, . r('-;-
Scction
411.11.5
(11")1. ,, . ,. lid
"--
- _.. _----
......
_.._---- - N d
Eq.411 33
t/= 0.27,1 .j (' hdl -- "
Eq . 41 134
'
. ,
- ---- -
'/-f" ,hd
53, ,,
f'-
N d
... _.
2' /--1
' I I
, " , l(
-_.--- - - -----_._--.--_ .
V =08S,1 ,1' hdl-"

'
41"
41,,'
r -
N d
1' = 33,1'1(' hd + - '"

'
'4/".
1-----..----,----- -~---_c,~,~~--~---~-~_4-7"--~---~.
rr 1.(01
A./l:+02;',)
r- 1.(03Y..fi.+02N.)'
. j" 1('25l,/],;'0/')
v = uOSl!L.+ __ .. ____ L lid v= Q J 6i~&. + .. _- . - - - -IJ!... lui
v= 06lL+-\----2!.. lui
M I.
~2
M..f..
\~2
'
M I.
\~
L.... _ _ _--L_-'~_.____._.._. _____ I___=__ ______ _~'____'__'_._ _ _ ______ .:._......
I
,
A. 4
APPENDIX A:: EQUIVALENCE BETWEEN -SI-METRIC, MKS-METRIC, AND U.S.

OF NON HOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
CUSTOMARY UNIT
I~~~~~~~'~~~~~~~~~~;~-~'---"---~~-----'------
Eq.~11 -37
HI'ft).lJT>..d
v. "'
II. = 053(1+ '~).1ji',b..d
v,
- -- - . _-- - - _ . - - - _.. _..._._ - - - - ----- - - ---- -_._ ....- - - _._......

G.
CAJ.
V =u2-1.I'+2)
, /j. . ,. bd
'l /{,
'''l!."
V =12
. I('2'+2)"j
. . ' . bd
I~.
1\.1. ",
41 1 3"
-.0
(2+ ~).1H~b.. "
.._- -
--j
II' I="(':l'!+2)'/f
'- bd
,
A,J., "
Eq.4Ti~9 -v-~J.i.Tr ;;~;f -- - \;---::-~7T'-;;:~/' --'Eq . 41 1-40
II. = 4J. JJ':"hOod

~,).jr:- '03f," h." + v,. --- I e=(J.16/!,J.jl': +o3f,Jh. d + v, v, =1fJ,J.jl-~(;.-3f-~)/;b-Ood-+-V,----1
Note:
Il,. bas units
f--;;--cc---+---;' =/~____
Seel ion
411..13.2 . 2
Secti o n
411..13.3 . 1
Secti o n
41 !.I 3.3 . 2
Sectio n
411.1 3.4..8
!r,
5 0.50
0 . 17.1
Mr.
Note: IJ,. has th e same un its as

The Sf-metri c version
55 kgficm'
fj',
jf',
1.I0lf:b"d
4lf:b"d
If: h" d
0 . 80), If: h" d
If: h" d
3), If: b, d
2.1O fT.:b"d
SJr, b"d
:5 70 psi
If: h" d
0 . 50jr, h" d
0..33Jr,/)"d
0..58
Sect ion
411..13..5.1
iT,
0.25),
h" d
190
If: h" d
0. 66 !1': 1",,1
0 . 17
If:
053
L6 ff
0 . 53(1), ff
0.53), ff
1.l0'\ ff
If: < 8 . 3 Mra
JJ: :5 26..5 kgficm
050
r-iY-"
13. 7..2
Section
If:
ff
Ol71.ff
0. 1
7,ff
0..33)' ff
Secti on
41 !.I 3 . 5.2
Secti on
411 .13 . 5,,4
Section
41 1.13 . 7.3
Section
Note,: /lphas units
If:
6 ff
2J. ff
2 J. ff
4J. ff
~-----I------~==--~------~~----~
-..!'.~;?.:.~.- --- --~.- -----. - - .-- -.-....

Section
412..3 . 2
/ _ ( f,.'!',VI, )d
,- 2.IAJT: "
Section
41 2..3..2
'
=(
=(_ /,'1', '1', )d
--- - - - - - , - - - - -- , - - --1
f ,'I','f, ")d
6.6AJT,
/ _( f ,'I','I',
ff :5 100 p,i
-'-)rI
f,'I','I'
25J.ff,
/' =( 20J.ff,
f ,'!', '1', )d
/ =( 3f ''!'''!'')d
,
SOA.ff, ,
, - 5..3A..JT: J"
L7Aff, ,
=(
J~~~--+_----_7--~~.----_l--. ----~-~~~--~------_7--~~--. --~
Secti on
41 2.3 . 2
~~~t~o~
Eq . 412- J
Section
41 2,,4. 2
Section
412 . 6 . 2
'--_ _--'_
/
d
/,
=( 1.4J.ff,
f ,. 'I','I', )d
'
----I -------7---~-----4
+~';ff: },'
V" .V'I
/ "'" __. ___/_,_V~!_
.... ,/
=( 4.4f,.'!','I',
)d
A.ff, "
I"~ =(3~fg.~},
f ),If, VI,If,
I.,
/
, - lIJ.Jrt'~~) :_. _ _7"._=_3. _5-c.1J_f_~_"r_c:_:: .K:_::-"-r_'_
[~J7) ", > 0.043/ ,<1,

/
[0.24\1', &. ) d
~---1
3f,Y',V',If.
_!---_;_'_~_4~",).i:-j-f-':(,-C-d. :; .;:R--,)-'-'-~
(J.~H') ". ~ OOO44/A.
=( ::~ff.:}.-....
(~~H d, >O OOO3[,. d,
(~m5\1',iL) d
d~
A.fT
b
~),I1;-; . ~
_ _ _ _ _ _ ___--'-_ _---'---'---'---'_---1_
(O. 02,i, )
Jd~ = Itff d~
_ ..:......'---'-_
. National Structural Code of the Pl1i1 ippines 6'h Edition Volume 1
.--'
AS
APPENDIX A: EQUIVALENCE BElWEEN SI-METRIC, MKS-METRIC, AND U.S.

CUSTOMARY
UNITS OF NONHOMOGENOUS EQUATIONS IN THE CODE
_ _ ~ __ _ _ ~~ ____________. _
d~IC~~(~1
' :I~~(~;-
''' ' [~7F!J d,

--- ----- .-TJ;~,241-- - --- ---- -
_._- --_ .
Eq.41 2-3
-~Oq 412-4
VJJ'NTJ7;~)
I, =( if}";( r"fc}.
Seclioll
412.11.5.2
.0.4111.-'
Section
412.14.2.2
O. J7d,JJI
1---_ __ .._ ------"...,;/~,:...

, -:---_ _ _
Sec,ioll
412.1 7.1
Section
417.6.3.1 and
417.6.3.2
Section
417.6.3.3
Section
418.4.3
,,, = [O~7J' J d,
--
1, ~rOO,i;'('J'J d,.
--F~;~~Or ----" - -
" =;hj7~J
--- -----_._._----_._.-
,,"027;:'{dj,J
=(to)". +( ~c7~L}.
I"
I,
O.053d bf)"
0.014<1,,1'1
O.(Xl73 !,db
(0.0 13 (. - 24)d"
0.0005 lA,
(0.0009.r, . 24 )d"
--~'ff,
OJ)7! J,db
(0.13,{.. - 24)d"
;.ff,--
O.55b,.d
( 1.8 + 0 .60.(..))..b,d < 3.5b,.d

Class U: f, 5 0.62!fc
Class T: 0.62
JT < f, 5 I JJ~
80b,d
( 18 + O.6p,[,.))..II,d ~ 35b,(/
Class U:f, S 2ji,
Class T: 2
JJ: <f, 5 3. 2 ji,
Class Cf, > I.0ji,
Class C:f, > 3.2ji,
50 Jr:.
f, :5 1.6 Jr:.
(260 + 0.6e-f.'))..",(/ :S 5(Xlb,Ll

Class U:f, S 7.5JI',
ClassT: 7.5!fc <f, 5 12 Jf;
Class c: I, > 12
f,
I-~c---j-----=_---I-------=_-.-.-.......r;:-;-
""-
Y /,,;
- - 1 -- 025
-..:.::...::...- ......
=f
1""
f"
.700 +._1_,_'
lOOp,.
and 418.10.3.2
Section
4
2 l b.d
s 6Jr:.
--=_-
6.JT:.
----;
7 -'- ..-.-I - -- - --...c"",'---- .f" + 70 + JOO"f = f + 700 + -f'-~--_~~_l-----~~..:.::.

p!...,_ _+ __"__"_
300P r
Sect 418.10.3.1
0 17 .Jf':
0.35.Jf':
Eq.418-5
rt;
3 .J /,,;
080 V /,,;
__
f 1" = f " ;. 70+...L:....

lOOp,.
. --
160[J~;
0.50[/,,;
Section
418.5.1 (3)
Eq.418-4
=(~}. +( ~oT}~
+ _ _._.."...:.Il:.,,~-----+----::~/,:...,-,--- ----i
;.ff,
f, :5
1_
"' -'-(i_~ ;,'; '; ;r --- -
~..bL
I '
+ ---'-/ /" = / " +'0000
'
JOOp p
--~-f-'--"
-'-/ P' = / " +'0000+

,
300p,.
2.Jf':
300 bJ
1-""1,-8_.1.,.3_.7_......;1-_ _ ,-..:.1..:.,~.~~---+--~-=-/..:.>- =c- . . ._ __+ _ _ -,--..:f_c>~-c-..c-=,------i

Section
J", = J" + 70
J", = J" + 700
Jp, = f" + 10,000
418. 14.4. 1
Section
o 33J..[i',
1.1
?.Jf':
4(Mff
_. ..:c4~
19~.5~.1:=..0______---,--,-'-c-c-__ -.- - -I- - --..,..,..-- -- -Section
.1A b,,!~.
i - - . -- - -- - - - 200-",., <1.
!...4..I",!!..
1
1-421.5.2.1
-- ----lI - - --'I.2.,'.---~----- - -----'-',:..,
. __-,--___ 1_____f-2.._...._.... _ _.._
Eq.42 1-2
-,, =IOO +(350 - h,)

3
.'.= l o l( 15 ~h,)
S, = 4+(~; h,_)
1.7.f1'~Aj
5J/f';A,
--+___..:4'--"'.in"-.",<~s''-''<=-6~in!:.._ _
20JiA
l.2"fT>j
4.0ff,A j
1 5[i~Aj
I.Off,A;
32{i':Aj
I2{i':Aj
100 millS So < 150 n,-",lIC.'ll_._j_--,I,-"O~c~n.'..1<~S''-'

' <~.~15o.:c,"n'CI_ _
Section
42 1.7.4.1
Association of Siructural Engineers of the Pllilippines
Sectioll
421.8 _2.2
V.
v. =AJa,J...jJ, +pJ,)
=AJa).fT; pJ,.)
II
II
a,. = O.80for~: :s 1.5
a .. = O. 25for/~ S 1.5
Eq .42 1-7
at" = 0.17/0(1: ~ 2.0
o66A
Section
421.8.4.4
I-"",Sc- c-:-C- lio n
a,
.f f
a" = 2,Ojor ': 2 2.0
212ANff
O.83A,,,.ff
8A,,ff
IOA,.ff
2.65A, .. f f
-
..-.----Ir--------'~f7----.-
- --':G"=.-
0-83A''' vf,
Secti on
II
It
=0.53for ,:"~ 2.0
----- - 1-- ----"=-- ---+- - - ----''=- .-.-- -n
-i- - - -----r,;--- ------
421.8.45
v. ='\. la,;</i', +M,J

II
a,. = 3.0jor I:' s: 1.5
2.65A,,,vf,
2.8
IOA, .. ,f,
400
28
421.8.6_5 (I) ___ _ '--'

I ,_ _-=~---j---.:.I'-,_ -=0--_ _--1 _ __ ---'1-'--,---;=--- ----1
~oo
~
~
O_083A".A,17
f,
O_27An. Ayf,
ANA,},
421.8_6_5 (2)
I Eq_421-9
i Eq- 421-10
I
I
I
Section
421.9.9_2
Section
42Ll 1.6
Eq.4222
V.
=A,,(O.I7J.fr: + M,)
V.
66A"ff
029
=A,,(0.53J.fr: + M,)
V. = AJ2J.fr: + M,)
8ANff
212A"ff
JT'>.d
0_93
Jr>.,d
35 ff: b"d
Eq_ 4227
Eq.4229
Eq_ 422-10
Y, =OII(I+%)..tJ!')""
"0022), ff: boil
v,
=035(1+%)..tJT,b."
"0 0_7 I) .fj~ boh
1h
Y, =(~+ 3~),jJT,b."
"0 2-66'-ff: b,il
National Siructural Code of Ihe Philippines 6 Edilion Volume 1
II-?
APPENDIX II
CONVERSION FACTORS
--- -_._.
,-- -. ----.~-- .
--------- - - ---
to _:=.:~_~==_____==~=:=::~. _____
To convcI1
~-- . -
.--J ,m
LENGTH
I mile (U.S . sl,ttul')
I yd
I fI
2.589998
0.4<>1 6gn
h.
0.8)6 1274
0.092 903 '"
!Il
01'
mill
VOLUME MODULUS OF SEeTI!>"!._
1 acre ft
645.16
I yd'
0.764 5549
0.2359737
0028316 g5
28.3168
m'
I (I)
L(dml)
I in)
16387.()6
16.3871
mm'
mL (ern)
(FLUID) CAI'ACITY
L"'
I gal (U,S. liquid )

I qt (U.S. liquid)
1 pi (U.S. liquid)
I n 07.. (U.S)
1 gal (U.S. liquid)
_.
-.
3.785412
946.3529
rnL
mL
mL
m'
U
I liter appf(lx. OJXJI cubic met('.r
SECOND MOMENT OF AREA
~~Hon (UK) ~2l?rox. 1.2 Gal (U.s.)
1 in
0. 158987.'\
Illl
I barrel (42 U.S. J:al!ons)
.-~---I
1233.489
m'
m'
100 board ft
473.1 765
295735
0.003785 4 12
-_
...._ --
! :~~
1 4162314
"4 162314x 10"
PLANE ANGLE
I " (degree)
r(ld
1 ftls
1 mile/h
SPEE~ ____
1.609 344
0.447 04
mls
VOLUME RATE Qt' FLOW
mJ/s
Us
Us
O.oz8 316 85
0.47 1 9474
0.0630902
0.0038
1.051 SO
43.8126
1233.49
mJ/min
mUs
Us
1 million gaVd
I acre fUs
_._-
m)/s
_. __ ._~.I:EMPERA TURE INTER VAL

Cor K
- 1F
. -
--J 0.555 5.%
'"
(Colltlfllled)
.~
.....-
- -- I toF= 9/st(,("+32
.----~.".-.,
.. .
----- ---.---- ..
sJ9 "C = %K
EQlJIVALENT TEMPERATURE (I,.-=T.-27J.15)
-_.-
. _--
I 0.3<>18
knvh
I rt Is
I ftl/min
1 gaVmin
I gal/min
I gallh
....<0-.._..
17.453.29
29().8882
4.g48 137
urad
VELOCITY
mls
.-
0.0174';3 29
mrad
urad
l' (minule)
J" (second)
.. _j
I
4046.873
Ill'
2
I (12
I in2
.601J .:14r---
--_.. _. _. -_."_._- ~~-.-..--~----.--.--
kill
I yd2
~~.ti:ip'ly-b';-::_
)<>1H
AREA
I mi le' (U.s, SIJlllle)

I acre (U.s. survey)
-- 1
0 .9144
03()4S
_________ _____ ___ __ iii:::
._1_;_"___ .. _. _____ __
----
A8
AI'I'ENJ)JX II
CONVERSION FACTORS--{Conlinued)
, 1ibJ(i'l-'. - - -- ----- - - -- - - -- - --
4.8S2 428
33.905 75
305. 1517
I Oll}'tJ'
I o7Jfl l
-,;-;:""_ __ __ _
- ) Ibm J
._ _ _-1
DENSITY (MASS PER UNIT VOLUME)
----------==='-'-=r.k:=g/7n'-"r==~-""===-------r-;176."0"
1 8",7
6 -- --
J Ib/yd'
I lon/yd J
kg/Ill)
v rn )
0,593 2764
\.1 86553
FORCE
I tonf (to n f{)rcc )
I kip ( 1,000 Jhf)
_.~ lbf (pOU!~_:(~~~ _ _ ___.__ _
kN
kN
.. ___ _~
8.896 44
4.448 22
= ='7N;,..,==-==-= ,-=_-==
4.448 22 _ ._ _ _ _ .____._
-;1"lIc;,f.7ft-- -- - - ------- - -- - - _-"M"O",M,,,"-"'E"N-"TIr'or.:':::",,

~O~R-"C"'E'-,T-'-O
"-..,
R"'
Q"'U"'i,,'-_
, -_--_-_-_-_-----.---.--"-.- -'-1".3"5'5'81"8Ilbfin
I tunfft
I kip,f(
N'm
kNm
kN.1l)
- --.---
I lbrlfl
J lbflin
1 10nyft
- --
- ---1
0.1129848
2 .7 11 6-1
1.355 82
FORCE PER UNIT LENGTH

-- ..-------~"""T~"'-'-'-'-"-"'-"''-'-''-'-'-'------,__;_:;_;;;_;;;_----_i
[ N/m
N/Ill
kN/m
J 4.5939
175.1 268
_-:-::-'::"29" .,IS,,7"'
, 80:-T."'_ _ _ _ _ _-l
PRESSURE, STRESS, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (FOR CE PER UNIT AREA ) (1 I'a = 1 Ntm' )
Iionflin'
MPa
kP,
MPa
13.7895
95 .7605
I lonflrt 1
I kipfm2
I Ibf/in~
1 lbflfl l
Atmosphere-
Pa
kPa
6.894757
6.894 757
47.8 803
101.3250
kP~
I inc h mercury
kPu
3.376 85
I foot (water colunlIl at 32"8
kPa
2.98898
-;-;=-== =o;:,-_____._____ ._____.\'-'VORK, ENERGY:1IjiEAT (lJ = IN", = !~ s)____........____

I kWh (550 ft.lbOs)
I'
I Btu (inLTable)
k.J
I fllbr
j
j
-- - - ------- - - 3.6
1.055056
1055.056
1.3558 18
COEFFICIENT OF I1EATTRANSFER
I lhul(ft h"F)
I WI(n,' K)
I 5.678263
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
WI(mK)
ILLUMINANCE
National Structurat Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
1.730735
NSCP C10110
SPONSORS AND BENEFACTORS

OF ASEP WHO HAVE
SUPPORTED THIS
MONUMENTAL TASK OF
PUBLISHING THIS CODE

Suitc 713, Futurc Point Plaza Condominium 1
11 2 Pa nay Avcnuc, Quczon City, Philippincs 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483
F ax No.: (+632) 41l-8606
Enlail : .<.!~eron!ine@gll1ail.com
Wcbsitc: http://www.ascponlinc.org
National Structura l Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1
JOEL MalUllln UDINA, M.M;-;:--~
Conau!llng Structural Enllilloor5. SIE 153
DAM C. ABINALES. "'-'>110. Insoo

Managing Principal
JOHN OLIVER D. PENANO. nmoo
Associalo Partner
Office: UG48 Cilyfand Pioneer Cond
128 Pionoer S1..,l.~artdaluyon[j.9.!Y_
Address: Blk 6! 1. La! :l4, l'llasc 6

MelrO{jlllC Moycauayan Ii
LDG Marilao l3ulac<lfL
~~~:II~::~~;~v~~;;o~c~9n~2'8328864
GILBERT B. MAGBUTAY, ... , .o.5EP
GISMA Englnef)rlng SCrvlces
Address: 93 Kalikasan SlIoe!.

Karaogalan Villaoe Phase 2A
Dela Paz, Pas~ Cily 1611
Phona: (02) 682-7114; 5171159

Mobile: 09209226441; 09233917297
Email: oibma2003@yahoo.com
ALLAN DERBY A, ALFILER, ... .ASfP
A.D.A ALFILER EnglnoorlnQ Consultant"
Addloss: l100nl 31'. 3JF Aliloo 8reln

1191 Quirino HiQhway
No~alictlOs, Qualon City
Phone: 4163059; 4190136

Mobile: 09209235232: 09228235232
Email: adaallileroc@yahoo,corn
1'11011(1: 4257076
ASSOCIATION OF CIVIL ENGINEERING ALUMNI OF NATIONAL UNIVERSIrY--(ACEANU)

Phone: 7496154; 7437992
Email: aceanuphil@yahoo.com;
Addross: 551 M.F. Jhocson 81"
Sampaloc, Manila
:~~:~~p:~::~~~:;::~~~
"CHRrsroPRERPT.T~YO, f. o\5~p
MIRIAM LUSICA-TAMAYO, _ _
_._--_.
Adam. Abl.nales nO;<1oo,j"o 8. COnsutlanCY

PhOflO: 7468156: 5024223
Mobile: 0908S72-2326; 09!75~2'2326
Email:
aaoplusc<i.i>yahoo.com:
mlo@aaepl\lsc,corn
WObsile: www.aaolllusc_com
Addross: 4/f. 15781riQa SlrM\'

Makati City
TandeM Englnooring Consultancy

PhOM: 8902022: 8966930
Email: lafldcm.onQ@gmail.com
.
~RYT:-WONG .....0.5p
Address: Shop !22 AI Tawila Bldg ..

Juliair, Manama, Baillail1
Email: wcenghoy2001@yahoe.. com

Websile: kooheiionll;nOClinll-collsullafICy.cOr!l
VIRGILIO B. COLUMNA,. '" ....,
V.B. Columna Construction Corporation
Address: 1133 Azucena St. Violela

Village, Sla. CruZ. Sixlo Bulacan
H.T. WONG,
Address: Chunics Bklg. (lower

ground lit). 3368 1'1. Mflgs~ysay
Blvd .. Manila. f'hilippinos
Phone: 7122201: 7127025

Mobile: 09175379654
Email: halrytingwonQ@yalloo,com
ANTHONY VLADIMIR
C. PIMENTEL. F .o.5EP
Pimentel & A.$soc lIes Eng neer n8 Consu tants
Address: GfF 430 Mafigaya III Bldg,
E. Rodriguez Avonue,Cubao
OuewnC'
Phone: 7217391: 7226278

Mobile: 09262600094
Email:
p::~::\_~~:::~~~~~oc.nol'Ph:
-RUEL B. RAMIREZ and ASSOCIATES
CANETE STRUCTURAL INVESTIGATION, INC.

AIIx!r1 C, Cailctc, ... seE.
RUEL RAMIREZ,
f. ASE!'
t.lSC~,"'_.0.5(r
Add,e~s;
Uoil20l, Joe!"r Bldg.

Comrnonw(!a~h A~e" Quewn Cily
[>hono; 931-5214: <153-5151

Facsimile: 95127(; 1
Address: U2F Maginhawa 81dg"

154 Maginhawa 51.. Sikaluna
Village, QUOl.On Cily
--~~-----.-
MEUSA A. RAMIREZ, .... .0.5EP

~"""""\lr"1'''''
P'''''r..o: f ''o>W11
Phone: ~339313
Mobile: 092090901 4 7
Email: rt;ra._eng'@yahoo_com
.... ---.
---------
EDMUNDO P. TUMACA---~---E,f).TUMACA ENGINEERING SEfWICES

Address: Quozon Ave ..
Kalioo Aklan
JOSE T. TAYAMORA
PhOM: (036) 26B 6076, (036)2589020

Mobile: 092131979134
Email: eplumaca@yahoo.com.ph
Address: 84 2nd Floor

General Espino St.. Zone IV,
Signal Village, T3{1uig City
Phone: 666 1087 Facsimile; 6388351

Mobile: 09395214051: 09394755915
Email: eCJaragola@yahoo.com
SMART MASONRY PHILIPPINES, INC.

Address: P3b B 12 L 13 Eastwood
[.
Greenview. 6rgy. San Isidro,

Rodflgue~. R,!ai
ALAN C. ABAN, f . .l.5EP
DANILO RElUCIO
Address: CIC Compo\lnd

Francisco Feli~ Ave_. Cainta. fkal
Pilone: 6555429
Facsim;le: 6557671
Email: allan.aban@grllail.com
~_.
____._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.-L
1108 Antel Global Corporate Ctr"

Julia Vargas Ave " Ortigas Clr. .
Pasig City
Tel. No,: 638-3414 to 24
Fax No,: 916-3740
Email: acs_manufacturing@yahoo .com
Website : www.acs-manufacturing.com
ACS MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
PROKRETE
Concrete Admixtures
"Ve make good concrete a better concrete.
Unit 401 4th Floor Lancaster Hotel,

#662 Shaw Boulevard Mandaluyong City,
Metro Manila, Philippines 1500
Tel. Nos.
(+632) 571-8668 t070
Fax No.
(+632) 571-6285
Email: info@ddtkonstract.com
Website : http://www.ddtkontract.com.p~l
DDT KONSTRACT, INC.

CONTRACTOR.
ENGINEERS
MISSION:
We will steadfastly strive to provide good services to the need of our
clients through quality and timely delivery by pursuing excellence in
every aspect of our services.
We will continuously support and enhance the well being of our hardworking workforce to meet the challenges offered by expanding market
and stronger competition.
We will continuously enhance a management vision to remain a partner
in the development of our society and country. GOD WILLING
Sales Office Address:

Unit 2104 ANTEL GLOBAL BLDG,
Julia Vargas, Ortigas Center, Pasig City, 1600
Tel. Nos.
.667-3278; 633-3474; 633-3477
Telefax Nos . 667-3279; 667-3281
,..'.
II ~ l! Q, 1l- lYJ< 6, ~,
6ltft c:;
1258 Sandoval Ave" San Miguel, Pasig City, 1600

Tel. No.: 643-7802
Tel. Fax: 640-0698
DEECONCRETE
INCORPOKATED
C. Raymundo Ave., Caniogan, Pasig City, 1600

Tel. No.: 641-7919
Tel. Fax: 6428020
..".,..
." If!1 4' q, 'Jr'i - .!If!;J<::1li. Z,Jtf, Ii;
Purok Uno, Baranggay Makiling, Calamba, Laguna
PRIME MOVERS OF QUALITY CONCRETE.
PRCI$'4N
11. A
.ltH,." '-JfC.
~ ~~
www.energy.com.ph
energy
DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
Thlrty.four years In the Industry says a lot about a company.

Our able staff of geoscientists, drillers and engineers Is In demand for both
consultancy and actual wor1< In geothennal exploration and development.
This enabled us to become the largest focused producer of geothermal energy in
the world.
Globally recognized for our knowledge and expertise, EDC is now at the frontline
wet steamfield technology and geothermal energy production.

At EOC,
we know green energy and we make it happen.
We never stop moving forward on green energy.
Executive Offices
No.12 Manggahan St. , Brgy. Bagumbayan ,
Quezon City 1110, Philippines
Tel. No.
: (632)635-0843
: (632)635-0861, (632)635-0609 ,
Facsimile No.
(632)635-0612
E-mail address:eeicenter@eei.com.ph
Website Address : http://Vv''WW.eei.com.ph
EEl CORPORATION
EEl Corporation is one of the Philippines' leading construction companies.

Long years of contracting and collaborating with global contractors, particularly in the
Middle East and Asia Pacific countries, have enabled the Company to achieve wondcaliber project management and construction expertise and competencies .
EEl possesses the broad capability to undertake construction contracts from design-andbuild, lump-sum basis to labor and construction supervision services across different
classes of projects.
It is the major provider of construction services to the power, oil, gas and petrochemical,
Infrastructure property and Industrial sectors.
As it continues to undertake major projects in different industries both here in the
Philippines and abroad, it is likewise contributing its share in the country's national development and progress.
PGA Technical Center

No. 85, Kamuning Road
Quezon City 1103, Philippines
Tel. Nos . (632) 929-33-52 to 55;
(632) 929-17 -86
TeleFax (632) 929-33-53
Website pgatech.com.ph
PGA TECH GROUP

"YOUR ONE STOP SHOP FOR ENGINEERING & SUPPORT SERVICES"
NON DEsmUCTIVE TESTING l.ABORATORY. INC
E-mail Address.pgandtl@gmail.com
Phone #'s: 632-929-34-05
Fax #. 632-929-34-06
E-mail Address:pgamain@gmail.com
Phone #'s: 632-929-33-53/929-33-55
Fax #. 632-929-33-54
E-mail Address:em2apartners@gmail.com
Phone #'s: 632-371-18-04/371-18-06
Fax #: 632-374-43-38
E-mail Address: pgacalab@pgatech.com.ph

Phone #'s: 632-929-35-36 to 38
Fax #: 632-929-35-39
~A Geopie,"
P(JAo.<>p'''' PIuJf('1'tl_
m.o
E-mail Address.pgageopier@gmail.com
TelelFax #: 632-372-79-48
Exclusive Licensee GEOPIER Technology
E-mail Address.peterground@gmail.com
Phone #'s: 632-371-18-03/371-18-09
TelelFax #: 632-372-79-48
PGA EARTH STRUCTURE SOLUnONS
,,_ Exdum, PnlfilOO D~nM"HGRID c.osln~'ocs
E-mail Address:egrid.pga@gmail.com
Phone #'s: 632-927-09-84
Fax #. 632-929-33-54
E-mail Address:contact@philgeogreen.com
Phone #'s. 632-332-26-57
Fax #: 632-928-66-27
Head Office Address:

5/F Benpres Building, Excllanga Road cor Meralco
Avenue Ortigas Ctr. Pasig City, Philippines 1600
Tel No. ; +632 910-4111
Fax No. +632 910-4141; +632467-9018
Vlkbsite W'N'W.firslbalfour.com
E-mail ; firstbalfour@firstbalfourcom
First Balfour
Excellence In Engineering & Cons1ructiOn
First Balfour is committed
1969
to providing wond-class construction services for eMI,
mechanical and electrical works.

It has served as a contractor for a growIng number of public and prtvate buildings, various
water and transport infrastructuta works, as wa~ as power geooration and transmission
projects.
The company has the ability to design and construct various worns in coordination with its
pool of designers fi'om diverse disciplines.
2326 Pasong Tamo Ext. .

1231 Maka!i City, Philippines
Phone: +02 784 7100
Fax: +02 764 7101
E-Mail: customerservice ph@hiltLcom
Website : www.hilti.com .ph
Reliable fastening. Anytime.

Anywhere.
Anchoring for 5tructural applications

Hilli anchor solutions that address the issues of load bearing performance in different
concrete strengths, steel strength reduction, loosening of nuts & progressive
displacement in earthquake and/or dynamic load influenced applications
Post-installe<J re-bar applications
Wlth Hiltl solutions. making post-installed rabar connections is Just as easy as planting a
tree.
Head Office
7th Floor Two World Square McKinley Hill,
Fort Bonifacio Taguig City
Tel: 459-3333
Fax: 459-3425
Ready Mix Concrete Plants
Taguig Plant
Barangay. Ibayo Tipas
Taguig City
Tel +632409-7933
Parafiaque Plant
Km. 16 Severina Industrial Estate
Bicutan, Paranaque City
Tel: +632821-3306
Holcim
Concrete
Strength.Performance.Passion
www.holcim.com
Headquarter
OFFICINE MACCAFERRI S.p.A
Tel. No . +39051 643600
Fax No.: +39051 0512365
Email: commit@maccaferri .com
Website: maccaferri.com
Regional Headquarter
MACCAFERRI MALAYSIA SON BHO
Tel. No. : +60 3 7957 8330
Fax No.: +60379579080
Email: hq@maccaferri-asia.com
Website: maccaferri.com.my
Philippines
PHILIPPINE GABIONS, INC.
Tel. No.: +6328130211
Fax No.: +6328130211-1
Email: sales@philgabions.com
Website : philgabions.com
Philippine Gabions
EnvironmentalSolutions
The Officine Maccaferri Group is a global player in the research, design and manufacture
of advance solutions in geosynthetics and soil erosion control. Started in 1879, the
experience gained makes Maccaferri a reliable problem-solving partner for soil
stabilization, slope reinforcement, erosion control , infrastructure development, and
construction works. Constant research and exclusive know-how enables Maccaferri to
guarantee maximum innovation and efficiency, and these concepts are transformed into
versatile solutions to meet customers' specific requirements.
Maccaferri manufactures and distributes a wide range of geotechnical products, and
provides services to compliment a broad range of drainage, filtration, reinforcement
and erosion control applications in the fields of civil and environmental engineering.
Philsteel Tower 140 Amorsolo Street,

Legaspi Village, Makati Philippines 1229
Tel. No.: 813-8382
Fax No.: 840-2123
Email: philmetal_sales@philsteelgroup.com
.
I
.Phil m eta I A
Philmetal
~~,~.!~~~~.~~.
The aest In Steel Decking Technology
STEELDEK SERIES: Steeldek I, Steeldek II , Steeldek IIA, Steeldek III (Designed to endure
anything. Used in SLEX SKYWAY & MRT.)
STRUCTURAL ROOFING: Colorbond Megadek, Colorbond Super V Dek, Colorbond
Crimplok, Colorbond KLiP-LOK
STEELFRAME SECTIONS; Studs & Tracks, l.C & BC Channel, Ceiling System
Unit 810, Pioneer Highlands Condominium

Pio~er cor. Madisons Sts, Mandaluyong City
1552 Metro Manila

Tel. No.: (632) 637-3367
Fax No.: (632) 636-5295
Email: email@pozzolanic.ph
Pozzolanic
Recovering Resources For Our Future
FLY ASH
Specify FLY ASH in your Concrete
.fHigher Strength
.f Sulfate Resistant Concrete
.flow Heat of Hydration in mass concrete
.fEw-friendly Green Concrete
An ISO 90012000 Cartifled Company
731 Aurora Blvd, Quezon City, 1112 Philippines

Tel No . (632) 721 .5781 1414 .1593-95
Fax
. (632)414.1596
Email .info@repchem com
REPUBLIC CHEMICAL
INDUSTRIES, INC.
CONSTRUCTION PROFESSIONALS SPECIFY PIONEER PRO
Adhesives, Sealants, Coatings, Waterproofing and Painting Preparations for

your construction needs,
Unit 2309 Cityland Condominium 10 Tower II,

6819 HV Dela Costa St., Salcedo Vi llage ,
Makati City
Tel. No.: (632) 894 5067 / 8922140
Email: info@rsia-engineers.com
ranni e.ison@gmail.com
R. S. ISON & ASSOCIATES
Consulting Engineers
RONALDO S. ISON
Civil/Structural Engineer

Office Adress:
Unit 2204-0, 22/F West Tower Philippine Stock Exchange Centre
Exchange Road , Ortigas Center Pasig City 1605, Philippines
Tel. Nos. : +(632)631 3075/6378286
Fax No. : +(632)6378236
Email: systraphil@systraphil.com
Website : www.systraphil.com
SYSTRA PHILIPPINES, INC.
SYSTRA PHILIPPINES, Inc. or SPI was created in 1995 as a Joint Venture undertaking
of JAVLON International Philippines, Inc. (JIPI) and SYSTRA SA in France.
SYSTRA S A is a limited liability company whose main shareholders are the Paris
Transport Authority (RATP) and the French National Railways (SNCF). RATP operates
the Paris Metro and is considered one of the biggest urban mass transport operators in
the world while SNCF operates the country-wide railways network ill France.
SYSTRA has over 50 years of experience in 140 countries and boasts of a solid
reputation of uncompromised professionalism and technical faculty. According to the
year 2001 survey carried out by the Engineering News Record, SYSTRA ranks first
among international design firms in the mass transit and rail category. SYSTRA operates
on major international markets whose activities cover all the skills and expertise in the
field of urban and rail transport - from high speed trains to buses, to intermodal
transport, conventional rail, suburban or inter-city rail services, metro, tramways,
automatic guided systems, road guided systems and people movers.
Offlce and Plant
2E San Andres Street, Canumay, Valenzuela City

Philippines
SatttUite OffIce
1108 C.M. Recto Ave Manila. Philippines
Tel. Nos, : (632) 292-7049; (632) 292-7050
(632) 2927052
Fax No : (632) 292-6780
Email
: unitanconstruction@gmail.com
Website : www.unltanconstruction.com
UNITAN CONSTRUCTION
a
DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION

NSCP 2010 6th Edition

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSCP 2010 6th Edition

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIXTH EDITION

Association of Stmctural Engineers of thc Philippincs

Association of Structural Engineers of th e Philippines

NATIONAL STR UcrURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES (NSCP)

ISSN No.: 2094-5477

Print His tory

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

PREFACE TO THE NSCP SIXTH EDITION

Changes and Developments

Uniform Building Code UBC1997 (adopled for Earlhquake Loads)

Imernational Building Code IBC2009 (referenced)

American SocielY of Civil Engineers ASCE70S (adopted for Wind Loads)

American Concrete Institute ACI31808M

American Iron and Sleelinslitute AISI S 100-2007

Reinforced Masonry Engineering Handbook America

Concrete Masonry H andbook, 6th Edition

Signifi cant rev is io ns are summari z.ed as follows:

Section 103 - Classification of Buildings

Section 104 - Design Requirements

Section 105 - Post ing and InslrUme nlati on

National Structural Code of the Philippines 6'" Edition Volume 1

Section 203 - Combination of Loads

The load factor val ues on wind 100lds (Ire

together with the inclusion of rOlin

Section 205 - Live Loads

Sec ti on 207 - Wind Load s

Sec ti on 208 - Earthquake Loads

Section 210 and Section 2i 1- Environmemal Loads

Provisions ptrtaining to the conduct and interpretation of found<Hion invcstigmions for

The section on pile foundations is amendcd to incorporate new provisions on splicing of

concrete piles; and

Th e section on special foundations, slope stabilization and matcrials of constructio n are

Sectioll 40 I . Genera l Requirements: Design requ iremcnts for carthquakc-rcsistam

Association of Structural Engincms of the Philippines

Section 404 - Durability Requirement: Exposure categories and classes, requirements or

Section 407 - Details of Reinforcement: To avoid the misconception that there is no

Nation8i Structural Code of the Philippines G Edition Volume 1

Section 418 - Prestressed Concrete:

The allowable concrete compression stress

Section 427 - Strut-and-tie Modcls:

Appendix A of ACI 3 I 8-08M is adopted in ils

J\ssocialion of Structural Engineers of t!~e Philippines

A section for Machine Graded Lumber (MGL) is included.

Recycled aggregates are defined and provided;

A section for Seismic Design is added; and

National Structural Code of the Philippines 6

AS!' Presidenl, 2009-20/0

ASEt' Presidl!llf, 2008-2009

ANTHONY VLADIMIJ{ C. PIMENTEL, "",,"'

CHRISTOPHER 1'. T. TAMA YO, ,. "."

ASEP lIice-Presidenl, 2009-2010 (/Ild

ASr:;P Pr('sit/{!III, 20072008

M(I"ogill[: Director, Cod(!.\" (111(/ Standard.l Commillcc

EM ILO M. MORALES, ~lsn: .ASI:.'

ROMEO A. ESTANEnO, 'b.n .. ...... St:l

CODES AND STANDARDS COMMITTEE

LOADS AND ACTIONS

CARLOS M, VILLAHAZA , ,'..'.""

CARLOS M. VILLAHAZA, ' '''''

RONALDO S. ISON, I".\ s .:r

BENITO M. PA CHECO, ''''-I' I.AS'':I'

ROY ANTHONY LUNA,

JONATHAN R. DUN GCA ,,,.,,.